Service Manual Coulter GEN S PDF

COULTER® Analytical Stations
Service Manual
Volume I
TM
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95 0000
COPYRIGHT 1989 - 1995
COULTER CORPORATION
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
BP CBC DIFF RETICS
II
PNEU 60 PSI 30 PSI 5 PSI VACUUM AC LINE AC
III
IV
V
TEMP
60 30.0 4.9 28 115 DC
VI
VII
VIII
POWER SUPPLY
PN 4277219B (July 2001)

COULTER CORPORATION
A Beckman Coulter Company
Miami, Florida 33196-2500 USA
LEGAL NOTICES
Beckman Coulter, Inc. makes no representation that, upon furnishing this service manual, the holder of the manual will have
the necessary technical capabilities and know-how to properly troubleshoot and repair any of the equipment specified in the
manual. Beckman Coulter, Inc. assumes no liability whatsoever, including consequential and incidental damages, resulting
from improper operation of Beckman Coulter instruments after maintenance of Beckman Coulter instruments has been
performed by persons not employed by Beckman Coulter, Inc. Furthermore, Beckman Coulter, Inc. assumes no liability
whatsoever for any personal injury or property damage resulting from maintenance and/or repair of Beckman Coulter
instruments performed by persons not employed by Beckman Coulter, Inc.
READ ALL PRODUCT MANUALS AND CONSULT WITH BECKMAN COULTER-TRAINED PERSONNEL
BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO OPERATE INSTRUMENT.
HAZARDS AND OPERATIONAL PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and IMPORTANTS alert you as follows:
WARNING - Might cause injury.

CAUTION - Might cause damage to the instrument.
IMPORTANT - Might cause misleading results.
Beckman Coulter, Inc. urges its customers to comply with all national health and safety standards such as the use of barrier
protection. This may include, but it is not limited to, protective eyewear, gloves, and suitable laboratory attire when
operating or maintaining this or any other automated laboratory analyzer.
"This Service Manual contains confidential information of Beckman Coulter, Inc. and its receipt or possession does not
convey any rights to reproduce, disclose its contents, or to manufacture, use, or sell anything it may describe.
Reproduction, disclosure, or use without specific written authorization of Beckman Coulter, Inc. is strictly forbidden."
Copyright © Beckman Coulter, Inc. 2001

All rights reserved.
REVISION STATUS
Initial Issue, 2/01

Released by CN 036250-0300
Software Version: Analyzer 2C; Workstation 3A
Revision B, 7/01
Released by CN 036830-0198
Software Version GEN•S System: Analyzer 4A; Workstation 4A1
Software Version LH 750 System: Analyzer 1A; Workstation 1A
This revision incorporates information for the LH 750 System. As part of adding the LH 750 System
information, the red and yellow traffic light icons were replaced with text in the error message tables. In
addition, Heading 9.6 is now divided into three sections, Headings A.6, A.7, and A.8, to accomodate
location illustrations for the LH750 System’s Diluter. This revision also includes information from service
memos 1745, 1891 (solid state RF Detector Preamp card), 1898 (laser bar-code reader), 1987 (probe-wipe
assembly with moveable backwash cup and sweep-flow reservoir with level sensor), and 3011.
This document applies to the latest software listed and higher versions. When a subsequent software version affects the
information in this document, the changes will be included on minor revision change pages or summarized on a Notice of
Information Update form and will be released by service memo.
PN 4277219B iii
REVISION STATUS
iv PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
LEGAL NOTICES
REVISION STATUS, iii
1 INTRODUCTION, 1.1-1
1.1 MANUAL DESCRIPTION, 1.1-1

Scope, 1.1-1
Intended Audience, 1.1-1
Organization, 1.1-2
Numbering Format, 1.1-3
Special Headings, 1.1-3
Warning, 1.1-3
Caution, 1.1-3
Important, 1.1-3
Attention, 1.1-4
Note, 1.1-4
Conventions, 1.1-4
1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, 1.2-1

Electronic, 1.2-1
Biological, 1.2-1
Laser, 1.2-2
Laser Beam Hazards, 1.2-2
Radiation Hazards, 1.2-2
Troubleshooting, 1.2-6
2 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION, 2.1-1
2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE GEN•S AND LH 750 SYSTEMS, 2.1-1

Summary, 2.1-1
Function, 2.1-1
CBC Parameters, 2.1-1
WBC Differential Parameters, 2.1-1
Reticulocyte Parameters, 2.1-1
Research Only Parameters, 2.1-2
Description, 2.1-2
Components, 2.1-2
Systems, 2.1-2
Diagnostic Products, 2.1-5
Physical Specifications, 2.1-5
Performance Specifications and Characteristics, 2.1-5
Leakage Current Specifications, 2.1-5
Operation, 2.1-6
Aspiration Modes, 2.1-6
Test Modes, 2.1-6
Operating Procedures, 2.1-6
2.2 POWER SUPPLY MAIN COMPONENTS, 2.2-1

Summary, 2.2-1
Main Components, 2.2-1
PN 4277219B v
CONTENTS VOLUME I
2.3 ANALYZER MAIN COMPONENTS, 2.3-1

Summary, 2.3-1
2.4 DILUTER MAIN COMPONENTS, 2.4-1

Summary, 2.4-1
2.5 ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER DEVELOPMENT AND

DISTRIBUTION, 2.5-1
Summary, 2.5-1
Electronic Power Supply Overview, 2.5-1
Transient Voltage Suppressor, 2.5-1
Fuses, 2.5-2
Bulk Power Supply, 2.5-2
Function, 2.5-2
Input, 2.5-2
Outputs, 2.5-2
Fans, 2.5-2
Bulk Power Filter Card, 2.5-2
Main Power Supply Cable, 2.5-3
Backplane Voltage Bus, 2.5-3
Local Power Supplies, 2.5-4
2.6 ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER UP, 2.6-1

Summary, 2.6-1
Control Voltage Development, 2.6-1
IBUS, 2.6-1
Control Voltage Distribution and Function, 2.6-1
Power-Up Signals, 2.6-4
POWER ON Signal, 2.6-4
AMC Power-Up Sequence, 2.6-5
SYSTEM RESET Signal, 2.6-5
PNEU ON Signal, 2.6-6
Power-Off Signals, 2.6-6
2.7 ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - LOCAL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE

ANALYZER, 2.7-1
Summary, 2.7-1
API Card, 2.7-1
Function, 2.7-1
Monitors, 2.7-2
Switches, 2.7-2
Input, 2.7-2
Outputs, 2.7-2
R/W/P SC/A Card, 2.7-3
Function, 2.7-3
Monitors, 2.7-4
Connectors, 2.7-4
vi PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Inputs, 2.7-4
Outputs, 2.7-4
APS1 Card, 2.7-4
Function, 2.7-4
Input, 2.7-5
Outputs, 2.7-5
Monitors, 2.7-6
LED, 2.7-6
Test Points, 2.7-6
APS2 Card, 2.7-6
Function, 2.7-6
Input, 2.7-7
Outputs, 2.7-7
Monitors, 2.7-8
LED, 2.7-8
Test Points, 2.7-8

DILUTER, 2.8-1
Summary, 2.8-1
Diff Power Supply Card, 2.8-1
Function, 2.8-1
Monitors, 2.8-2
Connectors, 2.8-2
Input, 2.8-2
Outputs, 2.8-2
Laser Interlock Switch, 2.8-2
Laser Power Supply, 2.8-3
Function, 2.8-3
Monitors, 2.8-3
Input, 2.8-3
Output, 2.8-3
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card, 2.8-3
Function, 2.8-3
Input, 2.8-3
Outputs, 2.8-3
Monitors, 2.8-4
Connectors, LEDs and Test Points, 2.8-4
2.9 PNEUMATIC POWER SYSTEM, 2.9-1

Summary, 2.9-1
Pneumatic Power Supply Overview, 2.9-1
Pneumatic Power Development, 2.9-2
Pressure Development, 2.9-2
Vacuum Development, 2.9-3
Monitors, 2.9-3
Pneumatic Levels and Status, 2.9-3
Temperature Monitoring, 2.9-3
PN 4277219B vii
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Pressure Distribution, 2.9-4

30 Psi, 2.9-4
5 Psi, 2.9-4
Vacuum Distribution, 2.9-4
High Vacuum, 2.9-5
Low Vacuum, 2.9-5
PVT Card, 2.9-5
Function, 2.9-5
Input, 2.9-6
Monitors, 2.9-6
Connectors, 2.9-6
2.10 POWER DEVELOPMENT CONTROL, 2.10-1

Summary, 2.10-1
System Power Controller Card, 2.10-1
Function, 2.10-1
Inputs, 2.10-2
Monitors, 2.10-2
Connectors and LEDs, 2.10-3
System Power Controller Display, 2.10-3
Function, 2.10-3
Conditions that Shut Down the Power Supply, 2.10-4
Insufficient Ac Input, 2.10-4
Power Supply Overheating, 2.10-5
Pressing POWER OFF, 2.10-5
2.11 SYSTEM CONTROL, 2.11-1

Summary, 2.11-1
System Control Overview, 2.11-1
AMC, 2.11-2
Function, 2.11-2
RESET Switch, 2.11-2
DIP Switches and Jumpers, 2.11-3
COMM INTERFACE Card, 2.11-4
Function, 2.11-4
Switches, 2.11-5
RS/Opto Intfc Card, 2.11-5
Function, 2.11-5
Connectors, 2.11-5
Scope Module, 2.11-6
Function, 2.11-6
Inputs, 2.11-7
2.12 DILUTER CONTROL, 2.12-1

Summary, 2.12-1
DILUTER PROCESSOR vs DILUTER CPU Cards - the Old and New Diluter
Interconnects, 2.12-2
DILUTER PROCESSOR CARD, 2.12-2
Function, 2.12-2
Switch, 2.12-2
viii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
DILUTER CPU CARD, 2.12-2

Function, 2.12-2
Switch, 2.12-3
Interface Bus (IBUS) and RS485 Interface Modules, 2.12-3
Diluter Cbl Adapter Card, 2.12-3
Function, 2.12-3
Connectors, 2.12-3
Diluter 1 Card, 2.12-3
Styles in Use, 2.12-3
Function, 2.12-4
Monitoring, 2.12-5
Function, 2.12-6
Inputs, 2.12-7
Monitoring, 2.12-7
BD ADJ Card, 2.12-8
Function, 2.12-8
Connectors, Test Points, and Adjustments, 2.12-8
Function, 2.12-8
Inputs, 2.12-9
Connectors and LED, 2.12-9
Function, 2.12-9
Inputs, 2.12-11
Diluter/Numeric Keypad, 2.12-11
Function, 2.12-11
Contrast Adjustment, 2.12-11
2.13 REAGENT HANDLING, 2.13-1

Summary, 2.13-1
Reagent Input, 2.13-1
Reagent Reservoir Module, 2.13-2
Function, 2.13-2
Monitoring the Reagent Level, 2.13-4
Reservoir Interface Card, 2.13-5
Function, 2.13-5
Inputs, 2.13-5
Connectors, 2.13-5
Reagent Distribution, 2.13-6
Diluent/Cleaning Agent Chamber, 2.13-7
Function, 2.13-7
PN 4277219B ix
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Backwash Tank, 2.13-8

Function, 2.13-8
Testing, 2.13-8
Backwash Manifold, 2.13-9
Function, 2.13-9
Sheath Tank, 2.13-9
Function, 2.13-9
Testing, 2.13-10
Sweep-Flow Reservoir, 2.13-10
Function, 2.13-10
Testing, 2.13-10
System-Flush Cycle, 2.13-11
Waste Collection and Monitoring, 2.13-11
Waste Collection, 2.13-11
Waste Level Monitoring, 2.13-11
2.14 SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION, 2.14-1

Summary, 2.14-1
Specimen Transport System Overview, 2.14-1
Cassette Transport Assembly (CTA), 2.14-2
Bar-Code Reader, 2.14-3
Function, 2.14-3
LED Bar-Code Reader, 2.14-3
Laser Bar-Code Reader, 2.14-4
Types of Bar Codes Used, 2.14-5
Bar-Code Label Specifications, 2.14-5
Sensor Distribution Card, 2.14-5
Function, 2.14-5
Input, 2.14-6
2.15 SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - CASSETTE MOVEMENT, 2.15-1

Summary, 2.15-1
Moving a Cassette from the Loading Bay to the Unloading Bay, 2.15-1
Initiating the Automatic-Mode Cycle, 2.15-1
Retrieving the Cassette from the Loading Bay, 2.15-1
Placing the Cassette on the Rocker Bed, 2.15-3
Moving the Cassette Across the Rocker Bed, 2.15-3
Detecting a Tube at the Piercing Station, 2.15-4
Positioning the Tube for Sample Acquisition, 2.15-4
Piercing the Cap of the Specimen Tube, 2.15-5
Identifying the Specimen, 2.15-5
Pushing the Tube Back into the Cassette, 2.15-6
Moving a Cassette to the Unloading Bay, 2.15-6
Removing a Cassette from the Rocker Bed, 2.15-7
x PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
2.16 SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW, 2.16-1

Summary, 2.16-1
Automatic-Mode, 2.16-1
Aspirating a Sample, 2.16-1
Segmenting the Sample, 2.16-2
Cleaning the Blood Pathways, 2.16-3
Manual Mode, 2.16-5
2.17 SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - HARDWARE DESCRIPTION, 2.17-1

Summary, 2.17-1
Aspiration Pump, 2.17-1
Function, 2.17-1
Aspiration Pump at Rest, 2.17-2
Aspiration Pump - Manual-Mode Aspiration, 2.17-3
Aspiration Pump - Automatic-Mode Aspiration, 2.17-3
Adjustable Stops, 2.17-4
Blood Sampling Valve (BSV), 2.17-5
Function, 2.17-5
BSV Ports, 2.17-6
Shear Valves, 2.17-7
Hardware Description, 2.17-7
Diff and Retic Segment Valves, 2.17-7
Stained Retic Segment Valve, 2.17-9
Shear Valve Ports, 2.17-10
Needle Assembly, 2.17-11
Bubble/Blood Detectors, 2.17-13
Function, 2.17-13
Operation, 2.17-14
Aspiration Messages, 2.17-15
Hand Detector, 2.17-16
Probe-Wipe Module, 2.17-17
Function, 2.17-17
Monitoring, 2.17-18
2.18 CBC ANALYSIS - COLLECTING WBC, RBC, PLT AND HGB DATA, 2.18-1
Summary, 2.18-1
Making the Sample Dilutions, 2.18-2
Applying the Coulter Principle, 2.18-4
Sensing Area, 2.18-4
Aperture Vacuum, 2.18-4
Aperture Current, 2.18-4
Timing the Data Collection in the GEN•S System, 2.18-5
WBC and RBC Data, 2.18-5
Note: Differences in cell type, cell concentration and the number of good
pulses can vary the histogram data collection time., 2.18-6
WBC Histogram, 2.18-6
PN 4277219B xi
CONTENTS VOLUME I
RBC Histogram, 2.18-6

Plt Histogram, 2.18-6
Timing the Data Collection in the LH 750 System, 2.18-6
WBC and RBC Count Data, 2.18-6
WBC, RBC, and Plt Histograms, 2.18-6
Determining the Hgb, 2.18-8
2.19 CBC ANALYSIS - ANALYZING RBC, WBC AND PLT DATA, 2.19-1
Summary, 2.19-1
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP 2 Cards (GEN•S System), 2.19-1
Function, 2.19-1
CAL Pulses, 2.19-2
Six-Channel Preamp Card (LH 750 System), 2.19-2
Function, 2.19-2
CAL Pulses, 2.19-3
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR Card (GEN•S System), 2.19-3
Function, 2.19-3
Input, 2.19-5
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 Card (LH 750 System), 2.19-5
Function, 2.19-5
Input, 2.19-6
PLATELET PROCESSOR Card, 2.19-6
Function, 2.19-6
Input, 2.19-7
Determining the CBC Parameters, 2.19-7
Determining the CBC Results on the GEN•S System, 2.19-7
Determining the CBC Results on the LH 750 System, 2.19-7
2.20 VCS TECHNOLOGY - COLLECTING THE DATA, 2.20-1

Summary, 2.20-1
VCS Measurements, 2.20-1
V - Volume (DC), 2.20-1
C - Conductivity (RF), 2.20-1
S - Light Scatter (LS), 2.20-1
Opacity (OP), 2.20-1
Rotated Light Scatter (RLS), 2.20-2
Linear Light Scatter (LLS), 2.20-2
Applying the VCS Technology, 2.20-2
DC and RF Currents, 2.20-2
Laser Light Source, 2.20-2
Flow-Cell Hydraulics, 2.20-3
Data Collection, 2.20-5
2.21 VCS TECHNOLOGY - MEASURING AND ANALYZING THE DATA, 2.21-1

Summary, 2.21-1
Electronic Overview, 2.21-1
xii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
RF Detector Preamp Card, 2.21-2

Function, 2.21-2
Inputs, 2.21-2
Outputs, 2.21-2
Monitoring, 2.21-4
Light Scatter Preamp Module and Sensor, 2.21-4
Function, 2.21-4
ANALOG 5 Card, 2.21-6
Function, 2.21-6
DIFF PROCESSOR Card, 2.21-7
Function, 2.21-7
Inputs, 2.21-8
Switch, 2.21-8
2.22 VCS TECHNOLOGY - DIFF ANALYSIS, 2.22-1

Summary, 2.22-1
Processing the Diff Sample on the GEN•S System, 2.22-1
Processing the Diff Sample on the LH 750 System, 2.22-2
Sensing the Diff Sample, 2.22-4
Diff Analysis Reagent System, 2.22-4
COULTER IntelliKinetics™ Application, 2.22-5
Ambient Temperature Thermistors, 2.22-5
Diff Lytic Reagent and Diff Preservative Pumps, 2.22-6
Reagent Dispenser Pump at Rest, 2.22-7
Dispensing the High Volume, 2.22-7
Dispensing the Low Volume, 2.22-8
Determining the Diff Parameters, 2.22-10
2.23 VCS TECHNOLOGY - RETIC ANALYSIS, 2.23-1

Summary, 2.23-1
Processing the Retic Sample on the GEN•S System, 2.23-1
Processing the Retic Sample on the LH 750 System, 2.23-3
Sensing the Retic Sample, 2.23-5
Retic Analysis Reagent System, 2.23-5
COULTER IntelliKinetics Application, 2.23-5
Regulating the Temperature in the Stain Chamber, 2.23-6
Regulating the Temperature in the Peltier Module, 2.23-6
Determining the Retic Parameters, 2.23-6
2.24 SAMPLE REPORTING, 2.24-1

Summary, 2.24-1
Sample Data Set, 2.24-2
CBC Analysis on the GEN•S System, 2.24-2
RBC and WBC Counts and Histograms, 2.24-2
MCV, 2.24-3
RDW, 2.24-3
Plt Histogram, Plt, MPV, PDW and Pct, 2.24-3
Hgb, 2.24-4
RBC Indices, 2.24-4
PN 4277219B xiii
CONTENTS VOLUME I
CBC Analysis on the LH 750 System, 2.24-5

MCV, 2.24-5
RDW, 2.24-6
Hgb, 2.24-7
RBC Indices, 2.24-7
Diff Analysis, 2.24-7
Nucleated RBC Counts (NRBC), 2.24-9
Retic Analysis, 2.24-9
Sample Flags, Codes and Messages, 2.24-10
2.25 CBC CALIBRATION OVERVIEW, 2.25-1

Why Calibrate?, 2.25-1
Calibration Tests, 2.25-1
Steps to Calibration, 2.25-1
Preliminary, 2.25-1
Latex Voltage Calibration, 2.25-2
Flow Rate Calibration, 2.25-5
Manual Mode-to-Automatic Mode Calibration, 2.25-7
When to Calibrate, 2.25-8
3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES, 3.1-1
PART A: GEN•S SYSTEM INSTALLATION
3.1 GEN•S SYSTEM PREINSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.1-1

Operator Training, 3.1-1
Carton Arrival and Condition, 3.1-1
Instrument Site, 3.1-1
Space and Accessibility, 3.1-1
Ventilation, 3.1-3
Remote Communication System (RCS) Requirement, 3.1-3
Electrical Requirements, 3.1-3
Drainage, 3.1-4
Ambient Temperature and Humidity, 3.1-4
Altitude, 3.1-5
Earthquake-Prone Regions, 3.1-5
Installation Supplies, 3.1-5
3.2 INSTALLING THE GEN•S SYSTEM WORKSTATION, 3.2-1
3.3 UNPACKING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.3-1

Tools/Supplies Needed for Installing the Analytical Station, 3.3-1
Unpacking, 3.3-1
3.4 INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE GEN•S SYSTEM, 3.4-1

Connecting the dc Power Cable, 3.4-1
Connecting the IBUS Cable, 3.4-2
Connecting the Analyzer Coaxial Cables on the GEN•S System, 3.4-2
Connecting the Backplane Voltage Bus, 3.4-4
xiv PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Connecting the Digital Backplane and the RF Detector Preamp Card, 3.4-5
Connecting the Digital Backplane and the RS/Opto Intfc Card, 3.4-6
Connecting the Workstation to the Analytical Station, 3.4-7
3.5 CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE GEN•S SYSTEM, 3.5-1

Connecting the Pneumatic Lines, 3.5-1
Installing the Pickup Tubes and the Reagent Lines, 3.5-1
3.6 SETTING UP THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.6-1

Setting Up the Power Supply, 3.6-1
Setting Up the GEN•S System Diluter, 3.6-3
Setting Up the Analyzer, 3.6-9
3.7 CHECKING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.7-1

Power Up Checks, 3.7-1
Analyzer Checks, 3.7-2
Adjusting the Analyzer Display and Accessing the Revision Levels, 3.7-2
Selecting the Analyzer Menu Settings, 3.7-3
Entering System Serial Numbers and Revisions at the Workstation, 3.7-4
3.8 TESTING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND

WORKSTATION, 3.8-1
Reagent Cycles, 3.8-1
Priming Cycles, 3.8-1
Startup Cycle, 3.8-1
System Verification, 3.8-3
Whole Blood Verification, 3.8-3
SlideMaker Installation, 3.8-3
SlideStainer Installation, 3.8-3
Report Completion, 3.8-3
System Installation Report, 3.8-3
Instrument Reference Report Form, 3.8-3
Service Call Report, 3.8-3
3.9 GEN•S SYSTEM AND GEN•S CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.9-1
PART B: LH 750 SYSTEM INSTALLATION
3.10 LH 750 SYSTEM PREINSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.10-1

Ventilation, 3.10-3
Drainage, 3.10-4
Altitude, 3.10-5
PN 4277219B xv
CONTENTS VOLUME I
3.11 UNPACKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.11-1

Opening the Cartons, 3.11-1
Unpacking and Setting Up the Power Supply, 3.11-2
Unpacking the Diluter, 3.11-5
Unpacking the Analyzer, 3.11-5
3.12 INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM, 3.12-1

Accessing the Connections, 3.12-1
Connecting the Analyzer to Preamp Cable, 3.12-4
3.13 CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM, 3.13-1

3.14 SETTING UP THE LH 750 SYSTEM DILUTER AND ANALYZER, 3.14-1

Setting Up the LH 750 System Diluter, 3.14-1
3.15 UNPACKING AND INSTALLING THE LH 750 SYSTEM WORKSTATION, 3.15-1

Unpacking and Checking the Workstation, 3.15-1
3.16 CHECKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.16-1

Closing Up the Instrument for Testing, 3.16-4
3.17 TESTING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND

WORKSTATION, 3.17-1
3.18 LH 750 SYSTEM AND LH 750 CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.18-1
xvi PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
4 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES, 4.1-1
4.1 POWER DOWN/POWER UP, 4.1-1

Analytical Station Power Down/Power Up, 4.1-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.1-1
Purpose, 4.1-1
Power Down, 4.1-1
Power Up, 4.1-1
Workstation Power Down/Power Up, 4.1-1
Purpose, 4.1-1
Power Down, 4.1-2
Power Up, 4.1-2
4.2 ANALYZER SERVICE MENU OPTIONS, 4.2-1

Purpose, 4.2-1
Procedure, 4.2-1
Verification, 4.2-1
4.3 ANALYZER SCOPE MENU OPTIONS, 4.3-1

Purpose, 4.3-1
Procedure, 4.3-1
Verification, 4.3-2
4.4 DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST, 4.4-1

Procedure, 4.4-1
Verification, 4.4-2
4.5 AUDIBLE ALARMS TESTS, 4.5-1

Purpose, 4.5-1
Procedure, 4.5-1
Verification, 4.5-1
4.6 ANALYZER CARD AND SCOPE MODULE REPLACEMENT, 4.6-1

Purpose, 4.6-1
Procedure, 4.6-1
4.7 DILUTER CARD REPLACEMENT, 4.7-1

Purpose, 4.7-1
Bar-Code Decoder Card Replacement, 4.7-1
Removal, 4.7-1
Installation, 4.7-2
Six-Channel Preamp Card Relocation or Replacement (LH 750 System), 4.7-2
Relocation or Removal, 4.7-2
PN 4277219B xvii
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Installation, 4.7-3
Diluter Card Replacements (except Bar-Code Decoder, Six-Channel Preamp, and
Reservoir Interface Cards), 4.7-3
Removal, 4.7-3
Installation, 4.7-4
4.8 CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES, 4.8-1

Purpose, 4.8-1
Procedures, 4.8-1
4.9 CBC CALIBRATION - LATEX VOLTAGE, 4.9-1

Purpose, 4.9-1
Procedure, 4.9-1
4.10 CBC CALIBRATION - FLOW RATE, 4.10-1

Purpose, 4.10-1
Procedure, 4.10-1
Verification, 4.10-3
4.11 MANUAL MODE-TO-AUTOMATIC MODE CALIBRATION, 4.11-1

Purpose, 4.11-1
Collecting the Data, 4.11-1
4.12 FAN REPLACEMENT, 4.12-1

Purpose, 4.12-1
Power Supply Exhaust Fan, 4.12-1
Procedure, 4.12-1
Pneumatic Power Supply Intake Fan, 4.12-2
Procedure, 4.12-2
Analyzer Fans, 4.12-3
Procedure, 4.12-3
4.13 REMOVING THE POWER SUPPLY COVER AND LEFT SIDE PANEL, 4.13-1
Purpose, 4.13-1
Removal, 4.13-1
4.14 COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT, 4.14-1

Purpose, 4.14-1
Removal, 4.14-1
xviii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Installation, 4.14-2
4.15 DUMP VALVE REPLACEMENT, 4.15-1

Purpose, 4.15-1
Procedure, 4.15-1
4.16 AIR WATER SEPARATOR CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT, 4.16-1

Purpose, 4.16-1
Cleaning, 4.16-1
Replacement, 4.16-2
Removal, 4.16-2
4.17 MOTOR CONTROLLER CARD REPLACEMENT, 4.17-1

Purpose, 4.17-1
Replacement, 4.17-1
4.18 SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER CARD REPLACEMENT, 4.18-1

Purpose, 4.18-1
Removal, 4.18-1
4.19 SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER DISPLAY TEST AND REPLACEMENT, 4.19-1

Purpose, 4.19-1
SPC Display Test, 4.19-1
Replacement, 4.19-1
4.20 BULK POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT, 4.20-1

Purpose, 4.20-1
Removal, 4.20-1
4.21 BULK POWER FILTER CARD REPLACEMENT, 4.21-1

Purpose, 4.21-1
Replacement, 4.21-1
PN 4277219B xix
CONTENTS VOLUME I
4.22 CBC LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND

REPLACEMENT, 4.22-1
Purpose, 4.22-1
Volume Check, 4.22-1
Pump Troubleshooting, 4.22-4
Replacement, 4.22-5
4.23 DILUENT DISPENSER CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT, 4.23-1

Purpose, 4.23-1
Dispenser Troubleshooting, 4.23-5
Replacement, 4.23-6
4.24 STAIN PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT, 4.24-1

Purpose, 4.24-1
Replacement, 4.24-7
4.25 RETIC CLEARING SOLUTION PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND

REPLACEMENT, 4.25-1
Purpose, 4.25-1
Pump Replacement, 4.25-6
4.26 CLEANING AGENT PUMP CHECK AND REPLACEMENT, 4.26-1

Purpose, 4.26-1
Replacement, 4.26-3
4.27 ASPIRATION PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT, 4.27-1

Purpose, 4.27-1
Low (Manual-Mode) Volume Check, 4.27-1
High (Automatic-Mode) Volume Check, 4.27-3
Replacement, 4.27-6
xx PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
4.28 DIFF LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND

REPLACEMENT, 4.28-1
Purpose, 4.28-1
Low Volume Check, 4.28-1
High Volume Check, 4.28-4
Replacement, 4.28-8
4.29 DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND

REPLACEMENT, 4.29-1
Purpose, 4.29-1
Replacement, 4.29-8
4.30 REAGENT RESERVOIR COMPONENT REPLACEMENT, 4.30-1

Purpose, 4.30-1
Float Sensor/Reservoir Cap Replacement, 4.30-1
Removal, 4.30-1
Reagent Reservoir Solenoid Replacement, 4.30-3
Procedure, 4.30-3
Reservoir Interface Card Replacement, 4.30-4
Procedure, 4.30-4
4.31 CBC LYTIC REAGENT AND DILUENT DELIVERY TIMING CHECK, 4.31-1
Purpose, 4.31-1
Preliminary Checks, 4.31-1
Timing Check, 4.31-1
4.32 HGB LAMP REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT, 4.32-1

Purpose, 4.32-1
Replacement, 4.32-1
Hgb Lamp Voltage Adjustment, 4.32-2
4.33 WORKSTATION SCREEN CAPTURE AND LIST-MODE DATA

COLLECTION, 4.33-1
Purpose, 4.33-1
PN 4277219B xxi
CONTENTS VOLUME I

Screen Capture, 4.33-1
List-Mode Data Collection, 4.33-1
4.34 CRT INTENSITY ADJUSTMENT, 4.34-1

Purpose, 4.34-1
CRT Intensity Adjustment on the GEN•S System, 4.34-1
Adjustment, 4.34-1
CRT Intensity Adjustment on the LH 750 System, 4.34-2
Adjustment, 4.34-2
4.35 BELT DRIVE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT, 4.35-1

Purpose, 4.35-1
Removal, 4.35-1
4.36 ROCKER BED BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT, 4.36-1

Purpose, 4.36-1
Adjustment, 4.36-1
4.37 UNDER LEFT STACK SWITCH REPLACEMENT, 4.37-1

Purpose, 4.37-1
Procedure, 4.37-1
4.38 UNDER RIGHT STACK SWITCH REPLACEMENT, 4.38-1

Purpose, 4.38-1
Procedure, 4.38-1
4.39 LEFT OR RIGHT LIFT UP SWITCH REPLACEMENT, 4.39-1

Purpose, 4.39-1
Removal, 4.39-1
4.40 LEFT OR RIGHT LIFT CYLINDER REPLACEMENT, 4.40-1

Purpose, 4.40-1
Removal, 4.40-1
xxii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Lift Function Test, 4.40-3

Lift Up Switch Activator Adjustment, 4.40-3
4.41 TOP LEFT OR RIGHT SAFETY SWITCH REPLACEMENT, 4.41-1

Purpose, 4.41-1
Replacement, 4.41-1
Top Left Safety Switch Test, 4.41-2
Top Right Safety Switch Test, 4.41-2
4.42 FLIPPERS (OLD STYLE) CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT, 4.42-1

Purpose, 4.42-1
Flipper Check and Adjustment, 4.42-1
4.43 ROCKER BED REMOVAL, 4.43-1

Purpose, 4.43-1
Removal, 4.43-1
4.44 ROCKER BED POSITION SENSORS CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS, 4.44-1

Purpose, 4.44-1
Bed Sensor Flag Check and Adjustment, 4.44-1
Bed Backward Sensor Check and Adjustment, 4.44-2
Bed Horizontal Sensor Check and Adjustment, 4.44-3
Bed Forward Sensor Check and Adjustment, 4.44-4
4.45 BED ROCK CYLINDER REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT, 4.45-1

Purpose, 4.45-1
Removal, 4.45-1
Bed Rock Rate Adjustment, 4.45-2
4.46 TUBE DETECTOR REPLACEMENT, 4.46-1

Purpose, 4.46-1
Replacement, 4.46-1
4.47 TUBE DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT, 4.47-1

Purpose, 4.47-1
PN 4277219B xxiii
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Adjustment, 4.47-1
4.48 CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY ALIGNMENT CHECKS, 4.48-1

Purpose, 4.48-1
Procedure, 4.48-1
4.49 BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST, 4.49-1

Purpose, 4.49-1
Procedure, 4.49-1
4.50 BAR-CODE SCANNER CYLINDER REPLACEMENT, 4.50-1

Purpose, 4.50-1
LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Replacement, 4.50-1
Removal, 4.50-1
Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Replacement, 4.50-2
Removal, 4.50-2
4.51 BAR-CODE SCANNER ADJUSTMENTS, 4.51-1

Purpose, 4.51-1
LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Adjustments, 4.51-1
Set Up, 4.51-1
Park Tab Verification, 4.51-2
Center Adjustment, 4.51-3
Height Over Tube Label Adjustment, 4.51-4
Height Over Cassette Label Adjustment, 4.51-7
Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Adjustments, 4.51-8
Adjustments, 4.51-8
4.52 LED STYLE BAR-CODE SCANNER SPEED AND ELECTRICAL CHECKS, 4.52-1
Purpose, 4.52-1
Tool/Supplies Needed, 4.52-1
Speed Check, 4.52-1
Electrical Checks, 4.52-2
4.53 BAR-CODE SCANNER POSITION SENSOR ADJUSTMENT, 4.53-1

Purpose, 4.53-1
LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor Adjustment, 4.53-1
Adjustment, 4.53-1
xxiv PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor Adjustment, 4.53-2

Adjustment, 4.53-2
4.54 BAR-CODE SCANNER ALIGNMENT WITH OSCILLOSCOPE, 4.54-1

Purpose, 4.54-1
Alignment, 4.54-1
4.55 BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT, 4.55-1

Purpose, 4.55-1
Retic Module, 4.55-1
Removal of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module, 4.55-1
Installation of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module, 4.55-2
Adjustment of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module, 4.55-3
Random Access Module, 4.55-4
Removal of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random Access Module, 4.55-5
Installation of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random Access
Module, 4.55-6
Adjustment of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random Access
Module, 4.55-7
4.56 BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR PERFORMANCE TEST, 4.56-1

Purpose, 4.56-1
Performance Test, 4.56-1
4.57 NEEDLE CAP-PIERCER MODULE REPLACEMENT, 4.57-1

Purpose, 4.57-1
Replacement, 4.57-1
Bellow Up and Bellows Down Sensor Adjustment, 4.57-2
4.58 PROBE-WIPE MODULE TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS, AND COMPONENT

REPLACEMENTS, 4.58-1
Purpose, 4.58-1
Tools/Materials Needed, 4.58-1
Probe-Wipe Test, 4.58-1
Probe-Wipe Module Component Replacement, 4.58-2
Cleaning Truck Alignment, 4.58-5
Initial Adjustment, 4.58-5
Final Adjustment, 4.58-6
PN 4277219B xxv
CONTENTS VOLUME I
Probe-Wipe Sensor Adjustment, 4.58-6

4.59 HAND-DETECTOR ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT, 4.59-1

Purpose, 4.59-1
Procedure, 4.59-1
4.60 BSV MODULE COMPONENT REPLACEMENT, 4.60-1

Purpose, 4.60-1
BSV/BSV Shaft, Spring, Housing, or Insulator Replacement, 4.60-1
Procedure, 4.60-1
BSV Manual-Mode (Front Section) Cylinder Replacement, 4.60-3
Procedure, 4.60-3
Probe Position Sensor Adjustment, 4.60-4
4.61 USING THE ELECTRONIC FORMS, 4.61-1

Purpose, 4.61-1
Using the System Verification Report, 4.61-1
Using the Instrument Reference Report, 4.61-2
Using the System Installation Report, 4.61-2
4.62 RETIC MIXING MOTOR REPAIR/REPLACEMENT, 4.62-1

Purpose, 4.62-1
Removal, 4.62-1
Removal, 4.62-2
4.63 STAIN OR RETIC CHAMBER REPLACEMENT, 4.63-1

Purpose, 4.63-1
Procedure, 4.63-1
4.64 PELTIER MODULE REPLACEMENT, 4.64-1

Purpose, 4.64-1
Procedure, 4.64-1
xxvi PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
4.65 HEATER CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS, 4.65-1

Purpose, 4.65-1
Procedure, 4.65-1
4.66 DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP VOLUME OPTIMIZATION, 4.66-1

Purpose, 4.66-1
Procedure, 4.66-1
4.67 DIFF HEATER REPLACEMENT, 4.67-1

Purpose, 4.67-1
Removal, 4.67-1
4.68 DIFF MIXING CHAMBER REPLACEMENT, 4.68-1

Purpose, 4.68-1
Procedure, 4.68-1
4.69 DIFF MIXING CHAMBER MOTOR REPLACEMENT, 4.69-1

Purpose, 4.69-1
Procedure, 4.69-1
4.70 CBC APERTURE CHECKS, 4.70-1

Purpose, 4.70-1
Procedure, 4.70-1
4.71 VCS OPTIMIZATION, 4.71-1

Purpose, 4.71-1
A. Preliminary Checks, 4.71-5
B. Pump Volume Checks, 4.71-5
C. VCS Flow Rate Adjustment, 4.71-5
D. RF Detector Preamp Card Adjustments, 4.71-6
E. DC and RF Verification, 4.71-6
F. Flow Cell Cleaning, 4.71-6
G. Laser and Flow-Cell Alignment, 4.71-6
H. LS Gain Adjustment, 4.71-6
I. LS Verification, 4.71-6
J. RMS Noise Check, 4.71-7
K. LATRON Verification, 4.71-7
L. VCS Verification, 4.71-7
PN 4277219B xxvii
CONTENTS VOLUME I
4.72 INITIAL SHEATH AND SAMPLE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS, 4.72-1

Purpose, 4.72-1
Procedure, 4.72-1
4.73 FLOW-RATE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE, 4.73-1

Purpose, 4.73-1
Procedure, 4.73-1
4.74 RF DETECTOR PREAMP CARD ADJUSTMENTS, 4.74-1

Purpose, 4.74-1
RF Detector Preamp Card Cable Adjustment, 4.74-2
Clog Detector Circuit Verification on the RF Detector Preamp Card with a Vacuum
Tube, 4.74-3
C1/C20 Adjustment, 4.74-4
RF and DC Gain Adjustment, 4.74-5
4.75 VCS NOISE CHECKS, 4.75-1

Purpose, 4.75-1
DC Verification, 4.75-1
RF Verification, 4.75-2
LS Verification, 4.75-9
RMS Noise Check, 4.75-10
4.76 LASER AND FLOW-CELL ALIGNMENT, 4.76-1

Purpose, 4.76-1
Flow-Cell Z-Axis (Focus) Alignment, 4.76-2
Flow-Cell X- and Y-Axis Plate Alignment, 4.76-5
Flow-Cell Y-Axis Final Alignment, 4.76-7
4.77 LS GAIN ADJUSTMENT, 4.77-1

Purpose, 4.77-1
Procedure, 4.77-1
4.78 LATRON VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, 4.78-1

Purpose, 4.78-1
Procedure, 4.78-1
4.79 FLOW CELL CLEANING, 4.79-1

Purpose, 4.79-1
xxviii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I

Procedure, 4.79-1
4.80 LENS BLOCK CLEANING, 4.80-1

Purpose, 4.80-1
Procedure, 4.80-1
4.81 SENSOR AND SWITCH CHECKS, 4.81-1

Purpose, 4.81-1
4.82 LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYZER GAS SPRING REPLACEMENT, 4.82-1

Purpose, 4.82-1
Removal, 4.82-1
4.83 RANDOM ACCESS MODULE REMOVAL, 4.83-1

Purpose, 4.83-1
Removal, 4.83-1
INDEX, INDEX-1
TRADEMARKS
ILLUSTRATIONS
1.2-1 Laser Warning and Certification Labels, Laser with Protective Housing, 1.2-3
1.2-2 Laser Warning and Certification Labels on the Laser Beam Cover, 1.2-4
1.2-3 Laser Warning Labels on the Handheld Scanner, 1.2-4
1.2-4 Laser Warning Labels on the Bar-Code Reader, Protective Housing On, 1.2-5
1.2-5 Laser Warning Label on the Bar-Code Reader, Protective Housing Cut Away, 1.2-5
2.1-1 GEN•S System Units, 2.1-3
2.1-2 GEN•S Cell Units, 2.1-3
2.1-3 LH 750 System Units, 2.1-4
2.1-4 LH 750 System Units with Optional LH SlideMaker and LH SlideStainer , 2.1-4
2.2-1 Power Supply Component Locations, Old Style Power Supply, 2.2-2
2.2-2 Power Supply Component Locations, New Style Power Supply, 2.2-2
2.3-1 GEN•S System Analyzer Component Locations, Front View, 2.3-3
2.3-2 GEN•S System Analyzer Component Locations, Rear View, 2.3-3
2.3-3 LH 750 System Analyzer Component Locations, Front View, Cover Down, 2.3-4
2.3-4 LH 750 System Analyzer Component Locations, Front View without Cover, 2.3-4
2.3-5 LH 750 System Analyzer Component Locations, Rear View, 2.3-4
2.4-1 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Front View, Panels Closed, 2.4-4
2.4-2 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Front Panels, 2.4-4
2.4-3 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Under Front Cover, 2.4-5
PN 4277219B xxix
CONTENTS VOLUME I
2.4-4 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Right Door and

Compartment, 2.4-5
2.4-5 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Left Door and Compartment, 2.4-6
2.4-6 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Right Rear Door, 2.4-6
2.4-7 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Left Rear Doors, 2.4-7
2.4-8 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Front View, Panels Closed, 2.4-8
2.4-9 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Front Panel, 2.4-8
2.4-10 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Under Front Cover, 2.4-9
2.4-11 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Center Rear Panel, 2.4-9
2.4-12 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Right Door and
Compartment, 2.4-10
2.4-13 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Left Door and
Compartment, 2.4-10
2.4-14 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Right Rear Door, 2.4-11
2.4-15 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Left Rear Doors, 2.4-11
2.5-1 Electronic Power Supply Block Diagram, 2.5-1
2.5-2 Backplane Voltage Bus Distribution on the GEN•S System, 2.5-3
2.5-3 Backplane Voltage Bus Distribution on the LH 750 System, 2.5-4
2.6-1 Control Voltage Development and Distribution (Old Diluter Interconnects), 2.6-2
2.6-2 Control Voltage Development and Distribution (New Diluter
Interconnects), 2.6-2
2.6-3 +5.2 Control Voltage and POWER ON Signal Distribution (Old Diluter
2.6-4 +5.2 Control Voltage and POWER ON Signal Distribution (New Diluter
2.6-5 POWER ON Signal, System Power Controller Card, 2.6-4
2.6-6 AMC Power-Up Signals, 2.6-5
2.6-7 SYSTEM RESET Signal, 2.6-6
2.7-1 API Card Block Diagram, 2.7-1
2.7-2 R/W/P SC/A Card Block Diagram, 2.7-3
2.7-3 APS1 Card Block Diagram, 2.7-5
2.8-1 Diff Power Supply Card Block Diagram, 2.8-1
2.8-2 Laser Power Supply Block Diagram, 2.8-3
2.8-3 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Block Diagram, 2.8-4
2.9-1 Pneumatic Supply Components, Old Style Power Supply, 2.9-1
2.9-2 Pneumatic Supply Components, New Style Power Supply, 2.9-2
2.9-3 Pneumatic On Signals on the System Power Controller Card, 2.9-4
2.10-1 System Power Controller Card and System Power Controller Display Block
Diagram, 2.10-1
2.10-2 System Power Controller Display, 2.10-3
2.11-1 System Control Overview Block Diagram, 2.11-1
2.11-2 RESET Signal Block Diagram, 2.11-3
2.11-3 Analyzer RESET Button, 2.11-3
2.11-4 COMM INTERFACE Card Communication Links, 2.11-4
2.11-5 RS/Opto Intfc Card Communication Links, 2.11-6
2.12-1 Diluter Control Overview, 2.12-1
2.12-2 Diluter 1 Card Power Supply Distribution, 2.12-4
2.12-3 Peltier and Ambient Temperature Circuit, 2.12-10
xxx PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
2.12-4 Stain Chamber Heater Circuit, 2.12-10

2.12-5 Diff Lytic Reagent Heater Circuit, 2.12-11
2.12-6 Diluter Keypad on the GEN•S System, 2.12-12
2.12-7 Numeric Keypad on the LH 750 System, 2.12-12
2.13-1 Reagent Inputs on Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir, 2.13-1
2.13-2 Reagent Inputs on Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent Reservoir, 2.13-2
2.13-3 Reagent Reservoir Module, Old Style (GEN•S System), 2.13-3
2.13-4 Reagent Reservoir Module, New Style (GEN•S System), 2.13-4
2.13-5 Reagent Reservoir Module, Modified New Style (GEN•S System and LH 750
System), 2.13-4
2.13-6 Reagent Distribution on Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir, 2.13-6
2.13-7 Reagent Distribution on Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent
Reservoir, 2.13-7
2.13-8 Backwash Tank Reagent Flow, 2.13-8
2.13-9 Sheath-Tank Reagent Flow, 2.13-10
2.14-1 Specimen Transport Block Diagram, 2.14-1
2.14-2 Cassette Transport Assembly, 2.14-2
2.14-3 LED Bar-Code Reader Block Diagram, 2.14-3
2.14-4 Laser Bar-Code Reader Block Diagram, 2.14-4
2.15-1 Initiating the Automatic Cycle, 2.15-1
2.15-2 Bed Position Sensors, 2.15-2
2.15-3 Bed Locks, 2.15-2
2.15-4 From Loading Bay to Rocker Bed, 2.15-3
2.15-5 Moving across the Rocker Bed, 2.15-3
2.15-6 Detecting Specimen Tubes, 2.15-4
2.15-7 Positioning Tube for Sampling, 2.15-4
2.15-8 Piercing the Tube, 2.15-5
2.15-9 Scanning Bar-Code Labels, 2.15-5
2.15-10Pushing Tube into Cassette, 2.15-6
2.15-11Moving to Unloading Bay, 2.15-6
2.15-12Rocker Bed to Unloading Bay, 2.15-7
2.16-1 Aspiration Path in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-1
2.16-2 Aspiration through the BSV in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-2
2.16-3 Delivering CBC Samples in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-2
2.16-4 Delivering Diff and Retic Samples in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-3
2.16-5 Backwashing the Diff and Retic Segments, 2.16-3
2.16-6 Backwashing the BSV in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-4
2.16-7 Cross-Rinse in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-4
2.16-8 Priming the Diff and Retic Sample Lines with Reagent, 2.16-5
2.16-9 Aspiration Path in the Manual Mode, 2.16-5
2.16-10Aspiration through the BSV in the Manual Mode, 2.16-6
2.16-11Delivering CBC Samples in the Manual Mode, 2.16-6
2.16-12Delivering Diff and Retic Samples in the Manual Mode, 2.16-7
2.16-13Backwashing the Diff and Retic Segments, 2.16-7
2.16-14Backwashing the BSV in the Manual Mode, 2.16-8
2.16-15Cross-Rinse in the Manual Mode, 2.16-8
2.16-16Priming the Diff and Retic Sample Lines with Reagent, 2.16-8
2.17-1 Aspiration Pump Components, 2.17-2
2.17-2 Aspiration Pump at Rest, 2.17-2
2.17-3 Aspiration in Manual Mode, 2.17-3
PN 4277219B xxxi
CONTENTS VOLUME I
2.17-4 Aspiration in Automatic Mode, 2.17-3

2.17-5 Adjusting the Low, Manual-Mode Volume, 2.17-4
2.17-6 Adjusting the High, Automatic-Mode Volume, 2.17-4
2.17-7 BSV Ports, 2.17-6
2.17-8 Aspirate Sample, 2.17-7
2.17-9 Deliver Sample, 2.17-8
2.17-10Backwash Sample Groove, 2.17-8
2.17-11Wash Cleaning Groove, 2.17-8
2.17-12Backwash Sample Loop, 2.17-8
2.17-13Aspirate Sample, 2.17-9
2.17-14Deliver Sample, 2.17-9
2.17-16Rinse Aspiration Pathway, 2.17-10
2.17-17Diff and Retic Segment Valve Ports, 2.17-10
2.17-18Stained Retic Segment Valve Ports, 2.17-11
2.17-19Needle Assembly Components, 2.17-12
2.17-20Bubble/Blood Detectors, 2.17-13
2.17-21Bubble/Blood Detector Operation, 2.17-14
2.17-22Manual-Mode Aspiration Station Components, 2.17-17
2.18-1 CBC Analysis in the GEN•S System Block Diagram, 2.18-1
2.18-2 CBC Analysis in the LH 750 System Block Diagram, 2.18-2
2.18-3 CBC Sample Processing Components on GEN•S System Analytical Stations that
Use the Diluent Reservoir, 2.18-3
Bypass the Diluent Reservoir, 2.18-3
2.18-5 CBC Sample Processing Components on LH 750 System Analytical
Stations, 2.18-4
2.18-6 Applying the Coulter Principle, 2.18-5
2.18-7 Data Collection Timing on the GEN•S System, 2.18-5
2.18-8 Data Collection Timing LH 750 System, 2.18-7
2.18-9 Hgb Sensing Area, 2.18-8
2.18-10Hgb Signal Flow, 2.18-8
2.19-1 RED/WHITE PRE-AMP Card Block Diagram, 2.19-1
2.19-2 Six-Channel Preamp Card Block Diagram, 2.19-3
2.19-3 RED/WHITE PROCESSOR Card Block Diagram, 2.19-4
2.19-4 RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 Card Block Diagram, 2.19-6
2.19-5 PLATELET PROCESSOR Card Block Diagram, 2.19-6
2.20-1 Applying the VCS Technology, 2.20-3
2.20-2 Light Scatter Path, 2.20-3
2.20-3 Hydrodynamically Focused Cells, 2.20-4
2.20-4 Flow Cell Hydraulics, 2.20-4
2.21-1 VCS Technology Block Diagram, 2.21-1
2.21-2 RF Detector Preamp Card (with Vacuum Tube) Block Diagram, 2.21-3
2.21-3 RF Detector Preamp Card (Solid State) Block Diagram, 2.21-3
2.21-4 LS Sensor Regions, 2.21-4
2.21-5 Light Scatter Preamp Module Block Diagram, 2.21-5
2.21-6 ANALOG 5 Card Block Diagram, 2.21-6
2.21-7 DIFF PROCESSOR Card Block Diagram, 2.21-7
2.22-1 Diff Sample Processing Components on the GEN•S System, 2.22-1
xxxii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
2.22-2 Diff Blood Sample and Reagent Delivery to the Mixing Chamber in the GEN•S
System, 2.22-2
2.22-3 Diff Sample Processing Components on the LH 750 System, 2.22-2
2.22-4 Diff Blood Sample Aspiration and Delivery to the Mixing Chamber in the LH 750
System, 2.22-3
2.22-5 Diff Sample Analysis Flow, 2.22-4
2.22-6 Ambient Temperature Sensor Location, 2.22-5
2.22-7 Diff Lytic Reagent Pump and Diff Preservative Pump Components, 2.22-6
2.22-8 Dispenser Pump at Rest, 2.22-7
2.22-9 Dispensing High Volume, 2.22-7
2.22-10Dispensing Low Volume, 2.22-8
2.22-11Adjusting the Low Volume, 2.22-9
2.22-12Adjusting the High Volume, 2.22-9
2.23-1 Retic Sample Processing Components on the GEN•S System, 2.23-1
2.23-2 Retic Blood Sample and Stain Delivery to Stain Chamber on the GEN•S
System, 2.23-2
2.23-3 Stained Sample and Clearing Solution Delivery to Retic Chamber on the GEN•S
System, 2.23-2
2.23-4 Retic Sample Processing Components on the LH 750 System, 2.23-3
2.23-5 Retic Blood Sample Aspiration and Delivery to the Stain Chamber in the LH 750
System, 2.23-4
2.23-6 Stained Sample Aspiration and Delivery to the Retic Chamber in the LH 750
System, 2.23-4
2.23-7 Retic Sample Analysis Flow, 2.23-5
2.23-8 Stain Heater Block Diagram, 2.23-6
2.23-9 Peltier Module, Cross Section, 2.23-6
2.24-1 Sample Data Flow on the GEN•S System from Final Processing to
Reporting, 2.24-1
2.24-2 Sample Data Flow on the LH 750 System from Final Processing to
Reporting, 2.24-2
2.24-3 Diff Analysis Two-Dimensional DataPlot, 2.24-8
2.24-4 Diff Analysis Three-Dimensional DataPlot, 2.24-8
2.24-5 NRBC Signature Position, 2.24-9
2.24-6 NRBC Location on WBC Histogram, 2.24-9
2.24-7 Retic Analysis DataPlot, 2.24-10
2.25-1 Latex Voltage Test Window, 2.25-3
2.25-2 Voltage Matching Test Window, 2.25-4
2.25-3 Flow Rate Test Window, 2.25-7
3.1-1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the GEN•S System without
SlideMaker, 3.1-1
3.1-2 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the GEN•S System with
SlideMaker, 3.1-2
3.1-3 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the GEN•S Cell, 3.1-2
3.1-4 Location of Fans on the GEN•S System, 3.1-3
3.1-5 Main Power and Drain Line Length Requirement for the GEN•S System, 3.1-4
3.1-6 Backwash Tank Custom Tubing on the GEN•S System, 3.1-5
3.3-1 Removing the Strapping from the Shipping Cartons, 3.3-1
3.3-2 Main Components Layout on the GEN•S System, 3.3-2
3.3-3 Opening Analyzer Side Doors on the GEN•S System, 3.3-3
3.3-4 Analyzer Captive Lock-Down Screws on the GEN•S System, 3.3-3
PN 4277219B xxxiii
CONTENTS VOLUME I
3.4-1 Connecting the Main Power Cable on the GEN•S System, 3.4-1
3.4-2 Connecting the IBUS Cable on the GEN•S System, 3.4-2
3.4-3 Opening the Diluter Side Doors, 3.4-3
3.4-4 Routing the Analyzer Coaxial Cables on the GEN•S System, 3.4-3
3.4-5 Connecting the Backplane Voltage Bus on the GEN•S System, 3.4-4
3.4-6 Connecting the Cable from the RF Detector Preamp Card to the Digital
Backplane, 3.4-5
3.4-7 Connecting the Cables from the Digital Backplane to the RS/Opto Intfc Card on
the GEN•S System, 3.4-6
3.4-8 Connecting the Workstation to the Diluter on the GEN•S System, 3.4-7
3.5-1 Installing the Pneumatic Lines on the GEN•S System, 3.5-1
3.5-2 Connecting Reagent Lines for the CBC Lyse, Retic Pak and SCATTER PAK® Lytic
Reagent on the GEN•S System, 3.5-2
3.5-3 Connecting the Diluent, Cleaning Agent, and Waste Line on the GEN•S
System, 3.5-3
3.6-1 Removing Power Supply Shipping Brackets, 3.6-1
3.6-2 Location of Power Supply Air Filter, 3.6-2
3.6-3 Connecting Main ac Power Cable to Power Supply, 3.6-3
3.6-4 Removing GEN•S System Diluter Shipping Inserts, 3.6-3
3.6-5 Removing the Spacers from the BSV on the GEN•S System, 3.6-4
3.6-6 Removing the Shipping Insert from the TTM on the GEN•S System, 3.6-5
3.6-7 Checking Needle Cartridge Installation on the GEN•S System, 3.6-6
3.6-8 Checking Rocker Bed Movement and Bed Position Sensor Condition on the
GEN•S System, 3.6-7
3.6-9 Checking Lift Cover Alignment and Stripper Plate Movement on the GEN•S
System, 3.6-8
3.6-10 AMC, COMM INTERFACE Card, and DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Locations,
3.7-1 Supplying ac Input to the Analytical Station on the GEN•S System, 3.7-1
3.7-2 Power On Checks on the GEN•S System, 3.7-2
3.7-3 Accessing the Revision Levels on the GEN•S System, 3.7-3
3.8-1 GEN•S System Condition after Shutdown Cycle, 3.8-1
3.8-2 GEN•S System Condition after Startup Cycle, 3.8-2
3.10-1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the LH 750 System without
SlideMaker, 3.10-1
3.10-2 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the LH 750 System with
SlideMaker, 3.10-2
3.10-3 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the LH 750 System, 3.10-2
3.10-4 Location of Fans on the LH 750 System, 3.10-3
3.10-5 Main Power and Drain Line Length Requirement for the LH 750 System, 3.10-4
3.10-6 Backwash Tank Custom Tubing on the LH 750 System, 3.10-5
3.11-5 Main Components Layout for the LH 750 System, 3.11-4
3.11-6 Removing the Left and Right Analytical Station Columns, 3.11-5
3.11-7 Opening Analyzer Side Doors on the LH 750 System, 3.11-6
3.11-8 Analyzer Captive Lock-Down Screws on the LH 750 System, 3.11-6
xxxiv PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I

3.12-2 Connecting the Main Power Cable on the LH 750 System, 3.12-2
3.12-3 Connecting the IBUS Cable on the LH 750 System, 3.12-3
3.12-4 Routing the Analyzer to Preamp Cable on the LH 750 System, 3.12-4
3.12-5 Connecting the Backplane Voltage Bus on the LH 750 System, 3.12-5
3.12-6 Routing the Cable from the RF Detector Preamp Card to the Digital Backplane on
the LH 750 System, 3.12-6
3.13-1 Installing the Pneumatic Lines on the LH 750 System, 3.13-1
Reagent on the LH 750 System, 3.13-2
3.13-3 Connecting the Diluent, Cleaning Agent, and Waste Line on the LH 750
System, 3.13-3
3.14-1 Removing LH 750 System Diluter Shipping Inserts, 3.14-1
3.14-2 Removing the Spacers from the BSV on the LH 750 System, 3.14-1
3.14-3 Removing the Shipping Insert from the TTM on the LH 750 System, 3.14-2
3.14-4 Checking Needle Cartridge Installation on the LH 750 System, 3.14-3
LH 750 System, 3.14-3
3.14-6 Checking Lift Cover Alignment and Stripper Plate Movement on the LH 750
System, 3.14-4
3.14-7 Setting Up the LH 750 System Analyzer, 3.14-4
3.15-1 Connecting the Workstation to the LH 750 System Diluter, 3.15-1
3.16-1 Supplying ac Input to the Analytical Station on the LH 750 System, 3.16-1
3.16-2 Power On Checks on the LH 750 System, 3.16-2
3.16-3 Accessing the Revision Levels on the LH 750 System, 3.16-3
3.17-1 LH 750 System Condition after Shutdown Cycle, 3.17-1
3.17-2 LH 750 System Condition after Startup Cycle, 3.17-2
4.2-1 Accessing the Analyzer SERVICE MENU, 4.2-1
4.3-1 Accessing the Analyzer SCOPE MENU, 4.3-1
4.3-2 Electronic Test Displays, 4.3-3
4.3-3 Count Test Displays, 4.3-4
4.3-4 Diff Analog Pulses Test Display, 4.3-4
4.3-5 VCS LATRON Control Display, 4.3-4
4.3-6 Volume Display, 4.3-5
4.3-7 Conductivity Display, 4.3-5
4.3-8 Light Scatter Display, 4.3-5
4.3-9 Phase Adjust Display, 4.3-6
4.3-10 Light Scatter Drift Displays, 4.3-6
4.3-11 F55 Displays, 4.3-6
4.3-12 CBC + Diff Displays, 4.3-7
4.3-13 CBC Only Displays, 4.3-7
4.3-14 Diff Only Displays, 4.3-7
4.4-1 Diff Analog Pulses Test Display on the GEN•S System VCS Calibration
Screen, 4.4-1
4.6-1 Removing an Analyzer Circuit Card, 4.6-1
4.6-2 Removing the BD ADJ Card, 4.6-2
4.6-3 Removing the Scope Module, 4.6-2
4.7-1 Removing the Bar-Code Decoder Card, 4.7-1
PN 4277219B xxxv
CONTENTS VOLUME I
4.7-2 Lowering the Six-Channel Preamp Card Assembly or Removing the Card
Cover, 4.7-3
4.9-1 Latex Voltage Window, 4.9-2
4.9-2 Voltage Matching Window, 4.9-3
4.12-1 Removing the Power Supply Exhaust Fan, 4.12-2
4.12-2 Removing the Pneumatic Power Supply Intake Fan, 4.12-3
4.12-3 Removing an Analyzer Fan, 4.12-4
4.13-1 Removing the Power Supply Cover, 4.13-1
4.13-2 Removing the Power Supply Left Panel, 4.13-2
4.14-1 Replacing the Compressor, 4.14-1
4.15-1 Removing the Dump Valve, Old Style Power Supply, 4.15-1
4.15-2 Removing the Dump Valve, New Style Power Supply, 4.15-2
4.16-1 Accessing the Air Water Separator, 4.16-2
4.16-2 Disconnecting the Air Water Separator, 4.16-3
4.17-1 Removing the Compressor Motor Controller Card, 4.17-1
4.18-1 Removing the System Power Controller Card, 4.18-2
4.19-1 Removing the System Power Controller Display, 4.19-2
4.20-1 Disconnecting the Bulk Power Supply, New Style Power Supply, 4.20-1
4.20-2 Disconnecting the Bulk Power Supply, Old Style Power Supply, 4.20-2
4.21-1 Removing the Bulk Power Filter Card, 4.21-1
4.22-1 Setting Up the Instrument for the CBC Lytic Reagent Volume Check, 4.22-2
4.22-2 Reading a Meniscus, 4.22-3
4.22-3 Pump Adjustments, 4.22-3
4.22-4 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the CBC Lytic Reagent
Delivery, 4.22-4
4.22-5 Replacing the CBC Lytic Reagent Pump, 4.22-6
4.23-1 Setting Up the Instrument for the Diluent Dispenser Volume Check, 4.23-2
4.23-3 Diluent Dispenser Adjustments on Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent
Reservoir, 4.23-3
4.23-4 Diluent Dispenser Adjustments on Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent
Reservoir, 4.23-4
4.23-5 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Diluent Delivery, 4.23-5
4.23-6 Replacing the Diluent Dispenser, 4.23-7
4.24-1 Setting Up the GEN•S System for the Retic Stain Volume Check, 4.24-2
4.24-2 Setting Up the LH 750 System for the Retic Stain Volume Check, 4.24-2
4.24-3 Reading the Meniscus, 4.24-3
4.24-4 Stain Pump Adjustments on the Retic Module, 4.24-4
4.24-5 Stain Pump Adjustments on the Random Access Module, 4.24-4
4.24-6 Setting Up the GEN•S System for Troubleshooting the Retic Stain Delivery, 4.24-5
4.24-7 Setting Up the LH 750 System for Troubleshooting the Retic Stain Delivery, 4.24-6
4.25-1 Setting Up the GEN•S System for the Retic Clearing Solution Volume
Check, 4.25-2
4.25-2 Setting Up the LH 750 System for the Retic Clearing Solution Volume
Check, 4.25-2
4.25-5 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Retic Clearing Solution
Delivery, 4.25-5
xxxvi PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
4.25-6 Replacing the Retic Clearing Solution Pump, 4.25-6

4.26-1 Setting Up the Instrument, 4.26-2
4.26-3 Replacing the Cleaning Agent Pump, 4.26-3
4.27-1 Manual-Mode Pump Adjustments, 4.27-2
4.27-2 Automatic-Mode Pump Adjustments, 4.27-4
4.27-3 Setting Up for Troubleshooting Aspiration Pump, 4.27-5
4.27-4 Replacing the Aspiration Pump, 4.27-7
4.28-1 Setting Up the Instrument for the Diff Lytic Reagent Volume Check, 4.28-2
4.28-2 Reading the Volumetric Cylinder for Diff Lytic Reagent (ELYSE), 4.28-3
4.28-3 Low Volume Pump Adjustments, 4.28-4
4.28-4 High Volume Pump Adjustments, 4.28-6
4.28-5 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Diff Lytic Reagent
Delivery, 4.28-7
4.28-6 Replacing the Diff Lytic Reagent Pump, 4.28-9
4.29-1 Setting Up the Instrument for the Diff Preservative Volume Check, 4.29-2
4.29-2 Reading the Volumetric Cylinder for Diff Preservative (SLYSE), 4.29-3
4.29-5 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Diff Preservative
Delivery, 4.29-7
4.29-6 Replacing the Diff Preservative Pump, 4.29-9
4.30-1 Reagent Reservoir Components, Old Style, 4.30-1
4.30-2 Reagent Reservoir Components, New Style, 4.30-2
4.31-1 WBC Bath Tubing Disconnected for Lytic Reagent/Diluent Timing
Hookup, 4.31-2
4.31-2 Equipment Hookup for Lytic Reagent/Diluent Timing Procedure on the GEN•S
System, 4.31-2
4.31-3 Equipment Hookup for Lytic Reagent/Diluent Timing Procedure on the LH 750
System, 4.31-3
4.32-1 Replacing the Hgb Lamp, 4.32-1
4.34-1 Brightness Potentiometer Location on the GEN•S System Scope Module, 4.34-1
4.34-2 Contrast Potentiometer Location on the LH 750 System, 4.34-2
4.35-1 Disconnecting Pneumatic Tubing from the Belt Advance Cylinder, 4.35-1
4.35-2 Tube Detector Assembly Allen Screw, 4.35-2
4.36-1 Belt Drive Assembly, Front View, Upside Down, 4.36-1
4.37-1 Removing the Under Left Stack Switch, 4.37-1
4.38-1 Removing the Under Right Stack Switch, 4.38-1
4.39-1 Removing the Lift Up Switch, 4.39-1
4.40-2 Removing the Lift Cylinder from the Cassette Transport Assembly
Channel, 4.40-2
4.40-3 Lift Up Switch Activator Setscrew, 4.40-4
4.41-1 Removing the Top Left or Top Right Safety Switch, 4.41-1
4.42-1 Adjusting the Flippers, 4.42-1
4.43-1 Left Pivot Pin and Retaining Setscrew, 4.43-1
4.44-1 Bed Position Sensor Locations, 4.44-1
4.44-2 Bed Position Flag/Sensor Adjustment Screws, 4.44-2
4.44-3 Bed Rock Cylinder Location, 4.44-3
PN 4277219B xxxvii
CONTENTS VOLUME I
4.45-2 Checking and Changing the Bed Rock Rate, 4.45-2

4.46-1 Tube Detector Stop Position Adjustment, 4.46-2
4.47-1 Tube Detector Height Adjustment, 4.47-1
4.49-1 Bar-Code Test Screen with Typical Data, 4.49-1
4.51-1 Bar-Code Scanner Home Position Alignment, 4.51-2
4.51-2 Bar-Code Scanner Alignment with Stripper Plate, 4.51-3
4.51-3 Bar-Code Scanner Housing and Mounting Block, 4.51-4
4.51-4 Tubing to Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder, Clamped, 4.51-4
4.51-5 BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block Installed, 4.51-6
4.51-6 Bar-Code Scanner Adjustment Point Locations, 4.51-6
4.51-7 Height Over Cassette Label Adjustment, 4.51-7
4.51-9 Bar-Code Scanner Alignment Components, 4.51-10
4.51-10Bar-Code Scanner and Mounting Block, 4.51-10
4.52-1 Bar-Code Scanner Card Pins and Test Points, 4.52-2
4.53-1 Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor and Guide Rod Magnet, 4.53-1
4.53-2 Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor and Mounting Bracket, 4.53-2
4.54-1 Bar-Code Decoder Card Jumper and Pin Locations, 4.54-2
4.54-2 Comparing Cassette and Tube Label Waveforms, 4.54-5
4.55-1 Replacing the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module, 4.55-1
4.55-2 Moving the Hand-Detector Mounting Bracket, 4.55-5
4.55-3 Replacing the Bubble/Blood Detectors of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the
4.57-1 Removing the Needle Cap-Piercer Module, 4.57-1
4.58-2 Captive Screws Securing Probe-Wipe Module to BSV Module, 4.58-2
4.58-3 Replacing Components in a Probe-Wipe Module with a Stationary Backwash
Cup, 4.58-3
4.58-4 Replacing Components in a Probe-Wipe Module with a Moveable Backwash
Cup, 4.58-4
4.58-5 Alignment of the Cleaning Truck Bracket in a Module with Moveable Backwash
Cup, 4.58-5
4.59-1 Replacing the Hand-Detector Assembly, 4.59-1
4.60-1 Accessing the BSV Insulator, Housing and Spring, 4.60-2
4.60-2 Installing the BSV Components, 4.60-2
4.60-3 Probe Position Sensor Orientation, 4.60-4
4.62-1 Removing the Retic Motor from the Retic Module, 4.62-1
4.62-2 Removing the Retic Motor from the Random Access Module, 4.62-3
4.63-1 Removing the Stain and Retic Chamber Bracket from the Retic Module, 4.63-1
4.63-2 Removing the Stain and Retic Chamber Bracket from the Random Access
Module, 4.63-2
4.64-1 Peltier Module, Rear and Front View, 4.64-1
4.65-1 Stain Heater Connector, 4.65-1
4.66-1 Diff Preservative Pump Low Volume Adjustments, 4.66-2
4.66-2 Diff Preservative Pump High Volume Adjustments, 4.66-3
4.67-2 Replacing the Diff Heater on a Retic Module, 4.67-2
xxxviii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME I
4.67-3 Replacing the Diff Heater on a Random Access Module, 4.67-2

4.68-1 Replacing the Diff Mixing Chamber, 4.68-1
4.69-1 Releasing the Ground Wire for the Diff Mixing Chamber Motor, 4.69-1
4.69-2 Removing the Diff Mixing Chamber Motor, 4.69-2
4.71-1 VCS Optimization Procedure Flow, 4.71-2
Backplane, 4.74-2
4.74-2 RF Detector Preamp Card Test Points and Adjustments, 4.74-3
4.75-1 Acceptable Static DC Noise Display, 4.75-1
4.75-2 Unacceptable Static DC Noise Display, 4.75-1
4.75-3 Acceptable Dynamic DC Noise, 4.75-2
4.75-4 Acceptable Static RF Noise Display, 4.75-3
4.75-5 Unacceptable Static RF Noise Display, 4.75-3
4.75-6 Acceptable Dynamic RF Noise Display, 4.75-3
4.75-7 RF 60 Hz, 4.75-5
4.75-8 RF 60 Hz with Noise Spikes, 4.75-5
4.75-9 Normal RF Random Baseline, 4.75-5
4.75-10RF Output with Bubble Trapped in Sheath 2, 4.75-6
4.75-11Normal RF Baseline while Cycling Diluent, 4.75-6
4.75-12Noisy RF Baseline while Cycling Diluent, 4.75-6
4.75-13Normal RF Baseline while Cycling Diluent (RF Noise 22 mV), 4.75-7
4.75-14Noisy RF Baseline while Cycling Diluent (RF Noise >100 mV), 4.75-7
4.75-15LATRON Control Sample with a Good RF Tube and Box, 4.75-7
4.75-16LATRON Control Sample with Bad RF Tube and Box, 4.75-8
4.75-17RF Output Running LATRON Control (LEAK at Flow Cell Fitting), 4.75-8
4.75-18LATRON Control Run with DC Gain Drop, 4.75-8
4.75-19Acceptable Static LS Noise Display, 4.75-10
4.75-20Unacceptable Static LS Noise Display, 4.75-10
4.75-21Acceptable Dynamic LS Noise Display, 4.75-10
4.76-1 Laser and Flow Cell Alignment Workflow, 4.76-2
4.76-2 Flow-Cell Z-Axis Alignment, 4.76-3
4.76-3 Scatter Sensor Laser Diffraction, 4.76-4
4.76-4 Flow-Cell X- and Y-Axis Plate Adjustment, 4.76-5
4.76-5 Laser Reflected Light Beam with Special Shield Installed, 4.76-6
4.76-6 Laser Diffraction Pattern on Paper, 4.76-7
4.79-1 Wetting Applicator with Alcohol, 4.79-2
4.79-2 Wiping Front of Flow Cell, 4.79-2
4.79-3 Wiping Rear of Flow Cell, 4.79-2
4.80-1 Removing the Lens Block, 4.80-1
4.82-1 Removing an Analyzer Door Gas Spring, 4.82-1
4.83-2 Captive Screws Securing Random Access Module, 4.83-2
TABLES
2.2-1 Power Supply (PS) Components, 2.2-1
2.3-1 Analyzer (ANA) Components, 2.3-1
2.4-1 Diluter (DIL) Components, 2.4-1
2.6-1 +5.2 Control Voltage Distribution, 2.6-4
2.7-1 APS1 Card Power Status LED Indications, 2.7-6
PN 4277219B xxxix
CONTENTS VOLUME I

2.10-1 System Power Controller Display Status LEDs, 2.10-4
2.17-1 Aspiration Pump Pneumatic Signals and Piston Positions, 2.17-1
2.17-2 Summary of the BSV Positions, 2.17-5
2.17-3 BSV Ports, 2.17-6
2.17-4 Diff and Retic Segment Valve Port Descriptions, 2.17-10
2.17-5 Stained Retic Segment Valve Port Descriptions, 2.17-11
2.17-6 Aspiration Messages, 2.17-15
2.20-1 Flow Cell Ports, 2.20-5
2.22-1 Diff Lytic Reagent and Diff Preservative Pumps’ Pneumatic Signals and Piston
Positions, 2.22-8
2.25-1 When to Calibrate, 2.25-8
3.6-1 Pinch Valves with Inconspicuous Deactivator Clips on the GEN•S System, 3.6-6
3.14-1 Pinch Valves on the LH 750 System with Inconspicuous Deactivator Clips, 3.14-2
4.2-1 Analyzer SERVICE MENU Options, 4.2-2
4.2-2 Analyzer ELECTRONIC TESTS MENU Options, 4.2-4
4.2-3 Analyzer DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES MENU Options, 4.2-4
4.2-4 Analyzer SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MENU Options, 4.2-5
4.2-5 Analyzer DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS MENU Options, 4.2-5
4.2-6 Analyzer MORE DIAGNOSTICS MENU Options, 4.2-5
4.2-7 Analyzer DIFF PROCESSOR DIAGNOSTICS MENU Options, 4.2-6
4.2-8 Analyzer DIAGNOSTICS DUMP MENU Options, 4.2-6
4.3-1 Analyzer Scope Modes, 4.3-3
4.6-1 Analyzer Circuit Card and Scope Module Replacement Instructions, 4.6-4
4.7-1 Diluter Cards’ Replacement Instructions, 4.7-4
4.30-1 Reagent Priming Functions and LEVEL Messages, 4.30-3
4.31-1 Conditions Affecting Lytic Reagent/Diluent Delivery Timing, 4.31-4
4.54-1 Bar-Code Scanner Waveforms for Example Label, 4.54-3
4.71-1 Purpose of VCS Optimization Procedures and Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.71-3
4.75-1 RF Troubleshooting Table, 4.75-4
4.81-1 Testing Operation of Sensors and Switches, 4.81-1
xl PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
1
1 INTRODUCTION, 1.1-1
1.1 MANUAL DESCRIPTION, 1.1-1

Scope, 1.1-1
Intended Audience, 1.1-1
Organization, 1.1-2
Numbering Format, 1.1-3
Special Headings, 1.1-3
Warning, 1.1-3
Caution, 1.1-3
Important, 1.1-3
Attention, 1.1-4
Note, 1.1-4
Conventions, 1.1-4
1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, 1.2-1

Electronic, 1.2-1
Biological, 1.2-1
Laser, 1.2-2
Laser Beam Hazards, 1.2-2
Radiation Hazards, 1.2-2
Troubleshooting, 1.2-6
ILLUSTRATIONS
1.2-1 Laser Warning and Certification Labels, Laser with Protective Housing, 1.2-3
1.2-2 Laser Warning and Certification Labels on the Laser Beam Cover, 1.2-4
1.2-3 Laser Warning Labels on the Handheld Scanner, 1.2-4
1.2-4 Laser Warning Labels on the Bar-Code Reader, Protective Housing On, 1.2-5
1.2-5 Laser Warning Label on the Bar-Code Reader, Protective Housing Cut Away, 1.2-5
PN 4277219B 1-i
CONTENTS
1-ii PN 4277219B
1INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 MANUAL DESCRIPTION
Scope
This manual provides the reference information and procedures needed for repairing and
maintaining the Analytical Station (Power Supply, Diluter and Analyzer) of the COULTER®
GEN•S™ System, the GEN•S Cell, the LH 750 System, and the LH 750 Cell. It is available
both online and in hard copy. The online manual is released on the Service Resource Kit
CD-ROM, PN 6417471.
This manual does not cover information and procedures for the Analytical Station already
covered in the instruments’ Online Help Systems or in the following customer documents:
COULTER GEN•S System COULTER LH 750 System

r Getting Started, PN 4237304 r Getting Started, PN 4277302
r Reference, PN 4237221 r Reference, PN 4277248
r Operator’s Guide, PN 4237222 r Operator’s Guide, PN 4277249
r Special Procedures and r Special Procedures and
Troubleshooting, PN 4237223 Troubleshooting, PN 4277250
r Master Index, PN 4237224 r Master Index, PN 4277301
r Host Transmission Specification, r Host Transmission Specification,
PN 4237306 PN 4277303
r AccuFlex™ Detailed Principles of Operation, PN 4237403
To service the Workstation, refer to the COULTER GEN•S Workstation Configuration,

PN 9023572, or the COULTER LH 700 Series Workstation Configuration, PN 9023736. Both
documents are included on the Service Resource Kit CD-ROM.
To service the COULTER GEN•S SM™ SlideMaker or the COULTER LH SlideMaker, refer to
the Slide Making Modules Service Manual, PN 4276985.
To service the COULTER GEN•S ST™ SlideStainer or the COULTER LH SlideStainer, refer to
the Slide Staining Modules Service Manual, PN 4237601.
Any service memo that affects the information in this manual will include either minor
revision change pages or a Notice of Information Update form for this manual. A Notice of
Information Update form will summarize the changes and will list the specific headings,
figures, and tables affected.
Intended Audience
To use this manual effectively, you need the following:
r An operator’s knowledge of the GEN•S System and the LH 750 System
r The GEN•S System Basic Service Certification
PN 4277219B 1.1-1
INTRODUCTION
r A thorough understanding of -
t Basic electronic and pneumatic principles and devices
t Hematology terms and concepts
t The Coulter Principle
t VCS technology
t COULTER Histogram Differential and Interpretive Reporting
t Reagent systems
t Quality control
t Troubleshooting techniques.
r The ability to -
t Read pneumatic/hydraulic schematics and understand related terminology
t Read electronic schematics and understand related terminology
t Use a digital multimeter and an oscilloscope
t Use basic mechanical tools and understand related terminology.
Organization
The information in this manual is organized into10 chapters. In the printed manual, the
chapters are separated into two volumes. Volume I contains Chapters 1 through 4; Volume II
contains Chapters 5 through 10. To make it easier to access the information:
r In the online manual, each page or screen has -

t A Contents button linked to a master table of contents.
t An Illustrations button linked to a master list of illustrations.
t A Tables button linked to a master list of tables.
t An Index button linked to an alphabetic index.
r In the printed manual, there is a volume-specific table of contents at the beginning of
each volume, a chapter-specific table of contents at the beginning of each chapter, and an
alphabetic index for the entire manual at the end of each volume.
CHAPTER 1, INTRODUCTION, includes a brief description of this manual, a list of
supporting documents, and essential safety information.
CHAPTER 2, INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION, includes the function and location of each

major component and an explanation of the instrument’s operation by system.
CHAPTER 3, INSTALLATION PROCEDURES, contains the procedures used to install the

Analytical Station
CHAPTER 4, SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES, contains the procedures used to

service and repair the Analytical Station. Each procedure includes a purpose, a list of needed
tools and supplies, instructions and a verification procedure.
CHAPTER 5, MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES, contains the procedures used to maintain

the Analytical Station and to verify the system is operating correctly.
CHAPTER 6, SCHEMATICS is provided for the insertion of instrument schematics.
1.1-2 PN 4277219B
INTRODUCTION
1
CHAPTER 7, TROUBLESHOOTING, contains problem descriptions, including a complete
list of error messages, with troubleshooting actions and tips. Use the information in this
chapter in conjunction with the procedures in Chapter 4 to locate and correct instrument
problems.
CHAPTER 8, PARTS LISTS, includes a master list of the field replaceable components (FRC)
and field replaceable units (FRU) for the Analytical Station; illustrations of these components;
and illustrations of the alignment tools designed for the instrument, with specifications.
CHAPTER 9, APPENDICES, is provided for the addition of reference material and includes
Appendix A, QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION. Appendix A contains instrument
specifications and tolerances, jumper and switch settings, test point and connector locations,
function tables and software menu trees.
CHAPTER 10 contains a list of ABBREVIATIONS used in this manual and a GLOSSARY of

terms.
Numbering Format
Each chapter of this manual is further divided into topics that are numbered sequentially,
beginning at one. The numbering format for the topic heading, which is called the primary
heading, is chapter number, decimal point, topic number. For example, the primary heading
number for the fifth topic covered in Chapter 2 is 2.5.
The page, figure and table numbers are tied directly to the primary heading number. For
example, Heading 2.5 begins on page 2.5-1, the first figure under Heading 2.5 is Figure 2.5-1
and the first table under Heading 2.5 is Table 2.5-1.
Note: Primary headings always begin on the top of a right-hand page.
Special Headings
Throughout this manual WARNING, CAUTION, IMPORTANT, ATTENTION and Note
headings are used to indicate potentially hazardous situations and important or helpful
information.
Warning
A WARNING indicates a situation or procedure that, if ignored, can cause serious personal
injury. The word WARNING is in bold-faced text in the printed manual and is red in the
online manual.
Caution
A CAUTION indicates a situation or procedure that, if ignored, can cause damage to
equipment. The word CAUTION is in bold-faced text in the printed manual and is red in the
online manual.
Important
An IMPORTANT indicates a situation or procedure that, if ignored can result in erroneous
test results. The word IMPORTANT is in bold-faced text in the printed manual and is red in
the online manual.
PN 4277219B 1.1-3
INTRODUCTION
Attention
An ATTENTION contains information that is critical for the successful completion of a
procedure and/or operation of the instrument. The word ATTENTION is in bold-faced text in
the printed manual and is red in the online manual.
Note
A Note contains information that is important to remember or helpful in performing a
procedure.
Conventions
This manual uses the following conventions to make the material clearer and more concise.
An example is given below each explanation.
1. Messages that appear on any of the three screens - Analyzer, Diluter or Workstation - are
in italics.
At the Analyzer, verify the SYSTEM STATUS is READY.
2. Keys on the Diluter keypad are in capital letters and are boldfaced.
At the Diluter keypad, press START/CONT.
3. Keys on the Workstation are boxed.
Press Ý+Þ+á to log on.
4. Menu titles and selections on the Analyzer screen are in capital letters.
At the Analyzer, from the MAIN MENU select SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.
5. Selections on the Workstation screen that are icons are represented by that icon in text.
At the Workstation, select tt to display the CBC Calibration window.

6. Selections on the Workstation screen that are not icons are boldfaced.
At the Workstation Command Center, select PRIME from the Process Control box.
7. Information that is to be typed is in Courier font.
Type the password Service.
8. Whenever keys are to be pressed in succession, the keys are printed with a space but no
punctuation between the keys.
At the Diluter keypad, press F 1 1 ENTER.
9. Whenever keys are to be pressed simultaneously, the keys are printed with a plus sign
between the keys.
Press Ý+È to display the Workstation Task List.
10. The software path to a specific function or screen on the Analyzer or Workstation
appears with the double solid-right triangle ( tt ) symbol between succeeding screen
options.
From the SERVICE MENU, select DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES tt MORE
DIAGNOSTICS tt DIAGNOSTICS DUMP tt MANUAL HGB TIMER DRAIN XX.
1.1-4 PN 4277219B
INTRODUCTION
1
11. When the word "select" is used in conjunction with one of the screens and its associated
keys, you are to press the key or keys necessary to display the desired screen or to initiate
the desired function.
At the Analyzer, from the SERVICE MENU select SYSTEM RUN to access the SYSTEM
RUN screen. (In this example, you need to press only one key, the key next to the
SYSTEM RUN prompt, to accomplish the desired task.)
At the Diluter keypad, select F27 to dispense CBC lytic reagent. (In this example, you
need to press four keys, the F, 2, 7, and ENTER keys, to accomplish the desired task.)
12. The meaning of the words "double-click," which are used together as a verb, varies
depending on the pointing device used.
r For a mouse it means, press the left mouse button twice.
r For a light pen it means, press the light pen against the screen twice.
r For a touch screen it means, touch the screen with your finger twice.
13. The meaning of the words "right-click," which are used together as a verb, varies
depending on the pointing device used.
r For a mouse it means, press the right mouse button.
r For a light pen with a button it means, press the button.
14. In the electronic version of the manual:
a. Links to additional information are in blue and are underlined.
Adjust the RF Detector Preamp card so the RMS noise is at the lowest setting. See
C1/C20 Adjustment under Heading 4.74.
To access the linked information, select the blue, underlined text.
b. The material is divided into many small sections (electronic files).
r Every primary heading is a separate file and whenever possible the amount of
material contained within one primary heading is limited to four to ten pages.
r If a primary heading must be large, such as the illustrated parts list, invisible
breaks are added to the electronic file to further divide it.
To move from one section (electronic file) to the next in an HTML version of the
manual, use the right and left arrows on the navigation bars displayed at the top and
bottom of each section.
PN 4277219B 1.1-5
INTRODUCTION
1.1-6 PN 4277219B
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1
1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section covers safety precautions that you must take whenever you are working on the
Analytical Station. In addition, always follow any safety precautions included in that
procedure.
Electronic
WARNING Risk of personal injury. Rings or jewelry can contact exposed electronic components, causing
personal injury from electric shock. Remove rings and other metallic jewelry before performing
maintenance or service on the electronic components of the instrument.
WARNING Risk of personal injury. Contacting exposed electronic components while the Analytical Station
is attached to power can cause personal injury from electric shock. Power down the Analytical Station
completely as instructed under Heading 4.1 before removing covers to access electronic components.
CAUTION Risk of damage to electronic components. If you remove or replace a circuit card or other
electronic component while the power is ON, damage to the component can occur. To prevent damage to
circuit cards and other electronic components, always turn OFF the power before removing or replacing the
component.
CAUTION Risk of damage to electronic components. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives,
add-in circuit cards and other electronic components. Perform any procedures where there is a possibility
of ESD damage at an ESD workstation or wear an antistatic wrist strap attached to a metallic part of the
chassis connected to an earth ground.
Biological
WARNING Risk of personal injury or contamination. If you do not properly shield yourself before servicing
the Analytical Station with the door open, you can be injured or contaminated. To prevent possible injury or
contamination, always wear gloves, a lab coat and eye protection when servicing the instrument with the
doors open.
WARNING Risk of contamination. Biohazardous contamination can occur from contact with the waste
container and its associated tubing if not handled with care. Avoid skin contact. Clean up spills immediately.
Dispose of the contents of the waste container in accordance with the local regulations and acceptable
laboratory procedures.
Use care when working with pathogenic materials. Means must be available to decontaminate
the instrument, provide ventilation and to dispose of waste liquid. Refer to the following
publications for further guidance on decontamination.
r Biohazards Safety Guide, 1974, National Institute of Health

r Classifications of Etiological Agents on the Basis of Hazards, 3d ed., June 1974, Center
for Disease Control, U.S. Public Health Service.
PN 4277219B 1.2-1
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Laser
Laser Beam Hazards
The laser, located in the Triple Transducer module, is a unique light source that shows
characteristics different from conventional light sources. The safe use of the laser depends
upon familiarity with the instrument and with the properties of coherent, intense beams of
light.
WARNING Risk of personal injury. The laser beam can cause eye damage if viewed either directly or
indirectly from reflective surfaces (such as a mirror or shiny metallic surface). Avoid direct exposure to the
beam. Do not view it directly or with optical instruments except from special service tools as directed in this
manual.
Eye and skin damage, as well as instrument damage, can be caused by the laser beam. The
laser has enough power to ignite substances placed in the beam path, even at a distance.
Indirect contact with the laser beam from reflective surfaces (such as jewelry) is called
specular reflection and might also cause damage.
Use the following precautions:
r Never look directly into the laser light source or at scattered laser light from any
reflective surface. Never look down into the beam's source.
r As a precaution against accidental exposure to the output beam or its reflection, wear
proper laser safety glasses when performing service or maintenance procedures on the
system.
r Do not use lasers in the presence of flammable material or explosives; these include
volatile substances such as alcohol, solvents and ether.
r Avoid direct exposure and indirect reflection of the laser beam to your skin.
r Assure that any spectators are not potentially exposed to a hazardous condition.
r Do not leave the laser unattended if there is a chance that an unauthorized person may
try to use it.
Radiation Hazards
WARNING Risk of personal injury from radiation exposure. Performing procedures other than those
specified in this manual can result in hazardous radiation exposure. Do not use any controls, make any
adjustments, or perform any procedures other than those specified in this manual.
In its design and manufacture of the GEN•S System, the GEN•S Cell, the LH 750 System, and
the LH 750 Cell, Coulter Corporation has complied with the requirements governing the use
and application of a laser as stipulated in regulatory documents issued by the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services, and by the National Center for Devices and
Radiological Health (CDRH). In compliance with these regulatory documents, every measure
has been taken to ensure the health and safety of users, laboratory personnel and service
personnel from the possible dangers of laser use. The laser is classified as Class I, when it is in
the system with the protective housing in place.
Note: As installed in the Triple Transducer Module (TTM) safety fixture, the laser presents no
radiation hazard to users and the instrument complies with 21 CFR 1040.
1.2-2 PN 4277219B
INTRODUCTION
CDRH-approved labels are placed near or on those covers that when removed might expose
laser radiation.
r See Figure 1.2-1 for the label and its location on the laser head.
r See Figure 1.2-2 for the labels and their locations on the beam cover between the laser
head and the sampling compartment. Both figures show the certification labels.
r See Figure 1.2-3 for the label and its location on the PSC® handheld scanner.
r See Figures 1.2-4 and 1.2-5 for the labels and their locations on the laser bar-code reader
mounted on the Diluter.
Note: As installed in the bar-code reader assembly, the laser presents no radiation hazard
to users and complies with 21 CFR 1040.
Figure 1.2-1 Laser Warning and Certification Labels, Laser with Protective Housing
Located on
back of unit
THIS LASER PRODUCT CONFORMS

TO THE PROVISIONS OF 21 CFR
SUBCHAPTER J, SECTION 1040. 10
AND 1040. 11.
LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT AND INTERLOCK DEFEATED.
Manufactured: AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE.
DATE 19 by:
COULTER CORPORATION
Miami, Fla. 33196
TM G E N S
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95 0000
COULTER CORPORATION
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
BP CBC DIFF RETICS
7219001B
PN 4277219B 1.2-3
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Figure 1.2-2 Laser Warning and Certification Labels on the Laser Beam Cover
Laser on
lamp
LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
AND INTERLOCKDEFEATED.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE.
Electromagnetic
shield
LASER RADIATION
1096 Mellon Avenue
IS EMITTED FROM
THIS APERTURE Manteca, CA 95337
MODEL
MANUFACTURED
AVOID EXPOSURE SERIAL NO.
Flow THIS LASER DOES NOT

COMPLY WITH 21 CFR 1040.
cell USE ONLY AS A COMPONENT.
PATENT NOS MADE

4352,185 4631,727 IN
4750,182 4864,583 USA
Laser
Laser interlock switch

(Behind Laser module)
Tamperproof
screws 7219002B
Figure 1.2-3 Laser Warning Labels on the Handheld Scanner
AVOID EXPOSURE-LASER LIGHT IS EMITTED FROM THIS APERTURE

CAUTION-LASER LIGHT WHEN OPEN. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.
PSC INC. CAUTION

LASER LIGHT
WEBSTER, NY 14580 DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
NYS9412 4.5 - 14 Vdc 670 nm LASER DIODE
1.0 mW MAX OUTPUT
CLASS II LASER PRODUCT
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE;
(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED
INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION
COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040
UL 1950 E125538
LISTED 4.5-14 Vdc
ACCESSORY 115-250 mA
IB62
PROCTECTED BY U.S. PATENTS
4,652,750 4,639,606
4,603,262 5,019,698
5,200,597 5,212,371 5,237,161
& OTHER U.S. & FOREIGN
PATENTS ISSUED & PENDING
ACCESSORY, ONLY FOR USE WITH UL LISTED PRODUCTS
NOT USER SERVICEABLE, OPENING CASE VOIDS WARRANTY 7221031A
1.2-4 PN 4277219B
INTRODUCTION
Figure 1.2-4 Laser Warning Labels on the Bar-Code Reader, Protective Housing On
LASER RADIATION
EMISSION INDICATOR (LED)
TM G EN S
CAUTION
Laser radiation when open
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95 0000
COULTER CORPORATION
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
and interlock defeated.
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.
MAIN
BP CBC DIFF RETICS
CAUTION
Laser radiation when open and
interlock defeated.
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.
LASER
ON
CAUTION
L ASER LIGHT - DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
Tamper-proof screws
6 70nm DIODE L ASER
1 .0 MILLI WATT MAXIMUM CLASS II LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION
LASER LIGHT - DONOT STAREINTO BEAM
670nm DIODE LASER PULSE DURATION 10µs
0.5MILLIWATTMAXIMUM CLASSIILASERPRUDUCT
0008412H
Figure 1.2-5 Laser Warning Label on the Bar-Code Reader, Protective Housing Cut Away
C A U T I O N
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
THIS LASER DOES NOT COMPLY
WITH 21 CFR 1040
CLASS II LASER PRODUCT
OPTICAL GLASS LENSES
PN 4277219B 1.2-5
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Troubleshooting
Bring the following warning to the customer's attention before advising that customer to
perform any service, maintenance or troubleshooting procedures on the instrument.
WARNING Risk of personal injury or contamination. If you do not properly shield yourself while performing
service, maintenance and troubleshooting procedures, residual fluids in the instrument can injure or
contaminate you. Coulter recommends barrier protection, such as appropriate safety glasses, lab coat, and
gloves, be worn throughout the performance of service, maintenance and troubleshooting procedures to
avoid contact with cleaners and residual fluids in the instrument.
1.2-6 PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
2
2 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION, 2.1-1
2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE GEN•S AND LH 750 SYSTEMS, 2.1-1

Summary, 2.1-1
Function, 2.1-1
CBC Parameters, 2.1-1
WBC Differential Parameters, 2.1-1
Reticulocyte Parameters, 2.1-1
Research Only Parameters, 2.1-2
Description, 2.1-2
Components, 2.1-2
Systems, 2.1-2
Diagnostic Products, 2.1-5
Physical Specifications, 2.1-5
Performance Specifications and Characteristics, 2.1-5
Leakage Current Specifications, 2.1-5
Operation, 2.1-6
Aspiration Modes, 2.1-6
Test Modes, 2.1-6
Operating Procedures, 2.1-6
2.2 POWER SUPPLY MAIN COMPONENTS, 2.2-1

Summary, 2.2-1
2.3 ANALYZER MAIN COMPONENTS, 2.3-1

Summary, 2.3-1
2.4 DILUTER MAIN COMPONENTS, 2.4-1

Summary, 2.4-1
2.5 ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER DEVELOPMENT AND

DISTRIBUTION, 2.5-1
Summary, 2.5-1
Electronic Power Supply Overview, 2.5-1
Transient Voltage Suppressor, 2.5-1
Fuses, 2.5-2
Bulk Power Supply, 2.5-2
Function, 2.5-2
Input, 2.5-2
Outputs, 2.5-2
Fans, 2.5-2
Bulk Power Filter Card, 2.5-2
Main Power Supply Cable, 2.5-3
Backplane Voltage Bus, 2.5-3
Local Power Supplies, 2.5-4
PN 4277219B 2-i
CONTENTS
2.6 ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER UP, 2.6-1

Summary, 2.6-1
Control Voltage Development, 2.6-1
IBUS, 2.6-1
Control Voltage Distribution and Function, 2.6-1
Power-Up Signals, 2.6-4
POWER ON Signal, 2.6-4
AMC Power-Up Sequence, 2.6-5
SYSTEM RESET Signal, 2.6-5
PNEU ON Signal, 2.6-6
Power-Off Signals, 2.6-6

ANALYZER, 2.7-1
Summary, 2.7-1
API Card, 2.7-1
Function, 2.7-1
Monitors, 2.7-2
Switches, 2.7-2
Input, 2.7-2
Outputs, 2.7-2
R/W/P SC/A Card, 2.7-3
Function, 2.7-3
Monitors, 2.7-4
Connectors, 2.7-4
Inputs, 2.7-4
Outputs, 2.7-4
APS1 Card, 2.7-4
Function, 2.7-4
Input, 2.7-5
Outputs, 2.7-5
Monitors, 2.7-6
LED, 2.7-6
Test Points, 2.7-6
APS2 Card, 2.7-6
Function, 2.7-6
Input, 2.7-7
Outputs, 2.7-7
Monitors, 2.7-8
LED, 2.7-8
Test Points, 2.7-8

DILUTER, 2.8-1
Summary, 2.8-1
Diff Power Supply Card, 2.8-1
Function, 2.8-1
Monitors, 2.8-2
Connectors, 2.8-2
Input, 2.8-2
2-ii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
2
Outputs, 2.8-2
Laser Interlock Switch, 2.8-2
Laser Power Supply, 2.8-3
Function, 2.8-3
Monitors, 2.8-3
Input, 2.8-3
Output, 2.8-3
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card, 2.8-3
Function, 2.8-3
Input, 2.8-3
Outputs, 2.8-3
Monitors, 2.8-4
Connectors, LEDs and Test Points, 2.8-4
2.9 PNEUMATIC POWER SYSTEM, 2.9-1

Summary, 2.9-1
Pneumatic Power Supply Overview, 2.9-1
Pneumatic Power Development, 2.9-2
Pressure Development, 2.9-2
Vacuum Development, 2.9-3
Monitors, 2.9-3
Pneumatic Levels and Status, 2.9-3
Temperature Monitoring, 2.9-3
Pressure Distribution, 2.9-4
30 Psi, 2.9-4
5 Psi, 2.9-4
Vacuum Distribution, 2.9-4
High Vacuum, 2.9-5
Low Vacuum, 2.9-5
PVT Card, 2.9-5
Function, 2.9-5
Input, 2.9-6
Monitors, 2.9-6
Connectors, 2.9-6
2.10 POWER DEVELOPMENT CONTROL, 2.10-1

Summary, 2.10-1
System Power Controller Card, 2.10-1
Function, 2.10-1
Inputs, 2.10-2
Monitors, 2.10-2
System Power Controller Display, 2.10-3
Function, 2.10-3
Conditions that Shut Down the Power Supply, 2.10-4
Insufficient Ac Input, 2.10-4
Power Supply Overheating, 2.10-5
Pressing POWER OFF, 2.10-5
PN 4277219B 2-iii
CONTENTS
2.11 SYSTEM CONTROL, 2.11-1

Summary, 2.11-1
System Control Overview, 2.11-1
AMC, 2.11-2
Function, 2.11-2
RESET Switch, 2.11-2
DIP Switches and Jumpers, 2.11-3
COMM INTERFACE Card, 2.11-4
Function, 2.11-4
Switches, 2.11-5
RS/Opto Intfc Card, 2.11-5
Function, 2.11-5
Connectors, 2.11-5
Scope Module, 2.11-6
Function, 2.11-6
Inputs, 2.11-7
2.12 DILUTER CONTROL, 2.12-1

Summary, 2.12-1
DILUTER PROCESSOR vs DILUTER CPU Cards - the Old and New Diluter
Interconnects, 2.12-2
DILUTER PROCESSOR CARD, 2.12-2
Function, 2.12-2
Switch, 2.12-2
DILUTER CPU CARD, 2.12-2
Function, 2.12-2
Switch, 2.12-3
Interface Bus (IBUS) and RS485 Interface Modules, 2.12-3
Diluter Cbl Adapter Card, 2.12-3
Function, 2.12-3
Connectors, 2.12-3
Function, 2.12-4
Monitoring, 2.12-5
Function, 2.12-6
Inputs, 2.12-7
Monitoring, 2.12-7
BD ADJ Card, 2.12-8
Function, 2.12-8
Connectors, Test Points, and Adjustments, 2.12-8
Function, 2.12-8
Inputs, 2.12-9
Connectors and LED, 2.12-9
2-iv PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
2
Function, 2.12-9
Inputs, 2.12-11
Diluter/Numeric Keypad, 2.12-11
Function, 2.12-11
Contrast Adjustment, 2.12-11
2.13 REAGENT HANDLING, 2.13-1

Summary, 2.13-1
Reagent Input, 2.13-1
Reagent Reservoir Module, 2.13-2
Function, 2.13-2
Reservoir Interface Card, 2.13-5
Function, 2.13-5
Inputs, 2.13-5
Connectors, 2.13-5
Reagent Distribution, 2.13-6
Diluent/Cleaning Agent Chamber, 2.13-7
Function, 2.13-7
Backwash Tank, 2.13-8
Function, 2.13-8
Testing, 2.13-8
Backwash Manifold, 2.13-9
Function, 2.13-9
Sheath Tank, 2.13-9
Function, 2.13-9
Testing, 2.13-10
Sweep-Flow Reservoir, 2.13-10
Function, 2.13-10
Testing, 2.13-10
System-Flush Cycle, 2.13-11
Waste Collection and Monitoring, 2.13-11
Waste Collection, 2.13-11
Waste Level Monitoring, 2.13-11
2.14 SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION, 2.14-1

Summary, 2.14-1
Specimen Transport System Overview, 2.14-1
Cassette Transport Assembly (CTA), 2.14-2
Bar-Code Reader, 2.14-3
Function, 2.14-3
LED Bar-Code Reader, 2.14-3
Laser Bar-Code Reader, 2.14-4
Types of Bar Codes Used, 2.14-5
Bar-Code Label Specifications, 2.14-5
PN 4277219B 2-v
CONTENTS
Sensor Distribution Card, 2.14-5

Function, 2.14-5
Input, 2.14-6
2.15 SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - CASSETTE MOVEMENT, 2.15-1

Summary, 2.15-1
Moving a Cassette from the Loading Bay to the Unloading Bay, 2.15-1
Initiating the Automatic-Mode Cycle, 2.15-1
Retrieving the Cassette from the Loading Bay, 2.15-1
Placing the Cassette on the Rocker Bed, 2.15-3
Moving the Cassette Across the Rocker Bed, 2.15-3
Detecting a Tube at the Piercing Station, 2.15-4
Positioning the Tube for Sample Acquisition, 2.15-4
Piercing the Cap of the Specimen Tube, 2.15-5
Identifying the Specimen, 2.15-5
Pushing the Tube Back into the Cassette, 2.15-6
Moving a Cassette to the Unloading Bay, 2.15-6
Removing a Cassette from the Rocker Bed, 2.15-7
2.16 SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW, 2.16-1

Summary, 2.16-1
Automatic-Mode, 2.16-1
Manual Mode, 2.16-5
2.17 SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - HARDWARE DESCRIPTION, 2.17-1

Summary, 2.17-1
Aspiration Pump, 2.17-1
Function, 2.17-1
Aspiration Pump at Rest, 2.17-2
Aspiration Pump - Manual-Mode Aspiration, 2.17-3
Aspiration Pump - Automatic-Mode Aspiration, 2.17-3
Blood Sampling Valve (BSV), 2.17-5
Function, 2.17-5
BSV Ports, 2.17-6
Shear Valves, 2.17-7
Hardware Description, 2.17-7
Diff and Retic Segment Valves, 2.17-7
Stained Retic Segment Valve, 2.17-9
Shear Valve Ports, 2.17-10
Needle Assembly, 2.17-11
2-vi PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
2
Bubble/Blood Detectors, 2.17-13
Function, 2.17-13
Operation, 2.17-14
Aspiration Messages, 2.17-15
Hand Detector, 2.17-16
Probe-Wipe Module, 2.17-17
Function, 2.17-17
Monitoring, 2.17-18
2.18 CBC ANALYSIS - COLLECTING WBC, RBC, PLT AND HGB DATA, 2.18-1
Summary, 2.18-1
Making the Sample Dilutions, 2.18-2
Applying the Coulter Principle, 2.18-4
Aperture Vacuum, 2.18-4
Aperture Current, 2.18-4
Timing the Data Collection in the GEN•S System, 2.18-5
WBC and RBC Data, 2.18-5
Note: Differences in cell type, cell concentration and the number of good
pulses can vary the histogram data collection time., 2.18-6
Timing the Data Collection in the LH 750 System, 2.18-6
WBC and RBC Count Data, 2.18-6
WBC, RBC, and Plt Histograms, 2.18-6
Determining the Hgb, 2.18-8
2.19 CBC ANALYSIS - ANALYZING RBC, WBC AND PLT DATA, 2.19-1
Summary, 2.19-1
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP 2 Cards (GEN•S System), 2.19-1
Function, 2.19-1
CAL Pulses, 2.19-2
Six-Channel Preamp Card (LH 750 System), 2.19-2
Function, 2.19-2
CAL Pulses, 2.19-3
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR Card (GEN•S System), 2.19-3
Function, 2.19-3
Input, 2.19-5
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 Card (LH 750 System), 2.19-5
Function, 2.19-5
Input, 2.19-6
PLATELET PROCESSOR Card, 2.19-6
Function, 2.19-6
Input, 2.19-7
PN 4277219B 2-vii
CONTENTS
Determining the CBC Parameters, 2.19-7

Determining the CBC Results on the GEN•S System, 2.19-7
Determining the CBC Results on the LH 750 System, 2.19-7
2.20 VCS TECHNOLOGY - COLLECTING THE DATA, 2.20-1

Summary, 2.20-1
VCS Measurements, 2.20-1
V - Volume (DC), 2.20-1
C - Conductivity (RF), 2.20-1
S - Light Scatter (LS), 2.20-1
Opacity (OP), 2.20-1
Rotated Light Scatter (RLS), 2.20-2
Linear Light Scatter (LLS), 2.20-2
Applying the VCS Technology, 2.20-2
DC and RF Currents, 2.20-2
Laser Light Source, 2.20-2
Flow-Cell Hydraulics, 2.20-3
Data Collection, 2.20-5
2.21 VCS TECHNOLOGY - MEASURING AND ANALYZING THE DATA, 2.21-1

Summary, 2.21-1
Electronic Overview, 2.21-1
RF Detector Preamp Card, 2.21-2
Function, 2.21-2
Inputs, 2.21-2
Outputs, 2.21-2
Monitoring, 2.21-4
Light Scatter Preamp Module and Sensor, 2.21-4
Function, 2.21-4
ANALOG 5 Card, 2.21-6
Function, 2.21-6
DIFF PROCESSOR Card, 2.21-7
Function, 2.21-7
Inputs, 2.21-8
Switch, 2.21-8
2.22 VCS TECHNOLOGY - DIFF ANALYSIS, 2.22-1

Summary, 2.22-1
Processing the Diff Sample on the GEN•S System, 2.22-1
Processing the Diff Sample on the LH 750 System, 2.22-2
Sensing the Diff Sample, 2.22-4
Diff Analysis Reagent System, 2.22-4
COULTER IntelliKinetics™ Application, 2.22-5
Ambient Temperature Thermistors, 2.22-5
Diff Lytic Reagent and Diff Preservative Pumps, 2.22-6
Reagent Dispenser Pump at Rest, 2.22-7
Dispensing the High Volume, 2.22-7
Dispensing the Low Volume, 2.22-8
2-viii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
2
Determining the Diff Parameters, 2.22-10
2.23 VCS TECHNOLOGY - RETIC ANALYSIS, 2.23-1

Summary, 2.23-1
Processing the Retic Sample on the GEN•S System, 2.23-1
Processing the Retic Sample on the LH 750 System, 2.23-3
Sensing the Retic Sample, 2.23-5
Retic Analysis Reagent System, 2.23-5
COULTER IntelliKinetics Application, 2.23-5
Regulating the Temperature in the Stain Chamber, 2.23-6
Regulating the Temperature in the Peltier Module, 2.23-6
Determining the Retic Parameters, 2.23-6
2.24 SAMPLE REPORTING, 2.24-1

Summary, 2.24-1
Sample Data Set, 2.24-2
CBC Analysis on the GEN•S System, 2.24-2
MCV, 2.24-3
RDW, 2.24-3
Hgb, 2.24-4
RBC Indices, 2.24-4
CBC Analysis on the LH 750 System, 2.24-5
MCV, 2.24-5
RDW, 2.24-6
Hgb, 2.24-7
RBC Indices, 2.24-7
Diff Analysis, 2.24-7
Nucleated RBC Counts (NRBC), 2.24-9
Retic Analysis, 2.24-9
Sample Flags, Codes and Messages, 2.24-10
2.25 CBC CALIBRATION OVERVIEW, 2.25-1

Why Calibrate?, 2.25-1
Calibration Tests, 2.25-1
Steps to Calibration, 2.25-1
Preliminary, 2.25-1
Latex Voltage Calibration, 2.25-2
Flow Rate Calibration, 2.25-5
Manual Mode-to-Automatic Mode Calibration, 2.25-7
When to Calibrate, 2.25-8
ILLUSTRATIONS
2.1-1 GEN•S System Units, 2.1-3
2.1-2 GEN•S Cell Units, 2.1-3
2.1-3 LH 750 System Units, 2.1-4
2.1-4 LH 750 System Units with Optional LH SlideMaker and LH SlideStainer , 2.1-4
PN 4277219B 2-ix
CONTENTS
2.2-1 Power Supply Component Locations, Old Style Power Supply, 2.2-2
2.2-2 Power Supply Component Locations, New Style Power Supply, 2.2-2
2.3-1 GEN•S System Analyzer Component Locations, Front View, 2.3-3

2.3-2 GEN•S System Analyzer Component Locations, Rear View, 2.3-3
2.3-3 LH 750 System Analyzer Component Locations, Front View, Cover Down, 2.3-4
2.3-4 LH 750 System Analyzer Component Locations, Front View without Cover, 2.3-4
2.3-5 LH 750 System Analyzer Component Locations, Rear View, 2.3-4
2.4-1 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Front View, Panels Closed, 2.4-4
2.4-2 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Front Panels, 2.4-4
2.4-3 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Under Front Cover, 2.4-5
2.4-4 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Right Door and
Compartment, 2.4-5
2.4-5 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Left Door and Compartment, 2.4-6
2.4-6 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Right Rear Door, 2.4-6
2.4-7 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Left Rear Doors, 2.4-7
2.4-8 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Front View, Panels Closed, 2.4-8
2.4-9 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Front Panel, 2.4-8
2.4-10 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Under Front Cover, 2.4-9
2.4-11 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Center Rear Panel, 2.4-9
2.4-12 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Right Door and
Compartment, 2.4-10
2.4-13 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Left Door and
Compartment, 2.4-10
2.4-14 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Right Rear Door, 2.4-11
2.4-15 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Left Rear Doors, 2.4-11
2.5-1 Electronic Power Supply Block Diagram, 2.5-1

2.5-2 Backplane Voltage Bus Distribution on the GEN•S System, 2.5-3
2.5-3 Backplane Voltage Bus Distribution on the LH 750 System, 2.5-4
2.6-1 Control Voltage Development and Distribution (Old Diluter Interconnects), 2.6-2
2.6-2 Control Voltage Development and Distribution (New Diluter
2.6-3 +5.2 Control Voltage and POWER ON Signal Distribution (Old Diluter
2.6-4 +5.2 Control Voltage and POWER ON Signal Distribution (New Diluter
2.6-5 POWER ON Signal, System Power Controller Card, 2.6-4
2.6-6 AMC Power-Up Signals, 2.6-5
2.6-7 SYSTEM RESET Signal, 2.6-6
2.7-1 API Card Block Diagram, 2.7-1

2.7-2 R/W/P SC/A Card Block Diagram, 2.7-3
2.8-1 Diff Power Supply Card Block Diagram, 2.8-1
2-x PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
2
2.8-2 Laser Power Supply Block Diagram, 2.8-3
2.8-3 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Block Diagram, 2.8-4
2.9-1 Pneumatic Supply Components, Old Style Power Supply, 2.9-1

2.9-2 Pneumatic Supply Components, New Style Power Supply, 2.9-2
2.9-3 Pneumatic On Signals on the System Power Controller Card, 2.9-4
2.10-1 System Power Controller Card and System Power Controller Display Block
Diagram, 2.10-1
2.10-2 System Power Controller Display, 2.10-3
2.11-1 System Control Overview Block Diagram, 2.11-1

2.11-2 RESET Signal Block Diagram, 2.11-3
2.11-3 Analyzer RESET Button, 2.11-3
2.11-4 COMM INTERFACE Card Communication Links, 2.11-4
2.11-5 RS/Opto Intfc Card Communication Links, 2.11-6
2.12-1 Diluter Control Overview, 2.12-1

2.12-2 Diluter 1 Card Power Supply Distribution, 2.12-4
2.12-3 Peltier and Ambient Temperature Circuit, 2.12-10
2.12-4 Stain Chamber Heater Circuit, 2.12-10
2.12-5 Diff Lytic Reagent Heater Circuit, 2.12-11
2.12-6 Diluter Keypad on the GEN•S System, 2.12-12
2.12-7 Numeric Keypad on the LH 750 System, 2.12-12
2.13-1 Reagent Inputs on Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir, 2.13-1
2.13-2 Reagent Inputs on Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent Reservoir, 2.13-2
2.13-3 Reagent Reservoir Module, Old Style (GEN•S System), 2.13-3
2.13-4 Reagent Reservoir Module, New Style (GEN•S System), 2.13-4
2.13-5 Reagent Reservoir Module, Modified New Style (GEN•S System and LH 750
System), 2.13-4
2.13-6 Reagent Distribution on Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir, 2.13-6
2.13-7 Reagent Distribution on Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent
Reservoir, 2.13-7
2.13-8 Backwash Tank Reagent Flow, 2.13-8
2.13-9 Sheath-Tank Reagent Flow, 2.13-10
2.14-1 Specimen Transport Block Diagram, 2.14-1

2.14-2 Cassette Transport Assembly, 2.14-2
2.14-3 LED Bar-Code Reader Block Diagram, 2.14-3
2.14-4 Laser Bar-Code Reader Block Diagram, 2.14-4
2.15-1 Initiating the Automatic Cycle, 2.15-1

2.15-2 Bed Position Sensors, 2.15-2
2.15-3 Bed Locks, 2.15-2
2.15-4 From Loading Bay to Rocker Bed, 2.15-3
2.15-5 Moving across the Rocker Bed, 2.15-3
2.15-6 Detecting Specimen Tubes, 2.15-4
2.15-7 Positioning Tube for Sampling, 2.15-4
2.15-8 Piercing the Tube, 2.15-5
PN 4277219B 2-xi
CONTENTS
2.15-9 Scanning Bar-Code Labels, 2.15-5

2.15-10Pushing Tube into Cassette, 2.15-6
2.15-11Moving to Unloading Bay, 2.15-6
2.15-12Rocker Bed to Unloading Bay, 2.15-7
2.16-1 Aspiration Path in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-1

2.16-2 Aspiration through the BSV in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-2
2.16-3 Delivering CBC Samples in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-2
2.16-4 Delivering Diff and Retic Samples in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-3
2.16-5 Backwashing the Diff and Retic Segments, 2.16-3
2.16-6 Backwashing the BSV in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-4
2.16-7 Cross-Rinse in the Automatic Mode, 2.16-4
2.16-8 Priming the Diff and Retic Sample Lines with Reagent, 2.16-5
2.16-9 Aspiration Path in the Manual Mode, 2.16-5
2.16-10Aspiration through the BSV in the Manual Mode, 2.16-6
2.16-11Delivering CBC Samples in the Manual Mode, 2.16-6
2.16-12Delivering Diff and Retic Samples in the Manual Mode, 2.16-7
2.16-13Backwashing the Diff and Retic Segments, 2.16-7
2.16-14Backwashing the BSV in the Manual Mode, 2.16-8
2.16-15Cross-Rinse in the Manual Mode, 2.16-8
2.16-16Priming the Diff and Retic Sample Lines with Reagent, 2.16-8
2.17-1 Aspiration Pump Components, 2.17-2

2.17-2 Aspiration Pump at Rest, 2.17-2
2.17-3 Aspiration in Manual Mode, 2.17-3
2.17-4 Aspiration in Automatic Mode, 2.17-3
2.17-5 Adjusting the Low, Manual-Mode Volume, 2.17-4
2.17-6 Adjusting the High, Automatic-Mode Volume, 2.17-4
2.17-7 BSV Ports, 2.17-6
2.17-8 Aspirate Sample, 2.17-7
2.17-9 Deliver Sample, 2.17-8
2.17-10Backwash Sample Groove, 2.17-8
2.17-12Backwash Sample Loop, 2.17-8
2.17-13Aspirate Sample, 2.17-9
2.17-14Deliver Sample, 2.17-9
2.17-16Rinse Aspiration Pathway, 2.17-10
2.17-17Diff and Retic Segment Valve Ports, 2.17-10
2.17-18Stained Retic Segment Valve Ports, 2.17-11
2.17-19Needle Assembly Components, 2.17-12
2.17-20Bubble/Blood Detectors, 2.17-13
2.17-21Bubble/Blood Detector Operation, 2.17-14
2.17-22Manual-Mode Aspiration Station Components, 2.17-17
2.18-1 CBC Analysis in the GEN•S System Block Diagram, 2.18-1

2.18-2 CBC Analysis in the LH 750 System Block Diagram, 2.18-2
Use the Diluent Reservoir, 2.18-3
2-xii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
2
Bypass the Diluent Reservoir, 2.18-3
2.18-5 CBC Sample Processing Components on LH 750 System Analytical
Stations, 2.18-4
2.18-6 Applying the Coulter Principle, 2.18-5
2.18-7 Data Collection Timing on the GEN•S System, 2.18-5
2.18-8 Data Collection Timing LH 750 System, 2.18-7
2.18-9 Hgb Sensing Area, 2.18-8
2.18-10Hgb Signal Flow, 2.18-8
2.19-1 RED/WHITE PRE-AMP Card Block Diagram, 2.19-1

2.19-2 Six-Channel Preamp Card Block Diagram, 2.19-3
2.19-3 RED/WHITE PROCESSOR Card Block Diagram, 2.19-4
2.19-4 RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 Card Block Diagram, 2.19-6
2.19-5 PLATELET PROCESSOR Card Block Diagram, 2.19-6
2.20-1 Applying the VCS Technology, 2.20-3

2.20-2 Light Scatter Path, 2.20-3
2.20-3 Hydrodynamically Focused Cells, 2.20-4
2.20-4 Flow Cell Hydraulics, 2.20-4
2.21-1 VCS Technology Block Diagram, 2.21-1

2.21-2 RF Detector Preamp Card (with Vacuum Tube) Block Diagram, 2.21-3
2.21-3 RF Detector Preamp Card (Solid State) Block Diagram, 2.21-3
2.21-4 LS Sensor Regions, 2.21-4
2.21-5 Light Scatter Preamp Module Block Diagram, 2.21-5
2.21-6 ANALOG 5 Card Block Diagram, 2.21-6
2.21-7 DIFF PROCESSOR Card Block Diagram, 2.21-7
2.22-1 Diff Sample Processing Components on the GEN•S System, 2.22-1

2.22-2 Diff Blood Sample and Reagent Delivery to the Mixing Chamber in the GEN•S
System, 2.22-2
2.22-3 Diff Sample Processing Components on the LH 750 System, 2.22-2
2.22-4 Diff Blood Sample Aspiration and Delivery to the Mixing Chamber in the LH 750
System, 2.22-3
2.22-5 Diff Sample Analysis Flow, 2.22-4
2.22-6 Ambient Temperature Sensor Location, 2.22-5
2.22-7 Diff Lytic Reagent Pump and Diff Preservative Pump Components, 2.22-6
2.22-8 Dispenser Pump at Rest, 2.22-7
2.22-9 Dispensing High Volume, 2.22-7
2.22-10Dispensing Low Volume, 2.22-8
2.22-11Adjusting the Low Volume, 2.22-9
2.22-12Adjusting the High Volume, 2.22-9
2.23-1 Retic Sample Processing Components on the GEN•S System, 2.23-1

2.23-2 Retic Blood Sample and Stain Delivery to Stain Chamber on the GEN•S
System, 2.23-2
2.23-3 Stained Sample and Clearing Solution Delivery to Retic Chamber on the GEN•S
System, 2.23-2
2.23-4 Retic Sample Processing Components on the LH 750 System, 2.23-3
PN 4277219B 2-xiii
CONTENTS
2.23-5 Retic Blood Sample Aspiration and Delivery to the Stain Chamber in the LH 750
System, 2.23-4
2.23-6 Stained Sample Aspiration and Delivery to the Retic Chamber in the LH 750
System, 2.23-4
2.23-7 Retic Sample Analysis Flow, 2.23-5
2.23-8 Stain Heater Block Diagram, 2.23-6
2.23-9 Peltier Module, Cross Section, 2.23-6
2.24-1 Sample Data Flow on the GEN•S System from Final Processing to
Reporting, 2.24-1
2.24-2 Sample Data Flow on the LH 750 System from Final Processing to
Reporting, 2.24-2
2.24-3 Diff Analysis Two-Dimensional DataPlot, 2.24-8
2.24-4 Diff Analysis Three-Dimensional DataPlot, 2.24-8
2.24-5 NRBC Signature Position, 2.24-9
2.24-6 NRBC Location on WBC Histogram, 2.24-9
2.24-7 Retic Analysis DataPlot, 2.24-10
2.25-1 Latex Voltage Test Window, 2.25-3

2.25-2 Voltage Matching Test Window, 2.25-4
2.25-3 Flow Rate Test Window, 2.25-7
TABLES
2.2-1 Power Supply (PS) Components, 2.2-1
2.3-1 Analyzer (ANA) Components, 2.3-1
2.4-1 Diluter (DIL) Components, 2.4-1
2.6-1 +5.2 Control Voltage Distribution, 2.6-4

2.10-1 System Power Controller Display Status LEDs, 2.10-4
2.17-1 Aspiration Pump Pneumatic Signals and Piston Positions, 2.17-1

2.17-2 Summary of the BSV Positions, 2.17-5
2.17-3 BSV Ports, 2.17-6
2.17-4 Diff and Retic Segment Valve Port Descriptions, 2.17-10
2.17-5 Stained Retic Segment Valve Port Descriptions, 2.17-11
2.17-6 Aspiration Messages, 2.17-15
2.20-1 Flow Cell Ports, 2.20-5
2.22-1 Diff Lytic Reagent and Diff Preservative Pumps’ Pneumatic Signals and Piston
Positions, 2.22-8
2.25-1 When to Calibrate, 2.25-8
2-xiv PN 4277219B
2INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION 2
2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE GEN•S AND LH 750 SYSTEMS
Summary
This section briefly describes the function, the main components and systems, and the
operating modes of the GEN•S System (Figure 2.1-1), the GEN•S System with a GEN•S SM
SlideMaker and GEN•S ST SlideStainer - also referred to as a GEN•S Cell (Figure 2.1-2), the
LH 750 System (Figure 2.1-3), and the LH 750 System with an LH SlideMaker and
LH SlideStainer - also referred to as an LH 755 (Figure 2.1-4). This section also references the
appropriate customer documents and/or headings within this document for more details.
Function
The GEN•S System and the LH 750 System are quantitative, automated hematology
analyzers, leukocyte differential counters, and reticulocyte counters For In Vitro Diagnostic
Use in clinical laboratories. These instruments can perform a complete blood count (CBC),
WBC differential, and reticulocyte analysis on a whole-blood sample. The LH 750 System can
also perform a CBC on a prediluted sample.
The specific parameters analyzed are listed below. For a description of the methods used to
derive these parameters, refer to the Online Help System or to Chapter 3 of the Reference
manual. For details about the components used to perform the analysis, see the appropriate
headings in this chapter.
The GEN•S Systems and LH 750 Systems with a SlideMaker and SlideStainer also create
blood smears on clean microscopic slides using a segment of blood aspirated at the Analytical
Station, transport those slides to the SlideStainer, and stain them.
CBC Parameters
The CBC consists of: white blood cell count (WBC), red blood cell count (RBC), hemoglobin
(Hgb), mean corpuscular volume (MCV), hematocrit (Hct), mean corpuscular hemoglobin
(MCH), mean corpuscular hemoglobin concentration (MCHC), red cell distribution width
(RDW), platelet count (Plt) and mean platelet volume (MPV). See Headings 2.18 and 2.19 for
details about the components used to perform the CBC analysis.
WBC Differential Parameters

The WBC differential consists of the percent and number of the following WBC populations:
lymphocytes (LY% and LY#), monocytes (MO% and MO#), neutrophils (NE% and NE#),
basophils (BA% and BA#) and eosinophils (EO% and EO#). See Headings 2.20, 2.21 and 2.22
for details about the components used to perform the WBC differential analysis.
The LH 750 System can also derive the percentage of nucleated RBCs from the WBC
differential and report the nucleated RBCs (NRBC% and NRBC#).
Reticulocyte Parameters
Reticulocyte analysis consists of the percent and number of reticulocytes (RET% and RET#),
the mean reticulocyte volume (MRV), and the immature reticulocyte fraction (IRF). See
Headings 2.20, 2.21 and 2.23 for details about the components used to perform the
reticulocyte analysis.
PN 4277219B 2.1-1
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
Research Only Parameters

The following additional platelet and reticulocyte parameters are considered “For Research
Use Only. Not for use in diagnostic procedures” and require the authorization of a research
usage agreement before they are enabled: the plateletcrit (Pct), the platelet distribution width
(PDW), the percent and number of high light scatter reticulocytes (HLR% and HLR#), and
the mean sphered cell volume (MSCV).
The PDW value is used as an internal check on the reported platelet parameters, the Plt and
MPV.
Description
Components
The GEN•S System (Figure 2.1-1) and the LH 750 System (Figure 2.1-3) consist of an
Analytical Station and a Workstation, with an optional SlideMaker and SlideStainer
(Figures 2.1-2 and 2.1-4). This manual provides information on the Analytical Stations only.
The Analytical Station consists of three units: the Power Supply, Analyzer, and Diluter. This
chapter contains illustrations identifying the main components and/or assemblies in each of
these units, and tables summarizing their functions. These illustrations and tables are
grouped by unit as follows:
r Power Supply (See Heading 2.2.)

r Analyzer (See Heading 2.3.)
r Diluter (See Heading 2.4.)
Systems
The GEN•S System and the LH 750 System comprise many smaller systems, each performing
a specific function. This chapter includes a description of the following systems:
r Electronic Power (See Headings 2.5, 2.6, 2.7 and 2.8.)

r Pneumatic Power (See Heading 2.9.)
r Power Development Control (See Heading 2.10.)
r System Control (See Heading 2.11.)
r Diluter Control (See Heading 2.12.)
r Reagent Handling (See Heading 2.13.)
r Specimen Transport (See Headings 2.14 and 2.15.)
r Sample Acquisition (See Headings 2.16 and 2.17.)
r CBC Analysis (See Headings 2.18, 2.19 and 2.25.)
Note: Heading 2.25 provides on overview of the calibration procedures for the CBC
Analysis parameters.
r VCS Technology (See Headings 2.20, 2.21, 2.22 and 2.23.)
r Sample Reporting (See Heading 2.24.)
2.1-2 PN 4277219B
2
Figure 2.1-1 GEN•S System Units
ANALYTICAL STATION
TM
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95 0000
COULTER CORPORATION
ANALYZER
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
WORKSTATION
BP CBC DIFF RETICS
DILUTER
R
POWER
TM
TURBO
RESET
GEN•• S
TEMP
60 30.0 4.9 28 115 DC
POWER
SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
6498044B
Figure 2.1-2 GEN•S Cell Units
ANALYTICAL STATION
TM
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95 0000
COULTER CORPORATION
ANALYZER STATUS : READY

ALERT:
BP CBC DIFF RETICS

MAIN
WORKSTATION
SLIDESTAINER SLIDEMAKER
®
TM
DILUTER
R
POWER
TURBO
RESET
GEN• S
Gen·S St
TEMP
60 30.0 4.9 28 115 DC
POWER
SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
6498043B
PN 4277219B 2.1-3
Figure 2.1-3 LH 750 System Units

A n a ly tic a l S ta tio n
*S Y S T E M R U N *
0 4 /3 0 /9 6 I
A n a ly z e r
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
II
II I
IV
V
S T A T U S : R E A D Y
W o r k s ta tio n
A L E R T : T E S T M O D E V I
M O D E : C /D /R A S P IR A T IO N S /T U B E 0 1
V II
M A IN M E N U
B L O O D D E T E C T : O N V II I
P R IM E C L E A R S T A R T A L A R M
D R A IN R IN S E R E A D Y S T O P P R E M IX R E S E T
A P E R T A P E R T C O N T
S T A R T U P F 1 2 3 ID P O W E R O N
S H U T D O W N 4 5 6 E P O W E R O F F
N
7 8 9 T
E
C E 0 . R
D ilu te r
N E C M u ltiS y n c L C D 1 7 0 0 m +
GEN• S
PPNEU
N E U 6600 PSI
P S I 3300 PSI
P S I 55 PSI
P S I VACUUM AAC
C LLINE
IN E AAC
C
TTEMP
E M P
6600 330.0
0 . 0 44.9
. 9 2288 1115
15 DDCC
P o w e r
S u p p ly
P O W E R S U P P L Y
6 4 9 8 1 1 7 B
Figure 2.1-4 LH 750 System Units with Optional LH SlideMaker and LH SlideStainer
Analytical Station
Analyzer
Workstation
SlideStainer SlideMaker
Diluter
GEN• S
TEMP DC
Power
Supply
6498118B
2.1-4 PN 4277219B
2
Diagnostic Products
Refer to the Online Help System or to Chapter 1 of the Reference manual for the diagnostic
products used on the instrument.
Physical Specifications
See Heading 3.1, Preinstallation Checklist, for the physical specifications needed to install the
instrument. For any other physical specifications, refer to the Online Help System or to
Chapter 4 of the Reference manual.
Performance Specifications and Characteristics

See Appendix A, QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION, for the performance specifications
needed to service the instrument. For any other performance specifications or performance
characteristics (including interfering substances), refer to the Online Help System or to
Chapter 4 of the Reference manual.
Leakage Current Specifications

Coulter instruments are evaluated and approved to Underwriters Laboratories Standard 1262,
Laboratory Equipment. Testing was performed by Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL).
Leakage current is tested per Section 6.7 - EXCEPTION:
Equipment required to have primary circuit filtering to meet Electromagnetic

Compatibility (EMC) regulations may have a Leakage Current at accessible parts of more
than 500 µA, but must not exceed 5.0 mA.
Coulter instruments such as the GEN•S System and the LH 750 System and their peripherals
incorporate primary circuit filtering to meet EMC requirements, therefore the exception in
UL Standard 1262, Section 6.7 is applicable and allows a leakage current as high as 5.0 mA.
Computer systems, such as the Workstation for the GEN•S System and the LH 750 System,
and their peripherals are evaluated and approved to Underwriters Laboratories Standard 478,
Information Processing and Business Equipment, prior to being approved for use with
Coulter instruments. Leakage current is tested per Section 28 A, paragraph 28 A.3,
EXCEPTION:
A unit that requires electromagnetic interference filters or filtering capacitors or both for
functional performance or to meet EMC regulations (for example FCC regulations) may
have Leakage Current in excess of 500 µA but must not exceed 3.5 mA.
Computers and their peripherals used with the GEN•S System and the LH 750 System
employ EMC filtering devices as described in UL 478 Section 28 A, paragraph 28 A.3,
EXCEPTION; therefore the maximum allowable leakage current is 3.5 mA.
PN 4277219B 2.1-5
Operation
Aspiration Modes
The instrument has two aspiration modes, the Automatic mode and the Manual mode.
In the Automatic mode, the operator loads the specimen tubes into cassettes and stacks the
cassettes into the loading bay of the Diluter. From the loading bay the cassettes are lowered
onto a rocker bed belt that advances the cassettes to the automatic cap-piercing mechanism.
While advancing, and between sample aspirations, the cassettes are rocked back and forth to
mix the specimens. The specimen tubes and cassettes are identified by bar-code labels that are
read automatically as the specimen is being sampled.
In the Manual mode, the operator enters the specimen ID, uncaps the specimen tube and
presents the open specimen tube to the aspirator tip. The cycle starts automatically when the
operator’s hand interrupts the path of optical sensors (the hand detector).
In the LH 750 System the operator can also run prediluted blood samples in the Manual
mode. The operator makes the dilution outside of the instrument and enters the dilution
factor at the Workstation. The software uses the dilution factor to calculate the whole blood
results from the diluted sample results.
The aspiration modes are described in the Online Help System and in Chapter 3 of the
Reference manual. For further details on how the specimen transport system works, see
Headings 2.14 and 2.15. For details on how aspiration occurs, see Headings 2.16 and 2.17.
Test Modes
The instrument has five test mode options: CBC/DIFF/RETIC, CBC/DIFF, CBC ONLY,
CBC/RETIC, and RETIC ONLY.
In the GEN•S System, the operator batches the specimen tubes by the test mode needed and
selects the test mode for the batch at the Analyzer.
In the LH 750 System, the instrument changes the test mode as needed for each specimen
tube according to the tests selected for that specimen on the ToDo List. This process, which is
referred to as random access, eliminates the need to batch specimen tubes.
Operating Procedures
Refer to the Operator’s Guide or the Online Help System for the operating procedures.
2.1-6 PN 4277219B
POWER SUPPLY MAIN COMPONENTS 2
2.2 POWER SUPPLY MAIN COMPONENTS
Summary
The Power Supply provides and monitors the main electronic power to the Analyzer and
Diluter and the pneumatic power (vacuum and pressure) to the Diluter. This section
identifies the main components and/or assemblies in the Power Supply, briefly describing
their functions and showing their locations.
For more details, see the Electronic Power System, Headings 2.5, 2.6, 2.7 and 2.8, and the
Pneumatic Power System, Heading 2.9.
Main Components
Table 2.2-1 lists the main components or assemblies in the Power Supply, in alphabetic order,
with the abbreviation, where applicable, and functions of each. Figure 2.2-1 shows the
locations of these components or assemblies in the old style Power Supply; Figure 2.2-2
shows their locations in the new style Power Supply.
Note: The new style Power Supply has additional vents to improve air flow and keep the
Power Supply from overheating.
Table 2.2-1 Power Supply (PS) Components
Component Abbreviation Functions
Bulk Power Supply Converts ac line voltage to dc power supply voltages.

Bulk Power Filter Card Filters switching noise from Bulk Power Supply voltages.
Compressor/Vacuum Pump Develops vacuum and pressures.
Motor Controller Card Provides the driver and power for the compressor/vacuum pump.
Power Supply Exhaust Fan One of two automatic, variable-speed fans used to cool the Power
Supply. Used as an exhaust fan.
Power Supply Intake Fan One of two automatic variable-speed fans used to cool the Power
Supply. Used as an intake fan.
System Power Controller Display SPC Display Displays pneumatic and voltage levels and status.
System Power Controller Card SPC Provides power management control and monitoring functions.
PN 4277219B 2.2-1
POWER SUPPLY MAIN COMPONENTS
Figure 2.2-1 Power Supply Component Locations, Old Style Power Supply
Bulk Power
Power Supply
Filter exhaust
System Power card fan
Controller
Display
System Power
Controller
card Motor
Controller
card
Power Supply Bulk

intake fan Power
Supply
Pneumatic
Power Supply
Compressor/
vacuum pump
6498071A
Figure 2.2-2 Power Supply Component Locations, New Style Power Supply
Bulk Power
Power Supply
Filter exhaust
System Power card fan
Controller
Display
System Power
Controller
card Motor
Controller
card
Power Supply Bulk

intake fan Power
Supply
Pneumatic
Power Supply
Compressor/
vacuum pump
6498072A
2.2-2 PN 4277219B
ANALYZER MAIN COMPONENTS 2
2.3 ANALYZER MAIN COMPONENTS
Summary
The Analyzer:
r Controls the System reset and power up sequence.

r Controls the electronic sequencing of all operating cycles.
r Accumulates pulses generated in the Diluter.
r Analyzes the CBC pulses.
r Sends the data to the Workstation as each cycle is completed.
The main central processing unit (CPU) responsible for system control, task scheduling and
synchronization, and sample analysis is housed on the Analyzer Microcontroller card (AMC)
in the Analyzer. This section identifies the main components and/or assemblies in the
Analyzer, briefly describing their functions and showing their locations.
Main Components
Table 2.3-1 lists the main components in the Analyzer, in alphabetic order, with the
abbreviation, where applicable, and functions of each. Figures Figures 2.3-1 through 2.3-5
show the locations of these components and are referenced in Table 2.3-1.
Table 2.3-1 Analyzer (ANA) Components
Figure Reference
GEN•S LH 750
Component Abbreviation Functions System System
AMC (Analyzer Microcontroller AMC Houses main CPU for instrument. 2.3-1 2.3-4
card)
Analog backplane Interconnect for signals on left (analog) side of 2.3-2 2.3-5
Analyzer
Analyzer fans (2) Two automatic, temperature controlled, 2.3-2 2.3-5
variable-speed fans used to cool the Analyzer
API (Aperture Current)-SIGNAL API Develops aperture current and test pulses 2.3-1 N/A
GENERATOR card
APS1 (Analyzer Power Supply 1) APS1 Local power supply for analog side of Analyzer 2.3-1 2.3-4
card
APS2 (Analyzer Power Supply 2) APS2 Local power supply for digital side of Analyzer 2.3-1 2.3-4
card
Backplane Interconnect (2 used) System bus connector between Analog, Digital 2.3-2 2.3-5
and CRT backplanes
Backplane voltage bus BVB Power distribution bus for +48 V1 dc, 48 V1 dc 2.3-2 2.3-5
return, and system ground
BD (blood detector) ADJ (adjust) Installed on Analytical Stations with a N/A 2.3-3
card Diluter 2 RBD card to provides test points for the
bubble/blood detector adjustments and the lyse
timing procedure.
PN 4277219B 2.3-1
ANALYZER MAIN COMPONENTS
Table 2.3-1 Analyzer (ANA) Components (Continued)
Figure Reference
GEN•S LH 750
COMM (Communication) Comm Intfc Communication link for AMC. 2.3-1 2.3-4
INTERFACE card
CRT backplane Interconnect for Scope Module signals. 2.3-2 2.3-5
CRT buttons Allows operator access to the options on the 2.3-3
interface menu.
DIFF (Differential) PROCESSOR Diff Proc Processes VCS signals and routes diff and retic 2.3-1 2.3-4
card raw data to the Workstation.
Digital backplane Interconnect for signals on right (digital) side of 2.3-2 2.3-5
Analyzer
DILUTER CPU card Controls all Diluter cycles as directed by the AMC N/A 2.3-4
and communicates directly with the Keypad and
Display Interface card (the numeric keypad)
DILUTER PROCESSOR card Dil Proc Controls all Diluter cycles as directed by the AMC 2.3-1 N/A
Keyboard and Display Interface Part of numeric keypad. See Diluter/Numeric N/A 2.12-6
card Keypad under Heading 2.12, DILUTER
CONTROL.
Numeric keypad Provides POWER ON/OFF signals and operator N/A 2.3-3
interface
PLATELET PROCESSOR card Plt Proc Provides channelizing circuitry for platelet 2.3-1 2.3-4
histograms.
RED PRE-AMP (Preamplifier) RED One of two Red/White Pre-Amp cards used on 2.3-1 N/A
card PRE-AMP the GEN•S System to amplify pulses from the
apertures. Amplifies RBC and platelet data
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card R/W Proc Provides editing circuitry and counters for RBC 2.3-1 N/A
and WBC count and histograms
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card R/W Proc 2 Provides editing circuitry and event and wait N/A 2.3-4
counters for RBC and WBC count and histograms
R/W/P (Red,White, Platelet) SC/A SC/A LH 750 System only: Develops aperture voltage N/A 2.3-4
(Signal Conditioner/Analyzer) and test pulses. Amplifies and conditions pulses
card from the Six-Channel Preamp card.
Scope Module Displays system status, messages, and operator 2.3-1 2.3-4
interface menu
VCS ANALOG card ANALOG Amplifies VCS signals 2.3-1 2.3-4
WHITE PRE-AMP (Preamplifier) WHITE One of two Red/White Pre-Amp cards used on 2.3-1 N/A
card PRE-AMP the GEN•S System to amplify pulses from the
apertures. Amplifies WBC data
2.3-2 PN 4277219B
ANALYZER MAIN COMPONENTS 2
Figure 2.3-1 GEN•S System Analyzer Component Locations, Front View
APS1 AMC
API-SIGNAL GENERATOR COMM INTERFACE
WHITE PRE-AMP DILUTER PROCESSOR
RED PRE-AMP DIFF PROCESSOR
PLATELET
PROCESSOR APS2 ANALOG
RED/WHITE SCOPE
7253059B
PROCESSOR MODULE
Figure 2.3-2 GEN•S System Analyzer Component Locations, Rear View
FANS
BACKPLANE
INTERCONNECTS
DIGITAL
BACKPLANE
CRT
BACKPLANE
BACKPLANE
VOLTAGE
BUS
ANALOG
7253060A
BACKPLANE
PN 4277219B 2.3-3
ANALYZER MAIN COMPONENTS
Figure 2.3-3 LH 750 System Analyzer Component Locations, Front View, Cover Down
CRT
buttons
0 4 /3 0 /9 6 I
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
II
III
IV
V
A L E R T : T E S T M O D E VI
VII
M A IN M E N U
B L O O D D E T E C T : O N VIII
Numeric
P R IM E
A P E R T
D R A IN R IN S E
C L E A R
A P E R T
R E A D Y S T O P P R E M IX
S T A R T
C O N T
A L A R M
R E S E T
keypad
N
7 8 9 T
E
C E 0 . R
6498115B
Figure 2.3-4 LH 750 System Analyzer Component Locations, Front View without Cover
A P S 1 A M C
R /W /P S C /A C O M M IN T E R F A C E
C o v e r p la te D IL U T E R C P U
B D A D J D IF F P R O C E S S O R
C o v e r p la te
P L A T E L E T
P R O C E S S O R A P S 2 V C S A N A L O G
R E D /W H IT E S c o p e
6 4 9 8 1 2 4 B
P R O C E S S O R 2 m o d u le
Figure 2.3-5 LH 750 System Analyzer Component Locations, Rear View
Backplane
voltage BUS Analog
backplane
Fans
Backplane
interconnects
Digital
backplane
CRT
backplane
6498183B
2.3-4 PN 4277219B
DILUTER MAIN COMPONENTS 2
2.4 DILUTER MAIN COMPONENTS
Summary
The Diluter transports, aspirates, pipettes, dilutes, mixes, lyses and generates pulses from
patient and control samples. To accomplish these tasks the Diluter provides the local power
and control for the solenoids and motors, level sensors, specimen transport assembly and
bar-code scanning components used to process the blood samples. This section identifies the
circuit cards and the main assemblies in the Diluter, briefly describing their functions and
showing their locations.
Note: Two configurations of the GEN•S System’s Analytical Station are currently in use, one
that uses the diluent reservoir (the original configuration) and one that bypasses the diluent
reservoir. The locations of the components discussed in this section are the same in both
configurations.
For a description of the fluidic components in the Diluter and the associated location
diagrams, see Main Diluter Fluidic Components under Heading A.6.
Main Components
Table 2.4-1 lists all the circuit cards and the main assemblies in the Diluter, in alphabetic
order, with the abbreviation, where applicable, and the functions of each. Figures 2.4-1
through 2.4-15 show the locations of the components described in Table 2.4-1 and are
referenced in the table.
Table 2.4-1 Diluter (DIL) Components
Figure Reference
GEN•S LH 750
Bar-Code Decoder card BCD Decodes signals from the bar-code scanner. 2.4-6 2.4-14
Bar-code scanner BCS Scans bar-code labels on tubes and cassettes to identify 2.4-2 2.4-9
assembly specimen.
Cassette transport CTA Mechanical components for handling cassettes in the 2.4-1 2.4-8
assembly Automatic mode. Consists of the:
r Loading bay
r Unloading bay
r Rocker bed
r Piercing station.
Differential Power Supply Diff PS Provides power for laser power supply, and DC and RF 2.4-4 2.4-12
card voltages for the flow cell.
Diff module Processes samples for diff analysis. 2.4-3 2.4-10
Diluter 1 card Dil 1 Develops power for and manages the Hgb lamp and 2.4-4 2.4-12
bar-code scanner, keyboard controller and
hand-detector sensor inputs.
Note: Two styles are currently in use. For details, see
Diluter 1 Card under Heading 2.12, DILUTER
CONTROL.
PN 4277219B 2.4-1
DILUTER MAIN COMPONENTS
Table 2.4-1 Diluter (DIL) Components (Continued)
Figure Reference
GEN•S LH 750
Diluter 2 card Dil 2 Manages blood detectors, reagent heaters, probe-wipe 2.4-5 2.4-13
motor and reagents reservoirs.
Note: Four styles are currently in use. For details, see
CONTROL.
Diluter 3 card Dil 3 Manages solenoids and mixing motors and houses a 2.4-5 2.4-13
SlideMaker interface.
Note: Three styles are currently in use. For details, see
CONTROL.
Diluter 4 Card Dil 4 Houses drivers for the heaters, thermistors, and Peltier 2.4-7 2.4-15
module.
Diluter Cbl (Cable) Cable Adpt Routes IBUS signals between Power Supply and left 2.4-5 2.4-13
Adapter card and right sides of Diluter.
Diluter keypad Provides POWER ON/OFF signals and operator 2.4-1 N/A
interface.
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Sol/Opt PS Provides local power to the Diluter 2 and Diluter 3 cards 2.4-5 2.4-13
Power Supply card and to the solid state RF Detector Preamp card if one is
installed.
Hgb cuvette assembly Consists of Hgb cuvette, lamp and preamp. Used to 2.4-2 2.4-9
photometrically analyze WBC dilution for Hgb
concentration.
Keyboard and Display Part of Diluter control keypad. See Diluter/Numeric 2.12-6 N/A
Interface card Keypad under Heading 2.12, DILUTER CONTROL.
Laser Coherent light source used for LS channel. 2.4-3 2.4-10
Laser Power Supply Laser PS Consists of Laser Power module and Laser Reference 4 2.4-4 2.4-12
card:
r Laser Power module - Develops power for laser
r Laser Reference 4 card - Develops laser reference
voltage.
Light Scatter Preamplifier LS Preamp Houses amplification and logic circuitry for the light 2.4-3 2.4-10
module scatter signals.
PVT card Monitors flow cell pressures, count vacuum and 2.4-4 2.4-12
ambient temperature (backup sensor).
Random Access module LH 750 System only: Segments the diff and retic N/A 2.4-10
samples and processes samples for retic analysis.
Reagent Reservoir Rgt Res Provides level sensing and internal reagent storage to 2.4-7 2.4-15
module trap bubbles during reagent change.
Reservoir Interface card Rgt Res Intfc Interfaces reagent reservoir solenoids and sensors. 2.4-7 2.4-15
2.4-2 PN 4277219B
Table 2.4-1 Diluter (DIL) Components (Continued)
Figure Reference
GEN•S LH 750
Retic module GEN•S System only: Segments the diff and retic 2.4-3 N/A
samples and processes samples for retic analysis.
RF Detector Preamp RF Preamp Generates RF and DC current, detects RF voltage, and 2.4-3 2.4-10
(Preamplifier) Card amplifies RF and DC pulses from the flow cell.
Note: Two styles are currently in use. For details, see RF
Detector Preamp Card under Heading 2.21, VCS
TECHNOLOGY - MEASURING AND ANALYZING THE
DATA.
RS/Opto Intfc (Interface) RS/O Intfc Routes signals between the Diluter, Workstation and 2.4-4 2.4-12
card Analyzer.
Sampling Station Contains components for pipetting blood samples in 2.4-3 2.4-10
the Automatic and Manual modes.
Sensor Distribution card Sensor Dist Connections for Diluter sensors for access by the 2.4-4 2.4-12
Diluter 1 card.
Six-Channel Aperture Six-Channel LH 750 System only: Amplifies WBC, RBC, and platelet N/A 2.4-11
Preamp (Preamplifier) Preamp pulses from the apertures.
card
Triple Transducer module TTM Contains components for VCS technology pulse 2.4-3 2.4-10
generation. Triple refers to the three measurements:
volume (DC), conductivity (RF) and scatter (LS).
PN 4277219B 2.4-3
Figure 2.4-1 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Front View, Panels Closed
TM GEN S
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95 0000
COULTER CORPORATION
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
BP CBC DIFF RETICS
UNLOADING BAY LOADING BAY
ROCKER BED
PIERCING
STATION KEYPAD
7253265A
Figure 2.4-2 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Front Panels
6 4 9 8 2 3 7 B
B a r-c o d e H g b c u v e tte
s c a n n e r a s s e m b ly
2.4-4 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.4-3 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Under Front Cover
RF DETECTOR
SAMPLING STATION DIFF MODULE PREAMP CARD
TRIPLE
TRANSDUCER
MODULE
RETIC LIGHT SCATTER

LASER
7253267B MODULE PREAMP MODULE
Figure 2.4-4 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Right Door and Compartment
RS/OPTO
INTFC CARD PVT
CARD
DIFF POWER
LASER POWER SUPPLY CARD
SUPPLY
DILUTER 1
CARD
SENSOR
DISTRIBUTION
CARD
7253158A
PN 4277219B 2.4-5
Figure 2.4-5 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Left Door and Compartment
DILUTER CBL
ADAPTER CARD
DILUTER 3
DILUTER/ CARD
SOLENOID/
OPTICS POWER
SUPPLY CARD
DILUTER 2
CARD
7253159A
Figure 2.4-6 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Right Rear Door
BAR-CODE
DECODER
CARD
7253160A
2.4-6 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.4-7 GEN•S System Diluter Component Locations, Left Rear Doors
Diluter 4
card
Reservoir
Interface
card
Reagent
Reservoir
module
(old style)
Reservoir
Interface
card
Reagent
Reservoir
module
(new style)
7253428E
PN 4277219B 2.4-7
Figure 2.4-8 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Front View, Panels Closed
0 4 /3 0 /9 6 I
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
II
III
IV
V
VII
M A IN M E N U
N
Unloading bay 7
C E
8
0
9
. R
E
T
Loading bay
Rocker bed
Piercing
station
6498114B
Figure 2.4-9 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Front Panel
Bar-code Hgb cuvette

scanner assembly 6498116B
2.4-8 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.4-10 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Under Front Cover
RF Detector
Diff module Preamp card
Sampling Station
Triple
Transducer
module
Random Light Scatter Laser

6498119B Access module Preamp module
Figure 2.4-11 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Center Rear Panel
Six-Channel Aperture
Preamp card
6498199B
PN 4277219B 2.4-9
Figure 2.4-12 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Right Door and Compartment
RS/Opto
Intfc card PVT
card
Diff Power
Laser Power Supply card
Supply
Diluter 1
card
Sensor
Distribution
card
6498120B
Figure 2.4-13 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Left Door and Compartment
Diluter Cbl
Adapter card
0 4 /3 0 /9 6 I
1 2 :3 0 :1 8 II
III
IV
V
VII
M A IN M E N U
Diluter 3
Diluter/ card
Solenoid/
Optics Power
Supply card
Diluter 2
card
6498121B
2.4-10 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.4-14 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Right Rear Door
Bar-Code
Decoder
card
6498122B
Figure 2.4-15 LH 750 System Diluter Component Locations, Left Rear Doors
Diluter 4
card
Reservoir
Interface
card
Reagent
Reservoir
module
6498123B
PN 4277219B 2.4-11
2.4-12 PN 4277219B
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER DEVELOPMENT AND DISTRIBUTION 2
2.5 ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER DEVELOPMENT AND DISTRIBUTION
Summary
The electronic power system converts the ac input line voltage to the main dc voltages needed
in the Analytical Station. This section describes the power development in the Power Supply
and subsequent distribution to local power supplies in the Analyzer and Diluter.
For more information about the electronic power system, see Heading 2.6 for a description of
the control voltage development and the power-up sequence, Heading 2.7 for a description of
the Analyzer power supplies, and Heading 2.8 for a description of the Diluter power supplies.
For troubleshooting information, see Heading 7.4.
Electronic Power Supply Overview

Turning on the MAIN POWER circuit breaker on the Power Supply routes ac voltage through
the transient voltage suppressor to the Bulk Power Supply. The Bulk Power Supply develops
the main and auxiliary dc voltages for the Power Supply. The System Power Controller card
monitors the Power Supply outputs and manages the power-up sequence in the Power
Supply. Refer to the block diagram of the Electronic Power Supply, Figure 2.5-1, as you read
this section. Refer to Figure 2.2-1 for the location of the components in the Power Supply.
Figure 2.5-1 Electronic Power Supply Block Diagram

SPC DISPLAY
PNEUMATIC
SPC TRANSDUCERS COMPRESSOR
CARD
+48 V2
J5
+5.2 V CONTROL
+5.2 V LEDS
RS485 +48 V1
Pin 2 CONTROL MOTOR
IBUS CONTROLLER
PRESSURE
CARD
DUMP VALVE
+12 V
F3
+48 V2
+12 V
MAIN
POWER
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
J4
MONITOR +48 V1 +48 V1
BULK
TVS3 VOLTAGES +48 V2 POWER 48 V1 RETURN
F1 +5.2 V CONTROL SYSTEM GROUND
FILTER
AC BULK POWER CARD
INPUT SUPPLY +12 V
THERMISTOR
F2 +12 V
THERMISTOR
6498238B
Transient Voltage Suppressor

The ac input goes through a transient voltage suppressor (TVS3) in the ac input jack to
minimize transient spikes as they occur. The transient voltage suppressor eliminates high
voltage transients, such as caused by lightning strikes, without affecting the main operating
voltage.
PN 4277219B 2.5-1
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER DEVELOPMENT AND DISTRIBUTION
Fuses
Two fuses in the ac input line to the Bulk Power Supply protect the Bulk Power Supply from
overcurrent. A third fuse in the ac input line to the System Power Controller card protects the
System Power Controller card from overcurrent.
Bulk Power Supply
Function
The Bulk Power Supply compensates automatically for ac line voltage and frequency and uses
individual ac-to-dc power supplies to develop the Power Supply dc voltages.
The Bulk Power Supply generates two +48 supply voltages and two auxiliary voltages, +5.2
control voltage and +12 Vdc.
r The +48 supply voltages power the Analytical Station and the compressor/vacuum
pump.
r The +5.2 control voltage ensures orderly System power up and reset.
r The +12 Vdc powers the Power Supply cooling fans and the dump valve.
Each of the voltages uses a floating return and the two +48 Vdc supplies and the +5.2 control
voltage are filtered to improve noise isolation. The +12 Vdc is not filtered.
The Bulk Power Supply contains an internal fan and thermistor for heat regulation.
Input
90 to 264 Vac, 47 to 63 Hz
Outputs
+ 5.2 control Vdc - used throughout the system to manage power up, power down and reset
+12 Vdc - used to power the Power Supply cooling fans and the pneumatic dump valve
+48 V1 dc - routed to backplane voltage bus for distribution to local power supplies in the
Analyzer and Diluter
+48 V2 dc - used to power the compressor/vacuum pump
Note: All Bulk Power Supply output voltages are referenced to their respective returns.
Fans
The Power Supply is cooled by two automatic, temperature controlled, variable-speed fans
(an intake and an exhaust), each with a thermistor to provide input for speed regulation. The
fans are powered by the +12 Vdc from the Bulk Power Supply. For the location of the fans
within the Power Supply, refer to Figure 2.2-1 and Figure 2.9-1 for the old style Power Supply,
Figure 2.2-2 and Figure 2.9-2 for the new style Power Supply.
Note: On the new style Power Supply, additional vents have been added to improve cooling.
Bulk Power Filter Card

The +5.2 control Vdc, the +48 V1 dc and the +48 V2 dc lines are routed through the Bulk
Power Filter card to reduce the switching noises on their outputs.
2.5-2 PN 4277219B
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER DEVELOPMENT AND DISTRIBUTION 2
Main Power Supply Cable
The Power Supply cable carries the +48 V1 dc, +48 V1 dc return and system ground from the
Bulk Power Filter card to the backplane voltage bus.
Backplane Voltage Bus

The backplane voltage bus (refer to Figure 2.3-2 or Figure 2.3-5 for location) is the
distribution point for routing the +48 V1 dc, 48 V1 dc return, and system ground to the
Analyzer and Diluter local power supplies. See Figure 2.5-2 for the distribution on the
GEN•S System, Figure 2.5-3 for the distribution on the LH 750 System.
Figure 2.5-2 Backplane Voltage Bus Distribution on the GEN•S System

BACKPLANE
VOLTAGE BUS
ANALYZER
APS 2 +12 V FAN FANS
CARD
DIGITAL
+15, -15, +5 V BACKPLANE
+12 V CRT
SCOPE
MODULE
APS 1 +15, -15, +5 V ANALOG
CARD BACKPLANE
+82 V
+150 V
ZAP VOLTAGE
API
CARD RED AP RED
CURRENT PRE-AMP
CARD RED
BATH
ZAP VOLTAGE
WHITE AP WHITE
CURRENT PRE-AMP
CARD
DILUTER/ WHITE
+15, -15, +5 V MOTORS BATH
SOLENOID/
OPTICS USED FOR:
+24 V SOLENOIDS
POWER
SUPPLY FOR SOLID STATE
CARD RF DETECTOR PREAMP ONLY.
DIFF +300 V RF DETECTOR
POWER SUPPLY +6.3 V PREAMP CARD
CARD +15, -15, +5 V
MONITORING LASER POWER
+12 V LASER
SUPPLY
DILUTER 1 FLOW
+6 V HGB LAMP VOLTAGE CELL
CARD
+15, -15, +5 V SENSOR DISTRIBUTION CARD
-5, +9, -9 V BAR-CODE DECODER CARD/SCANNER
DILUTER 4
+12 V PELTIER MODULE FAN
CARD
+48 V1
48 V1 RETURN
6498128B
SYSTEM GROUND
PN 4277219B 2.5-3
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER DEVELOPMENT AND DISTRIBUTION
Figure 2.5-3 Backplane Voltage Bus Distribution on the LH 750 System

Backplane
voltage bus
Analyzer
APS 2 +12 V FAN fans
card
Digital
+15, -15, +5 V backplane
+12 V CRT
Scope
module
APS 1 +15, -15, +5 V Analog
card backplane
+150 V +82 V
SC/A ZAP voltage

+ 82 V
card (RBC apertures)
±15 V
Aperture Six-Channel Red
Voltage Preamp card bath
ZAP voltage
+ 150 V (WBC apertures)
Diluter White
Solenoid/ +15, -15, +5 V Motors bath
Optics
Power Used for
+24 V solenoids
Supply
card
Diff +300 V RF Detector

Power Supply +6.3 V Preamp card
card +15, -15, +5 V
Monitoring Laser Power
+12 V Laser
Supply
Diluter 1 Flow
card +7.2 V Hgb lamp voltage cell
+15, -15, +5 V Sensor Distribution card
-5, +9, -9 V Bar-Code Decoder card/scanner
Diluter 4
+12 V Peltier module fan
card
+48 V1
48 V1 RETURN
6498129B
SYSTEM GROUND
Local Power Supplies

The +48 V1 dc inputs to the Analyzer and Diluter local power supplies contain hard wire
fuses to protect the local power supplies from overvoltage.
The local power supplies are filtered to suppress noise and also use floating grounds or
returns to reduce high frequency switching noise. This method reduces wiring, noise
susceptibility and ground loop problems. It also increases efficiency over conventional
designs. For a description of these power supplies, see:
r Heading 2.7, Electronic Power System - Local Power Supplies in the Analyzer
r Heading 2.8, Electronic Power System - Local Power Supplies in the Diluter.
2.5-4 PN 4277219B
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER UP 2
2.6 ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER UP
Summary
When the MAIN POWER circuit breaker at the Power Supply is turned on, ac is applied to
the Bulk Power Supply, but only the +5.2 control voltage is routed from the Bulk Power
Supply to the Analyzer and Diluter. To distribute the other voltages, it is necessary to press
POWER ON on the Diluter, initiating the power-up sequence. This section describes the
development of the control voltage and the power-up sequence. This section also describes
the power-off sequence.
power development in the Power Supply, Heading 2.7, for a description of the Analyzer
power supplies, and Heading 2.8 for a description of the Diluter power supplies. For
troubleshooting information, see Heading 7.4.
Control Voltage Development

see Figure 2.6-1. Turning on the main circuit breaker on the Power Supply routes ac line
voltage to the Bulk Power Supply. The Bulk Power Supply generates the +5.2 control voltage
and the control voltage return. From the Bulk Power Supply the +5.2 control voltage is routed
through the Bulk Power Filter card to reduce switching noise from the supply, and then to the
System Power Controller card to be distributed via the IBUS cable.
The distribution of the +5.2 control voltage via the IBUS cable differs, depending on whether
the Analytical Station has the original (old) Diluter interconnects used in the GEN•S System
or the current (new) Diluter interconnects used in the LH 750 System. The primary difference
between the two designs is the path the +5.2 control voltage takes from the IBUS cable
through the Diluter. Compare Figures 2.6-1 and 2.6-2, and Figures 2.6-3 and 2.6-4.
IBUS
For details about the IBUS, see Interface Bus (IBUS) and RS485 Interface Modules under
Heading 2.12, Diluter Control.
Control Voltage Distribution and Function

See Figure 2.6-3 (old Diluter interconnects) and Figure 2.6-4 (new Diluter interconnects).
When the +5.2 control voltage reaches the APS1 and APS2 cards, the LEDs on the front of the
cards turn yellow. As soon as the +5.2 control voltage is available in the System, the
instrument is ready for the POWER ON button on the Diluter/numeric keypad to be pressed.
Table 2.6-1 describes the functions of the +5.2 control voltage.
PN 4277219B 2.6-1
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER UP
Figure 2.6-1 Control Voltage Development and Distribution (Old Diluter Interconnects)
+ 5.2 CONTROL VOLTAGE

TVS3 IBUS
Bulk Power System
AC L Power AMC
IN Bulk Filter
N card Controller
Power
G card
Supply
CONTROL RETURN
APS1
card
Power Supply
Analyzer
APS2
card
DIL 1 Diluter
Diluter keypad
card
6498152B
Figure 2.6-2 Control Voltage Development and Distribution (New Diluter Interconnects)
TVS3 + 5.2 CONTROL VOLTAGE

IBUS
Bulk Power System
AC L Power AMC
IN N Bulk Filter
Power card Controller
G Supply card
CONTROL RETURN
APS1
card
Power Supply
Analyzer
APS2
card
Diluter
DILUTER DIL 1
CPU card card
Keyboard
Numeric and Display
keypad Interface
6498151B card
2.6-2 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.6-3 +5.2 Control Voltage and POWER ON Signal Distribution (Old Diluter Interconnects)
A C IN
M A IN
D IL U T E R B R E A K E R
D IL U T E R
K E Y P A D
B U L K P O W E R
O N O F F S U P P L Y A N D F IL T E R
C O N T R O L
+ 5 .2 C O N T R O L
R E T U R N P O W E R
S U P P L Y
J 1 6 3 8 5 1 7 S Y S T E M P O W E R
C O N T R O L C O N T R O L L E R C A R D
R E T U R N + 5 .2 C O N T R O L
J 1 6 3 8 5 1 7 1 2 5 6
J 1
S E N S O R
D IS T R IB U T IO N P O W E R O N P O W E R
C A R D J 2 O F F
1 2 5 6
J 5 3 2 3 1 3 3 4 5
D IL U T E R C A B L E
A D A P T E R C A R D
P O W E R O F F
P O W E R O N
C T R L G N D
+ 5 .2 C T R L
A N A L Y Z E R
J 4 1 2 5 6 T P 1 6
(O N B A C K P L A N E )
J 5 3 2 3 1 3 3 4 5 J 1 J 7 J 8 T P 1 7
G N D 1 2 5 6 A M C
1 1 (O N B A C K P L A N E )
D IL U T E R 1 + 5 .2 C O N T R O L R S /O P T O
2 2
C A R D 5 P O W E R O N 5 IN T F C
P O W E R O F F C A R D Y E L L O W
6 6 A P S 1 W H E N 5 .2 V
1 2 5 6
J 2 C A R D C O N T R O L
C O N T R O L P R E S E N T
J 1 9 1 2 5 6
R E T U R N Y E L L O W
D IG IT A L A P S 2 W H E N 5 .2 V
B A C K P L A N E C A R D C O N T R O L
+ 5 .2 C O N T R O L
6 4 9 8 1 7 4 B P R E S E N T
Figure 2.6-4 +5.2 Control Voltage and POWER ON Signal Distribution (New Diluter Interconnects)
AC IN
MAIN
BREAKER
BULK POWER
SUPPLY AND FILTER
CONTROL
+ 5.2 CONTROL
RETURN POWER
SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY
CONTROLLER CARD
DILUTER J1 1 2 5 6
POWER ON POWER
NUMERIC OFF
KEYPAD J2 1 2 5 6
OFF ON DILUTER CABLE
ADAPTER CARD ANALYZER
TP16
J1 4 12 5 J4 1 2 5 6 (ON BACKPLANE)
J6 J7 J8 TP17
CONTROL GND
GND 1 2 5 6 AMC
POWER OFF
POWER ON
DILUTER 1 1 (ON BACKPLANE)

+5.2 CONTROL RS/OPTO
1 2 2
5 POWER ON 5 INTFC
CARD
CARD
6 POWER OFF 6 YELLOW
1 2 5 6 APS1 WHEN 5.2 V
J2 CONTROL
CARD
POWER ON POWER PRESENT
J4 P/A OFF CONTROL
J19
5 DILUTER CPU 10 CONTROL GND 1 2 5 6 RETURN YELLOW
POWER ON DIGITAL APS2 WHEN 5.2 V
12 CARD 11
POWER OFF BACKPLANE + 5.2 CONTROL CARD CONTROL
4 12
6498175B PRESENT
PN 4277219B 2.6-3
Table 2.6-1 +5.2 Control Voltage Distribution
Component Function
AMC Replaces battery voltage for the system clock and RAM.
Generates high POWER FAIL signal.
APS1 card Provides power to indicate the status of the card.
APS2 card Provides power to indicate the status of the card.
Keyboard and Display Interface card (GEN•S Supplies the POWER ON/POWER OFF signals.
System only)
System Power Controller card Generates high POWER ON and POWER FAIL signals.
Power-Up Signals
POWER ON Signal
Pressing POWER ON on the Diluter/numeric keypad closes the power on switch. Closing the
power on switch applies control return, forcing the POWER ON signal low. Refer to
Figure 2.6-3 (old Diluter interconnects) and Figure 2.6-4 (new Diluter interconnects).
At the System Power Controller card, the low POWER ON signal causes the V1 RETURN
signal to go low. The low V1 RETURN signal goes to the Bulk Power Supply and enables the
+48 V1 dc output to the backplane voltage bus in the Analyzer. See Figure 2.6-5.
Figure 2.6-5 POWER ON Signal, System Power Controller Card

/ P W R F A IL P L D P W R F A IL
F r o m B u lk P o w e r S u p p ly A M C
(2 0 m s
d e la y ) P O W E R D O W N
U 3 9
/ V 1 O F F 5 V c o n tro l
T P 2 0
5 V
K e y p a d / V 1 R E T U R N
P O W E R O N
F F
U 8 T P 1 9
T o B u lk P o w e r S u p p ly
P O W E R O F F
+ 5 V c o n tro l
T P 1 8
/ V 2 R E T U R N
/ P N E U O N
T P 1 7
/ T E M P P N E U
7 2 1 9 0 2 0 B
Troubleshooting Tip: You can enable V1 for troubleshooting by placing a jumper across J20/J19.
The backplane voltage bus distributes +48 V1 dc, +48 V1 dc return and system ground from
the Power Supply to local power supplies in the Analyzer and Diluter. The local power
supplies develop the additional voltages needed.
2.6-4 PN 4277219B
AMC Power-Up Sequence
The AMC power-up sequence resets the main processor unit, which generates the SYSTEM
RESET signal. See Figure 2.6-6.
Figure 2.6-6 AMC Power-Up Signals

+ 5 B A T T E R Y
P O W E R D O W N
+ 5 B A T T E R Y
+ 5 B A T T E R Y D IS A B L E R A M
D IS A B L E T IM E R 1 S E C O N D
C M O S M E M R E S E T
R e s e t (P W R F A IL ) (T O C P U 8 0 1 8 6 )
C L O C K
S Y S T E M
C L O C K
+ 5 B A T T E R Y
+ 5 B A T T E R Y
T IM E R
P O W E R U P
7219028B
When the AMC receives +5 Vdc from the APS2 card:
1. The DISABLE CMOS MEM (PWR FAIL) signal to the AMC changes to a low signal and
triggers the Power Up signal to a high.
2. The DISABLE RAM signal is pulled up for 1 second, disabling access to the RAM.
3. The low RESET signal goes to the 80186 processor on the AMC. The 80186 processor
generates a high signal. This signal is inverted and generates the SYSTEM RESET signal.
SYSTEM RESET Signal

From the AMC, the SYSTEM RESET is routed as shown in Figure 2.6-7 to initialize
controllers, memory devices and interface devices, establishing communication links.
The COMMUNICATION INTERFACE card routes the SYSTEM RESET signal to the DIFF
PROCESSOR card as a high DIFF RESET signal.
The DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GEN•S System) or the DILUTER CPU card (LH 750
System) generates a DIL RESET signal. The DIL RESET signal:
1. Initializes the device drivers, bringing the devices to a nonhazardous, ready state.
2. Sends the START COMPRESSOR command to the System Power Controller card.
3. Checks the reagent and waste container levels.
4. Initiates the drain, rinse and backwash functions, preparing the Analytical Station for
cycling.
PN 4277219B 2.6-5
Figure 2.6-7 SYSTEM RESET Signal

DISABLE
CMOS MEM AMC
SYSTEM RESET
(PWR FAIL)
80186
CPU
MANUAL CRT PLATELET
RESET APS1
DISPLAY 4 PROCESSOR
CARD
CARD CARD
COMMUNICATION
DILUTER RED/WHITE API/
INTERFACE APS2
PROCESSOR/ PROCESSOR SC/A
CARD CARD
DILUTER CPU CARD CARD*
DIFF CARD*
RESET DIL
RESET
DIFF
PROCESSOR SYSTEM POWER
CARD CONTROLLER
DILUTER
CARD
KEYBOARD PNEU MOTOR

DILUTER 1 DILUTER 2 DILUTER 3 ON CONTROLLER
AND DISPLAY CARD CARD CARD
INTERFACE CARD
CARD † POWER SUPPLY 6498153B
* Two circuit cards are listed. The first card is used in the GEN•S System, the second in the LH 750 System.
† A RESET signal is only routed to the keypad in the LH 750 System.
PNEU ON Signal
During system reset, the DILUTER PROCESSOR (GEN•S System) or the DILUTER CPU
(LH 750 System) card sends a START COMPRESSOR command through the IBUS to the
System Power Controller card. The System Power controller card generates a PNEU ON
signal that turns on an optocoupler. The PNEU ON signal from the optocoupler and the V2
RETURN signal are connected to a wired-OR circuit with the TEMP PNEU signal. Refer to
Figure 2.6-5.
If all three signals are low, the V2 RETURN signal enables an optocoupler LED in the Bulk
Power Supply, which enables the +48 V2 dc output. The +48 V2 dc is routed to the Motor
Controller card to turn on the compressor/vacuum pump. When the compressor/vacuum
pump is on, it generates vacuum and pressures as described under Heading 2.9, Pneumatic
Power System.
Power-Off Signals
Refer to Figure 2.6-5. Pressing POWER OFF on the Diluter/numeric keypad:
1. Applies CONTROL RETURN to U8.
2. U8 turns on an optoisolator that pulls the V1 OFF signal low.
3. The low V1 OFF signal starts a 20 milliseconds timer on U39 that holds the V1 RETURN
low until it expires.
4. When the V1 RETURN signal goes high, the +48 V1 dc power supply is shut down.
2.6-6 PN 4277219B
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - LOCAL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE ANALYZER 2
2.7 ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - LOCAL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE ANALYZER
Summary
The electronic power system uses power supplies in the Analyzer and Diluter to develop
voltages locally. This section describes the functions, inputs, outputs and monitors of the
Analyzer power supply cards: the API-SIGNAL GENERATOR (API), Red/White/Platelet
Signal Conditioner/Analyzer (R/W/P SC/A) card, Analyzer Power Supply 1 (APS1), and
Analyzer Power Supply 2 (APS2) cards. Refer to Figure 2.3-1 for locations of the cards.
power development in the Power Supply, Heading 2.6 for a description of the control voltage
development and the power-up sequence, and Heading 2.8 for a description of the local
power supplies in the Diluter.
API Card
Function
The API card contains the circuits that develop and regulate aperture current for the CBC
apertures on the GEN•S System. See Figure 2.7-1.
Figure 2.7-1 API Card Block Diagram

DC-TO-DC DCDC MON
+48 VDC
POWER +250 V
+48 V RETURN SUPPLY VOLT RIA 1
REG REDMON 1
RED 1
VOLT RIA 2
REG REDMON 2
SYSRST RED CUR ON RED 2
API RED VOLT RIA 3

REG REDMON 3
CONTROLLER AUTOCAL
DAC RED 3
SYSTEM BUS MONITOR SW
WHITE AND ADC
AUTOCAL
DAC VOLT WIA 1
REG WHTMON 1
WHITE CUR ON
WHT 1
VOLT WIA 2
CAL REG WHTMON 2
COMMAND WHT 2
VOLT WIA 3
REG WHTMON 3
WHT 3
7253112A
DAC CALPULSES
PN 4277219B 2.7-1
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - LOCAL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE ANALYZER
Voltage Regulation - The dc-to-dc power supply converts +48 Vdc to +250 Vdc. When the
AMC sends a command to turn on aperture current, the API card generates the RED CUR ON
signal. The RED CUR ON signal enables the output of the +250 Vdc power supply and turns
on the red voltage regulators. The WHT CUR ON signal turns on the white voltage
regulators.
The individual regulators are adjustable using the Analyzer software options on the SERVICE
MENU, CBC LATEX CALIBRATION screen. The acceptable adjustment ranges for the red
and white aperture current are listed in Table A.1-3.
Calibration Pulses - The API card routes the CAL COMMAND signal to the RED/WHITE
PRE-AMP cards. Then the API card generates the test pulses and routes the pulses to the
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards.
r Ramp test. Generates the same number of each of the different size pulses to check the
CBC count and sizing circuitry. Checking the linearity also checks the noise levels in the
instrument.
r Precision test 3. Generates a series of pulses of identical height and uses a predetermined
set of histograms to verify the accuracy and precision of parameters derived from sizing
circuitry data.
ATTENTION: The ramp and precision pulses are not multiplied by the calibration factors. For
this reason the values are not changed by calibration and it is not necessary to re-establish
reference values after calibration.
Input Outputs
+48 Vdc from the analog backplane r Three red aperture currents, RIA 1, 2,
and 3, for use at the RED PRE-AMP
card
r Three white aperture currents, WIA 1,
2, and 3, for use at the WHITE
PRE-AMP card
r Test pulses for ramp and precision tests
Monitors
The API card:
r Develops reference voltages for each voltage regulator, REDMON 1, 2, and 3 and
WHTMON 1, 2, and 3.
r Develops reference voltage for the +250 Vdc, DCDC MON.
Switches
See Figure A.2-2 for the location of the DIP switches on the AP1 card. For the correct settings,
see Table A.2-3 and Table A.2-4.
2.7-2 PN 4277219B
R/W/P SC/A Card
Function
The R/W/P SC/A card contains the circuits that:
r Develop and regulate high voltage for the CBC apertures on the LH 750 System.
r Receive and condition aperture signals from the Six-Channel Preamp card, including DC
restoration. See Figure 2.7-2.
r Generate programmable calibration pulses.
Figure 2.7-2 R/W/P SC/A Card Block Diagram
P 1 A , P 1 B
B U S in te r fa c e
a n d D ig ita l
J 2 d ig ita l lo g ic I/F
T e s t
C A L p u ls e
g e n e ra to r
P 1 C , P 1 D R E D /W H IT E
P 2 R E D P R O C E S S O R
R E D (X 3 ) L P F R E D (X 3 ) c a rd
(X 3 )
S ix - C h a n n e l D IF F R X M D A C D C L P F /A M P P L A T E L E T
P re a m p (X 6 ) R e s to re P L T (X 3 ) P R O C E S S O R
(X 6 ) (X 3 )
c a rd W H IT E c a rd
W H IT E (X 3 ) W H IT E (X 3 ) R E D /W H IT E
L P F
(X 3 ) P R O C E S S O R
c a rd
Z A P Z A P R E D
c o n tro l Z A P W H IT E A P S 1 c a rd
± 1 5 V d c
± 1 5 V d c
+ 2 5 0 V d c d c -to -d c + 4 8 V d c
p o w e r s u p p ly
P re a m p I/F B a c k p la n e 7 2 1 9 0 3 0 B
Voltage Regulation - The dc-to-dc power supply converts +48 Vdc to +250 Vdc which is
regulated to +235 Vdc. When the AMC sends a command to turn on aperture current, the
R/W/P SC/A card generates the RED CUR ON signal. The RED CUR ON signal enables the
output of the +250 Vdc power supply and turns on the red high voltage. The WHT CUR ON
signal turns on the white high voltage.
The individual attenuators are adjustable using the Analyzer software options on the
SERVICE MENU, CBC LATEX CALIBRATION screen. The acceptable adjustment ranges for
the red and white aperture voltages are listed in Table A.1-3.
PN 4277219B 2.7-3
Calibration Pulses - The R/W/P SC/A card generates the test pulses and routes the pulses to
the input of the DC Restoration circuitry.
r Ramp test. Generates the same number of each of the different size pulses to check the
CBC count and sizing circuitry.
r Precision test. Generates two sets of precision pulses with different amplitudes to verify
the accuracy and precision of parameters derived from sizing circuitry data.
ATTENTION: The ramp and precision pulses are not multiplied by the calibration factors. For
this reason the values are not changed by calibration and it is not necessary to re-establish
reference values after calibration.
Inputs Outputs
r +48 Vdc from the analog backplane r +235 Vdc to the Six-Channel Preamp
card
r +150 Vdc from the APS1 card for white r +150 Vdc to the Six-Channel Preamp
aperture zap voltage card for white aperture zap voltage
r +82 Vdc from the APS1 card for red r +82 Vdc to the Six-Channel Preamp
aperture zap voltage card for red aperture zap voltage
r ±15 Vdc from the APS1 card r ±15 Vdc (passed through)
r Three red aperture signals for use at the
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card
r Three white aperture signals for use at
the RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card
r Three platelet aperture signals for use at
the PLATELET PROCESSOR card
Monitors
The R/W/P SC/A card develops reference voltage for the +235 Vdc.
Connectors
The R/W/P SC/A card connectors are shown in Figure A.2-10 and described in Table A.2-13.
APS1 Card
Function
The APS1 card contains the dc-to-dc power supplies that develop voltages for the circuit cards
on the analog backplane and for the Zap circuit on the RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards (GEN•S
System) or the R/W/P SC/A card (LH 750 System). See Figure 2.7-3.
Zap or Burn Circuit - The Zap circuit is activated every cycle to minimize protein buildup on
the apertures. The functions of the three Zap circuit signals are:
r ZAP ON. Low signal from the AMC enables the +150 V power supply output. The
150 Vdc is used as zap voltage for the WBC apertures and is limited by a zener diode to
obtain the +82 Vdc zap voltage for the RBC apertures.
r TIMER ON. A 1-second timing signal to enable ZAP ON.
2.7-4 PN 4277219B
r TIMER EXPIRED. Disables the ZAP ON signal.
Figure 2.7-3 APS1 Card Block Diagram
+48 V RETURN
+48 VDC
DC-TO-DC
POWER +150 V +15 V -15 V +5 V
SUPPLIES
+5 V
MONITOR -15 V ANALOG
CIRCUITS SECTION
+15 V
WHITE ZAP ANALOG
+150 V
RED ZAP BACKPLANE
+82 V +82 V
ZAP ON
+82 V MON
+5 V MON SYSTEM BUS
DIGITAL SECTION
-15 V MON A/D BUS ANALOG BACKPLANE
+15 V MON CONVERTER INTERFACE
+150 V MON
TIMER ON
TIMER EXPIRED
PLD
POWER STATUS
POWER STATUS LED 7253113A
Input Outputs
+48 Vdc from the backplane voltage bus r +15 Vdc for analog circuits
r -15 Vdc for analog circuits
r +5 Vdc for the digital circuits and power
status LEDs
r +150 Vdc to the WHITE PRE-AMP card
(GEN•S System) or the R/W/P SC/A
card (LH 750 System) for white
aperture zap voltage
r +82 Vdc to the RED PRE-AMP card
(GEN•S System) or the R/W/P SC/A
card (LH 750 System) for red aperture
zap voltage
PN 4277219B 2.7-5
Monitors
All voltages developed by the APS1 card are routed to the monitor circuits where a
multiplexer selects a voltage and routes it to the:
r A/D converter to be read by the AMC via the system bus (SBUS). The voltage levels are
displayed on the Analyzer ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES screen (select
SERVICE MENU tt DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC
SUPPLIES). The zap voltages are displayed only when the zap voltage is turned on.
r Programmable logic device (PLD) to determine the voltage status. The APS1 card -
t Makes the individual voltage statuses available to the AMC for generating a system
message if any of the voltages are out of tolerance.
t Displays the voltage status on its power status LED on the front edge of the card. See
Table 2.7-1 for details.
LED
Table 2.7-1 defines the APS1 card power status LED indications. Refer to Table A.1-25 for the
voltage specifications.
Table 2.7-1 APS1 Card Power Status LED Indications
Color Indication
Green All power supplies are within specifications.

Note: The +150 Vdc and +82 Vdc are only available and monitored during ZAP ON.
Red One or more of the following voltage supplies is out of specifications: +15 Vdc, +82 Vdc,
-15 Vdc or +150 Vdc.
Note: The +82 Vdc and +150 Vdc is only monitored during ZAP ON.
Yellow +5.2 Vdc control voltage is present and ready for power on. After power on, indicates the
+48 V1 dc is not present, or the +5 Vdc is out of specifications.
Off +5.2 Vdc control voltage is not present or the LED is defective.
Test Points
To measure the APS1 voltage outputs, use the test points on the analog backplane. Refer to
the Analog Backplane schematic in Chapter 6.
APS2 Card
Function
The APS2 card contains the dc-to-dc power supplies that develop voltages for the circuit cards
on the digital backplane. See Figure 2.7-4.
2.7-6 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.7-4 APS2 Card Block Diagram
+48 VDC
48 RETURN
DC-TO-DC
+12 V +12 V
POWER +15 V -15 V +5 V
FAN CRT
SUPPLIES
+12 V CRT
+5 V
MONITOR ANALOG
CIRCUITS -15 V
SECTION,
+15 V
RIGHT FAN RET DIGITAL
+12 V FAN RIGHT BACKPLANE
LFT FAN RET
RT FAN MON +12 V FAN LEFT
LFT FAN MON
+12 V CRT MON

SYSTEM BUS
+5 V MON DIGITAL SECTION
-15 V MON A/D BUS DIGITAL BACKPLANE
+15 V MON CONVERTER INTERFACE
LFT/RT FAN POWER STATUS

DILUTER LEFT STATUS
PLD
DILUTER 1 STATUS
SPC STATUS
POWER STATUS POWER STATUS LED 7253114A
Input Outputs
+48 Vdc from the backplane voltage bus r +15 Vdc for the analog circuits
r -15 Vdc for the analog circuits
r +5 Vdc for the digital circuits and power
status LED
r +12 Vdc CRT for the Scope Module
monitor
r +12 Vdc fan and return for the two
cooling fans mounted on the rear door
of the Analyzer
PN 4277219B 2.7-7
Monitors
All voltages developed by the APS2 card are routed to the monitor circuits where a
multiplexer selects a voltage and routes it to the:
r A/D converter to be read by the AMC via the SBUS. The voltage levels are displayed on
the Analyzer ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES screen (select SERVICE MENU tt
DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES).
r PLD to determine the voltage status. The APS2 card -
t Makes the individual voltage statuses available to the AMC for generating a system
message if any of the voltages are out of tolerance.
t Displays the voltage status on its power status LED on the front edge of the card. See
Table 2.7-2 for details.
The following statuses are routed on the SBUS to the APS2 card PLD. Refer to Figure 2.7-4.
r The DILUTER 1 status - includes the Diluter 1 card voltages and the ±15 Vdc from the
Diff Power Supply card.
r The DILUTER LEFT status - includes the voltages from the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics
Power Supply card and the Diluter 4 card.
r The SPC status - includes the +12 Vdc, +48 V1 dc, +48 V2 dc and the Power Supply
temperature statuses.
The PLD makes the DILUTER 1, DILUTER LEFT and SPC statuses available to the AMC for
generating a system message if any status is out of tolerance. DILUTER 1, DILUTER LEFT
and the pneumatic statuses are also displayed on the DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS screens.
LED
Table 2.7-2 defines the APS2 card power status LED indications. Refer to Table A.1-25 for
voltage specifications.
Table 2.7-2 APS2 Card Power Status LED Indications
Color Indication
Green All power supplies are within specifications and the Analyzer fans are
operational.
Red One or more of the following voltage supplies is out of specifications: +15 Vdc,
-15 Vdc or +12 Vdc CRT or the Analyzer fans are not operational.
Yellow +5.2 Vdc control voltage is present and ready for power on. After power on,
indicates the +48 V1 dc is not present, or the +5 V is out of specifications.
Off +5.2 Vdc control voltage is not present or the LED is defective.
Test Points
To measure the APS2 voltage outputs, use the test points on the digital backplane. Refer to the
Digital Backplane schematic in Chapter 6.
2.7-8 PN 4277219B
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - LOCAL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE DILUTER 2
2.8 ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - LOCAL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE DILUTER
Summary
The electronic power system uses power supplies in the Analyzer and Diluter to develop
voltages locally. This section describes the functions, inputs, outputs and monitors of the
Diluter power supplies: the Diff Power Supply card, the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power
Supply card and the Laser Power Supply. This section also describes the laser interlock
switch.
power development in the Power Supply, Heading 2.6, for a description of the control voltage
development and the power-up sequence, and Heading 2.7 for a description of the local
power supplies in the Analyzer.
Diff Power Supply Card
Function
The Diff Power Supply card is located inside the right door of the Diluter. Refer to
Figure 2.4-4 for location. The Diff Power Supply card contains individual dc-to-dc power
supplies that develop voltages for the TTM. See Figure 2.8-1.
Figure 2.8-1 Diff Power Supply Card Block Diagram
Diff Power Supply +15 V STATUS

-15 V STATUS Diluter 1
card
J6 J9
RF ON Diluter 1
RF ON RET card
+300 V
J4 J1
+6.3V REF
+48 V
+300 V
+48 V RET J3
SYSTEM +300 V
GND +300 V RET
+15 V REG RF
+6.3 V
+6.3 V RET Detector
-15 V Preamp
REG +5 V card
+15 V
+300 V REF
+15 V J69
LS
Preamp +6.3 V REF RS/Opto
J5
J78 Intfc
LASER REF card
-15 V
Laser
Reference J4
+12 V +12 V card
Laser
Power Laser
J1
module
J2
Laser on LED Laser Power Supply
7253115E Laser interlock switch
PN 4277219B 2.8-1
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - LOCAL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE DILUTER
The Diff Power supply card receives the RF ON signal from the Diluter 1 card for
RF oscillator on/off control.
r Low RF ON signal enables the output of the +300 Vdc power supply.
r High RF ON signal disables the output of the +300 Vdc power supply.
Input Outputs
+48 Vdc from the backplane voltage bus r +15 Vdc for analog circuits on RF
Detector Preamp and LS Preamp circuits
r -15 Vdc for RF Detector Preamp and LS
Preamp circuits
r +6.3 Vdc and return for power to RF
vacuum tube filament (if used)
r +300 Vdc and return for flow cell
aperture current and RF oscillation
r +12 Vdc for Laser Power Supply to
generate laser powe
r +5 Vdc for local monitor circuits
Monitors
The Diff Power Supply card:
r Routes the ±15 Vdc status signals to the Diluter 1 card for monitoring by the AMC. The
Analyzer VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES screen displays the voltages. (Select SERVICE
MENU tt DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES.)
r Develops the +300 Vdc reference voltage and routes it to the DIFF PROCESSOR card for
monitoring.
r Routes the +6.3 Vdc to the DIFF PROCESSOR card for monitoring.
Connectors
The Diff Power Supply card connectors are shown in Figure A.3-2 and described in
Table A.3-2.
Laser Interlock Switch

The laser interlock switch is located under the laser module cover. Refer to Figure 1.2-2 for
location. The laser interlock switch is a safety mechanism that removes power from the laser
whenever the laser cover is removed. When the cover is removed:
1. The laser interlock switch disengages, opening the circuit.

2. The open circuit disables the output of the +12 Vdc power supply.
3. The laser and the Laser On LED turn off.
2.8-2 PN 4277219B
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - LOCAL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE DILUTER 2
Laser Power Supply
Function
The Laser Power Supply is located in the right side compartment of the Diluter. Refer to
Figure 2.4-4 for location. The Laser Power Supply consists of two assemblies, the Laser Power
module and the Laser Reference 4 card. See Figure 2.8-2.
Laser Power module. Converts 12 Vdc from the Diff Power Supply card to about +1250 Vdc
for power for the laser.
Laser Reference 4 card. Develops a reference voltage for the laser power and routes the
reference voltage to the DIFF PROCESSOR card for monitoring.
Figure 2.8-2 Laser Power Supply Block Diagram

LASER POWER SUPPLY LASER
J1 LASER REFERENCE 4 CARD REFERENCE
+12 V VOLTAGE
+12 RET
+ 1250 VDC TO LASER

POWER SUPPLY
LASER POWER MODULE
7253117A
Input Output
+12 Vdc from the Diff Power Supply card +1250 Vdc to the laser
Monitors
The Laser Power Supply routes the laser reference voltage status to the DIFF PROCESSOR
card for monitoring.
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card
Function
The Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card is located on the left door of the Diluter.
Refer to Figure 2.4-5 for location. The Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card contains
four dc-to-dc power supplies that generate local power for the Diluter 2 and Diluter 3 cards.
Figure 2.8-3 shows the electronic flow through the card.
Input Outputs
+48 Vdc from the backplane voltage bus r +5 Vdc for digital circuitry
r -15 Vdc for analog circuits
r +15 Vdc for analog circuits
r +24 Vdc and return for solenoid power
r + 24 Vdc and return for the solid state
RF Detector Preamp card
PN 4277219B 2.8-3
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - LOCAL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE DILUTER
Monitors
The Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card voltages are routed to:
r A circuit on the card that uses on-board LEDs to indicate the voltage status. See
Table A.3-14 for the LED indications.
r The Diluter 2 card for monitoring and to develop the DILUTER LEFT status. The
Diluter 2 card routes the monitor voltages to the AMC. The Analyzer
VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES screen displays the values for the ±15 Vdc, +24 Vdc and
+5 Vdc. (Select SERVICE MENU tt DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt
VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES.)
Connectors, LEDs and Test Points

The Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card connectors, LEDs, and test points are shown
in Figure A.3-14. For more information about these components, see Table A.3-13 for the
connectors, Table A.3-14 for the LEDs and Table A.3-15 for the test points.
Figure 2.8-3 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Block Diagram

Solid state RF Detector
P69 Preamp card
J2 24 V RETURN
dc-to-dc + 24 V
J1 power supplies J5 Diluter 2 card
+48 V +24 V
SYSTEM +24 V 24 V RET
GROUND +5 V
+48 V
RETURN +15 V
+5 V
-15 V
J3 J7 Diluter 3 card
+5 V
+15 V +24 V
-15V 24 V RET
1 +5 V
2 Not used
3 +15 V STATUS LEDS
4 -15 V
5 +24 V
6498145B J4 TO Diluter 2
REFERENCE VOLTAGE
2.8-4 PN 4277219B
PNEUMATIC POWER SYSTEM 2
2.9 PNEUMATIC POWER SYSTEM
Summary
The pneumatic power system supplies and monitors the vacuum and pressure needed by the
Diluter. This section describes the development, regulation, monitoring and distribution of
the pneumatic power.
Pneumatic Power Supply Overview

The Pneumatic Power Supply is located in the Power Supply. See Figure 2.9-1 for the old style
Power Supply, Figure 2.9-2 for the new style.
The Pneumatic Power Supply is started as part of the power up sequence. For details, see
SYSTEM RESET Signal, PNEU ON Signal, under Heading 2.6, ELECTRONIC POWER
SYSTEM - POWER UP. In the Pneumatic Power Supply, the Motor Controller card provides
the drivers and power for the compressor/vacuum pump (PM1). PM1, a dc powered,
diaphragm pump, develops unregulated high vacuum and high pressure. The Pneumatic
Power Supply regulates the pressure and distributes 30 psi, 5 psi and unregulated vacuum to
the Diluter.
Figure 2.9-1 Pneumatic Supply Components, Old Style Power Supply
Power Supply RV1 RG1 RG2 Motor

Cooling
intake fan Controller
coils (CL1)
card
Mufflers
Compressor/
Air water vacuum pump (PM1)
separator
Dump (FL1)
6498070A
valve (VL1)
PN 4277219B 2.9-1
PNEUMATIC POWER SYSTEM
Figure 2.9-2 Pneumatic Supply Components, New Style Power Supply
Power Supply RV1 RG1 RG2 Motor

Cooling
intake fan Controller
coils (CL1)
card
Mufflers
Dump Compressor/
Air water valve (VL1) vacuum pump (PM1)
separator
(FL1)
6498075A
Pneumatic Power Development

Refer to the instrument’s pneumatic/hydraulic schematic in Chapter 6.
Pressure Development
The unregulated pressure from the pump is connected to a relief valve (RV1), which regulates
the pressure to 60 psi. The exhaust from RV1 is connected to a muffler (MUF3). From the
relief valve, the 60 psi passes through cooling coils (CL1) mounted over the Power Supply
intake fan, and then through the air water separator (FL1), which collects any condensation.
During Diluter cycles, the DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GEN•S System) or the DILUTER
CPU card (LH 750 System) routes a DRAIN command through the IBUS to the System Power
Controller card to open the dump valve (VL1), a solenoid valve. VL1 drains FL1 to prevent
water overflow into the pressure system.
The 60-psi output is connected to the:
r System Power Controller card for monitoring.

r 30-psi regulator (RG1) for regulation to 30 psi.

r 5-psi regulator (RG2) for regulation to 5 psi.
r Rear of the Power Supply for distribution to the Diluter.
2.9-2 PN 4277219B

Vacuum Development
The unregulated vacuum from the pump is connected to the:

Monitors
Pneumatic Levels and Status

The 60-psi, 30-psi, 5-psi, and high-vacuum lines are connected to transducers on the System
Power Controller card. The System Power Controller card determines the values and develops
the pneumatic status. The System Controller Display provides:
r Digital displays of the unregulated vacuum, 60 psi, 30 psi and 5 psi.

r Dual-color status indicators for the combined Power Supply temperatures and for
combined pneumatic levels.
A green status LED indicates all pneumatic output values are within specifications, red
indicates at least one of the values is outside the specifications. Specifications for the
pneumatic levels are in Table A.1-13.
r Routes the pneumatic status on the IBUS for the AMC which generates a message if any
status is out of tolerance. Refer to Heading 7.2 for Analytical Station messages.
See Heading 2.10 for details about the System Power Controller and System Controller
Display cards.
Temperature Monitoring
See Figure 2.9-3. A thermistor in the compressor senses the internal temperature. At the
System Power Controller card, the TEMP PNEU signal is high when the pneumatic
temperature is within operating limits. If the compressor thermistor senses a temperature
80°C, the Temp Detect circuit on the System Power Controller card changes the TEMP PNEU
signal to a low. The low TEMP PNEU signal from the optocoupler causes the V2 RETURN
signal to go high, which shuts off the +48 V2 dc and the compressor.
PN 4277219B 2.9-3
Figure 2.9-3 Pneumatic On Signals on the System Power Controller Card

/ P W R F A IL P L D P W R F A IL
F r o m B u lk P o w e r S u p p ly A M C
(2 0 m s
d e la y ) P O W E R D O W N
U 3 9
/ V 1 O F F 5 V c o n tro l
T P 2 0
5 V
K e y p a d / V 1 R E T U R N
P O W E R O N
F F
U 8 T P 1 9
T o B u lk P o w e r S u p p ly
P O W E R O F F
+ 5 V c o n tro l
T P 1 8
/ V 2 R E T U R N
/ P N E U O N
T P 1 7
/ T E M P P N E U
7 2 1 9 0 2 0 B
Troubleshooting Tip: You can enable V2 for troubleshooting by placing a jumper across J18/J17.
Pressure Distribution
Refer to the instrument’s pneumatic/hydraulic schematic in Chapter 6 for details.
30 Psi
30 psi is routed from the rear panel of the Power Supply to the rear panel of the Diluter. From
the rear of the Diluter, the 30 psi is routed to:
r Solenoids.
r Pressure manifolds.
r Pinch valves.
r Regulators to develop sheath, diff sample and retic sample pressures.
5 Psi
5 psi is routed from the rear panel of the Power Supply, through the rear panel of the Diluter,
to the 5-psi manifold (MF7). The 5 psi:
r Produces mixing bubbles.

r Drains the WBC bath into the Hgb cuvette.
r Clears the apertures.
r Drains the Hgb cuvette.
r Drains the bath overflow chamber (VC10).
Vacuum Distribution
Refer to the instrument’s pneumatic/hydraulic schematic in Chapter 6 for distribution details.
2.9-4 PN 4277219B
High Vacuum
Unregulated vacuum is routed from the rear of the Power Supply, through the rear panel of
the Diluter, to a vacuum chamber (VC21).
VC21 is a safety device to prevent liquid from entering the vacuum side of the
compressor/vacuum pump. VC21 contains a floating shutoff. If liquid is pulled into VC21,
the floating shutoff rises with the liquid. When the floating shutoff reaches the top of the
vacuum chamber, it blocks the vacuum input line. Blocking the vacuum input line prevents
liquid from being pulled into the line and back to the vacuum pump.
VC21 is connected to the vacuum overflow tank (VC22). VC22 distributes vacuum in the
Diluter to the:
r Waste chambers to drain liquid.

r Reagent reservoirs to refill the reservoirs.
r Cleaning agent pump to refill the pump.
r Sheath and backwash tanks to refill the tanks.
VC22 also traps any liquid that overflows into the vacuum line and contains a float sensor to
sense the level of the liquid. The float sensor is connected to the Sensor Distribution card and
is monitored by the Diluter 2 card. If the float sensor is activated, indicating there is liquid in
the overflow tank:
1. SL39 and SL40 are energized for 5 seconds to drain VC22.

2. If the sensor is still activated after 5 seconds of draining, the cycle is stopped and SL39
and SL40 are energized for another 7 seconds.
3. If the sensor is still activated after the additional 7 seconds of draining, the instrument
generates a message. Refer to Heading 7.2 for Analytical Station messages.
Low Vacuum
High vacuum is connected to the low vacuum regulator (RG2) for regulation to 6 in. Hg. The
low vacuum is connected to the vacuum isolator (VC1), which distributes vacuum in the
Diluter for functions such as aperture count.
The PVT card monitors the low vacuum.
PVT Card
Function
The PVT card is located in the right compartment of the Diluter. Refer to Figure 2.4-4 for
location. The PVT card:
r Converts the diff ambient temperature thermistor signal for monitoring.

Note: This function only happens on older GEN•S Systems with a diff ambient
temperature thermistor. Newer GEN•S Systems and the LH 750 System do not have a
diff ambient temperature thermistor.
PN 4277219B 2.9-5
r Uses transducers to convert the following pneumatic signals to an analog voltage for
monitoring -
t Low vacuum for counting
t Sheath pressure
t Diff sample pressure
t Retic sample pressure.
Input
r Sheath pressure from RG4
r Diff sample pressure from RG3
r Retic pressure from RG6
r Count vacuum from RG2
r Diff ambient temperature from the thermistor
Monitors
The PVT card routes:
r Diff ambient temperature, sheath pressure, diff sample pressure and retic pressure signals
to the DIFF PROCESSOR card for monitoring
r Count vacuum to the Diluter 1 card via the Sensor Distribution card for monitoring.
If the count vacuum exceeds the tolerance, the cycle stops. The Analyzer
VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES screen displays the count vacuum level. (Select SERVICE
MENU tt DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES.) Selecting F92 on
the Diluter keypad also displays the vacuum.
Connectors
The electrical and pneumatic connections for the PVT card are shown in Figure A.3-16 and
described in Table A.3-17.
2.9-6 PN 4277219B
POWER DEVELOPMENT CONTROL 2
2.10 POWER DEVELOPMENT CONTROL
Summary
Management of power development in the Analytical Station is accomplished through two
components in the Power Supply:
r The System Power Controller card processes the Power Supply signals and voltages for
the AMC.
r The System Power Controller Display provides a visual display of the Power Supply
pneumatic and voltage levels and status.
This section describes the System Power Controller card and the System Power Controller
Display. See Figure 2.10-1 for an overview. Refer to Figure 2.2-1 for the location of the
components. This section also describes the conditions that shut down the Power Supply.
Figure 2.10-1 System Power Controller Card and System Power Controller Display Block Diagram
SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER CARD SYSTEM POWER
CONTROLLER DISPLAY
CR8 A/D CONVERTER
TRANSDUCERS ZERO ADJ GAIN ADJ J3 J1
VACUUM
SELECT DISPLAY
60 PSI MSD
ANALOG MONITOR CIRCUIT NSD DECODER
5 PSI SEGMENT SELECT
SCALER LSD
30 PSI
AC LINE CR1 PNEU

J5
J1 IBUS J2
+5.2 V PLD CR2 DC
TO REAR OF RS485
POWER CONTROL
SUPPLY CR3 TEMP
J7 POWER ON/OFF
TEMP PNEU CIR CUIT CR4 AC
J4
+48 V2 CR 1
FROM BULK +48 V1 CR 2 J6
BULK POWER
POWER +5.2 V CONTROL CR 3 TO BULK
SUPPLY
FILTER POWER SUPPLY
+12 V DC CR 4 MONITORING
CARD
+5.2 V CONTROL
POWER +15 VDC
SUPPLY -15 VDC FOR SPC CARD
POWER SUPPLY
POWER +5 VDC CIRCUITS 7219023B
SUPPLY
System Power Controller Card
Function
The System Power Controller card:
r Manages the Analytical Station power off and power on routines.

r Manages the Power Supply electronic and pneumatic supplies.
r Monitors the Power Supply voltages and pneumatics for proper levels.
PN 4277219B 2.10-1
POWER DEVELOPMENT CONTROL
r Reports levels and status.

r Converts ac and pneumatic inputs to analog values.
r Develops ±15 Vdc and +5 Vdc for on-board use.
Inputs
r Bulk Power Supply dc voltages
r ac input voltage
r Pneumatic inputs for monitoring
r Temperature inputs from Bulk Power Supply and compressor/vacuum pump
Monitors
Pneumatic Supply Levels. The System Power Controller card:
r Routes the 60 psi, 30 psi, 5 psi and vacuum inputs through pressure transducers,
converts them to analog voltages, processes them into digital values, monitors the
individual values and routes them to the System Power Controller Display.
r Develops a combined pneumatic status, determines if the combined status is good or
bad, and routes the status signal to the System Power Controller Display.
Temperature. A heat sensitive switch in the Bulk Power Supply and a thermistor in the
compressor/vacuum pump sense the temperature. The System Power Controller card:
r Monitors the heat sensitive switch. If the Bulk Power Supply temperature exceeds 70°C,
the heat sensitive switch shuts down the Electronic Power Supply and generates a high
OVERTEMP signal to the System Power controller card. For details, see Conditions that
Shut Down the Power Supply, Power Supply Overheating.
r Monitors the thermistor. If the compressor/vacuum pump temperature exceeds 80°C, the
thermistor shuts down the compressor/vacuum pump and generates a high TEMP PNEU
signal to the System Power controller card.
r Determines a combined temperature status, determines if the combined status is good or
bad, and routes the status signal to the System Power Controller Display.
Note: Two other thermistors in the Power Supply, the intake and exhaust fan thermistors,
automatically regulate the speed of the fans, depending on the temperature inside the Power
Supply.
Input Line Voltage. The System Power Controller card:
r Monitors the ac POWER FAIL signal from the Bulk Power Supply. For details, see
Conditions that Shut Down the Power Supply, Insufficient Ac Input.
r Converts and processes the ac input line voltage into a digital value and routes the value
to the System Power Controller Display.
r Uses digital thresholds to determine the ac status and routes the status signal to the
System Power Controller Display.
2.10-2 PN 4277219B
Bulk Power Supply Voltages. The System Power Controller card:
r Monitors the +48 V1 dc, +48 V2 dc and +12 Vdc voltages from the Bulk Power Supply
individually and displays the results via on-board status LEDs.
The status LEDs are dual-color (red and green) LEDs. The green is powered by the
monitored voltage, the red by the 5.2 control voltage. Lighting both LEDs together
produces a third color option, amber. Refer to Table A.4-4 for a description of what each
LED color indicates.
r Develops a combined dc voltage status, determines if the combined status is good or bad,
and routes the status signal to the System Power Controller Display.
A/D Converter. The System Power Controller card displays the status of its A/D converter via
an on-board status LED. Refer to Table A.4-4 for a description of what each LED color
indicates.
The System Power Controller card routes the SPC status to the APS2 card for access by the
AMC. The Analyzer ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES screen displays the values for the
pneumatic and line voltages. (Select SERVICE MENU tt DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt
ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES.) If any level is out of tolerance, a system message is
generated.
Connectors and LEDs

The System Power Controller card connectors and LEDs are shown in Figure A.4-4. For more
information about these components, see Table A.4-3 for the connectors and Table A.4-4 for
the LEDs.
System Power Controller Display
Function
The System Power Controller Display is an extension of the System Power Controller card
that displays the current electronic and pneumatic levels and status in the Power Supply. See
Figure 2.10-2.
Figure 2.10-2 System Power Controller Display

ELECTRONIC AND PNEUMATIC LEVEL DISPLAYS

TEMP DC
STATUS STATUS
INDICATORS INDICATORS
7253122A
PN 4277219B 2.10-3
The System Power Controller Display contains:
r Decoders to interpret signals from the System Power Controller card.

r 12 red, 7-segment LED displays, in 5 banks to display electronic and pneumatic values.
r 4 dual-color red and green LEDs to display status.
Electronic and Pneumatic Level Displays. The System Power Controller card sends
information to the System Power Controller Display as a bank address and values for the
most, next, and least significant digits (MSD, NSD and LSD, respectively). The System Power
Controller Display decodes and outputs the information as select display and segment display
addresses. The addresses turn on the corresponding LED segments for visual display on the
front of the Power Supply. The addresses are clocked to provide a continually updated display.
Power Supply Status Displays. The four status indicator LEDs on the front of the Power
Supply are green when a status is within specifications, red when a status is outside of
specifications. Table 2.10-1 describes the values monitored by each status indicator LED. See
Table A.1-13 for Pneumatic Power Supply specifications, Table A.1-24 for ac line voltage
specifications.
Table 2.10-1 System Power Controller Display Status LEDs
LED Monitors
PNEU Combined vacuum and pressure levels

TEMP Electronic and Pneumatic Power Supplies’ temperatures
AC Ac input voltage
DC Combined +48 Vdc Analyzer, +48 Vdc compressor and +12 Vdc supplies
Conditions that Shut Down the Power Supply
Insufficient Ac Input
When the ac input goes too low, the Bulk Power Supply shuts down. However, both +48 Vdc
supplies have a 40-millisecond (minimum) output holdup time allowing the AMC to save
data to RAM and perform an orderly shutdown before dc power is lost.
The Bulk Power Supply routes the AC POWER FAIL signal to the System Power Controller
card. This signal is high when the ac input is within specifications.
When the Bulk Power Supply detects a low ac input, an internal 20-millisecond timer starts.
After the 20 milliseconds elapse, the ac input is sampled again. If the signal is now high, the
ac is within specifications. Waiting 20 milliseconds and sampling the ac input a second time
when the first signal is low allows the instrument to filter out power glitches caused by
momentary ac losses, such as brownouts.
If the ac input remains low, the Bulk Power Supply outputs a low AC POWER FAIL signal to
the System Power Controller card. When the System Power Controller card receives a low AC
POWER FAIL signal, it sends the PWR FAIL (DISABLE CMOS MEM) signal to the AMC. The
AMC generates the DISABLE RAM signal, returning battery protection to the RAM before the
Bulk Power Supply shuts off.
2.10-4 PN 4277219B
Power Supply Overheating
When the temperature reaches 70° C, the heat sensitive switch within the Bulk Power Supply
sends a high OVERTEMP signal to the System Power Controller card. The switch
automatically shuts down the bulk power supply to prevent damage to the components.
Pressing POWER OFF

Refer to Power-Off Signals under Heading 2.6, ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER
UP, for an explanation of the power off sequence.
PN 4277219B 2.10-5
2.10-6 PN 4277219B
SYSTEM CONTROL 2
2.11 SYSTEM CONTROL
Summary
Master control of the instrument is accomplished through three components in the Analyzer:
r The AMC (Analyzer Microcontroller card) runs the Analytical Station software which
controls all system timing.
r The COMM (Communication) INTERFACE card provides a serial interface between the
Analyzer and all other subsystems.
r The Scope Module provides the user interface for the instrument.
This section describes the functions, inputs and outputs of the AMC, COMM INTERFACE
card, and the Scope Module. This section also describes the RS/Opto Intfc card, the main
electrical bridge between the Analyzer and the Diluter.
For information on power development control, see Heading 2.10, for information on Diluter
control, see Heading 2.12.
System Control Overview

Figure 2.11-1 provides an overview of system control, showing the components with the
communications paths linking the instrument components.
Figure 2.11-1 System Control Overview Block Diagram

ANALYZER
AMC
RED/WHITE
PLT API /
PROCESSOR/ SBUS
PROCESSOR SC/A CARD *
RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR 2
*
DILUTER
PROCESSOR/
DIFF
ANALOG RS232 COMMUNICATION RS232 DILUTER CPU SCOPE
PROCESSOR INTERFACE MODULE
CARD CARD *
CARD CARD
RS232 (SM)
RS232 (RAW)
IBUS
OPTOISOL
RS232
RS232
RF BCD BCS
LS IBUS DILUTER 1
PREAMP
PREAMP CARD PVT
CARD
CARD
RS/OPTO
IBUS
INTFC DILUTER
CARD IBUS CBL IBUS
ADAPTER
OPTOISO RS232 (SM)
IBUS
RS232 ANALYZER
HS-RS232 (RAW)
HGB DIFF POWER

PREAMP RS232 (SM)
SUPPLY CARD DILUTER 3 DILUTER 2
RS232 (SM) CARD CARD
PARALLEL
RS232 (SM)
RS232 (SM)
ISOLATED
DILUTER/SOLENOID/
OPTO
8-BIT
OPTICS POWER SUPPLY

DILUTER CARD
POWER SUPPLY
RS232 (AUX) WORKSTATION
SLIDEMAKER SPC
CARD
RS232
( CHANNELS FOR
6498030B ANALYTICAL STATION #2 ON GEN S SYSTEM)
* Two circuit cards are listed. The first card is used in the GEN•S System, the second in the
LH 750 System.
PN 4277219B 2.11-1
SYSTEM CONTROL
AMC
Function
The AMC is located in the Analyzer. Refer to Figure 2.3-1 for location.
The AMC contains:
r 80186 microprocessor, 8087 math coprocessor and 82188 bus controller

r 384K of EPROM for the program and 128K of RAM for calculations
r Fully functional real-time system clock
r Power-fail write protect circuitry for the system clock and RAM
r Lithium battery to backup the system clock and the RAM containing system
configuration, API card voltage settings, and calibration factors
r 16-bit system bus structure in the Analyzer for address, control and data lines
r 8-position DIP switch for system configuration
r Jumpers for battery configuration.
The AMC:
r Provides the main program which controls the system timing.

r Communicates serially with the DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GEN•S System) or the
DILUTER CPU card (LH 750 System), the DIFF PROCESSOR card, the Workstation,
and the SlideMaker through the COMM INTERFACE card to synchronize the Analytical
Station, Workstation, and SlideMaker.
r Monitors the system status of the Diluter and Power Supply and generates status and
alert messages for display on the Scope Module.
r Controls the DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GEN•S System) or the DILUTER CPU card
(LH 750 System) which controls all Diluter timing functions and accumulates CBC data.
r Analyzes the CBC data in the GEN•S System; routes the raw CBC data to the
Workstation for analysis in the LH 750 System.
r Controls the DIFF PROCESSOR card which accumulate VCS raw data.
r Initiates the system reset signals during power up, manual reset using the RESET button,
and power fail recovery.
RESET Switch
The RESET switch is a normally closed switch in the AMC Power Fail circuit that allows the
operator to reset the Analytical Station. See Figure 2.11-2 for the RESET signal flow. Pressing
the RESET button on the Analyzer (see Figure 2.11-3) opens the RESET switch, generating a
high PWR FAIL signal, and causing the AMC to generate the RESET signal.
If the reset switch opens during a cycle, the cycle is stopped, any data is discarded, and the
instrument performs the drain, rinse and backwash functions; checks the Analyzer memory;
and checks the levels of the reagents and waste container in preparation for the next cycle.
2.11-2 PN 4277219B
SYSTEM CONTROL 2
Figure 2.11-2 RESET Signal Block Diagram
A M C
J 5
R E S E T A A A B
S Y S T E M R E S E T A P S 1 c a rd
A S P 2 c a rd
C O M M IN T E R F A C E c a rd
N C D IL U T E R P R O C E S S O R c a rd /
D IL U T E R C P U c a rd *
D IF F P R O C E S S O R c a rd
J 26
J 19 A P I S IG N A L G E N E R A T O R c a rd /
B A B B R /W /P S C /A c a rd *
S P C R E D /W H IT E P R O C E S S O R c a rd /
P W R F A IL 31 31 R E D /W H IT E P R O C E S S O R 2 c a rd *
P in 1 1 P L A T E L E T P R O C E S S O R c a rd
C R T
D ig ita l b a c k p la n e 7219022B
Figure 2.11-3 Analyzer RESET Button
Reset
button Reset
button
J27
GEN S System LH 750 System
J26
J24 J19
J26
RESET
6498125B
DIP Switches and Jumpers

Refer to Figure A.2-1 for the location of the DIP switch and the jumpers on the AMC. Refer to
Table A.2-1 and Table A.2-2 for the DIP switch settings and to AMC, Jumpers, under
Heading A.2, for the jumper settings.
PN 4277219B 2.11-3
SYSTEM CONTROL
COMM INTERFACE Card

Function
The COMM INTERFACE card is located in the Analyzer. Refer to Figure 2.3-1 for location.
The COMM INTERFACE card contains:
r Communication circuits consisting of DUARTS, opto-isolators and PAL circuits.

r A/D converter for Hgb signal conversion.
r Two 8-position DIP switches for port configuration.
The COMM INTERFACE card:
r Provides the main communications between the AMC and the rest of the system.
r Converts the analog Hgb-blank and Hgb-read signals to digital signals.
r Converts between 16-bit parallel data (from the SBUS) and serial data, for routing on
communication paths. See Figure 2.11-4.
Figure 2.11-4 COMM INTERFACE Card Communication Links

ANALYZER
AMC
RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR/ PLT SBUS
API /
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR SC/A CARD *
PROCESSOR 2
*
DILUTER
DIFF PROCESSOR/
ANALOG RS232 COMMUNICATION RS232 SCOPE
PROCESSOR INTERFACE DILUTER CPU
CARD CARD CARD * MODULE
CARD
RS232 (SM)
RS232 (RAW)
IBUS
OPTOISOL
RS232
RS232
RS232
RF BCD BCS
LS DILUTER 1
PREAMP PREAMP CARD
CARD PVT
CARD
RS/OPTO
IBUS
INTFC
CARD DILUTER
CBL
ADAPTER
OPTOISO RS232 (SM)
IBUS
RS232 ANALYZER
HS-RS232 (RAW)
HGB DIFF POWER RS232 (SM)

PREAMP SUPPLY CARD DILUTER 2
DILUTER 3
RS232 (SM) CARD
CARD
RS232 (SM)
RS232 (SM)
PARALLEL
ISOLATED
DILUTER/SOLENOID/
OPTICS POWER SUPPLY
OPTO
8-BIT
CARD
DILUTER
POWER SUPPLY
RS232 (AUX) WORKSTATION SPC
SLIDEMAKER
CARD
RS232
(CHANNELS FOR
ANALYTICAL STATION #2 ON GEN S SYSTEM)
6498032B
LH 750 System.
2.11-4 PN 4277219B
SYSTEM CONTROL 2
The communications links are:
r A system bus (SBUS)

r A 16-bit data bus structure for communication within the Analyzer
r The following serial interfaces for RS232 communications to -
t DIFF PROCESSOR card
t DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GEN•S System) or the DILUTER CPU card (LH 750
System)
t RS/Opto Intfc card for the Workstation
t RS/Opto Intfc card for the SlideMaker.
Switches
See Figure A.2-4 for the location of the DIP switches. See Table A.2-7 and Table A.2-8 for the
DIP switch settings.
RS/Opto Intfc Card

Function
The RS/Opto Intfc card is located in the Diluter. Refer to Figure 2.4-4 for location. The
RS/Opto Intfc card is the main electrical bridge between the Analyzer and Diluter, routing
IBUS and control signals. See Figure 2.11-5.
The RS/Opto Intfc card:
r Provides SCSI connectors for IBUS (RS485) communication links to the Diluter Cbl
Adapter card, the Diluter 1 card, and the DILUTER PROCESSOR card on the GEN•S
System or the DILUTER CPU card on the LH 750 System (via the Analyzer backplane).
r Gathers optocoupled, TTL, and analog signals from the following components and
converts them to RS232 signals for routing to the Analyzer-
t LS Preamp module - routes VCS mode, gain and LS offset signals from the DIFF
PROCESSOR card and LS signals to the ANALOG card.
t Hgb Preamp module - routes Hgb voltages to the COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
card.
t PVT card - routes monitoring signals for ambient temperature and TTM pressures to
the DIFF PROCESSOR card.
t Diff Power Supply card - routes monitoring voltages to the DIFF PROCESSOR card.
r Provides connectors and pathways for the -
t Workstation - three channels of RS232 communication signals. One is for Diff and
Retic raw data (high speed), the second is for the SlideMaker, and the third is for the
AMC card via the COMM INTERFACE card.
t SlideMaker (via the Diluter 3 card) - two channels of RS232 communication signals.
One is for the Workstation and the other is for the AMC card via the COMM
INTERFACE card.
Connectors
The RS/Opto Intfc card connectors are shown in Figure A.3-18 and described in Table A.3-19.
PN 4277219B 2.11-5
SYSTEM CONTROL
Figure 2.11-5 RS/Opto Intfc Card Communication Links
ANALYZER
AMC
RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR/ PLT API /
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR SC/A CARD *
PROCESSOR 2
*
DILUTER
DIFF COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR/
ANALOG RS232 RS232 SCOPE
PROCESSOR INTERFACE DILUTER CPU
CARD CARD MODULE
CARD CARD *
RS232 (SM)
RS232 (RAW)
OPTOISOL
RS232
RS232
RS232
RF BCD BCS
LS DILUTER 1
PREAMP PREAMP CARD
CARD PVT
CARD
RS/OPTO
IBUS
INTFC
CARD DILUTER
CBL
ADAPTER
OPTOISO RS232 (SM)
IBUS
RS232 ANALYZER
HS-RS232 (RAW)
HGB DIFF POWER RS232 (SM)

PREAMP SUPPLY CARD DILUTER 2
DILUTER 3
RS232 (SM) CARD
CARD
RS232 (SM)
RS232 (SM)
PARALLEL
ISOLATED
DILUTER/SOLENOID/
OPTICS POWER SUPPLY
OPTO
8-BIT
CARD
DILUTER
POWER SUPPLY
RS232 (AUX) WORKSTATION SLIDEMAKER SPC
CARD
RS232
(CHANNELS FOR
ANALYTICAL STATION #2 ON GEN S SYSTEM)
6498031B
LH 750 System.
Scope Module
Function
The Scope Module plugs into the CRT backplane in the Analyzer. Refer to Figure 2.3-1
(GEN•S System) or Figure 2.3-4 (LH 750 System) for location of the Scope Module.
The Scope module consists of the Scope 1, Scope 2 and CRT4 Display cards; the Analyzer
buttons (keypad); and the Analyzer CRT. While the Analyzer buttons and display look
different on the GEN•S System and the LH 750 System, the Scope module behind them is the
same.
The Scope Module is a user interface that displays:
r Messages and information about the Analytical Station status

r Data
r Electronic test signals for troubleshooting and aligning the TTM.
2.11-6 PN 4277219B
SYSTEM CONTROL 2
The Scope Module routes operator requests for Analyzer menu options and system
configuration selections, via the Analyzer buttons (keypad), to the AMC. For a summary of
the Analyzer menu options, refer to Figure A.10-1 (GEN•S System) or Figure A.10-2 (LH 750
System). For accessing the service options, refer to Heading 4.2 for the SERVICE MENU,
Heading 4.3 for the SCOPE MENU.
The Scope 1 and 2 cards provide displays of:
r Analog signals
r Blood sample signals.
The CRT4 Display card provides:
r SBUS interface
r Video display, memory and drivers for the CRT
r Keyboard interface
r Scope 1 and 2 card interface.
r A brightness potentiometer.
Note: On the LH 750 System, the brightness potentiometer has been moved to make
access to it much easier. Refer to CRT Intensity Adjustment on the LH 750 System under
Heading 4.34 for the procedure.
The CRT4 Display card has one DIP switch, SW1. Refer to Figure A.2-5 for the location of the
DIP switch and to Table A.2-9 for the settings.
Inputs
r +12 Vdc from APS2 card to CRT4 Display card for power for the Analyzer CRT
r RED 1, 2, 3 and WHT 1, 2, 3 buffered signals from the RED/WHITE PROCESSSOR card
(GEN•S System) or the RED/WHITE PROCESSSOR 2 card (LH 750 System) for pulse
display during counting or electronic pulse tests
r DC, RF and LS buffered signals from the ANALOG card for pulse display during
counting or special functions
PN 4277219B 2.11-7
SYSTEM CONTROL
2.11-8 PN 4277219B
DILUTER CONTROL 2
2.12 DILUTER CONTROL
Summary
Control of the Diluter is accomplished through the following components:
r The AMC instructs the DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GEN•S System) or the DILUTER
CPU card (LH 750 System) to initiate the Diluter tasks.
r The DILUTER PROCESSOR or the DILUTER CPU card sends program instructions to
the Diluter 1, Diluter 2, Diluter 3 and Diluter 4 cards, and monitors the status of Diluter
operations.
r The Diluter 1, 2, 3 and 4 cards develop local power and contain drivers for the hardware
components of the Diluter.
r The Diluter/numeric keypad displays error messages and allows the user to manually
control certain functions.
This section includes an overview block diagram of the Diluter control system, see
Figure 2.12-1, and a description of the DILUTER PROCESSOR card, the DILUTER CPU card,
the IBUS cable and the RS485 Interface modules, the Diluter Cbl Adapter, Diluter 1, Diluter 2,
Diluter 3 and Diluter 4 cards, and the Diluter/numeric keypad. For more information about
the AMC, see AMC under Heading 2.11, System Control.
Figure 2.12-1 Diluter Control Overview

D IL U T E R
P R O C E S S O R / A N A L Y Z E R N E W D IL U T E R K E Y P A D A N D O L D D IL U T E R
D IL U T E R C P U IN T E R C O N N E C T S D IS P L A Y IN T E R C O N N E C T S
C A R D *
S B U S
R S 4 8 5
P V T D IF F A M B IE N T T H E R M IS T O R D IL U T E R
IB U S P R E S S U R E A N D V A C U U M R E G U L A T O R S
C A R D
IB U S
R S /O P T O
IN T F C C A R D B A R -C O D E
D IL U T E R 1 D E C O D E R
C A R D B A R -C O D E S C A N N E R
C A R D
S E N S O R
R S 4 8 5 D IL U T E R S E N S O R S /S W IT C H E S
D IS T R IB U T IO N
C A R D H G B L A M P P V T
C A R D C O U N T V A C
IB U S
F O R S O L ID
S T A T E D IF F P O W E R L IG H T S C A T T E R
R F D E T E C T O R F L O W C E L L
P R E A M P C A R D S U P P L Y C A R D P R E A M P M O D U L E
D IL U T E R C B L IB U S
S W E E P -F L O W R E S E R V O IR A N D S O L E N O ID S
A D A P T E R R S 4 8 5
C A R D D IL U T E R / R E S E R V O IR IN T F C C A R D
S O L E N O ID /O P T IC S D IL U T E R 2
C A R D P R O B E W IP E IN T E R C O N N E C T
IB U S C A R D B L O O D D E T E C T O R S , F R O N T A N D R E A R
IB U S
D IF F H E A T E R T H E R M IS T O R
R S 4 8 5 M IX M O T O R S H E A T E R S
R S 4 8 5 D IL U T E R 4 D IL U T E R A M B IE N T T H E R M IS T O R
S
Y S T E M D IL U T E R 3 C A R D
C A R D P E L T IE R M O D U L E
P
O W E R S O L E N O ID S
C O N T R O L L E R S T A IN C H A M B E R T H E R M IS T O R
C A R D S L ID E M A K E R S E R IA L P O R T
6 4 9 8 0 3 3 B
P O W E R S U P P L Y S L ID E M A K E R P A R A L L E L P O R T
† This function is only on GEN•S Systems with software 4A and higher and on LH 750 Systems.
PN 4277219B 2.12-1
DILUTER CONTROL
DILUTER PROCESSOR vs DILUTER CPU Cards - the Old and New Diluter Interconnects
Two Diluter interconnects are in use, the original (old) Diluter interconnects used in the
GEN•S System and the current (new) Diluter interconnects used in the LH 750 System.
The DILUTER PROCESSOR card is part of the old design. This design includes the DILUTER
PROCESSOR card and a compatible Diluter 1 card and Diluter keypad. In this design the
Diluter keypad interfaces with the Diluter 1 card.
In the new design, the DILUTER CPU card replaces the DILUTER PROCESSOR card. This
design includes the DILUTER CPU card and its compatible Diluter 1 card, numeric keypad
(which performs the same functions as the Diluter keypad), analog backplane, and digital
backplane. In this design the numeric keypad interfaces with the DILUTER CPU card.
ATTENTION: The cards for the new Diluter interconnects are a set and cannot be mixed with the
cards from the old.
DILUTER PROCESSOR CARD
Function
The DILUTER PROCESSOR card is located in the Analyzer of the GEN•S System. Refer to
Figure 2.3-1 for location. The DILUTER PROCESSOR card contains:
r 8085 microprocessor, 128K PROM and 8K static RAM for program instructions and
Diluter control
r 1K dual-port RAM and DUART for serial communication with the AMC via the COMM
INTERFACE card
r On-board RS485 interface module for parallel communications on the IBUS.
The DILUTER PROCESSOR card uses these components to:
r Receive requests from the AMC and provide operating instructions to the Diluter
modules to perform the tasks.
r Monitor status information to maintain Diluter operations.
r Report status information to the AMC.
Switch
The DILUTER PROCESSOR card has one DIP switch, SW1. See Figure A.2-8 for location,
Table A.2-12 for settings.
DILUTER CPU CARD
Function
The DILUTER CPU card is located in the Analyzer of the LH 750 System. Refer to
Figure 2.3-4 for location. The DILUTER CPU card contains:
r 8085 microprocessor, 128K PROM and 8K static RAM for program instructions and
Diluter control
2.12-2 PN 4277219B
DILUTER CONTROL 2
r 1K dual-port RAM and DUART for serial communication with the AMC via the COMM
INTERFACE card
r On-board RS485 interface module for parallel communications on the IBUS.
r On-board PIC microcontrollers for communication with the PIC microcontrollers on the
Keypad and Display Interface card.
The DILUTER CPU card uses these components to:
r Receive requests from the AMC and provide operating instructions to the Diluter
modules to perform the tasks.
r Monitor status information to maintain Diluter operations.
r Report status information to the AMC.
r Interfaces with the Diluter/numeric keypad.
Switch
The DILUTER CPU card has one DIP switch, SW1. See Figure A.2-7 for location,
Table A.2-11 for settings.
Interface Bus (IBUS) and RS485 Interface Modules

The IBUS is a parallel communication link for transferring control signals and data between
the System Power Controller, DILUTER PROCESSOR or DILUTER CPU, Diluter 1, Diluter 2
and Diluter 3 cards. Each card contains an RS485 Interface module. This module is a SIMM
style assembly that provides bidirectional communication. The 50-pin, SCSI connectors
provide the physical connections between the cards.
Diluter Cbl Adapter Card
Function
The Diluter Cbl Adapter card is located in the Diluter. Refer to Figure 2.4-5 (GEN•S System)
or Figure 2.4-13 (LH 750 System) for location. The Diluter Cbl Adapter card is a bridge
connection for the IBUS 50-pin, SCSI connectors, linking the System Power Controller,
Diluter 2, Diluter 3 and RS/Opto Intfc cards.
Connectors
The Diluter Cbl Adapter card connectors are shown in Figure A.3-13 and described in
Table A.3-12.
Diluter 1 Card
Styles in Use
Two styles of Diluter 1 cards are currently in use, depending on the Diluter interconnects.
r The original Diluter 1 card, which is used with the old Diluter interconnects, interfaces
directly with the Diluter keypad and routes the +5 V control voltage and the control
return to the keypad.
PN 4277219B 2.12-3
DILUTER CONTROL
r The new Diluter 1 card, which is used with the new Diluter interconnects, does not
interface with the numeric keypad or route 5 V control voltage and the control return to
the keypad. It does, however, provide a pull-down resistor for the +5.2 V control voltage.
For more information on the role of the Diluter 1 card in the old and new Diluter
interconnects, refer to Heading 2.6, ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER UP.
Function
The Diluter 1 card is located in the Diluter. See Figure 2.4-4 (GEN•S System) or
Figure 2.4-12 (LH 750 System) for location. The Diluter 1 card contains:
r Individual switching power supplies

r Monitor circuitry
r Adjustment and driver circuitry for the Hgb lamp
r RS485 Interface module for IBUS communication link
r Circuitry for RS232 communications with the Bar-Code Decoder card
r LED status indicators
r Interface connections with the Diluter keypad (original style only)
r Pull-down resistor for the +5.2 V CONTROL voltage (new style only).
Using these components, the Diluter 1 card:
r Develops voltages for use locally and by Diluter components. See Figure 2.12-2 for
power distribution.
Figure 2.12-2 Diluter 1 Card Power Supply Distribution
J 7 J 5 J 4
+ 4 8 V D C
H G B V O L T A G E H G B L A M P S U P P L Y
S Y S T E M T O
P O W E R
G N D L A M P R E T H G B
S U P P L Y
-4 8 V D C R E T + 1 5 V D C L A M P
S E N S O R
-1 5 V D C D IS T R IB U T IO N
C A R D
+ 5 V D C
+ 5 V D C
D C -T O -D C
+ 1 5 V D C
P O W E R
S U P P L Y -1 5 V D C
P O W E R + 9 V D C
S U P P L Y
P O W E R -9 V D C T O B A R -C O D E
S U P P L Y D E C O D E R
P O W E R -5 V D C
C A R D
S U P P L Y
+ 5 V D C
6 4 9 8 1 4 8 B J 6
2.12-4 PN 4277219B
DILUTER CONTROL 2
r Adjusts the Hgb lamp voltage. The user initiates the adjustment from the ANALYZER
FUNCTIONS menu, HGB LAMP ADJUST screen. The AMC initiates a change in the
lamp driver, which alters the lamp voltage to produce an acceptable analog voltage at the
Hgb Preamp module.
r Receives bar-code data from the Bar-Code Decoder card using the RS232 communication
path. During scanning, the bar-code information is converted to TTL signals and routed
to the DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GEN•S System) or DILUTER CPU card (LH 750
System).
r Monitors the RF DETECT signal from the RF Detector Preamp card and routes the RF
ON signal to the Diff Power Supply card to control the output of the +300 Vdc power
supply on the Diff Power Supply card.
r Receives cassette transport assembly sensor and switch TTL level signals from the Sensor
Distribution card. The Sensor signals are routed to the DILUTER PROCESSOR card
(GEN•S System) or DILUTER CPU card (LH 750 System), which uses the sensor status
to perform Diluter operations and sends the status to the AMC.
For more information, see:
r Heading 2.14 for details about the Sensor Distribution card, Bar-Code Decoder card and
Cassette Transport Assembly
r Heading 2.21 for details about the RF Detector Preamp card.
Input Outputs
+48 Vdc and return from the backplane r +5 Vdc and return for local digital
voltage bus circuits
r ±15 Vdc for local analog circuits and
electronic manometer power
r Voltage for Hgb lamp power
t +6 Vdc and return from original
Diluter 1 card
t +7.2 Vdc and return from new
Diluter 1 card
r ±9 Vdc for the Bar-Code Decoder and
Bar-Code Scanner cards
r -5 Vdc for the Bar-Code Decoder and
Bar-Code Scanner cards
Monitoring
The Diluter 1 card:
r Develops voltage values and statuses for the +5 V, Hgb lamp voltage and the ±15 V power
supplies. The AMC generates a system message if any voltage is outside its specifications.
Refer to Heading 7.2 for Analytical Station messages.
Note: The voltage supplied by the Hgb voltage power supply differs, depending on the
style of Diluter 1 card. On the original card it supplies 6.0 Vdc, on the new card 7.2 Vdc.
While this difference affects the test point readings it does not affect the voltage reading
PN 4277219B 2.12-5
DILUTER CONTROL
on the Analyzer screen. The software adjusts the voltage reading from the new Diluter 1
card to mimic the reading from the old Diluter 1 card for the Analyzer display and for
determining if the voltage reading is within specifications.
r Receives ±15 V from the Diff Power Supply and develops the voltage value and status
that are routed on the IBUS for display.
r Routes all the voltage values and statuses as DILUTER 1 status to the APS2 card for
display on the Analyzer VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES screen. (Select SERVICE MENU tt
DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES.)
Connectors and LEDs

The Diluter 1 card connectors and LEDs are shown in Figure A.3-3. The connectors are
described in Table A.3-3. The LEDs, which indicate the status of voltages and signals, are
Diluter 2 Card
Styles in Use
Four styles of Diluter 2 cards are currently in use.
r The original Diluter 2 card is used on GEN•S Systems (software 3A or lower) without
the SlideMaker option.
r The Diluter 2 card is used on GEN•S Systems (software 3A or lower) with a SlideMaker
option. This Diluter 2 card added a connector for BD3. This card is also compatible with
GEN•S Systems (software 3A or lower) without the SlideMaker option.
r The Diluter 2 REL (reliability) card is used on GEN•S Systems with software 4A and
higher. This Diluter 2 card added drivers for four solenoids and monitoring for the
sweep-flow reservoir. On this Diluter 2 card the bubble/blood detector test points and
adjustments are relocated to the upper left edge of the card for easier access.
r The Diluter 2 RBD (remote blood detector) card is used on the LH 750 System. Because
of the lack of space between the left side of the Analytical Station and the LH SlideMaker,
the bubble/blood detector test points and adjustments are removed from this Diluter 2
card and relocated on the BD ADJ card in the Analyzer.
Function
r Monitor circuitry
r LED status indicators.
The Diluter 2 card:
r Uses +15 Vdc from the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card to generate ±10 Vdc
and +5 Vdc reference voltages for the monitoring circuits.
r Monitors the probe-position sensors and controls the Probe-Wipe module.
2.12-6 PN 4277219B
DILUTER CONTROL 2
r Monitors the reagent reservoir sensors and provides the power drivers for the solenoids
responsible for refilling the reagent reservoirs.
r Provides the power drivers for the solenoids responsible for refilling the sweep-flow
reservoir and for controlling the cylinder on the Probe-Wipe module (Diluter 2 REL and
Diluter 2 RBD cards only).
r Monitors the float sensors for the backwash tank, sheath tank and waste container.
r Provides comparator and logic circuitry for the operation and adjustment of the
bubble/blood detectors and provides on-board LEDs to indicate timing and status during
adjustment.
Note: On the Diluter 2 RBD (remote blood detectors) card, these adjustments have been
moved to the BD ADJ card in the Analyzer for easier access.
r Monitors the Diluter ambient, diff heater, Peltier module and stain chamber heater
temperatures for the Diluter 4 card.
r Provides logic control circuitry for the Diluter 4 card for the diff heater, stain chamber
heater and the Peltier module for Retic clearing solution.
For more information, see:
r Diluter 4 Card for details about the heating of the retic and diff lytic reagents
r Heading 2.17 for details about the Probe-Wipe module and bubble/blood detectors
r Heading 2.13 for details about the reagent tanks and reservoirs.
Inputs
r +5 Vdc from the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card
r -15 Vdc from the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card
Monitoring
The Diluter 2 card:
r Routes the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card outputs, ±15 V, +5 V, and +24 V,
through a circuit to develop a reference voltage level and voltage status for each voltage.
The AMC generates a message if any voltage is outside of specifications. Refer to
Heading 7.2 for Analytical Station messages.
r Routes the +12 V from the Diluter 4 card to develop a reference voltage level and status.
r Routes the Diluter ambient and heater temperatures from the Diluter 4 card.
r Routes the following DILUTER LEFT voltage values and temperatures for display on the
Analyzer VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES screen. (Select SERVICE MENU tt DILUTER
DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGE/TEMPERATURES.)
t ±15 Vdc and +24 Vdc from the Diluter/Optics/Solenoid Power Supply card
t +12 Vdc from the Diluter 4 card
t Diluter ambient, diff heater, Peltier and stain heater temperatures.
PN 4277219B 2.12-7
DILUTER CONTROL
Connectors and LEDs

described in Table A.3-5. The Diluter 2 card has two banks of LEDs, one for the timing signals
and the status of the bubble/blood detectors, the other for the status of the reagent levels.
Both banks are described in Table A.3-6.
BD ADJ Card
Function
The BD ADJ card is located in the Analyzer of the LH 750 System. See Figure 2.3-4 for
location. The BD ADJ card provides bubble/blood detector test points and potentiometers and
a lyse timing connector on the front of the Analyzer where they are easily accessed.
Inputs Outputs
TP1 r Front blood detector drive
TP4 r Rear blood detector drive
TP5 r Threshold
TP8
TP11
TP12
Lyse timing
Connectors, Test Points, and Adjustments

The BD ADJ card connectors, test points, and adjustments are shown in Figure A.2-3. The
connectors are described in Table A.2-5, the test points and adjustments in Table A.2-6.
Diluter 3 Card
Styles in Use
Three styles of Diluter 3 cards are currently in use.
r The original Diluter 3 card is used on GEN•S Systems without the SlideMaker option.
r The Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface card is used on GEN•S Systems with a SlideMaker
option. This Diluter 3 card added two connectors for SlideMaker components installed
in the Analytical Station. This card is also compatible with GEN•S Systems without the
SlideMaker option.
r The Diluter 3 LH card is required for the LH 750 System. This Diluter 3 card added four
solenoid drivers for the shear valve solenoids in the Random Access module. This card is
also compatible with all GEN•S Systems.
Function
Figure 2.4-13 (LH 750 System) for location.
2.12-8 PN 4277219B
DILUTER CONTROL 2
The Diluter 3 card contains:
r Logic circuitry and drivers -

t For the dc motors for the diff and retic mixing chambers
t For all the Diluter solenoids except the reagent reservoir solenoids
r LED status indicator
r Interface for the SlideMaker.
The Diluter 3 card uses four logic devices (PALs) and a programmable switch matrix for
outputs to provide power and driver circuitry for the dc motors for the diff and retic mixing
chambers and for all the Diluter solenoids except the reagent reservoir solenoids
The solenoids are grouped together into manifolds that provide a common pneumatic input
and a centralized distribution point. To minimize wiring harnesses, the Diluter 3 card is
connected to solenoid manifold interface cards, which are located on or near the solenoids.
The interface card connects the driver outputs to one side of the solenoid and provides
+24 Vdc to the other side. When instructed by the DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GEN•S
System) or the DILUTER CPU card (LH 750 System), the Diluter 3 card enables a solenoid
address and a control signal to a solenoid driver. The driver provides a path to ground to
energize the solenoid.
Refer to Table A.6-1 for a list of the solenoids and their functions. For solenoid wiring details,
see the instrument’s cable interconnection and signal interconnection diagrams in Chapter 6.
Inputs
r +24 Vdc and return from the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card
r +5 Vdc and ground from the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card
Connectors and LED

The Diluter 3 card connectors and LED are shown in Figure A.3-9 The connectors are
described in Table A.3-8. The Diluter 3 card has one LED that blinks during switch scan
ready state.
Diluter 4 Card
Function
r Circuitry to sense and convert thermistor signals to temperature.

r Driver circuitry to activate the heaters and the Peltier module.
r Reference and driver voltages for the heating and cooling elements.
r dc-to-dc power supply for developing +12 Vdc.
r LEDs that indicate the status of the heaters and Peltier module.
PN 4277219B 2.12-9
DILUTER CONTROL
The Diluter 4 card receives the thermistor signals, converts the thermistor signals to
temperature signals and routes the temperature signals to the Diluter 2 card for monitoring.
The Diluter 4 card uses a dc to dc power supply to develop +12 Vdc from +48 Vdc (received
via the backplane voltage bus) to power the Peltier module.
For specifications on reagent heating, see:
r Table A.1-14 for diff analysis reagents

r Table A.1-15 for retic analysis reagents.
Peltier and Ambient Temperature Circuit. A Peltier module is used to heat or cool the retic
clearing solution to maintain an optimum reaction temperature when the clearing solution is
added to the stain and blood mixture in the retic chamber.
The Peltier module contains a thermistor and Peltier cells. The DILUTER AMBIENT
THERMISTOR and the PELTIER THERMISTOR signals are used in a comparator circuit on
the Diluter 4 card to activate the driver to heat or cool the Peltier cells. See Figure 2.12-3.
Figure 2.12-3 Peltier and Ambient Temperature Circuit

CR9
DRIVER COOL PELTIER

DILUTER AMBIENT THERMISTOR COOL CIRCUIT
PELTIER THERMISTOR THERMISTOR

COMPARATOR
CR8
HEAT
DRIVER HEAT PELTIER
CIRCUIT
PELTIER TEMP
AMBIENT TEMP 7253128A
The DILUTER AMBIENT TEMP and PELTIER TEMP signals are routed to the Diluter 2 card
for monitoring.
Stain Chamber Heater Circuit. The ceramic retic chamber has a heater around it which is
heated to maintain an optimum reaction temperature for the blood and stain mixture, and a
thermistor to sense the temperature.
The Stain Thermistor circuit on the Diluter 4 card (Figure 2.12-4) activates the driver for the
stain chamber heater. The STAIN TEMP signal is routed to the Diluter 2 card for monitoring.
Figure 2.12-4 Stain Chamber Heater Circuit

STAIN TEMP
STAIN THERMISTOR CR7
THERMISTOR
DRIVER STAIN HEAT
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
7253126A
Diff Lytic Reagent Heater Circuit. The diff heater is an aluminum block with a heating
element and a thermistor around it. The diff lytic reagent is heated to provide the optimum
reaction temperature when mixed with the blood in the mixing chamber.
2.12-10 PN 4277219B
DILUTER CONTROL 2
The DILUTER AMBIENT THERMISTOR and DIFF HEATER THERMISTOR signals are used
in a comparator circuit on the Diluter 4 card to determine if the diff heater driver is activated.
See Figure 2.12-5.
The DIFF LYTIC REAGENT TEMP signal is routed to the Diluter 2 card for monitoring.
Figure 2.12-5 Diff Lytic Reagent Heater Circuit

DIFF REAGENT TEMP
CR5
DIFF HEATER THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR
DILUTER AMBIENT THERMISTOR DRIVER DIFF HEAT
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
7253127A
Inputs
+48 Vdc from the backplane voltage bus
Connectors and LEDs

described in Table A.3-9, the LEDs in Table A.3-10.
Diluter/Numeric Keypad
Function
The Diluter keypad located on the lower front cover of the GEN•S System Diluter
(Figure 2.12-6) and the numeric keypad mounted on the front door of the LH 750 System
Analyzer (Figure 2.12-7) comprise the following three components:
r LCD Display module. The LCD Display module contains an LCD panel with two lines of
16 characters to display messages and is backlighted for easy viewing of messages and
entries.
r Membrane keypad. The membrane keypad comprises numeric keys, control keys and a
function (F) key.
t The numeric keys allow the operator to enter digital information.
t The control keys allow the operator to request certain functions, such as turning the
power on (POWER ON). These functions are described in the Operator’s Guide.
t The F-key allows the operator to perform additional functions. The F-key functions
are described in Table A.5-1.
r Keyboard and Display Interface card. The Keyboard and Display Interface card provides
an interface with the Analytical Station, allowing the operator to request functions.
Figure 2.12-6 includes an exploded view of the Diluter keypad on the GEN•S System,
identifying the three components for your understanding. Both the Diluter keypad and the
numeric keypad are replaced as an assembly, however.
Contrast Adjustment
A potentiometer on the The Keyboard and Display Interface card varies the contrast on the
LCD panel.
PN 4277219B 2.12-11
DILUTER CONTROL
r On the GEN•S System, the contrast potentiometer, R3, is accessed through an opening
in the splash shield mounted on the rear of the Diluter keypad. R3 and the connectors on
the Keyboard and Display Interface card are shown in Figure A.3-15. The connectors are
r On the LH 750 System, the contrast potentiometer, R4, is accessed through an opening
in the Keyboard and Display Interface card shield as shown in Figure 2.12-7.
Note: Adjusting the contrast too low turns off the display completely, making the LCD
Display module appear defective.
Figure 2.12-6 Diluter Keypad on the GEN•S System
LCD DISPLAY
MODULE
MEMBRANE
KEYPAD
KEYBOARD
AND DISPLAY
INTERFACE
CARD
7253129A
Figure 2.12-7 Numeric Keypad on the LH 750 System
0 4 /3 0 /9 6 I
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
II
III
IV
V
VII
M A IN M E N U
N
7 8 9 T
E
C E 0 . R
Numeric
keypad
6498202B
R 4
2.12-12 PN 4277219B
REAGENT HANDLING 2
2.13 REAGENT HANDLING
Summary
Two reagent handling configurations are currently in use in the Analytical Station. In one (the
original configuration) all of the reagents are drawn from the reagent containers into
reservoirs in the Diluter and then distributed by reagent pumps and tanks. In the other
configuration, all of the reagents except diluent are drawn into reagent reservoirs - the
diluent reservoir is bypassed.
This section describes reagent handling from input and distribution to output as waste,
including how the reagent and waste levels are monitored. This section also describes the
System-Flush cycle.
Reagent Input
One end of the reagent input lines is attached to pickup tubes inserted into the reagent
containers. (See Figure 8.2-28 for an illustration and the part numbers of the pickup tubes.)
On Analytical Stations that use the diluent reservoir, the other end of the reagent input lines
is connected to the reagent reservoirs by quick-disconnect fittings at the rear of the Diluter.
See Figure 2.13-1. The quick-disconnect fittings are self-closing to prevent reagent from
running out when the reagent lines are disconnected. Check valves in the reagent input lines
prevent the reagents from siphoning back into the reagent containers.
Figure 2.13-1 Reagent Inputs on Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir
DISINFECT WASTE CBC RETIC RETIC

LYSE CLEAR STAIN
PAK
PRESERVE
PAK
LYSE
CLEANER
Quick-disconnect DILUENT
fitting
Back of
7253140E Diluter
PN 4277219B 2.13-1
REAGENT HANDLING
On Analytical Stations that bypass the diluent reservoir, the other end of the reagent input
lines is connected to the rear of the Diluter by stainless steel fittings. See Figure 2.13-2. For all
the reagents except diluent, the fittings are attached to a reagent reservoir. For the diluent,
tubing on the fitting connects the diluent input directly to the diluent/cleaning agent
manifold (VC32) which is located on the rear panel of the Diluter. (For the location of VC32,
refer to Figure A.7-4 for the GEN•S System, Figure A.8-4 for the LH 750 System.) A check
valves in the reagent input line to the reagent reservoir prevent the cleaning reagent from
siphoning back into the reagent container.
Figure 2.13-2 Reagent Inputs on Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent Reservoir
D IL U E N T W A S T E C B C R E T IC R E T IC
L Y S E C L E A R S T A IN
P A K
P R E S E R V E
P A K
L Y S E
C L E A N E R
6 4 9 8 0 9 1 B B a c k o f
D ilu te r
Reagent Reservoir Module
Function
The Reagent Reservoir module is located on the lower left rear door of the Diluter. Refer to
Figure 2.4-7 for location.
The Reagent Reservoir module (see Figures 2.13-3 and 2.13-4) consists of:
r Individual reservoirs for each of the seven reagents. The diluent reservoir holds 105 mL,
the other reservoirs hold 43 mL.
Note: On an Analytical Station that bypasses the diluent reservoir, the diluent reservoir
is still present, it is simply not used.
2.13-2 PN 4277219B
REAGENT HANDLING 2
r A reagent-float sensor for each reservoir. The float sensors house a magnetic switch for
sensing the reagent level.
Note: On an Analytical Station that bypasses the diluent reservoir, a pickup tube with a
float sensor is installed in the diluent container to monitor the level of diluent.
r A solenoid for each reservoir.
t In the old style Reagent Reservoir modules on the GEN•S System (Figure 2.13-3),
the solenoids provide vacuum for refilling the reservoirs.
t In the new style Reagent Reservoir modules on the GEN•S System (Figure 2.13-4)
the solenoids actuate pinch valves which provide the vacuum for refilling the
reservoirs.
Note: The latest GEN•S Systems and the LH 750 Systems have the Reagent
Reservoir module shown in Figure 2.13-5.
r A valve, VL113, for venting the diluent reservoir.
Note: On an Analytical Station that bypasses the diluent reservoir, VL113 is removed
as shown in Figure 2.13-5.
r The Reservoir Interface card which connects the sensors and solenoids to the
Diluter 2 card.
The reagent reservoirs hold sufficient reagents to complete a Diluter blood cycle. Initially, and
whenever a sensor indicates a low level, the reagent reservoirs are filled by energizing the
reservoir solenoids which apply vacuum to the reservoirs. During a cycle, the action of the
reagent pumps automatically pulls reagent up from the reagent containers, through the
reservoirs.
Figure 2.13-3 Reagent Reservoir Module, Old Style (GEN•S System)

Reservoir
Interface
card
Solenoids
Vacuum input
Vacuum
manifold
Reservoir
cap
Vacuum
output
to reservoir Float sensor
Reagent
reservoir
VL113
Reagent input
7253429E Reagent output
PN 4277219B 2.13-3
REAGENT HANDLING
Figure 2.13-4 Reagent Reservoir Module, New Style (GEN•S System)
Reservoir Vacuum input

Interface
Reagent card
input
Reservoir
Pinch cap
valves
VL113
VC31
Reagent
reservoir
Float sensor
Reagent
output
Solenoids 7253431E
Figure 2.13-5 Reagent Reservoir Module, Modified New Style (GEN•S System and LH 750 System)
Reservoir
Interface
card Vacuum input
Reagent
input
Reservoir
cap
Pinch
valves
VC31
Reagent
reservoir
Float sensor
Reagent
output
Solenoids 6498131B
Monitoring the Reagent Level

The float sensors in the reagent reservoirs activate when the reagent level drops too low. The
Diluter 2 card checks these sensors during reset, power on, and at the beginning of any
Diluter sample cycle or function test. During the startup and shutdown cycles, which consist
of a Diluter subcycle repeated six times, the Diluter 2 card rechecks the sensor status at the
beginning of each subcycle.
The Diluter 2 card checks the reagent reservoir sensors sequentially. If a sensor indicates a
low level, the Diluter 2 card energizes the solenoid for that reservoir for up to 1 second to
refill it. The Diluter 2 card continues checking the status of the reagent reservoir sensors and
refilling the reservoirs (one at a time) until all the reservoirs are full or until 6 seconds have
elapsed.
2.13-4 PN 4277219B
REAGENT HANDLING 2
Note: The reservoirs are filled, one at a time, to minimize its effect on the System’s vacuum
capacity.
After 6 seconds, if the reagent level in one or more reservoirs is still low:
r The instrument cycle stops.

r A message appears on the Diluter/numeric keypad display indicating a reagent reservoir
is filling.
r The Diluter 2 card energizes the solenoids for the empty reservoirs, one at a time, for up
to 7 seconds (18 seconds for diluent and cleaning agent).
After the additional refill time, if a reagent level is still low, the instrument:
r Generates a low reagent alarm.

r Displays a LEVEL message on the Analyzer and on the Diluter/numeric keypad display.
See Heading 7.2 for LEVEL messages.
r Inhibits further cycles until the reagent container is replaced.
On an Analytical Station that bypasses the diluent reservoir, the float sensor in the diluent
container activates when the diluent level drops too low. When the diluent level is too low,
the instrument:
r Generates a low reagent alarm.

r Displays a LEVEL message on the Analyzer and on the Diluter/numeric keypad display.
See Heading 7.2 for LEVEL messages.
r Inhibits further cycles until the diluent container is replaced.
Reservoir Interface Card
Function
The Reservoir Interface card (Figures 2.13-3 and 2.13-4) provides an interconnection
between the Diluter 2 card and the following:
r Reagent-float sensors
r Sheath-tank sensor
r Backwash-tank sensor
r Waste-level sensor
r Reservoir solenoids.
Inputs
r +5 Vdc for the sensors
r +24 Vdc for the solenoids
Connectors
The Reservoir Interface card connectors are shown in Figure A.3-17 and described in
Table A.3-18.
PN 4277219B 2.13-5
REAGENT HANDLING
Reagent Distribution
As you read this section, refer to the reagent distribution block diagrams, Figure 2.13-6 and
Figure 2.13-7. For details about the component interconnections, refer to the
pneumatic/hydraulic schematic in Chapter 6.
The CBC lytic reagent, diff lytic reagent, diff preservative, retic stain and retic clearing
solution reservoirs route their reagent directly to their respective reagent pumps.
In Analytical Stations that use the diluent reservoir (Figure 2.13-6):
r The diluent reservoir routes diluent to the BSV cleaning channels, the sheath tank
(VC15), the sweep-flow reservoir (VC29), and the diluent/cleaning agent
chamber (VC28).
r The cleaning agent reservoir routes cleaning agent to the cleaning agent pump (PM10)
and to the system flush/cleaning agent output manifold (MF5) for routing to VC28.
Figure 2.13-6 Reagent Distribution on Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir
2.13-6 PN 4277219B
REAGENT HANDLING 2
In Analytical Stations that bypass the diluent reservoir (Figure 2.13-7):
r The diluent/cleaning agent manifold (VC32) routes diluent to the BSV cleaning
channels, the sheath tank (VC15), the sweep-flow reservoir (VC29), and the
diluent/cleaning agent chamber (VC28).
r The cleaning agent reservoir routes cleaning agent to the diluent/cleaning agent manifold
(VC32) which in turn routes cleaning agent to the cleaning agent pump (PM10) and to
the diluent/cleaning agent chamber (VC28).
Figure 2.13-7 Reagent Distribution on Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent Reservoir
Backwash tank,
Sweep-flow VC23
tank
Diluent/cleaning agent chamber VC28
Sweep-flow WBC diluent RBC diluent

reservoir VC29 dispenser PM2 dispenser PM3
Reservoirs
Sheath tank VC15
BSV cleaning
channels
CLEANING
AGENT
Cleaning
agent Diluent/cleaning agent DILUENT
pump PM10 manifold VC 32
RETIC Retic cleaning

CLEANING solution
SOLUTION pump PM6
Diff lytic
DIFF LYTIC reagent
REAGENT pump PM4
Stain
STAIN pump PM5
CBC lytic
CBC lLYTIC reagent
REAGENT pump PM7
DIFF Diff preservative

PRESERVATIVE pump PM1
6498092A
Diluent/Cleaning Agent Chamber
Function
The diluent/cleaning agent chamber (VC28) and its associated pinch valve (VL14B) are
located on the rear panel of the Diluter. For the location of VC28 and VL14B, refer to
Figure A.7-4 for the GEN•S System or Figure A.8-4 for the LH 750 System.
PN 4277219B 2.13-7
REAGENT HANDLING
VC28 is the distribution chamber for diluent and cleaning agent in the Diluter. Refer to
Figure 2.13-6 or Figure 2.13-7. VL14B determines which reagent, diluent or cleaning agent,
VC28 distributes. During the startup cycle and routine Diluter functions, VL14B routes
diluent to VC28. During the shutdown cycle, when VL14B is activated, VL14B routes
cleaning agent to VC28.
Backwash Tank
Function
The backwash tank is located on the left front panel of the Diluter. Refer to Figure A.7-1
(GEN•S System) or Figure A.8-1 (LH 750 System) for location.
The backwash tank (VC23) is used to deliver diluent or cleaning agent to the backwash
manifold (MF4) and diluent to the Hgb cuvette for the Hgb-blank reading.
While the instrument is cycling, VC23 empties and refills. Vacuum is applied to the top of the
VC23 for up to 7 seconds to fill the tank; 30 psi is applied to deliver the reagent. See
Figure 2.13-8. During a startup or shutdown cycle, the previous reagent drains to waste and
the tank refills with the reagent for the selected cycle.
Figure 2.13-8 Backwash Tank Reagent Flow

Vacuum 30 psi
Float
Diluent/cleaning sensor
agent
chamber Backwash Backwash
VC28 tank tank
Diluent Backwash
Cleaning manifold
agent
Waste Hgb cuvette

6498130B A. Filling tank B. Dispensing reagent

VC23 contains a float sensor with a magnetic switch to monitor the reagent level in the tank.
The float sensor is connected to the Reservoir Interface card, which routes the float sensor
signal to the Diluter 2 card. LEDs on the Diluter 2 card indicate the status of these signals.
Refer to Table A.3-6.
The float sensor is active when the tank is not full. During the cycle, the DILUTER
PROCESSOR card monitors the sensor status. The tank is refilled or emptied accordingly. If
the sensor does not show the expected status, and the status cannot be changed, an error
occurs. See Heading 7.2 for possible errors.
Testing
The Diluter function, F30, tests the function of the backwash tank sensor.
2.13-8 PN 4277219B
REAGENT HANDLING 2
Backwash Manifold
Function
The backwash manifold is located under the Diluter front cover. Refer to Figure A.7-7
(GEN•S System) or Figure A.8-7 (LH 750 System) for location.
The backwash manifold (MF4) is a bank of solenoids that distribute pressurized diluent (or
cleaning agent during the shutdown cycle) to rinse the following areas:
r During the Automatic mode -

t Needle vent
t The aspiration path through the Diff and Retic blood segment components
t BSV aspiration path through needle
r During the Manual mode -
t The aspiration path through the Diff and Retic blood segment components
t BSV aspiration path through aspirator tip
t Outside of the aspirator tip via the Probe-Wipe module
r Diff mixing chamber (VC19)
r Stain chamber (VC24)
r Retic chamber (VC17)
r Sheath fluid pathways in flow cell.
Sheath Tank
Function
The sheath tank (VC15) is located on the right front panel of the Diluter. Refer to
Figure A.7-5 (GEN•S System) or Figure A.8-5 (LH 750 System) for location.
The sheath tank (VC15) provides the pressurized sheath diluent needed to direct the sample
stream through the flow cell during VCS analysis. For details about the flow-cell hydraulics,
see Flow-Cell Hydraulics under Heading 2.20.
While the instrument is cycling, VC15 empties and refills as the sheath fluid is used. Vacuum
is applied to the top of VC15 to fill the tank. Pressure, regulated by the sheath pressure
regulator (RG4) to between 6.3 psi and 6.5 psi, is applied to deliver the reagent. See
Figure 2.13-9.

VC15 contains a float sensor with a magnetic switch to monitor the reagent level in the tank.
The float sensor is connected to the Reservoir Interface card, which routes the float sensor
signal to the Diluter 2 card. LEDs on the Diluter 2 card indicate the status of these signals.
The float sensor is active when the tank is not full. During the cycle, the DILUTER
PROCESSOR card monitors the sensor status. The tank is refilled or emptied accordingly. If
the sensor does not show the expected status, and the status cannot be changed, an error
occurs. See Heading 7.2 for possible errors.
PN 4277219B 2.13-9
REAGENT HANDLING
Figure 2.13-9 Sheath-Tank Reagent Flow
Vacuum
Sheath
pressure
Float
sensor
Sheath
pressure
Sheath regulator (RG4)
tank Sheath
tank
Diluent Flow
input cell
6498093A A. Filling tank B. Dispensing reagent
Testing
The sheath tank test, F20, is available to test the function of the sensor.
Sweep-Flow Reservoir
Function
The sweep-flow reservoir (VC29) is located on the center rear panel of the Diluter. Refer to
Figure A.7-4 (GEN•S System) or Figure A.8-4 (LH 750 System) for location.
The sweep-flow reservoir (VC29) traps bubbles in the diluent supply for the sweep-flow tank.
While the instrument is cycling, VC29 empties and refills as the sweep-flow diluent is used.
Vacuum is applied to the top of VC29 to fill the reservoir. During the RBC and platelet count
cycles, vacuum from the vacuum isolator pulls diluent from the bottom of the sweep-flow
reservoir, through the sweep-flow tubing in the sweep-flow tank, and behind the RBC
apertures.

On the original GEN•S Systems the level of diluent in the sweep-flow reservoir is not
monitored. On GEN•S Systems that have been modified to use a sweep-flow reservoir with a
level sensor and on all LH 750 Systems, the sweep-flow reservoir contains a float sensor with
a magnetic switch to monitor the reagent level in the reservoir. The float sensor is connected
to the Diluter 2 card. Refer to Table A.3-6.
The float sensor is active when the reservoir is not full. During the cycle, the DILUTER
PROCESSOR card (GEN•S System) or the DILUTER CPU card (LH 750 System) monitors
the sensor status. The reservoir is refilled or emptied accordingly. If the sensor does not show
the expected status, and the status cannot be changed, an error occurs. See Heading 7.2 for
possible errors.
Testing
The sweep-flow reservoir test, F50, is available to test the function of the sensor.
2.13-10 PN 4277219B
REAGENT HANDLING 2
System-Flush Cycle
The System-Flush cycle is only available on Analytical Stations that use the diluent
reservoir and that have software version 3A or lower.
The System-Flush cycle allows decontamination of the instrument lines that contact blood by
distributing a flush solution such as sodium hypochlorite through most of the cleaning agent
pathways in the Diluter.
The input line connection for the flush solution is the DISINFECT port on the rear of the
Diluter. Refer to Figure 2.13-1 for location.The Diluter function F40 initiates the flush cycle.
The flush cycle uses the shutdown timing cycle to pull up and cycle flush solution.
From the rear of the Diluter the flush solution is routed to the system flush/cleaning agent
input manifold (MF2). Refer to Figure A.7-12 for location.
VL112 selects the input source, the system flush port or the cleaning agent reservoir, from
MF2 for the system flush/cleaning agent output manifold (MF5).
MF5 routes the selected reagent on the cleaning agent lines to VL14B. VL14B is activated,
routing flush solution to the diluent/cleaning agent chamber for distribution in the Diluter.
At the completion of the flush cycle, only a shutdown cycle can be performed. See
Decontaminating with Bleach under Heading 5.3 for the system-flush procedure.
Waste Collection and Monitoring
Waste Collection
During a cycle, waste is collected in chambers in the Diluter and drained through the waste
line on the rear of the Diluter (Figure 2.13-1 or Figure 2.13-2) to the waste container or
drain. Refer to Table A.6-3 to determine which chambers collect waste.
Waste Level Monitoring

When a waste container is used, the Diluter 2 card monitors the waste full float sensor located
inside the pickup tube in the waste container, to prevent backup of waste into the instrument.
When the waste container is full the cycle is completed, but subsequent cycles are inhibited
until the waste container is replaced. The instrument displays a LEVEL message on the
Analyzer and on the Diluter/numeric keypad display. See Heading 7.2 for LEVEL messages.
When waste is routed directly to a drain, the waste level sensor is bypassed with a jumper.
PN 4277219B 2.13-11
REAGENT HANDLING
2.13-12 PN 4277219B
SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION 2
2.14 SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
Summary
To process samples in the Automatic mode, the operator inserts the specimen tubes into
cassettes and places the cassettes in the loading bay. The specimen transport system uses the
following components to move and identify the specimen tubes for sample acquisition:
r The cassette transport assembly contains -

t Mechanical components that move the cassettes of specimen tubes.
t Sensors and switches that monitor the movement of the cassettes.
t A bar-code reader that reads and decodes bar-code labels to identify specimens.
r The Sensor Distribution card connects the electromechanical switches and optical
sensors in the cassette transport assembly with the Diluter 1 card.
This section includes an overview of the specimen transport system and describes the
specimen transport system components. See Heading 2.15 for a detailed description of the
movement of the cassettes through the Diluter.
Specimen Transport System Overview

Refer to Figure 2.14-1. As the cassette transport assembly moves the cassettes,
electromechanical switches and optical sensors in the assembly monitor the movement and
send their signals to the Sensor Distribution card.
Figure 2.14-1 Specimen Transport Block Diagram
BAR-CODE
DECODER CARD
AND BAR-CODE
SCANNER CARD
SYSTEM
IBUS IBUS DILUTER BUS
SENSOR DISTRIBUTION DILUTER 1 RS/OPTO PROCESSOR/ AMC
CARD CARD INTFC DILUTER CPU CARD
CARD CARD*
IBUS
DILUTER CBL
CASSETTE TRANSPORT
ADAPTER CARD
ASSEMBLY
SOLENOIDS/SENSORS
IBUS
DILUTER 3
CARD
6498190B
PN 4277219B 2.14-1
SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
The Sensor Distribution card routes the signals to the Diluter 1 card.
The Diluter 1 card converts the switch and sensor signals and routes the status information to
the DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GEN•S System) or the DILUTER CPU card (LH 750
System).
The DILUTER PROCESSOR or DILUTER CPU card:
r Relays the status to the AMC.

r Provides instructions to the Diluter cards, based on the status information, to activate
the appropriate components to move the cassettes.
For more information about the interaction between the DILUTER PROCESSOR card or the
DILUTER CPU card and the other Diluter cards, see Heading 2.12, Diluter Control.
Cassette Transport Assembly (CTA)

The components of the cassette transport assembly are located in four main areas: the right
stack or loading bay, the rocker bed, the piercing station and the left stack or unloading bay.
See Figure 2.14-2.
The function of the mechanical components and the switches and sensors within the cassette
transport assembly are explained under Heading 2.15. To verify the function of the sensors
and switches, see Heading 4.81.
Figure 2.14-2 Cassette Transport Assembly
TM GEN S
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95 0000
COULTER CORPORATION
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
LEFT STACK/
BP CBC DIFF RETICS
RIGHT STACK/
UNLOADING BAY LOADING BAY
BAR-CODE
SCANNER ROCKER BED
PIERCING
STATION
NEEDLE
ASSEMBLY 7253147A
2.14-2 PN 4277219B
Bar-Code Reader
Function
In the Automatic mode, each time a specimen tube is pierced the bar-code reader in the
Analytical Station reads the cassette and tube bar-code labels to identify the specimen. The
bar-code reader consists of two main components:
r The bar-code scanner assembly which is located above the rocker bed in the center of the
Diluter. Refer to Figure 2.4-2 (GEN•S System) or Figure 2.4-9 (LH 750 System) for
location.
r The Bar-Code Decoder card which is located on the rear right door of the Diluter. Refer
to Figure 2.4-6 (GEN•S System) or Figure 2.4-14 (LH 750 System) for location.
Two styles of bar-code readers are currently in use. The style installed on the original GEN•S
Systems uses visible light from two LEDs to read the bar-code labels. The style installed on
the current GEN•S Systems and on the LH 750 Systems uses a laser.
LED Bar-Code Reader

Refer to Figure 2.14-3. The bar-code scanner assembly for the LED bar-code reader houses
the Bar-code Scanner card which contains:
r Two red visible-light, 633 nm, LEDs.

r An aperture focusing lens.
r A photodiode circuit.
Figure 2.14-3 LED Bar-Code Reader Block Diagram

FROM DILUTER 1 BAR-CODE DECODER CARD BAR-CODE SCANNER CARD BAR-CODE
CARD -J6 J37 LABEL
BC GND AGC
-9 V DIGITIZER
+9 V PAL
+5 V J1
-5 V
J2 EPROM
AND PHOTODIODE APERTURE LEDS LENS
RAM
7253148A
The construction of the bar-code scanner allows the energy of its two LEDs to be summed
and focused onto the label, providing better scans. Reflected light from the label is directed
through the aperture to the photodiode. The photodiode converts the light to analog signals
and routes the analog signals to the Bar-Code Decoder card.
The Bar-Code Decoder card (manufactured by Welch-Allyn, Inc.) contains:
r An Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Digitizer circuit for signal conversion.

r Memory for bar-code formats.
r A beeper to indicate “good label” scans. The beeper is disabled for normal operations. To
enable the beeper, install a jumper on P3. Refer to Figure A.3-1 for the location of P3.
PN 4277219B 2.14-3
Note: The beep only indicates the Bar-Code Decoder card was able to produce a digital
output from the scanners input; it does not ensure the input is in an acceptable format.
Therefore, it is possible to hear a beep but not see bar-code label information displayed
on the Analyzer or Workstation screen because the software rejected the input.
The AGC Digitizer circuit on the Bar-Code Decoder card converts the analog signals from the
Bar-Code Scanner card to a digital format. The Bar-Code Decoder card checks the digital
format against information stored in the EPROMs to identify the type of tube label.
The Bar-Code Decoder card sends the decoded information to the Diluter 1 card using an
RS232 interface. The Diluter 1 card converts the RS232 signals and sends the information to
the DILUTER PROCESSOR card.
The DILUTER PROCESSOR card performs checksum calculations and sends the label
information to the AMC where it is held for transmission with the parameter information.
Laser Bar-Code Reader

Refer to Figure 2.14-4. The bar-code scanner assembly for the laser bar-code reader houses:
r A passive laser bar-code scanner at 670 nm.

r A laser control board - the Newbar card.
Figure 2.14-4 Laser Bar-Code Reader Block Diagram

Five-wire cable
From Diluter 1 Bar-Code Decoder card Newbar card Laser

card -J6 J1 output
lens Bar-code
/ RESET OUT
LASER
ON
label
BC GND 10
-9 V PAL POWER/ seconds
+9 V Micro
+5 V TTL signal
J1
-5 V
J2 EPROM SW1
and LED TEST Reflected
RAM light input
LASER LASER J2 aperture
6498113B ON ON Laser scanner
Latching
plug
The passive laser bar-code scanner has a focused elliptical beam which is oriented for
optimum reading of the cassette and tube bar-code labels within the depth of field. Reflected
laser light from the label is converted to a TTL signal by the AGC and Level Switching circuit
within the scanner. The TTL signal is routed from the scanner to the Bar-Code Decoder card.
The Bar-Code Decoder card (manufactured by Welch-Allyn, Inc.) contains:
r Memory for bar-code formats.

r A beeper to indicate “good label” scans. The beeper is disabled for normal operations. To
enable the beeper, install a jumper on P3. Refer to Figure A.3-1 for the location of P3.
Note: The beep only indicates the Bar-Code Decoder card was able to produce a digital
output from the scanners input; it does not ensure the input is in an acceptable format.
Therefore, it is possible to hear a beep but not see bar-code label information displayed
on the Analyzer or Workstation screen because the software rejected the input.
2.14-4 PN 4277219B
The Bar-Code Decoder card checks the received digital format against information stored in
the EPROMs to identify the type of tube label. The Bar-Code Decoder card sends the decoded
information to the Diluter 1 card using an RS232 interface.
The Diluter 1 card converts the RS232 signals and sends the information to the DILUTER
PROCESSOR card (GEN•S System) or the DILUTER CPU card (LH 750 System).
The DILUTER PROCESSOR or DILUTER CPU card performs checksum calculations and
sends the label information to the AMC where it is held for transmission with the parameter
information.
Types of Bar Codes Used

The Bar-Code Decoder card is currently programmed to use the following types of labels:
r Interleaved 2-of-5 has 5 bits/character and is numeric. The Coulter cassette labels are
Interleaved 2-of-5.
r Code 39® bar code has 9 bits/character, is fully alphanumeric and is widely used by the
health industry.
r Codabar has 7 bits/character, is extended numeric and is frequently used by blood banks.
r NW7 (Japan Red Cross) has 7 bits/character and is extended numeric.
r Code 128 USS 128 has 11 bits/character and is fully alphanumeric.
Bar-Code Label Specifications

For the bar-code label specifications, refer to Chapter 4 of the Reference manual.
Sensor Distribution Card
Function
The Sensor Distribution card is located in the Diluter. Refer to Figure 2.4-4 (GEN•S System)
or Figure 2.4-12 (LH 750 System) for location.
The Sensor Distribution card:
r Routes the control voltage and control return from the Diluter 1 card (IBUS) to the
Diluter keypad (old Diluter interconnects only).
r Routes the POWER ON and POWER OFF signals from the Diluter keypad to the
Diluter 1 card (old Diluter interconnects only)
r Routes display information from the Diluter 1 card (IBUS) to the Diluter keypad for
display (old Diluter interconnects only)
r Routes ±15 Vdc from the Diluter 1 card to power the PVT card.
r Routes Hgb lamp supply voltage from the Diluter 1 card to power the Hgb lamp.
r Routes power (+5 V from the Diluter 1 card) for the Diluter sensors and switches.
r Receives signals from the cassette transport assembly sensors and switches, converts the
signals to TTL levels, and sends the converted signals to the Diluter 1 card.
r Contains LED status indicators for bed position sensors.
PN 4277219B 2.14-5
Input
+5 Vdc from Diluter 1 card for LEDs, optoswitches, and sensors
Connectors and LEDs

The Sensor Distribution card connectors and LEDs are shown in Figure A.3-19. The
connectors are described in Table A.3-20. The LEDs, which monitor the bed position status,
are described in Table A.3-21.
2.14-6 PN 4277219B
SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - CASSETTE MOVEMENT 2
2.15 SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - CASSETTE MOVEMENT
Summary
To process samples in the Automatic mode, the operator inserts the specimen tubes into
cassettes and places the cassettes in the loading bay, and then the specimen transport system
moves and identifies the specimen tubes for sample acquisition. This section gives a detailed
description of the movement of the cassettes through the Diluter.
See Heading 2.14 for an overview of the specimen transport system and a description of its
components: the cassette transport assembly and the Sensor Distribution card.
Moving a Cassette from the Loading Bay to the Unloading Bay

Figures 2.15-1 through 2.15-12 follow the progress of a cassette from the loading bay to the
unloading bay.
Figure 2.15-1 Initiating the Automatic Cycle Initiating the Automatic-Mode Cycle
TOP
The instrument has an automatic start feature,
RIGHT COULTER SmartStart™ recognition, that is enabled
SAFETY by a DIP switch on the DILUTER PROCESSOR card
SWITCH (GEN•S System) or the DILUTER CPU card
(LH 750 System). Refer to Table A.2-12.
LOADING
BAY
r If SmartStart recognition is enabled, the
Automatic-mode cycle begins when a cassette
is placed in the loading bay or right stack.
r If SmartStart recognition is disabled, the
Automatic-mode cycle begins when the
operator presses START/CONT.
RIGHT
STACK Placing the cassette in the loading bay activates the
LOADED right stack loaded switch. See Figure 2.15-1.
UNDER SWITCH
RIGHT The right stack loaded switch is monitored during
7253187A BED
STACK the INSTRUMENT READY state and its activation
SWITCH POSITION
SENSORS indicates a cassette is available for cycling.
Retrieving the Cassette from the Loading Bay

Before raising the right lift to retrieve a cassette, the
instrument checks the status of the under right
stack, bed horizontal, and the top right safety
switches.
PN 4277219B 2.15-1
SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - CASSETTE MOVEMENT
Figure 2.15-2 Bed Position Sensors

The under right stack switch activates when there is
BED
HORIZONTAL a cassette on the rocker bed, under the loading bay.
SENSOR BED The lift will not extend to retrieve another cassette
BACKWARD until the cassette on the bed moves, deactivating the
BED SENSOR under right stack switch.
FORWARD
SENSOR The bed horizontal sensor activates when the rocker
bed is in the horizontal position. See Figure 2.15-2
for the location of the bed position sensors.
When the bed horizontal sensor is activated, the

bed stops rocking and the bed locks are engaged.
RIGHT
LIFT
BED LOCK 7253188A
Figure 2.15-3 Bed Locks

RIGHT
Two bed locks, one mounted on the base of the
NOTCH
LIFT rocker bed next to the right lift and the other next
to the left lift, are used to hold the rocker bed in
CAM position.
A bed lock consists of a solenoid-activated piston

BED LOCK and a cam with three notches, corresponding to the
PISTON three positions of the rocker bed: forward,
horizontal and backward. See Figure 2.15-3.
To engage a bed lock, the solenoid for the piston is

energized, pushing the piston into one of the
notches on the cam.
BED LOCK
ACTUATOR
Once the rocker bed is locked in the horizontal
position, the lift cylinder begins to extend. But if the
lift movement activates the top right safety switch,
indicating the loading bay is full (12 cassettes in the
loading bay), the lift cylinder does not extend fully.
7253303A
2.15-2 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.15-4 From Loading Bay to Rocker Bed Placing the Cassette on the Rocker Bed
If there is room on the rocker bed and in the loading
LOADING
BAY
bay, and if the rocker bed is in the horizontal
position, the right lift cylinder extends fully, raising
the right lift. See Figure 2.15-4.
FLIPPERS
The right lift pushes the cassette up past the
spring-loaded flippers and activates the right lift up
switch, indicating the lift is in motion.
RIGHT
The flipper retract solenoid is energized which
LIFT retracts the flippers.
Then the right lift cylinder retracts, lowering the lift

with the cassette and deactivating the right lift up
RIGHT switch.
LIFT UP RIGHT RIGHT LIFT
LIFT UP CYLINDER
SWITCH
SWITCH
The flipper retract solenoid is de-energized,
ACTIVATOR 7219007B
returning the flippers to their original position, so
that only one cassette is lowered onto the rocker
bed.
Figure 2.15-5 Moving across the Rocker Bed Moving the Cassette Across the Rocker Bed
When the cassette reaches the rocker bed, the
cassette activates the under right stack switch,
preventing another cassette from being placed on
the rocker bed.
ADVANCE WHEEL
The bed locks are disengaged and the bed rock
cylinder rocks the rocker bed to mix the specimens.
The belt advance cylinder is activated, moving the

rocker bed belt horizontally on the rocker bed. See
Figure 2.15-5. Sprockets on the cassette advance
wheel grab the cassette and move the cassette onto
the belt.
BED ROCK BELT ROCKER CASSETTE Note: The belt advance cylinder is located inside the
CYLINDER ADVANCE BED BELT ADVANCE rocker bed.
7253190A
CYLINDER WHEEL
When the cassette moves past the under right stack
switch, the switch deactivates and another cassette
can be lowered down onto the bed.
PN 4277219B 2.15-3
Figure 2.15-6 Detecting Specimen Tubes Detecting a Tube at the Piercing Station
L E D As the cassettes enter the piercing station, they pass
S P R IN G T U B E IN under the tube detector assembly.
P O S IT IO N
IN T E R R U P T E R S E N S O R
A R M The tube detector assembly uses a photosensor and
T U B E a “ball and rod” interrupter to detect the specimen
D E T E C T O R tubes. See Figure 2.15-6.
A S S E M B L Y
The interrupter is positioned over the rocker bed
and is lifted by the tubes in the cassettes. Lifting the
ball of the interrupter pivots the interrupter rod
7 2 1 9 0 0 8 B
away from the photosensor, activating the tube in
position sensor.
Activating the tube in position sensor sends a signal

to the Diluter 1 card to stop the belt drive. The belt
advance cylinder is deactivated, stopping the belt,
and the LED on the tube detector is lit.
The tube detector assembly is adjusted so that when

the rocker bed belt stops, the specimen tube is
aligned with the tube ram, the stripper plate and the
needle assembly.
Figure 2.15-7 Positioning Tube for Sampling Positioning the Tube for Sample Acquisition
When the instrument detects a tube, it activates the
stripper plate cylinder which retracts, pulling in the
stripper plate. See Figure 2.15-7.
The movement of the stripper plate activates the

stripper plate position switch.
Note: The stripper plate position switch is located

inside the rocker bed.
The stripper plate locks onto the tube, holding it in

place. The rocker bed rocks until the instrument is
ready to pierce the specimen tube. Then, when the
bed forward sensor activates, the rocker bed stops.
The bed locks are engaged to hold the bed in place
at a 45-degree forward angle.
STRIPPER STRIPPER STRIPPER TUBE Refer to Figure 2.15-2 for the location of the bed
PLATE PLATE PLATE DETECTOR forward sensor.
POSITION CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
SWITCH 7253192A
2.15-4 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.15-8 Piercing the Tube Piercing the Cap of the Specimen Tube
TUBE RAM To pierce the cap, the stripper plate cylinder is
CYLINDER deactivated, allowing the stripper plate to move
with the specimen tube, and the tube ram cylinder
extends, pushing the tube out of the cassette and
onto the needle. See Figure 2.15-8.
At the same time the bellows interlock is

disengaged, allowing the bellows cylinder to
contract the bellows as the tube is pushed onto the
needle.
For details on aspirating sample in the Automatic

mode, and cleaning the needle after aspiration, see:
r Automatic-Mode under Heading 2.16,

BELLOWS SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM -
TUBE
RAM OVERVIEW.
NEEDLE
ASSEMBLY r BSV Ports under Heading 2.17, SAMPLE
NEEDLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - HARDWARE
ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION.
BELLOWS
INTERLOCK BELLOWS
CYLINDER
7253193A
SIDE VIEW
Figure 2.15-9 Scanning Bar-Code Labels Identifying the Specimen

The cassettes are labeled with a bar-code label to
SCANNER
BAR-CODE identify the cassette number and the tube position.
POSITION
SWITCH SCANNER The specimen tubes may also have bar-code labels.
CYLINDER
While the needle is in the tube, the bar-code
scanner cylinder extends, moving the bar-code
scanner over the tube and cassette bar-code labels.
See Figure 2.15-9.
BAR-CODE
SCANNER The scanner position switch, which activates when
the scanner is over the cassette label, monitors the
speed of the bar-code scanner.
7253194A
PN 4277219B 2.15-5
Figure 2.15-10 Pushing Tube into Cassette Pushing the Tube Back into the Cassette
After the sample is aspirated:
1. The tube ram cylinder retracts, the bellows

cylinder extends and the bellows interlock is
engaged.
2. The stripper plate cylinder retracts and the
stripper plate pulls the tube off the needle and
pushes it back into the cassette. See
Figure 2.15-10.
3. The bed locks are disengaged and the rocker
bed begins to rock.
4. The stripper plate releases the tube, and the
belt advances until the tube detector assembly
senses the next tube.
STRIPPER
PLATE
7253195A
Figure 2.15-11 Moving to Unloading Bay Moving a Cassette to the Unloading Bay
After all the tubes in a cassette are pierced, the
UNLOADING rocker bed moves the cassette to the left toward the
TOP BAY
LEFT unloading bay. When the cassette reaches the left
SAFETY side of the rocker bed, it activates the under left
SWITCH stack switch. See Figure 2.15-11.
If the piercing station is empty, the bed stops

rocking and is locked in the horizontal position.
Before moving the cassette off the rocker bed into

the unloading bay, the instrument checks the status
of the top left safety switch. The top left safety
switch activates when the unloading bay is full (12
cassettes in the unloading bay).
UNDER LEFT ROCKER

STACK SWITCH BED 7253196A
2.15-6 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.15-12 Rocker Bed to Unloading Bay Removing a Cassette from the Rocker Bed
If there is room in the unloading bay, the left lift
UNLOADING cylinder extends, raising the left lift. The left lift
BAY pushes the cassette up into the unloading bay and
activates the left lift up switch.
FLIPPERS
Activating the left lift up switch ensures the rocker
bed does not rock at this time. See Figure 2.15-12.
Then the left lift cylinder retracts, returning the left

lift to the down position. The flippers in the
unloading bay are spring-loaded and hold the
cassette in the unloading bay as the lift retracts.
LEFT
LIFT When the left lift is down, the left lift switch
deactivates, the bed locks are released, and the
rocker bed begins rocking. The rocker bed rocks
LEFT LIFT UP LEFT until it detects another specimen tube or until it
LEFT LIFT LEFT LIFT SWITCH BED
CYLINDER UP SWITCH
completes 14 rocks.
ACTIVATOR LOCK
7253197A
PN 4277219B 2.15-7
2.15-8 PN 4277219B
SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW 2
2.16 SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW
Summary
The sample acquisition system aspirates blood samples from the specimen tubes, monitors
the quality and integrity of the samples (Automatic mode only), isolates segments of the
samples for analysis, and cleans the blood pathways between samples. This section gives an
overview of the sample acquisition system in the Automatic and Manual modes. For a more
detailed description of these modes, refer to Chapter 3 of the Reference manual.
Heading 2.17 describes the sample acquisition system components and assemblies.
Automatic-Mode
Aspirating a Sample
In the Automatic mode, the cassette transport assembly moves the specimen tubes to the
piercing station and positions the tubes for piercing. For details, see Heading 2.15,
SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - CASSETTE MOVEMENT. The front section of the BSV
rotates counterclockwise to prepare for the Automatic-mode aspiration; the center section
remains in the counterclockwise position.
When the specimen tube is in position for cap piercing, the tube ram pushes the specimen
tube onto the needle as the bellows cylinder contracts the bellows. As the needle enters the
specimen tube, the tube is vented to release residual vacuum or pressure. The needle vent is
connected to the needle vent chamber (VC19) to collect any aerosols when the tube is vented.
After the tube vents, the aspiration pump (PM9) is activated to aspirate the Automatic-mode
volume. Activating the aspiration pump creates a vacuum in the aspiration pathway, pulling a
blood sample through the needle, the front blood detector, the BSV, the diff sample segment,
the retic sample segment, and then the rear blood detector. Figure 2.16-1 shows the
aspiration pathway, Figure 2.16-2 shows the aspiration route through the BSV.
The bubble/blood detectors check the sample for quality and integrity.
Figure 2.16-1 Aspiration Path in the Automatic Mode

NEEDLE VENT
DIFF RETIC
CHAMBER
SAMPLE SAMPLE
NEEDLE SEGMENT SEGMENT
REAR
BLOOD
DETECTOR
FRONT BLOOD
BLOOD SAMPLING
DETECTOR VALVE
ASPIRATION
PUMP
6498029A
PN 4277219B 2.16-1
SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW
Figure 2.16-2 Aspiration through the BSV in the Automatic Mode

To diff and retic sample segments
rear bubble/blood detector
From needle through

front bubble/blood detector
6498135B
ASPIRATION (Front Section Rotated)
Segmenting the Sample

The center section of the BSV rotates clockwise, isolating blood sample segments for RBC/Plt
and WBC/Hgb analysis and aligning those segments with their respective diluent dispenser
input port and aperture bath output port. See Figure 2.16-3.
Note: Clockwise and counterclockwise positions of the BSV are described facing the BSV
knob.
Figure 2.16-3 Delivering CBC Samples in the Automatic Mode

FROM WBC DILUENT DISPENSER
TO RBC
BATH
FROM RBC
DILUENT
DISPENSER
TO WBC
BATH
SAMPLE DELIVERY (CENTER SECTION ROTATED) 7253150A
Sample segments for diff and retic analysis are isolated in special tubings (GEN•S System) or
in shear valves (LH 750 System). The diff segment is in line between the diff lytic reagent
pump and the mixing chamber. The retic segment is in line between the stain pump and the
stain chamber. See Figure 2.16-4.
Note: The diff lytic reagent pump and/or the stain pump are only activated if the test mode
selected includes analyzing the diff parameters and/or the retic parameters, respectively.
For details on sample delivery and processing, see Heading 2.18 for CBC analysis,
Heading 2.22 for diff analysis and Heading 2.23 for retic analysis.
2.16-2 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.16-4 Delivering Diff and Retic Samples in the Automatic Mode
DIFF RETIC
SAMPLE SAMPLE
SEGMENT SEGMENT TO
ASPIRATION
REAR PUMP
BLOOD
DETECTOR
HEATER
BSV
MIXING STAIN
CHAMBER CHAMBER
DIFF LYTIC STAIN
REAGENT PUMP
PUMP
7253274A
Cleaning the Blood Pathways

After aspiration, the instrument rinses the needle vent line and dries it with vacuum. For
details, see Needle Assembly, under Heading 2.17, SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM -
HARDWARE DESCRIPTION.
After sample delivery, diluent from the backwash manifold is pushed through the diff and
retic sample segments and the rear bubble/blood detector to waste. See Figure 2.16-5.
Figure 2.16-5 Backwashing the Diff and Retic Segments

DIFF RETIC
SAMPLE SAMPLE
FROM SEGMENT SEGMENT
BACKWASH TO WASTE
MANIFOLD
BACKWASH (CENTER SECTION ROTATED) 7253358A
After CBC analysis is completed, the center section of the BSV rotates to the counterclockwise
position and the instrument backwashes residual blood out of the aspiration pathway. To
backwash the aspiration pathway, diluent from the backwash manifold is pushed through the
aspiration pathway in the BSV, and out the needle, where it is collected in the bellows and
then drained to waste. See Figure 2.16-6.
PN 4277219B 2.16-3
Figure 2.16-6 Backwashing the BSV in the Automatic Mode

DIFF RETIC
SAMPLE SAMPLE
BACKWASH
MANIFOLD
TO
NEEDLE
BACKWASH (CENTER SECTION RETURNED) 7253151A
After CBC analysis is completed, the instrument drains the RBC and WBC baths and fills the
baths with a cross-rinse of diluent from the diluent dispensers. See Figure 2.16-7.
Figure 2.16-7 Cross-Rinse in the Automatic Mode

TO RBC
BATH
TO WBC
BATH FROM RBC
DILUENT
CROSS-RINSE DISPENSE 7253152A
Before the next sample is aspirated, the instrument primes the diff sample segment and the
15 in. delivery line with diff lytic reagent and/or the retic sample segment and delivery line
with stain. See Figure 2.16-8.
When the Automatic mode cycles are completed and the rocker bed stops, the front section of
the BSV rotates to the clockwise position.
2.16-4 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.16-8 Priming the Diff and Retic Sample Lines with Reagent
D IF F R E T IC
S A M P L E S A M P L E
S E G M E N T S E G M E N T T O
A S P IR A T IO N
R E A R P U M P
1 5 " d e liv e r y B L O O D
lin e D E T E C T O R
HEATER
B S V
M IX IN G S T A IN
C H A M B E R C H A M B E R
D IF F L Y T IC S T A IN
R E A G E N T P U M P
P U M P
6 4 9 8 2 2 5 B
Manual Mode
Aspirating a Sample
In the Manual mode, the operator presents an open specimen tube to the aspirator tip. The
hand detector initiates the Manual-mode when it detects the operator’s hand in the aspiration
station. The operator can also start the Manual mode cycle by pressing the activator, which
activates the manual start switch located behind the assembly.
The aspiration pump (PM9) is activated to pull the Manual-mode volume. Activating the
aspiration pump creates a vacuum in the aspiration pathway, pulling a blood sample through
the aspirator tip, the BSV, the diff sample segment, the retic sample segment and the rear
blood detector. Figure 2.16-9 shows the aspiration pathway, Figure 2.16-10 shows the
aspiration route through the BSV.
Note: The bubble/blood detectors are not active during the Manual-mode cycle.
Figure 2.16-9 Aspiration Path in the Manual Mode
DIFF RETIC
SAMPLE SAMPLE
SEGMENT SEGMENT
REAR
BLOOD
DETECTOR
BLOOD ASPIRATION
SAMPLING PUMP
VALVE
7253275A
PN 4277219B 2.16-5
Figure 2.16-10 Aspiration through the BSV in the Manual Mode

To diff and retic sample segments
rear bubble/blood detector
ASPIRATION 6498134B
Segmenting the Sample

The center section of the BSV rotates clockwise, isolating blood sample segments for RBC/Plt
and WBC/Hgb analysis and aligning those segments with their respective diluent dispenser
input port and aperture bath output port. See Figure 2.16-11.
Figure 2.16-11 Delivering CBC Samples in the Manual Mode

TO RBC
BATH
FROM RBC
DILUENT
DISPENSER
TO WBC
BATH
SAMPLE DELIVERY (CENTER SECTION ROTATED) 7253304A
Sample segments for diff and retic analysis are isolated in special tubings (GEN•S System) or
in shear valves (LH 750 System). The diff segment is in line between the diff lytic reagent
pump and the mixing chamber. The retic segment is in line between the stain pump and the
stain chamber. See Figure 2.16-12.
Note: The diff lytic reagent pump and/or the stain pump are only activated if the test mode
selected includes analyzing the diff parameters and/or the retic parameters, respectively.
After delivery of the CBC sample, the front section of the BSV rotates counterclockwise. See
Figure 2.16-12.
For details on sample delivery and processing, see Heading 2.18 for CBC analysis,
Heading 2.22 for diff analysis and Heading 2.23 for retic analysis.
2.16-6 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.16-12 Delivering Diff and Retic Samples in the Manual Mode
DIFF RETIC
SAMPLE SAMPLE
SEGMENT SEGMENT TO
ASPIRATION
REAR PUMP
BLOOD
DETECTOR
HEATER
BSV
MIXING STAIN
CHAMBER CHAMBER
DIFF LYTIC STAIN
REAGENT PUMP
PUMP
7253274A
Cleaning the Blood Pathways

After aspiration, the Probe-Wipe module automatically cleans the outside of the aspirator tip.
At the same time, diluent from the backwash manifold is pushed through the BSV, out the
aspirator tip and into the backwash cup, where it drains to waste.
After sample delivery, diluent from the backwash manifold is pushed through the diff and
retic sample segments and the rear bubble/blood detector to waste. See Figure 2.16-13.
Figure 2.16-13 Backwashing the Diff and Retic Segments

DIFF RETIC
SAMPLE SAMPLE
BACKWASH TO WASTE
MANIFOLD
BACKWASH (CENTER SECTION ROTATED) 7253358A
After CBC analysis is completed, the center section of the BSV rotates back to the
counterclockwise position and the instrument backwashes residual blood out of the
aspiration pathway. To clear residual blood out of the aspiration pathway, diluent from the
backwash manifold is pushed through the BSV, out the needle, and into the bellows, where it
is collected and drained to waste. See Figure 2.16-14.
PN 4277219B 2.16-7
Figure 2.16-14 Backwashing the BSV in the Manual Mode

DIFF RETIC
SAMPLE SAMPLE
BACKWASH TO WASTE
MANIFOLD
TO
NEEDLE
FROM
BACKWASH
MANIFOLD
7253155B
BACKWASH (FRONT AND CENTER SECTION RETURNED)
After the CBC sample is analyzed, the instrument drains the RBC and WBC baths and fills the
baths with a cross-rinse of diluent from the diluent dispensers (see Figure 2.16-15).
Figure 2.16-15 Cross-Rinse in the Manual Mode

TO RBC
BATH
TO WBC FROM RBC

BATH DILUENT DISPENSER
CROSS-RINSE 7253156A
Before the next sample is aspirated, the instrument primes the diff sample segment and the
15 in. delivery line with diff lytic reagent and/or the retic sample segment and delivery line
with stain. See Figure 2.16-16.
Figure 2.16-16 Priming the Diff and Retic Sample Lines with Reagent
D IF F R E T IC
S A M P L E S A M P L E
S E G M E N T S E G M E N T T O
A S P IR A T IO N
R E A R P U M P
1 5 " d e liv e r y B L O O D
lin e D E T E C T O R
HEATER
B S V
M IX IN G S T A IN
C H A M B E R C H A M B E R
D IF F L Y T IC S T A IN
R E A G E N T P U M P
P U M P
6 4 9 8 2 2 5 B
2.16-8 PN 4277219B
SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 2
2.17 SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
Summary
The sample acquisition system aspirates blood samples from the specimen tubes, monitors
the quality and integrity of the samples (Automatic mode only), isolates segments of the
samples for analysis, and cleans the blood pathways between samples. The sample acquisition
system comprises the following components and assemblies:
r Aspiration Pump - Aspirates blood sample.

r Blood Sampling Valve (BSV) - Segments blood sample for CBC analysis.
r Diff and Retic Sample Tubings (GEN•S System) or Shear Valves (LH 750 System) -
Segment blood samples for diff and retic analysis.
r Needle Assembly - Pierces specimen tube in Automatic mode.
r Bubble/Blood Detectors - Checks quality and integrity of blood sample in Automatic
mode.
r Hand Detector - Detects operator’s hand and initiates cycle in Manual mode.
r Probe-Wipe Module - Cleans outside of aspirator tip in Manual mode.
This section describes the sample acquisition system components and assemblies. See
Heading 2.16 for an overview of the sample acquisition system in both aspiration modes.
Aspiration Pump
Function
The aspiration pump (PM9) is located under the lower front cover of the Diluter. Refer to
Figure A.7-8 (GEN•S System) or Figure A.8-8 (LH 750 System) for location. The aspiration
pump is a dual-volume, field-adjustable, piston-style pump used to aspirate samples in both
the Automatic and the Manual modes. It consists of a liquid port (1), three pneumatic ports
(2, 3, and 4) and two pistons. See Figure 2.17-1.
r The inner piston aspirates the sample. Pneumatic signals from SL9 to the top (4) and
bottom (2) ports of the pump control the movement of this piston.
r The outer piston provides stops for the inner piston, determining the volume aspirated,
low or high. Pneumatic signals from SL24 to the side port (3) of the pump control the
movement of this piston.
The aspiration pump has three states: at rest, Manual-mode aspiration and Automatic-mode
aspiration. Table 2.17-1 summarizes the piston positions and pneumatic signals for the three
states of the pump. Figures 2.17-2, 2.17-3 and 2.17-4 show the three states.
.
Table 2.17-1 Aspiration Pump Pneumatic Signals and Piston Positions
Pump State Side Port (3) Outer Piston Top Port (4) Bottom Port (2) Inner Piston
At rest Pressure Up Vent Pressure Up
Automatic mode - aspiration Vent Down Pressure Vent Down
Manual mode - aspiration Pressure Up Pressure Vent Down
PN 4277219B 2.17-1
SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
Figure 2.17-1 Aspiration Pump Components

LIQUID
PORT (1)
TOP
PNEUMATIC
PORT(4)
INNER
PISTON
SIDE
PNEUMATIC
PORT(3) OUTER
PISTON
BOTTOM
7253272A
PNEUMATIC
PORT(2)
Figure 2.17-2 Aspiration Pump at Rest Aspiration Pump at Rest

When the aspiration pump is at rest, both pistons
VENT
are held at top of stroke as shown in
TOP PORT (4) Figure 2.17-2. To achieve this condition, both
SL9 and SL24 are de-energized.
In the de-energized state, SL9 vents the top port

(4) of the pump and routes 30 psi to the bottom
port (2), pushing up the inner piston and holding
it at top of stroke.
In the de-energized state, SL24 routes 30 psi to

the side port (3), pushing up the outer piston.
PRESSURE
SIDE PORT (3)
PRESSURE
7253305A
BOTTOM PORT (2)
2.17-2 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.17-3 Aspiration in Manual Mode Aspiration Pump - Manual-Mode Aspiration
To aspirate a sample in the Manual mode, SL9 is
energized and SL24 remains de-energized.
PRESSURE
TOP PORT (4)
In the energized state, SL9 vents the bottom port
(2) of the aspiration pump and routes 30 psi to
the top port (4). The inner piston moves down,
creating a vacuum at the liquid port (1) that
aspirates a sample.
In the de-energized state, SL24 routes pressure to

the side port of the pump, holding the outer
piston at the top of stroke. When the inner piston
PRESSURE reaches the outer piston, the outer piston stops
SIDE PORT (3) the movement of the inner piston, limiting
aspiration to the smaller, Manual-mode volume.
See Figure 2.17-3.
VENT
BOTTOM PORT (2) 7253306A
Figure 2.17-4 Aspiration in Automatic Mode Aspiration Pump - Automatic-Mode Aspiration

To aspirate a sample in the Automatic mode, both
SL9 and SL24 are energized.
PRESSURE
TOP PORT (4)
Note: During the Automatic mode, SL24 remains
energized until the last Automatic-mode sample
cycle is completed.
In the energized state, SL9 vents the bottom port

(2) of the aspiration pump and routes 30 psi to
the top port (4). The inner piston moves down,
creating a vacuum at the liquid port (1) that
aspirates the sample.
VENT
SIDE PORT (3) In the energized state, SL24 vents the side port
(3) of the pump. Now, when the inner piston
reaches the outer piston, the inner piston
continues to move, pushing down the outer
piston to make a full stroke. See Figure 2.17-4.
Making a full stroke aspirates the larger,
Automatic-mode volume.
VENT
PN 4277219B 2.17-3
Adjustable Stops
The dual-volume pumps have two adjustable stops, one for adjusting the low volume and the
other for adjusting the high volume. The low (Manual mode) volume is adjusted as shown in
Figure 2.17-5. Since this adjustment changes the length of the inner piston stroke and
therefore would also affect the high volume, this stop is always adjusted first. The high
(Automatic mode) volume is adjusted as shown in Figure 2.17-6.
Figure 2.17-5 Adjusting the Low, Manual-Mode Volume
Hold
MANUAL MODE
(LOW VOLUME)
STOP ADJUSTMENT
Adjust
7253324B
Figure 2.17-6 Adjusting the High, Automatic-Mode Volume
AUTOMATIC MODE
(HIGH VOLUME)
STOP ADJUSTMENT
7253323B
2.17-4 PN 4277219B
Blood Sampling Valve (BSV)
Function
The BSV is located under the lower front cover of the Diluter. Refer to Figure A.7-8 (GEN•S
System) or Figure A.8-8 (LH 750 System) for location. The BSV is composed of three ceramic
disks with pathways for:
r Aspirating blood samples.

r Delivering segments of the samples to the RBC and WBC baths for analysis.
r Backwashing the blood pathways.
r Cleaning the surfaces of the BSV.
For details on the aspiration, delivery and backwash pathways in the BSV, see the sample
acquisition system overview for both modes under Heading 2.16.
The cleaning pathways or channels of the BSV are located on the inner surfaces of the front
and rear sections of the BSV. During the Diluter cycle, while the vacuum isolator and baths are
draining, diluent is pulled through these pathways to clean the surfaces of the BSV.
The rear section of the BSV remains stationary, the front and the center sections rotate.
r Cylinder CL1 rotates the front section of the BSV to align the pathways or ports within
the ceramic disks for the selected aspiration mode, Automatic or Manual. SL34 normally
(de-energized state) routes pressure to CL1 to keep the front section rotated clockwise,
with the aspirator tip extended. SL34 and SL24 are both are energized to rotate the front
section counterclockwise. During the Automatic mode, SL34 and SL24 remain energized
until the last Automatic-mode sample cycle is completed.
r Cylinder CL2 rotates the shaft of the BSV, which rotates the center section of the BSV.
The center section isolates segments of the blood sample for CBC analysis and aligns
those segments with their respective diluent dispenser and aperture bath ports. SL15
routes pressure to CL2 to rotate the center section counterclockwise. SL17 routes
pressure to CL2 to rotate the center section clockwise.
Table 2.17-2 summarizes the positions of the BSV sections during a sample cycle.
Table 2.17-2 Summary of the BSV Positions
Automatic-Mode BSV Positions* Manual-Mode BSV Positions*
Time in Cycle Front Section Center Section Front Section Center Section
Aspiration CCW CCW CW CCW
Delivery CCW CW CW CW
Backwash Aspirator Tip N/A N/A CCW CCW
Backwash CBC Sample Lines and Needle CCW CCW CCW CCW
Cross-Rinse CCW CCW CCW CCW
* CW (clockwise) and CCW (counterclockwise) when facing the BSV knob.
PN 4277219B 2.17-5
BSV Ports
The ports for the BSV are shown in Figure 2.17-7 and described in Table 2.17-3.
Figure 2.17-7 BSV Ports

FRONT CENTER
SECTION SECTION
9
5
10
6 8
11
RBC SAMPLE 7
12
REAR
SECTION 1
13
WBC SAMPLE LOOP
4
2
7253090A 3
Table 2.17-3 BSV Ports
Port Number Tubing Number Description

1 201 To waste from rear section cleaning channel
2 202 To RBC bath
3 203 Diluent in for rear section cleaning channel
4 204 From RBC diluent dispenser for cross-rinse
5 205 To diff and retic sample lines
6 206 From WBC diluent dispenser
7 207 To WBC bath
8 208 From backwash manifold to clean aspirator tip
9 209 To waste from front section cleaning channel
10 210 From RBC diluent dispenser during Automatic mode
11 211 From piercing needle
12 212 From RBC diluent dispenser during Manual mode
13 213 Diluent in for front section cleaning channel
2.17-6 PN 4277219B
Shear Valves
Hardware Description
Shear valves are used on the LH 750 System to segment diff and retic blood samples and
stained retic samples and to align those samples with the appropriate reagent pumps and
chambers. The three shear valves, two 31 µL diff/retic blood segment valves (CVL85/126 and
CVL87/127) and one 2.5 µL stained retic segment valve (CVL93/128), are located on the
Random Access module in the Diluter. Refer to Figure A.8-9 for locations.
The shear valve assemblies consist of:
r Two flat ceramic plates, one stationary and one sliding, housed within a valve box and
cover.
r A side spring to press the plates against each other.
r A top spring to keep the sliding plate aligned with the stationary plate during movement.
r Two rods with pneumatic actuators, one at each end of the shear valve assembly, that
move the sliding plate.
Note: The primary advantage of using shear valves on the LH 750 System versus the system
of special tubings, tees, and crosses used on the GEN•S System, is that when a shear valve is
stationary the liquid in the aspiration path is never mixed with the liquid in the delivery path,
eliminating the possibility of contamination in the delivery path.
The following sections on the shear valves discuss how the shear valves work, describe what
is routed through them in each valve position, and identify the valves’ ports. Be aware
however, that the explanations may not follow the exact timing cycles of these valves.
Diff and Retic Segment Valves

The diff and retic segment valves contain pathways for:
r Aspirating the diff or retic blood samples. The sample segmenting section includes an
external stainless steel loop on the stationary plate.
r Delivering segments of the diff or the retic sample for processing.
r Cleaning the surfaces of the plates. The cleaning pathway is a groove ground into the
surface of the stationary plate.
Figure 2.17-8 Aspirate Sample During aspiration of the blood sample, blood enters the
Home position blood input port on the segment valve, travels through the
segmenting section in the stationary plate, and exits
Sample loop
through the blood output port. See Figure 2.17-8
6498178B Sample path
PN 4277219B 2.17-7
Figure 2.17-9 Deliver Sample After aspiration, the rod on the front of the shear valve
Segment position assembly is activated to move the sliding plate, aligning
the reagent input port and the reagent output port with
Sample loop the blood segment. See Figure 2.17-9.
Then the reagent pump is activated, delivering reagent to

the shear valve to push the blood segment to the
appropriate chamber. For details about the sample
processing, refer to Processing the Diff Sample on the
LH 750 System under Heading 2.22, or Processing the
6498179B Reagent path Retic Sample on the LH 750 System under Heading 2.23.
Figure 2.17-10 Backwash Sample Groove While in the segment position, the sample groove in the
Segment position sliding plate is backwashed. See Figure 2.17-10.
Backwash path
Sample groove 6498180B
Figure 2.17-11 Wash Cleaning Groove After the blood segment is delivered and the sample
groove is backwashed, the rod on the rear of the shear
Home position
valve assembly is activated to return the sliding plate to
Cleaning
the aspiration (home) position. See Figure 2.17-12.
groove
While in the home position, vacuum pulls diluent through
the cleaning groove to wash out any liquid that may have
migrated between the plates of the shear valve.
6498182B
Figure 2.17-12 Backwash Sample Loop In addition, the sample (aspiration) path is backwashed to
flush out the residual reagent. See Figure 2.17-11.
The segment valve remains primed with diluent in the

aspiration path and with reagent in the delivery path.
2.17-8 PN 4277219B
Stained Retic Segment Valve
The stained retic segment valve contains pathways for:
r Aspirating the stained retic blood sample. The sample segmenting section is a precisely
machined surface cavity in the stationery plate.
r Delivering the segment of the stained retic sample.
r Cleaning the surfaces of the plates. The cleaning pathway is a groove ground into the
surface of the stationary plate.
Figure 2.17-13 Aspirate Sample During aspiration of the stained blood sample, stained
blood enters the blood input port on the stationery plate,
H o m e p o s itio n travels through the segmenting section in the sliding plate,
S a m p le s e g m e n t
and exits through the blood output port on the stationary
plate. See Figure 2.17-13.
6 4 9 8 2 3 9 B S a m p le p a th
Figure 2.17-14 Deliver Sample After aspiration, the rod on the front of the shear valve
assembly is activated to move the sliding plate, aligning
S e g m e n t p o s itio n the reagent input port and the reagent output port with
the blood segment. See Figure 2.17-14.
Then the reagent pump is activated, delivering retic

clearing solution to the shear valve to push the stained
blood segment to the retic chamber. For details on the
retic stained sample processing, refer to Processing the
R e a g e n t Retic Sample on the LH 750 System under Heading 2.23.
6 4 9 8 2 4 0 B p a th
Figure 2.17-15 Wash Cleaning Groove After the stained blood segment is delivered, the rod on
the rear of the shear valve assembly is activated to return
the sliding plate to the aspiration (home) position. See
H o m e p o s itio n
Figure 2.17-16.
While in the home position, vacuum pulls diluent through

the cleaning groove to wash out any liquid that may have
migrated between the plates of the shear valve.
C le a n in g
g ro o v e 6 4 9 8 2 4 1 B
PN 4277219B 2.17-9
Figure 2.17-16 Rinse Aspiration Pathway In addition, the aspiration (sample) path is rinsed with
stain to flush out the residual retic clearing solution. See
H o m e p o s itio n S a m p le Figure 2.17-15.
s e g m e n t
The segment valve remains primed with stain in the
aspiration path and with retic clearing solution in the
delivery (reagent) path.
S ta in r in s e
6 4 9 8 2 4 2 B p a th
Shear Valve Ports

The ports for the diff and retic segment valves are shown in Figure 2.17-17 and described in
Figure 2.17-4. The ports for the stained retic segment valve are shown in Figure 2.17-18 and
described in Figure 2.17-5.
Figure 2.17-17 Diff and Retic Segment Valve Ports

F ro n t
1 2 1 1
1 0 6 5 3 1
9
7 4 2
6498201B L e ft s id e R ig h t s id e
M e ta l lo o p
Table 2.17-4 Diff and Retic Segment Valve Port Descriptions
Port # Diff Segment Valve (CVL85/126) Retic Segment Valve (CVL87/127)

1 To retic segment valve (CVL87/127), port 10 To VL62→BD2
2 31 µL metal loop→port 5 31 µL metal loop→port 5
3 FX1-1 3.5" 0.023 i.d. tubing loop→ port 7
4 1.25 mL 0.023 i.d. tubing loop→port 6 1.25 mL 0.023 i.d. tubing loop→port 6
5 31 µL metal loop→port 2 31 µL metal loop→port 2
6 1.25 mL 0.023 i.d. tubing loop→port 4 1.25 mL 0.023 i.d. tubing loop→port 4
7 FX1-3 3.5" 0.023 i.d. tubing loop→ port 3
8 To VL65→mixing chamber To VL89→stain chamber
9 From diff heater From VL99→PM5 (stain pump)
10 From FT13-3 (BSV) From diff segment valve (CVL85/126), port 1
11 FT33→FT32→QD73 (diluent input) FT33→FT32→QD73 (diluent input)
12 FT31→FT30→QD98 (waste output) FT31→FT30→QD98 (waste output)
2.17-10 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.17-18 Stained Retic Segment Valve Ports
F ro n t
6 7
1 4 B la n k
2 3
6498200B L e ft s id e R ig h t s id e
Table 2.17-5 Stained Retic Segment Valve Port Descriptions
Port # Stained Retic Segment Valve (CVL93/128)

1 From retic clearing solution pump (PM6)
2 To VL95→retic chamber
3 From VL94→stain chamber
4 To PM11
5 FT30→QD98 (waste output)
6 FT32→QD73 (diluent input)
Needle Assembly
The needle assembly is located under the lower cover of the Diluter. See Figure A.7-8 (GEN•S
System) or Figure A.8-8 (LH 750 System) for location. The needle assembly comprises:
r Stationary needle enclosed within a bellows

r Bellows up and bellows down sensors
r Bellows interlock
r Bellows cylinder (CL3)
r Needle vent vacuum chamber (VC19).
See Figure 2.17-19.
At all times except during piercing of the specimen tube:
r The bellows cylinder is extended, so that the bellows are expanded, covering the needle.
r The bellows up sensor is activated, indicating the bellows are expanded.
r The bellows interlock is engaged. The bellows interlock ensures the bellows remains
expanded, preventing accidental exposure of the needle. To contract the bellows, this
solenoid activated interlock must be disengaged.
PN 4277219B 2.17-11
Figure 2.17-19 Needle Assembly Components
NEEDLE
(Inside BELLOWS)
ASPIRATION
BELLOWS INTERLOCK LINE
WASTE LINE
VENT/VACUUM
INPUT NEEDLE
VENT LINE
BELLOW
NEEDLE VENT
UP SENSOR
CHAMBER
BELLOW
DOWN SENSOR
BELLOW
CYLINDER
From
BACKWASH
6498019B
MANIFOLD MF4
To pierce the specimen tube, the bellows interlock is disengaged and the bellows cylinder
(CL3) is retracted at the same time as the tube ram cylinder (CL6) is extended, so that the
bellows is contracted at the same time as the specimen tube is pushed onto the needle. When
the bellows is contracted, the bellows up sensor is deactivated and the bellows down sensor is
activated.
After aspiration, CL3 is extended and CL6 is retracted simultaneously, so that the bellows
expands, covering the needle, at the same time as the tube is pushed off the needle.
Before rinsing the needle vent line or backwashing the needle, the instrument checks the
bellows up sensor to verify the bellows is covering the needle, preventing the spraying of
biohazardous material.
Diluent from the backwash manifold (MF4) is pushed through the vent line, into the needle
vent chamber, through the needle vent into the bellows. The vent rinse is drained and then
vacuum is applied to the needle vent chamber to dry the vent lines.
The needle is backwashed with diluent and the backwash waste is collected in the bellows
and then drained to waste.
2.17-12 PN 4277219B
Bubble/Blood Detectors
Function
Two bubble/blood detectors are located in the Automatic-mode aspiration pathway, one
before the BSV, and the other at the other at the end of the pathway. See Figure 2.17-20.
Figure 2.17-20 Bubble/Blood Detectors
BSV
Rear blood
detector
Front blood
detector
Front
blood
detector Rear
blood
detector
Random Access module Retic module
6498025B
LH 750 System GEN S System
The bubble/blood detectors are optical sensors that monitor aspiration in the Automatic
mode to ensure the sample is of good quality and sufficient volume. The Diluter 2 card
contains the logic circuitry and provides the power for the bubble/blood detectors, and
contains LEDs indicating the status of the bubble/blood detectors for troubleshooting
The bubble/blood detectors are calibrated as a set to ensure proper operation.
PN 4277219B 2.17-13
Operation
Refer to the numbers on Figure 2.17-21 to follow the operation of the bubble/blood detectors.
Note: Figure 2.17-21 and the illustrations in Table 2.17-6 are provided to explain how the
bubble/blood detectors work and make no attempt to show the actual timing of the readings.
Figure 2.17-21 Bubble/Blood Detector Operation

Front Detector Rear Detector
% TRANSMITTANCE
100
Diluent
Air
Blood
Threshold
(3)
Blood Flow
0
TIME
Carryover Aspiration Blood Bubble BSV Partial Bubble/Blood
Check Occurs Check Check Rotates Aspiration Detectors
(1) (2) (4) Check Reset
(5) 7253359A
Immediately after a specimen tube is pushed onto the needle, the Blood Detector circuit looks
for diluent levels at both the front and rear detectors. This is the carryover check, verifying
the previous sample was backwashed and the sample path is clean (1).
After aspiration starts, an initial reading is taken at the front sensor (2) to verify the level is
below a preset blood threshold (3). This blood check is to verify that aspiration occurred.
During aspiration (until the BSV center section rotates), the front detector is monitored (4)
for any voltage increases that would indicate bubbles or dilution of the sample. This is the
bubble check, verifying the quality of the sample.
After the center section of the BSV rotates and the diluent dispensers are activated, the front
and rear detector voltages are compared to verify the consistency of the blood is the same at
the beginning and the end of the aspiration path. This is the partial aspiration check (5) to
ensure the aspirated sample volume is sufficient.
If an aspiration problem occurs and aspiration is set at one aspiration/tube, the instrument
aborts the current cycle, repierces the specimen tube and repeats aspiration. If an aspiration
problem occurs on a repeat cycle or if aspiration is set to more than one aspiration/tube, the
instrument completes the cycle and generates an aspiration message.
2.17-14 PN 4277219B
Aspiration Messages
If an aspiration error occurs, the instrument displays a message on the Analyzer and the
Diluter, writes a message in the event log at the Workstation, displays results at the
Workstation with a P (aspiration error) flag, and lights the appropriate LED on the Diluter 2
card. See Table 2.17-6 for a description of each message. Refer to Heading 7.2 for
troubleshooting action.
When the bubble/blood detectors are disabled, the Workstation displays the results of
samples ran in the Automatic mode with a P-flag. This alerts the operator to review the results
so that no erroneous results are reported if an aspiration error occurs while the bubble/blood
detectors are disabled.
Table 2.17-6 Aspiration Messages
Message LED Condition
ASPIRATION C CARRY Before the tube is pierced, the 100

difference between the front and rear
detectors is greater than a specified
limit. The most common cause is a
dirty pathway.
0
TIME
Carryover Check Failed
Difference Between Front
and Rear Detectors Failed 7253360A
Aspiration C
ASPIRATION N NOBL After the aspiration pump is

activated, the voltage at the front
detector fails to reach the blood 100
threshold within a given time,
indicating no blood was aspirated.
0
TIME
Front Detector Did Not Drop
Below Blood Threshold
Aspiration N 7253361A
PN 4277219B 2.17-15
Table 2.17-6 Aspiration Messages (Continued)
Message LED Condition
ASPIRATION B BUBB During aspiration, the front sensor 100

voltage level went above a specified
level, indicating the presence of
bubbles 0.1 µL or larger.
During aspiration, the difference
between the front sensor voltage and
the blood threshold increased,
indicating the blood may be diluted.
0
TIME
Front Detector Changes
Detected During Blood Flow
Bubble Check Failed
Aspiration B 7253362A
ASPIRATION P PART Before the BSV rotates, the 100

difference between the front and rear
detectors is greater than a specified
limit. The most common cause is a
short sample.
0
TIME
Difference Between Front
and Rear Detectors Failed
Partial Aspiration Check Failed
7253363B Aspiration P
Hand Detector
The hand detector is located in the Manual-mode aspiration station. See Figure 2.17-22.
The hand detector, an infrared optical sensor, performs two functions:
r It is a safety mechanism for the rotation of the front section of the BSV. Before the
instrument energizes the solenoid to rotate the front section of the BSV, it monitors the
hand-detector sensor to determine if anything is in the pathway of the aspirator tip.
r It initiates the Manual-mode cycle. The instrument monitors the hand-detector sensor
and automatically initiates aspiration when the light path is interrupted. The hand
detector is part of SmartStart recognition.
Note: If an operator presents a specimen tube to the aspirator tip before entering the
sample ID, the instrument prompts the operator to enter the sample ID before it aspirates
a sample. The operator must block the hand-detector’s beam throughout aspiration.
2.17-16 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.17-22 Manual-Mode Aspiration Station Components
Motor
Aspirator
tip
Activator Backwash
cup
Optical
cylinder
sensors
Cleaning
truck
Hand
detector
sensor Manual Backwash
start switch cup
6498140B
Probe-Wipe module
Probe-Wipe Module
Function
The Probe-Wipe module is located behind the Manual-mode aspiration station. Refer to
Figure 2.17-22. The Probe-Wipe module consists of:
r A backwash cup that receives the diluent and blood backwashed through the aspirator
tip and drains it to waste.
Note: Two styles of Probe-Wipe modules are currently in use on the GEN•S System.
t In the original Probe-Wipe module, the backwash cup is stationary. This
Probe-Wipe module works with any of the released software versions.
t In the current (or field modified) Probe-wipe module, the backwash cup is
moveable. The cup is moved up to the aspirator tip during the backwash to
eliminate the possibility of liquid spraying on the module and causing Probe-Wipe
errors. This Probe-Wipe module requires software version 4A or higher.
The LH 750 System uses the Probe-wipe module with a moveable backwash cup.
r A spring-return cylinder, CL11, that moves the backwash cup under the aspirator tip
during backwash.
Note: CL11 is only present in Probe-wipe modules with a moveable backwash cup.
r A cleaning truck that travels up and down the aspirator tip.
r A motor that drives the cleaning truck.
r Two optical sensors, one at the top and one at the bottom of the travel route of the truck,
that monitor the position of the cleaning truck.
PN 4277219B 2.17-17
After aspiration in the Manual mode, the cleaning truck moves up and down the aspirator tip,
dispensing clean diluent around the tip and applying vacuum from the waste chamber to
collect the diluent and any blood. This is the sequence of events:
1. The solenoids that provide diluent (SL110) and vacuum (SL111) to the cleaning truck
are energized.
2. The direction of the motor is set to up and the motor driver is enabled.
3. The motor timer is set and the probe-wipe up sensor is monitored.
4. When the probe-wipe up sensor detects the cleaning truck -
a. The motor stops and reverses direction.
b. The motor driver is enabled.
c. The timer is reset and the down sensor is monitored.
d. The solenoid that provides diluent (SL110) is disabled, so that only vacuum is
applied during the descent of the cleaning truck.
5. When the probe-wipe down sensor detects the cleaning truck -
a. The motor stops.
b. The vacuum solenoid (SL111) is de-energized.
At the end of the cycle, the cleaning truck:
1. Moves up slightly, applying only vacuum to remove the last drop on the aspirator tip.
2. Returns to the down position.
Monitoring
The optoswitch sensors in the Probe-Wipe module are monitored by the Diluter 2 card. The
Diluter 2 card also contains and controls the status LEDs for the sensors and the Motor-Driver
and Current Limit circuits for the motor.
If the time expires before the appropriate sensor detects the cleaning truck, the instrument
stops the motor and generates a fault message. If it is the probe-wipe up sensor that did not
detect the cleaning truck in time, the motor changes directions, sending the cleaning truck
back down.
The instrument also monitors the probe-wipe up and probe-wipe down sensors before
rotating the rear section of the BSV to ensure the cleaning truck is in the down position.
2.17-18 PN 4277219B
CBC ANALYSIS - COLLECTING WBC, RBC, PLT AND HGB DATA 2
2.18 CBC ANALYSIS - COLLECTING WBC, RBC, PLT AND HGB DATA
Summary
The Analytical Station uses the Coulter Principle to count and measure the RBCs and Plts in
the RBC bath and WBCs in the WBC bath, and measures hemoglobin photometrically in the
Hgb cuvette. Electronic cards in the Analyzer measure and count the pulses produced by the
cells, and develop histograms for a graphical representation of size versus number. The
remaining CBC parameters (Hct, MCH, MCHC, RDW, Pct and PDW) are calculated from the
directly measured data. This section describes the components used to sense the RBC, WBC
and Plt data and to measure the Hgb.
Heading 2.19 describes the electronic cards used to analyze RBC, WBC and Plt data. See
Chapter 3 in the Reference manual for a description of the methods used to obtain all the
CBC parameters.
For an overview of CBC analysis on the GEN•S System, see Figure 2.18-1. For an overview of
CBC analysis on the LH 750 System, see Figure 2.18-2.
Figure 2.18-1 CBC Analysis in the GEN•S System Block Diagram

DILUTER ANALYZER
WIA1
WHITE WIA2
PRE-AMP
WIA3
CARD
API SBUS RED/WHITE

CARD PROCESSOR
CARD
RED RIA1
PRE-AMP RIA2
RIA3
CARD
WBC
RBC
BATH
BATH PLATELET
PROCESSOR
CARD
HGB
CUVETTE
COMMUNICATION
INTERFACE AMC
HGB PREAMP
MODULE CARD
7253169B
PN 4277219B 2.18-1
CBC ANALYSIS - COLLECTING WBC, RBC, PLT AND HGB DATA
Figure 2.18-2 CBC Analysis in the LH 750 System Block Diagram

D IL U T E R A N A L Y Z E R
R /W /P P L T S B U S
P L A T E L E T
S C /A P R O C E S S O R
c a rd c a rd
R B C W B C
S ix - C h a n n e l
P re a m p
c a rd
R E D /W H IT E
P R O C E S S O R 2
c a rd
W B C R B C
B A T H B A T H
C O M M
H g b P re a m p IN T E R F A C E A M C
m o d u le c a rd
H g b
c u v e tte
W o r k s ta tio n
7 2 1 9 0 2 5 B
Making the Sample Dilutions

Refer to Figures 2.18-3 and 2.18-4 for component locations on the GEN•S System, to
Figure 2.18-5 for component locations on the LH 750 System.
After aspiration of the blood sample, the center section of the BSV rotates to segment two
separate volumes of the sample and to align the blood segments with the diluent dispensers.
For details about the function of the BSV, see Heading 2.16, SAMPLE ACQUISITION
SYSTEM - OVERVIEW, and see Blood Sampling Valve (BSV) under Heading 2.17, SAMPLE
ACQUISITION SYSTEM - HARDWARE DESCRIPTION.
The RBC diluent dispenser (PM2) and the WBC diluent dispenser (PM3) dispense diluent
through the BSV, washing the blood segments into their respective baths.
At the same time, the CBC lytic reagent pump (PM7) dispenses reagent into the delivery path
to the WBC bath, delivering the CBC lytic reagent with the blood/diluent dilution. The CBC
lytic reagent lyses the RBCs, leaving the WBCs for analysis. Mixing bubbles enter the baths to
mix the dilutions.
See Table A.1-31 for dispenser and pump volume specifications.
2.18-2 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.18-3 CBC Sample Processing Components on GEN•S System Analytical Stations that Use the
Diluent Reservoir
RBC DILUENT WBC DILUENT VACUUM CBC LYTIC VACUUM

DISPENSER DISPENSER ISOLATOR CHAMBER REAGENT PUMP REGULATOR
RBC SWEEP-FLOW HGB CUVETTE WBC

7253171A
BATH TANK ASSEMBLY BATH
Figure 2.18-4 CBC Sample Processing Components on GEN•S System Analytical Stations that Bypass
the Diluent Reservoir
RBC diluent WBC diluent RBC vacuum WBC vacuum CBC lytic Vacuum
dispenser dispenser isolator chamber isolator chamber reagent pump regulator
RBC Sweep-flow Hgb cuvette WBC

6498089A
bath tank assemblt bath
PN 4277219B 2.18-3
Figure 2.18-5 CBC Sample Processing Components on LH 750 System Analytical Stations
RBC diluent WBC diluent RBC vacuum WBC vacuum CBC lytic Vacuum
dispenser dispenser isolator chamber isolator chamber reagent pump regulator
RBC Sweep-flow Hgb cuvette WBC

6498191B
bath tank assembly bath
Applying the Coulter Principle
Sensing Area
Both aperture bath/aperture module assemblies house an external electrode, three apertures
and three internal electrodes for applying aperture current across the aperture. (The
instrument analyzes the dilutions three times simultaneously.) See Figure 2.18-6.
Aperture Vacuum
Regulated low vacuum from the vacuum isolator chamber (VC1) or from two vacuum
isolator chambers (VC1-R and VC1-W) pulls the dilutions through the apertures.
In the RBC aperture bath/aperture module assembly, the vacuum also pulls diluent from the
sweep-flow tank, up behind the RBC apertures, to prevent RBCs from swirling back into the
sensing area and being recounted as platelets.
Aperture Current
On the GEN•S System, coaxial cables connect the internal electrodes to the RED/WHITE
PRE-AMP cards, which supply the aperture current to the apertures. For details, see
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP 2 Cards (GEN•S System) under Heading 2.19, CBC ANALYSIS -
ANALYZING RBC, WBC AND PLT DATA.
On the LH 750 System, coaxial cables connect the internal electrodes to the Six-Channel
Preamp card which is mounted behind the apertures in the Diluter. For details see
Six-Channel Preamp Card (LH 750 System) under Heading 2.19, CBC ANALYSIS -
ANALYZING RBC, WBC AND PLT DATA.
2.18-4 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.18-6 Applying the Coulter Principle
APERTURE
INTERNAL VACUUM LINES
ELECTRODES
(1 OF 3)
APERTURE
VACUUM
LINES
COAXIAL
CABLES
WBC APERTURE
AREA (1 OF 3)
INTERNAL
ELECTRODES EXTERNAL
(1 OF 3) ELECTRODES SAMPLE
INPUT
SWEEP-FLOW
INPUT LINES 7253170A
RBC
(1 OF 3)
APERTURE
SAMPLE
AREA (1 OF 3)
INPUT
Timing the Data Collection in the GEN•S System
WBC and RBC Data

Data for the WBC and RBC counts is collected at the same time and for the same amount of
time, the first 4 seconds of the count cycle. See Figure 2.18-7.
Figure 2.18-7 Data Collection Timing on the GEN•S System

TIME - SECONDS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
COUNT
WBC
HISTOGRAM
COUNT
RBC
HISTOGRAM
PLT HISTOGRAM
DATA COLLECTION FOR WBC AND RBC COUNTS
MINIMAL DATA COLLECTION FOR HISTOGRAMS
ADDITIONAL DATA COLLECTION INCREMENTS FOR HISTOGRAMS 7253412C
Data for the development of the WBC and RBC histograms is collected sequentially and for
varying lengths of time as described below.
PN 4277219B 2.18-5
Note: Differences in cell type, cell concentration and the number of good pulses can vary the
histogram data collection time.
WBC Histogram
Data for the WBC histogram is collected for the first 2 seconds of the count cycle. If
additional information is required, the system extends data accumulation in 2-second
increments to a maximum of 10 seconds. Data accumulation stops when one of the following
criteria is met:
r The peak channel is full (254 particles in any one channel).

r 2,000 particles are accumulated in all WBC histograms.
r 10 seconds maximum is reached.
RBC Histogram
Data for the RBC histogram is collected after the instrument finishes collecting data for the
WBC histogram. The data is collected for 2 seconds. If additional information is required, the
system extends data accumulation in 2-second increments to a maximum of 8 seconds. Data
accumulation stops when one of the following criteria is met:

r 5,000 particles are accumulated in all RBC histograms.
Plt Histogram
Data for the PLT histogram is collected for the first 4 seconds of the count cycle. If additional
information is required, the system extends data accumulation in 2-second increments to a
maximum of 18 seconds. Data accumulation stops when one of the following criteria is met:

r 1,500 particles are accumulated in any platelet histogram.
Timing the Data Collection in the LH 750 System
WBC and RBC Count Data

Data for the WBC and RBC counts is collected at the same time and for the same amount of
time. See Figure 2.18-7. At a minimum the WBC and RBC count data is collected for the first
four 1 second count periods. Then the counts are extended in 1 second increments until the
data accumulation for the histograms is completed or until 10 seconds have elapsed,
whichever comes first.
WBC, RBC, and Plt Histograms

Data for the development of the WBC and RBC histograms is collected sequentially and for
varying lengths of time as described below.
Note: Differences in cell type, cell concentration and the number of good pulses can vary the
histogram data collection time.
2.18-6 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.18-8 Data Collection Timing LH 750 System
T IM E - S E C O N D S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0
C O U N T
W B C
H IS T O G R A M
C O U N T
R B C
H IS T O G R A M
P L T H IS T O G R A M
M in im a l d a ta c o lle c tio n fo r W B C a n d R B C c o u n ts
A d d itio n a l d a ta c o lle c tio n in c r e m e n ts fo r W B C a n d R B C c o u n ts
M in im a l d a ta c o lle c tio n fo r h is to g r a m s
A d d itio n a l d a ta c o lle c tio n in c r e m e n ts fo r h is to g r a m s 6 4 9 8 2 4 4 B
WBC Histogram
Data for the WBC histogram is collected for the first 1 second of the count cycle. If additional

r 2,000 particles are accumulated in all WBC histograms.
RBC Histogram
Data for the RBC histogram is collected after the instrument finishes collecting data for the
WBC histogram. The data is collected for 1 second. If additional information is required, the
system extends data accumulation in 1-second increments to a maximum of 10 seconds. Data
accumulation stops when one of the following criteria is met:

r 5,000 particles are accumulated in all RBC histograms.
Plt Histogram
Data for the PLT histogram is collected for the first 2 seconds of the count cycle. If additional

r 1,500 particles are accumulated in any platelet histogram.
PN 4277219B 2.18-7
Determining the Hgb

When the CBC lytic reagent lyses the RBCs, it releases the hemoglobin. The hemoglobin
reacts with the CBC lytic reagent to form cyanmethemoglobin, a stable pigment.
To perform the Hgb analysis, the instrument takes two sets of voltage readings of diluent (for
a blank) and of the sample dilution. While the WBC count is performed, diluent from the
backwash tank (VC23) is dispensed into the Hgb cuvette for the Hgb-blank reading and then
drained. After the WBC count is completed, the dilution in the WBC bath drains into the
cuvette for the Hgb-sample reading.
Incandescent light from the Hgb lamp passes through the Hgb cuvette and then through a
filter with a transmission wavelength of 525 nm. See Figure 2.18-9.
Figure 2.18-9 Hgb Sensing Area

HGB LAMP
HGB PREAMP
MODULE WITH
525 NM FILTER
HGB
CUVETTE
7253173A
A light sensitive diode generates current from the transmitted light, which is converted to a
voltage at the op-amp in the Hgb preamp. The higher the Hgb concentration, the darker the
dilution, the less light that can pass through the dilution, and the lower the Hgb voltage.
The Hgb preamp routes the voltage to the COMMUNICATION INTERFACE card, which
converts the voltage to a digital value for use by the AMC. See Figure 2.18-10.
Figure 2.18-10 Hgb Signal Flow

W B C B A T H
D IL U T E R 1 C O M M IN T F C
C A R D 5 2 5 N M F IL T E R R S /O P T O
C A R D
IN T F C C A R D
J 5 J 2 J 2 7 J 4 B A ,
J 5
L A M P V D C H G B H G B S IG N A L B B 1 8
L A M P A D C
L A M P R E T
H G B P R E A M P
H G B
C U V E T T E
7 2 1 9 0 2 4 B S Y S T E M B U S
2.18-8 PN 4277219B
On the GEN•S System, the AMC determines the Hgb results for the sample and then sends
the results to the Workstation. For details, see CBC Analysis on the GEN•S System, Hgb,
under Heading 2.24, SAMPLE REPORTING.
On the LH 750 System, the AMC stores the two sets of Hgb voltage readings and sends the
raw data to the Workstation for analysis. For details, see CBC Analysis on the LH 750 System,
Hgb, under Heading 2.24, SAMPLE REPORTING.
The sample dilution is drained from the Hgb cuvette either at the beginning of the next cycle
or according to the Hgb Timer Drain setting in the Analyzer Service Menu.
PN 4277219B 2.18-9
2.18-10 PN 4277219B
CBC ANALYSIS - ANALYZING RBC, WBC AND PLT DATA 2
2.19 CBC ANALYSIS - ANALYZING RBC, WBC AND PLT DATA
Summary
The Analytical Station uses the Coulter Principle to count and measure the RBCs and Plts in
the RBC bath and WBCs in the WBC bath, and measures hemoglobin photometrically in the
Hgb cuvette. Electronic cards in the Analyzer measure and count the pulses produced by the
cells, and collect data for histograms for a graphical representation of size versus number.
Heading 2.18 gives an overview of CBC analysis and describes the components used to sense
the RBC, Plt, WBC, MCV, MPV and Hgb parameters, and to determine the Hgb results. This
section describes all the electronic cards used to determine the RBC, WBC and Plt results,
except the R/W/P SC/A card used on the LH 750 System. It describes:
r The two RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards, the RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card, and the
PLATELET PROCESSOR card used on the GEN•S System.
r The Six-Channel Preamp card, the RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card, and the
PLATELET PROCESSOR card used on the LH 750 System.
For information on the R/W/P SC/A card, refer to R/W/P SC/A Card under Heading 2.7,
ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - LOCAL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE ANALYZER.
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP 2 Cards (GEN•S System)
Function
Two RED/WHITE PRE-AMP 2 cards are located in the Analyzer. Refer to Figure 2.3-1 for
locations. The RED PRE-AMP card (the one on the left) is used for RBC and Plt pulses, the
WBC PRE-AMP card (the one on the right) for WBC pulses.
Figure 2.19-1 RED/WHITE PRE-AMP Card Block Diagram
I IA A 1 1 VV OO LLTT AA GG EE DD CC RR EE SS TT OO RR EE XX 11
TT OO BB AA TT HH C C I IR R C C U U I IT T C C I IR R C C U U I IT T
ZZ AA PP G G A A I IN N
X X 8 8 . .0 0 9 9
A A M M P P L L I IF F I IE E R R
CC AA LL CC OO MM MM AA NN DD AA NN AA LLOO GG
CC AA LL PP UU LLSS EE S S W W I IT T C C H H
TT OO BB AA TT HH C C I IR R C C U U I IT T
C C I IR R C C U U I IT T
G G A A I IN N X X 8 8 . .0 0 9 9
AA NN AA LLOO GG
S S W W I IT T C C H H
TT OO BB AA TT HH C C I IR R C C U U I IT T C C I IR R C C U U I IT T
G G A A I IN N X X 8 8 . .0 0 9 9
AA NN AA LLOO GG
S S W W I IT T C C H H 7 72 25 53 31 17 74 4A A
PN 4277219B 2.19-1
CBC ANALYSIS - ANALYZING RBC, WBC AND PLT DATA
Each RED/WHITE PRE-AMP 2 card contains three independent circuits for analog signal
processing. Each circuit is connected to an aperture module by a coaxial cable. Identical
circuits allow simultaneous processing of analog signals from each aperture. See
Figure 2.19-1.
The RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards:
r Apply constant current to the electrodes through the coaxial cables.

r Amplify the pulses generated when cells pass through the apertures.
r Restore the voltage to a usable dc level.
r Route the voltages to the RED/WHITE PROCESSOR or PLATELET PROCESSOR card.
CAL Pulses
CAL COMMAND and CAL PULSE signals from the API card are routed to the RED/WHITE
PRE-AMP cards’ analog switch and differential high gain amplifiers to generate RAMP pulses
and self-tests. These pulses are applied to the CBC circuits to test the signal paths that pulses
from the apertures follow through the System.
Inputs Outputs
r Aperture current supplies from the API r Three X1 gain signals from the RED
card PRE-AMP to the RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR card
r Zap voltage from the APS1 card r Three X8.09 gain signals from the RED-
t +150 Vdc to the WHITE PRE-AMP PREAMP to the PLATELET
PROCESSOR card
t +82 Vdc to the RED PRE-AMP
r CAL COMMAND and CAL PULSE r Three X8.09 gain signals from the
signals from the API card WHITE PRE-AMP to the RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR card
Six-Channel Preamp Card (LH 750 System)
Function
The Six-Channel Preamp card is located in the Diluter. Refer to Figure 2.4-11 for location.
The Six-Channel Preamp card is designed to be used with the R/W/P SC/A card. It replaces
the RED/WHITE PREAMP cards used on the GEN•S System, without the dc restoration and
gain scaling functions.
The Six-Channel Preamp card:
r Applies constant current to the electrodes through the coaxial cables.

r Amplifies the pulses generated when cells pass through the apertures. See Figure 2.19-2.
r Routes the voltages to the R/W/R SC/A card
Locating the Six-Channel Preamp card in the Diluter, close to the apertures, allows the use of
shorter coaxial cables. The combination of shorter coaxial cables and the high-level
differential amplifier outputs generated by the Six-Channel Preamp card minimizes sensitivity
to interference.
2.19-2 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.19-2 Six-Channel Preamp Card Block Diagram
R E D /P L A T E L E T -
In p u t c o u p lin g T r a n s im p e d a n c e G a in
+ c a p a c ito r a m p lifie r s ta g e
2 X 3
3 0 0 µ A
R e d R E D /P L A T E L E T +
a p e rtu re D iffe r e n tia l
a m p lifie r
W H IT E -
In p u t c o u p lin g T r a n s im p e d a n c e G a in
+ c a p a c ito r a m p lifie r s ta g e
2 X 3
3 0 0 µ A W H IT E +
W h ite
a p e rtu re
7 2 1 9 0 2 7 B
CAL Pulses
Not available yet.
Inputs Outputs
r +235 Vdc from R/W/P SC/A card Six differential amplified signals
r Zap voltage from APS1 card
t +150 Vdc for white aperture zap
voltage
t +82 Vdc for red aperture zap
voltage
r ±15 Vdc via the R/W/P SC/A card
r Test pulse (not available yet)
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR Card (GEN•S System)
Function
The RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card is located in the Analyzer. Refer to Figure 2.3-1 for
location. The RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card routes the six gain signals from the
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards through comparator circuits, peak-detection and edit circuits
and buffer circuits to:
r Determine the RBC and WBC count.

r Find the ideal pulses for sizing to develop RBC and WBC histograms.
r Display pulses on the Analyzer CRT.
PN 4277219B 2.19-3
Cell Counting. Each of the six gain inputs from the RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards connect to
a comparator circuit. See Figure 2.19-3. All pulses sensed during the 4-second count time are
processed for count. But only pulses determined by the comparator circuits to be above a
predetermined threshold and within the desired pulse width are counted as a cell.
Pulses that pass the threshold are converted to digital signals and routed to a tri-counter. The
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card has two tri-counters, one for RBC counts and one for WBC
counts. The tri-counters validate and count the digital information, and hold it until it is
needed by the AMC.
Figure 2.19-3 RED/WHITE PROCESSOR Card Block Diagram

SIZING
RED 1 PEAK AP1

EDIT
DETECTION
WHT 1
A-D CONVERTER
RED 2 PEAK AP2
EDIT MEMORY
DETECTION
WHT 2
RED 3 PEAK AP3

EDIT
WHT 3 DETECTION
SYSTEM RED/WHITE
RESET CONTROLLER
WHITE
TRI-COUNTER
COUNTING COMPARATORS
SYSTEM BUS
RED
TRI-COUNTER
BUFFERED
BUFFERS SIGNALS TO
SCOPE MODULE
7253175A
Cell Sizing. The six gain inputs from the RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards connect to three
identical Peak-Detection and Edit circuits for cell sizing, one each for data from aperture 1,
aperture 2 and aperture 3. WBCs are sized first, then RBCs. See Timing the Data Collection in
the GEN•S System under Heading 2.18, CBC ANALYSIS - COLLECTING WBC, RBC, PLT
AND HGB DATA, for details.
The size of a cell determines the height (peak) of its pulse. The path of a cell as it passes
through the aperture determines the shape of its pulse. All pulses enter a Peak-Detection
circuit for size determination, but only pulses determined by the Edit circuit to have an ideal
shape - to have passed through the center of the aperture - are acceptable. The A/D converter
converts each acceptable pulse signal to a digital address for storage in the RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR card memory until retrieved by the AMC.
2.19-4 PN 4277219B
Cell Pulse Display. The six gain inputs from the RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards also connect
to a buffer circuit. The buffered signals are sent to the Scope Module to display the pulses.
Input
r Three X1 gain outputs from the RED PRE-AMP card
r Three X8.09 gain outputs from the WHITE PRE-AMP card
r System RESET signal during power up to clear and reset the counters
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 Card (LH 750 System)
Function
The RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card is located in the Analyzer. Refer to Figure 2.3-4 for
location. The RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card routes the six signals from the Six-Channel
Preamp card through Comparator circuits, Peak-Detection and Edit circuits, and Buffer
circuits to:
r Determine the RBC and WBC event count and the wait count.
r Find the ideal pulses for sizing to develop RBC and WBC histograms.
r Display pulses on the Analyzer CRT.
Cell Counting. Each of the six inputs from the R/W/P SC/A card connect to a comparator
circuit. See Figure 2.19-3. All pulses sensed during the count time are processed for count.
But only pulses determined by the comparator circuits to be above a predetermined threshold
and within the desired pulse width are counted as a cell.
In addition, the wait time (the time during which no pulses are above the threshold) is
measured. This measurement is used by the Workstation.
Pulses that pass the threshold are converted to digital signals and routed to a counter. The
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card has 12 counters: three for RBC event counts, three for RBC
wait counts, three for WBC event counts, and three for WBC wait counts. The counters
validate and count the digital information, and hold it until it is needed by the AMC.
Cell Sizing. The six inputs from the R/W/P SC/A card connect to three identical
Peak-Detection and Edit circuits for cell sizing, one each for data from aperture 1, aperture 2
and aperture 3. WBCs are sized first, then RBCs. See Timing the Data Collection in the
LH 750 System under Heading 2.18, CBC ANALYSIS - COLLECTING WBC, RBC, PLT AND
HGB DATA, for details.
The size of a cell determines the height (peak) of its pulse. The path of a cell as it passes
through the aperture determines the shape of its pulse. All pulses enter a Peak-Detection
circuit for size determination, but only pulses determined by the Edit circuit to have an ideal
shape - to have passed through the center of the aperture - are acceptable. The A/D converter
converts each acceptable pulse signal to a digital address for storage in the RED/WHITE
PROCESSOR card memory until retrieved by the AMC.
Cell Pulse Display. The six gain inputs from the RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards also connect
to a buffer circuit. The buffered signals are sent to the Scope Module to display the pulses.
PN 4277219B 2.19-5
Figure 2.19-4 RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 Card Block Diagram
3
R B C
P e a k F IF O
A /D
D e te c tio n d a ta
c o n v e rte r
m e m o ry
W B C 3 3
R /W S y s te m b u s
E d ito r in te r fa c e
D a ta
6 6 R e d a n d R e d a n d
C o u n t w h ite w h ite
C o m p a ra to rs c o u n te r c o n tr o lle r
A d d re s s
C o n tro l
6 6 S c o p e
B u ffe rs s ig n a ls
7 2 1 9 0 2 1 B
Input
r Three red output signals from the R/W/P SC/A card
r Three white output signals from the R/W/P SC/A card
r System RESET signal during power up to clear and reset the counters
PLATELET PROCESSOR Card
Function
The PLATELET PROCESSOR card is located in the Analyzer. Refer to Figure 2.3-1 (GEN•S
System) or Figure 2.3-4 (LH 750 System). The PLATELET PROCESSOR card routes the gain
inputs from the RED PRE-AMP card (GEN•S System) or the R/W/P SC/A card (LH 750
System) through three independent, identical Comparator circuits and Peak-Detection
circuits to determine pulse sizes for development of the Plt histograms. See Figure 2.19-5.
Figure 2.19-5 PLATELET PROCESSOR Card Block Diagram
R/P1 PEAK
A/D FIFO
R/P2 DETECTION
CONVERTER MEMORY
R/P3 CIRCUIT
COMPARATOR SYSTEM
CONTROLLER
CIRCUIT BUS
7253176A
2.19-6 PN 4277219B
The Comparator circuits on the PLATELET PROCESSOR card establish a window through
which only pulses between 2 and 20 fL are allowed to pass. Using these size thresholds
eliminates pulses from noise and normal RBCs.
The Peak-Detection circuits determine the height (peak) of a pulse for the determination of
cell size. The A/D converter converts the pulse peak to a digital address and sends it to
memory. Then the next pulse is processed.
Only the digital addresses of valid pulses (pulses that also passed through the comparator
circuit to memory) are stored in the memory of the PLATELET PROCESSOR card until
retrieved by the AMC.
Input
r Three X8.09 gain outputs from the RED PRE-AMP card (GEN•S System) or three
platelet outputs signals from the R/W/P SC/A card (LH 750 System)
r System RESET signal from the SBUS to reset storage
Determining the CBC Parameters
Determining the CBC Results on the GEN•S System

The AMC:
1. Determines the final results for the WBC, RBC, MCV, Plt, MPV and Hgb parameters.
2. Calculates the Hct, MCH, MCHC, RDW, Pct and PDW.
3. Sends the CBC results to the Workstation for reporting and display. For details, see
Heading 2.24, Sample Reporting.
Determining the CBC Results on the LH 750 System

1. The AMC stores the raw RBC, WBC, Plt, and Hgb data and sends it to the Workstation.
2. The Workstation:
a. Determines the final results for the WBC, RBC, MCV, Plt, MPV and Hgb parameters.
b. Calculates the Hct, MCH, MCHC, RDW, Pct and PDW.
c. Reports and displays results. For details, see Heading 2.24, Sample Reporting.
PN 4277219B 2.19-7
2.19-8 PN 4277219B
VCS TECHNOLOGY - COLLECTING THE DATA 2
2.20 VCS TECHNOLOGY - COLLECTING THE DATA
Summary
The Analytical Station uses the VCS technology to sense and analyze the WBC differential
and reticulocyte populations. This section gives an overview of the VCS technology
methodology and describes the sensing area.
Heading 2.21 describes the electronic components responsible for making the VCS
measurements. Headings 2.22 and 2.23 describe sample processing for the WBC differential
and the reticulocytes, respectively.
VCS Measurements
To obtain the WBC differential or reticulocyte data, the instrument simultaneously measures
three parameters on each cell: volume (DC), conductivity (RF) and light scatter (LS); and
derives three additional parameters, opacity (OP), rotated light scatter (RLS) and linear light
scatter (LLS).
V - Volume (DC)
Volume is measured using the Coulter Principle. Low-frequency direct current (DC) is
applied to two electrodes to measure the impedance across the aperture of the flow cell. As a
cell passes through the aperture, the impedance increases, generating a pulse that is directly
proportional to the cell volume.
C - Conductivity (RF)
Conductivity is measured by applying a radio-frequency current (RF) to the electrodes.
Unlike the DC (low-frequency) current which flows around the cells, this high frequency
current short-circuits the cell membrane and flows through the cells. This measurement is a
function of the cell volume and of the internal conductivity, which is related to the physical
and chemical contents of the cell.
S - Light Scatter (LS)

Light scatter is measured by passing the cells through a point focused laser beam. As a cell
passes through the laser beam in the flow cell, the cell scatters or reflects the light. The
scattered light is collected at angles between 10° and 70°, the range known as median angle
light scatter (MALS). The light is converted into a voltage pulse proportional to the total
amount scattered. These pulses define the shape and surface characteristics of each cell.
Opacity (OP)
Opacity is a transformation of the data derived from the ratio of the RF and DC components
obtained during data acquisition. It is calculated for every individual cell measurement or
event. Opacity has the effect of removing the size component, yielding a measurement that is
more closely related to the internal contents of the cell.
RF
OP ≈ --------
DC
PN 4277219B 2.20-1
VCS TECHNOLOGY - COLLECTING THE DATA
Rotated Light Scatter (RLS)

Rotated light scatter is a transformation of the data derived from the ratio of the log of LS to
the DC pulse peak information. It has the effect of removing the size component, yielding a
measurement that is more closely related to the internal structure of the cell. RLS is used in
the analysis of the diff parameters.
Log ( LS )
10
RLS ≈ ----------------------------
DC
Linear Light Scatter (LLS)

Linear light scatter is a transformation of the data derived from a ratio of the LS and DC
components obtained during data acquisition. It has the effect of removing the size
component, yielding a measurement that is more closely related to the internal structure of
the cell. LLS is used in the analysis of the retic parameters.
LS
LLS ≈ --------
DC
Applying the VCS Technology
Sensing Area
The flow cell, the sensing area for the VCS technology, is located in the Triple Transducer
module (TTM). Refer to Figure 2.4-3 for the location of the TTM. The flow cell contains two
electrodes and the aperture where the DC, RF, and LS parameters are sensed for each cell. See
Figure 2.20-1.
DC and RF Currents
The electrodes are connected to the RF Detector Preamp card which supplies the DC and the
RF currents. For details, see RF Detector Preamp Card under Heading 2.21, VCS Technology-
Measuring and Analyzing the Data.
Laser Light Source

In addition to the flow cell, the TTM module houses the laser, a lens block and a light scatter
sensor. See Figure 2.20-1.
Light from the laser shines through the lens block which focuses the light onto the aperture
in the flow cell. See Figure 2.20-2.
The light scatter (LS) sensor collects the scattered light from the flow cell. For details, see
Light Scatter Preamp Module and Sensor under Heading 2.21, VCS Technology - Measuring
and Analyzing the Data.
2.20-2 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.20-1 Applying the VCS Technology
R F D E T E C T O R
P R E A M P C A R D
L A S E R
L E N S B L O C K
(-) E L E C T R O D E
L S S E N S O R
A P E R T U R E
(+ ) E L E C T R O D E
L IG H T S C A T T E R
6 4 9 8 2 4 3 B P R E A M P M O D U L E
Figure 2.20-2 Light Scatter Path
LENS BLOCK
LS SENSOR
LASER BEAM
LENS
FLOW CELL
5915281H
Flow-Cell Hydraulics
Sheath fluid from the sheath tank (VC15) flows through the flow cell at a fixed pressure,
hydrodynamically focusing the sample stream through the center of the aperture, one cell at a
time. See Figure 2.20-3. The sheath fluid pressure is regulated by the sheath pressure
regulator (RG4).
PN 4277219B 2.20-3
Figure 2.20-3 Hydrodynamically Focused Cells
FLOW CELL
SHEATH-FLUID IN
SAMPLE DILUTION
SENSING
AREA SHEATH FLUID
SHEATH-FLUID IN
SAMPLE IN 7253191A
The sample stream is also pressurized, but the sample pressure is regulated higher than the
sheath pressure to overcome the higher resistance of the sample path. Refer to Table A.1-13
and Table A.1-18 for the pressure specifications for the sheath pressure, the diff sample
pressure, and the retic sample pressure.
Between samples, the flow cell is rinsed with diluent. See Figure 2.20-4 and Table 2.20-1 for
ports used and their function during sample flow and rinsing.
Figure 2.20-4 Flow Cell Hydraulics

SAMPLE MODE RINSE MODE
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT CLOSED
PORT 3 PORT 3
PORT CLOSED
APERTURE
APERTURE PORT 4
PORT 5
PORT 5
7253269A
PORT 6
2.20-4 PN 4277219B
Table 2.20-1 Flow Cell Ports
Port No. Connector Color Sample Flow Rinse
1 Yellow Waste out Closed

2 Black Closed Diluent out to VC26
3 Blue Sheath fluid in from VC15 Diluent in from backwash manifold (MF4)
4 Green Closed Diluent out to VC26
5 Red Sheath fluid in from VC15 Diluent in from backwash manifold (MF4)
6 Sample in from: Closed
r Mixing chamber - diff
r Retic chamber- retic.
Data Collection
As a sample passes through the aperture of the flow cell, each cell simultaneously:
r Impedes the DC current flow, yielding DC data.

r Impedes the RF current flow, yielding RF data.
r Scatters the laser light, yielding LS data.
PN 4277219B 2.20-5
2.20-6 PN 4277219B
VCS TECHNOLOGY - MEASURING AND ANALYZING THE DATA 2
2.21 VCS TECHNOLOGY - MEASURING AND ANALYZING THE DATA
Summary
and reticulocyte populations. This section describes the electronic components that measure
and analyze the data: the RF Detector Preamp card, the Light Scatter Preamp module and LS
sensor, the ANALOG 5 card, and the DIFF PROCESSOR card.
Heading 2.20 explains the VCS methodology and describes the sensing area. Headings 2.22
and 2.23 describe sample processing for the WBC differential and reticulocytes, respectively.
Electronic Overview
Figure 2.21-1 is a block diagram of the electronic components used to analyze cell
populations with VCS technology. The Diff Power Supply Card and the Laser Power Supply
are discussed under Heading 2.8, Electronic Power System - Local Power Supplies in the
Diluter. The COMM INTERFACE Card is discussed under Heading 2.11, SYSTEM
CONTROL.
Figure 2.21-1 VCS Technology Block Diagram

Diluter/
Solenoid/Optics +24 V
Power Supply For solid state RF Detector RF DETECT
card Preamp card only To Diluter 1 card
+6.3 V
RF DC Status COMM
+300 V, +15 V, -15 V Detector INTFC
Preamp RF ANALOG RFSP DIFF card
Diff card card PROCESSOR
Laser
Power +12 V LSSP card
Power
Supply Supply AMC
card module
GAIN SWITCH HSRS232
LS SELECT SELECT raw data
RS/Opto Intfc card
LS OFFSET
- LS sensor Light
1
Laser 2 Scatter
3 Preamp
+ Workstation
module 6498146B
Flow cell
PN 4277219B 2.21-1
VCS TECHNOLOGY - MEASURING AND ANALYZING THE DATA
RF Detector Preamp Card
Function
The RF Detector Preamp card is located under the lower front cover of the Diluter. Refer to
Figure 2.4-3 (GEN•S System) or Figure 2.4-10 (LH 750 System) for location.
The RF Detector Preamp card generates the constant DC and RF currents to the flow cell.
r On the RF Detector Preamp card with a vacuum tube:

t The +6.3 Vdc powers the RF vacuum tube filament.
t The +300 Vdc is used to develop RF and DC currents. See Figure 2.21-2.
t The +24 V is not present.
r On the solid state RF Detector Preamp card:
t The +6.3 Vdc is not used.
t The +300 Vdc is used to develop DC current. See Figure 2.21-3.
t The +24 V is used to develop RF currents. See Figure 2.21-3.
As cells pass through the flow cell aperture, the RF Detector Preamp card detects changes in
resistance, converts these raw DC and RF pulses to voltages, amplifies the voltages and sends
the voltages to the ANALOG 5 card. While the system is collecting data from the flow cell
aperture, the Clog Detector circuit on the RF Detector Preamp card monitors the aperture
for clogs.
Both styles of RF Detector Preamp cards have potentiometers for DC and RF gain
adjustments. See Heading 4.75 for the procedures for making these adjustments.
The RF Detector Preamp card with a vacuum tube also has an adjustment for the Clog
Detector circuit. A procedure is provided under Heading 4.75 to check the Clog Detector
circuit and to adjust it if necessary. However, this circuit is factory adjusted and should not
require field adjustment.
Inputs Outputs
r +300 Vdc for RF current (vacuum tube) r RF and DC pulses to ANALOG 5 card,
and for DC current from Diff Power via the digital backplane
Supply card
r +6.3 Vdc for RF vacuum tube filament r RF DETECT signal to Diluter 1 card
voltage from Diff Power Supply card
r ±15 Vdc from Diff Power Supply card r CLOGDET signal to Diluter 1 card
r +24 Vdc for RF generator (solid state)
from Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power
Supply card
r Raw DC and RF pulses from the flow
cell
2.21-2 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.21-2 RF Detector Preamp Card (with Vacuum Tube) Block Diagram
DC J73
PREAMP
DC
R17 GAIN
TO
R18 OFFSET TO
FLOW BNC
CELL ANALOG
RF CARD
J67 J69 RF
GENERATOR
PREAMP RF
CIRCUIT
+300 VDC R26 GAIN
C1
R27 OFFSET
FROM +6.3 VDC
DIFF J104
TP1
POWER
(WHT) RF RF
SUPPLY +15 VDC
CARD DETECT DETECT
-15 VDC DILUENT
TO
CONDUCTIVITY
TP3 DILUTER 1
VOLTAGE
CARD
TP2
CLOGDET
(WHT) COMPARATOR
R44 CLOG
DETECT
THRESHOLD TP4
CIRCUIT (BLK)
7253178E
Figure 2.21-3 RF Detector Preamp Card (Solid State) Block Diagram

J 6
D C
P R E A M P D C
T O R 5 4 G A IN
F L O W S M A T O
F R O M C E L L A N A L O G
J 6 7 R F C A R D
D IL U T E R / J 6 9 G E N E R A T O R R F
S O L E N O ID /O P T IC S + 2 4 V D C R F
C IR C U IT P R E A M P
C 2 0 R 4 3 G A IN
C A R D + 3 0 0 V D C
F R O M
+ 6 .3 V D C J 1
D IF F T P 1
P O W E R (R E D ) R F R F
S U P P L Y + 1 5 V D C D E T E C T D E T E C T
C A R D D IL U E N T
-1 5 V D C T O
C O N D U C T IV IT Y
D IL U T E R 1
V O L T A G E
C A R D
C L O G
D E T E C T C L O G
C O M P A R A T O R D E T E C T
T P 2
(B L K )
6 4 9 8 1 4 7 B
PN 4277219B 2.21-3
Monitoring
The RF Detector Preamp card routes the RF DETECT and CLOGDET signals to the
Diluter 1 card for monitoring.
The RF DETECT signal indicates the status of the RF oscillator.
r A low signal indicates oscillation is taking place

r A high signal indicates oscillation is not present. If the RF DETECT signal goes high
during the “count” cycle (when the 300 Vdc is on), the Diluter 1 card initiates an
RF Voltage Low error.
The CLOGDET signal indicates the status of the flow cell aperture.
r A low signal indicates the aperture is open.

r A high signal indicates the aperture is clogged. If the clog lasts for more than
0.5 seconds, the Diluter 1 card:
t Routes a high RF ON signal to the Diff Power Supply card to disable the output of
the +300 Vdc power supply.
t Turns off the RFON LED and lights the CLGERR LED.
t Initiates a clog error.
Light Scatter Preamp Module and Sensor
Function
The Light Scatter Preamp module is under the lower front cover of the Diluter. Refer to
Figure 2.4-3 (GEN•S System) or Figure 2.4-10 (LH 750 System) for location. The light
scatter (LS) sensor is part of the TTM module which is also located under the front cover of
the Diluter. For the location of the LS sensor within the TTM module, refer to Figure 2.20-1.
As cells pass through the flow cell, scattering the light from the laser beam, the LS sensor
collects the median angle light scatter information.
Photodiodes on the LS sensor collect the reflected light on two elements or regions of the
sensor and convert the light to current proportional to the intensity of the light. See
Figure 2.21-4.
Figure 2.21-4 LS Sensor Regions
D iff m o d e = R e g io n 1 a n d 2
R e tic m o d e = R e g io n 1
1 2 7 2 1 9 0 4 0 B
Note: A third region exists, but it is covered by the circular portion of the mask.
2.21-4 PN 4277219B
The LS sensor routes the light scatter information to the Light Scatter Preamp module. See
Figure 2.21-5. The V/R DVR signal from the ANALOG 5 card determines the input (region)
used by the Light Scatter Preamp module.
The Light Scatter Preamp module converts the current signals to voltage, amplifies the
voltage to a usable level and routes the amplified voltage to the ANALOG 5 card. The V/R SW
signal from the ANALOG 5 card determines the output amplifier used.
Inputs Outputs
r + 15 Vdc from the Diff Power Supply r LS pulses to ANALOG 5 card via the
card RS/Opto Intfc card
r -15 Vdc, from the Diff Power Supply r LS offset voltage to the DIFF
card PROCESSOR card for monitoring the
background light scatter via the
RS/Opto Intfc card
r V/R DRVR signal from the ANALOG
card via the RS/Opto Intfc card
r V/R SW signal from ANALOG card via
the RS/Opto Intfc card
Figure 2.21-5 Light Scatter Preamp Module Block Diagram
J66
FROM +15 VDC
DIFF
POWER -15 VDC
SUPPLY
CARD GND TP1 TP3
LS OFFSET
R8 GAIN
GND (LOWER)
J62
REGION 1 CURRENT
LS DIFF AMP
FROM TO
SENSOR CIRCUIT
LS SENSOR VOLTAGE
SELECT
REGION 2 CONVERTER
J78
TO DIFF RETIC AMP
PROCESSOR LS OFFSET CIRCUIT DIFF/RETIC
CARD GAIN
SELECT
R16 GAIN
V/R DRVR
TO/FROM (UPPER)
ANALOG V/R SW
CARD LS OUT
GND
SHIELD
7253180E
PN 4277219B 2.21-5
ANALOG 5 Card
Function
The ANALOG 5 card is located in the Analyzer. Refer to Figure 2.3-1 (GEN•S System) or
Figure 2.3-4 (LH 750 System) for location. The ANALOG 5 card amplifies and detects the
peaks of the DC, RF and LS pulses. See Figure 2.21-6. BNC connectors on the front edge
panel of the ANALOG 5 card allow the display of the pulses on an oscilloscope as an aid for
aligning the TTM.
Figure 2.21-6 ANALOG 5 Card Block Diagram

FROM DIFF PROCESSOR CARD
CAL PULSES
V/R DRVR TO LS
SUBSET/5 DIFF PREAMP
RETICS/5 DIFF V/R SW MODULE
GAIN THRESHOLD
SELECT SELECT
FROM LS QUAD LSSP

LIGHT SCATTER
AMP
PREAMP MODULE
PULSE THRESHOLD TO DIFF

DC
AMP STRETCH CIRCUITS DCSP PROCESSOR
CIRCUITS CARD
FROM RF
RF DETECTOR AMP RFSP
PREAMP CARD
RFPO
LSPO TO SCOPE
DCPO MODULE
7253356A
The ANALOG 5 card receives VCS/RETICS and SUBSET/VCS signals from the DIFF
PROCESSOR card, indicating the type of analysis or test mode to perform. These signals
select the proper amplifier and threshold settings on the ANALOG 5 card and determine the
signals routed to the Light Scatter Preamp module. Refer to Figure 2.21-6.
The ANALOG 5 card routes V/R DRVR and V/R SW signals to the Light Scatter Preamp
module to select the correct sensor regions and amplifier gain settings to use.
The DC pulse triggers the ANALOG 5 card to process the next cell or event. The ANALOG 5
card:
1. Amplifies the DC, RF and LS pulses simultaneously.

2. Verifies the pulses pass a preset threshold.
2.21-6 PN 4277219B
3. Stretches pulses that pass the threshold to determine the peak or height of the pulse.
4. Routes the stretched pulses DCSP, RFSP and LSSP to the DIFF PROCESSOR card.
5. Routes the amplified pulses DCPO, RFPO and LSPO to the Scope Module for display.
Inputs Outputs
r RETICS/5DIFF and SUBSET/5DIFF r V/R DRVR and V/R SW signals to Light
signal from DIFF PROCESSOR card Scatter Preamp module
r DC and RF pulses from RF Detector r DCSP, RFSP and LSSP stretched pulses
Preamp card to DIFF PROCESSOR card
r LS pulses from Light Scatter Preamp r DCPO, RFPO and LSPO pulses to Scope
module Module for display
DIFF PROCESSOR Card
Function
The DIFF PROCESSOR card is located in the Analyzer. Refer to Figure 2.3-1 (GEN•S System)
or Figure 2.3-4 (LH 750 System) for location.
The DIFF PROCESSOR card:
r Converts stretched pulses to digital values. See Figure 2.21-7.
Figure 2.21-7 DIFF PROCESSOR Card Block Diagram

RAW DATA
WORKSTATION
MICROPROCESSOR COMM INTFC

CARD
RETICS/5 DIFF
DCSP A/D
SUBSET/5 DIFF
ANALOG
FROM RFSP A/D CAL PULSES CARD
ANALOG MUX DAC
CARD LSSP A/D
FROM PVT CARD
A/D
FROM DIFF
POWER SUPPLY
CARD
SHEATH PRESSURE
FROM LASER DIFF SAMPLE PRESSURE
POWER SUPPLY RETIC PRESSURE
+300 VDC MUX
FROM LIGHT +6.3 VDC
SCATTER
PREAMP MODULE LASER REF VOLT
LS OFFSET 7219009B
r Holds the data until data accumulation is complete.

r Generates diff test pulse signals.
PN 4277219B 2.21-7
r Routes the raw data to the Workstation via a high speed RS232 communication link.
r Monitors the following signals for routing to the AMC-
t Sheath, retic and diff sample pressure voltage signals from the PVT card
t Laser reference voltage from the Laser Power Supply
t LS offset voltage from the Light Scatter Preamp module
t +300 Vdc reference and +6.3 Vdc reference voltages from the Diff Power
Supply card.
Inputs
r DCSP, RFSP and LSSP stretched pulses from ANALOG 5 card for each cell or event
r Diff ambient temperature and sheath, retic and diff pressure from the PVT card
r Laser reference voltage from the Laser Power Supply
r LS offset voltage from the Light Scatter Preamp module
r +300 Vdc reference and +6.3 Vdc reference voltages from the Diff Power Supply card
Switch
The DIFF PROCESSOR card has one DIP switch, SW1, but it is not currently used. See
Figure A.2-6 for its location, Table A.2-10 for settings.
2.21-8 PN 4277219B
VCS TECHNOLOGY - DIFF ANALYSIS 2
2.22 VCS TECHNOLOGY - DIFF ANALYSIS
Summary
and reticulocytes populations. This section describes sample processing for analysis of the
WBC differential parameters.
Sample processing for reticulocyte analysis is covered under Heading 2.23. For information
about sensing particles using the VCS methodology, see Headings 2.20 and 2.21.
Processing the Diff Sample on the GEN•S System

Refer to Figure 2.22-1 for component locations.
Figure 2.22-1 Diff Sample Processing Components on the GEN•S System

ON DILUTER FRONT AND REAR PANELS DIFF
DIFF LYTIC PRESERVATIVE
REAGENT PUMP (PM1)
PUMP
(PM 4)
SHEATH TANK
(VC 15)
DIFF
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
(RG3)
SHEATH
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
(RG4)
UNDER DILUTER FRONT COVER
MIXING
CHAMBER
(VC25)
DIFF HEATER FLOW CELL 7253198B
After aspiration of the blood sample in the GEN•S System, a segment of the sample is isolated
in the diff segment tubing for the diff dilution. For details about sample acquisition for diff
analysis, see Heading 2.16, SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW.
The diff lytic reagent pump (PM4) dispenses diff lytic reagent, displacing the reagent in the
diff heater. See Figure 2.22-2A. The reagent from the diff heater flows through the diff
segment tubing, washing the blood segment into the mixing chamber (VC25).
In the mixing chamber, the blood and diff lytic reagent mixture is incubated and mixed.
PN 4277219B 2.22-1
VCS TECHNOLOGY - DIFF ANALYSIS
Then the diff preservative pump (PM1) dispenses diff preservative into the mixing chamber.
See Figure 2.22-2B. The final dilution of blood, diff lytic reagent and diff preservative is
mixed and incubated.
Figure 2.22-2 Diff Blood Sample and Reagent Delivery to the Mixing Chamber in the GEN•S System
DIFF SEGMENT TUBING
BSV
MIXING
MIXING CHAMBER
CHAMBER DIFF (VC25)
(VC25) HEATER
BLOOD AND
DIFF LYTIC
DIFF LYTIC REAGENT
DIFF PRESERVATIVE
REAGENT PUMP PUMP (PM1)
(PM4)
A. Delivering Sample to Mixing Chamber B. Adding Diff Preservative 7253200A
Processing the Diff Sample on the LH 750 System

Figure 2.22-3 Diff Sample Processing Components on the LH 750 System
On Diluter front and rear panels Diff

Diff lytic preservative
reagent pump (PM1)
pump
(PM4)
Sheath tank
(VC15)
Diff
sample
pressure
regulator
(RG3)
Sheath
pressure
regulator
(RG4)
Under Diluter front cover
Mixing
chamber
(VC25)
Diff heater Diff segment valve (CVL85/126) Flow cell 6498144B
2.22-2 PN 4277219B
During aspiration of the blood sample in the LH 750 System, blood is pulled through two
shear valves before it reaches the rear blood detector, the diff segment valve (CVL85/126) and
the retic segment valve (CVL87/127). These shear valves isolate the diff and retic sample
segments for processing and replace the special segment tubing used on the GEN•S System.
With the exception of how the diff and retic sample segments are isolated however, sample
acquisition is the same for both the GEN•S System and LH 750 System. For details about
sample acquisition, refer to Heading 2.16, SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW.
For an explanation of how the shear valves works, refer to Shear Valves under Heading 2.17,
After aspiration of the blood sample (Figure 2.22-4, A), the sliding plate of the diff segment
valve (CVL85/126) moves, aligning the reagent input and output ports with the diff segment
isolated in the stationary plate of the valve (Figure 2.22-4, B).
The diff lytic reagent pump (PM4) dispenses diff lytic reagent, displacing the reagent in the
diff heater. See Figure 2.22-4, B. The reagent from the diff heater flows through the diff
segment valve, washing the diff blood segment into the mixing chamber (VC25).
In the mixing chamber, the blood and diff lytic reagent mixture is incubated and mixed.
Then the diff preservative pump (PM1) dispenses diff preservative into the mixing chamber.
See Figure 2.22-4, C. The final dilution of blood, diff lytic reagent and diff preservative is
mixed and incubated.
Figure 2.22-4 Diff Blood Sample Aspiration and Delivery to the Mixing Chamber in the LH 750 System
D iff s e g m e n t
v a lv e ( C V L 8 5 /1 2 6 ) B lo o d o u t
B lo o d in
Mixing Mixing
chamber chamber
Diff (VC25)
(VC25)
heater
Blood and
diff lytic
Diff lytic reagent Diff preservative
reagent pump
pump (PM1)
(PM4)
A. Aspirating sample B. Delivering sample C. Adding diff preservative

6498196B
PN 4277219B 2.22-3
Sensing the Diff Sample

After the final dilution is incubated, diff sample pressure, regulated by the diff sample
pressure regulator (RG3) is applied to the mixing chamber to push the sample from the
mixing chamber into the sheath fluid stream in the flow cell for sensing. See Figure 2.22-5.
Figure 2.22-5 Diff Sample Analysis Flow

WASTE OUT
DIFF
SAMPLE APERTURE SHEATH
PRESSURE PRESSURE
REGULATOR REGULATOR
(RG3) (RG4)
FLOW CELL
MIXING
CHAMBER SHEATH
(VC25) BLOOD, DIFF TANK
(VC15)
LYTIC REAGENT
AND DIFF PRESERVATIVE
SAMPLE IN DILUENT
SHEATH FLUID IN 7253201A
Before the next sample is analyzed, the diff sample segment, the mixing chamber, and the
flow cell are rinsed with diluent, and the diff sample segment and diff sample delivery line are
primed with diff lytic reagent. For details, see Automatic Mode, Cleaning the Blood Pathways,
and Manual Mode, Cleaning the Blood Pathways, under Heading 2.16.
The diff lytic reagent pathways to and from the diff sample valve remain primed with diff lytic
reagent.
Diff Analysis Reagent System

The diff analysis reagent system is designed to lyse the RBCs and reduce the cellular debris to
an insignificant level while leaving the WBC populations intact for analysis.
The diff lytic reagent lyses the cells and reduces the cellular debris by placing hypotonic stress
on the cells, causing all the cells to swell; lowering the pH of the dilution; and dissolving the
cell membranes with a surfactant. The RBCs lyse first and the diff preservative is added before
any WBCs lyse.
The diff preservative neutralizes the pH of the dilution and restores the isotonicity, inhibiting
the lysing reaction. In this environment the swollen WBCs lose water, shrinking until they
reach ionic equilibrium. When the cells reach equilibrium, shrinking ceases, and the WBCs
are in a near-native state (as close as possible to the size and internal composition of the
WBCs in the body), ready for analysis.
2.22-4 PN 4277219B
COULTER IntelliKinetics™ Application
The COULTER IntelliKinetics application is the process that controls the reaction kinetics to
ensure the best performance of the WBC differential analysis. Variations in ambient
temperature are managed through automatic adjustments to reagent reaction temperature,
incubation time, and delivery volumes. Refer to the AccuFlex™ Detailed Principles of
Operation, for additional information.
Ambient Temperature Thermistors

The original Analytical Stations have two thermistors to sense the ambient temperature, the
diff ambient thermistor and the Diluter ambient thermistor, but only the Diluter ambient
temperature is used. Current Analytical Stations have only one thermistor, the Diluter
ambient thermistor. The Diluter ambient thermistor is mounted behind the RF Detector
Preamp card (RF box). See Figure 2.22-6. On Analytical Stations that have two thermistors
installed, the thermistors are mounted together.
Figure 2.22-6 Ambient Temperature Sensor Location
Diluter ambient
thermistor
6498142B
The Diluter 4 card uses the Diluter ambient temperature to determine the optimum reagent
reaction temperature of the diff lytic reagent heater and the optimum incubation times and
reagent delivery volumes of the diff lytic reagent and the diff preservative. Refer to
Table A.1-14 for the diff analysis conditions for each of three temperature zones: low, normal,
and high. Refer to Table A.2-1 for the switch positions to select the temperature settings.
When the temperature selection is "automatic," the System uses the transition ranges to
automatically change from one temperature zone to the next. As the ambient temperature
increases, the System uses the upper limit of the temperature transition range to initiate the
higher temperature zone conditions. As the ambient temperature decreases, the System uses
the lower limit of the temperature transition range to initiate the lower temperature zone
conditions.
Changing the temperature transition ranges (see Table A.2-1) may correct lysing problems. If,
while the System is in the high temperature zone, cells are under lysed (normal bloods with
low counts and debris), select the higher temperature transition ranges. If the cells are over
lysed (double lymphocyte populations), select the lower temperature transition ranges.
PN 4277219B 2.22-5
Diff Lytic Reagent and Diff Preservative Pumps

The Analytical Station uses dual-volume pumps to dispense diff lytic reagent and diff
preservative. These pumps are field-adjustable, spring-return, piston-style pumps designed to
dispense two different volumes of reagent. The volumes selected are based on the ambient
temperature.
Each pump has a liquid port (3), two pneumatic ports (1 and 2), an internal spring, and two
pistons. See Figure 2.22-7.
r The inner piston dispenses the reagent. Pneumatic signals from SL43 (diff lytic reagent
pump) or SL45 (diff preservative pump) to the bottom port (1) of the pump and the
condition of the spring (compressed or released) control the movement of this piston.
r The outer piston provides the stops for the inner piston, determining the volume
dispensed, high or low. Pneumatic signals from SL82 to the side port (2) of the pumps
control the movement of the outer piston in both the diff lytic reagent pump and the diff
preservative pump.
Figure 2.22-7 Diff Lytic Reagent Pump and Diff Preservative Pump Components
LIQUID
PORT (3)
SPRING
INNER
SIDE PISTON
PNEUMATIC
PORT (2) OUTER
PISTON
BOTTOM
PNEUMATIC
7253308A
PORT (1)
The diff lytic reagent and the diff preservative pumps have three states: at rest, high-volume
dispense and low-volume dispense. Figures 2.22-8, 2.22-9 and 2.22-10 show the three states.
2.22-6 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.22-8 Dispenser Pump at Rest Reagent Dispenser Pump at Rest
REAGENT
When the reagent dispenser pump is at rest, SL43
(or SL45) and SL82 are de-energized.
In the de-energized state, SL43 (or SL45) vents the

bottom port (1) and SL82 vents the side port (2).
The compressed spring releases, pushing both the
inner and outer pistons down. See Figure 2.22-8.
The movement of the inner piston creates a vacuum

at the liquid port (3), pulling in reagent. Since the
outer piston also moves down, allowing the inner
piston to make a longer stroke, the pump pulls in
VENT the high volume of reagent.
SIDE PORT (2)
VENT
Figure 2.22-9 Dispensing High Volume Dispensing the High Volume

To dispense the high volume of reagent, SL43 (or
HIGH VOLUME SL45) is energized and SL82 remains de-energized.
DELIVERY
In the energized state, SL43 (or SL45) routes 30 psi
to the bottom port (1) of the pump. The inner
piston moves up, making a full stroke. See
Figure 2.22-9.
The movement of the inner piston dispenses the

high volume of reagent into the mixing chamber
and compresses the spring in the pump.
VENT
SIDE PORT (2)
PRESSURE
PN 4277219B 2.22-7
Dispensing the Low Volume

Dispensing the low volume is a two-step process. Initially SL82 is energized. Energizing SL82
routes 30 psi to the side port (2) of the pump. See Figure 2.22-10A. Applying 30 psi to the
side port pushes the outer piston up, moving the inner piston to the low volume position.
The excess reagent in the pump is dispensed back toward the reagent reservoir.
Once the inner piston is positioned for dispensing the low volume of reagent, SL43 (or SL45)
is energized. In the energized state, this solenoid routes 30 psi to the bottom port (1) of the
piston, pushing the inner piston up to dispense the low volume of reagent to the mixing
chamber and compressing the spring in the pump. See Figure 2.22-10B.
Figure 2.22-10 Dispensing Low Volume
EXCESS TO LOW VOLUME

REAGENT DELIVERY
RESERVOIR
PRESSURE PRESSURE
SIDE PORT (2) SIDE PORT (2)
VENT PRESSURE
BOTTOM PORT (1) BOTTOM PORT (1)
7253312A A. MOVING PISTON TO LOW VOLUME POSITION B. DISPENSING TO MIXING CHAMBER
Table 2.22-1 summarizes the piston and spring positions and the pneumatic signals for the
three states of the pump.
Table 2.22-1 Diff Lytic Reagent and Diff Preservative Pumps’ Pneumatic Signals and Piston Positions
Side Port Bottom

Pump State (2) Outer Piston Port (1) Spring Inner Piston
At rest Vent Down Vent Released Down

High volume - dispense Vent Down Pressure Compressed Up
Low volume - dispense Pressure Up Pressure Compressed Up
2.22-8 PN 4277219B
Adjustable Stops
The dual-volume pumps have two adjustable stops, one for adjusting the low volume and the
other for adjusting the high volume. The low volume is adjusted as shown in Figure 2.22-11.
Since this adjustment changes the length of the inner piston stroke and therefore would also
affect the high volume, this stop is always adjusted first. The high volume is adjusted as
shown in Figure 2.22-12.
Figure 2.22-11 Adjusting the Low Volume
LOW
VOLUME
STOP
Hold
Adjust
7253321A
Figure 2.22-12 Adjusting the High Volume
HIGH
VOLUME
STOP
7253320A
PN 4277219B 2.22-9
Determining the Diff Parameters

The Analytical Station counts for 19 seconds, or 8,192 events that passed the threshold,
whichever comes first. The DIFF PROCESSOR card routes the raw data to the Workstation.
At the Workstation, the software:
1. Stores the data.

2. Analyzes the position of each cell within a three-dimensional plot.
3. Determines the displayed and reported results for the sample. For details see
Heading 2.24, Sample Reporting.
2.22-10 PN 4277219B
VCS TECHNOLOGY - RETIC ANALYSIS 2
2.23 VCS TECHNOLOGY - RETIC ANALYSIS
Summary
and reticulocytes populations. This section describes sample processing for analysis of the
reticulocyte parameters.
Sample processing for WBC differential analysis is covered under Heading 2.22. For
information about sensing particles using the VCS methodology, see Headings 2.20 and 2.21.
Processing the Retic Sample on the GEN•S System

Figure 2.23-1 Retic Sample Processing Components on the GEN•S System

ON DILUTER FRONT AND REAR PANELS
SHEATH TANK
(VC 15)
RETIC SAMPLE
RETIC
PRESSURE
CLEARING
REGULATOR
SOLUTION
(RG6)
PUMP
(PM6)
SHEATH
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
(RG4)
PELTIER
MODULE UNDER DILUTER FRONT COVER
BLOOD/STAIN
ASPIRATION
PUMP (PM11)
RETIC STAIN STAIN FLOW CELL

CHAMBER CHAMBER PUMP (PM5) 7253199B
(VC17) (VC24)
After aspiration of the blood sample, a segment of the sample is isolated in the retic segment
tubing for the retic dilution. For details about sample acquisition for retic analysis, see
Heading 2.16, SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW.
The stain pump (PM5) dispenses retic stain through the retic segment tubing, washing the
blood segment into the stain chamber (VC24). See Figure 2.23-2. Depending on the stain
chamber temperature, the stain chamber heater may be activated to enhance the staining
reaction.
PN 4277219B 2.23-1
VCS TECHNOLOGY - RETIC ANALYSIS
Figure 2.23-2 Retic Blood Sample and Stain Delivery to Stain Chamber on the GEN•S System
RETIC SEGMENT TUBING
BSV
STAIN
CHAMBER
(VC24)
STAIN PUMP
(PM5)
7253202A
After incubation, the 50 µL blood/stain aspiration pump (PM11) is activated twice to pull the
stained sample from the stain chamber and through a cross fitting. See Figure 2.23-3A.
The retic clearing solution pump (PM6) dispenses 2 mL of retic clearing solution, displacing
the reagent in the Peltier module. See Figure 2.23-3B. The reagent from the Peltier module
flows through the cross fitting, washing approximately 2 µL of the stained blood sample into
the retic chamber (VC17). In the retic chamber, the stained blood and retic clearing solution
mixture is mixed and incubated
Figure 2.23-3 Stained Sample and Clearing Solution Delivery to Retic Chamber on the GEN•S System
STAINED BLOOD CROSS CROSS

SAMPLE FITTING FITTING
RETIC
CHAMBER
(VC17)
BLOOD STAINED
AND BLOOD
STAIN SAMPLE
STAIN
CHAMBER BLOOD/STAIN
(VC24) ASPIRATION PELTIER MODULE
PUMP
(PM11)
RETIC CLEARING
SOLUTION
PUMP (PM6)
A. Stained Sample Aspiration B. Stained Sample Delivery

7253203A
2.23-2 PN 4277219B
Processing the Retic Sample on the LH 750 System
Figure 2.23-4 Retic Sample Processing Components on the LH 750 System

On Diluter front and rear panels
Sheath tank
(VC15)
Retic sample
Retic
pressure
cleaning
regulator
solution
(RG6)
pump
(PM6)
Sheath
pressure
regulator
(RG4)
Peltier
module Under Diluter front cover
Stained
Retic
retic
segment valve
segment valve
(CVL87/127)
(CVL93/128)
Retic Stain Blood/stain Stain Flow cell

chamber chamber aspiration pump (PM5) 6498143B
(VC17) (VC24) pump (PM11)
During aspiration of the blood sample in the LH 750 System, blood is pulled through two
shear valves before it reaches the rear blood detector, the diff segment valve (CVL85/126) and
the retic segment valve (CVL87/127). These shear valves isolate the diff and retic sample
segments for processing and replace the special segment tubing used on the GEN•S System.
With the exception of how the diff and retic sample segments are isolated however, sample
acquisition is the same for both the GEN•S System and LH 750 System. For details about
sample acquisition, refer to Heading 2.16, SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW.
For an explanation of how the shear valves works, refer to Shear Valves under Heading 2.17,
After aspiration of the blood sample (Figure 2.23-5, A), the sliding plate of the retic segment
valve (CVL87/127) moves, aligning the reagent input and output ports with the retic segment
isolated in the stationary plate of the valve (Figure 2.23-5, B).
The stain pump (PM5) dispenses retic stain through the retic segment valve, washing the retic
segment into the stain chamber (VC24). See Figure 2.23-5, B. Depending on the stain
chamber temperature, the stain chamber heater may be activated to enhance the staining
reaction.
PN 4277219B 2.23-3
Figure 2.23-5 Retic Blood Sample Aspiration and Delivery to the Stain Chamber in the LH 750 System
R e tic s e g m e n t
v a lv e ( C V L 8 7 /1 2 7 ) B lo o d o u t
B lo o d in
Stain Stain
chamber pump
(VC24) (PM5)
A. Aspirating sample B. Delivering sample

6498197B
After incubation, the 50 µL blood/stain aspiration pump (PM11) is activated twice to pull a
stained sample from the stain chamber and through the stained retic segment valve
(CVL93/128). See Figure 2.23-6, A.
After the stained sample is aspirated, the sliding plate of the stained retic segment valve
moves, aligning the reagent input and output ports with the stained retic segment isolated in
the stationary plate of the valve (Figure 2.23-6, B).
The retic clearing solution pump (PM6) dispenses 2 mL of retic clearing solution, displacing
the reagent in the Peltier module. See Figure 2.23-6, B. The reagent from the Peltier module
flows through the sample segment in the stained retic segment valve, washing approximately
2 µL of the stained blood sample into the retic chamber (VC17). In the retic chamber, the
stained blood and retic clearing solution mixture is mixed and incubated.
Figure 2.23-6 Stained Sample Aspiration and Delivery to the Retic Chamber in the LH 750 System
Stained blood
segment Stained blood
segment
Stained retic Peltier module

segment valve Stain
(CVL93/128) chamber
(VC24)
Blood/stain
aspiration Blood
pump and Retic clearing
(PM11) solution Retic
stain
pump (PM6) chamber
(VC17)
A. Aspirating stained sample B. Delivering stained sample
6498198B
2.23-4 PN 4277219B
Sensing the Retic Sample
After the dilution is incubated, retic sample pressure, regulated by the retic sample pressure
regulator (RG6) is applied to the retic chamber to push the mixture from the retic chamber
into the sheath fluid stream in the flow cell for sensing. See Figure 2.23-7.
Figure 2.23-7 Retic Sample Analysis Flow

WASTE OUT
RETIC SAMPLE SHEATH

PRESSURE PRESSURE
REGULATOR REGULATOR
(RG6) APERTURE (RG4)
FLOW CELL
SHEATH
TANK
STAINED (VC15)
RETIC
BLOOD
CHAMBER SAMPLE IN
SAMPLE AND
(VC17) DILUENT
RETIC
CLEARING SHEATH FLUID IN
SOLUTION 7253204A
Before the next sample is analyzed the retic segment tubing, retic chamber and flow cell are
rinsed with diluent, and the retic segment tubing and the retic sample delivery line are
primed with stain. For details, see Automatic Mode, Cleaning the Blood Pathways, and
Manual Mode, Cleaning the Blood Pathways, under Heading 2.16. In addition, the
instrument activates the blood/stain pump to remove residual stained blood from the lines
and activates the retic clearing solution pump to rinse the retic chamber and associated
tubing.
Retic Analysis Reagent System

The retic analysis reagent system is designed to selectively stain the reticulocytes,
distinguishing them from mature RBCs for analysis.
The retic stain is a specially formulated new methylene blue dye that precipitates the
basophilic RNA networks that are present in reticulocytes but not present in mature RBCs.
Note: For more information about reticulocytes, including an illustration of stained

reticulocytes, see reticulocytes in the glossary.
The retic clearing solution clears the hemoglobin from the RBCs without removing the
precipitated dye-RNA complex.
COULTER IntelliKinetics Application

The COULTER IntelliKinetics application is the process that controls the reaction kinetics to
ensure the best performance of the reticulocyte analysis. Variations in ambient temperature
are managed through automatic adjustments to reagent reaction temperatures. Refer to the
AccuFlex™ Detailed Principles of Operation, for additional information.
PN 4277219B 2.23-5
To achieve the optimum reaction temperatures, the instrument uses the stain chamber heater
to maintain a constant optimal temperature of the blood/stain mixture and uses the Peltier
module to heat or cool the retic clearing solution.
Regulating the Temperature in the Stain Chamber

The stain chamber (VC24) is a ceramic chamber encircled by a foil heater. The Diluter 4 card
activates the stain heater to maintain a constant optimal temperature for the reaction of the
stain and blood mixture. See Figure 2.23-8. Refer to Table A.1-15 for the optimum retic
analysis conditions.
Figure 2.23-8 Stain Heater Block Diagram

STAIN
HEAT
ENABLE HEATER STAIN
DILUTER 2 DILUTER 4
CARD CARD CHAMBER
(VC24)
7253205A
Regulating the Temperature in the Peltier Module

The Peltier module consists of Peltier cells mounted on a ceramic manifold. See
Figure 2.23-9. Depending on the ambient temperature, the Diluter 4 card activates the
Peltier cells to heat or cool the ceramic manifold which in turn heats or cools the retic
clearing solution, adjusting the reagent to the correct temperature for optimum clearing
reaction. Refer to Table A.1-15 for the optimum retic analysis conditions.
Figure 2.23-9 Peltier Module, Cross Section

PELTIER
CELLS HEAT SINK
THERMISTOR
CERAMIC RETIC CLEARING SOLUTION

MANIFOLD
7253206A
Determining the Retic Parameters

The Analytical Station counts for 90 seconds, or 32,768 events, whichever comes first. The
DIFF PROCESSOR card routes the raw data to the Workstation. At the Workstation, the
software:
1. Stores the data.

2. Analyzes the position of each cell on a two-dimensional plot.
3. Determines the displayed and reported results for the sample. For details see
Heading 2.24, SAMPLE REPORTING.
2.23-6 PN 4277219B
SAMPLE REPORTING 2
2.24 SAMPLE REPORTING
Summary
This section describes how data from the following areas is processed by the AMC or the
Workstation to provide the reported sample results, graphics, and when indicated, codes,
messages and/or flags:
r Sample data from the DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GEN•S System) or the DILUTER
CPU card (LH 750 System)
r RBC and WBC raw data from the RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card (GEN•S System) or
the RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card (LH 750 System)
r Plt raw data from the PLATELET PROCESSOR card
r Hgb information retained at the AMC
r Diff raw data from the DIFF PROCESSOR card
r Retic raw data from the DIFF PROCESSOR card.
The flow of results from final processing to reporting is illustrated in Figure 2.24-1 (GEN•S
System) and Figure 2.24-2 (LH 750 System).
For details about the analysis of the data, refer to Headings 2.18 and 2.19 for the CBC
parameters, Headings 2.21 and 2.22 for the diff parameters, and Headings 2.21 and 2.23 for
the retic parameters.
Figure 2.24-1 Sample Data Flow on the GEN•S System from Final Processing to Reporting
DILUTER
PROCESSOR CARD
SAMPLE DATA SET
COMM
AMC CARD
CBC ANALYSIS
INTFC CARD
RED/WHITE HGB
PROCESSOR CARD
WBC AND RBC
COUNTS AND
HISTOGRAMS
PLATELET
PROCESSOR CARD
PLT HISTOGRAM
WORKSTATION RESULTS
DIFF DIFF AND RETIC HISTOGRAMS
PROCESSOR CARD ANALYSIS DATAPLOTS
DIFF DATA
RETIC DATA
7253325A
PN 4277219B 2.24-1
SAMPLE REPORTING
Figure 2.24-2 Sample Data Flow on the LH 750 System from Final Processing to Reporting
D IL U T E R
C P U c a rd
S a m p le d a ta s e t
D a ta C O M M IN T F C
R E D /W H IT E A M C a n d c a rd
P R O C E S S O R 2 c a l fa c to rs H g b ra w d a ta
c a rd
W B C ra w c o u n t
R B C ra w c o u n t
W B C w a it c o u n t*
R B C w a it c o u n t*
W B C ra w h is to
R B C ra w h is to
D IF F
P R O C E S S O R
P L T P R O C E S S O R c a r d D iff W o r k s ta tio n Results,
c a rd R e tic C B C , d i f f , r e t i c histograms,
a n a ly s is DataPlots
P L T ra w c o u n t
P L T r a w h is to
7 2 1 9 0 1 9 B
* Note: The wait count is a new feature introduced on the LH 750 System.
Sample Data Set

The AMC obtains the sample identification or bar-code data from the DILUTER PROCESSOR
card (GEN•S System) or the DILUTER CPU card (LH 750 System). The sample identification
and the following data from the AMC comprises the sample data set:
r Date
r Time
r Aspiration mode
r Test mode.
CBC Analysis on the GEN•S System

The AMC routes the sample data set, the CBC parameter results and the size distribution data
to the Workstation for display and reporting. The process for generating each of the reported
CBC results is described under the following headings: RBC and WBC Counts and
Histograms; MCV; RDW; Plt Histogram, Plt, MPV, PDW and Pct; Hgb; and RBC Indices.
RBC and WBC Counts and Histograms

The RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card stores raw data for the RBC and WBC counts and size
distribution data for the RBC and WBC histograms. To generate the RBC and WBC counts,
the AMC retrieves the raw count data for each aperture. Then the AMC:
1. Applies a scaling factor, corrects for coincidence passage and applies the aperture
calibration factor.
2.24-2 PN 4277219B
SAMPLE REPORTING 2
2. Votes on the data from each aperture.
r If at least two apertures are in agreement, the AMC generates an average result.
r If there is no agreement between the apertures, the AMC generates a voteout code
(-----) for that parameter. In addition, it generates an incomplete computation code
(•••••) for any parameter calculated using the voted out parameter. Single aperture
data is available on the Workstation In-Lab Data screen.
3. Applies the average calibration factors to the RBC and WBC counts.
4. Routes the RBC and WBC counts and raw histogram data to the Workstation for display
and reporting.
r The WBC histogram data is collected from 30 to 450 fL but is displayed from 0 to
80 fL in the operator modes and from 0 to 450 fL in the service mode.
r The RBC histogram is collected and displayed from 24 to 360 fL.
From the raw data histogram data, the Workstation calculates the peak-to-valley ratio at the
WBC threshold, 35 fL, to determine if any interference is present. If the threshold check is not
within the instrument limits, the Workstation generates the WBC backlighting flag (*).
MCV
The AMC applies coincidence correction, voting criteria and calibration factors to the red cell
size data to derive the MCV and routes the results to the Workstation. The Workstation
checks the MCV result. If the MCV is less than 50 fL, the Workstation generates an MCV (*)
flag.
RDW
The AMC calculates the RDW, which is a coefficient of variation of the RBC histogram,
applies voting criteria to the RDW, checks the symmetry of the RBC histogram, and routes the
RDW to the Workstation. If the RBC histogram is excessively asymmetrical, the Workstation
generates the RDW R flag.
Plt Histogram, Plt, MPV, PDW and Pct

The PLATELET PROCESSOR card stores the size distribution data for the platelet histograms.
To generate the Plt histograms, the AMC retrieves the raw data for each aperture from the
PLATELET PROCESSOR card. Then the AMC:
1. Corrects the data for coincidence passage.

2. Smooths the data to generate a smoothed curve between 0 and 20 fL.
3. If the Plt count per aperture would be at least 20,000, develops a fitted curve from the Plt
data.
4. Determines if the fitted curve meets the following criteria -
r The curve is positive.
r The mode is between 3 and 15 fL.
r The PDW is less than 20.
PN 4277219B 2.24-3
SAMPLE REPORTING
5. Derives the Plt count, MPV and PDW from the platelet curve -
r If the curve passes the fitting criteria, the Plt results are derived from the area under
the fitted curve from 0 to 70 fL. The Workstation displays both the smoothed and
the fitted curve.
r If the curve fails the fitting criteria, or if the count was too low for the accurate
development of a fitted curve, the AMC generates no-fit Plt results from the raw
data count between two minimum points. The Workstation displays the smoothed
curve only.
6. Applies aperture calibration factors to the Plt counts.
7. Calculates the Pct as follows -
Plt × MPV
Pct = ---------------------------
10
8. Applies the voting criteria to the Plt count and the MPV, and a calibration factor to the
average results.
9. Routes the Plt results and histograms to the Workstation for display and reporting. The
smoothed Plt histogram is displayed from 2 to 20 fL, the fitted from 0 to 70 fL.
Hgb
The Hgb-blank and Hgb-read voltages are converted by the COMM INTFC card and stored on
the AMC.
1. The AMC uses two sets of Hgb-blank and Hgb-read voltages to verify the integrity of the
voltage readings in the cuvette.The two values are compared to determine if they agree
with each other. In addition, the Hgb-blank is compared to the last three Hgb-blanks
readings retained by the AMC.
2. If both checks are within limits, the AMC:
a. Uses the highest Hgb blank and read voltages to determine the Hgb results for the
sample by comparing the blank and read voltages, determining the difference, and
converting the difference to a Hgb result.
b. Applies the calibration factor and routes the Hgb result to the Workstation.
3. If either check fails, the AMC generates an incomplete computation code (•••••) for the
Hgb parameter.
RBC Indices
The AMC calculates the Hct, MCH, MCHC from the RBC, MCV and Hgb parameters, using
the following formulas:
RBC × MCV
Hct = ---------------------------------
10
Hgb
MCH = ------------ × 10
RBC
Hgb
MCHC = ----------- × 100
Hct
2.24-4 PN 4277219B
SAMPLE REPORTING 2
CBC Analysis on the LH 750 System
The AMC routes the sample data set, the CBC raw data and the size distribution data to the
Workstation for analysis, display, and reporting. The process for generating each of the
reported CBC results is described under the following headings: RBC and WBC Counts and
Histograms; MCV; RDW; Plt Histogram, Plt, MPV, PDW and Pct; Hgb; and RBC Indices.
RBC and WBC Counts and Histograms

The RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card stores raw data for the RBC and WBC counts and size
distribution data for the RBC and WBC histograms. To generate the RBC and WBC counts,
the AMC retrieves the raw count data for each aperture and sends it to the Workstation. The
Workstation:
1. Applies a scaling factor, corrects for coincidence passage and applies the aperture
calibration factor.
2. Votes on the data from each aperture.
r If at least two apertures are in agreement, the Workstation generates an average
result.
r If there is no agreement between the apertures, the Workstation generates a
voteout code (-----) for that parameter. In addition, it generates an incomplete
computation code (•••••) for any parameter calculated using the voted out
parameter. Single aperture data is available on the Workstation In-Lab Data screen.
3. Applies the average calibration factors to the RBC and WBC counts.
4. Displays and reports WBC and RBC counts and histograms.
r The WBC histogram data is collected from 30 to 450 fL but is displayed from 0 to
80 fL in the operator modes and from 0 to 450 fL in the service mode.
r The RBC histogram is collected and displayed from 24 to 360 fL.
5. Checks the WBC histogram for interference:
a. From the raw data histogram data, the Workstation establishes the presence of the
lymphocyte population and then checks the area to the left of the lymphocyte
population to determine if any interference is present. Interfering particles include,
but are not limited to, NRBCs, unlysed RBCs, RBC fragments, giant platelets, and
platelet clumps.
b. If interference is present, the Workstation analyzes the interference population and
eliminates it from the WBC count. If it cannot eliminate the interference, it flags the
WBC with an asterisk (*) and generates a WBC interference suspect message.
MCV
The Workstation:
1. Applies coincidence correction, voting criteria and calibration factors to the red cell size
data to derive the MCV.
2. Checks the MCV result. If the MCV is less than 50 fL, the Workstation generates an
MCV (*) flag.
PN 4277219B 2.24-5
SAMPLE REPORTING
RDW
The Workstation:
1. Calculates the RDW, which is a coefficient of variation of the RBC histogram.
2. Applies voting criteria to the RDW.
3. Checks the symmetry of the RBC histogram. If the RBC histogram is excessively
asymmetrical, the Workstation generates the RDW R flag.
Plt Histogram, Plt, MPV, PDW and Pct

The PLATELET PROCESSOR card stores the size distribution data for the platelet histograms.
To generate the Plt histograms, the AMC retrieves the raw data for each aperture from the
PLATELET PROCESSOR card and sends it to the Workstation. The Workstation:
1. Smooths the raw data histograms to generate a smoothed curve between 0 and 20 fL.
2. Finds the mode channel.
3. If the Plt count per aperture would be at least 20,000, develops a fitted curve from the Plt
data.
4. Determines if the fitted curve meets the following criteria -
r The curve is positive.
r The mode is between 3 and 15 fL.
r The PDW is less than 20.
r The ratio between the mode amplitudes of the raw and fitted histograms is less
than1.5.
r The amplitude on channels 0 and 1 of the platelet histogram is less than 1.5 times
the mode amplitude.
Note: The platelet R-flag is only triggered for the above conditions if interference is
present in channels 0 or 1.
5. Derives the Plt count, MPV and PDW from the platelet curve -
r If the curve passes the fitting criteria, the Plt results are derived from the area under
the fitted curve from 0 to 70 fL. The Workstation displays both the smoothed and
the fitted curve.
r If the curve fails the fitting criteria, or if the count was too low for the accurate
development of a fitted curve, the Workstation generates no-fit Plt results from the
raw data count between two minimum points and displays the smoothed curve only.
6. Corrects the data for coincidence passage.
7. Applies aperture calibration factors to the Plt counts.
8. Applies the voting criteria to the Plt counts and the MPV and applies a calibration factor
to the average results.
9. Calculates the Pct as follows -
Plt × MPV
Pct = ---------------------------
10
10. Reports and displays the Plt results and histograms.
r The smoothed Plt histogram is displayed from 2 to 20 fL
r The fitted Plt histogram is displayed from 0 to 70 fL.
2.24-6 PN 4277219B
SAMPLE REPORTING 2
Hgb
The Hgb-blank and Hgb-read voltages are converted by the COMM INTFC card and stored on
the AMC. The AMC stores two sets of Hgb-blank and Hgb-read voltages and sends them to
the Workstation. The Workstation:
1. Uses the two sets of Hgb-blank and Hgb-read voltages to verify the integrity of the
voltage readings in the cuvette.The two values are compared to determine if they agree
with each other. In addition, the Hgb-blank is compared to the last three Hgb-blanks
readings retained by the AMC.
2. If both checks are within limits, the Workstation:
a. Uses the highest Hgb blank and read voltages to determine the Hgb results for the
sample by comparing the blank and read voltages, determining the difference, and
converting the difference to a Hgb result.
b. Applies the calibration factor to the Hgb results.
3. If either check fails, the Workstation generates an incomplete computation code (•••••)
for the Hgb parameter.
RBC Indices
The Workstation calculates the Hct, MCH, MCHC from the RBC, MCV and Hgb parameters,
using the following formulas:
RBC × MCV
Hct = ---------------------------------
10
Hgb
MCH = ------------ × 10
RBC
Hgb
MCHC = ----------- × 100
Hct
Diff Analysis
The DIFF PROCESSOR card routes the raw data directly to the Workstation where it is stored
and analyzed. The program (algorithms) used to analyze the raw diff data, which is called
COULTER AccuGate™ analysis, resides in the Workstation.
AccuGate analysis is a statistical analysis tool. It uses adaptive contouring methods and
multiresolution analysis of the cell populations to find the optimal separation of cell
populations for determining the WBC diff percentages. See the AccuFlex™ Detailed
Principles of Operation for details about the analysis.
If an abnormal cell distribution or population is present, a suspect message is generated

during the AccuGate analysis. See the instrument Online Help System for more information
about the suspect messages.
The Workstation multiplies the cell population percentages by the WBC to determine the
absolute number for each population.
PN 4277219B 2.24-7
SAMPLE REPORTING
The Workstation displays the diff results and two types of DataPlots: the two-dimensional
(2D) DataPlot and the three-dimensional (3D) DataPlot. On both DataPlots different colors
represent different cell populations. On the 2D DataPlot, shades of color represent event
density (concentration), dark colors for low event density, bright colors for high event
density.
.
Figure 2.24-3 Diff Analysis Two-Dimensional DataPlot

See Figure 2.24-3 for an example of a 2D DataPlot.
In a 2D DataPlot, DC is plotted on the Y-axis, RLS

on the X-axis.
Refer to the Online Help System for details about

the 2D DataPlot display for the diff.
Figure 2.24-4 Diff Analysis Three-Dimensional DataPlot

See Figure 2.24-4 for an example of a 3D DataPlot.
The 3D DataPlot, also referred to as a cube, is a
graphical projection of real-time data events that
can be rotated to enhance the 3D projection. The
three axes on the 3D DataPlot, DC (Y-axis), RLS
(X-axis) and OP (Z-axis), are color-coded.
Refer to the Online Help System for details about
the 3D DataPlot display for the diff.
2.24-8 PN 4277219B
SAMPLE REPORTING 2
Nucleated RBC Counts (NRBC)
The LH 750 System determines if nucleated RBCs are present by checking for particles in two
locations:
Figure 2.24-5 NRBC Signature Position r The NRBC signature position on

the differential Dataplot. See
Figure 2.24-5.
Figure 2.24-6 NRBC Location on WBC Histogram r The far left region of the WBC
histogram. See Figure 2.24-6.
If cells are present in both locations, the Workstation:
1. Applies an advanced algorithm to the WBC histogram to determine the number of

NRBCs per 100 WBC. This is reported as NRBC%.
2. Multiplies the percent of nucleated RBCs by the WBC count to determine the absolute
number of NRBCs.
Retic Analysis
The DIFF PROCESSOR card routes the raw data directly to the Workstation where it is stored
and analyzed. The program (algorithms) used to analyze the raw retic data, which is called
COULTER AccuGate analysis, resides in the Workstation.
AccuGate analysis is a statistical analysis tool. It uses adaptive contouring methods and
multiresolution analysis of the cell populations to find the optimal separation between the
retic population and the normal RBC population to determine the percentage of retics. See the
AccuFlex™ Detailed Principles of Operation for details about the analysis.
PN 4277219B 2.24-9
SAMPLE REPORTING
The Workstation multiplies the RBC count by the percentage of retics to determine the
absolute number of retics.
The Workstation displays the retic results and DataPlots representing the cell populations and
density (concentration). The two-dimensional (2D) DataPlot uses different colors to
distinguish reticulocytes from other cell groups and shades of color to represent event density,
dark colors for low density, bright colors for high density. In the 2D DataPlot, DC is plotted
on the Y-axis, LS on the X-axis. See Figure 2.24-7 for an example of this DataPlot display.
Refer to the Online Help System for details about the 2D DataPlot display for retics.
Figure 2.24-7 Retic Analysis DataPlot
Sample Flags, Codes and Messages

The instrument generates various flags, codes and messages concerning the sample data to
aid in interpreting the results. The suspect and parameters flags are determined by preset
instrument limits or conditions. All other flags and messages are based on limits defined and
set by the laboratory. For more information about any sample flag, code or message, refer to
the Online Help System or the Operator’s Guide.
2.24-10 PN 4277219B
CBC CALIBRATION OVERVIEW 2
2.25 CBC CALIBRATION OVERVIEW
Why Calibrate?
A cell passing through an aperture generates a pulse equal to its size (volume). The size of
that pulse determines if a cell is counted as an RBC, WBC or platelet and where that cell is
placed in the RBC, WBC or platelet histogram. Calibration ensures that the cells are sized
accurately.
Calibration also ensures that all three apertures within a bath “see” a cell as the same size and
count the same number of cells for a sample, eliminating voteouts due to minor differences in
the physical dimensions of the aperture and in the electronic circuitry.
Finally, calibration ensures that the final results are accurate.
Calibration Tests
At the Workstation, three calibration tests are available from the Service Function area, CBC
Calibration window: Latex Calibration, Voltage Matching and Flow Rate. These tests collect
the data needed for calibration, do any necessary calculations, analyze the data, and display
the results.
Steps to Calibration
IMPORTANT Calibration consists of several procedures. Always perform the procedures in the order they
are presented, as each procedure is written assuming that the settings established in the previous
procedures are correct.
ATTENTION: The procedures in this section are brief overviews only, provided to help you
understand the calibration process. To calibrate an instrument, be sure to use the detailed
calibration procedures in Headings 4.8, 4.9 and 4.10.
Preliminary
Doing the following preliminary procedures ensures the instrument is clean and operating
correctly:
r Aperture Bleaching and RBC Internal Electrode Bleaching.

Bleaching the apertures and internal electrodes removes protein buildup and debris.
Protein buildup in the apertures affects the sizing of cells and increases voteouts. Protein
buildup on the internal electrodes can generate electronic noise, causing erroneous
results.
r Precision Verification.
The Precision Verification procedure checks the ability of the instrument to produce the
same test results for repeated determinations from the same specimen. The results of the
Precision Verification procedure may also reveal any trends or shifts.
PN 4277219B 2.25-1
CBC CALIBRATION OVERVIEW
Since the accuracy of the results will be compromised by poor reproducibility, trends or
shifts, these problems must be corrected before calibrating the instrument.
t Trends in the data can be caused by a plug in the needle vent line.
t Shifts in the data can be caused by problems with the pumps or the BSV.
Latex Voltage Calibration

The aperture current affects the size of a particle or cell pulse, and consequently its placement
in one of the 256 channels used by size for histogram development. Using a known size of
latex particles to set aperture current ensures the cells are sorted into the correct channels.
The Latex Voltage Calibration procedure uses two of the Calibration Tests.
r It uses the Latex Voltage Test to adjust the aperture current settings.
r It uses the Voltage Matching Test to fine-tune the preamp voltages to compensate for
minor variations in the physical dimensions of the apertures and in the electronic
circuitry that affects the size data of the RBCs and WBCs.
In general, the steps to determine the correct aperture current settings are:
1. Using the Latex Voltage Test, analyze latex particles of a known size.
2. Compare the latex mean volume derived by the instrument to the actual latex particle
size.
3. Calculate the voltage needed to make the mean volume equal to the latex reference
value.
4. Adjust the preamp voltage to the new calculated voltage.
The Latex Voltage Test automatically analyzes and verifies the data, and calculates new
voltage settings. See Figure 2.25-1.
The Latex Voltage Test uses the following formula to calculate the voltage settings.
Latex Reference
Voltage APX New = ----------------------------------------- × Voltage APX Old
Latex MV APX
Where
:
Latex Reference is the known size of the latex particles.

Latex MV APX is the mean volume or size of the latex particles determined by the
instrument
Voltage APX Old is the current voltage setting for the aperture.
Voltage APX New is the new voltage setting calculated for the aperture.
APX indicates aperture 1, 2 or 3.
2.25-2 PN 4277219B
The Latex Voltage Test compares the data to preset limits and flags any values that are outside
the limits. The software verifies the following are within acceptable limits:
r The RBC and WBC results (to ensure a sufficient number of latex particles)
r The RMV and WMV (red and white mean volume) as compared to the assay value for the
latex particles
r The volume difference (RMV and WMV) between any two RBC or WBC apertures*
r The voltage difference between any two RBC or WBC apertures*
r The new calculated voltages.
*In the window: AP1 = AP2 - AP1

AP2 = AP3 - AP2
AP3 = AP1 - AP3.
Figure 2.25-1 Latex Voltage Test Window
7253440E
In general, the steps to fine-tune the preamp voltage settings are:
1. Using the Voltage Matching Test, cycle latex particles, whole blood, control material, or
calibrator material and compare the mean volume from apertures 2 and 3 to the data
from aperture 1.
2. Calculate the preamp voltages needed at apertures 2 and 3 to make the mean volume
match aperture 1.
3. Adjust the preamp voltage settings to the new calculated voltages for apertures 2 and 3.
PN 4277219B 2.25-3
The Voltage Matching Test (Figure 2.25-2) automatically calculates the voltage settings,
verifies the data and displays the results. The Voltage Matching Test uses the following
formula to calculate the voltage settings
Mean MV AP1
I AX New = --------------------------------------- × I AX Old
Mean MV APX
Where:
Mean MV AP1 is the mean volume for aperture 1.

Mean MV APX is the mean volume from aperture 2 or 3.
IAX Old is the current or old preamp voltage setting for aperture 2 or 3.
IAX New is the new calculated preamp voltage setting for aperture 2 or 3.
Figure 2.25-2 Voltage Matching Test Window
7253441E
The Voltage Matching Test compares the data to preset limits and flags any values that are
outside the limits. The software verifies the following are within acceptable limits:
r %CV for RMV (red mean volumes)

r %CV for WMV (white mean volume)
2.25-4 PN 4277219B
r The volume difference (RMV or WMV) between any two apertures.*
r The voltage difference between any two RBC or WBC apertures*
r The new calculated voltages.
* In the window: AP1 = AP2 - AP1

AP2 = AP3 - AP2
AP3 = AP1 - AP3.
Flow Rate Calibration

The Flow Rate Calibration procedure uses the Flow Rate Test to establish aperture calibration
factors and average calibration factors.
r Aperture calibration factors are established for apertures 2 and 3, using aperture 1 as a
reference, to compensate for minor variations in the physical dimensions of the apertures
and in the electronic circuitry that affect the count data. The aperture calibration factors
ensure the count data from all three apertures is the same. The counts are multiplied by
the aperture calibration factors before data from the three apertures are compared and
voted on.
r Average calibration factors for WBC, RBC, Hgb, MCV, Plt, and MPV are established to
ensure the final results are accurate.
The aperture calibration factors can be established using whole blood, a control material or a
calibrator material. Average calibration factors, however, must be established with an assayed
material, such as 5C® cell control, S-CAL® calibrator, or whole blood referenced to another
instrument.
The laboratory establishes the final average calibration factors using a calibrator material,
such as S-CAL calibrator, or a whole blood calibration procedure.
In general, the steps to establish the calibration factors are:
1. Using the Flow Rate Test, cycle blood and compare the count data from apertures 2
and 3 to the data from aperture 1.
2. Calculate the calibration factors needed to make the count data from apertures 2 and 3
match the count data from aperture 1.
3. Cycle the assayed material to calculate the average calibration factors needed to make the
average results match the assayed material
4. Determine which parameters need adjustment and transfer the new calibration factors to
the Analyzer.
PN 4277219B 2.25-5
The Flow Rate Test (Figure 2.25-3) automatically compares the results and calculates the
calibration factors. The Flow Rate Test uses the following formula to calculate WBC, RBC and
Plt calibration factors for apertures 2 and 3.
Mean AP1
Cal Factor APX New = ----------------------------- × Cal Factor APX Old
Mean APX
Where:
Mean AP1 is the mean of the WBC, RBC or Plt counts for aperture 1.
Mean APX is the mean of the WBC, RBC or Plt counts for aperture 2 or 3.
Cal Factor APX Old is the current or old calibration factor for aperture 2 or 3.
Cal Factor APX New is the new calculated factor for aperture 2 or 3.
The Flow Rate Test uses the following formula to calculate the average calibration factors for
WBC, RBC, Hgb, MCV, Plt and MPV
Reference Value
Cal Factor New = ------------------------------------------- × Cal Factor Old
Mean Average
Where
:
Reference Value is the assay value of the material used for calibration.
Mean Average is the mean of the average (versus single aperture) results obtained.
Cal Factor Old is the current calibration factor for the parameter.
Cal Factor New is the new calculated factor for the parameter.
The Flow Rate Test compares the data to preset limits and flags any values that are outside the
limits. The software verifies the following data for the individual aperture calibration factors
is within acceptable limits:
r WBC %CV
r RBC %CV
r Plt %CV
r WBC, RBC and Plt single-aperture calibration factors.
The software verifies that the following data for the average factors is within acceptable limits:
r %CV
r % Diff [(Mean - Assay)/Assay x 100%]
r Delta Diff
r Average calibration factors for WBC, RBC, MCV, Plt, MPV and Hgb.
2.25-6 PN 4277219B
Figure 2.25-3 Flow Rate Test Window
7253439E
Manual Mode-to-Automatic Mode Calibration

The aspiration pathway is different for the two aspiration modes, Automatic and Manual.
Calibration factors are established for the Manual mode to compensate for these differences
and ensure that the results for a specimen are the same, regardless of the aspiration mode
used. Manual-mode calibration factors are applied to the average results of the WBC, RBC, Plt
and Hgb parameters only.
In general, the steps to establish the Manual-mode calibration factors are:
1. Run the same specimens in the Automatic mode and the Manual mode.
2. Calculate the Manual-mode calibration factors, using the Automatic-mode results as a
reference The formula for calculating the Manual-mode calibration factors is:
Mean Automatic
Cal Factor New = ----------------------------------------- × Cal Factor Old
Mean Manual
Where:
Mean Automatic is the average of the results determined in the Automatic mode.
Mean Manual is the average of the results determined in the Manual mode.
Cal Factor Old is the current Manual-mode calibration factor
Cal Factor New is the new calculated Manual-mode calibration factor.
PN 4277219B 2.25-7
When to Calibrate
CBC calibration should be performed or verified any time a component associated with the
determination of CBC results is replaced. Also, if any changes are made during any calibration
procedure, all subsequent calibration procedures must be performed. Use Table 2.25-1 as a
guide to determine when to do the calibration procedures.
ATTENTION: Although the instrument is relatively insensitive to minor room temperature

changes, calibration should be performed when the room temperature is stable and within the
average temperature range, and should be verified whenever the room temperature changes
by more than 5°C (10°F).
Table 2.25-1 When to Calibrate
Calibration Procedures to Do
Component Replaced and/or Adjusted Latex Voltage Flow Rate Mode to Mode
Any component that affects aspiration pathway X* X

Any component that affects CBC parameter dilutions X*
Any component that affects WBC or RBC aperture voltage X X*
Any component that affects WBC, RBC or Plt flow rate X
Aperture block X X
Aperture module X X
API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card (GEN•S System) X X
Aspiration pump X* X
Aspiration tubing X* X
Bubble/Blood detectors X* X
BSV X* X
Needle X* X
PLATELET PROCESSOR card X
RBC diluent dispenser X*
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP card (GEN•S System) X X
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card (GEN•S System) X X
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card (LH 750 System) X X
R/W/P SC/A card (LH 750 System) X X
Six-Channel Preamp card (LH 750 System) X X
Sweep-flow tank X
WBC diluent dispenser X*
* Only the average calibration factors need to be checked.
2.25-8 PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
3
3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES, 3.1-1
3.1 GEN•S SYSTEM PREINSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.1-1

Ventilation, 3.1-3
Drainage, 3.1-4
Altitude, 3.1-5
3.2 INSTALLING THE GEN•S SYSTEM WORKSTATION, 3.2-1
3.3 UNPACKING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.3-1

Unpacking, 3.3-1
3.4 INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE GEN•S SYSTEM, 3.4-1

Connecting the Analyzer Coaxial Cables on the GEN•S System, 3.4-2
3.5 CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE GEN•S SYSTEM, 3.5-1

3.6 SETTING UP THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.6-1

Setting Up the Power Supply, 3.6-1
Setting Up the GEN•S System Diluter, 3.6-3
3.7 CHECKING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.7-1

3.8 TESTING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND

WORKSTATION, 3.8-1
PN 4277219B 3-i
CONTENTS

3.9 GEN•S SYSTEM AND GEN•S CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.9-1
3.10 LH 750 SYSTEM PREINSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.10-1

Ventilation, 3.10-3
Drainage, 3.10-4
Altitude, 3.10-5
3.11 UNPACKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.11-1

Opening the Cartons, 3.11-1
Unpacking and Setting Up the Power Supply, 3.11-2
Unpacking the Diluter, 3.11-5
Unpacking the Analyzer, 3.11-5
3.12 INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM, 3.12-1

Accessing the Connections, 3.12-1
Connecting the Analyzer to Preamp Cable, 3.12-4
3.13 CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM, 3.13-1

3-ii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
3
3.14 SETTING UP THE LH 750 SYSTEM DILUTER AND ANALYZER, 3.14-1
Setting Up the LH 750 System Diluter, 3.14-1
3.15 UNPACKING AND INSTALLING THE LH 750 SYSTEM WORKSTATION, 3.15-1

Unpacking and Checking the Workstation, 3.15-1
3.16 CHECKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.16-1

Closing Up the Instrument for Testing, 3.16-4
3.17 TESTING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND

WORKSTATION, 3.17-1
3.18 LH 750 SYSTEM AND LH 750 CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.18-1
ILLUSTRATIONS
3.1-1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the GEN•S System without
SlideMaker, 3.1-1
3.1-2 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the GEN•S System with
SlideMaker, 3.1-2
3.1-3 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the GEN•S Cell, 3.1-2
3.1-4 Location of Fans on the GEN•S System, 3.1-3
3.1-5 Main Power and Drain Line Length Requirement for the GEN•S System, 3.1-4
3.1-6 Backwash Tank Custom Tubing on the GEN•S System, 3.1-5

3.3-2 Main Components Layout on the GEN•S System, 3.3-2
3.3-3 Opening Analyzer Side Doors on the GEN•S System, 3.3-3
3.3-4 Analyzer Captive Lock-Down Screws on the GEN•S System, 3.3-3
3.4-1 Connecting the Main Power Cable on the GEN•S System, 3.4-1
3.4-2 Connecting the IBUS Cable on the GEN•S System, 3.4-2
PN 4277219B 3-iii
CONTENTS
3.4-4 Routing the Analyzer Coaxial Cables on the GEN•S System, 3.4-3
3.4-5 Connecting the Backplane Voltage Bus on the GEN•S System, 3.4-4
Backplane, 3.4-5
the GEN•S System, 3.4-6
3.4-8 Connecting the Workstation to the Diluter on the GEN•S System, 3.4-7
3.5-1 Installing the Pneumatic Lines on the GEN•S System, 3.5-1

Reagent on the GEN•S System, 3.5-2
3.5-3 Connecting the Diluent, Cleaning Agent, and Waste Line on the GEN•S
System, 3.5-3

3.6-4 Removing GEN•S System Diluter Shipping Inserts, 3.6-3
3.6-5 Removing the Spacers from the BSV on the GEN•S System, 3.6-4
3.6-6 Removing the Shipping Insert from the TTM on the GEN•S System, 3.6-5
3.6-7 Checking Needle Cartridge Installation on the GEN•S System, 3.6-6
3.6-9 Checking Lift Cover Alignment and Stripper Plate Movement on the GEN•S
System, 3.6-8
3.6-10 AMC, COMM INTERFACE Card, and DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Locations,
3.7-1 Supplying ac Input to the Analytical Station on the GEN•S System, 3.7-1
3.7-2 Power On Checks on the GEN•S System, 3.7-2
3.7-3 Accessing the Revision Levels on the GEN•S System, 3.7-3
3.8-1 GEN•S System Condition after Shutdown Cycle, 3.8-1

3.8-2 GEN•S System Condition after Startup Cycle, 3.8-2
3.10-1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the LH 750 System without
SlideMaker, 3.10-1
3.10-2 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the LH 750 System with
SlideMaker, 3.10-2
3.10-3 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the LH 750 System, 3.10-2
3.10-4 Location of Fans on the LH 750 System, 3.10-3
3.10-5 Main Power and Drain Line Length Requirement for the LH 750 System, 3.10-4
3.10-6 Backwash Tank Custom Tubing on the LH 750 System, 3.10-5

3.11-5 Main Components Layout for the LH 750 System, 3.11-4
3-iv PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
3
3.11-6 Removing the Left and Right Analytical Station Columns, 3.11-5
3.11-7 Opening Analyzer Side Doors on the LH 750 System, 3.11-6
3.11-8 Analyzer Captive Lock-Down Screws on the LH 750 System, 3.11-6

3.12-2 Connecting the Main Power Cable on the LH 750 System, 3.12-2
3.12-3 Connecting the IBUS Cable on the LH 750 System, 3.12-3
3.12-4 Routing the Analyzer to Preamp Cable on the LH 750 System, 3.12-4
3.12-5 Connecting the Backplane Voltage Bus on the LH 750 System, 3.12-5
3.12-6 Routing the Cable from the RF Detector Preamp Card to the Digital Backplane on
3.13-1 Installing the Pneumatic Lines on the LH 750 System, 3.13-1

Reagent on the LH 750 System, 3.13-2
3.13-3 Connecting the Diluent, Cleaning Agent, and Waste Line on the LH 750
System, 3.13-3
3.14-1 Removing LH 750 System Diluter Shipping Inserts, 3.14-1

3.14-2 Removing the Spacers from the BSV on the LH 750 System, 3.14-1
3.14-3 Removing the Shipping Insert from the TTM on the LH 750 System, 3.14-2
3.14-4 Checking Needle Cartridge Installation on the LH 750 System, 3.14-3
LH 750 System, 3.14-3
3.14-6 Checking Lift Cover Alignment and Stripper Plate Movement on the LH 750
System, 3.14-4
3.14-7 Setting Up the LH 750 System Analyzer, 3.14-4
3.15-1 Connecting the Workstation to the LH 750 System Diluter, 3.15-1
3.16-1 Supplying ac Input to the Analytical Station on the LH 750 System, 3.16-1
3.16-2 Power On Checks on the LH 750 System, 3.16-2
3.16-3 Accessing the Revision Levels on the LH 750 System, 3.16-3
3.17-1 LH 750 System Condition after Shutdown Cycle, 3.17-1

3.17-2 LH 750 System Condition after Startup Cycle, 3.17-2
TABLES
3.6-1 Pinch Valves with Inconspicuous Deactivator Clips on the GEN•S System, 3.6-6
3.14-1 Pinch Valves on the LH 750 System with Inconspicuous Deactivator Clips, 3.14-2
PN 4277219B 3-v
CONTENTS
3-vi PN 4277219B
3INSTALLATION PROCEDURES 3
3.1 GEN•S SYSTEM PREINSTALLATION CHECKLIST

Before you install the instrument, verify the following conditions are met. Report any
discrepancies on the Installation Report.
Operator Training
c An operator is trained or is scheduled to be trained within the next two weeks.
Carton Arrival and Condition

c All the cartons on the shipping list have arrived.
c All the cartons are intact and undamaged. If any cartons are damaged, confirm that a
claim was filed with the carrier.
Instrument Site
Space and Accessibility

c The designated instrument area is easily accessible for maintaining and servicing the
instrument, such as an island or a movable table.
c The space is sufficient for the individual units. The dimensions and requirements for
accessibility and ventilation are shown in Figures 3.1-1, 3.1-2, and 3.1-3.
Figure 3.1-1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the GEN•S System without SlideMaker
38 cm (15 in.) 15 cm (6 in.)
38.1 cm(15 in.)

MT GE N S
* S YS TE M RU N *
05/03/95 0000
C
OP
YG
R
1
95
IH
1
-9
T
8
9
C
OU
L TER CORPORA TION
ST ATUS : READY
86.4 cm
ALERT :
M
N
AI
BP CBC DIFF RETIC S
(34 in.)
CLEARANCE CLEARANCE 63.5 cm
30 cm (12 in.) 30 cm (12 in.) (25 in.)
50.8 cm 61 cm(24 in.)

99.1 cm (39 in.) 43 cm (17 in.)
(20 in.)
MT
®
G EN S 63.5 cm
(25 in.)
CLEARANCE
CLEARANCE
25 cm (10 in.)
25 cm (10 in.)
66 cm
38.1 cm (26 in.)
6498155B
(15 in.)
PN 4277219B 3.1-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
Figure 3.1-2 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the GEN•S System with SlideMaker
38 cm (15 in.) 38 cm (15 in.) 15 cm (6 in.)
38.1 cm
(15 in.) T M GE N S
61 cm 86.4 cm
* S YS TE M RU N *
0 5 / 0 3 / 9 5
C O UTER
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
L CORPORA TION
0 0 0 0
C O P Y R I G H T 1 9 8 9 - 1 9 9 5
(24 in.) (34 in.)

BP CBC DIFF RETIC S
MAIN
T M
®
GE N S S M
30 cm (12 in.) 63.5 cm
45.7 cm (25 in.)
CLEARANCE
(18 in.)
CLEARANCE
30 cm
(12 in.) 99.1 cm (39 in.)
68.9 cm (27 in.) 43 cm (17 in.)
60.69 cm 61 cm
(24 in.) (24 in.)
T M
®
GEN S
25 cm (10 in.) 25 cm (10 in.)

CLEARANCE CLEARANCE
63.5 cm
(25 in.)
66 cm
38.1 cm (26 in.) 6498156B
(15 in.)
Figure 3.1-3 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the GEN•S Cell
38 cm (15 in.) 38 cm (15 in.) 15 cm (6 in.)
38.1 cm
61 cm (15 in.) T M GE N S
38 cm (15 in.) 71.2 cm

(24 in.)
* S YS TE M RU N *
86.4 cm
0 5 / 0 3 / 9 5 0 0 0 0
C O P Y R I G H T 1 9 8 9 - 1 9 9 5
C O UTER
L CORPORA TION
(28 in.) STATUS : READY

ALERT:
MAIN
(34 in.)
BP CBC DIFF RETIC S
T M
®
GE N S S M
30 cm (12 in.) 63.5 cm
48.26 cm 45.7 cm (25 in.)
CLEARANCE
(19 in.) (18 in.)
CLEARANCE G e n·S S t
23 cm
(9 in.) 58.42 cm (23 in.) 68.9 cm (27 in.) 99.1 cm (39 in.) 43 cm (17 in.)
60.69 cm 61 cm
(24 in.) (24 in.)
T M
®
GEN S
25 cm (10 in.) 25 cm (10 in.)

CLEARANCE CLEARANCE
63.5 cm
(25 in.)
66 cm
38.1 cm (26 in.) 6498154B
(15 in.)
3.1-2 PN 4277219B
3
Ventilation
c The fans are not obstructed. See Figure 3.1-4 for the location of the fans.
Figure 3.1-4 Location of Fans on the GEN•S System

Exhaust fans
Exhaust
fan Vent
Workstation ANALYZER
Power
Supply
Vent
Vent
Exhaust fan
Intake vent
6498051A
(On botton of Power Supply)
Remote Communication System (RCS) Requirement

c A single-line, nonmultiplexed analog phone line is installed for RCS connection.
Electrical Requirements
CAUTION Heat damage. Using an extension cord on the Power Supply could cause heat damage to the
main ac power cable. Designate an area for the Power Supply close enough to an electrical outlet that an
extension cord is not needed.
c The female ac outlet for the main Power Supply is within 3 m (10 ft) of the area
designated for the instrument. See Figure 3.1-5.
PN 4277219B 3.1-3
Figure 3.1-5 Main Power and Drain Line Length Requirement for the GEN•S System
WASTE
LINE
Max
3.7 m
WASTE (12 ft)
LINE
Max
3m
(10 ft)
Max DRAIN
76 cm (30 in.)
7253037A
c The main ac outlet is a three-wire outlet supplying a 90 to 264 Vac, 47 to 63 Hz, 860 W,
single-phase input power.
c The ground is a confirmed third-wire earth ground that can carry the full current of the
circuit.
c The circuit is independent and protected.
Drainage
c If the waste from the instrument will drain into an open drain instead of a waste
container, the drain is chemically resistant and is appropriate for biohazardous waste.
c The drain or waste container is less than 76 cm (30 in.) above the floor and is within
3.7 m (12 ft) of the area designated for the Diluter. Refer to Figure 3.1-5.
c The drain or waste container is located so that the waste drain tubing is always below the
waste fitting at the base of the Diluter.
Ambient Temperature and Humidity

c The typical ambient room temperature is 16 to 32°C (60 to 90°F) and stable.
Note: If the area is air conditioned, an additional 5,000 Btu will compensate for the heat
generated by the system.
c The humidity is consistently less than 95% with no condensation.
3.1-4 PN 4277219B
3
Altitude
c If the altitude is greater than 2,134 m (7,000 ft) above sea level, locate the custom tubing
between FF5 and FF20 (see Figure 3.1-6), and replace it with 18 in. of the clear
polyurethane tubing designated in the master parts list, Table 8.1-2, for use on
instruments installed at high altitudes.
Figure 3.1-6 Backwash Tank Custom Tubing on the GEN•S System

F F 5
C u s to m
tu b in g
F F 2 0
7 2 1 9 0 3 6 B
Earthquake-Prone Regions
c If the instrument is located in an area prone to earthquakes, order the Earthquake
Tie-Down Kit to secure the Analytical Station to the workbench. For the part number of
the Earthquake Tie-Down Kit, see Hardware in the master parts list, Table 8.1-2.
Installation Supplies
c The instrument reagents, calibrators and controls are available and within expiration
limits.
c The paper supplies and blood collection tubes are available. Refer to the Appendix in the
Operator’s Guide for a list of blood collection tubes that can be used on the instrument.
PN 4277219B 3.1-5
3.1-6 PN 4277219B
INSTALLING THE GEN•S SYSTEM WORKSTATION 3
3.2 INSTALLING THE GEN•S SYSTEM WORKSTATION
ATTENTION: Installing the Workstation now allows you to access and use the online service
manual.
1. If installing both an Analytical Station and a Workstation, unpack, install and check the
Workstation according to the instructions in Section 25 of the GEN•S Workstation
Configuration.
2. If adding a second Analytical Station to a system that is already installed, go to
Heading 3.3, UNPACKING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION.
PN 4277219B 3.2-1
INSTALLING THE GEN•S SYSTEM WORKSTATION
3.2-2 PN 4277219B
UNPACKING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION 3
3.3 UNPACKING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION
Tools/Supplies Needed for Installing the Analytical Station
B Phillips-head screwdriver
B Side cutters
B Flathead screwdriver
B Two wrenches for removing strapping
B 5/32-in. Allen wrench for Power Supply
B 5C cell control - 3 levels
B Retic-C cell control - 3 levels
B LATRON primer and control
Unpacking
ATTENTION: As you install the instrument, log any problems or discrepancies on the
Installation Report form.
WARNING Personal injury. The cut edges of the metal strapping are sharp and will cut. Be careful when
removing the strapping.
1. Carefully remove the strapping from the cartons.

Note: If you use two crescent wrenches to hold the strapping as shown in Figure 3.3-1
and rotate the wrenches toward each other simultaneously, the strapping snaps easily
and the loose ends are held securely by the wrenches.
Figure 3.3-1 Removing the Strapping from the Shipping Cartons
7253007A
PN 4277219B 3.3-1
UNPACKING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION
2. Unpack each unit, making sure it is intact with no visible defective parts.
Note: Do not remove any shipping inserts at this time.
ATTENTION: Position the Workstation on the right side of the Diluter.
3. Position the components as shown in Figure 3.3-2.

Note: Cables to be routed from the Diluter to the Analyzer are located on top of the
Diluter. Open the Analyzer side doors as shown in Figure 3.3-3 to facilitate routing the
cables to the Analyzer.
Figure 3.3-2 Main Components Layout on the GEN•S System
ANALYTICAL STATION
TM
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95 0000
COULTER CORPORATION
ANALYZER
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
WORKSTATION
BP CBC DIFF RETICS
DILUTER
R
POWER
TM
TURBO
RESET
GEN• S
TEMP
60 30.0 4.9 28 115 DC
POWER
SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
6498044B
4. Secure the Analyzer to the Diluter:

a. Locate the five Analyzer captive screws; see Figure 3.3-4.
b. Fasten the captive screws, securing the Analyzer to the Diluter.
Note: To access the captive screws in the front, open the Analyzer side doors.
3.3-2 PN 4277219B
UNPACKING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION 3
Figure 3.3-3 Opening Analyzer Side Doors on the GEN•S System
1 1
J27
Unfasten Unfasten
captive screw J26
captive screw
J24 J19
7253357A
Figure 3.3-4 Analyzer Captive Lock-Down Screws on the GEN•S System
6 4 9 8 1 6 2 B
PN 4277219B 3.3-3
UNPACKING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION
3.3-4 PN 4277219B
INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE GEN•S SYSTEM 3
3.4 INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE GEN•S SYSTEM
CAUTION Electronic damage. Attaching electronic cables with the power on could damage the electronic
components. Do not connect the instrument to the main power source until you are instructed to do so.
WARNING Electric shock. Routing and attaching electronic cables with the power on could result in injury
from an electric shock. Do not connect the instrument to the main power source until you are instructed to
do so.
Connecting the dc Power Cable

1. Cut the tie wrap securing the dc power cable and route the connector end of the cable
from the Analyzer through the opening from the Analyzer to the Diluter. See
Figure 3.4-1.
2. Unscrew the cover plate at the rear of the Diluter and feed the connector through the
opening.
3. Secure the cable in the cable clamps in the Diluter and Analyzer.
4. Attach the dc power cable connector, P4, to J4 on the Power Supply.
Figure 3.4-1 Connecting the Main Power Cable on the GEN•S System
P4
J4
6498073B Power Supply
PN 4277219B 3.4-1
INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE GEN•S SYSTEM
Connecting the IBUS Cable

1. Locate the IBUS cable at the rear of the Diluter.
2. Attach the cable connector, P5, to J5 on the Power Supply. See Figure 3.4-2.
Figure 3.4-2 Connecting the IBUS Cable on the GEN•S System
C o v e r p la te
s c re w
S h ie ld
g ro u n d
IB U S
M a in
p o w e r
J 5
P 5
6 4 9 8 0 7 6 B P o w e r S u p p ly
Connecting the Analyzer Coaxial Cables on the GEN•S System

1. Open the left Diluter door to facilitate routing the coaxial cables. The side Diluter doors
are secured by a captive screw on the top of the door as shown in Figure 3.4-3.
3.4-2 PN 4277219B
Figure 3.4-3 Opening the Diluter Side Doors
6 4 9 8 1 9 5 B
2 U n fa s te n
2. Remove the bubble wrap and route the coaxial cables from inside the Diluter through the
opening from the Diluter to the Analyzer and connect the cables to their respective
Pre-Amp cards. See Figure 3.4-4.
Figure 3.4-4 Routing the Analyzer Coaxial Cables on the GEN•S System
PN 4277219B 3.4-3
Connecting the Backplane Voltage Bus

1. In the left and right Diluter compartments, remove the plastic shields to access the
openings for the voltage bus connectors.
Note: The left compartment shield is attached to a standoff on the Diluter 3 card. The
right compartment shield is attached by a plastic screw to the Laser Power Supply.
2. Route the power cables from the backplane voltage bus through the opening to the
Diluter.
3. Using Figure 3.4-5 as a guide, connect the cables to their respective cards as follows:
Connector on Voltage Bus Connects to

P1 J1 on Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card
P3 J3 on Diluter 4 card (remove the card cover to
connect cable)
P4 J4 on Diff Power Supply card
P4 ground Mounting screw on Diff Power Supply card
P7 J7 Diluter 1 card
4. Secure the cables in the cable clamps in the Diluter. Secure the cable to the Diluter 4 card
to the top of the Diluter compartment as shown in Figure 3.4-5.
Figure 3.4-5 Connecting the Backplane Voltage Bus on the GEN•S System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0
S Y S T E M
G R O U N D
G R O U N D + 4 8 V D C
P 4 - 4 8 V D C P 3
E 1 0 E 9
P 7 P 1
S H IE L D G R O U N D E 1 0
P 4 /J 4
P 1 /J 1
D iff P o w e r D ilu te r /S o le n o id
S u p p ly c a r d O p tic s P o w e r
S u p p ly c a r d
P 7 /J 7
D ilu te r 1
c a rd
P 3 /J 3
D ilu te r 4
c a rd 6 4 9 8 1 7 3 B
3.4-4 PN 4277219B
Connecting the Digital Backplane and the RF Detector Preamp Card
1. Locate the cable from the RF Detector Preamp card in the side compartment of the
Diluter and route the cable through the opening at the base of the Analyzer. See
Figure 3.4-6.
? Reword this section
ATTENTION: The following steps are critical to obtaining the lowest possible noise level on the
RF channel: coiling the RF Detector Preamp card cable into three turns (the preferable
number when using ferrites), starting the turns with the RF Detector Preamp end of the cable
on the inside, and attaching ferrites.
2. Remove the ferrites (but leave the wire ties in place) and route the cable from the RF
Detector Preamp card as shown in Figure 3.4-6.
3. Attach the cable to J24 on the digital backplane.
Figure 3.4-6 Connecting the Cable from the RF Detector Preamp Card to the Digital Backplane
W ir e tie
F e r r ite s
W ir e tie
Cable must be coiled with three turns and

placed horizontally as shown.
From RF Detector
Preamp card, J73
RF Detector
Preamp card 6498157B
PN 4277219B 3.4-5
Connecting the Digital Backplane and the RS/Opto Intfc Card

1. Locate the two cables in the Analyzer attached to the digital backplane, undo the wire
ties, and route the cables through the opening at the base of the Analyzer to the RS/Opto
Intfc card. See Figure 3.4-7.
Figure 3.4-7 Connecting the Cables from the Digital Backplane to the RS/Opto Intfc Card on the GEN•S
System
DIGITAL
BACKPLANE
J27
J27
SYSTEM J24
INTFC J27
J19
P19 RS/OPTO
INTERFACE
CARD J6
J26 P24
RF DETECTOR
J24 J24 J19 PREAMP CARD
DC/RF J19 J73
SIGNAL IBUS
P27 RS/OPTO
INTERFACE
CARD J2 7253009A
2. Attach the cables from the digital backplane to the following connectors on the RS/Opto
Intfc card.
Cable Connects to
IBUS cable from the digital backplane, J19 RS/Opto Intfc card, J6
SBUS cable from the digital backplane, J27 RS/Opto Intfc card, J2
3. In the left and right Diluter compartments, reinstall the plastic shields.
3.4-6 PN 4277219B
Connecting the Workstation to the Analytical Station
1. At the rear of the Diluter, locate the Analytical Station cable. See Figure 3.4-8.
2. Attach the cable to the appropriate instrument connector on the Workstation interface
cable. See Figure 3.4-8.
Figure 3.4-8 Connecting the Workstation to the Diluter on the GEN•S System
RS/Opto
Interface
card
J3
Workstation
interface cable
Instrument
connector
Analytical Station to
Workstation cable 6498041B
PN 4277219B 3.4-7
3.4-8 PN 4277219B
CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE GEN•S SYSTEM 3
3.5 CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE GEN•S SYSTEM
Connecting the Pneumatic Lines
Attach the pneumatic lines to the Power Supply and connect the other ends to the Diluter as
Figure 3.5-1 Installing the Pneumatic Lines on the GEN•S System
VAC
30 PSI 5 PSI
CBC RETIC RETIC PAK PAK

LYSE LYSE STAIN PRESERVE LYSE CLEANER DILUENT
30 PSI
5 PSI
VAC
6498074B
Power Supply
Installing the Pickup Tubes and the Reagent Lines
CAUTION Placing reagent containers above the reagent input lines on the Diluter can cause siphoning of
the reagents and priming problems. Never place a reagent container above the reagent input lines on the
back of the Diluter.
IMPORTANT Placing the Retic Pak and SCATTER PAK lytic reagent containers below the reagent input lines
on the Diluter can affect reagent flow, causing erroneous results. Always place the Retic Pak and SCATTER
PAK lytic reagent containers on the same tabletop level as the Diluter.
PN 4277219B 3.5-1
CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE GEN•S SYSTEM
ATTENTION: For the pickup tube part numbers, see Table 8.2-28.
1. Install the CBC lytic reagent, diff lytic reagent, diff preservative, retic stain and retic
clearing solution lines and pickup tubes as shown in Figure 3.5-2.
Figure 3.5-2 Connecting Reagent Lines for the CBC Lyse, Retic Pak and SCATTER PAK® Lytic Reagent on
the GEN•S System
CBC
LYSE RETIC
CLEAR RETIC
STAIN PAK
PRESERVE
PAK
LYSE
PAK
LYSE
PAK
PRESERVE
BACK OF
DILUTER
CBC
LYSE
RETIC
PAK
SCATTER
PAK 6498158B
ATTENTION: If this customer does a high volume of testing and wants to reduce the frequency
of diluent container replacements, you can connect two diluent containers in parallel to the
Analytical Station. The part number for the GEN•S Dual Diluent Pickup Tube kit is in
Table 8.1-7. The kit contains the instructions for making the connections.
3.5-2 PN 4277219B
CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE GEN•S SYSTEM 3
2. Install the diluent and cleaning agent lines and pickup tubes as shown in Figure 3.5-3.
3. Connect the level sensor cable on the diluent pickup tube to the diluent level sensor
cable at the back of the instrument. See Figure 3.5-3.
Figure 3.5-3 Connecting the Diluent, Cleaning Agent, and Waste Line on the GEN•S System
Waste
level
sensor WASTE
DILUENT
CLEANER
To waste container
Waste
level
sensor
bypass
Diluent level
sensor cable
To drain line
Diluent
Back of Waste
Diluter Cleaning
agent 6498095B
4. Install the waste line as shown in Figure 3.5-3. Drain lines 2.4 m (8 ft) and 3.7 m (12 ft)
are provided.
Note: If connecting the waste line to an open drain instead of a waste container:
r Install a bypass jumper (P35) on the waste level sense connector.
r Mechanically secure the waste tube in the drain so the tube cannot accidentally
come out of the drain. This prevents spillage.
PN 4277219B 3.5-3
CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE GEN•S SYSTEM
3.5-4 PN 4277219B
SETTING UP THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION 3
3.6 SETTING UP THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION
Setting Up the Power Supply
1. Remove the Power Supply cover as directed under Heading 4.13.
2. Remove the shipping brackets from the compressor. See Figure 3.6-1.
Figure 3.6-1 Removing Power Supply Shipping Brackets
1
Remove
shipping
brackets
6498077A
2
3. Reinstall the Power Supply cover.
PN 4277219B 3.6-1
SETTING UP THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION
4. Ensure the Power Supply air filter is installed correctly. See Figure 3.6-2.
Figure 3.6-2 Location of Power Supply Air Filter
6498078B
5. Ensure the plug installed on the main ac power cable is the correct one needed for the ac
wall outlet.
CAUTION Electronic damage. Checking electronic components with the power on could damage the
electronic components. Do not connect the instrument to the main power source until you are instructed to
do so.
6. Connect the main ac power cable to the Power Supply, but DO NOT plug the cable into
the ac wall outlet now. See Figure 3.6-3.
3.6-2 PN 4277219B
Figure 3.6-3 Connecting Main ac Power Cable to Power Supply
Main ac
power
cable
6 4 9 8 0 7 9 B
Setting Up the GEN•S System Diluter

1. Remove the cardboard and foam shipping inserts from the Diluter front panels. See
Figure 3.6-4.
Figure 3.6-4 Removing GEN•S System Diluter Shipping Inserts
Remove
7253016A shipping
insert
PN 4277219B 3.6-3
2. Using Figure 3.6-5 as a guide, remove the BSV spacers.
Figure 3.6-5 Removing the Spacers from the BSV on the GEN•S System
Loosen
knob.
Do not
remove.
7253038A
3. Tighten the BSV knob.
3.6-4 PN 4277219B
4. Remove the plastic film and the shipping screws from the TTM and then pull out the
shipping inserts as shown in Figure 3.6-6.
Figure 3.6-6 Removing the Shipping Insert from the TTM on the GEN•S System
S m a ll
T O P V IE W o n e h e re
2
1
L a rg e o n e h e re
R e m o v e s h ip p in g s c r e w s R e m o v e s h ip p in g in s e r ts
6 4 9 8 2 2 0 B
PN 4277219B 3.6-5
5. Check the pinch valves:

a. Remove the red pinch valve deactivator clips..
Note: The pinch valve deactivator clips listed in Table 3.6-1 are not conspicuous.
Ensure that they are removed.
b. Inspect the I-beam tubing to ensure it is threaded properly.
Table 3.6-1 Pinch Valves with Inconspicuous Deactivator Clips on the GEN•S System
Diluter Location Pinch Valves
Left front panel VL98

Center front panel VL4 (under Hgb module)
Rear of center panel VL14B
Diff module VL48B (under mixing chamber)
Retic module VL80, VL97B (under mixing chambers)
6. Check the needle assembly:

a. Remove the red safety clip from the needle.
b. Ensure the needle cartridge is installed correctly. See Figure 3.6-7.
Figure 3.6-7 Checking Needle Cartridge Installation on the GEN•S System
6498159B
3.6-6 PN 4277219B
7. Check the cassette transport mechanism.
a. Manually rock the rocker bed, ensuring it moves back and forth freely without
contacting cables or wires. See Figure 3.6-8.
b. Ensure the bed position sensor is not bent and the spring is attached as shown in
Figure 3.6-8.
Figure 3.6-8 Checking Rocker Bed Movement and Bed Position Sensor Condition on the GEN•S System
BED POSITION
SENSOR FLAG
SPRING
7253035A
PN 4277219B 3.6-7
c. Ensure the rocker bed does not move from side to side. See Figure 3.6-9.
d. Ensure the left and right lift covers are flush with the elevator pads as shown in
Figure 3.6-9.
e. Push the stripper plate in and out, ensuring it moves freely. See Figure 3.6-9.
Figure 3.6-9 Checking Lift Cover Alignment and Stripper Plate Movement on the GEN•S System
ALIGN
7253024A
3.6-8 PN 4277219B
Setting Up the Analyzer
ATTENTION: DO NOT remove the circuit cards to check the seating.
1. Ensure that all the Analyzer cards are properly fastened, the white tabs are flush and the
thumbscrews are secure.
ATTENTION: When configuring the instrument during installation, always set the switches for
an instrument without a SlideMaker. Even if you plan on installing a SlideMaker as part of the
instrument, you must install and test the instrument without a SlideMaker first.
2. Change the System Configuration as necessary by setting the DIP switches on the AMC,
the COMM INTERFACE card, and the DILUTER PROCESSOR card. See Figure 3.6-10
for the card locations.
r See Figure A.2-1 and Tables A.2-1 and A.2-2 for the AMC DIP switch’s location and
settings.
r See Figure A.2-4 and Tables A.2-7 and A.2-8 for the COMM INTERFACE card DIP
switches’ locations and settings.
r See Figure A.2-8 and Table A.2-12 for the DILUTER PROCESSOR card DIP switch’s
location and settings.
Figure 3.6-10 AMC, COMM INTERFACE Card, and DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Locations, GEN•S System
THUMBSCREWS WHITE TABS AMC COMM INTERFACE
CARD
J27
J26
J24 J19
7253049B
DILUTER
PROCESSOR CARD
PN 4277219B 3.6-9
3.6-10 PN 4277219B
CHECKING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION 3
3.7 CHECKING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION
Power Up Checks
main ac power cable. Do not use an extension cord. Plug the main ac power cable from the Power Supply
directly into a dedicated wall outlet.
1. Plug the main ac power cable for the Power Supply into the dedicated wall outlet.
2. Turn on the MAIN POWER circuit breaker. See Figure 3.7-1.
Figure 3.7-1 Supplying ac Input to the Analytical Station on the GEN•S System
5 PSI 30 PSI 60 PSI

MAIN
ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST
POWER
F3
SE
1/16A
FU
250 V
+ - + - 0
0
F
N ON
PU
F
US
IN IN LT
O ADJ
L
CREASE CREASE
O N
6 4 9 8 0 8 0 B
3. Press POWER ON, then check the indicators on the Power Supply. See Figure 3.7-2.
a. Ensure the AC status indicator LED is green, indicating the AC LINE value on the
display is within acceptable limits.
b. Ensure the status indicator LEDs on the Power Supply display are green.
c. Ensure the 60 PSI, 30 PSI, 5 PSI and VACUUM readings are within the specifications
listed in Table A.1-13. Adjust the pressure regulators, if necessary.
PN 4277219B 3.7-1
CHECKING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION
Figure 3.7-2 Power On Checks on the GEN•S System

1 Turn on the Analytical Station
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
CE 0 .
P O W E R
O N
P R IM E
A P E R T
D R A IN R IN S E
C L E A R
A P E R T
S T A R T /
C O N T F ID
P O W E R
O F F
S T A R T
U P
S H U T
D O W N
A L A R M
S E T
P R E M IX S T O P E N T E R
Press
Within specifications ?
2 Check Power Supply
TEMP
60 30.0 5.0 28 115 DC
Status Status
indicators indicators
green ? green ?
5 PSI 30 PSI 60 PSI MAIN

ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST POWER
+ - + - 0
0
F
N ON
IN F
IN IN CREASE
CREASE CREASE
6498040A
Regulators
Analyzer Checks
Adjusting the Analyzer Display and Accessing the Revision Levels

1. Verify the SYSTEM STATUS message on the Analyzer screen is READY.
2. Press the Analyzer reset button and record the software revision level displayed on the
Analyzer (CRT) screen for the installation report. See Figure 3.7-3.
3. Verify the SYSTEM STATUS message returns to READY.
4. Press the Analyzer reset button again and note the software revision level displayed on
the Diluter (LCD) display.
5. At the Workstation, from any customer application except Run Configuration select
Help tt About and note the software revision level displayed.
3.7-2 PN 4277219B
CHECKING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION 3
6. Verify the GEN•S System Analytical Station and Workstation software revisions are a
released combination. Refer to Table A.9-1.
7. If the software combination is not released, install a currently released combination.
Figure 3.7-3 Accessing the Revision Levels on the GEN•S System
RESET
BUTTON
SYSTEM RUN
10/10/95
12:30:18
COPYRIGHT 1995-96
COULTER CORPORATION
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
STATUS: VERSION ???

TEST MODE
ALERT:
MODE: C/D/R ASPIRATIONS / TUBE O1
BLOOD DETECT: ON MAIN MENU
7253015A
Selecting the Analyzer Menu Settings

Note: For a complete summary of the Analyzer menu selections on the GEN•S System, see
Figure A.10-1.
1. Select the desired date format option:

a. From the Analyzer MAIN MENU, select ANALYZER FUNCTIONS tt DATE AND
TIME tt FORMAT.
b. Switch to the desired date format option.
2. Enter the current date and time:
a. From the DATE & TIME menu, select SET DATE & TIME.
b. Using the Diluter keypad, enter the correct information, then select MAIN MENU.
3. If the customer uses Interleaved 2-of-5 bar-code tube labels, enter the correct number of
digits for the labels:
a. From the MAIN MENU, select SYSTEM CONFIGURATION tt NUMBER OF BAR
CODE DIGITS (2 OF 5) to XX.
b. Using the Diluter keypad, enter the number of digits on the label.
4. Ensure the Diluter alarms are enabled:
a. From the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION menu, select ALARM SET UP.
b. Enable all the alarms, then select MAIN MENU.
PN 4277219B 3.7-3
CHECKING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION
5. Access the Analyzer SERVICE MENU. See Heading 4.2 for directions.
6. Set the MANUAL HGB TIMER DRAIN option to 15:
a. From the SERVICE MENU, select DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES tt MORE
b. Using the Diluter keypad, set the number to 15.
7. Select SERVICE MENU tt SYSTEM RUN to return to the SYSTEM RUN menu.
Entering System Serial Numbers and Revisions at the Workstation
1. At the Workstation Command Center, select tt to access the System

Setup - Communications screen.
2. Type in the serial numbers and revisions levels for the Analyzer, Diluter, and Power
Supply.
3. Select GEN•S Workstation and type in the system serial numbers for the monitor and PC.
4. When finished, log off.
3.7-4 PN 4277219B
TESTING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND WORKSTATION 3
3.8 TESTING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND WORKSTATION
Reagent Cycles
Priming Cycles
1. At the Diluter, use the F31 function to prime the reagent reservoirs.
2. Use the F67 function to prime the reagent lines.
3. On the Diluter keypad, press SHUTDOWN to prime the cleaning agent.
4. After the Shutdown cycle is finished, verify the instrument condition is as shown in
Figure 3.8-1.
Figure 3.8-1 GEN•S System Condition after Shutdown Cycle

TM G E N S No Display
COMPRESSOR OFF
POWER
TM
TURBO
RESET
GEN• S
TEMP
00 0.00 0.0 00 000 DC
30 PSI, 5 PSI
and VACUUM
readouts » 0
7 2 1 9 0 3 7 B
C le a n in g a g e n t
5. Use the F17 function to prime the cleaning agent pump.

6. Press STARTUP to prime the system with diluent.
Startup Cycle
1. On the Diluter keypad, press STARTUP.
2. On the Workstation screen, select tt .
PN 4277219B 3.8-1
TESTING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND WORKSTATION
3. After the Startup cycle is finished, verify:

a. The instrument condition is as shown in Figure 3.8-2.
b. The results displayed on the Quality Assurance [Daily Checks] screen passed and
the Startup Test Details screen are within the specifications listed in Table A.1-10.
Figure 3.8-2 GEN•S System Condition after Startup Cycle

TM G E N S R E A D Y
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95 0000
COULTER CORPORATION
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
BP CBC DIFF RETICS
POWER
TM
TURBO
RESET
GEN• S
W ith in lim its

TEMP
60 30.1 4.9 28 115 DC
TM
®
GEN S
N o c le a n in g a g e n t
W ith in s p e c ific a tio n s ?
7 2 1 9 0 3 8 B
3.8-2 PN 4277219B
TESTING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND WORKSTATION 3
System Verification
Do the System Verification Procedure (SVP) and record the results as directed under
Heading 5.1.
Whole Blood Verification

Do the Whole Blood Verification procedure as directed under Heading 5.4.
SlideMaker Installation
If the instrument you are installing was shipped with a SlideMaker, install the SlideMaker
now. Follow the directions in Chapter 3 of the Slide Making Modules Service Manual.
SlideStainer Installation
If the instrument you are installing was shipped with a SlideStainer, install the SlideStainer
now. Follow the directions in Chapter 3 of the Slide Staining Modules Service Manual.
Report Completion
System Installation Report

Complete the System Installation Report form as directed under Heading 4.61.
Instrument Reference Report Form

Complete the Instrument Reference Report form as directed under Heading 4.61.
Service Call Report

Complete any Service Call forms required by your country’s procedure.
PN 4277219B 3.8-3
TESTING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND WORKSTATION
3.8-4 PN 4277219B
GEN•S SYSTEM AND GEN•S CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST 3
3.9 GEN•S SYSTEM AND GEN•S CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST
You can use this checklist after you are familiar with the installation procedure.
1. Unpack, set up, and check the Workstation.

2. Unpack and position the Analytical Station.
3. Secure the Analyzer to the Diluter.
4. Install the instrument cables:
a. Connect the dc power cable from the Analyzer to J4 on the Power Supply.
(Figure 3.4-1)
b. Attach the IBUS cable connector P5 to J5 on the Power Supply. (Figure 3.4-2)
c. Connect the coaxial cables to their respective Pre-Amp cards. (Figure 3.4-4)
d. Connect the backplane voltage bus cables P1 to J1 on the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics
Power Supply card, P3 to J3 on the Diluter 4 card, P4 to J4 on the Diff Power Supply
card and P7 to J7 on the Diluter 1 card. (Figure 3.4-5)
e. Connect the Diluter cables P24, P27, P19 to J24, J27, and J19 respectively, on the
digital backplane. (Figures 3.4-6 and 3.4-7)
Note: Always connect P24/J24 first, as you need maximum space to route the coiled
cable through the opening into the Analyzer.
f. Connect the Analytical Station-to-Workstation cable from the Diluter to the
appropriate instrument connector on the Workstation interface cable.(Figure 3.4-8)
5. Attach the pneumatic lines to the Power Supply and to the Diluter. (Figure 3.5-1)
6. Install the reagent lines, waste line, and pickup tubes. (Figures 3.5-2 and 3.5-3)
7. Set up the Power Supply:
a. Remove the shipping brackets from the compressor. (Figure 3.6-1)
b. Ensure the Power Supply air filter is installed correctly. (Figure 3.6-2)
c. Connect the main ac power cable to the Power Supply, but do not plug it into the
outlet. (Figure 3.6-3)
8. Set up the Diluter:
a. Remove the shipping inserts from the Diluter. (Figure 3.6-4)
b. Remove the BSV spacers. (Figure 3.6-5)
c. Remove the shipping screws and shipping insert from the TTM. (Figure 3.6-6)
d. Remove the red pinch valve deactivator clips.
e. Ensure the needle cartridge is installed correctly and the safety clip is removed.
(Figure 3.6-7)
f. Check the cassette transport mechanism manually to ensure the following -
r The rocker bed rocks freely without contacting cables or wires. (Figure 3.6-8)
r The bed position sensor is not bent and the spring is attached. (Figure 3.6-8)
r The rocker bed does not move from side to side. (Figure 3.6-9)
r The left and right lift covers are flush with the elevator pads. (Figure 3.6-9)
r The stripper plate moves in and out freely. (Figure 3.6-7)
PN 4277219B 3.9-1
GEN•S SYSTEM AND GEN•S CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST
9. Set up the Analyzer:

a. Ensure that all the Analyzer cards are properly seated and fastened.
b. Change the System Configuration as necessary. (Tables A.2-1, A.2-2, A.2-7, A.2-8,
and A.2-12)
10. Check the Analytical Station:
a. Plug the main ac power cable into the ac wall outlet.
b. Power up the System. At the Power Supply, verify the ac input reading is acceptable
and the pneumatic gauge readings (Table A.1-13) are within tolerance. Adjust the
pressures as necessary.
c. Reset the Analyzer and record the revision levels on the Installation Report.
d. At the Analyzer -
r Set the date and time format and enter the date and time.
r Set the number of bar-code digits for the Interleaved 2-of-5 labels in use.
r Set the manual Hgb timer drain to 15.
e. At the Workstation, type in the serial numbers and revisions levels for the Analyzer,
Diluter, and Power Supply and the serial numbers for the monitor and PC.
11. Test the Analytical Station and the Workstation:
a. Prime the reagents using the following functions in this order: F31, F67,
SHUTDOWN, F17 and STARTUP.
b. Do a startup cycle and ensure the displayed results are within specifications.
c. Do the following verification procedures -
1) System Verification (Heading 5.1)
2) Whole Blood Verification. (Heading 5.4)
12. If a SlideMaker was shipped as part of the instrument, install the SlideMaker. Follow the
instructions in Chapter 3 of the Slide Making Modules Service Manual.
13. If a SlideStainer was shipped as part of the instrument, install the SlideStainer. Follow the
instructions in Chapter 3 of the Slide Staining Modules Service Manual.
14. Fill out the Installation Report Form, GEN•S Reference Report, SVP Report and any
Service Call Report forms. (Heading 4.61)
3.9-2 PN 4277219B
LH 750 SYSTEM PREINSTALLATION CHECKLIST 3
3.10 LH 750 SYSTEM PREINSTALLATION CHECKLIST

Before you install the instrument, verify the following conditions are met. Report any
discrepancies on the Installation Report.
Operator Training
c An operator is trained or is scheduled to be trained within the next two weeks.
Carton Arrival and Condition

c All the cartons on the shipping list have arrived.
c All the cartons are intact and undamaged. If any cartons are damaged, confirm that a
claim was filed with the carrier.
Instrument Site
Space and Accessibility

c The designated instrument area is easily accessible for maintaining and servicing the
instrument, such as an island or a movable table.
c The space is sufficient for the individual units. The dimensions and requirements for
accessibility and ventilation are shown in Figures 3.10-1, 3.10-2, and 3.10-3.
Figure 3.10-1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the LH 750 System without SlideMaker
C L E A R A N C E
2 5 .4 c m ( 1 0 in .) 3 8 c m ( 1 5 in .)
4 4 .5 c m
( 1 7 .5 in .)
0 4 /3 0 /9 6 I
8 8 .9 c m
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
II
III
IV
V
VII
M A IN M E N U
( 3 5 in .)
N
7 8 9 T
E
C E 0 . R
3 0 c m ( 1 2 in .) 4 7 c m
( 1 8 .5 in .)
C L E A R A N C E
M u ltiS y n c L C D 1 7 0 0 m +
1 0 1 .6 c m ( 4 0 in .) 4 5 .7 c m ( 1 8 in .)
6 1 c m 4 5 .7 c m
( 2 4 in .) ( 1 8 in .)
2 5 c m ( 1 0 in .) 2 5 c m ( 1 0 in .)
C L E A R A N C E C L E A R A N C E
4 3 .1 c m
6 3 .5 c m ( 1 7 in .) 1 5 c m
( 2 5 in .) ( 6 in .)
6 6 c m
3 8 .1 c m ( 2 6 in .) 5 5 .9 c m
( 1 5 in .) ( 2 2 in .)
0 0 0 7 1 6 1 A
PN 4277219B 3.10-1
LH 750 SYSTEM PREINSTALLATION CHECKLIST
Figure 3.10-2 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the LH 750 System with SlideMaker
3 3 c m ( 1 3 in .)
C L E A R A N C E
2 5 .4 c m ( 1 0 in .) 3 8 c m ( 1 5 in .)
4 4 .5 c m
6 8 .6 c m ( 1 7 .5 in .)
( 2 7 in .)
0 4 /3 0 /9 6 I
8 8 .9 c m
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
II
III
4 5 .7 c m
C L E A R A N C E
IV
V
VII
M A IN M E N U
( 3 5 in .)
( 1 8 in .)
N
7 8 9 T
E
C E 0 . R
3 0 c m ( 1 2 in .) 4 7 c m
( 1 8 .5 in .)
5 0 .2 c m C L E A R A N C E
( 1 9 .7 5 in .)
C L E A R A N C E
1 2 .7 c m
( 5 in .) 7 4 .9 c m ( 2 9 .5 in .) 1 0 1 .6 c m ( 4 0 in .) 4 5 .7 c m ( 1 8 in .)
6 1 c m 4 5 .7 c m
( 2 4 in .) ( 1 8 in .)
2 5 c m ( 1 0 in .) 2 5 c m ( 1 0 in .)
4 3 .1 c m
6 3 .5 c m ( 1 7 in .) 1 5 c m
( 2 5 in .) ( 6 in .)
6 6 c m
3 8 .1 c m ( 2 6 in .) 5 5 .9 c m
( 1 5 in .) ( 2 2 in .)
Figure 3.10-3 Space and Accessibility Requirements for the LH 750 System
3 3 c m ( 1 3 in .)
2 7 .9 c m ( 1 1 in .)
C L E A R A N C E
2 5 .4 c m ( 1 0 in .) 3 8 c m ( 1 5 in .)
C
C
4 4 .5 c m
L
E L ( 1 7 .5 in .)
E
A 6 8 .6 c m A
3 0 c m ( 1 3 in .) R 7 6 .2 c m
( 2 7 in .) R 8 8 .9 c m
0 4 /3 0 /9 6 I
A
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
II
( 3 0 in .)
III
A
IV
N
V
4 5 .7 c m
( 3 5 in .)
VII
N
M A IN M E N U
C
C
( 1 8 in .)
F 1 2 3 ID
E
S T A R T U P P O W E R O N
N
7 8 9 T
E
E
C E 0 . R
3 0 c m ( 1 2 in .) 4 7 c m
5 0 .2 c m ( 1 8 .5 in .)
C L E A R A N C E
( 1 9 .7 5 in .) 5 0 .2 c m M u ltiS y n c L C D 1 7 0 0 m +
( 1 9 .7 5 in .)
C L E A R A N C E
2 5 .4 c m
( 1 0 in .) 6 0 .3 c m ( 2 3 .7 5 in .) 7 4 .9 c m ( 2 9 .5 in .) 1 0 1 .6 c m ( 4 0 in .) 4 5 .7 c m ( 1 8 in .)
6 1 c m 4 5 .7 c m
( 2 4 in .) ( 1 8 in .)
2 5 c m ( 1 0 in .) 2 5 c m ( 1 0 in .)
4 3 .1 c m
6 3 .5 c m ( 1 7 in .)
( 2 5 in .) 1 5 c m
( 6 in .)
6 6 c m
3 8 .1 c m ( 2 6 in .) 5 5 .9 c m
( 1 5 in .) ( 2 2 in .)
3.10-2 PN 4277219B
Ventilation
c The fans are not obstructed. See Figure 3.10-4 for the location of the fans.
Figure 3.10-4 Location of Fans on the LH 750 System

Exhaust fans
Exhaust
fan Vent
ANALYZER
Exhaust fan
F U L L R A N G E
Workstation
W A R N IN G
Power
Supply
Vent
6 4 9 8 1 6 0 B
Intake vent
(On botton of Power Supply)
Remote Communication System (RCS) Requirement

c A single-line, nonmultiplexed analog phone line is installed for RCS connection.
Electrical Requirements
main ac power cable. Designate an area for the Power Supply close enough to an electrical outlet that an
extension cord is not needed.
c The female ac outlet for the main Power Supply is within 3 m (10 ft) of the area
designated for the instrument. See Figure 3.10-5.
PN 4277219B 3.10-3
Figure 3.10-5 Main Power and Drain Line Length Requirement for the LH 750 System
WASTE
LINE
Max
3.7 m
WASTE (12 ft)
LINE
Max
3m
(10 ft)
Max DRAIN
76 cm (30 in.)
7253037A
c The main ac outlet is a three-wire outlet supplying a 90 to 264 Vac, 47 to 63 Hz, 860 W,
single-phase input power.
c The ground is a confirmed third-wire earth ground that can carry the full current of the
circuit.
c The circuit is independent and protected.
Drainage
c If the waste from the instrument will drain into an open drain instead of a waste
container, the drain is chemically resistant and is appropriate for biohazardous waste.
c The drain or waste container is less than 76 cm (30 in.) above the floor and is within
3.7 m (12 ft) of the area designated for the Diluter. Refer to Figure 3.10-5.
c The drain or waste container is located so that the waste drain tubing is always below the
waste fitting at the base of the Diluter.
Ambient Temperature and Humidity

c The typical ambient room temperature is 16 to 32°C (60 to 90°F) and stable.
Note: If the area is air conditioned, an additional 5,000 Btu will compensate for the heat
generated by the system.
c The humidity is consistently less than 95% with no condensation.
3.10-4 PN 4277219B
Altitude
c If the altitude is greater than 2,134 m (7,000 ft) above sea level, locate the custom tubing
between FF5 and FF20 (see Figure 3.10-6), and replace it with 18 in. of the clear
polyurethane tubing designated in the master parts list, Table 8.1-2, for use on
instruments installed at high altitudes.
Figure 3.10-6 Backwash Tank Custom Tubing on the LH 750 System

F F 5
C u s to m
tu b in g
F F 2 0
6 4 9 8 1 7 2 B
Earthquake-Prone Regions
c If the instrument is located in an area prone to earthquakes, order the Earthquake
Tie-Down Kit to secure the Analytical Station to the workbench. For the part number of
the Earthquake Tie-Down Kit, see Hardware in the master parts list, Table 8.1-2.
Installation Supplies
c The instrument reagents, calibrators and controls are available and within expiration
limits.
c The paper supplies and blood collection tubes are available. Refer to the Appendix in the
Operator’s Guide for a list of blood collection tubes that can be used on the instrument.
PN 4277219B 3.10-5
3.10-6 PN 4277219B
UNPACKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION 3
3.11 UNPACKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION
Tools/Supplies Needed for Installing the Analytical Station
B Side cutters
B Two wrenches for removing strapping
B 5/32-in. Allen wrench for Power Supply
B 5C cell control - 3 levels
B Retic-C cell control - 3 levels
B LATRON primer and control
Opening the Cartons

ATTENTION: As you install the instrument, log any problems or discrepancies on the
Installation Report form.
WARNING Personal injury. The cut edges of the metal strapping are sharp and will cut. Be careful when
removing the strapping.
Carefully remove the strapping from the cartons.
Note: If you use two crescent wrenches to hold the strapping as shown in Figure 3.11-1 and
rotate the wrenches toward each other simultaneously, the strapping snaps easily and the
loose ends are held securely by the wrenches.
Figure 3.11-1 Removing the Strapping from the Shipping Cartons
7253007A
PN 4277219B 3.11-1
UNPACKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION
Unpacking and Setting Up the Power Supply

1. Unpack the Power Supply, making sure it is intact with no visible defective parts.
2. Remove the Power Supply cover as directed under Heading 4.13.
3. Remove the shipping brackets from the compressor. See Figure 3.11-2.
Figure 3.11-2 Removing Power Supply Shipping Brackets
1
Remove
shipping
brackets
6498077A
2
3.11-2 PN 4277219B
5. Ensure the Power Supply air filter is installed correctly. See Figure 3.11-3.
Figure 3.11-3 Location of Power Supply Air Filter
6498078B
6. Ensure the plug installed on the main ac power cable is the correct one needed for the ac
wall outlet.
CAUTION Electronic damage. Checking electronic components with the power on could damage the
electronic components. Do not connect the instrument to the main power source until you are instructed to
do so.
7. Connect the main ac power cable to the Power Supply, but DO NOT plug the cable into
the ac wall outlet now. See Figure 3.11-4.
PN 4277219B 3.11-3
Figure 3.11-4 Connecting Main ac Power Cable to Power Supply
Main ac
power
cable
6 4 9 8 0 7 9 B
8. Position the Power Supply in its designated location as shown in Figure 3.11-5.
Note: Figure 3.11-5 shows an ideal layout of components. If you need to change this
layout to accomodate the laboratory, be sure to maintain the clearances for ventilation
and access shown in Figures 3.10-1, 3.10-2, and 3.10-3.
Figure 3.11-5 Main Components Layout for the LH 750 System

A n a ly tic a l S ta tio n
* S Y S T E M R U N *
0 4 /3 0 /9 6 I
A n a ly z e r
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
I I
I I I
I V
V
W o r k s ta tio n
A L E R T : T E S T M O D E V I
V I I
M A IN M E N U
B L O O D D E T E C T : O N V I I I
N
7 8 9 T
E
C E 0 . R
D ilu te r
GEN• S
PPNEU
N E U 660
0 PSI
P S I 330
0 PSI
P S I 55 PSI
P S I VACUUM AAC
C LLINE
IN E AAC
C
TTEMP
E M P
6600 330.0
0 . 0 44.9
. 9 2288 1115
1 5 DDC
C
P o w e r
S u p p ly
6 4 9 8 1 1 7 B
3.11-4 PN 4277219B
Unpacking the Diluter
1. Unpack the Diluter, making sure it is intact with no visible defective parts.
Note: Do not remove any shipping inserts at this time.
2. Position the Diluter in its designated area. See Figure 3.11-5 for the relative position of
the main components.
3. Loosen the screws securing the left and right Analytical Station columns to the Diluter
and pull the columns off as shown in Figure 3.11-6.
Note: Removing the columns makes it easier to position the Analyzer.
Figure 3.11-6 Removing the Left and Right Analytical Station Columns
2
2
L o o s e n
1 s c re w s
6 4 9 8 2 3 3 B
Unpacking the Analyzer

ATTENTION: The Analyzer is shipped with its front door strapped closed. The strapping is there
to prevent the front door from swinging open while you move the Analyzer. Do not remove
the strapping until the Analyzer is in position on top of the Diluter.
1. Unpack the Analyzer, making sure it is intact with no visible defective parts.
2. Position the Analyzer on top of the Diluter.
3. Remove the strapping from the Analyzer and open the front door.
4. Remove the right cover plate and set it aside.
Note: Removing the cover plate makes it easier to access the captive screw securing the
right side door of the Analyzer.
5. Open the side doors of the Analyzer (see Figure 3.11-7) and the rear door to access the
Analyzer to Diluter securing screws.
6. Fasten the five Analyzer captive screws shown in Figure 3.11-8, securing the Analyzer to
the Diluter.
7. Leave the Analyzer doors open.
PN 4277219B 3.11-5
Figure 3.11-7 Opening Analyzer Side Doors on the LH 750 System
1 1
Unfasten Unfasten
captive screw captive screw
2 6498161B
Figure 3.11-8 Analyzer Captive Lock-Down Screws on the LH 750 System
6 4 9 8 1 6 2 B
3.11-6 PN 4277219B
INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM 3
3.12 INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM
CAUTION Electronic damage. Attaching electronic cables with the power on could damage the electronic
components. Do not connect the instrument to the main power source until you are instructed to do so.
WARNING Electric shock. Routing and attaching electronic cables with the power on could result in injury
from an electric shock. Do not connect the instrument to the main power source until you are instructed to
do so.
Accessing the Connections

1. Open the Diluter doors. The side Diluter doors are secured by a captive screw on the top
of the door as shown in Figure 3.12-1.
Figure 3.12-1 Opening the Diluter Side Doors
6498194B 2 U n fa s te n
2. In the left and right Diluter compartments, remove the plastic shields.
Note: The left compartment shield is attached to a standoff on the Diluter 3 card. The
right compartment shield is attached by a plastic screw to the Laser Power Supply.
PN 4277219B 3.12-1
INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM
Connecting the dc Power Cable

1. Cut the tie wrap securing the dc power cable and route the connector end of the cable
from the Analyzer through the opening to the Diluter. See Figure 3.12-2.
Figure 3.12-2 Connecting the Main Power Cable on the LH 750 System
P 4
J 4
6 4 9 8 2 2 1 B P o w e r S u p p ly
2. Unscrew the cover plate at the rear of the Diluter and feed the connector through the
opening.
3. Secure the cable in the cable clamps in the Diluter and Analyzer.
4. Attach the dc power cable connector, P4, to J4 on the Power Supply.
3.12-2 PN 4277219B
Connecting the IBUS Cable
1. Locate the IBUS cable at the rear of the Diluter and remove the bubble wrap and all the
tie wraps except the tie wrap holding the ground wire to the IBUS cable.
2. Attach the cable connector, P5, to J5 on the Power Supply. See Figure 3.12-3.
3. Reinstall the cover plate on the rght rear corner of the Diluter and attach the shield
grounds for the dc power cable and the IBUS cable to the screw on the cover plate as
Figure 3.12-3 Connecting the IBUS Cable on the LH 750 System
C o v e r p la te
s c re w
S h ie ld
g ro u n d
IB U S
M a in
p o w e r
J 5
P 5
6 4 9 8 2 2 2 B P o w e r S u p p ly
PN 4277219B 3.12-3
Connecting the Analyzer to Preamp Cable

1. Remove the bubble wrap from the Analyzer to preamp cable and route the cable from the
R/W/P SC/A card through the opening in the left side of the Analyzer to the Diluter as
2. Connect the cable to the Six-Channel Preamp card. See Figure 3.12-4.
Figure 3.12-4 Routing the Analyzer to Preamp Cable on the LH 750 System
S C /A
C A R D
6 4 9 8 1 8 8 B
3.12-4 PN 4277219B
Connecting the Backplane Voltage Bus
1. Locate the power cables on the backplane voltage bus, remove the tie wraps, and route
the power cables from the backplane voltage bus through the openings to the Diluter.
Note: Route the cables to the cards on the right Diluter door through the top wire tie
securing the ribbon cable.
2. Using Figure 3.12-5 as a guide, connect the cables to their respective cards as follows:
Connector on Voltage Bus Connects to

P1 J1 on Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card
P3 J3 on Diluter 4 card (remove the card cover to
connect cable)
P4 J4 on Diff Power Supply card
P4 ground Mounting screw on Diff Power Supply card
P7 J7 Diluter 1 card
3. Secure the cable to the Diluter 4 card in the cable clamps on the top of the Diluter
compartment and on the left rear door.
Figure 3.12-5 Connecting the Backplane Voltage Bus on the LH 750 System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 S Y S T E M
G R O U N D
G R O U N D + 4 8 V D C
P 4 - 4 8 V D C P 3
E 1 0 E 9
P 7 P 1
S H IE L D G R O U N D E 1 0
P 4 /J 4
P 1 /J 1
D iff P o w e r
S u p p ly c a r d D ilu te r /S o le n o id
G ro u n d O p tic s P o w e r
S u p p ly c a r d
P 7 /J 7
D ilu te r 1
c a rd
P 3 /J 3
D ilu te r 4
c a rd 6 4 9 8 2 2 3 B
PN 4277219B 3.12-5
Connecting the Digital Backplane and the RF Detector Preamp Card

1. Locate the cable from the RF Detector Preamp card in the right side compartment of the
Diluter.
2. Remove the bubble wrap and the ferrites, noting their postions, but DO NOT remove the
wire ties.
3. Route the cable through the opening at the base of the Analyzer. See Figure 3.12-7.
on the inside, and attaching ferrites.
4. Verify the cable is coiled three times, then reinstall the ferrites.
5. Do not attach the cable to the digital backplane at this time.
Figure 3.12-6 Routing the Cable from the RF Detector Preamp Card to the Digital Backplane on the
LH 750 System
W ir e tie
F e r r ite s
W ir e tie
Cable must be coiled with three turns and

placed horizontally as shown.
From RF Detector
Preamp card, J73
RF Detector
Preamp card 6498157B
3.12-6 PN 4277219B
Connecting the Digital Backplane and the RS/Opto Intfc Card
1. Locate the two cables in the Analyzer attached to the digital backplane, undo the wire
ties, and route the cables through the opening at the base of the Analyzer to the RS/Opto
Intfc card. See Figure 3.12-7.
Figure 3.12-7 Connecting the Cables from the Digital Backplane to the RS/Opto Intfc Card on the LH 750
System
D IG IT A L
B A C K P L A N E
J27
J 2 7
S Y S T E M J24
IN T F C J27
J19
P 1 9 R S /O P T O
IN T E R F A C E
C A R D J 6
J26 P 2 4
R F D E T E C T O R
J24
J 2 4 J19 P R E A M P C A R D
D C /R F J 7 3
S IG N A L J 1 9
IB U S P 2 7 R S /O P T O
IN T E R F A C E
6 4 9 8 1 6 3 B
C A R D J 2
2. Attach the cables from the digital backplane to the following connectors on the RS/Opto
Intfc card.
Cable Connects to
IBUS cable from the digital backplane, J19 RS/Opto Intfc card, J6
SBUS cable from the digital backplane, J27 RS/Opto Intfc card, J2
3. Attach the RF Detector Preamp card cable to J24 on the digital backplane. Refer to
Figure 3.12-7.
PN 4277219B 3.12-7
3.12-8 PN 4277219B
CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM 3
3.13 CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM
Connecting the Pneumatic Lines
Attach the pneumatic lines to the Power Supply and connect the other ends to the Diluter as
Figure 3.13-1 Installing the Pneumatic Lines on the LH 750 System
VAC
30 PSI 5 PSI
CBC RETIC RETIC PAK PAK

LYSE LYSE STAIN PRESERVE LYSE CLEANER DILUENT
30 PSI
5 PSI
VAC
6498074B
Power Supply
Installing the Pickup Tubes and the Reagent Lines
CAUTION Placing reagent containers above the reagent input lines on the Diluter can cause siphoning of
the reagents and priming problems. Never place a reagent container above the reagent input lines on the
back of the Diluter.
IMPORTANT Placing the Retic Pak and SCATTER PAK lytic reagent containers below the reagent input lines
on the Diluter can affect reagent flow, causing erroneous results. Always place the Retic Pak and SCATTER
PAK lytic reagent containers on the same tabletop level as the Diluter.
PN 4277219B 3.13-1
CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM
ATTENTION: For the pickup tube part numbers, see Table 8.2-28.
1. Label both ends of the CBC lytic reagent, diff lytic reagent, diff preservative, retic stain
and retic clearing solution lines and install the lines and the pickup tubes as shown in
Figure 3.13-2.
Figure 3.13-2 Connecting Reagent Lines for the CBC Lyse, Retic Pak and SCATTER PAK® Lytic Reagent
on the LH 750 System
CBC
LYSE RETIC
CLEAR RETIC
STAIN PAK
PRESERVE
PAK
LYSE
PAK
LYSE
PAK
PRESERVE
BACK OF
DILUTER
CBC
LYSE
RETIC
PAK
SCATTER
PAK 6498158B
ATTENTION: If this customer does a high volume of testing and wants to reduce the frequency
of diluent container replacements, you can connect two diluent containers in parallel to the
Analytical Station. The part number for the LH 750 Dual Diluent Pickup Tube kit?? is in
Table 8.1-7. The kit contains the instructions for making the connections.
3.13-2 PN 4277219B
CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM 3
2. If the diluent line was shipped with a check valve, remove the check valve.
3. Label both ends of the diluent and cleaning agent lines and install the lines and the
pickup tubes as shown in Figure 3.13-3.
4. Connect the level sensor cable on the diluent pickup tube to the diluent level sensor
cable at the back of the instrument. See Figure 3.13-3.
Figure 3.13-3 Connecting the Diluent, Cleaning Agent, and Waste Line on the LH 750 System
Waste
level
sensor WASTE
DILUENT
CLEANER
To waste container
Waste
level
sensor
bypass
Diluent level
sensor cable
To drain line
Diluent
Back of Waste
Diluter Cleaning
agent 6498095B
5. Install the waste line as shown in Figure 3.13-3. Drain lines 2.4 m (8 ft) and 3.7 m (12 ft)
are provided.
Note: If connecting the waste line to an open drain instead of a waste container:
r Install a bypass jumper (P35) on the waste level sense connector.
r Mechanically secure the waste tube in the drain so the tube cannot accidentally
come out of the drain. This prevents spillage.
PN 4277219B 3.13-3
CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM
3.13-4 PN 4277219B
SETTING UP THE LH 750 SYSTEM DILUTER AND ANALYZER 3
3.14 SETTING UP THE LH 750 SYSTEM DILUTER AND ANALYZER
Setting Up the LH 750 System Diluter
1. Remove the cardboard shipping inserts from the Diluter front panels. See Figure 3.14-1.
Figure 3.14-1 Removing LH 750 System Diluter Shipping Inserts
6 4 9 8 2 0 3 B
2. Using Figure 3.14-2 as a guide, remove the BSV spacers.

3. Tighten the BSV knob.
Figure 3.14-2 Removing the Spacers from the BSV on the LH 750 System
L o o s e n
k n o b .
D o n o t
re m o v e .
6 4 9 8 1 6 4 B
PN 4277219B 3.14-1
SETTING UP THE LH 750 SYSTEM DILUTER AND ANALYZER
4. Remove the plastic film and the shipping screws from the TTM and then pull out the
shipping inserts as shown in Figure 3.14-3.
Figure 3.14-3 Removing the Shipping Insert from the TTM on the LH 750 System
S m a ll
T O P V IE W o n e h e re
2
1
L a rg e o n e h e re
R e m o v e s h ip p in g s c r e w s R e m o v e s h ip p in g in s e r ts
6 4 9 8 1 6 5 B
5. Check the pinch valves:

a. Remove the red pinch valve deactivator clips.
Note: The pinch valve deactivator clips listed in Table 3.14-1 are not conspicuous.
Ensure that they are removed.
b. Inspect the I-beam tubing to ensure it is threaded properly.
Table 3.14-1 Pinch Valves on the LH 750 System with Inconspicuous Deactivator Clips
Diluter Location Pinch Valves

Left front panel VL95/98
Center front panel VL4 (under Hgb module)
Right front panel VL53B, VL108
Rear of left panel VL61
Rear of center panel VL14B, VL16B
Diff module VL48B (under mixing chamber)
Random Access module VL80, VL97B (under mixing chambers)
3.14-2 PN 4277219B
6. Check the needle assembly:
a. Remove the red safety clip from the needle.
b. Ensure the needle cartridge is installed correctly. See Figure 3.14-4.
Figure 3.14-4 Checking Needle Cartridge Installation on the LH 750 System
6 4 9 8 1 9 2 B
7. Check the cassette transport mechanism.

a. Manually rock the rocker bed, ensuring it moves back and forth freely without
contacting cables or wires. See Figure 3.14-5.
b. Ensure the bed position sensor is not bent and the spring is attached as shown in
Figure 3.14-5.
Figure 3.14-5 Checking Rocker Bed Movement and Bed Position Sensor Condition on the LH 750 System
BED POSITION
SENSOR FLAG
SPRING
6 4 9 8 1 6 6 B
PN 4277219B 3.14-3
c. Ensure the rocker bed does not move from side to side. See Figure 3.14-6.
d. Ensure the left and right lift covers are flush with the elevator pads as shown in
Figure 3.14-6.
e. Push the stripper plate in and out, ensuring it moves freely. See Figure 3.14-6.
Figure 3.14-6 Checking Lift Cover Alignment and Stripper Plate Movement on the LH 750 System
A lig n
6 4 9 8 1 9 3 B
Setting Up the Analyzer

1. Install the BD ADJ card.
a. Position the card in the Analyzer as shown in Figure 3.14-7 and fasten the
thumbscrews.
b. Install the Analyzer to preamp cable in the cable clamp.
Figure 3.14-7 Setting Up the LH 750 System Analyzer
0 4 /3 0 /9 6
I
B D A D J T h u m b s c re w s W h ite ta b s A M C C O M M IN T E R F A C E
c a rd
1 2 : 3 0 :1 8 II
c a rd
III
IV
V
VII
M A IN M E N U
J 1
6498186B
D IL U T E R C P U
c a rd
3.14-4 PN 4277219B
c. Connect the Diluter 2 card to BD ADJ card cable to J1 on the BD ADJ card. See
Figure 3.14-7.
d. Route the other end of the cable down to the Diluter 2 card and connect it to J12.
ATTENTION: DO NOT remove the circuit cards to check the seating.
2. Ensure that all the Analyzer cards are properly fastened, the white tabs are flush and the
thumbscrews are secure. See Figure 3.14-7.
ATTENTION: When configuring the instrument during installation, always set the switches for
an instrument without a SlideMaker. Even if you plan on installing a SlideMaker as part of the
instrument, you must install and test the instrument without a SlideMaker first.
3. Change the System Configuration as necessary by setting the DIP switches on the AMC,
the COMM INTERFACE card, and the DILUTER CPU card. Refer to Figure 3.14-7 for
the card locations.
r See Figure A.2-1 and Tables A.2-1 and A.2-2 for the AMC DIP switch’s location and
settings.
r See Figure A.2-4 and Tables A.2-7 and A.2-8 for the COMM INTERFACE card DIP
switches’ locations and settings.
r See Figure A.2-7 and Table A.2-11 for the DILUTER CPU card DIP switch’s location
and settings.
ATTENTION: If the shear valves are seized and you allow the Analytical Station to reset before
you have exercised them, tubing may pop off of the shear valves.
4. On the DILUTER CPU card, set SW1, position 8, to ON, to inhibit resetting the
Analytical Station when you first turn the power on.
6. Close all the Analyzer and Diluter doors and install the Analytical Station covers and
columns.
PN 4277219B 3.14-5
3.14-6 PN 4277219B
UNPACKING AND INSTALLING THE LH 750 SYSTEM WORKSTATION 3
3.15 UNPACKING AND INSTALLING THE LH 750 SYSTEM WORKSTATION
Unpacking and Checking the Workstation
1. Unpack the Workstation, making sure it is intact with no visible defective parts.
ATTENTION: Position the Workstation monitor on the right side of the Diluter. The Workstaion
computer can be installed on the floor or on the counter, depending on the space available.
2. Install and check the Workstation according to the instructions in Chapter 18 of the
COULTER LH 700 Series Workstation Configuration.
Connecting the Workstation to the Analytical Station

1. At the rear of the Diluter, locate the Analytical Station cable. See Figure 3.15-1.
2. Attach the cable to the appropriate instrument connector on the Workstation interface
cable. See Figure 3.15-1.
Figure 3.15-1 Connecting the Workstation to the LH 750 System Diluter

R S /O p to
In te rfa c e
c a rd
J3
A n a ly tic a l S ta tio n to
W o r k s ta tio n c a b le
W o r k s ta tio n
in te r fa c e c a b le
In s tru m e n t
c o n n e c to r 6498185B
PN 4277219B 3.15-1
UNPACKING AND INSTALLING THE LH 750 SYSTEM WORKSTATION
3.15-2 PN 4277219B
CHECKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION 3
3.16 CHECKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION
Power Up Checks
main ac power cable. Do not use an extension cord. Plug the main ac power cable from the Power Supply
directly into a dedicated wall outlet.
1. Plug the main ac power cable for the Power Supply into the dedicated wall outlet.
2. Turn on the MAIN POWER circuit breaker. See Figure 3.16-1.
Figure 3.16-1 Supplying ac Input to the Analytical Station on the LH 750 System
5 PSI 30 PSI 60 PSI

MAIN
ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST
POWER
F3
SE
1/16A
FU
250 V
+ - + - 0
0
F
N ON
PU
F
US
IN IN LT
O ADJ
L
CREASE CREASE
O N
6 4 9 8 0 8 0 B
3. Press POWER ON, then check the indicators on the Power Supply. See Figure 3.16-2.
a. Ensure the AC status indicator LED is green, indicating the AC LINE value on the
display is within acceptable limits.
b. Ensure the status indicator LEDs on the Power Supply display are green.
c. Ensure the 60 PSI, 30 PSI, 5 PSI and VACUUM readings are within the specifications
listed in Table A.1-13. Adjust the pressure regulators, if necessary.
PN 4277219B 3.16-1
CHECKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION
Figure 3.16-2 Power On Checks on the LH 750 System

1 Turn on the Analytical Station
0 4 /3 0 /9 6 I
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
II
III
IV
V
VII
M A IN M E N U
N
7 8 9 T
E
C E 0 . R
A L A R M
Press
P R IM E C L E A R S T A R T
N
7 8 9 T
E
C E 0 . R
Within specifications ?
2 Check Power Supply
TEMP
60 30.0 5.0 28 115 DC
Status Status
indicators indicators
green ? green ?
5 PSI 30 PSI 60 PSI MAIN

ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST POWER
MAIN
POWER
F3
+ - + - 1/16A 0
0
F
IN IN NC
REASE
250 V N ON
F
I
CREASE CREASE
6 4 9 8 1 6 9 B
Regulators
Analyzer Checks
Adjusting the Analyzer Display and Accessing the Revision Levels

1. Verify the SYSTEM STATUS message on the Analyzer screen is READY.
2. Press the Analyzer reset button and record the software revision level displayed on the
Analyzer (CRT) screen for the installation report. See Figure 3.16-3.
3. Verify the SYSTEM STATUS message returns to READY.
4. Press the Analyzer reset button again and note the software revision level displayed on
the numeric keypad display (LCD).
5. At the Workstation, from any customer application except Run Configuration select
Help tt About and note the software revision level displayed.
3.16-2 PN 4277219B
CHECKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION 3
6. Verify the LH 750 System Analytical Station and Workstation software revisions are a
released combination. Refer to Table A.9-2.
7. If the software combination is not released, install a currently released combination.
Figure 3.16-3 Accessing the Revision Levels on the LH 750 System
Reset
button
*SYSTEM RUN*
04/30/01 I
12:30:18 II
COPYRIGHT 1995-2001 III
BECKMAN COULTER CORP.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED IV
V
STATUS : VERSION ???
VI
ALERT:
ASPIRATIONS/TUBE 01 VII
MODE: C/D/R
MAIN MENU VIII
BLOOD DETECT: ON 6498176B
Selecting the Analyzer Menu Settings

Note: For a complete summary of the LH 750 System Analyzer menu selections, see
Figure A.10-2.
1. Select the desired date format option:

a. From the Analyzer MAIN MENU, select ANALYZER FUNCTIONS tt DATE AND
TIME tt FORMAT.
b. Switch to the desired date format option.
2. Enter the current date and time:
a. From the DATE & TIME menu, select SET DATE & TIME.
b. Using the numeric keypad, enter the correct information, then select MAIN MENU.
PN 4277219B 3.16-3
CHECKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION
3. If the customer uses Interleaved 2-of-5 bar-code tube labels, enter the correct number of
digits for the labels:
a. From the MAIN MENU, select SYSTEM CONFIGURATION tt NUMBER OF BAR
CODE DIGITS (2 OF 5) to XX.
b. Using the numeric keypad, enter the number of digits on the label.
4. Ensure the Diluter alarms are enabled:
a. From the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION menu, select ALARM SET UP.
b. Enable all the alarms, then select MAIN MENU.
5. Access the Analyzer SERVICE MENU. See Heading 4.2 for directions.
6. Set the MANUAL HGB TIMER DRAIN option to 15:
a. From the SERVICE MENU, select DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES tt MORE
b. Using the Diluter keypad, set the number to 15.
7. Select SERVICE MENU tt SYSTEM RUN to return to the SYSTEM RUN menu.
Entering System Serial Numbers and Revisions at the Workstation
1. At the Workstation Command Center, select tt to access the System

Setup - Communications screen.
2. Select Instrument and type in the serial numbers and revisions levels for the Analyzer,
Diluter, and Power Supply.
3. Select LH 750 Workstation and type in the system serial numbers for the monitor and PC.
4. When finished, log off.
Closing Up the Instrument for Testing

2. Close all the instrument doors and install the Analytical Station covers and columns.
3.16-4 PN 4277219B
TESTING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND WORKSTATION 3
3.17 TESTING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND WORKSTATION
Reagent Cycles
Priming Cycles
1. At the Analyzer, use the F31 function to prime the reagent reservoirs.
2. Exercise the shear valves and ensure they are working correctly.
r Use the F85 function to exercise CVL85/126.
r Use the F87 function to exercise CVL87/127
r Use the F93 function to exercise CVL93/128.
3. Power down the Analytical Station and set the DILUTER CPU card, SW1, position 8, to
OFF, to enble the reset function.
4. Power up the Analytical Station.
5. Use the F67 function to prime the reagent lines.
6. Use the F17 function to prime the cleaning agent pump.
7. On the numeric keypad, press SHUTDOWN to prime the cleaning agent.
8. After the Shutdown cycle is finished, verify the instrument condition is as shown in
Figure 3.17-1.
9. On the numeric keypad, press STARTUP to prime the System with diluent.
Figure 3.17-1 LH 750 System Condition after Shutdown Cycle

No Display
0 4 /3 0 /9 6 I
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
II
III
IV
COMPRESSOR OFF
VII
M A IN M E N U
D R A IN R IN S E R E A D Y S T O P P R E M IX
A P E R T A P E R T C O N T R E S E T
N
7 8 9 T
E
C E 0 . R
N
ECGEN• S
30 PSI, 5 PSI
and VACUUM
readouts » 0
6 4 9 8 1 7 0 B Cleaning agent
PN 4277219B 3.17-1
TESTING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND WORKSTATION
Startup Cycle
1. On the numeric keypad, press STARTUP.
2. On the Workstation screen, select tt .

3. After the Startup cycle is finished, verify:
a. The instrument condition is as shown in Figure 3.17-2.
b. The results displayed on the Quality Assurance [Daily Checks] screen passed and
the Startup Test Details screen are within the specifications listed in Table A.1-10.
Figure 3.17-2 LH 750 System Condition after Startup Cycle
READY
0 4 /3 0 /0 1 I
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
III
IV
V
T E S T M O D E V I
A L E R T :
A S P IR A T IO N S /T U B E 0 1 V II
M O D E : C /D /R
M A IN M E N U
B L O O D D E T E C T : O N
N
7 8 9 T
E
C E 0 . R
Within limits
P N E U 60 P S I 30 P S I 5 P S I V A C U U M A C L IN E A C
TEM P
60 3 0 .0 4 .9 28 115 DC
No cleaning agent
6 4 9 8 1 7 7 B
3.17-2 PN 4277219B
TESTING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND WORKSTATION 3
System Verification
Do the System Verification Procedure (SVP) and record the results as directed under
Heading 5.1.
Whole Blood Verification

Do the Whole Blood Verification procedure as directed under Heading 5.4.
SlideMaker Installation
If the instrument you are installing was shipped with a SlideMaker, install the SlideMaker
now. Follow the directions in Chapter 3 of the Slide Making Modules Service Manual.
SlideStainer Installation
If the instrument you are installing was shipped with a SlideStainer, install the SlideStainer
now. Follow the directions in Chapter 3 of the Slide Staining Modules Service Manual.
Report Completion
System Installation Report

Complete the System Installation Report form as directed under Heading 4.61.
Instrument Reference Report Form

Complete the Instrument Reference Report form as directed under Heading 4.61.
Service Call Report

Complete any Service Call forms required by your country’s procedure.
PN 4277219B 3.17-3
TESTING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND WORKSTATION
3.17-4 PN 4277219B
LH 750 SYSTEM AND LH 750 CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST 3
3.18 LH 750 SYSTEM AND LH 750 CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST
You can use this checklist after you are familiar with the installation procedure.
1. Unpack and set up the Power Supply:
a. Remove the shipping brackets from the compressor. (Figure 3.11-2)
b. Ensure the Power Supply air filter is installed correctly. (Figure 3.11-3)
c. Connect the main ac power cable to the Power Supply, but do not plug it into the
outlet. (Figure 3.11-4)
2. Unpack and position the Diluter.
3. Unpack and position the Analyzer.
4. Secure the Analyzer to the Diluter.
5. Install the instrument cables:
a. Connect the dc power cable from the Analyzer to J4 on the Power Supply.
(Figure 3.12-2)
b. Attach the IBUS cable connector P5 to J5 on the Power Supply. (Figure 3.12-3)
c. Connect the Analyzer to preamp cable to the Six-Channel Preamp card.
(Figure 3.12-4)
d. Connect the backplane voltage bus cables P1 to J1 on the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics
Power Supply card, P3 to J3 on the Diluter 4 card, P4 to J4 on the Diff Power Supply
card and P7 to J7 on the Diluter 1 card. (Figure 3.12-5)
e. Route and connect the digital backplane cables.
1) Route the RF Detector Preamp cable from the Diluter to the Analyzer.
(Figure 3.12-6).
Note: Always route the RF Detector Preamp cable first, as you need maximum
space to route the coiled cable through the opening into the Analyzer.
2) Route the Diluter cables P27and P19 from the digital backplane to the RS/Opto
Intfc card and connect them to J27 and J19 respectively. (Figure 3.12-7 )
3) Connect the RF Detector Preamp cable to J24 on the digital backplane.
6. Attach the pneumatic lines to the Power Supply and to the Diluter. (Figure 3.13-1)
7. Install the reagent lines, waste line, and pickup tubes. (Figure 3.13-2 and Figure 3.13-3)
8. Set up the Diluter:
a. Remove the shipping inserts from the Diluter. (Figure 3.14-1)
b. Remove the BSV spacers. (Figure 3.14-2)
c. Remove the shipping screws and shipping insert from the TTM. (Figure 3.14-3)
d. Remove the red pinch valve deactivator clips.
e. Ensure the needle cartridge is installed correctly and the safety clip is removed.
(Figure 3.14-4)
f. Check the cassette transport mechanism manually to ensure the following -
r The rocker bed rocks freely without contacting cables or wires. (Figure 3.14-5)
r The bed position sensor is not bent and the spring is attached. (Figure 3.14-5)
r The rocker bed does not move from side to side. (Figure 3.14-6)
r The left and right lift covers are flush with the elevator pads. (Figure 3.14-6)
PN 4277219B 3.18-1
LH 750 SYSTEM AND LH 750 CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST
r The stripper plate moves in and out freely. (Figure 3.14-6)

9. Set up the Analyzer:
a. Install and connect the BD ADJ card (Figure 3.14-7).
a. Ensure that all the Analyzer cards are properly seated and fastened.
b. Change the System Configuration as necessary. (Tables A.2-1, A.2-2, A.2-7, A.2-8,
and A.2-12)
c. Set the DILUTER CPU CARD to inhibit reset.
10. Unpack, set up, and check the Workstation.
11. Connect the Analytical Station-to-Workstation cable from the Diluter to the appropriate
instrument connector on the Workstation interface cable.(Figure 3.15-1)
12. Check the Analytical Station:
b. Power up the System. At the Power Supply, verify the ac input reading is acceptable
and the pneumatic gauge readings (Table A.1-13) are within tolerance. Adjust the
pressures as necessary.
c. Reset the Analyzer and record the revision levels on the Installation Report.
d. At the Analyzer -
r Set the date and time format and enter the date and time.
r Set the number of bar-code digits for the Interleaved 2-of-5 labels in use.
r Set the manual Hgb timer drain to 15.
e. At the Workstation, type in the serial numbers and revisions levels for the Analyzer,
Diluter, and Power Supply and the serial numbers for the monitor and PC.
13. Install all the instrument panels and close all the doors in preparation for testing.
14. Test the Analytical Station and the Workstation:
a. Use F31 to prime the reagent reservoirs.
b. Exercise the shear valves using F85 (CVL85/126), F87 (CVL87/127), and F93
(CVL93/128).
c. Power down the Analytical Station, enable the reset function on the DILUTER CPU
card, and power up the Analytical Station.
d. Prime the reagents using the following functions in this order: F67, F17,
SHUTDOWN, and STARTUP.
e. Do a startup cycle and ensure the displayed results are within specifications.
f. Do the following verification procedures -
1) System Verification (Heading 5.1)
2) Whole Blood Verification. (Heading 5.4)
15. If a SlideMaker was shipped as part of the instrument, install the SlideMaker. Follow the
instructions in Chapter 3 of the Slide Making Modules Service Manual.
16. If a SlideStainer was shipped as part of the instrument, install the SlideStainer. Follow the
instructions in Chapter 3 of the Slide Staining Modules Service Manual.
17. Fill out the Installation Report Form, Reference Report, SVP Report and any Service Call
Report forms. (Heading 4.61)
3.18-2 PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
4
4 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES, 4.1-1
4.1 POWER DOWN/POWER UP, 4.1-1

Analytical Station Power Down/Power Up, 4.1-1
Purpose, 4.1-1
Power Down, 4.1-1
Power Up, 4.1-1
Workstation Power Down/Power Up, 4.1-1
Purpose, 4.1-1
Power Down, 4.1-2
Power Up, 4.1-2
4.2 ANALYZER SERVICE MENU OPTIONS, 4.2-1

Purpose, 4.2-1
Procedure, 4.2-1
Verification, 4.2-1
4.3 ANALYZER SCOPE MENU OPTIONS, 4.3-1

Purpose, 4.3-1
Procedure, 4.3-1
Verification, 4.3-2
4.4 DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST, 4.4-1

Procedure, 4.4-1
Verification, 4.4-2
4.5 AUDIBLE ALARMS TESTS, 4.5-1

Purpose, 4.5-1
Procedure, 4.5-1
Verification, 4.5-1
4.6 ANALYZER CARD AND SCOPE MODULE REPLACEMENT, 4.6-1

Purpose, 4.6-1
Procedure, 4.6-1
4.7 DILUTER CARD REPLACEMENT, 4.7-1

Purpose, 4.7-1
Bar-Code Decoder Card Replacement, 4.7-1
Removal, 4.7-1
Installation, 4.7-2
Six-Channel Preamp Card Relocation or Replacement (LH 750 System), 4.7-2
Relocation or Removal, 4.7-2
Installation, 4.7-3
PN 4277219B 4-i
CONTENTS
Diluter Card Replacements (except Bar-Code Decoder, Six-Channel Preamp, and

Reservoir Interface Cards), 4.7-3
Removal, 4.7-3
Installation, 4.7-4
4.8 CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES, 4.8-1

Purpose, 4.8-1
Procedures, 4.8-1
4.9 CBC CALIBRATION - LATEX VOLTAGE, 4.9-1

Purpose, 4.9-1
Procedure, 4.9-1
4.10 CBC CALIBRATION - FLOW RATE, 4.10-1

Purpose, 4.10-1
Procedure, 4.10-1
4.11 MANUAL MODE-TO-AUTOMATIC MODE CALIBRATION, 4.11-1

Purpose, 4.11-1
Collecting the Data, 4.11-1
4.12 FAN REPLACEMENT, 4.12-1

Purpose, 4.12-1
Power Supply Exhaust Fan, 4.12-1
Procedure, 4.12-1
Pneumatic Power Supply Intake Fan, 4.12-2
Procedure, 4.12-2
Analyzer Fans, 4.12-3
Procedure, 4.12-3
4.13 REMOVING THE POWER SUPPLY COVER AND LEFT SIDE PANEL, 4.13-1
Purpose, 4.13-1
Removal, 4.13-1
4.14 COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT, 4.14-1

Purpose, 4.14-1
Removal, 4.14-1
4-ii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
4
4.15 DUMP VALVE REPLACEMENT, 4.15-1

Purpose, 4.15-1
Procedure, 4.15-1
4.16 AIR WATER SEPARATOR CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT, 4.16-1

Purpose, 4.16-1
Cleaning, 4.16-1
Replacement, 4.16-2
Removal, 4.16-2
4.17 MOTOR CONTROLLER CARD REPLACEMENT, 4.17-1

Purpose, 4.17-1
Replacement, 4.17-1
4.18 SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER CARD REPLACEMENT, 4.18-1

Purpose, 4.18-1
Removal, 4.18-1
4.19 SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER DISPLAY TEST AND REPLACEMENT, 4.19-1

Purpose, 4.19-1
SPC Display Test, 4.19-1
Replacement, 4.19-1
4.20 BULK POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT, 4.20-1

Purpose, 4.20-1
Removal, 4.20-1
4.21 BULK POWER FILTER CARD REPLACEMENT, 4.21-1

Purpose, 4.21-1
Replacement, 4.21-1
PN 4277219B 4-iii
CONTENTS
4.22 CBC LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND

REPLACEMENT, 4.22-1
Purpose, 4.22-1
Replacement, 4.22-5
4.23 DILUENT DISPENSER CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT, 4.23-1

Purpose, 4.23-1
Dispenser Troubleshooting, 4.23-5
Replacement, 4.23-6
4.24 STAIN PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT, 4.24-1

Purpose, 4.24-1
Replacement, 4.24-7

REPLACEMENT, 4.25-1
Purpose, 4.25-1
Pump Replacement, 4.25-6
4.26 CLEANING AGENT PUMP CHECK AND REPLACEMENT, 4.26-1

Purpose, 4.26-1
Replacement, 4.26-3
4.27 ASPIRATION PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT, 4.27-1

Purpose, 4.27-1
Low (Manual-Mode) Volume Check, 4.27-1
High (Automatic-Mode) Volume Check, 4.27-3
Replacement, 4.27-6
4-iv PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
4
4.28 DIFF LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND
REPLACEMENT, 4.28-1
Purpose, 4.28-1
Replacement, 4.28-8
4.29 DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND

REPLACEMENT, 4.29-1
Purpose, 4.29-1
Replacement, 4.29-8
4.30 REAGENT RESERVOIR COMPONENT REPLACEMENT, 4.30-1

Purpose, 4.30-1
Float Sensor/Reservoir Cap Replacement, 4.30-1
Removal, 4.30-1
Reagent Reservoir Solenoid Replacement, 4.30-3
Procedure, 4.30-3
Reservoir Interface Card Replacement, 4.30-4
Procedure, 4.30-4
4.31 CBC LYTIC REAGENT AND DILUENT DELIVERY TIMING CHECK, 4.31-1
Purpose, 4.31-1
Timing Check, 4.31-1
4.32 HGB LAMP REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT, 4.32-1

Purpose, 4.32-1
Replacement, 4.32-1
Hgb Lamp Voltage Adjustment, 4.32-2
4.33 WORKSTATION SCREEN CAPTURE AND LIST-MODE DATA

COLLECTION, 4.33-1
Purpose, 4.33-1
PN 4277219B 4-v
CONTENTS

Screen Capture, 4.33-1
List-Mode Data Collection, 4.33-1
4.34 CRT INTENSITY ADJUSTMENT, 4.34-1

Purpose, 4.34-1
CRT Intensity Adjustment on the GEN•S System, 4.34-1
Adjustment, 4.34-1
CRT Intensity Adjustment on the LH 750 System, 4.34-2
Adjustment, 4.34-2
4.35 BELT DRIVE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT, 4.35-1

Purpose, 4.35-1
Removal, 4.35-1
4.36 ROCKER BED BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT, 4.36-1

Purpose, 4.36-1
Adjustment, 4.36-1
4.37 UNDER LEFT STACK SWITCH REPLACEMENT, 4.37-1

Purpose, 4.37-1
Procedure, 4.37-1
4.38 UNDER RIGHT STACK SWITCH REPLACEMENT, 4.38-1

Purpose, 4.38-1
Procedure, 4.38-1
4.39 LEFT OR RIGHT LIFT UP SWITCH REPLACEMENT, 4.39-1

Purpose, 4.39-1
Removal, 4.39-1
4.40 LEFT OR RIGHT LIFT CYLINDER REPLACEMENT, 4.40-1

Purpose, 4.40-1
Removal, 4.40-1
4-vi PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
4
Lift Function Test, 4.40-3
Lift Up Switch Activator Adjustment, 4.40-3
4.41 TOP LEFT OR RIGHT SAFETY SWITCH REPLACEMENT, 4.41-1

Purpose, 4.41-1
Replacement, 4.41-1
Top Left Safety Switch Test, 4.41-2
Top Right Safety Switch Test, 4.41-2
4.42 FLIPPERS (OLD STYLE) CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT, 4.42-1

Purpose, 4.42-1
Flipper Check and Adjustment, 4.42-1
4.43 ROCKER BED REMOVAL, 4.43-1

Purpose, 4.43-1
Removal, 4.43-1
4.44 ROCKER BED POSITION SENSORS CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS, 4.44-1

Purpose, 4.44-1
Bed Sensor Flag Check and Adjustment, 4.44-1
Bed Backward Sensor Check and Adjustment, 4.44-2
Bed Horizontal Sensor Check and Adjustment, 4.44-3
Bed Forward Sensor Check and Adjustment, 4.44-4
4.45 BED ROCK CYLINDER REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT, 4.45-1

Purpose, 4.45-1
Removal, 4.45-1
Bed Rock Rate Adjustment, 4.45-2
4.46 TUBE DETECTOR REPLACEMENT, 4.46-1

Purpose, 4.46-1
Replacement, 4.46-1
4.47 TUBE DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT, 4.47-1

Purpose, 4.47-1
PN 4277219B 4-vii
CONTENTS
Adjustment, 4.47-1
4.48 CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY ALIGNMENT CHECKS, 4.48-1

Purpose, 4.48-1
Procedure, 4.48-1
4.49 BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST, 4.49-1

Purpose, 4.49-1
Procedure, 4.49-1
4.50 BAR-CODE SCANNER CYLINDER REPLACEMENT, 4.50-1

Purpose, 4.50-1
LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Replacement, 4.50-1
Removal, 4.50-1
Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Replacement, 4.50-2
Removal, 4.50-2
4.51 BAR-CODE SCANNER ADJUSTMENTS, 4.51-1

Purpose, 4.51-1
LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Adjustments, 4.51-1
Set Up, 4.51-1
Park Tab Verification, 4.51-2
Center Adjustment, 4.51-3
Height Over Tube Label Adjustment, 4.51-4
Height Over Cassette Label Adjustment, 4.51-7
Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Adjustments, 4.51-8
Adjustments, 4.51-8
4.52 LED STYLE BAR-CODE SCANNER SPEED AND ELECTRICAL CHECKS, 4.52-1
Purpose, 4.52-1
Tool/Supplies Needed, 4.52-1
Speed Check, 4.52-1
Electrical Checks, 4.52-2
4.53 BAR-CODE SCANNER POSITION SENSOR ADJUSTMENT, 4.53-1

Purpose, 4.53-1
LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor Adjustment, 4.53-1
Adjustment, 4.53-1
4-viii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
4
Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor Adjustment, 4.53-2
Adjustment, 4.53-2
4.54 BAR-CODE SCANNER ALIGNMENT WITH OSCILLOSCOPE, 4.54-1

Purpose, 4.54-1
Alignment, 4.54-1
4.55 BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT, 4.55-1

Purpose, 4.55-1
Removal of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module, 4.55-1
Installation of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module, 4.55-2
Adjustment of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module, 4.55-3
Removal of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random Access Module, 4.55-5
Installation of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random Access
Module, 4.55-6
Adjustment of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random Access
Module, 4.55-7
4.56 BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR PERFORMANCE TEST, 4.56-1

Purpose, 4.56-1
Performance Test, 4.56-1
4.57 NEEDLE CAP-PIERCER MODULE REPLACEMENT, 4.57-1

Purpose, 4.57-1
Replacement, 4.57-1
Bellow Up and Bellows Down Sensor Adjustment, 4.57-2

REPLACEMENTS, 4.58-1
Purpose, 4.58-1
Tools/Materials Needed, 4.58-1
Probe-Wipe Test, 4.58-1
Probe-Wipe Module Component Replacement, 4.58-2
Cleaning Truck Alignment, 4.58-5
Initial Adjustment, 4.58-5
Final Adjustment, 4.58-6
PN 4277219B 4-ix
CONTENTS
Probe-Wipe Sensor Adjustment, 4.58-6

4.59 HAND-DETECTOR ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT, 4.59-1

Purpose, 4.59-1
Procedure, 4.59-1
4.60 BSV MODULE COMPONENT REPLACEMENT, 4.60-1

Purpose, 4.60-1
BSV/BSV Shaft, Spring, Housing, or Insulator Replacement, 4.60-1
Procedure, 4.60-1
BSV Manual-Mode (Front Section) Cylinder Replacement, 4.60-3
Procedure, 4.60-3
Probe Position Sensor Adjustment, 4.60-4
4.61 USING THE ELECTRONIC FORMS, 4.61-1

Purpose, 4.61-1
Using the System Verification Report, 4.61-1
Using the Instrument Reference Report, 4.61-2
Using the System Installation Report, 4.61-2
4.62 RETIC MIXING MOTOR REPAIR/REPLACEMENT, 4.62-1

Purpose, 4.62-1
Removal, 4.62-1
Removal, 4.62-2
4.63 STAIN OR RETIC CHAMBER REPLACEMENT, 4.63-1

Purpose, 4.63-1
Procedure, 4.63-1
4.64 PELTIER MODULE REPLACEMENT, 4.64-1

Purpose, 4.64-1
Procedure, 4.64-1
4-x PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
4
4.65 HEATER CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS, 4.65-1
Purpose, 4.65-1
Procedure, 4.65-1
4.66 DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP VOLUME OPTIMIZATION, 4.66-1

Purpose, 4.66-1
Procedure, 4.66-1
4.67 DIFF HEATER REPLACEMENT, 4.67-1

Purpose, 4.67-1
Removal, 4.67-1
4.68 DIFF MIXING CHAMBER REPLACEMENT, 4.68-1

Purpose, 4.68-1
Procedure, 4.68-1
4.69 DIFF MIXING CHAMBER MOTOR REPLACEMENT, 4.69-1

Purpose, 4.69-1
Procedure, 4.69-1
4.70 CBC APERTURE CHECKS, 4.70-1

Purpose, 4.70-1
Procedure, 4.70-1
4.71 VCS OPTIMIZATION, 4.71-1

Purpose, 4.71-1
A. Preliminary Checks, 4.71-5
B. Pump Volume Checks, 4.71-5
C. VCS Flow Rate Adjustment, 4.71-5
D. RF Detector Preamp Card Adjustments, 4.71-6
E. DC and RF Verification, 4.71-6
F. Flow Cell Cleaning, 4.71-6
G. Laser and Flow-Cell Alignment, 4.71-6
H. LS Gain Adjustment, 4.71-6
I. LS Verification, 4.71-6
J. RMS Noise Check, 4.71-7
K. LATRON Verification, 4.71-7
L. VCS Verification, 4.71-7
PN 4277219B 4-xi
CONTENTS
4.72 INITIAL SHEATH AND SAMPLE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS, 4.72-1

Purpose, 4.72-1
Procedure, 4.72-1
4.73 FLOW-RATE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE, 4.73-1

Purpose, 4.73-1
Procedure, 4.73-1
4.74 RF DETECTOR PREAMP CARD ADJUSTMENTS, 4.74-1

Purpose, 4.74-1
RF Detector Preamp Card Cable Adjustment, 4.74-2
Clog Detector Circuit Verification on the RF Detector Preamp Card with a Vacuum
Tube, 4.74-3
C1/C20 Adjustment, 4.74-4
RF and DC Gain Adjustment, 4.74-5
4.75 VCS NOISE CHECKS, 4.75-1

Purpose, 4.75-1
DC Verification, 4.75-1
RF Verification, 4.75-2
LS Verification, 4.75-9
RMS Noise Check, 4.75-10
4.76 LASER AND FLOW-CELL ALIGNMENT, 4.76-1

Purpose, 4.76-1
Flow-Cell Z-Axis (Focus) Alignment, 4.76-2
Flow-Cell X- and Y-Axis Plate Alignment, 4.76-5
Flow-Cell Y-Axis Final Alignment, 4.76-7
4.77 LS GAIN ADJUSTMENT, 4.77-1

Purpose, 4.77-1
Procedure, 4.77-1
4.78 LATRON VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, 4.78-1

Purpose, 4.78-1
Procedure, 4.78-1
4-xii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
4
4.79 FLOW CELL CLEANING, 4.79-1
Purpose, 4.79-1
Procedure, 4.79-1
4.80 LENS BLOCK CLEANING, 4.80-1

Purpose, 4.80-1
Procedure, 4.80-1
4.81 SENSOR AND SWITCH CHECKS, 4.81-1

Purpose, 4.81-1
4.82 LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYZER GAS SPRING REPLACEMENT, 4.82-1

Purpose, 4.82-1
Removal, 4.82-1
4.83 RANDOM ACCESS MODULE REMOVAL, 4.83-1

Purpose, 4.83-1
Removal, 4.83-1
ILLUSTRATIONS
4.2-1 Accessing the Analyzer SERVICE MENU, 4.2-1
4.3-1 Accessing the Analyzer SCOPE MENU, 4.3-1
4.3-2 Electronic Test Displays, 4.3-3
4.3-3 Count Test Displays, 4.3-4
4.3-4 Diff Analog Pulses Test Display, 4.3-4
4.3-5 VCS LATRON Control Display, 4.3-4
4.3-6 Volume Display, 4.3-5
4.3-7 Conductivity Display, 4.3-5
4.3-8 Light Scatter Display, 4.3-5
4.3-9 Phase Adjust Display, 4.3-6
4.3-10 Light Scatter Drift Displays, 4.3-6
4.3-11 F55 Displays, 4.3-6
4.3-12 CBC + Diff Displays, 4.3-7
4.3-13 CBC Only Displays, 4.3-7
4.3-14 Diff Only Displays, 4.3-7
4.4-1 Diff Analog Pulses Test Display on the GEN•S System VCS Calibration
Screen, 4.4-1
4.6-1 Removing an Analyzer Circuit Card, 4.6-1

4.6-2 Removing the BD ADJ Card, 4.6-2
PN 4277219B 4-xiii
CONTENTS
4.6-3 Removing the Scope Module, 4.6-2
4.7-1 Removing the Bar-Code Decoder Card, 4.7-1

4.7-2 Lowering the Six-Channel Preamp Card Assembly or Removing the Card
Cover, 4.7-3
4.9-1 Latex Voltage Window, 4.9-2

4.9-2 Voltage Matching Window, 4.9-3
4.12-1 Removing the Power Supply Exhaust Fan, 4.12-2

4.12-2 Removing the Pneumatic Power Supply Intake Fan, 4.12-3
4.12-3 Removing an Analyzer Fan, 4.12-4
4.13-1 Removing the Power Supply Cover, 4.13-1

4.13-2 Removing the Power Supply Left Panel, 4.13-2
4.14-1 Replacing the Compressor, 4.14-1
4.15-1 Removing the Dump Valve, Old Style Power Supply, 4.15-1
4.15-2 Removing the Dump Valve, New Style Power Supply, 4.15-2
4.16-1 Accessing the Air Water Separator, 4.16-2

4.16-2 Disconnecting the Air Water Separator, 4.16-3
4.17-1 Removing the Compressor Motor Controller Card, 4.17-1
4.18-1 Removing the System Power Controller Card, 4.18-2
4.19-1 Removing the System Power Controller Display, 4.19-2
4.20-1 Disconnecting the Bulk Power Supply, New Style Power Supply, 4.20-1
4.20-2 Disconnecting the Bulk Power Supply, Old Style Power Supply, 4.20-2
4.21-1 Removing the Bulk Power Filter Card, 4.21-1
4.22-1 Setting Up the Instrument for the CBC Lytic Reagent Volume Check, 4.22-2
4.22-4 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the CBC Lytic Reagent
Delivery, 4.22-4
4.22-5 Replacing the CBC Lytic Reagent Pump, 4.22-6
4.23-1 Setting Up the Instrument for the Diluent Dispenser Volume Check, 4.23-2
4.23-3 Diluent Dispenser Adjustments on Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent
Reservoir, 4.23-3
4.23-4 Diluent Dispenser Adjustments on Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent
Reservoir, 4.23-4
4.23-5 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Diluent Delivery, 4.23-5
4-xiv PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
4
4.23-6 Replacing the Diluent Dispenser, 4.23-7
4.24-1 Setting Up the GEN•S System for the Retic Stain Volume Check, 4.24-2
4.24-2 Setting Up the LH 750 System for the Retic Stain Volume Check, 4.24-2
4.24-3 Reading the Meniscus, 4.24-3
4.24-4 Stain Pump Adjustments on the Retic Module, 4.24-4
4.24-5 Stain Pump Adjustments on the Random Access Module, 4.24-4
4.24-6 Setting Up the GEN•S System for Troubleshooting the Retic Stain Delivery, 4.24-5
4.24-7 Setting Up the LH 750 System for Troubleshooting the Retic Stain Delivery, 4.24-6
4.25-1 Setting Up the GEN•S System for the Retic Clearing Solution Volume
Check, 4.25-2
4.25-2 Setting Up the LH 750 System for the Retic Clearing Solution Volume
Check, 4.25-2
4.25-5 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Retic Clearing Solution
Delivery, 4.25-5
4.25-6 Replacing the Retic Clearing Solution Pump, 4.25-6
4.26-1 Setting Up the Instrument, 4.26-2

4.26-3 Replacing the Cleaning Agent Pump, 4.26-3
4.27-1 Manual-Mode Pump Adjustments, 4.27-2

4.27-2 Automatic-Mode Pump Adjustments, 4.27-4
4.27-3 Setting Up for Troubleshooting Aspiration Pump, 4.27-5
4.27-4 Replacing the Aspiration Pump, 4.27-7
4.28-1 Setting Up the Instrument for the Diff Lytic Reagent Volume Check, 4.28-2
4.28-2 Reading the Volumetric Cylinder for Diff Lytic Reagent (ELYSE), 4.28-3
4.28-5 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Diff Lytic Reagent
Delivery, 4.28-7
4.28-6 Replacing the Diff Lytic Reagent Pump, 4.28-9
4.29-1 Setting Up the Instrument for the Diff Preservative Volume Check, 4.29-2
4.29-2 Reading the Volumetric Cylinder for Diff Preservative (SLYSE), 4.29-3
4.29-5 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Diff Preservative
Delivery, 4.29-7
4.29-6 Replacing the Diff Preservative Pump, 4.29-9
4.30-1 Reagent Reservoir Components, Old Style, 4.30-1

4.30-2 Reagent Reservoir Components, New Style, 4.30-2
4.31-1 WBC Bath Tubing Disconnected for Lytic Reagent/Diluent Timing

Hookup, 4.31-2
PN 4277219B 4-xv
CONTENTS
4.31-2 Equipment Hookup for Lytic Reagent/Diluent Timing Procedure on the GEN•S
System, 4.31-2
4.31-3 Equipment Hookup for Lytic Reagent/Diluent Timing Procedure on the LH 750
System, 4.31-3
4.32-1 Replacing the Hgb Lamp, 4.32-1
4.34-1 Brightness Potentiometer Location on the GEN•S System Scope Module, 4.34-1
4.34-2 Contrast Potentiometer Location on the LH 750 System, 4.34-2
4.35-1 Disconnecting Pneumatic Tubing from the Belt Advance Cylinder, 4.35-1
4.35-2 Tube Detector Assembly Allen Screw, 4.35-2
4.36-1 Belt Drive Assembly, Front View, Upside Down, 4.36-1
4.37-1 Removing the Under Left Stack Switch, 4.37-1
4.38-1 Removing the Under Right Stack Switch, 4.38-1

4.40-2 Removing the Lift Cylinder from the Cassette Transport Assembly
Channel, 4.40-2
4.40-3 Lift Up Switch Activator Setscrew, 4.40-4
4.41-1 Removing the Top Left or Top Right Safety Switch, 4.41-1
4.42-1 Adjusting the Flippers, 4.42-1
4.43-1 Left Pivot Pin and Retaining Setscrew, 4.43-1
4.44-1 Bed Position Sensor Locations, 4.44-1

4.44-2 Bed Position Flag/Sensor Adjustment Screws, 4.44-2

4.45-2 Checking and Changing the Bed Rock Rate, 4.45-2
4.47-1 Tube Detector Height Adjustment, 4.47-1

4.49-1 Bar-Code Test Screen with Typical Data, 4.49-1
4.51-1 Bar-Code Scanner Home Position Alignment, 4.51-2

4.51-2 Bar-Code Scanner Alignment with Stripper Plate, 4.51-3
4-xvi PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
4
4.51-3 Bar-Code Scanner Housing and Mounting Block, 4.51-4
4.51-5 BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block Installed, 4.51-6
4.51-6 Bar-Code Scanner Adjustment Point Locations, 4.51-6
4.51-7 Height Over Cassette Label Adjustment, 4.51-7
4.51-9 Bar-Code Scanner Alignment Components, 4.51-10
4.51-10Bar-Code Scanner and Mounting Block, 4.51-10
4.52-1 Bar-Code Scanner Card Pins and Test Points, 4.52-2
4.53-1 Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor and Guide Rod Magnet, 4.53-1
4.53-2 Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor and Mounting Bracket, 4.53-2
4.54-1 Bar-Code Decoder Card Jumper and Pin Locations, 4.54-2

4.54-2 Comparing Cassette and Tube Label Waveforms, 4.54-5
4.55-1 Replacing the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module, 4.55-1

4.55-3 Replacing the Bubble/Blood Detectors of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the
4.57-1 Removing the Needle Cap-Piercer Module, 4.57-1


4.58-2 Captive Screws Securing Probe-Wipe Module to BSV Module, 4.58-2
4.58-3 Replacing Components in a Probe-Wipe Module with a Stationary Backwash
Cup, 4.58-3
4.58-4 Replacing Components in a Probe-Wipe Module with a Moveable Backwash
Cup, 4.58-4
4.58-5 Alignment of the Cleaning Truck Bracket in a Module with Moveable Backwash
Cup, 4.58-5
4.59-1 Replacing the Hand-Detector Assembly, 4.59-

1
4.60-1 Accessing the BSV Insulator, Housing and Spring, 4.60-2
4.60-2 Installing the BSV Components, 4.60-2
4.60-3 Probe Position Sensor Orientation, 4.60-4
4.62-1 Removing the Retic Motor from the Retic Module, 4.62-1
4.62-2 Removing the Retic Motor from the Random Access Module, 4.62-3
4.63-1 Removing the Stain and Retic Chamber Bracket from the Retic Module, 4.63-1
4.63-2 Removing the Stain and Retic Chamber Bracket from the Random Access
Module, 4.63-2
4.64-1 Peltier Module, Rear and Front View, 4.64-1
4.65-1 Stain Heater Connector, 4.65-1
PN 4277219B 4-xvii
CONTENTS
4.66-1 Diff Preservative Pump Low Volume Adjustments, 4.66-2

4.66-2 Diff Preservative Pump High Volume Adjustments, 4.66-3

4.67-2 Replacing the Diff Heater on a Retic Module, 4.67-2
4.67-3 Replacing the Diff Heater on a Random Access Module, 4.67-2
4.68-1 Replacing the Diff Mixing Chamber, 4.68-1
4.69-1 Releasing the Ground Wire for the Diff Mixing Chamber Motor, 4.69-1
4.69-2 Removing the Diff Mixing Chamber Motor, 4.69-2
4.71-1 VCS Optimization Procedure Flow, 4.71-2
Backplane, 4.74-2
4.74-2 RF Detector Preamp Card Test Points and Adjustments, 4.74-3
4.75-1 Acceptable Static DC Noise Display, 4.75-1

4.75-2 Unacceptable Static DC Noise Display, 4.75-1
4.75-3 Acceptable Dynamic DC Noise, 4.75-2
4.75-4 Acceptable Static RF Noise Display, 4.75-3
4.75-5 Unacceptable Static RF Noise Display, 4.75-3
4.75-6 Acceptable Dynamic RF Noise Display, 4.75-3
4.75-7 RF 60 Hz, 4.75-5
4.75-8 RF 60 Hz with Noise Spikes, 4.75-5
4.75-9 Normal RF Random Baseline, 4.75-5
4.75-10RF Output with Bubble Trapped in Sheath 2, 4.75-6
4.75-11Normal RF Baseline while Cycling Diluent, 4.75-6
4.75-12Noisy RF Baseline while Cycling Diluent, 4.75-6
4.75-13Normal RF Baseline while Cycling Diluent (RF Noise 22 mV), 4.75-7
4.75-14Noisy RF Baseline while Cycling Diluent (RF Noise >100 mV), 4.75-7
4.75-15LATRON Control Sample with a Good RF Tube and Box, 4.75-7
4.75-16LATRON Control Sample with Bad RF Tube and Box, 4.75-8
4.75-17RF Output Running LATRON Control (LEAK at Flow Cell Fitting), 4.75-8
4.75-18LATRON Control Run with DC Gain Drop, 4.75-8
4.75-19Acceptable Static LS Noise Display, 4.75-10
4.75-20Unacceptable Static LS Noise Display, 4.75-10
4.75-21Acceptable Dynamic LS Noise Display, 4.75-10
4.76-1 Laser and Flow Cell Alignment Workflow, 4.76-2

4.76-2 Flow-Cell Z-Axis Alignment, 4.76-3
4.76-3 Scatter Sensor Laser Diffraction, 4.76-4
4.76-4 Flow-Cell X- and Y-Axis Plate Adjustment, 4.76-5
4.76-5 Laser Reflected Light Beam with Special Shield Installed, 4.76-6
4.76-6 Laser Diffraction Pattern on Paper, 4.76-7
4.79-1 Wetting Applicator with Alcohol, 4.79-2

4.79-2 Wiping Front of Flow Cell, 4.79-2
4-xviii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
4
4.79-3 Wiping Rear of Flow Cell, 4.79-2
4.80-1 Removing the Lens Block, 4.80-1
4.82-1 Removing an Analyzer Door Gas Spring, 4.82-1

4.83-2 Captive Screws Securing Random Access Module, 4.83-2
TABLES
4.2-1 Analyzer SERVICE MENU Options, 4.2-2
4.2-2 Analyzer ELECTRONIC TESTS MENU Options, 4.2-4
4.2-3 Analyzer DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES MENU Options, 4.2-4
4.2-4 Analyzer SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MENU Options, 4.2-5
4.2-5 Analyzer DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS MENU Options, 4.2-5
4.2-6 Analyzer MORE DIAGNOSTICS MENU Options, 4.2-5
4.2-7 Analyzer DIFF PROCESSOR DIAGNOSTICS MENU Options, 4.2-6
4.2-8 Analyzer DIAGNOSTICS DUMP MENU Options, 4.2-6
4.3-1 Analyzer Scope Modes, 4.3-3
4.6-1 Analyzer Circuit Card and Scope Module Replacement Instructions, 4.6-4
4.7-1 Diluter Cards’ Replacement Instructions, 4.7-4
4.30-1 Reagent Priming Functions and LEVEL Messages, 4.30-3
4.31-1 Conditions Affecting Lytic Reagent/Diluent Delivery Timing, 4.31-4

4.71-1 Purpose of VCS Optimization Procedures and Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.71-3
4.75-1 RF Troubleshooting Table, 4.75-4
4.81-1 Testing Operation of Sensors and Switches, 4.81-1
PN 4277219B 4-xix
CONTENTS
4-xx PN 4277219B
4SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES 4
4.1 POWER DOWN/POWER UP
Analytical Station Power Down/Power Up
Tools/Supplies Needed
B None
Purpose
Use this procedure before attempting any repairs or replacements in the Analytical Station.
electronic component while the power is ON, damage to the component may occur. To prevent damage to
circuit cards and other electronic components, always power down the Analytical Station completely before
removing or replacing the component.
completely before removing covers to access electronic components.
Following this Power Down procedure ensures all power is removed from the Analytical
Station, preventing damage to the components and personal injury from electric shock.
Power Down
1. On the Diluter/numeric keypad, press POWER OFF.
2. At the Power Supply:
a. Turn off the MAIN POWER circuit breaker.
b. Unplug the main ac power cable from the ac wall outlet.
Power Up
1. At the Power Supply:
b. Turn on the MAIN POWER circuit breaker. Verify the AC LINE indicator on the
Power supply reads greater than 90 Vac.
2. On the Diluter/numeric keypad, press POWER ON.
Workstation Power Down/Power Up
Purpose
Use this procedure to turn off the Workstation when necessary and to remove power before
connecting or disconnecting any components to the Workstation.
electronic component while the power is ON, damage to the component may occur. To prevent damage to
circuit cards and other electronic components, always power down completely before removing or
replacing the component.
PN 4277219B 4.1-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
WARNING Risk of personal injury. Contacting exposed electronic components while the instrument is
attached to power can cause personal injury from electric shock. Power down completely before removing
covers to access electronic components.
Following this Power Down procedure ensures all power is removed from Workstation.
B None
Power Down
1. At the Workstation, select . The following appears:
2. Select Shutdown. This closes the instrument application and the Windows® NT™
(GEN•S System) or Windows® 2000 (LH 750 System) operating system to power off
the Workstation.
3. Wait until the message on the screen indicates the Workstation is ready to be shut down.
4. Press the POWER button on the Workstation.
5. Unplug the Workstation from the ac wall outlet.
Power Up
1. Plug the Workstation into the ac wall outlet.
2. Press the POWER button on the Workstation.
4.1-2 PN 4277219B
ANALYZER SERVICE MENU OPTIONS 4
4.2 ANALYZER SERVICE MENU OPTIONS
Purpose
Use this procedure to perform any of the service routines available from the Analyzer SERVICE
MENU. These routines are described in the tables in this section. Refer to Figure A.10-1
(GEN•S System) or Figure A.10-2 (LH 750 System) for the menu tree of all the Analyzer
options, both customer and service.
B None
Procedure
1. At the Analyzer, access the MAIN MENU.
2. Press and hold the seventh button from the top of the CRT buttons (VII on the LH 750
System). This button is not identified by a screen prompt. See Figure 4.2-1.
3. Press the top button (I) and release the seventh button (VII). The SERVICE MENU
appears. See Table 4.2-1 for an explanation of the options on the SERVICE MENU.
Figure 4.2-1 Accessing the Analyzer SERVICE MENU
M A IN M E N U
2 S E R V IC E M E N U
A N A L Y Z E R F U N C T IO N S E L E C T R O N IC T E S T S
S Y S T E M C O N F IG U R A T IO N H IS T O G R A M S T A T IS T IC S
T E S T M O D E L A T E X C A L IB R A T IO N
D IA G N O S T IC R O U T IN E S
G E N S S y s te m T U R N P N E U M A T IC S O F F S P E C IA L F U N C T IO N S
1 HOLD
C Y C L E C O U N T E R : X X X X X X D IL U T E R D IA G N O S T IC S
M O D E : X X X S Y S T E M R U N
S Y S T E M R U N R E T U R N
M A IN M E N U
2 S E R V IC E M E N U
A N A L Y Z E R F U N C T IO N S I E L E C T R O N IC T E S T S I
S Y S T E M C O N F IG U R A T IO N II H IS T O G R A M S T A T IS T IC S II
III C B C L A T E X C A L IB R A T IO N III
L H 7 5 0 S y s te m IV D IA G N O S T IC R O U T IN E S IV
T U R N P N E U M A T IC S O F F V S P E C IA L F U N C T IO N S V
1 HOLD
C Y C L E C O U N T E R : X X X X X X V I D IL U T E R D IA G N O S T IC S V I
M O D E : X X X V II D IF F C A L IB R A T IO N V II
S Y S T E M R U N V III R E T U R N V III
6 4 9 8 2 0 4 B
4. Press the buttons next to the relevant prompts until the required service routine appears.
5. To exit the SERVICE MENU program, select SYSTEM RUN.
Note: Select RETURN to go back to the previous screen.
Verification
None.
PN 4277219B 4.2-1
ANALYZER SERVICE MENU OPTIONS
Table 4.2-1 Analyzer SERVICE MENU Options
Options Purposes
ELECTRONIC TESTS Allows access to RAMP TEST 0, PRECISION TEST 1, PRECISION TEST 2,
PRECISION TEST 3, PRECISION TEST 4, and COUNT options. See Table 4.2-2.
HISTOGRAM STATISTICS Provides count, mean, sigma (SD) and mode data for the WBC, RBC, and Plt
histograms of the last sample run.
LATEX CALIBRATION (GEN•S System On the GEN•S System, displays LATEX CALIBRATION screen, allowing access
only) to the following options needed to compute the correct aperture current
GEN•S System in CBC only mode settings during latex calibration:
CHANGE VALUES Allows entry of the red and white aperture current settings and the volume of
the latex particles.
AP CUR ON/OFF Switches between AP CUR ON and AP CUR OFF. AP CUR ON turns on the
aperture current and displays the current value for the selected aperture. AP
CUR OFF turns off the aperture current.
APERTURE 1/2/3 Switches between APERTURE 1, APERTURE 2 and APERTURE 3, determining
which aperture’s data appears in the RED AP VOLTAGE, WHT AP VOLTAGE and
LATEX VOLUME fields.
ASPIRATE SAMPLE Initiates the latex calibration cycle, aspirating latex particles through the
aspirator tip. When the cycle is finished, press COMPUTE to view the new
aperture current settings and latex volume.
LATEX CALIBRATION (GEN•S System On the GEN•S System, displays DIFF CALIBRATION screen, allowing access to
only) the following options needed to collect data for TTM alignment and latex
GEN•S System in Diff and/or Retic verification.
mode
ASPIRATE Initiates the latex calibration cycle, aspirating latex particles through the
aspirator tip, and initiates a continuous flow of dilution from the mixing
chamber through the flow cell.
RECOUNT Initiates a recount of latex particles. Can recount a maximum of three times.
VCS Displays DIFF CALIBRATION screen with a composite of V, C and S pulses.
V/C/S Displays DIFF CALIBRATION screen with a single set of pulses and switches
between the pulses displayed in this order: V, C, and S.
PHASE ADJ Displays the phase adjustment between V and S.
LS Displays the LS drift.
D/R/S Switches the gain setting from diff to retic to gain setting. Letter flashing is
gain setting selected.
QUIT If you pressed ASPIRATE, QUIT stops the flow of liquid through the flow cell,
rinses the mixing chamber to remove residual particles and stays at the DIFF
CALIBRATION screen.
If you did not press ASPIRATE, QUIT exits the DIFF CALIBRATION screen and
returns to the SERVICE MENU.
4.2-2 PN 4277219B
Table 4.2-1 Analyzer SERVICE MENU Options (Continued)
Options Purposes
CBC CALIBRATION (LH 750 System On the LH 750 System, displays LATEX CALIBRATION screen, allowing access
only) to the following options needed to compute the correct aperture current
settings during latex calibration:
CHANGE VALUES Allows entry of the red and white aperture current settings and the volume of
the latex particles.
AP CUR ON/OFF Switches between AP CUR ON and AP CUR OFF. AP CUR ON turns on the
aperture current and displays the current value for the selected aperture. AP
CUR OFF turns off the aperture current.
APERTURE 1/2/3 Switches between APERTURE 1, APERTURE 2 and APERTURE 3, determining
which aperture’s data appears in the RED AP VOLTAGE, WHT AP VOLTAGE and
LATEX VOLUME fields.
DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES Allows access to CRT DISPLAY TEST, RAM TEST, ROM TEST, ECHO TEST, and
SENSOR TEST options. See Table 4.2-3.
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Allows access to RAM/ROM TEST, PLT ANALYSIS, PLT NOFIT ANALYSIS
(MODE), INITIALIZE CALIBRATION FACTORS, HGB VOLTAGE, and
CHANGE/DISPLAY CYCLE COUNT options. See Table 4.2-4.
DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS Allows access to DILUTER VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES and ELECTRICAL/
PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES options. See Table 4.2-5.
DIFF CALIBRATION (LH 750 System On the LH 750 System, displays DIFF CALIBRATION screen, allowing access to
only) the following options needed to collect data for TTM alignment and latex
verification.
ASPIRATE Initiates the latex calibration cycle, aspirating latex particles through the
aspirator tip, and initiates a continuous flow of dilution from the mixing
chamber through the flow cell.
RECOUNT Initiates a recount of latex particles. Can recount a maximum of three times.
VCS Displays DIFF CALIBRATION screen with a composite of V, C and S pulses.
V/C/S Displays DIFF CALIBRATION screen with a single set of pulses and switches
between the pulses displayed in this order: V, C, and S.
PHASE ADJ Displays the phase adjustment between V and S.
LS Displays the LS drift.
D/R Switches the aspiration and gain mode between diff and retic. Letter flashing is
mode selected.
QUIT If you pressed ASPIRATE, QUIT stops the flow of liquid through the flow cell,
rinses the mixing chamber to remove residual particles and stays at the DIFF
CALIBRATION screen.
If you did not press ASPIRATE, QUIT exits the DIFF CALIBRATION screen and
returns to the SERVICE MENU.
PN 4277219B 4.2-3
Table 4.2-2 Analyzer ELECTRONIC TESTS MENU Options
Options Purposes
RAMP TEST (LH 750 System only) Routine startup test. Generates the same number of each different size pulse to
check the channelizing circuitry’s ability to build a proper histogram.
RAMP TEST 0 (GEN•S System only) Routine startup test. Generates the same number of each different size pulse to
check the channelizing circuitry’s ability to build a proper histogram.
PRECISION TEST (LH 750 System only) Generates two sets of precision pulses with different amplitudes to produce
two peaks of the same height. This multichannel check for different sized
pulses generated at the same time is used primarily for RDW.
PRECISION TEST 1 (GEN•S System Generates a set of precision pulses of identical height to check the RBC and
only) WBC counters.
In addition, uses a predetermined set of histograms (the WBC histogram has
two subpopulations of cells) to check the software’s ability to derive and
compute parameter results.
PRECISION TEST 2 (GEN•S System Generates two sets of precision pulses with different amplitudes to produce
only) two peaks of the same height. This multichannel check for different sized
pulses generated at the same time is used primarily for RDW.
PRECISION TEST 3 (GEN•S System Routine startup test. Generates a set of precision pulses of identical height to
only) check the RBC and WBC counters.
In addition, uses a predetermined set of histograms (the WBC histogram has
three subpopulations of cells) to check the software’s ability to derive and
compute parameter results.
PRECISION TEST 4 (GEN•S System Generates six sets of precision pulses with different amplitudes to produce six
only) peaks of the same height.
COUNT Performs a count on the contents of the RBC and WBC baths.
Table 4.2-3 Analyzer DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES MENU Options
Options Purposes
CRT DISPLAY TEST Checks display ability of Analyzer CRT screen. The screen fills with a series of
numbers and letters.
RAM TEST Tests RAM memory addresses for pass-fail condition. Press RESET to exit.
ROM TEST Checks ROM addresses for faults.
ECHO TEST Initiates echo test. Requires installation of cable adapter.
SENSOR TEST Displays the current state of the Diluter sensors and switches and can be used
to determine if they are working correctly. See Heading 4.81 for Diluter sensor
and switch functions, and System messages.
MORE DIAGNOSTICS Allows access to RED AND WHITE COUNTERS, DIFF PROCESSOR
DIAGNOSTICS, PLATELET NO FIT (MEAN), DIAGNOSTICS DUMP, CRT KEY
TEST and CRT ALIGNMENT TEST. See Table 4.2-6.
4.2-4 PN 4277219B
Table 4.2-4 Analyzer SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MENU Options
Options Purposes
RAM/ROM TEST Initiates Analyzer memory test. Turns off pneumatics at completion of test.
PLT FIT ANALYSIS Initiates a platelet fit analysis on the last sample run.
PLT NOFIT ANALYSIS (MODE) Initiates a platelet no fit analysis on the last sample run.
INITIALIZE CALIBRATION FACTORS ATTENTION: No warning screen is displayed. DO NOT select this option unless
you are sure you want to reset the calibration factors.
Resets the following:
r Calibration factors (Avg, AP2 and AP3 and Manual mode) to 1.000
r Hgb timer drain to 15
r RBC voltages to 149.9 and WBC voltages to 119.9.
HGB VOLTAGE Displays real-time Hgb lamp voltage.
CHANGE/DISPLAY CYCLE COUNT Allows changing of the cycle counter value.
Table 4.2-5 Analyzer DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS MENU Options
Options Purposes
DILUTER VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES Displays real-time values for Diluter and Diluter left voltages, diff and Diluter
ambient temperatures. Displays real-time temperatures and their ranges for diff
heater, Peltier module and stain heater.
ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES Displays real-time values for 60 psi, 30 psi, 5 psi, high and low vacuum,
voltages for ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1 and 2 cards, and ac line voltage.
Turns on zap voltage to check zap voltage.
Table 4.2-6 Analyzer MORE DIAGNOSTICS MENU Options
Options Purposes
RED AND WHITE COUNTERS Displays red and white raw counts for each aperture from last sample run. On
the LH 750 System, it also displays the wait count.
DIFF PROCESSOR DIAGNOSTICS Allows access to DIFF PROCESSOR RAM TEST, DIFF TIMER TEST, DIFF
PROCESSOR DUART TEST, and DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST. See Table 4.2-7.
PLATELET NO FIT (MEAN) Performs a platelet no fit (mean) on last sample run.
DIAGNOSTICS DUMP Allows access to DUMP APERTURES, I/O BUFFER, MANUAL HGB TIMER
DRAIN, PC COMMUNICATION TEST and CLENZ REMOVAL TIME (LH 750
System only) options. See Table 4.2-8.
CRT KEY TEST Allows a check of the CRT buttons. Screen displays PRESSED next to button
pressed. To exit this test, press bottom button twice.
CRT ALIGNMENT TEST Allows a check of the CRT alignment. Shows dimensional data and button
positions.
Note: To align the CRT, you must remove the Scope module from the Analyzer.
See Heading 4.6.
PN 4277219B 4.2-5
Table 4.2-7 Analyzer DIFF PROCESSOR DIAGNOSTICS MENU Options
Options Purposes
DIFF PROCESSOR RAM TEST Initiates self-test of DIFF PROCESSOR card on-board RAM.
DIFF TIMER TEST Initiates self-test of DIFF PROCESSOR card timing circuit.
DIFF PROCESSOR DUART TEST Initiates self-test of DIFF PROCESSOR card output ports.
DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST Generates a series of pulses to test the DIFF PROCESSOR and ANALOG cards
for proper histogram development. The data is displayed on the Workstation’s
Service Diff Latex Calibration screen.
Table 4.2-8 Analyzer DIAGNOSTICS DUMP MENU Options
Options Purposes
DUMP APERTURES Displays aperture 1, aperture 2, aperture 3 and average values for the WBC,
RBC, Hgb, Hct, MCV, MCH, MCHC, RDW, Plt, Pct, MPV, and PDW parameters
from the last sample run.
I/O BUFFER Displays the latest messages exchanged between the AMC and the Diluter,
DIFF PROCESSOR card, dual port RAM and the Workstation.
MANUAL HGB TIMER DRAIN XX Displays the timer value for draining the Hgb cuvette from 2 to 55 minutes.
Default is 15. New value can be entered at keypad.
PC COMMUNICATION TEST Does a continuous transmission to the Workstation until the RESET button is
pressed.
CLENZ REMOVAL TIME (hrs) XX Allows service to set the time (in hours) the Analytical Station will sit after a
Shutdown cycle before it automatically cycles diluent to flush out the cleaning
agent. The limits are 30 minutes to 24 hours. The default setting is 00 which
represents 30 minutes. Any setting over 24 is interpreted as 24 hours.
4.2-6 PN 4277219B
ANALYZER SCOPE MENU OPTIONS 4
4.3 ANALYZER SCOPE MENU OPTIONS
Purpose
Use this procedure to access the Analyzer SCOPE MENU and change the display speed of a
sample for troubleshooting purposes. Table 4.3-1 lists the Analyzer scope modes and the
display speeds available for each mode. The figures referenced in Table 4.3-1 are an artist’s
rendition of how the displays should appear. Refer to Figure A.10-1 (GEN•S System) or
Figure A.10-2 (LH 750 System) for the menu tree of all Analyzer options.
ATTENTION: At the time of this publication, not all of these modes have been tested on the
LH 750 System.
B None
Procedure
ATTENTION: If the power is interrupted or if the system is reset, all displays return to their
normal or slow speeds.
1. At the Analyzer, access the MAIN MENU.
2. Press and hold the sixth button from the top of the CRT buttons (VI on the LH 750
System). This button is not identified by a prompt. See Figure 4.3-1.
3. Press the top button (I) and release the sixth button (VI). The SCOPE MENU appears.
Figure 4.3-1 Accessing the Analyzer SCOPE MENU
2
M A IN M E N U SSCOPE
C O P E MENU
M E N U
A N A L Y Z E R F U N C T IO N S E L E C T R O N I C CT E B S C T / D S I F F
S Y S T E M C O N F IG U R A T IO N H IS T O G R A M S T A T C I B S C T I CO S N L Y
T E S T M O D E L A T E X C A L I B D R IA F T F I O O N N L Y
D I A GF 5 N 5 O T S E T S I C T R( F O A U S T T I / N S E L SO W )
G E N S S y s te m 1 HOLD
T U R N P N E U M A T IC S O F F S P E C IA L F U N C T IO N S
C Y C L E C O U N T E R : X X X X X X E L E C ./P N E U . S U P P IE S
M O D E : X X X S Y S S T Y E S M T E R M U RN U N
S Y S T E M R U N R E TR U E R T UN R N
2
M A IN M E N U S C O P E M E N U
A N A L Y Z E R F U N C T IO N S E L E C T R O N I C CT E B S C T / D S I F F
I I
S Y S T E M C O N F IG U R A T IO N II H IS T O G R A M S T A T C I B S C T I CO S N L Y
II
III L A T E X C A L I B D R IA F T F I O O N N L Y
III
L H 7 5 0 S y s te m IV D I A GF 5 N 5 O T S E T S I C T R( F O A U S T T I / N S E L SO W )
IV
1 HOLD
S P E C IA L F U N C T IO N S
T U R N P N E U M A T IC S O F F V V
C Y C L E C O U N T E R : X X X X X X V I E L E C ./P N E U . S U P P IE S V I
M O D E : X X X V II S Y S S T Y E S M T E R M U RN U N V II
S Y S T E M R U N V III R E TR U E R T U N R N V III
6 4 9 8 2 0 5 B
PN 4277219B 4.3-1
ANALYZER SCOPE MENU OPTIONS
4. To change the speed for a blood sample:

a. Press the button next to the prompt for the desired mode (CBC/DIFF, CBC ONLY or
DIFF ONLY). N (normal) and F (fast) appear in the upper right-hand corner of the
screen; the selected speed is flashing.
b. Press the button next to the prompt for the desired speed.
Note: These are real-time displays and can be used as troubleshooting aids.
c. Select RETURN on the Analyzer repeatedly until SYSTEM RUN appears.
d. Cycle a sample in the Automatic or Manual mode and watch the display screen.
During COUNT the sample is displayed in the selected speed.
5. To change the speed for a LATRON sample cycled in the F55 mode:
a. On the SCOPE MENU, the selected speed for F55 (fast or slow) is flashing. Press
the button next to the F55 (FAST/SLOW) prompt to change the speed.
Note: The button next to the prompt switches between fast and slow.
b. Select RETURN on the Analyzer repeatedly until SYSTEM RUN appears.
c. Select F55 at the Diluter/numeric keypad.
d. Cycle a sample of LATRON control when prompted and watch the display screen.
During COUNT the sample is displayed in the selected speed.
6. To change the speed for an electronic test:
a. On the SCOPE MENU, the selected speed for the electronic tests (fast or slow) is
flashing. Press the button next to the F55 (FAST/SLOW) prompt to change the
speed.
Note: The button next to the prompt switches between fast and slow.
b. Select RETURN on the Analyzer repeatedly until the MAIN MENU appears.
c. Access the SERVICE MENU (Heading 4.2) and select ELECTRONIC TESTS.
d. Initiate the desired electronic test; it is displayed in the selected speed.
7. When you are finished using this option, set the speed back to slow/normal, then cycle a
sample to verify the instrument works correctly.
Verification
None.
4.3-2 PN 4277219B
Table 4.3-1 Analyzer Scope Modes
Display Speed
(- means it is not displayed in this speed)
Sample Type Scope Mode Fast Slow or Normal Example
Electronic Pulses Ramp Test 0 F S Figure 4.3-2

Precision Test 1 F S
Count Test F N Figure 4.3-3
Diff Analog Pulses Test F - Figure 4.3-4
LATRON V,C, S F - Figure 4.3-5
V F - Figure 4.3-6
C F - Figure 4.3-7
S F - Figure 4.3-8
Phase Adj. F - Figure 4.3-9
LS Drift - S Figure 4.3-10
F55 F S Figure 4.3-11
Blood CBC + Diff F N Figure 4.3-12
CBC Only F N Figure 4.3-13
Diff Only F N Figure 4.3-14
Figure 4.3-2 Electronic Test Displays
PN 4277219B 4.3-3
Figure 4.3-3 Count Test Displays
Figure 4.3-4 Diff Analog Pulses Test Display
Figure 4.3-5 VCS LATRON Control Display
4.3-4 PN 4277219B
Figure 4.3-6 Volume Display
Figure 4.3-7 Conductivity Display
Figure 4.3-8 Light Scatter Display
PN 4277219B 4.3-5
Figure 4.3-9 Phase Adjust Display
Figure 4.3-10 Light Scatter Drift Displays
Figure 4.3-11 F55 Displays
4.3-6 PN 4277219B
Figure 4.3-12 CBC + Diff Displays
Figure 4.3-13 CBC Only Displays
Figure 4.3-14 Diff Only Displays
PN 4277219B 4.3-7
4.3-8 PN 4277219B
DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST 4
4.4 DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST
Use this procedure to test the ANALOG and DIFF PROCESSOR cards.
B RF Preamp Dummy Load, PN 6858098
Procedure
1. Disconnect the RF coaxial cable from the RF Detector Preamp and install the RF Preamp
Dummy Load.
2. Reset the Analytical Station.
3. At the Workstation, select tt .

4. At the Analyzer, access the SERVICE MENU (Heading 4.2) and select DIAGNOSTIC
ROUTINES tt MORE DIAGNOSTICS tt DIFF PROCESSOR DIAGNOSTICS tt DIFF
ANALOG PULSES TEST.
5. Check the results and verify the mean and mode channels are within the specifications in
Table A.1-9.
See Figure 4.4-1 for an example of the display on the GEN•S System Workstation. With
the exception of the icons displayed, the Diff Analog Pulses Test display on the LH 750
System Workstation is the same.
Note: If the results for V, C, and S fail to meet the specifications, the fault is either the
DIFF PROCESSOR or the ANALOG card.
Figure 4.4-1 Diff Analog Pulses Test Display on the GEN•S System VCS Calibration Screen
6. Disconnect the RF Preamp Dummy Load cable and reinstall the RF coaxial cable.
PN 4277219B 4.4-1
DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST
Verification
None.
4.4-2 PN 4277219B
AUDIBLE ALARMS TESTS 4
4.5 AUDIBLE ALARMS TESTS
Purpose
The instrument uses two audible alarms, one for the CRT buttons (Analyzer keypad) and one
for the Diluter/numeric keypad, to alert the operator as follows:
r The CRT buttons alarm produces a short alarm for each valid button (key) entry
r The Diluter/numeric keypad alarm produces three sounds -
t A short alarm for each valid key entry and for the completion of a command
t A long alarm for each invalid key entry
t A continuous pulsating alarm for conditions that require the operator’s attention,
such as level sense errors.
Use these procedures to check the functioning of these alarms.
Note: The alarms are menu controlled and can be disabled.
B None
Procedure
1. From the MAIN MENU select SYSTEM CONFIGURATION tt ALARM SET UP and
ensure the alarms are enabled.
2. Select SYSTEM RUN.
3. Press DRAIN on the Diluter/numeric keypad and listen for a short tone when the button is
pressed and another short tone when the bath has finished draining.
4. Press RINSE to refill the baths.
5. Press F 0 0 on the Diluter/numeric keypad, then press F again and listen for a long tone
alarm.
6. Press CE, then press STOP until system returns to READY.
Verification
None.
PN 4277219B 4.5-1
AUDIBLE ALARMS TESTS
4.5-2 PN 4277219B
ANALYZER CARD AND SCOPE MODULE REPLACEMENT 4
4.6 ANALYZER CARD AND SCOPE MODULE REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace any circuit card or the Scope Module in the Analyzer. Special
instructions and the verification procedures are listed in Table 4.6-1.
Procedure
WARNING Contacting exposed electronic components while the Analytical Station is attached to power can
cause personal injury from electric shock. Before removing a circuit card or the Scope Module from the
Analyzer, turn off the Analytical Station and disconnect the ac power cable.
1. Power down the Analytical Station as directed under Heading 4.1.

2. Open the front door of the Analyzer.
3. To remove any circuit card except the BD ADJ card on the LH 750 System:
a. Unfasten the thumbscrews on the top and bottom edge of the card. See Figure 4.6-1.
b. Extend the white tabs to push the card out of the connector.
c. Pull the card out.
Figure 4.6-1 Removing an Analyzer Circuit Card
J27
J26
J24 J19
A. Unfasten thumbscrews B. Extend tabs C. Remove card 7253314A
PN 4277219B 4.6-1
ANALYZER CARD AND SCOPE MODULE REPLACEMENT
4. To remove the BD ADJ card:

a. Remove the left Analytical Station cover and open the left Analyzer door.
b. Disconnect the Diluter 2 card to BD ADJ card cable from J1 on the BD ADJ card. See
Figure 4.6-2.
c. Remove the Analyzer to preamp cable from its cable clamp.
d. Unfasten the thumbscrews on the top and bottom edge of the BD ADJ card and
remove the card.
Figure 4.6-2 Removing the BD ADJ Card

B D A D J
c a rd
0 4 /3 0 /9 6 I
1 2 : 3 0 :1 8 II
III
IV
V
VII
M A IN M E N U
D is c o n n e c t
1
c a b le
2 R e m o v e U n fa s te n
3
7 2 1 9 0 3 9 B c a b le th u m b s c re w s
5. To remove the Scope Module:

a. Unfasten the three thumbscrews securing the Scope Module to the Analyzer. See
Figure 4.6-3.
b. Pull the Scope Module out.
Figure 4.6-3 Removing the Scope Module
Loosen
screws
SCOPE
MODULE
7253141A
4.6-2 PN 4277219B
6. Ensure the revision level of the replacement component is correct and, where applicable,
the software level is correct.
ATTENTION: The AMC is sent with the battery disabled. Ensure the jumpers are configured to
enable the battery before installing the card.
7. Ensure any jumpers or switches on the replacement component are set correctly. See the
appropriate circuit card under Heading A.2, ANALYZER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY
COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS.
8. To install any replacement card except the BD ADJ card:
a. Extend the white tabs.
CAUTION Installing the card into the wrong slot or misaligning the card with the connectors can damage
the card or the instrument. Ensure the card is installed in the correct slot and is aligned with the connectors.
b. Align the card edges with the tracks and push the card into the Analyzer. Refer to
Figure 2.3-1 for the correct location of the card.
c. Press the white tabs down to fully seat the card in the connector.
d. Fasten the thumbscrews.
9. To install the BD ADJ card.
a. Position the card in the Analyzer as shown in Figure 4.6-2 and fasten the
thumbscrews.
b. Install the Analyzer to preamp cable in the cable clamp.
c. Connect the Diluter 2 card to BD ADJ card cable to J1 on the BD ADJ card. See
Figure 4.6-2.
d. Close the left Analyzer door and reinstall the left Analytical Station cover.
10. To install the replacement Scope Module:
a. Align the Scope Module with its tracks and push the Scope Module into the
Analyzer, using the white tabs.
b. Fasten the thumbscrews.
11. Close the front Analyzer door.
13. Ensure no error messages are displayed and that the system goes to READY.
14. Go to Table 4.6-1 and follow the special instructions for the component replaced.
PN 4277219B 4.6-3
Table 4.6-1 Analyzer Circuit Card and Scope Module Replacement Instructions
Component Replaced Special Instructions*

AMC 1. From the SERVICE MENU, select SPECIAL FUNCTIONS tt INITIALIZE
CALIBRATION FACTORS to initialize the calibration factors.
2. Transfer all Automatic mode calibration factors from the Workstation.
3. Manually enter the manual mode calibration factors and Preamp voltages.
4. Select the correct Analyzer menu settings.
r On a GEN•S System, do the Selecting the Analyzer Menu Settings procedure
under Heading 3.7, CHECKING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION.
r On an LH 750 System, do the Selecting the Analyzer Menu Settings
procedure under Heading 3.16, CHECKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM
ANALYTICAL STATION.
(VCS) ANALOG card Do the Diff and Retic Verification, Heading 5.6.
ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY1 card 1. Ensure the LED on the front of the card is green.
2. From the SERVICE MENU, select DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt
ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES and ensure the voltages are within the
limits specified in Table A.1-25.
ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 2 card 1. Ensure the LED on the front of the card is green.
2. From the SERVICE MENU, select DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt
ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES and ensure the voltages are within the
API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card Do the following CBC Calibration procedures:
(GEN•S System 1. Heading 4.8, CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES.
2. Heading 4.9, CBC CALIBRATION - LATEX VOLTAGE.
3. Heading 4.10, CBC CALIBRATION - FLOW RATE.
BD ADJ card Adjust the bubble/blood detectors. See Adjustment of the Bubble/Blood Detectors
(LH 750 System) on the Random Access Module under Heading 4.55, BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT.
DIFF PROCESSOR card Do the Diff and Retic Verification, Heading 5.6.
DILUTER CPU card Cycle several samples to ensure no errors are generated.
(LH 750 System)
DILUTER PROCESSOR card Cycle several samples to ensure no errors are generated.
(GEN•S System)
PLATELET PROCESSOR card Do the following CBC Calibration procedures:
1. Heading 4.8, CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP card Do the following CBC Calibration procedures:
(GEN•S System) 1. Heading 4.8, CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES.
*Ensure any jumpers and/or switches are set as indicated for the card under Heading A.2 before installing the
card and performing these actions.
4.6-4 PN 4277219B
Table 4.6-1 Analyzer Circuit Card and Scope Module Replacement Instructions (Continued)
Component Replaced Special Instructions*

RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card Do the following CBC Calibration procedures:
(GEN•S System) 1. Heading 4.8, CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES.
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card Do the following CBC Calibration procedures:
(LH 750 System) 1. Heading 4.8, CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES.
R/W/P Signal Conditioner/Analyzer Do the following CBC Calibration procedures:
card 1. Heading 4.8, CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES.
(LH 750 System
Scope Module Verify displays are clear and legible.
*Ensure any jumpers and/or switches are set as indicated for the card under Heading A.2 before installing the
card and performing these actions.
PN 4277219B 4.6-5
4.6-6 PN 4277219B
DILUTER CARD REPLACEMENT 4
4.7 DILUTER CARD REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use these procedures to replace any circuit card in the Diluter except the Reservoir Interface
card and the Keyboard and Display Interface card. Special instructions and the verification
procedures are listed in Table 4.7-1.
Replacement of the Reservoir Interface card is covered under Heading 4.30. The Keyboard
and Display Interface card is only replaced as part of the Diluter LCD Display assembly.
Bar-Code Decoder Card Replacement
B Phillips-head screwdriver, medium
B 5/16-in. hex nut driver
Removal
cause personal injury from electric shock. Before removing a circuit card from the Diluter, turn off the
Analytical Station and disconnect the ac power cable.

2. Open the right rear door of the Diluter. See Figure 4.7-1.
Figure 4.7-1 Removing the Bar-Code Decoder Card

GROUND
P1 STRAP BAR-CODE
CABLE
DECODER
P2 CARD COVER
BAR-CODE
DECODER
CARD COVER
BAR-CODE
DECODER
CARD
P1
Inside view
7253251A
PN 4277219B 4.7-1
DILUTER CARD REPLACEMENT
ATTENTION: Retain all hardware for use when installing the replacement card.
3. Remove the hardware securing the card’s ground strap.

4. Disconnect cable P2.
5. Loosen the two screws securing the card’s protective cover and remove the cover.
6. Turn the cover over and disconnect cable P1.
7. Remove the hardware securing the Bar-Code Decoder card to the cover and retain the
hardware.
Installation
1. Secure the Bar-Code Decoder card to its cover.
2. Connect the disconnected cables to the replacement card. Refer to Figure A.3-1 for the
correct connector locations.
3. Attach the cover to the right rear door of the Diluter.
4. Reinstall the ground strap.
5. Power up the instrument.
7. Go to Table 4.7-1 and follow the special instructions for the Bar-Code Decoder card.
Six-Channel Preamp Card Relocation or Replacement (LH 750 System)
B Screwdriver (for lowering the Six-Channel Preamp card)
B Phillips-head screwdriver, medium
Relocation or Removal
1. Open both rear doors of the Diluter. See Figure 4.7-2.

2. Disconnect the Analyzer to Preamp cable and the six coaxial cables.
3. To lower the Six-Channel Preamp card to access the apertures, unfasten the top two
captive screws and swing the card assembly down. See Figure 4.7-2 A.
4. To remove the Six-Channel Preamp card -

a. Remove the four Phillips-head screws securing the Six-Channel Preamp card cover
and remove the cover. See Figure 4.7-2 B.
Note: The top left screw also secures the test connector cover plate.
b. Remove the six standoffs securing the Six-Channel Preamp card and remove the
card.
4.7-2 PN 4277219B
Figure 4.7-2 Lowering the Six-Channel Preamp Card Assembly or Removing the Card Cover
1 Unfasten 1 Remove
7219015B A. Lowering the Assembly B. Removing the Card Cover
Installation
1. Position the Six-Channel Preamp card in its assembly frame and secure it with the six
standoffs.
2. Reinstall the Six-Channel Preamp card cover and the test connector cover plate.
3. Connect the Analyzer to Preamp cable and the six coaxial cables to the card. Refer to
Figure A.3-20 for the correct connector locations.
4. Go to Table 4.7-1 and follow the special instructions for the Six-Channel Preamp card.
Diluter Card Replacements (except Bar-Code Decoder, Six-Channel Preamp, and Reservoir
Interface Cards)
Removal

2. Open the appropriate Diluter door to access the card. The Diluter card location
illustrations are referenced in Table 4.7-1.
PN 4277219B 4.7-3
3. Remove the card’s protective cover.

4. Disconnect all cables connected to the card.
5. Remove the hardware securing the card.
6. Ensure the revision level of the replacement card is correct and, where applicable, the
software level.
7. Ensure any jumpers or switches on the replacement card are set correctly. See the
appropriate circuit card under Heading A.3, DILUTER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY
COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS.
Installation
1. Secure the card to the appropriate door/panel with the retained hardware.
2. Connect the disconnected cables to the replacement card. See the appropriate circuit
card under Heading A.3, DILUTER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT
DESCRIPTIONS, for the correct connector locations.
5. Go to Table 4.7-1 and follow the special instructions for the card replaced.
6. Reinstall the cover.
R
Table 4.7-1 Diluter Cards’ Replacement Instructions
Figure Reference
GEN•S LH 750
Card Replaced System System Special Instructions
Bar-Code Decoder 2.4-6 2.4-14 Do Heading 4.49, BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST.
Diff Power Supply 2.4-4 2.4-12 From the SERVICE MENU, select DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGES/
TEMPERATURES and ensure the voltages are within the limits specified in
Table A.1-29.
Diluter 1 2.4-4 2.4-12 1. Verify all LEDs on the card are working correctly. See Table A.3-4.
2. From the SERVICE MENU, select DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGES/
TEMPERATURES and ensure the Diluter 1 voltages are within the limits
specified in Table A.1-29.
Diluter 2 2.4-5 2.4-13 1. Ensure all LEDs on the card are working correctly. See Table A.3-6.
TEMPERATURES and ensure the Diluter Left voltages are within the
3. Do the Adjustment of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module
procedure under Heading 4.55, BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT.
Diluter 3 2.4-5 2.4-13 Ensure the SW SCAN LED is flashing.
4.7-4 PN 4277219B
Table 4.7-1 Diluter Cards’ Replacement Instructions
Figure Reference
GEN•S LH 750
Card Replaced System System Special Instructions
Diluter 4 2.4-7 2.4-15 1. Ensure the SW SCAN LED is flashing.
TEMPERATURES and verify the heater values are within the limits
displayed and the voltages are within the limits specified in Table A.1-29.
3. Do Heading 4.65, HEATER CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS.
Diluter Cable Adapter 2.4-5 2.4-13 Cycle several samples to ensure no errors are generated.
Diluter/Solenoid/ 2.4-5 2.4-13 1. Ensure all LEDs on the card are working correctly.
Optics Power Supply 2. From the SERVICE MENU, select DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGES/
TEMPERATURES and ensure the Diluter Left voltages are within the
Light Scatter Preamp 2.4-3 2.4-10 1. Do Heading 4.77, LS GAIN ADJUSTMENT.
Module 2. Do the LS Verification and RMS Noise Check under Heading 4.75, VCS
NOISE CHECKS.
3. Do Heading 4.78, LATRON VERIFICATION PROCEDURE.
PVT 2.4-4 2.4-12 From the SERVICE MENU, select DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt ELECTRICAL/
PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES and VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES and verify the
pressures are within the limits specified in Table A.1-13 and the temperature
is within the limits displayed.
RF Detector Preamp 2.4-3 2.4-10 1. Do Heading 4.74, RF DETECTOR PREAMP CARD ADJUSTMENTS.
2. Do the DC Verification, RF Verification, and RMS Noise Check under
Heading 4.75, VCS NOISE CHECKS
3. Do Heading 4.78, LATRON VERIFICATION PROCEDURE.
RS/Opto Intfc 2.4-4 2.4-12 Cycle several samples to ensure no errors are generated.
Sensor Distribution 2.4-4 2.4-12 Cycle several samples in the Automatic and Manual modes and verify no
errors are generated.
Six-Channel Preamp N/A 2.4-11 Do the following CBC Calibration procedures:
(LH 750 System) 1. Heading 4.8, CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES.
PN 4277219B 4.7-5
4.7-6 PN 4277219B
CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES 4
4.8 CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
Purpose
ATTENTION: Although the Analytical Station is relatively insensitive to minor room
temperature changes, calibration should be performed when the room temperature is stable
and within the average temperature range, and should be verified whenever the room
temperature changes by more than 5°C (10°F)
The CBC Calibration procedure comprises three procedures:
r Preliminary Procedures
r Latex Voltage Calibration
r Flow-Rate Calibration.
Do these preliminary procedures before doing any of the other calibration procedures to
ensure the instrument is clean and operating correctly.
See Heading 2.25 for an overview of the complete CBC calibration procedure.
IMPORTANT An adjustment in the data flow affects the data from the adjustment point to the final output.
To ensure accurate results:
r Always do the calibration procedures in the order presented. Each procedure is written assuming that
the settings established in the previous procedures are correct.
r If you make an adjustment, do all subsequent calibration procedures.
B See each procedure listed below to determine what is needed.
Procedures
1. Bleach the apertures and internal electrodes. For instructions see the Special Procedures
and Troubleshooting Guide or the Online Help System.
2. Ensure the 5 psi, 30 psi, and 60 psi pressures and the 6 in. Hg vacuum are set to the
nominal values specified in Table A.1-13, Pressure and Vacuum Tolerances.
3. Do a Startup cycle and verify the results are acceptable.
4. Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION procedure in the Automatic, CBC ONLY test mode,
as directed under Heading 5.5, and verify the results are acceptable.
PN 4277219B 4.8-1
CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
4.8-2 PN 4277219B
CBC CALIBRATION - LATEX VOLTAGE 4
4.9 CBC CALIBRATION - LATEX VOLTAGE
Purpose
Use this procedure to adjust the aperture voltages for each aperture to compensate for any
differences in the dimensions of the apertures affecting volume measurements. Do this
procedure after doing any procedure that affects the RBC or WBC aperture voltages, including
replacement of the following:
GEN•S System LH 750 System

r Aperture block r Aperture block
r Aperture module r Aperture module
r RED/WHITE PRE-AMP card r Six-Channel Preamp card
r API/SIGNAL GENERATOR card r R/W/P SC/A card
r RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card. r RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card.
See Heading 2.25 for an overview of the CBC calibration procedures.
CAUTION Deteriorated latex particles can clog the apertures. Latex particles deteriorate when exposed to
direct sunlight or to temperatures above 45°C (113°F). DO NOT use latex particles that have been exposed
to these conditions.
IMPORTANT Making adjustments with insufficient data could produce erroneous results. The particle
concentration of LATRON control is low. DO NOT use LATRON control for this procedure.
B Latex particles, PN 6857371

B 5-mL tube of normal whole blood, preferably 24-48 hours old, 5C or 5C-ES cell control
or S-CAL calibrator
Procedure
1. Do the CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES as directed under
Heading 4.8.
2. Select the CBC only test mode.
r On the GEN•S System, select CBC ONLY at the Analyzer.
r On the LH 750 System, select C at the Workstation.
3. If you replaced the AMC or if the RAM memory is lost, initialize the calibration factors:
Note: INITIALIZE CALIBRATION FACTORS resets the average, individual aperture, and
Manual-mode calibration factors to 1.000; the preamp voltages to 149.9 and 119.9; and
the Hgb Drain Timer to 15.
a. At the Analyzer, access the SERVICE MENU (see Heading 4.2) and select SPECIAL
FUNCTIONS tt INITIALIZE CALIBRATION FACTORS.
b. Cycle a sample to transfer the initialized values to the Workstation.
PN 4277219B 4.9-1
CBC CALIBRATION - LATEX VOLTAGE
5. From the Select Calibration Test box, select Latex Voltage. See Figure 4.9-1.
6. Delete any data in the table.
Figure 4.9-1 Latex Voltage Window
7253440E
7. Verify the latex assay value is correct for the latex particles to be cycled.
8. From the Processing Control box at the Command Center, select CBC Calibration.
9. Gently mix the latex particles until completely mixed, about 3 minutes.
10. Clean the outside of the aspirator tip with distilled water and a lint-free tissue to prevent
contamination of the latex particles and dry the aspirator tip.
11. Cycle the latex particles in the Manual mode three times:
a. Enter a 3-digit ID number at the Diluter/numeric keypad.
b. Hold the latex particles under the aspirator tip to initiate the cycle.
c. Repeat this step for a total of three cycles.
12. Review the data on the screen for any results outside of the limits.
Note: The limits are listed in Tables A.1-3 and A.1-4 and on the CBC Calibration Setup
window. (Select tt to access the CBC Calibration Setup window.)

r If the values are within limits, go to step 15.
r If the new voltages or the RBC or WBC counts are outside the limits, locate and
correct the problem. Go to step 13.
r If only the voltage differences between apertures or the RMV or WMV results are
outside of the limits, adjust the voltage. Go to step 14.
4.9-2 PN 4277219B
CBC CALIBRATION - LATEX VOLTAGE 4
13. If the new voltages or the RBC or WBC counts are outside the limits:
a. Locate and correct the problem. Some problem sources to consider are -
r The apertures need bleaching and/or rinsing.
r The latex particles are contaminated.
r An aperture partially blocked, dirty or defective.
r A preamp channel is noisy.
b. Cycle a whole blood sample and verify there is no instrument problem.
c. Go back to step 6.
14. If the voltage difference between apertures or the RMV or WMV results are outside the
limits:
a. At the Analyzer, access the SERVICE MENU (see Heading 4.2) and select LATEX
CALIBRATION (GEN•S System) or CBC LATEX CALIBRATION (LH 750 System).
b. Enter the new voltages for each aperture.
c. Repeat from step 6.
15. Set up the instrument to verify the voltage settings:
a. Select to delete the data in the table.

b. From the Select Calibration Test box, select Voltage Matching. See Figure 4.9-2.
c. At the Analyzer, set the number of aspirations/tube to 5.
Figure 4.9-2 Voltage Matching Window
7253441E
PN 4277219B 4.9-3
CBC CALIBRATION - LATEX VOLTAGE
16. Cycle a tube of well-mixed latex particles, blood, control, or calibrator five times.
17. After the cycles are completed, check the results for any values outside of the limits.
Note: The limits are listed in Tables A.1-3 and A.1-4 and on the CBC Calibration Setup
window. (Select tt to access the CBC Calibration window.)

r If the values are within limits, no changes are needed. Go to step 21.
r If the %CV values or the voltage values are not within limits, recheck the values. Go
to step 18.
r If only the differences between apertures are outside the limits, adjust the voltages.
Go to step 19.
18. If the %CV values or the voltage values are not within limits, recheck the results:
a. Select to clear data from the table.

b. Verify there is not a problem with:
r A partially blocked, dirty or defective aperture
r A noisy preamp channel
r An abnormal blood specimen.
c. After correcting the problem, repeat from step 16.
19. If only the differences between apertures are outside the limits, fine-tune the adjustment
to the new preamp voltages:
a. At the Analyzer, access the SERVICE MENU (see Heading 4.2) and select LATEX
CALIBRATION (GEN•S System) or CBC LATEX CALIBRATION (LH 750 System).
b. Enter the new voltages for each aperture.
20. Cycle another specimen and verify the values are within specifications.
21. If you made changes while performing the Latex Voltage test, or performed a service
procedure that can affect flow rate, you need to do the CBC Calibration - Flow Rate
procedure:
a. From the Select Calibration Test box, select Flow-Rate test.
b. If you used a whole-blood specimen without reference values or latex particles to
verify the voltage settings, go directly to Heading 4.10, CBC CALIBRATION -
FLOW RATE.
c. If you used an assayed blood material, such as 5C or 5C-ES cell control, S-CAL
calibrator, or whole blood that is referenced to another instrument, to verify the
voltage settings:
1) Select tt .
2) Select the Flow Rate Test Assays tab.
3) On the Flow Rate Test Assays window, enter the assay or reference values for the
material used.
4) Go to Heading 4.10, CBC CALIBRATION - FLOW RATE, and begin at step 6.
4.9-4 PN 4277219B
CBC CALIBRATION - FLOW RATE 4
4.10 CBC CALIBRATION - FLOW RATE
Purpose
Use this procedure to establish calibration factors to compensate for any differences in the
dimensions that would affect the count measurements, and to make the initial adjustment of
the average calibration factors to ensure the accuracy of the final results. Depending on the
current status of the instrument’s calibration, this procedure may need to be repeated several
times.
The laboratory is responsible for the final adjustments of the average calibration factors using
S-CAL calibrator or a whole blood calibration procedure.
Do this procedure if you made any changes while doing the CBC Calibration - Latex Voltage
procedure and whenever you do any procedures that affects the WBC, RBC or Plt flow rates,
or the CBC parameter dilutions. This includes replacement of the following:
r Sweep-flow tank r Aspiration pump

r PLATELET PROCESSOR card r RBC diluent dispenser
r BSV r WBC diluent dispenser
See Heading 2.25 for an overview of the complete calibration procedure.
B Normal whole blood, enough to run two separate sets of 10
IMPORTANT The Flow Rate test cannot calculate average calibration factors without assay values. To make
the initial adjustment of the average calibration factors use an assayed material, such as 5C cell control or
S-CAL calibrator, or whole blood that is referenced to another instrument, and enter the assay values at the
Workstation.
B 5C or 5C-ES cell control, S-CAL calibrator, or whole blood referenced to another

instrument for Flow Rate Calibration of average calibration factors (required for
checking and adjusting the average calibration factors)
Procedure
1. Do the CBC CALIBRATION - PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES as directed under
Heading 4.8.
2. At the Analyzer, set the number of aspirations/tube to 5.
3. Select the CBC only test mode.
4. At the Workstation:
a. Select tt .
b. From the Processing Control box at the Command Center, select CBC Calibration.
PN 4277219B 4.10-1
CBC CALIBRATION - FLOW RATE
c. From the Select Calibration Test box, select Flow Rate.

d. If using assayed material, such as 5C cell control or S-CAL calibrator, or whole
blood referenced to another instrument -
1) Select tt .
2) Select the Flow Rate Test Assays tab.
3) On the Flow Rate Test Assays window, enter the assay or reference values for the
material to be cycled.
5. Cycle the blood or control material.
6. Check the individual aperture results for any values outside of the limits.
Note: The limits are listed in Table A.1-5 and on the CBC Calibration Setup window.
(Select tt to access the CBC Calibration Setup window.)

r If the values are within limits, no changes are needed. Go to step 8.
r If the %CVs and the new calibration factors are within limits and the differences
between apertures are outside the limits, record the apertures needing adjustment
and then go to step 8.
r If the %CVs or the new calibration factors are not within limits, locate and correct
the problem. Go to step 7.
7. If any %CV or if any of the differences between apertures is outside the limits:
a. Locate and correct the problem
b. Repeat this procedure.
8. Check the average results for any values outside of the limits:
r If the %CVs are within limits, but there are no results for the average calibration
factors:
t If you ran material with assay or reference values, enter the assay or reference
values as directed in step 3, d.
t If you ran material without assay or reference values, run 5C cell control,
S-CAL calibrator, or whole blood referenced to another instrument now, and
enter the assay or reference values as directed in step 3, d.
r If the %CVs are within limits, and the diff and %diff results are < to the calibration
limits, no changes are needed, go to step Verification.
r If the %CVs are within limits, and the diff and %diff results are within the
calibration limits, adjust one or more of the average calibration factors. Go to step
10.
r If any %CV is outside the limits or if the diff or %diff results are > the calibration
limits, locate and correct the problem. Go to step 9.
9. If any %CV is outside the limits or if the diff or %diff results are > the calibration limits:
a. Locate and correct the problem
4.10-2 PN 4277219B
CBC CALIBRATION - FLOW RATE 4
10. If the %CVs are within limits, and the diff and %diff results are within the calibration
limits, adjust the average calibration factors, and adjust any individual calibration factors
recorded in step 5.
a. From the Analyzer MAIN MENU, select ANALYZER FUNCTIONS tt
CALIBRATION tt AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION FACTORS, and enter the factors
needing adjustment.
b. At the Workstation, select to delete the data from the table.

c. Cycle another five samples and repeat from step 6 to verify the data is acceptable.
Verification
1. Do the System Verification Procedure, Heading 5.1.
2. Select tt and record new calibration data on the Instrument Reference

Report form.
PN 4277219B 4.10-3
CBC CALIBRATION - FLOW RATE
4.10-4 PN 4277219B
MANUAL MODE-TO-AUTOMATIC MODE CALIBRATION 4
4.11 MANUAL MODE-TO-AUTOMATIC MODE CALIBRATION
Purpose
Use this procedure to establish calibration factors for the Manual mode to compensate for
minor differences between the Manual and Automatic aspiration modes, ensuring the WBC,
RBC, Plt, and Hgb results for a specimen are the same regardless of the mode selected.
B Fresh normal blood specimens. For the quantity, select the option below that is most
convenient for the laboratory. Option 1 is usually more convenient because it requires
less blood/tube.
r Option 1 - Obtain 50 fresh, normal, different blood specimens of sufficient quantity
for a single analysis in both the Automatic and Manual modes.
r Option 2 - Obtain 10 fresh, normal, different blood specimens of sufficient quantity
for consecutive, triplicate analyses in both the Automatic and Manual modes.
Collecting the Data

ATTENTION: Instruct the operator to collect the necessary data in patient control files; one for
Manual-mode and another for Automatic-mode samples. Help the laboratoroy set up the
control files and ensure they understand the rest of the procedure outlined below.
1. Set up two patient control files to collect the data, one for each aspiration mode.
2. Cycle the samples.
r Option 1 - Cycle each sample once in each aspiration mode.
r Option 2 - Cycle each sample three times in each aspiration mode.
3. After analyzing all the samples, obtain the mean values for WBC, RBC, Hgb and Plt in
both aspiration modes.
4. Calculate the %diff for the WBC, RBC, Hgb and Plt using the formula:
[ Automatic Mode Mean ] – [ Manual Mode Mean ]
%Diff = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- × 100
Automatic-Mode Mean
5. Compare the %diff results to the specifications in Table A.1-12.
r If the %diff results are within tolerance, you have verified the current mode-to-mode
calibration is correct. The calibration factors do not require adjustment.
r If the %diff results are out of tolerance, ensure the instrument does not have a
problem and then go to step 6.
6. Obtain the Manual-mode calibration factors from the Analyzer.
7. Determine the new Manual-mode calibration factors for WBC, RBC, Hgb, and Plt using
the following formula:
Automatic Mode Mean
New Cal Factor = ------------------------------------------------------------- × Old Cal Factor
Manual Mode Mean
8. Verify the new calibration factors are within the limits specified in Table A.1-6.
9. Manually enter the new factors at the Analyzer. (From the MAIN MENU, select
CALIBRATION tt MANUAL CALIBRATION FACTORS.)
PN 4277219B 4.11-1
MANUAL MODE-TO-AUTOMATIC MODE CALIBRATION
10. Verify the adjustment. Go to the Verification procedure.
Verification
1. Delete the data in the control files.
2. Select 10 specimens and run each specimen once in each aspiration mode.
3. Calculate the %diff for the WBC, RBC, Hgb and Plt using the formula:
[ Automatic-Mode Mean ] – [ Manual-Mode Mean ]
%Diff = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- × 100
Automatic-Mode Mean
4. Verify the %diff values are within limits specified in Table A.1-12.
4.11-2 PN 4277219B
FAN REPLACEMENT 4
4.12 FAN REPLACEMENT
Purpose
The same model dc powered, variable speed fan is used as the intake and exhaust fans in the
Power Supply and as exhaust fans in the Analyzer. Each fan contains a thermistor for
monitoring the heat to automatically control the speed of the fan. If a fan stops working, the
area overheats. Use these procedures to replace a defective fan.
Power Supply Exhaust Fan
B 5/32-in. Allen wrench to open the Power Supply
Procedure
completely as directed under Heading 4.1 before removing the cover or the left side panel of the Power
Supply.
1. Power down the Analytical Station. See Heading 4.1.

2. Remove the Power Supply cover and left side panel as directed under Heading 4.13,
beginning at step 2.
3. Using Figure 4.12-1 as a guide, remove the fan as follows:
a. Remove the two screws securing the fan.
b. Disconnect connector J22 (located behind the Bulk Power Supply) and the ground
wire at E1.
c. Feed the fan cable up through the opening in the fan bracket.
d. Remove the fan and finger guards.
4. Install the replacement fan:
a. Feed the cable for the replacement fan down through the opening in the fan bracket.
b. Connect the fan cable connector P22 to J22 and the fan ground wire.
c. Position the fan between the finger guards, and secure the assembly in the Power
Supply with the screws.
d. Verify the direction of the air flow is out through the Power Supply side vents.
5. Reinstall the left side panel only.
6. Go to the Verification procedure.
PN 4277219B 4.12-1
FAN REPLACEMENT
Figure 4.12-1 Removing the Power Supply Exhaust Fan
Finger
guard
Fan
Finger
guard
J22
Ground wire
connection E1
Ground wire
7253293E
Bulk Power
Supply
Pneumatic Power Supply Intake Fan
B 5/3-in. Allen wrench
Procedure
attached to power can cause personal injury from electric shock. Power down the Analytical Station
Supply.

a. Unfasten the two captive screws securing the cooling coil bracket above the fan.
b. Carefully lift up the cooling coil bracket to access the fan and finger guards.
c. Disconnect connector J21 (located behind the Bulk Power Supply) and the ground
wire E1.
d. Remove the fan and finger guard.
4.12-2 PN 4277219B
FAN REPLACEMENT 4
a. Route the cable for the replacement fan to connector J21.
b. Connect the fan cable connector P21 to J21 and the fan ground wire.
c. Position the fan under the cooling coil bracket and secure the assembly in the Power
Supply with the captive screws.
d. Verify the direction of the air flow is up into the Power Supply.
5. Reinstall the left side panel only.
Figure 4.12-2 Removing the Pneumatic Power Supply Intake Fan

Loosen
and lift
bracket
Cooling
coil
Ground wire bracket
connection E1
Finger
guard
Bulk Power
Fan
Supply
J21
Ground
wire
7253301E
Analyzer Fans
B 5/16-in. spanner wrench
Procedure
completely as directed under Heading 4.1 before opening the rear door of the Analyzer and removing a fan.
PN 4277219B 4.12-3
FAN REPLACEMENT
2. Open the rear door of the Analyzer.

a. Disconnect the plug on the backbone for the fan to be replaced.
r J22 is for the digital backplane fan.
r J25 is for the analog backplane fan.
b. Unfasten the locknuts holding the fan in place.
c. Remove the finger guards and fan.
Figure 4.12-3 Removing an Analyzer Fan
FINGER
GUARD
DIGITAL ANALOG
BACKPLANE BACKPLANE
FAN FAN
FAN
FINGER
GUARD
J25
J22
7253302A

a. Position the replacement fan between the finger guards and secure the assembly to
the Analyzer door by installing the locknuts.
b. Plug in the fan connector.
5. Power up the Analytical Station and confirm the fan is working.
6. Close and secure the rear door of the Analyzer.
Verification
1. Power Supply fans only - Do the POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION procedure,
Heading 5.7, beginning at step 3.
2. Analyzer fans - None.
4.12-4 PN 4277219B
REMOVING THE POWER SUPPLY COVER AND LEFT SIDE PANEL 4
4.13 REMOVING THE POWER SUPPLY COVER AND LEFT SIDE PANEL
Purpose
Two styles of the Power Supply are currently in use. Use this procedure to access the
components inside either style.
Removal
completely before removing the cover or the left side panel of the Power Supply.

2. Unfasten the captive screw on the top of the Power Supply, tilt the cover to the right and
then lift the cover out as shown in Figure 4.13-1.
Figure 4.13-1 Removing the Power Supply Cover
Lined up when closed Open
1 2 3
6498081A
PN 4277219B 4.13-1
REMOVING THE POWER SUPPLY COVER AND LEFT SIDE PANEL
3. To remove the left side panel of the Power Supply:

a. Unfasten the two screws inside the upper edge of the frame. See Figure 4.13-2.
b. Tilt the left panel down and then lift the panel out of its securing clips.
Figure 4.13-2 Removing the Power Supply Left Panel
Remove
screws
1 2 3
6498082A
Verification
None.
4.13-2 PN 4277219B
COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT 4
4.14 COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT
Purpose
The compressor generates the pneumatic power for the GEN•S System and the LH 750
System. Use this procedure to replace a compressor that cannot generate 60 psi and/or high
vacuum.
B 7/16-in. open-ended spanner wrench
Removal
completely as directed under Heading 4.1 before removing the Power Supply cover.

2. Remove the Power Supply cover. See Heading 4.13.
3. Unfasten the four captive screws on the compressor mounting plate. See Figure 4.14-1.
Figure 4.14-1 Replacing the Compressor
Elbow Muffler
connectors
T-fitting
System
Power
Controller
card
Captive
screws (4)
P8/J8
P9/J9 6498024A
PN 4277219B 4.14-1
COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT
4. Disconnect the following tubing and cables from the compressor. Refer to Figure 4.14-1
for component locations.
a. At the two elbow connectors, disconnect the tubing from the quick-disconnect
fittings by pushing in the quick-disconnect ring, then pulling the tubing out.
b. At the T-fitting, unscrew the fitting and pull off the tubing.
c. Disconnect connectors P8 and P9.
5. At the System Power Controller card, disconnect P7. Refer to Figure 4.14-1 for location
of the System Power Controller card.
6. Remove the compressor from the Power Supply.
Installation
1. Position the replacement compressor in the Power Supply and secure it by fastening the
captive screws in the mounting plate.
2. Connect P7 to the System Power Controller card and connect P8 to J8 and P9 to J9.
3. Install the tubings:
a. At the quick-disconnect fittings on the elbow connectors, push the tubing past the
initial resistance, then pull on the tubing to ensure it is secure.
b. At the T-fitting, connect the tubing and screw down the fitting.
Verification
Do the POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION procedure, Heading 5.7, beginning at step 3.
4.14-2 PN 4277219B
DUMP VALVE REPLACEMENT 4
4.15 DUMP VALVE REPLACEMENT
Purpose
The dump valve (VL1) is a solenoid valve in the Power Supply used to drain the air water
separator. When this valve is not working, water builds up in the air water separator, blocking
the flow of pressure from the air water separator. Consequently, the compressor is running
and the vacuum output is within tolerance, but there is no 30 or 5 psi. Use this procedure to
replace a defective dump valve.
Procedure

3. Locate the dump valve. See Figure 4.15-1 for the old style Power Supply, Figure 4.15-2
for the new style.
Figure 4.15-1 Removing the Dump Valve, Old Style Power Supply
Dump
Wires valve
Bracket
7253290E
PN 4277219B 4.15-1
DUMP VALVE REPLACEMENT
Figure 4.15-2 Removing the Dump Valve, New Style Power Supply
Dump
Wires valve
Bracket
6498083A
4. Remove the solenoid. Refer to Figure 4.15-1 or Figure 4.15-2 for component locations.
a. Disconnect the solenoid wires at the solenoid, P26.
b. Remove the two screws securing the solenoid valve to the bracket and remove the
solenoid valve. Set the screws aside.
c. Disconnect the tubing from the solenoid. To disconnect the tubing from the
quick-disconnect fitting, push in the quick-disconnect ring, then pull out the
tubing.
5. Install the tubing on the replacement solenoid. To install the tubing on the
quick-disconnect fitting, push the tubing past the initial resistance, then pull on the
tubing to ensure it is secure.
6. Install the replacement valve on the bracket using the retained hardware. Ensure the wire
connections are accessible.
7. Connect the wires to the replacement valve.
9. Clean the air water separator, as needed. Do the Cleaning procedure under Heading 4.16,
Air Water Separator Cleaning and Replacement, beginning at step 2.
Verification
Do Heading 5.7, POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION.
4.15-2 PN 4277219B
AIR WATER SEPARATOR CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT 4
4.16 AIR WATER SEPARATOR CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT
Purpose
The air water separator traps moisture condensed from compressed air as it flows through
cooling coils and drains the water through the dump valve each cycle. Use the cleaning
procedure any time you replace the dump valve.
Use the replacement procedure when the compressor is running, the vacuum is within
tolerance but there is no 30 or 5 psi, and replacing the dump valve and cleaning the air water
separator does not resolve the problem.
B 5/32-in. Allen wrench (for the Removal procedure)
B Phillips-head screwdriver (for the Removal procedure)
Cleaning

2. Lay the Power Supply down on its right side to expose the bottom.
3. Open the filter bracket to access the air water separator. See Figure 4.16-1.
4. Remove the filter from the bracket, clean the filter as needed as needed, and set it aside.
ATTENTION: If there is liquid in the bowl of the air water separator, hold paper towels under the
drain tubing while removing the tubing to catch the liquid.
5. Remove the drain tubing from the bottom of the air water separator. See Figure 4.16-1.
6. Unscrew and remove the bowl of the air water separator.
7. Empty and clean the bowl with hot water.
8. Reposition the bowl in the Power Supply, ensuring the O-ring is in place, and screw in
the bowl until it is hand-tight.
9. Reconnect the drain tubing.
10. Reinstall the filter and close the filter bracket.
11. Set the Power Supply upright.
PN 4277219B 4.16-1
AIR WATER SEPARATOR CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT
Figure 4.16-1 Accessing the Air Water Separator

Quick
disconnect
to 30 psi Air water
regulator separator
Quick
disconnect
from
cooling coils
Drain
tubing
Bracket
6498084A
Filter
Replacement
Removal
Supply.

3. Disconnect the 30-psi regulator tubing from the top of the air water separator at the
quick-disconnect fitting. See Figure 4.16-2 for location.
4. Unscrew the two screws holding the air water separator in place. See Figure 4.16-2.
5. Lay the Power Supply on its right side to expose the bottom.
6. Open the filter bracket to access the air water separator. Refer to Figure 4.16-1.
7. Remove the filter from the bracket, clean the filter as needed as needed, and set it aside.
8. Disconnect the cooling coil tubing from the top of the air water separator and the drain
tubing from the bottom, and remove the air water separator from the Power Supply.
4.16-2 PN 4277219B
AIR WATER SEPARATOR CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT 4
Figure 4.16-2 Disconnecting the Air Water Separator
Disconnect
when upright
Remove
screws
6498085A
Installation
1. Position the replacement air water separator in the Power Supply and secure it with the
screws.
2. Attach the three tubings.
3. Reinstall the filter and close the filter bracket.
4. Set the Power Supply upright.
Verification
PN 4277219B 4.16-3
AIR WATER SEPARATOR CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT
4.16-4 PN 4277219B
MOTOR CONTROLLER CARD REPLACEMENT 4
4.17 MOTOR CONTROLLER CARD REPLACEMENT
Purpose
The Motor Controller card provides the drivers that turn on the compressor/vacuum pump.
Use this procedure to replace a defective Motor Controller card.
Replacement

3. Referring to Figure 4.17-1 for location, disconnect:
r J15 from the Bulk Power Filter card.
r P8 and P9 at the compressor.
Figure 4.17-1 Removing the Compressor Motor Controller Card
BULK POWER
FILTER CARD
Remove
screws
MOTOR
CONTROLLER
CARD
Loosen
screws
P8/J8
7253295A P9/J9
4. Remove the two screws at the upper edge of the Motor Controller Card and loosen, but
do not remove, the lower two screws.
5. Lift out the Motor Controller card.
PN 4277219B 4.17-1
MOTOR CONTROLLER CARD REPLACEMENT
6. Position the replacement Motor Controller card assembly in the Power Supply, sliding
the slots in the lower back edge of the card over the loosened screws.
7. Install screws in the top edge of the Motor Controller card assembly and tighten the
screws on the lower edge to secure the replacement card.
8. Connect the following Motor Controller card cables:
r P15 to J15 on Bulk Power Filter card
r P8 to J8 on the compressor
r P9 to J9 on the compressor.
Verification
4.17-2 PN 4277219B
SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER CARD REPLACEMENT 4
4.18 SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER CARD REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective System Power Controller card.
Removal
Supply.
1. Power down the Analytical Station, see Heading 4.1.

3. Disconnect the following cables and tubings from the System Power Controller card:
a. Remove the ribbon cables, J3 and J1, by squeezing the metal clips on the ends of the
connector.
b. Disconnect the wire connectors.
4. Remove the screws securing the System Power Controller card to the Power Supply,
retaining the hardware. See Figure 4.18-1.
5. Gently pull on the corners of the System Power Controller card to pull the card off the
standoff pins.
6. Disconnect the pneumatic tubing from the transducers, noting the locations.
Installation
1. Connect the tubing to the replacement System Power Controller card.
2. Position the System Power Controller card in the Power Supply and press on the corners
of the card until the card engages with the standoff pins.
3. Secure the System Power Controller card with the retained hardware.
4. Connect the cables to the System Power Controller card. Refer to Figure A.4-4 for the
correct locations.
6. Verify the LEDS on the replacement System Power Controller card indicate an acceptable
status. Refer to Table A.4-3 for LED indications.
7. Ensure the problem leading to the replacement of the System Power Controller card is
resolved.
8. Power down the Analytical Station, then reinstall the left panel only of the Power Supply.
9. Go to Verification.
PN 4277219B 4.18-1
SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER CARD REPLACEMENT
Figure 4.18-1 Removing the System Power Controller Card
STANDOFF
PINS (4)
60 PS1
30 PS1
5 PS1
VACUUM
Remove
253297A screws
Verification
4.18-2 PN 4277219B
SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER DISPLAY TEST AND REPLACEMENT 4
4.19 SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER DISPLAY TEST AND REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use the SPC Display Test to check the display function of all the LED segments, ensuring the
System Power Controller Display is working correctly. Use the replacement procedure to
replace a defective System Power Controller Display in the Power Supply.
SPC Display Test
Supply.

2. On the System Power Controller Display, connect TP2 (ground) and TP3, shorting the
circuit.
3. Monitor the System Power Controller Display and verify each section displays the
following sequence of characters correctly:
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, L, h, E
r If each section displays the characters correctly and you are testing a replacement
System Controller Display, power down the instrument and go to the Verification
procedure.
r If each section does not display the characters correctly, the System Power
Controller Display is defective. Go to the Replacement procedure.
Replacement
WARNING Risk of personal injury. Contacting exposed electronic components while the iAnalytical Station
Supply.

3. Disconnect P1 on the System Power Controller Display by squeezing the metal clips on
the ends of the connector. See Figure 4.19-1 for the location of the System Power
Controller Display.
PN 4277219B 4.19-1
SYSTEM POWER CONTROLLER DISPLAY TEST AND REPLACEMENT
Figure 4.19-1 Removing the System Power Controller Display

COVER
SYSTEM POWER
CONTROLLER
DISPLAY
Remove
screws
and
spacers SYSTEM
POWER
CONTROLLER
CARD
7253298B
4. Loosen the System Power Controller card for easier access to the System Power
Controller Display:
a. Remove the screws securing the System Power Controller card to the Power Supply.
Refer to Figure 4.18-1.
b. Gently pull on the corners of the System Power Controller card to pull the card off
the standoff pins.
5. Remove the screws from the System Power Controller Display, being careful not to drop
the screws or the spacers into the Power Supply, and remove the display and its cover
from the Power Supply. See Figure 4.19-1.
6. Position the cover and the replacement System Power Controller Display in the Power
Supply and secure the assembly with screws.
7. Reinstall the System Power Controller card.
8. Connect cable P1 to the System Power Controller Display.
9. Reinstall the left side panel only of the Power Supply.
10. Power up the Analytical Station and test the operation of the replacement System Power
Controller Display. Go to the SPC Display Test procedure.
Verification
4.19-2 PN 4277219B
BULK POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT 4
4.20 BULK POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective Bulk Power Supply.
Removal
completely as instructed under Heading 4.1 before removing the cover or the left side panel of the Power
Supply.

3. If this is a new style Power Supply (Figure 4.20-1), remove the two screws securing the
air baffle bracket to the Bulk Power Supply. Retain the screws.
Note: It is not necessary to remove this bracket or the dump valve bracket attached to it.
4. Unfasten the four captive screws securing the Bulk Power Supply mounting plate to the
base of the Power Supply. See Figure 4.20-1 for the new style Power Supply,
Figure 4.20-2 for the old style.
Figure 4.20-1 Disconnecting the Bulk Power Supply, New Style Power Supply
System Power
Controller Bulk Power
card Filter card
Bulk
Power
Supply
Air baffle
bracket
Dump
valve
Captive
6498086A
screws (4)
PN 4277219B 4.20-1
BULK POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT
Figure 4.20-2 Disconnecting the Bulk Power Supply, Old Style Power Supply
SYSTEM POWER
CONTROLLER BULK POWER
CARD FILTER CARD
BULK
POWER
SUPPLY
DUMP
VALVE
CAPTIVE
7253299A SCREWS (4)
5. Disconnect the Bulk Power Supply harness. See Figure A.4-2 for locations.
r From the rear of the Bulk Power Supply, disconnect the wires at wire markers (WM)
9, 8, 14, 15 and 16.
r From the Bulk Power Filter card, disconnect P10, P11, P12, P14 and P16.
r From the Power Supply fans, disconnect P21 and P22.
r From the System Power Controller card, disconnect P4 and P6.
r From the dump valve, disconnect the wire leads.
6. Remove the Bulk Power Supply from the Power Supply.
7. Turn the Bulk Power Supply over and remove the screws securing the Bulk Power Supply
to its mounting plate.
Installation
1. Secure the replacement Bulk Power Supply to the mounting plate.
2. Position the replacement Bulk Power Supply in the Power Supply.
3. Connect the Bulk Power Supply harness. Refer to step 5.
4. Fasten the captive screws in the Bulk Power Supply mounting plate to secure the bulk
power supply in the Power Supply.
5. If this is a new style Power Supply, reinstall the air baffle bracket.
6. Reinstall the left side panel only of the Power Supply.
Verification
4.20-2 PN 4277219B
BULK POWER FILTER CARD REPLACEMENT 4
4.21 BULK POWER FILTER CARD REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective Bulk Power Filter card.
Replacement
Supply.

3. Disconnect all cables attached to the Bulk Power Filter card. See Figure 4.21-1 for the
location of the Bulk Power Filter card.
4. Remove the four Phillips-head screws securing the Bulk Power Filter card to the Power
Supply, retaining the hardware.
Figure 4.21-1 Removing the Bulk Power Filter Card

BULK POWER
FILTER CARD
STANDOFF
PINS (2)
7253300A
PN 4277219B 4.21-1
BULK POWER FILTER CARD REPLACEMENT
5. Gently pull the Bulk Power Filter card off the two standoff pins.
6. Position the replacement Bulk Power Filter card in the Power Supply and press on the
center edges of the card until the card engages with the standoff pins.
7. Secure the Bulk Power Filter card with the retained hardware.
8. Connect the cables to the Bulk Power Filter card. Refer to Figure A.4-1 for the correct
locations.
9. Reinstall the left panel only of the Power Supply.
Verification
4.21-2 PN 4277219B
CBC LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT 4
4.22 CBC LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
Purpose
The CBC lytic reagent pump is a single-volume, field-adjustable, piston-style pump. This
section contains procedures for checking and adjusting the volume of the CBC lytic reagent
pump, troubleshooting the pump, and replacing the pump.
r Use the Volume Check procedure to determine the volume of reagent dispensed and to
adjust the pump volume as needed. Two methods for checking the volume are provided;
the weight method is recommended as it is the most accurate, but you can use the
alternate volume method if a scale is not available.
r Use the Pump Troubleshooting procedure to isolate a pump or reagent pathway problem
when the volume check is not within limits.
r Use the Replacement procedure to replace a defective pump.
For pump volume adjustment and verification ranges, see Table A.1-31, Pump Volume
Tolerances.
B One small Y-fitting, PN 6232259 (for Volume Check procedure)
B One extension tubing: consists of one 30-cm (12-in.) piece of 0.082 i.d. polyurethane
tubing, PN 3202036, attached to barbed end of feed-thru fitting, PN 1016929 (for
Volume Check and Pump Troubleshooting procedures)
B Two vials, such as ACCUVETTE® II vials, one for waste and one for testing
B Mettler scale model P2100, or equivalent scale with an accuracy of ±0.001 g (for Volume
Check procedure - weight method)
B 25-mL, certified graduated cylinder (for Volume Check procedure - volume method)
B Small flathead screwdriver
B One feed-thru fitting, PN 1005697 (for Pump Troubleshooting procedure)
Volume Check
1. Press DRAIN to drain the WBC bath.
2. Disconnect the input tubings from the WBC bath and connect the tubings to the
Y-fitting. See Figure 4.22-1.
3. Connect the extension tubing to the third leg of the Y-fitting as shown in Figure 4.22-1.
ATTENTION: When dispensing reagent into a vial, always touch the fitting to the side of the vial
to remove the drop on the end.
4. Place the other end of the extension tubing in the waste vial and select F27 to dispense
CBC lytic reagent. Press ENTER as often as necessary to prime the tubing with reagent.
Touch the fitting to the side of the vial to remove the last drop.
5. Measure the volume dispensed:
r If a scale is available, use the weight method. Go to step 6.
r If a scale is not available, use the volume method. Go to step 7.
PN 4277219B 4.22-1
CBC LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
Figure 4.22-1 Setting Up the Instrument for the CBC Lytic Reagent Volume Check
Connect
bath tubing
Y-FITTING
Disconnect
bath tubing 3
Connect
extension tubing
Dispense CBC
lytic reagent (F27) 7253211A
6. Use the weight method to determine the volume dispensed:

a. Weigh a clean vial. If the scale does not have a tare function, record the weight.
b. Place the tubing in the weighed test vial and press ENTER to dispense CBC lytic
reagent for the test.
c. Weigh the test vial and record the weight. If the scale does not have a tare function,
subtract the previously recorded weight of the vial to determine the weight of the
dispensed volume.
d. Repeat steps a through c two more times to obtain three measurements.
e. Go to step 8.
7. Use the volume method to determine the volume dispensed:
ATTENTION: For an accurate volume measurement, always use a dry graduated cylinder.
a. Place the tubing in the clean, dry graduated cylinder and press ENTER 10 times to
dispense 10 aliquots of CBC lytic reagent into the graduated cylinder.
b. Determine the volume of reagent in the cylinder from the position of the meniscus
(Figure 4.22-2), and divide the value by 10.
4.22-2 PN 4277219B
Figure 4.22-2 Reading a Meniscus
EYE LEVEL
Read here
7253210A
8. Compare the measurements to the pump volume specifications in Table A.1-31. If the
volume measurements are:
r Within the verification range, the pump volume is acceptable. Go to step 11.
r Above the verification range, adjust the pump volume down. Go to step 9.
r Below the verification range, go to the Pump Troubleshooting procedure to
determine if the failure is in the pump or in the reagent pathway.
9. Adjust the pump to decrease the volume dispensed:
a. Turn the adjustment screw clockwise as shown in Figure 4.22-3.
Figure 4.22-3 Pump Adjustments
Decrease
Increase
1/2 turn 5 µL
7253213A
b. Repeat step 4, dispensing reagent at least twice to prime the pump, then recheck the
pump volume.
c. Continue adjusting, priming and checking the volume of the pump until the
volume falls within the adjustment range.
PN 4277219B 4.22-3
d. To ensure the adjustment holds, repeat steps 4 through 7 and compare the
measurements to the adjustment range in Table A.1-31, Pump Volume Tolerances.
If the measurements are:
r Within the adjustment range, the pump volume is acceptable. Go to step 11.
r Outside the adjustment range, the pump is defective. Go to step 10.
10. The CBC lytic reagent pump is defective:
a. Press STOP to return to READY.
b. Reconnect the tubings to the bath.
c. Replace the CBC lytic reagent pump; go to the Replacement procedure.
11. The CBC lytic reagent pump volume is acceptable:
c. Press RINSE refill the baths and drain the waste chamber.
d. Select F02 to prime the CBC lytic reagent lines.
e. Go to Verification.
Pump Troubleshooting
1. Reconnect the tubings to the bath.
2. Disconnect the tubing from fitting 127 above VL3 and connect the tubing to a feed-thru
fitting. See Figure 4.22-4.
3. Connect the extension tubing to the other side of the feed-thru fitting as shown in
Figure 4.22-4.
4. Place the other end of the extension tubing into a waste vial. Select F27, pressing ENTER
as often as necessary to prime the tubing with CBC lytic reagent.
Figure 4.22-4 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the CBC Lytic Reagent Delivery
1 2
Disconnect Connect
tubing here tubing
FEED-THRU
FITTING
127
3
Connect
extension tubing
VL3
4
RIGHT FRONT PANEL Dispense
CBC
CBC lytic
LYTIC
reagent (F27)
REAGENT
7253212A
PUMP
4.22-4 PN 4277219B
5. Determine the volume dispensed. Do steps 5 through 7 of the Volume Check procedure.
6. Compare the measurements to the pump volume tolerances in Table A.1-31:
r If the measurements are within the verification range, the pump is functioning
correctly. Troubleshoot the reagent pathway, correct the problem and then recheck
the pump volume.
r If the measurements are below the verification range, the problem could be the
pump or the pump adjustment. Try to adjust the pump. Go to step 7.
7. Adjust the pump to increase the volume dispensed:
a. Turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise as shown in Figure 4.22-3.
b. Repeat step 4, dispensing reagent at least twice to prime the pump, and then
recheck the volume.
d. To ensure the adjustment holds, do steps 4 through 7 of the Volume Check procedure
and compare the measurements to the adjustment range in Table A.1-31, Pump
Volume Tolerances. If the measurements are:
8. The CBC lytic reagent pump is defective:
b. Reconnect the tubing to fitting 127.
c. Replace the CBC lytic reagent pump; go to the Replacement procedure.
9. The CBC lytic reagent pump volume is acceptable:
c. Press RINSE to refill the baths and drain the waste chamber.
d. Select F02 to prime the CBC lytic reagent lines.
Replacement
1. Remove the pump by sliding it out of the mounting bracket. See Figure 4.22-5.
2. Disconnect the tubing from the CBC lytic reagent pump.
3. Install the replacement pump in the mounting bracket.
4. Connect the tubing to the replacement pump.
5. Select F02 to prime the replacement CBC lytic reagent pump.
6. Do the Volume Check procedure to ensure the pump volume is correct.
Verification
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION procedure, Heading 5.5, for the CBC parameters.
PN 4277219B 4.22-5
Figure 4.22-5 Replacing the CBC Lytic Reagent Pump
REAGENT
LINE
PRESSURE
LINE
MOUNTING
BRACKET
CBC LYTIC
REAGENT
7253214A PUMP RIGHT FRONT PANEL
4.22-6 PN 4277219B
DILUENT DISPENSER CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT 4
4.23 DILUENT DISPENSER CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
Purpose
The diluent dispensers are single-volume, field-adjustable, piston-style pumps. Two styles are
currently in use. This section contains procedures for checking and adjusting the volumes of
either style of the RBC and WBC diluent dispensers, troubleshooting the dispensers, and
replacing the dispensers. Except where noted, the procedures are identical for the RBC and
WBC diluent dispensers.
IMPORTANT The volumes dispensed by the diluent dispensers affect the data. Diluent dispensers are
factory calibrated, but you must verify the volumes to ensure accurate dilutions.
adjust the dispenser volume as needed. Two methods for checking the volume are
provided; the weight method is recommended as it is the most accurate, but you can use
the alternate volume method if a scale is not available.
r Use the Dispenser Troubleshooting procedure to isolate a dispenser or reagent pathway
problem, when the volume check is not within limits.
r Use the Replacement procedure to replace a defective dispenser.
Tolerances.
B One small Y-fitting, PN 6232259 (for Volume Check procedure)
Volume Check and Dispenser Troubleshooting procedures)
B Two vials, such as ACCUVETTE II vials, one for waste and one for testing
B One feed-thru fitting, PN 1005697 (for Dispenser Troubleshooting procedure)
B Clamping device such a hemostat (for Replacement procedure)
Volume Check
1. Press DRAIN to drain the baths.
2. Disconnect the input tubings from the appropriate bath and connect the tubings to the
Y-fitting. See Figure 4.23-1.
3. Connect the extension tubing to the third leg of the Y-fitting as shown in Figure 4.23-1.
PN 4277219B 4.23-1
DILUENT DISPENSER CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
4. Place the other end of the extension tubing in the waste vial and do one of the following
to dispense diluent, priming the tubing. Touch the fitting to the side of the vial to remove
the drop at the end.
r For the RBC diluent dispenser, select F32
r For the WBC diluent dispenser, select F33.
Figure 4.23-1 Setting Up the Instrument for the Diluent Dispenser Volume Check
2
Connect
bath tubing
Y-FITTING
1
Disconnect
bath tubing 3
Connect
extension tubing
4
Dispense diluent
7253215A (RBC F32, WBC F33)

b. Place the tubing in the weighed test vial and press ENTER to dispense diluent for the
test.
dispensed volume.
e. Go to step 8.
4.23-2 PN 4277219B
a. Place the tubing in the clean, dry graduated cylinder and press ENTER three times to
dispense three aliquots of diluent into the graduated cylinder.
EYE LEVEL
Read here
7253210A
8. Compare the measurements to the dispenser volume specifications in Table A.1-31. If

the measurements are:
r Within the verification range, the dispenser volume is acceptable. Go to step 11.
r Above the verification range, adjust the dispenser volume down. Go to step 9.
r Below the verification range, go to the Dispenser Troubleshooting procedure to
determine if the failure is in the dispenser or in the reagent pathway.
a. Turn the adjustment screw clockwise as shown in Figure 4.23-3 or Figure 4.23-4.
Note: Figure 4.23-3 shows the style of diluent dispensers used on Analytical
Stations that use the diluent reservoir. Figure 4.23-4 shows the style of diluent
dispensers used on Analytical Stations that bypass the diluent reservoir.
Figure 4.23-3 Diluent Dispenser Adjustments on Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir
Decrease
Increase LEFT FRONT PANEL

1/4 turn 0.1 mL 7253230A
PN 4277219B 4.23-3
Figure 4.23-4 Diluent Dispenser Adjustments on Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent Reservoir
Decrease
Increase LEFT FRONT PANEL

1/4 turn 0.1 mL 6498099A
pump volume.
If two of the three weight measurements or if the volume measurement is:
10. The diluent dispenser is defective:
c. Replace the diluent dispenser; go to the Replacement procedure.
11. The diluent dispenser volume is acceptable:
d. Select F16 to prime the diluent lines.
4.23-4 PN 4277219B
Dispenser Troubleshooting
1. Reconnect the tubings to the bath.
2. Disconnect the output tubing of the diluent dispenser being tested and connect the
tubing to a feed-thru fitting. See Figure 4.23-5.
r For the RBC diluent dispenser, disconnect the I-beam tubing above VL8.
r For the WBC diluent dispenser, disconnect the I-beam tubing above VL7.
Figure 4.23-5.
4. Place the other end of the extension tubing into a waste vial and dispense diluent twice
to prime the tubing:
r For the RBC diluent dispenser, select F32 to prime the tubing
r For the WBC diluent dispenser, select F33 to prime the tubing.
Figure 4.23-5 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Diluent Delivery
1 2
1
D is c o n n e c t fo r C o n n e c t
D is c o n n e c t fo r
R B C d ilu e n t I- b e a m tu b in g
W B C d ilu e n t
d is p e n s e r d is p e n s e r
F e e d -th ru
fittin g
VL8 VL7
3
C o n n e c t
e x te n s io n tu b in g
4
D is p e n s e
L E F T F R O N T P A N E L d ilu e n t
6 4 9 8 2 0 6 B (R B C F 3 2 , W B C F 3 3 )
6. Compare the results to the dispenser volume specifications in Table A.1-31:

r If the results are within the verification range, the dispenser is functioning correctly.
Troubleshoot the reagent pathway, correct the problem and then recheck the
dispenser volume.
r If the results are below the verification range, the problem could be the dispenser or
the dispenser adjustment. Try to adjust the dispenser. Go to step 7.
PN 4277219B 4.23-5
7. Adjust the dispenser to increase the volume dispensed:

b. Repeat step 4, dispensing reagent at least twice to prime the dispenser, and then
recheck the volume.
c. Continue adjusting, priming and checking the volume of the dispenser until the
d. To ensure the adjustment holds, do steps 4 through 7 of the Volume Check
procedure and compare the measurements to the adjustment range in Table A.1-31,
Pump Volume Tolerances. If the measurements are:
r Within the adjustment range, the dispenser volume is acceptable. Go to step 9.
r Outside the adjustment range, the dispenser is defective. Go to step 8.
8. The diluent dispenser is defective:
a. Press STOP.
b. Reconnect the tubing:
r For the RBC diluent dispenser, reconnect the tubing to the fitting above VL8.
r For the WBC diluent dispenser, reconnect the tubing to the fitting above VL7.
c. Replace the diluent dispenser; go to the Replacement procedure.
9. The diluent dispenser volume is acceptable:
b. Reconnect the tubing:
r For the RBC diluent dispenser, reconnect the tubing to the fitting above VL8.
r For the WBC diluent dispenser, reconnect the tubing to the fitting above VL7.
d. Select F16 to prime the diluent lines.
Replacement
1. Press DRAIN.
2. Using a hemostat, clamp both tubings attached to the top of the defective dispenser, then
remove the tubings from the dispenser. See Figure 4.23-6.
3. Remove the dispenser from the base clamp and gently pull the dispenser down and out
of the holding collar.
4. Remove the pressure tubing from the bottom rear of the dispenser.
5. Empty the diluent from the dispenser.
6. Connect the pressure tubing to the fitting on the replacement dispenser.
7. Carefully feed the dispenser up through the holding collar and set it into the base clamp.
8. Connect the diluent tubing to the appropriate fittings on the diluent dispenser, then
remove the hemostats.
4.23-6 PN 4277219B
Figure 4.23-6 Replacing the Diluent Dispenser
Clamp these tubings on Clamp these tubings on

RBC diluent dispenser WBC diluent dispenser
HOLDING
COLLAR
PRESSURE
TUBING
BASE
7253217A CLAMPS LEFT FRONT PANEL
9. Select F16 to prime the diluent.

10. Do the Volume Check procedure to ensure the replacement dispenser volume is correct.
Verification
PN 4277219B 4.23-7
4.23-8 PN 4277219B
STAIN PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT 4
4.24 STAIN PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
Purpose
The stain pump is a single-volume, field-adjustable, piston-style pump. This section contains
procedures for adjusting and checking the volume of the stain pump, troubleshooting the
pump and replacing the pump.
For pump volumes adjustment and verification ranges, see Table A.1-31, Pump Volume
Tolerances.
B One feed-thru fitting, PN 1005697 (for Volume Check procedures)
B 1-mL or 2-mL serological pipettes with 0.01-mL divisions (for Volume Check
procedure - volume method)
Volume Check
ATTENTION: The retic stain contains new methylene blue which is a permanent dye. Use care in
handling the stain and any associated tubing. Place gauze under any areas where tubing will
be disconnected.
1. At the stain chamber, disconnect the tubing from VL89 and connect the tubing to a feed-
thru fitting. See Figure 4.24-1 (Retic module) or Figure 4.24-2 (Random Access
module).
Figure 4.24-1(Retic module) or Figure 4.24-2 (Random Access module).
stain. Press ENTER as often as necessary to prime the tubing with stain. Touch the fitting
to the side of the vial to remove the last drop.
PN 4277219B 4.24-1
STAIN PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT

Figure 4.24-1 Setting Up the GEN•S System for the Retic Stain Volume Check
2
Connect
tubing
1
Disconnect
FEED-THRU
tubing here
FITTING
3
Connect
extension tubing
VL89
4
Dispense
RETIC stain
MODULE (F25)
STAIN
6498058A
CHAMBER
Figure 4.24-2 Setting Up the LH 750 System for the Retic Stain Volume Check
2
C o n n e c t
S ta in 1
tu b in g
c h a m b e r D is c o n n e c t
R a n d o m F e e d -th ru
tu b in g h e r e
A c c e s s fittin g
m o d u le
3
V L 8 9 C o n n e c t
4
D is p e n s e
s ta in
7 2 1 9 0 3 4 B
(F 2 5 )
4.24-2 PN 4277219B
b. Place the tubing in the weighed test vial and press ENTER to dispense stain for the
test.
dispensed volume.
e. Go to step 7.
ATTENTION: For accurate measurements, when a pipette is full of stain, exchange it for a
clean, dry pipette. Do not reuse the wet pipette.
a. Remove the fitting from the end of the extension tubing and connect the tubing to a
1- or 2-mL serological pipette.
b. Hold the pipette vertically and press ENTER until the meniscus of the stain falls
within the graduated marks on the pipette.
c. Read and record the meniscus. See Figure 4.24-3.
d. Press ENTER three times to dispense three aliquots of stain, then reread the
meniscus.
e. Divide the difference between the two meniscus readings by 3 to determine the
volume dispensed.
Figure 4.24-3 Reading the Meniscus
EYE LEVEL
Read here
7253210A
measurements are:
a. For easy access to the adjustment screw, slide the pump out of the mounting
bracket. See Figure 4.24-4 (Retic module) or Figure 4.24-5 (Random Access
module).
b. Turn the adjustment screw clockwise as shown in Figure 4.24-4 (Retic module) or
Figure 4.24-5 (Random Access module).
c. Reinstall the pump in the mounting bracket.
PN 4277219B 4.24-3
d. Repeat step 3, dispensing reagent at least twice to prime the pump and then recheck
the pump volume.
e. Continue adjusting, priming and checking the volume of the pump until the
Figure 4.24-4 Stain Pump Adjustments on the Retic Module
S ta in
p u m p
A d ju s tm e n t
D e c re a s e
In c re a s e
Retic 1 /2 tu rn 5 µ L
module
M o u n tin g
b ra c k e t
6 4 9 8 0 6 0 A
Figure 4.24-5 Stain Pump Adjustments on the Random Access Module

R a n d o m
A c c e s s
m o d u le
S ta in
p u m p
A d ju s tm e n t
Decrease
Increase
1/2 turn 5 µL
M o u n tin g
7 2 1 9 0 3 3 B
b ra c k e t
4.24-4 PN 4277219B
f. To ensure the adjustment holds, repeat steps 3 through 6 and compare the
9. The stain pump is defective:
b. Reconnect the stain input tubing to the stain chamber.
c. Replace the stain pump; go to the Replacement procedure.
10. The stain pump volume is acceptable:
b. Reconnect the stain input tubing to the stain chamber.
c. Select F18 to prime the stain lines.
d. Go to Verification.
1. Reconnect the stain input tubing to the stain chamber.
2. On the Retic module, unfasten the three captive screws securing the right side bracket of
the Retic module to the Retic module and carefully lift up the right side bracket. See
Figure 4.24-6.
Figure 4.24-6 Setting Up the GEN•S System for Troubleshooting the Retic Stain Delivery
1 2
Disconnect Connect
output extension
tubing here tubing
RETIC
MODULE VL99
RIGHT SIDE
BRACKET
STAIN
PUMP 3
Dispense
stain
(F25)
6498059A
PN 4277219B 4.24-5
3. Disconnect the output tubing from VL99. See Figure 4.24-6 (Retic module) or
Figure 4.24-7 Setting Up the LH 750 System for Troubleshooting the Retic Stain Delivery
1 2
D is c o n n e c t C o n n e c t
o u tp u t e x te n s io n
R a n d o m tu b in g h e r e tu b in g
A c c e s s
m o d u le V L 9 9
S ta in
p u m p 3
D is p e n s e
V L 9 9 s ta in
(F 2 5 )
7 2 1 9 0 3 1 B
4. Connect the extension tubing to the output fitting on VL99 as shown in Figure 4.24-6
(Retic module) or Figure 4.24-7 (Random Access module).
as often as necessary to prime the tubing with stain.
7. If using the weight method, compare the measurements to the verification range in
Table A.1-31, Pump Volume Tolerances. If the measurements are:
r Within the verification range, the pump is functioning correctly. Troubleshoot the
reagent pathway, correct the problem and then recheck the pump volume.
r Below the verification range, the problem could be the pump or the pump
adjustment. Try to adjust the pump. Go to step 8.
a. For easy access to the adjustment screw, pull the pump out of the mounting clip.
Refer to Figure 4.24-4 (Retic module) or Figure 4.24-5 (Random Access module).
b. Turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise as shown in Figure 4.24-4 (Retic
module) or Figure 4.24-5 (Random Access module).
c. Reinstall the pump in the mounting clip.
d. Repeat step 5, dispensing reagent at least twice to prime the pump, and then
recheck the volume.
4.24-6 PN 4277219B
f. To ensure the adjustment holds, do steps 3 through 6 of the Volume Check
procedure. Compare the measurements to the adjustment range in Table A.1-31,
r Within the range, the pump volume is acceptable. Go to step 10.
r Outside the range, the pump is defective. Go to step 9.
9. The stain pump is defective:
b. Reconnect the tubing to VL99.
c. Replace the stain pump; go to the Replacement procedure.
10. The stain pump volume is acceptable:
b. Reconnect the tubing to VL99.
c. Reinstall the right side bracket on the Retic module.
d. Select F18 to prime the stain lines.
Replacement
1. Remove the pump by sliding it out of the mounting bracket. Refer to Figure 4.24-4
2. Disconnect the tubing from the stain pump and carefully dispose of the stain in the
pump.
5. Reinstall the right side bracket on the Retic module.
6. Select F18 to prime the replacement stain pump.
Verification
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION procedure, Heading 5.5, for the retic parameters.
PN 4277219B 4.24-7
4.24-8 PN 4277219B
RETIC CLEARING SOLUTION PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT 4
REPLACEMENT
Purpose
The retic clearing solution pump is a single-volume, field-adjustable, piston-style pump. This
section contains procedures for adjusting and checking the volume of the retic clearing
solution pump, troubleshooting the pump and replacing the pump.
Tolerances.
B One feed thru-fitting, PN 1005697 (for Volume Check procedures)
B One extension tubing: consists of one 30 cm (12 in.) piece of 0.082 i.d. polyurethane
Volume Check
1. At the retic chamber, disconnect the tubing from VL95A (Retic module) or VL129
(Random Access module) and connect the tubing to a feed-thru fitting. See Figure 4.25-1
Figure 4.25-1 (Retic module) or Figure 4.25-2 (Random Access module).
retic clearing solution. Press ENTER as often as necessary to prime the tubing with retic
clearing solution. Touch the fitting to the side of the vial to remove the last drop.
PN 4277219B 4.25-1
RETIC CLEARING SOLUTION PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
Figure 4.25-1 Setting Up the GEN•S System for the Retic Clearing Solution Volume Check
2
Connect
tubing
1
RETIC Disconnect
FEED-THRU
MODULE tubing here
FITTING
3
Connect
extension tubing
VL95A
4
Dispense
retic
RETIC clearing solution
6498061A
CHAMBER (F26)
Figure 4.25-2 Setting Up the LH 750 System for the Retic Clearing Solution Volume Check
2
C o n n e c t
tu b in g
1
R a n d o m D is c o n n e c t F e e d -th ru
A c c e s s tu b in g h e r e fittin g
m o d u le 3
C o n n e c t
V L 1 2 9 e x te n s io n tu b in g
R e tic
c h a m b e r
4
D is p e n s e
r e tic
c le a r in g s o lu tio n
7 2 1 9 0 3 2 B (F 2 6 )
4.25-2 PN 4277219B
b. Place the tubing in the weighed test vial and press ENTER to dispense retic clearing
solution for the test.
dispensed volume.
e. Go to step 7.
a. Place the tubing in the clean, dry graduated cylinder and press ENTER five times to
dispense five aliquots of retic clearing solution into the graduated cylinder.
EYE LEVEL
Read here
7253210A
measurements are:
a. Turn the adjustment screw clockwise as shown in Figure 4.25-4.
pump volume.
PN 4277219B 4.25-3
Figure 4.25-4 Pump Adjustments
Decrease
Increase
1/2 turn 5 µL
7253213A
9. The retic clearing solution pump is defective:

b. Reconnect the retic clearing solution input tubing to the retic chamber.
c. Replace the retic clearing solution pump; go to the Pump Replacement procedure.
10. The retic clearing solution pump volume is acceptable:
b. Reconnect the retic clearing solution input tubing to the retic chamber.
c. Select F19 to prime the retic clearing solution lines.
1. Reconnect the retic clearing solution tubing to the retic chamber.
2. Disconnect the output tubing of VL98 and connect the tubing to a feed-thru fitting. See
Figure 4.25-5.
Figure 4.25-5.
as often as necessary to prime the tubing with retic clearing solution.
r Within range, the pump is functioning correctly. Troubleshoot the reagent pathway,
correct the problem and then recheck the pump volume.
r Below the range, the problem could be the pump or the pump adjustment. Try to
adjust the pump. Go to step 7.
4.25-4 PN 4277219B
Figure 4.25-5 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Retic Clearing Solution Delivery
2
C o n n e c t
tu b in g
Feed-thru
fitting
3
C o n n e c t
1 D is c o n n e c t
tu b in g h e r e
4
D is p e n s e
L E F T F R O N T P A N E L
r e tic
R e tic c le a r in g c le a r in g s o lu tio n
6 4 9 8 2 1 0 B s o lu tio n p u m p (F 2 6 )

b. Repeat step 4, dispensing reagent at least twice to prime the pump, and then
recheck the volume.
d. To ensure the adjustment holds, do steps 3 through 6 of the Volume Check
procedure. If using the weight method, compare the measurements to the
adjustment range in Table A.1-31, Pump Volume Tolerances. If the
measurements are:
r Within the range, the pump volume is acceptable. Go to step 9.
8. The retic clearing solution pump is defective:
b. Reconnect the output tubing to VL98.
c. Replace the retic clearing solution pump; go to the Pump Replacement procedure.
9. The retic clearing solution pump volume is acceptable:
b. Reconnect the output tubing to VL98.
c. Select F19 to prime the retic clearing solution lines.
PN 4277219B 4.25-5
Pump Replacement
1. Remove the pump by sliding it out of the mounting bracket. See Figure 4.25-6.
2. Disconnect the tubing from the retic clearing solution pump.
5. Select F19 to prime the retic clearing solution pump.
Verification
Do the Heading PRECISION VERIFICATION procedure, Heading 5.5, for the retic
parameters.
Figure 4.25-6 Replacing the Retic Clearing Solution Pump

Reagent Mounting
line bracket
Pressure
line
Retic
clearing
solution
6 4 9 8 2 0 7 B
pump
4.25-6 PN 4277219B
CLEANING AGENT PUMP CHECK AND REPLACEMENT 4
4.26 CLEANING AGENT PUMP CHECK AND REPLACEMENT
Purpose
The cleaning agent pump is a nonadjustable diaphragm pump. This section contains
procedures for a checking the volume of the cleaning agent pump and replacing the pump.
r Use the Volume Check procedure to determine the volume of reagent dispensed. Two
methods for checking the volume are provided; the weight method is recommended as it
is the most accurate, but you can use the alternate volume method if a scale is not
available.
Tolerances.
Volume Check procedure)
B Phillips-head screwdriver (for Replacement procedure)
Volume Check
1. Disconnect the tubing from fitting 129 above VL47 and connect the tubing to a feed-thru
Figure 4.26-1.
cleaning agent. Press ENTER as often as necessary to prime the tubing with cleaning
agent. Touch the fitting to the side of the vial to remove the last drop.
Note: F13 activates the cleaning agent pump twice each time you press ENTER,
dispensing two 2-mL aliquots.
PN 4277219B 4.26-1
CLEANING AGENT PUMP CHECK AND REPLACEMENT
Figure 4.26-1 Setting Up the Instrument

1
Disconnect 2 Connect
tubing here tubing
FEED-THRU
FITTING
3
Connect
extension tubing
129
VL47
RIGHT FRONT PANEL 4

CLEANING Dispense
AGENT PUMP cleaning
7253224A
agent (F13)

b. Place the tubing in the weighed test vial and press ENTER to dispense cleaning agent
for the test.
dispensed volume and divide the weight by 2.
e. Go to step 7.
a. Place the tubing in the clean, dry graduated cylinder and press ENTER five times to
dispense 10 aliquots of cleaning agent into the graduated cylinder.
measurements are:
r Outside the verification range, the pump may be defective. Go to step 8.
4.26-2 PN 4277219B
CLEANING AGENT PUMP CHECK AND REPLACEMENT 4
EYE LEVEL
Read here
7253210A
8. The cleaning agent pump is defective:

c. Replace the cleaning agent pump; go to the Replacement procedure.
9. The cleaning agent pump volume is acceptable:
c. Select F13 to prime the cleaning agent lines.
Replacement
1. Unscrew the tubing retainers on the pump and remove the tubing. See Figure 4.26-3.
2. Remove the screws securing the pump bracket to the Diluter panel and remove the
pump.
3. Install the replacement pump.
Figure 4.26-3 Replacing the Cleaning Agent Pump

REAGENT
LINE
BRACKET
CLEANING
AGENT
PUMP
RETAINERS
PRESSURE
LINE 7253225A
PN 4277219B 4.26-3
CLEANING AGENT PUMP CHECK AND REPLACEMENT
4. Unscrew the tubing retainers on the replacement pump.

5. Feed the tubing through the retainers and connect the tubing to the pump.
6. Screw the tubing retainers onto the pump, ensuring the tubing is not twisted or loose.
7. Select F13, pressing ENTER several times, to prime the cleaning agent pump.
8. Do the Volume Check procedure to ensure the replacement pump volume is correct.
Verification
Select F13 and ensure the lines from the pump are free of bubbles and that cleaning agent is
dispensed into the flow cell lines.
4.26-4 PN 4277219B
ASPIRATION PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT 4
4.27 ASPIRATION PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
Purpose
The aspiration pump is a dual-volume, field-adjustable, piston-style pump used to aspirate
sample in the Manual and the Automatic modes. This section contains procedures for
adjusting and checking the volume aspirated by the aspiration pump in both modes,
troubleshooting the pump and replacing the pump.
IMPORTANT Changes to the low volume will affect the high volume. Always check the low, Manual-mode
volume of the pump before checking the high, Automatic-mode volume. For details, see Aspiration Pump,
Adjustable Stops, under Heading 2.17, SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - HARDWARE DESCRIPTION.
r Use the Volume Check procedure to determine the volume of sample aspirated and to
adjust the pump volume as needed.
r Use the Pump Troubleshooting procedure to isolate a pump or sample pathway problem
For the pump volume adjustment and verification ranges, see Table A.1-31, Pump Volume
Tolerances.
B 1 vial, such as an ACCUVETTE II vial or a stoppered test tube, containing diluent (for
Manual-mode Volume Check)
B 3 stoppered test tubes containing diluent in a cassette (for Automatic-mode volume
check)
B Mettler scale model P2100 or equivalent scale with an accuracy of ±0.001 g (for both
modes volume check)
B One feed-thru fitting, PN 1005697 (for Pump Troubleshooting procedure)
tubing, PN 3202036, attached to barbed end of feed-thru fitting, PN 1016929 (for Pump
Troubleshooting procedure)
B Two pairs of hemostats (for Pump Troubleshooting procedure)
B Two adjustable wrenches (for pump adjustment)
Low (Manual-Mode) Volume Check

1. At the Analyzer, select CBC ONLY test mode, and at the Workstation Command Center,
Process control box, select PRIME.
2. Enter an ID# and cycle once in the Manual mode to prime the diluent lines.
PN 4277219B 4.27-1
ASPIRATION PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
3. Measure the volume aspirated:

a. Weigh the vial of diluent. This is the initial weight.
b. Using the Manual mode, cycle a sample from the weighed vial.
c. Reweigh the vial and subtract this weight from the initial weight to determine the
volume aspirated.
d. Repeat steps b through c two more times to obtain three measurements.
e. Go to step 4.
measurements are:
r Within the verification range, the pump volume is acceptable. If the Wait function
is enabled, press RESET to disable the Wait function, then go to the High
(Automatic-Mode) Volume Check.
determine if the failure is in the pump or in the sample pathway.
a. For easy access to the adjustment hex nuts at the base of the pump, slide the pump
from the mounting bracket. See Figure 4.27-1.
b. While holding the middle of the three hex nuts in position, turn the smallest hex
nut clockwise as shown in Figure 4.27-1.
Figure 4.27-1 Manual-Mode Pump Adjustments
ASPIRATION
PUMP
ASPIRATION
PUMP
MODULE
MOUNTING Decrease
BRACKET
Hold
Increase
1/2 turn 5 µL
7253226B
Adjust
4.27-2 PN 4277219B
d. Cycle the instrument two times in the Manual mode to reprime the pump, then
recheck the pump volume using step 3.
r Within the adjustment range, the pump volume is acceptable. Verify the
volume for the Automatic mode is still acceptable. Go to the High
(Automatic-Mode) Volume Check.
Note: Whenever you adjust the low (Manual-mode) volume, you must check
the high (Automatic-mode) volume
r Outside the adjustment range, the pump is defective. Go to the Replacement
procedure.
High (Automatic-Mode) Volume Check

ATTENTION: Always verify the low (Manual-mode) volume is correct before checking the high
(Automatic-mode) volume.
1. Disable the blood detectors.
2. Cycle the cassette of tubes containing diluent one time to vent the stoppered tubes,
eliminating residual pressure, and to prime the diluent lines.
3. Measure the volume aspirated:
a. Weigh each of the tubes to determine the initial weight.
b. Cycle the tubes again and reweigh each tube.
c. Subtract the weight of each tube from its initial weight to determine the volume
aspirated.
d. Go to step 4.
measurements are:
r Within the verification range, the pump volume is acceptable. If the front door
switch is bypassed, remove the bypass, then go to the Verification procedure.
determine if the failure is in the pump or in the sample pathway.
b. Turn the largest of the three hex nuts clockwise as shown in Figure 4.27-2
PN 4277219B 4.27-3
Figure 4.27-2 Automatic-Mode Pump Adjustments
ASPIRATION
PUMP
ASPIRATION
PUMP
MODULE
Decrease
MOUNTING
BRACKET Increase
1/2 turn 5 µL
7253228B
d. Cycle the instrument two times in the Automatic mode to reprime the pump, then
recheck the pump volume using step 3.
r Within the adjustment range, the pump volume is acceptable. Go to
Verification.
r Outside the adjustment range, the pump is defective. Go to the Replacement
procedure.
1. Set up the instrument and aspirate a sample as follows:
a. Using hemostats, clamp off the tubing at the Y-fitting above the aspiration pump as
b. Disconnect the tubing at the top of the aspiration pump from the Y-fitting, and
connect the tubing to a feed-thru fitting. See Figure 4.27-3.
c. Connect the extension tubing to the other side of the feed-thru fitting as shown in
Figure 4.27-3
4.27-4 PN 4277219B
Figure 4.27-3 Setting Up for Troubleshooting Aspiration Pump
3
1 Connect
Clamp tubing
tubing
FEED-THRU
FITTING
2
Disconnect
tubing
here 4
ASPIRATION Connect
ASPIRATION PUMP extension tubing
PUMP
MODULE
WEIGHED
VIAL OF
DILUENT
7253338B
d. Reweigh the vial and subtract this weight from the initial weight to determine the
volume aspirated. Place the other end of the extension tubing into a weighed vial of
diluent.
e. Aspirate a sample:
r If checking the Automatic-mode volume, enter an ID#, then place a cassette
with empty tubes on the rocker bed and then press START/CONT.
r If checking the Manual-mode volume, press and release the activator.
f. When the instrument is aspirating, press the blank area on the Diluter keypad to
select the Wait mode.
Note: The instrument is aspirating when the bar-code scanner is down (Automatic
mode only) and the Analyzer STATUS is INTRO SAMPLE.
g. Reconnect the pump tubing to the Y-fitting.
h. Release the Wait mode and let the instrument complete the current cycle.
2. Compare the measurement to the verification range in Table A.1-31, Pump Volume
Tolerances. If the measurement is:
r Within range, the pump is functioning correctly. Troubleshoot the sample pathway,
PN 4277219B 4.27-5
3. Adjust the pump to increase the volume aspirated:

a. If adjusting the Manual-mode volume -
1) For easy access to the adjustment hex nuts at the base of the pump, slide the
pump from the mounting bracket. Refer to Figure 4.27-1.
2) While holding the middle of the three hex nuts in position, turn the smallest
hex nut counterclockwise as shown in Figure 4.27-1.
b. If adjusting the Automatic-mode volume -
2) Turn the largest of the three hex nuts counterclockwise as shown in
Figure 4.27-2.
c. Reinstall the pump in the mounting bracket and cycle two samples of diluent to
reprime the pump, then recheck the pump volume.
d. Continue adjusting, priming and checking the volume of the pump until the
e. To ensure the adjustment holds, repeat steps 1 through 3 and compare the
measurement to the adjustment range in Table A.1-31, Pump Volume Tolerances. If
the measurement is:
4. The aspiration pump is defective:
b. Reconnect the pump tubing to the Y-fitting.
c. Replace the aspiration pump; go to the Replacement procedure.
5. The aspiration pump volume is acceptable:
b. Reconnect the pump tubing to the Y-fitting.
c. Cycle diluent in the Automatic mode to prime the aspiration lines.
d. At the Workstation Command Center, turn off the Prime mode.
Replacement
1. Slide the aspiration pump out of the mounting bracket. See Figure 4.27-4.
2. Disconnect the tubing from the pump.
5. Do the Low (Manual-Mode) Volume Check and High (Automatic-Mode) Volume Check
procedures to ensure the replacement pump volume is correct.
4.27-6 PN 4277219B
Figure 4.27-4 Replacing the Aspiration Pump
SL24B
SL9B
SL9A
PRESSURE LINE SAMPLE
from SL9A LINE
ASPIRATION
PUMP
ASPIRATION
PUMP PRESSURE LINE
MODULE from SL24B
PRESSURE LINE
from SL9B
7253229B
Verification
Do the WHOLE BLOOD VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, Heading 5.4, for the CBC
parameters.
PN 4277219B 4.27-7
4.27-8 PN 4277219B
DIFF LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT 4
4.28 DIFF LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
Purpose
The diff lytic reagent pump is a dual-volume, field-adjustable, piston-style pump that
dispenses the volume of diff lytic reagent (low or high) needed to obtain an optimum
chemical reaction, depending on the ambient temperature. This section contains procedures
for adjusting and checking both volumes of the diff lytic reagent pump, troubleshooting the
IMPORTANT Changes to the low volume can affect the high volume. Always check the low volume of the
pump before checking the high volume. For details, see Diff Lytic Reagent and Diff Preservative Pumps,
Adjustable Stops, under Heading 2.22, VCS TECHNOLOGY - DIFF ANALYSIS.
Tolerances.
B Volumetric Cylinder, Erythrolyse and StabiLyse, PN 5450245-1 (for Volume Check
procedure - volume method)
B Cotton swabs (to clean and dry the Volumetric Cylinder)
Low Volume Check

1. At the mixing chamber, disconnect the tubing from VL65 and connect the tubing to a
feed-thru fitting. See Figure 4.28-1.
Figure 4.28-1.
PN 4277219B 4.28-1
DIFF LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
the low volume of diff lytic reagent. Press ENTER as often as necessary to prime the tubing
with diff lytic reagent. Touch the fitting to the side of the vial to remove the last drop.
Figure 4.28-1 Setting Up the Instrument for the Diff Lytic Reagent Volume Check
1 2
Disconnect Connect
tubing here tubing
DIFF
MODULE FEED-THRU
FITTING
VL65
MIXING
CHAMBER
3
Connect
extension tubing
4
Dispense
diff lytic reagent
(low volume F23,
6498017A
high volume F24)

b. Place the tubing in the weighed test vial and press ENTER to dispense diff lytic
dispensed volume.
e. Compare the three measurements to the pump volume specifications in Table A.1-31.
r Within the verification range, the low pump volume is acceptable. Go to the
High Volume Check procedure.
4.28-2 PN 4277219B
ATTENTION: For an accurate volume measurement, always use a dry Volumetric Cylinder.
a. Place the tubing in the clean, dry Volumetric Cylinder and press ENTER three times
to dispense three aliquots of diff lytic reagent into the Volumetric Cylinder.
b. Hold the Volumetric Cylinder in a vertical position and ensure the meniscus falls
between the minimum and maximum marks for the low volume of diff lytic reagent
(ELYSE). See Figure 4.28-2.
Figure 4.28-2 Reading the Volumetric Cylinder for Diff Lytic Reagent (ELYSE)
HIGH ELYSE LOW
DIFF LYTIC
REAGENT EYE LEVEL
HIGH VOLUME
CALIBRATION
MARKS
LOW VOLUME
CALIBRATION Read here
SLYSE
MARKS
H
L
7253336A
c. If the meniscus is:

r Between the minimum and maximum marks, the pump volume is acceptable.
Go to step the High Volume Check procedure.
r Above the maximum mark, adjust the pump volume down. Go to step 7.
r Below the minimum mark, go to the Pump Troubleshooting procedure to
the pump volume.
e. Continue adjusting, priming and checking the volume of the pump until:
r For the weight method, the volume falls within the adjustment range.
r For the volume method, the meniscus falls between the minimum and
maximum marks on the Volumetric Cylinder for low volume of diff lytic
reagent (ELYSE).
PN 4277219B 4.28-3
Figure 4.28-3 Low Volume Pump Adjustments
DIFF LYTIC
REAGENT PUMP
MOUNTING
BRACKET
Decrease
LEFT FRONT PANEL
Hold
Increase
7253232A
1/2 turn 5 µL
Adjust
f. To ensure the adjustment holds, repeat steps 3 through 6. If using the weight
method, compare the measurements to the adjustment range in Table A.1-31,
r Within range, the low pump volume is acceptable. Go to the High Volume
Check procedure.
8. The diff lytic reagent pump is defective:
b. Reconnect the sample/diff lytic reagent input tubing to the mixing chamber.
c. Replace the diff lytic reagent pump; go to the Replacement procedure.
High Volume Check

ATTENTION: Always check the low volume of the diff lytic reagent before checking the high
volume.
1. Place the loose end of the extension tubing in the waste vial and select F24 to dispense
the high volume of diff lytic reagent. Press ENTER as often as necessary to prime the
tubing with diff lytic reagent. Touch the fitting to the side of the vial to remove the last
drop.
4.28-4 PN 4277219B
b. Place the tubing in the weighed test vial and press ENTER to dispense diff lytic
dispensed volume.
r Within the verification range, the high pump volume is acceptable. Go to
step 7.
ATTENTION: For an accurate volume measurement, always use a clean, dry Volumetric
Cylinder.
to dispense three aliquots of diff lytic reagent into the Volumetric Cylinder.
between the minimum and maximum marks for the high volume of the diff lytic
reagent (ELYSE). Refer to Figure 4.28-2.
r Between the minimum and maximum marks, the high pump volume is
acceptable. Go to step 7.
b. Turn the largest of the three hex nuts clockwise as shown in Figure 4.28-4.
the pump volume.
PN 4277219B 4.28-5
Figure 4.28-4 High Volume Pump Adjustments
DIFF LYTIC
REAGENT PUMP
MOUNTING
BRACKET
Decrease
LEFT FRONT PANEL Increase

1/2 turn 5 µL
7253233A
maximum marks on the Volumetric Cylinder for the high volume of diff lytic
reagent (ELYSE).
r Within range, the high pump volume is acceptable. Go to step 7.
7. The diff lytic reagent volumes are acceptable:
c. Select F14 to prime the diff lytic reagent lines.
4.28-6 PN 4277219B
1. Reconnect the sample/diff lytic reagent input tubing from VL65 to the mixing chamber.
2. Disconnect the tubing from fitting 3 above SL63 and connect the tubing to a feed-thru
Figure 4.28-5 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Diff Lytic Reagent Delivery
2
Connect
1
tubing
Disconnect
tubing here FF3 FF4 SL63
FEED-THRU
FITTING
VL8 VL7 DIFF LYTIC

REAGENT PUMP
3
Connect
extension tubing
4
Dispense
diff lytic reagent
(low volume F23,
7253234A LEFT FRONT PANEL
high volume F24)
Figure 4.28-5.
4. Place the other end of the extension tubing into a waste vial and do one of the following
to dispense diff lytic reagent, pressing ENTER as often as necessary to prime the tubing.
r For low volume, select F23.
r For high volume, select F24.
5. Determine the volume dispensed.
r For low volume, do steps 4 through 6 of the Low Volume Check procedure.
r For high volume, do steps 2 through 4 of the High Volume Check procedure.
PN 4277219B 4.28-7

a. If adjusting the low volume -
b. If adjusting the high volume -
Figure 4.28-4.
the pump volume.
r For the volume method, the meniscus falls between the appropriate minimum
and maximum marks for diff lytic reagent (ELYSE) on the Volumetric Cylinder.
r Within range, the pump volume is acceptable. Go to step 9.
a. Press STOP to return to READY
9. The diff lytic reagent volumes are acceptable:
c. Select F14 to prime the diff lytic reagent lines.
Replacement
1. Disconnect the tubing from the pump. See Figure 4.28-6.
2. Remove the pump by sliding it out of the mounting bracket.
5. Do the Low Volume Check and High Volume Check procedures to ensure the
replacement pump volumes are correct.
4.28-8 PN 4277219B
Figure 4.28-6 Replacing the Diff Lytic Reagent Pump
REAGENT
LINE
DIFF LYTIC
REAGENT
FF10 PUMP
FF12
PRESSURE LINE
from FF10
LEFT FRONT PANEL

MOUNTING PRESSURE LINE
BRACKET from FF12
7253235A
Verification
1. If you did this procedure as part of the VCS Optimization procedure, go back to the VCS
OPTIMIZATION procedure, Heading 4.71.
2. If you did this procedure for any other reason, do the DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP
VOLUME OPTIMIZATION procedure, Heading 4.66.
PN 4277219B 4.28-9
4.28-10 PN 4277219B
DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT 4
4.29 DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
Purpose
The diff preservative pump is a dual-volume, field-adjustable, piston-style pump that
dispenses the volume of diff preservative (low or high) needed to obtain an optimum
chemical reaction, depending on the ambient temperature. This section contains procedures
for adjusting and checking both volumes of the diff preservative pump, troubleshooting the
IMPORTANT Changes to the low volume will affect the high volume. Always check the low volume of the
pump before checking the high volume. For details, see Diff Lytic Reagent and Diff Preservative Pumps,
Adjustable Stops, under Heading 2.22, VCS TECHNOLOGY - DIFF ANALYSIS.
Tolerances.
B One extension tubing: consists of one 30-m (12-in.) piece of 0.082 i.d. polyurethane
B Two vials, such as ACCUVETTE™ II vials, one for waste and one for testing
B Mettler scale model P2100, or equivalent scale with an accuracy of ± 0.001 g (for Volume
B Volumetric Cylinder, Erythrolyse™ reagent and StabiLyse™ reagent, PN 5450245-1 (for
Volume Check procedure - volume method)
B Cotton swabs (to clean and dry the Volumetric Cylinder)
Low Volume Check

1. Disconnect the polyurethane tubing from the I-beam tubing in VL45 and connect the
I-beam tubing to a feed-thru fitting. See Figure 4.29-1.
Figure 4.29-1.
PN 4277219B 4.29-1
DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT
the low volume of diff preservative. Press ENTER as often as necessary to prime the tubing
with diff preservative. Touch the fitting to the side of the vial to remove the last drop.
Figure 4.29-1 Setting Up the Instrument for the Diff Preservative Volume Check
1 2
Disconnect Connect
tubing here I-beam tubing
FEED-THRU
DIFF FITTING
MODULE
VL45
3
Connect
extension tubing
MIXING
CHAMBER 4
Dispense
diff preservative
(low volume F21,
6498039A
high volume F22)

b. Place the tubing in the weighed test vial and press ENTER to dispense diff
preservative for the test.
dispensed volume.
r Within the verification range, the low pump volume is acceptable. Go to the
High Volume Check procedure.
4.29-2 PN 4277219B
Below the verification range, go to the Pump Troubleshooting procedure to
r
to dispense three acquits of diff preservative into the Volumetric Cylinder.
between the minimum and maximum marks for the low volume of diff preservative
(SLYSE). See Figure 4.29-2.
r Between the minimum and maximum marks, the pump volume is acceptable.
Go to the High Volume Check procedure.
Figure 4.29-2 Reading the Volumetric Cylinder for Diff Preservative (SLYSE)
HIGH ELYSE LOW
EYE LEVEL
DIFF
SLYSE
PRESERVATIVE Read here

HIGH VOLUME
CALIBRATION
MARKS
H
LOW VOLUME
L
CALIBRATION
MARKS
7253337A

the pump volume.
maximum marks on the Volumetric Cylinder for low volume of diff
preservative (SLYSE).
PN 4277219B 4.29-3
Figure 4.29-3 Low Volume Pump Adjustments
DIFF
PRESERVATIVE
PUMP
MOUNTING
BRACKET
Decrease
Hold
Increase
RIGHT FRONT PANEL
1/2 turn 5 µL
7253237A Adjust
r Within range, the low pump volume is acceptable. Go to the High Volume
Check procedure.
8. The diff preservative pump is defective:
b. Reconnect the polyurethane tubing to the I-beam tubing in VL45.
c. Replace the diff preservative pump; go to the Replacement procedure.
High Volume Check

ATTENTION: Always verify the low volume of the diff preservative before verifying the high
volume.
1. Place the loose end of the extension tubing in the waste vial and select F22 to dispense
the high volume of diff preservative. Press ENTER as often as necessary to prime the
tubing with diff preservative. Touch the fitting to the side of the vial to remove the last
drop.
4.29-4 PN 4277219B
b. Place the tubing in the weighed test vial and press ENTER to dispense diff
preservative for the test.
dispensed volume.
r Within the verification range, the high pump volume is acceptable. Go to
step 7.
to dispense three aliquots of diff preservative into the Volumetric Cylinder.
between the minimum and maximum marks for the high volume of diff
preservative. Refer to Figure 4.29-2.
r Between the minimum and maximum marks, the high pump volume is
acceptable. Go to step 7.
from the mounting bracket. Refer to Figure 4.29-4.
b. Turn the largest of the three hex nuts clockwise as shown in Figure 4.29-4.
the pump volume.
maximum marks on the Volumetric Cylinder for high volume of diff
preservative (SLYSE).
PN 4277219B 4.29-5
Figure 4.29-4 High Volume Pump Adjustments
DIFF
PRESERVATIVE
PUMP
MOUNTING
BRACKET
Decrease
Increase
1/2 turn 5 µL
RIGHT FRONT PANEL

7253238A
r Within range, the high pump volume is acceptable. Go to step 7.
7. The diff preservative volumes are acceptable:
c. Select F15 to prime the diff preservative lines.
1. Reconnect the polyurethane tubing to the I-beam tubing in VL45.
2. Disconnect the tubing from fitting 101 above SL60 and connect the tubing to a feed-thru
Figure 4.29-5.
4.29-6 PN 4277219B
Figure 4.29-5 Setting Up the Instrument for Troubleshooting the Diff Preservative Delivery
2
1
Connect
FF100 FF101 Disconnect
tubing
tubing here
SL60
FEED-THRU
FITTING
3
Connect
extension tubing
RIGHT FRONT PANEL

4
Dispense
diff preservative
(low volume F21,
7253239A
high volume F22)
4. Place the other end of the extension tubing into a waste vial and do one of the following
to dispense diff preservative, pressing ENTER as often as necessary to prime the tubing.
r For low volume, select F21.
r For high volume, select F22.
5. Determine the volume dispensed.
r For low volume, do steps 4 through 6 of the Low Volume Check procedure.
r For high volume, do steps 2 through 4 of the High Volume Check procedure.
a. If adjusting the low volume -
PN 4277219B 4.29-7
b. If adjusting the high volume -

Figure 4.29-4.
the pump volume.
r For the volume method, the meniscus falls between the appropriate minimum
and maximum marks for diff preservative (SLYSE) on the Volumetric Cylinder.
r Within range, the pump volume is acceptable. Go to step 9.
9. The diff preservative pump volumes are acceptable:
c. Select F15 to prime the diff preservative lines.
Replacement
1. Disconnect the tubing from the pump. See Figure 4.29-6.
2. Remove the pump by sliding it out of the mounting bracket.
5. Do the Low Volume Check and High Volume Check procedures to ensure the
replacement pump volumes are correct.
4.29-8 PN 4277219B
Figure 4.29-6 Replacing the Diff Preservative Pump
REAGENT
LINE MOUNTING
BRACKET
DIFF FF125
PRESERVATIVE
PUMP
FF131
PRESSURE LINE PRESSURE LINE

from FF131 from FF125
RIGHT FRONT PANEL

7253240A
Verification
1. If you did this procedure as part of the VCS Optimization, go back to the VCS
OPTIMIZATION procedure, Heading 4.71.
2. If you did this procedure for any other reason, do the DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP
VOLUME OPTIMIZATION, Heading 4.66.
PN 4277219B 4.29-9
4.29-10 PN 4277219B
REAGENT RESERVOIR COMPONENT REPLACEMENT 4
4.30 REAGENT RESERVOIR COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use the procedures in this section to replace the following components in the reagent
reservoir:
r Float sensor/reservoir caps

r Solenoids
r Reservoir Interface card.
Float Sensor/Reservoir Cap Replacement
B Medium Phillips-head screwdriver
B Medium flathead screwdriver
B Square of gauze or absorbent tissue (for stain reservoir components)
Removal
2. Open the upper and lower right rear Diluter doors to gain access to the reagent
reservoirs. See Figure 4.30-1 (old style) or Figure 4.30-2 (new style).
Figure 4.30-1 Reagent Reservoir Components, Old Style

Solenoid
cables
Reservoir
Interface Sensor
card cables
Solenoids
Vacuum
Vacuum input Securing
manifold screws
Reservoir
cap
Float
sensor
Reagent
reservoir
7253258A
PN 4277219B 4.30-1
REAGENT RESERVOIR COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
Figure 4.30-2 Reagent Reservoir Components, New Style
Sensor Securing
cables screws
Reservoir
Interface
card
Reservoir
cap
Solenoid
cables
VC31
Reagent
Float reservoir
sensor
Vacuum
input
Solenoids
7253432E
3. Disconnect the sensor cable for the float sensor being replaced from the Reservoir
Interface card.
4. Disconnect the vacuum input tubing from the reservoir cap.
5. Remove the screws securing the reservoir cap.
Note: The diluent reservoir cap has four screws, the other reservoirs caps have two.
6. Carefully remove the reservoir cap and its attached float sensor.
Note: The retic stain contains new methylene blue that can leave a permanent stain. Use
gauze or absorbent tissue when removing components for this reagent.
7. Slide the float sensor out of the reservoir.
8. Inspect the O-ring for damage, cracks or flat areas, and replace if defective.
Installation
1. Assemble the O-ring, float sensor and reservoir cap with the necessary replacement parts
and insert the assembly into the reagent reservoir.
2. Secure the reservoir cap with the screws, replace the vacuum tubing, and connect the
sensor cable.
4. Select the F-function to prime the reagent. See Table 4.30-1.
5. Verify that no LEVEL message is displayed and that the reagent pathway is full.
4.30-2 PN 4277219B
REAGENT RESERVOIR COMPONENT REPLACEMENT 4
Table 4.30-1 Reagent Priming Functions and LEVEL Messages
Reagent LEVEL Message Priming Function
CBC lytic reagent LEVEL L F02
Cleaning agent LEVEL C F17
Diff lytic reagent LEVEL P F14
Diff preservative LEVEL P F15
Diluent LEVEL D F16
Retic clearing solution LEVEL R F19
Stain LEVEL R F18
Reagent Reservoir Solenoid Replacement
B Adjustable wrench
Procedure
reservoirs. Refer to Figure 4.30-1 (old style) or Figure 4.30-2 (new style).
3. Disconnect the solenoid cable from the Reservoir Interface card.
4. To replace the solenoid on the old style Reagent Reservoir module:
a. Remove the hex nut on the top of the solenoid to remove the outer case of the
solenoid.
b. Unscrew the center portion of the solenoid from the manifold.
c. Install the replacement solenoid.
5. To replace the solenoid on the new style Reagent Reservoir module:
a. Remove the two Phillips-head screws on the bottom of the solenoid and remove the
solenoid.
b. Ensure the two O-rings for the solenoid are installed and seated correctly.
Tip: An easy way to remove the O-rings from the solenoid without damaging them
is to firmly press a piece of scotch tape across the O-rings and then lift off the scotch
tape to lift out the O-rings.
c. Install the O-rings in the new solenoid, ensuring they are seated correctly.
d. Install the replacement solenoid.
6. Connect the solenoid cable.
PN 4277219B 4.30-3
REAGENT RESERVOIR COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
8. Select the appropriate F-function to prime the reagent and verify the solenoid is
functioning correctly. Refer to Table 4.30-1.
9. Verify that no LEVEL message is displayed and that the reagent pathway is full.
Reservoir Interface Card Replacement
Procedure
reservoirs. Refer to Figure 4.30-1 (old style) or Figure 4.30-2 (new style).
3. Disconnect all the cables from the Reservoir Interface card.
4. On the old style Reagent Reservoir module, remove the vacuum manifold
(Figure 4.30-1) by removing the two screws underneath the manifold.
5. Remove the three screws securing the Reservoir Interface card and remove the card.
6. Install the replacement Reservoir Interface card.
7. On the old style Reagent Reservoir module, reinstall the vacuum manifold.
8. Connect all the cables to the Reservoir Interface card. Refer to Figure A.3-17 for the
correct locations of the connectors.
9. Power up the Analytical Station and ensure no system messages are displayed.
Verification
Cycle several samples to ensure there are no reagent errors.
4.30-4 PN 4277219B
CBC LYTIC REAGENT AND DILUENT DELIVERY TIMING CHECK 4
4.31 CBC LYTIC REAGENT AND DILUENT DELIVERY TIMING CHECK
Purpose
The delivery timing of the CBC lytic reagent and the diluent affects the positioning of the
WBC populations in the WBC histogram. Use this procedure to ensure that delivery timing is
correct.
B Storage scope with probes
B One coaxial cables with BNC connectors (for all Systems)
B A second coaxial cables with BNC connectors (for Systems with a BD ADJ card)
B Hemostat or equivalent clamping device
B Digital pressure meter, such as a Marsh Meter, PN 2906639 (for use alone or with
optional Pressure Transducer and Test Box, PN 2906535)
B T-fitting
B Tubing
B Minimum of five different normal whole-blood specimens. Ensure the blood specimens
used to verify the timing adjustment have a completely normal differential.
Preliminary Checks
1. Verify the CBC lytic reagent pump volume is correct. See Volume Check under
Heading 4.22, CBC LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND
REPLACEMENT.
2. Verify the WBC diluent dispenser volume is correct. See Volume Check under
Heading 4.23, DILUENT DISPENSER CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT.
3. Verify the 30 psi readout at the Power Supply is 30 psi ±0.1 psi.
Note: If there is a failure of T2 or T4, recheck the pressure in the Diluter. If the times are
too long, 30 psi may be low.
Timing Check
1. Do the Preliminary Checks procedure before starting this procedure.
2. Press DRAIN to drain the baths.
3. Disconnect the Y-fitting for CBC lytic reagent and diluent input as shown in
Figure 4.31-1.
PN 4277219B 4.31-1
CBC LYTIC REAGENT AND DILUENT DELIVERY TIMING CHECK
Figure 4.31-1 WBC Bath Tubing Disconnected for Lytic Reagent/Diluent Timing Hookup
WBC
BATH
METAL FEED-THRU
FITTING
Disconnect
tubing
from here 7253398B
4. Connect the storage oscilloscope to a pressure transducer test box as shown in

Figure 4.31-2A (GEN•S System) and Figure 4.31-3A (LH 750 System), or to a digital
pressure indicator (Marsh meter) as shown in Figure 4.31-2B (GEN•S System) and
Figure 4.31-3B (LH 750 System).
Figure 4.31-2 Equipment Hookup for Lytic Reagent/Diluent Timing Procedure on the GEN•S System
Diluter 3 Card Diluter 3 Card

Oscilloscope TP3 Oscilloscope TP3
TP1 TP1
ON
Test box WBC bath WBC bath
Digital
OFF
+- pressure
meter
Output sensor
Ground Ground
CBC lytic CBC lytic

reagent line reagent line
Transducer Diluent line Diluent line
A. Hookup with Test Box and Transducer B. Hookup with Digital Pressure Meter 7253264E
4.31-2 PN 4277219B
Figure 4.31-3 Equipment Hookup for Lytic Reagent/Diluent Timing Procedure on the LH 750 System
B D A D J c a rd B D A D J c a rd
B N C B N C
c o n n e c to r c o n n e c to r
7 2 1 9 0 1 7 B
5. Connect the external trigger probe:

r On the GEN•S System, connect the probe to TP1 on the Diluter 3 card for the SL7
(WBC dispense) signal and the probe ground to TP3, digital ground, as shown in
Figure 4.31-2.
r On the LH 750 System, connect a BNC cable to the BNC connector on the BD ADJ
card as shown in Figure 4.31-3.
6. Configure the oscilloscope settings:
Switch Position
Display Mode Store
Time/Division 0.5 seconds
Sweep Mode Single Trigger
Trigger Source External
Trigger/Slope Negative
Volts/Division 0.1 V for pressure transducer test boxes
20 mV for Marsh meter
Coupling DC
PN 4277219B 4.31-3
7. If using a test box and transducer, prime the transducer to eliminate bubbles in the
tubing:
a. Press DRAIN to empty the baths.
b. Unclamp the hemostats.
c. Place gauze or a vial under the tubing to catch the diluent, then press RINSE.
d. Clamp the hemostats during the diluent flow to prevent bubbles.
e. Repeat as necessary until lines are bubble-free.
8. Cycle the instrument in the Manual mode to get a display of the waveform on the scope.
Verify the waveform timing is within the limits specified in Table A.1-16.
r If the timing is within the limits, verify the Gran Mode is within limits. Go to
step 10.
r If the timing is not within the limits, correct the problem; go to step 9.
9. If the timing is not within limits:
a. Ensure all fittings are the correct size and tubing is the correct length and diameter.
b. Check conditions listed in Table 4.31-1.
c. Adjust CK1 until the timing is within the specifications given in Table A.1-16.
Table 4.31-1 Conditions Affecting Lytic Reagent/Diluent Delivery Timing
Failure Conditions may be caused by:

T1 Problem with solenoids.
T2 r 30 psi out of specifications.
r CBC lytic reagent pump failure.
r CBC lytic reagent delivery tubing out of specifications.
T3 Check problems with T1, T2 or T4.
T4 r 30 psi out of specifications.
r WBC diluent dispenser failure.
r WBC diluent delivery tubing out of specifications.
10. Configure the Printer for printing the Gran Mode:

a. Log in as service administrator.
b. Select tt .
c. On the System Setup - Patient screen, select Reporting Options.
d. Record the Report Format displayed in the Printout Options box.
e. Set the Report Format to STKS.
4.31-4 PN 4277219B
11. Cycle five different, normal whole-blood specimens and verify the Gran Modes are
within the specifications given in Table A.1-16.
Note: The Gran Mode is printed on the second page of the printout, under 3Diff.
r If the Gran Mode is within limits, the delivery timing of the CBC lytic reagent and
diluent is acceptable. Go to step 13.
r If the Gran Mode is not within limits, go to step 12.
12. If the Gran Mode is not acceptable:
a. Ensure the blood specimens you used are normal and fresh. If not, obtain fresh,
normal whole-blood specimens and repeat from step 11.
b. If the whole-blood specimens are acceptable and the Gran Mode is still out, repeat
this procedure, beginning with the Preliminary Checks.
13. Drain the baths.
14. Disconnect the trigger cables and transducer hookup. Reconnect tubing to the fitting
under the bath.
15. Reconfigure the Printer to the original Report Format you recorded in step 10.
Verification
Do the WHOLE BLOOD VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, Heading 5.4.
PN 4277219B 4.31-5
4.31-6 PN 4277219B
HGB LAMP REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 4
4.32 HGB LAMP REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
Purpose
Use the Hgb lamp replacement procedure whenever the Hgb voltages:
r Cannot be adjusted to within specifications.

r Must be adjusted frequently because of drift.
Use the Hgb lamp adjustment procedure lamp whenever:
r Any part of the Hgb assembly is cleaned or replaced.

r The Hgb-blank or Hgb-sample voltages are outside the specifications.
r A problem within the Hgb analysis system is corrected.
B None
Replacement
1. Press POWER OFF on the Diluter.
2. Disconnect the Hgb lamp connector from the Diluter panel. See Figure 4.32-1.
Figure 4.32-1 Replacing the Hgb Lamp
G E N S S y s te m
L H 7 5 0 S y s te m
Hgb lamp
Heat connector
6 4 9 8 2 0 8 B
sink
3. Unscrew the heat sink to remove the Hgb lamp.

ATTENTION: Ensure the lamp filament is installed vertically.
4. Install the new Hgb lamp and plug in the lamp connector.
PN 4277219B 4.32-1
HGB LAMP REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
5. Press POWER ON on the Diluter.

6. Wait 15 minutes before adjusting the Hgb-lamp voltage; go to the Hgb Lamp Voltage
Adjustment procedure.
Hgb Lamp Voltage Adjustment

1. Ensure the Analytical Station is powered on for 15 minutes before doing the lamp
adjustment.
2. Ensure the instrument is primed with diluent.
3. From the Analyzer’s MAIN MENU, select ANALYZER FUNCTIONS tt HGB LAMP
ADJUST. The Analyzer displays PERFORMING HGB LAMP ADJUST and the Diluter
displays ADJUSTING HGB.
4. When the displays return to READY, access the Analyzer SERVICE MENU (Heading 4.2)
and select SPECIAL FUNCTIONS tt HGB VOLTAGE.
5. Ensure the Hgb preamp output voltage is within the specifications listed in Table A.1-30,
Hgb Voltage Limits.
6. Cycle diluent in the Manual mode.
7. From the MAIN MENU, select ANALYZER FUNCTION tt HGB READINGS.
8. Ensure the Hgb-blank and Hgb-sample voltages and the difference between the
Hgb-blank and Hgb-sample voltages are within the specifications listed in Table A.1-30.
Verification
4.32-2 PN 4277219B
WORKSTATION SCREEN CAPTURE AND LIST-MODE DATA COLLECTION 4
4.33 WORKSTATION SCREEN CAPTURE AND LIST-MODE DATA COLLECTION
Purpose
Use the procedures in this section to capture Workstation screens or to collect List-mode data
for off-site viewing and analysis. These procedures use customer menu options only, so you
can share them with your customers as needed.
B A formatted 3 1/2 in. floppy diskette
Screen Capture
1. Display the desired screen on the Workstation.
2. Press Ý+Õ to copy the screen to the clipboard.
Note: You will not see anything happening; the computer does not display a message or
give any other indication that it is copying the screen.
3. Press Ý+È to access the program menu.
4. Select Programs tt Accessories tt Paint.
5. Select Edit tt Paste to paste the screen from the clipboard into the Paint program.
Note: At this point the file can be printed, saved, or imported into another application.
6. Save the screen on a diskette for later viewing or analysis.
a. Insert a formatted 3 1/2 in. floppy diskette into drive A.
b. Save the screen as a 16-color bit map:
1) Select File tt Save As.
2) In the Save in: field, select 3 1/2 Floppy (A:).
3) In the File name: field, enter the file name.
4) In the Save as type: field, select 16 color bit map.
5) Select Save.
7. Remove the diskette from drive A.
8. Select File tt Exit to exit the Paint program and return to the instrument program.
List-Mode Data Collection

1. Insert a formatted 3 1/2 in. floppy diskette into drive A.
2. Display the desired Patients Test (Results & Graphics) screen on the Workstation.
3. Select to access the Research screen and obtain the listname (for example,
01B6E1F5).
4. Press Ý+È to access the program menu.
5. Select Programs tt Windows NT Explorer.
6. From the column on the left side of the screen, click once on the + sign in front of Adms
to expand the directory.
PN 4277219B 4.33-1
WORKSTATION SCREEN CAPTURE AND LIST-MODE DATA COLLECTION
7. Select (click once) RawData.

8. On the right side of the screen, use the arrow keys to highlight the raw data file you want
to save (for example, 01B6E1F5).
9. Select (click once) the raw data file. Highlight both the .dat and the .inf files.
Note: To highlight more than one file at a time, press Ý and hold it while selecting
the files.
10. Select File tt Send To tt 31/2 Floppy (A). The raw data file is transmitted to the diskette.
11. Remove the diskette from drive A.
12. Select File tt Close to exit the Windows program and return to the instrument program.
4.33-2 PN 4277219B
CRT INTENSITY ADJUSTMENT 4
4.34 CRT INTENSITY ADJUSTMENT
Purpose
ATTENTION: It is recommended to replace the Scope Module instead of performing the CRT
adjustment.
Adjust the intensity of the CRT display when a lack of contrast makes it unreadable and you
cannot replace the Scope Module.
CRT Intensity Adjustment on the GEN•S System
B Insulated screwdriver or plastic TV alignment tools
B Small Phillips-head screwdriver
Adjustment
WARNING Injury from electric shock. High voltage is present in the area for making adjustments to the
Scope Module. To avoid injury:
1. Power down the Analytical Station.
2. Remove all jewelry.
3. Make adjustments with an insulated screwdriver or plastic TV alignment tools.

2. Remove the Scope Module from the Analyzer; refer to Heading 4.6 for directions.
3. Remove the two screws on the top of the Scope Module securing the Scope card.
4. Remove the four screws securing the rear plate of the Scope Module and remove the rear
plate.
5. On the CRT4 Disp card, adjust the brightness potentiometer by turning it fully
clockwise. See Figure 4.34-1.
Figure 4.34-1 Brightness Potentiometer Location on the GEN•S System Scope Module
H. HOLD TRANSFORMER
H. DELAY
CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS
VERT VERT VERT
P3
FOCUS
LIN HOLD SIZE
7253317A
6. Install the Scope card and place the Scope Module back into the Analyzer.
Note: It is not necessary to secure the rear plate at this time.
PN 4277219B 4.34-1
CRT INTENSITY ADJUSTMENT

8. Check the CRT display for a bright raster with flyback lines.
9. Power down the Analytical Station and remove the Scope Module again.
10. Turn the brightness potentiometer counterclockwise a quarter of a turn.
11. Place the Scope Module back into the Analyzer.
12. Power up the Analytical Station and check the display.
13. Repeat steps 9 through 12 until the raster and flyback lines disappear from the display.
14. Test the backlighting in all areas of the menus that use backlighting and make sure the
intensity is satisfactory.
16. Remove the Scope Module from the Analyzer and secure the rear plate and the Scope
card.
17. Reinstall the Scope Module into the Analyzer and secure with the retaining screws.
18. Power up and verify the Analytical Station is working correctly. Go to Verification.
CRT Intensity Adjustment on the LH 750 System
B Plastic trimpot tool
Adjustment
1. Adjust the contrast potentiometer for the CRT (Figure 4.34-2) until the display is clear,
without any raster or flyback lines.
2. Verify the Analytical Station is working correctly. Go to Verification
Figure 4.34-2 Contrast Potentiometer Location on the LH 750 System
C o n tra s t 7 2 1 9 0 0 3 B
p o te n tio m e te r
Verification
1. At the Analyzer, access the SERVICE MENU (Heading 4.2).
2. Select DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES tt CRT DISPLAY TEST and verify the display of
characters and numbers is filled and legible.
3. Return to SYSTEM RUN.
4.34-2 PN 4277219B
BELT DRIVE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT 4
4.35 BELT DRIVE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to remove the belt drive assembly whenever it is necessary to:
r Check the tension in the rocker bed belt.

r Access a component mounted under the belt drive assembly.
r Replace the tube detector or the belt drive assembly.
B Allen wrench
Removal
2. Open the Diluter front cover and disconnect the tubing to the belt advance cylinder. See
Figure 4.35-1.
Figure 4.35-1 Disconnecting Pneumatic Tubing from the Belt Advance Cylinder
BELT ADVANCE
CYLINDER
Disconnect
here
7253332B
Note: These components are in the same relative locations on the GEN•S System (shown) and
the LH 750 System.
PN 4277219B 4.35-1
BELT DRIVE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT
3. Remove the top Allen screw from the tube detector assembly and carefully lift the tube
detector mount off the guide pins. See Figure 4.35-2.
Figure 4.35-2 Tube Detector Assembly Allen Screw

GUIDE
PINS
ALLEN
SCREW
5915305H
4. Remove the screws that secure the metal guide strip to the top front of the rocker bed
and remove the guide strip.
5. Remove the cover on one end of the rocker bed.
6. Remove the screws that secure the belt drive assembly to the rear of the rocker bed.
7. Lift up and remove the belt drive assembly.
Installation
1. Reposition the belt drive assembly on the rocker bed.
2. Secure the belt drive assembly to the rear of the rocker bed.
3. Install the metal guide strip.
4. Install the tube detector mount on the post.
5. Reconnect the pneumatic tubing to the belt advance cylinder and close the Diluter front
cover.
Verification
Do the CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY VERIFICATION, Heading 5.8.
4.35-2 PN 4277219B
ROCKER BED BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT 4
4.36 ROCKER BED BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT
Purpose
If the rocker bed belt tension is too tight or too loose, the belt may not move correctly. Use
this procedure to check the belt tension, and to adjust the tension if necessary.
B Allen wrench set
B Ruler
Adjustment
1. Power down theAnalytical Station as directed under Heading 4.1.
2. Remove the belt drive assembly as directed under Heading 4.35, beginning at step 2.
3. Turn the belt drive assembly upside down and ensure the slack caused by gravity is
within the specifications for Lengths, Rocker Bed Belt Check under Heading A.1,
Tolerances and Limits.
4. If the belt tension is not within specifications, adjust the tension by relocating the
adjustment rollers in the access holes. See Figure 4.36-1.
Figure 4.36-1 Belt Drive Assembly, Front View, Upside Down
ROLLER ROLLER
ADJUSTMENTS ADJUSTMENTS
SLACK
5915075H AREA OF SLACK TOLERANCE
5. Reinstall the belt drive assembly as directed under Heading 4.35.

6. Verify the cassette transport assembly is working correctly. Go to the Verification
procedure.
Verification
PN 4277219B 4.36-1
ROCKER BED BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT
4.36-2 PN 4277219B
UNDER LEFT STACK SWITCH REPLACEMENT 4
4.37 UNDER LEFT STACK SWITCH REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective under left stack switch and to verify the replacement
switch works correctly.
B Small Phillips-head screwdriver (small right-angle Phillips-head screwdriver for easier
access)
B Soldering iron
Procedure
2. Remove the four screws securing the left section of the rocker bed and slide the left
section out. See Figure 4.37-1.
Figure 4.37-1 Removing the Under Left Stack Switch

Remove
screws
ROCKER BED
UNDER LEFT
STACK SWITCH
7253329A
the LH 750 System.
3. Remove the two screws securing the switch to the rocker bed.
4. Unsolder the wires from the switch, noting the positions of the wires on the switch.
5. Solder the wires to the replacement switch.
6. Attach the replacement switch to the rocker bed assembly.
7. Reinstall the left section of the cassette transport assembly.
PN 4277219B 4.37-1
UNDER LEFT STACK SWITCH REPLACEMENT

Verification
1. Verify the under left stack switch changes states correctly as directed in Table 4.81-1.
2. Do the CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY VERIFICATION, Heading 5.8.
4.37-2 PN 4277219B
UNDER RIGHT STACK SWITCH REPLACEMENT 4
4.38 UNDER RIGHT STACK SWITCH REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective under right stack switch and to verify the
replacement switch works correctly.
B Soldering iron
B Allen wrench
Procedure
Note: To facilitate soldering, remove rocker bed if necessary.

2. Remove the belt drive assembly as directed under Heading 4.35, beginning at step 2.
3. Remove the two screws securing the switch to the rocker bed. See Figure 4.38-1.
Figure 4.38-1 Removing the Under Right Stack Switch
ROCKER BED
Remove
screws
(2)
UNDER RIGHT BELT

STACK SWITCH
7253330B
the LH 750 System.
5. Attach the replacement switch to the rocker bed assembly.
7. Reinstall the belt drive assembly as directed under Heading 4.35.
PN 4277219B 4.38-1
UNDER RIGHT STACK SWITCH REPLACEMENT
Verification
1. Verify the under right stack switch changes states correctly as directed in Table 4.81-1.
4.38-2 PN 4277219B
LEFT OR RIGHT LIFT UP SWITCH REPLACEMENT 4
4.39 LEFT OR RIGHT LIFT UP SWITCH REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective left or right lift up switch and to verify the
replacement switch works correctly.
B Soldering iron
Removal
2. Move the rocker bed to the horizontal position.
3. When all the pneumatic gauges read zero, manually raise the appropriate lift platform,
being careful not to damage the actuator guide rail or the rubber grommet.
4. Remove the lift cover.
5. Move the bed to the forward position and remove the screws securing the switch bracket
to the lift assembly. See Figure 4.39-1.
Figure 4.39-1 Removing the Lift Up Switch
LIFT UP
SWITCH
LEFT RIGHT
LIFT LIFT
ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
COVER COVER
LEFT RIGHT
LEFT LIFT LIFT UP LIFT UP RIGHT LIFT
CYLINDER SWITCH SWITCH CYLINDER 7253243A
the LH 750 System.
PN 4277219B 4.39-1
LEFT OR RIGHT LIFT UP SWITCH REPLACEMENT
6. Unsolder the wires from the switch, noting the positions of the wires.
7. Remove the switch from the switch bracket.
Installation
1. Attach the replacement switch to the switch bracket and solder on the wires.
2. Reattach the switch bracket to the lift assembly.
3. Push the lift platform down and replace the lift cover.
4. Power on the Analytical Station.
Verification
1. Verify the replacement lift up switch changes states correctly as directed in Table 4.81-1.
4.39-2 PN 4277219B
LEFT OR RIGHT LIFT CYLINDER REPLACEMENT 4
4.40 LEFT OR RIGHT LIFT CYLINDER REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective left or right lift cylinder and to verify the
replacement cylinder works correctly.
B One 1-1/2 in. #4-40 screw
B Double-sided tape
Removal
2. Remove the rocker bed as instructed under Heading 4.43, beginning at step 2.
3. Remove the cover of the appropriate lift assembly.
4. Remove the two screws securing the switch bracket to the cylinder. See Figure 4.40-1.
Figure 4.40-1 Removing the Lift Up Switch
LIFT UP
SWITCH
LEFT RIGHT
LIFT LIFT
ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
COVER COVER
LEFT RIGHT
LEFT LIFT LIFT UP LIFT UP RIGHT LIFT
CYLINDER SWITCH SWITCH CYLINDER 7253243A
the LH 750 System.
PN 4277219B 4.40-1
LEFT OR RIGHT LIFT CYLINDER REPLACEMENT
5. Remove the two screws, accessed under the Diluter, that secure the lift cylinder to the
black cassette transport assembly channel. See Figure 4.40-2.
6. Noting the port location of the tubing, remove the tubing from the cylinder.
7. Using the screwdriver, carefully pry the cover off the lift platform.
8. Remove the screw securing the lift platform to the top of the cylinder and remove the
cylinder.
9. Remove the tie wrap holder on cylinder.
Figure 4.40-2 Removing the Lift Cylinder from the Cassette Transport Assembly Channel
RIGHT LIFT
CYLINDER
CASSETTE
TRANSPORT LIFT
ASSEMBLY CYLINDER
CHANNEL
LEFT LIFT
CYLINDER
TRANSPORT
ASSEMBLY
CHANNEL
(bottom view)
7253244A
Installation
1. Attach the replacement cylinder to the black cassette transport assembly channel.
2. Connect the tubing to the ports of the cylinder noted in step 6 of the Removal procedure.
Attach the tie wrap holder to cylinder.
3. Attach the lift platform to the top of the cylinder.
4. Apply new double-sided tape to the lift platform cover and reinstall the cover onto the
lift platform.
5. Install the switch bracket on the cylinder.
6. Install the lift assembly cover.
7. Reinstall the rocker bed as directed under Heading 4.43.
9. Verify the new cylinder is working correctly. Go to the Lift Function Test.
4.40-2 PN 4277219B
LEFT OR RIGHT LIFT CYLINDER REPLACEMENT 4
Lift Function Test
1. Ensure the rocker bed is horizontal.
2. Select F05, Solenoid Test, then energize the solenoid for the appropriate lift and ensure
the lift moves up smoothly without interference:
r For the right lift, energize SL21.
r For the left lift, energize SL22.
3. Press ENTER several times and ensure the lift moves up and down smoothly without
binding or jerking.
4. With the lift in the down position, check the function of the lift.
a. If checking the right lift:
1) Place two cassettes in the loading bay.
2) Verify that the right lift rises, retrieves one cassette and places the cassette on
the rocker bed, and that the second cassette is retained by the flippers.
3) Press STOP.
b. If checking the left lift:
1) Place a cassette on the left side of the rocker bed below the unloading bay.
2) Press START/CONT.
3) Verify that the left lift rises and places the cassette in the unloading bay.
5. If the lift functions correctly, go to Verification.
6. If the lift does not function correctly, adjust the lift up switch activator. Go to the Lift Up
Switch Activator Adjustment procedure.
Lift Up Switch Activator Adjustment

1. Select F05, Solenoid Test, then energize the appropriate solenoid to raise the lift:
r For the right lift, energize SL21.
r For the left lift, energize SL22.
2. Remove the lift assembly cover, if necessary, to access the setscrew securing the lift up
switch activator (black bumper). See Figure 4.40-3.
3. Loosen the setscrew and raise the activator about 3 mm (1/8 in.), then tighten the
setscrew.
Note: If you have made this adjustment several times without success, try moving the
activator all the way down (or up) and starting again.
4. Repeat the Lift Function Test.
Verification
PN 4277219B 4.40-3
LEFT OR RIGHT LIFT CYLINDER REPLACEMENT
Figure 4.40-3 Lift Up Switch Activator Setscrew

UNLOADING LOADING
BAY BAY
LEFT RIGHT
LIFT LIFT
SETSCREW
LEFT LIFT UP RIGHT

SWITCH LIFT UP
ACTIVATOR SWITCH
7253331A ACTIVATOR
4.40-4 PN 4277219B
TOP LEFT OR RIGHT SAFETY SWITCH REPLACEMENT 4
4.41 TOP LEFT OR RIGHT SAFETY SWITCH REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use the replacement procedure to replace either the top left or the top right safety switch. Use
the switch test procedure to ensure the replacement switch works correctly.
The top left and top right safety switches are hazard fail-safe devices that allow only 12
cassettes in the loading or the unloading bay at one time. This prevents injury to the operators’
hands and fingers as they load and unload cassettes, and also prevents damage to the cassettes.
B Standard cassette
B Pliers
B Soldering iron
Replacement
2. Open the appropriate side door of the Diluter to access the defective safety switch.
3. Remove the nuts securing the safety switch to the Diluter. See Figure 4.41-1.
Figure 4.41-1 Removing the Top Left or Top Right Safety Switch
TOP LEFT ACTIVATOR UNLOADING LOADING ACTIVATOR TOP RIGHT

SAFETY SWITCH BAR BAY BAY BAR SAFETY SWITCH
RIGHT
COMPARTMENT
DOOR OPEN
SAFETY
SWITCH
7253335A LEFT PANEL RIGHT PANEL

6. Using the hardware removed in step 3, attach the replacement switch to the Diluter panel.
8. Test the switch to verify it is working correctly. Go to the Top Left Safety Switch Test
procedure or the Top Right Safety Switch Test procedure.
PN 4277219B 4.41-1
TOP LEFT OR RIGHT SAFETY SWITCH REPLACEMENT
Top Left Safety Switch Test

1. Place a cassette on the rocker bed belt, in the far left position.
2. Press and hold the top left safety switch activator bar. Refer to Figure 4.41-1 for location.
3. Press START/CONT and ensure the left lift does not move up and the LEFT STACK FULL
message is generated.
4. Release the left top safety switch activator bar and press START/CONT.
5. As the left lift starts to rise, press the left top safety switch activator bar and ensure the
left lift retracts immediately and does not make a full stroke.
6. Release the left top safety switch activator bar and ensure the cassette is placed in the
unloading bay.
7. If the Analytical Station does not meet the criteria described in steps 4 through 6,
reposition the switch:
a. Access the Analyzer SERVICE MENU (Heading 4.2), select DIAGNOSTIC
ROUTINES tt SENSOR TESTS, and check the status of the TOP LEFT SAFETY
switch.
b. Loosen the nuts for the switch and adjust the switch until the status changes.
c. Tighten the nuts and repeat this test.
Top Right Safety Switch Test

1. Press and hold the right top safety switch activator bar. Refer to Figure 4.41-1 for
location.
2. Place a standard cassette in the loading bay or press START/CONT and ensure the right lift
does not move up and the RIGHT STACK FULL message is generated.
3. Release the right top safety switch activator bar and ensure the right lift retrieves the
cassette and places it on the rocker bed.
4. Press STOP.
5. Place the cassette back in the loading bay or press START/CONT.
6. As the right lift starts to rise, press the right top safety switch activator bar and ensure the
right lift retracts immediately and does not make a full stroke.
7. Press STOP.
8. If the Analytical Station does not meet the criteria described in steps 5 through 7,
reposition the switch:
a. Access the Analyzer SERVICE MENU (Heading 4.2), select DIAGNOSTIC
ROUTINES tt SENSOR TESTS, and check the status of the TOP RIGHT SAFETY
switch.
b. Loosen the nuts for the switch and adjust the switch until the status changes.
c. Tighten the nuts and repeat this test.
Verification
4.41-2 PN 4277219B
FLIPPERS (OLD STYLE) CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT 4
4.42 FLIPPERS (OLD STYLE) CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to check the operation of the old style flippers in the loading and
unloading bays and to adjust those flippers as necessary.
Note: The new style flippers are not adjustable. You can easily identify the style of flippers in
use by comparing the width of the projections on the flippers.
r On the old style flippers the front and rear projections are the same width, about 1.6 cm
(5/8 in.). See Figure 4.42-1.
r On the new style flippers the front projection is noticeably narrower than the rear
projection.
Figure 4.42-1 Adjusting the Flippers
R e a r R e a r
F lip p e r p r o je c tio n s p r o je c tio n s F lip p e r
F lip p e r F lip p e r
F ro n t
p r o je c tio n s
L o o s e n L o o s e n
7 2 1 9 0 2 6 B
th e s e s c re w s th e s e s c re w s
B One empty cassette
B Ruler
Flipper Check and Adjustment

1. Ensure the Analyzer display is SYSTEM RUN and that no cassettes are in the loading or
unloading bays, or on the rocker bed.
2. Select F90 on the Diluter/numeric keypad to prevent SmartStart recognition from
occurring.
3. Place an empty cassette in the loading bay.
PN 4277219B 4.42-1
FLIPPERS (OLD STYLE) CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT
4. Slide the cassette to the left and verify that the right side of the cassette overlaps the
flipper on the right side by the distance specified in the Cassette Transport Assembly
Specifications, Flipper Position Check, under Heading A.1, Tolerances and Limits.
5. Slide the cassette to the right and verify that the left side of the cassette overlaps the
flipper on the left side by the distance specified in the Cassette Transport Assembly
Specifications, Flipper Position Check, under Heading A.1, Tolerances and Limits.
6. If the overlap is not correct, adjust the flippers:
a. Loosen the two screws securing the flipper to the frame. Refer to Figure 4.42-1.
b. Move the flipper until the cassette overlap is correct, then tighten the screws.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 5 in the unloading bay.
8. Press STOP to return to READY.
9. Place two empty cassettes in the loading bay. If necessary, press START/CONT to initiate the
Automatic-mode.
10. Ensure the cassettes are lifted smoothly and only one cassette clears the retracted flippers
as it is lowered. The second cassette should remain on the flippers.
r If the cassette is lifted correctly, go to Verification.
r If the flippers misalign the descending cassette, adjust the right lift up switch
activator. See Lift Up Switch Activator Adjustment under Heading 4.40, Left or
Right Lift Cylinder Replacement.
Verification
4.42-2 PN 4277219B
ROCKER BED REMOVAL 4
4.43 ROCKER BED REMOVAL
Purpose
Use this procedure to remove the rocker bed for performing other procedures and to replace a
defective rocker bed.
B Hemostats or equivalent clamping device
B One, #4-40 screw
B Allen wrench
Removal
2. Disconnect cable P36 from under the rocker bed, and remove the cable from its retaining
clip.
3. Disconnect the pressure tubing to the stripper plate and belt advance cylinders at the
quick-disconnect fittings.
CAUTION Applying a side load to the rocker bed cylinder can damage the cylinder shaft and seal. Do not
apply a side load to the cylinder while disconnecting the ball and socket joint.
4. Disconnect the bed rock cylinder ball and socket joint.

5. Using the hemostats, disconnect and remove the rocker bed spring, setting the spring
aside for later replacement.
6. Install the #4-40 screw in the end of the left pivot pin. See Figure 4.43-1 for location of
the pivot pin.
Figure 4.43-1 Left Pivot Pin and Retaining Setscrew
Pivot
pin
Pivot pin
retaining
set screw
Pivot pin
mounting Rocker
bracket bed
6498045A
PN 4277219B 4.43-1
ROCKER BED REMOVAL
7. Loosen the retaining setscrew for the left pivot pin.

8. While holding the rocker bed securely, pull out the left pivot pin and set it aside.
CAUTION The bed sensor flag could damage a bed position sensor when you lift the rocker bed. Move the
rocker bed carefully as you maneuver it past the bed position sensors to avoid damaging the sensors.
9. Move the rocker bed to the left to slide the rocker bed off the right pivot pin.
10. If unable to clear the right pivot pin:
a. Loosen the two retaining setscrews for the right pivot pin.
b. Remove and set aside the right pivot pin.
11. Lift the rocker bed out of the Diluter.
Installation
1. If the right pivot pin is out, reinstall the right pivot pin, pushing the pin in until it is
flush with the mounting bracket, then tighten the pin’s retaining setscrew.
CAUTION The bed sensor flag could damage a bed position sensor when you lift the rocker bed. Move the
rocker bed carefully as you maneuver it past the bed position sensors to avoid damaging the sensors.
2. Install the rocker bed on the right pivot pin, being careful not to damage the bed position
sensors with the bed sensor flag.
3. While holding the rocker bed securely, install the left pivot pin in the mounting bracket.
4. Tighten the retaining setscrew for the left pivot pin and ensure there is no side-to-side
movement of the bed.
5. Remove the #4-40 screw from the left pivot pin.
6. Reinstall the rocker bed spring, and reconnect cable P36 and the quick disconnects for
the stripper plate and belt advance cylinders pressure tubing.
7. Reconnect the ball and socket joint for the bed rock cylinder, being careful not to apply
side pressure. If it is necessary to extend the bed rock cylinder arm to connect the ball
and socket joint:
a. Power up the instrument.
b. Select F05 on the Diluter keypad to access the function for energizing solenoids.
c. Energize SL27 to extend the bed rock cylinder arm and then reconnect the ball and
socket joint.
d. Return to READY, and then go to Verification.
8. Power up the Analytical Station and go to Verification.
Verification
4.43-2 PN 4277219B
ROCKER BED POSITION SENSORS CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4
4.44 ROCKER BED POSITION SENSORS CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Purpose
Use this procedure to check the position of the rocker bed position flag and sensors and to
adjust the flag and/or sensors if necessary following alignment of the tube ram, adjustment of
the bar-code scanner and/or adjustment of the bed bumpers.
ATTENTION: Verify the tube ram/needle alignment, the bar-code scanner position adjustment
and the bed bumpers adjustments are correct before doing this procedure.
B Right-angle Allen wrench
Bed Sensor Flag Check and Adjustment

1. Select F05, the function for energizing solenoids.
2. Ensure the bed locks are released. If not, select SL28 to release the bed locks.
3. Ensure the stripper plate is activated. If not, select SL29 to activate the stripper plate.
4. Open the lower front cover of the Diluter.
5. Move the rocker bed backward, positioning the bed sensor flag in the bed backward
sensor. See Figure 4.44-1 for sensor location. Ensure the flag:
r Extends more than halfway into the sensor without touching the sensor or the
sensor retaining screw. See Figure 4.44-2.
r Is not skewed to the left or right.
Figure 4.44-1 Bed Position Sensor Locations
BED RIGHT FRONT PANEL

HORIZONTAL
SENSOR BED
BED BACKWARD
FORWARD SENSOR
SENSOR
RIGHT
LIFT
7253250B
PN 4277219B 4.44-1
ROCKER BED POSITION SENSORS CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Figure 4.44-2 Bed Position Flag/Sensor Adjustment Screws
Rocker bed
Channel upright
Plate
Sensor retaining screw

Flag
Flag Sensor
retaining
6 4 9 8 2 0 9 B
screws
6. If the flag is not positioned correctly, loosen the retaining screws for the flag and move
the flag until it meets the criteria in step 5.
7. If the flag is positioned correctly, go to the Bed Backward Sensor Check and Adjustment
procedure.
Bed Backward Sensor Check and Adjustment

1. Move the bed to its 45-degree backward position and hold.
2. Select SL27 to activate the bed rock cylinder. The bed should stay in place.
3. Verify the bed rock cylinder has more travel so that the end stroke does not coincide with
its held position. See Figure 4.44-3 for location of the bed rock cylinder.
4. Open the right side Diluter door and verify CR3 (the bed backward LED on the Sensor
Distribution card is ON.
r If CR3 is ON, go to step 8.
r If CR3 is OFF, reposition the bed backward sensor; go to step 5.
5. Loosen the retaining screw on the bed backward sensor.
Note: Access the bed backward sensor through the right side door of the Diluter.
CAUTION The sensors bend easily when held tightly between the fingers. Hold the sensors carefully while
working on them.
6. Adjust the bed backward sensor:

a. Slide the sensor to its rightmost position.
b. Monitor the CR3 LED. It should be OFF.
c. Move the sensor slowly toward the left until CR3 turns ON.
7. Tighten the sensor retaining screw to lock the bed backward sensor in position.
4.44-2 PN 4277219B
ROCKER BED POSITION SENSORS CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4
Figure 4.44-3 Bed Rock Cylinder Location
CENTER PANEL
BED ROCK
BED ROCK
CYLINDER
CYLINDER
(FRONT VIEW) 7253245A
(REAR VIEW)
8. Select SL27 to deactivate the bed rock cylinder.

9. Ensure the bed locks are engaged. If not, select SL28 to engage the bed locks.
10. Manually move the rocker bed to its backward position.
11. Check the status of CR3:
r If CR3 is ON, go to the Bed Horizontal Sensor Check and Adjustment procedure.
r If CR3 is OFF, repeat from step 5.
12. Go to the Bed Horizontal Sensor Check and Adjustment procedure.
Bed Horizontal Sensor Check and Adjustment

1. Grip the bed with both hands and move it to the horizontal position.
2. Monitor CR1 on the Sensor Distribution Card.
3. Rock the bed with both hands without allowing the bed lock pistons to completely leave
the indent on the cam assembly.
r If CR1 is ON, go to the Bed Forward Sensor Check and Adjustment.
r If CR1 is OFF, reposition the bed horizontal sensor; go to step 4.
4. Loosen the retaining screw for the bed horizontal sensor.
Note: Access the bed horizontal sensor through the right side door of the Diluter.
5. While monitoring CR1, slide the bed horizontal sensor to the left and right until the LED
turns ON, then OFF.
6. Center the bed is horizontal sensor while CR1 is ON.
7. Tighten the sensor retaining screw to lock the bed is horizontal sensor in position.
PN 4277219B 4.44-3
ROCKER BED POSITION SENSORS CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
8. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to verify the adjustment.

9. Go to the Bed Forward Sensor Check and Adjustment procedure.
Bed Forward Sensor Check and Adjustment

1. Grip the rocker bed with both hands and move it to the 45-degree forward position.
2. Monitor CR2 status on the Sensor Distribution Card.
r If CR2 is ON, go to Verification.
r If CR2 is OFF, reposition the bed forward sensor: go to step 3.
3. Loosen the retaining screw for the bed forward sensor.
Note: Access the bed forward sensor through the right side door of the Diluter.
4. Adjust the bed forward sensor:
a. Slide the sensor until CR2 goes ON then OFF.
b. Center the sensor while CR2 is ON.
5. Tighten the sensor retaining screw to lock the bed forward sensor in position.
6. Recheck the bed forward sensor.
r If CR2 is ON, go to step 7.
r If CR2 is OFF, repeat steps 3 through 6.
7. Return the system to READY and then go to Verification.
Verification
4.44-4 PN 4277219B
BED ROCK CYLINDER REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 4
4.45 BED ROCK CYLINDER REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective bed rock cylinder and to verify the replacement
cylinder works correctly.
B Three cassettes filled with specimen tubes containing at least 3-mL blood or 5-mL
diluent or cleaning agent
B Clamping device such as hemostats
Removal
2. Move the rocker bed to the backward position.
CAUTION Applying a side load to the bed rock cylinder can damage the cylinder shaft and seal. Do not
apply a side load to the cylinder while disconnecting the ball and socket joint.
3. Disconnect the bed rock cylinder ball and socket joint. For location of the bed rock
cylinder, see Figure 4.45-1.
4. Remove the green/black striped tubing connected to the front of the cylinder.
5. Open the left rear door of the Diluter and remove the green/black striped tubing
connected to the rear of the bed rock cylinder.
Figure 4.45-1 Bed Rock Cylinder Location

CENTER PANEL
BED ROCK
BED ROCK
CYLINDER
CYLINDER
(FRONT VIEW) 7253245A
(REAR VIEW)
Note: These components are in the same relative locations on the GEN•S System (shown) and the LH 750
System.
PN 4277219B 4.45-1
BED ROCK CYLINDER REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
6. Remove the retaining ring that secures the cylinder to the mounting bracket to release
the cylinder.
Installation
1. Position the replacement bed rock cylinder on the mounting bracket and reinstall the
retaining ring.
2. Connect the green/black striped tubing to the rear of the replacement cylinder and close
the rear door of the Diluter.
4. Use F05 to energize SL27, activating the cylinder.
5. At the front of the Diluter:
a. Connect the green/black striped tubing to the front of the bed rock cylinder.
b. Connect the bed rock cylinder ball and socket joint, being careful not to apply side
pressure.
c. Press STOP to exit F05.
6. Adjust the bed rock rate; go to the Bed Rock Rate Adjustment procedure.
Bed Rock Rate Adjustment

1. Place the loaded cassettes on the rocker bed, positioning the cassettes so that the tube
detector LED remains off.
2. Under the lower front cover of the Diluter, locate SL36 on MF13. See Figure 4.45-2.
Figure 4.45-2 Checking and Changing the Bed Rock Rate
Adjust SL30
here
CHOKE
REAR VIEW
SL27 CLAMP SL36
6498026A
4.45-2 PN 4277219B
BED ROCK CYLINDER REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 4
3. Clamp the output line from SL36 to keep the belt from advancing.
4. Select F07 to activate the bed rock, and verify the bed rocks freely. If the rocker bed is not
moving freely, check for obstructions inhibiting movement.
Note: One bed rock is defined as a complete swing of the bed in one direction - either
forward or backward.
5. Using the second hand of your watch or a timer for accuracy, verify the number of bed
rocks per minute is within the limits specified for Cassette Transport Assembly
Specifications, Rocker Bed Belt Check, under Heading A.1, TOLERANCES AND LIMITS.
r If the rock rate is within specifications, go to step 7.
r If the rock rate is not within specifications, adjust the variable choke. Go to step 6.
6. To adjust the bed rock rate:
a. Locate the variable choke, CK18, in the line connecting SL27 and SL30. Refer to
Figure 4.45-2.
b. Turn the setscrew on the choke:
r Counterclockwise to open the choke and speed up the rock rate.
r Clockwise to close the choke and slow down the rock rate.
c. Repeat step 5.
7. Exit the bed rock function.
8. Remove the cassettes from the rocker bed and remove the clamp from the tubing on
SL36.
Verification
PN 4277219B 4.45-3
BED ROCK CYLINDER REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
4.45-4 PN 4277219B
TUBE DETECTOR REPLACEMENT 4
4.46 TUBE DETECTOR REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective tube detector and adjust the tube position. If the
tube detector assembly height is not correct, go to Heading 4.47 for adjustment.
B Pin pusher
B Allen wrench set
B Cassette filled with tubes
Replacement
2. Remove the rocker bed belt assembly as directed under Heading 4.35, beginning at
step 2.
3. Disconnect the tube detector assembly cable wires from the connector under the rocker
bed, noting the pin positions.
4. Disconnect the original tube detector assembly from its mounting post.
5. Insert the wires from the replacement tube detector assembly cable into the pin positions
of the connector as noted in step 3.
6. Install the replacement tube detector assembly on the original mounting post.
7. Reinstall the belt drive assembly and power up the Analytical Station (Heading 4.35).
8. Position a cassette of tubes on the right side of the tube detector assembly and select F96,
Transport Test, to advance the cassette.
9. For each of the 12 tubes:
a. Watch the tube detector LED and the stripper plate until the LED lights and the
stripper plate engages with the tube.
b. Ensure the tube is either centered with the stripper plate (see Figure 4.46-1) or is
positioned to the right of the center of the stripper plate within the limits specified
in the Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications, Tube Detector Checks, under
Heading A.1, TOLERANCES AND LIMITS.
10. If the stripper plate and tube are not aligned correctly, adjust the position of the sensor:
a. Turn the adjustment screw on the right side of the tube detector bracket. See
Figure 4.46-1.
b. Rerun the cassette.
c. Check the tube and stripper plate alignment as described in step 9.
d. Repeat steps a through c until the adjustment is correct.
e. Press STOP twice to exit this routine, then verify the bar-code reader reads the tube
labels correctly. Go to the BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST, Heading 4.49.
11. Press STOP twice to exit this routine, then go to Verification.
PN 4277219B 4.46-1
TUBE DETECTOR REPLACEMENT
Figure 4.46-1 Tube Detector Stop Position Adjustment
ROCKER BED 90
ASSEMBLY LED
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW
TUBE in
CASSETTE TUBE DETECTOR
ASSEMBLY
(Top view)
STRIPPER
PLATE DISTANCE TOLERANCE
7253248A
Verification
4.46-2 PN 4277219B
TUBE DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT 4
4.47 TUBE DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to adjust the tube detector height and tube stop position as necessary.
B Cassette filled with tubes
B Universal Stripper Plate GO/NO GO Gauge, PN 5401259 (optional)
B Ruler
B Allen wrench set
Adjustment
1. Check the distance between front edge of the tube detector assembly and the rocker bed.
r If using the Universal Stripper Plate GO/NO GO Gauge, go to step 2.
r If using a ruler, go to step 3.
2. Place the Universal Stripper Plate GO/NO GO Gauge, in the GO position, between the
base of the tube detector and the rocker bed as shown in Figure 4.47-1, and ensure the
Gauge slides under the tube detector assembly and fits snugly.
r If the Gauge does not slide under the tube detector assembly, or if there is a gap
between the Gauge and the tube detector, adjust the tube detector assembly. Go to
step 4.
r If the Gauge fits correctly, go to step 5.
Figure 4.47-1 Tube Detector Height Adjustment
UNIVERSAL STRIPPER
PLATE GO/NO GO GAUGE
ROCKER BED in GO POSITION
MOUNT
ASSEMBLY
CABLE
DISTANCE
TOLERANCE POST
ALLEN
(ATTACHMENT)
SCREWS
TUBE DETECTOR
TUBE DETECTOR ASSEMBLY
ROCKER
7253413C SUPPORT PLATE (Side view)
BED
PN 4277219B 4.47-1
TUBE DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT
3. Using a ruler, measure the distance between the base of the tube detector assembly
mount and the rocker bed as shown in Figure 4.47-1. Verify the distance is within the
limits specified in the Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications, Tube Detector Checks,
under Heading A.1, TOLERANCES AND LIMITS.
r If the distance is not within limits, adjust the tube detector assembly post. Go to
step 4.
r If the distance is within limits, go to step 5.
4. Reposition the tube detector assembly:
a. Loosen the Allen screws that attach the tube detector assembly post to the rear of
the rocker bed. Refer to Figure 4.47-1.
b. Move the tube detector assembly post until the distance between the tube detector
and the rocker bed is correct.
c. Ensure the tube detector support plate is properly installed. Refer to Figure 4.47-1.
d. Tighten the Allen screws.
e. If using the Universal Stripper Plate GO/NO GO Gauge, remove the Gauge.
CAUTION If the tubes touch the rod of the tube detector, the tube detector will detect the tubes incorrectly,
which could cause the needle to pierce the wrong area of the tube cap, damaging the needle. When
adjusting the tube detector, ensure the tubes do not touch the rod of the tube detector.
5. Place the loaded cassette on the rocker bed and slowly slide the cassette from right to left
under the finger ball. As a tube approaches the ball, make sure the tube touches the ball
and not the rod and that the finger ball moves up and down freely.
6. Slide the cassette until the tube detector LED lights.
7. Determine the distance between the center of the tube and the center of the stripper
plate. See Figure 4.47-2. Ensure the distance is within the limits specified in the Cassette
Transport Assembly Specifications, Tube Detector Checks, under Heading A.1,
TOLERANCES AND LIMITS.
Note: This is about the distance that the cassette and belt drive coast before stopping.
8. Slide the cassette until the tube passes the finger ball and ensure the ball falls freely to its
lowest position and the tube detector LED is out.
9. Reposition the cassette on the right side of the tube detector assembly and select F96,
Transport Test, to advance the cassette.
10. For each of the 12 tubes:
a. Watch the tube detector LED and the stripper plate until the LED lights and the
stripper plate engages with the tube.
b. Ensure the tube is either centered with the center of the stripper plate or is
positioned to the right of the groove on the stripper plate within the limits specified
in the Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications, Tube Detector Checks, under
Heading A.1. See Figure 4.47-2.
4.47-2 PN 4277219B
TUBE DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT 4
Figure 4.47-2 Tube Detector Stop Position Adjustment
ROCKER BED 90
ASSEMBLY LED
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW
TUBE in
CASSETTE TUBE DETECTOR
ASSEMBLY
(Top view)
STRIPPER
PLATE DISTANCE TOLERANCE
7253248A
11. If the stripper plate and tube are not aligned correctly, adjust the position of the sensor:
a. Turn the adjustment screw on the right side of the tube detector bracket. Refer to
Figure 4.47-2.
b. Rerun the cassette.
c. Check the tube and stripper plate alignment as described in step 10.
d. Repeat steps a through c until the adjustment is correct.
12. Press STOP twice to exit this routine, then verify the instrument is working correctly. Go
to Verification.
Verification
1. Do the BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR PERFORMANCE TEST, Heading 4.56.
2. Do the BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST, Heading 4.49.
PN 4277219B 4.47-3
TUBE DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT
4.47-4 PN 4277219B
CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY ALIGNMENT CHECKS 4
4.48 CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY ALIGNMENT CHECKS
Purpose
Use this procedure to verify the alignment of the cassette transport assembly, after performing
any adjustments, or to determine if adjustments are needed.
B Cassette filled with empty tubes
Procedure
1. Open the front cover of the Diluter and ensure there is sufficient clearance between the
base of the stripper plate cylinder and the ram tower cutout.
2. Select F05 on the Diluter/numeric keypad to access the function for energizing
solenoids.
3. Move the rocker bed to the forward position and ensure:
r The stripper plate does not hit the bellows.
r The bed locks are in place. If they are not, energize SL28 to engage the bed locks.
WARNING The needle is sharp and may contain biohazardous material. To avoid skin puncture, do not put
your hands in the piercing station unless instructed to do so.
4. Select the following solenoids to verify the needle, tube ram and stripper plate are
aligned.
r SL29 to retract the stripper plate and ensure it is held against the rocker bed
r SL23 to disengage the needle interlock
r SL25 to extend the tube ram and lower the bellows. The stripper plate holds the
tube ram in position.
5. Verify the needle is straight and clean.
6. Verify there is clearance between the tube ram and rocker bed.
7. Select SL29 to release the stripper plate. Carefully push the stripper plate against the top
of the bellows. Ensure it is flush with the bellows and the needle is centered in the
stripper plate.
8. Return the needle, tube ram and stripper plate, to their at rest state:
a. Select SL25 to retract the tube ram and extend the bellows.
b. Select SL23 to engage the bellows interlock.
c. Select SL29 to extend the stripper plate.
9. Move the bed to the backward position and verify the stripper plate does not hit the
bar-code scanner and is aligned with the bar-code scanner focal line.
10. Move the bed to the horizontal position.
PN 4277219B 4.48-1
CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY ALIGNMENT CHECKS
11. Slide the cassette slowly under the tube detector and ensure:
r The tube detector clears the tubes and cassette.
r The tube detector LED lights only when a tube passes under the ball activator.
12. Go to the BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST, Heading 4.49, to verify the scanner is
aligned properly.
4.48-2 PN 4277219B
BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST 4
4.49 BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST
Purpose
Use this procedure to ensure the bar-code reader is working correctly by verifying the read
rate is within specifications.
B 12 bar code-labeled test tubes filled with diluent.
Procedure

2. At the Analyzer, ensure the instrument is in SYSTEM RUN.
3. At the Diluter/numeric keypad, select F07, BAR-CODE READ.
4. Load a cassette with the bar code-labeled tubes of diluent and place the cassette on the
rocker bed, to the right of the piercing station.
5. Check the data on the Workstation Bar-Code Read Test screen and verify it is within the
bar-code read rate specifications listed in Table A.1-1. Figure 4.49-1 is an example of a
Bar-Code Test screen with typical scanning data.
Figure 4.49-1 Bar-Code Test Screen with Typical Data
PN 4277219B 4.49-1
BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST
6. If the bar-code read rate is outside the specifications listed in Table A.1-1, adjust the
bar-code scanner as directed under Heading 4.51, BAR-CODE SCANNER
ADJUSTMENTS.
4.49-2 PN 4277219B
BAR-CODE SCANNER CYLINDER REPLACEMENT 4
4.50 BAR-CODE SCANNER CYLINDER REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use the procedures in this section to replace the bar-code scanner cylinder for either the LED
style or the laser style bar-code reader.
LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Replacement
B Crescent wrench
B Nut driver set
Removal
2. Loosen the BSV module for access to the bar-code scanner components.
3. Remove the bar-code scanner cover.
4. Remove the bar-code scanner and place it out of the way:
a. Remove the screws in front.
b. Remove the ground from the guide assembly.
c. Retain the pim-nut bracket.
5. Remove the bar-code scanner guide rod, by unscrewing the rod.
6. Remove the bar-code scanner guide assembly and retain the threaded plate.
7. Ensure the cylinder rod is retracted into the bar-code scanner cylinder.
8. On the cylinder, disconnect the tubing from the front fitting, then remove the fitting.
9. At the rear of the Diluter:
a. Unscrew the magnet at the end of the guide rod.
b. Disconnect the tubing.
c. Pull out the bar-code scanner cylinder.
Installation
1. Insert the replacement cylinder from the rear of the Diluter. Reinstall the magnet on the
rod, and install the tubing on the rear fitting of the cylinder.
2. Route the tubing for the front fitting of the cylinder through the opening, then install the
star washer and nut to secure the cylinder.
3. Connect the tubing to the front fitting of the bar-code cylinder.
4. Reinstall the guide rod assembly.
5. Reinstall the threaded plate in the opening and install the locknut and washer.
6. Reinstall the bar-code scanner and pim-nut bracket.
7. Reposition and secure the BSV module in its original location.
PN 4277219B 4.50-1
BAR-CODE SCANNER CYLINDER REPLACEMENT

9. Go to the BAR-CODE SCANNER ADJUSTMENTS procedure, Heading 4.51.
Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Replacement
B Tamper proof screwdriver, PN 5450541
B Crescent wrench
B Nut driver set
Removal
2. Loosen the BSV module for access to the bar-code scanner components.
3. Using the tamper proof screwdriver, remove the bar-code scanner cover.
4. Remove the bar-code scanner and place it out of the way:
a. Remove the screws in front.
b. Retain the pim-nut bracket.
c. Disconnect the scanner cable from J2.
5. Remove the ground wire from the top of the Newbar card.
6. Disconnect the ribbon cable from J1.
7. Remove the locknut from the cylinder rod.
8. Retract the cylinder rod into the bar-code scanner cylinder and retain the threaded plate.
9. On the cylinder, disconnect the tubing from the front fitting, then remove the fitting.
10. At the rear of the Diluter, unscrew the magnet at the end of the guide rod.
11. At the front of the Diluter:
a. Remove the bar-code scanner mounting block containing the Newbar card.
b. Remove the nut and star washer securing the bar-code scanner cylinder.
12. At the rear of the Diluter:
a. Disconnect the tubing from the rear fitting on the cylinder.
b. Pull out the bar-code scanner cylinder.
Installation
1. Insert the replacement cylinder from the rear of the Diluter and install the tubing on the
rear fitting of the cylinder.
2. Route the tubing for the front fitting of the cylinder through the opening, then install the
star washer and nut to secure the cylinder.
3. Install the front fitting on the bar-code cylinder and connect the tubing.
4. Reinstall the bar-code scanner mounting block containing the Newbar card.
4.50-2 PN 4277219B
BAR-CODE SCANNER CYLINDER REPLACEMENT 4
5. Reinstall the threaded plate in the opening. Thread the cylinder rod into the threaded
plate until the rod is flush with the bar-code scanner mounting block.
6. Install the locknut on the front of the cylinder rod.
7. Reconnect the ribbon cable to J1 and reinstall the ground wire on the top of the Newbar
card.
8. Using the two screws and the pim-nut bracket, reinstall the bar-code scanner. Adjust the
scanner horizontally until it is flush with the left edge of the mounting block.
9. Reconnect the scanner cable to J2 on the Newbar card.
10. Reinstall the bar-code scanner cover.
11. At the rear of the Diluter, reinstall the magnet on the end of the guide rod.
12. Reposition and secure the BSV module in its original location.
Verification
Do the BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST, Heading 4.49.
PN 4277219B 4.50-3
BAR-CODE SCANNER CYLINDER REPLACEMENT
4.50-4 PN 4277219B
BAR-CODE SCANNER ADJUSTMENTS 4
4.51 BAR-CODE SCANNER ADJUSTMENTS
Purpose
Use the LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Adjustments or the Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner
Adjustments in this section if it is necessary to meet the bar-code read rate specifications.
LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Adjustments
B Allen wrench
B Cassette
B DMM
B Ruler and/or the following optional tools
B BCS GO/NO GO Gauge (SK 3338), PN 7231105 (optional)
B BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block (SK 3156), PN 7231085 (optional)
B Parallel Adjustment Cylinder (SK 3157), PN 7231084 (optional)
B Stop watch
B Alcohol
B Lint-free wipes
B 12 bar code-labeled tubes
Set Up
CAUTION Doing the following steps out of sequence could damage the needle or the bar-code scanner. To
avoid damaging these components, do the following steps as stated and in the order given.
1. Open the front cover of the Diluter.

3. Check the rocker bed and determine if the bed locks are engaged.
r If the bed locks are engaged, grip the rocker bed with both hands and move the
rocker bed 45 degrees forward.
r If the bed locks are not engaged, manually move and hold the rocker bed 45 degrees
forward and energize SL28 to engage the bed locks, locking the rocker bed in that
position.
4. Load a cassette with the laboratory’s tubes in positions 5 and 7 and the Parallel
Adjustment Cylinder (if available) or another laboratory tube in position 6.
5. Position the cassette on the rocker bed so that the Parallel Adjustment Cylinder or the
tube in position 6 is in the piercing position. The tube detector LED is lit.
WARNING The piercing needle is sharp and contains biohazardous material. Do not put your hands in the
piercing station unless you are directed to do so.
PN 4277219B 4.51-1
BAR-CODE SCANNER ADJUSTMENTS
6. Position the Parallel Adjustment Cylinder or tube on the piercing needle:

a. Energize SL29 to engage the stripper plate with the front of the Parallel Adjustment
Cylinder or tube.
b. Energize SL23 to release the bellows interlock.
c. Energize SL25 to engage the tube ram with the rear of the Parallel Adjustment
Cylinder or the tube and to contract the bellows.
d. Energize SL29 to push the Parallel Adjustment Cylinder or the tube onto the needle.
See Figure 4.51-1.
7. Ensure the front of the cassette is flush with the front guide of the rocker bed.
Figure 4.51-1 Bar-Code Scanner Home Position Alignment
BAR-CODE
SCANNER
ASSEMBLY
BAR-CODE
SCANNER
PARK TAB
STRIPPER
7253347A
PLATE TAB
Park Tab Verification

1. Energize SL26 to move the bar-code scanner out.
2. Remove the bar-code scanner assembly cover.
CAUTION Forcing the bar-code scanner home could damage the cylinder shaft. DO NOT push the bar-code
scanner home.
3. Press ENTER to position the bar-code scanner home and make sure:
a. The front of the bar-code scanner assembly is positioned over the bar-code scanner
park tab. Refer to Figure 4.51-1.
b. The tab does not protrude from under the bar-code scanner assembly more than the
length specified in the Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications, Bar-Code
Scanner Position Checks, under Heading A.1, TOLERANCES AND LIMITS.
4.51-2 PN 4277219B
4. Press ENTER to move the bar-code scanner out and ensure the bar-code scanner housing
is positioned over the stripper plate tab at the end of the stroke. Refer to Figure 4.51-1
for the tab location.
Note: The bar-code scanner should not hit any part of the stripper plate assembly.
5. Measure the stroke length and ensure it is within the limits specified in the Cassette
Transport Assembly Specifications, Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Checks, under
6. If the bar-code scanner’s cylinder stroke is not within the specified limits, replace the
bar-code scanner cylinder. See Heading 4.50.
7. Press ENTER to position the bar-code scanner home, then press STOP.
Center Adjustment
1. Ensure the bar-code scanner is in the home position.
2. Move the rocker bed to the backward position.
3. Verify that the focal axis indicator or white line on the bar-code scanner is aligned with
the center of the stripper plate. See Figure 4.51-2.
r If the focal axis indicator is aligned correctly with the stripper plate, go to the
Height Over Tube Label Adjustment procedure.
r If the focal axis indicator is not aligned correctly with the stripper plate, go to
step 4.
Figure 4.51-2 Bar-Code Scanner Alignment with Stripper Plate
MOUNTING
SCREWS
FOCAL AXIS
INDICATOR
STRIPPER
PLATE 7253348A
ASSEMBLY
4. Loosen the bar-code scanner mounting screws and adjust the bar-code scanner
horizontally until the focal axis indicator is aligned with the center of the stripper plate.
5. Make sure the lower back edge of the bar-code scanner housing sits flush on the lower
front edge of the bar-code scanner mounting block as shown in Figure 4.51-3.
6. Tighten the bar-code scanner mounting screws alternately to avoid skewing the bar-code
scanner in a vertical plane.
7. Move the rocker bed to the forward position.
PN 4277219B 4.51-3
Figure 4.51-3 Bar-Code Scanner Housing and Mounting Block
BAR-CODE BAR-CODE
SCANNER SCANNER
MOUNTING HOUSING
BLOCK 5915332H
Height Over Tube Label Adjustment
CAUTION If the hemostat touches an electronic component on the Bar-Code Scanner card, it could damage
the card. When clamping the pressure tubing for the bar-code scanner cylinder with the hemostat, be very
careful not to touch the Bar-Code Scanner card.
1. Remove the pressure tubing in front, at the bottom of the bar-code scanner cylinder, and
clamp it with the hemostat; see Figure 4.51-4.
Figure 4.51-4 Tubing to Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder, Clamped
BAR-CODE
SCANNER
CARD
5915266H
4.51-4 PN 4277219B
2. Position the piercing needle on the Parallel Adjustment Cylinder or tube as follows:
a. Energize SL25 to engage the tube ram.
b. Energize SL29 to disengage the stripper plate.
c. Manually pull the bar-code scanner until it is just past the cassette.
3. Measure the distance between the bar-code scanner housing and the Parallel Cylinder or
tube.
a. If using the BCS GO/NO GO Gauge, ensure the GO Gauge fits between the Parallel
Adjustment Cylinder or tube and the bar-code scanner housing, and the NO GO
Gauge does not.
r If the gauge fits correctly, go to Height Over Cassette Label Adjustment
procedure.
r If the gauge does not fit correctly and a BCS and Tube Detector Height
Adjustment Block is available, go to step 4 to reposition the bar-code scanner.
Adjustment Block is not available, go to step 5 to reposition the bar-code
scanner.
b. If using a ruler, measure the distance between the bar-code scanner housing and the
Parallel Cylinder or tube, and verify the distance is within the verification limits of
the Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications, Bar-Code Scanner Position Checks,
under Heading A.1, TOLERANCES AND LIMITS.
r If the distance is within the verification limits, go to Height Over Cassette
Label Adjustment procedure.
r If the distance is not within the verification limits and a BCS and Tube Detector
Height Adjustment Block is available, go to step 4 to reposition the bar-code
scanner.
r If the distance is not within the verification limits and a BCS and Tube Detector
Height Adjustment Block is not available, go to step 5 to reposition the
bar-code scanner.
ATTENTION: The BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block has two positions. Use the
1.273 cm (0.501 in.) side for checking bar-code scanner heights.
4. Use the BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block to set the height over the tube
label:
a. Center the BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block (with block in the
1.273 cm [0.501 in.] position) on the Parallel Adjustment Cylinder or the tube as
b. Make sure the bar-code scanner mounting block contacts the BCS and Tube
Detector Height Adjustment Block and allows minimal drag on the BCS and Tube
Detector Height Adjustment Block when the block is moved from side to side.
c. Using the tube height adjustment screw, adjust the position of the bar-code scanner
as necessary. See Figure 4.51-6 for location of the tube height adjustment screw.
d. Remove the BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block.
e. Repeat step 3 to verify the tube height adjustment is correct.
PN 4277219B 4.51-5
Figure 4.51-5 BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block Installed
BCS AND
TUBE DETECTOR
HEIGHT PARALLEL
ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT
BLOCK CYLINDER
STRIPPER
PLATE TAB
7253350C
5. Using the tube height adjustment screw, adjust the position of the bar-code scanner until
the distance between the bar-code scanner housing and the tube label is within the
adjustment limits of the Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications, Bar-Code Scanner
Position Checks, under Heading A.1, TOLERANCES AND LIMITS. See Figure 4.51-6 for
location of the tube height adjustment screw.
Figure 4.51-6 Bar-Code Scanner Adjustment Point Locations
ACCESS HOLE FOR

CASSETTE HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT LOCK
CASSETTE HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT SCREW
TUBE HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW
7253340A
4.51-6 PN 4277219B
Height Over Cassette Label Adjustment
1. Position the bar-code scanner over the center of the cassette label.
2. Measure the distance between the bar-code scanner housing and the cassette label:
a. If using the BCS GO/NO GO Gauge, ensure the GO Gauge fits between the bar-code
scanner and the cassette label, and the NO GO Gauge does not.
r If the gauge fits correctly, go to step 6.
Adjustment Block is available, go to step 3 to install the gauge.
Adjustment Block is not available, go to step 4 to reposition the bar-code
scanner.
b. If using a ruler, measure the distance between the bar-code scanner housing and the
cassette label and verify the distance is within the verification limits of the Cassette
Transport Assembly Specifications, Bar-Code Scanner Position Checks, under
r If the distance is within the Verification limits, go to step 6.
r If the distance is not within the Verification limits and a BCS and Tube Detector
Height Adjustment Block is available, go to step 3 to install the gauge.
r If the distance is not within the Verification limits and a BCS and Tube Detector
Height Adjustment Block is not available, go to step 4 to reposition the scanner.
The BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block has two positions. Use
the 1.273 cm (0.501 in.) side for checking bar-code scanner heights.
3. Center the BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block (with block in the 1.273 cm
[0.501 in.] position) between the bar-code scanner mounting block and the cassette label
Figure 4.51-7 Height Over Cassette Label Adjustment
BAR-CODE
SCANNER
ASSEMBLY
BCS AND
TUBE DETECTOR
HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
BLOCK
7253349A
PN 4277219B 4.51-7
4. Adjust the distance between the bar-code scanner and the cassette label.
Note: Since this adjustment requires turning a screw in the back of the Diluter while
checking height at the front of the Diluter, it is easier if another person can help.
a. Loosen the cassette height adjustment lock. Refer to Figure 4.51-6.
b. Turn the cassette height adjustment screw until:
r If using the BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block, the bar-code
scanner mounting block contacts the BCS and Tube Detector Height
Adjustment Block, but allows minimal drag on the BCS and Tube Detector
Height Adjustment Block when the block is moved from side to side.
r If using a ruler, the distance between the bar-code scanner housing and the
cassette label is within the adjustment limits of the Cassette Transport
Assembly Specifications, Bar-Code Scanner Position Checks, under
c. Tighten the cassette height adjustment lock, being careful not to change the
adjustment.
d. If using the BCS and Tube Detector Height Adjustment Block to set the height,
remove the block and repeat step 2.
5. Replace the bar-code scanner cover.
6. Gently push the bar-code scanner home (in), then reconnect the pneumatic tubing to the
cylinder and remove the hemostat.
Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Adjustments
B Tamperproof screwdriver, PN 5450541
B Pot adjustment tool
B Hemostat
B Cassette
B 3 mL tube adapter, PN 5450562
B 12 bar code-labeled tubes
Adjustments
CAUTION Doing the following steps out of sequence could damage the needle or the bar-code scanner. To
avoid damaging these components, do the following steps as stated and in the order given.
1. Open the front cover of the Diluter.

4.51-8 PN 4277219B
3. Check the rocker bed and determine if the bed locks are engaged.
r If the bed locks are engaged, grip the rocker bed with both hands and move the
rocker bed 45 degrees forward.
r If the bed locks are not engaged, manually move and hold the rocker bed 45 degrees
forward and energize SL28 to engage the bed locks, locking the rocker bed in that
position.
4. Load position 6 of a cassette with a 3 mL tube adapter.
5. Position the cassette on the rocker bed so that the tube adapter in position 6 is in the
piercing position. The tube detector LED is lit.
6. Ensure the front of the cassette is flush with the front guide of the rocker bed.
7. Using the tamperproof screwdriver, remove the bar-code scanner cover.
CAUTION If the hemostat touches an electronic component on the Newbar card, it could damage the card.
When clamping the pressure tubing for the bar-code scanner cylinder with the hemostat, be very careful not
to touch the Newbar card.
8. Remove the pressure tubing in front, at the bottom of the bar-code scanner cylinder, and
clamp it with the hemostat; see Figure 4.51-8.
Figure 4.51-8 Tubing to Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder, Clamped
Newbar
card
NEWBAR
ASSY 6707113
SCHEM 6323677
PWB 1713688B
40
30 50
20 60
L A S E R R A D IA T IO N
psi 70 D O N O T S T A R E IN T O B E A M
0 T H IS L A S E R D O E S N O T C O M P L Y
W IT H 2 1 C F R 1 0 4 0
C L A S S II L A S E R P R O D U C T
6498126B
9. Loosen the bar-code scanner mounting screws. See Figure 4.51-9.
PN 4277219B 4.51-9
Figure 4.51-9 Bar-Code Scanner Alignment Components
LED
SW1
NEWBAR
SW1
ASSY 6707113
SCHEM 6323677
PWB 1713688B
40
30 50
NEWBAR
20 60
ASSY 6707113
psi 70 SCHEM 6323677
0
PWB 1713688B
L A S E R R A D IA T IO N
D O N O T S T A R E IN T O B E A M
Mounting T H IS L A S E R D O E S N O T C O M P L Y 6498127B
W IT H 2 1 C F R 1 0 4 0
screws C L A S S II L A S E R P R O D U C T
indirectly from reflective surfaces (such as a mirror or shiny metallic surface). Do not place any type of
reflective material between the laser and the bar-code label and always maintain a minimum of 10 in.
between your eyes and the reflected laser light.
10. With the pot adjustment tool, turn SW1 on the Newbar card clockwise until the
laser ON LED lights. Refer to Figure 4.51-9 for the location of SW1 and the LED.
11. Manually place the bar-code reader on top of the 3 mL tube adapter.
12. Adjust the bar-code scanner horizontally until the bar-code laser beam is positioned in
the center of the opening on top of the 3 mL tube adapter.
13. Make sure the lower back edge of the bar-code scanner is flush with the lower front edge
of the bar-code scanner mounting block. See Figure 4.51-10.
Figure 4.51-10 Bar-Code Scanner and Mounting Block
Front edge
of the
mountimg block
Bar-code
scanner
Mounting
6498133B screws
4.51-10 PN 4277219B
14. Tighten the bar-code scanner mounting screws alternately to avoid skewing the bar-code
scanner in a vertical plane.
15. Turn SW1 on the Newbar card counterclockwise until the laser ON LED goes out.
16. Reinstall the pressure tubing on the front fitting of the bar-code scanner cylinder.
17. Reinstall the bar-code scanner cover.
18. Close the front cover of the Diluter.
19. On the Diluter.numeric keypad, press STOP three times to return all the piercing station
components to their idle state positions.
Verification
PN 4277219B 4.51-11
4.51-12 PN 4277219B
LED STYLE BAR-CODE SCANNER SPEED AND ELECTRICAL CHECKS 4
4.52 LED STYLE BAR-CODE SCANNER SPEED AND ELECTRICAL CHECKS
Purpose
Use these checks to troubleshoot scanner problems with an LED style bar-code reader.
Tool/Supplies Needed
B Cassette
B Several laboratory tubes
B Parallel Adjustment Cylinder, PN 7231084 (optional)
B DVM
B Alcohol
B Lint-free wipes
B Stop watch or watch with second hand
Speed Check
1. Ensure the bar-code scanner pressure gauge reads within the limits specified
in Table A.1-13. Adjust RG5 as needed. Refer to Figure A.7-3 for the location of the
regulator.
2. To time the bar-code scanner forward and reverse strokes:
a. Select F05, the function for energizing solenoids.
b. Press 2 6 on the Diluter keypad.
c. Press ENTER and start the stop watch simultaneously.
d. Stop the watch when the bar-code scanner is at the end of its stroke. The forward
stroke should be within the time specified in the Cassette Transport Assembly
Specifications Bar-Code Scanner Timing Checks, under Heading A.1,
TOLERANCES AND LIMITS.
e. Reset the stop watch.
f. Press ENTER and start the stop watch simultaneously.
g. Stop the watch when the bar-code scanner is at home. The reverse stroke should be
within the time specified in the Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications,
Bar-Code Scanner Timing Checks, under Heading A.1, TOLERANCES AND
LIMITS.
3. If both strokes are in tolerance, go to step 5. If either stroke is out of tolerance, check the
bar-code scanner pressure. If the pressure is within specifications, the bar-code cylinder
may need replacement.
4. Be sure the bar-code scanner is in the home position, then repeat step 2. If either stroke
speed still exceeds the time limits, correct the problem, then repeat this procedure.
5. Reposition the Parallel Adjustment Cylinder or tube in the cassette:
a. Energize SL29 to engage the stripper plate.
b. Energize SL25 to disengage the tube ram. The stripper plate pushes the Parallel
Adjustment Cylinder or tube back into the cassette.
PN 4277219B 4.52-1
LED STYLE BAR-CODE SCANNER SPEED AND ELECTRICAL CHECKS
c. Energize SL23 to engage the bellows interlock.

d. Manually return the rocker bed to its horizontal position.
e. Energize SL29 to disengage the stripper plate from the Parallel Adjustment
Cylinder.
f. Press STOP until the instrument returns to the READY state.
6. Remove the cassette from the rocker bed.
Electrical Checks
1. Clean the bar-code scanner viewing screen and the tube and cassette labels with alcohol.
2. Select F05 so you can energize individual solenoids.
3. Select SL26 to extend the bar-code scanner.
4. Remove the bar-code scanner cover.
5. Using ground E28, measure the voltages at pin 4 and pin 7 on the Bar-Code Scanner
card; see Figure 4.52-1.
Figure 4.52-1 Bar-Code Scanner Card Pins and Test Points

PIN 4 TP3
PIN 7
E28
7253343A
6. Ensure the voltages are within the limits specified for the bar-code scanner electrical
checks in Table A.1-2.
7. Using ground E28, monitor TP3. Ensure the offset voltage is within the limits specified
for the bar-code electrical checks in Table A.1-2.
Note: The approximate voltages for TP3, when read over black and when read over
white, are included in Table A.1-2.
8. Replace the bar-code scanner cover.
Verification
4.52-2 PN 4277219B
BAR-CODE SCANNER POSITION SENSOR ADJUSTMENT 4
4.53 BAR-CODE SCANNER POSITION SENSOR ADJUSTMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to adjust the (bar-code) scanner position sensor as needed.
LED Style Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor Adjustment
B Cassette with 12 bar code-labeled tubes
B Small screwdriver
Adjustment
1. Fill a cassette with bar code-labeled tubes, place the cassette in the loading bay and press
START/CONT.
2. Open the top left rear door of the Diluter and monitor the bar-code scanner from the
rear.
3. Ensure that when the bar-code scanner scans a tube, the magnet at the end of the guide
rod does not contact the bar-code scanner position sensor. See Figure 4.53-1 for location
of the magnet and sensor.
Figure 4.53-1 Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor and Guide Rod Magnet
MAGNET
GUIDE
ROD
SCANNER
POSITION
SENSOR
REAR OF DILUTER PANELS
7253333A
4. If the magnet contacts the bar-code position sensor, adjust the sensor:
a. Loosen the screws on the bar-code position sensor and slide the sensor as far
forward (toward the scanner) and down (parallel to the guide rod) as it goes.
b. Tighten the screws.
c. Repeat steps 1 through 3.
5. Close the rear door of the Diluter and go to Verification.
PN 4277219B 4.53-1
BAR-CODE SCANNER POSITION SENSOR ADJUSTMENT
Laser Style Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor Adjustment
B Small screwdriver
Adjustment
1. Open the top left rear door of the Diluter and locate the rear of the bar-code scanner and
the scanner position sensor. Refer to Figure 4.53-1.
2. Verify that the scanner position sensor is flush with the rear of the sensor-mounting
bracket. See Figure 4.53-2 for the location of the sensor and its mounting bracket.
Figure 4.53-2 Bar-Code Scanner Position Sensor and Mounting Bracket

Flush down
across full
length of side
Scanner position sensor
10
4
Sensor mounting bracket
Flush with front 6498136B
3. If the scanner position sensor is not flush with the rear of the sensor-mounting bracket,
adjust the sensor:
a. Loosen the screws on the scanner position sensor and slide the sensor backward
(toward the rear door) until the sensor is flush with the sensor-mounting bracket.
b. Tighten the screws.
4. Close the rear door of the Diluter and go to Verification.
Verification
4.53-2 PN 4277219B
BAR-CODE SCANNER ALIGNMENT WITH OSCILLOSCOPE 4
4.54 BAR-CODE SCANNER ALIGNMENT WITH OSCILLOSCOPE
Purpose
Use this procedure to increase the read rates on labels other than CDD photographic quality
bar-code labels without compromising the read rate of the CDD photographic quality labels.
ATTENTION: Only perform this procedure when CDD bar-code labels pass the read-rate
specifications and alternate bar-code labels fail. Never use this procedure to bring CDD
bar-code labels into the read-rate specifications.
Verify the read rate for CDD labels using the BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST,
Heading 4.49.
B Anti-static shield
B Alligator clip
B Storage oscilloscope
B 12 specimen tubes with the laboratory's bar-code labels
B 12 specimen tubes with the CDD bar-code labels
B 1/4-in., open-ended wrench
Alignment
2. Unfasten the two captive screws securing the card holder. Do not disconnect the ground
wire.
3. Install the jumper at P3, BEEPER CONNECT, to enable the bar-code beeper. See
Figure 4.54-1.
4. Connect a storage oscilloscope to the analog input on the Bar-Code Decoder card.
a. Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 input cable to TP5. Refer to Figure A.3-1.
b. Connect the oscilloscope coaxial cable ground (channel 1) to pin 9 of the bar-code
scanner ribbon cable. This is easily done by connecting the oscilloscope ground
cable to the rear of the small ribbon connector socket. See Figure 4.54-1.
c. Power up the Analytical Station.
d. Use the oscilloscope internal trigger.
e. Set the oscilloscope to 50 mV per division and 0.1 second per division.
f. Reset the oscilloscope display just before the backward stroke of the scanner. This
allows you to view the tube label waveform rather than the cassette label.
5. Fill one cassette with tubes with customer generated bar-code labels.
6. At the Workstation, access the Bar-Code Test screen and delete the data.
7. Select F07 to advance the cassette of tubes and perform bar-code scanning.
PN 4277219B 4.54-1
BAR-CODE SCANNER ALIGNMENT WITH OSCILLOSCOPE
Figure 4.54-1 Bar-Code Decoder Card Jumper and Pin Locations
TC5516AP - 2
JAPAN 8614HBK
147 - 1125P - 12 - 4338
MC6803U4P - 1
7K
TM68724
J2
J1 BEEPER
TP5 CONNECT
PIN 10 PIN 9 TP 5 BEEPER

7253355A JUMPER
8. Watch the bar-code waveforms appearing on the oscilloscope and compare them to the
waveforms in Table 4.54-1 and Table 4.54-2.
Note: All waveforms in Tables 4.54-1 and 4.54-2 are 50 mV/division and GND coincide
with the center of the graticule unless otherwise indicated.
9. Based on the waveforms observed, adjust the distance from the tube label. Using a
1/4-in., open-ended wrench, turn the tube height adjustment screw about 1/4 turn to
increase or decrease the distance from the tube label. (Refer to Figure 4.51-6 for location
of height adjustment screw.)
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 until optimal scanning is achieved.
11. Set the oscilloscope to 1 V/division and 0.1 second/division.
12. Reset the oscilloscope display just before scanner operation. You will see separate
waveforms, one for the cassette label and one for the tube label.
13. Verify the waveforms are of similar appearance. If the tube label waveform is significantly
different in amplitude (>1 V), the bar-code read rate may be decreased. Figure 4.54-1
illustrates the waveforms of a good and a bad label read. The waveforms shown are
1 V/division. Notice the downward pulse amplitudes for the tube label when focusing
the scanner head.
15. Remove all connections from the Bar-Code Decoder card and the jumper at P3.
16. Reinstall the card.
17. Power up the Analytical Station and go to Verification.
4.54-2 PN 4277219B
Table 4.54-1 Bar-Code Scanner Waveforms for Example Label
Description SB-344-1 Remarks

Normal tube signal in the Not an ideal trace, but
forward direction with pragmatically normal.
correct height over tube Wide (WE) and narrow
label. (NE) element signals
should be the same
amplitude.
SB-344-2
Height over tube too high The Analytical Station may

until no stepping is still read this. Amplitude
observed. indicates a problem.
SB-344-3
Cassette label signal with GND set one division up

height over cassette too from bottom of graticule.
low. No stepping of The wheel is not in contact
scanner observed. with the guide rod. Notice
uneven lows (uneven
bottoms of signal).
Compare WE:NE amplitude
differences with those in
first example.
SB-344-4
Height over cassette label Note change in amplitude.

too high. Speed may also be
affected by increase in
friction. The Analytical
Station may still read this.
SB-344-5
PN 4277219B 4.54-3
Table 4.54-2 Bar-Code Scanner Waveforms for Example Label
Description SB-344-6 Remarks

Normal tube signal in the Not an ideal trace, but
forward direction with the pragmatically normal.
correct height over tube Wide (WE) and narrow
label. (NE) element signals
should be the same
amplitude.
SB-344-7
Tube signal with the Normal may still read.

aperture in the scanner Notice the abbreviations
turned back to front. in the wide (WE) and
narrow element (NE)
pulses.
SB-344-8
Tube signal with aperture This aperture
rotated 90 degrees. configuration is correct
for the Auto-Reporter
Printer BCS. The
Analytical Station will not
read this signal.
Height over tube label too GND set one division up

low. from bottom of graticule.
Notice the dramatic
change in amplitude and
offset.
SB 344 A
4.54-4 PN 4277219B
Figure 4.54-2 Comparing Cassette and Tube Label Waveforms
5V
4V
EXAMPLE: 3V
BAD LABEL READ
2V
1V
0V
0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 m sec
CASSETTE INTERMEC
LABEL LABEL
BAR CODE BAR CODE
ACTIVITY ACTIVITY
5V
4V
EXAMPLE:
3V
GOOD LABEL READ
2V
1V
0V
5915346H
0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 m sec
Verification
1. Do the BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST, Heading 4.49, using at least 12 different
customer generated bar-code labels.
2. Do the BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST, Heading 4.49, using at least 12 CDD quality
bar-code labels.
PN 4277219B 4.54-5
4.54-6 PN 4277219B
BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 4
4.55 BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
Purpose
Use these procedures to replace a defective bubble/blood detector in either a Retic Module or
a Random Access Module and to adjust the bubble/blood detectors.
Note: The two bubble/blood detectors are replaced as a set.
Retic Module
B An external DVM
B Blood Detector Test Aid, PN 2906553, if available.
B Three tubes of diluent
B One tube of 5C Abnormal II cell control at room temperature
Removal of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module

2. Remove the rocker bed for easier access to the bubble/blood detector cables. See
Heading 4.43.
3. Remove the defective bubble/blood detectors. See Figure 4.55-1.
a. Unfasten the captive screw to remove the bracket.
Figure 4.55-1 Replacing the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module
Disconnect
tubing
Unfasten
captive
screw 6498027A
PN 4277219B 4.55-1
BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
b. Disconnect the tubing from the bubble/blood detectors.

c. Disconnect the bubble/blood detector cables from the Diluter 2 card. Refer to
Figure A.3-5 and Table A.3-5 for locations.
d. Remove the bubble/blood detectors and associated cables from the instrument.
Installation of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module

1. Install the replacement bubble/blood detectors.
a. Install the new detector bracket.
a. Connect the tubing to the bubble/blood detectors.
b. Fasten the captive screw.
c. Route the bubble/blood detector cables to the Diluter 2 card, securing them with
retaining clips.
d. Connect the cables to the Diluter 2 card.
2. Reinstall the rocker bed.
4. Go to the Preliminary Checks procedure.
Preliminary Checks
1. Check the bubble/blood detector sensors and cables:
a. Access the Diluter 2 card. Refer to Figure 2.4-5 for location.
b. Ensure the connections at J1 (front sensor) and J3 (rear sensor) are secure and not
stretched or binding.
c. Ensure the sensors and the cables are not rubbed by moving parts.
2. Verify the needle vents correctly:
a. At the Analyzer -
1) Select CBC-DIFF test mode.
2) Set the aspirations/tube to 2.
b. Load a cassette with a tube of diluent and place the cassette in the loading bay.
c. Observe the tube when the needle pierces the cap and verify several bubbles appear.
If no bubbles appear, troubleshoot the needle vent system and repeat the check.
3. Verify the aspiration tubing is the correct type, size and length as shown in the
instrument’s pneumatic/hydraulic schematic in Chapter 6.
4. Check the integrity of the aspiration pathway:
a. Load a cassette with a tube of diluent and place the cassette in the loading bay.
b. During aspiration, verify there are no bubbles or leaks in the aspiration pathway. If
there are bubbles or leaks, correct the problem in the aspiration pathway and repeat
the check.
c. Load a cassette with a tube of 5C Abnormal II cell control and place the cassette in
the loading bay.
4.55-2 PN 4277219B
d. During aspiration, verify the sample extends approximately 5 cm (2 in.) beyond the
rear sensor and the sample does not appear streamed or thinned excessively. If the
sample is short or is streamed, correct the problem in the aspiration pathway and
repeat the checks.
5. Verify the aspiration pathway is backwashed correctly after aspiration. If the backwash
does not clean adequately, resolve the problem and repeat the checks.
Adjustment of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Retic Module

1. Do the Preliminary Checks before doing this procedure.
2. Ensure the Analytical Station is on for at least 20 minutes before going to step 3.
3. At the Analyzer:
a. Set the aspirations/tube to 1.
b. Select the CBC-ONLY test mode.
c. Disable the bubble/blood detectors (MAIN MENU tt SYSTEM CONFIGURATION tt
BLOOD DETECTOR).
4. Load a cassette with a tube of diluent and place the cassette in the loading bay.
5. When the cycle ends, adjust the sensor output settings on the Diluter 2 card. Refer to
Figure A.3-5 for test point and potentiometer locations.
a. Measure the front sensor output at TP4, using TP12 as ground.
b. Adjust the front sensor input using R25 until the reading at TP4 is the value
indicated on the front sensor cable.
c. Measure the rear sensor output at TP8, using TP12 as ground.
d. Adjust the rear sensor input using R44 until the reading at TP8 is the value
indicated on the rear sensor cable.
6. Using TP12 as ground, read the front sensor input voltage at TP3 and the rear sensor
input voltage at TP7. Ensure the voltage at either test point is within the limits specified
in Table A.1-26.
r If the voltage at either test point is greater than the limits, there may be a bubble in
the optical path. Try to clear the pathway and repeat from step 4.
r If the readings are acceptable, go to step 7.
7. Cycle diluent two more times and monitor the voltages at TP4 and TP8, using TP12 as
ground. Verify the voltages are within the verification range specified in Table A.1-26 of
the values indicated on the respective sensor cables. If the output of either sensor is out
of tolerance, do the following before continuing with the test:
a. Check for bubbles in the lines.
b. Ensure the instrument is backwashing correctly.
c. Repeat the procedure from step 5 to readjust R25 and R44.
8. Load a cassette with a tube of 5C Abnormal II cell control and place the cassette in the
loading bay.
9. Monitor the voltages at TP4 and TP8, using TP12 as ground. Verify that within
10 seconds after the last backwash, the voltages are within the Verification Range limits
specified in Table A.1-26 of the values indicated on the respective sensor cables.
PN 4277219B 4.55-3
If the output of either sensor is out of tolerance, troubleshoot and correct the problems
before proceeding. The failure could be caused by:
r Poor backwashing
r Sensor drifts
r Diluter 2 card problems
r Bubbles
r Incorrect initial adjustment.
10. Set the number of aspirations/tube to 3.
11. Load a cassette with a tube of 5C Abnormal II cell control and place the cassette in the
loading bay.
ATTENTION: Ensure the sample/hold output voltage has stabilized before recording the value.
12. Read the sample/hold circuit output voltages at TP1 (front) and TP5 (rear) for each of
the three samples, using TP12 as ground. Record the voltages between 1 and 10 seconds
after the rear detector voltage drops and stabilizes.
13. Use the recorded values to calculate T1 and T2 as follows:
T1 = X + 0.040
2
X
T2 = X + ----------------------------------
Value of TP5
Where: X = value of TP5 - value of TP1

14. Determine the largest of the values calculated for T1 and T2. That is the threshold
adjustment.
15. Measure the threshold value at TP11, using TP12 as ground, and adjust R57 until it is set
to 1.1 times the value selected in step 14.
Note: Multiplying the threshold value by 1.1 gives a 10% margin on the threshold
setting, resulting in fewer false partial aspiration failures when running low samples and
5C Abnormal II control.
16. Reinstall the protective cover on the Diluter 2 card, ensuring that no cables are pinched.
17. Enable the bubble/blood detectors.
Random Access Module
B A pair of hemostats
B An external DVM
B Three tubes of diluent
B One tube of normal whole blood
B One tube of 5C or 5C-ES Abnormal II cell control at room temperature
4.55-4 PN 4277219B
Removal of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random Access Module
2. Remove the rocker bed for easier access to the bubble/blood detector cables. See
Heading 4.43.
3. Open the lower front door of the Diluter.
4. To access the bubble/blood detectors:
a. Disconnect the hand detector mounting bracket from the Diluter as shown in
Figure 4.55-3 and let the hand detector and its mounting bracket hang down, out of
the way.
Figure 4.55-2 Moving the Hand-Detector Mounting Bracket
R e m o v e
Unfasten
R e m o v e
Loosen
7 2 1 9 0 0 6 B
b. Disconnect the tubing connected to the left side of the Random Access module -
1) At the BSV, disconnect tubing 205
2) At the BSV, note the routing of tubing 211, then disconnect it.
3) At the front blood detector, disconnect the needle input tubing.
4) Remove the knob of the BSV.
5) At the rear blood detector, disconnect tubing 77, the tubing to the aspiration
pump.
5. Remove the defective bubble/blood detectors. See Figure 4.55-3.
a. Disconnect the red and white striped pinch tubing from the bubble/blood detectors.
b. Remove the two screws securing the bubble/blood detector bracket and pull out the
bracket.
c. Disconnect the bubble/blood detector cables from the Diluter 2 card. Refer to
Figure A.3-5 and Table A.3-5 for locations.
d. Remove the bubble/blood detectors and associated cables from the instrument.
PN 4277219B 4.55-5
Figure 4.55-3 Replacing the Bubble/Blood Detectors of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random
Access Module
R e m o v e
s c re w s
7 2 1 9 0 1 4 B
Installation of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random Access Module

1. Install the replacement bubble/blood detectors.
a. Install the new bubble/blood detector bracket.
b. Connect the tubing to the bubble/blood detectors.
c. Route the bubble/blood detector cables to the Diluter 2 card, securing them with
retaining clips.
d. Connect the cables to the Diluter 2 card, ensuring the connections at J1 (front
sensor) and J3 (rear sensor) are secure and not stretched or binding.
e. Ensure the sensors and the cables are not in the path of moving parts.
2. Reconnect the tubing on the left side of the Random Access module and reinstall the BSV
knob.
3. Reattach the hand detector mounting bracket to the Diluter.
6. Go to the Preliminary Checks procedure.
Preliminary Checks
1. Verify the aspiration tubing is the correct type, size and length as shown in the
instrument’s pneumatic/hydraulic schematic in Chapter 6.
2. Check the integrity of the aspiration pathway:
a. At the Workstation, select the CBC-DIFF (CD) test mode.
b. Load a cassette with a tube of normal blood and place the cassette in the loading bay.
c. At the Analyzer, set the aspirations/tube to 5.
4.55-6 PN 4277219B
d. During aspiration verify:
r There are no bubbles or leaks in the aspiration pathway. If there are bubbles or
leaks, correct the problem in the aspiration pathway and repeat the check.
r The sample extends past the rear sensor and the sample does not appear
streamed or thinned excessively. If the sample is short or is streamed, correct
the problem in the aspiration pathway and repeat the checks.
3. Verify the aspiration pathway is backwashed correctly after aspiration. If the backwash
does not clean adequately, resolve the problem and repeat the checks.
Adjustment of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the Random Access Module

1. Do the Preliminary Checks before doing this procedure.
2. Ensure the Analytical Station is on for at least 20 minutes before going to step 4.
3. At the Workstation, select the CBC only (C) test mode.
4. At the Analyzer:
a. Set the aspirations/tube to 1.
b. Disable the bubble/blood detectors (MAIN MENU tt SYSTEM CONFIGURATION tt
BLOOD DETECTOR).
5. Load a cassette with a tube of diluent and place the cassette in the loading bay.
6. When the cycle ends, adjust the sensor output settings on the BD ADJ card
(Figure A.2-3:
a. Measure the front sensor output at TP4, using TP12 as ground.
b. Adjust the front sensor input using R25 until the reading at TP4 is 10 times the
value indicated on the front sensor cable.
c. Measure the rear sensor output at TP8, using TP12 as ground.
d. Adjust the rear sensor input using R44 until the reading at TP8 is 10.00 (1.00 x 10).
7. Cycle diluent two more times and monitor the voltages at TP4 and TP8, using TP12 as
ground. Verify the voltages are within the verification range specified in Table A.1-26 of
the values indicated on the respective sensor cables. If the output of either sensor is out
of tolerance, do the following before continuing with the test:
a. Check for bubbles in the lines.
b. Ensure the instrument is backwashing correctly.
c. Repeat the procedure from step 5 to readjust R25 and R44.
8. Load a cassette with a tube of 5C-ES Abnormal II cell control and place the cassette in
the loading bay.
9. Monitor the voltages at TP4 and TP8, using TP12 as ground. Verify that within
10 seconds after the last backwash, the voltages are within the Verification Range limits
specified in Table A.1-26 of the values indicated on the respective sensor cables.
If the output of either sensor is out of tolerance, troubleshoot and correct the problems
before proceeding. The failure could be caused by:
r Poor backwashing
r Sensor drifts
r Diluter 2 card problems
PN 4277219B 4.55-7
r Bubbles
r Incorrect initial adjustment.
10. Set the number of aspirations/tube to 3.
11. Load a cassette with a tube of 5C or 5C-ES Abnormal II cell control and place the
cassette in the loading bay.
ATTENTION: Ensure the sample/hold output voltage has stabilized before recording the value.
12. Read the sample/hold circuit output voltages at TP1 (front) and TP5 (rear) for each of
the three samples, using TP12 as ground. Record the voltages between 1 and 10 seconds
after the rear detector voltage drops and stabilizes.
13. Use the recorded values to calculate T1 and T2 as follows:
T1 = X + 0.040
2
X
T2 = X + ----------------------------------
Value of TP5
Where: X = value of TP5 - value of TP1

14. Determine the largest of the values calculated for T1 and T2. That is the threshold
adjustment.
15. Measure the threshold value at TP11, using TP12 as ground, and adjust R57 until it is set
to 1.1 times the value selected in step 13.
Note: Multiplying the threshold value by 1.1 gives a 10% margin on the threshold
setting, resulting in fewer false partial aspiration failures when running low samples and
5C or 5C-ES Abnormal II control.
16. Enable the bubble/blood detector.
Verification
Perform the BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR PERFORMANCE TEST, Heading 4.56.
4.55-8 PN 4277219B
BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR PERFORMANCE TEST 4
4.56 BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR PERFORMANCE TEST
Purpose
Use this test to ensure the bubble/blood detectors are working correctly and the appropriate
aspiration errors are generated.
B Two tubes of 5C or 5C-ES Abnormal II cell control
B One tube of clean diluent
B Cassette
B Four empty tubes
B Hemostat or equivalent clamping device
B 12 tubes of different whole-blood specimens. If possible obtain specimens that span the
range of RBC and Hgb values typically run on the instrument.
Performance Test
1. At the Analyzer, set the aspirations/tube to 3.
2. Select CBC only test mode.
3. Load a cassette with a tube of 5C or 5C-ES Abnormal II cell control, place the cassette in
the loading bay, and monitor the instrument for alarms or error messages.
r If there are no alarms or error messages, the blood check is good. Go to step 4.
r If any alarms or error messages occur, correct the problem; go to step 10.
4. Load a cassette with an empty tube, place the cassette in the loading bay, and monitor the
instrument for error messages.
r If an ASPIRATION N or N_P occurs for each air sample, the air check is good. Go to
step 5.
r If the correct aspiration messages are not displayed, correct the problem; go to
step 10.
5. Load a cassette with a tube of clean diluent, place the cassette in the loading bay, and
monitor the instrument for error messages.
r If an ASPIRATION N or N_P occurs for each diluent sample, the diluent check is
good. Go to step 6.
r If the correct aspiration messages are not displayed, correct the problem; go to
step 10.
PN 4277219B 4.56-1
BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR PERFORMANCE TEST
6. Load a cassette with a tube of 5C or 5C-ES Abnormal II cell control and place the
cassette in the loading bay. Before the first sample backwashes, carefully clamp the
tubing between the front blood detector and the BSV, then monitor the next sample for
error messages.
r If an ASPIRATION C occurs for the next sample, the carryover check is good.
Remove the hemostats and go to step 7.
r If an APIRATION C does not occur, repeat this step.
7. Load a cassette with a nearly empty tube of control material and place the cassette in the
loading bay. Run the tube until the needle is exposed beyond the control material inside
the tube (4.8 mm [3/16 in.]) and bubbles are aspirated.
r If an ASPIRATION B is displayed for the sample, the bubble check is good. Go to
step 8.
r If the correct message is not displayed, repeat the check with another tube. If the
correct message is still not displayed, correct the problem; go to step 10.
8. Set the aspirations/tube to 1.
9. Load a cassette with 12 different blood specimens, place the cassette in the loading bay,
and monitor the instrument for aspiration alarms and messages.
r If there are no alarms or error messages, the blood check is good.
r If any alarms or error messages occur, correct the problem; go to step 10.
10. Handle any problems encountered as follows:
a. Troubleshoot the system for a failure.
b. Troubleshoot the bubble/blood detector system for a failure.
c. Readjust the blood detector. See Adjustment of the Bubble/Blood Detectors on the
Retic Module under Heading 4.55, BUBBLE/BLOOD DETECTOR REPLACEMENT
AND ADJUSTMENT.
d. Repeat this procedure.
Verification
None
4.56-2 PN 4277219B
NEEDLE CAP-PIERCER MODULE REPLACEMENT 4
4.57 NEEDLE CAP-PIERCER MODULE REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace the Needle Cap-Piercer module and to align the module and its
sensors (bellows up and bellows down) properly.
B Cassette containing 12 empty tubes
B Ball-end Allen wrench set
Replacement
1. Power off the Analytical Station as directed under Heading 4.1.
2. For easier access to the Needle Cap-Piercer module, loosen the BSV module.
WARNING The Needle Cap-Piercer module may contain biohazardous material. Handle accordingly.
3. At the Needle Cap-Piercer module (Figure 4.57-1), disconnect the tubing from:
r The bellows interlock actuator
r The bellows cylinder.
4. Disconnect the bellows up sensor from P15 and the bellows down sensor from P16.
Note: P15 and P16 are connected to P10 on the Sensor Distribution card.
5. Remove the two Allen screws securing the Needle Cap-Piercer module to the Diluter
base. Refer to Figure 4.57-1
Figure 4.57-1 Removing the Needle Cap-Piercer Module
Remove bellows
cylinder tubing
Bellows
interlock
Disengage Bellows up
interlock sensor
Lockdown
Remove bellows screws
interlock tubing
Bellows
cylinder
Bellows down
sensor
7253373B Remove screws
PN 4277219B 4.57-1
NEEDLE CAP-PIERCER MODULE REPLACEMENT
6. Remove the module.

7. Install the replacement module and connect the tubing, but do not tighten the Allen
screws.
WARNING The needle is sharp and may contain biohazardous material. To avoid skin puncture, use care
when working in the piercing station.
8. Disengage the bellows interlock by prying up the rod mechanism with the end of a
screwdriver as shown in Figure 4.57-1, and carefully push back the bellows cylinder arm
to expose the needle.
9. Tilt and hold the rocker bed in the forward position and center the needle in the stripper
plate opening.
Note: Use the stripper plate as a guide to ensure the stripper plate is flush against the
upper end of the bellows.
10. When the needle is properly centered, tighten the three Allen screws.
11. Expand the bellows and ensure the stripper plate does not contact the bellows.
12. Repeat from step 8 as needed to adjust the position.
13. Connect the bellows up sensor to P15 and the bellows down sensor to P16.
14. Power up the Analytical Station and adjust the sensors. Go to Bellow Up and Bellows
Down Sensor Adjustment.
Note: Disregard any sensor errors that occur on power up until you have made the
sensor adjustments.
Bellow Up and Bellows Down Sensor Adjustment

1. For better access to the sensors, disconnect the hand detector mounting bracket from the
Diluter as shown in Figure 4.57-2 and let the hand detector and its mounting bracket
hang down, out of the way.
R e m o v e
R e m o v e
R e m o v e
U n fa s te n
R e m o v e R e m o v e
G E N S S y s te m L H 7 5 0 S y s te m 7 2 1 9 0 1 2 B
4.57-2 PN 4277219B
NEEDLE CAP-PIERCER MODULE REPLACEMENT 4
2. Loosen the locking screw on both sensors (Figure 4.57-1) enough to allow the sensors to
move in the slot.
WARNING The needle is sharp and may contain biohazardous material. To avoid skin puncture, use care
when working in the piercing station.
3. Disengage the bellows interlock by prying up the rod mechanism with the end of a
screwdriver as shown in Figure 4.57-1, and carefully push down on the cylinder until it
is in the fully retracted position.
4. Move up the bellows down sensor (Figure 4.57-1) until the LED goes off, then move the
sensor down until the LED goes back on. Mark this as position 1.
5. Continue slowly moving the bellows down sensor down until the LED goes off again.
Mark this as position 2.
6. Move the bellows down sensor to the center point between position 1 and position 2 and
tighten the sensor’s locking screw.
7. Fully extend the bellows cylinder to the locked position.
8. Move down the bellows up sensor (Figure 4.57-1) until the LED goes off, then move the
sensor up until the LED goes back on. Mark this as position 3.
9. Continue slowly moving the bellows up sensor up until the LED goes out again. Mark
this as position 4.
10. Move the bellows up sensor to the center point between position 3 and position 4 and
tighten the sensor’s locking screw.
Verification
1. Using the cassette of empty tubes, select F07 to ensure the tubes are being pierced in the
center and no errors occur.
2. Do the WHOLE BLOOD VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, Heading 5.4.
PN 4277219B 4.57-3
NEEDLE CAP-PIERCER MODULE REPLACEMENT
4.57-4 PN 4277219B
SERVICE/REPAIR PROCEDURES
PROBE-WIPE MODULE TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS, AND COMPONENT REPLACEMENTS 4
REPLACEMENTS
Purpose
Use these procedures to test the Probe-Wipe module, to adjust the optoswitches, to align the
cleaning truck on the Probe-Wipe module with a moveable backwash cup, and to replace
defective components including the cleaning truck, backwash cup, motor, bearings, and
sensors.
Tools/Materials Needed
B Allen wrench
B Diluent for cycling in Manual mode.
Probe-Wipe Test
1. Select F28, CHECKING PROBE WIPE, at the Diluter/numeric keypad.
2. During the probe-wipe test verify the following occurs without any alarms or error
messages:
a. The aspirator tip retracts.
b. The cleaning truck moves smoothly up the full length of the aspirator tip, then
moves back down without binding.
c. The cleaning truck moves about a quarter of the way up the aspirator tip, and then
moves back down.
d. The aspirator tip returns to the extended position.
3. If the probe-wipe test is successful and you replaced a component in the Probe-Wipe
module, go to Verification.
4. If the probe-wipe test is not successful, determine the cause of the problem:
a. Repeat F28 and verify there are no obstructions in the cleaning truck pathway. If any
obstructions are visible, remove the obstructions, then repeat F28.
b. Verify there is no buildup on the aspirator tip. If there is a buildup on the aspirator
tip, clean the aspirator tip with distilled water and lint-free tissues, then repeat F28.
c. If you are testing a Probe-Wipe module with a moveable backwash cup, ensure the
cleaning truck is aligned with the aspirator tip; go to the Cleaning Truck Alignment
procedure.
d. If you replaced a component in the Probe-Wipe module, try adjusting the
probe-wipe sensors; go to the Probe-Wipe Sensor Adjustment procedure.
e. Check the Probe-Wipe module for defective components and replace as necessary;
go to the Probe-Wipe Module Component Replacement procedure.
PN 4277219B 4.58-1
PROBE-WIPE MODULE TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS, AND COMPONENT REPLACEMENTS
Probe-Wipe Module Component Replacement

2. For better access to the Probe-Wipe module, disconnect the hand detector mounting
bracket from the Diluter as shown in Figure 4.58-1 and let the hand detector and its
mounting bracket hang down, out of the way.

R e m o v e
R e m o v e
R e m o v e
U n fa s te n
3. Remove the Probe-Wipe module from the Diluter:

a. Ensure the aspirator tip is extended.
b. Unfasten the two captive screws securing the Probe-Wipe module to the BSV
module. See Figure 4.58-2.
Figure 4.58-2 Captive Screws Securing Probe-Wipe Module to BSV Module
Unfasten captive
screws (2)
7253344A
4.58-2 PN 4277219B
c. Disconnect the cylinder attached to the front section of the BSV.
d. Disconnect the probe-wipe sensor and motor cable, P1.
WARNING Possible contamination from biohazardous material. The cleaning truck, backwash cup, and
associated tubing may contain biohazardous material. Handle carefully.
e. Lift up the Probe-Wipe module, disconnect the tubing from the cleaning truck and
the backwash cup, and remove the Probe-Wipe module from the Diluter.
4. To replace the probe-wipe up or the probe-wipe down sensor:
a. Unscrew the defective sensor from the from the Probe-Wipe module. See
Figure 4.58-3 or Figure 4.58-4.
b. Unsolder the sensor wires.
c. Solder the wires to the replacement switch.
d. Position the replacement switch in the Probe-Wipe module and secure it with the
screw.
Figure 4.58-3 Replacing Components in a Probe-Wipe Module with a Stationary Backwash Cup
Motor
Sensor
Setscrew
Cleaning
truck
Cleaning bracket
truck
Bearings
Backwash
cup
6498137B
5. To clean or replace the cleaning truck or the backwash cup in a Probe-Wipe module
with a stationary backwash cup (Figure 4.58-3):
a. Raise the cleaning truck by manually turning the shaft.
b. Remove the screw on the front of the backwash cup. Refer to Figure 4.58-3.
c. Pry open the bracket holding the cleaning truck and pull the cleaning truck and
backwash cup out of the Probe-Wipe module.
d. Clean or replace the cleaning truck and the backwash cup as needed.
e. Position the cleaning truck in the backwash cup and install the cleaning truck/
backwash cup assembly in the Probe-Wipe module, securing it with the screw.
PN 4277219B 4.58-3
6. To clean or replace the cleaning truck in a Probe-Wipe module with a moveable

backwash cup:
a. Pry open the bracket holding the cleaning truck (Figure 4.58-4) and pull the
cleaning truck out of the Probe-Wipe module.
b. Clean or replace the cleaning truck.
c. Ensure the fork on the cleaning truck bracket is aligned as shown in Figure 4.58-5.
If necessary, loosen the Allen screw, readjust the fork, and then tighten the screw.
d. Install the cleaning truck in the cleaning truck bracket.
Figure 4.58-4 Replacing Components in a Probe-Wipe Module with a Moveable Backwash Cup
Motor
Sensor
Setscrew
Backwash
Cleaning cup
truck cylinder
bracket
Cleaning
Allen screw
truck
Backwash
cup
6498141B
7. To clean or replace the backwash cup in a Probe-Wipe module with a moveable

backwash cup:
a. Unscrew the Allen screw on the bottom of the backwash cup (Figure 4.58-4) and
remove the cup.
b. Clean or replace the backwash cup.
c. Install the backwash cup on the backwash cup cylinder.
8. To replace the motor:
a. Remove the setscrew from the coupling below the motor. Refer to Figure 4.58-3 or
Figure 4.58-4.
b. Pull the motor up and out of the Probe-Wipe module.
c. Position the replacement motor in the Probe-Wipe module and secure it with the
setscrew.
9. To replace the bearings in the base of the Probe-Wipe module in a Probe-Wipe module
with a stationary backwash cup (Figure 4.58-3):
a. Remove the two screws at the base of the Probe-Wipe module. Refer to
Figure 4.58-3.
4.58-4 PN 4277219B
b. Remove the bearings.
c. Install the replacement bearings in the Probe-Wipe module and secure with the
screws.
10. Connect the diluent and waste lines to the ports on the cleaning truck and the backwash
cup (refer to Figure 4.58-3 or Figure 4.58-4), and reinstall the Probe-Wipe module in the
Diluter. Do not reinstall the hand-detector bracket at this time.
11. Connect the cylinder to the rear section of the BSV.
13. If you replaced the cleaning truck or its bracket on the Probe-Wipe module with a
moveable backwash cup, ensure the cleaning truck is aligned with the aspirator tip. Do
the Cleaning Truck Alignment procedure, beginning at step 2.
14. Do the Probe-Wipe Test procedure at the beginning of this section to verify the
Probe-Wipe module is working correctly.
Cleaning Truck Alignment

ATTENTION: Do not attempt to align the cleaning truck with a bent aspirator tip.
Check the condition of the aspirator tip. If the aspirator tip is bent, replace the BSV before
continuing with this procedure.
Initial Adjustment
1. For better access to the Probe-Wipe module, remove the screws securing the hand
detector mounting bracket to the Diluter and let the hand detector and its mounting
bracket hang down, out of the way. Refer to Figure 4.58-1.
2. Verify the fork of the cleaning truck bracket is aligned as shown in Figure 4.58-5.
3. If necessary, loosen the Allen screw, readjust the fork, and then tighten the Allen screw.
Note: The cleaning truck mounting bracket is slotted to allow side-to-side and
front-to-back adjustment of the cleaning truck bracket.
Figure 4.58-5 Alignment of the Cleaning Truck Bracket in a Module with Moveable Backwash Cup
M o u n tin g
b ra c k e t
A d ju s t fo r k
le ft a n d r ig h t
A d ju s t fo r k
in a n d o u t
A lle n s c r e w
2 .5 4 m m
( 0 .1 0 in .)
9 0 .0 d e g re e s
0 .7 6 m m
( 0 .0 3 in .) 6 4 9 8 1 8 7 B
PN 4277219B 4.58-5
Final Adjustment
ATTENTION: This adjustment ensures that the cleaning truck can float freely within the fork
while the truck travels up and down the aspirator tip. The fork must be positioned so that the
cleaning truck has equal play from side to side and from front to back while the hole is
centered on the aspirator tip. If the fork restricts the movement of the cleaning truck in any
direction, the truck could bind on the aspirator tip during operation.
1. At the Diluter/numeric keypad, select F06 to release the pressure on the BSV and
manually rotate the aspirator tip all the way into the Diluter.
2. Manually rotate the lead screw in the Probe-Wipe module to move the cleaning truck up
until you can see the tip of the aspirator tip in the cone at the bottom of the truck.
3. Center the cleaning truck in the fork of the cleaning truck bracket.
a. Loosen the Allen screw on the cleaning truck bracket. Refer to Figure 4.58-5
b. Being careful to maintain the fork at the 90 degree angle shown in Figure 4.58-5,
position the fork so that the truck is centered in the fork.
c. Tighten the Allen screw.
d. Verify the cleaning truck is still centered within the fork and the fork is still at a
90 degree angle to the bracket. If not, repeat from step a.
4. Press STOP twice to exit the F06 function.
6. Reattach the hand-detector bracket to the BSV module.
Probe-Wipe Sensor Adjustment

1. For better access to the Probe-Wipe module, remove the screws securing the hand
detector mounting bracket to the Diluter and let the hand detector and its mounting
bracket hang down, out of the way. Refer to Figure 4.58-1.
2. Select F28, CHECKING PROBE WIPE, to determine which sensor needs adjustment.
3. Open the left door of the Diluter to view the probe-wipe sensor LEDs, UPSEN and
DNSEN, on the Diluter 2 card. Manually move the probe wipe truck up to the sensor.
4. Loosen the screw for the appropriate sensor, move the sensor until the LED for that
sensor lights, then tighten the screw.
Verification
1. Cycle diluent five times in the Manual mode and verify:
r The cleaning truck and backwash cup are not leaking.
r No system errors are generated.
3. Do the Probe-Wipe Test, steps 1 and 2.
4. Cycle blood in the Manual mode and ensure no messages are generated.
4.58-6 PN 4277219B
HAND-DETECTOR ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT 4
4.59 HAND-DETECTOR ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace the hand-detector assembly when needed.
B Diluent or blood specimens for cycling in the Manual mode
Procedure
1. Press POWER OFF on the Diluter to prevent cycling during replacement.
2. Open the front cover and disconnect the connector P32.
3. Undo the threaded shaft securing the hand detector assembly to the BSV module, using
care not to lose the spring. See Figure 4.59-1 for location.
Figure 4.59-1 Replacing the Hand-Detector Assembly

THREADED
SHAFT
SPRING
HAND DETECTOR
SPRING 7253371A
4. To install the assembly:

a. Align the replacement assembly with the hand-detector spring, and hook the lower
edge into place.
b. Insert the shaft and ensure it aligns with the holes and the spring, then screw it into
place.
5. Connect P32.
6. Press POWER ON on the Diluter and go to Verification.
PN 4277219B 4.59-1
HAND-DETECTOR ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
Verification
1. Select F06, Release BSV, to ensure the aspirator tip does not contact the hand detector
assembly.
2. Cycle several samples in the Manual mode and ensure there are no errors.
4.59-2 PN 4277219B
BSV MODULE COMPONENT REPLACEMENT 4
4.60 BSV MODULE COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use the procedures in this section for BSV/BSV Shaft, Spring, Housing, or Insulator
Replacement and for BSV Manual-Mode (Front Section) Cylinder Replacement.
BSV/BSV Shaft, Spring, Housing, or Insulator Replacement
B Gauze
B 7/64-in., right-angle Allen wrench
Procedure
WARNING Risk of personal contamination. The BSV and its associated tubing may contain biohazardous
material. Avoid skin contact. Clean up spills immediately in accordance with local regulations and
acceptable laboratory procedures.
1. Press DRAIN on the Diluter/numeric keypad.

2. Use F06 to release the BSV.
3. Place gauze beneath and around the BSV to catch any spills.
4. Remove the BSV and the O-ring from the mounting post as directed in the Online Help
System or Chapter 2 of the Special Procedures and Troubleshooting manual.
ATTENTION: DO NOT remove the tubing from the BSV unless you are replacing the BSV.
5. If replacing the BSV, remove the tubing from the BSV.

6. If replacing the BSV shaft, spring, housing or insulator:
a. Remove the three Allen screws securing the BSV housing to the BSV module
bracket. See Figure 4.60-1. Retain all hardware.
ATTENTION: When the shaft lever cap is loose, the BSV spring decompresses.
b. Remove the two Phillips-head screws securing the BSV shaft lever cap. Retain the
hardware.
c. Remove the BSV housing, insulator, spring or shaft as necessary for replacement.
PN 4277219B 4.60-1
BSV MODULE COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
Figure 4.60-1 Accessing the BSV Insulator, Housing and Spring

2 Remove Allen
screws (3)
3 Remove Phillips-head
screws (2)
1 Remove BSV
7253405B
d. Position the BSV spring, insulator and housing on the shaft and reinstall the shaft
lever cap with the retained hardware. Use Figure 4.60-2 as a guide.
Figure 4.60-2 Installing the BSV Components
7253411E
e. Align the screw holes in the insulator and housing with the screw holes in the BSV
module bracket, compress the BSV spring, and secure the BSV housing to the BSV
module bracket with the retained hardware.
Note: When the BSV housing is installed correctly, the BSV guide post sits next to
the bottom of the Probe-Wipe module motor.
7. If you replaced the BSV, install the BSV tubing on the replacement BSV. Refer to
Figure 2.17-7 for port identification, Table 2.17-3, for port functions and tubing
numbers. Refer to the instrument’s pneumatic/hydraulic schematic in Chapter 6 for
tubing replacements.
8. Install the O-ring and the BSV.
9. Press ENTER on the Diluter/numeric keypad to reinitiate F06 and verify the BSV sections
rotate smoothly and completely.
4.60-2 PN 4277219B
BSV MODULE COMPONENT REPLACEMENT 4
10. Press STOP twice to exit F06.
11. Press RINSE to refill the baths. Verify the BSV is not leaking.
12. Cycle diluent in the Manual mode and in the Automatic mode and ensure the BSV does
not leak.
13. Remove the gauze and clean up any spills.
BSV Manual-Mode (Front Section) Cylinder Replacement
B Hemostats
Procedure
2. For better access to CL1 and its sensor, remove three of the screws and loosen the fourth
screw securing the hand detector mounting bracket to the Diluter, and let the hand
detector and its mounting bracket hang down, out of the way. Refer to Figure 4.58-1.
3. Disconnect the tubing from the BSV Manual-mode cylinder, CL1 (Figure 4.60-2).
4. Push back the sleeve on CL1 (Figure 4.60-2) and lift the cylinder arm off the ball joint to
disconnect the cylinder from the front section of the BSV.
5. Remove the pin securing CL1 (Figure 4.60-2) and slide CL1 from its mount.
6. Disconnect the probe position sensor from P33.
Note: P33 is connected to P7 on the Sensor Distribution card.
7. On the new cylinder, verify the probe position sensor is oriented as shown in
Figure 4.60-3.
8. Connect the tubing to the bottom port of CL1. Do not connect the tubing to the top port
at this time.
Note: Leaving the top pressure line disconnected allows you to manually move the
aspirator tip as needed in the Probe Position Sensor Adjustment procedure below.
9. Install the new cylinder on its mount and connect it to the front section of the BSV.
10. Connect the probe position sensor to P33.
11. With the hemostats, pinch the tubing for the top port of CL1.
12. Power up the Analytical Station and adjust the probe position sensor. Go to Probe
Position Sensor Adjustment.
Note: Disregard any sensor errors that occur on power up until you have made the
sensor adjustments.
PN 4277219B 4.60-3
BSV MODULE COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
Figure 4.60-3 Probe Position Sensor Orientation
Probe
position
sensor
Locking
screw
7253438E
Probe Position Sensor Adjustment

1. Loosen the locking screw (Figure 4.60-3) on the probe position sensor enough to allow
the sensor to move in the slot.
2. Manually move the aspirator tip to the “in” position over the rinse trough.
3. Move the probe position sensor down until the LED goes off, then move the sensor up
until the LED goes back on. Mark this as position 1.
4. Continue slowly moving the probe position sensor up until the LED goes out again.
Mark this as position 2.
5. Move the probe position sensor to the center point between position 1 and position 2
and tighten the sensor’s locking screw.
6. Remove the hemostats from the tubing for the top port of CL1 and connect the tubing to
CL1.
Verification
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION, Heading 5.5.
4.60-4 PN 4277219B
USING THE ELECTRONIC FORMS 4
4.61 USING THE ELECTRONIC FORMS
Purpose
Use these procedures to access and fill in the electronic forms resident in the Workstation: the
System Verification Report, Instrument Reference Report and System Installation Report.
Note: Saving an electronic form stores the form in the database where it is retained. You can
access the form again by using the scroll buttons next to that form’s screen.
B None
Using the System Verification Report
1. Select tt tt to access the SYSTEM VERIFICATION REPORT

screen.
2. Fill in the required information on the screen:
a. Select to access the fields of a new form on the screen.

b. Ensure the information displayed automatically is correct.
c. Enter information in the remaining fields as necessary.
d. Select to save the information.

3. To record any problems:
a. From the View/Enter box, select PROBLEMS to display the SYSTEM VERIFICATION
REPORT - PROBLEMS screen.
b. Select to access the fields on the screen.

c. Enter information as necessary.
Note: Record only one problem per screen.

e. Repeat steps b through d for each problem.
4. If a printout is needed, select to print the report.
PN 4277219B 4.61-1
USING THE ELECTRONIC FORMS
Using the Instrument Reference Report
1. Select tt tt to access the INSTRUMENT REFERENCE REPORT

screen.
a. Select to access the fields on the screen. The instrument data and the ranges
for the manually entered data are displayed automatically.
b. Ensure the instrument data in the header is correct.
ATTENTION: The ranges are provided as references for the manually entered data. The
ranges are not used to flag entries that are outside the limits.
c. Enter additional header information and reference values as necessary.
ATTENTION: The values cannot be edited after they are saved. Ensure all fields are filled in
correctly before saving.
d. Select to save the report.
3. If a printout is needed, select print the report.
Using the System Installation Report
1. Select tt tt to access the SYSTEM INSTALLATION REPORT screen.

a. Select to access the fields on the screen.

b. Ensure the information displayed automatically is correct.
c. Enter information in the remaining fields as necessary.

3. To record any problems:
a. From the View/Enter box, select PROBLEMS to display the SYSTEM INSTALLATION
REPORT - PROBLEMS screen.

Note: Record only one problem per screen.
4.61-2 PN 4277219B
USING THE ELECTRONIC FORMS 4

e. Repeat steps b through d for each problem.
f. Select to return to the SYSTEM INSTALLATION REPORT screen.

4. To record any missing parts:
a. From the View/Enter box, select MISSING PARTS to display the SYSTEM
INSTALLATION REPORT - MISSING PARTS screen.

Note: Record only one missing part per screen.

e. Repeat steps b through d for each missing part.

5. To record any replacement parts:
a. From the View/Enter box, select REPLACEMENT PARTS to display the SYSTEM
INSTALLATION REPORT - REPLACEMENT PARTS screen.

Note: Record only one replacement part per screen.

e. Repeat steps b through d for each replacement part.
6. If a printout is needed, select to print the report.
PN 4277219B 4.61-3
USING THE ELECTRONIC FORMS
4.61-4 PN 4277219B
RETIC MIXING MOTOR REPAIR/REPLACEMENT 4
4.62 RETIC MIXING MOTOR REPAIR/REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective retic mixing motor or to access and replace its belt
on either the Retic Module or the Random Access Module.
Retic Module
Removal
2. Disconnect the blood/stain input tubing to the retic chamber. See Figure 4.62-1.
Figure 4.62-1 Removing the Retic Motor from the Retic Module
Unfasten captive screws

RETIC MIXING
MOTOR 3
1
Remove screws
Remove
blood/stain
input tubing here
Remove
mixing motor Remove screws
ground strap
Unfasten captive
6498062A
screws
3. Disconnect the motor cable J66, located behind the Retic module.
4. Remove the motor ground strap from the bubble/blood detector bracket.
5. For better access to the area, unfasten the captive screws on the mounting bracket for
MF16 and disconnect P11.
6. Unfasten the three captive screws securing the Retic module to the floor of the Diluter
and pull the Retic module forward.
7. Remove the two screws securing the retic and stain chambers’ bracket to the retic mixing
motor bracket and move the retic and stain chambers’ bracket out of the way.
8. Remove the two screws holding the retic mixing motor bracket to the frame of the Retic
module.
PN 4277219B 4.62-1
RETIC MIXING MOTOR REPAIR/REPLACEMENT
9. Remove the retic mixing motor from the Diluter.

10. If necessary, replace the belt.
Installation
1. Install the repaired or replacement retic mixing motor:
a. Position the retic mixing motor in the Diluter, connect J66, and fasten the captive
screws that secure the motor bracket to the Retic module frame.
b. Slide the Retic module back into the Diluter and fasten the captive screws that
secure the Retic module to the floor of the Diluter.
c. Connect the motor ground cable.
d. Reinstall the retic and stain chambers’ bracket to the motor bracket.
e. Fasten the captive screws that secure the mounting bracket for MF16 to the Retic
module and reconnect P11.
f. Reconnect the blood/stain input tubing to the retic chamber.
3. At the Analyzer, select the Retic test mode and verify the retic mixing motor is working.
Note: You can manually activate the retic mixing motor to verify it is functioning by
using the F05 function and selecting SL66.
Random Access Module
B A pair of hemostats
Removal
3. For easier access to the retic motor, remove the rocker bed as directed under
Heading 4.43.
4. Remove the screw securing the dual four-valve splash shield on the left side of the
Random Access module and remove the shield.
5. Unfasten the three captive screws on the mounting plate for solenoid manifold MF16
and move the plate out of the way.
Note: For easier access, disconnect the harness for the solenoids.
6. Remove the splash shield on the right side of the Random Access module.
7. Remove the two screws securing the retic and stain chambers’ bracket to the retic mixing
motor bracket and move the retic and stain chambers’ bracket out of the way.
Note: It is not necessary to disconnect any of the tubing from the chambers.
8. Unfasten the captive screws holding the retic mixing motor bracket to the frame of the
Random Access module.
4.62-2 PN 4277219B
RETIC MIXING MOTOR REPAIR/REPLACEMENT 4
9. Remove the nut holding the braided ground wire to the motor assembly and disconnect
the motor cable P1 from P66.
Figure 4.62-2 Removing the Retic Motor from the Random Access Module
R e m o v e U n fa s te n c a p tiv e s c r e w s
1 2
s h ie ld a n d m o v e p la te
R e m o v e
3
s h ie ld
M o v e
4 c h a m b e r
b ra c k e t
R e m o v e m o to r
5
a s s e m b ly
6
D is c o n n e c t
7 2 1 9 0 1 0 B
10. Remove the retic mixing motor from the Diluter.

11. If necessary, replace the belt.
Installation
1. Install the repaired or replacement retic mixing motor:
a. Position the retic mixing motor in the Diluter, connect the braided ground wire to
the assembly, connect P1 to P66, and fasten the captive screws that secure the motor
bracket to the Random Access module.
b. Reinstall the retic and stain chambers’ bracket to the motor bracket.
c. If you disconnected the harness for the MF16, reconnect it.
d. Reposition the mounting plate for MF16 and fasten the screws that secure the
mounting plate to the Random Access module.
e. Reinstall the splash shields.
PN 4277219B 4.62-3
RETIC MIXING MOTOR REPAIR/REPLACEMENT
4. At the Analyzer, select the Retic test mode and verify the retic mixing motor is working.
Note: You can manually activate the retic mixing motor to verify it is functioning by
using the F05 function and selecting SL66.
Verification
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION, Heading 5.5, for the retic parameters.
4.62-4 PN 4277219B
STAIN OR RETIC CHAMBER REPLACEMENT 4
4.63 STAIN OR RETIC CHAMBER REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace the stain chamber/heater or the retic chamber.
B Hemostat
B Allen wrench
B Gauze
Procedure
1. Open the front cover of the Diluter to access the Retic or the Random Access module.
2. If the stain chamber is being replaced, disconnect P1, the stain heater connector.
WARNING The stain chamber may be hot. The temperature is about 37 to 43°C (100 to 110°F). Be careful
when working around the stain chamber.
3. Remove the stain and retic chambers bracket. See Figure 4.63-1 (Retic module) or
a. Remove the two screws behind the retic chamber.
Figure 4.63-1 Removing the Stain and Retic Chamber Bracket from the Retic Module
Disconnect the Remove screws BLOOD/STAIN

blood/stain DELIVERY TUBING
delivery tubing RETIC
CHAMBER STAIN
CHAMBER
Disconnect the
drain tubing
Unfasten captive
6498065A screws
PN 4277219B 4.63-1
STAIN OR RETIC CHAMBER REPLACEMENT
Figure 4.63-2 Removing the Stain and Retic Chamber Bracket from the Random Access Module
R e m o v e s c re w s
B lo o d /s ta in
d e liv e r y tu b in g D is c o n n e c t th e
R e tic
b lo o d /s ta in
c h a m b e r
d e liv e r y tu b in g
S ta in
D is c o n n e c t th e c h a m b e r
d r a in tu b in g
U n fa s te n
c a p tiv e s c r e w s
7 2 1 9 0 3 5 B
ATTENTION: The retic stain contains new methylene blue, which is a permanent dye. Use
care in handling the stain and any associated tubing. Place gauze under any areas where
tubing will be disconnected.
b. Disconnect the blood/stain delivery tubing from the stain chamber, and the drain
tubing from the stain and the retic chambers.
4. Loosen the Allen screw that secures the chamber to be replaced to the bracket and
remove the chamber.
5. Disconnect the tubing from the chamber and install it on the replacement chamber.
6. Install the new chamber in the bracket and tighten the Allen screw.
7. Reinstall the chamber bracket in the Retic or Random Access module.
8. Reconnect the drain tubing and blood/stain delivery lines.
9. If the stain chamber was replaced, reconnect P1.
Verification
1. If the stain chamber was replaced, do the HEATER CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
procedure to adjust the stain heater. See Heading 4.65.
2. Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION, Heading 5.5, for the retic parameter.
4.63-2 PN 4277219B
PELTIER MODULE REPLACEMENT 4
4.64 PELTIER MODULE REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace the Peltier module.
B Hemostat
Procedure
1. Open the rear door of the Diluter to access the Peltier module.
2. Disconnect the cable at J1. See Figure 4.64-1.
Figure 4.64-1 Peltier Module, Rear and Front View

PELTIER REAR VIEW PELTIER FRONT VIEW
Remove screws (4) Remove tubing 7253376B

J1
3. Remove the screws securing the Peltier module to the Diluter wall.
4. Remove the Peltier module.
5. At the front of the Diluter, disconnect the input and output tubing from the Peltier
module.
Note: For easier access, raise the left lift and remove the lift cover.
6. Connect the tubing to the replacement Peltier module.
7. Install the Peltier module and replace the screws.
8. Connect the cable at J1.
9. Select F19 to prime the retic clearing solution.
PN 4277219B 4.64-1
PELTIER MODULE REPLACEMENT
Verification
1. At the Analyzer, access the SERVICE MENU (Heading 4.2), select DILUTER
DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES and ensure the Peltier temperature on
the VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES screen is within the displayed limits.
2. Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION, Heading 5.5, for the retic parameters.
4.64-2 PN 4277219B
HEATER CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4
4.65 HEATER CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Purpose
Use this procedure when you replace the Diluter 4 card or when the heater temperatures are
in question.
Check the heaters to ensure the settings are correct for achieving expected system
performance. Because of the dynamic nature of the heating system, variations can be
expected. If the system is located in a room that has severe ambient temperature variations,
then the heater variation will be wider.
Adjust the stain heater to the correct operating threshold to ensure optimal reaction
temperature for staining the reticulocytes.
B DVM
B Thermal probe
Procedure
1. Ensure the Analytical Station is on and idle for a minimum of 5 minutes prior to
performing this check.
2. Open the rear door of the Diluter and remove the shield protecting the Diluter 4 card.
3. Disconnect the stain heater connector, J1. See Figure 4.65-1.
Figure 4.65-1 Stain Heater Connector
6498028A
PN 4277219B 4.65-1
HEATER CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
4. At the Diluter 4 card, connect the DVM to TP10 (heater set point) and TP13 (ground) to
read dc voltage.
r If the reading is within the limits specified for TP10 in Table A.3-11, no adjustment
is required. Go to step 5.
r If the voltage is incorrect, adjust R91 on the Diluter 4 card.
5. After completing the adjustment:
a. Reconnect J1.
b. Reset the Analytical Station.
6. At the Analyzer, access the SERVICE MENU (Heading 4.2) and select DILUTER
DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES.
7. Monitor the stain heater temperature on the VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES screen for
1 minute to ensure the temperature is within the displayed range.
r If the stain heater temperature is within range, go to step 8.
r If the temperature is >150°F, inspect the thermistor or wiring harness for possible
shorts.
r If the temperature is <25°F, inspect the wiring harness for mechanical problems or
openings due to corrosion.
8. Ensure the stain LED on the Diluter 4 card switches on and off after about a minute.
9. Adjust the ambient temperature displayed on the VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES screen.
a. Place the thermal probe on the ambient thermister behind the RF Detector Preamp
card.
b. At the Diluter 4 card, adjust R47 until the Diluter Ambient Temperature display
equals the thermal probe reading.
c. Close all the doors to prevent drafts and monitor the ambient temperature displays
for 2 minutes.
d. Ensure the voltage change is <2°F.
10. Reinstall the shield for the Diluter 4 card.
11. Ensure the Peltier temperature and the diff heater temperature on the
VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES screen are within the displayed ranges.
Verification
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION, Heading 5.5, for the diff and retic parameters.
4.65-2 PN 4277219B
DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP VOLUME OPTIMIZATION 4
4.66 DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP VOLUME OPTIMIZATION
Purpose
ATTENTION: Always verify the diff lytic reagent pump volume and the initial diff preservative
pump volume are acceptable as directed under Headings 4.28 and 4.29, respectively, before
doing this procedure.
Use this procedure to adjust the diff preservative pump at different temperature settings to
ensure the cell counts and DC conductivity noise remain within limits.
B Three normal, whole-blood specimens mixed for at least 30 minutes before using. See
Chapter 4 of the Reference manual for anticoagulant and storage specifications.
B Oscilloscope
Procedure
1. Ensure the diff lytic reagent pump volume (Heading 4.28) and the initial diff
preservative pump volume (Heading 4.29) are acceptable.
3. Access the AMC switch, SW1, and set positions 1 and 4 for high temperature. See
Table A.2-2 for the position settings.
5. Set up the oscilloscope to read the DC channel of the ANALOG card:
a. Set volts/div to 20-mV scale.
b. Set trigger source to channel 1.
c. Connect channel 1 to the DC (upper) connector on the ANALOG card.
6. At the Analyzer, select the CBC/DIFF test mode.
7. Run four samples of fresh, well-mixed blood, two in the Automatic mode and two in the
Manual mode, and record:
a. The peak value of the conductivity noise for the DC channel during “count.”
b. The DC cell counts.
8. Verify the DC conductivity noise and the cell counts are within the limits specified for
high temperature mode in Table A.1-19.
9. If the DC cell counts are outside the limits:
a. Obtain a different specimen and repeat from step 7.
b. If the problem persists, determine the cause and fix the problem.
PN 4277219B 4.66-1
DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP VOLUME OPTIMIZATION
10. If the DC conductivity noise is outside the limits:

a. Adjust the low volume of the diff preservative pump up or down as shown in
Figure 4.66-1 and rerun blood until the DC conductivity noise falls within limits.
b. Do the Low Volume Check for the diff preservative pump as directed under
Heading 4.29 and ensure the volume is still within the verfication range.
c. Repeat steps a and b as often as necessary to achieve the minimum DC conductivity
noise within the verification range.
Figure 4.66-1 Diff Preservative Pump Low Volume Adjustments
DIFF
PRESERVATIVE
PUMP
MOUNTING
BRACKET
Decrease
Hold
Increase
RIGHT FRONT PANEL
1/2 turn 5 µL
7253237A Adjust
11. Power down the Analytical Station and reset the AMC switch for normal temperature.
13. Run four samples of fresh, well-mixed blood, two in the Automatic mode and two in the
Manual mode, and record:
a. The peak value of the conductivity noise for the DC channel during “count.”
b. The DC cell counts.
14. Verify the DC conductivity noise and the cell counts are within the limits specified for
normal temp mode in Table A.1-19.
15. If the DC cell counts are outside the limits:
a. Obtain a different specimen and repeat from step 13.
b. If the problem persists, determine the cause and fix the problem.
4.66-2 PN 4277219B
DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP VOLUME OPTIMIZATION 4
16. If the DC conductivity noise is outside the limits:
a. Adjust the high volume of the diff preservative pump up or down as shown in
Figure 4.66-2 and rerun blood until the DC conductivity noise is within limits.
b. Do the High Volume Check for the diff preservative pump as directed under
Heading 4.29 and ensure the volume is still within the verfication range.
c. Repeat steps a and b as often as necessary to achieve the minimum DC conductivity
noise within the verification range.
17. Power down the Analytical Station and reset the AMC switch to the automatic
temperature mode. Refer to Table A.2-2
Figure 4.66-2 Diff Preservative Pump High Volume Adjustments
DIFF
PRESERVATIVE
PUMP
MOUNTING
BRACKET
Decrease
Increase
1/2 turn 5 µL
RIGHT FRONT PANEL

7253238A
Verification
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION, Heading 5.5, for the diff parameters.
Note: If you did this procedure as part of the VCS Optimization procecdure, do the
PRECISION VERIFICATION and then go back to theVCS OPTIMIZATION procedure,
Heading 4.71
PN 4277219B 4.66-3
DIFF PRESERVATIVE PUMP VOLUME OPTIMIZATION
4.66-4 PN 4277219B
DIFF HEATER REPLACEMENT 4
4.67 DIFF HEATER REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective diff heater in either the Retic module or the Random
Access module.
B Two pairs of hemostats or equivalent clamping device
B Absorbent paper or tissue
Removal
2. To access the diff heater:
a. Disconnect the hand detector mounting bracket from the Diluter as shown in
Figure 4.67-1 and let the hand detector and its mounting bracket hang down, out of
the way.

R e m o v e
R e m o v e
R e m o v e
U n fa s te n
b. On the LH 750 System, disconnect the tubing connected to the left side of the
Random Access module:
1) At the BSV, disconnect tubing 205.
2) At the BSV, note the routing of tubing 211, then disconnect it.
3) At the front bubble/blood detector, disconnect the needle input tubing.
4) Remove the knob of the BSV.
5) At the rear bubble/blood detector, disconnect tubing 77, the tubing to the
aspiration pump.
3. If removing a diff heater from a Retic module:
a. Disconnect the diff heater cable P30. See Figure 4.67-2.
b. Unfasten the captive screw securing the diff heater bracket to the Retic module.
PN 4277219B 4.67-1
DIFF HEATER REPLACEMENT
Figure 4.67-2 Replacing the Diff Heater on a Retic Module
DIFF HEATER
BRACKET
DIFF HEATER
CAPTIVE
SCREW
P30
6498063A
4. If removing a diff heater from a Random Access module:

a. Disconnect the diff heater cable (red connector). See Figure 4.67-3.
b. Unfasten the captive screw securing the diff heater bracket to the Random Access
module.
Figure 4.67-3 Replacing the Diff Heater on a Random Access Module
C a p tiv e
s c re w
D iff
h e a te r
D iff h e a te r
b ra c k e t
7 2 1 9 0 1 1 B
4.67-2 PN 4277219B
DIFF HEATER REPLACEMENT 4
5. Clamp both tubings at the rear of the diff heater with the hemostats to minimize leaking,
then disconnect the tubing.
6. Slide the diff heater out of the diff heater bracket.
Installation
1. Slide the replacement diff heater into the diff heater bracket.
2. Install the tubing on the diff heater and remove the hemostats.
3. Reinstall the heater bracket in the module and connect the diff heater cable.
5. Select F14 to prime the diff lytic reagent, then wait 5 minutes for the diff heater to heat
the diff lytic reagent in the heater.
6. At the Analyzer, access the SERVICE MENU (Heading 4.2), select DILUTER
DIAGNOSTICS tt VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES, and verify the diff heater temperature
on the VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES screen is within the displayed limits.
7. On the LH 750 System, reconnect the tubing connected to the left side of the Random
Access module and reinstall the BSV knob.
8. Reattach the hand detector mounting bracket to the Diluter.
Verification
PN 4277219B 4.67-3
DIFF HEATER REPLACEMENT
4.67-4 PN 4277219B
DIFF MIXING CHAMBER REPLACEMENT 4
4.68 DIFF MIXING CHAMBER REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective diff mixing chamber.
B Hemostats
Procedure
2. Unfasten the two captive screws securing the Diff module to the Diluter. See
Figure 4.68-1.
Figure 4.68-1 Replacing the Diff Mixing Chamber
DIFF MIXING
CHAMBER
2
Loosen
white screw
1
Unfasten
captive screws
6498015A
3. Loosen the nylon plastic screw securing the diff mixing chamber in its holder. See
Figure 4.68-1.
4. Tilting the Diff module as necessary, disconnect the tubing from the diff mixing chamber.
5. Remove the diff mixing chamber.
6. Install the replacement diff mixing chamber into the holder and connect the tubing.
Refer to the instrument’s pneumatic/hydraulic schematic in Chapter 6 for the correct
tubing connections.
7. Tighten the nylon plastic screw on the diff mixing chamber holder to secure the diff
mixing chamber.
PN 4277219B 4.68-1
DIFF MIXING CHAMBER REPLACEMENT
8. Fasten the two captive screws at the bottom of the Diff module to secure the Diff module
to the Diluter.
10. Ensure the diff mixing chamber tubing connections are secure and the diff mixing
chamber did not leak.
Verification
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION, Heading 5.5. for the diff parameters.
4.68-2 PN 4277219B
DIFF MIXING CHAMBER MOTOR REPLACEMENT 4
4.69 DIFF MIXING CHAMBER MOTOR REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace a defective diff mixing chamber motor.
Procedure
2. Remove the rocker bed as directed under Heading 4.43, beginning at step 2.
3. Remove the screw securing the ambient temperature thermistors to the thermistor post,
then unscrew the thermistor post to release the ground wire for the diff mixing chamber
motor. See Figure 4.69-1.
Figure 4.69-1 Releasing the Ground Wire for the Diff Mixing Chamber Motor
THERMISTORS
1
1 Remove screw
2
Unscrew post
3
Remove
ground wire
6498067A
4. Loosen the two captive screws securing the Diff module to the Diluter. See Figure 4.69-2.
5. Tilting the Diff module as necessary, remove the two screws securing the motor assembly
to the Diff module. See Figure 4.69-2. Retain the hardware.
6. Tilt the motor assembly forward and remove the two screws securing the diff mixing
chamber holder to the motor assembly. See Figure 4.69-2. Retain the hardware.
7. At the rear of the Diluter, disconnect P73.
Note: J73 is located near J16 which is connected to the Diluter 3 card.
8. Remove the wire harness from the wire clips.
9. Remove the defective motor assembly.
10. Route the wire harness for the replacement diff mixing chamber motor through the
Diluter panel and connect P73 to J73. Secure the harness in wire clips as necessary.
11. Position the replacement diff mixing chamber motor in the Diff module and secure the
motor assembly to the diff mixing chamber holder with the hardware retained in step 6.
PN 4277219B 4.69-1
DIFF MIXING CHAMBER MOTOR REPLACEMENT
Figure 4.69-2 Removing the Diff Mixing Chamber Motor
3 Remove
2 screws(2)
Remove
screws(2)
1
Unfasten
captive screws
6498016A
12. Secure the diff mixing chamber motor to the Diff module with the hardware retained in
step 5.
13. Reinstall the thermistor post with the ground wire for the diff mixing chamber motor at
its base.
14. Secure the ambient thermistors to the thermistor post, ensuring the thermistors do not
touch the RF Detector Preamp card or any other components.
15. Fasten the two captive screws at the bottom of the Diff module to secure the Diff module
to the Diluter.
18. Using F05, select SL73 to manually send the logic signal for activating the diff mixing
chamber motor, and to verify the motor is functioning.
Verification
4.69-2 PN 4277219B
CBC APERTURE CHECKS 4
4.70 CBC APERTURE CHECKS
Purpose
Use this procedure to ensure minimal noise on the RBC and WBC channels. This procedure
checks the integrity of the RBC and WBC apertures, coaxial cables, and aperture modules.
B DMM
B Hemostats
Procedure
1. Check the instrument and ensure:
r The instrument is ON but not performing any cycles.
r The RBC and WBC baths are filled.
r The apertures and the sweep-flow lines are primed.
2. To prevent outside noise interference, close all the Diluter doors and panels except the
rear door for accessing the Six-Channel Preamp card on the LH 750 System.
3. Remove all the coaxial cables from the RED and WHITE PRE-AMP cards (GEN•S
System) or the Six-Channel Preamp card (LH 750 System), ensuring the connectors do
not touch each other or chassis ground.
4. Set up the DMM.
a. Connect the red probe to the positive terminal.
b. Connect the black probe to the negative terminal.
c. Set the reading to K ohms.
5. With the DMM, take readings across each coaxial cable to verify the integrity of the
circuit through the aperture.
a. Attach the negative probe to the outside (case) of the coaxial cable being tested.
ATTENTION: The following measurement is difficult to take because the resistance changes
rapidly as the dc voltage from the DMM is applied to the diluent.
b. While observing the DMM display, touch the positive probe to the center pin of the
the coaxial cable being tested and record the first resistance reading observed.
c. If you need to repeat the measurement, reverse the probes to reverse the polarity.
d. Ensure the reading falls within the range specified in Table A.1-7, Red and White
Aperture Impedance.
e. Repeat steps a through d above for each coaxial cable.
6. At the needle assembly, clamp the aspiration tubing with a pair of hemostats and
disconnect the tubing from the needle assembly. To locate the aspiration tubing, refer to
Figure 2.17-19.
7. At the Diluter/numeric keypad, select F05 and energize SL4 to reduce fluidic movement.
8. Ensure the Diluter doors and panels are still closed and the coaxial cables are not
touching chassis ground.
PN 4277219B 4.70-1
CBC APERTURE CHECKS
9. Set the DMM to read megohms.

10. With the DMM, verify the apertures are electrically isolated from each other.
a. Attach the negative probe to chassis ground.
b. While observing the DMM display, touch the positive probe to the outside (case) of
the RBC coaxial cable #1.
c. Ensure the reading is equal to or exceeds the value specified in Table A.1-8, Red and
White Aperture Isolation Impedance (with Diluent).
d. Repeat steps a through c for the WBC coaxial cable #1.
11. Disconnect the DMM and reconnect the coaxial cables.
12. Reconnect the aspiration tubing to the needle assembly.
13. Exit the F05 function. SL4 is automatically de-energized.
4.70-2 PN 4277219B
VCS OPTIMIZATION 4
4.71 VCS OPTIMIZATION
Purpose
Many factors can affect blood results obtained using VCS technology. Use this procedure to
optimize the instrument-related factors, to minimize the impact of factors such as specimen
handling and environmental problems.
Perform this procedure after replacing any VCS technology component. These include the
following: flow cell, laser, LS sensor, RF Detector Preamp card, and Light Scatter Preamp
module. Perform the noise level and LATRON control checks after replacing the Diff Power
Supply card or Laser Power Supply module.
The overall VCS optimization procedure is divided into several individual, interrelated
procedures. The purpose of each of these procedures and the tools and supplies needed are
listed in Table 4.71-1.
While the procedures within the VCS Optimization procedure are presented linearly, because
of the close interrelationship of many of the adjustments, you may need to do them in a
different order. For example:
r You must correct any grossly misadjusted items before attempting the overall
optimization.
r After completing certain adjustments, you may have to repeat previous adjustments.
Figure 4.71-1 shows the recommended procedure flow for VCS optimization. Use it as a
guide.
See Table 4.71-1.
PN 4277219B 4.71-1
VCS OPTIMIZATION
Figure 4.71-1 VCS Optimization Procedure Flow
VCS
optimization
procedures
Adjust the
Do
LS
preliminary
gains
checks
Verify the
Verify diff lytic reagent
LS noise is
and diff preservative
acceptable
pump volumes are
within specifications
Verify the
Set sheath RMS noise is
and sample acceptable
pressures
Verify the
RF, DC and LS gains
Adjust DC are adjusted correctly
and RF
gains
Check
instrument
Verify DC and RF performance
noise is
acceptable
Instrument
is performing NO Correct
Clean the within
flow cell problem
specifications
?
Align the YES

flow cell VCS
and the laser technology
system is
optimized
7253380B
4.71-2 PN 4277219B
VCS OPTIMIZATION 4
Table 4.71-1 Purpose of VCS Optimization Procedures and Tools/Supplies Needed
Procedures Use this procedure to ensure: Tools/Supplies Needed

A. Preliminary Checks No obvious fluidic or electronic B None
sources of noise.
B. Pump Volume Checks Reagent volumes are within B One feed-thru fitting, PN 1005697
specifications. B One extension tubing: consists of one 30 cm
(12 in.) piece of 0.082 i.d. polyurethane tubing,
PN 3202036, attached to barbed end of feed-
thru fitting, PN 1016929
B Two vials, such as ACCUVETTE™ II vials, one for
waste and one for testing
B Mettler scale model P2100, or equivalent scale
with an accuracy of ± 0.001 g (for Volume Check
procedure - weight method)
B Volumetric Cylinder, Erythrolyse™ reagent and
StabiLyse™ reagent, PN 5450245 (for Volume
Check procedure - volume method)
B Cotton swabs (to clean and dry the Volumetric
Cylinder)
B Two adjustable wrenches
B Three normal, whole-blood specimens mixed for
at least 30 minutes before using. See Chapter 4
of the Reference manual for anticoagulant and
storage specifications.
B Oscilloscope
C. VCS Flow Rate Sheath and sample pressures are B LATRON™ primer, PN 7546915
Adjustment set for accurate, precise flow B LATRON™ control, PN 7546914
through the flow cell aperture and
the count ratio is acceptable. B Fresh, normal whole-blood specimens
D. RF Detector Preamp Minimum noise on the RF channel B DMM

Card Adjustments using the C1 Adjustment. For DC B Diluent
and RF gain adjustments, use large
latex particles to ensure accurate B Plastic Trim Pot Tool with metallic shaft,
gain adjustments and LATRON PN 5402071
control to verify the adjustment. B Plastic Trim Pot Tool with nonmetallic shaft,
PN 5415364
B LATRON primer, PN 7546915
B Probe with BNC connector
B Latex particles DC/RF, large, PN 6605419
E. DC and RF Verification Minimum noise on the DC and RF B Diluent for cycling
channels. B Oscilloscope
B DMM
B Instrument Reference Report form
PN 4277219B 4.71-3
VCS OPTIMIZATION
Table 4.71-1 Purpose of VCS Optimization Procedures and Tools/Supplies Needed (Continued)

F. Flow Cell Cleaning Flow cell is clean and free of debris. B Isopropyl alcohol (ChromAR), analytical grade
99.5% purity or better, PN 1606138
B Applicator stick, PN 2527713
B Tape, Scotch type or masking
G. Laser and Flow-Cell TTM assembly is aligned B 20 MHz dual-trace oscilloscope
Alignment mechanically for high quality, B DMM
consistent light-scatter
characteristics. B Z-Axis Gauge, PN 5401245
B Plastic Trim Pot Tool, PN 5402071
B LATRON control, PN 7546914
B Light Shield, PN 5401269
B White paper
B 5C Normal cell control
B Normal whole-blood specimen mixed for at least
30 minutes before using. See Chapter 4 of the
Reference manual for anticoagulant and storage
specifications.
The following torque tools are recommended if
available:
B T-handle torque wrench, 20 in./lb, Utica
PN BT-1B
B Torque-limiting screwdriver, 15 in./lb, Utica
PN TS-30
H. LS Gain Adjustment LS gain is set for optimum B LATRON primer, PN 7546915
positioning of WBC subpopulations B LATRON control, PN 7546914
on the DataPlot.
I. LS Verification Minimum noise on the LS channel. B Diluent for cycling
B Oscilloscope
B DMM
J. RMS Noise Check Static and dynamic noise in both B Diluent for cycling
the Diff and Retic modes are within B Oscilloscope
acceptable limits.
B DMM
4.71-4 PN 4277219B
VCS OPTIMIZATION 4
Table 4.71-1 Purpose of VCS Optimization Procedures and Tools/Supplies Needed (Continued)

J. RMS Noise Check Proper positioning of the WBC B LATRON primer, PN 7546915
populations within the DataPlot. B LATRON control, PN 7546914
L. VCS Verification Instrument is performing to B Normal whole-blood specimen mixed for at least
specifications. (The DataPlots are 30 minutes before using. See Chapter 4 of the
good, and the DC channel baseline Reference manual for anticoagulant.
is clean.) B 20 MHz dual-trace oscilloscope
B DMM
A. Preliminary Checks
1. Run a startup cycle.
2. Check TTM assembly area for leaks.
3. Check the sheath lines, flow cell, and diff preservative and diff lytic reagent pumps and
tubing for trapped bubbles.
4. Ensure the interconnecting electrical cables within the TTM are properly dressed and
connected.
5. Ensure the LS amplifier output signal cable, the braided grounding strap and the green
grounding wire:
r Have smooth radius bends.
r Do not prevent the laser base mount assembly from floating freely.
6. Ensure the base shock mounts are intact and the TTM assembly “floats” freely.
B. Pump Volume Checks

1. Verify the diff preservative pump volumes are within specifications. See Heading 4.29.
2. Verify the diff lytic reagent pump volumes are within specifications. See Heading 4.28.
3. Optimize the diff preservative pump volume as instructed under Heading 4.66.
4. At the Workstation, access the Instrument Reference Report form as directed under
Heading 4.61 and record the pump volumes.
C. VCS Flow Rate Adjustment

1. If you replace the flow cell or a sheath, diff sample or retic sample pressure regulator, do
the INITIAL SHEATH AND SAMPLE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS procedure. See
Heading 4.72.
2. Verify and adjust the flow rate if necessary. Do the FLOW-RATE ADJUSTMENT
PROCEDURE procedure. See Heading 4.73.
3. If the count ratio is not acceptable, resolve the problem before continuing. Any of the
following can adversely affect the count ratio:
r Incorrect flow rate and/or flow noise from partial plugs or bubbles
r Incorrect gain settings
r Electronic noise from any of the VCS components
PN 4277219B 4.71-5
VCS OPTIMIZATION
r Reagent conductivity noise due to sheath/sample imbalance (pump volumes)

r Lysing noise from improper RBC lysing
r Mechanical failures
r High incidence of abnormal specimens
r Specimen mishandling
r Extreme temperatures.
Note: If the count ratio is still poor after you have performed this optimization
procedure, the most likely cause is sample handling/preparation problems.
D. RF Detector Preamp Card Adjustments

1. Adjust the RF Detector Preamp card so the RMS noise is at the lowest setting. See
C1/C20 Adjustment under Heading 4.74.
2. Adjust the DC and RF gain settings using the large latex particles. See RF and DC Gain
Adjustment under Heading 4.74. If you cannot achieve limits specified in the RF Preamp
Detector Card Adjustments procedure:
a. Troubleshoot and resolve any problems.
b. Continue with this optimization procedure.
c. Repeat this procedure after you have aligned the laser and flow cell.
E. DC and RF Verification
1. See Heading 4.75, VCS NOISE CHECKS, and do the DC Verification and RF Verification
procedures to ensure there are no periodic waveforms and that the DC and RF noise is
acceptable.
2. If any periodic waveforms are present, find and eliminate the cause of the RF noise (see
Table 4.75-1 for troubleshooting tips), then recheck the RF Detector Preamp card
Adjustments. See Heading 4.74.
F. Flow Cell Cleaning

Clean the flow cell. See Heading 4.79.
G. Laser and Flow-Cell Alignment

Align the laser and flow cell. See Heading 4.76.
H. LS Gain Adjustment
1. Ensure the Analytical Station and the laser have been on for at least 15 minutes.
2. Adjust the LS gain. See Heading 4.77.
I. LS Verification
1. See Heading 4.75, VCS NOISE CHECKS, and do the LS Verification procedure to ensure
no periodic waveforms are present and the noise is acceptable.
2. If any periodic waveforms are present, find and eliminate the cause.
4.71-6 PN 4277219B
VCS OPTIMIZATION 4
J. RMS Noise Check
1. See Heading 4.75, VCS NOISE CHECKS, and do the RMS Noise Check procedure to
verify the static and dynamic noise in both the Diff and Retic modes are within the limits
2. Record readings on the Instrument Reference Report form.
K. LATRON Verification
Verify gain adjustments using LATRON control. See Heading 4.78.
L. VCS Verification
1. Set up the oscilloscope to read the DC channel of the ANALOG card:
a. Set volts/div to 20-mV scale.
b. Set trigger source to channel 1.
c. Connect channel 1 to the DC (upper) connector on the ANALOG card.
2. At the Analyzer, select the CBC/DIFF/RETIC test mode.

4. Cycle five well mixed whole-blood specimens and ensure:
a. During count the DC channel baseline conductivity -
r Is not >200 mV.
r Does not change from run to run.
Note: Causes of failure may be in the mixing chamber, diff lytic reagent pump or the
diff preservative pump.
b. The counts for the specimens are above the cell counts and within the acceptable
expected count times specified in Table A.1-19.
c. The DataPlots show good separation of the populations and the populations are
positioned correctly.
PN 4277219B 4.71-7
VCS OPTIMIZATION
4.71-8 PN 4277219B
INITIAL SHEATH AND SAMPLE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS 4
4.72 INITIAL SHEATH AND SAMPLE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS
Purpose
The sheath pressure and diff and retic sample pressures determine the rate of flow of the cells
through the flow cell during analysis. Diff and retic sample pressures are adjusted higher than
the sheath pressure to maintain a single-cell stream flowing through the center of the flow cell
aperture. The displayed values for CELL pressure are actually the differences between the
actual diff or retic sample pressure and the sheath pressure.
Use this initial adjustment procedure after replacing the flow cell or a sheath, diff sample or
retic sample regulator. Use the FLOW-RATE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE, Heading 4.73, to
verify and fine-tune the pressures.
Procedure
1. At the Analyzer, display the DIFF CALIBRATION screen.
a. On the GEN•S System, select the CBC/DIFF test mode.
b. Access the SERVICE MENU (See Heading 4.2).
c. Select LATEX CALIBRATION (GEN•S System) or DIFF CALIBRATION (LH 750
System).
2. On the DIFF CALIBRATION screen, select D.
3. Aspirate LATRON primer from the DIFF CALIBRATION screen.
ATTENTION: Regulator adjustments are more stable when going from a lower to higher pressure
setting. If the pressure is higher than the target pressure, set the pressure below the target
pressure and increase the settings to reach the target value.
4. Monitor the sheath pressure at the DIFF CALIBRATION screen during count, and adjust
the sheath pressure regulator, RG4, until the pressure is within the adjustment range
5. Cycle LATRON primer again and verify that during count the sheath pressure does not
vary more than specified for sheath pressure in Table A.1-18.
Note: Any fluctuations in the flow cell pressures cause the sample stream to drift.
6. Cycle LATRON primer to monitor the diff CELL pressure during count and adjust the
diff sample pressure regulator, RG3, until the pressure is within limits specified in
Table A.1-13.
7. Cycle LATRON primer again and verify that during count the diff CELL pressure does
not vary more than specified for diff sample pressure in Table A.1-18.
8. On the DIFF CALIBRATION screen, select R.
9. Cycle LATRON primer to monitor the retic CELL pressure during count and adjust the
Retic sample pressure to regulator, RG6, to the limits specified in Table A.1-13.
10. Cycle LATRON primer again and verify that during count the retic CELL pressure does
not vary more than specified for retic sample pressure in Table A.1-18.
PN 4277219B 4.72-1
INITIAL SHEATH AND SAMPLE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS
11. Go to the FLOW-RATE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE procedure, Heading 4.73.
4.72-2 PN 4277219B
FLOW-RATE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 4
4.73 FLOW-RATE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
Purpose
Flow rate, which is the product of the total number of cells and the count time, is relatively
constant because samples with high cell concentrations count faster than samples with low
concentrations. (More cells, less time: less cells, more time.)
Use this procedure to adjust the flow rate to:

r Ensure sufficient data is accumulated for samples with low cell counts.
r Fine-tune the diff and retic sample pressures for optimum cell counts.
If you replaced a sheath, diff sample or retic sample pressure regulator, or a flow cell, do the
INITIAL SHEATH AND SAMPLE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS procedure, Heading 4.72, first.
B Fresh, normal whole-blood specimens
Procedure
a. Select tt .
b. From the Process Control box, select VCS Calibration.
System).
5. Aspirate LATRON primer from the DIFF CALIBRATION screen and verify the
background count is within the specifications listed in Table A.1-17.
6. Aspirate LATRON control from the DIFF CALIBRATION screen.
7. Note the CV for DC.
8. Adjust the sheath pressure regulator, RG4, to obtain the minimum CVs for DC. Verify
the sheath pressure is still within the limits specified in Table A.1-18.
9. At the Analyzer:
a. Select SYSTEM RUN.
b. Set the number of aspirations/tube to 3.
10. Select the CBC/DIFF/RETIC test mode.
r On the GEN•S System, select CBC/DIFF/RETIC at the Analyzer.
PN 4277219B 4.73-1
FLOW-RATE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
r On the LH 750 System, select CDR at the Workstation.

a. Select tt .
b. From the Process Control box, select Precision.
12. Cycle the blood and verify:
r The Diff analyzed counts are >7900.
r The Retic analyzed counts are >31,100.
13. If the analyzed counts are not within range:
a. Determine the cause and fix the problem. Any of the following can adversely affect
the count ratio:
r Incorrect flow rate and/or flow noise from partial plugs or bubbles
r Incorrect gain settings
r Electronic noise from any of the VCS components
r Reagent conductivity noise due to sheath/sample imbalance (pump volumes)
r Lysing noise from improper RBC lysing
r Mechanical failures
r High incidence of abnormal specimens
r Specimen mishandling.
Note: If the count ratio is still poor after you have finished the VCS Optimization
procedure, the most likely cause is sample handling/preparation problems.
b. Repeat the test.
14. Calculate the average expected count-time using the mean WBC and RBC values from
the table and ensure the results are within the specified verification range in
Table A.1-19.
15. Calculate the difference between the actual and expected count times for each sample.
r If the difference is within 0.5 seconds of the diff expected time and 1.0 seconds of
the retic expected time, no further adjustments are needed.
r If the difference exceeds the tolerance, adjust the diff (RG3) or retic (RG6) sample
pressure regulators until the pressure is within 0.2 seconds of the diff expected time
or 0.7 seconds of the retic expected time.
16. If any adjustments are made, delete the data from the table and repeat from step 11 to
verify adjustments, and compare the results to the calibration range in Table A.1-19.
Verification
1. Verify the sheath and sample pressures are within limits specified in Table A.1-18.
2. If you did this procedure as part of the VCS Optimization procedure, no additional
verification is needed. Go back to the VCS OPTIMIZATION procedure, Heading 4.71.
3. Do the DIFF AND RETIC VERIFICATION, Heading 5.6.
4.73-2 PN 4277219B
RF DETECTOR PREAMP CARD ADJUSTMENTS 4
4.74 RF DETECTOR PREAMP CARD ADJUSTMENTS
Purpose
Use the following procedures after replacing either an RF Detector Preamp Detector card with
a vacuum tube or a solid state RF Detector card. With the exception of the reference
designators for the potentiometers and test points on the cards, the procedures are the same.
Also use the C1/C20 Adjustment and the RF and DC Gain Adjustment procedures as part of
the VCS Optimization procedure.
r Use the RF Detector Preamp Card Cable Adjustment procedure to minimize noise on the
RF channel.
r Use the Clog Detector Circuit Verification on the RF Detector Preamp Card with a
Vacuum Tube procedure to verify the Clog Detector circuit on the RF Detector Preamp
card with a vacuum tube is adjusted correctly.
Note: The Clog Detector circuit on the solid state RF Detector Preamp card is not
adjustable.
r Use the C1/C20 Adjustment procedure to obtain the lowest RMS noise value in the entire
360-degree range of C1 (RF Detector Preamp card with a vacuum tube) or C20 (solid
state RF Detector Preamp card).
r Use the RF and DC Gain Adjustment procedure to make initial adjustments to the DC
and RF gains.
B DMM
B Diluent
B Plastic potentiometer adjustment tool with metallic shaft, 0.32 tip, PN 5402071 (for the
clog detector and gain adjustment procedure)
B Plastic potentiometer adjustment tool with nonmetallic shaft, PN 5415364 (for the
C1/C20 Adjustment procedure)
B RMS meter (for the C1/C20 Adjustment procedure)
B Probe with BNC connector
B Latex particles DC/RF, large, PN 6605419 (for the RF and DC Gain Adjustment
procedure)
Note: A large latex particle is used to adjust the RF and DC gain settings. LATRON
control is used to verify the gain adjustments.
PN 4277219B 4.74-1
RF DETECTOR PREAMP CARD ADJUSTMENTS
RF Detector Preamp Card Cable Adjustment

on the inside, and attaching ferrites. In addition, on RF Detector Preamp card with a vacuum
tube the height of the cable loop must be adjusted to 1.9 cm (0.75 in.) above the RF box.
1. Ensure the cable for the RF Detector Preamp card is routed to the Analyzer and dressed
2. On RF Detector Preamp cards with a vacuum tube, ensure the height of the cable loop is
1.9 cm (0.75 in.) above the RF box as shown in Figure 4.74-1.
Figure 4.74-1 Connecting the Cable from the RF Detector Preamp Card to the Digital Backplane
T ie w r a p
1 .9 c m
( 0 .7 5 in .)
h ig h .
F e r r ite s
C a b le m u s t b e c o ile d w ith
th r e e tu r n s a n d p la c e d
h o r iz o n ta lly a s s h o w n .
F ro m R S /O p to In tfc c a rd , J 6
A d ju s t c a b le lo o p
o n R F D e te c to r F ro m R S /O p to In tfc c a rd , J 2
P re a m p c a rd w ith
v a c u u m tu b e
F ro m R F D e te c to r
P re a m p c a rd , J 7 3
R F D e te c to r
P re a m p c a rd
7 2 1 9 0 1 6 B
4.74-2 PN 4277219B
Clog Detector Circuit Verification on the RF Detector Preamp Card with a Vacuum Tube
1. Connect the DMM across TP2 and TP4 (ground) on the RF Detector Preamp card. See
Figure 4.74-2
2. At the Analyzer, select the CBC/DIFF/RETIC test mode.
3. Cycle diluent in the Manual mode.
4. While cycling, obtain a reading at TP2 on the RF Detector Preamp card and verify it is
within the verification range specified in Table A.1-28.
ATTENTION: The Clog Detector circuit is factory adjusted and should not require adjustment.
5. If the reading at TP2 is not within the verification range, adjust the circuit.
a. Cycle diluent in the Manual mode.
b. While cycling, adjust R44 on the RF Detector Preamp card to obtain a reading at
TP2 within the adjustment limits specified in Table A.1-28.
6. Cycle diluent again to ensure AUTOCLEAR does not occur.
7. Disconnect the flow-cell cable, J67, from the RF Detector Preamp card.
See Figure 4.74-2.
8. Cycle diluent and ensure AUTOCLEAR occurs.
9. Reconnect J67.
10. Go to the C1/C20 Adjustment.
Figure 4.74-2 RF Detector Preamp Card Test Points and Adjustments

TP4
TP3
J73
J67 R26
TP1
TP2
RF
Detector
Preamp
card with
C1 vacuum tube
TP1
TP2
R44 R17 Ground
P6
P1
TP1
TP2
P5
Solid state
RF Dectector
R43 Preamp card
R54
6498068B
C20
PN 4277219B 4.74-3
C1/C20 Adjustment
ATTENTION: Before observing the readings, allow the readings to stabilize.
1. Connect the RMS meter to the RF channel on the ANALOG card.

System).
ATTENTION: While making adjustments, aspirate more samples of diluent as needed. If the
sample runs out, check the flow cell for bubbles and purge the flow cell, if necessary.
6. Aspirate diluent from the DIFF CALIBRATION screen.
ATTENTION: Between count periods the RMS noise increases. Ensure readings are taken during
the count periods.
7. While the system is in count, observe the RMS voltage.
ATTENTION: To eliminate the interference caused by a metal shaft, use a nonmetallic
potentiometer adjustment tool to adjust C1 or C20 on an RF Detector Preamp card.
8. Using a nonmetallic potentiometer adjustment tool, make slight adjustments to C1 (RF
Detector Preamp card with a vacuum tube) or C20 (solid state RF Detector Preamp
card), moving through the entire 360 degree range. Refer to Figure 4.74-2. After each
adjustment allow the voltage to settle. This takes time and patience. Note the lowest
reading.
9. Adjust C1 or C20 to the lowest RMS value obtained in the step 8.
10. To optimize the routing of the RF Detector Preamp card cable, move the loops in the
cable [one is by the digital backplane, the other by an RF Detector Preamp card with a
vacuum tube (Figure 4.74-1)], until you obtain the lowest possible RMS voltage reading.
11. Go to the RF and DC Gain Adjustment procedure.
4.74-4 PN 4277219B
RF and DC Gain Adjustment
ATTENTION: Large latex particles will saturate the light scatter channel. Do not adjust the LS
gain using the new (large) latex particles DC/RF. Adjust LS gain using LATRON control only.
a. Select tt .
b. From the Process Control box in the Command Center, select VCS Calibration.
2. Prepare a dilution of the large latex particles DC/RF according to the assay sheet.
3. Use F55 to cycle the LATRON primer and ensure the cell count is within the limits given
in Table A.1-17.
4. Use F55 to cycle the diluted latex particles DC/RF. Ensure the cell count is within the
limits specified for latex particles DC/RF in Table A.1-22.
5. Adjust the gains on the RF Detector Preamp card (Figure 4.74-2) until the DC and RF
mean channels match the values specified on the assay sheet for the latex particles
DC/RF.
r Use R17 (RF Detector Preamp card with a vacuum tube) or R54 (solid state RF
Detector Preamp card) for DC gain adjustment.
r Use R26 (RF Detector Preamp card with a vacuum tube) or R43 (solid state RF
Detector Preamp card) for RF gain adjustment.
6. Use F55 to cycle the latex particles DC/RF dilution five times.
7. Ensure the mean channel values recovered are within the adjustment limits of the assay
value specified in Table A.1-22.
8. Use F55 to cycle LATRON primer to remove any traces of the latex particles DC/RF.
OPTIMIZATION procedure, Heading 4.71. If not, go to Verification.
Verification
Do the LATRON VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, Heading 4.78.
PN 4277219B 4.74-5
4.74-6 PN 4277219B
VCS NOISE CHECKS 4
4.75 VCS NOISE CHECKS
Purpose
Use the following procedures to ensure there is minimal noise on the DC, RF and LS
channels, and that the static and dynamic noise in the Diff and Retic modes is within
acceptable limits.
r The DC, RF and LS Verification procedures ensure no periodic waveforms are present.
r The RMS noise checks ensure the static and dynamic noise is within limits.
B Diluent for cycling
B Oscilloscope
B DMM
DC Verification
1. Set up the Oscilloscope:
Volts/div = 20-mV scale.
Trigger source = Channel I.
2. Connect Channel 1 of the oscilloscope to the DC connector (upper) on the ANALOG
card.
3. While the system is idle, step through the time base settings from 5 ms/division through
1.0 µs/division.
a. At each setting, vary the trigger level and look for periodic waveforms. See Figures
4.75-1 and 4.75-2 for examples of acceptable and unacceptable static DC noise.
b. If any periodic wave forms are seen, find and eliminate the cause.
c. Repeat if necessary.
Figure 4.75-1 Acceptable Static DC Noise Figure 4.75-2 Unacceptable Static DC Noise
Display Display
4. Set the oscilloscope’s trigger source to LINE and repeat step 3.

5. Set the trigger source back to Channel I.
PN 4277219B 4.75-1
VCS NOISE CHECKS

System).
9. While the system is counting, step through the time base settings from 5 ms/division
through 1.0 µs/division.
a. At each setting, vary the trigger level and look for periodic waveforms. See
Figure 4.75-3 for an example of acceptable dynamic DC noise.
b. If any periodic wave forms are seen, find and eliminate the cause.
c. Repeat if necessary.
Figure 4.75-3 Acceptable Dynamic DC Noise
10. Set the trigger source to LINE and repeat step 8.

11. Go to the RF Verification.
RF Verification
1. Set up the Oscilloscope:
a. Set Volts/div to the 50-mV scale.
b. Set trigger source to Channel 1.
c. Connect Channel 1 to the RF connector (middle) on the ANALOG 4 card.
1.0 µs/division.
r At each setting, vary the trigger level and look for periodic waveforms. See
Figures 4.75-4 and 4.75-5 for examples of acceptable and unacceptable static RF
noise.
r If you see any periodic waveforms, find and eliminate the cause.
r Repeat if necessary.
4.75-2 PN 4277219B
VCS NOISE CHECKS 4
Figure 4.75-4 Acceptable Static RF Noise Figure 4.75-5 Unacceptable Static RF Noise
Display Display
3. Set the trigger source to LINE and repeat step 3.

4. Set the trigger source back to Channel 1.
6. While the system is cycling, step through the time base settings from 5 ms/division
Figure 4.75-6 for an example of acceptable dynamic RF noise.
b. Repeat if necessary.
c. If you see any periodic waveforms, ensure C1 was properly adjusted. Otherwise,
find and eliminate the cause. See Table 4.75-1 and Figures 4.75-7 through 4.75-18
for help.
Figure 4.75-6 Acceptable Dynamic RF Noise Display
7. If you did this procedure as part of the VCS Optimization procedure before flow-cell
cleaning and alignment, go back to the VCS OPTIMIZATION procedure; see
Heading 4.71. Otherwise go to the LS Verification procedure.
PN 4277219B 4.75-3
VCS NOISE CHECKS
Table 4.75-1 RF Troubleshooting Table
Sample Type Problem Cause Action Examples

Diluent 60 Hz Loose grounds Check grounding. See Figures 4.75-7
and 4.75-8
LATRON Control Random baseline Fluidics leaks or Fix leaks or perform purge. See Figures 4.75-9
bounce bubbles and 4.75-10
Diluent RMS noise (mV) RF Preamp noise 1. Check C1 adjustment. See See Figures 4.75-11
38 <RF <100 C1/C20 Adjustment under and 4.75-12
Heading 4.74.
2. Verify routing of RF Detector
Preamp card cable to digital
backplane is optimal. See RF
Detector Preamp Card Cable
Adjustment under Heading 4.74.
3. Replace:
a. Vacuum tube
b. RF Detector Preamp card.
Diluent RMS noise (mV) RF Preamp noise Replace: See Figures 4.75-13
RF <100 random 1. Vacuum tube through 4.7-16.
or continuous
2. RF Detector Preamp card.
Diluent RMS noise (mV) Shunts or leaky 1. Clean any liquid or salt residue off See Figures 4.75-17
RF <100 random flow cell of the flow cell. and 4.75-18
2. Perform Purge F44, F45.
3. Replace flow cell.
4.75-4 PN 4277219B
VCS NOISE CHECKS 4
Figure 4.75-7 RF 60 Hz
Figure 4.75-7 is an example of a normal LATRON control run. The
RMS noise was 22.0 mV. Notice the RF base.
Figure 4.75-8 RF 60 Hz with Noise Spikes

Figure 4.75-8, notice with the 60 cycles the large spikes and how
the baseline is distorted. The RMS noise increased to 63 mV.
Figure 4.75-9 Normal RF Random Baseline

Figure 4.75-9 is an example of a normal LATRON control run. The
RMS noise was 22.0 mV. Notice the baseline after the RF pulse.
PN 4277219B 4.75-5
VCS NOISE CHECKS
Figure 4.75-10 RF Output with Bubble Trapped in

Sheath 2 Figure 4.75-10 shows the RF output while running LATRON
control with a bubble trapped in sheath 2. The RMS noise
increased to 24.5 mV. Notice the bounce in the baseline after the
RF pulse.
Note: The single pulse with the doubled amplitude is caused by
two LATRON control particles passing through the flow cell at the
same time.
Figure 4.75-11 Normal RF Baseline while Cycling

Diluent Figure 4.75-11 is a normal RF baseline while cycling diluent. The
RMS noise was 22.0 mV.
Figure 4.75-12 Noisy RF Baseline while Cycling

Diluent Figure 4.75-12 shows a noisy RF baseline while cycling diluent;
the RMS noise is now 45 mV. Notice the amplitude increased in
the baseline. In this case the RMS noise is steady.
4.75-6 PN 4277219B
VCS NOISE CHECKS 4
Figure 4.75-13 Normal RF Baseline while Cycling
Diluent (RF Noise 22 mV) Figure 4.75-13 is a normal RF baseline while cycling diluent. The
RMS noise was 22.0 mV.
Figure 4.75-14 Noisy RF Baseline while Cycling

Diluent (RF Noise >100 mV) Figure 4.75-14 shows a noisy RF baseline while cycling diluent;
the RMS noise is now >100 mV and erratic. Notice the amplitude
increased in the baseline. In this case the RMS noise is unsteady
as is the baseline.
Figure 4.75-15 LATRON Control Sample with a

Good RF Tube and Box Figure 4.75-15 is a LATRON control sample from a system with a
good RF tube and box. Notice the mean to mode channel
difference, the low CV and the narrow histogram.
PN 4277219B 4.75-7
VCS NOISE CHECKS
Figure 4.75-16 LATRON Control Sample with Bad

RF Tube and Box In the LATRON control sample shown in Figure 4.75-16 the RF
tube was bad, but the box can cause the same problem.
The mean-to-mode difference has increased, as well as the CV.
Also the histogram now has a foot to the right. In addition, the OP
histogram is wider and not as smooth.
Figure 4.75-17 RF Output Running LATRON Control

(LEAK at Flow Cell Fitting) Figure 4.75-17 shows the RF output while running LATRON
control with a leak at the flow cell fitting. The RMS noise
increased to 23.5 mV. Notice the bounce in the baseline after the
RF pulse.
Figure 4.75-18 LATRON Control Run with DC Gain

Drop In the LATRON control run shown in Figure 4.75-18, observe the
DC gain drop. The CV for both DC and RF increased. And, on all
channels there is noise to the right of the LATRON control
populations. The OP histogram too is wider, shifted to the right
and not as smooth.
4.75-8 PN 4277219B
VCS NOISE CHECKS 4
LS Verification
1. Ensure the laser cover is on.
2. Set up the oscilloscope to read LS offset voltage.
a. Set the DMM to measure volts.
b. Connect the DMM to TP1 and TP3 on the Light Scatter Preamp module.
System).
6. While the system is counting, measure the LS offset voltage with a DMM and ensure the
voltages do not exceed limits specified in Table A.1-21. Record the Diff LS Offset on the
Instrument Reference Report form.
7. On the DIFF CALIBATION screen, select QUIT and wait for the completion of the
cleanup cycle.
10. While the system is counting, measure the LS offset voltage with a DMM and ensure the
voltages do not exceed limits specified in Table A.1-21.
11. On the DIFF CALIBATION screen, select QUIT.
12. At the Workstation, access the Instrument Reference Report Form as instructed under
Heading 4.61 and record the Retic LS offset voltage.
13. Disconnect the DMM.
14. Set up the oscilloscope:
a. Set Volts/div to 20-mV scale.
b. Set Trigger source to Channel 1.
a. Connect Channel 1 of the oscilloscope to the LS channel (lower) on the ANALOG
card.
1.0 µs/division.
a. At each setting, vary the trigger level and look for periodic waveforms. See Figures
4.75-19 and 4.75-20 for examples of acceptable and unacceptable static LS noise.
b. Repeat if necessary.
c. If you see any periodic waveforms, find and eliminate the cause.
16. Set the trigger source to LINE. Repeat step 15.
17. Set the trigger source back to Ch 1.
PN 4277219B 4.75-9
VCS NOISE CHECKS
Figure 4.75-19 Acceptable Static LS Noise Display Figure 4.75-20 Unacceptable Static LS Noise
Display

20. While the system is counting, step through the time base settings from 5 ms/division
Figure 4.75-21 for an example of acceptable dynamic LS noise.
Figure 4.75-21 Acceptable Dynamic LS Noise Display
b. If you see any periodic waveforms, find and eliminate the cause.
Note: When the time base is set at 20 ms/division a 25 kHz waveform may be
observed on some instruments. This can be caused by the Laser Power Supply.
21. Set the oscilloscope's trigger source to LINE. Repeat steps 19 and 15.
22. Go to the RMS Noise Check.
RMS Noise Check

System).
4.75-10 PN 4277219B
VCS NOISE CHECKS 4
3. While the instrument is idle, use the DMM to measure the Diff static RMS noise for DC,
RF, and LS channels on the ANALOG card. Record the voltages on the Instrument
Reference Report form.
4. Ensure the noise for each of the channels does not exceed the limits given for the static
conditions listed in Table A.1-20.
ATTENTION: Dirt, debris or bubbles will increase the noise readings. Ensure that the diluent is
clean and the system is free of bubbles.
6. While the instrument is counting, measure the diff dynamic RMS noise for DC, RF, and
LS channels on the ANALOG card.
7. At the Workstation, access the Instrument Reference Report form and record the
voltages.
8. Ensure the noise for each of the channels does not exceed the limits given for the
dynamic conditions listed in Table A.1-20.
9. On the DIFF CALIBATION screen, select QUIT and wait for the completion of the
cleanup cycle.
11. While the instrument is idle, use an RMS meter to measure the Retic RMS noise for DC,
RF, and LS channels on the ANALOG card. Record the voltages on the Instrument
Reference Report form.
13. While the instrument is counting, measure the Retic dynamic RMS noise for DC, RF, and
LS channels on the ANALOG card. Record the voltages on the Instrument Reference
Report form.
14. Ensure the noise for each of the channels does not exceed the limits given for the static
conditions listed in Table A.1-20.
Note: If only the LS fails, check the following for a source of the noise:
r An improperly targeted laser.
r Debris on the lens block.
r A warped light shield.
r Dirt on the flow cell.
15. Save the Instrument Reference Report form.
Verification
Do the LATRON VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, Heading 4.78.
PN 4277219B 4.75-11
VCS NOISE CHECKS
4.75-12 PN 4277219B
LASER AND FLOW-CELL ALIGNMENT 4
4.76 LASER AND FLOW-CELL ALIGNMENT
Purpose
The laser and flow-cell alignment procedure is divided into several individual procedures.
You may have to repeat these procedures after performing other steps, until all measurements
fall within specifications. See Figure 4.76-1 for an overview. The goal is to achieve:
r Correct alignment of mechanical characteristics of TTM assembly.

r Minimum LS offset voltage.
r Minimum LATRON control CVs.
r Minimum LATRON control mean to mode difference.
r Correct DataPlot distribution and population positioning for 5-part diff and retics.
B 20 MHz dual-trace oscilloscope
B DMM
B Z-Axis Gauge, PN 5401245
B Light Shield, PN 5401269
B White paper
B 5C Normal cell control
B Normal whole-blood specimen mixed for at least 30 minutes before using. See Chapter 4
of the Reference manual for anticoagulant and storage specifications.
The following torque tools are recommended if available:
B T-handle torque wrench, 20 in./lb, Utica PN BT-1B

B Torque-limiting screwdriver, 15 in./lb, Utica PN TS-30
ATTENTION: Torquing the lock-down screws without shifting the adjustment is very technique
dependent. The flow-cell alignment procedures require loosening and then torquing all
alignment lock-down screws, the lens-block screws, and the laser-mount screws.
To torque the screws correctly:
1. Grip the wrench by the knurled portion of the handle. Failure to do so will cause
improper torque.
2. Tighten each screw sequentially, 1/32 to 1/16 turn each time, until torqued.
PN 4277219B 4.76-1
LASER AND FLOW-CELL ALIGNMENT
Figure 4.76-1 Laser and Flow Cell Alignment Workflow

Laser and
Flow-Cell
Alignment
procedure
Align
Z-axis
(focus)
Align
X-axis and Y-axis
plate
Align
Y-axis (tilt) plate
Adjust LS
Gain
Check for
LS noise
Laser and
Flow-cell
are
aligned 7253379A
Flow-Cell Z-Axis (Focus) Alignment

1. Set up the oscilloscope:
a. Select these settings:
Input Ch. 1 and Ch. 2
Impedance 1 M DC
Vertical 500 mV/Div
Horizontal 5 microseconds/division
Synch Normal - Ch. 1
b. Connect Channel 1 to the DC output (upper) on the ANALOG card.

c. Connect Channel 2 to the LS output (lower) on the ANALOG card.
2. Loosen each set of lock-down screws by an equal amount and just enough to allow
adjustments to the X-, Y- and Z-axes. See Figure 4.76-2 for location for locking screws D
and E for Z-axis, F and G for X-axis, and H and I for Y-axis.
4.76-2 PN 4277219B
Figure 4.76-2 Flow-Cell Z-Axis Alignment
Y-adjust
(vertical adjustment) LS
A sensor
screws
J Y-adjust
Lens
block
I Y-lock down
Z- axis
H Y-lock down gauge
X-axis plate
G X-lock down
Horizontal B Z-adjust
bolt plate
F X-lock down
C X-adjust
E Z-lock down
6498046A
D Z-lock down
3. Place the 1.360 focus side of the Z-Axis Gauge between the center of the tilt plate
(between the sensor screws), and the center of the lens block as shown in Figure 4.76-2.
Turn the Z-axis adjust screw (Figure 4.76-2, B) until the Gauge just fits. This adjusts the
Z-axis to its preliminary setting,
4. Set the DMM to read volts mV to measure the LS offset voltage.
5. Connect the DMM leads to TP1 and TP3 (ground) on the Light Scatter Preamp module.
6. Perform a visual alignment of the flow cell
a. Remove the flow cell cover and manually activate the laser interlock switch.
b. Slide the light shield in place.
c. Adjust the X- and Y-adjust screws until the laser light is visible on the light scatter
sensor.
d. Adjust the Y-adjust screw until the beam is vertically centered on the flow cell.
e. Adjust the X-adjust screw until the beam is split evenly in a line across the light
sensor mask.
System).
PN 4277219B 4.76-3

10. From the DIFF CALIBRATION screen, aspirate LATRON control as needed to adjust the
X-adjust and Y-adjust screws to obtain a LS pulse on the oscilloscope. See Figure 4.76-2,
C and J.
11. Adjust R8 on the Light Scatter Preamp module to obtain an LS pulse with an amplitude
of 3.5 V.
12. Remove the flow cell cover. Shine a light on the LS sensor and ensure the scattered laser
beam is centered vertically on the sensor mask and that it is free of dust or other foreign
material. See Figure 4.76-3. If it is not centered, loosen the LS sensor screws
(Figure 4.76-2, A) and center the LS sensor.
Figure 4.76-3 Scatter Sensor Laser Diffraction

LASER LS SENSOR
BEAM SENSOR MASK
LASER DIFFRACTION
IN CENTER OF WHITE
MARK
6498047A
13. Reinstall the flow-cell cover.

14. Use the X-adjust screw to fine-tune the X-axis setting for maximum LS amplitude with
minimum variations.
15. Use the Y-adjust screw to achieve minimum LS offset voltage and record the LS offset
voltage reading.
16. Turn the Z-adjust screw clockwise 1/4 to 1/2 turn and repeat from step 14 until the
lowest offset voltage is achieved. See Table A.1-21.
r If the offset voltage decreases, continue repeating from step 14 until the offset
voltage starts to increase.
r If the offset voltage increases, turn the Z-adjust screw counterclockwise to set the
X-Y assembly past the preliminary setting, then repeat from step 15 to find the
lowest offset voltage.
ATTENTION: For correct torquing technique, refer to the Attention at the beginning of this
procedure.
17. Tighten each Z-lock down screw (Figure 4.76-2 D and E) sequentially, a little at a time,
until torqued.
4.76-4 PN 4277219B
Flow-Cell X- and Y-Axis Plate Alignment
1. Aspirate LATRON control from the DIFF CALIBRATION screen. During counting, use
the X- and Y-adjust screws (Figure 4.76-4, C and J) as follows:
r Adjust the X-adjust screw to fine-tune the X-axis for maximum LS amplitude with
minimum variations.
r Adjust the Y-adjust screw to achieve minimum LS offset voltage. See Table A.1-21.
Figure 4.76-4 Flow-Cell X- and Y-Axis Plate Adjustment
Tilt plate
Y- lock down
J X- lock down
Y- adjust
(vertical
adjustment)
Y- axis plate
(tilt plate)
X- axis plate
Y- adjust Flow cell
I Y- lock down
H Y- lock down
G X- lock down
Horizontal C X- adjust
bolt plate
F X- lock down
6498048A
ATTENTION: For correct torquing techniques, refer to the Attention at the beginning of this
procedure.
2. Torque the Y-lock down screws (Figure 4.76-4, H, I).
PN 4277219B 4.76-5
3. If the LS offset voltage is still too high:

a. Remove the flow cell cover, lens block and the light shield from the flow cell and
insert the special light shield.
b. Pull the light shield out until the laser's main beam just touches the far side of the
hole and the reflected beam is at its brightest. Ensure the laser's reflected beam is
centered on the vertical white line directly below the main beam. See Figure 4.76-5.
r If the reflected beam is not centered, loosen and then retorque the Z-lock down
screws (Figure 4.76-2, D and E).
r If the reflected beam cannot be aligned, determine which parts are defective,
replace the parts and perform the laser alignment procedure from the
beginning.
Figure 4.76-5 Laser Reflected Light Beam with Special Shield Installed
LENS
BLOCK
ASSEMBLY
SPECIAL
LIGHT
SHIELD
LASER
GOOD BAD 6498049A
c. Without shifting the reflected beam off the vertical white line, tighten each X-lock
down screw (refer to Figure 4.76-4, F, G) sequentially, a little at a time, until they are
torqued.
d. Remove the special light shield from the flow cell and reinstall the regular light
shield and the lens block.
e. Reinstall the flow-cell cover.
4.76-6 PN 4277219B
f. If you were unable to bring the LS offset voltage within specifications:
1) Clean the flow cell. See Heading 4.80.
2) Replace the lens block if a replacement is available.
3) As a last measure, clean the lens block. See Heading 4.81.
Flow-Cell Y-Axis Final Alignment

ATTENTION: This is the final step in the physical alignment of the laser to the flow cell.
Alignment of Y-axis (tilt) plate affects the LS offset voltage, LATRON LS CVs, LS Mean to
Mode, and NERLSMN. You may need to readjust the X- or Z-axis plates to find the best
alignment of the Y-axis plate.
1. Loosen the Y- (vertical) lock down screws (Figure 4.76-4, H, I) just enough to allow the
Y-axis (tilt) plate to be adjusted.
2. Adjust the Y- (vertical) adjust screw (Figure 4.76-4, J) for minimum LS offset voltage.
3. Without shifting the laser alignment, tighten each Y-lock down screw (Figure 4.76-4,
H, I) sequentially, a little at a time, until the screws are torqued.
4. Verify the LS offset voltage is still within the range specified in Table A.1-21.
5. Aspirate LATRON control and verify:
a. LATRON control LS CVs are within range. If not -
1) Realign the Y-axis.
2) Clean the flow cell. See Heading 4.79.
3) Replace the lens block if a replacement is available.
4) As a last measure, clean the lens block. See Heading 4.80.
b. LATRON control mean-to-mode differences are within range. If not -
1) Check for noise, leaks, bubbles or contamination.
2) If problem persists, replace the flow cell.
6. Remove the flow-cell cover, shine a light on the LS sensor and ensure the scattered laser
beam is centered vertically on the LS sensor mask. Refer to Figure 4.76-3.
7. Slide a white piece of paper between the flow cell aperture and the LS sensor. Ensure the
diffracted laser beam is a fine line without any vertical lines and cones are minimized.
See Figure 4.76-6.
Figure 4.76-6 Laser Diffraction Pattern on Paper
8. Remove the paper carefully and ensure no lint is left behind.

9. Reinstall the flow-cell cover and secure it with its mounting screws.
PN 4277219B 4.76-7
10. If the laser alignment shifts after tightening the flow-cell cover, check the following for
proper fitting:
r Screws holding the laser to the base plate
r Coaxial cable
r Flow-cell tubing bracket
r Flow-cell cover.
11. Adjust the LS gain. See Heading 4.77.
4.76-8 PN 4277219B
LS GAIN ADJUSTMENT 4
4.77 LS GAIN ADJUSTMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to adjust the LS gain for optimum positioning of the WBC diff and retic
populations on the DataPlots.
Procedure
ATTENTION: Do not remove the flow-cell cover unless realignment is necessary.
1. Ensure the system and the laser have been on for at least 15 minutes.

System).
5. Cycle the LATRON primer and the LATRON control five times.
6. Ensure the mean channel, mean-to-mode difference and %CV values are within the
7. Adjust the LS gain as needed and rerun the LATRON control to verify adjustment. Use
R8 (lower) on the Light Scatter Preamp module to adjust the diff LS gain.
8. On the DIFF CALIBRATION screen, select QUIT and wait for the completion of the
cleanup cycle.
9. Select R on the DIFF CALIBRATION screen.
10. Cycle the LATRON primer and the LATRON Control five times.
11. Ensure the LS mean channel, mean-to-mode difference and %CV values are within the
12. Adjust the LS gain as needed and rerun the LATRON control to verify adjustment. Use
R16 (upper) on the Light Scatter Preamp module to adjust the retic LS gain.
13. If you did this procedure as part of another procedure, such as VCS optimization, no
further verification is needed. Go back to that procedure. Otherwise, go to Verification.
Verification
1. Do the LATRON VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, Heading 4.78.
2. Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION, Heading 5.5, for the diff and retic parameters.
PN 4277219B 4.77-1
LS GAIN ADJUSTMENT
4.77-2 PN 4277219B
LATRON VERIFICATION PROCEDURE 4
4.78 LATRON VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
Purpose
Use this procedure to verify the DC, RF and LS gains after completing VCS Optimization,
replacing the RF Detector Preamp card, and after doing other procedures as necessary.
Procedure

2. Select F57, Diff and Retic LATRON function, to cycle LATRON primer. Ensure the
background count is within the limits specified in Table A.1-17.
3. Cycle LATRON control five times.
4. After the cycles are completed, review the data on the VCS Calibration window for any
results outside of the limits. When assay values are entered on the VCS Setup screen, the
instrument automatically verifies the following DC, RF and LS data and displays any data
that is outside the limits in red:
a. The mean channels are within the verification range.
b. The mean-to-mode differences are within acceptable limits.
c. The CVs are within the verification limits.
Note: The limits are listed on the VCS Calibration Setup screen and in Table A.1-22. To
access the VCS Calibration Setup screen, select tt .

5. If the results are within limits and you did this procedure as part of another procedure,
such as VCS Optimization, go back to that procedure. Otherwise, go to Verification.
6. If the values are not within the limits
a. Determine the cause and fix the problem. Check for the following:
r Noise in the system. See Heading 4.75.
r Incorrect adjustments. See Heading 4.74 for RF Detector Preamp card
adjustments, Heading 4.77 for LS gain adjustments.
r Incorrect TTM grounding.
r Defective components.
r Incorrect flow-cell alignment.
PN 4277219B 4.78-1
LATRON VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
Verification
Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION procedure, Heading 5.5, for the diff and retic
parameters.
4.78-2 PN 4277219B
FLOW CELL CLEANING 4
4.79 FLOW CELL CLEANING
Purpose
Perform this procedure:
r Before aligning the TTM, to ensure flow cell aperture is clean and free of debris.
r When LS offset voltage is failing specifications in Diff or Retic mode.
r When LS CV% is failing specifications in Diff or Retic mode.
Note: A dirty flow cell can also contribute to problems with NERLS mean, NERLSSD, and
LATRON control mean and mean to mode.
B Isopropyl alcohol (ChromAR), analytical grade 99.5% purity or better, PN 1606138
ATTENTION: Use lint-free paper or gauze to avoid contaminating the alcohol with dust.
B Lint-free paper or gauze

B Applicator stick, PN 2527713
B Tape, Scotch type or masking
B Lens paper, high/good grade
Procedure
indirectly from reflective surfaces (such as a mirror or shiny metallic surface). To avoid accidental exposure
to the laser beam while cleaning the flow cell, always turn off the instrument before doing this procedure.
1. Press POWER OFF on the Diluter.

2. Using the tamperproof screwdriver, carefully remove the screws that hold the TTM flow
cell cover.
3. Check for leakage around the flow cell aperture area. If a leak exists replace the flow cell.
4. Remove the flow cell shield and the LS sensor and place them in a clean area.
5. Secure a piece of transparent tape on the front of the lens block assembly to avoid
splashing into the lens.
WARNING Personal injury from broken glass. Breaking off the tip of the ampule of alcohol without
protecting your fingers could lead to cuts from broken glass. Cover the ampule with lint-free paper or gauze
to protect your fingers when opening the ampule.
6. Cover the ampule of alcohol with lint-free paper or gauze to protect your fingers and
break off the tip.
PN 4277219B 4.79-1
FLOW CELL CLEANING
Figure 4.79-1 Wetting Applicator with Alcohol

CAUTION Alcohol can soften the paint used on the
flow cell, permanently damaging the flow cell. To avoid
S# u
CA Man
67
damaging the flow cell, ensure the applicator stick
160
O
P/N
PR
does not contact the painted surfaces of the flow cell
ISO
and do not reuse the applicator stick.
7. Carefully moisten the applicator tip with

isopropyl alcohol without over saturating it
(Figure 4.79-1).
5961123D
Figure 4.79-2 Wiping Front of Flow Cell 8. Place the applicator tip flat on the front of
the flow-cell aperture and pull it out
toward the outside of the instrument, using
a one-way motion only. See Figure 4.79-2.
5961122C
Figure 4.79-3 Wiping Rear of Flow Cell 9. Obtain a new applicator stick and repeat
step 7.
10. Place the applicator flat on the rear of the
flow-cell aperture and pull it out toward
the outside of the instrument, using a
one-way motion only. See Figure 4.79-3.
11. Repeat steps 7 through 10 if necessary.
5961124C
12. Polish the front and back of the flow cell with a dry lens paper.
13. Remove the tape from the lens block. Reinstall the LS sensor and flow cell shield. Ensure
the LS sensor is properly aligned with the laser beam.
14. Press POWER ON on the Diluter.
4.79-2 PN 4277219B
FLOW CELL CLEANING 4
15. Check for correct alignment of the scattered beam on the sensor’s mask.
16. If you are performing this procedure as part of another procedure, such as VCS
Optimization, go back to that procedure. If not, go to step 17.
17. Set up the DMM to read the LS offset voltage.
r Set the DMM to measure voltage.
r Connect the DMM to TP1 and TP3 on the Light Scatter Preamp module.
System).
20. Aspirate diluent from the DIFF CALIBRATION screen and measure and record the LS
offset voltage.
a. While the system is counting, measure the LS offset voltage with a DMM and ensure
the voltages do not exceed the limits specified in Table A.1-21.
b. At the Workstation, access the Instrument Reference Report form as directed under
Heading 4.61 and record the Diff LS Offset.
21. On the DIFF CALIBRATION screen, select QUIT and wait for the completion of the
cleanup cycle.
23. Aspirate diluent from the DIFF CALIBRATION screen and measure and record the LS
offset voltage.
a. While the system is counting, measure the LS offset voltage with a DMM and ensure
the voltages do not exceed limits specified in Table A.1-21.
b. At the Workstation, access the Instrument Reference Report form as directed under
Heading 4.61 and record the Retic LS Offset.
c. Disconnect the DMM.
OPTIMIZATION procedure now; see Heading 4.71. Otherwise, go to Verification.
Verification
1. Do the LATRON VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, Heading 4.78.
2. Do the DIFF AND RETIC VERIFICATION, Heading 5.6.
PN 4277219B 4.79-3
FLOW CELL CLEANING
4.79-4 PN 4277219B
LENS BLOCK CLEANING 4
4.80 LENS BLOCK CLEANING
Purpose
ATTENTION: Replace any field-cleaned lens block assembly as soon as possible.
Use this procedure only as the last step if you are unable to achieve the LS specifications when
performing the TTM alignment procedure. Processes for assembling this lens block assembly
have been optimized to ensure contamination of the lens surface does not occur, but once
contaminated, cleaned lenses do not stay clean long. Replace a field-cleaned lens block
assembly as soon as possible.
B Lens paper, PN 3814123
B Analytical grade acetone (1 ppm), PN 1615361
Procedure
CAUTION Powder and skin oils will damage the lenses. Clean your hands with an alcohol prep pad or wash
them with soap and water before performing this procedure. Wear powder-free gloves to prevent skin oils
from coming into contact with lens surfaces.

2. Remove the laser cover.
3. Remove the hardware securing the lens block to the TTM. See Figure 4.80-1.
Figure 4.80-1 Removing the Lens Block
COVERS
Remove screw
Remove
screws
LENS BLOCK
7253375A
PN 4277219B 4.80-1
LENS BLOCK CLEANING
4. Place a new sheet of lens paper on a clean surface.

5. Cut another piece of lens paper about the same width as the lens or slightly smaller.
6. With the tamperproof screwdriver, carefully loosen the lens cover screws. Loosen the
screws 1/4-turn at a time to prevent breaking the lens.
7. Remove the lenses from the block and place them on the new piece of lens paper.
8. Holding one of the lenses in gloved hand, drape the cut piece of lens paper over the lens
and drop one drop of acetone near the edge of the lens onto the lens paper.
9. Slide the lens paper off the lens slowly sideways, dragging the drop of acetone to the side
of the lens.
10. Drape the same lens paper over the opposite side of the lens and drag it across the lens as
in step 9 above.
11. Look at the acetone drop to verify complete evaporation. If the lens surface remains wet
with acetone, continue dragging lens paper until lens is dry.
ATTENTION: Do not use compressed air to remove dust particles because moisture and
propellant in the air may contaminate the lens surface, defeating the cleaning process.
12. Look at the cleaned lens surface from the side to determine if all contamination has been
removed. If it has not:
a. Remove dust particles with an aperture brush.
b. If any contamination remains, repeat the cleaning procedure for the surface once.
c. If the second cleaning does not remove the contamination, replace the lens block
assembly.
13. Carefully place the lens in the lens block.
CAUTION Tightening the screws incorrectly damages the lens cover. Tighten the screws alternately to
prevent warping the lens cover. Do not overtighten.
14. Carefully install the lens cover and install the screws. Tighten the screws until the cover
just touches the lens. Continue tightening the screws alternately 1/4-turn at a time.
15. Repeat the procedure for the other lens. Once both lenses have been cleaned, install the
lens block in the TTM.
ATTENTION: If, at the completion of the Laser/Flow-Cell Alignment procedure, the instrument
fails the Verification procedures, replace the lens block and repeat the LASER AND
FLOW-CELL ALIGNMENT procedure.
16. Perform the LASER AND FLOW-CELL ALIGNMENT procedure and verify instrument
performance as instructed under Heading 4.76.
4.80-2 PN 4277219B
SENSOR AND SWITCH CHECKS 4
4.81 SENSOR AND SWITCH CHECKS
Purpose
Table 4.81-1 lists the sensors and switches in the Analytical Station, their functions, and the
procedures to test them. Use the relevant procedures in the Action to Test column of
Table 4.81-1 to verify a sensor or switch is operating correctly.
For more details about the messages listed in the Functions/Messages column, refer to
Heading 7.2.
None
Table 4.81-1 Testing Operation of Sensors and Switches
Sensor Name/ Function/

Type Messages Action to Test
Backwash Tank Indicates backwash tank is empty and Select F30, Backwash Tank Test, to check the
Float Sensor needs to be refilled. operation of the backwash tank switch.
Backwash Tank Not Full
Backwash Tank Still Full
Bed Backward One of three sensors that monitor the Move the bed to the backward position and ensure
Optosensor rocker bed position. Indicates the rocker CR3 on the Sensor Distribution card lights.
bed is rocked backward, to the rear of
the Diluter.
Bed Not Backward
Bed Forward One of three sensors that monitor the Move the bed to the forward position and ensure
bed is rocked forward, to the front of
the Diluter.
Not Forward Bed
Bed Horizontal One of three sensors that monitor the Move the bed to the horizontal position and ensure
bed is horizontal.
Bed Not Level
Bellows Up One of two sensors that monitor the 1. Select SERVICE MENU tt DIAGNOSTIC
Magnetic position of the bellows. Indicates the ROUTINES tt SENSOR TEST.
bellows is up (expanded). This is the 2. Ensure the sensor status is 1.
normal at-rest position.
3. Return to the SYSTEM RUN screen.
Bellows Not Up
4. Move the rocker bed to the forward position,
select F90, and energize SL23 then SL25 to
contract the bellows.
5. Exit the F90 function.
6. Select SERVICE MENU tt DIAGNOSTIC
ROUTINES tt SENSOR TEST, and ensure the
sensor changed state.
PN 4277219B 4.81-1
SENSOR AND SWITCH CHECKS
Table 4.81-1 Testing Operation of Sensors and Switches (Continued)

Bellows Down One of two sensors that monitor the 1. Select SERVICE MENU tt DIAGNOSTIC
Magnetic position of the bellows. Indicates the ROUTINES tt SENSOR TEST.
bellows is down (contracted). 2. Ensure the sensor status is 0.
Bellows Not down 3. Return to the SYSTEM RUN screen.
4. Move the rocker bed to the forward position,
select F90, and energize SL23 then SL25 to
contract the bellows.
5. Exit the F90 function.
ROUTINES tt SENSOR TEST, and ensure the
sensor changed state.
Front Door During the Automatic mode, indicates 1. Select SERVICE MENU tt DIAGNOSTIC
Magnetic the front door is closed. ROUTINES tt SENSOR TEST.
Door Open Run Stopped 2. Open and close the Diluter lower front door
(cover) and ensure the sensor status is 1 when
Note: Message is displayed in the
the door is closed.
Automatic mode only.
Hand Detector Initiates a Manual-mode cycle and 1. Access the Diluter 1 card and ensure the HAND
Optosensor monitors the area around the aspirator LED is lit.
tip before rotating the front section of
ATTENTION: Do not press the activator to initiate the
the BSV.
Manual mode.
Probe Obstructed
2. Cycle a sample in the Manual mode by blocking
Sample Removed Too Soon
the hand-detector sensor and ensure the HAND
LED goes out while the sensor is blocked.
Left Lift Up During Automatic-mode cycle, indicates 1. Select SERVICE MENU tt DIAGNOSTIC
Mechanical the position of the left lift. Keeps the ROUTINES tt SENSOR TEST.
rocker bed from rocking while the left 2. Turn off the pneumatics and place the bed in the
lift is up. horizontal position.
Left Lift Not Up 3. Manually raise the lift until the activator contacts
the switch.
4. Ensure the sensor status is 1 when the switch is
activated.
Manual-Mode Start Initiates a Manual-mode cycle when the Initiate a Manual-mode cycle by pressing the
Mechanical operator presses the activator in the activator without blocking the hand-detector sensor
Manual-mode aspiration station. and ensure the cycle begins.
Probe Position Indicates position of aspirator tip. 1. Access the Diluter 1 card and monitor the
Magnetic Manual Probe Not In PROBEIN LED.
2. Select F06 and ensure the PROBEIN LED lights
when the aspirator tip is retracted and goes out
when the aspirator tip is extended.
4.81-2 PN 4277219B

Probe-Wipe Down One of two sensors that monitor the 1. Access the Diluter 2 card and monitor the
Optosensor position of the probe-wipe cleaning DWSEN LED.
truck. Indicates the cleaning truck is 2. Select F28, Probe Wipe Test, to check the
down. operation of the probe-wipe sensors and verify
Note: The cleaning truck must be down the DWSEN LED lights when the cleaning truck is
before the front section of the BSV is down and goes out when the cleaning truck
rotated to retract the aspirator tip. moves up.
Probe Wipe Down Fail
Probe Wipe Truck Not Home
Probe-Wipe Up One of two sensors that monitor the 1. Access the Diluter 2 card and monitor the UPSEN
Optosensor position of the probe-wipe cleaning LED.
truck. Indicates the cleaning truck is up, 2. Select F28, Probe Wipe Test, to check the
so motor can be reversed to send operation of the probe-wipe sensors and verify
cleaning truck back down. the UPSEN LED lights when the cleaning truck is
Probe Wipe Up Fail up, and goes out when the cleaning truck moves
down.
Right Lift Up During the Automatic-mode cycle, 1. Select SERVICE MENU tt DIAGNOSTIC
Mechanical indicates the position of the right lift. ROUTINES tt SENSOR TEST.
Right Lift Not Down 2. Turn off the Pneumatic Supply and place the bed
in the horizontal position.
Right Lift Not Up
3. Manually raise the lift until the activator contacts
the switch.
4. Ensure the sensor status is 1 when the switch is
activated.
Right Stack Loaded Indicates a cassette is in the loading 1. Select SERVICE MENU tt DIAGNOSTIC
Mechanical bay, ready to be cycled. ROUTINES tt SENSOR TEST.
2. Place a cassette in the loading bay, activating the
right stack switch, and ensure the sensor status
changes to 1.
Scanner Position Activated when the bar-code scanner 1. Select F95 to release the solenoids.
Magnetic moves to check the scanner speed and 2. Select SERVICE MENU tt DIAGNOSTIC
label position. ROUTINES tt SENSOR TEST.
3. Place a cassette on the rocker bed in the piercing
station and move the rocker bed to the forward
position.
4. Pull the bar-code scanner down over the cassette
label and ensure the sensor status is 1 when the
scanner is between the cassette label and the
tube label.
5. Press RESET to return to READY.
PN 4277219B 4.81-3

Sheath Tank Indicates the sheath tank is empty and Select F20, Sheath Tank Test, to check the operation
Float Sensor needs to be refilled. of the sheath tank switch.
Sheath Tank Not Full
Sheath Tank Still Full
Stripper Plate Position Indicates whether the stripper plate 1. Select SERVICE MENU tt DIAGNOSTIC
Mechanical cylinder is retracted or extended. ROUTINES tt SENSOR TEST.
Stripper Plate Not In 2. Move the rocker bed to the backward position
and push the stripper plate in until it is flush with
Stripper Plate Not Out
the rocker bed.
3. Ensure the sensor status changes to 0.
Sweep-Flow Reservoir Indicates the sweep-flow reservoir is Select F50, Sweep-Flow Reservoir Test, to check the
Float Sensor empty and needs to be refilled. operation of the sweep-flow reservoir switch.
?To be supplied
Top Left Safety Indicates the unloading bay is full, 1. Select SERVICE MENU tt DIAGNOSTIC
Mechanical ensuring no more than 12 cassettes are ROUTINES tt SENSOR TEST.
placed in the unloading bay. 2. Press the plastic activator at the top of the
If raising the lift activates this switch, unloading bay to manually activate the sensor
the lift cylinder retracts immediately, and ensure the sensor status changes to 1.
lowering the lift.
Left Stack Full
Top Right Safety Indicates the loading bay is full, Check the sensor using one of two methods.
Mechanical ensuring no more than twelve cassettes Method 1:
are placed in the loading bay.
If raising the lift activates this switch, ROUTINES tt SENSOR TEST.
the lift cylinder retracts immediately,
lowering the lift. 2. Press the plastic activator at the top of the
loading bay to manually activate the sensor.
Right Stack Full
Method 2:
1. Press and hold the plastic activator at the top of
the loading bay to manually activate the sensor.
2. Place a cassette in the loading bay.
3. Ensure an error is generated when the cycle
begins.
Tube in Position Indicates a tube is in the piercing 1. Slide a loaded cassette under the tube detector.
Optosensor station. 2. When a tube is in the correct position under the
tube detector, ensure the LED on the tube
detector lights.
3. Select F07 and verify that the tubes are in the
correct position when detected.
4.81-4 PN 4277219B

Under Left Stack Indicates a cassette is ready to be 1. Select SERVICE MENU tt DIAGNOSTIC
Mechanical unloaded from the rocker bed. ROUTINES tt SENSOR TEST.
2. Place a cassette on the rocker bed under the
unloading bay.
Under Right Stack Indicates a cassette is on the rocker bed 1. Select SERVICE MENU tt DIAGNOSTIC
Mechanical under the loading bay. ROUTINES tt SENSOR TEST.
2. Place a cassette on the rocker bed under the
loading bay.
Vacuum Overflow Tank Indicates the vacuum overflow tank is 1. Disconnect the vacuum overflow tank connector,
Float Sensor full. J17.
Level----V- 2. Press ID on the Diluter keypad and ensure
Level----V- is displayed.
3. Reconnect J17.
4. Press RESET and ensure the message is no
longer displayed.
Waste Level Indicates the waste container is full. 1. Disconnect the waste level sensor connector,
Level -----W J35.
Note: The waste sensor is usually 2. Press ID on the Diluter keypad and ensure
bypassed when the waste line drains Level-----W is displayed.
directly to an external drain. 3. Reconnect J35.
4. Press RESET and ensure the message is no
longer displayed.
PN 4277219B 4.81-5
4.81-6 PN 4277219B
LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYZER GAS SPRING REPLACEMENT 4
4.82 LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYZER GAS SPRING REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to replace the gas springs that hold up LH 750 System Analyzer door
when it is open.
B Support, such as a tube rack, to hold the Analyzer door open
B Needle nose pliers
B Philips-head screwdriver
Removal
WARNING Risk of personal injury. The Analyzer cover requires two gas springs to hold it open. To avoid
having the Analyzer door fall on you while removing a gas spring, always prop the Analyzer door open
before removing the spring.
1. Open the Analyzer front door and insert a support, such as a tube rack, between the
Scope module and the Analyzer door to support the door as shown in Figure 4.82-1.
Figure 4.82-1 Removing an Analyzer Door Gas Spring
T o p
B ra c k e t
P in
G a s
s p r in g B a ll a n d
s o c k e t jo in t
G a s s p r in g
B o tto m
7 2 1 9 0 0 4 B
2. On the top ball and socket joint of the gas spring requiring replacement:
a. Remove the safety ring pin, being careful not to lose the pin. Refer to Figure 4.82-1.
b. Insert a pair of needle nose pliers between the bracket and the socket and pry the
socket off the ball.
3. Remove the appropriate Analytical Station side panel and open the Analyzer side door to
access the bottom ball and socket joint of the gas spring requiring replacement.
PN 4277219B 4.82-1
LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYZER GAS SPRING REPLACEMENT
4. On the bottom ball and socket joint of the gas spring:

a. Remove the safety ring pin, being careful not to lose the pin. Refer to Figure 4.82-1.
b. Insert a pair of needle nose pliers between the bracket and the socket and pry the
socket off the ball.
Installation
1. Align a socket on the replacement gas spring with the ball on the top bracket and snap
the socket onto the ball.
2. Reinstall the safety ring pin. Refer to Figure 4.82-1.
3. Align the other socket on the replacement gas spring with the ball on the bottom bracket
and snap the socket onto the ball.
4. Reinstall the safety ring pin.
5. Verify the gas springs are working correctly. Go to Verification.
Verification
1. Remove the support and close the Analyzer door.
2. Open the Analyzer door completely and ensure the gas springs hold it open when you
release the door.
3. Close the Analyzer front and side doors and reinstall the Analytical Station panel.
4.82-2 PN 4277219B
RANDOM ACCESS MODULE REMOVAL 4
4.83 RANDOM ACCESS MODULE REMOVAL
Purpose
Use all or parts of this procedure to move the Random Access module to access components
on the Random Access module or in its vicinity.
B Philips-head screwdriver
Removal
3. For better access to the Random Access module disconnect the hand detector mounting
bracket from the Diluter as shown in Figure 4.83-1 and let the hand detector and its
mounting bracket hang down, out of the way.

R e m o v e
Unfasten
R e m o v e
Loosen
7 2 1 9 0 0 6 B
4. Unfasten the captive screws securing the Random Access module. See Figure 4.83-2.
5. Disconnect the tubing connected to the left side of the Random Access module:
a. At the BSV, disconnect tubing 205
b. At the BSV, note the routing of tubing 211, then disconnect it.
c. At the front blood detector, disconnect the needle input tubing.
d. Remove the knob of the BSV.
e. At the rear blood detector, disconnect tubing 77, the tubing to the aspiration pump.
Note: Removing the tubing up to this point allows access to both the blood detectors and
the diff heater.
PN 4277219B 4.83-1
RANDOM ACCESS MODULE REMOVAL
Figure 4.83-2 Captive Screws Securing Random Access Module
U n fa s te n
c a p tiv e s c r e w s
7 2 1 9 0 0 5 B
6. Disconnect the tubing connected to the right side of the Random Access module:
a. At the stain chamber, disconnect the sample line to the flow cell.
b. At the retic chamber, disconnect the retic delivery line and pull the line through
VL44.
c. At the diff mixing chamber, disconnect the red striped latex sample line.
d. At the diff mixing chamber, disconnect the 15 in. diff delivery line and pull the line
through VL65.
e. At CVL93, carefully remove the retic clearing solution input line from port 1.
7. Remove the Random Access module and set it aside.
Installation
Follow the Removal procedure in reverse order to reinstall the Random Access module.
4.83-2 PN 4277219B
INDEX
Numerics part number, 8.1-25

5C® cell control 48 Volt bulk or pneumatic Power Supply
using for initial adjustment of average defective, 7.2-9
calibration factors, 4.10-1 48 Volt power outside ±10% limit, 7.2-3
5C Control material used in Retic or SUBSET 48 volts fault isolation, 7.4-5
modes, 7.2-1 60 psi
5C Not Allowed In This Mode, 7.2-1 acceptable limits, A.1-6
5-diff lyse pump. See diff lytic reagent pump development, 2.9-2
5 psi distribution, 2.9-2
acceptable limits, A.1-6 60 PSI pressure high., 7.2-19
connections from Power Supply to Diluter on 60 PSI pressure low, 7.2-19
the GEN•S System, 3.5-1 60 PSI pressure out of range (too high), 7.2-19
connections from Power Supply to Diluter on 60 PSI pressure out of range (too low), 7.2-19
the LH 750 System, 3.13-1 60-psi regulator (RV1)
development, 2.9-3 part number, 8.1-25
distribution, 2.9-3, 2.9-4 function, 2.9-2
5 PSI Pressure High, 7.2-1 location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
5 PSI Pressure Low, 7.2-1 286 Board Communication Error, 7.2-1
5 PSI pressure too high, 7.2-1
5 PSI pressure too low, 7.2-1 A
5-psi regulator (RG2) A Control Lot number archive file was created, 7.3-1
function, 2.9-2 abbreviations
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2 used in this manual, ABBREVIATIONS-1
part number, 8.1-25 ac input voltage specifications, table of, A.1-11
5 Volts on Diluter 1 Card outside limit, 7.2-14 AC Line Voltage Bad, 7.2-2
6-Channel Preamp card. See Six-Channel Preamp AC line voltage below 90 Volt limit, 7.2-2
card ACK Not Received By Diluter, 7.2-2
12 Volts on Diluter 4 Card outside limit, 7.2-14 adjustment procedures
+15 Volts from Diff Power Supply outside limit, 7.2-12 ambient temperature display, 4.65-2
-15 Volts from Diff Power Supply outside limit, 7.2-12 aperture voltage, 4.9-1
-15 Volts on Diluter 1 Card outside limit, 7.2-14 aspiration pump, 4.27-1
+15 Volts on Diluter 1 card outside limit, 7.2-14 bar-code scanner position sensor for laser style
+15 Volts on Diluter 2 Card outside limit, 7.2-13 bar-code reader, 4.53-2
-15 Volts on Diluter 2 Card outside limit, 7.2-13 bar-code scanner position sensor for LED style
24 Volts on Diluter 2 Card outside limit, 7.2-13 bar-code reader, 4.53-1
30 psi bar-code scanner, laser style bar-code
acceptable limits, A.1-6 reader, 4.51-8
connections from Power Supply to Diluter on bar-code scanner, LED style bar-code
the GEN•S System, 3.5-1 reader, 4.51-1
connections from Power Supply to Diluter on bed backward sensor, 4.44-2
the LH 750 System, 3.13-1 bed forward sensor, 4.44-4
development, 2.9-2 bed horizontal sensor, 4.44-3
distribution, 2.9-2, 2.9-4 bellows down sensor, 4.57-2
30 PSI Pressure High, 7.2-1 bellows up sensor, 4.57-2
30 PSI Pressure Low, 7.2-1 bubble/blood detectors, 4.55-3, 4.55-7
30 PSI pressure too high, 7.2-1 CBC calibration factors, 4.10-1
30 PSI pressure too low, 7.2-1 CBC lytic reagent pump, 4.22-1
30-psi regulator (RG1) cleaning truck, 4.58-5
function, 2.9-2 Clog Detector circuit, 4.74-3
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2 CRT intensity on the GEN•S System, 4.34-1
PN 4277219B INDEX-1
INDEX
CRT intensity on the LH750 System, 4.34-2 determining Plt and MPV results on the GEN•S
diff lytic reagent pump, 4.28-1 System, 2.24-3
diff preservative pump, 4.29-1 determining RBC counts on the GEN•S
diff preservative pump volume System, 2.24-2
optimization, 4.66-1 determining RDW results on the GEN•S
diluent dispensers, 4.23-1 System, 2.24-3
Diluter keypad display (contrast), A.3-13 determining WBC counts on the GEN•S
flippers, loading bay, 4.42-1 System, 2.24-2
flippers, unloading bay, 4.42-1 function, 2.3-1, 2.11-2
flow-rate (sheath, diff sample and retic sample generating Plt histogram on the GEN•S
regulators), 4.73-1 System, 2.24-3
Hgb lamp voltage, 4.32-2 generating RBC histogram on the GEN•S
initial sheath, diff sample and retic sample System, 2.24-2
pressures, 4.72-1 generating WBC histogram on the GEN•S
left lift up switch activator, 4.40-3 System, 2.24-2
LS gain, 4.77-1 jumper locations, A.2-1
probe position sensor, 4.60-4 jumpers settings, A.2-1
probe-wipe down sensor, 4.58-6 location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3
probe-wipe up sensor, 4.58-6 location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4
retic clearing solution pump, 4.25-1 part number, 8.1-22
RF Detector Preamp card, 4.74-1 power up signals simplified schematic, 2.6-5
right lift up switch activator, 4.40-3 replacement, 4.6-1
rocker bed belt tension, 4.36-1 RESET signal block diagram, 2.11-3
rocker bed position flag, 4.44-1 switch location, A.2-1
rocker bed rock rate, 4.45-2 switch settings, tables of, A.2-1
stain heater, 4.65-1 AMC Did Not Reply, 7.2-2
stain pump, 4.24-1 AMC Never Sent Start Command, 7.2-2
tube detector, 4.47-1 AMC reported error - ASCII Receive Error, 7.2-3
air water separator (FL1) AMC Reported Error - Diff Transmit Failure., 7.2-13
cleaning, 4.16-1 AMC Reported Error - Function Not Allowed, 7.2-18
filter, part number, 8.1-11 AMC Reported Error - PC not ready., 7.2-28
function, 2.9-2 AMC Reported Error - Retic Transmit Failure, 7.2-32
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2 AMC Reported Error - Run Aborted, PC Not
part number, 8.1-3 Ready, 7.2-34
replacement, 4.16-2 AMC Reported Errors -- Operator Alert 09., 7.2-27
alarms, audible AMC Requested Stop, 7.2-2
descriptions, 4.5-1 AMC, Diluter or DIFF Processor hardware
how to turn off, 7.1-1 malfunction (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-21
testing, 4.5-1 AMC-DIFF communication failure: 286 board, 7.2-1
Ambient Temp Sensor Bad, 7.2-2 AMC-DIFF communication failure:
Ambient temperature sensor defective or unknown., 7.2-39, 7.2-40
disconnected, 7.2-2 AMC-DIFF communication failure: wrong
AMC echo., 7.2-41
component locations, A.2-1 An archive file with patient samples was created, 7.3-1
determining Hgb results on the GEN•S ANA. See Analyzer
System, 2.24-4 ANALOG 5 card
determining MCV results on the GEN•S block diagram, 2.21-6
System, 2.24-2 function, 2.21-6
inputs, 2.21-7
2-INDEX PN 4277219B
INDEX
outputs, 2.21-7 Analyzer +48V Bad, 7.2-3

part number, 8.1-22 Analyzer Error, 7.2-3
See also ANALOG card Analyzer fans
analog backplane function, 2.3-1
for GEN•S System, part number, 8.1-22 location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3
for LH 750 System, part number, 8.1-22 location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4
function, 2.3-1 replacement, 4.12-3
location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3 Analyzer Fans Failed, 7.2-3
location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4 Analyzer Fans Power Supply Defective, 7.2-3
test points and voltage specifications, table Analyzer fans power supply defective, 7.2-3
of, A.1-11 Analyzer keypad. See CRT buttons; Numeric
ANALOG card keypad
function, 2.3-2 Analyzer memory read/write failure., 7.2-34
location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3 ANALYZER MICROCONTROLLER card. See AMC
location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4 Analyzer non-communication error, 7.2-20
replacement, 4.6-1 Analyzer power supplies
See also ANALOG 5 card ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1 card, 2.7-4
Analytical Station ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 2 card, 2.7-6
alarm, turning off, 7.1-1 API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card, 2.7-1, 2.7-3
audible alarms, description, 4.5-1 general description, 2.5-4
connecting to the Workstation on the GEN•S ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1 card
System, 3.4-7 block diagram, 2.7-5
connecting to the Workstation on the LH 750 function, 2.3-1, 2.7-4
System, 3.15-1 input, 2.7-5
decontaminating, 5.3-2 location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3
description, 2.1-2, 2.1-5 location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4
extended shutdown and startup monitors, 2.7-6
procedures, 5.2-1 outputs, 2.7-5
main units, 2.1-2, 2.1-5 part number, 8.1-22
power down/power up procedure, 4.1-1 power status LEDs, table of indications, 2.7-6
software versions, GEN•S System, A.9-1 replacement, 4.6-1
software versions, LH 750 System, A.9-1 test points, 2.7-6
Analytical Station messages Zap circuit, description of, 2.7-4
"and" condition, 7.1-2 ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 2 card
about the message tables, 7.1-2 block diagram, 2.7-7
Analyzer function, 2.3-1, 2.7-6
accessing and using the SCOPE MENU, 4.3-1 input, 2.7-7
accessing and using the SERVICE MENU, 4.2-1 location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3
backplane voltage test points, A.1-11 location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4
card layouts with component descriptions, A.2-1 monitors, 2.7-8
circuit card replacement, 4.6-1 outputs, 2.7-7
function, 2.3-1 part number, 8.1-22
illustrated parts. See parts, illustrated power status LEDs, table of indications, 2.7-8
installation, GEN•S System. See installation replacement, 4.6-1
procedure, GEN•S System test points, 2.7-8
installation, LH 750 System. See installation Analyzer stopped, 7.2-2
procedure, LH 750 System Analyzer, GEN•S System
main components, table of functions, 2.3-1 component locations, front view, 2.3-3
See also Analyzer, GEN•S System; Analyzer, component locations, rear view, 2.3-3
LH 750 System CRT buttons. See CRT buttons
PN 4277219B INDEX-3
INDEX
opening side doors, illustration, 3.3-3 switch locations, A.2-2

software menu tree, A.10-1 switch settings, table of, A.2-2
See also Analyzer APS1 card. See ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1 card
Analyzer, LH 750 System APS2 card. See ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 2 card
component locations, front view, 2.3-4 ASCII Rec. Error, 7.2-3
component locations, front view, cover Aspiration -B--, 7.2-4
down, 2.3-4 Aspiration ---C, 7.2-4
component locations, rear view, 2.3-4 aspiration modes
CRT buttons. See CRT buttons options available, 2.1-6
opening side doors, illustration, 3.11-6 Aspiration N---, 7.2-5
software menu tree, A.10-2 Aspiration --P-, 7.2-5
See also Analyzer aspiration pump (PM9)
Analyzer-Diluter communication failure: two NAKs adjustable stops, 2.17-3
sent from AMC, 7.2-39 aspiration state, Automatic mode, 2.17-3
Analyzer-Diluter communication failure: two NAKs aspiration state, Manual mode, 2.17-3
sent from Diluter., 7.2-39 at rest state, 2.17-2
Analyzer-Diluter communication failure: components, illustration of, 2.17-2
unknown., 7.2-39, 7.2-40 function, 2.17-1
Analyzer-to-Diluter communication failure., 7.2-14 function and location reference, A.6-11
Angar™ valves high (Automatic-mode) adjustments,
function, A.6-8 illustration of, 4.27-4
illustration of, 8.2-62 high (Automatic-mode) volume check, 4.27-3
location references, table of, A.6-8 low (Manual-mode) adjustments, illustration
part numbers, 8.1-36, 8.2-63 of, 4.27-2
aperture blocks and module, part numbers, 8.1-3 low (Manual-mode) volume check, 4.27-1
aperture gain matching procedure. See latex voltage module, exploded view of, 8.2-48
calibration part number, 8.1-24
aperture impedance pneumatic signals and piston positions, table
red and white isolation with diluent, table of of, 2.17-1
limits, A.1-3 replacement, 4.27-6
red and white with diluent, table of limits, A.1-3 troubleshooting, 4.27-4
red and white without diluent, table of volume tolerances, A.1-14
limits, A.1-3 Aspiration Pump module
Aperture Voltage Lower Failed, 7.2-3 components, GEN•S System, illustration, A.7-4
Aperture voltage reading above limits, 7.2-3 components, LH 750 System, illustration, A.8-4
Aperture voltage reading below limits, 7.2-3 exploded view of, 8.2-48
Aperture Voltage Upper Failed, 7.2-3 location, GEN•S System, A.7-4
Aperture voltage(s) out of range (<Tube ID>, location, LH 750 System, A.8-4
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-9 aspiration station
API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card component locations, 2.17-17
block diagram, 2.7-1 Aspiration Timeout, 7.2-6
component locations, A.2-2 Aspiration timeout, 7.2-6
function, 2.3-1, 2.7-1, 2.7-3 aspirator tip
input, 2.7-2 function, A.6-9
location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3 location, 2.17-17
monitors, 2.7-2, 2.7-4 location, GEN•S System, A.7-4
outputs, 2.7-2 location, LH 750 System, A.8-4
part number, 8.1-22 attention
replacement, 4.6-1 definition, 1.1-4
4-INDEX PN 4277219B
INDEX
Automatic CBC calibration factors updated from stationary vs moveable, 2.17-17

Analyzer., 7.3-1 backwash cylinder (CL11)
Automatic CBC calibration factors updated from GEN function and location reference, A.6-9
S Workstation., 7.3-1 backwash manifold (MF4)
Automatic Mode Disabled, 7.2-6 function, 2.13-9, 2.17-12
Automatic sampling mode disabled., 7.2-6 function and location reference, A.6-10
Auto-Numbering has been disabled., 7.3-1 See also manifolds
Auto-Numbering has been enabled auto number is backwash tank (VC23)
<Auto-Numbering Start ID>., 7.3-1 choke, CK15, location, 3.1-5, 3.10-5
Autostop - check Workstation, 7.2-6 function, 2.13-8
AutoStop Check Workstation, 7.2-6 function and location reference, A.6-12
Autostop check Workstation, 7.2-6 monitoring the reagent level of, 2.13-8
Autostop has been triggered for Analytical Station reagent flow, illustration of, 2.13-8
<Instrument#>, 7.3-1 testing sensor, 2.13-8, 4.81-1
AutoStop has been triggered for control folder Backwash Tank Not Full, 7.2-7
<lot#>., 7.3-1 backwash tank sensor
AutoStop Requested, 7.2-6 function, 4.81-1
testing, 4.81-1
Backwash Tank Still Full, 7.2-7
B Bar code scanner pressure too low or scanner
BA# obstructed (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>), 7.2-35
diff parameter, 2.1-1 Bar-Code Decoder card
BA% components locations, A.3-1
checking precision, 5.5-1 connector locations, A.3-1
diff parameter, 2.1-1 connectors, table of connections, A.3-1
Background CBC test values within limits, 7.3-1 for LED style bar-code reader, part
Background DIFF test values within limits, 7.3-1 number, 8.1-22
Background: <Background test/parameter> function, 2.4-1
<Background> exceeded <flag> limit, 7.3-1 jumper location, A.3-1
Background: <Background test/parameter> , 7.3-1 jumper setting, A.3-1
backplane interconnects location, GEN•S System, 2.4-6
function, 2.3-1 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-11
location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3 part number, 8.1-22
location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4 replacement, 4.7-1
backplane voltage bus bar-code reader
connecting on the GEN•S System, 3.4-4 bar-code label specifications, 2.14-5
connecting on the LH 750 System, 3.12-5 function, 2.14-3
function, 2.3-1, 2.5-3 performance test, 4.49-1
location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3 read-rate specifications, A.1-1
location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4 types of bar codes used, 2.14-5
backplane voltage bus distribution bar-code reader, laser style
block diagram for the GEN•S System, 2.5-3 block diagram, 2.14-4
block diagram for the LH 750 System, 2.5-4 description, 2.14-4
backplanes scanner adjustments, 4.51-8
analog. See analog backplane scanner cylinder replacement, 4.50-2
CRT. See CRT backplane See also bar-code reader
digital. See digital backplane bar-code reader, LED style
backwash cup block diagram, 2.14-3
function, 2.17-17 description, 2.14-3
marker, 2.16-7 scanner adjustments, 4.51-1
PN 4277219B INDEX-5
INDEX
scanner cylinder replacement, 4.50-1 BD ADJ card

See also bar-code reader adjustment locations, A.2-3
bar-code scanner component locations, A.2-3
adjustment locations for LED style bar-code connectors, table of connections, A.2-3
reader, 4.51-6 replacement, 4.6-1
adjustments, laser style bar-code reader, 4.51-8 replacement, illustration, 4.6-2
adjustments, LED style bar-code reader, 4.51-1 BD1
alignment with oscilloscope, 4.54-1 function, A.6-9
allowable distance from bar-code housing, A.1-1 location on the GEN•S System, A.7-4
electrical check for LED style bar-code location on the LH 750 System, A.8-4
reader, 4.52-2 location, GEN•S System, A.7-4
electrical checks, table of test points and location, LH 750 System, A.8-4
acceptable ranges, A.1-1 See also bubble/blood detectors
function, 2.4-1 BD2
location, 2.15-5 function, A.6-9
location, GEN•S System, 2.4-4 location on the GEN•S System, A.7-4
location, LH 750 System, 2.4-8 location on the LH 750 System, A.8-4
park tab length tolerance, A.1-1 location, GEN•S System, A.7-4
position sensor adjustment for laser style location, LH 750 System, A.8-4
bar-code reader, 4.53-2 See also bubble/blood detectors
position sensor adjustment for LED style bed backward sensor
bar-code reader, 4.53-1 adjustment, 4.44-2
speed check for LED style bar-code function, 4.81-1
reader, 4.52-1 location, 2.15-2
stoke timing specifications, A.1-1 testing, 4.81-1
Bar-Code Scanner card bed forward sensor
location, 4.51-4 adjustment, 4.44-4
test point locations, 4.52-2 function, 4.81-1
bar-code scanner cylinder (CL7) location, 2.15-2
acceptable pressure, A.1-6 testing, 4.81-1
function, 2.15-5 bed horizontal sensor
function and location reference, A.6-9 adjustment, 4.44-3
location, 2.15-5 function, 2.15-2, 4.81-1
replacement, 4.50-1 location, 2.15-2
stroke specifications, A.1-1 testing, 4.81-1
bar-code scanner cylinder pressure regulator (RG5) bed locks
function and location reference, A.6-11 description, 2.15-2
part number, 8.1-24 function, 2.15-2
bar-code scanner position sensor location, 2.15-2, 2.15-7
location, 4.53-1 Bed Not Advanced, 7.2-7
Bar-Code Test screen, illustration, 4.49-1 Bed Not Backward, 7.2-7
basophil Bed Not Forward, 7.2-7
definition, GLOSSARY-1 Bed Not Level, 7.2-8
See also BA#; BA%; diff parameters bed position flag
bath overflow chamber (VC10) adjustment, 4.44-1
function and location reference, A.6-12 bed position sensors
BCD card. See Bar-Code Decoder card location, 2.15-2
BCS. See bar-code scanner See also bed backward sensor; bed forward
sensor; bed horizontal sensor
6-INDEX PN 4277219B
INDEX
bed rock cylinder (CL8) API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card, 2.7-1

function, 2.15-3 backplane voltage bus distribution on the
location, 2.15-3 GEN•S System, 2.5-3
location, front and rear views, 4.45-1 backplane voltage bus distribution on the
replacement, 4.45-1 LH 750 System, 2.5-4
bed rock rate adjustment, 4.45-2 bar-code reader, laser style, 2.14-4
bellows cylinder (CL3) bar-code reader, LED style, 2.14-3
function, 2.15-5, 2.17-11 CBC analysis on the GEN•S System, 2.18-1
function and location reference, A.6-9 CBC analysis on the LH 750 System, 2.18-2
location, 2.15-5, 2.17-12 control voltage development and distribution,
bellows down sensor new Diluter interconnects, 2.6-2
adjusting, 4.57-2 control voltage development and distribution,
function, 2.17-12, 4.81-2 old Diluter interconnects, 2.6-2
location, 2.17-12, 4.57-1 Diff Power Supply card, 2.8-1
testing, 4.81-2 DIFF PROCESSOR card, 2.21-7
bellows interlock Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply
function, 2.15-5, 2.17-11 card, 2.8-4
location, 2.15-5, 2.17-12 Electronic Power Supply, 2.5-1
Bellows Not Down, 7.2-8 Hgb signal flow, 2.18-8
Bellows not extended, 7.2-8 Laser Power Supply, 2.8-3
Bellows Not Up, 7.2-8 Light Scatter Preamp module, 2.21-5
bellows up sensor PLATELET PROCESSOR card, 2.19-6
adjusting, 4.57-2 power up sequence, 7.4-3
function, 2.17-11, 4.81-1 R/W/P SC/A card], 2.7-3
location, 2.17-12, 4.57-1 reagent distribution in Analytical Stations that
testing, 4.81-1 bypass the diluent reservoir, 2.13-7
belt advance cylinder (CL9) reagent distribution in Analytical Stations that
function, 2.15-3 use the diluent reservoir, 2.13-6
location, 2.15-3 RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards, 2.19-1
belt drive assembly RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card, 2.19-6
allowable slack, A.1-1 RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card, 2.19-4
belt tension adjustment, 4.36-1 RESET signal, 2.11-3
location, 2.15-3 RF Detector Preamp card with vacuum
part number, 8.1-20 tube, 2.21-3
removal, 4.35-1 RF Detector Preamp card, solid state, 2.21-3
replacement, 4.35-1 sample data flow on the GEN•S System from
biological hazards final processing to reporting, 2.24-1
safety precautions, 1.2-1 sample data flow on the LH 750 System from
BLD DET ADJ card final processing to reporting, 2.24-2
function, 2.3-1 Six-Channel Preamp card, 2.19-3
location, 2.3-4 Specimen Transport system, 2.14-1
block diagrams stain heater, 2.23-6
+5.2 control voltage and POWER ON signal System Control overview, 2.11-1
distribution, new Diluter System Power Controller card and System Power
interconnects, 2.6-3 Controller Display, 2.10-1
+5.2 control voltage and POWER ON signal SYSTEM RESET signal, 2.6-6
distribution, old Diluter interconnects, 2.6-3 VCS optimization procedure flow, 4.71-2
ANALOG 5 card, 2.21-6 VCS Technology system overview, 2.21-1
ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1 card, 2.7-5 blood detectors. See bubble/blood detectors
ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 2 card, 2.7-7
PN 4277219B INDEX-7
INDEX
Blood front and rear sensors detected partial replacement, 4.21-1

aspiration (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>), 7.2-5 Bulk Power Supply
blood sampling valve. See BSV 48 V fault isolation, 7.4-5
blood/stain aspiration pump (PM11) connector locations, A.4-2
function, 2.23-2, 2.23-4 connectors, table of connections, A.4-2
function and location reference, A.6-11 function, 2.2-1, 2.5-2
part number, 8.1-24 input, 2.5-2
BSV location, 2.2-2
component part numbers, 8.1-3 outputs, 2.5-2
function, 2.17-5, A.6-9 part number, 8.1-24
location, GEN•S System, A.7-4 replacement, 4.20-1
location, LH 750 System, A.8-4 BVB. See backplane voltage bus
port descriptions, table of, 2.17-6
port locations, 2.17-6
positions, table of, 2.17-5 C
replacement, 4.60-1 C1 adjustment, 4.74-4
See also BSV cylinders; BSV module Cable Adpt card. See Diluter Cable Adapter card
BSV cylinders (CL1 and CL2) cables, part numbers, 8.1-4
CL1 replacement, 4.60-3 calibration
function, 2.17-5 CBC. See CBC calibration
function and location reference, A.6-9 definition, GLOSSARY-1
location, 4.60-2 VCS. See VCS optimization
BSV module Calibration factors received from analyzer
component replacement, 4.60-1 unexpectedly - delete runs & restart., 7.3-2
component replacement, illustration of, 4.60-1 calibration procedures
components, GEN•S System, illustration, A.7-4 CBC. See CBC calibration procedures
components, LH 750 System, illustration, A.8-4 VCS. See VCS optimization procedures
exploded view, 8.2-44 Carryover failed, 7.3-2
location, GEN•S System, A.7-4 Carryover passed, 7.3-2
location, LH 750 System, A.8-4 cassette advance wheel
bubble detectors. See bubble/blood detectors location, 2.15-3
bubble/blood detectors Cassette did not advance to next position., 7.2-35
aspiration messages, table of, 2.17-15 Cassette Not Lowered Onto Bed, 7.2-9
checks and adjustments, 4.55-3, 4.55-7 cassette transport assembly
function, 2.17-13 alignment checks, 4.48-1
function and location reference, A.6-9 component locations, 2.14-2
location, 2.17-13 component locations, GEN•S System, 2.4-4
operation, 2.17-14 component locations, LH 750 System, 2.4-8
part number, 8.1-3 component part numbers, 8.1-6
performance test, 4.56-1 function, 2.4-1, 2.14-2
replacement, 4.55-1, 4.55-5 moving a cassette, 2.15-1
Bulk Power Filter card specifications, A.1-1
component locations, A.4-1 verification procedure, 5.8-1
connector locations, A.4-1 caution
connectors, table of connections, A.4-1 definition, 1.1-3
function, 2.2-1, 2.5-2 CBC Analysis system
location, 2.2-2 analyzing the RBC, WBC and Plt data, 2.19-1
part number, 8.1-22 applying the Coulter Principle, 2.18-4
8-INDEX PN 4277219B
INDEX
CBC analysis on the GEN•S System block matching Manual mode-to-Automatic

diagram, 2.18-1 mode, 4.11-1
CBC analysis on the LH 750 System block CBC lytic reagent
diagram, 2.18-2 and diluent delivery timing check, 4.31-1
delivering CBC samples in the Automatic mode, conditions affecting delivery timing, table
illustration of, 2.16-2 of, 4.31-4
delivering CBC samples in the Manual mode, connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the
illustration of, 2.16-6 GEN•S System, 3.5-2
determining the CBC parameters, 2.19-7 connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the
determining the Hgb, 2.18-8 LH 750 System, 3.13-2
function, 2.18-1 F-key function to prime, A.5-1
making the sample dilutions, 2.18-2 function, 2.18-2, 2.18-8
PLATELET PROCESSOR card, 2.19-6 CBC lytic reagent and diluent delivery timing check
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards, 2.19-1 conditions affecting timing, table of, 4.31-4
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card, 2.19-5 equipment hookup for,
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card, 2.19-3 illustration, 4.31-2, 4.31-3
sample processing components on a GEN•S scope settings for, 4.31-3
System that bypasses the diluent reservoir, timing specifications, A.1-8
illustration, 2.18-3 CBC lytic reagent pump (PM7)
sample processing components on a GEN•S adjustments, illustration of, 4.22-3
system that uses the diluent reservoir, function, 2.18-2
illustration, 2.18-3 function and location reference, A.6-11
sample processing components on the LH 750 part number, 8.1-24
System, illustration, 2.18-4 replacement, 4.22-5
Six-Channel Preamp card, 2.19-2 troubleshooting, 4.22-4
timing the data collection, 2.18-5, 2.18-6 volume check, 4.22-1
CBC aperture checks volume tolerances, A.1-14
procedure, 4.70-1 CBC noise checks
CBC Bath Voltages Out Of Range, 7.2-9 limits, A.1-3
CBC calibration CBC parameters
automatic-mode calibration factor limits, table determining reported results on the GEN•S
of, A.1-3 System, 2.24-2
conditions that require calibration, table determining reported results on the LH 750
of, 2.25-8 System, 2.24-5
flow-rate test limits, table of, A.1-3 generated by instrument, 2.1-1
latex voltage test limits, table of, A.1-2 test limits, A.1-5
manual-mode calibration factor limits, table See also CBC Analysis system
of, A.1-3 CBC Xmit Failure, 7.2-9
mode-to-mode comparison limits, A.1-6 check valves
procedures, overview, 2.25-1 illustration of, 8.2-58
tests available from CBC Calibration part numbers, 8.2-59
window, 2.25-1 chokes
voltage matching test limits, table of, A.1-2 illustration of, 8.2-58
when to calibrate, 2.25-8 part numbers, 8.1-7, 8.2-59
why calibrate, 2.25-1 circuit cards
See also CBC calibration procedures AMC. See AMC
CBC calibration procedures ANALOG. See ANALOG card
flow rate, 4.10-1 ANALYZER MICROCONTROLLER. See AMC
latex voltage, 4.9-1 ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1. See ANALYZER
POWER SUPPLY 1 card
PN 4277219B INDEX-9
INDEX
ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 2. See ANALYZER Motor Controller. See Motor Controller card
POWER SUPPLY 2 card Newbar. See Newbar card
Analyzer, replacement procedure, 4.6-1 PLATELET PROCESSOR. See PLATELET
Analyzer, table of special replacement PROCESSOR card
instructions, 4.6-4 Plt Proc. See PLATELET PROCESSOR card
API. See API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card PVT. See PVT card
API-SIGNAL GENERATOR. See API-SIGNAL R/W Proc 2 card. See RED/WHITE PROCESSOR
GENERATOR card card
APS1. See ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1 card R/W Proc. See RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card
APS2. See ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 2 card R/W/P SC/A. See R/W/P SC/A card
Bar-Code Decoder. See Bar-Code Decoder card R/W/P Signal Conditioner/Analyzer. See R/W/P
Bar-Code Scanner. See Bar-Code Scanner card SC/A card
BCD. See Bar-Code Decoder card Red Pre-amp. See RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards
BLD DET ADJ. See BLD DET ADJ card. RED/WHITE PRE-AMP. See RED/WHITE
Bulk Power Filter. See Bulk Power Filter card PRE-AMP cards
Cable Adpt. See Diluter Cable Adapter card RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2. See RED/WHITE
COMM INTERFACE. See COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR 2 card
INTERFACE card RED/WHITE PROCESSOR. See RED/WHITE
Comm Intfc. See COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR card
INTERFACE card Reg Res Intfc. See Reservoir Interface card
CRT4 Display. See CRT4 Display card Reservoir Interface. See Reservoir Interface card
Diff Power Supply. See Diff Power Supply card RF Detector Preamp. See RF Detector Preamp
Diff Proc. See DIFF PROCESSOR card card
DIFF PROCESSOR. See DIFF PROCESSOR card RF Preamp. See RF Detector Preamp card
Diff PS. See Diff Power Supply card RS/O Intfc. See RS/Opto Intfc card
Dil 1. See Diluter 1 card RS/Opto Intfc. See RS/Opto Intfc card
Dil 2. See Diluter 2 card SC/A. See R/W/P Signal Conditioner/Analyzer
Dil 3. See Diluter 3 card card
Dil 4. See Diluter 4 card Scope 1. See Scope 1 card
Dil Proc. See DILUTER PROCESSOR card Scope 2. See Scope 2 card
Diluter 1. See Diluter 1 card Sensor Dist. See Sensor Distribution card
Diluter 2. See Diluter 2 card Sensor Distribution. See Sensor Distribution
Diluter 3. See Diluter 3 card card
Diluter 4. See Diluter 4 card Six-Channel Aperture Preamp. See Six-Channel
Diluter Cable Adapter. See Diluter Cable Adapter Preamp card
card Six-Channel Preamp. See Six-Channel Preamp
Diluter Cbl Adapter. See Diluter Cable Adapter card
card Sol/Opt PS. See Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power
DILUTER CPU. See DILUTER CPU card Supply card
DILUTER PROCESSOR. See DILUTER SPC. See System Power Controller card
PROCESSOR card System Power Controller. See System Power
Diluter, replacement procedure, 4.7-1 Controller card
Diluter, table of special replacement VCS ANALOG. See VCS ANALOG card
instructions, 4.7-4 White Pre-amp. See RED/WHITE PRE-AMP
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply. See cards
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card circuits
Keyboard and Display Interface. See Keyboard Clog Detector. See Clog Detector circuit
and Display Interface card Diff Lytic Reagent Heater, 2.12-11
Laser Reference 4. See Laser Reference 4 card Peltier and Ambient Temperature, 2.12-10
10-INDEX PN 4277219B
INDEX
Stain Chamber Heater, 2.12-10 volume tolerances, A.1-14

Zap, 2.7-4 cleaning procedures
CL1 (Diluter) air water separator, 4.16-1
function, A.6-9 flow cell, 4.79-1
location, GEN•S System, A.7-4 lens block, 4.80-1
location, LH 750 System, A.8-4 Probe-Wipe module cleaning truck, 4.58-2
See also BSV cylinders System flush, 5.3-2
CL1 (Power Supply) cleaning truck
function, 2.9-2 adjustment, 4.58-5
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2 cleaning, 4.58-2
CL2 function, A.6-9
function, A.6-9 location, 2.17-17
location, GEN•S System, A.7-4 location, GEN•S System, A.7-4
location, LH 750 System, A.8-4 location, LH 750 System, A.8-4
See also BSV cylinders replacement, 4.58-2
CL3 Clog Detector
function, A.6-9 error generated by, 7.5-1
location, GEN•S System, A.7-4 Clog Detector circuit
location, LH 750 System, A.8-4 adjustment, 4.74-3
See also bellows cylinder function, 2.21-2
CL4. See left lift cylinder threshold voltage limits, A.1-12
CL5. See right lift cylinder coaxial cables, Analyzer
CL6 connecting, 3.4-2
function, A.6-9 coefficient of variation
location, GEN•S System, A.7-2 definition, GLOSSARY-1
location, LH 750 System, A.8-2 COMM INTERFACE card. See
See also tube-ram cylinder COMMUNICATION INTERFACE card
CL7 Comm Intfc card. See COMMUNICATION
function, A.6-9 INTERFACE card
location, GEN•S System, A.7-2 Comment for control folder <lot#>, <comment>,
location, LH 750 System, A.8-2 <comment>, 7.3-2
See also bar-code scanner cylinder COMMON ROM AREA CRC ERROR, 7.2-10
CL8. See bed rock cylinder Communication error with AMC or
CL9. See belt advance cylinder interconnect, 7.2-2
CL10. See stripper plate cylinder Communication failure during transmission to
CL11 diluter, 7.2-16
function, 2.17-17, A.6-9 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE card
location, GEN•S System, A.7-4 communication links, illustration of, 2.11-4
location, LH 750 System, A.8-4 component locations, A.2-4
See also backwash cylinder function, 2.3-2, 2.11-4
cleaning agent location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4
GEN•S System, 3.5-3 part number, 8.1-22
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the replacement, 4.6-1
LH 750 System, 3.13-3 role in analyzing Hgb data, 2.18-8
F-key function to prime, A.5-2 switch locations, A.2-4
cleaning agent pump (PM10) switch settings, table of, A.2-4
function and location reference, A.6-11 Communications error, 7.2-2, 7.2-3
replacement, 4.26-3 Compressor +48V Bad, 7.2-9
volume check, 4.26-1 Compressor Too Hot, 7.2-9
PN 4277219B INDEX-11
INDEX
compressor. See compressor/vacuum pump component locations, A.2-5

compressor/vacuum pump function, 2.11-7
function, 2.2-1, 2.9-1 switch location, A.2-5
location, 2.2-2, 2.9-1, 2.9-2 switch settings, table of, A.2-5
part number, 8.1-8 CTA. See cassette transport assembly
replacement, 4.14-1 current, leakage specifications. See leakage current
conductivity (RF) specifications
VCS measurement, description, 2.20-1 CV
consumables, part numbers, 8.1-8 definition, GLOSSARY-1
Control Folder <Lot #> is expired (<Expiration CVL43
Date>), 7.3-2 location, A.8-5
Control folder <lot#> created, it must be edited in a See also diff sample valve
system setup for valid flagging., 7.3-2 CVL85/126
Control folder for lot number <lot #> created, 7.3-2 function, A.6-9
Control folder for lot number <lot #> deleted, 7.3-2 CVL87/127
Control folder for lot number <lot #>edited, 7.3-2 function, A.6-10
Control run for control folder <Lot #> out of CVL93
range, 7.3-2 function, A.8-5
Control run outside limits condition has cleared, 7.3-3 See also stained retic sample valve
control voltage development and distribution CVL93/128
block diagram, new Diluter interconnects, 2.6-2 function, A.6-10
block diagram, old Diluter interconnects, 2.6-2 CVL99
Coulter Principle, instrument application location, A.8-5
aperture current, 2.18-4 CVL993
aperture vacuum, 2.18-5 See also retic sample valve
sensing area, 2.18-4 cylinders
sensing area, illustration, 2.18-5 bed rock. See bed rock cylinder
covers, instrument bellows. See bellows cylinder
part numbers, 8.1-10 belt advance. See belt advance cylinder
removal of. See removal procedures BSV. See BSV cylinders
CRC Error, 7.2-10 left lift. See left lift cylinder
CRT backplane part numbers, 8.1-9
+48 V check, test point and acceptable right lift. See right lift cylinder
range, A.1-10 stripper plate. See stripper plate cylinder
function, 2.3-2 tube ram. See tube ram cylinder
location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3
location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4
part number, 8.1-22 D
test points and voltage specifications, table Daily check precision test failed, 7.3-3
of, A.1-11 Daily check ramp test failed, 7.3-3
CRT buttons data collection, List mode, 4.33-1
function, 2.3-2 data collection, timing
location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4 Plt histogram, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
CRT, Analyzer RBC histogram, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
intensity adjustment on the GEN•S WBC and RBC count data, 2.18-5, 2.18-6
System, 4.34-1 WBC histogram, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
intensity adjustment on the LH 750 dc power cable
System, 4.34-2 connecting on the GEN•S System, 3.4-1
CRT4 Display card connecting on the LH 750 System, 3.12-2
DC. See volume (DC)
INDEX
deactivator clips for pinch valves. See pinch valves low volume check, 4.28-1
decontamination part number, 8.1-24
of the Analytical Station, procedure, 5.3-2 pneumatic signals and piston positions, table
Demographic information updated for <Sample of, 2.22-8
ID>, 7.3-3 reading Volumetric Cylinder for volume
Diagnostic Mode, 7.2-11 measurement, illustration of, 4.28-3
Did not detect rocker bed backward position., 7.2-7 replacement, 4.28-8
Did not detect rocker bed forward position., 7.2-7 troubleshooting, 4.28-7
Did not detect rocker bed horizontal position., 7.2-8 volume tolerances, A.1-14
diff ambient thermistor diff mixing chamber (VC25)
function, 2.22-5 function, 2.22-1, 2.22-3
location, 2.22-5 function and location reference, A.6-13
DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST location, 4.68-1
acceptable ranges, table of, A.1-4 replacement, 4.68-1
procedure, 4.4-1 Diff module
diff chamber mixing motor components, GEN•S System, illustration, A.7-5
replacement, 4.69-1 components, LH 750 System, illustration, A.8-5
Diff communication failure., 7.2-11 diff mixing chamber replacement, 4.68-1
diff heater exploded view, 8.2-40
function, A.6-9 function, 2.4-1
location, GEN•S System, A.7-5 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
location, LH 750 System, A.8-5 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-9
part number, 8.1-18 part number, 8.1-19
replacement, 4.67-1 verifying correct operation, 5.6-1
temperature check, 4.65-1 diff parameters
DIFF heater defective or disconnected., 7.2-11 determining reported results, 2.24-7
Diff Heater Disabled, 7.2-11 generated by instrument, 2.1-1
Diff heater disabled for current cycle., 7.2-11 test limits, A.1-5
Diff Heater Sensor Bad, 7.2-11 verification procedure, 5.6-1
Diff Laser Offset Lower Failed, 7.2-11 See also VCS Technology system
Diff Laser Offset Upper Failed, 7.2-11 Diff PC Communication Failed, 7.2-11
diff lytic reagent Diff Power Supply card
conditions causing a PC2 error, 7.5-2 +48 V check, test point and acceptable
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the range, A.1-10
GEN•S System, 3.5-2 block diagram, 2.8-1
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the component locations, A.3-2
LH 750 System, 3.13-2 connection to backplane voltage bus on the
F-key function to prime, A.5-2 GEN•S System, 3.4-4
function, 2.22-4 connection to backplane voltage bus on the
diff lytic reagent pump (PM4) LH 750 System, 3.12-5
adjustable stops, 2.22-9 connector locations, A.3-2
at rest state, 2.22-7 connectors, table of connections, A.3-2
components, illustration of, 2.22-6 function, 2.4-1, 2.8-1
dispensing state, high volume, 2.22-7 input, 2.8-2
dispensing state, low volume, 2.22-8 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
function and location reference, A.6-11 monitors, 2.8-2
high volume adjustments, illustration of, 4.28-6 outputs, 2.8-2
high volume check, 4.28-4 part number, 8.1-22
low volume adjustments, illustration of, 4.28-4
INDEX
diff preservative DIFF Processor monitor command did not

conditions causing a PC2 error, 7.5-2 finish., 7.2-26
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the Diff Processor Out Of Synch., 7.2-12
GEN•S System, 3.5-2 DIFF PS Card +15 V Error, 7.2-12
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the DIFF PS Card -15 V Error, 7.2-12
LH 750 System, 3.13-2 Diff PS card. See Diff Power Supply card
F-key function to prime, A.5-2 Diff RAM Test Failed, 7.2-12
function, 2.22-4 diff sample pressure
diff preservative pump (PM1) acceptable limits, A.1-6
adjustable stops, 2.22-9 acceptable variation, A.1-9
at rest state, 2.22-7 regulator. See diff sample pressure regulator
components, illustration of, 2.22-6 transducer (DIFF PRESSURE) location, A.3-14
dispensing state, high volume, 2.22-7 DIFF sample pressure above limit (<Tube ID>,
dispensing state, low volume, 2.22-8 <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-12
function, 2.22-6 DIFF sample pressure below limit (<Tube ID>,
function and location reference, A.6-10 <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-11
high volume adjustments, illustration of, 4.29-6 diff sample pressure regulator (RG3)
high volume check, 4.29-4 function, 2.22-4
low volume adjustments, illustration of, 4.29-4 function and location reference, A.6-11
low volume check, 4.29-1 part number, 8.1-25
part number, 8.1-24 diff sample valve (CVL43)
pneumatic signals and piston positions, table function and location reference, A.6-9
of, 2.22-8 diff segment valve
reading Volumetric Cylinder for volume function, 2.17-7
measurement, illustration of, 4.29-3 ports, description, 2.17-10
replacement, 4.29-8 ports, illustration, 2.17-10
troubleshooting, 4.29-6 See also shear valves
volume optimization, 4.66-1 DIFF timer error., 7.2-13
volume optimization, peak-to-peak DC Diff Timer Test Failed, 7.2-13
conductivity noise limits, A.1-9 diff waste chamber (VC13)
volume tolerances, A.1-14 function and location reference, A.6-12
diff preserve. See diff preservative DIFF Xmit Failure, 7.2-13
Diff Pressure Lower Failed, 7.2-11 differential parameters. See diff parameters
Diff Pressure Upper Failed, 7.2-12 Differential Power Supply card. See Diff Power
Diff Proc card. See DIFF PROCESSOR card Supply card
DIFF PROCESSOR card digital backplane
block diagram, 2.21-7 connecting with the RF Detector Preamp card on
component locations, A.2-6 the GEN•S System, 3.4-5
function, 2.3-2, 2.21-7 connecting with the RF Detector Preamp card on
inputs, 2.21-8 the LH 750 System, 3.12-6
location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3 connecting with the RS/Opto Intfc card on the
location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4 GEN•S System, 3.4-6
part number, 8.1-22 connecting with the RS/Opto Intfc card on the
switch location, A.2-6 for GEN•S System, part number, 8.1-22
switch settings, table of, A.2-6 for LH 750 System, part number, 8.1-22
DIFF processor communication failure, 7.2-12 function, 2.3-2
Diff Processor Does Not Answer, 7.2-12 location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3
INDEX
test points and voltage specifications, table fluidic component locations, center front panel,
of, A.1-11 GEN•S System, A.7-2
Dil 1 card. See Diluter 1 card fluidic component locations, center front panel,
Dil 2 card. See Diluter 2 card LH 750 System, A.8-2
Dil 3 card. See Diluter 3 card fluidic component locations, Diff module,
Dil 4 card. See Diluter 4 card GEN•S System, A.7-5
Dil Proc card. See DILUTER PROCESSOR card fluidic component locations, Diff module,
Dil SOL/OP PS +15V Error, 7.2-13 LH 750 System, A.8-5
Dil SOL/OP PS -15V Error, 7.2-13 fluidic component locations, left front panel,
Dil SOL/OP PS 24V Error, 7.2-13 GEN•S System, A.7-1
Dil1 Card 5V Error, 7.2-14 fluidic component locations, left front panel,
Dil1 Card +15V Error, 7.2-14 LH 750 System, A.8-1
Dil1 Card -15V Error, 7.2-14 fluidic component locations, lower left rear
DIL4 Card 12V Error, 7.2-14 door, GEN•S System, A.7-6
diluent fluidic component locations, lower left rear
and CBC lytic reagent delivery timing door, LH 750 System, A.8-6
check, 4.31-1 fluidic component locations, Random Access
conditions affecting delivery timing to WBC module, A.8-5
bath, table of, 4.31-4 fluidic component locations, rear of center front
conditions causing a PC2 error, 7.5-2 panel, GEN•S System, A.7-2
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the fluidic component locations, rear of center front
GEN•S System, 3.5-3 panel, LH 750 System, A.8-2
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the fluidic component locations, rear of left front
LH 750 System, 3.13-3 panel, GEN•S System, A.7-1
F-key function to prime, A.5-2 fluidic component locations, rear of left front
diluent and CBC lytic reagent delivery timing panel, LH 750 System, A.8-1
check. See CBC lytic reagent and diluent fluidic component locations, rear of right front
delivery timing check panel, GEN•S System, A.7-3
diluent dispensers. See RBC diluent dispenser; WBC fluidic component locations, rear of right front
diluent dispenser panel, LH 750 System, A.8-3
Diluent front and rear sensors detected carryover fluidic component locations, Retic
(<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-4 module, A.7-5
Diluent level low or faulty backwash tank float fluidic component locations, right front panel,
sensor., 7.2-7 GEN•S System, A.7-3
Diluent level low or faulty sheath tank float fluidic component locations, right front panel,
sensor., 7.2-36 LH 750 System, A.8-3
Diluent level low or faulty tank sensor, 7.2-38 fluidic component locations, right rear
diluent/cleaning agent chamber (VC28) door, A.7-6
function, 2.13-7 fluidic component locations, Sampling Station,
function and location reference, A.6-13 GEN•S System, A.7-4
diluent/cleaning agent manifold (VC32) fluidic component locations, Sampling Station,
function, 2.13-7 LH 750 System, A.8-4
function and location reference, A.6-13 fluidic component locations, under front cover,
inputs, 2.13-2, 2.13-7 GEN•S System, A.7-4
Diluter fluidic component locations, under front cover,
accessing F-key functions, A.5-1 LH 750 System, A.8-4
Angar valves. See Angar™ valves fluidic components, table of descriptions and
card layouts with component descriptions, A.3-1 location references, A.6-9
circuit card replacement, 4.7-1 function, 2.4-1
F-key functions, table of, A.5-1
INDEX
installation. See installation procedure, GEN•S Diluter 2 I/O card failure (<Tube ID>,
System; installation procedure, LH 750 <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-15
System Diluter 2 RBD card
main components, table of descriptions and component locations, A.3-6
location references, 2.4-1 connector locations, A.3-6
pinch valves. See pinch valves jumper settings, A.3-6
solenoid valves. See solenoids valves LED locations, A.3-6
See also Diluter, GEN•S System; Diluter, LH 750 Diluter 2 REL card
System component locations, A.3-6
Diluter 1 card connector locations, A.3-6
+48 V check, test point and acceptable jumper settings, A.3-6
range, A.1-10 LED locations, A.3-6
component locations, A.3-3 Diluter 3 card
connection to backplane voltage bus on the component locations, A.3-8
GEN•S System, 3.4-4 connector locations, A.3-8
connection to backplane voltage bus on the connectors, table of connections, A.3-9
LH 750 System, 3.12-5 function, 2.4-2, 2.12-8
connector locations, A.3-3 inputs, 2.12-9
connectors, table of connections, A.3-4 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-6
function, 2.4-1, 2.12-4 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-10
input, 2.12-5, 2.12-8 part number, 8.1-22
LED indications, table of, A.3-4 replacement, 4.7-3
LED locations, A.3-3 styles in use, 2.12-8
location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5 Diluter 3 I/O card failure (<Tube ID>,
location, LH 750 System, 2.4-10 <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-15
monitoring, 2.12-5 Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface card
outputs, 2.12-5, 2.12-8 component locations, A.3-8
part number, 8.1-22, 8.2-25 connector locations, A.3-8
power supply distribution, illustration of, 2.12-4 connectors, table of connections, A.3-9
replacement, 4.7-3 part number, 8.1-23
styles in use, 2.12-3 See also Diluter 3 card
Diluter 1 I/O card failure (<Tube ID>, Diluter 4 card
<Cass/Pos>), 7.2-15 +48 V check, test point and acceptable
Diluter 2 card range, A.1-10
component locations, A.3-5 component locations, A.3-10
connector locations, A.3-5 connection to backplane voltage bus on the
connectors, table of connections, A.3-7 GEN•S System, 3.4-4
function, 2.4-2, 2.12-6, 2.12-8 connection to backplane voltage bus on the
inputs, 2.12-7 LH 750 System, 3.12-5
jumper settings, A.3-5 connector locations, A.3-10
LED indications, table of, A.3-7 connectors, table of connections, A.3-10
LED locations, A.3-5 Diff Lytic Reagent Heater circuit, illustration
location, GEN•S System, 2.4-6 of, 2.12-11
location, LH 750 System, 2.4-10 function, 2.4-2, 2.12-9
monitoring, 2.12-7 inputs, 2.12-11
part number, 8.1-22 LED indications, table of, A.3-10
replacement, 4.7-3 LED locations, A.3-10
styles in use, 2.12-6 location, GEN•System, 2.4-7
INDEX
part number, 8.1-23 Diluter keypad

Peltier and Ambient Temperature circuit, component locations, exploded view, 2.12-12
illustration of, 2.12-10 contrast adjustment, 2.12-11, A.3-13
replacement, 4.7-3 function, 2.4-2, 2.12-11
Stain Chamber Heater circuit, illustration location, 2.4-4
of, 2.12-10 Diluter keypad failure., 7.2-21
Diluter ambient thermistor Diluter Left Power Sup. Bad, 7.2-15
function, 2.22-5 Diluter left power supply defective, 7.2-15
location, 2.22-5 Diluter memory failure, 7.2-15
Diluter Board Not Answering, 7.2-14 Diluter not ready to receive data from AMC., 7.2-27
Diluter Cable Adapter card Diluter not receiving data from AMC, 7.2-2
component locations, A.3-11 Diluter power supplies
connector locations, A.3-11 Diff Power Supply card, 2.8-1
connectors, table of connections, A.3-11 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply
function, 2.4-2, 2.12-3 card, 2.8-3
location, GEN•S System, 2.4-6 general description, 2.5-4
location, LH 750 System, 2.4-10 Laser Power Supply, 2.8-3
part number, 8.1-23 DILUTER PROCESSOR card
replacement, 4.7-3 component locations, A.2-7, A.2-9
Diluter Card 1 Failure, 7.2-15 function, 2.3-2, 2.12-2
Diluter Card 2 Failure, 7.2-15 location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3
Diluter Card 3 Failure, 7.2-15 location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4
Diluter Cbl Adapter card. See Diluter Cable Adapter part number, 8.1-23, 8.2-5
card replacement, 4.6-1
Diluter Comm. Error, 7.2-15 switch location, A.2-7, A.2-9
Diluter communication failure, 7.2-15 switch settings, table of, A.2-9
Diluter Control system vs DILUTER CPU card, 2.12-6
Diluter 1 card, 2.12-4 Diluter RAM Fault, 7.2-15
Diluter 2 card, 2.12-6, 2.12-8 Diluter received an invalid command from the
Diluter 3 card, 2.12-8 AMC., 7.2-41
Diluter 4 card, 2.12-9 Diluter Right Power Sup. Bad, 7.2-16
Diluter Cable Adapter card, 2.12-3 Diluter right power supply defective, 7.2-16
DILUTER CPU card, 2.12-2 Diluter TxRx Error, 7.2-16
Diluter keypad, 2.12-11 Diluter, GEN•S System
DILUTER PROCESSOR card, 2.12-2 keypad. See Diluter keypad
function, 2.12-1 main component locations, front panels, 2.4-4
numeric keypad, 2.12-11 main component locations, front view, panels
overview, 2.12-1 closed, 2.4-4
DILUTER CPU card main component locations, left door and
function, 2.3-2, 2.12-2 compartment, 2.4-6
replacement, 4.6-1 main component locations, left rear doors, 2.4-7
vs DILUTER PROCESSOR card, 2.12-6 main component locations, right door and
Diluter CPU card compartment, 2.4-5
part number, 8.1-23, 8.2-79 main component locations, right rear door, 2.4-6
Diluter Echo Error, 7.2-15 main component locations, under front
Diluter Error, 7.2-15 cover, 2.4-5
Diluter failure., 7.2-15 opening side doors, illustration, 3.4-3
Diluter front door open during automatic sampling See also Diluter
mode operation., 7.2-16
INDEX
Diluter, LH 750 System doors, instrument, part numbers, 8.1-10

main component locations, center rear DPR Diluter Packet Error, 7.2-16
panel, 2.4-9 dump valve (VL1)
main component locations, front panel, 2.4-8 function, 2.9-2
main component locations, front view, panels location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
closed, 2.4-8 replacement, 4.15-1
main component locations, left door and Dump Valve Stuck Closed, 7.2-16
compartment, 2.4-10 Dump Valve Stuck Open, 7.2-16
main component locations, left rear Duplicate run date and/or run time received, 7.3-3
doors, 2.4-11
main component locations, right door and
compartment, 2.4-10 E
main component locations, right rear electronic forms
door, 2.4-11 available in Workstation, 4.61-1
main component locations, under front Instrument Reference Report, using, 4.61-2
cover, 2.4-9 System Installation Report, using, 4.61-2
opening side doors, illustration, 3.12-1 System Verification Report, using, 4.61-1
See also Diluter electronic hazards
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card safety precautions, 1.2-1
+48 V check, test point and acceptable Electronic Power Supply
range, A.1-10 block diagram, 2.5-1
block diagram, 2.8-4 component locations, 2.2-2
component locations, A.3-12 Electronic Power system
connector locations, A.3-12 +5.2 V control voltage and POWER ON signal
connectors, table of connections, A.3-12 distribution block diagram, new Diluter
function, 2.4-2, 2.8-3 interconnects, 2.6-3
input, 2.8-3 +5.2 V control voltage and POWER ON signal
LED indications, table of, A.3-12 distribution block diagram, old Diluter
LED locations, illustration, A.3-12 interconnects, 2.6-3
location, GEN•S System, 2.4-6 +5.2 V control voltage distribution, table of
location, LH 750 System, 2.4-10 components and functions, 2.6-4
monitors, 2.8-4 ac power timing sequence, table of, 7.4-1
outputs, 2.8-3 Analyzer power supplies, 2.7-1
part number, 8.1-23 control voltage development, 2.6-1
test point locations, illustration, A.3-12 control voltage development and distribution
test points, table of expected values, A.3-13 block diagram, new Diluter
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics/Power Supply card interconnects, 2.6-2
connection to backplane voltage bus on the control voltage development and distribution
GEN•S System, 3.4-4 block diagram, old Diluter
connection to backplane voltage bus on the interconnects, 2.6-2
LH 750 System, 3.12-5 control voltage distribution, 2.6-1
replacement, 4.7-3 description, 2.5-1
disinfect Diluter power supplies, 2.8-1
procedure, 5.3-2 function, 2.5-1
dispensers, diluent. See RBC diluent dispenser, instrument power on timing sequence, table
WBC diluent dispenser of, 7.4-2
Door Open Run Stopped, 7.2-16 main cable connections on the GEN•S
door, front System, 3.4-1
testing sensor, 4.81-2 main cable connections on the LH 750
System, 3.12-1
INDEX
power development and distribution, 2.5-1 Fatal DPR Error, 7.2-17

power off signals, 2.6-6 Faulty backwash tank float sensor, 7.2-7
power up sequence, 2.6-4 Faulty diluter memory., 7.2-10
power up sequence block diagram, 7.4-3 Faulty PS1 power supply., 7.2-21
power voltages and power voltage signal lines, Faulty PS2 power supply, 7.2-21
table of, 7.4-1 Faulty sheath tank float sensor, 7.2-36
SYSTEM RESET signal, 2.6-5 Faulty SPC A/D, 7.2-37
SYSTEM RESET signal block diagram, 2.6-6 Faulty SPC A/D., 7.2-36
electronic test limits FC, 7.5-1
for DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST, A.1-4 filters, part numbers, 8.1-11
for PRECISION TEST 2, A.1-4 fittings
for PRECISION TEST 3, A.1-4 illustration of, 8.2-60
for RAMP TEST 0, A.1-4 part numbers, 8.1-13, 8.2-61
EO# FL1 (Power Supply). See air water separator
diff parameter, 2.1-1 flippers
EO% allowable cassette overlap, A.1-1
checking precision, 5.5-1 location, loading bay, 2.15-3
diff parameter, 2.1-1 location, unloading bay, 2.15-7
eosinophil part numbers, 8.1-14
definition, GLOSSARY-1 flippers, loading bay
See also EO#; EO%; diff parameters checks and adjustments, 4.42-1
erythrocyte flippers, unloading bay
definition, GLOSSARY-1 checks and adjustments, 4.42-1
See also RBC float sensor, backwash tank. See backwash tank
Erythrolyse. See diff lytic reagent sensor
ETX not received from diluter, 7.2-17 float sensor, sheath tank. See sheath tank sensor
ETX not received from Diluter., 7.2-26 float sensor, sweep-flow reservoir. See sweep-flow
ETX Rec. Error, 7.2-17 reservoir sensor
EXPECTED COMMAND FROM AMC, 7.2-17 float sensor, VC22
Expected Command from AMC, 7.2-17 function, 2.9-5
Expected command from AMC, command not float sensor/reservoir cap
received., 7.2-17 replacement, 4.30-1
extended shutdown float sensors, backwash tank
procedure overview, 5.2-1 location, 2.13-8
when to do, 5.2-1 float sensors, diluent (for Analytical Stations that
bypass the diluent reservoir)
function, 2.13-5
F location, 2.13-3
F-key functions float sensors, reagent reservoirs
accessing, A.5-1 function, 2.13-4
descriptions, table of, A.5-1 location, 2.13-3, 2.13-4
Fan Power Bad, 7.2-17 replacement. See float sensor/reservoir cap,
fans replacement
Analyzer. See Analyzer fans float sensors, sheath tank
part numbers, 8.1-11 function, 2.13-9
Power Supply exhaust. See Power Supply location, 2.13-10
exhaust fan float sensors, sweep-flow reservoir
Power Supply intake. See Power Supply intake function, 2.13-10
fan
INDEX
float sensors, waste G

function, 2.13-11 gain matching procedure. See latex voltage
location, 2.13-11 calibration
flow cell (VC18) GEN•S Cell
cleaning procedure, 4.79-1 defined, 2.1-1
errors, troubleshooting, 7.5-1 installation checklist, 3.9-1
function and location reference, A.6-12 main units, description, 2.1-2
port functions, table of, 2.20-5 main units, illustration, 2.1-3
ports, illustration of, 2.20-4 preventive maintenance inspection
Flow Cell Clog, 7.2-18 procedure, 5.9-1
Flow cell voltages/pressures out of space and accessibility requirements,
specifications, 7.3-3 illustration, 3.1-2
flow rate balancing procedure. See flow rate See also instrument
calibration GEN•S System
flow rate calibration installation checklist, 3.9-1
procedure, 4.10-1 main units, description, 2.1-2
procedure overview, 2.25-5 main units, illustration, 2.1-3
flow rate matching procedure. See flow rate preventive maintenance inspection
calibration procedure, 5.9-1
foam trap (VC14) space and accessibility requirements with
function and location reference, A.6-12 SlideMaker, illustration, 3.1-2
foam trap (VC30) space and accessibility requirements,
function and location reference, A.6-13 illustration, 3.1-1
foam trap (VC31) See also instrument
function and location reference, A.6-13 ghost pump. See retic clearing solution pump
foam trap (VC37) ghost reagent. See retic clearing solution
function and location reference, A.6-13
forms
Instrument Reference Report, using H
electronic, 4.61-2 hand-detector assembly
Notice of Information Update, when used, 1.1-1 function, 2.17-16, 4.81-2
System Installation Report, using location, 2.17-17
electronic, 4.61-2 replacement, 4.59-1
System Verification Report, using testing optosensor, 4.81-2
electronic, 4.61-1 handheld scanner
System Verification Report, using electronic laser warning label, 1.2-4
form, 4.61-1 hazards
front door sensor biological, 1.2-1
function, 4.81-2 electronic, 1.2-1
testing, 4.81-2 laser beam, 1.2-2
Front sensor detected air bubbles (<Tube ID>, laser radiation, 1.2-2
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-4 Hct
Function Not Allowed, 7.2-18 CBC parameter, 2.1-1
fuses, Electronic Power Supply determining reported results on the GEN•S
function, 2.5-2 System, 2.24-4
part numbers, 8.1-14 determining reported results on the LH 750
System, 2.24-7
formula for deriving, 2.24-4, 2.24-7
heater, diff. See diff heater
INDEX
heater, stain. See stain heater Host: Bad RCV Buffer End, 7.3-4
hematocrit Host: Bad TestName in TestField, 7.3-4
definition, GLOSSARY-2 Host: Cass/pos Not 6 Char In Testfield, 7.3-4
See also Hct Host: Cass/Pos With Test Type Pending
hemoglobin Duplicate, 7.3-4
definition, GLOSSARY-2 Host: Date Format Incorrect, 7.3-4
See also Hgb Host: Date format incorrect. Non Numeric, 7.3-4
Hgb Host: ID1 Too Long In Test Field, 7.3-4
analyzing the data, 2.18-8 Host: ID1 With Test Type Pending Duplicate, 7.3-4
CBC parameter, 2.1-1 Host: Illegal Comma In Testfield, 7.3-4
checking precision, 5.5-1 Host: Insertion error, Test exists, 7.3-4
determining reported results on the GEN•S Host: Invalid Gender Entry, 7.3-4
System, 2.24-4 Host: Leading Spaces In Field, 7.3-4
determining reported results on the LH 750 Host: No Comma After Testname In TestField, 7.3-5
System, 2.24-7 Host: No CRLF at End of Preamble, 7.3-5
sensing area, illustration of, 2.18-8 Host: No CRLF At Field End, 7.3-5
signal flow block diagram, 2.18-8 Host: No data in transmitted field, 7.3-5
voltage limits, A.1-13 Host: No ID1 Or CassPos, 7.3-5
Hgb cuvette assembly Host: No SOH in preamble, 7.3-5
function, 2.4-2 Host: No Space after Tag, 7.3-5
location, GEN•S System, 2.4-4 Host: No String Between Commas In TestField, 7.3-5
location, LH 750 System, 2.4-8 Host: No Valid Field Tag AC found, 7.3-5
Hgb lamp Host: Non Alpha Char In Alpha Field, 7.3-5
connector, location, 4.32-1 Host: Non Alphanumeric in Alphanumeric field, 7.3-5
part number, 8.1-19 Host: Non Numeric Char In Numeric Field, 7.3-5
replacement, 4.32-1 Host: Nonnumeric Cass/pos Char In Testfield, 7.3-5
voltage adjustment, 4.32-2 Host: Num Of Fields Mismatch in Preamble, 7.3-5
HGB lamp power supply defective, 7.2-19 Host: Number Of Fields Count is 0, 7.3-6
Hgb module Host: Test request UPDATED No Valid Patient
part number, 8.1-19 ID, 7.3-6
Hgb preamp, part number, 8.1-24 Host: Time Format Incorrect, 7.3-6
HGB Status Error, 7.2-19 Host: Time Format Incorrect, Non Numeric, 7.3-6
High pressure High, 7.2-19 Host: Trailing Spaces In Field, 7.3-6
High pressure Low, 7.2-19
High Pressure Too High, 7.2-19
High Pressure Too Low, 7.2-19 I
High Vacuum Low, 7.2-20 IBUS
High vacuum too low., 7.2-20 function, 2.12-3
Histogram Mem. Reset Error, 7.2-20 IBUS cable
histograms connecting on the GEN•S System, 3.4-2
definition, GLOSSARY-2 connecting on the LH 750 System, 3.12-3
Plt. See Plt ID MISMATCH: Sample ID received does not match
RBC. See RBC pre-assigned ID, 7.3-7
WBC. See WBC ID not read by wand or ID was not available., 7.2-26
HLR# Illegal Interrupt, 7.2-21
research parameter, 2.1-2 illustrated parts. See parts, illustrated
HLR% important
research parameter, 2.1-2 definition, 1.1-3
Host: Bad Field Count, 7.3-4 Incomplete Retic Collection, 7.2-32
Host: Bad Intro Field, 7.3-4 Incomplete Retic collection., 7.2-32
INDEX
Incorrect calibration factor transmission, 7.2-38 illustration of, 3.10-4

Incorrect calibration factors or bath voltages., 7.2-41 modification for earthquake-prone areas, 3.10-5
Incorrect calibration factors received, 7.2-21 modification for high altitude, 3.10-5
installation procedure, GEN•S System power up checks, 3.16-1
Analyzer checks, 3.7-2 preinstallation checklist, 3.10-1
connecting the pneumatic lines, 3.5-1 setting up the Analyzer, 3.14-4
electronic report form, using, 4.61-2 setting up the Diluter, 3.14-1
entering system serial numbers and revision setting up the Power Supply, 3.11-2
levels at the Workstation, 3.7-4 space and accessibility requirements for the
filling out the reports, 3.8-3 LH 750 Cell, illustration, 3.10-2
installation checklist, 3.9-1 space and accessibility requirements for the
installing the electrical cables, 3.4-1 LH 750 System with SlideMaker,
installing the pickup tubes, 3.5-1 illustration, 3.10-2
installing the reagent lines, 3.5-1 space and accessibility requirements for the
installing the waste line, 3.5-1 LH 750 System, illustration, 3.10-1
installing the Workstation, 3.2-1 testing the Analytical Station and
main component layout, illustration, 3.3-2 Workstation, 3.17-1
main power and drain line length requirements, unpacking the Analytical Station, 3.11-1
illustration of, 3.1-4 installation procedure, on the LH 750 System
modification for earthquake-prone areas, 3.1-5 installing the electrical cables, 3.12-1
modification for high altitude, 3.1-5 instrument
power up checks, 3.7-1 ac input voltage specifications, A.1-11
preinstallation checklist, 3.1-1 Analytical Station. See Analytical Station
setting up the Analyzer, 3.6-9 auto-start feature, SmartStart™
setting up the Diluter, 3.6-3 recognition, 2.15-1
setting up the Power Supply, 3.6-1 description, 2.1-2
space and accessibility requirements for the electronic forms available, 4.61-1
GEN•S Cell, illustration, 3.1-2 fan locations, 3.10-3
space and accessibility requirements for the fan locations, GEN•S System, 3.1-3
GEN•S System with SlideMaker, function, 2.1-1
illustration, 3.1-2 functional systems, 2.1-2
space and accessibility requirements for the initiating the Automatic-mode cycle, 2.15-1
GEN•S System, illustration, 3.1-1 installation procedure, LH 750 System, 3.15-1
testing the Analytical Station and installation, GEN•S System procedure, 3.2-1
Workstation, 3.8-1 leakage current specifications, 2.1-5
unpacking the Analytical Station, 3.3-1 mode-to-mode comparison limits, table
installation procedure, LH 750 System of, A.1-6
Analyzer checks, 3.16-2 operating modes, 2.1-6
connecting the pneumatic lines, 3.13-1 parameters generated, 2.1-1
entering system serial numbers and revision performance specifications, A.1-5
levels at the Workstation, 3.16-4 preinstallation checklist, 3.10-1
filling out the reports, 3.17-3 preinstallation checklist, GEN•S System, 3.1-1
installation checklist, 3.18-1 tolerances and limits, A.1-1
installing the pickup tubes, 3.13-1 verification procedure, 5.1-1
installing the reagent lines, 3.13-1 whole blood verification procedure, 5.4-1
installing the waste line, 3.13-1 Workstation. See Workstation
installing the Workstation, 3.15-1 See also GEN•S System; GEN•S Cell; LH 750
main component layout, illustration, 3.11-4 System; LH 750 Cell
main power and drain line length requirements,
INDEX
Instrument 1 NO READ Sample received without labels

proper identification [...,....], 7.2-6 laser warning, location, 1.2-3, 1.2-4
Instrument detected clog in flow cell and attempted laser, part number, 8.1-19
three times to clear clog without lamp, Hgb. See Hgb lamp
success., 7.2-18 laser
Instrument dual port RAM memory test failed., 7.2-17 and flow cell alignment procedure, 4.76-1
Instrument has not performed a shutdown in <24> function, 2.4-2
hours., 7.3-7 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
Instrument Reference Report, using electronic location, LH 750 System, 2.4-9
form, 4.61-2 part number, 8.1-19
interface bus power supply. See Laser Power Supply
function, 2.12-3 laser electromagnetic shield, location, 1.2-4
Intermittent PS1 Supply Error, 7.2-21 laser hazards
Intermittent PS2 Supply Error, 7.2-21 safety precautions, 1.2-2
Internal Cal. Fac. Error, 7.2-21 laser interlock switch
Internal software failure, 7.2-37 function, 2.8-2
Interpreter Collator ABORT., 7.3-7 location, 1.2-4
Interpreter Collator Forced to Reset, 7.3-7 Laser offset too high., 7.2-11
Interpreter Collator has timed-out indicating a Laser offset too low., 7.2-11
possible Analytical Station malfunction, 7.3-7 Laser Power module
Invalid character received from Diluter, 7.2-26 function, 2.8-3
Invalid Diluter command., 7.2-26 Laser Power Supply
Invalid dual port RAM packet (<Tube ID>, block diagram, 2.8-3
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-16 function, 2.4-2, 2.8-3
Invalid tube label type read by scanner (<Tube ID>, input, 2.8-3
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-35 Laser Power module, 2.8-3
IQAP data collected., 7.3-7 Laser Reference 4 card, 2.8-3
Ireg Hst., 7.2-21 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
IRF location, LH 750 System, 2.4-10
retic parameter, 2.1-1 monitors, 2.8-3
outputs, 2.8-3
part number, 8.1-23
J Laser PS. See Laser Power Supply
jumpers Laser Reference 4 card
locations and settings. See specific circuit card function, 2.8-3
laser tamper-proof screws, location, 1.2-4
K Laser voltage above limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-22
Keyboard and Display Interface card
Laser voltage below limit (<Tube ID>,
component locations, A.3-13
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-22
connector locations, A.3-13
Laser Voltage Lower Failed, 7.2-22
connectors, table of connections, A.3-13
Laser Voltage Too High, 7.2-22
function, 2.3-2, 2.4-2
Laser Voltage Too Low, 7.2-22
Laser Voltage Upper Failed, 7.2-22
potentiometer R3, function, A.3-13
Last Two XB batches are outside limits, 7.3-8
Keyboard Interrupt Error, 7.2-21
Last XB Batch is outside limits, 7.3-8
Last XB batch outside limit conditions has
L cleared, 7.3-8
Label Not Read Run Stopped, 7.2-22 latex voltage calibration
procedure, 4.9-1
INDEX
procedure overview, 2.25-2 LH 755 System

LATRON control defined, 2.1-1
acceptable verification limits, A.1-10 main units, illustration, 2.1-4
used to verify VCS gain settings, 4.78-1 See also instrument
LATRON primer light scatter (LS)
background limits, A.1-8 VCS measurement, description of, 2.20-1
leakage current specifications Light Scatter Preamp module
computers, 2.1-5 block diagram, 2.21-5
GEN•S System and LH 750 System, 2.1-5 function, 2.4-2, 2.21-4
left lift cylinder inputs, 2.21-5
function test, 4.40-3 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
replacement, 4.40-1 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-9
left lift cylinder (CL4) outputs, 2.21-5
location, 2.15-7 replacement, 4.7-3
Left Lift Not Up, 7.2-23 light scatter sensor. See LS sensor
left lift up switch linear light scatter (LLS)
activator adjustment, 4.40-3 VCS measurement, description of, 2.20-2
activator location, 2.15-7 LIS Upload: Invalid report Profile Requested, 7.3-8
function, 2.15-7, 4.81-2 List mode data collection procedure, 4.33-1
location, 2.15-7 LLS. See linear light scatter (LLS)
replacement, 4.39-1 loading bay
testing, 4.81-2 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-4
Left Load Fail, 7.2-23 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-8
Left Stack Full, 7.2-23 long term shutdown
leukocyte procedure, 5.2-2
definition, GLOSSARY-2 procedure overview, 5.2-1
See also WBC when to do, 5.2-1
Level C------, 7.2-23 Low Vacuum Drifted, 7.2-24
Level Check Fail Caused Stop, 7.2-23 Low Vacuum High, 7.2-25
Level -D-----, 7.2-23 Low Vacuum Low, 7.2-25
Level --L----, 7.2-23 Low vacuum too high., 7.2-25
Level ---P---, 7.2-24 Low vacuum too low., 7.2-25
Level ----R--, 7.2-24 LS Preamp module. See Light Scatter Preamp
Level -----V-, 7.2-24 module
Level ------W, 7.2-24 LS sensor
LH 750 Cell function, 2.21-4
installation checklist, 3.18-1 regions, illustration of, 2.21-4
space and accessibility requirements, LS. See light scatter (LS)
illustration, 3.10-2 LY#
LH 750 System, 2.1-2 diff parameter, 2.1-1
installation checklist, 3.18-1 LY%
main units, description, 2.1-2 checking precision, 5.5-1
main units, illustration, 2.1-4 diff parameter, 2.1-1
space and accessibility requirements with lymphocyte
SlideMaker, illustration, 3.10-2 definition, GLOSSARY-2
space and accessibility requirements, See also LY#; LY%; diff parameters
illustration, 3.10-1
See also instrument
INDEX
M Maximum # Of Repro runs Exceeded - Sample Not

manifolds Stored, 7.3-8
functions, A.6-10 Maximum number of cassettes (12) already loaded,
location references, A.6-10 obstruction or faulty switch., 7.2-23
part numbers, 8.1-19 MCH
manual CBC parameter, 2.1-1
abbreviations used in, ABBREVIATIONS-1 determining reported results on the GEN•S
conventions, 1.1-4 System, 2.24-4
intended audience, 1.1-1 determining reported results on the LH 750
numbering format, 1.1-3 System, 2.24-7
organization, 1.1-2 formula for deriving, 2.24-4, 2.24-7
reference designators used MCHC
in, ABBREVIATIONS-1 CBC parameter, 2.1-1
scope, 1.1-1 determining reported results on the GEN•S
special headings, 1.1-3 System, 2.24-4
Manual CBC calibration factors updated from determining reported results on the LH 750
Analyzer., 7.3-8 System, 2.24-7
Manual CBC calibration factors updated from GEN S formula for deriving, 2.24-4, 2.24-7
Workstation., 7.3-8 MCV
Manual mode-to-Automatic mode calibration CBC parameter, 2.1-1
procedure, 4.11-1 checking precision, 5.5-1
procedure overview, 2.25-7 determining reported results on the GEN•S
Manual Probe Not In, 7.2-26 System, 2.24-3
Manual sampling probe did not retract (<Tube ID>, determining reported results on the LH 750
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-26, 7.2-28 System, 2.24-5
Manual sampling probe wipe obstructed (<Tube ID>, mean cell volume
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-28 definition, GLOSSARY-2
Manual sampling probe wipe obstructed (not down) See also MCV
(<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-28 mean corpuscular (cell) hemoglobin
Manual sampling probe wipe obstructed (not home) definition, GLOSSARY-2
(<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-29 See also MCH
Manual sampling probe wipe obstructed (not up) mean corpuscular (cell) hemoglobin concentration
(<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-29 definition, GLOSSARY-2
Manual-mode activator See also MCHC
location, 2.17-17 mean platelet volume
Manual-mode aspiration station definition, GLOSSARY-2
component locations, 2.17-17 See also MPV
Manual-mode start switch meniscus
function, 4.81-2 how to read correctly, illustration of, 4.22-3
location, 2.17-17 menu trees
testing, 4.81-2 Analyzer, A.10-1
manuals, customer MF. See manifolds
part numbers, 1.1-1 MF4. See backwash manifold
manuals, service mixing chamber, diff. See diff mixing chamber
online version, part number, 1.1-1 mixing motors. See motors, mixing
Slide Making Modules, part number, 1.1-1 MO#
Slide Staining Modules, part number, 1.1-1 diff parameter, 2.1-1
Workstation, part number, 1.1-1 MO%
checking precision, 5.5-1
diff parameter, 2.1-1
INDEX
mode to mode comparison. See Manual NE%

mode-to-Automatic mode calibration checking precision, 5.5-1
mode to mode matching procedure. See Manual diff parameter, 2.1-1
mode-to-Automatic mode calibration needle
modules location, 2.17-12
Aspiration Pump. See Aspiration Pump module part number, 8.1-21
BSV. See BSV module needle assembly
Diff. See Diff module component locations, 2.17-12
Hgb. See Hgb module function, 2.17-11, A.6-9
Peltier. See Peltier module list of components in, 2.17-11
Probe Wipe. See Probe-Wipe module location, 2.15-5
Random Access. See Random Access module location, GEN•S System, A.7-4
Retic. See Retic module location, LH 750 System, A.8-4
Solenoid Interconnect. See Solenoid modules
Interconnect module Needle-Cap Piercer. See Needle-Cap Piercer
Triple Transducer. See Triple Transducer module
module needle vent chamber
Monitor Task Did Not Finish, 7.2-26 function, 2.16-1
monocyte needle vent chamber (VC19)
definition, GLOSSARY-2 function and location reference, A.6-12
See also MO#; MO%; diff parameters location, 2.17-12
Motor Controller card Needle-Cap Piercer module
function, 2.2-1, 2.9-1 part number-Needle Cap Piercer, 8.1-19
jumper locations, A.4-3 replacement, 4.57-1
location, 2.2-2, 2.9-1, 2.9-2 neutrophil
part number, 8.1-23 definition, GLOSSARY-2
replacement, 4.17-1 See also NE#; NE%; diff parameters
motor, Probe-Wipe module. See Probe-Wipe Newbar card
module motor LED and switch locations, 4.51-10
motor, retic mixing. See retic mixing motor location, 4.51-10
motors, mixing No ACK From Diluter, 7.2-26
diff. See diff chamber mixing motor No Calibrator lot number. No statistics will be
part numbers, 8.1-20 calculated, 7.3-9
retic. See retic mixing motor No ETX, 7.2-26
MPV No latex Setup Information available, latex sample
CBC parameter, 2.1-1 will not be stored., 7.3-9
checking precision, 5.5-1 NO MATCH: Sample run received does not match any
determining reported results, 2.24-6 Todo list entry, 7.3-9
determining reported results on the GEN•S NO READ: Sample run received without proper
System, 2.24-3 identification, 7.3-9
MRV No Retics Control In This Mode, 7.2-26
retic parameter, 2.1-1 No Valid ID, 7.2-26
MSCV No Wand ID, 7.2-26
research parameter, 2.1-2 noise checks
CBC aperture checks, procedure, 4.70-1
CBC, limits, A.1-3
N VCS, limits, A.1-9
NE# VCS, procedure, 4.75-1
diff parameter, 2.1-1 Non-ASCII From Diluter, 7.2-26
INDEX
Not Ready For AMC Data, 7.2-27 Operator <Operator ID> changed Reporting Units
note setup, 7.3-11
definition, 1.1-4 Operator <Operator ID> changed Shifts
Notice of Information Update form definition, 7.3-11
when used, 1.1-1 Operator <Operator ID> changed Workstation
NRBC# setup, 7.3-11
LH 750 System parameter, 2.1-1 Operator <Operator ID> changed XB setup, 7.3-11
NRBC% Operator <Operator ID> deleted <# 0f runs> Run(s)
LH 750 System parameter, 2.1-1 from Control Folder <Lot #>, 7.3-11
Numeric keypad Operator <Operator ID> deleted <Location Name>
function, 2.3-2 from the location list., 7.3-11
location, 2.3-4 Operator <Operator ID> installed <Reagent
numeric keypad Type><Coulter/Non-Coulter> Reagent Lot to:
contrast adjustment, 2.12-11 <New Lot#>, opened on <Open Date> with open
contrast adjustment location, 2.12-12 expiration <Open Exp>, 7.3-11
function, 2.12-11 Operator <Operator ID> requested Research Use Only
certification, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> shutdown the GEN S
O Workstation, 7.3-11
OP. See opacity (OP) Operator <Operator ID> Started RAS, 7.3-11
opacity (OP) Operator <Operator ID> Stopped RAS, 7.3-11
VCS measurement, description of, 2.20-1 Operator acknowledged stop condition, 7.3-12
Operator <Operator ID> added <Location Name> to Operator Alert 09, 7.2-27
the location list, 7.3-10 Operator removed sample from probe before
Operator <Operator ID> added <Physician’s First aspiration was complete (<Tube ID>,
Name, Last Name> to from physician <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-35
list, 7.3-11 Operator selected assay limits for control folder <Lot
Operator <Operator ID> added <Physician’s First #>, 7.3-12
Name, Last Name> to the physician list, 7.3-10 O-rings, part numbers, 8.1-21
Operator <Operator ID> changed <Physician’s First Overflow valve malfunction (remained closed)
Name, Last Name> to <Physician’s First Name, detected while turning compressor ON., 7.2-16
Last Name>, 7.3-10 Overflow valve malfunction (remained open) detected
Operator <Operator ID> changed Analytical Station while turning compressor ON., 7.2-16
setup, 7.3-10 OVERLARY AREA CRC ERROR, 7.2-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed Database
setup, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed Decision Rules P
setup, 7.3-10 P/W Harness Not Connected, 7.2-31
Operator <Operator ID> changed Display Labels parameters
setup, 7.3-10 CBC, 2.1-1
Operator <Operator ID> changed Institution differential, 2.1-1
setup, 7.3-10 research only, 2.1-2
Operator <Operator ID> changed lis/his setup, 7.3-10 retic, 2.1-1
Operator <Operator ID> changed location <Location parameters, research only
Name> to <Location Name>., 7.3-10 generated by instrument, 2.1-2
Operator <Operator ID> changed Parameter part numbers
setup, 7.3-10 actuators, 8.1-3
Operator <Operator ID> changed Print setup, 7.3-10 air water separator, 8.1-3
Operator <Operator ID> changed reagents Analytical Station, list
setup, 7.3-10 of, 8.1-3, 8.1-4, 8.1-10, 8.1-11, 8.1-15, 8.1-1
INDEX
9, 8.1-21, 8.1-22, 8.1-26, 8.1-31, 8.1-36, 8.1- software, 8.1-28

37 springs, 8.1-29
aperture blocks and modules, 8.1-3 switches, 8.1-29
BSV components, 8.1-3 thermistors, 8.1-31
bubble/blood detectors, 8.1-3 tie wraps, 8.1-31
Bulk Power Supply, 8.1-24 tools, 8.1-31
cables, 8.1-4 Triple Transducer module components, 8.1-32
cassette transport assembly components, 8.1-6 tubing, 8.1-33
chambers, 8.1-6 valves, Angar™, 8.1-36
chokes, 8.1-7 valves, pinch, 8.1-36
circuit cards, 8.1-22 valves, relief (pressure bleed off), 8.1-36
compressor/vacuum pump, 8.1-8 Workstation, 1.1-1
consumables, 8.1-8 parts
covers, 8.1-10 common names and categories used in parts list,
custom components, 8.1-7 table of, 8.1-1
customer documents, 1.1-1 replaceable, master list
cylinders, 8.1-9 of, 8.1-3, 8.1-4, 8.1-10, 8.1-11, 8.1-15, 8.1-1
displays, 8.1-10 9, 8.1-21, 8.1-22, 8.1-26, 8.1-31, 8.1-36, 8.1-
doors, 8.1-10 37
drives, 8.1-10 parts, illustrated
engineering schematics, 6.1-1 Analyzer and Diluter front and side covers and
fans, 8.1-11 doors, LH750 System, 8.2-74
filters, 8.1-11 Analyzer, card cage, rear door and hardware,
fittings, 8.1-7, 8.1-13 GEN•S System, 8.2-4
flippers, 8.1-14 Analyzer, card cage, rear door and hardware,
fuses, 8.1-14 LH 750 System, 8.2-78
hardware, miscellaneous, 8.1-15 Analyzer, front door and hardware, GEN•S
hardware, nuts, 8.1-21 System, 8.2-2
hardware, screws, 8.1-26 Analyzer, front door hardware, LH 750
hardware, washers and spacers, 8.1-37 System, 8.2-76
heaters, 8.1-18 check valves, 8.2-58
labels, 8.1-19 chokes, 8.2-58
lamps, 8.1-19 Diluter, Aspiration Pump module, MF4 and
laser, 8.1-19 MF13, 8.2-48
manifolds, 8.1-19 Diluter, bar-code scanner and tube ram
modules, 8.1-19 cylinder, 8.2-30
motors, 8.1-20 Diluter, BSV module, 8.2-44
muffler, 8.1-20 Diluter, cassette guide panels, 8.2-8
needle, 8.1-21 Diluter, center front panel, 8.2-16
O-rings, 8.1-21 Diluter, Diff module, 8.2-40
preamps, 8.1-24 Diluter, hydraulic inputs, 8.2-54, 8.2-56
Probe-Wipe module cleaning truck Diluter, left door and compartment, 8.2-10
components, 8.1-24 Diluter, left front panel, 8.2-12
pumps, 8.1-24 Diluter, left rear door, 8.2-52
regulators, 8.1-25 Diluter, lower front door hardware, LH 750
Service Resource Kit, 1.1-1 System, 8.2-77
sheath flow coil, 8.1-28 Diluter, piercing station assembly, 8.2-28
Slide Making Modules Service Manual, 1.1-1 Diluter, piercing station, rocker bed, and
Slide Staining Modules Service Manual, 1.1-1 components under front cover, 8.2-26
INDEX
Diluter, Probe-Wipe module, 8.2-46 front and rear views, 4.64-1

Diluter, rear of center front panel, 8.2-18 function, 2.23-6, A.6-10
Diluter, rear of left front panel, 8.2-14 location, GEN•S System, A.7-1
Diluter, rear of right front panel, 8.2-22 location, LH 750 System, A.8-1
Diluter, Retic module, 8.2-42 part number, 8.1-20
Diluter, right door and compartment, 8.2-24 replacement, 4.64-1
Diluter, right front panel, 8.2-20 temperature check, 4.65-1
Diluter, right rear door, 8.2-50 Peltier Temp. Outside Limits, 7.2-28
Diluter, rocker bed, 8.2-32 Peltier temperature outside limits., 7.2-28
Diluter, rocker bed mounting channel, 8.2-34 P-flag
Diluter, Triple Transducer module, 8.2-36 when bubble/blood detectors disabled, 2.17-15
Diluter, Triple Transducer module translation piercing station
plates and hardware, 8.2-38 exploded view of, 8.2-28
fittings, 8.2-60 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-4
hardware, miscellaneous, 8.2-60 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-8
hardware, mounting, 8.2-64 module part number, 8.1-20
Power Supply, Bulk Power Supply, Motor pinch valves
Controller card and mufflers, 8.2-70 function, A.6-8
Power Supply, covers and panels, 8.2-72 illustration of, 8.2-62
Power Supply, overview and location references, table of, A.6-8
compressor/vacuum pump, regulators and part numbers, 8.1-36, 8.2-63
filters, 8.2-66 platelet
Power Supply, SPC card, System Power definition, GLOSSARY-3
Controller Display and air water See also Plt
separator, 8.2-68 Platelet fit algorithm failed (<Tube
Random Access module, 8.2-80 ID>,<Cass/Pos>), 7.2-28
tie wraps, 8.2-64 PLATELET PROCESSOR card
valves, common, 8.2-62 block diagram, 2.19-6
Password changed, 7.3-13 function, 2.3-2, 2.19-6
PC Not Receiving, 7.2-28 inputs, 2.19-7
PC1, 7.5-1 location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3
PC2, 7.5-2 location, LH7 50 System, 2.3-4
Pct replacement, 4.6-1
determining results on the GEN•S PLB1
System, 2.24-4 function, A.6-10
determining results on the LH 750 location, GEN•S System, A.7-1
system, 2.24-6 location, LH 750 System, A.8-1
formula for deriving, 2.24-4, 2.24-6 See also Peltier module
PDW Plt
determining results on the GEN•S analyzing the data, 2.19-1
System, 2.24-4 CBC parameter, 2.1-1
determining results on the LH 750 checking precision, 5.5-1
System, 2.24-6 determining reported results on the GEN•S
internal check on Plt parameters, 2.1-2 System, 2.24-3
research parameter, 2.1-2 determining reported results on the LH 750
used as internal check, 2.1-2 System, 2.24-6
Peltier Heater Sensor Bad, 7.2-28 histogram, timing of data
Peltier heater sensor defective or disconnected, 7.2-28 collection, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
Peltier module PLT No Fit Aperture 2 Mode Out, 7.2-28
cross-section view, 2.23-6 PLT No Fit Aperture 3 Mode Out, 7.2-28
INDEX
PLT No Fit Aperture X Mode Out, 7.2-28 location, GEN•S System, A.7-3
Plt Proc card. See PLATELET PROCESSOR card location, LH 750 System, A.8-3
PLT PROCESSOR card See also cleaning agent pump
part number, 8.1-23 PM11
PM1 (Diluter) function, A.6-11
function, A.6-10 location, GEN•S System, A.7-5
location, GEN•S System, A.7-3 location, LH 750 System, A.8-5
location, LH 750 System, A.8-3 See also blood/stain aspiration pump
See also diff preservative pump PMI procedure, 5.9-1
PM1 (Power Supply) Pneumatic Power Supply
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2 component locations, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
See also compressor/vacuum pump overview, 2.9-1
PM2 Pneumatic Power system
function, A.6-11 connections from Power Supply to Diluter on
location, GEN•S System, A.7-1 the GEN•S System, 3.5-1
location, LH 750 System, A.8-1 connections from Power Supply to Diluter on
See also RBC diluent dispenser the LH 750 System, 3.13-1
PM3 function, 2.9-1
function, A.6-11 Motor Controller card, 2.9-1
location, GEN•S System, A.7-1 pneumatic levels and status monitors, 2.9-3
location, LH 750 System, A.8-1 pneumatic on signals simplified schematic, 2.9-4
See also WBC diluent dispenser pressure development, 2.9-2
PM4 pressure distribution, 2.9-4
function, A.6-11 PVT card, 2.9-5
location, GEN•S System, A.7-1 temperature monitoring, 2.9-3
location, LH 750 System, A.8-1 vacuum development, 2.9-3
See also diff lytic reagent pump vacuum distribution, 2.9-4
PM5 Pneumatics/Power Supply overheated or
function, A.6-11 defective, 7.2-9
location, GEN•S System, A.7-5 Power Development Control system
location, LH 750 System, A.8-5 function, 2.10-1
See also stain pump troubleshooting, 7.4-1
PM6 power down/power up procedures
function, A.6-11 for Analytical Station, 4.1-1
location, GEN•S System, A.7-1 for Workstation, 4.1-1
location, LH 750 System, A.8-1 power supplies, local
See also retic clearing solution pump function, 2.5-4
PM7 See also Analyzer power supplies; Diluter power
function, A.6-11 supplies
location, GEN•S System, A.7-3 Power Supply
location, LH 750 System, A.8-3 card layouts with component descriptions, A.4-1
See also CBC lytic reagent pump component locations, 2.2-2
PM9 conditions that shut it down, 2.10-4
function, A.6-11 cover removal, 4.13-1
location, GEN•S System, A.7-4 function, 2.2-1
location, LH 750 System, A.8-4 illustrated parts. See parts, illustrated
See also aspiration pump installation. See installation procedure, GEN•S
PM10 System
function, A.6-11 left side panel removal, 4.13-1
INDEX
main components, table of functions, 2.2-1 60 psi. See 60 psi

verification procedure, 5.7-1 diff sample. See diff sample pressure
Power Supply 1 problem: +5 Volts above limit, 7.2-29 for bar-code scanner cylinder. See bar-code
Power Supply 1 problem: +5 Volts below limit, 7.2-29 scanner cylinder
Power Supply 1 problem: +15 Volts above retic sample. See retic sample pressure
limit, 7.2-29 sheath. See sheath pressure
Power Supply 1 problem: +15 Volts below VCS variation limits, table of, A.1-9
limit, 7.2-29 preventive maintenance procedure, 5.9-1
Power Supply 1 problem: -15 Volts above limit, 7.2-29 Probe Obstructed, 7.2-28
Power Supply 1 problem: -15 Volts below limit, 7.2-30 probe position sensor
Power Supply 2 defective, 7.2-17 adjustment, 4.60-4
Power Supply 2 problem: +5 Volts above limit, 7.2-30 function, 4.81-2
Power Supply 2 problem: +5 Volts below limit, 7.2-30 location, 4.60-2
Power Supply 2 problem: +12 Volts above orientation, illustration, 4.60-4
limit, 7.2-30 testing, 4.81-2
Power Supply 2 problem: +12 Volts below Probe Wipe Down Fail, 7.2-28
limit, 7.2-30 Probe Wipe Failed, 7.2-28
Power Supply 2 problem: +15 Volts above Probe Wipe Truck Not Home, 7.2-29
limit, 7.2-30 Probe Wipe Up Fail, 7.2-29
Power Supply 2 problem: +15 Volts below probe-wipe down sensor
limit, 7.2-30 adjustment, 4.58-6
Power Supply 2 problem: -15 Volts above limit, 7.2-31 function, 2.17-18, 4.81-3
Power Supply 2 problem: -15 Volts below limit, 7.2-31 replacement, 4.58-2
Power Supply exhaust fan testing, 4.81-3
function, 2.2-1, 2.5-2 Probe-Wipe module
location, 2.2-2 cleaning truck cleaning/replacement, 4.58-2
replacement, 4.12-1 cleaning truck component part numbers, 8.1-24
Power Supply intake fan component locations, 2.17-17
function, 2.2-1, 2.5-2 components, GEN•S System, illustration, A.7-4
location, 2.2-2, 2.9-1, 2.9-2 components, LH 750 System, illustration, A.8-4
replacement, 4.12-2 differences between two styles, 2.17-17
preamps exploded view, 8.2-46
Hgb, part number, 8.1-24 function, 2.17-17, A.6-9
light scatter. See Light Scatter Preamp module location, GEN•S System, A.7-4
RF detector. See RF Detector Preamp card location, LH 750 System, A.8-4
precision monitoring, 2.17-18
definition, GLOSSARY-3 motor replacement, 4.58-2
verification procedure, 5.5-1 part number, 8.1-20
PRECISION TEST 2 sensor replacement, 4.58-2
acceptable values, table of, A.1-4 Probe-Wipe module motor
PRECISION TEST 3 location, 2.17-17
acceptable values, table of, A.1-4 part number, 8.1-20
Precision test 3 replacement, 4.58-2
definition, 2.7-2, 2.7-4 probe-wipe optical sensors
Precision test values within limits, 7.3-13 locations, 2.17-17
preliminary procedures, CBC calibration See also probe-wipe down sensor; probe-wipe up
overview, 2.25-1 sensor
pressure Probe-Wipe Test, 4.58-1
5 psi. See 5 psi probe-wipe up sensor
30 psi. See 30 psi adjustment, 4.58-6
INDEX
function, 2.17-18, 4.81-3 pump

replacement, 4.58-2 diluent dispensers. See RBC diluent dispenser;
testing, 4.81-3 WBC diluent dispenser
procedure summaries retic clearing solution (PM6). See retic clearing
GEN•S System installation, 3.9-1 solution pump
LH 750 System installation, 3.18-1 stain (PM5). See stain pump
pump volume checks, A.1-13 vacuum. See compressor/vacuum pump
VCS optimization, 4.71-2 volume check procedure summary, A.1-13
procedures volume tolerances, table of, A.1-14
adjustment. See adjustment procedures pumps, dual volume
calibration. See CBC calibration procedures; aspiration (PM9). See aspiration pump
VCS optimization procedures diff lytic reagent (PM4). See diff lytic reagent
cleaning. See cleaning procedures pump
installation. See installation procedures diff preservative (PM1). See diff preservative
noise checks. See noise checks pump
power down/power up, See power down/power PVT card
up procedures component locations, A.3-14
preventive maintenance, 5.9-1 connector locations, A.3-14
removal. See removal procedures connectors, table of connections, A.3-14
replacement. See replacement procedures function, 2.4-2, 2.9-5
timing. See timing procedures inputs, 2.9-6
troubleshooting. See troubleshooting location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
procedures location, LH 750 System, 2.4-10
verification. See verification procedures monitors, 2.9-6
PS. See Power Supply part number, 8.1-23
PS1 +5V Supply High, 7.2-29 replacement, 4.7-3
PS1 +5V Supply Low, 7.2-29
PS1 +15V Supply High, 7.2-29
PS1 +15V Supply Low, 7.2-29 Q
PS1 -15V Supply High, 7.2-29 QD. See quick disconnects
PS1 -15V Supply Low, 7.2-30 quench. See diff preservative
PS2 +5V Supply High, 7.2-30 quick disconnects
PS2 +5V Supply Low, 7.2-30 location references, A.6-11
PS2 +12V Supply High, 7.2-30 part numbers, 8.1-12
PS2 +15V Supply High, 7.2-30 R
R/W Data Mem. Interference, 7.2-34
PS2 -15V Supply High, 7.2-31
RAMP TEST 0
PS2 -15V Supply Low, 7.2-31
acceptable values, table of, A.1-4
pumps
Ramp Test values within limits., 7.3-13
aspiration (PM9). See aspiration pump
Ramp test, definition, 2.7-2, 2.7-4
blood/stain aspiration (PM11). See blood/stain
Random Access module
aspiration pump
components, illustration, A.8-5
CBC lytic reagent (PM7). See CBC lytic reagent
exploded view, 8.2-80
pump
function, 2.4-2
cleaning agent. See Cleaning agent pump
location, 2.4-9
diff lytic reagent (PM4). See diff lytic reagent
part number, 8.1-20
pump
RBC
diff preservative (PM1). See diff preservative
analyzing the data, 2.19-1
INDEX
CBC parameter, 2.1-1 reagent input

checking precision, 5.5-1 connections, 3.5-2, 3.5-3, 3.13-2, 3.13-3
count, timing the data collection, 2.18-5, 2.18-6 reagent input ports, 2.13-1
determining reported count on the GEN•S reagent input ports, illustration (on Analytical
System, 2.24-2 Stations that bypass the diluent
determining reported count on the LH 750 reservoir), 2.13-2
System, 2.24-5 reagent input ports, illustration (on Analytical
diluent dispenser. See RBC diluent dispenser Stations that use the diluent
generating histograms on the LH 750 reservoir), 2.13-1
System, 2.24-5 reagent level monitoring, 2.13-4
generating histograms on the GEN•S Reagent Reservoir module, 2.13-2
System, 2.24-2 Reservoir Interface card, 2.13-5
histogram, timing the data sheath tank, 2.13-9
collection, 2.18-6, 2.18-7 sweep-flow reservoir, 2.13-10
RBC bath (VC2) System-Flush cycle, 2.13-11
function and location reference, A.6-12 waste collection, 2.13-11
RBC diluent dispenser (PM2) waste level monitoring, 2.13-11
adjustments, illustration of, 4.23-3, 4.23-4 waste level sensor bypass
function, 2.18-2 installation, 3.5-3, 3.13-3
function and location reference, A.6-11 waste output connection, 3.5-3, 3.13-3
part number, 8.1-24 Reagent level sense, pressure or voltage error
replacement, 4.23-6 detected., 7.2-11
troubleshooting, 4.23-5 reagent reservoir component replacement. See float
volume check, 4.23-1 sensor/reservoir cap, replacement; reagent
volume tolerances, A.1-14 reservoir solenoids, replacement; Reservoir
RBC vacuum isolator chamber (VC1-R) Interface card, replacement
function, 2.18-4 Reagent Reservoir module
function and location reference, A.6-12 component locations, new style, 2.13-4
RDW component locations, old style, 2.13-3
CBC parameter, 2.1-1 function, 2.4-2, 2.13-2
checking precision, 5.5-1 location, GEN•System, 2.4-7
determining reported results, 2.24-6 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-11
determining reported results on the GEN•S monitoring the reagent level in, 2.13-4
System, 2.24-3 reagent reservoir solenoids
Reagent <Reagent lot #> is expired, 7.3-13 replacement, 4.30-3
Reagent Handling system Received Host Deletion Request
backwash manifold, 2.13-9 %1, %2 ToDo List entries were deleted, 7.3-13
backwash tank, 2.13-8 red blood cell. See RBC
diluent/cleaning agent chamber, 2.13-7 red distribution width
function, 2.13-1 definition, GLOSSARY-3
pickup tube See also RDW
connections, 3.5-2, 3.5-3, 3.13-2, 3.13-3 Red Pre-amp card. See RED/WHITE PRE-AMP
reagent distribution, 2.13-6 cards
reagent distribution block diagram (in RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards
Analytical Stations that bypass the diluent block diagram, 2.19-1
reservoir), 2.13-7 connecting coaxial cables, 3.4-2
reagent distribution block diagram (in function, 2.3-2, 2.19-1
Analytical Stations that use the diluent inputs, 2.19-2
reservoir), 2.13-6 location, 2.3-3
outputs, 2.19-2
INDEX
replacement, 4.6-1 ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 2 card, 4.6-1

RED/WHITE PREAMP cards API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card, 4.6-1
part number, 8.1-23 aspiration pump, 4.27-1
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card Bar-Code Decoder card, 4.7-1
block diagram, 2.19-6 bar-code scanner cylinder, 4.50-1
function, 2.3-2, 2.19-5 BD ADJ card, 4.6-1
input, 2.19-6 bed rock cylinder, 4.45-1
location, 2.3-4 BSV, 4.60-1
replacement, 4.6-1 BSV module components (housing, insulator,
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card O-ring, shaft and spring), 4.60-1
block diagram, 2.19-4 bubble/blood detectors, 4.55-1, 4.55-5
function, 2.3-2, 2.19-3 Bulk Power Filter card, 4.21-1
input, 2.19-5 Bulk Power Supply, 4.20-1
location, 2.3-3 CBC lytic reagent pump, 4.22-1
part number, 8.1-23 cleaning agent pump, 4.26-1
replacement, 4.6-1 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE card, 4.6-1
Red/white processor counter(s) did not compressor/vacuum pump, 4.14-1
reinitialize., 7.2-32 diff chamber mixing motor, 4.69-1
Red/White Reset Error, 7.2-32 diff heater, 4.67-1
reference designators diff lytic reagent pump, 4.28-1
used in this manual, ABBREVIATIONS-1 diff mixing chamber, 4.68-1
Reg Res Intfc card. See Reservoir Interface card diff preservative pump, 4.29-1
regulator DIFF PROCESSOR card, 4.6-1
regulators diluent dispensers, 4.23-1
5 psi. See 5-psi regulator Diluter 1 card, 4.7-3
diff sample pressure. See diff sample pressure Diluter 3 card, 4.7-3
regulator Diluter 4 card, 4.7-3
retic sample pressure. See retic sample pressure Diluter Cable Adapter card, 4.7-3
regulator DILUTER CPU card, 4.6-1
sheath pressure. See sheath pressure regulator DILUTER PROCESSOR card, 4.6-1
vacuum (low). See vacuum regulator Diluter/Solenoid/Optics/Power Supply
relief valve (RV1) card, 4.7-3
part number, 8.1-36 dump valve, 4.15-1
See also 60-psi regulator float sensor/reservoir cap, 4.30-1
removal procedures hand detector assembly, 4.59-1
Power Supply cover, 4.13-1 Hgb lamp, 4.32-1
Power Supply left side panel, 4.13-1 left lift cylinder, 4.40-1
rocker bed, 4.43-1 left lift up switch, 4.39-1
rocker bed belt drive assembly, 4.35-1 Light Scatter Preamp module, 4.7-3
Replace reagent container, 7.2-23 Motor Controller card, 4.17-1
replacement procedures Needle-Cap Piercer module, 4.57-1
air water separator, 4.16-2 Peltier module, 4.64-1
AMC, 4.6-1 PLATELET PROCESSOR card, 4.6-1
ANALOG card, 4.6-1 Power Supply exhaust fan, 4.12-1
Analyzer fans, 4.12-3 Power Supply intake fan, 4.12-2
Analyzer front door gas springs, LH 750 probe-wipe down sensor, 4.58-2
System, 4.82-1 Probe-Wipe module cleaning truck, 4.58-2
ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1 card, 4.6-1 Probe-Wipe module motor, 4.58-2
INDEX
probe-wipe up sensor, 4.58-2 Reservoir low or Stain or clearing agent level sense
PVT card, 4.7-3 detected., 7.2-24
reagent reservoir solenoids, 4.30-3 reset signals, 2.6-5
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards, 4.6-1 RESET switch
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card, 4.6-1 function, 2.11-2
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card, 4.6-1 location, 2.11-3
Reservoir Interface card, 4.30-4 RET#
retic chamber, 4.63-1 retic parameter, 2.1-1
retic clearing solution pump, 4.25-1 RET%
retic mixing motor on the Random Access checking precision, 5.5-1
module, 4.62-2 retic parameter, 2.1-1
retic mixing motor on the Retic module, 4.62-1 Retic Accumulation Not Finished, 7.2-32
RF Detector Preamp card, 4.7-3 retic chamber (VC17)
right lift cylinder, 4.40-1 function, 2.23-2, 2.23-4
right lift up switch, 4.39-1 function and location reference, A.6-12
rocker bed belt drive assembly, 4.35-1 location, 4.63-1, 4.63-2
RS/Opto Intfc card, 4.7-3 replacement, 4.63-1
R/W/P SC/A card, 4.6-1 retic clearing solution
Scope Module, 4.6-1 connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the
Sensor Distribution card, 4.7-3 GEN•S System, 3.5-2
Six-Channel Preamp card, 4.7-2 connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the
stain chamber, 4.63-1 LH 750 System, 3.13-2
stain pump, 4.24-1 F-key function to prime, A.5-2
System Power Controller card, 4.18-1 function, 2.23-5
System Power Controller Display, 4.19-1 retic clearing solution pump (PM6)
top left safety switch, 4.41-1 adjustments, illustration of, 4.25-4
top right safety switch, 4.41-1 function, 2.23-2, 2.23-4
tube detector assembly, 4.46-1 function and location reference, A.6-11
under left stack switch, 4.37-1 part number, 8.1-24
under right stack switch, 4.38-1 replacement, 4.25-6
Repro Set Deleted, 7.3-13 troubleshooting, 4.25-4
reproducibility volume check, 4.25-1
definition, GLOSSARY-3 volume tolerances, A.1-14
verification procedure, 5.5-1 Retic control material used in CBC or CBC/DIFF test
Reservoir Interface card mode., 7.2-26
component locations, A.3-15 Retic laser offset too low., 7.2-32
connector locations, A.3-15 Retic Laser Offset Upper Failed, 7.2-32
connectors, table of connections, A.3-15 retic mixing motor
function, 2.4-2, 2.13-5 part number, 8.1-20
inputs, 2.13-5 replacement on the Random Access
location, GEN•System, 2.4-7 module, 4.62-2
location, LH 750 System, 2.4-11 replacement on the Retic module, 4.62-1
part number, 8.1-23 Retic module
replacement, 4.30-4 components, illustration, A.7-5
Reservoir low on CBC lyse., 7.2-23 exploded view, 8.2-42
Reservoir low on cleaner., 7.2-23 function, 2.4-3
Reservoir low on DIFF PAK., 7.2-24 location, 2.4-5
Reservoir low on diluent, 7.2-23 part number, 8.1-20
Reservoir low on Retic PAK., 7.2-24 stain chamber and retic chamber
Reservoir low or Stabilyse level sense detected, 7.2-24 replacement, 4.63-1
INDEX
verifying correct operation, 5.6-1 connection to digital backplane on the LH 750

retic parameters System, 3.12-6
determining reported results, 2.24-9 function, 2.4-3, 2.21-2
generated by instrument, 2.1-1 inputs, 2.21-2
test limits, A.1-5 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
verification procedure, 5.6-1 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-9
See also VCS Technology system monitoring, 2.21-4
Retic Pressure Lower Failed, 7.2-32 outputs, 2.21-2
Retic Pressure Upper Failed, 7.2-32 part number, 8.1-24
retic sample pressure replacement, 4.7-3
acceptable limits, A.1-6 solid state, block diagram, 2.21-3
acceptable variation, A.1-9 test point locations, 4.74-3
regulator. See retic sample pressure regulator with vacuum tube, block diagram, 2.21-3
transducer (RETIC PRESSURE) location, A.3-14 RF Lower Limit Failed, 7.2-33
Retic sample pressure above limit (<Tube ID>, RF Preamp card. See RF Detector Preamp card
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-32 RF Upper Limit Failed, 7.2-33
Retic sample pressure below limit (<Tube ID>, RF Voltage Low, 7.2-33
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-32 RF voltage reading below limit., 7.2-33
retic sample pressure regulator (RG6) RF. See conductivity (RF)
function, 2.23-5 RF/DC Detector Preamp card
function and location reference, A.6-11 possible cause of an FC error, 7.5-1
part number, 8.1-25 RG1 (Power Supply)
retic sample valve (CVL99) function, 2.9-2
function and location reference, A.6-10 location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
retic segment valve See also 30-psi regulator
function, 2.17-7 RG2 (Diluter)
ports, description, 2.17-10 function, A.6-11
ports, illustration, 2.17-10 location, GEN•S System, A.7-3
See also shear valves location, LH 750 System, A.8-3
retic stain pump. See stain pump See also vacuum regulator
retic stain. See stain RG2 (Power Supply)
Retic Xmit Failure, 7.2-32 function, 2.9-2
reticulocyte location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
definition, GLOSSARY-3 See also 5-psi regulator
See also RET#; RET%; retic parameters RG3
reticulocyte parameters. See retic parameters function, A.6-11
RF (6.3V) voltage reading above limit (<Tube ID>, location, GEN•S System, A.7-3
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-33 location, LH 750 System, A.8-3
RF (6.3V) voltage reading below limit (<Tube ID>, See also diff sample pressure
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-33 RG4
RF box. See RF Detector Preamp card function, A.6-11
RF Detector Preamp card location, GEN•S System, A.7-3
adjustment, 4.74-1 location, LH 750 System, A.8-3
adjustment locations, 4.74-3 See also sheath pressure regulator
Clog detector circuit. See Clog Detector circuit RG5
connection to digital backplane, 4.74-2 function, A.6-11
connection to digital backplane on the GEN•S location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
System, 3.4-5 location, LH 750 System, A.8-2
INDEX
See also bar-code scanner cylinder pressure Rocker bed obstructed (right lift not up) or faulty
regulator sensor (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-33
RG6 rotated light scatter (RLS)
function, A.6-11 VCS measurement, description of, 2.20-2
location, GEN•S System, A.7-3 RS485 Interface modules
See also retic sample pressure regulator RS/O Intfc card. See RS/Opto Intfc card
Rgt Res module. See Reagent Reservoir module RS/Opto Intfc card
right lift cylinder communication links, illustration of, 2.11-6
function test, 4.40-3 component locations, A.3-16
replacement, 4.40-1 connections to digital backplane on the GEN•S
right lift cylinder (CL5) System, 3.4-6
function, 2.15-3 connections to digital backplane on the LH 750
location, 2.15-3 System, 3.12-7
Right Lift Not Down, 7.2-33 connector locations, A.3-16
Right Lift Not Up, 7.2-33 connectors, table of connections, A.3-16
right lift up switch function, 2.4-3, 2.11-5
activator adjustment, 4.40-3 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
activator location, 2.15-3 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-10
replacement, 4.39-1 Run Aborted. PC Not Ready., 7.2-34
testing, 4.81-3 RV1
Right Stack Full, 7.2-33 function, 2.9-2
right stack loaded switch location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
function, 2.15-1, 4.81-3 See also 60-psi regulator
location, 2.15-1 R/W Proc card. See RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card
testing, 4.81-3 R/W/P SC/A card
RLS. See rotated light scatter (RLS) block diagram, 2.7-3
rocker bed component locations, A.2-12
air cylinder. See bed rock cylinder connectors, table of connections, A.2-12
belt drive assembly. See belt drive assembly function, 2.3-2
belt. See belt drive assembly inputs, 2.7-4
exploded view, 8.2-32 location, 2.3-4
location, GEN•S System, 2.4-4 outputs, 2.7-4
location, LH 750 System, 2.4-8 part number, 8.1-23
module part number, 8.1-20 replacement, 4.6-1
position flag. See bed position flag R/W/P Signal Conditioner/Analyzer. See R/W/P
position sensors. See bed backward sensor; bed SC/A card
forward sensor; bed horizontal sensor
removal, 4.43-1
rock rate adjustment, 4.45-2 S
rocks per minute, acceptable range, A.1-2 safety precautions
Rocker bed did not advance., 7.2-7 biological, 1.2-1
Rocker bed obstructed (left lift not down) or faulty electronic, 1.2-1
sensor (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-23 laser, 1.2-2
Rocker bed obstructed (left lift not up) or faulty sensor troubleshooting, 1.2-6
(<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-23 Same Label Read Run Stopped, 7.2-35
Rocker bed obstructed (right lift not down) or faulty Sample Access and Reservoir module
sensor (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-33 location, GEN•S System, A.7-4
INDEX
location, LH 750 System, A.8-4 sample data flow on the LH750 System from
Sample Acquisition system final processing to reporting, block
aspirating a sample in the Automatic diagram, 2.24-2
mode, 2.16-1 sample flags, codes and messages, 2.24-10
aspirating a sample in the Manual mode, 2.16-5 Sample Tube Not Detected, 7.2-35
aspiration path in the Automatic mode, Sampling Station
illustration of, 2.16-1 components, GEN•S System, illustration, A.7-4
aspiration path in the Manual mode, illustration components, LH 750 System, illustration, A.8-4
of, 2.16-5 function, 2.4-3
aspiration path through the BSV in the location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
Automatic mode, illustration of, 2.16-2 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-9
aspiration path through the BSV in the Manual SC display test
mode, illustration of, 2.16-6 procedure, 4.19-1
aspiration pump, 2.17-1 S-CAL® calibrator
blood sampling valve (BSV), 2.17-5 using for initial adjustment of average
bubble/blood detectors, 2.17-13 calibration factors, 4.10-1
cleaning the blood pathways in the Automatic Scanner Error, 7.2-35
mode, 2.16-3 scanner position switch
cleaning the blood pathways in the Manual function, 2.15-5, 4.81-3
mode, 2.16-7 location, 2.15-5
function, 2.16-1 testing, 4.81-3
hand-detector assembly, 2.17-16 scanner, handheld
list of components in, 2.17-1 laser warning label, 1.2-4
needle assembly, 2.17-11 Scanning Fault, 7.2-35
overview, 2.16-1 schematics, engineering
Probe-Wipe module, 2.17-17 Analog Backplane, GEN•S System, DCN, 6.1-1
segmenting the sample in the Automatic Analog Backplane, LH 750 System, DCN, 6.1-1
mode, 2.16-2 Backplane Interconnect, GEN•S System,
segmenting the sample in the Manual DCN, 6.1-1
mode, 2.16-6 CRT Backplane, GEN•S System, DCN, 6.1-1
Sample ID portion of the Positive ID has Digital Backplane, GEN•S System, DCN, 6.1-1
changed, 7.3-13 Digital Backplane, LH 750 System, DCN, 6.1-1
Sample Removed Too Soon, 7.2-35 GEN•S Cable Interconnection Diagram,
Sample Reporting system DCN, 6.1-1
CBC analysis parameters on the GEN•S GEN•S Pneumatic/Hydraulic Schematic
System, 2.24-2 Diagram, DCN, 6.1-1
CBC analysis parameters on the LH 750 GEN•S System Signal Interconnection Diagram,
System, 2.24-5 DCN, 6.1-1
diff analysis parameters, 2.24-7 included in Chapter 6, list of, 6.1-1
diff analysis three-dimensional DataPlot, LH 750 Pneu/Hydr, DCN, 6.1-1
example, 2.24-8 LH 750 System Signal Interconnect, DCN, 6.1-1
diff analysis two-dimensional DataPlot, Pneu/Hydr layout, Power Supply, DCN, 6.1-1
example, 2.24-8 when updated in manual, 6.1-1
function, 2.24-1 schematics, simplified
retic analysis DataPlot, example, 2.24-10 pneumatic on signals, 2.9-4
retic analysis parameters, 2.24-9 POWER ON signal, 2.6-4
sample data flow on the GEN•S System from power up signals, 2.6-5
final processing to reporting, block Scope 1 card
diagram, 2.24-1 function, 2.11-7
INDEX
Scope 2 card location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5

SCOPE MENU, Analyzer part number, 8.1-23
accessing, 4.3-1 replacement, 4.7-3
modes and display speeds available, table sensors
of, 4.3-3 backwash. See backwash tank sensor
See also SCOPE MENU, example displays bar-code scanner position, location, 4.53-1
SCOPE MENU, example displays bed backward. See bed backward sensor
CBC ONLY, 4.3-7 bed forward. See bed forward sensor
CBC/DIFF, 4.3-7 bed horizontal. See bed horizontal sensor
conductivity, 4.3-5 bellows down. See bellows down sensor
count test, 4.3-4 bellows up. See bellows up sensor
Diff Analog Pulses Test, 4.3-4 diff ambient thermistor. See diff ambient
DIFF ONLY, 4.3-7 thermistor
electronic test, 4.3-3 Diluter ambient thermistor. See Diluter ambient
F55, 4.3-6 thermistor
light scatter, 4.3-5 float. See float sensor, VC22; float sensors,
light scatter drift, 4.3-6 reagent reservoirs
phase adjust, 4.3-6 front door. See front door sensor
VCS LATRON control, 4.3-4 hand detector. See hand detector assembly
volume, 4.3-5 LS. See LS sensor
Scope Module probe position. See probe position sensor
function, 2.3-2 probe-wipe down. See probe-wipe down sensor
location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3 probe-wipe up. See probe-wipe up sensor
location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4 sheath. See sheath tank sensor
replacement, 4.6-1 sweep-flow reservoir. See sweep-flow reservoir
Scope module sensor
CRT intensity adjustment tube in position. See tube in position sensor
on the LH 750 System, 4.34-2 vacuum overflow tank. See vacuum overflow
CRT intensity adjustment on the GEN•S tank sensor
System, 4.34-1 waste. See waste level sensor
Scope Module 2 SERVICE MENU, Analyzer
function, 2.11-6 accessing, 4.2-1
inputs, 2.11-7 options available. See service options, Analyzer
See also Scope Module service options, Analyzer
screws, part numbers, 8.1-26 on DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES MENU, table of
SD descriptions, 4.2-4
definition, GLOSSARY-3 on DIAGNOSTICS DUMP MENU, table of
Sensor detected diluted blood or non-blood sample descriptions, 4.2-6
(<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-5 on DIFF PROCESSOR DIAGNOSTICS MENU,
Sensor Dist. See Sensor Distribution card table of descriptions, 4.2-6
Sensor Distribution card on ELECTONIC TESTS MENU, table of
component locations, A.3-17 descriptions, 4.2-4
connected to VC22 float sensor, 2.9-5 on MORE DIAGNOSTICS MENU, table of
connector locations, A.3-17 descriptions, 4.2-5
connectors, table of connections, A.3-17 on SERVICE MENU, table of descriptions, 4.2-2
function, 2.4-3, 2.14-5 on SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MENU, table of
input, 2.14-6 descriptions, 4.2-5
LED indications, table of, A.3-17 shear valves
LED locations, A.3-17 hardware description, 2.17-7
INDEX
ports, 2.17-10 SlideMaker

See also diff sample valve; retic sample valve; AMC switch settings for, A.2-1
stained retic sample valve Diluter Processor card switch settings
sheath flow restrictor (VC12) for, A.2-8, A.2-9, A.2-10
function and location reference, A.6-12 service manual name and part number, 1.1-1
sheath pressure SlideStainer
acceptable limits, A.1-6 service manual name and part number, 1.1-1
acceptable variation, A.1-9 SmartStart™ recognition
regulator. See sheath pressure regulator enabling, 2.15-1
transducer location, A.3-14 function, 2.15-1
Sheath Pressure Lower Failed, 7.2-35 hand detector part of, 2.17-16
sheath pressure regulator (RG4) software
function, 2.13-9 part numbers, 8.1-28
function and location reference, A.6-11 procedure for displaying versions, A.9-1
part number, 8.1-25 released version configurations for the GEN•S
Sheath Pressure Upper Failed, 7.2-36 System, A.9-1
Sheath sample pressure above limit (<Tube ID>, released version configurations for the LH 750
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-36 System, A.9-1
Sheath sample pressure below limit (<Tube ID>, Solenoid Interconnect module
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-35 function, A.6-9
sheath tank (VC15) location, GEN•S System, A.7-3
function, 2.13-9 location, LH 750 System, A.8-3
function and location reference, A.6-12 part number, 8.1-20
monitoring the reagent level in, 2.13-9, 2.13-10 solenoid valves
reagent flow, illustration of, 2.13-10 functions and location references, table of, A.6-1
testing sensor, 2.13-11, 4.81-4 solenoids valves
Sheath Tank Not Full, 7.2-36 reagent reservoir, replacement
sheath tank sensor Sol/Opt PS card. See Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power
function, 4.81-4 Supply card
testing, 4.81-4 spacers, part numbers, 8.1-37
Sheath Tank Still Full, 7.2-36 SPC A/D Status Error, 7.2-36
shift SPC card. See System Power Controller card
definition, GLOSSARY-3 SPC Display. See System Power Controller Display
shutdown procedures SPC Power Supply Bad, 7.2-36
extended, 5.2-1 SPC power supply defective, 7.2-36
long term, 5.2-2 SPC Status Not Ready, 7.2-37
Six-Channel Preamp card special headings
block diagram, 2.19-3 attention, 1.1-4
component locations, A.3-18 caution, 1.1-3
connector locations, A.3-18 important, 1.1-3
connectors, table of connections, A.3-18 note, 1.1-4
function, 2.4-3, 2.19-2 Specimen Transport system
location, 2.4-9 bar-code reader, 2.14-3
part number, 8.1-23 block diagram, 2.14-1
replacement, 4.7-2 cassette transport assembly, 2.14-2
Six-Channel Preamp cards detecting a tube at the piercing station, 2.15-4
inputs, 2.19-3 function, 2.14-1
outputs, 2.19-3 identifying the specimen, 2.15-5
initiating the Automatic-mode cycle, 2.15-1
INDEX
list of components in, 2.14-1 Stain temperature high, heater disabled., 7.2-37
moving a cassette to the unloading bay, 2.15-6 Stain temperature low, heater disabled., 7.2-37
moving the cassette across the rocker Stain temperature sensor failed., 7.2-37
bed, 2.15-3 stained retic sample valve (CVL93)
overview, 2.14-1 function and location reference, A.6-10
piercing the cap of the specimen tube, 2.15-5 stained retic segment valve
placing the cassette on the rocker bed, 2.15-3 function, 2.17-9
positioning the tube for sample ports, description, 2.17-11
acquisition, 2.15-4 ports, illustration, 2.17-11
pushing the tube back into the cassette, 2.15-6 See also shear valves
retrieving the cassette from the loading standard deviation
bay, 2.15-1 definition, GLOSSARY-3
Sensor Distribution card, 2.14-5 start switch. See Manual-mode start switch
springs, part numbers, 8.1-29 startup after extended shutdown
StabiLyse. See diff preservative procedure, 5.2-2
Stack Overflow, 7.2-37 procedure overview, 5.2-1
stain startup after long term shutdown
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the procedure, 5.2-2
GEN•S System, 3.5-2 procedure overview, 5.2-1
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the startup procedures
LH 750 System, 3.13-2 after extended shutdown, 5.2-2
F-key function to prime, A.5-2 after long term shutdown, 5.2-2
function, 2.23-5 stripper plate
stain chamber (VC24) function, 2.15-4
function, 2.23-1, 2.23-3 location, 2.15-4
function and location reference, A.6-13 stripper plate cylinder (CL10)
location, 4.63-1, 4.63-2 function, 2.15-4
stain heater Stripper Plate Not In, 7.2-38
block diagram, 2.23-6 Stripper Plate Not Out, 7.2-38
checks and adjustments, 4.65-1 Stripper plate obstructed (not in) or faulty
function, 2.23-1, 2.23-3, 2.23-6 sensor., 7.2-38
voltage limits, A.3-11 Stripper plate obstructed (not out) or faulty
Stain Heater Disabled, 7.2-37 sensor., 7.2-38
Stain heater disabled for current cycle., 7.2-37 stripper plate position switch
Stain Heater Sensor Bad, 7.2-37 function, 4.81-4
stain pump (PM5) location, 2.15-4
adjustments on the Random Access module, testing, 4.81-4
illustration of, 4.24-4 STX Rec. Error, 7.2-38
adjustments on the Retic module, illustration SVP
of, 4.24-4 procedure, 5.1-1
function, 2.23-1, 2.23-3 using electronic form for, 4.61-1
function and location reference, A.6-11 Sweep Flow Reservoir Not Full, 7.2-38
part number, 8.1-24 Sweep Flow Reservoir Still Full, 7.2-38
replacement, 4.24-7 sweep-flow reservoir (VC29)
troubleshooting, 4.24-5 function, 2.13-10
volume check, 4.24-1 function and location reference, A.6-13
volume tolerances, A.1-14 testing sensor, 4.81-4
Stain Temp Hi. Heater Disabled, 7.2-37 sweep-flow reservoir sensor
Stain Temp Low. Run Stopped, 7.2-37 testing, 4.81-4
INDEX
sweep-flow tank jumper settings for 48 V fault isolation, 7.4-5

function, A.6-9 LED locations, A.4-4
location, GEN•S System, A.7-2 location, 2.2-2
location, LH 750 System, A.8-2 part number, 8.1-23
switches pneumatic level monitors, 2.10-2
laser interlock. See laser interlock switch POWER ON signal simplified schematic, 2.6-4
left lift up. See left lift up switch replacement, 4.18-1
Manual-mode start. See Manual-mode start temperature monitors, 2.10-2
switch voltage status LEDs, table of indications, A.4-4
on circuit cards. See specific circuit card System Power Controller Display
part numbers, 8.1-29 block diagram, 2.10-1
RESET. See RESET switch electronic and pneumatic level displays, 2.10-4
right lift up. See right lift up switch function, 2.2-1, 2.10-3
right stack loaded. See right stack loaded switch location, 2.2-2
scanner position. See scanner position switch replacement, 4.19-1
settings for System with status displays, 2.10-4
SlideMaker, A.2-1, A.2-8, A.2-9, A.2-10 testing, 4.19-1
stripper plate position. See stripper plate system verification procedure. See SVP
position switch System-Flush cycle
top left safety. See top left safety switch description, 2.13-11
top right safety. See top right safety switch function, 2.13-11
under left stack. See under left stack switch systems
under right stack. See under right stack switch CBC Analysis. See CBC Analysis system
System Control overview Diluter Control. See Diluter Control system
block diagram, 2.11-1 Electronic Power. See Electronic Power system
System Control system functional, listing of, 2.1-2
AMC, 2.11-2 GEN•S System. See GEN•S System
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE card, 2.11-4 LH 750 System. See LH 750 System
function, 2.11-1 Pneumatic Power. See Pneumatic Power system
overview, 2.11-1 Power Development Control. See Power
RS/Opto Intfc card, 2.11-5 Development Control system
Scope Module, 2.11-6 Reagent Handling. See Reagent Handling system
System flush Sample Acquisition. See Sample Acquisition
procedure, 5.3-2 system
System Installation Report, using electronic Sample Reporting. See Sample Reporting system
form, 4.61-2 Specimen Transport. See Specimen Transport
System messages system
tables of, 7.2-1 System Control. See System Control system
See also individual messages VCS Technology. See VCS Technology system
System Power Controller card
A/D converter status monitor, 2.10-3
block diagram, 2.10-1 T
Bulk Power Supply voltage monitors, 2.10-3 tanks
component locations, A.4-4 backwash. See backwash tank
connector locations, A.4-4 sheath. See sheath tank
connectors, table of connections, A.4-4 sweep-flow. See sweep-flow tank
function, 2.2-1, 2.10-1 temperature
input line voltage monitors, 2.10-2 ambient, adjusting display of, 4.65-2
inputs, 2.10-2 changes that require verification of
calibration, 2.25-8, 4.8-1
INDEX
required for instrument operation, 3.1-4, 3.10-4 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
requirements for calibration, 2.25-8, 4.8-1 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-9
role of Diluter ambient in diff analysis, 2.22-5 part number, 8.1-32, 8.1-33
role of Peltier module in retic analysis, 2.23-6 voltage noise tolerances, table of, A.1-9
role of stain heater in retic troubleshooting procedures
analysis, 2.23-1, 2.23-3, 2.23-6 +48 V fault isolation, 7.4-5
test modes aspiration pump, 4.27-1
options available, 2.1-6 CBC lytic reagent pump, 4.22-1
The C: drive is full. Please clear Print and diff lytic reagent pump, 4.28-1
Transmission buffers from Run diff preservative pump, 4.29-1
Configuration., 7.3-13 diluent dispensers, 4.23-1
The probe wipe harness is not connected., 7.2-31 flow-cell errors, 7.5-1
thermistors LED style bar-code scanner speed and electrical
diff ambient. See diff ambient thermistor checks, 4.52-1
Diluter ambient. See Diluter ambient thermistor power up problems, 7.4-1
part number, 8.1-31 retic clearing solution pump, 4.25-1
Three Consecutive Voteouts, 7.2-39 stain pump, 4.24-1
Three consecutive voteouts of WBC, RBC, PLT or TTM. See Triple Transducer module
MCV., 7.2-39 tube detector
thrombocyte adjustment, 4.47-1
definition, GLOSSARY-3 allowable distance to rocker bed, A.1-2
See also Plt LED, when it should light, A.1-2
tie wraps where cap is pierced when adjusted
illustration, 8.2-64 correctly, A.1-2
part numbers, 8.1-31, 8.2-65 tube detector assembly
timing procedures component locations, 2.15-4
bar-code scanner cylinder stroke, A.1-1 function, 2.15-4
CBC lytic reagent and diluent location, 2.15-4
delivery, 4.31-2, 4.31-3 replacement, 4.46-1
tools, part numbers, 8.1-31 tube in position sensor
top left safety switch function, 2.15-4, 4.81-4
location, 2.15-6 testing, 4.81-4
replacement, 4.41-1 tube ram cylinder (CL6)
test, 4.41-2 function, 2.15-5
testing, 4.81-4 function and location reference, A.6-9
top right safety switch location, 2.15-5
function, 2.15-2, 4.81-4 tubing, part numbers, 8.1-33
location, 2.15-1 TV3. See transient voltage suppressor
replacement, 4.41-1 Two NAKs From Diluter, 7.2-39
test, 4.41-2 Two NAKs Sent From AMC, 7.2-39
testing, 4.81-4
transient voltage suppressor
function, 2.5-1 U
trend Unable to read cassette label., 7.2-22
definition, GLOSSARY-3 under left stack switch
Triple Transducer module function, 2.15-6, 4.81-5
component part numbers, 8.1-32 location, 2.15-6
exploded view, 8.2-36 replacement, 4.37-1
INDEX
under right stack switch valves

function, 2.15-2, 4.81-5 Angar. See Angar™ valves
location, 2.15-1 blood sampling. See BSV
replacement, 4.38-1 check. See check valves
testing, 4.81-5 dump. See dump valve
Unknown Diff Error Message, 7.2-39, 7.2-40 pinch. See pinch valves
UNKNOWN Diluter Error Message, 7.2-39, 7.2-40 relief. See relief valve
unloading bay shear. See shear valves
location, GEN•S System, 2.4-4 solenoid. See solenoids valves
location, LH 750 System, 2.4-8 VC1
function, A.6-12
location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
V See also vacuum isolator chamber;VC1-R;
vacuum VC1-W
pump. See compressor/vacuum pump VC1-R
See also vacuum, high; vacuum, low function, A.6-12
vacuum chamber (VC16) location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
function and location reference, A.6-12 location, LH 750 System, A.8-2
vacuum chamber (VC27) See also RBC vacuum isolator chamber
function and location reference, A.6-13 VC1-W
vacuum isolator chamber (VC1) function, A.6-12
function, 2.18-4 location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
vacuum overflow tank (VC22) See also WBC vacuum isolator chamber
function, 2.9-5 VC2
function and location reference, A.6-12 function, A.6-12
sensor testing, 4.81-5 location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
Vacuum overflow tank full., 7.2-24 location, LH 750 System, A.8-2
vacuum overflow tank sensor See also RBC bath, A.6-12
function, 4.81-5 VC3
testing, 4.81-5 function, A.6-13
vacuum regulator (RG2) location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
part number, 8.1-25 See also WBC bath, A.6-13
vacuum trap (VC21) VC10
vacuum, high location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
acceptable limits, A.1-6 location, LH 750 System, A.8-2
connections from Power Supply to Diluter on VC11
the GEN•S System, 3.5-1 function, A.6-12
connections from Power Supply to Diluter on location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
the LH 750 System, 3.13-1 location, LH 750 System, A.8-2
development, 2.9-3 VC12
distribution, 2.9-3, 2.9-5 function, A.6-12
vacuum, low location, GEN•S System, A.7-3
distribution, 2.9-5 VC13
transducer (COUNT VACUUM) function, A.6-12
location, A.3-14 location, GEN•S System, A.7-3
INDEX
location, LH 750 System, A.8-3 VC26

VC14 function, A.6-13
See also sheath tank function, A.6-13
VC16 location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
function, A.6-12 location, LH 750 System, A.8-2
location, GEN•S System, A.7-3 See also diluent/cleaning agent chamber
location, LH 750 System, A.8-5 See also sweep-flow reservoir
See also retic chamber VC30
See also flow cell function, A.6-13
location, GEN•S System, A.7-4 VC32
location, LH 750 System, A.8-4 function, A.6-13
See also needle vent chamber location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
VC21 location, LH 750 System, A.8-2
function, 2.9-5, A.6-12 See also diluent/cleaning agent manifold
function, 2.9-5, A.6-12 location, LH 750 System, A.8-1
location, GEN•S System, A.7-1 VCS calibration. See VCS optimization
location, LH 750 System, A.8-1 VCS measurements
VC23 conductivity (RF), 2.20-1
function, A.6-12 light scatter (LS), 2.20-1
location, GEN•S System, A.7-1 linear light scatter (LLS), 2.20-2
location, LH 750 System, A.8-1 opacity (OP), 2.20-1
See also backwash tank rotated light scatter (RLS), 2.20-2
VC24 volume (DC), 2.20-1
function, A.6-13 VCS noise checks
location, GEN•S System, A.7-5 limits, A.1-9
location, LH 750 System, A.8-5 procedure, 4.75-1
VC25 VCS optimization
function, A.6-13 diff and retic count time specifications, table
location, GEN•S System, A.7-5 of, A.1-9
location, LH 750 System, A.8-5
INDEX
diff and retic sample pressure variation limits, diff lytic reagent and diff preservative
table of, A.1-9 pumps, 2.22-6
diff preservative pump volume optimization, DIFF PROCESSOR card, 2.21-7
peak-to-peak DC conductivity noise diff sample analysis flow, illustration of, 2.22-4
limits, A.1-9 diff sample processing components on the
latex calibration adjustment and verification GEN•S System, illustration, 2.22-1
limits, table of, A.1-10 diff sample processing components on the
LS offset voltages limits, table of, A.1-9 LH 750 System, illustration, 2.22-2
overview, 4.71-1 electronic overview, 2.21-1
procedure flow, block diagram, 4.71-2 electronic overview block diagram, 2.21-1
VCS static and dynamic noise, table of flow cell port functions, table of, 2.20-5
acceptable limits, A.1-9 flow cell ports, illustration of, 2.20-4
See also VCS optimization procedures flow through flow cell, illustration of, 2.20-4
VCS optimization procedures function, 2.20-1
diff lytic reagent pump volume checks, 4.28-1 light scatter (LS) sensor, 2.21-4
diff preservative pump checks, 4.29-1 Light Scatter Preamp module, 2.21-4
diff preservative pump volume processing the sample for diff analysis on the
optimization, 4.66-1 GEN•S System, 2.22-1
flow-cell cleaning, 4.79-1 processing the sample for diff analysis on the
flow-rate adjustment, 4.73-1 LH 750 System, 2.22-2
initial sheath, diff sample and retic sample processing the sample for retic analysis on the
pressure adjustments, 4.72-1 GEN•S System, 2.23-1
laser and flow-cell alignment, 4.76-1 processing the sample for retic analysis on the
LATRON verification procedure, 4.78-1 LH 750 System, 2.23-3
lens block cleaning, 4.80-1 retic analysis conditions, table of
LS gain adjustment, 4.77-1 specifications, A.1-7
preliminary checks, 4.71-5 retic analysis reagent system, 2.23-5
RF Detector Preamp card adjustments, 4.74-1 retic blood sample and stain delivery to stain
VCS noise checks, 4.75-1 chamber, GEN•S System, illustration, 2.23-2
VCS technology parameters. See diff parameters, retic blood sample and stain delivery to stain
retic parameters chamber, LH 750 System, illustration, 2.23-4
VCS Technology system retic sample analysis flow, illustration of, 2.23-5
ANALOG 5 card, 2.21-6 retic sample processing components on the
applying the VCS technology, 2.20-2 GEN•S System, illustration, 2.23-1
COULTER IntelliKinetics™ retic sample processing components on the
application, 2.22-5, 2.23-5 LH 750 System, illustration, 2.23-3
delivering diff and retic samples in the retic stained sample and clearing solution
Automatic mode, illustration of, 2.16-3 delivery to retic chamber, GEN•S System,
delivering diff and retic samples in the Manual illustration, 2.23-2
mode, illustration of, 2.16-7 retic stained sample and clearing solution
determining the diff parameters, 2.22-10 delivery to retic chamber, LH 750 System,
determining the retic parameters, 2.23-6 illustration, 2.23-4
diff analysis conditions, table of RF Detector Preamp card, 2.21-2
specifications, A.1-7 stain heater block diagram, 2.23-6
diff analysis reagent system, 2.22-4 VCS measurements, 2.20-1
diff blood sample and reagent delivery to mixing VCS technology, instrument application
chamber, GEN•S System, illustration, 2.22-2 DC and RF currents, 2.20-2
diff blood sample and reagent delivery to mixing flow through flow cell, illustration of, 2.20-4
chamber, LH 750 System, illustration, 2.22-3 flow-cell hydraulics, 2.20-3
INDEX
hydrodynamically focused cells, illustration connection to Diluter on the LH 750

of, 2.20-4 System, 3.13-3
laser light source, 2.20-2 waste level sensor
light scatter path, illustration of, 2.20-3 function, 4.81-5
sensing area, illustration of, 2.20-2 testing, 4.81-5
verification procedures waste level sensor bypass
bar-code performance, 4.49-1 installation on the GEN•S System, 3.5-3
cassette transport assembly, 5.8-1 installation on the LH 750 System, 3.13-3
diff and retic, 5.6-1 location on the GEN•S System, 3.5-3
LATRON, 4.78-1 location on the LH 750 System, 3.13-3
Power Supply, 5.7-1 WBC
precision, 5.5-1 analyzing the data, 2.19-1
whole blood, 5.4-1 checking precision, 5.5-1
VIC. See vacuum isolator chamber count, timing the data collection, 2.18-5, 2.18-6
VL1 (Power Supply). See dump valve determining reported count on the GEN•S
Vls Air Error, 7.2-40 System, 2.24-2
Vls Diluent Error, 7.2-40 determining reported count on the LH 750
volume (DC) System, 2.24-5
VCS measurement, description of, 2.20-1 diluent dispenser. See WBC diluent dispenser
Volumetric Cylinder generating histogram on the GEN•S
reading correctly for diff lytic reagent pump System, 2.24-2
volumes, 4.28-3 generating histogram on the LH 750
reading correctly for diff preservative pump System, 2.24-5
volumes, 4.29-3 histogram, timing the data
Voteouts of WBC, RBC, PLT or MCV, 7.2-6 collection, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
WBC bath (VC3)
W WBC differential parameters
warning generated by instrument, 2.1-1
definition, 1.1-3 WBC diluent dispenser (PM3)
washers, part numbers, 8.1-37 adjustments, illustration of, 4.23-3, 4.23-4
waste function, 2.18-2
collection, description, 2.13-11 function and location reference, A.6-11
level monitoring, description, 2.13-11 part number, 8.1-24
See also waste level sensor replacement, 4.23-6
waste chamber (VC11) troubleshooting, 4.23-5
function and location reference, A.6-12 volume check, 4.23-1
waste chamber (VC26) volume tolerances, A.1-14
function and location reference, A.6-13 WBC preserve. See diff preservative
waste container WBC vacuum isolator chamber (VC1-W)
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the function, 2.18-4
GEN•S System, 3.5-3 function and location reference, A.6-12
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the white blood cell. See WBC
LH 750 System, 3.13-3 White Pre-amp card. See RED/WHITE PRE-AMP
Waste container full., 7.2-24 cards
waste drain whole blood verification
connection to Diluter on the GEN•S procedure, 5.4-1
System, 3.5-3 Workload has been automatically reset in the
database., 7.3-14
INDEX
Workload has been manually archived, 7.3-14 Workstation messages

Workload has been manually printed, 7.3-14 about the message tables, 7.1-3
Workload has been manually reset in the Workstation screens
database, 7.3-14 Bar-Code Test, illustration of, 4.49-1
Workload was automatically printed., 7.3-14 capture procedure, 4.33-1
Workstation Latex Voltage, illustration of, 4.9-2
connecting to the Analytical Station on the Voltage Matching, illustration of, 4.9-3
GEN•S System, 3.4-7 Wrong Cal Factors, 7.2-41
connecting to the Analytical Station on the Wrong Calibration Type, Latex Sample will not be
LH 750 System, 3.15-1 stored., 7.3-14
determining Hgb results on the LH 750 Wrong Calibration Type, Sample will be stored as a
System, 2.24-7 Patient Sample., 7.3-14
determining MCV results on the LH 750 Wrong Carryover Type, latex Sample will not be
System, 2.24-5 stored., 7.3-14
determining MCV results reported on the Wrong Carryover Type, Sample will be stored as a
GEN•S System, 2.24-3 Patient Sample., 7.3-14
determining MCV results reported on the Wrong Command Interpretation, 7.2-41
LH 750 System, 2.24-5 Wrong Command Sequence, 7.2-41
determining Plt and MPV results on the LH 750 Wrong Control 5C Type, Sample will be stored as a
determining RBC counts on the LH 750 Wrong Control Retics Type, Sample will be stored as a
determining RDW results on the LH 750 Wrong Echo Xmit, 7.2-41
System, 2.24-6 Wrong Match and Balance Type, latex Sample will not
determining WBC counts on the LH 750 be stored., 7.3-14
System, 2.24-5 Wrong Match and Balance Type, Sample will be stored
determining WBC results reported on the as a Patient Sample., 7.3-14
GEN•S System, 2.24-3 Wrong Repro Type, latex Sample will not be
determining WBC results reported on the stored., 7.3-15
LH 750 System, 2.24-5
entering system serial numbers and revisions on
the GEN•S System, 3.7-4 X
entering system serial numbers and revisions on XB all batches were deleted, 7.3-15
thew LH 750 System, 3.16-4 XB current batch was deleted, 7.3-15
error messages, 7.3-1
generating Plt histogram on the LH750
System, 2.24-6
generating RBC histogram on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
generating WBC histogram on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
installation, GEN•S System, 3.2-1
installation, LH 750 System, 3.15-1
leakage current specifications, 2.1-5
power down/power up procedures, 4.1-1
screens. See Workstation screens
software versions, GEN•S System, A.9-1
software versions, LH 750 System, A.9-1
Workstation comms timeout, 7.2-41
TRADEMARKS
The BECKMAN COULTER logo, 4 C PLUS, 5C, AccuGate, ACCUVETTE, COULTER,

COULTER CLENZ, Erythrolyse, GEN•S, GEN•S SM, GEN•S ST, IntelliKinetics, ISOTON,
LATRON, RCS, S-CAL, SCATTER PAK, SmartStart, and Stabilyse are trademarks of
Beckman Couter, Inc.
All other trademarks, service marks, products, or services are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
PN 4277219B
COULTER® Analytical Stations
Service Manual
Volume II
TM
* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95 0000
COULTER CORPORATION
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
MAIN
BP CBC DIFF RETICS
II
III
IV
V
TEMP
60 30.0 4.9 28 115 DC
VI
VII
VIII
POWER SUPPLY
PN 4277219B (July 2001)

COULTER CORPORATION
A Beckman Coulter Company
Miami, Florida 33196-2500 USA
LEGAL NOTICES
Beckman Coulter, Inc. makes no representation that, upon furnishing this service manual, the holder of the manual will have
the necessary technical capabilities and know-how to properly troubleshoot and repair any of the equipment specified in the
manual. Beckman Coulter, Inc. assumes no liability whatsoever, including consequential and incidental damages, resulting
from improper operation of Beckman Coulter instruments after maintenance of Beckman Coulter instruments has been
performed by persons not employed by Beckman Coulter, Inc. Furthermore, Beckman Coulter, Inc. assumes no liability
whatsoever for any personal injury or property damage resulting from maintenance and/or repair of Beckman Coulter
instruments performed by persons not employed by Beckman Coulter, Inc.
READ ALL PRODUCT MANUALS AND CONSULT WITH BECKMAN COULTER-TRAINED PERSONNEL
BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO OPERATE INSTRUMENT.
HAZARDS AND OPERATIONAL PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and IMPORTANTS alert you as follows:
WARNING - Might cause injury.

CAUTION - Might cause damage to the instrument.
IMPORTANT - Might cause misleading results.
Beckman Coulter, Inc. urges its customers to comply with all national health and safety standards such as the use of barrier
protection. This may include, but it is not limited to, protective eyewear, gloves, and suitable laboratory attire when
operating or maintaining this or any other automated laboratory analyzer.
"This Service Manual contains confidential information of Beckman Coulter, Inc. and its receipt or possession does not
convey any rights to reproduce, disclose its contents, or to manufacture, use, or sell anything it may describe.
Reproduction, disclosure, or use without specific written authorization of Beckman Coulter, Inc. is strictly forbidden."
Copyright © Beckman Coulter, Inc. 2001

All rights reserved.
CONTENTS VOLUME II
5 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES, 5.1-1
5.1 SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, 5.1-1

Purpose, 5.1-1
Startup Checks, 5.1-1
LATRON Control Checks, 5.1-1
5C Cell Control Checks, 5.1-1
Retic-C Cell Control Checks, 5.1-1
Recording Results, 5.1-1
5.2 EXTENDED SHUTDOWN AND STARTUP PROCEDURES, 5.2-1

Purpose, 5.2-1
Extended Shutdown, 5.2-1
Long-Term Shutdown, 5.2-2
Startup after Extended Shutdown, 5.2-2
Startup after Long-Term Shutdown, 5.2-2
5.3 DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES, 5.3-1

Purpose, 5.3-1
Decontaminating with Bleach, 5.3-1
Procedure, 5.3-2
Decontaminating with Acetic Acid - Abbreviated Procedure, 5.3-2
Procedure, 5.3-2
Decontaminating with Acetic Acid - Extended Procedure, 5.3-3
Decontaminating the Diluter, 5.3-4
Rinsing the Diluter, 5.3-5
Installing New Reagents and Checking the Analytical Station, 5.3-5
5.4 WHOLE BLOOD VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, 5.4-1

Purpose, 5.4-1
Procedure, 5.4-1
5.5 PRECISION VERIFICATION, 5.5-1

Purpose, 5.5-1
Procedure, 5.5-1
5.6 DIFF AND RETIC VERIFICATION, 5.6-1

Purpose, 5.6-1
Procedure, 5.6-1
5.7 POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION, 5.7-1

Purpose, 5.7-1
Procedure, 5.7-1
PN 4277219B iii
CONTENTS VOLUME II
5.8 CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY VERIFICATION, 5.8-1

Purpose, 5.8-1
Procedure, 5.8-1
5.9 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE, 5.9-1
6 SCHEMATICS, 6.1-1
6.1 SCHEMATICS INCLUDED, 6.1-1
7 TROUBLESHOOTING, 7.1-1
7.1 ANALYTICAL STATION AND WORKSTATION MESSAGES, 7.1-1

System Alarms, 7.1-1
Analytical Station Messages, 7.1-1
Icons and Traffic Lights Displayed on the Workstation with Analytical Station
Messages, 7.1-1
About the Tables of Analytical Station Messages Under Heading 7.2, 7.1-2
Workstation Messages, 7.1-3
Icons and Traffic Lights Displayed on the Workstation with Workstation
Messages, 7.1-3
About the Tables of Workstation Messages Under Heading 7.3, 7.1-3
7.2 TABLES OF ANALYTICAL STATION MESSAGES, 7.2-1
7.3 TABLES OF WORKSTATION MESSAGES, 7.3-1
7.4 TROUBLESHOOTING POWER-UP PROBLEMS, 7.4-1

Summary, 7.4-1
Power Voltages and Power Voltage Signal Lines, 7.4-1
Power-Up Sequence, 7.4-1
Dump Valve Check Routine, 7.4-4
48 Volts Failure Isolation, 7.4-5
Procedure, 7.4-5
7.5 FLOW-CELL ERRORS FC, PC1, AND PC2, 7.5-1
8 PARTS LISTS, 8.1-1
8.1 MASTER PARTS LIST, 8.1-1
8.2 ILLUSTRATED PARTS, 8.2-1
A QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION, A.1-1
A.1 TOLERANCES AND LIMITS, A.1-1

Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications, A.1-1
Bar-Code Read Rate, A.1-1
Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Checks, A.1-1
Bar-Code Scanner Electrical Checks - LED Style Bar-Code Reader, A.1-1
Bar-Code Scanner Position Checks, A.1-1
iv PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME II
Bar-Code Scanner Timing Checks, A.1-1

Flipper Position Check, A.1-1
Rocker Bed Belt Check, A.1-1
Rocker Bed Timing Check, A.1-2
Tube Detector Checks, A.1-2
CBC Calibration Limits, A.1-2
CBC Noise Level Limits, A.1-3
Electronic Test Limits, A.1-4
Performance Specifications, A.1-5
Pressure and Vacuum Tolerances, A.1-6
Sample Conditions/Specifications, A.1-7
Diff and Retic Analysis Conditions, A.1-7
Diluent/CBC Lytic Reagent Timing, A.1-8
VCS Optimization Limits, A.1-8
Voltage Limits, A.1-10
Volume Specifications, A.1-13
Pumps, A.1-13
A.2 ANALYZER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS, A.2-1

AMC, A.2-1
Jumpers, A.2-1
Switch, A.2-1
API - SIGNAL GENERATOR Card, A.2-2
Switches, A.2-2
BD ADJ Card, A.2-3
Connectors, A.2-3
Test Points and Adjustments, A.2-3
COMM INTERFACE Card, A.2-4
Switches, A.2-4
CRT4 Display Card (In Scope Module), A.2-5
Switch, A.2-5
DIFF PROCESSOR Card, A.2-6
Switch, A.2-6
DILUTER CPU Card, A.2-7
Connector, A.2-7
LED, A.2-7
Switches, A.2-7
DILUTER PROCESSOR Card, A.2-9
Switches, A.2-9
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2, A.2-11
R/W/P SC/A Card, A.2-12
Connectors, A.2-12
A.3 DILUTER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS, A.3-1

Bar-Code Decoder Card, A.3-1
Connectors, A.3-1
Jumper, A.3-1
Diff Power Supply Card, A.3-2
Connectors, A.3-2
Diluter 1 Card, A.3-3
PN 4277219B v
CONTENTS VOLUME II
Connectors, A.3-4
LEDs, A.3-4
Connectors, A.3-7
LEDs, A.3-7
Connectors, A.3-9
Connectors, A.3-10
LEDs, A.3-10
Diluter Cbl Adapter Card, A.3-11
Connectors, A.3-11
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card, A.3-12
Connectors, A.3-12
LEDs, A.3-12
Test Points, A.3-13
Keyboard and Display Interface Card (GEN•S System), A.3-13
Connectors, A.3-13
Potentiometers, A.3-13
PVT Card, A.3-14
Connectors, A.3-14
Reservoir Interface Card, A.3-15
Connectors, A.3-15
RS/Opto Infc Card, A.3-16
Connectors, A.3-16
Sensor Distribution Card, A.3-17
Connectors, A.3-17
LEDs, A.3-17
Six-Channel Preamp Card, A.3-18
Connectors, A.3-18
A.4 POWER SUPPLY CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT

DESCRIPTIONS, A.4-1
Bulk Power Filter Card, A.4-1
Connectors, A.4-1
Bulk Power Supply, A.4-2
Connectors, A.4-2
Motor Controller Card, A.4-3
System Power Controller Card, A.4-4
Connectors, A.4-4
LEDs, A.4-4
A.5 DILUTER F-FUNCTIONS, A.5-1
A.6 DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT FUNCTIONS AND LOCATION

REFERENCES, A.6-1
Summary, A.6-1
Solenoids Valves, A.6-1
vi PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME II
Pinch Valves and Asco® Angar™ Valves, A.6-8

Main Diluter Fluidic Components, A.6-9
A.7 GEN•S SYSTEM DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT LOCATIONS, A.7-1
A.8 LH 750 SYSTEM DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT LOCATIONS, A.8-1
A.9 SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS, A.9-1
A.10 MENU TREES, A.10-1
ABBREVIATIONS, ABBREVIATIONS-1
GLOSSARY, GLOSSARY-1
INDEX, INDEX-1
TRADEMARKS
ILLUSTRATIONS
5.3-1 Flush Input Line, 5.3-1
5.4-1 Precision Screen, 5.4-1
7.4-1 Power-Up Sequence, 7.4-3
7.4-2 Dump Valve Check Routine, 7.4-4
8.2-1 Main Analytical Station Components Illustrated, 8.2-1
8.2-2 Analyzer, Front Door (See Table 8.2-2), 8.2-2
8.2-3 Analyzer, Card Cage and Rear Door and Hardware (See Table 8.2-3), 8.2-4
8.2-4 GEN•S System Diluter, Front Doors and Covers (See Table 8.2-4), 8.2-6
8.2-5 Diluter, Cassette Guide Panels (See Table 8.2-5), 8.2-8
8.2-6 Diluter, Left Door and Compartment (See Table 8.2-6), 8.2-10
8.2-7 Diluter, Left Front Panel (See Table 8.2-7), 8.2-12
8.2-8 Diluter, Rear of Left Front Panel (See Table 8.2-8), 8.2-14
8.2-9 Diluter, Center Front Panel (See Table 8.2-9), 8.2-16
8.2-10 Diluter, Rear of Center Front Panel (See Table 8.2-10), 8.2-18
8.2-11 Diluter, Right Front Panel (See Table 8.2-11), 8.2-20
8.2-12 Diluter, Rear of Right Front Panel (See Table 8.2-12), 8.2-22
8.2-13 Diluter, Right Door and Compartment (See Table 8.2-13), 8.2-24
8.2-14 Diluter, Piercing Station, Rocker Bed, and Components under Front Cover
(See Table 8.2-14), 8.2-26
8.2-15 Diluter, Piercing Station Assembly (See Table 8.2-15), 8.2-28
8.2-16 Diluter, Tube Ram Cylinder and Bar-Code Scanners and Cylinder See
Table 8.2-16), 8.2-30
8.2-17 Diluter, Rocker Bed (See Table 8.2-17), 8.2-32
8.2-18 Diluter, Rocker Bed Mounting Channel (See Table 8.2-18), 8.2-34
8.2-19 Diluter, Triple Transducer Module (See Table 8.2-19), 8.2-36
8.2-20 Diluter, Triple Transducer Module Translation Plates and Hardware (See
Table 8.2-20), 8.2-38
8.2-21 Diluter, Diff Module (See Table 8.2-21), 8.2-40
8.2-22 Diluter, Retic Module (See Table 8.2-22), 8.2-42
8.2-23 Diluter, BSV Module (See Table 8.2-23), 8.2-44
PN 4277219B vii
CONTENTS VOLUME II
8.2-24 Diluter, Probe-Wipe Module (See Table 8.2-24), 8.2-46

8.2-25 Diluter, Aspiration Pump Module, MF4 and MF13 (See Table 8.2-25), 8.2-48
8.2-26 Diluter, Right Rear Door (See Table 8.2-26), 8.2-50
8.2-27 Diluter, Left Rear Doors (See Table 8.2-27), 8.2-52
8.2-28 Diluter, Hydraulic Inputs to Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir
(See Table 8.2-28), 8.2-54
8.2-29 Diluter, Hydraulic Inputs to Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent Reservoir
(See Table 8.2-29), 8.2-56
8.2-30 Check Valves and Chokes (See Table 8.2-30.), 8.2-58
8.2-31 Fittings and Miscellaneous Hardware (See Table 8.2-31), 8.2-60
8.2-32 Common Valves (See Table 8.2-32), 8.2-62
8.2-33 Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware (See Table 8.2-33), 8.2-64
8.2-34 Power Supply, Overview and Compressor/Vacuum Pump, Regulators and Filter
(See Table 8.2-34), 8.2-66
8.2-35 Power Supply, SPC Card and Display, and Air Water Separator (See
Table 8.2-35), 8.2-68
8.2-36 Power Supply, Bulk Power Supply, Motor Controller Card and Mufflers (See
Table 8.2-36), 8.2-70
8.2-37 Power Supply, Covers and Panels (See Table 8.2-37), 8.2-72
8.2-38 LH 750 System Diluter and Analyzer Covers and Doors (See Table 8.2-38), 8.2-74
8.2-39 LH 750 System Analyzer Front Door Hardware (See Table 8.2-39), 8.2-76
8.2-40 LH 750 System Diluter Lower Front Door and Hardware (See
Table 8.2-40), 8.2-77
8.2-41 LH 750 System Analyzer Card Cage, Rear Door and Hardware (See
Table 8.2-41), 8.2-78
8.2-42 Random Access Module Components (See Table 8.2-42), 8.2-80
A.1-1 CBC Lytic Reagent and Diluent Delivery Timing, A.1-8
A.2-1 AMC Component Locations, A.2-1
A.2-2 API Card Component Locations, A.2-2
A.2-3 BD ADJ Card Component Locations, A.2-3
A.2-4 COMM INTERFACE Card Component Locations, A.2-4
A.2-5 CRT4 Display Card Component Locations, A.2-5
A.2-6 DIFF PROCESSOR Card Component Locations, A.2-6
A.2-7 DILUTER CPU Card Component Locations, A.2-7
A.2-8 DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Component Locations, A.2-9
A.2-9 RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 Jumper Locations and Settings, A.2-11
A.2-10 R/W/P SC/A Card Component Locations, A.2-12
A.3-1 Bar-Code Decoder Card Component Locations, A.3-1
A.3-2 Diff Power Supply Card Component Locations, A.3-2
A.3-3 Diluter 1 Card Component Locations (Used with Old Diluter
Interconnects), A.3-3
A.3-4 Diluter 1 Card Component Locations (Used with New Diluter
Interconnects)t, A.3-3
A.3-5 Diluter 2 Card Component Locations (GEN•S System SW3A or Lower, without
SlideMaker), A.3-5
A.3-6 Diluter 2 Card Component Locations (GEN•S System SW3A or Lower, with or
without SlideMaker), A.3-5
A.3-7 Diluter 2 REL Card Component Locations), A.3-6
A.3-8 Diluter 2 RBD Card Component Locations, A.3-6
viii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME II
A.3-9 Diluter 3 Card Component Locations, A.3-8

A.3-10 Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface Card Component Locations, A.3-8
1.3-11 Diluter 3 LH Card Component Locations, A.3-8
A.3-13 Diluter Cbl Adapter Card Component Location, A.3-11
A.3-14 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Component Locations, A.3-12
A.3-15 Keyboard and Display Interface Card Component Locations on the GEN•S
System, A.3-13
A.3-16 PVT Card Component Locations, A.3-14
A.3-17 Reservoir Interface Card Component Locations, A.3-15
A.3-18 RS/Opto Intfc Card Component Locations, A.3-16
A.3-19 Sensor Distribution Card Component Locations, A.3-17
A.3-20 Six-Channel Preamp Card Component Locations, A.3-18
A.4-1 Bulk Power Filter Card Component Locations, A.4-1
A.4-2 Bulk Power Supply Connectors, A.4-2
A.4-3 Motor Controller Card Locations and Settings, A.4-3
A.4-4 System Power Controller Card Component Locations, A.4-4
A.7-2 GEN•S System Diluter - Rear of Left Front Panel, A.7-1
A.7-1 GEN•S System Diluter - Left Front Panel, A.7-1
A.7-3 GEN•S System Diluter - Center Front Panel, A.7-2
A.7-4 GEN•S System Diluter - Rear of Center Front Panel, A.7-2
A.7-5 GEN•S System Diluter - Right Front Panel, A.7-3
A.7-6 GEN•S System Diluter - Rear of Right Front Panel, A.7-3
A.7-8 GEN•S System Diluter - Sampling Station, A.7-4
A.7-7 GEN•S System Diluter - Under Front Cover Overview, A.7-4
A.7-9 GEN•S System Diluter - Retic Module, A.7-5
A.7-10 GEN•S System Diluter - Diff Module, A.7-5
A.7-11 GEN•S System Diluter - Lower Left Rear Door, A.7-6
A.7-12 GEN•S System Diluter- Right Rear Door, A.7-6
A.8-1 LH 750 System Diluter - Left Front Panel, A.8-1
A.8-2 LH 750 System Diluter - Rear of Left Front Panel, A.8-1
A.8-3 LH 750 System Diluter - Center Front Panel, A.8-2
A.8-4 LH 750 System Diluter - Rear of Center Front Panel, A.8-2
A.8-5 LH 750 System Diluter - Right Front Panel, A.8-3
A.8-6 LH 750 System Diluter - Rear of Right Front Panel, A.8-3
A.8-8 LH 750 System Diluter - Sampling Station, A.8-4
A.8-7 LH 750 System Diluter - Under Front Cover Overview, A.8-4
A.8-9 LH 750 System Diluter - Random Access Module, A.8-5
A.8-10 LH 750 System Diluter - Diff Module, A.8-5
A.8-11 LH 750 System Diluter - Lower Left Rear Door, A.8-6
A.10-1 GEN•S System Analyzer Menu Summary, A.10-1
A.10-2 LH 750 System Analyzer Menu Summary, A.10-2
TABLES
7.2-1 System Messages - Symbols and Numbers, 7.2-1
7.2-2 System Messages - A, 7.2-2
7.2-3 System Messages - B, 7.2-7
7.2-4 System Messages - C, 7.2-9
7.2-5 System Messages - D, 7.2-11
PN 4277219B ix
CONTENTS VOLUME II
7.2-6 System Messages - E through G, 7.2-17

7.2-7 System Messages - H, 7.2-19
7.2-8 System Messages - I through K, 7.2-21
7.2-9 System Messages - L, 7.2-22
7.2-10 System Messages - M through O, 7.2-26
7.2-11 System Messages - P through Q, 7.2-28
7.2-12 System Messages - R, 7.2-32
7.2-13 System Messages - S, 7.2-35
7.2-14 System Messages - T through V, 7.2-39
7.2-15 System Messages - U, 7.2-40
7.2-16 System Messages - W through Z, 7.2-41
7.3-1 Workstation Messages - A through B, 7.3-1
7.3-2 Workstation Messages - C through G, 7.3-2
7.3-3 Workstation Messages - H, 7.3-4
7.3-4 Workstation Messages - I through K, 7.3-7
7.3-5 Workstation Messages - L through N, 7.3-8
7.3-7 Workstation Messages - N, 7.3-9
7.3-8 Workstation Messages - O, 7.3-10
7.3-9 Workstation Messages - P through V, 7.3-13
7.3-13 Workstation Messages - W through Z, 7.3-14
7.4-1 Power Voltages and Power Voltage Signal Lines, 7.4-1
7.4-2 AC Power Timing Sequence, 7.4-1
7.4-3 Instrument Power-On Timing Sequence, 7.4-2
7.5-1 Flow-Cell Errors, 7.5-1
8.1-1 Common Names and Categories Used in Master Parts List, 8.1-1
8.1-2 Master Parts List - A through B, 8.1-3
8.1-3 Master Parts List - C, 8.1-4
8.1-4 Master Parts List - D through E, 8.1-10
8.1-5 Master Parts List - F through G, 8.1-11
8.1-6 Master Parts List - H, 8.1-15
8.1-7 Master Parts List - I through M, 8.1-19
8.1-8 Master Parts List - N and O, 8.1-21
8.1-9 Master Parts List - P through R, 8.1-22
8.1-10 Master Parts List - S, 8.1-26
8.1-11 Master Parts List - T, 8.1-31
8.1-12 Master Parts List - U through V, 8.1-36
8.1-13 Master Parts List - W through Z, 8.1-37
8.2-1 Illustrations Not Referenced from Figure 8.1, 8.2-1
8.2-2 Analyzer, Front Cover (See Figure 8.2-2), 8.2-3
8.2-3 Analyzer, Card Cage and Rear Panel and Cover (See Figure 8.2-3), 8.2-5
8.2-4 Diluter, Front Covers (See Figure 8.2-4), 8.2-7
8.2-5 Diluter, Cassette Guide Panels (See Figure 8.2-5), 8.2-9
8.2-6 Diluter, Left Door and Compartment (See Figure 8.2-6), 8.2-11
8.2-7 Diluter, Left Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-7), 8.2-13
8.2-8 Diluter, Rear of Left Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-8), 8.2-15
8.2-9 Diluter, Center Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-9), 8.2-17
8.2-10 Diluter, Rear of Center Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-10), 8.2-19
8.2-11 Diluter, Right Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-11), 8.2-21
8.2-12 Diluter, Rear of Right Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-12), 8.2-23
x PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME II
8.2-13 Diluter, Right Door and Compartment (See Figure 8.2-13), 8.2-25
(See Figure 8.2-14), 8.2-27
8.2-15 Diluter, Piercing Station Assembly (See Figure 8.2-15), 8.2-29
8.2-16 Diluter, Bar-Code Scanner and Tube Ram Cylinder (See Figure 8.2-16), 8.2-31
8.2-17 Diluter, Rocker Bed (See Figure 8.2-17), 8.2-33
8.2-18 Diluter, Rocker Bed Mounting Channel (See Figure 8.2-18), 8.2-35
8.2-19 Diluter, Triple Transducer Module (See Figure 8.2-19), 8.2-37
Figure 8.2-20), 8.2-39
8.2-21 Diluter, Diff Module (See Figure 8.2-21), 8.2-41
8.2-22 Diluter, Retic Module (See Figure 8.2-22), 8.2-43
8.2-23 Diluter, BSV Module (See Figure 8.2-23), 8.2-45
8.2-24 Diluter, Probe-Wipe Module (See Figure 8.2-24), 8.2-47
8.2-25 Diluter, Aspiration Pump Module, MF4 and MF13 (See Figure 8.2-25), 8.2-49
8.2-26 Diluter, Right Rear Door (See Figure 8.2-26), 8.2-51
8.2-27 Diluter, Left Rear Doors (See Figure 8.2-27), 8.2-53
(See Figure 8.2-28), 8.2-55
(See Figure 8.2-29), 8.2-57
8.2-30 Check Valves and Chokes (See Figure 8.2-30), 8.2-59
8.2-31 Fittings and Miscellaneous Hardware (See Figure 8.2-31), 8.2-61
8.2-32 Common Valves (See Figure 8.2-32), 8.2-63
8.2-33 Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware (See Figure 8.2-33), 8.2-65
(See Figure 8.2-34), 8.2-67
Figure 8.2-35), 8.2-69
Figure 8.2-36), 8.2-71
8.2-37 Power Supply, Covers and Panels (See Figure 8.2-37), 8.2-73
8.2-38 LH 750 System Diluter and Analyzer Covers and Doors (See
Figure 8.2-38), 8.2-75
8.2-39 LH 750 System Analyzer Front Door Hardware (See Figure 8.2-39), 8.2-76
Figure 8.2-40), 8.2-77
8.2-41 LH 750 System Analyzer Components (See Figure 8.2-41), 8.2-79
8.2-42 Random Access Components (See Figure 8.2-42), 8.2-81
A.1-1 Bar-Code Read-Rate Specifications, A.1-1
A.1-2 Bar-Code Scanner Electrical Checks - LED Style Bar-Code Reader, A.1-1
A.1-3 Latex Voltage Test Limits, A.1-2
A.1-4 Voltage Matching Test Limits, A.1-2
A.1-5 Flow-Rate Test Limits, A.1-3
A.1-6 CBC Calibration Factor Limits, A.1-3
A.1-7 Red and White Aperture Impedance, A.1-3
A.1-8 Red and White Aperture Isolation Impedance (with Diluent), A.1-3
A.1-9 DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST Limits, A.1-4
A.1-10 RAMP and PRECISION TEST Limits , A.1-4
A.1-11 Parameter Test Limits, A.1-5
PN 4277219B xi
CONTENTS VOLUME II
A.1-12 Mode-to-Mode Comparison Limits*, A.1-6

A.1-13 Pressure and Vacuum Tolerances, A.1-6
A.1-14 Diff Analysis Conditions, A.1-7
A.1-15 Retic Analysis Conditions, A.1-7
A.1-16 CBC Lytic Reagent and Diluent Delivery Limits, A.1-8
A.1-17 LATRON Primer Background Limits, A.1-8
A.1-18 VCS Pressure Variation Limits, A.1-9
A.1-19 Diff/Retic Cell Count Times and Values and Diff Conductivity Noise Limits, A.1-9
A.1-20 Diff/Retic TTM Voltage Noise Limits Verification, A.1-9
A.1-21 LS Offset Voltage, A.1-9
A.1-22 VCS Latex Calibration and Verification Limits, A.1-10
A.1-23 48 V Check, A.1-10
A.1-24 AC Line Input Voltage Specifications, A.1-11
A.1-25 Analyzer Backplane Voltage Test Points, A.1-11
A.1-26 Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Voltage Ranges on GEN•S System, A.1-11
A.1-27 Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Voltage Ranges on LH 750 System, A.1-11
A.1-28 Clog Detector Threshold Voltage - For RF Detector Preamp Card with Vacuum
Tube, A.1-12
A.1-29 Diluter Card Voltage Test Points, A.1-12
A.1-30 Hgb Voltage Limits, A.1-13
A.1-31 Pump Volume Tolerances, A.1-14
A.2-1 AMC Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-1
A.2-2 AMC Card Switch, SW1, Temperature Selection, A.2-2
A.2-3 API Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-2
A.2-5 BD ADJ Card Connectors, A.2-3
A.2-6 Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Adjustments, A.2-3
A.2-7 COMM INTERFACE Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-4
A.2-9 CRT4 Display Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-5
A.2-10 DIFF PROCESSOR Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-6
A.2-11 DILUTER CPU Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-7
A.2-12 DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-9
A.2-13 R/W/P SC/A Card Connectors, A.2-12
A.3-1 Bar-Code Decoder Card Connectors, A.3-1
A.3-2 Diff Power Supply Card Connectors, A.3-2
A.3-3 Diluter 1 Card Connectors, A.3-4
A.3-4 Diluter 1 Card LEDs, A.3-4
A.3-7 Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Adjustments on the Diluter 2 Card, A.3-7
A.3-11 Diluter 4 Card Test Points and Adjustments, A.3-11
A.3-12 Diluter Cbl Adapter Card Connectors, A.3-11
A.3-13 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Connectors, A.3-12
A.3-14 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card LEDs, A.3-12
A.3-15 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Test Points, A.3-13
xii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS VOLUME II
A.3-16 Keyboard and Display Interface Card Connectors on the GEN•S System, A.3-13
A.3-17 PVT Card Connectors, A.3-14
A.3-18 Reservoir Interface Card Connectors, A.3-15
A.3-19 RS/Opto Intfc Card Connectors, A.3-16
A.3-20 Sensor Distribution Card Connectors, A.3-17
A.3-21 Sensor Distribution Card LEDs, A.3-17
A.3-22 Six-Channel Preamp Card Connectors, A.3-18
A.4-1 Bulk Power Filter Card Connectors, A.4-1
A.4-3 System Power Controller Card Connectors, A.4-4
A.4-4 System Power Controller Card Voltage Status LEDs, A.4-4
A.5-1 Diluter F-Key Functions, A.5-1
A.6-1 Solenoid Valve Functions, A.6-1
A.6-2 Pinch and Angar Valve Location References, A.6-8
A.6-3 Diluter Components, A.6-9
A.9-1 Worldwide Released Configurations for the GEN•S System*, A.9-1
A.9-2 Worldwide Released Configurations for the LH 750 System*, A.9-1
PN 4277219B xiii
CONTENTS VOLUME II
xiv PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
5
5 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES, 5.1-1
5.1 SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, 5.1-1

Purpose, 5.1-1
Startup Checks, 5.1-1
LATRON Control Checks, 5.1-1
5C Cell Control Checks, 5.1-1
Retic-C Cell Control Checks, 5.1-1
Recording Results, 5.1-1
5.2 EXTENDED SHUTDOWN AND STARTUP PROCEDURES, 5.2-1

Purpose, 5.2-1
Extended Shutdown, 5.2-1
Long-Term Shutdown, 5.2-2
Startup after Extended Shutdown, 5.2-2
Startup after Long-Term Shutdown, 5.2-2
5.3 DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES, 5.3-1

Purpose, 5.3-1
Decontaminating with Bleach, 5.3-1
Procedure, 5.3-2
Decontaminating with Acetic Acid - Abbreviated Procedure, 5.3-2
Procedure, 5.3-2
Decontaminating with Acetic Acid - Extended Procedure, 5.3-3
Decontaminating the Diluter, 5.3-4
Rinsing the Diluter, 5.3-5
Installing New Reagents and Checking the Analytical Station, 5.3-5
5.4 WHOLE BLOOD VERIFICATION PROCEDURE, 5.4-1

Purpose, 5.4-1
Procedure, 5.4-1
5.5 PRECISION VERIFICATION, 5.5-1

Purpose, 5.5-1
Procedure, 5.5-1
5.6 DIFF AND RETIC VERIFICATION, 5.6-1

Purpose, 5.6-1
Procedure, 5.6-1
5.7 POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION, 5.7-1

Purpose, 5.7-1
Procedure, 5.7-1
PN 4277219B 5-i
CONTENTS
5.8 CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY VERIFICATION, 5.8-1

Purpose, 5.8-1
Procedure, 5.8-1
5.9 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE, 5.9-1
ILLUSTRATIONS
5.3-1 Flush Input Line, 5.3-1

5-ii PN 4277219B
5MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 5
5.1 SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
Purpose
Use this procedure at the end of each service call to verify the instrument is operating
correctly.
B LATRON primer
B LATRON control
B COULTER 5C or 5C-ES cell controls
B Retic-C cell controls
B System Verification Report form
Startup Checks
1. Press START UP.
2. Verify all daily checks are acceptable.
LATRON Control Checks

1. Do F57 to select the Diff and Retics LATRON mode.
2. Run the LATRON primer and LATRON control.
3. Verify all parameters are within acceptable limits.
5C Cell Control Checks

1. On the GEN•S System, select the CBC/DIFF test mode.
Note: On the LH 750 System, this selection is made automatically.
2. Run all levels of 5C or 5C-ES cell control in the Automatic mode.
Retic-C Cell Control Checks

1. On the GEN•S System, select the RETIC ONLY test mode.
Note: On the LH 750 System, this selection is made automatically.
2. Run all levels of Retic-C control in the Automatic mode.
Recording Results
Complete the System Verification Report form as directed under Heading 4.61.
PN 4277219B Type of Review 5.1-1

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
5.1-2 PN 4277219B Type of Review

EXTENDED SHUTDOWN AND STARTUP PROCEDURES 5
5.2 EXTENDED SHUTDOWN AND STARTUP PROCEDURES
Purpose
ATTENTION: This procedure is valid as written for the GEN•S System. A revised procedure is
needed for the LH 750 System and was not yet available at the time of publication.
If the Analytical Station is not operated for four or more days, the reagents in the Diluter can
dry out and precipitate. Use the following shutdown procedures to prevent this problem:
r If theAnalytical Station will not be operated for three to seven days, do the Extended
Shutdown procedure. This procedure removes the reagents from the system and replaces
the reagents with deionized or distilled water.
r If the Analytical Station will not be operated for longer than a week, will be put into
storage, or will be shipped from its current location, do the Extended Shutdown
procedure and the Long-Term Shutdown procedure. The Long-Term Shutdown
procedure drains all liquid from the Diluter and releases the pinch valve tubing.
Before operating the Analytical Station after an extended shutdown, do the appropriate
startup procedure:
r If the Analytical Station was shut down using the Extended Shutdown procedure, use the
Startup after Extended Shutdown procedure to remove the deionized water, prime the
Diluter with reagents and verify instrument operation.
r If the Analytical Station was shut down using the Long-Term Shutdown procedure, use
the Startup after Long-Term Shutdown procedure to prime the Diluter with reagents and
verify instrument operation.
B 1.5 to 2 L deionized or distilled water in a container
B Red pinch valve deactivator clips (for the Long-Term Shutdown procedure only)
B Empty container (for the Long-Term Shutdown and the Start Up after Extended
Shutdown procedures only)
Extended Shutdown
1. Press SHUT DOWN. Let cleaning agent remain in the instrument for at least 30 minutes.
2. Remove the retic stain pickup tube from its container, rinse the outside of the pickup
tube with deionized water and place it in the container of deionized water.
ATTENTION: DO NOT remove the waste pickup tube from the waste container or drain.
3. Remove the rest of the reagent pickup tubes from their reagent containers and place the
tubes in the container of deionized water.
4. Press SHUT DOWN to prime the cleaning agent lines with deionized water.
5. Do F17 to prime the cleaning agent pump lines with deionized water.
6. Do F67 three times to prime all of the reagent lines with deionized water. Refill the
deionized water container as needed.
PN 4277219B 5.2-1
EXTENDED SHUTDOWN AND STARTUP PROCEDURES
7. If the unit will not be operated for longer than a week, will be put into storage, or will be
shipped from its current location, do the Long-Term Shutdown procedure now,
8. Optional: Power down the Analytical Station as directed under Heading 4.1.
Long-Term Shutdown
1. Perform the Extended Shutdown procedure.
ATTENTION: DO NOT disconnect the reagent lines or waste line from the back of the Diluter.
2. Remove the pickup tubes from the deionized water container and place the tubes in an
empty container to prime the system with air.
3. Press SHUT DOWN to prime the cleaning agent lines with air.
4. Select F68 to remove all reagents. Leave this function activated for 30 minutes.
5. Reset instrument to exit F68.
6. Press POWER OFF, turn off the Power Supply breaker, and unplug the main ac power cable.
7. Install red pinch valve deactivator clips on all pinch valves.
Startup after Extended Shutdown

1. Place the pickup tubes in an empty container.
2. Power up the Analytical Station as directed under Heading 4.1.
3. Do F67 four times to remove the deionized water from the Diluter.
4. Press SHUT DOWN to remove the deionized water from the cleaning agent lines.
5. Do F17 twice to remove water from the cleaning agent pump.
6. Place the pickup tubes in the reagent containers.
7. Select F31 to fill the reagent reservoirs with reagent.
8. Select F67 to prime the reagents.
9. Press SHUT DOWN to prime the cleaning agent.
10. Select F17 to prime the cleaning agent pump.
11. Press START UP.
12. Do the SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE as directed under Heading 5.1.
Startup after Long-Term Shutdown

1. Remove all red pinch valve deactivator clips from the pinch valves.
2. Place the pickup tubes in their respective reagent containers.
3. Power up the Analytical Station as directed under Heading 4.1.
4. Select F31 to fill the reagent reservoirs with reagent.
5. Select F67 three times to prime the reagents.
6. Press SHUT DOWN.
7. Select F17 to prime the cleaning agent pump.
8. Press START UP.
5.2-2 PN 4277219B
DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES 5
5.3 DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES
Purpose
Use the procedures in this section to decontaminate the Diluter lines and components
exposed to blood before working on the instrument and when required by the laboratory.
r The Decontaminating with Bleach procedure can only be used on an Analytical Station
configured with a DISINFECT port as shown in Figure 5.3-1 and with software version
3A or lower.
r The Decontaminating with Acetic Acid - Abbreviated Procedure and the
Decontaminating with Acetic Acid - Extended Procedure can be used on any GEN•S
System Analytical Station.
Note: This procedure is valid as written for the GEN•S System. A revised procedure is
Figure 5.3-1 Flush Input Line

D IS IN F E C T
B a c k o f
D ilu te r 7 2 1 9 0 1 8 B
Decontaminating with Bleach
B System-flush reagent tubing (may already be installed on Diluter)
CAUTION Risk of Diluter damage. Mixing ISOTON® III diluent with bleach produces a precipitate that can
clog the tubing and components. Do not mix them together.
B 750 mL of freshly prepared bleach solution. Coulter recommends using a fresh solution
of one part bleach (a 5% solution of sodium hypochlorite or a high-quality unscented
household bleach) and one part deionized or distilled water.
B 750 mL of deionized or distilled water
PN 4277219B 5.3-1
DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES
Procedure
1. Ensure the system-flush reagent tubing is installed on the DISINFECT port on the back
of the Diluter. Refer to Figure 5.3-1.
2. Place the other end of the system-flush reagent tubing in the container of bleach
solution.
3. Select F40 to initiate the system-flush cycle, pulling in the bleach solution.
4. When the system-flush cycle is finished (it takes about 5 minutes), let the bleach
solution sit in the Diluter for no more than 15 minutes.
5. Transfer the system-flush reagent tubing to the container of deionized water.
6. Select F40 to rinse out the bleach solution with deionized water.
7. Press START UP.
Decontaminating with Acetic Acid - Abbreviated Procedure

B One empty diluent container (to be used for waste collection)
B One pair of hemostats
B About 1 L of distilled or deionized water
B 2 L of 5 % acetic acid (white distilled vinegar)
B Two large shielded input lines for diluent and cleaning agent, PN 6915052
B Two 10 - 20 L pickup tubes, one for the cleaning agent and the other for the diluent.
Depending on the configuration of the Analytical Station, you will need either:
r Two universal 10 - 20 L pickup tubes, PN 6706295
or
r One universal 10 - 20 L pickup tube, PN 6706295 (for the cleaning agent) and one
pickup tube with float sensor, PN 5120250
WARNING Failure to adhere to the following procedure could mix reagents with acetic acid, exposing you
and your customer to hazardous chemicals. Follow the procedure exactly as it is written.
Procedure
1. Place the waste output line in the empty diluent container.
2. Disconnect the pressure line from the side of the CBC lytic reagent pump (PM7) to
prevent the delivery of CBC lytic reagent to the WBC bath. Crimp the pressure line with
a pair of hemostats.
3. Remove the diluent pickup tube from the reagent container and place the diluent pickup
tube in distilled water.
4. Do a Startup cycle.
5.3-2 PN 4277219B
5. Remove the cleaning agent pickup tube from the reagent container and place the
cleaning agent pickup tube in distilled water.
6. Do a Shutdown cycle.
7. Remove the diluent pickup tube from the distilled water and place the diluent pickup
tube in acetic acid.
8. Manually drain the sweep-flow reservoir, VC29, by disconnecting tubing from the
reservoir. After draining the liquid, reconnect the tubing.
9. Do a Startup cycle.
10. Remove the cleaning agent pickup tube from the distilled water and place the cleaning
agent pickup tube in acetic acid.
11. Do a Shutdown cycle.
12. Alternate between Startup and Shutdown cycles a minimum of two times each until the
acetic acid is pulled completely through the Diluter.
13. Leave the acetic acid in the Diluter for 1 hour.
14. After the 1-hour time limit has expired, run additional Startup and Shutdown cycles
until the remainder of the acetic acid is used up.
15. Remove the pickup tubes from the acetic acid and place them in fresh distilled water.
16. Do a Startup cycle and a Shutdown cycle, pulling in the distilled water.
17. Return the waste output line to its original location.
18. Reconnect the pressure tubing to the CBC lytic reagent pump.
19. Replace the cleaning agent input line and pickup tube with a new set and install the
pickup tube in a new container of cleaning agent.
20. Do two Shutdown cycles.
21. Replace the diluent input line and pickup tube with a new set and install the pickup tube
in a new container of diluent.
22. Do two Startup cycles.
23. Verify all background counts are acceptable.
Decontaminating with Acetic Acid - Extended Procedure

B Two large shielded input lines for diluent and cleaning agent, PN 6915052
B Five small shielded input lines for CBC lytic reagent, retic clearing solution, retic stain,
PAK Preserve, and PAK Lyse, PN 6915053
PN 4277219B 5.3-3
B Two 10 - 20 L pickup tubes, one for the cleaning agent and the other for the diluent.
Depending on the configuration of the Analytical Station, you will need either:
r Two universal 10 - 20 L pickup tubes, PN 6706295
or
r One universal 10 - 20 L pickup tube, PN 6706295 (for the cleaning agent) and one
pickup tube with float sensor, PN 5120250
B Two universal 5 L pickup tubes for PAK Lyse and retic clearing solution, PN 6706296
B Two universal 0.5 - 1.9 L pickup tubes for retic stain and PAK Preserve, PN 6706297
B One universal 5 L pickup tube, PN 6706296, or one universal 0.5 - 1.9 L pickup tube,
PN 6706297, for CBC lytic reagent (depending on the size reagent container in use)
B One empty diluent container (to be used for waste collection)
B Paper towels
B One syringe
B One pair of hemostats
B Distilled or deionized water
B 7 L of 5 % acetic acid (white distilled vinegar)
B One sweep-flow reservoir (VC29), PN 6805861
WARNING Failure to adhere to the following procedure could mix reagents with acetic acid, exposing you
and your customer to hazardous chemicals. Follow the procedure exactly as it is written.
Decontaminating the Diluter

1. Remove all the reagent pickup tubes from the reagent containers and select F68 to the
drain the reagents from the Diluter. Leave the function activated for 10 minutes, then
reset the Analyzer to stop the function.
2. Replace all the reagent input lines and pickup tubes with new sets and place the new
pickup tubes in distilled water.
3. Place the waste output line in the empty diluent container.
4. At the reagent reservoir manifold:
a. Remove all the reagent reservoir float assemblies, including the diluent riser tube,
and clean them with a paper towel and distilled water.
Note: If the Analytical Stations is configured to bypass the diluent reservoir you do
not need to clean the diluent reservoir or any of its components.
b. Suction all the reagent out of each reservoir with a syringe and dry up any residual
liquid with paper towels.
c. Reinstall the riser tube and all the float assemblies.
5. Disconnect the pressure line from the side of the CBC lytic reagent pump (PM7) to
prevent the delivery of CBC lytic reagent to the WBC bath. Crimp the pressure line with
a pair of hemostats.
6. Reset the Analyzer to initiate a mini-Prime cycle and fill the reagent reservoirs, or select
F31 to prime all the reagent reservoirs.
5.3-4 PN 4277219B
7. If the backwash and sheath tanks are not completely full, select F16 as often as necessary
to fill them.
8. Select F67 twice to prime the reagent lines in the Diluter.
9. Do a Shutdown cycle and a Startup cycle, resetting the Analyzer after each cycle.
10. Remove the pickup tubes from the distilled water, dry them off with paper towels, and
place the pickup tubes in acetic acid.
a. Remove all the reagent reservoir float assemblies and dry them with paper towels.
b. Suction the water out of each reservoir with a syringe and dry up any residual water
with paper towels.
c. Reinstall the float assemblies.
to fill them.
15. Do a Shutdown cycle and a Startup cycle three times. You may need to reset the Analyzer
after any flow cell clog errors.
16. Leave the acetic acid in the Diluter for a minimum of 5 hours.
Rinsing the Diluter

1. Remove all the pickup tubes from the acetic acid and select F68 to drain the acetic acid
from the Diluter. Leave the function activated for 5 minutes, then reset the Analyzer to
stop the function.
2. Dry off the pickup tubes with paper towels and place the pickup tubes in fresh distilled
water.
3. Remove the sweep-flow reservoir, VC29, and install a new one.
4. Select F20 several times to drain and flush the sheath tank.
a. Remove all the reagent reservoir float assemblies and dry them with paper towels.
b. Suction all the acetic acid out of each reservoir with a syringe and dry up any
residual acetic acid with paper towels.
c. Reinstall the float assemblies.
to fill them.
9. Select each of the following functions twice to ensure each pump is rinsed with distilled
water: F02, F14, F15, F17, F18, and F19.
10. Do a Shutdown cycle and a Startup cycle four times. You may need to reset the Analyzer
after any flow cell clog errors.
PN 4277219B 5.3-5
11. Remove all the pickup tubes from the distilled water, dry them off with paper towels, and
position the pickup tubes so that they will not be contaminated.
12. Select F68 to drain the distilled water out of the Diluter. Leave the function activated for
15 minutes to dry the lines, then reset the Analyzer to stop the function.
14. Return the waste output line to its original location.
15. Reconnect the pressure tubing to the CBC lytic reagent pump.
Installing New Reagents and Checking the Analytical Station

1. Open new containers of all the reagents and install the pickup tubes in the containers.
2. Power up the Analytical Station and wait until it reaches the READY state.
3. Select F31 to prime all the reagent reservoirs.
to fill them.
6. Do three Shutdown cycles.
7. Do three Startup cycles.
8. Verify all background counts are acceptable.
9. Do a CBC latex verification as directed under Heading 4.9
10. Do a LATRON control check for the diff parameters.
11. Run 5C cell controls and Retic-C controls.
12. Do a reproducibility check as directed under Heading 5.6. During the reproducibility
run:
a. Remove the diluent pickup tube from its container to generate a diluent out error.
b. Place the diluent pickup tube back in its container and reset the Analyzer.
c. Ensure the Analytical Station resumes normal operation.
5.3-6 PN 4277219B
WHOLE BLOOD VERIFICATION PROCEDURE 5
5.4 WHOLE BLOOD VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
Purpose
Use this procedure to verify that all the aspiration and test modes of the instrument report the
same results for the same whole-blood specimen.
Do not use this procedure to check reproducibility, or to adjust mode-to-mode matching. Use
the PRECISION VERIFICATION, Heading 5.5, to check reproducibility. Use the MANUAL
MODE-TO-AUTOMATIC MODE CALIBRATION procedure, Heading 4.11, to adjust
mode-to-mode matching.
If the laboratory does not use all the test modes, select at least four test modes to run or
increase the number of samples for a minimum of 16 results.
B Three 5-mL tubes of fresh, normal, whole blood (same donor) drawn into EDTA - One
tube is needed to test three modes.
B Three 5-mL empty, red-stoppered tubes without anticoagulant
Procedure
1. Pool the three tubes of whole blood, mix the pooled specimen well and pour equal
portions into the three empty red-top tubes.
2. At the Analyzer, set the number of aspirations per tube to 4.
3. At the Workstation, select the reproducibility option:
a. Select tt to display the Precision screen. See Figure 5.4-1.

b. Select PRECISION at the Command Center.
Figure 5.4-1 Precision Screen
PN 4277219B 5.4-1
WHOLE BLOOD VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
4. Cycle the pooled specimen four times in each mode being tested. Use the following as a
guide.
Tube No. Test Mode Aspiration Mode

1 CBC/DIFF/RETIC Automatic
CBC/RETIC Automatic
CBC/RETIC Manual
2 CBC/DIFF Automatic
CBC ONLY Automatic
CBC ONLY Manual
3 CBC/DIFF/RETIC Manual
CBC/DIFF Manual
5. Verify the parameter %CV and Diff values are within the parameter test limits specified
in Table A.1-11, and the diff and retic cell counts are within the minimum good count
Note: Results that are outside the limits are displayed in red.
6. If any parameter does not meet the criteria:
a. Determine if the cause is due to a particular test and/or aspiration mode.
b. Correct the problem.
c. Repeat the test.
5.4-2 PN 4277219B
PRECISION VERIFICATION 5
5.5 PRECISION VERIFICATION
Purpose
Use this procedure to verify the reproducibility (precision) of the results in either aspiration
mode and for any test mode.
B Fresh normal, whole blood. Determine the quantity needed based on the number of test
modes to be run. Use one 5-mL tube for each test mode.
Procedure
1. At the Workstation, select the Precision screen:
a. Select tt to display the Reproducibility screen. See Figure 5.5-1.

b. Select PRECISION at the Command Center.
Figure 5.5-1 Precision Screen
2. Select the test mode.

r On the GEN•S System, select the test mode at the Analyzer.
r On the LH 750 System, select the test mode at the Workstation.
3. Cycle the blood:
r If you are using the Automatic mode, set the number of aspirations per tube to 11.
r If you are using the Manual mode, cycle 11 samples from the specimen tube,
keeping the tube well mixed.
PN 4277219B 5.5-1
PRECISION VERIFICATION
4. Delete the first sample, which is a prime, from the table.

5. Check the data and verify:
a. The parameter %CV and Diff values are within the parameter test limits specified in
Table A.1-11.
Note: Results that are out of limits are displayed in red.
b. No parameters are trending. A trend could indicate a plug in the needle vent line.
6. If any parameter does not meet the criteria:
a. Correct the problem.
b. Repeat the test.
5.5-2 PN 4277219B
DIFF AND RETIC VERIFICATION 5
5.6 DIFF AND RETIC VERIFICATION
Purpose
Use this procedure after performing any procedure that affects the Diff or Retic module to
verify proper operation of the instrument.
The Diff Analog Pulses Test verifies proper operation of the DIFF PROCESSOR and ANALOG
cards by checking the electronic circuitry used to place a pulse in the correct V, C and S
channels.
B LATRON primer
B LATRON control
B RF Preamp Dummy Load, PN 6858098
B Fresh, normal, whole-blood specimens
Procedure
1. Press START UP and verify the results displayed on the Daily Checks screen passed, and
the Daily Check Details screen are within specifications.
2. Run LATRON primer and control material.
a. Verify the LATRON primer results are within the limits specified in Table A.1-17.
b. Verify the control material results are within acceptable limits.
3. Do a DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST as directed under Heading 4.4. Verify the results are
within the specifications given under Table A.1-9.
4. Do the PRECISION VERIFICATION in the CBC/DIFF/RETIC test mode as directed
under Heading 5.5 and verify the results are acceptable.
5. If the results of each step are within limits, the diff and retic verification has passed.
PN 4277219B 5.6-1
DIFF AND RETIC VERIFICATION
5.6-2 PN 4277219B
POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION 5
5.7 POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION
Purpose
Use this procedure after servicing the Power Supply in the Analytical Station to verify the
Power Supply is operating correctly.
Procedure
WARNING Contacting exposed electronic components while the Analytical Station is connected to power
can cause personal injury from electric shock. Power down the Analytical Station completely as directed
under Heading 4.1 before removing the cover of the Power Supply.

2. Remove the Power Supply cover.
3. Check the Power Supply connections, fans and filters:
a. Ensure that all the cables and pneumatic lines inside and at the rear of the Power
Supply are secure.
b. Ensure the fans are free of debris and the intake filter is clean and properly installed.
4. Reinstall the Power Supply cover, being careful not to crimp any tubing or cables.
5. Power up the Analytical Station and ensure no system messages are displayed.
6. Check the System Controller Display on the Power Supply and verify:
r The AC LINE reading is >90.
r The 60 PSI, 30 PSI, 5 PSI and VACUUM readings are within the ranges listed in
Table A.1-13. Adjust the pressure regulators as needed.
r The four status indicators are green, indicating the ac input, the dc output, the
pneumatic outputs and the Power Supply temperatures are within tolerance.
7. Verify the LEDs on the APS1 and APS2 cards are green, indicating the voltages are within
limits.
8. At the Analyzer, check the voltages on the SERVICE MENU, DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS
SCREENs:
a. From the SERVICE MENU, select DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS tt
ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES.
b. Verify the displayed voltages are within limits.
c. Select ZAP to turn on the zap voltages and verify they are within limits.
d. Return to the DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS screen, and select
VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES.
e. Verify the displayed voltages are within limits.
f. If any of the displayed voltages are out of limits, correct the problem, then repeat
this procedure.
PN 4277219B 5.7-1
POWER SUPPLY VERIFICATION
9. At the Analyzer MAIN MENU, turn off the pneumatics and ensure:
a. The compressor turns off.
b. The Analyzer display clears.
c. The pneumatic readings on the System Power Controller Display drop to zero.
Note: The display may be 00, 00.1 or LLL.
10. On the Diluter keypad, press PRIME APERT to turn on the pneumatics.
5.7-2 PN 4277219B
CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY VERIFICATION 5
5.8 CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY VERIFICATION
Purpose
Use this procedure after adjusting or replacing any of the components in the cassette
transport assembly to verify the cassette transport assembly is operating correctly.
B 12 cassettes - Use the types commonly used on the instrument.
B Twelve 5-mL empty red top tubes with bar-code labels
Procedure
1. Place all 12 empty cassettes in the loading bay.
2. Observe the transporting process as the cassettes are moved from the loading bay to the
unloading bay and ensure:
a. Each cassette is lowered onto the rocker bed smoothly without causing the
remaining cassettes to become misaligned.
b. Only one cassette is lowered at a time.
c. Cassettes are transported to the unloading bay.
d. No error codes are generated.
3. If any cassette falls or generates an error, correct the problem and repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. After the last cassette is placed in the unloading bay, press STOP.
5. Remove all cassettes from the instrument.
6. Fill one cassette with the bar-code labeled tubes, with the bar-code labels facing up.
7. Using F86, do the Transport Test:
a. At the Diluter/numeric keypad, select F86, TRANSPORT TEST.
b. Place the filled cassette in the loading bay and ensure the cassette is lowered onto
the rocker bed correctly.
c. Ensure each tube is detected and the stripper plate grabs the tube correctly.
d. Ensure the cassette is unloaded correctly.
e. When finished, press STOP.
8. Do the BAR-CODE PERFORMANCE TEST as directed under Heading 4.49.
PN 4277219B 5.8-1
CASSETTE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY VERIFICATION
5.8-2 PN 4277219B
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 5
5.9 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
The recommended schedule for component replacement and inspection in the GEN•S System
and the GEN•S Cell is outlined in the PMI PROCEDURE COULTER® GEN•S, PN 9023723.
A copy of that form is included at the end of this chapter for your convenience. Make copies
as needed.
A recommended schedule for component replacement and inspection in the LH 750 System
and the LH 750 Cell is not available.
PN 4277219B 5.9-1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
5.9-2 PN 4277219B
BECKMAN COULTER Inc. PMI PROCEDURE Part number: 9023723
COULTER® GEN•S Revision: A
Preventative Maintenance on this product is an annual process. This document outlines the checks and actions
that are required to complete the annual process. The frequency of PM visits required to complete this process
will range from one to two depending on access to the product, customer preference, instrument workload and
Service Engineer technical recommendation.
CHECK TO CONFIRM COMPLETION

VISIT #
1 2
1. Preliminary Checks
• Discuss with customer for any known instrument problems.

• Run start up. Verify instrument cycle, and start up results.
• Run Controls. Verify results against customers expected limits.
2. Preventative Maintenance
• Review and implement any outstanding Service Memos.
Parts Replacement
Diluter
• All silicone tubing, right and left panels.

• All silicone tubing, centre.
• All silicone tubing, lower front/rear.
• All X & T fittings, retic & aspirate tubing on retic module.
• Replace Diff mixing chamber and sample lines
Inspect for Damage. Replace as Necessary
Diluter
• Check valves.
• Polyurethane tubing.
• All pinch valves and mounts.
• Pumps and dispensers.
• Aperture modules, aperture blocks, ‘O’ rings and baths.
• BSV mechanism.
• Mixing motor belts.
• Vacuum and waste chambers
Power Supply
• White Polyflo tubing.

3. Cleaning as required
• Internal and external surfaces.

• Waste chambers.
• Rocker bed.
• Manual rinse trough.
• Hgb cuvette.
• BSV.
• Wash/wipe probe sensors.
• Rocker bed sensor.
• Needle and bellows.
• Vacuum system/vacuum trap.
Analyzer

• CRT display.
• Filter.
Power Supply

• Filters.
4. Final Test and Verification
• Run shut down and start up to check for correct cycling and leaks
• Verify start up tests.
• Run and verify Latron results
• Perform precision verification in Primary and Secondary modes
• Perform and verify mode to mode testing
Refer to GEN*S Service Manual 4237253

for calibration procedures, adjustments and tolerances.
The handling of electronics components must only be carried out while using the ‘ESD Kit’.
Cycle Count: Visit 1: ................................... PMI Completion Date: Visit 1: ............................................
Visit 2: ................................... Visit 2: ............................................
Instrument: ................................................ Serial No: .....................................................................
Account : ............................................................................................................................................................
Signature and Employee # of CSS:..................................................................................................................................
COPY TO BE LEFT WITH INSTRUMENT

CONTENTS
6
6 SCHEMATICS, 6.1-1
6.1 SCHEMATICS INCLUDED, 6.1-1
PN 4277219B 6-i
CONTENTS
6-ii PN 4277219B
6SCHEMATICS 6
6.1 SCHEMATICS INCLUDED
This chapter contains the engineering schematics you need for troubleshooting the Analytical
Station. The schematic revision levels were current on the date this revision of the manual
was released. They will be updated again to the latest revision level whenever this manual is
revised.
Because the engineering schematics are simply inserted into the document and are not
assigned page numbers or figure numbers, they are not included in the table of contents or
the index. In the text they are referenced by their name and document control number
(DCN).
The schematics are inserted into this chapter in the following order:
.
System Name DCN

GEN•S System
GEN•S System Cable Interconnect 6322764
GEN•S Pneumatic/Hydraulic 6321104
GEN•S System Signal Interconnect 6323227
Digital Backplane 6321404
Analog Backplane 6321405
Backplane Interconnect 6321403
LH 750 System
LH 750 Pneu/Hydr 6323685
LH 750 System Signal Interconnect (not 6323775
available at the time of publication)
Digital Backplane 6323711
Analog Backplane 6323710
Common
Pneu/Hydr Layout, Power Supply 6321598
CRT Backplane 6321402
PN 4277219B 6.1-1
SCHEMATICS
6.1-2 PN 4277219B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
REVI S I ONS
REV D
DESCRIPTION PCN DATE BY CHKR APPVL
A DWG. GENER
E ATED,SAR# 02801534 29AUG95 RTD
T FS RDV
B MISC. CLEA
AN-UP SAR# 02801876
RELEASED 028020-0192 O9AUG96 LM
MG LMG DB
C NUMEROUS S DOC. UPDATES 028030-0428 APPROVED
D MISC. UPDATES 028040-0548 S. VARGAS CPDM APPROVAL
E DRAWING & TEMPLATES UPDATED REFEER TO CPDM
D D
System Reset
ANALYZER 5104036
6028509
J26 Thermister FAN1
J25
ANALOG BACKPLANE CRT BACKPLANE DIGITAL BACKPLANE

A 6859177 A 6859178 A 68
859176 A 68
859178 2603068
A 6859175
Thermister FAN2
Backplane Backplane
ct
interconnec rconnect
inter J22
}
POWER 48V
L
2603068
C SYSTEM
INTERF
INSTUMENT
BUS SDL C
J27 J19 J24
A B D E K
POWERSUPPLY 6028496
3
PNEUMATIC
P.S.
6028709 6028481 6028080
SHEET 5 50 50 6
6
SHEET 5 602878
84 Sheet 2
L
6028785 3 SYS
Y TEM INTERFACE
B D
ELECTRONIC
P.S.
Sheet3 IB
BUS GEN*S
B J
6028497 50
E
0.5M
6028609 WORKSTATION
B
INTCON5.SCH 16 6028620 MULTIPORT
A G G K
SDL
D SERIAL
GEN*S-1 CARD CABLE
50 IBUS 6028498 60
028660 15
H H F F
ROLL AROUND P.S. UNIT 1.0M DB15
IBUS GEN*S-2
J
SHEET 3 SHEET 2 HOST-1
SHEET 4
HOST-
-2
60 6028656
GEN*S SM I P P
4 6805286
N N
INTCON2.SCH
I TCON3.SCH
IN
6028498 50
I
SHEET 4
DILUTER INTCON4.SCH
ORCAD VER. 386 Plu
ENG.FILE CONTROL
us
Sl
lide Maker See 6321624 PROJECT N0. 028030
0
SHEET FILE NAME
1 INTCON1.SCH
2 INTCON1.SCH
3 INTCON1.SCH
4 INTCON1.SCH
5 INTCON1.SCH
A A
NOTES: UNLE
ESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
COULTER CORPORATION
ORIGIN
NATOR:
MIAMI, FLORIDA
1. ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS DRAWING:
"A" INDICATES THE ASSEMBLY NUMBER,
U. S. A.
2. LETTERS IN CIRCLES ARE USED TO CONNEC
E T RODRIGO ZAPATA
HARNESS OR CABLES FROM SHEET TO SHEET.
E Title
GEN*S SYSTEM CABLE INTERCONNECT
3. WIREMARKERS ARE INDICATED AS A BOX WITH "wm"
FOLLOW
WED BY THE WIREMARKER NUMBERE . NOT ALL Size Doc
cument Number REV
THIS DRAWING AND/OR SPECIFICATION IS THE PROP
PERTY OF COULTER CORPORATION , IS ISSUED
WIREMARKERS ARE SHOWN.
IN STRICT CONFIDENCE, AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED, COPIED, OR USED AS THE BASIS D 6322764 E
FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR SALE OF APPARATUS, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN PERMIS SSION.
Date: January 19, 1998 Sheet 1 of 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TO/FROM DIGITAL BACKPLANE
SYSTEM INTERFACE 0.5M 50 6028709

D
D TO/FROM DIGITAL BACKPLANE D

IBUS 0.5M 50 6028481
E
TO/FROM DILUTER CABLE

L ADAPTER
1.0M 50 6028498
H
TO/FROM ADMS
DMS 15 6028660
F
TO/FROM DILUTER 3 I/O
IBUS 16 6028620
G
6706373
LASER REF
C LASER
DC/DC
CONV J1
2x8
J3
DB15
J8
IBUS
J6
IBUS
J2
SYSTEM INTERFACE J5 P5
HGB,PRESS,TEMP C
6859622
P4 J4 2X5
5 8 7
J1
P1 A 6706203
3 RS/OPTO INTF
J7
7 4
1 MOD4
IBUS
J9 6701652 P5
2 P9 J5
THESE CABLES ARE HGB 9D
BUNDLED TOG
T ETHER 0.5M PRE-AMP
6028481 4 PIN
50 CIRCULAR P V T CARD
3
6859474 A 6859703
6706013
P1 6859777 (ASSY IN RF BOX)
J1 6028510 LS
48V POWER FROM BUSBARS CA0361 DETECTOR
P4 J4
7 3 DIFF P.S. J5 P5
5 P69 J69 10
B
RF DET 6805509
A 6705994 12 9 PRE-AMP6 J67 COAXIAL Ambient
J106 P2 J2 6857192 P78 P62 Temperature
3 3X1 J78 J62 Thermistor
3x5 3X3 BNC
C E1 E2 P4 J4
LASER INTER- 2X5 2X3 3 CON4 2
T
LOCK SW 5120035 J6 J3 J73 J104 LS PRE-AMP-4 E4 E3 1X3
CABLE 6858119 P6 P3 P73 P104 6706302
SDL
B 5 1X4
B
4 J6
TO/FROM DIGITAL BACKPL
LANE 6805052 P6
FLOWCELL
SDL 6028080 6 6706458
K
6805286
4
TO/FROM SENSOR
DISTR
RIBUTION
2
N
J3 J4 J1
P2 J2 CON4 1X4 IBUS
A/T HGG
NOT USED
J6 P6 P2 J2 WELCH P1 P20 P37 J37
6028691 P9 J9 DILUTE
ER 1 A 6706002 6028659 ALLEN 6859437 BAR CODE
10 RS485 25 DECODER 10 SCANNER
2X5 A2016238 6858081
A 6859783
P7 J7 CON26 DB25 MOD10
1 MOD10
4 6028785 NOT
O USED
CON3 GND GND
MMNL 9PIN
9 2x30
J8 J5
AUX P5
A 6028656
TO/FROM SENSOR DISTRIBUTION
60
A
P
COULT
TER CORPORATION
Title
GEN*S SYSTEM
M CABLE INTERCONNECT
Size Document Number REV
D 6322764 E
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 680550
08
D P3 D
Ambient
J3 1x3 J4 P4 Temperature
MMNL E2 E
E1 Thermistor
1X3 2
T
E3 E
E4
DILUTER 4
TO/FROM RS OPTO INTF 6028498 J4 DILUTER J3 6028481
1.0M 0.5M
H
IBUS 50 CABLE IBUS 50 J1 P1
A 6706368 6805198 J1 P1
ADAPTER IBUS 6 PELTIER
MODULE
TO/FROM ELEC. P.S. 6028497 J2 A 6706036 2X3
2.0M J7
IBUS 50 J4 P4 P2 J2 J5 P5
J
P5 J5 6028685 J1
6805082 20 4 STAIN
J1 8 6 DILUTER 2 HEATER
3X3
3 2X10 2X10 2X5 6805304
MMNL
IBUS J30
J8 A 6706003 4 5 DIFF
P2 J10 LIGHT BAR HEATER
J2 2 ASSEMBLY J1
3x5 (OPTIONAL) RS485
A 6859510 2x5 FRONT 4
48V POWER FROM BUSBARS J1
1 SOL/Optics PS A 6859783 BLOOD
6028784 J4 P4 P2 J2 DETECTOR
3 1x3 A 6705993 6028690 J3 MATCHED
A
MMNL 10 SET
C 3x3
2x5 2x5 MF3
2x13
REAR 4 6859506
C
TO/FROM RS OPTO INTF J3 6805083 10 J6
6028620 P3 P6
16 PROBE WIPE 6859436
G
INT-CONN
6028481 2 P1 J1 J2 P2
TO/FROM CABSM 6028498

0.5M
50
5
M 8 A 6706382
1.0M 3505048 26
50 6805072 Probe Wipe Motor J2 2
I
CABSMBUS 2X5 2X5 6028655 P1 J1
OTON
ISO
OPTO SWITCH J9 6859348 2
3 3
2x13
PROBE WIPE UP
4818006 J3 2
OPTO SWITCH CLENZ

3 J10 6859348 2
PROBE WIPE DOWN

4818006
IBUS RES
E ERVOIR J4 2
J1 IN
NTERFACE
6859521 2 SOL96 MF3 E
PAK LYSE
J2 J13 J1 J7 A 6706198 J11 6859348 2
2x8 J14
MNML J8 J2
6028618 6859521 2 S0L75
MF4 J5 2
2x7
J3 PAK QUEN
NCH
B DILUTER 3
A 6706157
RS485
A 6859783 J16 P16
A6859371
6859521 2 SOL42 J12 6859348 2
B
SOL21 J4
1X4 4 2 6859521 2 SOL110 J6 2
NOMF2
SOL RIGHT STAIN
2 FRONT J5 J13 6859348 2
NO
OMF1 MF13 MF11 MF6 MF9 MF16 MF17 MF18 6859521 2 SOL1
2
2x8 2x8 2x7 2x7 2x7 2x7 2x5 2x5 A 6706190
J
J15 J12 J3 J4 J5 J6 J11 J10 J73
P
P15 P12 P3 P4 P5 P6 P11 P10 J6 J7 2
6859521 2 SOL2
DISTRIBUTED 6232744 6028658 6028616 6028615 6028617 6028619 6028
8657 P73 GHOST
SOLENOID MAIN 6805079 16 14 14 14 14 10 9 J14 6859348 2
NOMF1 13 J7
M 6859521 2 SOL68
J/P13 P11 P11 P11 P11 P5 J10 MIXING MOTOR J8 2

SOL 61 J11 J11 J11 J11 J5 P10 DIFF J8
DB9 6859521 2 SOL69 LYSE 3 DIFF
I
6
6859366 J15 6859348 2
J/P14 2X3 J16
SOL 63 6859514 7 P/O OF J9
RETICS 6805075 2 SOL22
MODULE P16
SOL 19 14 VALVE 10 VALVE 10 VALVE 10
0 VALVE 10 VALVE 4 VALVE 2 2 SOL94
ASSY J10 6 680
05636
6805076 2 SOL24 6805011
SOL 20 2 SOL95 2 J35 P35 2 P36
J1 - SOL35 J1 - SOL46 J1 - SOL16 J1 - SOL5 J1 - SOL59 J1 - SOL41 J11 6859790 WASTE

S
SOL 33 J2 - SOL38 J2 - SOL45 J2 - SOL67 J2 - SOL105 J2 - SOL89 J2 - SOL50 2 SOL58 6805074 2 SOL9 CONTAINER
J3 - SOL36 J3 - SOL47 J3 - SOL6 J3 - SOL7 J3 - SOL97 J3 - SOL52 2 2
J4 - SOL111 J4 - SOL3 J4 - SOL12 J4 - SOL8 J4 - SOL80 J4 - LOL65
A SOL 14 J5
J6
J7
-
-
-
SOL29
SOL28
SOL26
J5
J6
J7
-
-
-
SOL31
SOL57
SOL49
J5
J6
J7
-
-
-
SOL4
SOL13
SOL15
J5
J6
J7
-
-
-
SOL82
SOL43
SOL39
J5
J6
J7
-
-
-
SOL93
SOL99
SOL44 2
2 SOL62
13 VALVE
INTERFACE
J12 J40 J39
A
SOL 53 J8 - SOL27 J8 - SOL51 J8 - SOL17 J8 - SOL40 J8 - SOL76 J66
6 P66 MF4 P40 P39
J9 - SOL34 J9 - SOL54 J9 - SOL108 J9 - SOL10 J9 - SOL98 J13
SOL 18
J/P18 J10
J11
-
-
SOL88
SOL64
J10 - SOL55 J10 - SOL48 J10 - SOL11 J10 - SOL56
M 6805077 2 SOL25
J12 - SOL30 MIXING MOTOR BACKWASH SHEATH

J13 - SOL23 SOLENOID LISTS INDICATE THE ASSIGNMENT RETIC RESE
ERVOIR RESERVOIR
J/P10 J14 - SOL37 OF CONNECTORS FOR EACH EACH MANIFOLD J92 P92 COULT
TER CORPORATION
SOL 60 SOL92
Title
GEN*S SYSTEM
M CABLE INTERCONNECT
D 6322764 E
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
D D
TO/FROM P V T CARD
4
N
TO/FROM DILUTER 1 I/O
60
P
6028656 6805286
DISPLAY MODULE 6805302

P5 P9
J5 J9
2x30 1X4
C KEYBOARD AND DISPLA

I Y INTERFACE C
SENSOR DISTRIBUTIO
I N J1 P1
40
P1 J1
A 6705957
A 6706196 2x20 6859432 2x20
J2 J5 J3
P2 P5
6859438
14 2 15
2x3 1x4 2x7 2x8 2x7 CON2 2x5

J2 J6 J3 J8 J10 J4 J7
P6 P3 P8 P10 P4 P7
6805221 P1
6859435 6028533 J1
6 6859781 12 6859393 16 RIBBON 2X7 MEMBRANE
KEYPAD
SENSOR LEFT DILUTER RIGHT BED POSITION ROCKER HGB LAMP HARNESS LCD DISPLAY 2016587
CENTER SENSORS SENSORS BED EXTENSION 2 BOARD
2 COAX 6859467 6805232
P36
J36
2 6854610 COAX P11 J11
B J13 P/N 6805089

SCANNER
POSITION
B
To VC22 CENTER
P15 FRONT
VAC SENSOR 6859611
OVERFLOW 3
CHAMBER P/N 5120105 6859427
UNDER RIGHT STACK BELLOWS EXTENDED P32 J32
NEEDLE UP J11 3
wm P16 1X3
4 (U4)
) P11
3 COAX 3
P/N 4818006 P/N 6859260
BED IS TUBE IN POSITION BELLOWS RETRACTED 2
BACKWARD (TUBE SENSOR) NEE
EDLE DOWN
wm
3 (U3)
) COAX HAND DETECTOR
FRONT COVER OPEN
INTERLO OCK RQRS A P/N 5116004 P/N 6855620
P P/N 4818006 P/N 5120106 P/N 5120035
MAGNET T ACTUATOR FRONT DOOR RIG
GHT STACK LOADED BED IS STRIPPER PLATE LEF
FT LIFT UP
P/N 5111192 INTERLOCK HORIZONTAL POSITION
wm HGB LAMP P33 J33

2 (U2)
) COAX SOURCE 3
P/N 5120106 P/N 5120106

P P/N 4818006 P/N 5120035 P/N 5120035 6859621 P/N 5104077 1X3 P/N 6805597
TOP LEFT T P RIGHT SAFETY
TO BED IS FORWARD UNDER LEFT STACK RIG
GHT LIFT UP MANUAL MODE PROBE POSITION
SAFETY START (MANUAL PROBE
POSITION SENSOR)
(PROBE IN)
A A
COULTER CORPORATION
Title
GEN*S SYSTEM CABLE INTER
T CONNECT
D 6322764 E
Date: January 19, 1998 Sheet
h 4 of 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
D D
SPC DISPLAY COMP/VACUUM COMPRESSOR/VACUUM

ASSY CONTROLLER BOARD
A 6705962
A 6859181 A 3505052
J1
P1
10 10
MNL
1X3
3 J8 P8 3
6028523
30 5 J9 P9 5
6959381 J4
2X3
MMNL 3 48V OUT 4
L
P3 2 2
J3 60284
496
J7 P7 Also P/O the chassis
C SYSTEM 2 POS
MMNL
4
ground connection
at the Bulk Supply
on this page.
wm
5 C
POWER 2X3
MNL
P16 P15 P13 E1
CONTR.
RS485 J16 J15 J13
(SPC) 2X2
P1 J1 A 6859783 J4 P4 P11 J11
J5 A 6706038 8 2
J
6028497 50 IBUS 3X3 DC
6011024 1X3
FILTER
3X5 2
J5 J6 P26 A 6706158
P5 P6
1 3
2 SOL
1X3 2X3 2X3
6859421 J10 J12 J1
14
wm POWER
18 SUPPLY
1 LOGIC P10 P12 P14
TRANSIENT CONTROLLER
VOLTAGE wm wm
SUPRESSOR 6 7 FILTER
BOARD
6706495 IN
NPUT
wm 68
859383
17 14
4 2 2 2
3
B LEFT PANEL
(CIRCUIT
BREAKER)
2
7 2 2 2
2 1 E2
B
6859378 5101029 4 wm wm wm wm wm
w
AC INPUT #1 1 2 25/26 21/22 23/2
24 Thermister FAN1
wm wm J17 J18 J19 J20 6859377

"1" 10 12 3X4 2X3 2X3 2X3 wm FAN J21 P21
AC 19 2 2
"G" BULK
PWR wm wm 2 2 2603068
"W" 11 13 2 2 SUPPLY wm
IN wm 20
14 A 6805774 NOTE: BOTH THER
E MISTERS
E3 ATTACH TO A ST
TUD AT E3
wm
15
Thermister FAN2
wm J22 P22
9 2 2
wm
16
2603068
wm P/O 6959381
8
E1
A A
COULTER CORPORATION
Title
GEN*S SYSTEM CABLE INTERCONNECT
D 632
22764 E
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
B
B AD D E D N O TE O N S H EE T 4. REFER TO EJ .D F DE ER LNGAAN DDOE Z A P P R O V E D

U P D A T E D P 9 P IN O U T OONN SSHHEHEEETT 22. CPDM CPDM APPRO VAL
B BB B B B B B B B B B
B
B
B AD D E D N O TE O N SH EE T 4 REFER TO E D D E LG AD O AP PR O V ED
CPD M C P D M AP PR O V AL
B
B
B
B
N O T IN S T A L L E D I N A L L S Y S T E M S .
(W IL L N O T IM P A C T S Y S T E M P E R F O R M A N C E ).
B
B
B
B
B AD D E D N O TE TO SH E E T 4 REFER TO E D D E LG AD O A P PR O V ED
CPD M C P M APP R O V AL
B
B
B AD D ED N O TE TO SH E E T 4 REFER TO E D D E LG AD O AP PR O V ED
B
B
B AD D E D N O TE TO SH E E T 4 REFER TO E D D E LG AD O AP PR O V ED
B
B
B
B
B
B
B AD D ED N O TE TO SH E E T 4 REFER TO E D D E LG AD O AP PR O V ED
B
CONTENTS
7
7 TROUBLESHOOTING, 7.1-1
7.1 ANALYTICAL STATION AND WORKSTATION MESSAGES, 7.1-1

System Alarms, 7.1-1
Analytical Station Messages, 7.1-1
Icons and Traffic Lights Displayed on the Workstation with Analytical Station
Messages, 7.1-1
About the Tables of Analytical Station Messages Under Heading 7.2, 7.1-2
Workstation Messages, 7.1-3
Icons and Traffic Lights Displayed on the Workstation with Workstation
Messages, 7.1-3
About the Tables of Workstation Messages Under Heading 7.3, 7.1-3
7.2 TABLES OF ANALYTICAL STATION MESSAGES, 7.2-1
7.3 TABLES OF WORKSTATION MESSAGES, 7.3-1
7.4 TROUBLESHOOTING POWER-UP PROBLEMS, 7.4-1

Summary, 7.4-1
Power Voltages and Power Voltage Signal Lines, 7.4-1
Power-Up Sequence, 7.4-1
Dump Valve Check Routine, 7.4-4
48 Volts Failure Isolation, 7.4-5
Procedure, 7.4-5
7.5 FLOW-CELL ERRORS FC, PC1, AND PC2, 7.5-1
ILLUSTRATIONS
7.4-1 Power-Up Sequence, 7.4-3
7.4-2 Dump Valve Check Routine, 7.4-4
TABLES
7.2-1 System Messages - Symbols and Numbers, 7.2-1
7.2-2 System Messages - A, 7.2-2
7.2-3 System Messages - B, 7.2-7
7.2-4 System Messages - C, 7.2-9
7.2-5 System Messages - D, 7.2-11
7.2-6 System Messages - E through G, 7.2-17
7.2-7 System Messages - H, 7.2-19
7.2-8 System Messages - I through K, 7.2-21
7.2-9 System Messages - L, 7.2-22
7.2-10 System Messages - M through O, 7.2-26
7.2-11 System Messages - P through Q, 7.2-28
7.2-12 System Messages - R, 7.2-32
7.2-13 System Messages - S, 7.2-35
7.2-14 System Messages - T through V, 7.2-39
7.2-15 System Messages - U, 7.2-40
7.2-16 System Messages - W through Z, 7.2-41
7.3-1 Workstation Messages - A through B, 7.3-1
PN 4277219B 7-i
CONTENTS
7.3-2 Workstation Messages - C through G, 7.3-2

7.3-3 Workstation Messages - H, 7.3-4
7.3-4 Workstation Messages - I through K, 7.3-7
7.3-5 Workstation Messages - L through N, 7.3-8
7.3-7 Workstation Messages - N, 7.3-9
7.3-8 Workstation Messages - O, 7.3-10
7.3-9 Workstation Messages - P through V, 7.3-13
7.3-13 Workstation Messages - W through Z, 7.3-14
7.4-1 Power Voltages and Power Voltage Signal Lines, 7.4-1
7.4-2 AC Power Timing Sequence, 7.4-1
7.4-3 Instrument Power-On Timing Sequence, 7.4-2
7.5-1 Flow-Cell Errors, 7.5-1
7-ii PN 4277219B
7TROUBLESHOOTING 7
7.1 ANALYTICAL STATION AND WORKSTATION MESSAGES
The instrument automatically monitors many of its activities and conditions and generates
messages to alert the operator when the instrument does not respond as expected.
r Analytical Station messages are described in the tables under Heading 6.2 in this manual.
r Workstation messages are described in the tables under Heading 7.3 in this manual.
r SlideMaker messages are described in the tables under Heading 7.2-1 in the Slide Making
Modules Service Manual.
r SlideStainer messages are described in the tables under Heading 7.2-1 in the Slide
Staining Modules Service Manual.
The information in these tables was copied from revision R of the GEN•S System Messages,
PN 0300120, and revision C of the LH 750 System Messages, PN 0304633.
Messages that are logged at the Workstation appear in the following format: date, time,
instrument name, operator name, message.
System Alarms
Many of the error messages are accompanied by an alarm. To reset the alarm:
r If the alarm is a Diluter-generated alarm, press ALARM RESET.

r If the alarm is generated in the SlideMaker, press any key on the SlideMaker screen.
r If the alarm is generated by the SlideStainer, click on the traffic light and acknowledge
the error.
Analytical Station Messages
Icons and Traffic Lights Displayed on the Workstation with Analytical Station Messages
Icons are used to flag certain instrument conditions. In the error message tables, either the
relevant icon or a text description, such as "red light" for the red traffic light icon, is included.
The Instrument icon is displayed on the Command Center when the

Analytical Station is halted.
A red traffic light is displayed on the Command Center when immediate

action is required.
GEN•S LH 750
Double-clicking on the red traffic light displays the error message and a
System System button for clearing the error. Double-clicking on the error message displays
the Help topic for that message.
A yellow traffic light is displayed on the Command Center when caution is

required. However, a red light supersedes a yellow light. (For example, if
another condition occurs that triggers a red light, the red light is displayed
GEN•S LH 750 until that condition is resolved, then the yellow light appears.)
System System
Double-clicking on the yellow traffic light displays the warning message.
Double-clicking on the warning message displays the Help topic for that
message.
PN 4277219B 7.1-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
About the Tables of Analytical Station Messages Under Heading 7.2

The Analytical Station messages, with their probable causes and corrective actions, are
arranged alphabetically by Analyzer message.
Note: These error message tables contain the same information given to the instrument
operators, plus more. Leaving the statement “call your Beckman Couter Representative” in
the corrective action, lets you know how much a customer is expected to do before calling.
Several Analytical Station messages are listed with an “and” condition. For those messages:
r If the error occurs while the instrument is idle or ready to pierce, the Analyzer only
displays the first message.
r If the error occurs while the instrument is running, the Analyzer displays the first
message and then replaces it with the second message. The second message is always
Diluter Error or Non-Diluter Error.
To locate the appropriate corrective actions in the System Message tables for Diluter Error
and Non-Diluter Error messages, use the message on the Diluter screen; it usually
mirrors the original Analyzer message.
When a message column lists “current status” instead of a specific message, one of the
following Analyzer status messages is displayed:
:
ACTIVE GEN•S INITIALIZING/RAW READ HGB

ANALYZE INTRO SAMPLE READY
ASPIRATE SAMPLE MANUAL MODE RETICS BACKWASH
AUTOCLEARING NOT READY RETICS COUNT
BACKWASH PERFORMING CLEANUP RETICS PRIME
CBC/DIFF PRIME PERFORMING RECOUNT RINSE
CHECKING PRESSURES PREPARING SAMPLE SYSTEM FAULT
COUNT PRIME VERSION 1E/GENS
COUNT COMPLETED RAW DATA DUMP XMIT IN PROGRESS
DATA ACCEPT
The Analytical Station messages are referenced in the index.
7.1-2 PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
7
Workstation Messages
Icons and Traffic Lights Displayed on the Workstation with Workstation Messages
Icons are used to flag certain instrument conditions. In the error message tables, either the
relevant icon or a text description, such as "red light" for the red traffic light icon, is included.
The Patient icon is displayed on the Command Center when patient sample
results are pending to be reviewed for validation in the review folder.
The Host Communication icon is displayed on the Command Center when

sample transmissions are pending to be transmitted and the LIS/HIS is not
responding.
The XB icon is displayed on the Command Center when the last XB batch is
outside limits.
The QC icon is displayed on the Command Center when the last control
run is outside limits.
The Printer icon is displayed on the Command Center when sample reports
are pending to be printed and the Printer is not ready.
The Instrument icon is displayed on the Command Center when the

Analytical Station is halted.
The Database icon is displayed on the Command Center when database

storage is not functional.
A red traffic light is displayed on the Command Center when immediate

action is required.
GEN•S LH 750
Double-clicking on the red traffic light displays the error message and a
System System button for clearing the error. Double-clicking on the error message displays
the Help topic for that message.
A yellow traffic light is displayed on the Command Center when caution is

required. However, a red light supersedes a yellow light. (For example, if
another condition occurs that triggers a red light, the red light is displayed
GEN•S LH 750 until that condition is resolved, then the yellow light appears.)
System System
Double-clicking on the yellow traffic light displays the warning message.
Double-clicking on the warning message displays the Help topic for that
message.
About the Tables of Workstation Messages Under Heading 7.3

The Workstation messages, with their probable causes and corrective actions, are arranged
alphabetically.
Note: These error message tables contain the same information given to the instrument
operators, plus more. Leaving the statement “call your Beckman Couter Representative” in
the corrective action, lets you know how much a customer is expected to do before calling.
PN 4277219B 7.1-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Not all Workstation messages are described in the tables under Heading 7.2. Some messages
appear from the Windows NT™ operating system and other software packages that are
included on the Workstation. Because these messages may not be logged or have online help
for them, you should write them down.
If the Workstation is connected to a network, some messages may be caused by the network
configuration. If a local network administrator or Windows NT administrator is available,
contact the administrator for help resolving the problem.
The Workstation messages are referenced in the index.
7.1-4 PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
TABLES OF ANALYTICAL STATION MESSAGES 7
7.2 TABLES OF ANALYTICAL STATION MESSAGES
Table 7.2-1 System Messages - Symbols and Numbers
Analytical Station Workstation Analytical Station Status/Recovery
Analyzer Diluter/Numeric Log Message and

Analyzer Alert Message Status Message Keypad Message Beeps Icon on Command Center Sample Results Analytical Station Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
5 PSI Pressure High (current status) 5 PSI Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed. Beeps- operation continues. 5 psi regulator and/or transducer 1. Adjust 5 psi regulator to 5 ±0.1 psi. If you cannot
PRESSURE HIGH Instrument Log (LH750 light defective (pressure >5.2 psi). adjust the 5 psi pressure reading, call your Beckman
System) Coulter Representative.
5 PSI pressure too high. 2. Continue normal operation. If message recurs, call
Adjust 5 PSI pressure. If your Beckman Coulter Representative.
pressure reading cannot be
adjusted, call Coulter
Customer Operations.
5 PSI Pressure Low READY 5 PSI Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Run stopped. 5 psi regulator and/or transducer 1. Adjust 5 psi regulator to 5 ±0.1 psi. If you cannot
PRESSURE LOW Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” defective (pressure <4.8 psi) adjust the 5 psi pressure reading, call your Beckman
System) message printed in footer of and/or line leaking. Coulter Representative.
5 PSI pressure too low. sample report (depends upon 2. Continue normal operation. If message recurs, call
Adjust 5 PSI pressure. If when error occurred). your Beckman Coulter Representative.
5C Not Allowed In This READY READY No Event Log Red Data not available. Run stopped. 5C cell control material used in 1. Change the Analytical Station test mode to CBC or
Mode (GEN•S System 5C Control material used in light RETIC ONLY test mode. CBC/DIFF.
only) Retic or SUBSET modes. 2. Process the control.
Reset Analytical Station. 3. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
30 PSI Pressure High READY 30 PSI Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Run stopped. 30 psi regulator and/or transducer 1. Adjust 30 psi regulator to 30 ±0.2 psi. If you cannot
PRESSURE HIGH Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” defective (pressure >31 psi). adjust the 30 psi pressure reading, call your Beckman
System) message printed in footer of Coulter Representative.
30 PSI pressure too high. sample report (depends upon 2. Continue normal operation. If message recurs, call
30 PSI Pressure Low READY 30 PSI Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Run stopped. 30 psi regulator and/or transducer 1. Adjust 30 psi regulator to 30 ±0.2 psi. If you cannot
PRESSURE LOW Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” defective (pressure <29 psi) and/or adjust the 30 psi pressure reading, call your Beckman
System) message printed in footer of line leaking. Coulter Representative.
30 PSI pressure too low. sample report (depends upon 2. Continue normal operation. If message recurs, call
286 Board Communication NOT READY N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted. Stopped - inoperable. DIFF PROCESSOR card 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Error Instrument Log (LH750 light communication problem. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
System) Representative.
AMC-DIFF communication
failure: 286 board. Reset
Analytical Station.
PN 4277219B 7.2-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
TABLES OF ANALYTICAL STATION MESSAGES
Table 7.2-2 System Messages - A
Analyzer Diluter Log Message and

Analyzer Alert Message Status Message Screen Message Beeps Icon on Command Center Sample Results Analytical Station Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
AC Line Voltage Bad READY AC LINE Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Run stopped. Ac line voltage <90 V limit. 1. Check the ac line voltage reading on the Power Supply.
VOLTAGE BAD Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” 2. If the voltage is <90 V, ensure the Power Supply is
System) message printed in footer of properly connected to the dedicated wall outlet.
AC line voltage below 90 Volt sample report (depends upon 3. If the Power Supply is properly connected, have the
limit. when error occurred). house maintenance person verify the wall outlet is
supplying 90 to 264 Vac.
4. If the wall outlet is supplying 90 to 264 Vac, call your
Beckman Coulter Representative and report your
Analytical Station’s current ac reading.
ACK Not Received By NOT READY ACK NOT RECEIVED Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Communication error with AMC or 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Diluter BY DILUTER Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error interconnect. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
System) occurred). Representative.
Communication error with
AMC or interconnect. Reset
Analytical Station.
Ambient Temp Sensor Bad (current status) AMBIENT TEMP Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed. Idle - ready for request. Faulty or disconnected sensor. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
SENSOR BAD Instrument Log (LH750 light 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Ambient temperature sensor
defective or disconnected.
Reset Analytical Station.
AMC Did Not Reply NOT READY AMC DID NOT Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Diluter not receiving data from 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
REPLY Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error AMC. 2. If message persists, reseat the AMC.
System) occurred). 3. If message still persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Diluter not receiving data Representative.
from AMC. Reset Analytical
Station.
AMC Never Sent Start NOT READY AMC NEVER SENT Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red N/A Stopped - inoperable. Communication error. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Command START COMMAND Instrument Log (LH750 light 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Communications error. Reset
Analytical Station.
AMC Requested Stop (current status) AMC REQUESTED No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Paused until error resolved. Analyzer needs to stop after an 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
STOP Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error abnormal condition occurred (for 2. If message persists, perform the flow cell unclog
System) occurred). example, clearing flow cell clogs). function (for example, F44, F45 or F46).
Analyzer stopped. Reset
Analytical Station. If message
persists, perform flow cell
unclog procedure.
7.2-2 7.2-2 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-2 System Messages - A (Continued)

Analyzer +48V Bad READY ANALYZER +48V BAD Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. +48 V power to Analyzer outside 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” ±5% limit. 2. If message persists:
System) message printed in footer of a. Turn Power Supply MAIN POWER switch OFF for 5
48 Volt power outside ±10% sample report (depends upon minutes.
limit. when error occurred).
b. Verify air filter is clean.
c. Turn Power Supply MAIN POWER switch ON.
3. If message still persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
Analyzer Error SYSTEM FAULT ANALYZER ERROR Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Communication error. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
and and Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Non-Diluter Error (GEN•S System) occurred). Representative.
NOT READY
System only) Communications error. Reset
Analytical Station.
Analyzer Fans Failed (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. Analyzer fans power supply 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” defective. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
System) message printed in footer of Representative.
Analyzer fans power supply sample report (depends upon
defective. Reset Analytical when error occurred).
Station.
Aperture Voltage Lower (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch Voltage reading <277 V (measured 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Failed (GEN•S Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” is OFF, run continues. at the aperture) or <4.332 V 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
System) System) message printed in footer of If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch (measured at the edge connector Representative.
No Aperture voltage reading sample report (depends upon is ON, run is stopped at end of the DIFF PROCESSOR card).
(LH750 below limits. when error occurred). of cycle.
System)
Aperture Voltage Upper (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data not transmitted, or data If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch Voltage reading <322 V (measured 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Failed (GEN•S Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” is OFF, run continues. at the aperture) or <5.045 V 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
System) System) message printed in footer of If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch (measured at the edge connector Representative.
No Aperture voltage reading sample report (depends upon is ON, run is stopped at end of the DIFF PROCESSOR card).
(LH750 above Limits. when error occurred). of cycle.
System
ASCII Rec. Error NOT READY N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Communication error. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
AMC reported error - ASCII
Receive Error. Reset
Analytical Station.
PN 4277219B 7.2-3
TROUBLESHOOTING

Aspiration -B-- (current status) ASPIRATION -B-- Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) r Data is displayed. Automatic mode disabled Front sensor detected air bubbles. 1. Check the specimen and ensure:
and Instrument Log (LH750 r “P” appears in all parameter after three consecutive a. The volume was sufficient
Diluter Error (GEN•S System) flag fields. aspiration errors. Manual b. It does not contain clots or fibrin.
System only) Front sensor detected air r “System Alarm” message is mode is operable.
c. It was collected and stored correctly.
bubbles (<Tube ID>, printed in footer of sample 2. If the message persists for three consecutive runs,
<Cass/Pos>). Check sample report. reset the Analytical Station to continue running
volume and rerun.
samples in the Automatic mode.
Yellow traffic light is Yellow
displayed until AutoStop light WARNING Skin puncture from the needle, which
condition is reached could contain biohazardous material, can occur. Use
Red traffic light is displayed extreme care when inspecting the needle area.
Red
when AutoStop condition is light
reached. 3. If the still message persists:
a. Check the needle for plugs.
b. Ensure the aspiration lines are clean.
c. Troubleshoot the sample flow path for leaks, kinks
or plugs.
4. If the message still persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative. You can run samples in the Manual
mode.
Aspiration ---C (current status) ASPIRATION ---C Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) r Data is displayed. Automatic mode disabled Diluent front and rear sensors 1. Check the specimen and ensure:
and Instrument Log (LH750 r “P” appears in all parameter after three consecutive detected carryover. a. The volume was sufficient
Diluter Error (GEN•S System) flag fields. aspiration errors. Manual b. It does not contain clots or fibrin.
System only) Diluent front and rear sensors r “System Alarm” message is mode is operable.
detected carryover (<Tube printed in footer of sample 2. If the message persists for three consecutive runs,
ID>, <Cass/Pos>). Re-run report. reset the Analytical Station to continue running
sample.
displayed until AutoStop light WARNING Skin puncture from the needle, which
condition is reached. could contain biohazardous material, can occur. Use
Red traffic light is displayed extreme care when inspecting the needle area.
Red
or plugs.
mode.
7.2-4 7.2-4 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING

Aspiration N--- (current status) ASPIRATION N--- Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) r Data is displayed. Automatic mode disabled Sensor detected preset blood 1. Check the specimen and ensure:
and Instrument Log (LH750 r “P” appears in all parameter after three consecutive threshold failure due to excessive a. The volume was sufficient
Diluter Error (GEN•S System) flag fields. aspiration errors. Manual diluted blood or non-blood sample. b. It does not contain clots or fibrin.
System only) Sensor detected diluted blood r “System Alarm” message is mode is operable.
or non-blood sample (<Tube printed in footer of sample 2. If the message persists for three consecutive runs,
ID>, <Cass/Pos>). Check report. reset the Analytical Station to continue running
sample and rerun.
displayed until AutoStop light
WARNING Skin puncture from the needle, which
condition is reached
could contain biohazardous material, can occur. Use
Red traffic light is displayed Red extreme care when inspecting the needle area.
or plugs.
mode.
Aspiration --P- (current status) ASPIRATION --P- Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) r Data is displayed. Automatic mode disabled Blood front and rear sensors 1. Check the specimen and ensure:
and Instrument Log (LH750 r “P” appears in all parameter after three consecutive detected partial aspiration or a. The volume was sufficient
Diluter Error (GEN•S System) flag fields. aspiration errors. Manual diluted blood. b. It does not contain clots or fibrin.
System only) Blood front and rear sensors r “System Alarm” message is mode is operable.
detected partial aspiration printed in footer of sample 2. If the message persists for three consecutive runs,
(<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>). report. reset the Analytical Station to continue running
Check sample for sufficient
volume, check needle for
clogs and rerun sample. WARNING Skin puncture from the needle, which could
Yellow
Yellow traffic light is light contain biohazardous material, can occur. Use extreme
displayed until AutoStop care when inspecting the needle area.
Red traffic light is displayed Red 3. If the still message persists:
when AutoStop condition is light a. Check the needle for plugs.
reached. b. Ensure the aspiration lines are clean.
or plugs.
mode.
PN 4277219B 7.2-5
TROUBLESHOOTING

Aspiration Timeout NOT READY ASPIRATION Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted or data Stopped - inoperable. Diluter did not receive message 1. Reset the Analytical Station and try to rerun samples in
TIMEOUT Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted to Workstation but from Analyzer within 5 seconds of the Automatic mode.
System) flagged (depends upon when being ready to pierce in Automatic 2. If error recurs, run sample in Manual mode.
Aspiration timeout. Reset error occurred). mode.
Analytical Station to run
samples in Automatic
sampling mode or run
samples in Manual Sampling
mode.
Automatic Mode Disabled MANUAL MODE AUTOMATIC MODE Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed if available Automatic mode disabled; Automatic mode error not 1. Check the event history log for previous messages that
DISABLED Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error Manual mode is operable. resolved. may affect the Automatic mode.
System) occurred). 2. Correct the problems.
Automatic sampling mode 3. Reset the Analytical Station.
disabled. Check previous 4. If unable to correct the problem, or if the message
messages (<Tube ID>, recurs, call your Beckman Coulter Representative. You
<Cass/Pos>). can run samples in the Manual mode.
Autostop - check NOT READY N/A Yes Event Log Data available for the three Run stopped The Workstation is not ready to 1. Verify proper connection of coaxial cables.
Workstation (LH750 Instrument Log consecutive samples. process a sample because: 2. Verify baths contain diluent.
System only) r An AutoStop condition 3. Verify apertures are not blocked.
Voteouts of WBC, RBC, PLT
or MCV. Verify proper stopped the System. 4. Reset the Analytical Station.
connection of coaxial cables r Selected voteouts of WBC, 5. Use F03 and ensure no microbubbles are present.
and verify baths contain RBC, Plt or MCV.
6. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
diluent. r Communication between the Representative.
Yellow traffic light is Yellow Analytical Station and the
7. Service Only: Ensure the BSV is aligned.
displayed until AutoStop light Workstation is lost.
Red traffic light is displayed Red
reached.
AutoStop Check READY N/A Yes Instrument Log Red Run stopped An AutoStop condition stopped the Reset the Analytical Station.
Workstation Instrument 1 NO READ light System for one of the following
Sample received without errors:
proper identification [...,....]. r ToDo
r Control
r XB
r Data/Time
7.2-6 7.2-6 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-3 System Messages - B

Backwash Tank Not Full SYSTEM FAULT BACKWASH TANK Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Diluent level low or faulty float 1. Check diluent container for sufficient volume and
and and NOT FULL Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error and/or sensor. replace if necessary.
Non-Diluter Error (GEN•S System) occurred). 2. Reset the Analytical Station.
NOT READY
System only) Diluent level low or faulty 3. If volume of diluent is adequate or if message recurs:
backwash tank float sensor. a. Use F30 to check operation of the backwash tank.
Check diluent container and
b. Check for leaks and kinks in the tubing around the
restart Analytical Station.
backwash tank.
4. Continue operation. If message persists after resetting
Analytical Station a maximum of three times, call your
Beckman Coulter Representative.
Backwash Tank Still Full SYSTEM FAULT BACKWASH TANK Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Faulty float and/or sensor. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
and and STILL FULL Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error 2. If message persists:
Non-Diluter Error (GEN•S System) occurred). a. Use F30 to check operation of the backwash tank.
NOT READY
System only) Faulty backwash tank float b. Check for leaks and kinks in the tubing around the
sensor. Restart Analytical backwash tank.
Station.
3. Continue normal operation. If message persists after
resetting Analytical Station a maximum of three times,
call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Bed Not Advanced SYSTEM FAULT BED NOT ADVANCED Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed if available Automatic mode disabled; Obstruction in bed area or faulty 1. Ensure the rocker bed and belt are unobstructed.
and and Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error Manual mode is operable. sensor. 2. Reposition the cassette.
Diluter Error (GEN•S System) occurred). 3. Reset the Analytical Station.
MANUAL MODE
System only) Rocker bed did not advance. 4. Continue normal operation. If message persists, call
check belt tension or cassette your Beckman Coulter Representative. You can run
position (<Tube ID>, samples in the Manual mode.
<Cass/Pos>).
Bed Not Backward SYSTEM FAULT BED NOT BACKWARD Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed if available Automatic mode disabled; Obstruction in bed area or faulty 1. Ensure the rocker bed and belt are unobstructed.
MANUAL MODE
System only) Did not detect rocker bed 4. Continue normal operation. If message persists, call
backward position. Check for your Beckman Coulter Representative. You can run
obstruction or defective samples in the Manual mode.
sensor (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>).
Bed Not Forward SYSTEM FAULT BED NOT FORWARD Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed if available Automatic mode disabled; Obstruction in bed area or faulty 1. Ensure the rocker bed and belt are unobstructed.
MANUAL MODE
forward position. Check for your Beckman Coulter Representative. You can run
sensor (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>).
PN 4277219B 7.2-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-3 System Messages - B (Continued)

Bed Not Level SYSTEM FAULT BED NOT LEVEL Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed if available Automatic mode disabled; Obstruction in bed area or faulty 1. Ensure the rocker bed and belt are unobstructed.
MANUAL MODE
horizontal position. Check for your Beckman Coulter Representative. You can run
sensor (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>).
Bellows Not Down SYSTEM FAULT BELLOWS NOT DOWN Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Automatic mode disabled; Obstruction in bellows pathway
and and Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error Manual mode is operable. prevented bellows from moving WARNING Skin puncture from the needle, which could
Diluter Error (GEN•S System) occurred). down. contain biohazardous material, can occur. Use extreme
MANUAL MODE
System only) Bellows not down. Reset care when inspecting the needle area.
Analytical Station.
1. Ensure the bellows pathway is unobstructed.
3. Continue normal operation. If message persists, check
for leaks, kinks or plugs around the needle.
4. If message still persists, replace the needle.
5. If message still persists, call your Beckman Coulter
mode.
Bellows Not Up SYSTEM FAULT BELLOWS NOT UP Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Obstruction in bellows pathway
and and Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error prevented bellows from moving WARNING Skin puncture from the needle, which could
Non-Diluter Error (GEN•S System) occurred). up. contain biohazardous material, can occur. Use extreme
MANUAL MODE
System only) Bellows not extended. Needle care when inspecting the needle area.
not in safe position (<Tube
ID>, <Cass/Pos>). 1. Ensure the bellows pathway is unobstructed.
3. If the message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
7.2-8 7.2-8 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-4 System Messages - C

Cassette Not Lowered Onto (current status) CASSETTE NOT Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed. Run stopped. Right lift or sensor defective. 1. Ensure the right lift is unobstructed.
Bed LOWERED ONTO BED Instrument Log (LH750 light 2. Reposition the cassette.
System) 3. Reset the Analytical Station.
Cassette not lowered onto 4. If the message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
bed. Check right lift and Representative. You can place the cassette on the
rerun. rocker bed and press START/CONT to continue
running in the Automatic mode, or you can use the
Manual mode.
CBC Bath Voltages Out Of NOT READY N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. Red and/or white aperture voltages 1. Open the Analyzer cover and ensure the six white
Range Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” outside range (135 to 175 Vdc for preamp cables are properly connected to the two
System) message printed in footer of RBC aperture voltage and 100 to RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards.
Aperture voltage(s) out of sample report (depends upon 150 Vdc for WBC aperture 2. Close the Analyzer cover.
range (<Tube ID>, when error occurred). voltage). This could indicate: 3. Reset the Analytical Station. While the Analytical
<Cass/Pos>). r The baths are out of diluent. Station resets, ensure the WBC and RBC baths drain
r A preamp cable is loose. and rinse correctly.
r The aperture voltages need to 4. Continue operation. If the message persists, call your
be recalibrated. Beckman Coulter Representative and indicate the RBC
and WBC aperture voltages need to be recalibrated.
CBC Xmit Failure (current status) N/A No N/A (GEN•S System) N/A Stopped - inoperable. Analytical Station-to-Workstation 1. Ensure the Workstation is on. If not, turn on the
Instrument Log (LH750 transmission failure. This could Workstation, log onto the Workstation and go to step
System) indicate: 4.
r The Workstation is OFF. 2. Ensure the cables between the Analyzer and the
r The cables connecting the Workstation are connected. If not, connect the cables
Analyzer and the Workstation and go to step 4.
are loose or disconnected. 3. If the Workstation is turned on, shutdown and restart
r A hardware or software it, then go to step 4.
malfunction. 4. Reset the Analytical Station.
5. Continue normal operation. If message persists, call
your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Compressor +48V Bad READY COMPRESSOR Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. r Short on +48 V output 1. Turn the Power Supply MAIN POWER switch OFF for 5
+48V BAD Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” r Bulk Power Supply overheated minutes.
System) message printed in footer of r Pneumatic Power Supply 2. Verify air filter is clean.
48 Volt bulk or pneumatic sample report (depends upon defective. 3. Turn the Power Supply MAIN POWER switch ON.
Power Supply defective. when error occurred).
Representative.
Compressor Too Hot READY COMPRESSOR Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. Overheated pneumatics and/or 1. Turn the Power Supply MAIN POWER switch OFF for 5
TOO HOT Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” Pneumatic Power Supply defective minutes.
System) message printed in footer of (compressor shuts OFF when 2. Verify air filter is clean.
Pneumatics/Power Supply sample report (depends upon compressor temperature >80°C). 3. Turn the Power Supply MAIN POWER switch ON.
overheated or defective. when error occurred).
Verify air filter is clean. Representative.
PN 4277219B 7.2-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-4 System Messages - C (Continued)

CRC Error NOT READY COMMON ROM AREA Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red N/A Stopped - inoperable. Incorrect or faulty Diluter PROM 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
CRC ERROR Instrument Log (LH750 light chip. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Faulty diluter memory. Reset
Analytical Station.
CRC Error NOT READY OVERLAY AREA CRC Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red N/A Stopped - inoperable. Incorrect or faulty Diluter PROM 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
ERROR Instrument Log (LH750 light chip. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Faulty diluter memory. Reset
Analytical Station.
7.2-10 7.2-10 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-5 System Messages - D

Diagnostic Mode READY DIAGNOSTIC MODE - Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red N/A Analytical Station operation Reagent level sense, pressure 1. Resolve reagent level sense, pressure or voltage error.
TO RUN HIT RESET Instrument Log (LH750 light disabled (except for (5psi, 30 psi, high vacuum or low 2. Reset the Analytical Station.
System) F-functions from Diluter vacuum only), or voltage error 3. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Reagent level sense, pressure keypad) until error is detected at power up. Representative.
or voltage error detected. resolved.
Diff Heater Disabled (current status) DIFF HEATER Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed. Idle - ready for request. Temperature control failure. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
DISABLED Instrument Log (LH750 light 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Diff heater disabled for
current cycle. Heater
temperature not within
expected limits. Reset
analyzer.
Diff Heater Sensor Bad (current status) DIFF HEATER Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed. Idle - ready for request. Faulty or disconnected sensor. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
DIFF heater sensor defective
or disconnected. Reset
Analytical Station.
Diff Laser Offset Lower READY N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed Idle - ready for request. Analytical Station not adjusted If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Failed (GEN•S Instrument Log (LH750 light properly. Representative.
System) System)
No Laser offset too low.
(LH750
System)
Diff Laser Offset Upper READY N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed Idle - ready for request. Analytical Station not adjusted If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
System) System)
No Laser offset too high.
(LH750
System)
Diff PC Communication (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted. Stopped- inoperable DIFF PROCESSOR card 1. Reset the Workstation and the Analytical Station.
Failed Instrument Log (LH750 light communication failure or 2. Continue normal operation. If message recurs:
System) Workstation did not respond. a. Change the test mode to a non-Diff test and
Diff communication failure. process non-Diff samples.
Reset Analytical Station. b. Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Diff Pressure Lower Failed (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch Pressure reading <0.1 psi. Continue normal operation.
one Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” is OFF, run continues. 1. If additional messages appear, follow corrective
beep System) message printed in footer of If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch actions for those messages.
(GEN•S DIFF sample pressure below sample report (depends upon is ON, run is stopped at end 2. If this message recurs:
System) limit (<Tube ID>, when error occurred). of cycle. a. Change the test mode to a non-Diff test and
No <Cass/Pos>). process non-Diff samples.
(LH750
b. Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
System)
PN 4277219B 7.2-11
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-5 System Messages - D (Continued)

Diff Pressure Upper Failed (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch Pressure reading >0.9 psi. Continue normal operation.
one Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” is OFF, run continues. 1. If additional messages appear, follow corrective
beep System) message printed in footer of If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch actions for those messages.
(GEN•S DIFF sample pressure above sample report (depends upon is ON, run is stopped at end 2. If this message recurs:
System) limit (<Tube ID>, when error occurred). of cycle. a. Change the test mode to a non-Diff test and
No <Cass/Pos>). process non-Diff samples.
(LH750
System)
Diff Processor Does Not (current status) N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red CBC only results displayed. Operates only in CBC test DIFF PROCESSOR card failure or 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Answer (GEN•S Instrument Log (LH750 light (GEN•S System) mode. communication failure. 2. If message persists:
System) System) N/A (LH750 System) a. Change the test mode to CBC Only and process
DIFF processor CBC only samples.
communication failure. Reset b. Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Analytical Station.
Diff Processor Out Of (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. DIFF PROCESSOR card 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Synch. Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error communication failure. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
DIFF processor
communication failure. Reset
Analytical Station.
DIFF PS Card +15 V Error (current status) DIFF PS CARD Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. U4 on the Diff Power Supply card 1. Power down the Analytical Station:
Note: If event severe, this +15V ERROR Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” failed (outside ±5% limit). a. On the Diluter keypad, press POWER OFF.
message may not appear. System) message printed in footer of
b. At the Power Supply, turn off the MAIN POWER
+15 Volts from Diff Power sample report (depends upon
switch.
Supply outside limit. Power when error occurred).
2. Power up the Analytical Station:
down/up Analytical Station.
a. Turn on the MAIN POWER switch.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
DIFF PS Card -15 V Error (current status) DIFF PS CARD Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. U4 on the Diff Power Supply card 1. Power down the Analytical Station:
-15V ERROR Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” failed (outside ±5% limit). a. On the Diluter keypad, press POWER OFF.
System) message printed in footer of
-15 Volts from Diff Power sample report (depends upon
switch.
Supply outside limit. Power when error occurred).
down/up Analytical Station.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
Diff RAM Test Failed N/A N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data not transmitted. Idle - ready for request. Diff RAM error. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
DIFF RAM test failed. Rerun
test.
7.2-12 7.2-12 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING

Diff Timer Test Failed N/A N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow N/A Idle - ready for request. Diff timer error. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
DIFF timer error. Rerun test.
DIFF Xmit Failure (current status) N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red N/A Stopped - inoperable. Analytical Station-to-Workstation 1. Ensure the communication cables between the
Instrument Log (LH750 light transmission failure. This can Workstation and the Analytical Station are properly
System) happen if the Workstation is turned connected.
AMC Reported Error - Diff off or if the communication cables 2. Turn on or reset the Workstation.
Transmit Failure. between the Workstation and the 3. Continue normal operation. If message recurs:
Analytical Station loosen while data
a. Change the test mode to a non-Diff test and
is being transmitted.
process non-Diff samples.
Dil SOL/OP PS +15V Error (current status) DIL SOL/OP PS Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. U2 on the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics 1. Power down the Analytical Station:
+15V ERROR Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” Power Supply card failed (outside a. On the Diluter keypad, press POWER OFF.
System) message printed in footer of ±5% limit).
+15 Volts on Diluter 2 Card sample report (depends upon
switch.
outside limit. Power down/up when error occurred).
Analytical Station.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
Dil SOL/OP PS -15V Error (current status) DIL SOL/OP PS Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. U2 on the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics 1. Power down the Analytical Station:
Note: If event severe, this -15V ERROR Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” Power Supply card failed (outside a. On the Diluter keypad, press POWER OFF.
message may not appear. System) message printed in footer of ±5% limit).
-15 Volts on Diluter 2 Card sample report (depends upon
switch.
Analytical Station.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
Dil SOL/OP PS 24V Error (current status) DIL SOL/OP PS Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. U1 on the Diluter/Solenoid/Optics 1. Power down the Analytical Station:
Note: If event severe, this 24V ERROR Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” Power Supply card failed (outside a. On the Diluter keypad, press POWER OFF.
message may not appear. System) message printed in footer of ±8% limit).
24 Volts on Diluter 2 Card sample report (depends upon
switch.
Analytical Station.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
PN 4277219B 7.2-13
TROUBLESHOOTING

Dil1 Card 5V Error NOT READY DIL1 CARD 5V Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. U35 on the Diluter 1 card failed 1. Power down the Analytical Station:
ERROR Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” (outside ±5% limit). a. On the Diluter keypad, press POWER OFF.
switch.
Analytical Station.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
Dil1 Card +15V Error (current status) DIL1 CARD +15V Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. U35 on the Diluter 1 card failed 1. Power down the Analytical Station:
+15 Volts on Diluter 1 Card sample report (depends upon
switch.
Analytical Station.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
Dil1 Card -15V Error (current status) DIL1 CARD -15V Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. U35 on the Diluter 1 card failed 1. Power down the Analytical Station:
-15 Volts on Diluter 1 Card sample report (depends upon
switch.
Analytical Station.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
Dil4 Card 12V Error (current status) DIL4 CARD Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. U5 on the Diluter 4 card failed 1. Power down the Analytical Station:
12V ERROR Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” (outside ±5% limit). a. On the Diluter keypad, press POWER OFF.
switch.
Analytical Station.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
Diluter Board Not (current status) N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted. Stopped - inoperable Analyzer-to-Diluter communication 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Answering Instrument Log (LH750 light error. 2. If the message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Analyzer-to-Diluter
communication failure. Reset
Analytical Station.
7.2-14 7.2-14 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING

Diluter Card 1 Failure NOT READY DILUTER CARD 1 Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Diluter 1 card not answering. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
FAILURE Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error 2. If the message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Diluter 1 I/O card failure
(<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>).
Diluter Comm. Error NOT READY N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Failure to communicate commands 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error to Diluter. 2. If the message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Diluter communication
failure. Reset Analytical
Station.
Diluter Echo Error NOT READY N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Diluter echo not understood by 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error Analyzer. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Diluter communication
Station.
Diluter Error NOT READY DILUTER ERROR Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Generic fatal Diluter error. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Diluter failure. Reset
Analytical Station.
Diluter Left Power Sup. Bad (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. Diluter left power supply defective. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Diluter left power supply sample report (depends upon
Station.
Diluter RAM Fault SYSTEM FAULT DILUTER RAM No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted. Stopped - inoperable. Internal memory error. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
FAULT Instrument Log (LH750 light 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Diluter memory failure. Reset
Analytical Station.
PN 4277219B 7.2-15
TROUBLESHOOTING

Diluter Right Power Sup. (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. Diluter right power supply 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Bad Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” defective. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Diluter right power supply sample report (depends upon
Station.
Diluter TxRx Error NOT READY N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red N/A Stopped - inoperable. Communications error during 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light transmission to the Diluter. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Communication failure during
transmission to diluter. Reset
Analytical Station.
Door Open Run Stopped (current status) DOOR OPEN Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Run stopped. Diluter front door open during Close Diluter front door and continue operation.
RUN STOPPED Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error Automatic mode operation.
System) occurred).
Diluter front door open
during automatic sampling
mode operation. Close front
door and continue operation.
DPR Diluter Packet Error SYSTEM FAULT N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Idle - ready for request or DPR malfunction. 1. Continue normal operation and watch for additional
and and Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error cycle continues. messages.
Non-Diluter Error (GEN•S System) occurred). 2. If additional messages appear, follow the corrective
NOT READY
System only) Invalid dual port RAM packet actions associated with those messages.
(<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>). 3. If this message persists:
Reset Analytical Station and a. Change the test mode to CBC Only.
rerun sample.
b. Continue processing CBC only samples.
c. Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Dump Valve Stuck Closed NOT READY DUMP VALVE Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted. Stopped - inoperable. Power Supply valve malfunction. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
STUCK CLOSED Instrument Log (LH750 light 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Overflow valve malfunction
(remained closed) detected
while turning compressor
ON. Reset Analytical Station.
Dump Valve Stuck Open NOT READY DUMP VALVE Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted. Stopped - inoperable. Power Supply valve malfunction. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
STUCK OPEN Instrument Log (LH750 light 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Overflow valve malfunction
(remained open) detected
while turning compressor
ON. Reset Analytical Station.
7.2-16 7.2-16 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-6 System Messages - E through G

ETX Rec. Error NOT READY N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Last character received from 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error Workstation was not ETX. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
ETX not received from diluter.
Expected Command from (current status) EXPECTED COMMAND Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Diluter did not receive message 1. Reset the Analytical Station and/or Workstation.
AMC FROM AMC Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error from AMC. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Expected command from
AMC, command not received.
Fan Power Bad (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. U3 on power supply 2 defective. 1. Power down the Analytical Station:
Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” a. On the Diluter keypad, press POWER OFF.
Power Supply 2 defective. sample report (depends upon
switch.
Power down/up Analytical when error occurred).
Station.
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
4. Service Only: Replace the AMC as instructed under
Heading 4.6, ANALYZER CARD AND SCOPE MODULE
REPLACEMENT.
Fatal DPR Error SYSTEM FAULT N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. DPR malfunction. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
and and Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
NOT READY
System only) instrument dual port RAM
memory test failed. Reset
Analytical Station.
PN 4277219B 7.2-17
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-6 System Messages - E through G (Continued)

Flow Cell Clog SYSTEM FAULT FLOW CELL CLOG Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data for VCS-affected parameters Stopped - inoperable. Analytical Station detected clog in 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
and and Instrument Log (LH750 light incomplete; colons (:::::) appear flow cell and attempted three times 2. Perform F44 FLOWCELL UNCLOG 1 function.
Non-Diluter Error (GEN•S System) in VCS-affected parameter fields if to clear clog without success. 3. If message recurs, repeat F44 FLOWCELL UNCLOG 1
NOT READY
System only) Instrument detected clog in clog is cleared after autoclearing. function.
flow cell and attempted three If clog is not cleared, data will not
4. If message recurs, perform F45 FLOWCELL UNCLOG
times to clear clog without be available.
2 function, up to three times.
success. Perform F44
function. CAUTION Risk of instrument damage. Using F46 can
damage the flow cell because it places greater stress
on the flow cell than F44 or F45. Only use F46 if F44
and F45 fail to clear the clog, and never do F46 more
than once unless specifically instructed to do so by
5. If message recurs, perform F46 FLOWCELL UNCLOG
3 function once.
6. Allow Analytical Station to sit idle for 30 minutes. Then
perform F44 FLOWCELL UNCLOG 1 function before
analyzing samples.
Representative.
Function Not Allowed (current status) N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red N/A Paused until correct function F58 or F59 selected and Analytical Enter correct function for Analytical Station's mode of
Instrument Log (LH750 light entered. Station does not allow CD4 or CD8 operation.
System) (COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
AMC Reported Error - card switches).
Function Not Allowed.
7.2-18 7.2-18 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-7 System Messages - H

HGB Status Error (current status) HGB STATUS Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed. Paused until error resolved. Hgb lamp power supply defective Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
ERROR Instrument Log (LH750 light
System)
HGB lamp power supply
defective. Call coulter
customer operations.
High pressure High (current status) HIGH PRESSURE Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed. Beeps - operation continues. 60 psi relief valve, compressor 1. Adjust 60 psi relief valve to 60 ±1 psi.
HIGH Instrument Log (LH750 light and/or pressure transducer 2. If 60 psi pressure reading cannot be adjusted, call your
System) functioning improperly (pressure Beckman Coulter Representative.
60 PSI pressure high. Adjust is 71 to 80 psi).
pressure. If 60 PSI pressure
reading cannot be adjusted,
call Coulter Customer
Operations.
High pressure Low (current status) HIGH PRESSURE Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed. Beeps - operation continues. 60 psi relief valve, compressor 1. Adjust 60 psi relief valve to 60 ±1 psi.
LOW Instrument Log (LH750 light and/or pressure transducer 2. If 60 psi pressure reading cannot be adjusted, call your
System) functioning improperly (pressure Beckman Coulter Representative.
60 PSI pressure low. Adjust is 45 to 49 psi) and/or line leaking.
pressure. If 60 PSI pressure
Operations.
High Pressure Too High NOT READY HIGH PRESSURE Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Beeps - operation continues. 60 psi relief valve, compressor 1. Adjust 60 psi relief valve to 60 ±1 psi. (If 60 psi
TOO HIGH Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” or and/or pressure transducer pressure reading cannot be adjusted, call your
System) message printed in footer of defective (compressor shuts OFF Beckman Coulter Representative).
Stopped.
60 PSI pressure out of range sample report (depends upon when pressure >80 psi). 2. Turn Power Supply MAIN POWER switch OFF and then
when error occurred). Depends on when error ON. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
(too high). Adjust pressure. If
occurred. Representative.
60 PSI pressure reading
cannot be adjusted, call
Coulter Customer Operations.
High Pressure Too Low (current status) HIGH PRESSURE Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Beeps - operation continues. 60 psi relief valve, compressor 1. Adjust 60 psi relief valve to 60 ±1 psi. (If 60 psi
TOO LOW Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” or and/or pressure transducer pressure reading cannot be adjusted, call your
System) message printed in footer of defective (pressure <45 psi) and/or Beckman Coulter Representative).
Stopped.
60 PSI pressure out of range sample report (depends upon line leaking. 2. Turn Power Supply MAIN POWER switch OFF and then
when error occurred). Depends on when error ON.
(too low). Adjust pressure. If
occurred.
60 PSI pressure reading 3. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
cannot be adjusted, call Representative.
PN 4277219B 7.2-19
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-7 System Messages - H (Continued)

High Vacuum Low READY HIGH VACUUM LOW Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Run stopped. Vacuum pump and/or vacuum 1. Power down the Analytical Station:
Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” transducer defective (vacuum is a. On the Diluter keypad, press POWER OFF.
System) message printed in footer of <14 in. Hg) and/or line leaking.
High vacuum too low. Power sample report (depends upon
switch.
down/up Analytical Station. when error occurred).
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
Histogram Mem. Reset NOT READY N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted. Stopped - inoperable. Analyzer non-communication fatal 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Error Instrument Log (LH750 light error. 2. If message persists, call your Coulter Representative.
System)
Analyzer non-communication
error. Reset Analytical
Station.
7.2-20 7.2-20 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-8 System Messages - I through K

Illegal Interrupt SYSTEM FAULT ILLEGAL Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. AMC, Diluter/Solenoid/Optics 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
and and INTERRUPT Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error Power Supply or DIFF 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Non-Diluter Error (GEN•S System) occurred). PROCESSOR cards’ hardware Representative.
NOT READY
System only AMC, Diluter or DIFF malfunction.
Processor hardware
malfunction (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>). Reset Analytical
Station and rerun sample.
Intermittent PS1 Supply SYSTEM FAULT N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. Faulty APS1 card. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Error Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Faulty PS1 power supply. sample report (depends upon
Reset Analytical Station. when error occurred).
Intermittent PS2 Supply SYSTEM FAULT N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. Faulty APS2 card. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Error Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Faulty PS2 power supply. sample report (depends upon
Reset Analytical Station. when error occurred).
Internal Cal. Fac. Error NOT READY N/A No Calibration Log (GEN•S Red Data not transmitted. Stopped - inoperable. System detected internal 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
System) light calibration factor error while 2. At Analyzer, select ANALYZER FUNCTIONS tt
Instrument Log (LH750 receiving S-CAL factors from CALIBRATION.
System) Workstation.
3. Check/re-enter calibration factors and recalibrate.
Incorrect calibration factors
received. Reset Analytical
Station and retransmit
calibration factors from
GEN•S Workstation.
Ireg Hst. READY N/A No N/A Data displayed but flagged. Idle - ready for request. System detected a “spike” in the 1. Continue operation.
platelet histogram. 2. If message occurs on other samples, call your
Keyboard Interrupt Error SYSTEM FAULT KEYBOARD Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable Diluter keyboard failure. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
and and INTERRUPT ERROR Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
NOT READY
System only Diluter keypad failure. Reset
Analytical Station.
PN 4277219B 7.2-21
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-9 System Messages - L

Label Not Read Run (current status) LABEL NOT READ Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not available. Run stopped Unable to read cassette label. 1. Clean the bar-code reader.
Stopped RUN STOPPED Instrument Log (LH750 light 2. Check the cassette label and clean or replace the label
System) if necessary.
Unable to read cassette label. 3. Continue operation. If message persists, use a
Check label and scanner. different cassette.
Rerun sample. 4. If message still persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
Laser Voltage Lower Failed (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch Voltage is 1181 to 1230 Vdc. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
(GEN•S Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” is OFF, run continues. 2. Continue normal operation and watch for additional
System) System) message printed in footer of If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch messages.
No Laser voltage below limit sample report (depends upon is ON, run is stopped at end 3. If additional messages appear, follow the corrective
(LH750 (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>). when error occurred). of cycle. actions associated with the messages.
System) 4. If this message persists:
a. Change the test mode to a non-Diff test.
b. Continue processing non-Diff samples.
Laser Voltage Too High NOT READY N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Idle - ready for request. Voltage ≥1520 Vdc. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
(GEN•S Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” 2. Continue normal operation and watch for additional
System) System) message printed in footer of messages.
No Laser voltage too high. sample report (depends upon 3. If additional messages appear, follow the corrective
(LH750 when error occurred). actions associated with the messages.
Laser Voltage Too Low NOT READY N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Idle - ready for request. Voltage ≤1180 Vdc. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
(GEN•S Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” 2. Continue normal operation and watch for additional
System) System) message printed in footer of messages.
No Laser voltage too low. sample report (depends upon 3. If additional messages appear, follow the corrective
(LH750 when error occurred). actions associated with the messages.
Laser Voltage Upper Failed (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch Voltage is 1470 to 1519 Vdc. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
(GEN•S Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” is OFF, run continues. 2. Continue normal operation and watch for additional
System) System) message printed in footer of If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch messages.
No Laser voltage above limit sample report (depends upon is ON, run is stopped at end 3. If additional messages appear, follow the corrective
(LH750 (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>). when error occurred). of cycle. actions associated with the messages.
7.2-22 7.2-22 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-9 System Messages - L (Continued)

Left Lift Not Up SYSTEM FAULT LEFT LIFT NOT UP Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed if available Automatic mode disabled; Obstruction or faulty sensor. 1. Ensure the left lift is unobstructed.
and and Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error Manual mode is operable. 2. Reset the Analytical Station.
Diluter Error (GEN•S System) occurred). 3. Continue normal operation. If message persists, call
MANUAL MODE
System only Rocker bed obstructed (left your Beckman Coulter Representative. You can run
lift not up) or faulty sensor samples in the Manual mode.
Remove obstruction and
Left Load Fail SYSTEM FAULT LEFT LOAD FAIL Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed if available Automatic mode disabled; Obstruction or faulty sensor. 1. Ensure the left lift is unobstructed.
and and Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error Manual mode is operable. 2. Reset the Analytical Station.
Diluter Error (GEN•S System) occurred). 3. Continue normal operation. If message persists, call
MANUAL MODE
System only Rocker bed obstructed (left your Beckman Coulter Representative. You can run
lift not down) or faulty sensor samples in the Manual mode.
Left Stack Full (current status) LEFT STACK FULL Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Run stopped. Maximum number of cassettes 1. If the unloading bay is full (12 cassettes), remove the
Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error (12) already loaded or switch cassettes from the unloading bay.
System) occurred). stuck/failed. 2. If the unloading bay is not full, check the sensor and
Maximum number of ensure it is not stuck. If necessary, gently pull down on
cassettes (12) already loaded, the sensor plate at the top of the unloading bay.
obstruction or faulty switch. 3. Continue normal operation. If the message persists,
Remove at least one cassette call your Coulter Representative.
and continue operation.
Level C------ READY LEVEL C------ Yes Reagents Log Red Data displayed if available Cycling inhibited until sensor Reservoir low on cleaning agent. 1. Replace cleaning agent container.
Reservoir low on cleaner. light (depends upon when error error resolved. 2. Press START/CONT to resume normal operation.
Replace cleaner container occurred).
and press START/CONT On
Diluter keypad to continue.
Level Check Fail Caused (current status) LEVEL CHECK FAIL Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Run stopped. Analytical Station detected a low 1. Check the reagent containers and replace any that are
Stop CAUSED STOP Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error fluidic condition that could low.
System) occurred). produce a level sense problem. 2. Press START/CONT to resume normal operation.
Replace reagent container. 3. If the message recurs, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
Level -D----- READY LEVEL -D----- Yes Reagents Log Red Data displayed if available Cycling inhibited until sensor Diluent is low. 1. Replace diluent container.
Diluent is low. Replace light (depends upon when error error resolved. 2. Press START/CONT to resume normal operation.
diluent container and press occurred).
START/CONT on Diluter
keypad to continue.
Level --L---- READY LEVEL --L---- Yes Reagents Log Red Data displayed if available Cycling inhibited until sensor Reservoir low on CBC lytic reagent. 1. Replace CBC lytic reagent container.
Reservoir low on CBC lyse. light (depends upon when error error resolved. 2. Press START/CONT to resume normal operation.
Replace CBC Lyse container occurred).
and press START/CONT on
PN 4277219B 7.2-23
TROUBLESHOOTING

Level ---P--- READY LEVEL ---P--- Yes Reagents Log Red Data displayed if available Cycling inhibited until sensor Reservoir low on diff lytic reagent 1. Replace DIFF PAK or Stabilyse diff preservative
(GEN•S System) Reservoir light (depends upon when error error resolved. and/or diff preservative. container.
low on DIFF PAK . Replace occurred). 2. Press START/CONT to resume normal operation.
DIFF PAK container and press
keypad to continue.
(LH750 System) Reservoir
low or Stabilyse level sense
detected. Replace DIFF PAK
or Stabilyse container and
press START/CONT on Diluter
keypad to continue.
Level ----R-- READY LEVEL ----R-- Yes Reagents Log Red Data displayed if available Cycling inhibited until sensor Reservoir low on retic stain and/or 1. Replace RETIC PAK or stain container.
(GEN•S System) Reservoir light (depends upon when error error resolved. retic clearing solution. 2. Press START/CONT to resume normal operation.
low on Retic PAK. Replace occurred).
Retic PAK container and
press START/CONT on Diluter
keypad to continue.
(LH750 System) Reservoir
low or Stain or clearing agent
level sense detected. Replace
Retic PAK or Stain or clearing
agent container and press
keypad to continue.
Level -----V- READY LEVEL -----V- Yes Reagents Log Red Data displayed if available Cycling inhibited until sensor Vacuum overflow tank full. 1. Empty vacuum overflow tank.
Vacuum overflow tank full. light (depends upon when error error resolved. 2. Press START/CONT to resume normal operation.
Empty vacuum overflow tank occurred).
Level ------W READY LEVEL ------W Yes Reagents Log Red Data displayed if available Cycling inhibited until sensor Waste container full. 1. Empty or replace waste container.
Waste container full. Empty light (depends upon when error error resolved. 2. Press START/CONT to resume normal operation.
or replace waste container occurred).
Low Vacuum Drifted (current status) LOW VACUUM Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed. Beeps - operation continues. Low vacuum between 5.8-5.9 or 1. Adjust low vacuum regulator to 6 ±0.010 in. Hg (if low
DRIFTED Instrument Log (LH750 light 6.1-6.2 in. Hg and/or low vacuum vacuum reading cannot be adjusted, call your
System) regulator and/or vacuum pump Beckman Coulter Representative).
Low vacuum drifted. Adjust defective. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
low vacuum. If low vacuum Representative.
Operations.
7.2-24 7.2-24 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING

Low Vacuum High READY LOW VACUUM HIGH Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Run stopped. Low vacuum outside limit (vacuum 1. Use F92 to monitor low vacuum and adjust low
Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” >6.21 in. Hg) and/or low vacuum vacuum regulator to 6 ±0.010 in. Hg. If low vacuum
System) message printed in footer of regulator and/or vacuum pump reading cannot be adjusted, call your Beckman Coulter
Low vacuum too high. Adjust sample report (depends upon defective. Representative.
low vacuum. If low vacuum when error occurred). 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
reading cannot be adjusted, Representative.
Operations.
Low Vacuum Low READY LOW VACUUM LOW Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Run stopped. Low vacuum outside limit (vacuum 1. Use F92 to monitor low vacuum and adjust low
Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” <5.8 in. Hg) and/or low vacuum vacuum regulator, RG2, to 6 ±0.010 in. Hg. If low
System) message printed in footer of regulator and/or vacuum pump vacuum reading cannot be adjusted, call your
Low vacuum too low. Adjust sample report (depends upon defective. Beckman Coulter Representative.
low vacuum. If low vacuum when error occurred). 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
reading cannot be adjusted, Representative.
call Coulter Customer 3. Service Only: If problem occurs when cycling RETIC
Operations. ONLY samples in the Manual mode -
a. Starting at VC1, fitting 4, retube this line all the way
to the COUNT VACUUM transducer on the PVT
card, ensuring all feed-thru fittings are open.
b. Completely retube the 3-way pinch valve, VL16A.
c. Close the doors, ensuring no tubing is sharply bent
or restricted.
4. If the problem persists -
a. Starting at VC1, fitting 7, retube this line all the way
to the low vacuum regulator, RG2, ensuring all
feed-thru fittings are open.
b. Replace the tubing through VL17.
c. Replace the brown-striped tubing through VL12E.
d. Replace the low vacuum regulator restrictor tubing.
Troubleshooting Tip: Usually the correct tubing
with a fitting boot on one end is available in the
customer parts kit, but you must cut it to the
correct length.
e. Replace the tubing to VC16, fitting 8.
5. If the problem still persists, replace the low vacuum
regulator, RG2.
6. If the problem still persists, replace the Pneumatic
Monitor card.
PN 4277219B 7.2-25
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-10 System Messages - M through O

Manual Probe Not In (current status) MANUAL PROBE Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not available. Stopped - inoperable. Aspirator tip, probe wipe 1. Ensure the aspirator tip is unobstructed.
NOT IN Instrument Log (LH750 light mechanism, and/or sensor 2. Ensure the cleaning truck in the Probe-Wipe module is
System) malfunction. correctly aligned with the aspirator tip.
Manual sampling probe did 3. Reset the Analytical Station.
not retract (<Tube ID>, 4. Continue normal operation and watch for messages.
<Cass/Pos>). Check for
5. If additional messages appear, follow the corrective
obstruction or faulty sensor
actions associated with those messages.
and rerun sample.
6. If this message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative.
Monitor Task Did Not Finish SYSTEM FAULT N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted. Stopped - inoperable. DIFF PROCESSOR card monitor 1. Reset the Analytical Station and/or Workstation.
Instrument Log (LH750 light command did not finish. 2. If message persists, call Beckman Coulter Customer
System) Operations.
DIFF Processor monitor
command did not finish.
No ACK From Diluter NOT READY N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Diluter response command 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error contained unknown code 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Invalid Diluter command.
No ETX NOT READY N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Last character received from 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error Diluter was not ETX. 2. If message persists, call Beckman Coulter Customer
System) occurred). Operations.
ETX not received from Diluter.
No Retics Control In This READY N/A Yes Event Log Red Data not available. Run stopped. Retic control material used in CBC Change the Analytical Station test mode to RETIC,
Mode (GEN•S System Retic control material used in light or CBC/DIFF test mode. CBC/RETIC or CBC/DIFF/RETIC.
only) CBC or CBC/DIFF test mode.
No Valid ID (LH750 System (current status) NO WAND ID Yes Instrument Log Red Data not transmitted. Beeps. ID not read by handled scanner or Re-enter ID using handheld scanner or enter ID using
only) ID not read by wand or ID light ID was not available. Diluter keypad.
was not available. Re-enter ID
using wand or manually
using diluter keypad.
No Wand ID (GEN•S (current status) NO WAND ID Yes Event Log Red Data not transmitted. Beeps. ID not read by handled scanner or Re-enter ID using handheld scanner or enter ID using
System only) ID not read by wand or ID light ID was not available. Diluter keypad.
was not available. Re-enter ID
using wand or manually
using diluter keypad.
Non-ASCII From Diluter NOT READY N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Non-ASCII character received 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error while exchanging data with Diluter. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Invalid Character received
from Diluter. Reset Analytical
station.
7.2-26 7.2-26 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-10 System Messages - M through O (Continued)

Not Ready For AMC Data NOT READY NOT READY Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Communication error. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
FOR AMC DATA Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Diluter not ready to receive
data from AMC. Reset
Analytical Station.
Operator Alert 09 NOT READY N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted. Stopped - inoperable. Miscommunication between the 1. Reset the Analytical Station and reposition the
Instrument Log (LH750 light Analyzer and the Diluter. cassette.
System) 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
AMC Reported Error -- Representative.
Operator Alert 09.
PN 4277219B 7.2-27
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-11 System Messages - P through Q

PC Not Receiving NOT READY N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not available. Stopped - inoperable. Workstation not receiving data 1. Reset the Analytical Station and/or Workstation.
Instrument Log (LH750 light from Analytical Station. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
AMC Reported Error - PC not
ready. Reset Analytical
Station.
Peltier Heater Sensor Bad (current status) PELTIER HEATER Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed. Idle - ready for request. Faulty or disconnected sensor. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Peltier heater sensor
defective or disconnected.
Peltier Temp. Outside (current status) PELTIER TEMP. Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed. Idle - ready for request. Temperature control failure. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Limits OUTSIDE LIMITS Instrument Log (LH750 light 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Peltier temperature outside
limits. Reset Analyzer .
PLT No Fit Aperture X Mode (current status) N/A No Event Log Data displayed but flagged. Idle - ready for request. Platelet fit algorithm failed. If message occurs on other samples, call your Beckman
Out (GEN•S System only) Platelet fit algorithm failed Coulter Representative.
Note: “X” appears as 1, 2 (<Tube ID>,<Cass/Pos>). If
or 3. message occurs on other
samples, call Coulter
Probe Obstructed (current status) PROBE OBSTRUCTED Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed. Paused until error resolved. Obstruction preventing aspirator 1. Remove obstruction from aspirator tip area.
and Instrument Log (LH750 light Note (LH750 System): tip retraction. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Expected Command from System) Depending upon the length of Representative.
AMC (LH750 System Manual sampling probe did time the aspirator tip is
only) not retract (<Tube ID>, obstructed, the operator may
<Cass/Pos>). Remove see one or both messages.
obstruction.
Probe Wipe Down Fail SYSTEM FAULT PROBE WIPE DOWN Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed. Stopped - inoperable. Obstruction or faulty sensor. 1. Remove obstruction.
and and FAIL Instrument Log (LH750 light 2. Reset the Analytical Station.
Non-Diluter Error (GEN•S System) 3. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
NOT READY
System only) Manual sampling probe wipe Representative.
obstructed (not down)
Remove obstruction.
Probe Wipe Failed SYSTEM FAULT PROBE WIPE FAILED Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data Displayed. Stopped - inoperable. r Sensor is obstructed or faulty 1. Remove obstruction.
and and Instrument Log (LH750 light r Probe-wipe mechanism is 2. Reset the Analytical Station.
Non-Diluter Error (GEN•S System) obstructed or faulty 3. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
NOT READY
System only) Manual sampling probe wipe Representative.
obstructed (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>). Remove
obstruction.
7.2-28 7.2-28 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-11 System Messages - P through Q (Continued)

Probe Wipe Truck Not SYSTEM FAULT PROBE WIPE TRUCK Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed. Stopped - inoperable. r Sensor is obstructed or faulty 1. Remove obstruction.
Home and NOT HOME Instrument Log (LH750 light r Probe-wipe mechanism is 2. Reset the Analytical Station.
and System) obstructed or faulty. 3. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
NOT READY
Non-Diluter Error (GEN•S Manual sampling probe wipe Representative.
System only) obstructed (not home)
Remove obstruction.
Probe Wipe Up Fail SYSTEM FAULT PROBE WIPE UP Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed. Stopped - inoperable. Obstruction or faulty sensor. 1. Remove obstruction.
and and FAIL Instrument Log (LH750 light 2. Reset the Analytical Station.
Non-Diluter Error (GEN•S System) 3. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
NOT READY
System only Manual sampling probe wipe Representative.
obstructed (not up) (<Tube
ID>, <Cass/Pos>). Remove
obstruction.
PS1 +5V Supply High SYSTEM FAULT N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. +5 V power to power supply 1 Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” outside +5% limit.
Power Supply 1 problem: +5 sample report (depends upon
Volts above limit. Call Coulter when error occurred).
PS1 +5V Supply Low SYSTEM FAULT N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. +5 V power to power supply 1 Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” outside -5% limit.
Volts below limit. Call Coulter when error occurred).
PS1 -15V Supply High SYSTEM FAULT N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. -15 V power to power supply 1 Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Power Supply 1 problem: sample report (depends upon
-15 Volts above limit. Call when error occurred).
PN 4277219B 7.2-29
TROUBLESHOOTING

PS1 -15V Supply Low SYSTEM FAULT N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. -15 V power to power supply 1 Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
-15 Volts below limit. Call when error occurred).
Volts Above limit. Call Coulter when error occurred).
7.2-30 7.2-30 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING

PS2 -15V Supply High SYSTEM FAULT N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. -15 V power to power supply 2 Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
-15 Volts above limit. Call when error occurred).
PS2 -15V Supply Low SYSTEM FAULT N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Stopped - inoperable. -15 V power to power supply 2 Call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
--15 Volts below limit. Call when error occurred).
P/W Harness Not (current status) P/W HARNESS NOT Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Processed normally. Beeps- operation continues. Harness not connected. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Connected CONNECTED Instrument Log (LH750 light 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
The probe wipe harness is
not connected. Reset
Analytical Station.
PN 4277219B 7.2-31
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-12 System Messages - R

Red/White Reset Error NOT READY N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted. Stopped - inoperable. Red and white counter did not 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light reset to zero value. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Red/white processor
counter(s) did not reinitialize.
Retic Accumulation Not NOT READY N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted. Stopped - inoperable. Error during retic data 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Finished Instrument Log (LH750 light accumulation. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Incomplete Retic collection.
Retic Laser Offset Lower READY N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed Idle - ready for request. Analytical Station not adjusted If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
System) System)
No Retic laser offset too low.
(LH750
System)
Retic Laser Offset Upper READY N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed Idle - ready for request. Analytical Station not adjusted If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
System) System)
No Retic laser offset too high.
(LH750
System
Retic Pressure Lower (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data not transmitted, or data If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch Pressure reading <0.3 psi. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Failed one Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” is OFF, run continues. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
beep System) message printed in footer of If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch Representative.
(GEN•S Retic sample pressure below sample report (depends upon is ON, run is stopped at end
System) limit (<Tube ID>, when error occurred). of cycle.
No <Cass/Pos>).
(LH750
System
Retic Pressure Upper Failed (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data not transmitted, or data If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch Pressure reading >2.2 psi. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
one Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” is OFF, run continues. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
beep System) message printed in footer of If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch Representative.
(GEN•S Retic sample pressure above sample report (depends upon is ON, run is stopped at end
System) limit (<Tube ID>, when error occurred). of cycle.
No <Cass/Pos>).
(LH750
System
Retic Xmit Failure (current status) N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted. Stopped - inoperable. Analytical Station-to-Workstation 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light transmission failure. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
AMC Reported Error - Retic
Transmit Failure.
7.2-32 7.2-32 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-12 System Messages - R (Continued)

RF Lower Limit Failed (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data not transmitted, or data If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch Reading <5.8 V. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
(GEN•S Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” is OFF, run continues. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
System) System) message printed in footer of If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch Representative.
No RF (6.3V) voltage reading sample report (depends upon is ON, run is stopped at end
(LH750 below limit (<Tube ID>, when error occurred). of cycle.
System <Cass/Pos>).
RF Upper Limit Failed (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data not transmitted, or data If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch Reading >6.7 V. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
(GEN•S Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” is OFF, run continues. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
No RF (6.3V) voltage reading sample report (depends upon is ON, run is stopped at end
(LH750 above limit (<Tube ID>, when error occurred). of cycle.
System <Cass/Pos>).
RF Voltage Low SYSTEM FAULT RF VOLTAGE LOW Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. RF 300 V power supply low (scaled 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
and and Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error down voltage is 4.7 Vdc ±2%). 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
NOT READY
System only) RF voltage reading below
limit.
Right Lift Not Down SYSTEM FAULT RIGHT LIFT Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed if available Automatic mode disabled; Obstruction or faulty sensor. 1. Ensure the right lift is unobstructed.
and and NOT DOWN Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error Manual mode operable. 2. Reposition the cassette.
MANUAL MODE
System only) Rocker bed obstructed (right 4. Continue normal operation.
lift not down) or faulty sensor
mode.
rerun sample.
Right Lift Not Up SYSTEM FAULT RIGHT LIFT Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed if available Automatic mode disabled; Obstruction or faulty sensor. 1. Ensure the right lift is unobstructed.
and and NOT UP Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error Manual mode operable. 2. Reposition the cassette.
MANUAL MODE
System only) Rocker bed obstructed (right 4. Continue normal operation.
lift not up) or faulty sensor
mode.
rerun sample.
Right Stack Full (current status) RIGHT STACK FULL Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Run stopped. Maximum number of cassettes 1. If the loading bay is full (12 cassettes), remove at least
Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error (12) already loaded or switch one cassette.
System) occurred). stuck/failed. 2. If the loading bay is not full, check the sensor and
Right stack full. remove one ensure it is not stuck. If necessary, gently pull down on
or more cassette(s), or check the sensor plate at the top of the loading bay.
switch. 3. Continue normal operation. If the message persists,
call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
PN 4277219B 7.2-33
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-12 System Messages - R (Continued)

Run Aborted. PC Not SYSTEM FAULT N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red N/A Stopped - inoperable. AMC to Workstation 1. Ensure the Workstation is on. If not, turn on the
Ready. and Instrument Log (LH750 light communication error. This could Workstation, log onto the Workstation and go to step
System) indicate: 4.
NOT READY
AMC Reported Error - Run r The Workstation is OFF. 2. Ensure the cables between the Analyzer and the
Aborted, PC Not Ready r The cables connecting the Workstation are connected. If not, connect the cables
Analyzer and the Workstation and go to step 4.
are loose or disconnected. 3. If the Workstation is turned on, shutdown and restart
r A hardware or software it, then go to step 4.
malfunction. 4. Reset the Analytical Station.
5. Continue normal operation. If message persists, call
R/W Data Mem. NOT READY N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted. Stopped - inoperable. Internal memory error. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Interference Instrument Log (LH750 light 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Analyzer memory read/write
Station.
7.2-34 7.2-34 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-13 System Messages - S

Same Label Read Run (current status) SAME LABEL READ Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed. Run stopped. The cassette did not advance to the 1. Reset the Analytical Station and reposition the
Stopped RUN STOPPED Instrument Log (LH750 light next position, or the same cassette cassette.
System) was put back on the rocker bed 2. Press START/CONT and ensure the cassette
Cassette did not advance to while the rocker bed was still advances on the rocker bed.
next position. Check for active.
obstruction. Representative. You can run samples in the Manual
mode.
4. Service Only: Perform F07, BAR CODE READER TEST,
to check advancement of the cassette.
Sample Removed Too Soon (current status) SAMPLE REMOVED Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed. Beeps - operation continues. Operator removed sample from 1. Wait for the System to return to READY.
TOO SOON Instrument Log (LH750 light aspirator tip before aspiration was 2. Present sample to aspirator tip again. Do not remove
System) complete. sample until Analytical Station beeps, indicating
Operator removed sample aspiration is complete.
from probe before aspiration
was complete (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>). Rerun sample.
Sample Tube Not Detected (current status) SAMPLE TUBE Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow N/A Beeps - operation continues. Tube detector sensor malfunction 1. Reset the Analytical Station and reposition the
NOT DETECTED Instrument Log (LH750 light or tube detector needs adjustment. cassette.
System) 2. If the message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Sample tube not detected. Representative. You can run samples in the Manual
Tube detector sensor mode.
malfunction or tube detector 3. Service Only: Adjust the tube detector as instructed
needs adjustment. under Heading 4.47, TUBE DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT.
Scanner Error SYSTEM FAULT SCANNER ERROR Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Invalid label type received from 1. Check the label and clean the scanner.
and and Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error scanner. 2. Reset the Analytical Station, then retry the tube.
Diluter Error (GEN•S System) occurred). 3. If message persists, try another tube.
MANUAL MODE
System only) Invalid tube label type read by 4. If message still persists, call your Beckman Coulter
scanner (<Tube ID>, Representative.
<Cass/Pos>). Check label.
Scanning Fault SYSTEM FAULT SCANNING FAULT Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed if available Automatic mode disabled; Scanner stuck. 1. Ensure the scanner is unobstructed.
and and Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error Manual mode operable. 2. Reset the Analytical Station.
Diluter Error (GEN•S System) occurred). 3. Continue normal operation. If the message recurs, call
MANUAL MODE
System only) Bar code scanner pressure your Beckman Coulter Representative. You can run
too low or scanner samples in the Manual mode.
obstructed (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>). Check scanner.
Sheath Pressure Lower (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data not transmitted, or data If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch Pressure reading <6.25 psi. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Failed (GEN•S Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” is OFF, run continues. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
No Sheath sample pressure sample report (depends upon is ON, run is stopped at end
(LH750 below limit (<Tube ID>, when error occurred). of cycle.
System <Cass/Pos>). To verify
pressure, run Daily Checks
background test.
PN 4277219B 7.2-35
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-13 System Messages - S (Continued)

Sheath Pressure Upper (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data not transmitted, or data If AutoStop/Flow Cell switch Pressure reading >6.55 psi. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Failed (GEN•S Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” is OFF, run continues. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
No Sheath sample pressure sample report (depends upon is ON, run is stopped at end
(LH750 above limit (<Tube ID>, when error occurred). of cycle.
System <Cass/Pos>). To verify
pressure, run Daily Checks
background test.
Sheath Tank Not Full SYSTEM FAULT SHEATH TANK Yes Event Log Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Diluent level low or faulty float 1. Check diluent container for sufficient volume and
and and NOT FULL Diluent level low or faulty light (depends upon when error and/or sensor. replace if necessary.
Non-Diluter Error (GEN•S sheath tank float sensor. occurred). 2. Reset the Analytical Station.
NOT READY
System only) Perform F20 function and 3. If volume of diluent is adequate or if message recurs:
replace diluent container. a. Use F20 to check operation of the sheath tank.
b. Check for leaks and kinks in the tubing around the
sheath tank.
4. Continue operation. If message persists, call your
Sheath Tank Still Full SYSTEM FAULT SHEATH TANK Yes Event Log Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Faulty float and/or sensor. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
(GEN•S System only) and STILL FULL Faulty sheath tank float light (depends upon when error 2. If message persists:
and sensor. Perform F20 function. occurred). a. Use F20 to check operation of the sheath tank.
NOT READY
Non-Diluter Error (GEN•S b. Check for leaks and kinks in the tubing around the
System only) sheath tank.
SPC A/D Status Error NOT READY SPC A/D Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red N/A Stopped - inoperable. SPC card’s A/D status 1. Power down the Analytical Station:
STATUS ERROR Instrument Log (LH750 light unsatisfactory. a. On the Diluter keypad, press POWER OFF.
System)
Faulty SPC A/D. Power switch.
down/up Analytical Station. 2. Power up the Analytical Station:
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
SPC Power Supply Bad (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. SPC card’s power supply defective. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error 2. If the message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
SPC power supply defective.
7.2-36 7.2-36 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING

SPC Status Not Ready NOT READY SPC STATUS Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red N/A Stopped - inoperable. SPC card’s status register indicates 1. Power down the Analytical Station:
NOT READY Instrument Log (LH750 light a “not ready" condition. a. On the Diluter keypad, press POWER OFF.
System)
Faulty SPC A/D. Power switch.
down/up Analytical Station. 2. Power up the Analytical Station:
b. Press POWER ON.
Representative.
Stack Overflow NOT READY N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Internal software problem. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Internal software failure.
Stain Heater Disabled (current status) STAIN HEATER Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Run stopped when Retic Temperature control failure. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
DISABLED Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” cycle is run. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Stain heater disabled for sample report (depends upon
current cycle. Heater when error occurred).
temperature not within
expected limits. Reset
Analytical Station.
Stain Heater Sensor Bad (current status) STAIN HEATER Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Run stopped when Retic Faulty or disconnected sensor. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
SENSOR BAD Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” cycle is run. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Stain temperature sensor sample report (depends upon
failed. Reset Analytical when error occurred).
Station.
Stain Temp Hi. Heater (current status) STAIN TEMP. HI Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Run stopped when Retic Temperature control failure. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Disabled HEATER DISABLED Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” cycle is run. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Stain temperature high, sample report (depends upon
heater disabled. Reset when error occurred).
Analytical Station.
Stain Temp Low. Run (current status) STAIN TEMP LOW. Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Run stopped when Retic Temperature control failure. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Stopped RUN STOPPED Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” cycle is run. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Stain temperature low, heater sample report (depends upon
disabled. Reset Analytical when error occurred).
Station.
PN 4277219B 7.2-37
TROUBLESHOOTING

Stripper Plate Not In SYSTEM FAULT STRIPPER PLATE Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed if available Automatic mode disabled; Obstruction or faulty sensor. 1. Ensure the stripper plate is unobstructed.
and and NOT IN Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error Manual mode operable. 2. Reset the Analytical Station.
MANUAL MODE
System only) Stripper plate obstructed (not your Beckman Coulter Representative. You can run
in) or faulty sensor. Remove samples in the Manual mode.
obstruction and restart
Analytical Station.
Stripper Plate Not Out SYSTEM FAULT STRIPPER PLATE Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Yellow Data displayed if available Automatic mode disabled; Obstruction or faulty sensor. 1. Ensure the stripper plate is unobstructed.
and and NOT OUT Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error Manual mode operable. 2. Reset the Analytical Station.
MANUAL MODE
System only) Stripper plate obstructed (not your Beckman Coulter Representative. You can run
out) or faulty sensor. Remove samples in the Manual mode.
obstruction and restart
Analytical Station.
STX Rec. Error NOT READY N/A No Calibration Log (GEN•S Red Data not transmitted. Stopped - inoperable. The first character not STX while 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
System) light receiving K-CAL factors. 2. Retransmit the calibration factors to the Analyzer.
Instrument Log (LH750 3. Continue normal operation. If message recurs, call
System) your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Incorrect calibration factor
transmission. Retransmit
calibration factors from
GEN•S Workstation.
Sweep Flow Reservoir Not READY N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Stopped Inoperable Diluent level low or faulty float 1. Check diluent container for sufficient volume and
Full Instrument Log (LH750 and/or sensor. replace if necwssary.
System) 2. Reset the Analytical Station.
Diluent level low or faulty 3. If the volume of diluent is adeqaute or message recurs,
tank sensor. Check diluent check for leaks and kinks in the tubing around the
and restart Analytical station. reservoir.
Sweep Flow Reservoir Still READY N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Stopped Inoperable Faulty float and/or sensor. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Full Instrument Log (LH750 2. If message persisits,
System) a. Use F50 to check operation of the sweep-flow
Diluent level low or faulty reservoir.
tank sensor b. Check for kinks in the tubing around the reservoir.
4. Service Only: Ensure SW1, Pos.4 on the DILUTER
PROCESSOR card (GEN•S System) or the DILUTER
CPU card (LH750 System) is set to enable the
sweep-flow reservoir level monitoring. Refer to
Table A.2-12 ( DILUTER PROCESSOR card) or
Table A.2-11 (DILUTER CPU card).
7.2-38 7.2-38 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-14 System Messages - T through V

Three Consecutive NOT READY N/A No Event Log Red Data available for the three Stopped - inoperable. Three consecutive voteouts of ATTENTION: (Service Only) To prevent the Analytical
Voteouts (GEN•S System Three consecutive voteouts light consecutive samples. WBC, RBC, Plt or MCV. Station from halting and to display data, change the setting
only) of WBC, RBC, PLT or MCV. of SW1 on the COMMUNICATION INTERFACE card. Refer
Verify proper connection of to Table A.2-7.
coaxial cables and verify 1. Verify proper connection of coaxial cables.
baths contain diluent. 2. Verify baths contain diluent.
3. Verify apertures are not blocked.
5. Use F03 and ensure no microbubbles are present.
Representative.
7. Service Only: Ensure the BSV is aligned.
Two NAKs From Diluter NOT READY N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Two NAKs detected while receiving 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error data from Diluter. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
System occurred). Representative.
Analyzer-Diluter
Communication failure: two
NAKs sent from Diluter. Reset
Analytical Station.
Two NAKs Sent From AMC NOT READY N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Two NAKs detected while 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error transmitting data to Diluter. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
System occurred). Representative.
Analyzer-Diluter
communication failure: two
NAKs sent from AMC. Reset
Analytical Station.
Unknown Diff Error (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed. Idle - ready for request. Communication error between 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Message Instrument Log (LH750 light DIFF PROCESSOR card and AMC. 2. Continue normal operation and watch for messages.
System 3. If additional messages appear, follow the corrective
AMC-DIFF communication actions associated with the messages.
failure: unknown. Reset 4. If this messages persists:
Analytical Station.
a. Select the CBC only test mode.
b. Run CBC only samples.
UNKNOWN Diluter Error (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed. Idle - ready for request. AMC detected invalid error code 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Message Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted by Diluter. 2. Continue normal operation and watch for messages.
Note: If event severe, this System 3. If additional messages appear, follow the corrective
message may not appear. Analyzer-Diluter actions associated with the messages.
communication failure: 4. If this message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
unknown. Reset Analytical Representative.
Station.
PN 4277219B 7.2-39
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-15 System Messages - U

Unknown Diff Error (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed. Idle - ready for request. Communication error between 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Message Instrument Log (LH750 light DIFF PROCESSOR card and AMC. 2. Continue normal operation and watch for messages.
System 3. If additional messages appear, follow the corrective
AMC-DIFF communication actions associated with the messages.
failure: unknown. Reset 4. If this messages persists:
Analytical Station.
a. Select the CBC only test mode.
b. Run CBC only samples.
c. Call your Coulter Representative.
UNKNOWN Diluter Error (current status) N/A Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed. Idle - ready for request. AMC detected invalid error code 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Message Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted by Diluter. 2. Continue normal operation and watch for messages.
Note: If event severe, this System 3. If additional messages appear, follow the corrective
message may not appear. Analyzer-Diluter actions associated with the messages.
communication failure: 4. If this message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
unknown. Reset Analytical Representative.
Station.
Vls Air Error NOT READY (GEN•S VLS Air Error Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Automatic mode disabled; r Obstruction or faulty sensor. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
System) Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” Manual mode operable. r Pinched, kinked or cut tubing. Service Only Note: Resetting the Analytical Station
MANUAL MODE System message printed in footer of r High vacuum outside limit. automatically recalibrates the blood detector.
(LH750 System) VLS Air Error sample report (depends upon 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
when error occurred). Representative.
Service Only:
1. Check for tubing kinks at the feed-thru and Y-fittings in
the needle vent/aspiration pathway.
2. After servicing the needle-vent line, do the F79
function to recalibrate BD3.
3. If you moved or replaced any tubing in FD1, recalibrate
the SlideMaker fluid detectors. Refer to Heading 4.9 in
the Slide Making Modules Service Manual.
Vls Diluent Error NOT READY (GEN•S VLS Diluter Error Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted, or data Automatic mode disabled; r Obstruction, faulty sensor or 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
System) Instrument Log (LH750 light transmitted and “System Alarm” Manual mode operable. tubing moved within sensor. Service Only Note: Resetting the Analytical Station
MANUAL MODE SystemVLS Diluent Error message printed in footer of r Pinched, kinked or cut tubing. automatically recalibrates the blood detector.
(LH750 System) VLS Diluter Error sample report (depends upon 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
when error occurred). Representative.
Service Only:
1. Check for tubing kinks at the feed-thru and Y-fittings in
the needle vent/aspiration pathway.
2. After servicing the needle-vent line, do the F79
function to recalibrate BD3.
3. If you moved or replaced any tubing in FD1, recalibrate
the SlideMaker fluid detectors. Refer to Heading 4.9 in
the Slide Making Modules Service Manual.
7.2-40 7.2-40 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.2-16 System Messages - W through Z

Workstation NOT READY N/A Red Stopped Communication timeout. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Communications light Communication between the 2. Continue normal operation. If the message recurs, call
Timeout Analytical Station and the your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Workstation.is lost.
Wrong Cal. Factors NOT READY N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted. Stopped - inoperable. Incorrect calibration factors or 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light bath voltages. 2. Re-enter the calibration factors and/or aperture
System) voltages.
Incorrect calibration factors 3. Continue normal operation. If the message recurs, call
or bath voltages. Re-enter your Beckman Coulter Representative.
calibration factors and/or
bath voltages.
Wrong Command NOT READY INVALID COMMAND Yes Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Invalid command received by 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Interpretation XX RECEIVED Instrument Log (LH750 light (depends upon when error Diluter. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
Diluter received an invalid
command from the AMC.
Wrong Command NOT READY NOT READY FOR XX Yes N/A Data displayed if available Stopped - inoperable. Communication error. 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Sequence COMMAND AFTER YY (depends upon when error 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
occurred). Representative.
Wrong Echo Xmit NOT READY N/A No Event Log (GEN•S System) Red Data not transmitted. Stopped - inoperable. Wrong echo received from Diluter 1. Reset the Analytical Station.
Instrument Log (LH750 light while transmitting data. 2. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter
AMC-DIFF communication
failure: wrong echo. Reset
Analytical Station.
PN 4277219B 7.2-41
TROUBLESHOOTING
7.2-42 7.2-42 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
TABLES OF WORKSTATION MESSAGES 7
7.3 TABLES OF WORKSTATION MESSAGES
Table 7.3-1 Workstation Messages - A through B
Workstation System Status/Recovery
Applicable
Log Message and Icon on Command Center Log Sample Results System Status Probable Cause Corrective Action
A Control Lot number archive file was created. Control N/A Ready Operator created a control archive file. Status only; no action necessary.
Internal Message Code:
EV_CONTROL_LOT_ARCHIVED
An archive file with patient samples was created Event N/A Ready Operator created an archive with a patient sample. Status only, no action necessary.
EV_PATIENT_ARCHIVED
Automatic CBC calibration factors updated from Analyzer. Calibration N/A Ready Workstation received new automatic CBC calibration factors from Status only, no action necessary.
Internal Message Code: Analyzer.
EV_CALIB_PRI_MOD_ANLYZ
Automatic CBC calibration factors updated from GEN S Workstation. Calibration N/A Ready Operator initiated transmission of automatic CBC calibration Status only, no action necessary.
Internal Message Code: factors.
EV_CALIB_PRI_MOD_ADMS
Auto-Numbering has been disabled. Event N/A Ready Operator disabled the SID Auto-Numbering feature. Status only; no action necessary.
EV_AUTONUMBER_DISABLED
Auto-Numbering has been enabled auto number is <Auto-Numbering Event SID of next run Ready Operator enabled the SID Auto-Numbering feature. Status only; no action necessary.
Start ID>. received will be
Internal Message Code: replaced by the
EV_AUTONUMBER_ ENABLED current Auto
Numbered SID.
Autostop has been triggered for Analytical Station <Instrument#>. Red Event N/A Analytical Station Autostop was triggered for one of the following reasons: Acknowledge error to clear Autostop condition.
Internal Message Code: light stopped ToDo, Control, XB, or Data/Time error.
EV_REPORT_AUTOSTOP
AutoStop has been triggered for control folder <lot#>. Red Controls N/A Ready A control Autostop condition has occurred. 1. Review the Control History Log to review specific error.
Internal Message Code: light 2. Perform corrective action per lab protocol.
EV_CONTROL_AUTO_STOP
Background CBC test values within limits Daily Checks Ready The background test passed for the test specified. N/A
EV_BACKGROUNDCBC_SUCCESSFUL
Background DIFF test values within limits Daily Checks Ready The background test passed for the test specified. N/A
EV_BACKGROUNDDIFF_SUCCESSFUL
Background: <Background test/parameter> <Background> exceeded Red Event (GEN•S N/A N/A During a background test, one of the test parameters failed. Test 1. Repeat the test.
<flag> limit light System) parameters are HGB blank, HGB read, WBC, RBC, HGB, PLT, DIFF, 2. If the message persists, call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Internal Message Code: Daily Checks RETIC, sheath pressure, DIFF pressure, DIFF LS offset, RETIC LS
EV_STARTUP_FAILED (LH750 offset, Laser voltage, RF300 Volts, RF6.3 Volts, and ambient
System) temperature.
PN 4277219B 7.3-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
TABLES OF WORKSTATION MESSAGES
Table 7.3-2 Workstation Messages - C through G
Applicable
Calibration factors received from analyzer unexpectedly - delete runs & Red Calibration Ready While performing calibration, a run was received with a 1. Delete runs from calibration table.
restart. light calibration factor different from current calibrations factors. 2. Reset the Analyzer.
Internal Message Code: Calibration factors were either corrupted or changed manually. 3. Restart calibration process.
EV_CALIB_RCVD_FAC_UNEXPECTEDLY
Carryover failed: (<List Of Parameters That Failed With Result>). Red Carryover N/A Ready At least one parameter for the last carryover test performed on 1. If the WBC value is out of limits, obtain a different specimen with a WBC
Internal Message Code: light the specified Analytical Station was outside the predefined limits. count of 10,000 ±1,000 and repeat the carryover test.
EV_CARRY_FAILED Carryover parameters are WBC, RBC, HGB, PLT, DIFF and RETIC. 2. Otherwise, repeat the carryover test with the same specimen.
3. If the message persists, call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Carryover passed. Carryover N/A Ready All parameters for the last carryover test performed on the Status only; no action necessary.
Internal Message Code: specified Analytical Station were within the predefined limits.
EV_CARRY_PASSED
Comment for control folder <lot#>, <comment>, <comment> Control N/A N/A Operator added a comment to specify control folder. Status only, no action necessary.
EV_CONTROL_COMMENT
Control Folder <Lot #> is expired (<Expiration Date>). Yellow Control N/A Analytical Station The Workstation compared the control run date with the control 1. Ensure the proper lot number was used for the control.
Yellow traffic light is displayed if Control AutoStop option is disabled. light stopped if Control folder expiration date and found that the run date is past the 2. Ensure the expiration date for the control was set up correctly.
AutoStop option is expiration date. This could indicate: 3. If you changed the lot number or expiration date, rerun the control.
enabled. r Control number was specified incorrectly. Otherwise:
Red traffic light is displayed if Control AutoStop option is enabled. Red
light r Expiration date was set up incorrectly. a. Discard the control materials.
EV_CONTROL_FOLDER_EXPIRED r Control material has expired. b. Set up a new control.
c. Run the new control.
Control folder <lot#> created, it must be edited in a system setup for Controls Control run saved Ready No file setup for control run. Download the assigned values from the control diskette, or manually enter the
valid flagging. assigned values and limits.
EV_CONTROLINSERTSETUP
Control folder for lot number <lot #> created. Control N/A Ready Operator created new control folder for the specified lot number Status only; no action necessary.
Internal Message Code: from system Setup [Quality Assurance].
EV_CONTROL_FOLDER_CREATED
Control folder for lot number <lot #> deleted. Control N/A Ready Operator deleted control folder for the specified lot number from Status only; no action necessary.
Internal Message Code: System Setup [Quality Assurance].
EV_CONTROL_LOT_DELETED
Control folder for lot number <lot #> was edited. Control N/A Ready Operator edited control folder from System Setup [Quality Status only; no action necessary.
Internal Message Code: Assurance].
EV_CONTROL_FOLDER_UPDATED
Control run for control folder <Lot #> out of range. Yellow Control N/A Analytical Station At least one of the parameter results for the control run received Refer to the procedure in the Online Help System and in Chapter 3 of the
Yellow traffic light is displayed if Control AutoStop option is disabled. light stopped if Control is outside the expected range (or lab limits). This could indicate: Operator’s Guide for what to do when a control is outside its expected ranges or
AutoStop option is r Improper mixing. what to do when a latex control is outside its expected ranges.
enabled.
Red traffic light is displayed if Control AutoStop option is enabled. Red r Control is stored in the wrong folder.
light Note: The AutoStop r Control information was set up incorrectly.
Internal Message Code: option only applies to
EV_CONTROL_FOLDER_OUT_OF_RANGE r Statistical outlier.
controls analyzed in the
Automatic Mode. r Change in the control material.
r Bubbles or clog in the flow cell (latex controls only).
r Analytical Station problem.
7.3-2 7.3-2 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-2 Workstation Messages - C through G (Continued)
Applicable
Control run outside limits condition has cleared Controls N/A Ready The previous control run was outside the limits, the current Status only, no action necessary.
Internal Message Code: control run is within the limits.
EV_CLEAR_CONTROL_LASTRUNOUT
Daily check precision test failed: (<List Of Parameters That Failed With Red Daily Checks N/A Ready During a Daily Check operation (StartUp), one of the following 1. Verify that the baths contain only clean diluent (no bleach or cleaning agent)
Result>). light Precision test parameters failed: WBC, RBC, HGB, HCT, MCV, and that the diluent covers the apertures.
Internal Message Code: MCH, MCHC, RDW, PLT, MPV, *PCT, *PDW. 2. Repeat the Precision test at the Analyzer.
EV_DAILY_CHECK_PRECISION_TEST_FAILED * Research Use Only 3. If the message recurs, call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Daily check ramp test failed: (<List Of Parameters That Failed With Red Daily Checks N/A Ready During a Daily Check operation (StartUp), one of the following 1. Verify that the baths contain only clean diluent (no bleach or cleaning agent)
Result>). light Ramp test parameters failed: WBC, RBC, HGB, HCT, MCV, MCH, and that the diluent covers the apertures.
Internal Message Code: MCHC, RDW, PLT, MPV, *PCT, *PDW. 2. At the Analyzer, repeat the Ramp test.
EV_DAILY_CHECK_RAMP_TEST_FAILED * Research Use Only 3. If the message recurs, call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Demographic information updated for <Sample ID> Event N/A Ready Operator changed Demographic information for specified sample Status only, no action necessary.
Internal Message Code: ID.
EV_PAT_DEMO_UPDATED
Duplicate run date and/or run time received (<Run SID>, <Run C/P>). Red Event N/A Analytical Station The Workstation received a sample run with an invalid run date 1. Check the clock on the Analyzer screen to see if it is incrementing.
Internal Message Code: light stopped. and/or run time or two sample runs with the same date and time. 2. If the clock is not running, reset the Analytical Station.
EV_DUPLICATE_RUN_DATE_TIME 3. If the clock is still not running, call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
Flow cell voltages/pressures out of specifications (<Run SID>, <Run Yellow Event “System Alarm” Ready Analytical Station detected a flow cell problem such as Diff or If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
C/P>). light message printed Retic sheath pressure or voltages out of specifications.
Internal Message Code: in footer of
EV_INST_FLOWPRESSVOL sample report.
PN 4277219B 7.3-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-3 Workstation Messages - H
Applicable
Host: Bad Field Count Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
Internal Message Code: light transmission or Receive format.
EV_INTCOL_BAD_FIELD_CNT
Host: Bad Intro Field Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_BAD_INTRO_FIELD
Host: Bad RCV Buffer End Red Event N/A Ready Data transmitted by Host to Workstation (ToDo List upload) was 1. LIS should retransmit.
Internal Message Code: light unrecognizable or inconsistent. 2. If the message persists, call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
EV_INTCOL_BAD_RCV_BUFFER
Host: Bad TestName in TestField Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_BAD_FIELD_TEST
Host: Casspos Not 6 Chars In Testfield Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_CASSPOS_NOT_SIX
Host: CassPos With TestType Pending Duplicate Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_CASSPOS_DUPLICATE
Host: Date Format Incorrect Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_BAD_DATE_FORMAT
Host: Date format incorrect. Non Numeric Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_NON_NUMERIC_DATE
Host: ID1 Too Long In TestField Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_ID1_TO_LONG
Host: ID1 With TestType Pending Duplicate Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_ID1_DUPLICATE
Host: Illegal Comma In TestField Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_ILLEGAL_COMMA
Host: Insertion error, Test exists Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_TEST_EXISTS
Host: Invalid Gender Entry Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_BAD_SEX
Host: Leading Spaces In Field Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_LEADING_SPACES
7.3-4 7.3-4 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-3 Workstation Messages - H (Continued)
Applicable
Host: No Comma After Testname In TestField Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_NO_COMMA
Host: No CRLF at End of Preamble Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_NO_CRLF
Host: No CRLF At Field End Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_NO_CRLF_FIELD
Host: No data in transmitted field Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_LEADING_SPACE
Host: No ID1 Or CassPos Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_NO_ID1_ORCASS
Host: No SOH in preamble Red Event N/A Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
Internal Message Code: light or Receive format.
EV_INTCOL_NO_SOH
Host: No Space after Tag Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_NO_SPACE_AFTER_TAG
Host: No String Between Commas In TestField Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_NO_STRING
Host: No Valid Field Tag found Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_NO_VALID_TAG
Host: Non Alpha Char In Alpha Field Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_NON_ALPHA
Host: Non Alphanumeric in Alphanumeric field Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_NON_ALPHANUMERIC
Host: Non Numeric Char In Numeric Field Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_NON_NUMERIC
Host: Nonnumeric Casspos Char In TestField Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_CASSPOS_NOT_NUMERIC
Host: Num Of Fields Mismatch in Preamble Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_PREAMBLE_MISMATCH
PN 4277219B 7.3-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-3 Workstation Messages - H (Continued)
Applicable
Host: Number Of Fields Count is 0 Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_0_FIELD_CNT
Host: Test request UPDATED No Valid Patient ID Event N/A Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
Internal Message Code: or Receive format.
EV_INTCOL_NO_PAT_ID
Host: Time Format Incorrect Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_BAD_TIME
Host: Time Format Incorrect Non Numeric Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_NON_NUMERIC_TIME
Host: Trailing Spaces In Field Red Event Abort Ready for next Transmit The data received in Host Transmission is not in the defined See Host Transmission Specification for correct format.
EV_INTCOL_TRAILING_SPACES
7.3-6 7.3-6 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-4 Workstation Messages - I through K
Applicable
ID MISMATCH: Sample ID received does not match pre-assigned ID Yellow Event Sample run status Ready Sample ID (barcode) received does not match the preassigned ID. 1. Check the cassette, tube, and labels. Ensure that the tube is in the correct
(<Run C/P>, <Run SID>), (<Pre-Assigned SID>, <Pre-Assigned C/P>). light set to This condition can occur only when the Cass/Pos is used as position and the label is properly placed and readable. If necessary,
Internal Message Code: MISMATCH. positive identifier and any of the following occurs: reposition the tube or label, or replace the label for future use.
EV_ID_MISMATCH Results reported. r Tube is misplaced in the cassette. 2. Check the sample ID preassignment values. If they are incorrect, edit the
r Tube ID is not read. values.
r Preassigned sample ID is entered incorrectly.
Instrument has not performed a shutdown in <24> hours. Beckman Yellow Event N/A N/A Shutdown time frame was exceeded. Shutdown
Coulter service recommends shutdown every 24 hours. (GEN•S light Note: This condition continues and increments on four hour
System only) intervals until Startup is performed.
EV_INSTRUMENT_REQUIRES_SHUTDOWN
Interpreter Collator ABORT. Cannot allocate graphics or Raw Data. Red Event Discarded N/A Memory allocation error at Workstation Shutdown and restart Workstation.
Internal Message Code: light
EV_INTCOL_RG_ABORT
Interpreter Collator Forced to Reset Red Event Discarded N/A Communications error between Workstation and Analyzer. Shutdown and restart the Workstation.
EV_INTCOL_RESET
Interpreter Collator has timed-out indicating a possible Analytical Red Event None Unknown Communications between the Workstation and the Analytical 1. Reset the Analytical Station
Station malfunction light Station were interrupted. 2. Shutdown and restart the Workstation.
Internal Message Code: 3. Check cable connections.
EV_INTCOL_TIMEOUT 4. If message persists, call your Beckman Coulter Representative.
IQAP data collected. Event N/A Ready Operator or RCS performed an IQAP data collection. Status only; no action necessary.
Internal message Code:
EV_IQAP_COLLECTED
PN 4277219B 7.3-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-5 Workstation Messages - L through N
Applicable
Last Two XB batches are outside limits. Yellow XB N/A Analytical Station Last XB batch is outside limits. 1. Ensure all results are reportable. If necessary, exclude non-reportable
Yellow traffic light is displayed if XB AutoStop option is disabled. light stopped if XB AutoStop results from the statistics.
option (2 batches out) 2. Check the results for a nonrandom sample distribution.
is enabled.
Red traffic light is displayed if XB AutoStop option is enabled. Red r If a nonrandom sample distribution is the problem, document the
Internal Message Code: light problem based on your laboratory’s protocol and continue
EV_XBXM_BATCHES_OUTSIDE_LIMITS processing samples.
r Otherwise, troubleshoot for a possible Analytical Station
problem.
Last XB Batch is out of limits. Yellow XB N/A Analytical Station The last XB batch is outside limits. 1. Ensure all results are reportable. If necessary, exclude nonreportable
Yellow traffic light is displayed if XB AutoStop option is disabled. light stopped if XB AutoStop results from the statistics.
option (1 batch out) is 2. Check the results for a nonrandom sample distribution.
enabled. r If a nonrandom sample distribution is the problem, document the
Red traffic light is displayed if XB AutoStop option is enabled. Red
Internal Message Code: light problem based on your laboratory’s protocol and continue
EV_XBXM_LASTBATCHOUT processing samples.
r Otherwise, troubleshoot for a possible Analytical Station
problem.
Last XB batch outside limit conditions has cleared XB N/A Ready Last XB batch was out of limits and current XB batch is within Status only, no action necessary.
Internal Message Code: limits.
EV_CLEAR_XBXM_LASTBATCHOUT
LIS Upload: Invalid report Profile Requested Event N/A Ready Invalid profile was sent to host. Status only, no action necessary.
EV_HOSTCOM_BADRP
Manual CBC calibration factors updated from Analyzer. Calibration N/A Ready Workstation received new manual CBC calibration factors from Status only, no action necessary.
Internal Message Code: Analyzer.
EV_ CALIB_ SEC_ MOD_ ANLYZ
Manual CBC calibration factors updated from GEN S Workstation. Calibration N/A Ready Secondary calibration factor was changed. Status only, no action necessary.
EV_CALIB_SEC_MOD_ADMS
Maximum # Of Repro runs Exceeded - Sample Not Stored Red Reproducibility Discarded Ready User attempted to run more than the maximum allowable Change operating mode from Reproducibility to Auto Analysis
Internal Message Code: light reproducibility cycles.
EV_REPRO_MAXRUNS_EXCEEDED
7.3-8 7.3-8 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-7 Workstation Messages - N
Applicable
No Calibrator lot number. No statistics will be calculated Red Calibration N/A N/A When no lot number has been entered for calibration table. Enter lot number and save.
EV_CALIB_NO_CALIBRATOR
No latex Setup Information available, latex sample will not be stored. Red Calibration Discarded Ready Operator ran a latex control sample and no latex control file was Create a latex control file and rerun the control.
Internal Message Code: light set up.
EV_SETUP_WRONGTYPE_LATEX
NO MATCH: Sample run received does not match any ToDo list entry Yellow Event Sample run status On Systems with The sample run received does not match a ToDo List entry. This
(<Run C/P>, <Run SID>). light set to NO MATCH. software version 2B1 or could indicate:
1. Select on the Operator Alert window.
Yellow traffic light is displayed until AutoStop condition is reached. Results reported. lower: The Analytical r Preassigned Cass/Pos or sample ID was entered incorrectly.
Station stopped after 2. Check the ToDo list. If identification information is incorrect, edit the
Red traffic light is displayed when AutoStop condition is reached. Red r Sample was run in incorrect test mode information.
three consecutive NO
Internal Message Code: light r Tube was misplaced in the cassette 3. Check the cassette, tube, and labels. Ensure that the tube is in the correct
MATCH errors, or a
EV_RUN_NO_MATCH_TODO_LIST_ENTRY r Incorrect test assigned in the ToDo List. position and the label is properly placed and readable. If necessary,
total of 10 NO MATCH,
NO READ or PART.ASP. r Label is smudged. reposition the tube or label, or replace the label for future use.
errors. r Label is misplaced. 4. Clean the bar-code reader.
On Systems with r Bar-code reader is dirty. 5. If the message persists, contact your Beckman Coulter Representative.
software version 2C or
higher and the
No Match AutoStop
option selected: The
Analytical Station
stopped after 1 -10 (the
number is user
programmable)
consecutive NO MATCH
errors.
NO READ: Sample run received without proper identification (<Run Yellow Event Sample run status On Systems with The sample run received is not properly identified. This condition
C/P>, <Run SID>). light set to NO READ. software version 2B1 or can occur only when the positive identification scheme used is
1. Select on the Operator Alert window.
Yellow traffic light is displayed until AutoStop condition is reached. Results reported. lower: The Analytical Cass/Pos and SID.This could indicate:
Station stopped after 2. Check the cassette, tube, and labels. Ensure that the tube is in the correct
Red traffic light is displayed when AutoStop condition is reached. Red r Label is smudged.
three consecutive NO position and the label is properly placed and readable. If necessary,
Internal Message Code: light r Tube or label is misplaced. reposition the tube or label, or replace the label for future use.
READ errors, or a total
EV_RUN_NO_PROPER_IDENTIFICATION r Bar-code reader is dirty. 3. Clean the bar-code reader.
of 10 NO MATCH, NO
READ or PART.ASP. 4. If the message persists, contact your Beckman Coulter Representative.
errors.
On Systems with
software version 2C or
higher and the
No Read AutoStop
option selected: The
Analytical Station
stopped after 1-10 (the
number is user
programmable)
consecutive NO READ
errors.
PN 4277219B 7.3-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-8 Workstation Messages - O
Applicable
Operator <Operator ID> added <Location Name> to the location list. Event N/A N/A Operator added the specified location to the location list. Status only; no action necessary.
EV_SETUP_LOCATION_ADDED
Operator <Operator ID> added <Physician’s First Name, Last Name> to Event N/A N/A Operator added the specified physician to the physician list. Status only; no action necessary.
the physician list.
EV_SETUP_PHYSICIAN_ADDED
Operator <Operator ID> changed Analytical Station setup Event N/A Ready Operator changed Instrument setup. Status only, no action necessary.
EV_SETUP_INSTRUMENT_CHANGED
Operator <Operator ID> changed Database setup Event N/A Ready User changed database setup. Status only, no action necessary.
EV_SETUP_DATABASE_CHANGED
Operator <Operator ID> changed Decision Rules setup Event N/A Operator changed Decision Rules setup. Status only, no action necessary.
EV_SETUP_DECISION_CHANGED
Operator <Operator ID> changed Display Labels setup Event N/A Ready Operator changed SlideMaker labels setup Status only, no action necessary.
EV_SETUP_DISPLAY_CHANGED
Operator <Operator ID> changed Institution setup Event N/A Ready Operator changed Institution setup. Status only, no action necessary.
EV_SETUP_INSTITUTION_CHANGED
Operator <Operator ID> changed lis/his setup Event N/A Operator changed LIS/HIS setup. Status only, no action necessary.
EV_SETUP_LIS_HIS_CHANGED
Operator <Operator ID> changed location <Location Name> to Event N/A N/A Operator changed the specified location from the location list to Status only; no action necessary.
<Location Name>. another location.
EV_SETUP_LOCATION_MODIFIED
Operator <Operator ID> changed Parameter setup Event N/A Ready Operator changed Parameters setup Status only, no action necessary.
EV_SETUP_PARAMETER_CHANGED
Operator <Operator ID> changed physician <Physician’s First Name, Event N/A N/A Operator changed the specified physician from the physician list Status only; no action necessary.
Last Name> to <Physician’s First Name, Last Name> to another physician.
EV_SETUP_PHYSICIAN_MODIFIED
Operator <Operator ID> changed Print setup Event N/A Ready Operator changed print configuration setup. Status only, no action necessary.
EV_SETUP_PRINT_CHANGED
Operator <Operator ID> changed reagents setup. Reagent N/A Ready Operator changed the reagent setup information Status only; no action necessary.
EV_REAGENT_CHANGED
7.3-10 7.3-10 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-8 Workstation Messages - O (Continued)
Applicable
Operator <Operator ID> changed Reporting Units setup Event N/A Ready Operator changed Reporting Units setup. Status only, no action necessary.
EV_SETUP_REPORTINGUNITS_CHANGED
Operator <Operator ID> changed Shifts definition: ([HH:MM:SS, Event N/A N/A Operator modified the shift setup. Add to the message the Status only; no action necessary.
HH:MM:SS, HH:MM:SS] Or [No Shifts]). starting time for each shift defined, or “No shifts” if the operator
Internal Message Code: decided to work without shifts.
EV_SETUP_SHIFTS_CHANGED
Operator <Operator ID> changed Workstation setup Event N/A Ready Operator changed Workstation setup. Status only, no action necessary.
EV_SETUP_WORKSTATION_CHANGED
Operator <Operator ID> changed XB setup. XB N/A N/A Operator edited XB target and/or limit values from Setup [Quality Status only: no action necessary.
Internal Message Code: Assurance].
EV_SETUP_XBXM_CHANGED
Operator <Operator ID> deleted <# of Runs> Run(s) from Control Folder Control N/A N/A Operator deleted specified runs from selected control folder. Status only; no action necessary.
<Lot #>.
EV_CONTROL_RUNS_DELETED
Operator <Operator ID> deleted <Location Name> from the location list. Event N/A N/A Operator deleted the specified location from the location list. Status only; no action necessary.
EV_SETUP_LOCATION_DELETED
Operator <Operator ID> deleted <Physician’s First Name, Last Name> Event N/A N/A Operator deleted the specified physician to from the physician Status only; no action necessary.
from the physician list. list.
EV_SETUP_PHYSICIAN_DELETED
Operator <Operator ID> installed <Reagent Type><Coulter/Non-Coulter> Reagent N/A Ready The operator updated information for the reagent <Lot #>. Status only; no action necessary.
Reagent Lot to: <New Lot#>, opened on <Open Date> with open
expiration <Open Exp>
EV_REAGENT_INSTALLED
Operator <Operator ID> requested Research Use Only certification. Event N/A Ready Operator enable the research parameters. Status only, no action necessary.
EV_SETUP_RESEARCH_USE_ONLY_REQUEST
Operator <Operator ID> shutdown the GEN S Workstation. Event (GEN•S N/A N/A The defined operator shutdown the Workstation. Status only, no action necessary.
Internal Message Code: System)
EV_SHUTDOWN Daily Checks
(LH750
System)
Operator <Operator ID> Started RAS Event N/A Ready Operator initiated icon. N/A
EV_RASSTARTED
Operator <Operator ID> Stopped RAS Event N/A Ready Operator initiated icon. N/A
EV_RASSTOPPED
PN 4277219B 7.3-11
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-8 Workstation Messages - O (Continued)
Applicable
Operator acknowledged stop condition Event N/A Analytical Station Operator acknowledged the ToDo, Control, XB, or Date/Time error N/A
Internal Message Code: previously stopped, will conditions. The Analytical Station is allowed to analyze samples.
EV_OPERATOR_ACKNOWLEDGED_STOP now analyze samples.
Operator selected assay limits for control folder <Lot #>. Control N/A N/A Operator selected assay limits for the specified control folder. Status only; no action necessary.
EV_CONTROL_ASSAY_SELECTED
7.3-12 7.3-12 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-9 Workstation Messages - P through V
Applicable
Password changed. Event N/A N/A Operator currently logged on has changed his password. Status only; no action necessary.
EV_SETUP_PASSWORD_CHANGED
Precision test values within limits. Daily Checks N/A Ready The Precision test passed. Status only; no action necessary.
EV_PRECISION_SUCCESSFUL
Ramp Test values within limits. Daily Checks N/A Ready The Ramp test passed Status only; no action necessary.
EV_RAMP_SUCCESSFUL
Reagent <Reagent lot#> is expired Yellow Reagent N/A Ready The reagent(s) mentioned is expired: Diluent, CBC lyse, DIFF Pak, Reagent setup dialog is automatically displayed. Verify that reagent expiration
Internal Message Code: light Retic Pak, and/or cleaner. (The conditions of this error occur date is correct. Replace reagent if necessary. Enter new reagent lot number and
EV_REAGENT_EXPIRED when the Startup cycle is performed on the Analyzer). expirations dates.
Received Host Deletion Request: %1, %2 ToDo List entries were Event N/A N/A Status only, no action necessary
deleted.
EV_HOST_DELETE_SUCCESS
Repro Set Deleted Reproducibility The operator cleared the reproducibility table. Status only; no action necessary.
EV_REPRO_SET_DELETED
Sample ID portion of the Positive ID has changed Event N/A Ready Operator changed the patient sample run positive identification N/A
Internal Message Code: scheme to “SID”, “Cass/Pos”, or “SID + Cass/Pos”.
EV_POSITIVEID_CHANGED
The C: drive is full. Please clear Print and Transmission buffers from Red Event N/A N/A N/A N/A
Run Configuration. light
EV_DISK_FULL
PN 4277219B 7.3-13
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-13 Workstation Messages - W through Z
Applicable
Workload has been automatically reset in the database Event N/A Ready The workload recording is automatically reset (restart at zero) Status only, no action necessary.
Internal Message Code: after 365 days.
EV_CYCLE_COUNTS_AUTOMATICALLY_RESET
Workload has been manually archived Event N/A Ready Operator initiated an archiving of the workload recording. Status only, no action necessary.
EV_CYCLE_COUNTS_MANUALLY_ARCHIVED
Workload has been manually printed Event N/A Ready Operator initiated a printing of the workload recording. Status only, no action necessary.
EV_CYCLE_COUNTS_MANUALLY_PRINTED
Workload has been manually reset Event N/A Ready Operator reset the workload recording (restart at zero) by deleting Status only, no action necessary.
Internal Message Code: the table.
EV_CYCLE_COUNTS_MANUALLY_RESET
Workload was automatically printed. Event N/A Ready Cycle count results are automatically printed when the operator Status only, no action necessary.
Internal Message Code: resets the workload recording or after 365 days.
EV_CYCLE_COUNTS_AUTOMATICALLY_PRINTED
Wrong Calibration Type, Latex Sample will not be stored. (GEN•S Red Calibration Discarded Ready The run received is of Latex type (ie., F55, F56, F57, F58...) and Verify Workstation mode of operation is consistent with sample material.
System only) light cannot be received in Carryover mode.
EV_CALIB_WRONGTYPE_LATEX
Wrong Calibration Type, Sample will be stored as a Patient Sample. Yellow Calibration Stored as patient Ready When running a calibration test the operator changed the Rerun the sample in the correct aspiration mode. (Automatic or Manual).
Internal Message Code: light sample aspiration mode (Automatic vs. Manual).
EV_CALIB_WRONGTYPE_SAMPLE
Wrong Carryover Type, latex Sample will not be stored. Red Carryover Discarded Ready The run received is of Latex type (ie., F55, F56, F57, F58...) and Verify Workstation mode of operation is consistent with sample material.
Internal Message Code: light cannot be received in Carryover mode.
EV_CARRY_WRONGTYPE_LATEX
Wrong Carryover Type, Sample will be stored as a Patient Sample. Yellow Carryover Stored as patient Ready When running a Carryover test the operator changed the Rerun the sample in the correct aspiration mode. (Automatic or Manual).
Internal Message Code: light sample aspiration mode (Automatic vs. Manual).
EV_CARRY_WRONGTYPE_SAMPLE
Wrong Control 5C Type, Sample will be stored as a Patient Sample. Yellow Controls N/A A 5C control was run and the instrument was not in any of the Change the instrument to one of the following modes and rerun the control:
Internal Message Code: light following modes: CDC, CD, CDR, CR. CDC, CD, CDR, CR.
EV_CONTROL_WRONGTYPE_5C
Wrong Control Retics Type, Sample will be stored as a Patient Sample. Yellow Controls Ready A Retic control was run and the instrument was not in any of the Change the instrument to one of the following modes and rerun the control:
Internal Message Code: light following modes: CDR, CR, R. CDR, CR, R.
EV_CONTROL_WRONGTYPE_RETIC
Wrong Match and Balance Type, latex Sample will not be stored. Red Calibration Discarded Ready When running latex particles on Match and Balance table. Service Only:
Internal Message Code: light Run latex particles on calibration table.
EV_CALIB_BALWRONGTYPE_LATEX
Wrong Match and Balance Type, Sample will be stored as a Yellow Calibration N/A Ready When running a sample that does not belong in a Match and Service Only:
Patient Sample. light Balance table. Run sample on Patients results.
EV_CALIB_BALWRONGTYPE_SAMPLE
7.3-14 7.3-14 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 7.3-13 Workstation Messages - W through Z (Continued)
Applicable
Wrong Repro Type, latex Sample will not be stored. Red Repro N/A Ready The run received is of Latex type (ie., F55, F56, F57...) and cannot Verify Workstation mode of operation is consistent with sample material.
Internal Message Code: light be received in the Reproducibility mode.
EV_REPRO_WRONGTYPE_LATEX
XB all batches were deleted XB N/A Ready The operator cleared all XB batches. Status only; no action necessary.
EV_XBXM_CLEARALLBATCHES
XB current batch was deleted XB N/A Ready The operator deleted the current XB batch. Status only; no action necessary.
EV_XBXM_LASTBATCHDEL
PN 4277219B 7.3-15
TROUBLESHOOTING
7.3-16 7.3-16 PN 4277219B

TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING POWER-UP PROBLEMS 7
7.4 TROUBLESHOOTING POWER-UP PROBLEMS
Summary
This section provides a summary of the instrument’s power voltages and power voltage signal
lines, timing tables, and flow diagrams of the power-up sequence and the compressor’s dump
valve check routine, as tools for troubleshooting power-up problems. For a complete
description of the development of electronic power for the Analytical Station and the
power-up sequence, refer to Headings 2.5 and 2.6, respectively.
Power Voltages and Power Voltage Signal Lines

Table 7.4-1 summarizes the instrument power voltages and power voltage signal lines.
.
Table 7.4-1 Power Voltages and Power Voltage Signal Lines
Voltages Description Signal Lines Description

+48 V1 Main 48 V from 48 V1 power supply routed to V1 RETURN Signal routed to the Bulk Power
the backplane voltage bus. Supply to turn on 48 V1 (active low).
48 V1 Return Floating ground return for 48 V1 power supply.
+48 V2 48 V from 48 V2 power supply routed to the V2 RETURN Signal routed to the Bulk Power
Motor Controller card to run the Supply to turn on 48 V2 (active low).
compressor/vacuum pump.
48 V2 Return Floating ground return for 48 V2 power supply
+5.2 V Control Control voltage from 5.2 V control power
supply used to generate the power-up
sequence.
Control Return Floating ground return for 5.2 V control power
supply.
Power-Up Sequence
The power-up sequence consists of two sequences, the ac power sequence followed by the
instrument power on sequence. Table 7.4-2 describes the ac power sequence (by time);
Table 7.4-3 describes the instrument power on sequence. Figure 7.4-1 is a flow diagram of the
power-up sequence. The legend for the numbered items is below the figure.
Table 7.4-2 AC Power Timing Sequence
Relative Time
(in seconds) Action
0 The circuit breaker on the Power Supply is turned on.
2.5 At the Power Supply:
r SPC card CR1 (+48 V2) LED and CR2 (+48 V1) LED turn red.
r SPC card CR3 (+5 V CTRL) LED and CR4 (+12 V) LED turn amber.
r Circulation fans turn on.
At the Analyzer:
r APS1 card LED turns amber.
r APS2 card LED turns amber.
PN 4277219B 7.4-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING POWER-UP PROBLEMS
Table 7.4-3 Instrument Power-On Timing Sequence
Relative Time
(in seconds) Action
0 The POWER ON button on the Diluter/numeric keypad is pressed.
At the Analyzer, circulation fans turn on.
At the Diluter:
r Diluter 1 card +5, +15, -15 and HGBOK LEDs light.
r Diluter 2 card CR3 LEDs light momentarily.
r If a laser bar-code reader is installed, the laser ON light comes on for 10 seconds.
At the Power Supply:
r SPC Display turns on.
r SPC card CR8 LED turns red then amber as the SPC card is checked for 1 second, then turns
green if all checks pass.
1 At the Analyzer, APS1 card LED turns red for 1 second and then turns green.
1.5 At the Power Supply, SPC Display starts updating.
2 At the Analyzer:
r APS2 card LED turns red for 0.2 seconds during status check of the card and of the signals it
receives from the SPC, Diff Power Supply, and Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply cards, and
then turns green if all checks pass.
r CRT turns on
r DIFF PROCESSOR card SWSCAN LED lights.
Note: The SWSCAN LED is located behind the upper white tab of the card.
At the Diluter/numeric keypad, the display turns on and displays the software version for 1 second.
2.5 At the Diluter/numeric keypad, the display changes to CHECKING CRC for about 10 seconds.
11 The GEN•S System beeps twice, the LH 750 System beeps once.
12.5 At the Diluter/numeric keypad, the display changes to INITIALIZING INSTRUMENT for 2 seconds.
14 At the Diluter:
r Diluter 1 card SWSCAN LED starts blinking.
r Diluter 2 card SCAN LED (on CR3) starts blinking, and the DWSEN lights.
r Diluter 3 card SW SCAN LED (CR2) starts blinking.
16 At the Power Supply, compressor/vacuum pump turns on. See Figure 7.4-2.
17 At the Diluter/numeric keypad, the display changes to PERFORMING MINI PRIME.
Note: The Diluter mini-prime sequence varies depending whether or not a SlideMaker is installed.
101 At the Analyzer:
r AMC SWSCAN LED starts blinking
r CRT displays READY.
At the Diluter/numeric keypad, the display changes to READY.
7.4-2 PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Figure 7.4-1 Power-Up Sequence
1 2
L H 7 5 0 S y s te m
A C T V S A C B re a k e r A C
+ 4 8 V 1
/ P O W E R O F F 4 8 V 1 R E T U R N
7 / P O W E R O N E L E C T E M P B u lk
N u m e r ic
k e y p a d C O N T R O L R E T U R N 1 4 P o w e r
8 S u p p ly
4 8 V 2 R E T U R N
1 1 / P W R F A IL / V 2 R E T U R N
1 0 + 4 8 V 2
/ V 1 R E T U R N
D IL P R O C /
D IL C P U A M C
C O N T R O L
c a rd R E T U R N 3
1 2 4 5 .2 V C O N T R O L 1 5
1 3 S P C
/ S Y S T E M R E S E T c a rd M o to r
IB U S P N E U T E M P C o n tr o lle r
9 c a rd
1 6
D IL 1 A P S 2 A P S 1
c a rd c a rd C o m p re s s o r/
c a rd
L E D L E D v a c u u m p u m p
G E N S S y s te m
5 .2 V C O N T R O L 6 5
C O N T R O L R E T U R N
D ilu te r
k e y p a d 7 / P O W E R O N 8
/ P O W E R O F F
7 2 1 9 0 2 9 B
AC Power Sequence
1 Circuit breaker on Power Supply is turned on.
2 Ac input to Bulk Power Supply.
3 Bulk Power Supply outputs 5.2 V CTRL.
4 SPC card outputs 5.2 V CTRL to IBUS for distribution throughout instrument.
5 APS1 and APS2 LEDs turn amber.
6 On GEN•S System, Diluter 1 card routes 5.2 V CTRL to Diluter keypad. The Diluter 1 card does not contain any
active components.
7 Instrument is ready for the POWER ON button on the Diluter keypad to be pressed.
Instrument Power On Sequence
8 POWER ON button on Diluter keypad is pressed.
9 Low POWER ON signal goes to SPC card.
10 SPC card routes low V1 RETURN to Bulk Power Supply which outputs +48 V1 to the backplane voltage bus, if ELEC
TEMP is in range. (If ELEC TEMP is out of range, the power-up sequence fails.)
11 SPC card routes PWR FAIL signal to AMC.
12 AMC routes SYSTEM RESET to IBUS and digital backplane.
13 DILUTER PROCESSOR card (GEN•S System) or DILUTER CPU card (LH 750 System) resets and routes START
COMPRESSOR to SPC card. (This signal is on the IBUS in parallel format and cannot be measured without a logic
analyzer.)
14 SPC card routes low V2 RETURN to Bulk Power Supply if PNEU TEMP is in range. (If PNEU TEMP is out of range
the instrument powers up with an error message.)
15 Bulk Power Supply outputs +48 V2 to Motor Controller card.
16 Motor Controller card starts compressor/vacuum pump.
PN 4277219B 7.4-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Dump Valve Check Routine

The dump valve check routine detailed in Figure 7.4-2 is done whenever the compressor is
turned on, including at the beginning of the power-up sequence, the reset sequence, and the
startup cycle.
Figure 7.4-2 Dump Valve Check Routine

Compressor
ON valve OFF
Wait for
5 seconds YES
Valve OFF Wait for
NO NO Generates
0.5 seconds and 3 seconds 60 psi reading DUMP VALVE
60 psi reading
ON 0.3 seconds drop >5 psi? STUCK CLOSED
<45 psi?
for 3 times. error.
Leave valve ON.
YES
Wait for Leaves compressor
3 seconds OFF and valve ON
Valve ON Wait for

NO 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds NO Generates
60 psi reading 60 psi reading DUMP VALVE
OFF 0.5 seconds
rise >5 psi? rise >5 psi? STUCK OPEN
for 3 times. Leave
valve OFF. error.
YES
YES
Wait for
2 seconds
Valve OK Valve OFF
Wait for
3 seconds
Continue
7253423D
The flow diagram of this routine (Figure 7.4-2) can be used as an aid in troubleshooting
DUMP VALVE STUCK OPEN and DUMP VALVE STUCK CLOSED errors.
7.4-4 PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
48 Volts Failure Isolation
The Bulk Power Supply generates two +48 supply voltages, one for the Analytical Station and
the other for the compressor/vacuum pump. During normal operation two “active low”
signals from the System Power Controller card, V1 RETURN (Analyzer) and V2 RETURN
(compressor) turn on the 48 V. These two signals are located on connector J6/P6 on the
System Power Controller card, pins 6 and 7. Use the following procedure to determine if a
48 V failure is caused by a defective Bulk Power Supply or by a missing or incorrect
control signal.
Procedure
Supply.

2. To access the System Power Controller card, remove the Power Supply cover and left side
panel as directed under Heading 4.13, beginning at step 2.
3. Manually force a low condition to turn on the 48 V by placing jumpers between test
points on the System Power Controller card.
a. If you suspect the Analyzer 48 V, place a jumper between TP19 and TP20. For test
point locations, refer to Figure A.4-4.
a. If you suspect the compressor 48 V, place a jumper between TP17 and TP18. For
test point locations, refer to Figure A.4-4.
5. If both 48 V in the Bulk Power Supply are present and the System goes to READY, the
Bulk Power Supply is functioning. Look for problems in other assemblies causing a
missing or incorrect control signal.
6. When you have finished troubleshooting, power down the Analytical Station and remove
the jumpers.
PN 4277219B 7.4-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
7.4-6 PN 4277219B
TROUBLESHOOTING
FLOW-CELL ERRORS FC, PC1, AND PC2 7
7.5 FLOW-CELL ERRORS FC, PC1, AND PC2
The three flow-cell errors, FC (Full Clog), PC1 (Partial Clog 1), and PC2 (Partial Clog 2), are
displayed on the Workstation Patient Tests - Results and Graphics screen, in the upper left
corner of the DataPlot. For all three errors, the diff parameter results (both % and #) are
replaced with the (:::::) code.
PC1 and PC2 are based on the DC count and time. FC is triggered by a special circuit, the
Clog Detector, on the RF/DC Detector Preamp. See Table 7.5-1 for the specific conditions that
trigger a flow-cell error and a list of typical causes.
Table 7.5-1 Flow-Cell Errors
Error Condition Typical Causes

FC Overvoltage is detected in the RF/DC current in the flow 1. Particulate matter plugging flow cell.
cell. (The current is not flowing correctly between the 2. Interruption in RF/DC aperture current from:
two electrodes in the flow cell.)
r Bubbles.
Note: When an FC error occurs, the RF/DC current is r Open circuit.
turned off.
r Coaxial cable problems.
When an FC is detected, the instrument stops the cycle
3. Defective RF tube inside the RF/DC Detector
and starts an autoclear. If the FC error is not cleared
Preamp card.
after three attempts, the instrument stops.
4. Chemistry problems.
5. Incorrectly adjusted Clog Detector circuit. To adjust
the circuit, refer to Clog Detector Circuit Verification
on the RF Detector Preamp Card with a Vacuum
Tube under Heading 4.74, RF DETECTOR PREAMP
CARD ADJUSTMENTS.
6. Failure of the Clog Detector circuit.
PC1 The following conditions must exist to generate a 1. Obstructed sample line to flow cell.
PC1 error: 2. Partially plugged flow cell. Purge the flow cell to
r The WBC is >1K and <56K. remove any partial plugs.
r The DC count time exceeds the expected count time 3. Sample pressure too low (flow not fast enough). To
by greater than 50% where - adjust the sample and sheath pressure, refer to
[(7000/WBC) x 10 = Expected Time]. Heading 4.72, INITIAL SHEATH AND SAMPLE
PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS.
For example, if the count time for a WBC of 7,000 is
4. Sheath pressure too high (sample flow restricted).
>15 s (which is 50% more than the expected
To adjust the sample and sheath pressure, refer to
10 seconds), a PC1 occurs.
Heading 4.72, INITIAL SHEATH AND SAMPLE
When PC1 is detected three times consecutively, the PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS.
instrument initiates an autoclear routine at the end of
5. Pressure leak at mixing chamber.
the third cycle. However, due to the overlap of
instrument cycles, the autoclear routine does not
actually occur until the end of the fourth cycle.
PN 4277219B 7.5-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
FLOW-CELL ERRORS FC, PC1, AND PC2
Table 7.5-1 Flow-Cell Errors (Continued)
Error Condition Typical Causes

PC2 The following conditions must exist to generate a 1. Obstructions in the lower sheath input (sample
PC2 error: rushes through the flow cell).
r The WBC is >1K and <56K. 2. Chemistry imbalance caused by:
r Either 8192 cells accumulate within <1.0 second or r Incorrect diff lytic reagent, diff preservative,
zero (0) cells accumulate within 1.0 second. and/or blood-sample volumes. To check the
volumes:
When PC2 is detected, the instrument initiates an
autoclear routine at the end of the cycle. However, due t Dispensed by the diff lytic reagent
to the overlap of instrument cycles, the autoclear pump, refer to Heading 4.28, DIFF
routine does not actually occur until the end of the LYTIC REAGENT PUMP CHECK,
next cycle. ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT.
t Dispensed by the diff preservative
pump, refer to Heading 4.29, DIFF
PRESERVATIVE PUMP CHECK,
ADJUSTMENT AND REPLACEMENT.
t Pulled by the aspiration pump, refer to
Heading 4.27, ASPIRATION PUMP
CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND
REPLACEMENT.
r Incorrect mixing in the mixing chamber.
r Incorrect rinsing and/or draining at mixing
chamber.
r Interferences in the blood specimen, such as:
t Lipemia.
t Extreme chemistry imbalances.
t Drugs.
r Condition of reagents, such as:
t Diluent frozen and improperly mixed
after thawing.
t Reagents contaminated.
t Reagents outdated.
3. Air flowing through the flow cell (no sample or diff
lytic reagent delivered).
7.5-2 PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
8
8 PARTS LISTS, 8.1-1
8.1 MASTER PARTS LIST, 8.1-1
8.2 ILLUSTRATED PARTS, 8.2-1
ILLUSTRATIONS
8.2-1 Main Analytical Station Components Illustrated, 8.2-1
8.2-2 Analyzer, Front Door (See Table 8.2-2), 8.2-2
8.2-3 Analyzer, Card Cage and Rear Door and Hardware (See Table 8.2-3), 8.2-4
8.2-4 GEN•S System Diluter, Front Doors and Covers (See Table 8.2-4), 8.2-6
8.2-5 Diluter, Cassette Guide Panels (See Table 8.2-5), 8.2-8
8.2-6 Diluter, Left Door and Compartment (See Table 8.2-6), 8.2-10
8.2-7 Diluter, Left Front Panel (See Table 8.2-7), 8.2-12
8.2-8 Diluter, Rear of Left Front Panel (See Table 8.2-8), 8.2-14
8.2-9 Diluter, Center Front Panel (See Table 8.2-9), 8.2-16
8.2-10 Diluter, Rear of Center Front Panel (See Table 8.2-10), 8.2-18
8.2-11 Diluter, Right Front Panel (See Table 8.2-11), 8.2-20
8.2-12 Diluter, Rear of Right Front Panel (See Table 8.2-12), 8.2-22
8.2-13 Diluter, Right Door and Compartment (See Table 8.2-13), 8.2-24
(See Table 8.2-14), 8.2-26
8.2-15 Diluter, Piercing Station Assembly (See Table 8.2-15), 8.2-28
8.2-16 Diluter, Tube Ram Cylinder and Bar-Code Scanners and Cylinder See
Table 8.2-16), 8.2-30
8.2-17 Diluter, Rocker Bed (See Table 8.2-17), 8.2-32
8.2-18 Diluter, Rocker Bed Mounting Channel (See Table 8.2-18), 8.2-34
8.2-19 Diluter, Triple Transducer Module (See Table 8.2-19), 8.2-36
Table 8.2-20), 8.2-38
8.2-21 Diluter, Diff Module (See Table 8.2-21), 8.2-40
8.2-22 Diluter, Retic Module (See Table 8.2-22), 8.2-42
8.2-23 Diluter, BSV Module (See Table 8.2-23), 8.2-44
8.2-24 Diluter, Probe-Wipe Module (See Table 8.2-24), 8.2-46
8.2-25 Diluter, Aspiration Pump Module, MF4 and MF13 (See Table 8.2-25), 8.2-48
8.2-26 Diluter, Right Rear Door (See Table 8.2-26), 8.2-50
8.2-27 Diluter, Left Rear Doors (See Table 8.2-27), 8.2-52
(See Table 8.2-28), 8.2-54
(See Table 8.2-29), 8.2-56
8.2-30 Check Valves and Chokes (See Table 8.2-30.), 8.2-58
8.2-31 Fittings and Miscellaneous Hardware (See Table 8.2-31), 8.2-60
8.2-32 Common Valves (See Table 8.2-32), 8.2-62
8.2-33 Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware (See Table 8.2-33), 8.2-64
(See Table 8.2-34), 8.2-66
Table 8.2-35), 8.2-68
PN 4277219B 8-i
CONTENTS
Table 8.2-36), 8.2-70
8.2-37 Power Supply, Covers and Panels (See Table 8.2-37), 8.2-72
8.2-38 LH 750 System Diluter and Analyzer Covers and Doors (See Table 8.2-38), 8.2-74
8.2-39 LH 750 System Analyzer Front Door Hardware (See Table 8.2-39), 8.2-76
Table 8.2-40), 8.2-77
8.2-41 LH 750 System Analyzer Card Cage, Rear Door and Hardware (See
Table 8.2-41), 8.2-78
8.2-42 Random Access Module Components (See Table 8.2-42), 8.2-80
TABLES
8.1-1 Common Names and Categories Used in Master Parts List, 8.1-1
8.1-2 Master Parts List - A through B, 8.1-3
8.1-3 Master Parts List - C, 8.1-4
8.1-4 Master Parts List - D through E, 8.1-10
8.1-5 Master Parts List - F through G, 8.1-11
8.1-6 Master Parts List - H, 8.1-15
8.1-7 Master Parts List - I through M, 8.1-19
8.1-8 Master Parts List - N and O, 8.1-21
8.1-9 Master Parts List - P through R, 8.1-22
8.1-10 Master Parts List - S, 8.1-26
8.1-11 Master Parts List - T, 8.1-31
8.1-12 Master Parts List - U through V, 8.1-36
8.1-13 Master Parts List - W through Z, 8.1-37
8.2-1 Illustrations Not Referenced from Figure 8.1, 8.2-1

8.2-2 Analyzer, Front Cover (See Figure 8.2-2), 8.2-3
8.2-3 Analyzer, Card Cage and Rear Panel and Cover (See Figure 8.2-3), 8.2-5
8.2-4 Diluter, Front Covers (See Figure 8.2-4), 8.2-7
8.2-5 Diluter, Cassette Guide Panels (See Figure 8.2-5), 8.2-9
8.2-6 Diluter, Left Door and Compartment (See Figure 8.2-6), 8.2-11
8.2-7 Diluter, Left Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-7), 8.2-13
8.2-8 Diluter, Rear of Left Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-8), 8.2-15
8.2-9 Diluter, Center Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-9), 8.2-17
8.2-10 Diluter, Rear of Center Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-10), 8.2-19
8.2-11 Diluter, Right Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-11), 8.2-21
8.2-12 Diluter, Rear of Right Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-12), 8.2-23
8.2-13 Diluter, Right Door and Compartment (See Figure 8.2-13), 8.2-25
(See Figure 8.2-14), 8.2-27
8.2-15 Diluter, Piercing Station Assembly (See Figure 8.2-15), 8.2-29
8.2-16 Diluter, Bar-Code Scanner and Tube Ram Cylinder (See Figure 8.2-16), 8.2-31
8.2-17 Diluter, Rocker Bed (See Figure 8.2-17), 8.2-33
8.2-18 Diluter, Rocker Bed Mounting Channel (See Figure 8.2-18), 8.2-35
8.2-19 Diluter, Triple Transducer Module (See Figure 8.2-19), 8.2-37
Figure 8.2-20), 8.2-39
8.2-21 Diluter, Diff Module (See Figure 8.2-21), 8.2-41
8-ii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
8
8.2-22 Diluter, Retic Module (See Figure 8.2-22), 8.2-43
8.2-23 Diluter, BSV Module (See Figure 8.2-23), 8.2-45
8.2-24 Diluter, Probe-Wipe Module (See Figure 8.2-24), 8.2-47
8.2-25 Diluter, Aspiration Pump Module, MF4 and MF13 (See Figure 8.2-25), 8.2-49
8.2-26 Diluter, Right Rear Door (See Figure 8.2-26), 8.2-51
8.2-27 Diluter, Left Rear Doors (See Figure 8.2-27), 8.2-53
(See Figure 8.2-28), 8.2-55
(See Figure 8.2-29), 8.2-57
8.2-30 Check Valves and Chokes (See Figure 8.2-30), 8.2-59
8.2-31 Fittings and Miscellaneous Hardware (See Figure 8.2-31), 8.2-61
8.2-32 Common Valves (See Figure 8.2-32), 8.2-63
8.2-33 Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware (See Figure 8.2-33), 8.2-65
(See Figure 8.2-34), 8.2-67
Figure 8.2-35), 8.2-69
Figure 8.2-36), 8.2-71
8.2-37 Power Supply, Covers and Panels (See Figure 8.2-37), 8.2-73
8.2-38 LH 750 System Diluter and Analyzer Covers and Doors (See
Figure 8.2-38), 8.2-75
8.2-39 LH 750 System Analyzer Front Door Hardware (See Figure 8.2-39), 8.2-76
Figure 8.2-40), 8.2-77
8.2-41 LH 750 System Analyzer Components (See Figure 8.2-41), 8.2-79
8.2-42 Random Access Components (See Figure 8.2-42), 8.2-81
PN 4277219B 8-iii
CONTENTS
8-iv PN 4277219B
8PARTS LISTS 8
8.1 MASTER PARTS LIST
The components in the master parts list are listed alphabetically by their common names or
categories. Table 8.1-1 lists the common names and categories used, further defines the
categories, and references the table in this section where those components appear. Where
applicable, a component is either cross referenced to its illustration in Heading 8.2 or to a
schematic in Chapter 6, SCHEMATICS.
Note: For most cables and switches, the figures referenced in this section are schematics.
Table 8.1-1 Common Names and Categories Used in Master Parts List
Common Name/
Category Category Includes Table
Actuator 8.1-2
Air water separator 8.1-2
Aperture WBC and RBC aperture blocks and aperture module. 8.1-2
Bar-code Scanners 8.1-2
Blood detectors 8.1-2
BSV All parts of the BSV. 8.1-2
Cable All electronic wiring. 8.1-3
Cassette transport Bar-code guide block, cassette advance wheel, lever, ram tip, rocker bed locking assy, 8.1-3
stripper plate and stripper plate button.
Chamber All liquid, vacuum and pressure chambers except the Hgb cuvette which is listed 8.1-3
separately under Hgb cuvette.
Check valve 8.1-3
Choke Chokes and choke fittings. 8.1-3
Component Miscellaneous custom parts such as the arm for the retic mixing chamber and the pin and 8.1-3
pin mount for the center Diluter door.
Compressor and 8.1-3
vacuum pump
Consumable All customer billable parts such as adhesives, alcohol, bar-code labels, cassettes, 8.1-3
controls, grease, and tape.
Cover All non-hinged panels, circuit card covers, and component covers and splash shields. 8.1-3
Cylinder All air cylinders. 8.1-3
Display Analyzer CRT, Diluter LCD, and Power Supply LED displays and all gauges. 8.1-4
Door All hinged panels. 8.1-4
Drive Drives for diff mixing chamber drive and for stain and retic (mixing) chambers. 8.1-4
Fan Fan guards and fans. 8.1-5
Filter Air fluid barrier, air water separator, and air filters. 8.1-5
FINAL Analyzer, Diluter, Power Supply and GEN•S System. 8.1-5
Fitting Elbow, feed-thru, muffler, plug, quick-disconnect, T-, union and Y-fittings. Does not 8.1-5
include choke fittings which are listed separately under Chokes.
Flipper 8.1-5
Fuse Fuse holder and fuses. 8.1-5
Gauge 8.1-5
Hardware Miscellaneous hardware including brackets, guides, clips, Earthquake Tie-Down Kit, 8.1-6
hinges, knobs, latches, plates, standoffs and studs. Does not include fittings, nuts,
screws, and washers which are listed as separate categories.
PN 4277219B 8.1-1
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-1 Common Names and Categories Used in Master Parts List (Continued)
Common Name/
Category Category Includes Table
Heater Diff heater. 8.1-6
Hgb cuvette 8.1-6
Keypad Diluter (GEN•S System) and numeric (LH 750 System) 8.1-7
Label 8.1-7
Lamp Lamp for Hgb module. 8.1-7
Laser 8.1-7
Manifold All manifolds. 8.1-7
Module Replaceable assemblies. Includes the BSV, Diff, Enclosed Needle Cap Piercer, Hgb, Level 8.1-7
Sense Manifold, Peltier, Piercing Station, Probe-Wipe, Retic, Rocker Bed and Rocker Bed
Belt Assy manifolds. Does not include the Hgb Preamp module or the Light Scatter
Preamp module which are both listed under Preamp, and does not include the Triple
Transducer which is listed under TTM.
Motor Motors for diff mixing chamber and Probe-Wipe module. 8.1-7
Muffler 8.1-7
Needle 8.1-7
Nut 8.1-7
O-ring 8.1-7
PCB All printed circuit cards except the RF Detector Preamp card which is listed under Preamp. 8.1-9
Power supply, bulk 8.1-9
Preamp Hgb Preamp module, Light Scatter Preamp module and RF Detector Preamp card. 8.1-9
Probe-Wipe Probe-Wipe module cleaning truck, cleaning truck bracket and lead screw, and backwash 8.1-9
cup.
Pump All liquid pumps and dispensers. 8.1-9
Regulator All pressure and vacuum regulators. 8.1-9
Screw 8.1-10
Sheath flow coil 8.1-10
Software EPROM kits 8.1-10
Spring 8.1-10
Switch All types including button, float, magnetic, micro and opto. 8.1-10
Thermistor 8.1-11
Tie wrap Nylon, loop and clamp tie wraps and tie wrap adhesives. 8.1-11
Tool Tool box and all tools needed for servicing the instrument. 8.1-11
Tool/Supply Special supplies purchased for servicing the instrument such as large latex particles. 8.1-11
Tray 8.1-11
TTM Flow cells, lens block, LS sensor, RF box triode, and TTM LED, plates, shaft and shock 8.1-11
mount.
Tubing Standard, custom, I-beam, input line, and pickup tubing; and tubing sleeves. 8.1-11
Valve All valves (except the BSV which is listed as a separate category), the pinch valve mounts, 8.1-12
pinch valve sleeves, and pinch valve deactivator clips.
Washer Washers and spacers. 8.1-13
.
8.1-2 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
8
Table 8.1-2 Master Parts List - A through B
Description Part Number Figure Item

Actuator, 1-tubing pinch valve 6211015 8.2-32 5
Actuator, 3-tubing pinch valve 6232447 8.2-15 21
8.2-32 8
Actuator, pilot, 7/16 bore 6232986 8.2-32 6
Air water separator, w/ fittings 6805386 8.2-35 4
Aperture block set, RBC 6701589 8.2-9 28
Aperture block set, WBC 6701588 8.2-9 27
Aperture module 2 with electrode and cable for Six-Channel Preamp card (LH 750 6807158
System) 7000696, FRU
Aperture module 2 (GEN•S System) 6859304 8.2-9 23
Bar-code, scanner, Automatic mode (laser style bar-code reader) 6807264 8.2-16 23
Bar-code, scanner, Automatic mode (LED style bar-code reader) 6858081 8.2-16 22
Note: Scanners manufactured with a new adhesive that prevents the LEDs from
moving out of alignment are labeled revision D.
Blood detectors, insulator 6805201
Blood detectors, matched set, Retic module 6859506 8.2-22 27
Blood detectors, matched set, Random Access module 6807365 8.2-42 23
BSV, center pad standoff 1021990 8.2-23 6
BSV, front pad standoff 1022003 8.2-23 14
BSV, housing 6855650 8.2-23 35
BSV, housing insulator 3104044 8.2-23 34
BSV, lever shaft 1017440 8.2-23 9
BSV, pad antifriction spacer 1023328 8.2-23 20
BSV, pads, matched set 6706457 8.2-23 19
BSV, shaft lever cap 1017439 8.2-23 1
BSV, shaft, coated 1017361 8.2-23 21
BSV, shaft, hand detector, threaded ends 6805358 8.2-23 31
BSV, tension spring retainer 1017438 8.2-23 2
PN 4277219B 8.1-3
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-3 Master Parts List - C
Figure/
Description Part Number Schematic Item
Cable, 13-valve I/O to solenoid 22 6805075 6322764
Cable, ac input, w/ ac input connector 6859378 8.2-36 6
Cable, Analytical Station to Workstation, 8’ 6028660 6322764
Cable, Analyzer to preamp (LH 750 System) 6029111 8.2-41 14
Cable, Bar Code Decoder card to bar-code scanner 6859437 6322764
Cable, Bulk Power Supply logic harness 6859421 6322764
Cable, Bulk Power Supply to Bulk Power Filter card 6859383 6322764
Cable, Bulk Power Supply to fans 6859377 6322764
Cable, Bulk Power Supply to filter boards and external connector 6859381 6322764
Cable, Diff Power Supply J1, J2 and J3 6859474 6322764
Cable, diluent sensor extension 6807099 8.2-29 7
Cable, Diluter 1 and Diff Power Supply card to backplane voltage bus 6028785 6322764
Cable, Diluter 1 card to Bar-Code Decoder card 6028659 6322764
Cable, Diluter 1 card to Diff Power Supply card 6028691 6322764
Cable, Diluter 1 card to RF Preamp card 6805052 6322764
Cable, Diluter 1 card to Sensor Distribution card 6028656 6322764
Cable, Diluter 2 card to Diluter 4 card 6028685 6322764
Cable, Diluter 2 card to Diluter Solenoid Optics PS card 6028690 6322764
Cable, Diluter 2 card to Probe-Wipe interconnect 6859436 6322764
Cable, Diluter 2 card to Reservoir Interface card 6028655 6322764
Cable, Diluter 3 card to MF11 6028658 6322764
Cable, Diluter 3 card to Retic module 6028657 6322764
Cable, Diluter 3 card to RS/Opto card 6028620 6322764
Cable, Diluter 3 card to Slide Maker and RS/Opto Interface card to Diluter Cable 6028498 6322764
Adapter card
8.1-4 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
8
Table 8.1-3 Master Parts List - C (Continued)
Figure/
Cable, Diluter 3 card to solenoid 21 and diff mixing motor 6859371 6322764
Cable, Diluter 3 to solenoids 14, 18, 19, 20, 33, 53, 60, 61, 63 6805079 6322764
Cable, Diluter 4 card and Diluter Solenoid Optics PS card to backplane voltage bus 6028784 6322764
Cable, Diluter 4 card to Peltier Thermoelectric Cooler module 6805198 6322764
Cable, Diluter 4 card to stain and diff heaters 6805304 6322764
Cable, Diluter to Analyzer, SCSI 6028481 6322764
Cable, ground, 13” 6028263
Cable, ground, 6.5”, flow cell 6027956
Cable, ground, 6” 6855145
Cable, keypad interface to LCD 6859438 6322764
Cable, keypad, Diluter control (LH 750 System) 6029140 8.2-39 3
Cable, laser interlock cable w/ LED 6858119 6322764
Cable, Motor Control card harness 6806204
Cable, mounting channel harness 6805221 6322764
Cable, needle harness 6806454
Cable, Power Supply to 115 Vac wall outlet 6028683
Cable, Power Supply to backplane voltage bus 6028496 6322764
Cable, Power Supply to Diluter Cable Adapter card (for new style Power Supply) 6029113
Cable, Power Supply to Diluter Cable Adapter card (for old style Power Supply) 6028497 6322764
Cable, probe harness 6806456
Cable, probe-wipe harness, with sensors and motor (for Probe-Wipe module with 6807188 8.2-24 20
moveable backwash cup)
Cable, Reservoir Intfc card to backwash, sheath and waste 6805011 6322764
Cable, Retic module harness 6859366 6322764
Cable, RF Preamp card to digital backplane, 78” 6028080 6322764
Cable, RF Preamp card to flow-cell, coaxial 6857192 6322764
Cable, RF to 24 V supply 6029069
Cable, rocker bed harness 6854610 6322764
Cable, RS/Opto Interface card to LS Preamp module 6028510 6322764
Cable, RS/Opto Interface card to PVT card and Hgb preamp 6859622 6322764
Cable, Sensor Distribution card to Hgb lamp 6859467 6322764
Cable, Sensor Distribution card to keypad and Keyboard and Display Interface card 6859432 6322764
Cable, Sensor Distribution card to left safety and front door, w/ switches 6859435 6322764
Cable, Sensor Distribution card to PVT card 6805286 6322764
Cable, Sensor Distribution card to right stack, w/ switches 6859781 6322764
PN 4277219B 8.1-5
PARTS LISTS
Figure/
Cable, Sensor Distribution card to rocker bed P36 6028533 6322764
Cable, Sensor Distribution card to rocker bed position, w/ sensors 6859393 6322764
Cable, Sensor Distribution to Manual-mode sensors w/ switch 6859427 6322764
Cable, SPC card to external connector (for new style Power Supply) 6029114
Cable, SPC card to external connector (for old style Power Supply) 6028928 6322764
Cable, SPC card to System Controller Display 6028523 6322764
Cable, waste sensor bypass connector 6805629 8.2-28 12
8.2-29 15
Cable, Workstation interface, one to four connectors 6028609 6322764
Cassette transport, ram guide block (for laser style bar-code reader) 6807111
Cassette transport, ram guide block (for LED style bar-code reader) 6855431 8.2-16 4
Cassette transport, cassette advance wheel 1015614 8.2-17 6
Cassette transport, lever, w/ shaft, screw and bearings 6855039 8.2-17 9
Cassette transport, ram tip 1023253 8.2-16 9
Cassette transport, rocker bed front rail assembly 6806521 8.2-17 30
Cassette transport, rocker bed locking assy 6805543 8.2-18 11
Cassette transport, stripper plate button 1024330 8.2-17 25
Cassette transport, stripper plate button (for Analytical Stations with a laser style 6807360
bar-code reader)
Cassette transport, stripper plate, w/ button 6805192 8.2-17 18
Chamber, backwash tank (also used as sweep-flow reservoir) 6858331 8.2-7 4
8.2-10 27
Chamber, bath, RBC and WBC 6855601 8.2-9 25
Chamber, clear plastic, 11 top ports 6805035 8.2-12 32
8.2-12 19
8.2-11 13
8.2-12 17
Chamber, clear plastic, 5 top ports w/ white ball inside 6805861 8.2-10 29
Chamber, clear plastic, 5 top ports, small 6852456 8.2-9 41
8.2-12 31
Chamber, clear plastic, 5 top ports, three plugged (VC19, needle vent chamber) 6854848
8.2-10 22
Chamber, diluent/cleaning agent reservoir 6806767 8.2-10 37
8.1-6 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
8
Figure/
Chamber, mixing, diff 6858748 8.2-21 2
Chamber, mixing, retic 6805155 8.2-22 19
8.2-42 19
Chamber, sheath tank 6805016 8.2-11 7
Chamber, stain 6859121 8.2-22 20
8.2-42 20
Chamber, sweep flow tank 6856877 8.2-10 26
Chamber, vacuum overflow tank 6859096 8.2-7 8
Chamber, vacuum trap w/ fittings 6859311 8.2-8 10
Choke, fitting, black, 0.010 orifice 6232695 8.2-30 19
Choke, fitting, blue, 0.012 orifice 6232693 8.2-27 13
8.2-30 16
Choke, fitting, brown, 0.006 orifice 6232697 8.2-30 18
Choke, fitting, green, 0.016 orifice 6232694 8.2-30 17
Choke, fitting, red, 0.008 orifice 6232696 8.2-30 20
Choke, metal, black, 0.010 orifice 6213011 8.2-30 11
Choke, metal, blue, 0.012 orifice 6213010 8.2-30 14
Choke, metal, brown, 0.006 orifice 6213009 8.2-30 12
Choke, metal, gold, 0.004 orifice 6213008 8.2-30 15
Choke, metal, green, 0.016 orifice 6213007 8.2-30 13
Choke, metal, red, 0.008 orifice 6213006 8.2-30 10
Choke, plastic, 3” fluid, 0.010 orifice 1022419 8.2-25 5
Choke, plastic, black, 0.012 orifice 6213020 8.2-30 5
Choke, plastic, blue, 0.020 orifice 6213013 8.2-30 9
Choke, plastic, brown, 0.025 orifice 6213015 8.2-30 6
Choke, plastic, clear, 0.062 i.d. tubing, 0.016 orifice 6232154 8.2-18 14
Choke, plastic, gray, 0.016 orifice 6213012 8.2-30 7
Choke, plastic, yellow, 0.010 orifice 6213014 8.2-30 8
Choke, variable, 1/16 i.d. 6213016 8.2-25 29
Component, misc, arm, mixing chamber, retic 6858962 8.2-22 21
8.2-42 21
Component, misc, grounding contact 1020955 8.2-4 5
Component, misc, pin mount, center Diluter window 1017577 8.2-5 8
Component, misc, pin, center Diluter window 1017748 8.2-5 6
Component, misc, pin, center Diluter window 6854305 8.2-5 5
Component, misc, reagent container neck support 7000364
PN 4277219B 8.1-7
PARTS LISTS
Figure/
Component, misc, rod pivot 1016063 8.2-16 10
Compressor and vacuum pump, w/ fittings and cable 6859181 8.2-34 9
Note: Revision F of this assembly has a modified design to reduce low frequency
sound output.
Consumable, adhesive, LOCTITE® 222-31 1601065
Consumable, adhesive, LOCTITE® 651, 1/3 oz bottle 1601032
Consumable, alcohol 1615069
Consumable, bar-code dispenser 2016172
Consumable, cassette, 16 mm o.d. tube 6857870
Consumable, cassette, HEMOGARD™ tubes 6858033
Consumable, cassette,13 mm o.d. tube 6858032
Consumable, grease, high vacuum, 3.3 oz tube 1604002
Consumable, LATRON control 7546914
Consumable, LATRON primer 7546915
Consumable, tape 8023259
Consumable, tape, foam 8010009 8.2-9 13
Consumable, tape, Teflon®, 0.02 8004007
Cover, Analytical Station, left column (LH 750 System) 6807235 8.2-38 11
Cover, Analytical Station, left side (LH 750 System) 6807055 8.2-38 13
Cover, Analytical Station, right column (LH 750 System) 6807057 8.2-38 7
Cover, Analytical Station, right side (LH 750 System) 6807054 8.2-38 4
Cover, Analytical Station, top (LH 750 System) 6807056 8.2-38 3
Cover, Bar-Code Decoder card 6805100 8.2-26 2
Cover, bar-code scanner 1015679 8.2-16 21
Cover, bus bar 6805217 8.2-3 26
8.2-41 26
Cover, cassette lifts w/ 8010017 adhesive tape 6855014 8.2-18 2
Cover, CRT, cover bottom, black strip 6859146 8.2-2 4
Cover, CRT, cover top, black strip 6859145 8.2-2 1
Cover, Diluter 4 card 6806602 8.2-27 1
Cover, Diluter, center (LH 750 System) 6807050 8.2-38 2
Cover, display, CRT window, clear w/ EMI coating 1022205 8.2-2 3
Cover, flow cell and lens block 6805630 8.2-19 1
Cover, keyboard panel, splash 1022544 8.2-4 3
Cover, lens block and laser 1022206 8.2-19 2
Cover, level sense manifold, large, diluent 1022948 8.2-27 27
8.1-8 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
8
Figure/
Cover, level sense manifold, small 1023262 8.2-27 25
Cover, Power Supply, left side panel (new style Power Supply) 6807390 8.2-37 5
Cover, Power Supply, left side panel (old style Power Supply) 6805277 8.2-37 6
Cover, Power Supply, top and right side, w/ latch (new style Power Supply) 6807292 8.2-37 3
Cover, Power Supply, top and right side, w/ latch (old style Power supply) 6859187 8.2-37 2
Cover, Probe-Wipe Interconnect card 6805009 8.2-23 23
Cover, SlideMaker access (LH 750 System) 6807236 8.2-38 10
Cover, splash shield, dual 4-valve 1025430 8.2-42 29
Cover, splash shield, laser side 1025419 8.2-42 6
Cover, splash shield, retic pump, CP 1025209 8.2-4 17
Cover, splash shield, retic valves, CP 1024818 8.2-22 33
Cover, splash shield, Solenoid Interconnect module, CP 1025133 8.2-11 9
Cover, System Controller Display (Power Supply) 6805173 8.2-35 1
Cover, window, smoked, door, front, center (GEN•S System) 6805395 8.2-4 2
Cover, window, smoked, w/ clips, left and right panels (GEN•S System) 6854517 8.2-4 1
Cylinder, air, backwash cup (assembly includes associated hardware and moveable 6707151 8.2-24 22
backwash cup)
Cylinder, air, bar-code reader 6805541 8.2-16 3
Cylinder, air, bed rock 6857929 8.2-15 10
Cylinder, air, bellows contract (for enclosed needle cap piercer) 6232919 8.2-15 14
Cylinder, air, BSV center section 6805648 8.2-23 5
Cylinder, air, BSV Manual-mode, with sensors 6805597 8.2-23 15
Cylinder, air, BSV Manual-mode, without sensors 6232920 8.2-23 15
Cylinder, air, cassette belt advance 6232127 8.2-17 2
Cylinder, air, cassette lifts 6232133 8.2-18 1
Cylinder, air, stripper plate 6232859 8.2-17 22
Cylinder, air, tube ram 6232218 8.2-16 14
PN 4277219B 8.1-9
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-4 Master Parts List - D through E

Display, CRT, Scope Module 2 (GEN•S System) 6859503 8.2-3 6
Display, CRT, Scope Module with keypad (LH 750 System) 6807370 8.2-41 6
7000697, FRU
Display, Diluter LCD w/ Keyboard and Display Interface card and keypad 6805302 8.2-4 7
Display, LCD, Diluter front panel 6805232 8.2-4 9
Display, LED, Power Supply w/ bracket 6859483 8.2-35 2
Door, Analyzer front, cover with graphics only (GEN•S System) 6858990 8.2-2 5
Door, Analyzer, front (LH 750 System) 6807048 8.2-38 1
Door, Analyzer, rear 6859069 8.2-3 19
8.2-41 19
Door, Analyzer, right and left 6859067 8.2-3 14
8.2-39 5
Door, Diluter, aperture EMI shield 6805525 8.2-9 38
Door, Diluter, center panel, lower metal door 6859076 8.2-9 35
Door, Diluter, left rear, bottom 6805094 8.2-27 19
Door, Diluter, left rear, top 6805093 8.2-27 3
Door, Diluter, left side 6858997 8.2-6 1
8.2-38 12
Door, Diluter, lower front (LH 750 System) 6807374 8.2-38 8
Door, Diluter, lower front, w/o Keyboard and Display Interface card (GEN•S System) 6858989 8.2-4 16
Door, Diluter, right rear 6805091 8.2-26 5
Door, Diluter, right side 6858998 8.2-13 3
8.2-38 6
Drive, mixing chamber, diff, FRU 7999687 8.2-21 13
Drive, mixing chambers (stain and retic), Retic and Random Access modules 6859498 8.2-22 30
8.2-42 7
8.1-10 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
8
.
Table 8.1-5 Master Parts List - F through G

Fan, guard, plastic, used w/ 4.69’’ square fan 2603062 8.2-35 10
Fan,12 Vdc, 4.68 square,1.5 thk, w/ thermistor and connector 2603068 8.2-3 31
8.2-41 31
8.2-35 11
Filter, air fluid barrier, 0.45 µ, tubing fittings 6232076 8.2-31 24
Filter, air water separator, filter only 6232759 8.2-35 6
Filter, air, used on rear cover 1022868 8.2-3 16
8.2-41 16
Filter, air, used under Power Supply 1022450 8.2-34 23
Filter, air, used on left and right side of new style Power Supply 6807331 8.2-37 4
Filter/muffler assembly 7237051 8.2-34 10
FINAL, Analyzer (GEN•S System), FRU 7000496
FINAL, Analyzer, tested (LH 750 System) 6707184
7000703, FRU
FINAL, Diluter (GEN•S System), FRU 7000497
FINAL, Diluter, tested (LH 750 System) 6707089
7000702, FRU
FINAL, GEN•S System 7000498
FINAL, Power Supply, tested (GEN•S System/LH 750 System) 6707153
7000704, FRU
FINAL, Power Supply (GEN•S System - old style), FRU 7000499
Fitting, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 10-32 thd 1005692 8.2-17 5
8.2-24 13
8.2-27 12
8.2-32 7
Fitting, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 10-32 thd, brass 6232038 8.2-12 24
8.2-17 21
Fitting, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 10-32 thd, ss 6232036 8.2-15 20
8.2-24 27
Fitting, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 10-32 thd, ss, w/ O-ring 6852910 8.2-11 5
Fitting, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 10-32 thd, w/ O-ring 6852909 8.2-11 18
8.2-21 14
8.2-22 14
8.2-42 15
Fitting, 0.082 tubing to 0.5 thd 6232379 8.2-18 8
Fitting, 0.094 i.d. tubing to 0.1/4 npt 6232642 8.2-27 22
Fitting, 0.125 i.d. tubing to 1/8 npt 6206006 8.2-35 8
8.2-35 17
PN 4277219B 8.1-11
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-5 Master Parts List - F through G (Continued)

Fitting, 0.188 i.d. tubing to 1/8 npt 6232647 8.2-26 8
Fitting, cross, clear with steel tubes 6858676 8.2-31 25
Fitting, cross, green with metal tubes 6807148 8.2-31 25
Fitting, elbow, 0.187 i.d. tubing to 1/8 npt 6216128 8.2-12 26
Fitting, elbow, 0.187 i.d. tubing to 1/8 npt 6232191 8.2-8 9
Fitting, elbow,10-32 thd, male to female 6216002 8.2-10 9
Fitting, elbow,10-32 thd, male to female 6232360 8.2-25 27
Fitting, elbow, adjustable, 2 mm (0.08 in.) i.d. hose barb to 10-32 6232829 8.2-42 5
Fitting, feed thru, 1/8 npt 6232980 8.2-27 31
8.2-29 16
Fitting, feed-thru isolator, white 1016486 8.2-31 2
Fitting, feed-thru, 0.062 i.d. to 0.093 i.d., w/ 10-22 npt 6216353 8.2-31 3
Fitting, feed-thru, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 0.082 tubing 1016929 8.2-31 4
Fitting, feed-thru, 0.125 i.d., w/ 1/4 npt 6216320 8.2-31 10
Fitting, feed-thru, black 1022081 8.2-31 6
Fitting, feed-thru, metal, 0.062 i.d. tubing, w/ 10-32 thd 1005697 8.2-9 18
8.2-31 5
Fitting, feed-thru, metal, 0.093 i.d. tubing, w/ 10-32 thd 1005699 8.2-31 1
Fitting, muffler,10-32 thd 6216195 8.2-25 31
Fitting, plug for tubing 6232383 8.2-31 28
Fitting, plug, 1/8 npt, external hex 6216312 8.2-34 8
Fitting, plug, 1/8 npt, internal hex 6232339 8.2-12 29
Fitting, plug, 10-32 thd 1004645 8.2-25 7
8.2-42 3
Fitting, plug, 10-32, w/ O-ring, 1004645 and 2523062 6856745 8.2-27 10
Fitting, quick disconnect, 0.125 i.d. tubing 6232644 8.2-27 20
Fitting, quick disconnect, 0.125 i.d. tubing to 1/4 npt 6232716 8.2-36 15
Fitting, quick disconnect, 5/32 o.d. tubing to 1/4 o.d. tubing 6232751 8.2-31 22
Fitting, quick disconnect, 5-tube, TTM, mixing chamber 6805301 8.2-21 4
Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.125 o.d. tubing to 1/8 npt 6232752 8.2-34 6
Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.250 o.d. tubing to 1/4 mpt 6232680 8.2-35 5
Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.250 o.d. tubing to 1/4 mpt, brass 6216018 8.2-34 2
Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.250 to 0.125 6232773 8.2-27 33
Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.250 tubing to 1/8 mnpt 6232681 8.2-34 7
Fitting, quick disconnect, female, 0.125 mnpt, 0.125 flow 6232996 8.2-27 32
Fitting, quick disconnect, input door, female, 0.170 i.d. x 0.25 o.d. tubing 6232714 8.2-36 8
8.1-12 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
8

Fitting, quick disconnect, input lines, small, 0.125 o.d. tubing, almond 6232645 8.2-27 34
8.2-28 4
8.2-29 4
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, cap, white 6232434 8.2-31 17
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, female, white 6232435 8.2-31 18
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, black 6232666 8.2-21 8
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, blue 6232663 8.2-21 6
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, green 6232664 8.2-21 5
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, red 6232665 8.2-21 7
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, to 0.094 i.d. tubing, clear 6232660 8.2-31 19
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, to 0.094 i.d. tubing, white 6232436 8.2-31 19
Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, yellow 6232662 8.2-21 9
Fitting, quick disconnect, male, 0.250 i.d. tubing, steel 6232715 8.2-28 5
8.2-29 5
8.2-36 9
Fitting, quick disconnect, male, 0.250 tubing to 10/32 thd 6232678 8.2-34 17
8.2-35 15
Fitting, quick disconnect, T, 1/4 o.d. tubing 6232753 8.2-31 23
Fitting, quick disconnect,1/8 o.d. tubing to 5/32 o.d. tubing 6232750 8.2-31 21
Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube round, female 6232444 8.2-22 32
Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube round, male 6232443 8.2-22 31
Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube, base (QD1) 6805129 8.2-10 19
Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube, base (QD2, QD5, QD6) 6859039 8.2-25 11
Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube, base (QD4) 6859040 8.2-25 10
Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube, plate w/ bolt (QD4) 6859041 8.2-25 16
Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube, plate w/ bolts (QD2, QD5, QD6) 6859038 8.2-12 23
Fitting, quick-disconnect, T, 0.25 i.d. tubing to 1/4 npt 6232676 8.2-34 4
Fitting, T, 0.062 i.d. tubing, polypropylene 6226008 8.2-31 15
Fitting, T, 0.093 i.d. to 0.125 i.d. to 0.125, polyurethane 6232380 8.2-31 13
Fitting, T, 0.094 i.d. tubing, polypropylene 6232051 8.2-31 16
Fitting, T, 0.156 i.d. tubing, polyurethane 6232584 8.2-31 15
Fitting, T, 0.250 o.d. to 0.250 o.d. to 1/4 mpt, vacuum 6232712 8.2-34 11
Fitting, T, clear w/ metal tubes 6858675 8.2-31 14
Fitting, T, green w/ metal tubes 6807147 8.2-31 14
Fitting, tubing to 10-32 thd 6232362 8.2-8 3
8.2-27 18
Fitting, union, 0.062 i.d x 10-32 thd, polypropylene (for aperture top) 1004595 8.2-9 21
PN 4277219B 8.1-13
PARTS LISTS

Fitting, union, 0.062 i.d. to 0.093 i.d. (reducer) 6232352 8.2-31 11
Fitting, union, 0.062 i.d. to 0.125 i.d tubing, square flange 6232564
Fitting, union, 0.062 i.d., clear 6232109 8.2-31 12
Fitting, union, 0.093 i.d. to 0.0125 i.d. tubing, clear 6232246 8.2-31 12
Fitting, union, 0.094 i.d. tubing, Luer quick disconnect (comprises PN 6232435, 6232399 8.2-31 20
PN 6232436, and PN 6232434)
Fitting, union, 0.187 i.d. to 0.187 i.d. 6216308 8.2-26 7
8.2-29 14
Fitting, union,10-32 female to female 6216006 8.2-25 30
Fitting, union,10-32 thd to 1-8 npt 6206001 8.2-12 25
Fitting, union,10-32 thd to10-32 thd 6216033 8.2-31 27
Fitting, Y, 0.050 i.d., blue 6232263 8.2-31 16
Fitting, Y, 0.062 i.d. 9909059 8.2-31 16
Fitting, Y, 0.093 i.d. to 0.125 to 0.125 i.d. tubing, white 1018245 8.2-31 16
Fitting, Y, 0.093 i.d. tubing, clear 6232259 8.2-31 16
Fitting, Y, 0.125 i.d. tubing, clear (large waste line) 9908085 8.2-31 16
Fitting, Y, 0.125 o.d. tubing, clear 6216081 8.2-31 16
Fitting, Y, 0.130 i.d. tubing, clear 6216181 8.2-31 16
Flipper, left, inner 6807019 8.2-5 4
Flipper, left, outer 6807022 8.2-5 2
Flipper, right, inner 6806638 8.2-5 9
Flipper, right, outer 6807020 8.2-5 10
Fuse holder, 20 A, 250 Vac 9921373 8.2-36 7
Fuse, 1/16 A, 250 V, 0.25 x 1.25 5102040
Fuse, 15.0 A, 250 V, 25 x 1.25 ceramic, sloblo 5102057
Gauge, pressure, 0 to 60 psi 6232189 8.2-15 24
8.1-14 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
8
.
Table 8.1-6 Master Parts List - H

Hardware, baffle, Power Supply 6807307 8.2-34 25
Hardware, bearing, bushing, shaft, nylon, BSV 2523361 8.2-23 39
Hardware, bearing, Probe-Wipe module 2527689 8.2-24 14
Hardware, belt, 75 grooves 2523221 8.2-21 11
8.2-22 29
8.2-42 8
Hardware, bracket, air cylinder ball mount 1015617 8.2-17 33
Hardware, bracket, air filter, Power Supply 2840060 8.2-34 21
Hardware, bracket, air filter, Power Supply 6859466 8.2-34 22
Hardware, bracket, aperture door thumbscrew 6859608 8.2-9 31
Hardware, bracket, bed locking 6855015 8.2-17 27
Hardware, bracket, bed rock air cylinder ball 1015522 8.2-17 32
Hardware, bracket, bubble/blood detector 6805220 8.2-22 26
Hardware, bracket, chamber 2116002 8.2-9 7
Hardware, bracket, chamber, white coated metal 2851620
Hardware, bracket, coiled tubing, Power Supply 6859722 8.2-35 9
Hardware, bracket, cover support, Analyzer 6859036 8.2-2 10
Hardware, bracket, dual 14-valve quick disconnect 6805014 8.2-25 9
Hardware, bracket, fastener, socket ball 1016565 8.2-17 28
Hardware, bracket, front cover latch, left 6805177 8.2-5 24
Hardware, bracket, front cover latch, right 6805156 8.2-5 16
Hardware, bracket, hand detector mount 6805517 8.2-23 27
Hardware, bracket, heater, diff 6805106 8.2-22 24
8.2-42 24
Hardware, bracket, magnetic catch 6859057 8.2-7 2
Hardware, bracket, mount, 1-3/8 diam 2851244 8.2-9 16
8.2-11 17
Hardware, bracket, mufflers 6805130 8.2-36 17
Hardware, bracket, needle-vent chamber 6805495
Hardware, bracket, pump holder 2838003 8.2-11 12
8.2-22 17
8.2-42 10
Hardware, bracket, pump mounting 6805196 8.2-22 11
Hardware, bracket, QD6 6859132 8.2-10 23
Hardware, bracket, RBC and WBC diluent dispensers 2116001 8.2-7 18
Hardware, bracket, ribbon cable holder 1023221 8.2-19 10
Hardware, bracket, rocker bed air cylinder mount 2851391 8.2-15 7
PN 4277219B 8.1-15
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-6 Master Parts List - H (Continued)

Hardware, bracket, rocker bed spring, w/ sensor flag 6855390 8.2-17 12
Hardware, bracket, solenoid valve, left 6857466 8.2-18 15
Hardware, bracket, solenoid valve, right 6857465 8.2-18 9
Hardware, bracket, stripper plate 1024475 8.2-17 23
Hardware, bracket, vacuum regulator 6859112 8.2-12 4
Hardware, bracket,13-valve solenoid valve manifold 6859205 8.2-25 4
Hardware, bracket,14-valve solenoid valve manifold 6859204 8.2-25 25
Hardware, bushing, piercing station 1023072 8.2-15 15
Hardware, cap, black plastic vinyl isolator (used on VC1) 2523477 8.2-9 8
Hardware, cassette guide, metal strip 6859008 8.2-5 14
Hardware, cassette guide, left 1024629 8.2-5 23
Hardware, cassette guide, right 1022162 8.2-5 17
Hardware, casters, fixed, used on Power Supply 2523779 8.2-34 24
Hardware, casters, swivel, used on Power Supply 2523780 8.2-34 20
Hardware, clamp, tubing, black nylon ratcheting 2852004 8.2-35 18
Hardware, clip, bed rock cylinder 2852036 8.2-15 5
Hardware, clip, BSV center section cylinder 2851445 8.2-23 3
Hardware, clip, BSV Manual-mode aspirator tip cylinder 2851444 8.2-23 17
Hardware, clip, retaining 2837045 8.2-19 12
Hardware, clip, retaining, BSV hand detector mount 2837031 8.2-23 25
Hardware, clip, shaft retaining, tube ram 2837037 8.2-16 11
Hardware, compressor mounting bottom shipping stand (two required) 1022531
Hardware, compressor mounting clip w/ slot 1023479
Hardware, compressor mounting metal strap 1022532
Hardware, Earthquake Tie-Down Kit 6915060
Hardware, gasket, EMI 5704030 8.2-9 34
Hardware, grommet, rubber, 0.250 i.d. x 0.0562 o.d. 2830013 8.2-19 6
Hardware, hinge, aperture door 1023429 8.2-9 37
Hardware, hinge, Diluter doors, left and right 1022932 8.2-6 2
Hardware, hinge, front cover, Analyzer 2523647 8.2-2 7
8.2-39 2
Hardware, hinge, lower left door, Diluter 6805102 8.2-27 21
Hardware, knob, black, used on regulators 2523691 8.2-12 28
8.1-16 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
8

Hardware, knob, BSV, shaft 6855617 8.2-23 18
Hardware, knob, vacuum regulator 2406016 8.2-12 1
Hardware, latch, magnet, Diluter front cover 2840073 8.2-5 22
8.2-34 19
Hardware, latch, magnet, used w/ front cover switch 5111192
Hardware, latch, magnetic catch, Diluter front cover 1016023 8.2-5 21
Hardware, latch, magnetic catch, Diluter left and right windows 2840053 8.2-11 2
Hardware, latch, quarter turn, black, Power Supply 2852257 8.2-37 1
Hardware, latch, snap-in w/ catch 2851859 8.2-3 15
8.2-4 10
8.2-39 5
8.2-40 1
8.2-41 15
Hardware, latch, snap-in w/ catch, Diluter left and right doors 2852109 8.2-6 4
Hardware, magnet, scanner position actuator 2509007 8.2-16 19
Hardware, misc, bar, side panel cover lower mount 1015772 8.2-11 8
Hardware, misc, bus bar 1022451 8.2-3 24
8.2-41 24
Hardware, misc, front cover mount, Diluter 1022183 8.2-4 13
8.2-40 3
Hardware, misc, front cover mount, Diluter 1022442 8.2-4 12
8.2-40 4
Hardware, misc, holdup arm guide, Analyzer 1022315 8.2-3 20
8.2-41 20
Hardware, pin, front cover mount 1022182 8.2-4 14
8.2-40 6
Hardware, plate, BSV and retic area 6859000 8.2-25 17
Hardware, plate, Bulk Power Supply, w/ captive screws 6858805 8.2-36 13
Hardware, plate, compressor, w/ captive screws 6858806 8.2-34 15
Hardware, plate, mounted below cooling coil 6859412 8.2-35 13
Hardware, plate, TTM area 6858982 8.2-19 20
Hardware, plate, TTM laser area 6859227 8.2-19 19
Hardware, slide rack used for front cover 1411145 8.2-4 15
8.2-40 5
Hardware, splash shield support 6807191 8.2-4 17
Hardware, standoff, snap-in 2851407 8.2-10 38
Hardware, stud, ball 1016567 8.2-18 16
Hardware, stud, ball 1019135 8.2-18 22
Hardware, stud, ball, #10-32 1014681 8.2-23 8
PN 4277219B 8.1-17
PARTS LISTS

Hardware, stud, ball, sleeve 1019136 8.2-18 23
Heater, diff 6859463 8.2-22 25
8.2-42 25
Hgb cuvette, glassware only 6103025 8.2-9 12
8.1-18 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
8
.
Table 8.1-7 Master Parts List - I through M

Keypad, membrane, front panel (GEN•S System) 2016587 8.2-4 8
Keypad, with LCD, Diluter control (numeric) (LH 750 System) 6807378 8.2-38 9
7000698, FRU
Kit, GEN•S Dual Diluent Pickup Tube 6915136
Label, bar-code specimen 7546856
Label, bar-code stripper button labels (for laser style bar-code reader) 2431336
Label, cassette, 0001-0100 (for laser style bar-code reader) 2427065
Label, cassette, 0001-0100 (LED style bar-code reader) 2427112
Label, laser warning 2429637 8.2-19 21
Lamp, Hgb w/ cable 6859621 8.2-9 10
Laser 6805206 8.2-19 8
Manifold, 6 ports 1007924 8.2-18 18
Manifold, bath bubbler 1019128 8.2-10 11
Manifold, cleaning agent 6805096 8.2-26 9
Manifold, diluent 6805098 8.2-26 16
Manifold, diluent/cleaning agent 6806758 8.2-10 35
Manifold, solenoid valve, 10-valve, w/ fittings 6232739 8.2-10 34
8.2-22 2
Manifold, solenoid valve, 10-valve, w/ fittings (use for MF16 w/ Solenoid 6233021 8.2-22 2
Interconnect module) 8.2-42 2
Manifold, solenoid valve, 14-valve, w/ bracket and quick disconnect 6859514 8.2-25 32
Manifold, solenoid valve, 1-valve, 3-way, w/ fittings 6214112 8.2-10 8
Manifold, solenoid valve, 1-valve, 4-way 6856996 8.2-10 21
Manifold, solenoid valve, 4-valve, w/ fittings (use for MF17 w/ Solenoid 6233025 8.2-10 28
Interconnect module) 8.2-21 16
Manifold, solenoid valve, 4-valve, w/o fittings 6232636 8.2-22 8
Manifold, solenoid valve, 7-valve, 24 Vdc/30 psi, w/ actuators and pinch valves 6232981 8.2-27 14
Manifold, solenoid valve, 8-valve, w/ bracket and quick disconnect 6859515 8.2-25 3
Manifold, solenoid valve, level sense manifold, 7-valve, w/ fittings 6805503 8.2-27 8
Module, BSV 6859517 8.2-14 5
Module, Diff Mixing Chamber, w/ drive 6859511 8.2-21 10
Module, diluent/cleaning agent assembly 6805632 8.2-10 36
Module, Enclosed Needle Cap Piercer 6805670 8.2-15 12
Module, Hgb, w/ preamp, cuvette and lamp 6859795 8.2-9 14
PN 4277219B 8.1-19
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-7 Master Parts List - I through M (Continued)

Module, Level Sense Manifold 6805306 8.2-27 35
Module, Peltier Thermoelectric Cooler 6805143 8.2-7 9
Module, Piercing Station 6805084 8.2-16 18
Module, Probe-Wipe, with moveable backwash cup, FRU 7000690 8.2-24 19
Module, Probe-Wipe, with stationary backwash cup 6706396 8.2-24 1
Module, Random Access (LH 750 System) 6707182 8.2-42
7000695, FRU
Module, Retic (GEN•S System) 6805200 8.2-14 4
Module, Rocker Bed 6805184 8.2-14 1
Module, Rocker Bed Belt Assy 6702887 8.2-17 1
Module, Solenoid Interconnect 6807073 8.2-11 10
Motor, Diff mixing chamber, w/ filter board 6805817 8.2-21 12
Motor, Probe-Wipe module (for Probe-Wipe module with stationary backwash 3505048 8.2-24 5
cup)
Motor, Probe-Wipe module, dc, gear (for Probe-Wipe module with moveable 3533122 8.2-24 21
backwash cup)
Motor, retic mixing, w/ filter card 6805818 8.2-22 28
8.2-42 9
Muffler, pneumatic 6218031 8.2-36 16
8.1-20 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
8
Table 8.1-8 Master Parts List - N and O

Needle, enclosed needle cap piercer (for instruments with or without a SlideMaker) 6807145 8.2-15 11
Nut, #2, 56 UNC 2822050 8.2-6 10
Nut, #4, hex custom 2852066 8.2-2 2
Nut, clip on, Analyzer rear cover 2852106 8.2-3 28
8.2-41 28
Nut, hex, #10 2822016 8.2-9 20
8.2-17 36
Nut, hex, #10, used on X-axis 2851568 8.2-20 18
Nut, hex, #25 2822040 8.2-17 19
Nut, hex, #25 2822046 8.2-31 7
Nut, hex, #37-24 UNF, 0.562 AF x 0.328 thk 2822047 8.2-26 6
Nut, hex, #37-24 UNF, 0.625 AF x 0.257 thk 2822066
Nut, hex, #4 2822003 8.2-9 30
Nut, hex, #6 2822008 8.2-10 40
8.2-17 13
Nut, hex, #6, w/ washer attached 2852076 8.2-4 4
Nut, misc, clip on, used w/ quick open screws 2852240 8.2-27 5
Nut, misc, use with 6857096 pinch valve 2822040 8.2-32 13
Nut, square, #10, used on Y- and Z-axis 2851569 8.2-20 14
O-ring, 0.145 i.d. x 0.281 o.d. x 0.062w (aperture module fitting seal) 2512088 8.2-9 22
O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w 2523062 8.2-10 6
8.2-17 20
8.2-24 26
8.2-27 11
8.2-42 4
O-ring, 0.301 i.d. x 0.070 w 2512006 8.2-24 11
O-ring, 0.489 i.d. x 0.070 w, aperture seal, large 2512071 8.2-9 24
O-ring, 0.926 i.d. x 0.070 w 2527716 8.2-27 23
O-ring, 10-32 thd fitting 6216345 8.2-17 4
O-ring, 2.310 i.d. x 0.070 w 1023567 8.2-27 28
O-ring, air water separator seal 2512040 8.2-35 7
O-ring, aperture seal, small 2512120 8.2-9 26
O-ring, clear plastic flat 2851687 8.2-18 7
O-ring, motor mount 2512127 8.2-24 8
O-ring, red, BSV shaft 2512031 8.2-23 10
PN 4277219B 8.1-21
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-9 Master Parts List - P through R
Figure/
PCB, AMC, without software EPROM 6706028 8.2-3 8
8.2-41 8
PCB, Analog 5 6706071 8.2-3 13
8.2-41 13
PCB, Analyzer Power Supply 1 6705984 8.2-3 5
8.2-41 5
PCB, Analyzer Power Supply 2 6705985 8.2-3 7
8.2-41 7
PCB, API 6705977 8.2-3 4
PCB, Backplane, Analog (GEN•S System only) 6859177 8.2-3 23
PCB, Backplane, Analog (LH 750 System) 6707152 8.2-41 23
PCB, Backplane, CRT 6859176 8.2-3 29
8.2-41 29
PCB, Backplane, Digital (GEN•S System only) 6859175 8.2-3 30
PCB, Backplane, Digital (LH 750 System) 6707154 8.2-41 30
PCB, Backplane, Interconnect 6859178 8.2-3 27
8.2-41 27
PCB, Bar-Code Decoder (for use with LED style bar-code reader) 2016238 8.2-26 1
PCB, Bar-Code Decoder (for use with laser style bar-code reader) 2016905
PCB, BD ADJ (Remote BD) 6707204 8.2-41 1
PCB, Bulk Power Filter 6706158 8.2-36 18
PCB, COMM INTFC 6706070 8.2-3 9
8.2-41 9
PCB, GEN•S Driver 1, daughter card for Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface card (replaces 6707073 8.2-6 13
drivers on U22 and U28)
drivers on U1, U3, U4, U5, U11, and U23)
drivers on U2, U17, and U21)
PCB, Diff Power Supply 6705994 8.2-13 4
PCB, DIFF PROCESSOR 4, without software EPROM 6706314 8.2-3 12
8.2-41 12
PCB, Diluter 1 (GEN•S System only) 6706002 8.2-13 5
PCB, Diluter 1 (LH 750 System) 6707177 8.2-13 5
PCB, Diluter 2 (GEN•S System only) 6706003 8.2-6 7
PCB, Diluter 2 RBD (LH 750 System) 6707207
PCB, Diluter 2 REL (GEN•S Systems with SW 4.0 and higher only) 6707158 8.2-6 7
PCB, Diluter 3 (only for GEN•S Systems without a SlideMaker) 6706157 8.2-6 11
8.1-22 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
8
Table 8.1-9 Master Parts List - P through R (Continued)
Figure/
PCB, Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface (for GEN•S Systems with or without a 6706591 8.2-6 11
SlideMaker)
PCB, Diluter 3 LH (required for LH 750 Systems with or without a SlideMaker, but 6707231 8.2-6 11
also works on GEN•S Systems)
PCB, Diluter 4 6706368 8.2-27 2
PCB, Diluter Cable Adapter 6706036 8.2-6 9
PCB, DILUTER CPU (LH 750 System) 6707173 8.2-41 10
PCB, DILUTER PROCESSOR, without software EPROM (for use on GEN•S System 6706631 8.2-3 10
only)
PCB, Diluter Solenoid Optics PS (for use with an RF Detector Preamp card with a 6705993 8.2-6 8
vacuum tube only)
PCB, Diluter Solenoid Optics PS 2 (required for a solid state RF Detector Preamp 7000688 8.2-6 8
card but can also be used with an RF Detector Preamp card with a vacuum tube)
PCB, Ground Interconnect 6854923 8.2-10 39
PCB, Keypad and Display Interface (LH 750 System) 6707169
PCB, Laser PS, w/ cover 6706373 8.2-13 14
PCB, Motor Controller, w/ cable 3505052 8.2-36 5
PCB, Motor Filter, diff mixing chamber drive 6706409
PCB, Plt Processor 2 6706923 8.2-3 2
8.2-41 2
PCB, Probe-Wipe Interconnect 6706382 8.2-23 22
PCB, PVT, w/ bracket 6859703 8.2-13 12
PCB, Red/White Preamp 2 (GEN•S System only) 6706029 8.2-3 1
PCB, Red/White Processor (GEN•S System only) 6705876 8.2-3 3
PCB, Red/White Processor 2 (LH 750 System only) 6707099 8.2-41 3
PCB, R/W/P Signal Conditioner/Analyzer (LH 750 System only) 6707067 8.2-41 4
PCB, Reservoir Interface, level sense manifold 6706198 8.2-27 29
PCB, RS/Opto Interface 6706203 8.2-13 10
PCB, RS485 Interface 6707233 8.2-13 6
PCB, Sensor Distribution 6706196 8.2-13 13
PCB, Six-Channel Preamp (LH 750 System only) 6707057
7000692-
FRU
PCB, Solenoid Manifold,13-valve I/O 6706190 8.2-25 2
PCB, System Power Controller (SPC) 6706038 8.2-35 19
PCB, Thermistor w/ cable, to Diluter 4 card 6805508 6322764
PCB, Thermistor w/ cable, to PVT card 6805509 6322764
PN 4277219B 8.1-23
PARTS LISTS
Figure/
Power Supply, Bulk w/ cables 6805774 8.2-36 14
Preamp, Hgb 6701652 8.2-9 11
Preamp, LS Preamp 7 6805539 8.2-19 18
Preamp, RF Detector Preamp 6 6859777 8.2-19 4
Preamp, RF Detector, solid state, FRU 7000700 8.2-19 23
Note: A solid state RF Detector Preamp card can only be installed in an Analytical
Station that has a Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply 2 card (PN 7000688) and
an RF to 24 V supply cable (PN 6029069). Refer to SM 1891.
Probe Wipe, backwash cup (moveable) 1025201 8.2-24 25
Probe-Wipe, backwash cup (stationary) 1023249 8.2-24 18
Probe Wipe, cleaning truck bracket (for Probe-Wipe module with moveable 6707171 8.2-24 23
backwash cup)
Probe Wipe, cleaning truck bracket (for Probe-Wipe module with stationary 6805367 8.2-24 12
backwash cup)
Probe Wipe, cleaning truck, clear nylon (for Probe-Wipe module with moveable 6807327 8.2-24 24
backwash cup)
Probe Wipe, cleaning truck, clear nylon (for Probe-Wipe module with stationary 6858854 8.2-24 17
backwash cup)
Probe Wipe, lead screw truck 2852262 8.2-24 10
Pump, 2 mL diaphragm pump 6805481 8.2-11 14
Pump, aspiration, Manual mode 205 µL, Automatic mode 285 µL 6707119 8.2-25 21
Pump, blood/stain aspiration, 50 µL 6232653 8.2-22 12
8.2-42 12
Pump, CBC lytic reagent, 1.06 mL 6859144 8.2-11 16
Pump, diff lytic reagent (Erythrolyse), low volume 350 µL, high volume 540 µL 6858757 8.2-7 14
Pump, diff preservative (StabiLyse), low volume 131 µL, high volume 231 µL 6858762 8.2-11 19
Pump, diluent dispenser, RBC, 10 mL (use on Analytical Stations that bypass the 6905043 8.2-7 21
diluent reservoir)
Pump, diluent dispenser, RBC, 10 mL (use on Analytical Stations that use the diluent 6859192 8.2-7 20
reservoir)
Pump, diluent dispenser, WBC, 6 mL (use on Analytical Stations that bypass the 6912099 8.2-7 22
diluent reservoir)
Pump, diluent dispenser, WBC, 6 mL (use on Analytical Stations that use the diluent 6858979 8.2-7 19
reservoir)
Pump, retic clearing solution, 2 mL 6858756 8.2-7 11
Pump, stain (retic), 200 µL 6858073 8.2-22 15
8.2-42 16
Regulator, 25 psi, bar-code scanner cylinder 6856488 8.2-15 23
8.1-24 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
8
Figure/
Regulator, 30 psi, w/ fittings 6805384 8.2-34 3
Regulator, sheath, diff sample and retic 6232313 8.2-12 27
Regulator, vacuum, w/ attaching nut 6232628 8.2-12 5
PN 4277219B 8.1-25
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-10 Master Parts List - S
Figure/
Screw, #0 x 80, 0.62 l, hsc-hd, hex 2851669 8.2-18 6
Screw, #10 x 32, 0.25 l, shoulder-hd 2810138 8.2-2 8
Screw, #10 x 32, 0.38 l, pan-hd, xrec, w/ cone washer 2852078 8.2-23 7
Screw, #10 x 32, 0.50 l, pan-hd, xrec 2810017 8.2-10 17
8.2-34 13
Screw, #10 x 32, 2.25 l, hsc-hd, hex, black 2851306 8.2-15 25
Screw, #2 x 56, 0.3 l, pan-head, xrec 2802019 8.2-20 6
Screw, #2 x 56, 0.56 l, pan-hd, xrec, black 2802051 8.2-18 4
Screw, #2 x 56, 1.0 l, pan -hd, xrec 2802026 8.2-22 13
8.2-42 13
Screw, #4 x 40, 0.12 l, µf82-hd, xrec 2804101 8.2-17 8
Screw, #4 x 40, 0.19 l, µf-hd, xrec 2804080 8.2-16 20
Screw, #4 x 40, 0.19 l, pan -hd, xrec 2804077 8.2-9 40
Screw, #4 x 40, 0.3 l, FL82-hd, xrec 2804088 8.2-5 1
8.2-39 6
8.2-40 2
8.2-42 1
8.2-24 9
8.2-42 27
Screw, #6 x 32, 0.25 l, µF82-hd, xrec 2806104
8.2-20 25
8.1-26 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
8
Table 8.1-10 Master Parts List - S (Continued)
Figure/
Screw, #6 x 32, 0.25 l, setscrew, hex 2807038 8.2-12 2
8.2-20 16
Screw, #6 x 32, 0.31 l, fl-hd, xrec 2806021 8.2-17 29
Screw, #6 x 32, 0.375 l, hex, setscrew 2807024 8.2-22 22
8.2-42 22
8.2-27 26
8.2-11 11
8.2-22 18
8.2-27 4
8.2-34 14
8.2-42 17
Screw, #6 x 32, 0.38 l, w/ locking washer (use with tie wrap mount PN 6011021) 2852093 8.2-12 34
Screw, #6 x 32, 0.75 l, hex-hd, ehex 2806150 8.2-16 8
Screw, #8 x 32, 0.25 l, µf-hd, xrec 2808080 8.2-36 12
Screw, #8 x 32, 0.38 l, hsc-hd, hex 2808057
Screw, #8 x 32, 0.50 l, setscrew, hex 2808110 8.2-20 23
8.2-39 1
Screw, #8 x 32, 0.62 l, hex-hd, ehex 2852276 8.2-20 19
Screw, #8 x 32, 0.62 l, TTM lockdown 2851614 8.2-20 22
Screw, #8 x 32,2.25 l, pan-hd, xrec 2808131 8.2-20 7
Screw, misc, captive 2852006 8.2-22 18
8.2-42 18
Screw, misc, d-type, female 40 2121896 8.2-36 10
Screw, misc, d-type, female w/ bolt 2104261 8.2-17 14
PN 4277219B 8.1-27
PARTS LISTS
Figure/
Screw, misc, flag sensor 2802006 8.2-24 7
Screw, misc, quick turn, use w/ 2851840, slotted 2852105 8.2-3 17
8.2-41 17
Screw, misc, SCSI, 0.050 2121898 8.2-36 11
Screw, misc, slotted, used w/ quick open screws 2852241 8.2-27 7
Screw, misc, tamperproof, flow-cell cover 2851566 8.2-19 22
Screw, thumb, nylon, mixing chamber holder 2851830 8.2-21 3
Screw,1.25 l, #4 x 40, pan-hd, xre 2804036 8.2-16 7
Screw,1.57 l, #10 x 56, used on Y- and Z-axis 2851567 8.2-20 11
Sheath flow coil 6856819 8.2-11 4
Software, diskette, Imaging, Utility II for versions 2A, 2B1, 2C1 (required for 6417953
installation of any software revision on DTX computers at Rev. C.5 and lower.)
Note: This disk is required for your service tool box.
Software, diskette, Workstation drivers for C.3 and C.4 hardware profile 6418142
Software, diskette, Workstation video driver for C.5 hardware profile 6418244
Software, flex disk, Image Blaster III 6418265
Software, flex disk, Workstation drivers for C.5 and C.7 hardware 6418281
Software, version 1B, EPROM kit, Analytical Station 6915105
Software, version 1C, EPROM kit, Analytical Station 6915157
Software, version 2A, CD-ROM, Image, English 6417943
Software, version 2A, CD-ROM, Workstation and System Help, English 6417952
Software, version 2A, EPROM kit, AMC 6915259
Software, version 2A, EPROM kit, Diff Processor 6915260
Software, version 2A1, EPROM kit, Analytical Station 6915232
Software, version 2A1, EPROM kit, Diluter Processor 6915231
Software, version 2A2, diskette, Workstation Installation, English 6418088
Software, version 2B1, CD-ROM, Software, English 6418114
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Installation and Online Help, English 6418184
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Installation and Online Help, French 6418187
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Installation and Online Help, German 6418188
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Installation and Online Help, Italian 6418185
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Installation and Online Help, Spanish 6418186
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Workstation Audio/Visual Help, English 6418190
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Workstation Audio/Visual Help, French 6418196
8.1-28 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
8
Figure/
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Workstation Audio/Visual Help, German 6418198
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Workstation Audio/Visual Help, Italian 6418192
Software, version 2C1, CD-ROM, Workstation Audio/Visual Help, Spanish 6418194
Software, version 2C1, EPROM kit, Analytical Station 6915382
Software, version 2D, CD-ROM, Installation and Online Help, Japanese 6418260
Spring, 0.120 o.d. x 0.75 l x 0.016 w 2523144 8.2-5 3
Spring, 0.25 i.d. x 0.030 w 2527688 8.2-19 11
Spring, 0.250 o.d. x 1.38 l x 0.026 w, bath retainers 2523291 8.2-9 29
Spring, 0.250 o.d. x 2.00 l x 0.022 w 2523315 8.2-9 32
Spring, bar-code reader cylinder 1016096 8.2-16 2
Spring, BSV tension 2523294 8.2-23 4
Spring, compression, 0.210 o.d. x 0.38 l 2515153 8.2-23 26
Spring, compression, 1.14 i.d. x 1.35 l x 0.088 w 1022449 8.2-34 12
Spring, Diluter center window hinge pin 2523264 8.2-5 7
Spring, gas, Analyzer front door 6807359 8.2-39 4
Spring, hand detector 2515099 8.2-23 29
Spring, rocker bed return 2515004 8.2-18 10
Spring, stripper plate cylinder 2527823 8.2-17 24
Spring, switch return 2523299 8.2-17 10
Spring, TTM X-, Y-, Z-alignment shafts 2515158 8.2-20 13
Switch, button, Analyzer reset, w/ cable and connector 6028509 6322764
Switch, finger, tube detector (for PN 6805972) 6806144 8.2-17 16
Switch, finger, tube detector (for PN 6807168) 6807003 8.2-17 16
Switch, float, level sense manifold 6859348 8.2-27 18
Switch, Hall effect with LED 6806400 8.2-15 14
8.2-23 15
Switch, magnetic, front door interlock 5116004 6322764
Switch, main power w/ cable and connectors 6859380 6322764
Switch, micro, Manual-mode start 5104077 6322764
Switch, micro, right and left lift up, under left stack, and TTM 5120035 6322764
Switch, micro, right stack loaded 6855620 6322764
Switch, micro, top right and left safety, and stripper plate 5120106 6322764
Switch, micro, under right stack 5120105 6322764
Switch, opto, BSV hand detector w/ black plastic assy 6859611 8.2-23 30
Switch, opto, tube detector, w/ cable and housing, new style 6807168 8.2-17 15
PN 4277219B 8.1-29
PARTS LISTS
Figure/
Switch, opto, tube detector, w/ cable and housing, old style 6805972 8.2-17 15
Switch, opto,1-bit reader, 0.200 gap 4818006 8.2-24 2
Switch, scanner position, w/ cable and connector 6805089 6322764
Switch, tube detector support, cantilevered (for PN 6805972) 1023839 8.2-17 17
Switch, tube detector support, cantilevered (for PN 6807168 1025196 8.2-17 17
8.1-30 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
8
Table 8.1-11 Master Parts List - T

Thermistor, w/ cable, w/o connector and fan 2306093 8.2-3 32
8.2-41 32
Tie wrap mount, 0.51 x 0.33 w, w/ #6 hole 6011019 8.2-33 1
Tie wrap mount, 0.75 x 0.75, adhesive 6027284 8.2-33 2
Tie wrap mount, 1 x 1, w/ #6 hole, adhesive 6011015 8.2-33 3
Tie wrap mount, 1.71 x 8 w, w/ #8 hole (use with screw and locking washer 6011021 8.2-12 33
PN 2852093) 8.2-33 1
Tie wrap, black loop, 0.2” diam 6006002 8.2-33 4
Tie wrap, metal clamp 6006006 8.2-33 7
Tie wrap, multiuse clip, adhesive 6027571 8.2-33 8
Tie wrap, multiuse, loop, 0.5” diam 6027785 8.2-33 12
Tie wrap, multiuse, loop, adhesive, 0.5” diam 6027769 8.2-33 16
Tie wrap, multiuse, loop, adhesive, 1” diam 6027720 8.2-33 17
Tie wrap, multiuse, loop,1” diam 6027718 8.2-33 14
Tie wrap, nylon, 15” l x 0.2” 6011003 8.2-33 20
Tie wrap, nylon, 4” l x 0.1” 6011001 8.2-33 18
Tie wrap, nylon, 7” l x 0.2” 6011002 8.2-33 19
Tie wrap, ribbon cable clamp, 1”, green 6027372 8.2-33 21
Tie wrap, square plastic base for ribbon 6028706 8.2-33 24
Tie wrap, square plastic top for ribbon 6028707 8.2-33 25
Tie wrap, white loop, 0.3” diam, adhesive 6028738 8.2-33 9
Tie wrap, white loop, 0.5” diam 6028733 8.2-33 26
Tool, brush, aperture cleaning 5406011
Tool, COULTER GEN•S Imaging kit 6915110
Tool, forceps, curved, 7 1/2” 5402104
Tool, Mach Removal 5450423
PN 4277219B 8.1-31
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-11 Master Parts List - T (Continued)

Tool, mirror, dental style 5402034
Tool, pin extractor 5450104
Tool, pinch valve removal 5415206
Tool, plastic potentiometer adjustment, metallic shaft, 0.32 tip 5402071
Tool, plastic potentiometer adjustment, nonmetallic shaft (use for C1 adjustment) 5415364
Tool, pliers, needlenose, large 5402030
Tool, pliers, needlenose, small 5402146
Tool, screwdriver, flat, 1/8 x 4” 5402033
Tool, screwdriver, Phillips head, small 5402012
Tool, screwdriver, tamperproof 5415219
Tool, stripper plate 5450555
Tool, tool-box, plastic, blue 5402162
Tool, TTM Light Shield Alignment 5401269
Note: Only use revision A or revision C of this tool. If you have revision B, order a
new one; the laser alignment is not optimized using revision B.
Tool, Volumetric Cylinder, Erythrolyse reagent and StabiLyse reagent 5450245
Tool/Supply, acetone, analytical grade acetone (1 ppm) 1615361
Tool/Supply, applicator stick 2527713
Tool/Supply, Isopropyl alcohol (ChromAR), analytical grade 99.5% purity 1606138
Tool/Supply, latex particles DC/RF, large 6605419
Tool/Supply, lens paper 3814123
Tray, BSV cleaning 1023299 8.2-23 32
TTM, flow cell light shield 1022478 8.2-20 3
TTM, flow cell, coated and tested 6706458 8.2-20 1
TTM, flow-cell mounting plate 1019356 8.2-20 26
TTM, LED, red 4802024 8.2-19 4
TTM, lens block 7000551 8.2-20 10
TTM, LS sensor 6706013 8.2-20 2
TTM, plate, horizontal bolt, CP 1022733 8.2-20 21
TTM, plate, vertical adjustment, CP 1023419 8.2-20 24
TTM, plates, horizontal and vertical slide, S/A 6856153 8.2-20 15
TTM, shaft, X-axis 1017940 8.2-20 17
TTM, shock mount 2523590 8.2-19 13
TTM, triode, RF box 5704031 8.2-19 5
TTM, module with RF Detector Preamp card with vacuum tube 6859512 8.2-14 2
8.1-32 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
8

TTM, module with solid state RF Detector Preamp card, FRU 7000699 8.2-14 2
Note: A TTM with a solid state RF Detector Preamp card can only be installed in an
Analytical Station that has a Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply 2 card
(PN 7000688) and an RF to 24 V supply cable (PN 6029069). Refer to SM 1891.
Tubing, custom, 10 w/ flare, 0.023 i.d. silicone, Retic module 1021633 6321104
Tubing, custom, critical length red marker 1023153 6321104
Tubing, custom, diff preservative 6805120 6321104
Tubing, custom, diff preservative line, Retic module 1018301 6321104
Tubing, custom, feed thru 90 to solenoid 6805152 6321104
Tubing, custom, flow cell input (cut to 8.9 cm [3.5 in.] for port 5 on flow cell) 7000095
Tubing, custom, sample line, 1.25” l 1022016 6321104
Tubing, custom, sample line, 15”, TTM, mixing chamber 1019301 6321104
Tubing, custom, sample line, 18” long [used between FF5 and FF20 on units installed 6859003 6321104
at low altitudes, <2,134 m (7,000 ft) above sea level]
Tubing, custom, sample line, 4.75” l 1022017 6321104
Tubing, custom, sample line, 6”, TTM, mixing chamber 1017954 6321104
Tubing, custom, segment. Automatic-mode 6859015 6321104
Tubing, custom, silicone, 1.75” 6805641 6321104
Tubing, custom, silicone, 3” 6805167 6321104
Tubing, I-beam, 0.062 i.d. x 0.031 w, black stripe 3213197
Tubing, I-beam, 0.079 i.d. x 0.031 w, blue stripe 3213198
Tubing, input line, large, shielded, diluent, flush, and cleaner 6915052 8.2-28 7
8.2-29 8
Tubing, input line, small, shielded, w/ labels 6915053 8.2-28 1
8.2-29 1
Tubing, input line, waste, 12’, shielded w/ cable to sensor 6805366 8.2-28 11
8.2-29 12
Tubing, input line, waste, 8’, shielded w/o cable to sensor 6859790 8.2-28 10
8.2-29 11
Tubing, nylon, 0.250 o.d. x 0.033 w, black 3230089
Tubing, pickup, 0.5 - 1.9 L universal (Use for CBC lytic reagent, 500 mL and 1 L; 6706297 8.2-28 2
stain; and PAK PRESERVE [StabiLyse]) 8.2-29 2
Tubing, pickup, 10 - 20 L universal (Use for diluent; cleaning agent, 10 L; and flush 6706295 8.2-28 8
solution) 8.2-29 9
Tubing, pickup, 20 L, w/ float sensor 5120250 8.2-29 13
Tubing, pickup, 5 L universal (Use for CBC lytic reagent, 5 L; PAK LYSE 6706296 8.2-28 3
[Erythrolyse]; retic clearing solution; and cleaning agent, 5 L) 8.2-29 3
PN 4277219B 8.1-33
PARTS LISTS

Tubing, pickup, waste 6805636 8.2-28 9
8.2-29 10
Tubing, polyallomer, 1/4 o.d., white 3202048
Tubing, polyallomer, 1/8 o.d., white 3202077
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.023 i.d. x 0.083 o.d., 0.030 w, clear 3213153
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, black solid 3202277
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, black stripe 3202203
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, blue stripe 3202209
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, blue/black, 3202218
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, brown stripe 3202204
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, clear [used between FF5 and 3202036
FF20 on units installed at high altitudes, >2,134 m (7,000 ft) above sea level]
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, gray stripe 3202211
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, gray/black 3202244
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, green and black 3202217
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, green stripe 3202208
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, orange stripe 3202206
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, red stripe 3202205
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, violet and black 3202243
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, violet stripe 3202210
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, white stripe 3202212
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, yellow and black 3202216
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., 0.031 w, yellow stripe 3202207
Tubing, polyurethane, 0.145 i.d. x 0.251 o.d., 0.058 w, clear 3202039 8.2-28 6
Tubing, restrictor with molded ends 6806417
Tubing, riser, CP (for reagent reservoir) 1024715 8.2-27 30
Tubing, silicone, 0.023 i.d. x 0.103 o.d., 0.040 w, red stripe 3213073
Tubing, silicone, 0.030 i.d., 0.047 w (used on NC port of VL89 to FT9) 3230080
Tubing, silicone, 0.040 i.d. x 0.102 o.d., 0.031 w, green stripe 3203026
8.1-34 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
8

Tubing, silicone, 0.062 i.d. x 0.124 o.d., 0.031 w, black stripe 3203015
Tubing, silicone, 0.062 i.d. x 0.156 o.d., 0.047 w, yellow stripe 3213163
Tubing, silicone, 0.062 i.d. x 0.186 o.d., 0.062 w, not for pinch valves 3213080
Tubing, silicone, 0.079 i.d. x 0.157 o.d., 0.039 w, yellow stripe 3213176
Tubing, sleeve 6806498 8.2-31 25
Tubing, thermoplastic, 0.062 i.d. x 0.156 o.d., 0.047 w 3213212
PN 4277219B 8.1-35
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-12 Master Parts List - U through V

Valve, 4-way, pneumatic 6214081 8.2-15 18
Valve, Angar™, 3-way, # 458002 6232579 8.2-32 10
Valve, Angar™, 3-way, # 458005 6232578 8.2-32 11
Valve, check, 0.062 i.d. tubing 6214108 8.2-30 3
Valve, check, 0.125 i.d. to 0.082 i.d. tubing 6232605 8.2-30 2
Valve, check, 0.125 i.d. tubing 6214107 8.2-30 1
Valve, check, 0.125 i.d. tubing, w/ black stripe 6232080 8.2-30 4
Valve, pinch, 1-tube, black 6857096 8.2-32 12
Valve, pinch, 3-tube, white 6856319 8.2-32 14
Valve, pinch, deactivator clip, red, holds pinch valve open 1008315 8.2-32 9
Valve, pinch, mount 1017501 8.2-32 2
Valve, pinch, reduced stroke, white (used for VL58A, VL58B, VL59, VL62A, VL62B, 6807225 8.2-32 16
VL64, VL94A, VL94B, VL95A, and VL95B)
Valve, pinch, Retic waste assembly 6706898 8.2-22 23
Valve, pinch, sleeve, blue, CP 1025225 8.2-32 15
Valve, pinch, white, standard 6855763 8.2-32 1
Valve, pressure bleed off, w/ fittings 6805382 8.2-34 16
Note: Revision D implements changes to prevent the valve from sticking in the 8.2-35 14
open position.
Valve, shear, 2.5 µL (LH 750 System) 6707179 8.2-42 11
7000693-FRU
Valve, shear, 31 µL (LH 750 System) 6707180 8.2-42 14
7000694-FRU
Valve, solenoid, 2-way, w/ connector and mount 6859244 8.2-10 30
Valve, solenoid, 2-way, w/ connector and O-rings 6859521 8.2-25 1
Valve, solenoid, 2-way, w/ O-rings 6232342 8.2-10 12
Valve, solenoid, 2-way, w/ seal, for level sense manifold 6232757 8.2-27 9
Valve, solenoid, 3-way, pneumatic, 0 - 25 psi, 24 Vdc, NC, w/ 24” leads 6233023
Valve, solenoid, 3-way, pneumatic, 50 psi, 24 Vdc 6232985 8.2-27 17
Valve, solenoid, 3-way, w/ connector and mount 6859245 8.2-7 3
Valve, solenoid, 3-way, w/ screws and O-ring 6232807 8.2-10 33
Valve, solenoid, 4-way, nc, w/o fittings 6232635 8.2-22 9
8.2-42 28
Valve, solenoid, 5-way 6232376 8.2-18 5
8.1-36 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
8
.
Table 8.1-13 Master Parts List - W through Z

Washer plate, CP (for Cap Piercer module) 1024318
Washer, cylinder, 0.500 i.d. x 0.562 o.d. x 0.062 thk 6216012 8.2-15 19
Washer, flat, #2, 2.094 i.d. x 0.259 o.d. x 0.020 thk 2827095 8.2-20 4
8.2-12 12
8.2-16 6
8.2-19 14
8.2-20 5
8.2-25 12
8.2-41 18
8.2-34 26
Washer, flat, #12, 0.250 i.d. x 0.50 o.d. x 0.031 thk, nylon 2826035 8.2-23 37
8.2-41 21
Washer, flat, #4, 0.125 i.d. x 0.250o.d. x 0.031 thk 2827045 8.2-16 13
PN 4277219B 8.1-37
PARTS LISTS
Table 8.1-13 Master Parts List - W through Z (Continued)

8.2-17 35
Washer, flat, #37, 0.406 i.d. x 1.250 o.d. x 0.100 thk 2827167
Washer, I-tooth, #47, 0.47 i.d. x 0.60 o.d. x 0 020 thk 2826030 8.2-15 22
8.2-32 3
Washer, lock, spring, 0.164 i.d. x 0.343 o.d. x 0.013 thk 2852270 8.2-20 20
Washer, spacer, #6, 1.25 l, 0.25 round 2842085 8.2-15 4
Washer, split lock #2 2826001 8.2-24 6
8.1-38 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
8.2 ILLUSTRATED PARTS
On the illustrations in this section, a number is used to identify the part in the associated
parts list, a letter to indicate detailed illustrations are available for the component or assembly.
Figure 8.2-1 Main Analytical Station Components Illustrated Figure Reference

A A Card cage and rear panel
and cover, Figure 8.2-3
B
TM G E N S
B Front cover, Figure 8.2-2

* SYSTEM RUN *
05/03/95 0000
COULTER CORPORATION
STATUS : READY
ALERT:
6600 PSI
P S I 3300 PSI
P S I 55 PSI
P S I AAC
C LINE
L IN E AAC
C
C Door, Figure 8.2-6

PPNEU
N E U VACUUM
I 6600 330.0
0 . 0 44.9
. 9 2288 1115
15
MAIN
BP CBC DIFF RETICS
TTEMP
E M P DDCC
D Front panel, Figure 8.2-7

C Rear panel, Figure 8.2-8
E Front covers,
Figure 8.2-4
H
D Under front cover,
piercing station, and
rocker bed, Figure 8.2-14
F Front panel, Figure 8.2-9
Rear panel, Figure 8.2-10
E F G G Front panel,
Figure 8.2-11
Rear panel, Figure 8.2-12
H Door, Figure 8.2-13
I Overview, Figure 8.2-34
Covers and panels,
J K Figure 8.2-37
J Door, Figure 8.2-26
K Door, Figure 8.2-27
L Door, Figure 8.2-27
L
Inputs, Figure 8.2-28
6 4 9 8 2 3 4 B
Table 8.2-1 Illustrations Not Referenced from Figure 8.1
Title Number
Diluter Cassette Guide Panels 8.2-5
Check Valves and Chokes 8.2-30
Fittings and Miscellaneous Hardware 8.2-31
Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware 8.2-33
Valves, Common 8.2-32
LH 750 System Diluter and Analyzer Covers and Doors 8.2-38
LH 750 System Analyzer Card Cage, Rear Door, and Hardware 8.2-41
Random Access Module 8.2-42
PN 4277219B 8.2-1
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-2 Analyzer, Front Door (See Table 8.2-2)
5
3
1
13 8
9
12 10
12
11
7253072A
8.2-2 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-2 Analyzer, Front Cover (See Figure 8.2-2)
Item Part Number Description

1 6859145 Cover, CRT, cover top, black strip
2 2852066 Nut, #4, hex custom
3 1022205 Cover, display, CRT window, clear w/ EMI coating
4 6859146 Cover, CRT, cover bottom, black strip
5 6858990 Door, Analyzer front, cover with graphics only (GEN•S System)
6 2808051 Screw, #8 x 32, 0.62 l, fl-hd, xrec
7 2523647 Hardware, hinge, front cover, Analyzer
8 2810138 Screw, #10 x 32, 0.25 l, shoulder-hd
9 2827071 Washer, flat, #12, 0.250 i.d. x 0.50 o.d. x 0.031 thk, nylon
10 6859036 Hardware, bracket, cover support, Analyzer
11 1022315 Hardware, misc, holdup arm guide, Analyzer
12 2852022 Screw, #4 x 40, 0.38 l, pan-hd, xrec, w/ cone washer
13 2851859 Hardware, latch, snap-in w/ catch
PN 4277219B 8.2-3
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-3 Analyzer, Card Cage and Rear Door and Hardware (See Table 8.2-3)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 , 1 1 1 2 1 3
1 4
1 5
F R O N T
1 6 1 7
2 2
1 9 2 1
1 8
2 0
3 1 , 3 2
3 0
2 9
2 7 2 4 , 2 5 , 2 6
2 8 2 3
R E A R
6 4 9 8 2 2 8 B
8.2-4 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-3 Analyzer, Card Cage and Rear Panel and Cover (See Figure 8.2-3)

1 6706029 PCB, Red/White Preamp 2
2 6706923 PCB, Plt Processor 2
3 6705876 PCB, Red/White Processor
4 6705977 PCB, API
5 6705984 PCB, Analyzer Power Supply 1
6 6859503 Display, CRT, Scope Module 2
8 6706028 PCB, AMC, without software EPROM
9 6706070 PCB, Comm Intfc
10 6706631 PCB, Diluter Processor, without software EPROM (for use on GEN•S System only)
11 6707233 PCB, RS485 Interface
12 6706314 PCB, Diff Processor 4, without software EPROM
13 6706071 PCB, Analog 5
14 6859067 Door, Analyzer, right and left
16 1022868 Filter, air, used on rear cover
17 2852105 Screw, misc, quick turn, use w/ 2851840, slotted
18 2851840 Washer, flat, #10, 0.210 i.d. x 0.51 o.d. x 0.051 thk
19 6859069 Door, Anlayzer, rear
23 6859177 PCB, Backplane, Analog
24 1022451 Hardware, misc, bus bar
25 2852023 Screw, #6 x 32, 0.38 l, pan-hd, xrec
26 6805217 Cover, bus bar
27 6859178 PCB, Backplane, Interconnect
28 2852106 Nut, clip on, Analyzer rear cover
29 6859176 PCB, Backplane, CRT
30 6859175 PCB, Backplane, Digital
31 2603068 Fan,12 Vdc, 4.68 square,1.5 thk, w/ thermistor and connector
32 2306093 Thermistor, w/ cable, w/o connector and fan
PN 4277219B 8.2-5
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-4 GEN•S System Diluter, Front Doors and Covers (See Table 8.2-4)
3
4
1 7
6
1 6
7 , 8 , 9
1 0
1 5 1 2
1 3
1 1
1 1
1 4
6 4 9 8 2 3 5 B
8.2-6 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-4 Diluter, Front Covers (See Figure 8.2-4)

1 6854517 Cover, window, smoked, w/ clips, left and right panels (GEN•S System)
2 6805395 Cover, window, smoked, door, front, center (GEN•S System)
3 1022544 Cover, keyboard panel, splash
4 2852076 Nut, hex, #6, w/ washer attached
5 1020955 Component, misc, grounding contact
7 6805302 Display, Diluter LCD w/ Keyboard and Display Interface card and keypad
8 2016587 Keypad, membrane, front panel
9 6805232 Display, LCD, Diluter front panel
12 1022442 Hardware, misc, front cover mount, Diluter
14 1022182 Hardware, pin, front cover mount
15 1411145 Hardware, slide rack used for front cover
16 6858989 Door, Diluter, lower front, w/o Keyboard and Display Interface card (GEN•S System)
17 1025209 Cover, splash shield, retic pump, CP
6807191 Hardware, splash shield support
PN 4277219B 8.2-7
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-5 Diluter, Cassette Guide Panels (See Table 8.2-5)
4 5 7 9
3
3
6
1 1
2 10
19
3 20 3
21
22
1 1
11 12 13 14
23 17 23 17
18 18 18 18
15 15
24 16
6498037A
8.2-8 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-5 Diluter, Cassette Guide Panels (See Figure 8.2-5)

1 2804088 Screw, #4 x 40, 0.3 l, FL82-hd, xrec
2 6807022 Flipper, left, outer
3 2523144 Spring, 0.120 o.d. x 0.75 l x 0.016 w
4 6807019 Flipper, left, inner
5 6854305 Component, misc, pin, center Diluter window
6 1017748 Component, misc, pin, center Diluter window
7 2523264 Spring, Diluter center window hinge pin
8 1017577 Component, misc, pin mount, center Diluter window
9 6806638 Flipper, right, inner
10 6807020 Flipper, right, outer
11 6859011 Hardware, cassette guide, metal strip
16 6805156 Hardware, bracket, front cover latch, right
17 1024630 Hardware, cassette guide, right
19 2804119 Screw, #4 x 40, 0.3 l, pan-hd, xrec, black
21 1016023 Hardware, latch, magnetic catch, Diluter front cover
22 2840073 Hardware, latch, magnet, Diluter front cover
23 1024629 Hardware, cassette guide, left
24 6805177 Hardware, bracket, front cover latch, left
PN 4277219B 8.2-9
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-6 Diluter, Left Door and Compartment (See Table 8.2-6)
L E F T D O O R
1 2
2 8 5 2 0 2 3 (4 )
3
5
4
3
L E F T C O M P A R T M E N T 9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 2
6 4 9 8 2 1 2 B
8.2-10 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-6 Diluter, Left Door and Compartment (See Figure 8.2-6)

1 6858997 Door, Diluter, left side
2 1022932 Hardware, hinge, Diluter doors, left and right
4 2852109 Hardware, latch, snap-in w/ catch, Diluter left and right doors
7 6706003 PCB, Diluter 2
6707158 PCB, Diluter 2 REL (GEN•S Systems with SW 4.0 and higher only)
8 6705993 PCB, Diluter Solenoid Optics PS (for use with an RF Detector Preamp card with a vacuum tube
only)
7000688 PCB, Diluter Solenoid Optics PS 2 (required for a solid state RF Detector Preamp card but can also
be used with an RF Detector Preamp card with a vacuum tube)
9 6706036 PCB, Diluter Cable Adapter
10 2822050 Nut, #2, 56 UNC
11 6706157 PCB, Diluter 3 (only for GEN•S Systems without a SlideMaker)
6706591 PCB, Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface (for GEN•S Systems with or without a SlideMaker)
6707231 PCB, Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface (required for LH 750 Systems with or without a SlideMaker,
but also works on GEN•S Systems.)
12 6707084 PCB, GEN•S Driver 3, daughter card for Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface card (replaces drivers on
U2, U17, and U21)
U22 and U28)
U1, U3, U4, U5, U11, and U23)
PN 4277219B 8.2-11
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-7 Diluter, Left Front Panel (See Table 8.2-7)
21 22 2
13 17
18
5 4
20
19 5
5
5 15
14
5, 6
16 13
5
7
11
12
5 13 10 9 6498098A
8.2-12 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-7 Diluter, Left Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-7)

1 2840053 Hardware, latch, magnetic catch, Diluter left and right windows
2 6859057 Hardware, bracket, magnetic catch
3 6859245 Valve, solenoid, 3-way, w/ connector and mount
4 6858331 Chamber, backwash tank
5 6859221 Fitting, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 10-32 thd
6 6856745 Fitting, plug, 10-32, w/ O-ring, 1004645 and 2523062
7 1015772 Hardware, misc, bar, side panel cover lower mount
8 6859096 Chamber, vacuum overflow tank
9 6805143 Module, Peltier Thermoelectric Cooler
10 6232036 Fitting, 0.062 i.d.tubing to 10-32 thd, ss
11 6858756 Pump, retic clearing solution, 2 mL
12 2838003 Hardware, bracket, pump holder
14 6858757 Pump, diff lytic reagent (Erythrolyse), low volume 350 µL, high volume 540 µL
15 2851244 Hardware, bracket, mount, 1-3/8 diam
16 6852909 Fitting, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 10-32 thd, w/ O-ring
18 2116001 Hardware, bracket, RBC and WBC diluent dispensers
19 6858979 Pump, diluent dispenser, WBC, 6 mL (use on Analytical Stations that use the diluent reservoir)
20 6859192 Pump, diluent dispenser, RBC, 10 mL (use on Analytical Stations that use the diluent reservoir)
21 6905043 Pump, diluent dispenser, RBC, 10 mL (use on Analytical Stations that bypass the diluent reservoir)
22 6912099 Pump, diluent dispenser, WBC, 6 mL (use on Analytical Stations that bypass the diluent reservoir)
PN 4277219B 8.2-13
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-8 Diluter, Rear of Left Front Panel (See Table 8.2-8)
1 2
10
8 9
7
6
5
11
11
14
12
13
6498020A
8.2-14 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-8 Diluter, Rear of Left Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-8)

1 2523062 O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
3 6232362 Fitting, tubing to 10-32 thd
4 6232807 Valve, solenoid, 3-way, w/ screws and O-ring
6 2827045 Washer, flat, #4, 0.125 i.d. x 0.250o.d. x 0.031 thk
8 6232739 Manifold, solenoid valve, 10-valve, w/ fittings
9 6232191 Fitting, elbow, 0.187 i.d. tubing to 1/8 npt
10 6859311 Chamber, vacuum trap w/ fittings
11 6859138 Chamber, clear plastic, 2 top ports
12 6805143 Module, Peltier Thermoelectric Cooler
PN 4277219B 8.2-15
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-9 Diluter, Center Front Panel (See Table 8.2-9)
41 1 3 4 9 3 4
2 2
5 5
6 6
7 7
2 2
37
38
40
39
30
31
30
36
32
34 33
30 35
21 22 4
15 10
23
24 13
16
17 3
11
29
14 12
18
27, 28
26 25 1" 20
19
6498036A
8.2-16 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-9 Diluter, Center Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-9)

1 7000380 Chamber, clear plastic,11 top ports (use on Analytical Stations that use the diluent reservoir)
6 2842007 Washer, flat,#8, 0.187 i.d. x 0.438 o.d. x 0.063 thk
7 2116002 Hardware, bracket, chamber
8 2523477 Hardware, cap, black plastic vinyl isolator (used on VC1)
10 6859621 Lamp, Hgb w/ cable
11 6701652 Preamp, Hgb
12 6103025 Hgb, cuvette, glassware only
13 8010009 Consumable, tape, foam
14 6859795 Module, Hgb, w/ preamp, cuvette and lamp
18 1005697 Fitting, feed-thru, metal, 0.062 i.d. tubing, w/ 10-32 thd
20 2822016 Nut, hex, #10
21 1004595 Fitting, union, 0.062 i.d x 10-32 thd,polypropylene (for aperture top)
22 2512088 O-ring, 0.145 i.d. x 0.281 o.d. x 0.062w (aperture module fitting seal)
23 6859304 Aperture module 2
24 2512071 O-ring, 0.489 i.d. x 0.070 w, aperture seal, large
25 6855601 Chamber, bath, RBC and WBC
26 2512120 O-ring, aperture seal, small
27 6701588 Aperture block set, WBC
28 6701589 Aperture block set, RBC
29 2523291 Spring, 0.250 o.d. x 1.38 l x 0.026 w, bath retainers
30 2822003 Nut, hex,#4
31 6859608 Hardware, bracket, aperture door thumbscrew
32 2523315 Spring, 0.250 o.d. x 2.00 l x 0.022 w
34 5704030 Hardware, gasket, EMI
35 6859076 Door, Diluter, center panel, lower metal door
37 1023429 Hardware, hinge, aperture door
38 6805525 Door, Diluter, aperture EMI shield
41 6852456 Chamber, clear plastic, 5 top ports, small (use on Analytical Stations that bypass the diluent
reservoir)
PN 4277219B 8.2-17
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-10 Diluter, Rear of Center Front Panel (See Table 8.2-10)
1 2 10
8 11
6
9 12
3
15
1 14
6 1 13
7
38 39
40
16
18 17
22
36 21 37
21
19
20
35
Configuration on Analytical Stations
that bypass the diluent reservoir.
23
34 17
33 29 26
31
27
25
15 30
24
14
32 28
6 Sweep-flow reservoir
with level sensor 6498088B
7
8.2-18 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-10 Diluter, Rear of Center Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-10)

2 1007924 Manifold, 6 ports
3 6232693 Choke, fitting, blue, 0.012 orifice
4 6232694 Choke, fitting, green, 0.016 orifice
5 6232697 Choke, fitting, brown, 0.006 orifice
6 2523062 O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
8 6214112 Manifold, solenoid valve, 1-valve, 3-way, w/ fittings
9 6216002 Fitting, elbow,10-32 thd, male to female
10 1004645 Fitting, plug, 10-32 thd
11 1019128 Manifold, bath bubbler
12 6232342 Valve, solenoid, 2-way, w/ O-rings
19 6805129 Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube, base (QD1)
20 6859041 Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube, plate w/ bolt (QD4)
21 6856996 Manifold, solenoid valve, 1-valve, 4-way
23 6859132 Hardware, bracket, QD6
24 6859038 Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube, plate w/ bolts (QD2, QD5, QD6)
25 6859039 Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube, base (QD2, QD5, QD6)
26 6856877 Chamber, sweep-flow tank
27 6858331 Chamber, backwash tank (used as sweep-flow reservoir, VC39)
29 6805861 Chamber, clear plastic, 5 top ports w/ white ball inside
35 6806758 Manifold, diluent/cleaning agent
36 6805632 Module, diluent/cleaning agent assembly
37 6806767 Chamber, diluent/cleaning agent reservoir
38 2851407 Hardware, standoff, snap-in
39 6854923 PCB, Ground Interconnect
40 2822008 Nut, hex, #6
PN 4277219B 8.2-19
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-11 Diluter, Right Front Panel (See Table 8.2-11)
17 3
19
2
11
1
15 18
4
16
11
12
15
14
5, 6
8
11
12
9
13
6498052A
10
8.2-20 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-11 Diluter, Right Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-11)

2 2840053 Hardware, latch, magnetic catch, Diluter left and right windows
3 6859057 Hardware, bracket, magnetic catch
4 6856819 Sheath flow coil
5 6852910 Fitting, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 10-32 thd, ss, w/ O-ring
7 6805016 Chamber, sheath tank
8 1015772 Hardware, misc, bar, side panel cover lower mount
9 1025133 Cover, splash shield, Solenoid Inteconnect module, CP
10 6807073 Module, Solenoid Interconnect
14 6805481 Pump, 2 mL diaphragm pump
16 6859144 Pump, CBC lytic reagent, 1.06 mL
19 6858762 Pump, diff preservative (StabiLyse), low volume 131 µL, high volume 231 µL
PN 4277219B 8.2-21
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-12 Diluter, Rear of Right Front Panel (See Table 8.2-12)
8
1, 2 6 10
7
3
9
4
5
25230622288204600452((22))
11
34 33 12
13
32
1 14, 15
16
18
17
30
31
24 14
25 22
23 21
29 26 20 19
27
28 6498050A
8.2-22 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-12 Diluter, Rear of Right Front Panel (See Figure 8.2-12)

1 2406016 Hardware, knob, vacuum regulator
2 2807038 Screw, #6 x 32, 0.25 l, setscrew, hex
4 6859112 Hardware, bracket, vacuum regulator
5 6232628 Regulator, vacuum, w/ attaching nut
7 6214112 Manifold, solenoid valve, 1-valve, 3-way, w/ fittings
14 2523062 O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
20 6011003 Tie wrap, nylon, 15” l x 0.2”
23 6859038 Fitting, quick disconnect,10-tube, plate w/ bolts (QD2, QD5)
24 6232038 Fitting, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 10-32 thd, brass
25 6206001 Fitting, union,10-32 thd to 1-8 npt
26 6216128 Fitting, elbow, 0.187 i.d. tubing to 1/8 npt
27 6232313 Regulator, sheath, diff sample and retic
28 2523691 Hardware, knob, black, used on regulators
29 6232339 Fitting, plug, 1/8 npt, internal hex
31 6852456 Chamber, clear plastic, 5 top ports, small
33 6011021 Tie wrap mount, 1.71 x 8 w, w/ #8 hole (use with screw and locking washer PN 2852093)
34 2852093 Screw, #6 x 32, 0.38 l, w/ locking washer (use with PN 6011021)
PN 4277219B 8.2-23
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-13 Diluter, Right Door and Compartment (See Table 8.2-13)
RIGHT DOOR
2 3
9 8
RIGHT COMPARTMENT
10
11
14 12
13
7253074A
8.2-24 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-13 Diluter, Right Door and Compartment (See Figure 8.2-13)

2 1022932 Hardware, hinge, Diluter doors, left and right
3 6858998 Door, Diluter, right side
4 6705994 PCB, Diff Power Supply
5 6706002 PCB, Diluter 1 (GEN•S System)
6707177 PCB, Diluter 1 (LH 750 System)
8 2852109 Hardware, latch, snap-in w/ catch, Diluter left and right doors
10 6706203 PCB, RS/Opto Interface
11 2852076 Nut, hex, #6, w/ washer attached
12 6859703 PCB, PVT, w/ bracket
13 6706196 PCB, Sensor Distribution
14 6706373 PCB, Laser PS, w/ cover
PN 4277219B 8.2-25
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-14 Diluter, Piercing Station, Rocker Bed, and Components under Front Figure Reference
Cover (See Table 8.2-14)
A Piercing station,
Figure 8.2-15
B Rocker bed, Figure 8.2-17
1 C Rocker bed mounting
A channel, Figure 8.2-18
B
D Aspiration Pump module
C and manifolds MF4 and
MF13, Figure 8.2-25
E Probe-Wipe module,
Figure 8.2-24
F BSV module, Figure 8.2-23
G Retics module,
Figure 8.2-22
H Diff module, Figure 8.2-21
I Triple Transducer module,
Figure 8.2-19
D E F G H I
7253063E 5 4 3 2
8.2-26 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-14 Diluter, Piercing Station, Rocker Bed, and Components under Front Cover
(See Figure 8.2-14)

1 6805184 Module, Rocker Bed
2 6859512 Module, Triple Transducer (TTM) with RF Detector Preamp card with vacuum tube
7000699 Module, Triple Transducer (TTM) with solid state RF Detector Preamp card, FRU
Note: A TTM with a solid state RF Detector Preamp card can only be installed in an Analytical
Station that has a Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply 2 card (PN 7000688) and an RF to 24 V
cable (PN 6029069). Refer to SM 1891.
3 6859511 Module, Diff Mixing Chamber, w/ drive
4 6805200 Module, Retic
5 6859517 Module, BSV
PN 4277219B 8.2-27
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-15 Diluter, Piercing Station Assembly (See Table 8.2-15) Figure Reference
A Tube ram cylinder and
bar-code scanners and
3
2 cylinder, Figure 8.2-16
1
4
A
5 6
10
25 7
24
12
11
23
17
8 16
15
9
22 13
21
18
19
20 14
6498226B
8.2-28 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-15 Diluter, Piercing Station Assembly (See Figure 8.2-15)

2 6006006 Tie wrap, metal clamp
3 6006014 Tie wrap, black loop, 0.6” diam
4 2842085 Washer, spacer, #6, 1.25 l, 0.25 round
5 2852036 Hardware, clip, bed rock cylinder
7 2851391 Hardware, bracket, rocker bed air cylinder mount
9 2523062 O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
10 6857929 Cylinder, air, bed rock
11 6807145 Needle, enclosed needle cap piercer
12 6805670 Module, Enclosed Needle Cap Piercer
14 6232919 Cylinder, air, bellows contract (for enclosed needle cap piercer)
6806400 Switch, Hall effect with LED (use with PN 6232919)
15 1023072 Hardware, bushing, piercing station
18 6214081 Valve, 4-way, pneumatic
20 6232036 Fitting, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 10-32 thd, ss
21 6232447 Actuator, 3-tubing pinch valve
23 6856488 Regulator, 25 psi, bar-code scanner cylinder
24 6232189 Gauge, pressure, 0 to 60 psi
25 2851306 Screw, #10 x 32, 2.25 l, hsc-hd, hex, black
PN 4277219B 8.2-29
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-16 Diluter, Tube Ram Cylinder and Bar-Code Scanners and Cylinder See Table 8.2-16)
3
1
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 4 4
1 3 5
6 6
1 2
7
1 1
8
9
1 0
1 8
1 9
1 9
2 0
2 3
2 1
2 2
6 4 9 8 2 2 9 B
8.2-30 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-16 Diluter, Bar-Code Scanner and Tube Ram Cylinder (See Figure 8.2-16)

2 1016096 Spring, bar-code reader cylinder
3 6805541 Cylinder, air, bar-code reader
4 6855431 Cassette transport, ram guide block
8 2806150 Screw, #6 x 32, 0.75 l, hex-hd, ehex
9 1023253 Cassette transport, ram tip
10 1016063 Component, misc, rod pivot
11 2837037 Hardware, clip, shaft retaining, tube ram
12 2804067 Screw, #4 x 40, 0.50 l, hsc-hd, hex
14 6232218 Cylinder, air, tube ram
16 2523062 O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
17 6206001 Fitting, union,10-32 thd to 1-8 npt
18 6805084 Module, Piercing Station
19 2509007 Hardware, magnet, scanner position actuator
20 2804080 Screw, #4 x 40, 0.19 l, µf-hd, xrec
21 1015679 Cover, bar-code scanner
22 6858081 Bar-code, scanner, Automatic mode (LED style bar-code reader)
Note: Scanners manufactured with a new adhesive that prevents the LEDs from moving out of
alignment are labeled revision D.
23 6807264 Bar-code, scanner, Automatic mode (laser style bar-code reader)
PN 4277219B 8.2-31
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-17 Diluter, Rocker Bed (See Table 8.2-17)

1 3
2
6
7
4
5
8 11
9
12
10
36
34 35
33
32
31
13 14
30
18
25
26
24
29 19
15
23 20
28
17 7253414E
27 21 16
22
8.2-32 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-17 Diluter, Rocker Bed (See Figure 8.2-17)

1 6702887 Module, Rocker Bed Belt Assy
2 6232127 Cylinder, air, cassette belt advance
3 2830013 Hardware, grommet, rubber, 0.250 i.d. x 0.0562 o.d.
4 6216345 O-ring, 10-32 thd fitting
6 1015614 Cassette transport, cassette advance wheel
8 2804101 Screw, #4 x 40, 0.12 l, µf 82-hd, xrec
9 6855039 Cassette transport, lever, w/ shaft, screw and bearings
10 2523299 Spring, switch return
11 2802006 Screw, misc, flag sensor
12 6855390 Hardware, bracket, rocker bed spring, w/ sensor flag
13 2822008 Nut, hex, #6
14 2104261 Screw, misc, d-type, female w/ bolt
15 6805972 Switch, opto, tube detector, w/ cable and housing, old style
6807168 Switch, opto, tube detector, w/ cable and housing, new style
16 6806144 Switch, finger, tube detector (for PN 6805972)
6807003 Switch, finger, tube detector (for PN 6807168)
17 1023839 Switch, tube detector support, cantilevered (for PN 6805972)
1025196 Switch, tube detector support, cantilevered (for PN 6807168)
18 6805192 Cassette transport, stripper plate, w/ button
19 2822040 Nut, hex, #25
20 2523062 O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
22 6232859 Cylinder, air, stripper plate
23 1024475 Hardware, bracket, stripper plate
24 2527823 Spring, stripper plate cylinder
25 1024330 Cassette transport, stripper plate button
27 6855015 Hardware, bracket, bed locking
28 1016565 Hardware, bracket, fastener, socket ball
30 6806521 Cassette transport, rocker bed front rail assembly
32 1015522 Hardware, bracket, bed rock air cylinder ball
33 1015617 Hardware, bracket, air cylinder ball mount
36 2822016 Nut, hex, #10
PN 4277219B 8.2-33
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-18 Diluter, Rocker Bed Mounting Channel (See Table 8.2-18)
1 3
19
4
20
5
21 23
22
18 9 6
17
7
8
17
16
10
11
12
13
14
6
15
7
8 7253086A
8.2-34 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-18 Diluter, Rocker Bed Mounting Channel (See Figure 8.2-18)

1 6232133 Cylinder, air, cassette lifts
2 6855014 Cover, cassette lifts w/ 8010017 adhesive tape
5 6232376 Valve, solenoid, 5-way
7 2851687 O-ring, clear plastic flat
8 6232379 Fitting, 0.082 tubing to 0.5 thd
9 6857465 Hardware, bracket, solenoid valve, right
10 2515004 Spring, rocker bed return
11 6805543 Cassette transport, rocker bed locking assy
14 6232154 Choke, plastic, clear, 0.062 i.d. tubing, 0.016 orifice
15 6857466 Hardware, bracket, solenoid valve, left
16 1016567 Hardware, stud, ball
18 1007924 Manifold, 6 ports
20 2523062 O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
22 1019135 Hardware, stud, ball
23 1019136 Hardware, stud, ball, sleeve
PN 4277219B 8.2-35
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-19 Diluter, Triple Transducer Module (See Table 8.2-19) Figure Reference
4 A Translation plates and
23
hardware,
Figure 8.2-20
3
2
7
22 9
21
22
11
10
20
12
19
18 13
14
15
17
6498132B 16
8.2-36 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-19 Diluter, Triple Transducer Module (See Figure 8.2-19)

1 6805630 Cover, flow cell and lens block
2 1022206 Cover, lens block and laser
3 4802024 TTM, LED, red
4 6859777 Preamp, RF Detector Preamp 6
5 5704031 TTM, triode, RF box
6 2830013 Hardware, grommet, rubber, 0.250 i.d. x 0.0562 o.d.
8 6805206 Laser
10 1023221 Hardware, bracket, ribbon cable holder
11 2527688 Spring, 0.25 i.d. x 0.030 w
12 2837045 Hardware, clip, retaining
13 2523590 TTM, shock mount
18 6805539 Preamp, LS Preamp 7
19 6859227 Hardware, plate, TTM laser area
20 6858982 Hardware, plate, TTM area
21 2429637 Label, laser warning
22 2851566 Screw, misc, tamperproof, flow-cell cover
23 7000700 Preamp, RF Detector, solid state
Note: A solid state RF Detector Preamp card can only be installed in an Analytical Station that has
a Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply 2 card (PN 7000688) and an RF to 24 V supply cable
(PN 6029069). Refer to SM 1891.
PN 4277219B 8.2-37
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-20 Diluter, Triple Transducer Module Translation Plates and Hardware (See Table 8.2-20)
23
1
12
2
26 3
25
4
5
6
13 7
8
24
20 10
22 23
9
14
20 11
21
12
13
14
13
18
BOTTOM VIEW
20
12 15
19
17
16
REAR VIEW
6498038A
8.2-38 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-20 Diluter, Triple Transducer Module Translation Plates and Hardware (See Figure 8.2-20)

1 6706458 TTM, flow cell, coated and tested
2 6706013 TTM, LS sensor
3 1022478 TTM, flow cell light shield
6 2802019 Screw, #2 x 56, 0.3 l, pan-head, xrec
10 7000551 TTM, lens block
11 2851567 Screw, #10 x 56, 1.57 l, used on Y- and Z-axis
13 2515158 Spring, TTM X-, Y-, Z-alignment shafts
14 2851569 Nut, square, #10, used on Y- and Z-axis
15 6856153 TTM, plates, horizontal and vertical slide, S/A
17 1017940 TTM, shaft, X-axis
18 2851568 Nut, hex, #10, used on X-axis
19 2852276 Screw, #8 x 32, 0.62 l, hex-hd, ehex
20 2852270 Washer, lock, spring, 0.164 i.d. x 0.343 o.d. x 0.013 thk
21 1022733 TTM, plate, horizontal bolt, CP
22 2851614 Screw, #8 x 32, 0.62 l, TTM lockdown
24 1023419 TTM, plate, vertical adjustment, CP
26 1019356 TTM, flow-cell mounting plate
PN 4277219B 8.2-39
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-21 Diluter, Diff Module (See Table 8.2-21)
1 1
16 15
14
10
13 2
11
3
9
7
4
6
5
12
6498042A
8.2-40 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-21 Diluter, Diff Module (See Figure 8.2-21)

1 6859038 Fitting, quick disconnect, 10-tube, plate w/ bolts (QD2, QD5)
2 6858748 Chamber, mixing, diff
3 2851830 Screw, thumb, nylon, mixing chamber holder
4 6805301 Fitting, quick disconnect, 5-tube, TTM, mixing chamber
5 6232664 Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, green
6 6232663 Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, blue
7 6232665 Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, red
8 6232666 Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, black
9 6232662 Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, yellow
10 6859511 Module, Diff Mixing Chamber, w/ drive
11 2523221 Hardware, belt, 75 grooves
12 6805817 Motor, Diff mixing chamber, w/ filter board
13 7000687 Drive, mixing chamber, diff, FRU
6233025 Manifold, solenoid valve, 4-valve, w/ fittings (use for MF17 w/ Solenoid Interconnect module)
PN 4277219B 8.2-41
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-22 Diluter, Retic Module (See Table 8.2-22)

1 3 4 3
4
8
2
9
3
6 7
10
6
32
31 33 12
11
13
30 14
29
17 16 15
28 23
18
19
20
27 24
22
25
26
21
6498053A
8.2-42 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-22 Diluter, Retic Module (See Figure 8.2-22)

6233021 Manifold, solenoid valve, 10-valve, w/ fittings (use for MF16 with Solenoid Interconnect module)
4 6232360 Fitting, elbow,10-32 thd, male to female
7 2523062 O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
8 6232636 Manifold, solenoid valve, 4-valve, w/o fittings
9 6232635 Valve, solenoid, 4-way, nc, w/o fittings
11 6805196 Hardware, bracket, pump mounting
12 6232653 Pump, blood/stain aspiration, 50 µL
15 6858073 Pump, stain (retic), 200 µL
18 2852006 Screw, misc, captive
19 6805155 Chamber, mixing, retic
20 6859121 Chamber, stain
21 6858962 Component, misc, arm, mixing chamber, retic
22 2807024 Screw, #6 x 32, 0.375 l, hex, setscrew
23 6706898 Valve, pinch, Retic waste assembly
24 6805106 Hardware, bracket, heater, diff
25 6859463 Heater, diff
26 6805220 Hardware, bracket, bubble/blood detector
27 6859506 Blood detectors, matched set, Retic module
28 6805818 Motor, retic mixing, w/ filter card
30 6859498 Drive, mixing chambers (stain and retic), Retic and Random Access modules
31 6232443 Fitting, quick disconnect, 10-tube round, male
32 6232444 Fitting, quick disconnect, 10-tube round, female
33 1024818 Cover, splash shield, retic valves, CP
PN 4277219B 8.2-43
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-23 Diluter, BSV Module (See Table 8.2-23) Figure Reference
12 13 15
A Probe-Wipe module,
1 2 11 14 Figure 8.2-24
16
3 10
9 4
7
8 6
21
5
20 18 17
19
40
39
38 33 34
A
37
36
35
32
31
25 24 22
26
23
29 28 27 6498138B
30
8.2-44 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-23 Diluter, BSV Module (See Figure 8.2-23)

1 1017439 BSV, shaft lever cap
2 1017438 BSV, tension spring retainer
3 2851445 Hardware, clip, BSV center section cylinder
4 2523294 Spring, BSV tension
5 6805648 Cylinder, air, BSV center section
6 1021990 BSV, center pad standoff
7 2852078 Screw,#10 x 32, 0.38 l, pan-hd, xrec, w/ cone washer
8 1014681 Hardware, stud, ball, #10-32
9 1017440 BSV, lever shaft
10 2512031 O-ring, red, BSV shaft
11 2822046 Nut, hex,#25
14 1022003 BSV, front pad standoff
15 6805597 Cylinder, air, BSV Manual-mode, with sensors
6232920 Cylinder, air, BSV Manual-mode, without sensors
6806400 Switch, Hall effect with LED (use with PN 6232920)
17 2851444 Hardware, clip, BSV Manual-mode aspirator tip cylinder
18 6855617 Hardware, knob, BSV, shaft
19 6706457 BSV, pads, matched set
20 1023328 BSV, pad antifriction spacer
21 1017361 BSV, shaft, coated
22 6706382 PCB, Probe-Wipe Interconnect
23 6805009 Cover, Probe-Wipe Interconnect card
25 2837031 Hardware, clip, retaining, BSV hand detector mount
26 2515153 Spring, compression, 0.210 o.d. x 0.38 l
27 6805517 Hardware, bracket, hand detector mount
29 2515099 Spring, hand detector
30 6859611 Switch, opto, BSV hand detector w/ black plastic assy
31 6805358 BSV, shaft, hand detector, threaded ends
32 1023299 Tray, BSV cleaning
34 3104044 BSV, housing insulator
35 6855650 BSV, housing
39 2523361 Hardware, bearing, bushing, shaft, nylon, BSV
PN 4277219B 8.2-45
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-24 Diluter, Probe-Wipe Module (See Table 8.2-24)
1 Probe-Wipe module with stationary backwash cup
2
3 6
4
7
17 13 10
11
14 12
16
18 15
19 Probe-Wipe module with moveable backwash cup
21
20 2
3 6
4
7
8
22
9
11
26
23
24
27
25
6498139B
8.2-46 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-24 Diluter, Probe-Wipe Module (See Figure 8.2-24)

1 7000507 Module, Probe-Wipe, with stationary backwash cup, FRU
2 4818006 Switch, opto,1-bit reader, 0.200 gap
5 3505048 Motor, Probe-Wipe module (for Probe-Wipe module with stationary backwash cup)
6 2826001 Washer, split lock #2
7 2802006 Screw, misc, flag sensor
8 2512127 O-ring, motor mount
10 2852262 Probe Wipe, lead screw truck
11 2512006 O-ring, 0.301 i.d. x 0.070 w
12 6805367 Probe Wipe, cleaning truck bracket (for Probe-Wipe module with stationary backwash cup)
14 2527689 Hardware, bearing, Probe-Wipe module
17 6858854 Probe Wipe, cleaning truck, clear nylon (for Probe-Wipe module with stationary backwash cup)
18 1023249 Probe wipe, backwash cup (stationary)
19 7000690 Module, Probe-Wipe, with moveable backwash cup, FRU
20 6807188 Cable, probe-wipe harness, with sensors and motor (for Probe-Wipe module with moveable
backwash cup)
21 3533122 Motor, Probe-Wipe module, dc, gear (for Probe-Wipe module with moveable backwash cup)
22 6707151 Cylinder, air, backwash cup (assembly includes associated hardware and moveable backwash cup)
23 6707171 Probe Wipe, cleaning truck bracket (for Probe-Wipe module with moveable backwash cup)
24 6807327 Probe Wipe, cleaning truck, clear nylon (for Probe-Wipe module with moveable backwash cup)
25 1025201 Probe Wipe, backwash cup (moveable)
26 2523062 O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
27 6232036 Fitting, 0.062 i.d.tubing to 10-32 thd, ss
PN 4277219B 8.2-47
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-25 Diluter, Aspiration Pump Module, MF4 and MF13 (See Table 8.2-25)
3
2
4
1
10 13
8 12
9 14
11
6
16
7
17
15
32 28 8
6
24
25
46
8
26
18
27
31
30 19
8
20 8
21
29
22
23 8
7253066B
8.2-48 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-25 Diluter, Aspiration Pump Module, MF4 and MF13 (See Figure 8.2-25)

1 6859521 Valve, solenoid, 2-way, w/ connector and O-rings
2 6706190 PCB, Solenoid Manifold, 13-valve I/O
3 6859515 Manifold, solenoid valve, 8-valve, w/ bracket and quick disconnect
4 6859205 Hardware, bracket, 13-valve solenoid valve manifold
5 1022419 Choke, plastic, 3” fluid, 0.010 orifice
6 2523062 O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
9 6805014 Hardware, bracket, dual 14-valve quick disconnect
10 6859040 Fitting, quick disconnect, 10-tube, base (QD4)
15 6859038 Fitting, quick disconnect, 10-tube, plate w/ bolts (QD2, QD5)
16 6859041 Fitting, quick disconnect, 10-tube, plate w/ bolt (QD1, QD4)
17 6859000 Hardware, plate, BSV and retic area
21 6707119 Pump, aspiration, Manual mode 205 µL, Automatic mode 285 µL
25 6859204 Hardware, bracket, 14-valve solenoid valve manifold
26 6232695 Choke, fitting, black, 0.010 orifice
27 6232360 Fitting, elbow, 10-32 thd, male to female
29 6213016 Choke, variable, 1/16 i.d.
30 6216006 Fitting, union, 10-32 female to female
31 6216195 Fitting, muffler, 10-32 thd
32 6859514 Manifold, solenoid valve, 14-valve, w/ bracket and quick disconnect
PN 4277219B 8.2-49
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-26 Diluter, Right Rear Door (See Table 8.2-26)
1
2
INSIDE VIEW
4
8 16
15
3
14
12 17
13 11 10
7
15 9
6
11
10 5
14
12
13
7253076D
Note: MF2 and MF5 are not present on Analytical Stations that are configured to bypass the
diluent reservoir.
8.2-50 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-26 Diluter, Right Rear Door (See Figure 8.2-26)

1 2016238 PCB, Bar-Code Decoder, for LED style bar-code reader
2016905 PCB, Bar-Code Decoder, for laser style bar-code reader
2 6805100 Cover, Bar-Code Decoder card
4 2852241 Screw, misc, slotted, used w/ quick open screws
5 6805091 Door, Diluter, right rear
6 2822047 Nut, hex, #37-24 UNF, 0.562 AF x 0.328 thk
7 6216308 Fitting, union, 0.187 i.d. to 0.187 i.d. (external waste fitting)
8 6232647 Fitting, 0.188 i.d tubing to 1/8 npt
9 6805096 Manifold, cleaning agent
14 2523062 O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
16 6805098 Manifold, diluent
PN 4277219B 8.2-51
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-27 Diluter, Left Rear Doors (See Table 8.2-27)

Inside left rear door (upper)
1
6
5 2
7
3
Left rear door (lower)

8 13
35 26 9
12
27
25 24
Rear view old 11
style assembly
28 10
24
29 14 15
23 16
30
31 11
19
17
33
32 18
Rear view new
20 style assembly
34
4
22
21
4
7253433E
8.2-52 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-27 Diluter, Left Rear Doors (See Figure 8.2-27)

1 6806602 Cover, Diluter 4 card
2 6706368 PCB, Diluter 4
3 6805093 Door, Diluter, left rear, top
5 2852240 Nut, misc, clip on, used w/ quick open screws
7 2852241 Screw, misc, slotted, used w/ quick open screws
8 6805503 Manifold, solenoid valve, level sense manifold, 7-valve, w/ fittings
9 6232757 Valve, solenoid, 2-way, w/ seal, for level sense manifold
11 2523062 O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
15 6232986 Actuator, pilot, 7/16 bore
14 6232981 Manifold, solenoid valve, 7-valve, 24 Vdc/30 psi, includes actuators and pinch valves
17 6232985 Valve, solenoid, 3-way, pneumatic, 50 psi, 24 Vdc
19 6805094 Door, Diluter, left rear, bottom
20 6232644 Fitting, quick disconnect, 0.125 i.d. tubing
21 6805102 Hardware, hinge, lower left door, Diluter
22 6232642 Fitting, 0.094 i.d. tubing to 0.1/4 npt
23 2527716 O-ring, 0.926 i.d. x 0.070 w
24 6859348 Switch, float, level sense manifold
25 1023262 Cover, level sense manifold, small
27 1022948 Cover, level sense manifold, large, diluent
28 1023567 O-ring, 2.310 i.d. x 0.070 w
29 6706198 PCB, Reservoir Interface, level sense manifold
30 1024715 Tubing, riser, CP (for reagent reservoir)
31 6232980 Fitting, feed thru, 1/8 npt
32 6232996 Fitting, quick disconnect, female, 0.125 mnpt, 0.125 flow
33 6232773 Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.250 to 0.125
34 6232645 Fitting, quick disconnect, input lines, small, 0.125 o.d. tubing, almond
35 6805306 Module, Level Sense Manifold
PN 4277219B 8.2-53
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-28 Diluter, Hydraulic Inputs to Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir (See
Table 8.2-28)
CBC lytic reagent
1
2, 3
Retic clearing solution
1
2
Retic stain
1 3
PAK Preserve 1
12 VAC
4 1
WASTE 30 PSI 5 PSI
LEVEL
SENSOR CBC RETIC RETIC PACK PACK PAK Lyse
DISINFECT WASTE LYS E CLEAR STAIN PRESERVE LYS E CLEANER DILUENT
5
7 30 PSI 30 PSI
6 5 PSI 5 PSI
7 7 VAC VAC
10 11
Disinfect Power
Cleaning Supply
Waste
8 agent Diluent
3, 8 8
9
6498101A
8.2-54 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-28 Diluter, Hydraulic Inputs to Analytical Stations that Use the Diluent Reservoir (See
Figure 8.2-28)

1 6915053 Tubing, input line, small, shielded, w/ labels
2 6706297 Tubing, pickup, 0.5 - 1.9 L universal (use for CBC lytic reagent, 500 mL and 1 L; stain; and PAK
PRESERVE [StabiLyse reagent])
3 6706296 Tubing, pickup, 5 L universal (use for CBC lytic reagent, 5 L; PAK LYSE [Erythrolyse reagent]; retic
clearing solution; and cleaning agent, 5 L)
5 6232715 Fitting, quick disconnect, male, 0.250 i.d. tubing, steel
6 3202039 Tubing, polyurethane, 0.145 i.d. x 0.251 o.d., 0.058 w, clear
7 6915052 Tubing, input line, large, shielded, diluent, flush, and cleaner
8 6706295 Tubing, pickup, 10 - 20 L universal (use for diluent; cleaning agent, 10 L; and disinfect solution)
9 6805636 Tubing, pickup, waste
10 6859790 Tubing, input line, waste, 8’, shielded w/o cable to sensor
11 6805366 Tubing, input line, waste, 12’, shielded w/ cable to sensor
12 6805629 Cable, waste sensor bypass connector
PN 4277219B 8.2-55
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-29 Diluter, Hydraulic Inputs to Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent Reservoir (See
Table 8.2-29)
CBC lytic reagent
1
2,3
Retic clearing solution
1
2
Retic stain
1 3
PAK Preserve 1
16
14 15 VAC
4
1
WASTE 30 PSI 5 PSI
LEVEL
SENSOR CBC RETIC RETIC PACK PACK PAK Lyse
DISINFECT WASTE LYSE CLEAR STAIN PRESERVE LYSE CLEANER DILUENT
5
8 7 30 PSI 30 PSI
6 5 PSI 5 PSI
8 VAC VAC
11 12
Diluent POWER
Cleaning SUPPLY
Waste
agent
13
10 3, 9
6498096A
8.2-56 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-29 Diluter, Hydraulic Inputs to Analytical Stations that Bypass the Diluent Reservoir (See
Figure 8.2-29)

1 6915053 Tubing, input line, small, shielded, w/ labels
2 6706297 Tubing, pickup, 0.5 - 1.9 L universal (use for CBC lytic reagent, 500 mL and 1 L; stain; and PAK
PRESERVE [StabiLyse reagent])
3 6706296 Tubing, pickup, 5 L universal (use for CBC lytic reagent, 5 L; PAK LYSE [Erythrolyse reagent]; retic
clearing solution; and cleaning agent, 5 L)
6 3202039 Tubing, polyurethane, 0.145 i.d. x 0.251 o.d., 0.058 w, clear
7 6807099 Cable, diluent sensor extension
8 6915052 Tubing, input line, large, shielded, diluent, flush, and cleaner
9 6706295 Tubing, pickup, 10 - 20 L universal (use for diluent; cleaning agent, 10 L; and disinfect solution)
10 6805636 Tubing, pickup, waste
11 6859790 Tubing, input line, waste, 8’, shielded w/o cable to sensor
12 6805366 Tubing, input line, waste, 12’, shielded w/ cable to sensor
13 5120250 Tubing, pickup, 20 L, w/ float sensor
14 6216308 Fitting, union, 0.187 i.d. to 0.187 i.d. (Use with two flat washers, PN 2827167, and hex nut,
PN 2822066.)
15 6805629 Cable, waste sensor bypass connector
16 6232980 Fitting, feed thru, 1/8 npt
PN 4277219B 8.2-57
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-30 Check Valves and Chokes (See Table 8.2-30.)
2
1 3 5
BLACK
6
BROWN
7 GRAY
8 YELLOW
BLUE
4 9
(WITH STRIPE)
10 RED
16
11 BLACK BLUE
12 17 GREEN
BROWN
18 BROWN
13 GREEN
19 BLACK
14
BLUE
20 RED
15
GOLD
7253083B
8.2-58 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-30 Check Valves and Chokes (See Figure 8.2-30)

1 6214107 Valve, check, 0.125 i.d. tubing
2 6232605 Valve, check, 0.125 i.d. to 0.082 i.d. tubing
3 6214108 Valve, check, 0.062 i.d. tubing
4 6232080 Valve, check, 0.125 i.d. tubing, w/ black stripe
5 6213020 Choke, plastic, black, 0.012 orifice
6 6213015 Choke, plastic, brown, 0.025 orifice
7 6213012 Choke, plastic, gray, 0.016 orifice
8 6213014 Choke, plastic, yellow, 0.010 orifice
9 6213013 Choke, plastic, blue, 0.020 orifice
10 6213006 Choke, metal, red, 0.008 orifice
11 6213011 Choke, metal, black, 0.010 orifice
12 6213009 Choke, metal, brown, 0.006 orifice
13 6213007 Choke, metal, green, 0.016 orifice
14 6213010 Choke, metal, blue, 0.012 orifice
15 6213008 Choke, metal, gold, 0.004 orifice
17 6232694 Choke, fitting, green, 0.016 orifice
18 6232697 Choke, fitting, brown, 0.006 orifice
19 6232695 Choke, fitting, black, 0.010 orifice
20 6232696 Choke, fitting, red, 0.008 orifice
PN 4277219B 8.2-59
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-31 Fittings and Miscellaneous Hardware (See Table 8.2-31)
4
1 2
5
7
8
9
10
3
14
13
12
15
11
18
16
17
19
20
21
22 24
23
25
27 28
26
6498069A
8.2-60 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-31 Fittings and Miscellaneous Hardware (See Figure 8.2-31)

2 1016486 Fitting, feed-thru isolator, white
3 6216353 Fitting, feed-thru, 0.062 i.d. to 0.093 i.d., w/ 10-22 npt
4 1016929 Fitting, feed-thru, 0.062 i.d. tubing to 0.082 tubing
6 1022081 Fitting, feed-thru, black
7 2822046 Nut, hex,#25
10 6216320 Fitting, feed-thru, 0.125 i.d., w/ 1/4 npt
11 6232352 Fitting, union, 0.062 i.d. to 0.093 i.d.
12 6232246 Fitting, union, 0.093 i.d. to 0.0125 i.d. tubing, clear
6232109 Fitting, union, 0.062 i.d., clear
13 6232380 Fitting, T, 0.093 i.d. to 0.125 i.d. to 0.125, polyurethane
14 6858675 Fitting, T, clear w/ metal tubes
6807147 Fitting, T, green w/ metal tubes
15 6226008 Fitting, T, 0.062 i.d. tubing,
6232051 Fitting, T, 0.094 i.d. tubing, polypropylene
6232584 Fitting, T, 0.156 i.d. tubing, polypropylene
16 6216081 Fitting, Y, 0.125 o.d. tubing, clear
1018245 Fitting, Y, 0.093 i.d. to 0.125 to 0.125 i.d. tubing, white
6232263 Fitting, Y, 0.050 i.d., blue
6232259 Fitting, Y, 0.093 i.d. tubing, clear
6216181 Fitting, Y, 0.130 i.d. tubing, clear
9909059 Fitting, Y, 0.062 i.d
9908085 Fitting, Y, 0.125 i.d. tubing, clear (large waste line)
17 6232434 Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, female cap, white
18 6232435 Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, female, white
19 6232436 Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, to 0.094 i.d. tubing, white
6232660 Fitting, quick disconnect, Luer, male, to 0.094 i.d. tubing, clear
20 6232399 Fitting, union, 0.094 i.d. tubing, Luer quick disconnect (comprises PN 6232435, PN 6232436, and
PN 6232434)
21 6232750 Fitting, quick disconnect,1/8 o.d. tubing to 5/32 o.d. tubing
22 6232751 Fitting, quick disconnect, 5/32 o.d. tubing to 1/4 o.d. tubing
23 6232753 Fitting, quick disconnect, T, 1/4 o.d. tubing
24 6232076 Filter, air fluid barrier, 0.45 µ, tubing fittings
25 6807148 Fitting, cross, green with metal tubes
6858676 Fitting, cross, clear with steel tubes
26 6806498 Tubing, sleeve
27 6216033 Fitting, union,10-32 thd to10-32 thd
28 6232383 Fitting, plug for tubing
PN 4277219B 8.2-61
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-32 Common Valves (See Table 8.2-32)
(Item 6 for VL100 6

through VL106 only) 7
7
5
4 5
3
2 4
1
10, 11
8
(Item 8 for VL17
and VL18 only)
14
12
3
4 13
15
16
6498057A
8.2-62 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-32 Common Valves (See Figure 8.2-32)

1 6855763 Valve, pinch, white, standard
2 1017501 Valve, pinch, mount
3 2826030 Washer, I-tooth, #47, 0.47 i.d. x 0.60 o.d. x 0 020 thk
4 6216012 Washer, cylinder, 0.500 i.d. x 0.562 o.d. x 0.062 thk
6 6232986 Actuator, pilot, 7/16 bore
9 1008315 Valve, pinch, deactivator clip, red, holds pinch valve open
10 6232579 Valve, Angar™, 3-way, #458002
11 6232578 Valve, Angar, 3-way, #458005
12 6857096 Valve, pinch, 1-tube, black
13 2822040 Nut, misc, use with PN 6857096 pinch valve
14 6856319 Valve, pinch, 3-tube, white
15 1025225 Valve, pinch, sleeve, blue, CP
16 6807225 Valve, pinch, reduced stroke, white (used for VL58A, VL58B, VL59, VL62A, VL62B, VL64, VL94A,
VL94B, VL95A, and VL95B)
PN 4277219B 8.2-63
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-33 Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware (See Table 8.2-33)
1 2 3
4 7
8
11
10 12
9 13
14
15
18
17
16
19
20
21 25 28
26 27
22
24
23
7253138A
8.2-64 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-33 Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware (See Figure 8.2-33)

1 6011019 Tie wrap mount, 0.51 x 0.33 w, w/ #6 hole
6011021 Tie wrap mount, 1.71 x 8 w, w/ #8 hole (use with screw and locking washer PN 2852093)
2 6027284 Tie wrap mount, 0.75 x 0.75, adhesive
3 6011015 Tie wrap mount, 1 x 1, w/ #6 hole, adhesive
7 6006006 Tie wrap, metal clamp
8 6027571 Tie wrap, multiuse clip, adhesive
9 6028738 Tie wrap, white loop, 0.3” diam, adhesive
12 6027785 Tie wrap, multiuse, loop, 0.5” diam
14 6027718 Tie wrap, multiuse, loop,1” diam
16 6027769 Tie wrap, multiuse, loop, adhesive, 0.5” diam
17 6027720 Tie wrap, multiuse, loop, adhesive, 1” diam
18 6011001 Tie wrap, nylon, 4” l x 0.1”
19 6011002 Tie wrap, nylon, 7” l x 0.2”
20 6011003 Tie wrap, nylon, 15” l x 0.2”
21 6027372 Tie wrap, ribbon cable clamp, 1”, green
24 6028706 Tie wrap, square plastic base for ribbon
25 6028707 Tie wrap, square plastic top for ribbon
26 6028733 Tie wrap, white loop, 0.5” diam
PN 4277219B 8.2-65
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-34 Power Supply, Overview and Compressor/Vacuum Pump, Regulators Figure Reference
and Filter (See Table 8.2-34)
A Bulk Power Supply,
1 Motor Controller card,
and mufflers,
2
Figure 8.2-36
B SPC card and display and
air water separator,
Figure 8.2-35
3
27 26
5 6 4
8
B 25 7
9 10
2
11
12
13
15 14
19 16
20
17
18
21
22 14
24 15 23
6498022A
8.2-66 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-34 Power Supply, Overview and Compressor/Vacuum Pump, Regulators and Filter
(See Figure 8.2-34)

1 6805385 Regulator, 5 psi, w/ fittings
2 6216018 Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.250 o.d. tubing to 1/4 mpt, brass
4 6232676 Fitting, quick-disconnect, T, 0.25 i.d. tubing to 1/4 npt
6 6232752 Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.125 o.d. tubing to 1/8 npt
7 6232681 Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.250 tubing to 1/8 mnpt
8 6216312 Fitting, plug, 1/8 npt, external hex
9 6859181 Compressor and vacuum pump, w/ fittings and cable
Note: Revision F of this assembly has a modified design to reduce low frequency sound output.
10 7237051 Filter/muffler assembly
11 6232712 Fitting, T, 0.250 o.d. to 0.250 o.d. to 1/4 mpt, vacuum
12 1022449 Spring, compression, 1.14 i.d. x 1.35 l x 0.088 w
15 6858806 Hardware, plate, compressor, w/ captive screws
16 6805382 Valve, pressure bleed off, w/ fittings
Note: Revision D implements changes to prevent the valve from sticking in the open position.
17 6232678 Fitting, quick disconnect, male, 0.250 tubing to 10/32 thd
19 2840073 Hardware, latch, magnet, Diluter front cover
20 2523780 Hardware, casters, swivel, used on Power Supply
21 2840060 Hardware, bracket, air filter, Power Supply
22 6859466 Hardware, bracket, air filter, Power Supply
23 1022450 Filter, air, used under Power Supply
24 2523779 Hardware, casters, fixed, used on Power Supply
25 6807307 Hardware, baffle, Power Supply
PN 4277219B 8.2-67
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-35 Power Supply, SPC Card and Display, and Air Water Separator (See Table 8.2-35)
1 10
4 5
11
6, 7
12
2
3
8
13
20 14
18
15
17
16
19 16
7253078E
8.2-68 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-35 Power Supply, SPC Card and Display, and Air Water Separator (See Figure 8.2-35)

1 6805173 Cover, System Controller Display (Power Supply)
2 6859483 Display, LED, Power Supply w/ bracket
4 6805386 Air water separator, w/ fittings
5 6232680 Fitting, quick disconnect, elbow, 0.250 o.d. tubing to 1/4 mpt
6 6232759 Filter, air water separator, filter only
7 2512040 O-ring, air water separator seal
8 6206006 Fitting, 0.125 i.d. tubing to 1/8 npt
9 6859722 Hardware, bracket, coiled tubing, Power Supply
10 2603062 Fan, guard, plastic, used w/ 4.69’’ square fan
13 6859412 Hardware, plate, mounted below cooling coil
14 6805382 Valve, pressure bleed off, w/ fittings
Note: Revision D implements changes to prevent the valve from sticking in the open position.
15 6232678 Fitting, quick disconnect, male, 0.250 tubing to 10/32 thd
18 2852004 Hardware, clamp, tubing, black nylon ratcheting
19 6706038 PCB, System Power Controller (SPC)
PN 4277219B 8.2-69
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-36 Power Supply, Bulk Power Supply, Motor Controller Card and Mufflers (See Table 8.2-36)
3 5
18
17 15
16 4 7
2
6
1
8
14
9
10
11
5
12
13
6498035A
8.2-70 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-36 Power Supply, Bulk Power Supply, Motor Controller Card and Mufflers (See Figure 8.2-36)

2 2603062 Fan, guard, plastic, used w/ 4.69’’ square fan
5 3505052 PCB, Motor Controller, w/ cable
6 6859378 Cable, ac input, w/ ac input connector
7 9921373 Fuse holder, 20 A, 250 Vac
8 6232714 Fitting, quick disconnect, input door, female, 0.170 i.d. x 0.25 o.d. tubing
10 2121896 Screw, misc, d-type, female 4-40 (for 48 V cable)
11 2121898 Screw, misc, SCSI, 0.050 (for ribbon cable)
12 2808080 Screw, #8 x 32, 0.25 l, µf-hd, xrec
13 6858805 Hardware, plate, Bulk Power Supply, w/ captive screws
14 6805774 Power Supply, Bulk w/ cables
15 6232716 Fitting, quick disconnect, 0.125 i.d. tubing to 1/4 npt
16 6218031 Muffler, pneumatic
17 6805130 Hardware, bracket, mufflers
18 6706158 PCB, Bulk Power Filter
PN 4277219B 8.2-71
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-37 Power Supply, Covers and Panels (See Table 8.2-37)
1
30.0 2
Old style
5
3
4
6498100A New style
8.2-72 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-37 Power Supply, Covers and Panels (See Figure 8.2-37)

1 2852257 Hardware, latch, quarter turn, black, Power Supply
2 6859187 Cover, Power Supply, top and right side, w/ latch (old style Power Supply)
3 6807292 Cover, Power Supply, top and right side, w/ latch (new style Power Supply)
4 6807331 Filter, air, used on left and right side of new style Power Supply
5 6807390 Cover, Power Supply, left side panel (new style Power Supply)
6 6805277 Cover, Power Supply, left side panel (old style Power Supply)
PN 4277219B 8.2-73
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-38 LH 750 System Diluter and Analyzer Covers and Doors Figure Reference
(See Table 8.2-38)
A Analyzer front door
A hardware, Figure 8.2-39
B Diluter lower front door
5
hardware, Figure 8.2-40
0 4 /3 0 /9 6
1 2 :3 0 :1 8
I
II
III
IV
1
1 3
V
VII
M A IN M E N U
1 2 2
1 1
1 0
9 5
6 4 9 8 2 3 2 B
B
8.2-74 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-38 LH 750 System Diluter and Analyzer Covers and Doors (See Figure 8.2-38)

1 6807048 Door, Analyzer, front (LH 750 System)
2 6807050 Cover, Diluter, center (LH 750 System)
3 6807056 Cover, Analytical Station, top (LH 750 System)
4 6807054 Cover, Analytical Station, right side (LH 750 System)
5 6859067 Door, Analyzer, right and left
6 6858998 Door, Diluter, right side
7 6807057 Cover, Analytical Station, right column (LH 750 System)
8 6807374 Door, Diluter, lower front (LH 750 System)
9 6807378 Keypad, with LCD, Diluter control (numeric) (LH 750 System)
7000698, FRU
10 6807236 Cover, SlideMaker access (LH 750 System)
11 6807235 Cover, Analytical Station, left column (LH 750 System)
12 6858997 Door, Diluter, left side
13 6807055 Cover, Analytical Station, left side (LH 750 System)
PN 4277219B 8.2-75
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-39 LH 750 System Analyzer Front Door Hardware (See Table 8.2-39)
6
6 4 9 8 2 3 0 B
Table 8.2-39 LH 750 System Analyzer Front Door Hardware (See Figure 8.2-39)

2 2523647 Hardware, hinge, front cover, Analyzer
3 6029140 Cable, keypad, Diluter control (numeric) (LH 750 System)
4 6807359 Spring, gas, Analyzer front door
8.2-76 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Figure 8.2-40 LH 750 System Diluter Lower Front Door and Hardware (See Table 8.2-40)
5 4
3
2
2
6
6498021B
Table 8.2-40 LH 750 System Diluter Lower Front Door and Hardware (See Figure 8.2-40)

5 1411145 Hardware, slide rack used for front cover
6 1022182 Hardware, pin, front cover mount
PN 4277219B 8.2-77
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-41 LH 750 System Analyzer Card Cage, Rear Door and Hardware (See Table 8.2-41)
5 7
4 8
3 9
2 6 1 0 , 1 1
1 1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
F R O N T
1 6 1 7
2 2
1 9 2 1
1 8
2 0
3 1 , 3 2
3 0
2 7
2 9
2 4 , 2 5 , 2 6
2 3
2 8
R E A R
6 4 9 8 2 2 7 B
8.2-78 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-41 LH 750 System Analyzer Components (See Figure 8.2-41)

1 6707204 PCB, BD ADJ (Remote BD)
2 6706923 PCB, Plt Processor 2
3 6707099 PCB, Red/White Processor 2
4 6707067 PCB, R/W/P Signal Conditioner/Analyzer
6 6807370 Display, CRT, Scope Module with keypad (LH 750 System)
7000697, FRU
8 6706028 PCB, AMC, without software EPROM
9 6706070 PCB, COMM INTFC
10 6707173 PCB, DILUTER CPU (LH 750 System)
12 6706314 PCB, DIFF PROCESSOR 4, without software EPROM
13 6706071 PCB, (VCS) ANALOG 5
14 6029111 Cable, Analyzer to preamp
16 1022868 Filter, air, used on rear cover
17 2852105 Screw, misc, quick turn, use w/ 2851840, slotted
19 6859069 Door, Analyzer, rear
23 6707152 PCB, Backplane, Analog
24 1022451 Hardware, misc, bus bar
26 6805217 Cover, bus bar
27 6859178 PCB, Backplane, Interconnect
28 2852106 Nut, clip on, Analyzer rear cover
29 6859176 PCB, Backplane, CRT
30 6707154 PCB, Backplane, Digital
32 2306093 Thermistor, w/ cable, w/o connector and fan
PN 4277219B 8.2-79
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
Figure 8.2-42 Random Access Module Components (See Table 8.2-42)
7
1 6
8
2 3
9
5 1 0 1 2
3 0
1 1
1 3
2 9
2 6
2 8 1 4
1 5
2 7
2 3
1 8
1 9
1 0
2 0 1 7
2 4
1 6
2 2
2 5
2 1 6498231B
8.2-80 PN 4277219B
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS 8
Table 8.2-42 Random Access Components (See Figure 8.2-42)

6707182 Module, Random Access
7000695, FRU
4 2523062 O-ring, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 w
5 6232829 Fitting, elbow, adjustable, 2 mm (0.08 in.) i.d. hose barb to 10-32
6 1025419 Cover, splash shield, laser side
7 6859498 Drive, mixing chambers (stain and retic), Retic and Random Access modules
9 6805818 Motor, retic mixing, w/ filter card
11 6707179 Valve, shear, 2.5 µL
7000693-FRU
12 6232653 Pump, blood/stain aspiration, 50 µL
14 6707180 Valve, shear, 31 µL (LH 750 System)
7000694-FRU
16 6858073 Pump, stain (retic), 200 µL
18 2852006 Screw, misc, captive
19 6805155 Chamber, mixing, retic
20 6859121 Chamber, stain
21 6858962 Component, misc, arm, mixing chamber, retic
22 2807024 Screw, #6 x 32, 0.375 l, hex, setscrew
23 6807365 Blood detectors, matched set, Random Access module
24 6805106 Hardware, bracket, heater, diff
25 6859463 Heater, diff
29 1025430 Cover, splash shield, dual 4-valve
30 TBS Screw, TBS
PN 4277219B 8.2-81
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
8.2-82 PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
9
A QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION, A.1-1
Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications, A.1-1
Bar-Code Read Rate, A.1-1
Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Checks, A.1-1
Bar-Code Scanner Electrical Checks - LED Style Bar-Code Reader, A.1-1
Bar-Code Scanner Position Checks, A.1-1
Bar-Code Scanner Timing Checks, A.1-1
Flipper Position Check, A.1-1
Rocker Bed Belt Check, A.1-1
Rocker Bed Timing Check, A.1-2
Tube Detector Checks, A.1-2
CBC Calibration Limits, A.1-2
CBC Noise Level Limits, A.1-3
Electronic Test Limits, A.1-4
Performance Specifications, A.1-5
Pressure and Vacuum Tolerances, A.1-6
Sample Conditions/Specifications, A.1-7
Diff and Retic Analysis Conditions, A.1-7
Diluent/CBC Lytic Reagent Timing, A.1-8
VCS Optimization Limits, A.1-8
Voltage Limits, A.1-10
Volume Specifications, A.1-13
Pumps, A.1-13
A.2 ANALYZER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS, A.2-1

AMC, A.2-1
Jumpers, A.2-1
Switch, A.2-1
API - SIGNAL GENERATOR Card, A.2-2
Switches, A.2-2
BD ADJ Card, A.2-3
Connectors, A.2-3
COMM INTERFACE Card, A.2-4
Switches, A.2-4
CRT4 Display Card (In Scope Module), A.2-5
Switch, A.2-5
DIFF PROCESSOR Card, A.2-6
Switch, A.2-6
DILUTER CPU Card, A.2-7
Connector, A.2-7
LED, A.2-7
Switches, A.2-7
DILUTER PROCESSOR Card, A.2-9
Switches, A.2-9
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2, A.2-11
R/W/P SC/A Card, A.2-12
Connectors, A.2-12
PN 4277219B 9-i
CONTENTS
A.3 DILUTER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS, A.3-1

Bar-Code Decoder Card, A.3-1
Connectors, A.3-1
Jumper, A.3-1
Diff Power Supply Card, A.3-2
Connectors, A.3-2
Connectors, A.3-4
LEDs, A.3-4
Connectors, A.3-7
LEDs, A.3-7
Connectors, A.3-9
Connectors, A.3-10
LEDs, A.3-10
Diluter Cbl Adapter Card, A.3-11
Connectors, A.3-11
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card, A.3-12
Connectors, A.3-12
LEDs, A.3-12
Test Points, A.3-13
Keyboard and Display Interface Card (GEN•S System), A.3-13
Connectors, A.3-13
Potentiometers, A.3-13
PVT Card, A.3-14
Connectors, A.3-14
Reservoir Interface Card, A.3-15
Connectors, A.3-15
RS/Opto Infc Card, A.3-16
Connectors, A.3-16
Sensor Distribution Card, A.3-17
Connectors, A.3-17
LEDs, A.3-17
Six-Channel Preamp Card, A.3-18
Connectors, A.3-18
A.4 POWER SUPPLY CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT

DESCRIPTIONS, A.4-1
Bulk Power Filter Card, A.4-1
Connectors, A.4-1
Bulk Power Supply, A.4-2
Connectors, A.4-2
Motor Controller Card, A.4-3
System Power Controller Card, A.4-4
Connectors, A.4-4
LEDs, A.4-4
9-ii PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
9
A.5 DILUTER F-FUNCTIONS, A.5-1
A.6 DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT FUNCTIONS AND LOCATION

REFERENCES, A.6-1
Summary, A.6-1
Solenoids Valves, A.6-1
Pinch Valves and Asco® Angar™ Valves, A.6-8
Main Diluter Fluidic Components, A.6-9
A.7 GEN•S SYSTEM DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT LOCATIONS, A.7-1
A.8 LH 750 SYSTEM DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT LOCATIONS, A.8-1
A.9 SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS, A.9-1
A.10 MENU TREES, A.10-1
ILLUSTRATIONS
A.1-1 CBC Lytic Reagent and Diluent Delivery Timing, A.1-8
A.2-1 AMC Component Locations, A.2-1

A.2-2 API Card Component Locations, A.2-2
A.2-3 BD ADJ Card Component Locations, A.2-3
A.2-4 COMM INTERFACE Card Component Locations, A.2-4
A.2-5 CRT4 Display Card Component Locations, A.2-5
A.2-6 DIFF PROCESSOR Card Component Locations, A.2-6
A.2-7 DILUTER CPU Card Component Locations, A.2-7
A.2-8 DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Component Locations, A.2-9
A.2-9 RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 Jumper Locations and Settings, A.2-11
A.2-10 R/W/P SC/A Card Component Locations, A.2-12
A.3-1 Bar-Code Decoder Card Component Locations, A.3-1

A.3-2 Diff Power Supply Card Component Locations, A.3-2
A.3-3 Diluter 1 Card Component Locations (Used with Old Diluter
Interconnects), A.3-3
A.3-4 Diluter 1 Card Component Locations (Used with New Diluter
Interconnects)t, A.3-3
A.3-5 Diluter 2 Card Component Locations (GEN•S System SW3A or Lower, without
SlideMaker), A.3-5
A.3-6 Diluter 2 Card Component Locations (GEN•S System SW3A or Lower, with or
without SlideMaker), A.3-5
A.3-7 Diluter 2 REL Card Component Locations), A.3-6
A.3-8 Diluter 2 RBD Card Component Locations, A.3-6
A.3-10 Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface Card Component Locations, A.3-8
1.3-11 Diluter 3 LH Card Component Locations, A.3-8
A.3-13 Diluter Cbl Adapter Card Component Location, A.3-11
A.3-14 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Component Locations, A.3-12
PN 4277219B 9-iii
CONTENTS
A.3-15 Keyboard and Display Interface Card Component Locations on the GEN•S
System, A.3-13
A.3-16 PVT Card Component Locations, A.3-14
A.3-17 Reservoir Interface Card Component Locations, A.3-15
A.3-18 RS/Opto Intfc Card Component Locations, A.3-16
A.3-19 Sensor Distribution Card Component Locations, A.3-17
A.3-20 Six-Channel Preamp Card Component Locations, A.3-18
A.4-1 Bulk Power Filter Card Component Locations, A.4-1

A.4-3 Motor Controller Card Locations and Settings, A.4-3
A.4-4 System Power Controller Card Component Locations, A.4-4
A.7-2 GEN•S System Diluter - Rear of Left Front Panel, A.7-1

A.7-1 GEN•S System Diluter - Left Front Panel, A.7-1
A.7-3 GEN•S System Diluter - Center Front Panel, A.7-2
A.7-4 GEN•S System Diluter - Rear of Center Front Panel, A.7-2
A.7-5 GEN•S System Diluter - Right Front Panel, A.7-3
A.7-6 GEN•S System Diluter - Rear of Right Front Panel, A.7-3
A.7-8 GEN•S System Diluter - Sampling Station, A.7-4
A.7-7 GEN•S System Diluter - Under Front Cover Overview, A.7-4
A.7-9 GEN•S System Diluter - Retic Module, A.7-5
A.7-10 GEN•S System Diluter - Diff Module, A.7-5
A.7-11 GEN•S System Diluter - Lower Left Rear Door, A.7-6
A.7-12 GEN•S System Diluter- Right Rear Door, A.7-6
A.8-1 LH 750 System Diluter - Left Front Panel, A.8-1

A.8-2 LH 750 System Diluter - Rear of Left Front Panel, A.8-1
A.8-3 LH 750 System Diluter - Center Front Panel, A.8-2
A.8-4 LH 750 System Diluter - Rear of Center Front Panel, A.8-2
A.8-5 LH 750 System Diluter - Right Front Panel, A.8-3
A.8-6 LH 750 System Diluter - Rear of Right Front Panel, A.8-3
A.8-8 LH 750 System Diluter - Sampling Station, A.8-4
A.8-7 LH 750 System Diluter - Under Front Cover Overview, A.8-4
A.8-9 LH 750 System Diluter - Random Access Module, A.8-5
A.8-10 LH 750 System Diluter - Diff Module, A.8-5
A.8-11 LH 750 System Diluter - Lower Left Rear Door, A.8-6
A.10-1 GEN•S System Analyzer Menu Summary, A.10-1

A.10-2 LH 750 System Analyzer Menu Summary, A.10-2
TABLES
A.1-1 Bar-Code Read-Rate Specifications, A.1-1
A.1-2 Bar-Code Scanner Electrical Checks - LED Style Bar-Code Reader, A.1-1
A.1-3 Latex Voltage Test Limits, A.1-2
A.1-4 Voltage Matching Test Limits, A.1-2
A.1-5 Flow-Rate Test Limits, A.1-3
A.1-6 CBC Calibration Factor Limits, A.1-3
A.1-7 Red and White Aperture Impedance, A.1-3
9-iv PN 4277219B
CONTENTS
9
A.1-8 Red and White Aperture Isolation Impedance (with Diluent), A.1-3
A.1-9 DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST Limits, A.1-4
A.1-10 RAMP and PRECISION TEST Limits , A.1-4
A.1-11 Parameter Test Limits, A.1-5
A.1-12 Mode-to-Mode Comparison Limits*, A.1-6
A.1-13 Pressure and Vacuum Tolerances, A.1-6
A.1-14 Diff Analysis Conditions, A.1-7
A.1-15 Retic Analysis Conditions, A.1-7
A.1-16 CBC Lytic Reagent and Diluent Delivery Limits, A.1-8
A.1-17 LATRON Primer Background Limits, A.1-8
A.1-18 VCS Pressure Variation Limits, A.1-9
A.1-19 Diff/Retic Cell Count Times and Values and Diff Conductivity Noise Limits, A.1-9
A.1-20 Diff/Retic TTM Voltage Noise Limits Verification, A.1-9
A.1-21 LS Offset Voltage, A.1-9
A.1-22 VCS Latex Calibration and Verification Limits, A.1-10
A.1-23 48 V Check, A.1-10
A.1-24 AC Line Input Voltage Specifications, A.1-11
A.1-25 Analyzer Backplane Voltage Test Points, A.1-11
A.1-26 Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Voltage Ranges on GEN•S System, A.1-11
A.1-27 Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Voltage Ranges on LH 750 System, A.1-11
A.1-28 Clog Detector Threshold Voltage - For RF Detector Preamp Card with Vacuum
Tube, A.1-12
A.1-29 Diluter Card Voltage Test Points, A.1-12
A.1-30 Hgb Voltage Limits, A.1-13
A.1-31 Pump Volume Tolerances, A.1-14
A.2-1 AMC Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-1

A.2-2 AMC Card Switch, SW1, Temperature Selection, A.2-2
A.2-5 BD ADJ Card Connectors, A.2-3
A.2-6 Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Adjustments, A.2-3
A.2-9 CRT4 Display Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-5
A.2-10 DIFF PROCESSOR Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-6
A.2-11 DILUTER CPU Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-7
A.2-12 DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Switch, SW1, Settings, A.2-9
A.2-13 R/W/P SC/A Card Connectors, A.2-12
A.3-1 Bar-Code Decoder Card Connectors, A.3-1

A.3-2 Diff Power Supply Card Connectors, A.3-2
A.3-7 Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Adjustments on the Diluter 2 Card, A.3-7
PN 4277219B 9-v
CONTENTS
A.3-11 Diluter 4 Card Test Points and Adjustments, A.3-11

A.3-12 Diluter Cbl Adapter Card Connectors, A.3-11
A.3-13 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Connectors, A.3-12
A.3-14 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card LEDs, A.3-12
A.3-15 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Test Points, A.3-13
A.3-16 Keyboard and Display Interface Card Connectors on the GEN•S System, A.3-13
A.3-17 PVT Card Connectors, A.3-14
A.3-18 Reservoir Interface Card Connectors, A.3-15
A.3-19 RS/Opto Intfc Card Connectors, A.3-16
A.3-20 Sensor Distribution Card Connectors, A.3-17
A.3-21 Sensor Distribution Card LEDs, A.3-17
A.3-22 Six-Channel Preamp Card Connectors, A.3-18
A.4-1 Bulk Power Filter Card Connectors, A.4-1

A.4-3 System Power Controller Card Connectors, A.4-4
A.4-4 System Power Controller Card Voltage Status LEDs, A.4-4
A.5-1 Diluter F-Key Functions, A.5-1
A.6-1 Solenoid Valve Functions, A.6-1

A.6-2 Pinch and Angar Valve Location References, A.6-8
A.6-3 Diluter Components, A.6-9
A.9-1 Worldwide Released Configurations for the GEN•S System*, A.9-1

A.9-2 Worldwide Released Configurations for the LH 750 System*, A.9-1
9-vi PN 4277219B
AQUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION A
A.1 TOLERANCES AND LIMITS
Cassette Transport Assembly Specifications
Bar-Code Read Rate

Table A.1-1 Bar-Code Read-Rate Specifications
Verification Adjustment
First Scan >90% 95 to 100%
Total Scans >95% 98 to 100%
Bar-Code Scanner Cylinder Checks

The bar-code scanner cylinder stroke should be 12.07 cm ±0.64 cm (4.27 in. ±0.25 in.).
Bar-Code Scanner Electrical Checks - LED Style Bar-Code Reader
Table A.1-2 Bar-Code Scanner Electrical Checks - LED Style Bar-Code Reader
Test Points Ground Voltage Acceptable Range

J37-2/4 J36-6 -5 Vdc ±0.25 Vdc
J37-7/8 J36-6 +5 Vdc ±0.25 Vdc
TP3 with respect to TP2 offset voltage TP2 0 Vdc ±200 mV
TP3 over black TP2 -10 Vdc
TP3 over white TP2 -10 Vdc
Bar-Code Scanner Position Checks

The park tab should not protrude from under the bar-code scanner assembly more than
0.318 cm (0.125 in.)
The distance from the bar-code scanner housing to:
r Cassette label should be 1.300 to 1.366 cm (0.512 to 0.538 in.), verification limits.
r Stripper plate should be 0.127 cm to 0.331cm (0.050 in. to 0.130 in.).
r Tube or Parallel Cylinder should be -
t 1.300 to 1.366 cm (0.512 to 0.538 in.), verification limits.
t 1.323 cm to 1.343 cm (0.521 in. to 0.529), adjustment limits.
Bar-Code Scanner Timing Checks

Completion of forward stroke = 0.70 seconds ±0.20 seconds (0.50 to 0.90 seconds)
Completion of reverse stroke = 0.80 seconds ±0.20 seconds (0.60 to 1.00 seconds)
Flipper Position Check

The cassette/flipper overlap should be 1.58 mm (1/16 in.)
Rocker Bed Belt Check

The belt assembly slack (measured by holding assembly upside down) should be about
0.508 cm ±0.254 cm (0.20 in. ±0.10 in.)
PN 4277219B A.1-1
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
Rocker Bed Timing Check

Number of rocks/minute = 52 - 54
Tube Detector Checks

The tube detector LED should:
r Light when the center of the tube is about 0.178 cm (0.07 in.) to the right of the center
of the stripper plate
r Go out when the center of the tube is about 0.127 cm (0.05 in.) to the left of the stripper
plate ball.
The tube cap should be pierced in the center or within 0.127 cm (0.05 in.) from the left of
center.
The tube detector base should be 2.108 ±0.005 cm (0.830 ±0.002 in. [53/64 in.]) from the
rocker bed.
CBC Calibration Limits

Table A.1-3 Latex Voltage Test Limits
Parameter Acceptable Limit

Red - Aperture current voltage 155.6 Vdc* ±10.55 (145.05 to 166.15 Vdc)
White - Aperture current voltage 126 Vdc*±11.35 (114.65 to 137.35 Vdc)
Red - Latex particle volume (Default = 94.3 fL) Assay value ±1.2
White - Latex particle volume Assay value ±1.2
Red - Volume (RMV) difference between apertures 1 (adjustment), 1.2 (verification)
White- Volume (WMV) difference between apertures 1 (adjustment), 1.2 (verification)
Red - Voltage difference between apertures ≤5 Vdc maximum difference
White- Voltage difference between apertures ≤5 Vdc maximum difference
* The maximum adjustment is 210 Vdc.
Table A.1-4 Voltage Matching Test Limits
Parameter Maximum
RMV 1.8% CV
WMV 3.5% CV
Red - Volume (RMV) difference between apertures 1 (adjustment), 1.2 (verification)
White- Volume (WMV) difference between apertures 1 (adjustment), 1.2 (verification)*
Red - Voltage difference between apertures 8
White - Voltage difference between apertures 7
*Note: This specification was established using unimodal 4C cell control. If unimodal 4C cell
control is not available, use latex particles. You may not be able to meet this specification
using a tri-modal sample, such as whole blood.
A.1-2 PN 4277219B
A
Table A.1-5 Flow-Rate Test Limits
AP1/AP2/AP3 Average
Parameter %CV AP Diff %CV Diff
WBC <3.5% 0.3 2.5 0.10
RBC <1.8% 0.06 0.8 0.03
HGB N/A N/A 0.8 0.10
MCV N/A 2 0.8 1.00
PLT <5.0% 12 3.2 6.00
MPV N/A 2 5 0.50
Table A.1-6 CBC Calibration Factor Limits
Automatic Mode Limits Manual Mode Limits
Parameter Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum

WBC Avg 0.984 1.276 0.88 1.12
WBC AP2 0.880 1.120 N/A N/A
WBC AP3 0.880 1.120 N/A N/A
RBC Avg 0.926 1.275 0.94 1.06
RBC AP2 0.940 1.060 N/A N/A
RBC AP3 0.940 1.060 N/A N/A
Hgb 1.000 1.386 0.88 1.12
MCV 0.880 1.120 0.93 1.07
Plt Avg 0.869 1.234 0.93 1.07
Plt AP2 0.930 1.070 N/A N/A
Plt AP3 0.930 1.070 N/A N/A
MPV 0.880 1.141 0.93 1.07
RDW 0.880 1.141 N/A N/A
CBC Noise Level Limits

Table A.1-7 Red and White Aperture Impedance
Cable Range with Diluent Minimum without Diluent

RBC 1, RBC 2, or RBC 3 (across aperture) 22 K to 44 K ohms 10 megohms
WBC 1, WBC 2, or WBC 3 (across aperture) 7.4 K to 39 K ohms 10 megohms
Table A.1-8 Red and White Aperture Isolation Impedance (with Diluent)
Cable Minimum
RBC 1 GND to Chassis GND 10 Meg
WBC 1 GND to Chassis GND 10 Meg
PN 4277219B A.1-3
Electronic Test Limits

Table A.1-9 DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST Limits
Parameter Channel Range

DC 124 ±5.2
RF 124 ±5.2
LS 124 ±5.2
Table A.1-10 RAMP and PRECISION TEST Limits
Acceptable Limits - GEN•S System Acceptable Limits - LH 750 System

Data Param RAMP TEST 0 PRECISION TEST2 PRECISION TEST3 RAMP TEST PRECISION TEST
Final Results WBC 39.10 - 43.78 45.00 - 45.36 52.35 - 52.65 50.5 - 54.5 52.2 - 56.2
RBC 4.029 - 4.099 4.431 - 4.518 5.085 - 5.185 5.42 - 5.62 5.6 - 5.8
HGB 11.02 - 11.10 11.05 - 11.07 11.05 - 11.07 Not tested Not tested
HCT 72.95 - 75.83 58.61 - 63.21 42.51 - 42.75 Not tested Not tested
MCV 179.5 - 185.6 131.3 - 140.9 82.86 - 83.14 194.5 - 198.5 151.5 - 156.5
MCH 21.77 - 32.69 24.54 - 24.90 21.40 - 21.68 Not tested Not tested
MCHC 14.54 - 15.16 17.46 - 18.86 25.17 - 26.73 Not tested Not tested
RDW 47.57 - 48.91 16.77 - 17.50 14.23 50.97 - 51.97 15.1 - 17.1
PLT 222.6 - 273.2 74.2 - 78.6 685.9 - 689.7 650 - 700 725 - 775
MPV 10.84 - 11.17 4.33 - 7.57 5.77 - 5.83 10.67 11.07 10.6 - 11
PCT† 0.2528 - 0.2932 0.0336 - 0.0573 0.3977 - 0.4007 Not tested Not tested
PDW† 16.87 - 19.85 10.07 - 10.75 16.43 - 16.47 18.8 - 19.8 16.5 - 17.5
Aperture Raw WBC 22342 - 22818 24225 - 24285 27313 - 27368 7802 - 7822 7515 - 7535
Counts WBC N/A N/A N/A 8143000 - 8287000 -
Wait 8243000 8387000
RBC 22095 - 22418 24240 - 24270 27338 - 27346 7802 - 7822 7515 - 7535
RBC N/A N/A N/A 8270000 - 8390000 -
Wait 8370000 8490000
Histogram WBC 1800 - 2300‡ 704 - 1342 4414 2225 - 2275 310 - 410
Count RBC 1900 - 2300‡ 460.6 - 468.1 6161 2065 - 2115 300 - 380
Range*
PLT 1528 - 1740 478.6 - 489.2 1744 1705 - 1755 463 - 473
Histogram WBC 127.0 - 141.6 75.34 - 93.20 121.7 127 - 129 84.7 - 90.7
Mean RBC 127.0 - 133.3 89.86 - 96.76 50.46 126 - 129 94.5 - 104.5
Range*
PLT 32.41 - 33.16 25.80 - 38.10 14.84 31.5 - 32.5 30 -33
Histogram WBC 70.50 - 73.10 17.15 - 18.50 74.79 73.4 - 74.4 15.6 - 17.6
Sigma RBC 69.00 - 71.73 15.36 - 22.17 9.68 72.9 - 74.9 15.7 - 18.7
Range*
PLT 17.19 - 17.54 16.75 - 18.63 9.73 18.3 - 18.66 17.5 -18.5
Histogram WBC N/A N/A 19 N/A N/A
Mode* RBC N/A N/A 50 N/A N/A
PLT N/A N/A 7 N/A N/A
* On Histogram statistics screen
† Research only parameters
‡ The actual value is 10 times the value shown.
A.1-4 PN 4277219B
A
Performance Specifications
Table A.1-11 Parameter Test Limits
WBC WBC Diff Diff

Precision Precision WBC WBC Carryover Background
Parameter/Unit Range Max %CV Max Diff Carryover Background R R
WBC x 103 ≥3.6 but <4.0 2.30 0.298 0.247 0.2 111 82
cells/mL ≥4.0 but <5.0 2.12 0.354 0.259 0.2 119 82
≥5.0 but <6.0 2.00 0.409 0.272 0.2 127 82
≥6.0 but <7.0 1.92 0.463 0.285 0.2 135 82
≥7.0 but <8.0 1.85 0.516 0.298 0.2 144 82
≥8.0 but <9.0 1.80 0.569 0.311 0.2 152 82
≥9.0 but <10.0 1.76 0.621 0.324 0.2 160 82
≥10.0 but <11.1 1.72 0.673 0.337 0.2 168 82
RBC RBC Retic Retic
Precision Precision RBC RBC Carryover Background
Parameter/Unit Range Max %CV Max Diff Carryover Background M/R M/R
RBC x 106 ≥3.2 but <4.0 0.90 0.116 0.038 0.01 591/750 320/750
cells/mL ≥4.0 but <5.0 0.84 0.140 0.046 0.01 591/750 320/750
≥5.0 but <6.2 0.80 0.163 0.054 0.01 591/750 320/750
Parameter Parameter
Precision Precision Parameter Parameter
Parameter/Unit Range Max %CV Max Diff Carryover Background
Hgb g/dL ≥9.9 but <18.0 0.82 0.456 0.29 0.15
MCV fL ≥70 but <104 0.82 2.74 N/A N/A
RDW % ≥10.5 but <15.3 2.25 1.09 N/A N/A
PLT x 103 ≥101 but <401 3.38 37.7 5.5 3
cells/mL
MPV fL ≥6.4 but <11.5 2.25 0.753 N/A N/A
5-Part Diff - LY% 2.74
5-Part Diff - MO% 2.74
5-Part Diff - NE% 3.04
5-Part Diff - EO% 1.44
5-Part Diff - BA% 1.34
Retics ≥0% but <0.5% 15%
≥0.5% but <1.5% 13%
≥1.5% but <4% 10%
≥4% but <15% 5%
PN 4277219B A.1-5
Table A.1-12 Mode-to-Mode Comparison Limits*
Max Diff Limit % Diff Limit

Parameter Max Diff = Abs (Auto-Manual) Percent Diff = Abs (Auto - Manual)/Auto x 100
WBC 0.40 5%
RBC 0.20 2%
HGB 0.30 2%
PLT 20.0 7%
MCV 2.0
RDW 0.7
MPV 0.5†
0.6‡
LY% 4.04 N/A
MO% 4.04 N/A
NE% 4.24 N/A
EO% 2.04 N/A
BA% 2.04 N/A
Ret% 0.50 N/A
*These limits apply to comparisons between whole blood samples ran in both the Automatic
mode and the Manual mode. They do not apply to comparisons between either whole blood
mode and the Prediluted mode available on the LH 750 System, and must not be used for that.
It is the customer’s responsibility to determine if the Prediluted mode results are acceptable.
† Specification for a GEN•S System and for an LH 750 System referenced to an LH 750 System.
‡ Specification for an LH 750 System referenced to a GEN•S System.
Pressure and Vacuum Tolerances

Table A.1-13 Pressure and Vacuum Tolerances
Location Name Nominal Verification Range Adjustment Range

Power Supply 60 psi 60 psi ±1 psi ±0.1
Power Supply 30 psi* 30 psi ±0.1 psi ±0.1
Power Supply 5 psi 5 psi ±0.1 psi ±0.1
Power Supply Vacuum 25 in. Hg ±3 in. Hg N/A
Diluter (back) Sheath (RG4) 6.5 psi 6.30 to 6.70 ±0.2
Diluter (back) Diff sample (RG3) 7.0 psi 6.65 to 7.35 N/A
Diluter (back) Retic sample (RG6) 7.7 psi 6.9 to 8.5 N/A
Diluter (front) Bar-Code Scanner 24 psi ±1 psi ±0.1 psi
Diluter (front) 6 in. Hg 6 in. Hg ±0.1 in. Hg ±0.02 in. Hg
* The tolerance of the 30 psi when checking against a digital pressure meter is 30 ±1.2 psi.
A.1-6 PN 4277219B
A
Sample Conditions/Specifications
Diff and Retic Analysis Conditions
Table A.1-14 Diff Analysis Conditions
Conditions Low Temp Zone Normal Temp Zone High Temp Zone
Temperature Mode Selection Manual Temp Mode* AMC SW1-1 OFF AMC SW1-1 ON AMC SW1-1 OFF
AMC SW1-4 ON AMC SW1-4 OFF AMC SW1-4 OFF
Auto Temp Mode AMC SW1-1 ON† AMC SW1-1 ON† AMC SW1-1 ON†
AMC SW1-4 ON† AMC SW1-4 ON† AMC SW1-4 ON†
Ambient Temperature - pertains to AMC SW1-5 OFF 15.5°C to 21.6°C 20.5°C to 26.1°C 25.0°C to 32.2°C
Auto Temp mode only* 60°F to 71°F‡ 69°F to 79°F‡ 77°F to 90°F‡
AMC SW1-5 ON† 15.5°C to 21.6°C 20.5°C to 28.3°C 27.2°C to 32.2°C
60°F to 71°F‡ 69°F to 83°F‡ 81°F to 90°F‡
Blood Volume 34 µL 34 µL 34 µL
Diff Lytic Reagent Pump Volume 540 µL 540 µL 350 µL
Diff Heater Temperature 100°F to 95°F 85°F to OFF OFF
Incubation Time of Blood and Diff Lytic Reagent 5.3 seconds 3.3 seconds 4.3 seconds
Mixing Time of Blood and Diff Lytic Reagent (after 4.0 seconds 2.0 seconds 3.0 seconds
1.3 seconds of incubation)
Diff Preservative Pump Volume 205 µL 205 µL 134 µL
Mixing Time of Blood, Diff Lytic Reagent, and Preservative 2.5 seconds 2.5 seconds 2.5 seconds
(at start of incubation time)
Incubation Time of Blood, Diff Lytic Reagent, and Diff 8.5 seconds 10.5 seconds 10.5 seconds
Preservative
* The temperature zone used in the Manual Temp mode is determined by the AMC SW1-1 and SW1-4 settings.
The temperature zone used in the Auto Temp mode is determined by the AMC SW1-5 setting and the
associated ambient temperature.
† The default settings for AMC SW1, positions 1, 4 and 5, are both SW1-1 and SW1-4 ON (the Auto Temp mode)
and SW1-5 ON. For a summary of all the AMC SW1 settings, see Tables A.2-1 and A.2-2.
‡ Hysteresis occurs when switching between temperature zones.
The switch from low to normal occurs at 71°F, but the switch back from normal to low occurs at 69°.
The switch from normal to high occurs at 79° or 83°, but the switch back to normal occurs at 77° or 81°F.
Table A.1-15 Retic Analysis Conditions
Conditions Specifications Conditions Specifications

Blood Volume About 2 µL Stain Temperature 100.8 - 110.8° F
Stain Volume 0.2 mL Clearing Solution Volume 2.0 mL
PN 4277219B A.1-7
Diluent/CBC Lytic Reagent Timing
Figure A.1-1 CBC Lytic Reagent and Diluent Delivery Timing

LYSE DELIVERY
TIME
T1 T2 T3
P
R DILUENT SOLENOID ENERGIZED
E
S
S
U
R
E
TIME
T4
DILUENT DELIVERY TIME
7253062E
Table A.1-16 CBC Lytic Reagent and Diluent Delivery Limits
Limits - Limits -
Parameter GEN•S System LH 750 System
30 psi 30 ±0.1 30 ±0.1
Lymph mode average* N/A Pending
Gran mode average† 130 ±30 Pending
T1 - Start diluent to start of CBC lytic reagent 2.15 ±0.05 2.15 ±0.05
T2 - CBC lytic reagent dispensing time 0.75 ±0.10 0.75 ±0.10
T3 - End of CBC lytic reagent to end of diluent 0.5 ±0.15 0.5 ±0.15
T4 - Diluent dispensing time‡ 3.4 ±0.15 3.4 ±0.15
* The lymph mode average must be in the correct location for optimum WBC interference
flagging and for NRBCs. To increase the lymph mode average, you can decrease the lytic
reagent volume slightly (while increasing the diluent volume to keep the dilution ratio
constant), or you can decrease the diluent delivery time, T4.
† The gran mode average is a good indicator of correct lysing, but is difficult to use.
‡ To correct WBC flagging problems (particularly at high temperatures) or high WBC background
counts, try increasing the T4 time by increasing the choke on the diluent dispenser. Slowing
the diluent flow increases the lysing strength and reduces bubbles.
VCS Optimization Limits

Table A.1-17 LATRON Primer Background Limits
Performance Specifications Service Specifications

≤200 ≤100
A.1-8 PN 4277219B
A
Table A.1-18 VCS Pressure Variation Limits
Parameter Nominal Variation during Count Limits Verification Range

Sheath 6.5 ±0.02 6.3 - 6.7 psi
Diff Sample 0.5 ±0.04 0.15 - 0.85 psi
Retic Sample 1.2 ±0.04 0.40 - 2.00 psi
Table A.1-19 Diff/Retic Cell Count Times and Values and Diff Conductivity Noise Limits
Expected Count Time Good Cell Count Max Peak-to-Peak DC

(in Norm Temp mode) Values Conductivity Noise
Norm Temp High Temp

Parameter Calibration Verification Norm Temp Mode Mode Mode
Diff 63/WBC ±1* 63/WBC ±2.5* (M) 7992 ±200 250 mV 350 mV
Retic 65/RBC ±2† 65/RBC ±4.5† (L) 31,768 ±1000 N/A N/A
* Where diff analyzed count is >7,792
† Where retic displayed count is >31,100
Table A.1-20 Diff/Retic TTM Voltage Noise Limits Verification
Diff TTM Voltages Retic TTM Voltages
Static - Static - Static - Static -

Parameter Vac Tube† Solid State‡ Dynamic Parameter Vac Tube† Solid State‡ Dynamic
V (DC) ≤7.5 mV ≤4.5 mV ≤12.0 mV V (DC) ≤7.5 mV ≤4.5 mV ≤12.0 mV
C (RF) ≤15 mV ≤4.5 mV ≤38.0 mV C (RF) ≤15 mV ≤4.5 mV ≤ 38.0 mV
S (LS) ≤3.0 mV ≤3.0 mV ≤4.0 mV S (LS) ≤9.3* mV ≤9.3* mV ≤10.0 mV*
LS Offset See Table A.1-21 LS Offset See Table A.1-21
* Retic Dynamic to Retic Static ≤2 mV
† Specifications for Analytical Stations using a RF Detector card with a vacuum tube.
‡ Specifications for Analytical Stations using a solid state RF Detector card.
Table A.1-21 LS Offset Voltage
Laser Power Diff Maximum Retic Maximum

1.1 - 1.2 mW 0.85 V 0.60 V
1.2 - 1.3 mW 0.90 V 0.65 V
1.3 - 1.4 mW 0.95 V 0.70 V
1.4 - 1.5 mW 1.00 V 0.75 V
1.5 - 1.6 mW 1.05 V 0.80 V
PN 4277219B A.1-9
Table A.1-22 VCS Latex Calibration and Verification Limits
Diff and Retic Diff Retic
Latex Particles DC/RF Results* V (DC) C (RF) S (LS) S - Avg 5 S (LS) S - Avg 5
Calibration Limits† Mean Assay ±1 Assay ±1 N/A N/A N/A N/A
CV% 2.3% 2.3% N/A N/A
Mean to Mode ±2 ±3 N/A N/A
Verification Limits† Mean Assay ±5 Assay ±5 N/A N/A N/A N/A
CV% 2.7% 2.7% N/A N/A
Mean-Mode ±2.5 ±3.5 N/A N/A
Diff and Retic Diff Retic
LATRON Control Results‡ V (DC) C (RF) S (LS) S - Avg 5 S (LS) S - Avg 5

Calibration Limits† Mean N/A N/A Assay ±2 Assay ±0.5 Assay ±4 Assay ±4
CV% N/A N/A 3.8% 3.8%
Mean-Mode N/A N/A -1.2 to +0.6 -2.4 to +1.2
Verification Limits† Mean Assay ±1.1 Assay ±1.4 Assay ±5 Assay ±4 Assay ±10 Assay ±8
CV% 4.5% 6.5% 5% 5%
Mean-Mode ±0.5 ±0.6 -1.3 to +0.7 -2.6 to +1.4
* Use the large latex particles DC/RF to adjust the DC and RF gains. Ensure the diff and retic right count is 800
minimum.
† The limits you should use, calibration or verification, is based on why you are checking the results.
r If you are collecting this data following DC, RF, or LS gain adjustments; as part of VCS optimization; or at
instrument installation; compare the results to the tighter, calibration limits.
r If you are collecting this data for any other reason, compare the results to the verification limits.
‡ Use the LATRON control to adjust the diff and retic LS gains. Ensure the diff and retic right count is 8192 in
less than 20 seconds.
Voltage Limits
Table A.1-23 48 V Check
Location Acceptable Range

CRT backplane, bus bar E2 to E3 45.5 to 50.5 V
Diff Power Supply card, P4, pins 1 and 4 45.5 to 50.5 V
Diluter 1 card, P7, pins 1 and 3 45.5 to 50.5 V
Diluter 4 card, P3, pins 1 and 3 (using TP5 as ground) 45.5 to 50.5 V
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card, P1, pins 1 and 3 45.5 to 50.5 V
A.1-10 PN 4277219B
A
Table A.1-24 AC Line Input Voltage Specifications
Volts Hz ARMS Watts

100 47-63 8.6 860
115 47-63 7.5 860
180 47-63 4.8 860
230 47-63 3.8 860
Table A.1-25 Analyzer Backplane Voltage Test Points
Backplane Voltage Acceptable Range Test Point Ground to Use

Analog +5 V +4.85 to +5.15 Vdc TP2 E1
+15 V +14.70 to +15.30 Vdc TP3 or TP8 E1
-15 V -14.70 to -15.30 Vdc TP4 or TP9 E1
CRT +12 V +11.64 to +12.36 Vdc TP1 E1
+5 V +4.85 to +5.15 Vdc TP2 E1
-15 V -14.70 to -15.30 Vdc TP3 E1
+15 V +14.70 to +15.30 Vdc TP4 E1
Digital -15 V -14.70 to -15.30 Vdc TP5 E1
+15 V +14.70 to +15.30 Vdc TP6 E1
+5 V +4.85 to +5.15 Vdc TP7 E1
+12 V (CRT) +11.64 to +12.36 Vdc TP11 TP12
+5.2 Control V +4.94 to +5.46 Vdc TP17 TP16
Table A.1-26 Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Voltage Ranges on GEN•S System
TP (Diluter 2 Card) Ground R Voltage Adjustment Range Verification Range

TP4 (front sensor out) TP12 R25 Value on front sensor cable ±0.002 V ±0.005 V
TP8 (rear sensor out) TP12 R44 Value on rear sensor cable ±0.002 V ±0.005 V
TP3 (front sensor in) TP12 <7.50 Vdc
TP7 (rear sensor in) TP12 <7.50 Vdc
TP11 (blood detector TP12 R57 1.1 x (maximum threshold ±0.002 V ±0.005 V
threshold) adjustment value, T1 or T2,
calculated under Heading 4.55)
Table A.1-27 Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Voltage Ranges on LH 750 System
TP (Diluter 2 Card) Ground R Voltage Adjustment Range Verification Range

TP4 (front sensor out) TP12 R25 10X value on front sensor cable ±0.02 V ±0.05 V
TP8 (rear sensor out) TP12 R44 10X value on rear sensor cable ±0.02 V ±0.05 V
TP11 (blood detector TP12 R57 1.1 x (maximum threshold ±0.002 V ±0.005 V
threshold) adjustment value, T1 or T2,
calculated under Heading 4.55)
PN 4277219B A.1-11
Table A.1-28 Clog Detector Threshold Voltage - For RF Detector Preamp Card with Vacuum Tube
TP (RF Detector Preamp Card) Ground R Voltage Adjustment Range Verification Range
TP2 TP4 R44 3.5 ±0.1 V ±0.2 V
Table A.1-29 Diluter Card Voltage Test Points
Card Voltage Acceptable Range Test Points Ground to Use

Diluter 1 (original +5.00 V +4.75 to +5.25 Vdc TP23 TP27
card, old Diluter
+15.30 V +14.535 to +16.065 Vdc TP24 TP27
interconnects)
-15.30 V -14.535 to -16.065 Vdc TP25 TP27
+6.0 V +5.52 to +6.48 Vdc TP26 TP27
+9.00 V +8.55 to +9.45 Vdc TP22 TP27
-9.00 V -8.55 to -9.45 Vdc TP20 TP27
-5.00 V -4.775 to -5.225 Vdc TP17 TP27
Diluter 1 (new +5.00 V +4.75 to +5.25 Vdc TP2 TP5
card, new Diluter +15.30 V +14.61 to +15.98 Vdc TP3 TP5
interconnects)
-15.30 V -14.61 to -15.98 Vdc TP1 TP5
+7.2 V +6.94 to +7.46 TP4 TP5
+9.00 V +8.55 to +9.45 Vdc * *
-9.00 V -8.55 to -9.45 Vdc * *
-5.00 V -4.775 to -5.225 Vdc * *
Diff Power Supply +6.30 V +5.922 to +6.678 Vdc C19
WARNING High voltage present that can cause injury from electrical shock. Use caution when
measuring the +300 Vdc.
+300 V +282 to +318 Vdc C12

+12.0 V +11.40 to +12.60 Vdc C8
+15.0 V +14.325 to +15.675 Vdc C22
-15.0 V -14.325 to -15.675 Vdc C13
Diluter 4 +24.0 V +22.92 to +25.08 Vdc TP8 TP5
+15.0 V +14.325 to +15.675 Vdc TP16 TP5
-15.0 V -14.325 to -15.675 Vdc TP17 TP5
+12.0 V +11.22 to +12.78 Vdc TP4 TP5
+5.00 V +4775 to +5.225 Vdc TP14 TP5
* The new Diluter 1 card does not have test points for verifying these voltage specifications.
A.1-12 PN 4277219B
A
Table A.1-30 Hgb Voltage Limits
Parameter Range
Hgb Preamp Output Voltage 8.5 V to 9.5 V
Hgb Blank 7.5 V to 9.5 V
Hgb Sample 7.5 V to 9.5 V
Abs (Blank - Sample) ≤0.07 V
Volume Specifications
Pumps
ATTENTION: If you have a question about the procedure for checking the volume,
troubleshooting, or replacing a pump, refer to the procedure for that pump in Chapter 4.
The following is a checklist to use when testing the volume of a pump.
1. Always prime the Diluter by doing a startup cycle immediately before doing any pump
volume tests. If necessary, prime the individual pumps by using the appropriate
F-function.
2. Always prime the extension tubing using the appropriate F-function before measuring
the pump volume and ensure you include the last drop on the tubing in the
measurement.
3. Use the volume measurement test points to aid in troubleshooting:
r Use the delivery endpoint to check the reagent volume at the delivery point,
checking both the pump and the reagent pathway.
r Use the pump output to check the reagent volume delivered by the pump only.
4. Compare the volume measurements to the verification range. If the volume is:
r Within limits, no adjustment is necessary
r Above the limits, adjust the pump
r Below the limits, ensure there is no problem in the reagent pathway before adjusting
the pump.
5. If the reagent pathway is clear and either you cannot adjust the pump to within the
adjustment range or the pump does not hold its adjustment, replace the pump.
Table A.1-31 summarizes the information needed for checking the volume of a pump and for
troubleshooting the pump.
PN 4277219B A.1-13
Table A.1-31 Pump Volume Tolerances
Pump Function
Reference Designator/ to Test Point for Test Point for Pump Verification Adjustment
Name Dispense Delivery Endpoint Pump Output Volume* Range Range
PM1 F21 Polyurethane tubing Tubing at FF101 0.140 g ±0.015† ±0.010†
Diff Preservative from VL45 (NC) at above SL60 or
connection to 0.134 mL†
Low Volume I-beam tubing
PM1 F22 Polyurethane tubing Tubing at FF101 0.214 g ±0.015† ±0.010†
Diff Preservative from VL45 (NC) at above SL60 or
connection to 0.205 mL†
High Volume
I-beam tubing
PM2 F32 Input lines on sides I-beam tubing at 10 g ±0.10 ±0.02
RBC Diluent Dispenser of RBC bath FF1 above VL8
PM3 F33 Input lines on sides I-beam tubing at 6g ±0.05 ±0.01

WBC Diluent Dispenser of WBC bath FF7 above VL7
PM4 F23 Tubing from VL65 at Tubing at FF3 0.350 g† ±0.015 ±0.010
Diff Lytic Reagent top of mixing above SL63
chamber
Low Volume
PM4 F24 Tubing from VL65 at Tubing at FF3 0.540 g† ±0.020† ±0.015†
Diff Lytic Reagent top of mixing above SL63
chamber
High Volume
PM5 F25 Tubing from VL89B Tubing at FF171 0.200 g ±0.006† ±0.002†
Stain at top of stain from VL99
chamber
PM6 F26 Tubing from VL95A Output tubing 2.00 g ±0.04 ±0.01
Retic Clearing Solution at top of stain from VL98
chamber
PM7 F27 Input lines on sides Tubing at FF127 1.06 g ±0.04 ±0.01
CBC Lytic Reagent of WBC bath above PM7
PM9 Manual - 0.205 g ±0.010 ±0.002

Aspiration mode
activator
Manual Mode
PM9 START / 0.285 g ±0.010 ±0.002
Aspiration CONT
Automatic Mode
PM10 F13 N/A Tubing at FF129 2.00 g +0.50 N/A
Cleaning Agent above VL47 -0.2
* For all reagent volumes except the diff preservative, 1 g is equal to 1 mL. The gram to volume equivalency is different for
diff preservative because of its specific gravity (1.042).
†The optimal diff lytic reagent pump and diff preservative pump volumes are dependent on the strength of the reagent lot.
Therefore no absolute target value gives optimum performance, only a target range. In the field, the pump volumes are
adjusted to give high good counts (>8000) indicating sufficient lysing of the red cells along with low conductivity noise.
For example if the strength of the diff lytic reagent is weak, the diff lytic reagent pump is adjusted to dispense enough
reagent to sufficiently lyse all the red cells and then the diff preservative is adjusted to minimize the conductivity noise.
A.1-14 PN 4277219B
ANALYZER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS A
A.2 ANALYZER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
AMC
Figure A.2-1 AMC Component Locations
E58 E29
E57 E35
E36
E11 E6
E69 E67
E68
E25
E24
E53 E52 E23
E54 E50 BATTERY
E51 E5
E10 E4
E71 E72
E70
PWB NO. 1713187E
SW1 E44 E21 E18 E9 E3 E66 E65

6498034A E43
E17 E8
Jumpers
To enable the battery, set jumpers E4-E5, E18-E21 and E3-E9. If present, also set jumpers
E67-E68 and E70-E71.
Switch
Table A.2-1 AMC Switch, SW1, Settings
Positions/Settings
Default 1 - ON 2 - OFF 3 - OFF 4 - ON 5 - ON 6 - OFF 7 - OFF 8 - OFF

Options Temperature SlideMaker Language Temperature Temperature Transition Not used Not used Not used
GEN•S Selection, see Present OFF=English Selection, see ON=Low-norm at 69°-71°F; Must be Must be Must be
System Table A.2-2 OFF=No ON=Not valid Table A.2-2 Norm-high at 81°-83°F OFF OFF OFF
SlideMaker OFF=Low-norm at 69°-71°F
ON=SlideMaker Norm-high at 77°- 79°F
present
Options Temperature SlideMaker Shutdown Temperature Temperature Transition Not used Not used Not used
LH 750 Selection, see Present reset flag Selection, see ON=Low-norm at 69°-71°F; Must be Must be Must be
System Table A.2-2 OFF=No OFF=Norm Table A.2-2 Norm-high at 81°-83°F OFF OFF OFF
SlideMaker ON=Reset OFF=Low-norm at 69°-71°F
ON=SlideMaker flag Norm-high at 77°- 79°F
present
PN 4277219B A.2-1
ANALYZER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
Table A.2-2 AMC Card Switch, SW1, Temperature Selection
SW1, Position 1 SW1, Position 4 Selection Analyzer Display (Under Mode)

ON ON Automatic (Default Settings) None
OFF ON Low Temperature /1
ON OFF Normal Temperature /2
OFF OFF High Temperature /3
API - SIGNAL GENERATOR Card

Figure A.2-2 API Card Component Locations
SW2 SW1
PWB NO.. 1713109D

7253284A
Switches
Table A.2-3 API Card Switch, SW1, Settings
Positions/Settings
Default 1- OFF 2 - ON 3 - OFF 4 - OFF 5 - OFF 6 - OFF 7 - OFF 8 - ON

Options Test Pulse Width Not used Not used Not used Not used Internal Use ON=Normal
Selection Must be OFF Must be OFF Must be OFF Must be OFF OFF=Test Mode
Table A.2-4 API Card Switch, SW2, Settings
Positions/Settings
Default 1- OFF 2 - OFF 3 - OFF 4 - OFF 5 - OFF 6 - OFF 7 - OFF 8 - OFF

Options Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used
Must be OFF Must be OFF Must be OFF Must be OFF Must be OFF Must be OFF Must be OFF Must be OFF
A.2-2 PN 4277219B
BD ADJ Card
Figure A.2-3 BD ADJ Card Component Locations
P W B N O . 1 7 1 3 7 3 1 A R 2 5
A S S Y N O . 6 7 0 7 2 0 4
T P 4
R 4 4
T P 8
T P 1
J 1 T P 5
R 5 7
T P 1 1
J 2
T P 1 2
6 4 9 8 2 1 3 B
Connectors
Table A.2-5 BD ADJ Card Connectors
J No. Connects to: J No. Connects to:

J1 Diluter 2 card, J12 J2 Oscilloscope. Not connected except
during CBC lytic reagent and diluent
delivery timing check.
Test Points and Adjustments
Table A.2-6 Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Adjustments
Functions Front Detector* Rear Detector* Ground

Sensor Output TP4 TP8 TP12
Sensor Adjust R25 R44
Sensor Input TP3 TP7 TP12
Sample Hold Circuit Output TP1 TP5 TP12
Threshold Value TP11 TP12
Threshold Adjust R57
* For adjustment ranges on the LH 750 System, see Table A.1-27.
PN 4277219B A.2-3
COMM INTERFACE Card

Figure A.2-4 COMM INTERFACE Card Component Locations
SW2 SW1
PWB NO. 1713148D

7253101B
Switches
Table A.2-7 COMM INTERFACE Card Switch, SW1, Settings
Positions/Settings
Default 1 - ON 2 - OFF 3 (See below) 4 - OFF 5 - OFF 6 - OFF 7 - OFF 8 - OFF

Options # Tube/Cass Bar code Stop at 3 ID3 Tube label CD8 CD4 Not used
GEN•S ON=12 tubes OFF=Codabar voteouts OFF=Disabled checksum OFF=Disabled OFF=Disabled Must be
System OFF=10 tubes ON=NW7 ON=Enabled ON=Enabled OFF=Enabled ON=Enabled ON=Enabled OFF.
OFF=Disabled ON=Disabled
Default ON
Options # Tube/Cass Bar code Not used Not used Tube label Not used Not used Not used
LH 750 ON=12 tubes OFF=Codabar Must be OFF. Must be OFF. checksum Must be OFF. Must be OFF. Must be
System OFF=10 tubes ON=NW7 Default OFF OFF=Enabled OFF.
ON=Disabled
Table A.2-8 COMM INTERFACE Card Switch, SW2, Settings
Positions/Settings
Default 1 - OFF 2 - OFF 3 - OFF 4 - OFF 5 - OFF 6 - OFF 7 - OFF 8 - OFF

Options for HAL cal factors Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used
stand-alone OFF=Disabled Must be Must be Must be Must be Must be Must be OFF. Must be
System ON=Enabled OFF. OFF. OFF. OFF. OFF. OFF.
Must be OFF.
Options for HAL cal factors Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used
System modified OFF=Disabled Must be Must be Must be Must be Must be Must be OFF. Must be
for lab ON=Enabled OFF. OFF. OFF. OFF. OFF. OFF.
automation - HAL Must be ON.
A.2-4 PN 4277219B
CRT4 Display Card (In Scope Module)
Figure A.2-5 CRT4 Display Card Component Locations
SW1
1713202D 7253279A
Switch
Table A.2-9 CRT4 Display Card Switch, SW1, Settings
Positions/Settings
Default 1- OFF 2 - OFF 3 - OFF 4 - OFF 5 - ON 6 - ON 7 - ON 8 - OFF

Options for Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Keyboard Scope Beeper Not used.
GEN•S System Must be OFF Must be Must be Must be ON=New ON=Installed ON=New Must be
OFF OFF OFF OFF=Old OFF=None OFF=Old OFF
Options for Dual calibration Raw data Raw data Not used. Keyboard Scope Beeper CRT vert
stand alone OFF=Disabled accum accum Must be ON=New ON=Installed ON=New freq cntrl
LH 750 System ON=Enabled speed* criteria† OFF OFF=Old OFF=None OFF=Old OFF=60 HZ
Must be OFF OFF= Norm OFF= All ON=50 Hz
ON=Fast ON=Any
Options for Dual calibration Raw data Raw data Not used. Keyboard Scope Beeper CRT vert
LH 750 System OFF=Disabled accum accum Must be ON=New ON=Installed ON=New freq cntrl
modified for ON=Enabled speed* criteria† OFF OFF=Old OFF=None OFF=Old OFF=60 HZ
lab automation Must be ON OFF= Norm OFF= All ON=50 Hz
- HAL ON=Fast ON=Any
* Normal means using the same histogram minimum stop count as the GEN•S System. Fast is for research use
and is only available on the LH 750 System.
† All means all three apertures must reach FE before the channelizing is stopped. Any is for research use only.
PN 4277219B A.2-5
DIFF PROCESSOR Card

Figure A.2-6 DIFF PROCESSOR Card Component Locations
PWB NO. 1713392B
SW1
7253351A
Switch
Table A.2-10 DIFF PROCESSOR Card Switch, SW1, Settings
Positions/Settings
Default 1- OFF 2 - OFF 3 - OFF 4 - OFF 5 - OFF 6 - OFF 7 - OFF 8 - OFF

Options Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used
Must be Must be Must be Must be Must be Must be Must be Must be
OFF. OFF. OFF. OFF. OFF. OFF OFF OFF.
A.2-6 PN 4277219B
DILUTER CPU Card
Figure A.2-7 DILUTER CPU Card Component Locations
S W 1 X 2
U 2
X 1
K e y p a d
p re s e n t
J 5
P W B 1 7 1 3 7 2 2 B
A S S Y 6 7 0 7 1 7 3
X 3
6 4 9 8 2 1 5 B
Connector
J5 connects to the Keypad and Display Interface card on the LH 750 System.
LED
KEYPAD PRESENT lights when the numeric keypad is connected.
Switches
Table A.2-11 DILUTER CPU Card Switch, SW1, Settings
Positions/Settings
Default 1 - OFF 2 - OFF 3 - OFF 4 - ONF 5 - ON 6 - OFF 7 - OFF 8 - OFF
Options for HAL Not SmartStartä Sweep-flow Random Analytical BD3 Reset Diluter
stand automation used Recognition reservoir level access Station OFF=Disabled table†
alone delay* Must OFF=Enabled monitoring OFF=Disabled timing cycles ON=Enabled OFF=Enabled
LH 750 OFF=Delay be OFF. On=Disabled OFF=Disabled ON=Enabled for Must be OFF On=Disabled
System ON=No delay ON=Enabled SlideMaker Must be OFF
without Must be OFF OFF=Disabled
SlideMaker ON=Enabled
Must be OFF.
* Adds a 2 second delay after piercing the tube in LH 750 Systems used with the HAL lab automated system.
† Disables the full reset. Use for installation and troubleshooting purposes only. Should always be left in the OFF (enabled)
position.
PN 4277219B A.2-7
Table A.2-11 DILUTER CPU Card Switch, SW1, Settings
Positions/Settings
Default 1 - OFF 2 - OFF 3 - OFF 4 - ONF 5 - ON 6 - OFF 7 - OFF 8 - OFF
Options for HAL Not SmartStartä Sweep-flow Random Analytical BD3 Reset Diluter
stand automation used Recognition reservoir level access Station OFF=Disabled table†
alone delay* Must OFF=Enabled monitoring OFF=Disabled timing cycles ON=Enabled OFF=Enabled
LH 750 OFF=Delay be OFF. On=Disabled OFF=Disabled ON=Enabled for Must be ON On=Disabled
System ON=No delay ON=Enabled SlideMaker Must be OFF
with Must be OFF OFF=Disabled
SlideMaker ON=Enabled
Must be OFF.
Options HAL Not SmartStartä Sweep-flow Random Analytical BD3 Reset Diluter
for LH 750 automation used Recognition reservoir level access Station ON=Enabled table†
System delay* Must OFF=Enabled monitoring OFF=Disabled timing cycles OFF=Disabled OFF=Enabled
modified OFF=Delay be OFF. On=Disabled OFF=Disabled ON=Enabled for Must be ON On=Disabled
for lab ON=No delay ON=Enabled SlideMaker Must be OFF
automation Must be ON OFF=Disabled
HAL - ON=Enabled
without Must be OFF.
SlideMaker
Options HAL Not SmartStartä Sweep-flow Random Analytical BD3 Reset Diluter
for LH 750 automation used Recognition reservoir level access Station ON=Enabled table†
System delay* Must OFF=Enabled monitoring OFF=Disabled timing cycles OFF=Disabled OFF=Enabled
modified OFF=Delay be OFF. On=Disabled OFF=Disabled ON=Enabled for Must be ON On=Disabled
for lab ON=No delay ON=Enabled SlideMaker Must be OFF
automation Must be ON OFF=Disabled
HAL - with ON=Enabled
SlideMaker Must be ON.
* Adds a 2 second delay after piercing the tube in LH 750 Systems used with the HAL lab automated system.
† Disables the full reset. Use for installation and troubleshooting purposes only. Should always be left in the OFF (enabled)
position.
A.2-8 PN 4277219B
DILUTER PROCESSOR Card
Figure A.2-8 DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Component Locations
PWB NO. 17130950D
SW1
7253402B
Switches
Table A.2-12 DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Switch, SW1, Settings
Positions/Settings
Default 1 - OFF 2 - OFF 3 - OFF 4* 5 - ON 6 - OFF 7 - OFF 8 - OFF
Options Not used Not used SmartStartä Not used Not used Analytical BD3 Not used
for GEN•S Must be OFF Must be Recognition Station timing OFF=Disabled Must be
System OFF OFF=Enabled cycles for ON=Enabled OFF
without On=Disabled SlideMaker Must be OFF
SlideMaker OFF=Disabled
SW 2C/3A ON=Enabled
Must be OFF.
Options Not used Not used SmartStartä Not used Not used Analytical BD3 Not used
for GEN•S Must be OFF Must be Recognition Station timing ON=Enabled Must be
System OFF OFF=Enabled cycles for OFF=Disabled OFF
with On=Disabled SlideMaker Must be ON
SlideMaker OFF=Disabled
SW 2C/3A ON=Enabled
Must be ON.
* For GEN•S Systems with SW 2C/3A and lower, the default setting is OFF. For GEN•S Systems with SW 4A and
higher and for all LH 750 Systems, the default setting is ON.
PN 4277219B A.2-9
Table A.2-12 DILUTER PROCESSOR Card Switch, SW1, Settings (Continued)
Positions/Settings
Default 1 - OFF 2 - OFF 3 - OFF 4* 5 - ON 6 - OFF 7 - OFF 8 - OFF
Options HAL system Not used SmartStartä Sweep-flow Not used Analytical BD3 Not used
for GEN•S OFF=Disabled Must be Recognition reservoir level Station timing OFF=Disabled Must be
System ON=Enabled OFF OFF=Enabled monitoring cycles for ON=Enabled OFF
without On=Disabled OFF=Disabled SlideMaker Must be OFF
SlideMaker ON=Enabled OFF=Disabled
SW 4A ON=Enabled
Must be OFF
Options HAL system Not used SmartStartä Sweep-flow Not used Analytical BD3 Not used
for GEN•S OFF=Disabled Must be Recognition reservoir level Station timing ON=Enabled Must be
System ON=Enabled OFF OFF=Enabled monitoring cycles for OFF=Disabled OFF
with On=Disabled OFF=Disabled SlideMaker Must be ON
SlideMaker ON=Enabled OFF=Disabled
SW 4A ON=Enabled
Must be ON
* For GEN•S Systems with SW 2C/3A and lower, the default setting is OFF. For GEN•S Systems with SW 4A and
higher and for all LH 750 Systems, the default setting is ON.
A.2-10 PN 4277219B
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2
Figure A.2-9 RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 Jumper Locations and Settings
E 3 9 E 3 8 E 6
E 4 E 5
E 2 7 E 2 6 E 3
E 2 4 E 2 1 E 2 0
E 1 2 E 1 1
E 2 5 E 2 3
E 1 9 E 1 7 E 1 6
E 1 0 E 9
E 2 2 E 1 8
E 1 5 E 1 4 E 1 3
E 8 E 7
A S S Y N O . 6 7 0 7 0 9 9
E 2
P W B N O . 1 7 1 3 6 8 2 B
E 1
6 4 9 8 2 1 9 B
X 1
PN 4277219B A.2-11
R/W/P SC/A Card

Figure A.2-10 R/W/P SC/A Card Component Locations
P W B N O . 1 7 1 3 6 6 4 B
A S S Y N O . 6 7 0 7 0 6 7
J 2
P 2
6 4 9 8 2 1 6 B
Connectors
Table A.2-13 R/W/P SC/A Card Connectors
P No. Connects to: J No. Connects to:

P2 Six-Channel Preamp card, P2 J2 Not connected. Provides test points for
checking the card.
A.2-12 PN 4277219B
DILUTER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS A
A.3 DILUTER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
Bar-Code Decoder Card
Figure A.3-1 Bar-Code Decoder Card Component Locations
TC5516AP - 2
JAPAN 8614HBK
147 - 1125P - 12 - 4338
MC6803U4P - 1
7K
TM68724
J2
J1 B E E P E R
C O N N E C T
7253318A TP 5 T
P
5 P3
Note: This illustration shows the Bar-Code Decoder card for the
LED bar-code reader. The Bar-Code Decoder card for the laser
bar-code reader looks very similar but does not have a TP5.
Connectors
Table A.3-1 Bar-Code Decoder Card Connectors

J1 Bar-Code Scanner card J2 Diluter 1 card
Jumper
To enable beeper, install jumper on P3.
PN 4277219B A.3-1
DILUTER CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
Diff Power Supply Card

Figure A.3-2 Diff Power Supply Card Component Locations
J5
J3
J4
J2
J1
J6
7253382A
Connectors
Table A.3-2 Diff Power Supply Card Connectors

J1 Laser Reference 4 card J4 Backplane Voltage Bus
J2 Laser Interlock Switch J5 RF Detector Preamp card, J69
RS/Opto Intfc card, J9
J3 Diluter 1 card, J2 J6 Diluter 1 card, J9
RS/Opto Intfc card, J4
A.3-2 PN 4277219B
Diluter 1 Card
Figure A.3-3 Diluter 1 Card Component Locations (Used with Old Diluter Interconnects)
J7 PWB NO. 1713120D J9
TP26 TP27
J8 TP24
J1
TP25
65 4
X6
(Jumped) 98 7
RS485
MODULE TP22 12 11 10
TP21
J4 15 14 13
J6 TP20
TP23
J3
TP17 LEDS
1
J2 2
X5 3
BEEPER 4
(Jumped)
VOLUME 5
X4 JUMPERS 6
(Jumped) X1L 7
X2M 8
J5 X3H 9
6498224B
10
Figure A.3-4 Diluter 1 Card Component Locations (Used with New Diluter Interconnects)t
J 7 J 9
X 2
J 8
T P 5
J P 2
J 1 1 3
J P 1
1 3
J P 4
J 6
1 3
J P 3
J 3
1 3
J 2
LEDS
1
J 5 2
3
4
5
T P 2
6
P W B N O . 1 7 1 3 7 2 5 B A S S Y N O . 6 7 0 7 1 7 7 7
8
T P 1 9
B e e p e r H 10
T P 4 T P 3
X 1 v o lu m e M
6 4 9 8 2 1 4 B L
PN 4277219B A.3-3
Connectors
Table A.3-3 Diluter 1 Card Connectors

J1 RS/Opto Intfc card, J7 J6 Bar-Code Decoder card, J2
J2 Diff Power Supply card, J3 J7 +48 Vdc voltage backplane
J3 RF Detector Preamp card, J104 J8 Not used
J4 Not used J9 Diff Power Supply card, J6
J5 Sensor Distribution card, J5
LEDs
Table A.3-4 Diluter 1 Card LEDs
LED Name Lights when: LED Name Lights when:

CR1 RFON RF voltage is on CR6 BEEP Keypad beeps. Occurs (for
hearing impaired)
CR2 PROBEIN BSV probe in CR7 +5V OK +5 Vdc within limits
CR3 CLGERR Flow cell clog error detected CR8 +15V OK +15 Vdc within limits
CR4 HAND Hand detector is not obstructed CR9 -15V OK -15 Vdc within limits
CR5 SWSCAN Switch scan (blinking) CR10 HGB OK Hgb voltage within limits
A.3-4 PN 4277219B
Diluter 2 Card
Figure A.3-5 Diluter 2 Card Component Locations (GEN•S System SW3A or Lower, without SlideMaker)
RS485
J8 a b
MODULE
a
TP18
SCAN J7
DWSEN X1
UPSEN
X2
BLC 12 13
BUTH
IBTH 14 15 16
X3
PART
NOBL J6
CARRY 10 11
J5
BUBB
X4
b
TP14
WASTE 17 18 19
LEDIF J4 X6
GHOST TP13
STAIN
4 5 6
PAKP
PAK TP12
CLZ J2
ISO PWB NO. 1713121D
BACK TP8
SHTH R57 TP11 TP5 TP1 X7 R44 R25 X5 J1 J3 TP3 TP4 TP7
7253097D
7 8 9 1 2 3
Figure A.3-6 Diluter 2 Card Component Locations (GEN•S System SW3A or Lower, with or without
SlideMaker)
X7 X2
a b
a J8 TP22 TP21 7 8 9 14 15 16 TP16 R44
SCAN RS485 X9 X6
DWSEN TP19 MODULE
UPSEN 29 22 23 3 28 4
BLC TP20 J7
BUTH
IBTH TP23
PART X1 TP17
NOBL
CARRY 12 13 J6
BUBB
X3
J5
b
X4 X5
10 11 X8
WASTE
LEDIF TP18 17 18 19 1 26 2 27 20 21
GHOST J4
STAIN TP15 TP7
PAKP TP13 TP6
PAK
CLZ TP9 TP8
ISO TP4
TP10 PWB NO. 1713523 J2
BACK
SHTH
R57 TP11 TP14 TP5 TP1 R25 R163 TP2 TP3 TP24 J9 J1 J3 TP12
X10
7253426E
24 25 30
PN 4277219B A.3-5
Figure A.3-7 Diluter 2 REL Card Component Locations)

J8 a b J1 0
T P 1 2 P W B N O . 1 7 1 3 7 1 4 A a
T P 4 A S S Y N O . 6 7 0 7 1 5 8
R 2 5 SCAN
T P 8 J7
DWSEN
T P 1 1 UPSEN
T P 3 BLC
T P 7 R 4 4 BUTH
T P 1 R 5 7 J1 1 IBTH
T P 5 PART
NOBL
E 1 2 E 1 3 CARRY
J6
BUBB
J5 b
WASTE
LEDIF
E 1 0 E 1 1 GHOST
STAIN
J4 PAKP
PAK
CLZ
E 7 E 8 E 9 ISO
J3
BACK
J1 SHTH
J2
E 2 9 E 3 E 2 7 E 1
J9
E 1 7 E 1 8 E 1 9 E 2 4 E 2 5 E 3 0 E 2 2 E 2 8 E 2 0 E 2 6
6 4 9 8 2 1 8 B E 2 3 E 4 E 2 1 E 2
Note: For this Diluter 2 card the bubble/blood detector adjustment test points are located on the upper left edge.
Figure A.3-8 Diluter 2 RBD Card Component Locations
J 8 a b J 1 0
a
T P 1 2 P W B N O . 1 7 1 3 7 3 2 A
S C A N A S S Y N O . 6 7 0 7 2 0 7
T P 4 J 7
D W S E N T P 8
U P S E N
B L C T P 1 7
B U T H T P 1 1
IB T H T P 1
P A R T T P 5 J 1 1
N O B L
C A R R Y
B U B B E 1 3 J 6
b E 1 2 J 5
W A S T E
L E D IF
G H O S T J 4
S T A IN E 1 0 E 1 1
P A K P
P A K J 1 2
C L Z J 3
IS O
B A C K J 1
S H T H J 2
6 4 9 8 2 1 7 B
J 9
Note: For this Diluter 2 card the bubble/blood detector adjustment test points are relocated onto the BD ADJ card.
A.3-6 PN 4277219B
Connectors

J1 Front bubble/blood detector J7 Diluter Cbl Adapter card (IBUS), J3
J2 Probe-wipe interconnect, J2 J8 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card, J4
J3 Rear bubble/blood detector J9* BD3 (available on all Diluter 2 cards except the
original)
J4 Diluter 4 card, J2 J10 Sweep-flow reservoir float sensor
J5 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card, J2 J11 Diluter solenoids
J6 Reservoir Interface card, J1 J12 BD ADJ card, J1
* For Systems with a SlideMaker
LEDs
Name Lights when: Name Lights when:

SCAN Switch scan active (blinking) WASTE Waste container full
DWSEN Probe wipe down LEDIF CBC lyse reservoir empty
UPSEN Probe wipe up GHOST Retic clear reservoir empty
BLC Blood comparator signal STAIN Retic stain reservoir empty
BUTH Bubble threshold signal PAKP Pak preserve reservoir empty
IBTH ISOTON® diluent-blood threshold signal PAK Diff lyse reservoir empty
PART Aspiration error - front to rear failure CLZ Cleaning agent reservoir empty
NOBL Aspiration error - no blood detected ISO Diluent reservoir empty
CARRY Aspiration error - carryover detected BACK Backwash tank empty
BUBB Aspiration error - bubbles detected SHTH Sheath tank empty

ATTENTION: These test points and adjustments are not available on the Diluter 2 RBD card.
Table A.3-7 Bubble/Blood Detector Test Points and Adjustments on the Diluter 2 Card
Functions Front Detector* Rear Detector* Ground

Sensor Output TP4 TP8 TP12
Sensor Adjust R25 R44
Sensor Input TP3 TP7 TP12
Sample Hold Circuit Output TP1 TP5 TP12
Threshold Value TP11 TP12
Threshold Adjust R57
*For adjustment ranges, see Table A.1-26.
PN 4277219B A.3-7
Diluter 3 Card
Figure A.3-9 Diluter 3 Card Component Locations Figure A.3-10 Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface Card
Component Locations
J1 J7 J1 J7
RS485 RS485
J13 INTERFACE J13 INTERFACE
TP 3 MODULE TP 3 MODULE
TP 7 TP 7
TP 4 TP 4
J2 TP 6 J2 TP 6
SW SW
J3 SCAN J3 SCAN
LED LED
J4 J4
J5 TP 2
TP1 J5 J17
TP 1
J6 J6 J19
J12 J12
J10 J10
J11 J11
J16 J16 TP8
J15 J8 J8
J15
TP12
PWB NO. 1713181C 7253095E PWB NO. 1713514D 7253425D
TP11
Figure 1.3-11 Diluter 3 LH Card Component Locations
J1 J7
J13 TP3
R5485
Interface TP4
module TP7
TP6
J2
J20
J21
J3 J23
TP2
J22
J18
J4 J28
J27
J5
TP1 J17
J6 J19
E12
E13 J12
J10
J11 J26
TP8 J24
J16 J25
J8
J15
PWB NO. 1713740A
ASSY NO. 6707231
7219043B
A.3-8 PN 4277219B
Connectors

J1 Diluter Cbl Adapter card (IBUS), J1 J12 MF13
J2* SlideMaker J13 RS/Opto Intfc card, J1 (SlideMaker)
J3 MF11, J11 J15 Miscellaneous solenoids, MF1
J4 MF6, J11 J16 Solenoid 21 and J73 (diff mix motor)
J5 MF9, J11 J17* J1/MF6 on the Sample Access and Reservoir

module
J6 MF16 (Retic module), J11 J18
J7 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card, J3 J19* SOL120
J8 MF4 (backwash manifold), J14 J20 Diluter 3 LH card only: J20 on the Random
Access module.
J10 MF18 (Retic module), J10 J21 Diluter 3 LH card only: For future use.
J11 MF17, J5 J22 - Diluter 3 LH card only: Test equipment. Used

J28 for in-house testing only.
* For instruments with a SlideMaker
PN 4277219B A.3-9
Diluter 4 Card
Figure A.3-12 Diluter 4 Card Component Locations
J1 PWB NO. 1713407C
CR9
CR8
TP11
J3
TP10
R91
U10
J2
R47
TP3
J5
TP13
TP12
J4
7253096A
CR5 CR6 CR7
Connectors

J1 Peltier module, J1 J4 Diluter ambient temperature sensor
J2 Diluter 2 card, J4 J5 Stain chamber heater, J1, and diff heater, J30
J3 Backplane voltage bus
LEDs

CR5 5DIFFON Diff heater on CR8 HEAT Peltier module heating
CR6 +12 V +12 V within specifications CR9 COOL Peltier module cooling
CR7 STAINON Stain chamber heater on
A.3-10 PN 4277219B
Table A.3-11 Diluter 4 Card Test Points and Adjustments
Test Points and Adjustment Verification

Function Adjustments Ground Limits Limits
Stain Heater Setpoint TP10 TP13 8.15 V ±0.01 8.15 V ±0.02
Stain Heater Setpoint Adjustment R91
Ambient Temperature Voltage TP12 TP13
Peltier Temperature Voltage TP11 TP13
Diff Heater Temperature Voltage TP3 TP13
Diluter Cbl Adapter Card

Figure A.3-13 Diluter Cbl Adapter Card Component Location
J1 J2 J3 J4
1
26
1
26
1
26
1
Left 26
PWB NO. 1713108C

Door of
Diluter
J1
J2
J3
J4
25
50
25
50
25
50
25
50
7253104A
Connectors
Table A.3-12 Diluter Cbl Adapter Card Connectors

J1 Diluter 3 card, J1 J3 Diluter 2 card, J7
J2 System Power Controller card, J1 J4 RS/Opto Intfc card, J8
PN 4277219B A.3-11
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card

Figure A.3-14 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Component Locations
PWB NO. 1713118G J1
TP6
TP5
TP3
CR5
CR4
TP4
CR3
TP2
CR2
CR1
TP7
7253098A
J4 J5 TP1 J2 J3
Connectors
Table A.3-13 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Connectors

J1 Backplane Voltage Bus J4 Diluter 2 card, J8
J2 Diluter 2 card, J5, and solid state RF J5 Not used

Detector Preamp card
J3 Diluter 3 card, J7
LEDs
Table A.3-14 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card LEDs

CR1 +5V +5 V is not present CR4 -15V -15 V is not present
CR2 -5V_OPT +5 V optics is not present CR5 +24V +24 V is not present
CR3 +15V +15 V is not present
A.3-12 PN 4277219B
Test Points
Table A.3-15 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply Card Test Points
Test Point Voltage Ground to Use

TP1 +24 V TP3, analog ground
TP2 +15 V TP3, analog ground
TP4 -15 V TP3, analog ground
TP5 +5 V TP6, digital ground
TP7 Not used Not used
Keyboard and Display Interface Card (GEN•S System)

Figure A.3-15 Keyboard and Display Interface Card Component Locations on the GEN•S System
R3 J2 J5 J1
PWB 1713105
J3
6498055A
Connectors
Table A.3-16 Keyboard and Display Interface Card Connectors on the GEN•S System

J1 Sensor Distribution card, J1 J3 Membrane keypad
J2 LCD Display module, J1 J5 LCD Display module
Potentiometers
ATTENTION: Adjusting R3 too low turns off the display completely, making the LCD Display
module appear defective.
R3 varies the display contrast on the LCD Display module in the GEN•S System. R3 is
accessed through an opening in the splash shield mounted on the rear of the Diluter control
keypad.
PN 4277219B A.3-13
PVT Card
Figure A.3-16 PVT Card Component Locations
J4 J6
J5
R35
COUNT
VACUUM
DIFF
PRESSURE
(RG 3)
RETIC
PRESSURE
(RG 6)
SHEATH
PRESSURE
(RG 4)
PWB NO. 1713400B
7253094A
Note: R35 is not present on newer versions of the PVT card.
Connectors
Table A.3-17 PVT Card Connectors
J No. Connects to:

J4 Diff ambient temperature thermistor
J5 RS/Opto Intfc card, J6
J6 Sensor Distribution card, J9
A.3-14 PN 4277219B
Reservoir Interface Card
Figure A.3-17 Reservoir Interface Card Component Locations
J2 J3 J9 J4 J5 J10 J6 J11 J7 J12 J8 J13 J14 J16 J15 J1
PWB NO. 1713205B
7253100A
Connectors
Table A.3-18 Reservoir Interface Card Connectors
Sensor Reservoir Solenoid Diluter 2 Card

Reagent/Waste Connector Solenoid Connector Connector
N/A J1
Diluent J9 SL100 J2
Cleaning agent J10 SL101 J3
Diff lytic reagent J11 SL102 J4
Diff preserve J12 SL103 J5
Retic stain J13 SL104 J6
Retic clearing reagent J14 SL105 J7
CBC lytic reagent J15 SL106 J8
Waste, backwash tank and sheath tank J16
PN 4277219B A.3-15
RS/Opto Infc Card

Figure A.3-18 RS/Opto Intfc Card Component Locations
J2 J9 J5 J6 J7 J8
Right
Door of
Diluter
PWB NO. 1713210C

7219042B
Rear of Diluter right panel
J3 J1 J4
Connectors
Table A.3-19 RS/Opto Intfc Card Connectors

J1 Diluter 3 card, J13 J6 Digital backplane (IBUS), J19
J2 Digital backplane (SBUS), J27 J7 Diluter 1 card (IBUS), J1
J3 Workstation J8 Diluter Cbl Adapter card (IBUS), J4
J4 Laser Power Reference card, J1 J9 Light Scatter Preamp module, J78

Diluter 1 card, J2
J5 PVT card J5
Hgb Preamp module
A.3-16 PN 4277219B
Sensor Distribution Card
Figure A.3-19 Sensor Distribution Card Component Locations
CR2 CR1 CR3
J4 J9
J2
J7
J10
PWB NO. 1713204D J6
J3
J8 J1
J5
7253099A
Connectors
Table A.3-20 Sensor Distribution Card Connectors

J1 Keyboard and Display Interface card, J1 (on J6 Right stack loaded and top right safety sensors
GEN•S System with old Diluter interconnects)
J2 Top left safety, front door and vacuum overflow J7 Probe position, J33, and hand detector, J32,
sensors sensors, and manual-mode start switch
J3 Bed position sensors J8 Rocker bed sensors at P36 (under right and left
stack, stripper plate and tube detector sensors)
J4 Hgb lamp, J11 J9 PVT card, J6
J5 Diluter 1 card, J5 J10 (Bar-Code) scanner position, J11, bellows up,
bellows down, left lift, and right lift sensors.
LEDs
Table A.3-21 Sensor Distribution Card LEDs
LED Lights when:

CR1 Rocker bed is horizontal.
CR2 Rocker bed is forward.
CR3 Rocker bed is backward.
PN 4277219B A.3-17
Six-Channel Preamp Card

Figure A.3-20 Six-Channel Preamp Card Component Locations
P 1 U 1 9 P 2
U 1 7
6 4 9 8 2 3 6 B
J 6 J 5 J 4 J 3 J 2 J 1
Connectors
Table A.3-22 Six-Channel Preamp Card Connectors
J No. Connects to: P No. Connects to:

J1 Red aperture 1 J5 White aperture 2
J2 Red aperture 2 J6 White aperture 3
J3 Red aperture 3 P1 Not connected. Provides test points for checking
the card.
J4 White aperture 1 P2 R/W/P SC/A card, P2
A.3-18 PN 4277219B
POWER SUPPLY CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS A
A.4 POWER SUPPLY CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
Bulk Power Filter Card
Figure A.4-1 Bulk Power Filter Card Component Locations
J11 J16
PWB NO. 1713179C
J15
J13
J14
J10 J12
7253352A
Connectors
Table A.4-1 Bulk Power Filter Card Connectors

J10 Bulk Power Supply, WM 25/26 J14 Bulk Power Supply, WM 23/24
J11 System Power controller card, J4 J15 Motor Controller card
J12 Bulk Power Supply, WM 21/22 J16 System Power Controller card, J4
J13 Rear of Power Supply, J4 to Analyzer

Backplane Voltage Bus
PN 4277219B A.4-1
POWER SUPPLY CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
Bulk Power Supply

Figure A.4-2 Bulk Power Supply Connectors
WM26 WM25 WM1 WM2
26 25 1 2
P18
WM23
P18
WM24 23 +
P20
24
WM22 P20
22 +
WM21 P19
21 P19
9 10 11 12
WM9
WM10
WM11 20 19
WM12
WM20
WM19
P17
P17
7253381A
Connectors
Table A.4-2 Bulk Power Supply Connectors
WM or P No. Connects to:

19/20 J21 and J22, exhaust and intake fans
23/24 Bulk Power Filter card, J14
1/2 Dump valve solenoid
18, 19, 20 System Power Controller card, J6
A.4-2 PN 4277219B
POWER SUPPLY CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS A
Motor Controller Card
Figure A.4-3 Motor Controller Card Locations and Settings
Lower card
Upper card
3
2
JP1 1
P5
1 2 3
7253424D
PN 4277219B A.4-3
POWER SUPPLY CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
System Power Controller Card

Figure A.4-4 System Power Controller Card Component Locations
+5.2 V CONTROL(CR3) J6 J1 J2 J3 CR8
PWB NO. 1713137G

60 PSI
30 PSI
5 PSI
VACUUM
7253403E
J4 +48 V1 +48 V2 +12 V TP19 TP18 J7 J5

(CR2) (CR1) (CR4) TP17
TP20
Connectors
Table A.4-3 System Power Controller Card Connectors

J1 Rear of Power Supply (J5) J5 Ac input line
J2 RS485 Module J6 Bulk Power Supply
J3 System Controller Display J7 Compressor/vacuum pump
Motor Controller card
J4 Bulk Power Filter card
LEDs
Table A.4-4 System Power Controller Card Voltage Status LEDs
Color of LED (after Power On)
LED Indicator For Green Red Amber

CR1 +48 V2 dc Compressor Defective LED Not present Within tolerance
CR2 +48 V1 dc Analyzer Defective LED Not present Within tolerance
CR3 +5 Vdc Control Defective LED Not present Within tolerance
CR4 +12 Vdc Defective LED Not present Within tolerance
CR8 Internal A/D converter status Ready Power On Zero adjust done, gain adjust not done
A.4-4 PN 4277219B
DILUTER F-FUNCTIONS A
A.5 DILUTER F-FUNCTIONS
Table A.5-1describes the functions available using the F-key on the Diluter control keypad.
To access the F-key functions, press F, the numbers of the option and then ENTER. For most
functions, you press ENTER again to repeat the function and STOP to exit the function. Any
exceptions to this are noted in Table A.5-1.
.
Table A.5-1 Diluter F-Key Functions
Function Display Description

F01 CLEAN APERTURES Activates burn circuit.
F02 PRIME CBC LYSE Primes CBC lytic reagent:
1. Drains both baths.
2. Dispenses six aliquots of CBC lytic reagent into WBC bath.
3. Drains baths.
4. Dispenses another six aliquots of CBC lytic reagent for a total of
twelve.
5. Drains baths.
6. Fills both baths with diluent.
F03 RBC & WBC MIX Energizes WBC sample mix and RBC sample mix solenoids which
dispense mixing bubbles into the WBC and RBC baths, respectively.
F04 DILUENT DISPENSE Dispenses about 1 mL of diluent from Manual-mode aspirator tip.
F05 SOLENOID XXX Allows activation of individual solenoid. Solenoid returns to original
position (state) when this routine is exited.
Enter the solenoid number and press ENTER to activate the solenoid.
Press ENTER as necessary to change the state of the solenoid.
Press STOP to exit the routine for the selected solenoid. Press STOP
again to exit this function.
F06 RELEASE BSV Drains baths, bleeds off pressure, and rotates BSV back and forth five
times.
F07 BAR CODE READ Pierces the tube and scans the bar-code label.
F08 PRIME SWEEP FLOW Primes sweep-flow lines.
F09 ZAP APERTURES Zaps the apertures to “burn” off protein or debris.
1. Applies pressure behind baths.
2. Drains baths.
3. Primes baths with cleaning agent.
4. Activates burn circuit 10 times.
5. When finished:
r Select 1 to repeat
r Select 0 to remove cleaning agent and exit.
F10 MASTER.... On the LH 750 System only.
SLAVE... 1. Displays the versions of the microprocessors on the DILUTER CPU
card (master) and the Display Interface card (slave).
2. After 2.5 seconds, returns to F10.
F11 EXTENDED PRIME Pulls liquid through apertures to the vacuum isolator chamber for
44 seconds.
PN 4277219B A.5-1
DILUTER F-FUNCTIONS
Table A.5-1 Diluter F-Key Functions (Continued)

F12 EXTENDED CLEAR Applies 5 psi to rear of the apertures for 60 seconds.
F13 PURGE MODE Clears air or debris from flow cell by dispensing cleaning agent from
cleaning agent pump.
1. Fills lower section of flow cell with cleaning agent.
2. Fills upper section of flow cell with cleaning agent, fills lower section
with diluent.
F14 PRIME DIFF LYSE Primes diff lytic reagent pump lines.
F15 PRIME DIFF Primes diff preservative pump lines.
PRESERVE
F16 PRIME DILUENT Primes diluent lines.
F17 PRIME CLEANER Primes cleaning agent pump lines.
F18 PRIME RETIC Primes retic stain pump lines.
STAIN
F19 PRIME RETIC Primes retic clearing solution pump lines.
CLEAR
F20 SHEATH TANK Fills and drains sheath tank, checking the sheath tank level sensors to
CHECK verify they work correctly.
F21 DIFF PRESERVE Used to measure the low volume (LV) of diff preservative dispensed.
LV DISPENSE Dispenses one aliquot of diff preservative to the mixing chamber.
F22 DIFF PRESERVE Used to measure the high volume (HV) of diff preservative dispensed.
HV DISPENSE Dispenses one aliquot of diff preservative to the mixing chamber.
F23 DIFF LYSE Used to measure the low volume (LV) of diff lytic reagent dispensed.
LOW VOLUME DISPENSE Dispenses one aliquot of diff lytic reagent to the mixing chamber.
F24 DIFF LYSE Used to measure the high volume (HV) of diff lytic reagent dispensed.
HIGH VOLUME DISPENSE Dispenses one aliquot of diff lytic reagent to the mixing chamber.
F25 RETIC STAIN Used to measure the volume of stain dispensed. Dispenses one aliquot
of stain to the stain chamber.
F26 RETIC CLEAR Used to measure the volume of retic clearing solution dispensed.
Dispenses one aliquot of retic clearing solution to the retic chamber.
F27 CBC LYSE Used to measure the volume of CBC lytic reagent dispensed. Dispenses
one aliquot of CBC lytic reagent to the WBC bath.
F28 CHECKING PROBE WIPE Activates probe-wipe mechanism to verify probe-wipe mechanism is
working correctly:
1. Retracts Manual-mode aspirator tip.
2. Moves cleaning truck up and down a full stroke.
3. Moves the cleaning truck up about 1/4 of the way and then returns to
the down position.
4. Extends the aspirator tip.
F30 BACKWASH TANK Fills and drains backwash tank, checking the backwash tank level
CHECK sensors to verify they work correctly.
F31 PRIME RESERVOIRS Fills the reagent reservoirs if needed. Press ALARM RESET to exit.
A.5-2 PN 4277219B

F32 RBC PUMP Used to measure the volume dispensed by the RBC diluent dispenser.
DISPENSE Drains the baths, then dispenses one aliquot of reagent from the RBC
diluent dispenser into the RBC bath.
F33 WBC PUMP Used to measure the volume dispensed by the WBC diluent dispenser.
DISPENSE Drains the baths, then dispenses one aliquot of reagent from the WBC
diluent dispenser into the WBC bath.
F40 SYSTEM FLUSH Initiates cycling of solution through the disinfect port on the rear of the
Diluter.
F41 (LH 750 NEEDLE CLEANING Cleans the sample aspiration and the vent sides of the needle.
System only)
F42 (LH 750 MINI PRIME Quickly flushes the diff and retic reagent and sample lines and does a
System only) short prime of the flow cell.
F44 FLOWCELL UNCLOG 1 Initiates the flow-cell clear cycle 1:
1. Purges flow cell with cleaning agent.
2. Applies sample pressure and vacuum alternately to aperture.
3. Turns on RF current.
4. Fills flow cell with diluent.
2. Applies 30 psi to top of aperture.
4. Fills flow cell with diluent.
2. Applies 30 psi to top of aperture.
4. Fills flow cell with cleaning agent; ideally cleaning agent should
remain in flow cell for 30 minutes.
F50 PRESS 0/1 FOR ATTENTION: Only available on GEN•S Systems with software 4A and
DIL HW 3A-/3B+ higher and on LH 750 Systems.
SWEEP FLOW TANK
Fills and drains sweep-flow reservoir, checking the sweep-flow reservoir
CHECK
level sensor to verify it works correctly.
1. Turns on SL16 for 5 seconds to drain VC1.

2. Turns on SL11 to pull diluent from the sweep-flow reservoir.
3. Checks the level sensor in the sweep-flow reservoir every second for
up to 30 seconds to determine if it senses the low diluent level.
r If the sensor is triggered, the test passed.
r If the sensor is not triggered, the test failed.
4. Turns off SL11.
5. Turns on SL16 to drain VC1.
6. Refills sweep-flow reservoir.
PN 4277219B A.5-3
DILUTER F-FUNCTIONS

F55 PRESS MANUAL Used to run LATRON primer or control in the Diff mode.
or CLEAR APERT r To cycle Primer, press CLEAR APERT, then initiate cycle.
Then displays r To cycle control, initiate Manual-mode cycle.
LATEX-DIFF....
F56 PRESS MANUAL Used to run LATRON primer or control in the Retic mode.
or CLEAR APERT r To cycle Primer, press CLEAR APERT, then initiate cycle.
Then displays r To cycle control, initiate Manual-mode cycle.
LATEX-RETIC....
F57 PRESS MANUAL Used to run LATRON primer or control in Diff and Retic mode.
or CLEAR APERT r To cycle primer, press CLEAR APERT, then initiate cycle.
Then displays: r To cycle control, initiate Manual-mode cycle.
LATEX-DIFF + RETIC....
F67 DILUTER INITIAL PRIME Primes all reagent lines except cleaning agent.
F68 DRY ALL Drains all reagents from system. Press RESET to end.
F79 VENT LINE CALIBRATION On systems with a SlideMaker, calibrates BD3, the blood detector for the
INITIALIZING VENT LINE vent line.
When done displays: 1. Backwashes diluent through the needle vent line.
VENT CALIBRATION 2. Calibrates BD3 on the diluent.
SUCCESSFUL
3. Dries the needle vent line.
4. If calibration passed, displays READY. If calibration failed, generates
an error message.
F85 (LH 750 RELEASE CVL85/126 Moves the ceramic pads in CVL85/126 back and forth ten times.
System only)
F86 TRANSPORT TEST Tests functioning of cassette transport assembly.
System only)
F90 SOLENOID XXX Allows activation of individual solenoid. Has memory - solenoid remains
in selected position when this routine is exited
Enter the solenoid number and press ENTER to activate the solenoid.
Press ENTER as necessary to change the state of the solenoid. Press
STOP to exit the routine for the selected solenoid. Press STOP again to
exit this function.
F92 LOW VAC X.XXX. Displays real-time low vacuum. Used to adjust low vacuum.
System only)
F95 SOLENOIDS FREE Turns off solenoids pneumatically; that is, any solenoid valve with a
normally open pneumatic line is repositioned to close the line.
F96 TUBE ADVANCE Moves a cassette through the piercing station, one tube position at a
time.
Press STOP to halt the advance of the cassette. When F96 appears,
press ENTER to repeat function, press STOP to exit this function.
A.5-4 PN 4277219B

F98 KEYBOARD TEST Allows operator to press any key on the Diluter keypad and ensure the
name is displayed on the Diluter display.
Press STOP three times to exit this function.
F99 WAIT EN/DISABLED Enables or disables the “WAIT” function. When WAIT is enabled, the
operator can put the GEN•S System in WAIT by pressing the blank key
(key between F and ID) on the Diluter keypad.
When WAIT ENABLED or WAIT DISABLED appears, press ENTER to
switch between the options. When F99 appears, press ENTER to repeat
function, STOP to exit.
PN 4277219B A.5-5
DILUTER F-FUNCTIONS
A.5-6 PN 4277219B
DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT FUNCTIONS AND LOCATION REFERENCES A
A.6 DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT FUNCTIONS AND LOCATION REFERENCES
Summary
Most of the Diluter functions are accomplished by fluidic components that are interconnected
by tubing and controlled by timed solenoid signals. This section briefly describes the
functions of these components.
r See Solenoids Valves for information about the solenoid valves.

r See Pinch Valves and Asco® Angar™ Valves for information about the pinch valves and
Angar valves.
r See Main Diluter Fluidic Components for information about the remaining fluidic
components.
Illustrations of the Diluter panels and modules - with the fluidic components identified - are
included under Heading A.7 (GEN•S System) and Heading A.8 (LH750 System), and are
cross-referenced from the tables in this section.
Solenoids Valves
Solenoids valves are electronic valves that are energized or de-energized to perform a function
or to activate other components in the Diluter. The function of each solenoid in the Diluter
and the components it activates is listed in Table A.6-1 and on the instrument’s
pneumatic/hydraulic schematic in Chapter 6. Use the figures referenced in Table A.6-1 to
locate the solenoid valves.
Table A.6-1 Solenoid Valve Functions
Figure Reference
SL No. Function Components Activated GEN•S System LH 750 System
1 Rinse Needle Lee Valve A.7-7, MF4 A.8-7, MF4
2 Backwash Probe Lee Valve A.7-7, MF4 A.8-7, MF4
3 CBC Lyse Pump PM7, VL3 A.7-6, MF11 A.8-6, MF11
4 Hgb Drain Valve VL4A, VL4B, VL4C A.7-4, MF6 A.8-4, MF6
5 Backwash Pressure Backwash Tank (VC23) A.7-2, MF9 A.8-2, MF9
6 Hgb and Waste Drain VL6 A.7-4, MF6 A.8-4, MF6
7 WBC Dispense PM3, VL7 A.7-2, MF9 A.8-2, MF9
8 RBC Dispense PM2, VL8 A.7-2, MF9 A.8-2, MF9
9 Whole Blood Aspirate PM9, VL9A, VL9B A.7-8 A.8-8
10 WBC Count VL10 A.7-2, MF9 A.8-2, MF9
11 RBC Count VL11A, VL11B A.7-2, MF9 A.8-2, MF9

* Ensure rocker bed is in the horizontal position before energizing.
† Ensure rocker bed is in the forward position before energizing.
‡ Process controlled solenoid. No direct access.
PN 4277219B A.6-1
DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT FUNCTIONS AND LOCATION REFERENCES
Table A.6-1 Solenoid Valve Functions (Continued)
Figure Reference
12 Baths Drain VL12A, VL12B, VL12C, VL12D, A.7-4, MF6 A.8-4, MF6
VL12E, VLF
13 Probe/Needle drain VL13 A.7-4, MF6 A.8-4, MF6
14 Cleaning Agent VL14A, VL14B A.7-4 A.8-4
15 Sample Valve Return VC14, CL2 A.7-4, MF6 A.8-4, MF6
16 Vac Isolator Drain VL16A, VL16B A.7-4, MF6 A.8-4, MF6
17 Segment Sample VL17, CL2 A.7-4, MF6 A.8-4, MF6
18 Hgb Blank Dispense South Bend, 2-way A.7-4 A.8-4
19 WBC Sample Mix WBC Bath (VC3) A.7-4 A.8-4
20 RBC Sample Mix RBC Bath (VC2) A.7-4 A.8-4
21* Right Lift CL5 A.7-7 A.8-7
22* Left Lift CL4 A.7-7 A.8-7
23 Needle Interlock L3 A.7-7, MF13 A.8-7, MF13
24 Manual Probe In PM9, CL1 A.7-8 A.8-8
25† Tube Ram/Needle Bellow Down CL6, CL3, VL25A A.7-1 A.8-1
26† Bar Code Reader VL26, CL7 A.7-7, MF13 A.8-7, MF13
27 Backward Bed Rock CL8 A.7-7, MF13 A.8-7, MF13
28 Bed Lock L1, L2 A.7-7, MF13 A.8-7, MF13
29 Stripper Plate CL10 A.7-7, MF13 A.8-7, MF13
30 Forward Bed Rock CL8 A.7-7, MF13 A.8-7, MF13
31 Flipper Retract L41, L42 A.7-6, MF11 A.8-6, MF11
32 Reservoir Refill Request Logic Signal To Trigger Reservoir N/A N/A

Refill
33 Needle Vent Vacuum VL33 A.7-4 A.8-2
34 Manual Probe Out (N.O.) CL1 A.7-7, MF13 A.8-7, MF13
35 Not used N/A N/A
36 Belt Advance CL9 A.7-7, MF13 A.8-7, MF13
37‡ Needle Bellow Up CL3 A.7-7, MF13 A.8-7, MF13

A.6-2 PN 4277219B
Figure Reference
38 Not used N/A N/A
39 Vacuum Overflow Dump VL39, VC22 A.7-2, MF9 A.8-2, MF9
40 Stop Vacuum VL40 A.7-2, MF9 A.8-2, MF9
41 Reverse Flush VL41 A.7-10, MF17 A.8-10, MF17
42 Rinse - Diff Lee Valve A.7-7, MF4 A.8-7, MF4
43 Diff Lyse (PAK Lyse) PM4 A.7-2, MF9 A.8-2, MF9
44 Sample Disable - Retics VL44 A.7-9, MF16 A.8-9, MF16
45 Diff Preserve (PAK Preserve) PM1, VL45 A.7-6, MF11 A.8-6, MF11
46 Flush VL46A, VL46B A.7-6, MF11 A.8-6, MF11
47 Cleaning Agent Pump VL47A, VL47B, PM10 A.7-6, MF11 A.8-6, MF11
48 5 Diff Mixing Chamber Drain GEN•S System: VL48A, VL48B A.7-4, MF6 N/A
LH 750 System: VL48B N/A A.8-4, MF6
49 Exit - Flow Cell GEN•S System: VL49A, VL49B A.7-6, MF11 N/A
LH 750 System: VL49A N/A A.8-6, MF11
50 Vacuum to Diff Chamber VL50A, VL50B A.7-10, MF17 A.8-10, MF17
51 Sample Pressure/Vent - Diff VL51 A.7-6, MF11 A.8-6, MF11
52 Sample Disable - Diff VL52 A.7-10, MF17 A.8-10, MF17
53 Drain Diff/Retics Waste GEN•S System: VC13 A.7-6 N/A
LH 750 System: VL53A, VL53B, N/A A.8-6

VL53C, VL53D, VC13, VC26
54 Sheath Flow VL54 A.7-6, MF11 A.8-6, MF11
55 Forward Flush VL55 A.7-6, MF11 A.8-6, MF11
56 Vacuum to Retic Chamber VL56 A.7-9, MF16 A.8-9, MF16
57 Probe/Needle Drain Vacuum GEN•S System: VL57A, VL57B, A.7-6, MF11 N/A
VL57C
LH 750 System: VL57A, VL57C N/A A.8-6, MF11
58 GEN•S System: Aspiration Enable and VL58A, VL58B A.7-9, MF17 N/A
Lyse Disable
LH 750 System: Latex Sample Enable VL58 N/A A.8-9, MF18
- Diff
PN 4277219B A.6-3
Figure Reference
59 Backwash Disable VL59 A.7-9, MF16 A.8-9, MF16
60 Diff Preserve (PAK Preserve) South Bend, 3-way A.7-5 A.8-5

Dispense/Refill Enable
61 Backwash Tank/Sweep Flow Reservoir VL61 A.7-2 A.8-2
Purge
62 GEN•S System: Aspiration Enable and VL62A, VL62B A.7-9, MF18 N/A
Stain Disable
LH 750 System: Back Aspiration VL62 N/A A.8-9, MF18
Enable
63 Diff Lyse (Pak Lyse) Dispense/Refill South Bend, 3-way A.7-1 A.8-1
Enable
64 GEN•S System: 5 Diff and Retic VL64 A.7-7, MF13 N/A
Segment (N.O.)
LH 750 System: Front Aspiration VL64 N/A A.8-7, MF13
Enable (N.O.)
65 Diff Lyse (Pak Lyse) to Diff Chamber VL65 A.7-10, MF17 A.8-10, MF17
Disable
66 Mixer - Retics Logic Signal to Trigger Retic Mixing N/A N/A
Motor
67 Vent Chamber Drain VL67 A.7-4, MF6 A.8-4, MF6
68 Backwash Needle/Segments Lee Valve A.7-7, MF4 A.8-7, MF4
69 Backwash Flow Cell Lee Valve A.7-7, MF4 A.8-7, MF4
70 Sheath Tank Refill Request Logic Signal to Trigger Sheath Tank N/A N/A
Refill
71 Clog Detector On Logic Signal to Trigger Clog N/A N/A
Detector On
72 RF On Logic Signal to Trigger RF On N/A N/A
73 Mixer - Diff Logic Signal to Trigger Diff Mixing N/A N/A

Motor
74 Count - Diff/Retics Logic Signal to Trigger Diff/Retics N/A N/A
Count
75 Rinse Retic Chamber Lee Valve A.7-7, MF4 A.8-7, MF4
76 Sample Pressure - Retics VL76 A.7-9, MF16 A.8-9, MF16
77 Diluent Sense Logic Signal to Trigger Diluent N/A N/A

Sense
78 Blood Flow Logic Signal to Trigger Blood Flow N/A N/A
Monitoring
79 Blood Sense Logic Signal to Trigger Blood Sense N/A N/A
A.6-4 PN 4277219B
Figure Reference
80 Retic Chamber Drain GEN•S System: VL80A, VL80B A.7-9, MF16 A.8-9, MF16
LH 750 System: VL80B
82 Pak Volume - Low PM4, PM1 A.7-2, MF9 A.8-2, MF9
83 Probe Wipe Error Reset Logic Signal to Trigger Probe Wipe N/A N/A
Error Reset
84 Probe Wipe Enable Logic Signal to Trigger Probe Wipe N/A N/A
Enable
85 LH 750 System: Diff Sample Segment CVL85/126 N/A A.8-4, MF10
Valve Return
86‡ GEN•S System w/ SW 4A and higher VL86 A.7-4, MF10 A.8-4, MF10
and LH 750 System: Sweep Flow
Reservoir Refill
87 LH 750 System: Retic Sample CVL87/127 N/A A.8-4, MF10
Segment Valve Return
88 Latex Sample Enable - Retics (N.O.) VL88 A.7-7, MF13 A.8-7, MF13
89 Blood/Stain to Stain Chamber VL89 A.7-9, MF16 A.8-9, MF16
90 Tip Wipe Enable Logic Signal to Trigger Tip Wipe N/A N/A
Enable
91 Backwash Tank Refill Request Logic Signal to Trigger Backwash N/A N/A
Tank Refill
92 Blood/Stain Aspiration Pump PM11 A.7-9 A.8-9
93 GEN•S System: 5 psi to Stain VL93A, VL93B A.7-9, MF16 N/A

Chamber
LH 750 System: Segment 2 µL CVL93/128 N/A A.8-9, MF16
Blood/Stain
94 GEN•S System: Segment 2 µL VL94A, VL94B A.7-9, MF18 N/A
Blood/Stain
LH 750 System: Enable 2 µL VL94A N/A A.8-9, MF18
Blood/Stain Aspiration
95 GEN•S System: Toggle Waste/Retic VL95A, VL95B A.7-9, MF18 N/A
Chamber
LH 750 System: Ghost Pump PM6, VL95* N/A A.8-9, MF18
Note: On LH 750 Systems this is
labeled VL95/98. It is activated by
SL98 on the GEN•S System, and by
SL95 on the LH 750 System.
96 Rinse Stain Chamber Lee Valve A.7-7, MF4 A.8-7, MF4
PN 4277219B A.6-5
Figure Reference
97 Drain Stain Chamber GEN•S System: VL97A, VL97B, A.7-9, MF16 N/A
VC30
LH 750 System: VL97B N/A A.8-9, MF16
98 GEN•S System: Ghost Pump PM6, VL98* A.7-9, MF16 A.8-9, MF16
Note: On newer GEN•S Systems
this is labeled VL95/98. It is
activated by SL98 on the GEN•S
System, and by SL95 on the
LH 750 System.
LH 750 System: Segment Valves VL98 N/A A.8-9, MF16
Self-Cleaning
99 Stain Pump PM5, VL99 A.7-9, MF16 A.8-9, MF16
100‡ Diluent Level Refill VL100 A.7-11, MF3 A.8-11, MF3
101‡ Cleaning Agent Level Refill VL101 A.7-11, MF3 A.8-11, MF3
102‡ Pak Lyse Level Refill VL102 A.7-11, MF3 A.8-11, MF3
103‡ Pak Preserve Level Refill VL103 A.7-11, MF3 A.8-11, MF3
104‡ Stain Level Refill VL104 A.7-11, MF3 A.8-11, MF3
105‡ Ghost Level Refill VL105 A.7-11, MF3 A.8-11, MF3
106‡ CBC Lyse Reagent Refill VL106 A.7-11, MF3 A.8-11, MF3
107‡ Backwash Tank Refill VL107A, VL107B A.7-2, MF9 A.8-2, MF9
108‡ Sheath Tank Refill VL108 A.7-4, MF6 A.8-4, MF6
110‡ Probe Wipe Rinse Lee Valve A.7-7, MF4 A.8-7, MF4
111‡ Probe Wipe Vacuum VL111 A.7-7, MF13 A.8-7, MF13
112 GEN•S System: Disinfectant (SW 3A VL112 A.7-7, MF13 N/A

and lower)
Not used (SW 4A and higher)
LH 750 System: Not used N/A N/A N/A
113 GEN•S System: Diluent Reservoir VL113 A.7-7, MF13 N/A

Vent (SW 3A and lower)
Not used (SW 4A and higher)
LH 750 System: Not used N/A N/A N/A
114 Needle Vent Side Isolator (SlideMaker VL114 In the Sample Access and
Option) Reservoir Module. Refer to the
Slide Making Modules FSM.
A.6-6 PN 4277219B
Figure Reference
115 VC19 Isolator 1 (SlideMaker Option) VL115 In the Sample Access and
Reservoir Module. Refer to the
116 GEN•S System: VC19 Isolator 2 (SM VL116 In the Sample Access and
and SW 3A and lower) Reservoir Module. Refer to the
VC19 Isolator 2 (SW 4A and higher) Slide Making Modules FSM.
LH 750 System: VC19 Isolator 2 VL116 In the Sample Access and
117 SlideMaker Aspiration Line Isolator VL117 In the Sample Access and
(SM) Reservoir Module. Refer to the
118 Reservoir SW1 (SM) (N.O. RES1) VL118 In the Sample Access and
119 Not used N/A N/A
120 Duplicate SlideMaker Aspiration Line VL120 In the Sample Access and
Isolator (SM) (Duplicate of SL117) Reservoir Module. Refer to the
121 VLS Check Logic Signal to Trigger VLS Check N/A N/A
122 GEN•S System: Sweep Flow Logic Signal to Trigger Sweep Flow N/A N/A
Reservoir Refill (SW 4A and higher) Reservoir Refill
LH 750 System: Sweep Flow Logic Signal to Trigger Sweep Flow N/A N/A
Reservoir Refill Reservoir Refill
123 Probe Wipe Block Up Logic Signal to Trigger Probe Wipe N/A N/A
Block Up
124 Probe Wipe Block Reset Logic Signal to Trigger Probe Wipe N/A N/A
Block Reset
125‡ GEN•S System: Probe Wipe Rinse CL11 A.7-4, MF10 N/A
Cup (SW 4A and higher)
LH 750 System: Probe Wipe Rinse CL11 N/A A.8-4, MF10?
Cup
126 LH 750 System only: Segment 31 µL CVL85/126 N/A A.8-9, MF18
Diff Sample
Retic Sample
Blood/Stain Return
129 LH 750 System only: Clearing VL129 N/A A.8-9, MF18
solution line protection (N.O.)
130 LH 750 System only: Not used N/A N/A N/A
PN 4277219B A.6-7
Pinch Valves and Asco® Angar™ Valves

Pinch valves and Angar valves, which are controlled by solenoids, route pressure, vacuum
and reagents throughout the Diluter. Use the figures referenced in Table A.6-2 to locate the
valves. To activate a valve, energize the solenoid with the same number as the valve.
Table A.6-2 Pinch and Angar Table A.6-2 Pinch and Angar Table A.6-2 Pinch and Angar
Valve Location References Valve Location References Valve Location References
Figure Reference Figure Reference Figure Reference
GEN•S LH 750 GEN•S LH 750 GEN•S LH 750

Valve System System Valve System System Valve System System
VL3 A.7-5 VL46B A.7-10 A.8-10 VL86 A.7-4 A.8-4
VL4A A.7-3 A.8-3 VL47A A.7-5 A.8-5 VL88 A.7-9 A.8-9
VL4B A.7-7 A.8-7 VL47B A.7-5 A.8-5 VL89 A.7-9 A.8-9
VL4C A.7-7 A.8-7 VL48A A.7-5 VL93A A.7-9
VL6 A.7-3 A.8-3 VL48B A.7-10 VL93B A.7-9
VL7 A.7-1 A.8-1 VL49A A.7-5 A.8-5 VL94A A.7-9 A.8-9
VL8 A.7-1 A.8-1 VL49B A.7-5 VL94B A.7-9 A.8-9
VL9A A.7-8 A.8-8 VL50A A.7-10 A.8-10 VL95A A.7-9 N/A
VL9B A.7-8 A.8-8 VL50B A.7-10 A.8-10 VL95B A.7-9 N/A
VL10 A.7-3 A.8-3 VL51 A.7-5 A.8-5 VL95/98 A.7-1 A.8-1
VL11A A.7-3 A.8-3 VL52 A.7-10 A.8-10 VL97A A.7-5
VL11B A.7-4 A.8-4 VL53A N/A A.8-5 VL97B A.7-9 A.8-9
VL12A A.7-3 A.8-3 VL53B N/A A.8-5 VL98 A.7-1 A.8-9
VL12B A.7-3 A.8-3 VL53D N/A A.8-6 VL99 A.7-9 A.8-9
VL12C A.7-3 A.8-3 VL54 A.7-5 A.8-5 VL100 A.7-11 A.8-11
VL12D A.7-3 A.8-3 VL55 A.7-5 A.8-5 VL101 A.7-11 A.8-11
VL12E A.7-6 A.8-6 VL56 A.7-9 A.8-9 VL102 A.7-11 A.8-11
VL12F A.7-3 A.8-3 VL57A A.7-3 A.8-3 VL103 A.7-11 A.8-11
VL13 A.7-8 A.8-8 VL57B A.7-5 VL104 A.7-11 A.8-11
VL14A A.7-6 A.8-6 VL57C A.7-8 A.8-8 VL105 A.7-11 A.8-11
VL14B A.7-4 A.8-4 VL58A A.7-9 A.8-9 VL106 A.7-11 A.8-11
VL16A A.7-3 A.8-3 VL58B A.7-9 VL107A A.7-1 A.8-1
VL16B A.7-4 A.8-4 VL59 A.7-9 A.8-9 VL107B A.7-1 A.8-1
VL17 A.7-5 A.8-5 VL61 N/A A.8-2 VL108 A.7-5 A.8-5
VL25 A.7-8 A.8-8 VL62A A.7-9 A.8-9 VL111 A.7-8 A.8-8
VL26 A.7-1 A.8-1 VL62B A.7-9 VL112 A.7-12 N/A
VL33 A.7-1 A.8-1 VL64 A.7-9 A.8-9 VL113 A.7-11 N/A
VL39 A.7-1 A.8-1 VL65 A.7-10 A.8-10 VL129 N/A A.8-9
VL40 A.7-1 A.8-1 VL67A A.7-3 A.8-3 VLBCR A.8-3
VL41 A.7-10 A.8-10 VL67B N/A A.8-5 VLRLF A.8-6
VL44 A.7-9 A.8-9 VL76 A.7-9 A.8-9
VL45 A.7-10 A.8-10 VL80A A.7-5
VL46A A.7-5 A.8-5 VL80B A.7-9 A.8-9
A.6-8 PN 4277219B
Main Diluter Fluidic Components
With the exception of the solenoids, pinch valves and Angar valves, the main fluidic
components in the Diluter are described in Table A.6-3. Table A.6-3 also includes the
reference designator for the component, where applicable, and a figure reference for locating
the component.
Table A.6-3 Diluter Components
Figure Reference
Reference GEN•S LH 750

Designator Component Functions System System
Aspirator tip Input pathway for sample aspiration in Manual mode. A.7-8 A.8-8
Cleaning truck Cleans the outside of the aspirator trip between each A.7-8 A.8-8
sample.
Diff heater Heats diff lytic reagent. A.7-9 A.8-9
Needle assembly Input pathway for sample aspiration in the Automatic A.7-8 A.8-8
mode.
Probe-Wipe module Cleans the outside of the aspirator tip in the Manual A.7-8 A.8-8
mode.
Solenoid Interconnect Provides a splash shielded connection point for the A.7-5 A.8-5
module solenoids mounted on MF16 and MF17.
Sweep-flow tank Regulates diluent delivery through the sweep flow lines A.7-4 A.8-4
behind the RBC apertures.
BD1 Front blood detector In the Automatic mode, monitors the fluid in the A.7-8 A.8-8
aspiration line entering the BSV.
BD2 Rear blood detector In the Automatic mode, monitors the fluid in the A.7-8 A.8-8
aspiration line leaving the BSV.
BSV Blood sampling valve Isolates blood for the RBC/Plt and WBC/Hgb dilutions, A.7-8 A.8-8
and routes the blood samples, diluent and rinse to the
RBC and WBC bath.
CL1 BSV cylinder Rotates the front section of the BSV to align the paths for A.7-8 A.8-8
the aspiration mode selected, Automatic or Manual.
CL11 Backwash cup cylinder Moves the backwash cup up to the aspirator tip during A.7-8 A.8-8
the backwash.
CL2 BSV cylinder Rotates the center section of the BSV to isolate the A.7-8 A.8-8
portions of the blood sample needed for blood dilutions.
CL3 Bellows cylinder Expands and retracts the bellows to cover and uncover A.7-3, A.8-3,
the piercing needle. A.7-8 A.8-8
CL6 Tube-ram cylinder Pushes the specimen tube out of the cassette and onto A.7-3, A.8-3,
the piercing needle. A.7-4 A.8-4
CL7 Bar-code scanner cylinder Moves the bar-code scanner over the tube and cassette A.7-3, A.8-3
labels. A.7-4 A.8-4
CVL85/126 Diff sample valve Isolates blood for the diff dilution, and routes the blood N/A A.8-9
sample to the mixing chamber (VC25).
PN 4277219B A.6-9
Table A.6-3 Diluter Components (Continued)
Figure Reference

CVL87/127 Retic sample valve Isolates blood for the initial (stained) retic dilution, and N/A A.8-9
routes the blood sample to the stain chamber (VC24)
CVL93/128 Stained retic sample valve Isolates stained blood for the final retic dilution, and N/A A.8-9
routes the blood sample to the retic chamber (VC17)
MF1 Reagent reservoir manifold Stores reagents in reservoirs. A.7-11 A.8-11
MF10 Contains solenoids SL85, SL86, SL87, and SL125 A.7-4 A.8-4
(GEN•S System) or SL127 (LH 750 System).
MF11 Contains solenoids SL3, SL31, SL45, SL46, SL47, SL49, A.7-6 A.8-6
SL51, SL54, SL55, and SL57.
MF12 Contains solenoid SL53 A.7-6 A.8-6
MF13 Contains solenoids SL23, SL26, SL27, SL28, SL29, A.7-7 A.8-7
SL30, SL34, SL36, SL37, SL64, SL88, SL111, SL112,
and SL113.
MF16 Contains solenoids SL44, SL56, SL59, SL76, SL80, A.7-9 A.8-9
SL89, SL93, SL97, SL98, and SL99.
MF17 Contains solenoids SL41, SL50, SL52, and SL65. A.7-10 A.8-10
MF18 Contains solenoids SL58, SL62, SL94, and SL95. A.7-9 A.8-9
MF2 System flush/cleaning Determines the input source for the system A.7-12 N/A
agent input manifold flush/cleaning agent input manifold.
MF3 Reagent solenoid manifold Distributes vacuum to solenoids used to refill reagent A.7-11 A.8-11
reservoirs. Contains solenoids SL100 through SL106.
MF4 Backwash manifold Delivers pressurized diluent or cleaning agent to rinse A.7-7 A.8-7
the aspiration pathways, and the diff mixing, stain and
retic chambers. Contains solenoids SL1, SL2, SL42,
SL68, SL69, SL75, SL96, and SL110.
MF5 System flush/cleaning Routes cleaning agent or flush solution to VL14B for A.7-12 N/A
agent output manifold routing to the diluent/cleaning agent chamber for
distribution in the Diluter.
SL17, SL48, SL67, and SL108.
MF7 5-psi manifold Distributes 5 psi. A.7-4 A.8-4
MF8 Contains solenoids SL19 and SL20. A.7-4 A.8-4
SL40, SL43, SL82, and SL107.
PLB1 Peltier module Heats or cools retic clearing solution. A.7-2 A.8-2
PM1 Diff preservative pump Dual-volume pump that dispenses diff preservative to A.7-5 A.8-5
the mixing chamber.
A.6-10 PN 4277219B
Figure Reference

PM10 Cleaning agent pump Delivers cleaning agent to flow cell during flow cell A.7-5 A.8-5
cleaning functions.
PM11 Blood/stain aspiration Pulls the stained sample from the stain chamber through A.7-9 A.8-9
pump a cross fitting that is used to isolate the stained sample
for the final dilution for retic analysis.
PM2 RBC diluent dispenser Dispenses diluent to RBC bath for RBC dilution and to A.7-1 A.8-1
the WBC bath to rinse bath.
PM3 WBC diluent dispenser Dispenses diluent to WBC bath for the WBC dilution and A.7-1 A.8-1
to the RBC bath to rinse bath.
PM4 Diff lytic reagent pump Dual-volume pump that dispenses diff lytic reagent A.7-1 A.8-1
through the diff heater and the diff blood sample
segment to the mixing chamber.
PM5 Stain pump Delivers stain and retic blood sample to stain chamber. A.7-9 A.8-9
PM6 Retic clearing solution Delivers retic clearing solution through Peltier module to A.7-1 A.8-1
pump retic chamber.
PM7 CBC lytic reagent pump Delivers CBC lytic reagent to WBC bath to lyse RBCs and A.7-5 A.8-5
react with the hemoglobin.
PM9 Aspiration pump Dual-volume pump that aspirates blood in both A.7-8 A.8-8
aspiration modes.
QD1 Quick disconnect 1 A.7-4 A.8-4
QD7 Quick disconnect 7 A.7-9
QD8 Quick disconnect 8 A.7-9
RG2 Vacuum (low) regulator Regulates the low (6 in. Hg) vacuum used to pull the A.7-6 A.8-6
dilutions through the RBC and WBC apertures.
RG3 Diff sample pressure Regulates pressure for diff sample flow through the flow A.7-6 A.8-6
regulator cell.
RG4 Sheath pressure regulator Regulates pressure for sheath fluid. A.7-6 A.8-6
RG5 Bar-code scanner cylinder Regulates pressure flow to bar-code reader cylinder A.7-3 A.8-3
pressure regulator controlling speed of bar-code reader movement.
RG6 Retic sample pressure Regulates pressure for retic sample flow through the A.7-6 A.8-6
regulator flow cell.
PN 4277219B A.6-11
Figure Reference

VC1 Vacuum isolator chamber Distributes low vacuum (6 in. Hg) to pull dilution A.7-3 N/A
through the apertures in both baths, high vacuum to
scavenge the sweep flow lines to the RBC bath, and
pressure (5 psi) to clear the WBC and RBC apertures.
VC10 Bath overflow chamber Collects any liquid that overflows from the WBC or RBC A.7-3 A.8-3
baths.
VC11 Waste chamber Collects waste from the Diluter. A.7-3 A.8-3
VC12 Sheath flow restrictor During sample analysis, restricts the upper sheath flow A.7-5 A.8-5
and directs it into flow cell port 3. This flow moves cells
away as they exit the aperture, preventing them from
swirling back into the sensing area.
VC13 Diff waste chamber Collects waste from the aspiration station and mixing A.7-6 A.8-6
chamber.
VC14 Foam trap (waste Collects any foam or liquid overflow from the waste A.7-5 A.8-5
chamber) chamber.
VC15 Sheath tank Provides pressurized diluent for sheath flow through the A.7-5 A.8-5
flow cell.
VC16 Vacuum chamber Distributes vacuum within the Diluter. A.7-6 A.8-6
VC17 Retic chamber Mixing chamber for incubating retic clearing solution A.7-9 A.8-9
with stained blood sample for retic analysis.
VC18 Flow cell Houses and provides path to VCS aperture. A.7-7 A.8-7
VC19 Needle vent chamber Collects any blood aspirated into the needle vent line and A.7-8 A.8-8
the diluent or cleaning agent used to clean the needle.
VC1-R RBC vacuum isolator Distributes low vacuum (6 in. Hg) to pull dilution A.7-3 A.8-3
chamber through the apertures in the RBC bath, high vacuum to
scavenge the sweep- flow lines, and pressure (5 psi) to
clear the RBC apertures.
VC1-W WBC vacuum isolator Distributes low vacuum (6 in. Hg) to pull dilution A.7-3 A.8-3
chamber through the apertures in the WBC bath and pressure (5
psi) to clear the WBC apertures.
VC2 RBC bath Holds RBC dilution for mixing and for collection data of A.7-3 A.8-3
RBCs and Plts.
VC21 Vacuum trap Traps any liquid in the vacuum lines, preventing the A.7-2 A.8-2
liquid from traveling back to the pump in the Power
Supply.
VC22 Vacuum overflow tank Distributes vacuum in the Diluter and traps any liquid A.7-1 A.8-1
overflow into the vacuum lines.
VC23 Backwash tank Distributes pressurized diluent or cleaning agent to the A.7-1 A.8-1
backwash manifold and diluent to the Hgb cuvette for the
Hgb-blank reading.
A.6-12 PN 4277219B
Figure Reference

VC24 Stain chamber Mixing chamber for incubating retic blood sample and A.7-9 A.8-9
retic stain.
VC25 Mixing chamber, diff Chamber for mixing and incubating blood and reagents A.7-10 A.8-10
for diff analysis.
VC26 Waste chamber Collects waste from the flow cell. A.7-6 A.8-6
VC27 Vacuum chamber Distributes vents and vacuum to the needle-vent A.7-2 A.8-2
chamber, VC19.
VC28 Diluent/cleaning agent Distributes diluent (startup and sample cycles) or A.7-4 A.8-4
chamber cleaning agent (shutdown cycle) to the diluent
dispensers and the backwash tank.
VC29 Sweep-flow reservoir Traps bubbles and distributes diluent to the sweep-flow A.7-4 A.8-4
tank.
VC3 WBC bath Holds WBC dilution for mixing and for collection data of A.7-3 A.8-3
WBCs.
VC30 Foam trap (blood/stain Collects waste from the blood/stain aspiration pump, A.7-6 N/A
aspiration pump) PM11, and dispenses it to waste.
VC31 Foam trap (reagent Collects any foam or liquid pulled into the vacuum A.7-11 A.8-11
reservoirs) supply line to the reagent reservoirs, isolating the liquid
from the vacuum system.
VC32 Diluent/cleaning agent Routes diluent and cleaning agent in the Diluter. A.7-4 A.8-4
manifold
VC37 Foam trap (backwash tank) Collects any foam or liquid in lines between SL5 and the A.7-2 A.8-2
backwash tank VC23.
PN 4277219B A.6-13
A.6-14 PN 4277219B
GEN•S SYSTEM DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT LOCATIONS A
A.7 GEN•S SYSTEM DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT LOCATIONS
Use the illustrations in this section to identify the fluidic components on the GEN•S System’s
Diluter panels and modules. For the functions of these components, refer to Heading A.6.
Figure A.7-1 GEN•S System Diluter - Left Front Panel

VL7 SL63 VL33 VL107A
PM4
VL8
VC23
PM2
PM3 VL107B
PM2 PM3
Style used on Analytical
Stations that bypass the
diluent reservoir.
VL40
VL39
VC22
SL25
VL98
PM6 VL26 6498097A
Note: On newer GEN•S Systems VL98 is labeled VL95/98. It is activated by

SL98 on the GEN•S System, and by SL95 on the LH 750 System.
Figure A.7-2 GEN•S System Diluter - Rear of Left Front Panel
MF9
VC37
VC21
SL5
VC27
SL107
SL7
SL8
SL82
SL43 SL61
SL39
SL40
SL10 PLB1
6498011A SL11
PN 4277219B A.7-1
GEN•S SYSTEM DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT LOCATIONS
Figure A.7-3 GEN•S System Diluter - Center Front Panel

V L 1 1 A V L 6 7 A V C 1 V L 1 2 D V L 1 0 V L 1 6 A
C L 6 V L 1 2 F
V C I-R V C I-W
C L 7
V L 1 2 C
C o n fig u r a tio n o n A n a ly tic a l
S ta tio n s th a t b y p a s s th e
d ilu e n t r e s e r v io r .
V L 6
V L 5 7 A
V C 2
V C 3
V C 1 1
R G 5
a n d g a u g e
C L 3 V C 1 0 V L 1 2 A V L 4 A V L 1 2 B 6 4 9 8 0 9 0 A
Figure A.7-4 GEN•S System Diluter - Rear of Center Front Panel

VL14B SL14 VC28 CL6 CL7
VC32
SL33
Configuration on Analytical Stations

that bypass the diluent reservoir.
MF8
MF7
VC29
SL19
VL11B
SL20
SL125
SL16 VL11B
SL67
SL86 SL6
SL12
MF10 SL14
SL4
SL13
VL86
SL15 VL14B
SL17
Sweep-flow reservoir SL108
with level sensor SL48 VC28
SL18 MF16 VL16B VC29 Sweep-Flow QD6 QD1

Tank 6498087B
A.7-2 PN 4277219B
Figure A.7-5 GEN•S System Diluter - Right Front Panel
V L 4 9 A V L 5 1 V L 8 0 A V L 9 7 A V L 5 4 V L 5 5 V L 4 6 A V C 1 2
S L 6 0
P M 1 R G 2 k n o b
V L 5 7 B
V L 4 7 B
P M 7
V L 1 7
V L 3
P M 1 0
V C 1 5
V L 4 7 A
V L 4 9 B
V C 1 4 V L 1 0 8
V L 4 8 A
S o le n o id
In te rc o n n e c t 6498001A
m o d u le
Figure A.7-6 GEN•S System Diluter - Rear of Right Front Panel
VL12E
SL53 (MF12)
MF11
RG2
VC26
1 SL55
SL54
SL51
SL49
SL57
VL14A SL31
SL3
VC30
SL47
VC13
SL45
SL46
RG4 RG3 RG6 QD2 VC16

2826002(2) 6498008A
PN 4277219B A.7-3
Figure A.7-7 GEN•S System Diluter - Under Front Cover Overview A Sampling Station,
VL4B VL4C Figure A.7-8
SL96 B Retic module,
MF4 SL75 Figure A.7-9
SL42
SL69 SL110 C Diff module,
SL68
SL22
Figure A.7-10
SL2 QD4 QD5
A B C
SL1
MF13 VC18 TTM SL21
SL112
SL30 46 SL113
SL36
SL23
SL37 SL111
SL27 SL29
SL34 SL28
SL88 SL26 6498004A
SL64
Figure A.7-8 GEN•S System Diluter - Sampling Station
VL57C VC19 VL25 Needle

assembly
CL3
BD2
BD1
Probe Wipe
module
BSV
VL111 VL13 CL1
SL9 VL9B CL2
VL9A
PM9
SL24 Aspirator tip
CL11
Sample Access and Reservoir module Cleaning
(For details refer to the truck
Slide Making Modules Service Manual) Aspiration Pump module BSV and Probe-Wipe modules 6498005B
A.7-4 PN 4277219B
Figure A.7-9 GEN•S System Diluter - Retic Module
MF18
VC17 VC24 PM11,
MF16 VL95A
VL44 SL92
QD8 VL93B
SL98 SL56
SL44 SL76 VL95B SL94
SL93 SL99 QD7 SL95
SL97 SL80 VL94A SL58
SL59 SL89 SL62
VL89 VL56
VL64
BD2 VL76
VL62B VL93A
VL58B
VL99
(Behind
PM5 STAIN PUMP)
VL62A
BD1 VL94B
VL59 VL80B
VL97B
VL58A
VL88 Diff heater
6498007B
Figure A.7-10 GEN•S System Diluter - Diff Module
SL50 SL41 MF17

SL52
SL65
VL50A
VL65
VL45
VL46B
VL41
VL50B
VC25
QD9 VL52
VL48B
6498006A
PN 4277219B A.7-5
Figure A.7-11 GEN•S System Diluter - Lower Left Rear Door

VL106
VL105
VL104
VL103
VL102
VL101
VL100
MF1
VL113 MF1
SL106 VC31
SL105
SL104 SL106
SL103 SL105 VL113
SL102 SL104
SL101 SL103
SL100 SL102
MF3 MF3 SL101
Old style SL100
6498013A New style
Note: VL113 is not present on Analytical Stations that are configured to bypass the diluent reservoir.
Figure A.7-12 GEN•S System Diluter- Right Rear Door
MF2
VL112
MF5
6498012A
Note: MF2, MF5 and VL112 are not present on Analytical

Stations that are configured to bypass the diluent reservoir.
A.7-6 PN 4277219B
LH 750 SYSTEM DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT LOCATIONS A
A.8 LH 750 SYSTEM DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT LOCATIONS
Use the illustrations in this section to identify the fluidic components on the LH750 System’s
Diluter panels and modules. For the functions of these components, refer to Heading A.6.
Figure A.8-1 LH 750 System Diluter - Left Front Panel

V L 7 S L 6 3 V L 3 3 V L 1 0 7 A
P M 4
V L 8
V C 2 3
P M 2
P M 3 V L 1 0 7 B
V L 4 0
V L 3 9
V C 2 2
S L 2 5
V L 9 5 /9 8
P M 6 V L 2 6 6 4 9 8 1 0 3 B
Figure A.8-2 LH 750 System Diluter - Rear of Left Front Panel

SL61 SL33
MF9
VC21
SL5 VC27
VC37
SL107
SL7
SL8
SL82
VL61
SL43
SL39
SL40
PLB1
SL10
6498102B SL11
PN 4277219B A.8-1
LH 750 SYSTEM DILUTER FLUIDIC COMPONENT LOCATIONS
Figure A.8-3 LH 750 System Diluter - Center Front Panel

V L 1 1 A V C 1 -R V C 1 -W V L 1 2 D V L 1 0 V L 1 6 A
C L 6
V L 1 2 F
V L B C R
C L 7
V L 1 2 C
V L 6
V L 5 7 A
V C 2
V C 3
V C 1 1
R G 5
a n d g a u g e
C L 3 V C 1 0 V L 1 2 A V L 4 A V L 1 2 B
6498106B
Figure A.8-4 LH 750 System Diluter - Rear of Center Front Panel

SL15 SL4 SL6 SL48
SL87 SL85 SL86 SL127 SL17 SL13 SL12 SL16 SL108 SL67 CL6 CL7
MF10
VL16B
MF8
MF6
SL19
SL20
VL11B
SL14
VL14B
MF7
VC28
VC32
SL18 VL86 VC29 Sweep-flow QD6 QD1 6498107B
tank
A.8-2 PN 4277219B
Figure A.8-5 LH 750 System Diluter - Right Front Panel
V L 4 9 A V L 5 1 V L 4 7 B V L 1 7 V L 5 4 V L 5 5 V L 4 6 A V C 1 2
S L 6 0
V L 6 7 B
P M 1 R G 2 k n o b
V L 5 3 A
P M 7
V L 3
P M 1 0
V C 1 5
V L 4 7 A
V C 1 4 V L 1 0 8
V L 5 3 B
S o le n o id
In te rc o n n e c t 6498104B
m o d u le
Figure A.8-6 LH 750 System Diluter - Rear of Right Front Panel
M F 1 1
S L 4 6
S L 4 5 V L 1 2 E
S L 4 7 S L 5 3 (M F 1 2 )
R G 2
S L 3
V L 5 3 D
S L 3 1
V L R L F
S L 5 7 V L 1 4 A
S L 4 9
V C 2 6
S L 5 1
S L 5 4
S L 5 5
V C 1 3
6 4 9 8 1 0 5 B
R G 4 R G 3 R G 6 Q D 2 V C 1 6
PN 4277219B A.8-3
Figure A.8-7 LH 750 System Diluter - Under Front Cover Overview A Sampling Station,
Figure A.8-8
VL4B VL4C B Random Access
SL96 module,
MF4 SL75 Figure A.8-9
SL42
SL110 C Diff module,
SL69
SL68 Figure A.8-10
SL22 A B C
SL2 QD4 QD5
SL1
MF13 VC18 TTM SL21
SL112
SL30 46 SL113
SL36
SL23
SL37 SL111
SL27 SL29
SL34 SL28
SL88 SL26 6498110B
SL64
Figure A.8-8 LH 750 System Diluter - Sampling Station
VL57C VC19 VL25 Needle

assembly
CL3
BD2
BD1
Probe Wipe
module
BSV
VL111 VL13 CL1
SL9 VL9B CL2
VL9A
PM9
SL24 Aspirator tip
CL11
Sample Access and Reservoir module Cleaning
(For details refer to the truck
Slide Making Modules Service Manual) Aspiration Pump module BSV and Probe-Wipe modules 6498005B
A.8-4 PN 4277219B
Figure A.8-9 LH 750 System Diluter - Random Access Module
VL94B
SL98 SL56 VC17 CVL93/128 Right side
SL76 underneath
SL44 MF16
SL99
SL93 VC24
VL44
SL80 VL129
SL97 VL94A
SL89
VL89
SL59
SL58 PM11 (SL92)
VL88 VL58 (behind PM5)
SL62
SL92
SL129
PM5
MF18
BD1 VL99
SL95
VL80
SL126 VL56 VL97B
SL127 VL59
SL128 VL76
VL98
VL62 CVL87/127
VL64 CVL85/126 Diff heater BD2 6498108B
Figure A.8-10 LH 750 System Diluter - Diff Module
SL50 SL41 MF17

SL52
SL65
VL50A
VL65
VL45
VL46B
VL41
VL50B
VC25
QD9 VL52
VL48B
6498006A
PN 4277219B A.8-5
Figure A.8-11 LH 750 System Diluter - Lower Left Rear Door

VL106
VL105
VL104
VL103
VL102
VL101
VL100
MF1
VC31
SL106
SL105
SL104
SL103
SL102
MF3 SL101
SL100 6498109B
A.8-6 PN 4277219B
SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS A
A.9 SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS
When installing a GEN•S System or an LH 750 System, always verify that the Analytical
Station software and Workstation software combination are a released configuration.
Table A.9-1 lists the current released configurations for the GEN•S System, Table A.9-2 for
the LH 750 System.
Table A.9-1 Worldwide Released Configurations for the GEN•S System*
Analytical Station Software
Configuration Analyzer (CRT) Display Diluter (LCD) Display Workstation Software

2C AS/2C1 WS 2C 2C 2C1
2C AS/3A WS 2C 2C 3A
4A AS/4A1 WS 4A/GENS 4A 4A1
* Refer to the appropriate service memo for software configurations released after 4A1.
Table A.9-2 Worldwide Released Configurations for the LH 750 System*
Analytical Station Software
Configuration Analyzer (CRT) Display Diluter (LCD) Display Workstation Software

1A AS/1A WS 1A AS/1A WS 1A AS/1A WS 1A AS/1A WS
* Refer to the appropriate service memo for software configurations released after 1A.
1. To display the Analytical Station software versions, press the Analyzer reset button and
observe the displays on the Analyzer (CRT) and the Diluter/numeric keypad (LCD).
2. To display the Workstation software version, select Help tt About from any customer
application except Run Configuration.
3. If the combination is not released, install a currently released software combination.
PN 4277219B A.9-1
SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS
A.9-2 PN 4277219B
MENU TREES A
A.10 MENU TREES
Figure A.10-1 GEN•S System Analyzer Menu Summary
1. RAMP TEST 0
1. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION FACTORS 2. PRECISION TEST 1
2. MANUAL CALIBRATION FACTORS 1. ELECTRONIC 3. PRECISION TEST 2
3. RECEIVE AVERAGE CALIBRATION FACTORS TESTS 4. PRECISION TEST 3
1. CALIBRATION 5. PRECISION TEST 4
6. MAIN MENU
7. SYSTEM RUN 6. COUNT
8. RETURN
ANALYZER 8. RETURN
1.
FUNCTIONS 2. HISTOGRAM HISTOGRAM STATISTICS
STATISTICS COUNT MEAN SIGMA MODE
2. HGB READINGS (BLANK 6. MAIN MENU
& SAMPLE VOLTAGES) 7. SYSTEM RUN 8. RETURN
8. RETURN
CBC ONLY 4. AP CUR ON
1. RAMP TEST LATEX CALIBRATION
MODE 5. AP CUR OFF
3. START UP 2. PRECISION TEST 3. 5. COMPUTE
CHANGE VALUES 6. REPEAT CALIBRATION
TESTS 3. BACKGROUND TEST 4. 6. ASPIRATE SAMPLE 7.
AP CUR ON/OFF SERVICE MENU
6. MAIN MENU 5. 7. SERVICE MENU 8.
APERTURE 1/2/3 RETURN
7. SYSTEM RUN 6. 8. RETURN
ASPIRATE SAMPLE
8. RETURN 8.
LATEX RETURN
3. BED BACKWARD 0 WASTE LEVEL FULL 0
4. HGB LAMP ADJUST 1. 1. MONTH CALIBRATION
FORMAT BED FORWARD 0 DILUENT LEVEL FULL 1
5. TRANSMIT TO PC 2. DAY
MM/DD/YY(US)/DD/MM/YY(EUROPEAN)/ DIFF CALIBRATION BED HORIZONTAL 1 CLEANER LEVEL FULL 1
6. DATE AND TIME 3. YEAR
YY/MM/DD(JAPANESE)
7. SYSTEM RUN SET DATE & TIME 4. HOURS 1. ASPIRATE
2. OTHER THAN
8. RETURN MAIN MENU 5. MINUTES 2. SCANNER POSITION 1 DIFF LYSE FULL 1
6. CBC ONLY RECOUNT
SYSTEM RUN 6. SECONDS 3. VCS TUBE DETECTED 0 DIFF PRESERVE FULL 1
7. MODE
8. RETURN 7. SYSTEM RUN V 4. V/C/S STRIPPER PLATE 1 CBC LYSE FULL 1
8. RETURN 5. PHASE ADJ
6. LS DRIFT BELLOWS UP 1 RETIC STAIN FULL 1
1. DILUTER SWITCH PANEL ALARM: 7. D/R/S BELLOWS DOWN 0 RETIC CLEAN FULL 1
MAIN 1. ENABLED/DISABLED 8. QUIT HAND DETECTOR 0 SHEATH TANK FULL 1
ALARM SETUP
MENU 2. LONG ALARM:
SERVICE
2. NUMBER OF ENABLED/DISABLED PROBE POSITION 0 BACKWASH TANK FULL 1
MENU
BAR CODE 3. CONTINUOUS ALARM: PROBE WIPE UP 0 OVERFLOW TANK FULL 0
DIGITS (2 OF 5) 3 - 11 ENABLED/DISABLED PROBE WIPE DOWN 1 FRONT DOOR 0
1. CRT DISPLAY TEST
6. MAIN MENU 2. RAM TEST
3. BLOOD DETECTOR:
7. SYSTEM RUN 3. ROM TEST RIGHT LIFT UP 0 TOP RIGHT SAFETY 0
OFF/ON
8. RETURN ECHO TEST
4. LEFT LIFT UP 0 TOP LEFT SAFETY 0
4. FLOW CELL ERRORS AUTO STOP SENSOR TEST
2. 5. RIGHT STACK LOAD 0
SYSTEM OFF/ON
CONFIGU- 4. DIAGNOSTIC
RATION UNDER R. STACK 0
7. SYSTEM RUN ROUTINES
UNDER L. STACK 0
7. SERVICE MENU
8. RETURN
8. RETURN 1. DIFF PROCESSOR RAM TEST
1. RED AND WHITE COUNTERS 2. DIFF TIMER TEST
2. DIFF PROCESSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. CBC/DIFF/RETIC
6. MORE 3. PLATELET NO FIT (MEAN) 3. DIFF PROCESSOR DUART TEST
3. 2. CBC/DIFF
TEST MODE DIAGNOSTICS 4. DIAGNOSTICS DUMP 4. DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST
3. CBC ONLY
5. CRT KEY TEST 7. SYSTEM RUN 7. SERVICE MENU
4. CBC/RETIC
5. RETIC ONLY RETURN 6. CRT ALIGNMENT TEST 8. RETURN
8. 7. SERVICE MENU
5. TURN PNEUMATICS OFF 8. SYSTEM RUN
8. RETURN 8. RETURN
1. DUMP APERTURES
1. N 1. RAM/ROM TEST
1. CBC/DIFF 2. I/O BUFFER
2. F 2. PLT FIT ANALYSIS
6. SCOPE 2. CBC ONLY 3. MANUAL HGB TIMER DRAIN XX (in minutes)
PRESS KEY #6 WITH KEY #1 TO ACCESS SCOPE MENU 4. RETURN 3. PLT NOFIT ANALYSIS (MODE)
MENU 3. DIFF ONLY 4. PC COMMUNICATION TEST
4. INITIALIZE CALIBRATION FACTORS
4. F55 TEST (FAST/SLOW) 7. SERVICE MENU
5. HGB VOLTAGE
7. SYSTEM RUN SPECIAL 8. RETURN
5. 6. CHANGE/DISPLAY CYCLE COUNT
8. RETURN FUNCTIONS 8. RETURN
7. PRESS KEY #7 WITH KEY #1 TO ACCESS SERVICE MENU
6. DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS
1. ZAP
1. ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES
6. TEST MODE 7. SERVICE MENU
7. SYSTEM RUN 7. VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES 1. RETURN
SYSTEM 7. ASPIRATIONS/TUBE XX SERVICE MENU 8.
8. 8. RETURN
RUN 8. MAIN 7.
8. RETURN RETURN 7 2 1 9 0 4 4 B
PN 4277219B A.10-1
MENU TREES
Figure A.10-2 LH 750 System Analyzer Menu Summary

I AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION FACTORS I RAMP TEST
II MANUAL CALIBRATION FACTORS I ELECTRONIC III PRECISION TEST
I
CALIBRATION III RECEIVE AVERAGE CALIBRATION FACTORS TESTS VI COUNT
VI MAIN MENU VIII RETURN
VII SYSTEM RUN
I ANALYZER VIII RETURN
FUNCTIONS
II HGB READINGS (BLANK VI MAIN MENU HISTOGRAM HISTOGRAM STATISTICS

II
& SAMPLE VOLTAGES) VII SYSTEM RUN STATISTICS COUNT MEAN SIGMA MODE
VIII RETURN
I RAMP TEST
III
START UP II PRECISION TEST BED BACKWARD 0 WASTE LEVEL FULL 0
TESTS III BACKGROUND TEST BED FORWARD 0 DILUENT LEVEL FULL 1
III CHANGE VALUES
VI MAIN MENU BED HORIZONTAL 1 CLEANER LEVEL FULL 1
VII III CBC LATEX IV AP CUR ON/OFF
SYSTEM RUN
VIII CALIBRATION V APERTURE 1/2/3
RETURN SCANNER POSITION 1 DIFF LYSE FULL 1
VIII RETURN
IV HGB LAMP ADJUST I I MONTH TUBE DETECTED 0 DIFF PRESERVE FULL 1
FORMAT
V TRANSMIT TO PC II DAY STRIPPER PLATE 1 CBC LYSE FULL 1
MM/DD/YY(US)/DD/MM/YY(EUROPEAN)/
VI DATE & TIME III YEAR
YY/MM/DD(JAPANESE)
VII SYSTEM RUN
II SET DATE & TIME IV HOURS BELLOWS UP 1 RETIC STAIN FULL 1
VIII RETURN MAIN MENU V MINUTES BELLOWS DOWN 0 RETIC CLEAN FULL 1
VI
VII SYSTEM RUN VI SECONDS HAND DETECTOR 0 SHEATH TANK FULL 1
VIII RETURN VII SYSTEM RUN
VIII RETURN PROBE POSITION 0 BACKWASH TANK FULL 1
PROBE WIPE UP 0 OVERFLOW TANK FULL 0
I DILUTER SWITCH PANEL ALARM: I CRT DISPLAY TEST PROBE WIPE DOWN 1 FRONT DOOR 0
MAIN I ALARM SETUP ENABLED/DISABLED II RAM TEST
MENU II LONG ALARM: III ROM TEST
SERVICE RIGHT LIFT UP 0 TOP RIGHT SAFETY 0
II NUMBER OF ENABLED/DISABLED IV
MENU ECHO TEST LEFT LIFT UP 0 TOP LEFT SAFETY 0
BAR CODE III CONTINUOUS ALARM: V SENSOR TEST RIGHT STACK LOAD 0
DIGITS (2 OF 5) 3 - 11 ENABLED/DISABLED
VI MAIN MENU
BLOOD DETECTOR: VII UNDER R. STACK 0
III SYSTEM RUN VI
OFF/ON VIII SERVICE MENU UNDER L. STACK 0
RETURN
VIII RETURN
IV FLOW CELL ERRORS AUTO STOP
SYSTEM OFF/ON DIAGNOSTIC
II IV
CONFIGU- ROUTINES I
V CALIBRATION FACTORS REG/CLA DIFF PROCESSOR RAM TEST
RATION I RED AND WHITE COUNTERS II DIFF TIMER TEST
II DIFF PROCESSOR DIAGNOSTICS
VII SYSTEM RUN III DIFF PROCESSOR DUART TEST
VI MORE IV DIAGNOSTIC DUMP
IV DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST
DIAGNOSTICS V CRT KEY TEST VII SYSTEM RUN
VIII RETURN VII SERVICE MENU
VI CRT ALIGNMENT TEST
VIII RETURN
VIII RETURN VII SERVICE MENU VIII
VIII RETURN RETURN
II I/O BUFFER
I RAM/ROM TEST
III MANUAL HGB TIMER DRAIN XX (in minutes
IV INITIALIZE CALIBRATION FACTORS
IV PC COMMUNICATION TEST
V TURN PNEUMATICS OFF SPECIAL V HGB VOLTAGE
V V CLENZ REMOVAL TIME (hrs)XX
FUNCTIONS VI CHANGE/DISPLAY CYCLE COUNT
VII SERVICE MENU
I N VIII RETURN
I CBC/DIFF VIII RETURN
II F
VI SCOPE II CBC ONLY
PRESS KEY #6 WITH KEY #1 TO ACCESS SCOPE MENU IV RETURN I ZAP
MENU III DIFF ONLY I ELECTRICAL/PNEUMATIC SUPPLIES
F55 TEST (FAST/SLOW) VI DILUTER DIAGNOSTICS VII SERVICE MENU
IV VII VOLTAGES/TEMPERATURES
SYSTEM RUN VIII RETURN
VII VIII RETURN
VIII RETURN
VII DIFF CALIBRATION I SERVICE MENU
VII PRESS KEY #7 WITH KEY #1 TO ACCESS SERVICE MENU
VII
VIII RETURN RETURN
SYSTEM VII ASPIRATIONS/TUBE XX MODE I ASPIRATE

VIII
RUN VIII MAIN II RECOUNT
V III VCS
IV V/C/S
V PHASE ADJ
VI LS DRIFT
VII D/R 6498112B
VIII QUIT
A.10-2 A.10-2 PN 4277219B

CONTENTS
10
ABBREVIATIONS, ABBREVIATIONS-1
GLOSSARY, GLOSSARY-1
PN 4277219B 10-i
CONTENTS
10-ii PN 4277219B
ABBREVIATIONS
The following list is a composite of the abbreviations, acronyms and reference designators used in this
manual. When the same abbreviation (or reference designator) is used for more than one word (or type of
component), all meanings relevant to this manual are included, separated by semicolons.
SYMBOLS assy - assembly

≈ - approximately auto - automatic
> - greater than autocal - automatic calibration
≥ - greater than or equal to aux - auxiliary
< - less than avg - average
≤ - less than or equal to
µ - micron B
µA - micro amperes BA - basophils
µf - microfarad BCD (card) - Bar-Code Decoder
µf-hd - microfarad head BCS - bar-code scanner
µL - microliter blk - black
- - minus BNC (connector) - bayonet Neil-Concelman
# - number BSV - blood sampling valve
% - percent Btu - British thermal units
+ - plus BUBB - bubble
± - plus or minus BVB - backplane voltage bus
A C
A - ampere C - centigrade; capacitor
abs - absolute (difference) Cable Adpt (card) - Diluter Cable Adapter
ac - alternating current CAL - calibration
accum - accumulate CBC - complete blood count
ACK - acknowledge cass/pos - cassette/position
A/D - analog to digital cbl - cable
adpt - adapter CD - CBC and diff
adj - adjustment CDD - Coulter Diagnostics Division
AGC - automatic gain control CDR - CBC, diff and retic
AMC - ANALYZER MICROCONTROLLER card CDRH - National Center for Devices and
Radiological Health
ANA - Analyzer
CE - clear entry
AP - aperture
Ch -channel
API - aperture current
CK - choke
API - SIGNAL GENERATOR (card) - Aperture
Current Signal Generator CL - cooling coils; cylinder
APS1 (card) - ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1 cm - centimeter
APS2 (card) - ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 2 CMOS - complementary metal oxide
semiconductor
ARMS - amps root mean square
PN 4277219B ABBREVIATIONS-1
ABBREVIATIONS
Comm Intfc (card) - COMMUNICATION EDTA - ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid

INTERFACE ehex - external hex
CP - custom part ELYSE - Erythrolyse
C/P - cassette/position number EMC - electromagnetic compatability
CPU - central processing unit EMI - electromagnetic shield
CR - CBC and retic; current regulator EO - eosinophils
(semi-conductor device)
EPROM - erasable programmable read-only
CRT - cathode ray tube memory
CTRL - control ESD - electrostatic discharge
CTA - cassette transport assembly ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories
CUR - current ETX - end of text
CV - coefficient of variation
F
D F - Fahrenheit; fast; function; fuse
D - dimensional (2D and 3D DataPlots) FCC - Federal Communication Commission
DAC - digital to analog converter FF - feed-through fitting; flip flop
dc - direct current FIFO - first in, first out
DC - direct current (for VCS technology) fL - femtoliter
DCN - document control number FL - air water separator; filter
diam - diameter fl-hd (screw) - flat head
Diff - difference; differential FRC - field replaceable component
Diff Proc (card) - Differential Processor FRU - field replaceable unit
DIFF PROCESSOR (card) - Differential Processor ft - feet
Dil - Diluter FT - T-fitting
Dil Proc (card) - DILUTER PROCESSOR FX - cross fitting
Diluter Cbl Adapter (card) - Diluter Cable Adapter FY - Y-fitting
Diluter Solenoid Optics PS (card) -
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply
G
DIP switch - dual in-line package switch g - grams
disp - display GA - gauge
dL - deciliter GND - ground
DMM - digital multimeter GR - granulocytes
DNSEN - down sensor (for Probe-Wipe module)
DPR - dual port RAM H
DUART - dual universal asynchronous receiver Hct - hematocrit
transmitter
hd - head
DVM - digital volt meter
Hg - mercury
Hgb - hemoglobin
E HI - high
2-ABBREVIATIONS PN 4277219B
ABBREVIATIONS
HRLS -high light scatter reticulocytes m - meter; middle

hsc-hd (screw) - hex-socket head mA - milli-amperes
HV - high voltage; high volume MALS - median light scatter
Hz - Hertz max - maximum
MCH - mean corpuscular hemoglobin
I MCHC - mean corpuscular hemoglobin
IA - aperture current concentration
IBUS - instrument bus MEM - memory
i.d. - internal diameter MF - manifold
ID - identification MHz - megahertz
in. - inches min - minimum
I/O - input/output misc - miscellaneous
IRF - immature reticulocyte fraction mL - milliliter
Ireg Hst. - irregular histogram mm - millimeter
MN - mean
J MO - monocytes
J - receptacle connector MON - monitor
MPV - mean platelet volume
K MSCV - mean spherical cell volume
K - constant; thousand MSD - most significant digit
msg - message
L MUX - multiplexer
l - long
mV - millivolts
L - left; liter; lock
MV - mean volume
laser - light amplification by stimulated emission of
radiation
Laser PS - Laser Power Supply N
N - normal
LCD - liquid crystal display
N/A - not applicable
LED - light emitting diode
NAK - not acknowledged
LIS - laboratory information system
NC (nc) - normally closed
LLS - linear light scatter
NE - narrow element; neutrophils
LO - low
NE DC - neutrophil direct current
LS - light scatter
NE OP - neutrophil opacity
LSD - least significant digit
NE RLS -neutrophil rotated light scatter
LS Preamp (module) - Light Scatter Preamplifier
nm - nanometer
LV - low volume
npt - national pipe thread
LY - lymphocytes
N.O. - normally open
norm - normal
M
ABBREVIATIONS
NOBL - no blood RAM - random access memory

NRBC - nucleated RBC RAS - remote access services
NSD - next significant digit RBC - red blood cell count; red blood cell
RCS - remote communication service
O RDW - red cell distribution width
o.d. - outer diameter RED PRE-AMP (card) - Red (cell) Pre-Amplifier
op amp - operational amplifier RED/WHITE PRE-AMP (card) - Red (cell)/White
OP - opacity (cell) Pre-Amplifier
OPT - optics REF - reference
oz - ounces REG - regulator
RET - reticulocytes; return
P Retic - reticulocytes
P - plug connector RF - radio frequency
PAL - programmable array logic RF Preamp (card) - RF Detector Preamp
pan-hd (screw) - panhead RG - pressure regulator
param - parameter Rgt Res Intfc (card) - Reservoir Interface
PART - partial (aspiration) Rgt Res (module) - Reagent Reservoir
PCB - printed circuit board (card) RIA - red (cell) aperture current
Pct - plateletcrit RLS - rotated light scatter
PDW - platelet distribution width RMS - root mean square
PLD - programmable logic device RMV - red (cell) mean volume
Plt - platelet ROM - read only memory
Plt Proc (card) - PLATELET PROCESSOR R/P - red (cell)/platelet
PM - pump RS/O Intfc (card) - RS/Opto Interface
PN - part number RV - relief valve
PNEU - pneumatics R/W Proc (card) - RED (cell)/WHITE (cell)
ppm - parts per million PROCESSOR
preamp - preamplifier R/W/P SC/A (card) - red (cell)/white (cell)/platelet
signal conditioner/analyzer
PS - power supply
psi - pounds per square inch
PVT - pressure, vacuum, temperature
S
S - slow
P/W (harness) - probe wipe
S/A - subassembly
PWR - power
SBUS - System bus
SC/A (card) - signal conditioner/analyzer
Q
SCSI - small computer system interface
QD - quick disconnect
SD - standard deviation
shoulder-hd (screw) - shoulder head
R
R - potentiometer; resistor; right SID - sample identification
ABBREVIATIONS
SIMM - single in-line memory module Vls - vent line sensor

SL - solenoid VL - valve
SLYSE- StabiLyse volt - voltage
SM - SlideMaker
SOL - solenoid W
Sol/Opt PS (card) - Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power w - wide
Supply W - watt
SP - stretched pulse w/ - with
SPC (card or Display) - System Power Controller WBC - white blood cell count; white blood cell
ss - stainless steel WE - wide element
STX - start of text WHITE PRE-AMP (card) - White (cell)
SUP - supply Preamplifier
SVP - system verification procedure WHT (wht) - white
SW - software; switch WIA - white (cell) aperture current
WM - wire marker
T WMV - white (cell) mean volume
T - time w/o - without
TEMP - temperature
thd - thread X
thk - thick xmit - transmit
TP - test point xrec - cross recess
TTL - transistor-transistor logic x - times
TTM - Triple Transducer module
TVS - transient voltage suppressor
U
U - integrated circuit package
UNC - unified coarse thread
UNF - unified fine thread
UL - Underwriters Laboratory
UPSEN - up sensor (for Probe Wipe module)
V
V - volts
Vac - volts alternating current
vac - vacuum
VC - vacuum chamber
VCS - volume, conductivity, (light) scatter
Vdc - volts direct current
ABBREVIATIONS
GLOSSARY
Absolute count - Concentration of a cell type expressed as a number per volume of whole
blood.
Accuracy - Ability of the instrument to agree with a predetermined reference (true) value.
Anticoagulant - A substance added to blood to prevent clotting.
Aperture - An opening of a specific size and length through which cells pass for counting and
sizing.
Assay values - Values established for a control by extensive analysis of that material.
Basophil - A mature granulocytic WBC with granules that contain heparin and vasoactive
compounds. The granules stain purple-blue with Wright’s stain.
Calibration - The adjustment of an instrument reading or measurement to a known physical

constant.
Calibrator - A substance with values obtained by reference instruments and used to calibrate
instruments.
Carryover - The amount, in percent, of sample remaining in the system and picked up by the
next sample cycled. Low-to-high carryover is the amount of sample with low cell
concentrations carried over to samples with high cell concentrations, such as diluent to
blood. High-to-low carryover is the amount of samples with high cell concentrations carried
over to samples with low cell concentrations, such as blood to diluent.
Coefficient of Variation (CV) - An expression, in percent, of data spread as related to the

mean.
SD
CV% = -------------- × 100
Mean
Coincidence correction - Mathematical adjustment of cell count and size for coincidence
error.
Coincidence error - Errors produced in counting and sizing by the presence of more than one
cell within the aperture sensing area at the same time. The system senses these as one large
cell rather than as two distinct cells.
Control (material) - A substance with predetermined values used as a standard to verify

accuracy of instrument results.
Default - Original setting in the instrument.
Differential count - The distribution (in percentage and/or absolute number) of the different
populations of WBCs on a stained blood smear.
Eosinophil - A mature granulocytic WBC that responds to parasitic infections and allergic
conditions. Granules stain a bright reddish orange with Wright’s stain.
Erythrocyte (red blood cell) - A biconcave disc, 6 to 8 µ, that carries oxygen to the tissues in
the body and carries carbon dioxide away from the tissues.
PN 4277219B GLOSSARY-1
GLOSSARY
Hematocrit - Red cell packed volume. The percentage of packed red cells compared to the
entire blood sample.
Hemoglobin - A protein component of red cells that carries oxygen and carbon dioxide.
Histogram - A graphical display of the cell size distribution of a blood sample, where size is
on the A-axis and frequency is on the Y-axis.
Indices - In hematology, refers to the following calculated values for red cell properties: MCV,
MCH and MCHC.
In vitro - Outside of a living organism, such as in a laboratory or in an artificial container.
In vivo - Inside a living organism, associated with the physiological system.
Linearity - The ability of an instrument to recover expected results at varying levels of

concentration.
Leukocyte (white blood cell) - Cells that defend the body against disease.
Lymphocyte - WBC originating in the lymph system. The key to the body’s immune system,
the lymphocyte recognizes and eliminates foreign pathogens in the body.
Lyse - To break apart or dissolve.
Mean - Arithmetic average of a group of data.
Mean corpuscular hemoglobin (MCH) - The weight of hemoglobin in the average red blood
cell expressed in picograms.
Mean corpuscular hemoglobin concentration (MCHC) - The weight of hemoglobin in the

packed red cell volume expressed in g/dL or g/L.
Mean cell volume (MCV) - Average volume of red blood cells expressed in fL.
Mean platelet volume (MPV) - Average volume of platelets expressed in fL.
Micron (µ) - One millionth of a meter.
Mode - The cycle used to run a sample (Aspiration mode) or the tests selected for analysis
(Test mode). Also, the number (or set of numbers) that occur most frequently, for example
the peak on a histogram.
Monocyte - A large, mononuclear, phagocytic WBC found in the peripheral blood and in the
lymphoid system.
Nanometer (nm) - a unit of linear measurement, equal to 10-9 meter.
Neutrophil - A mature granulocytic WBC characterized by a segmented nucleus. The

cytoplasm of this phagocyte stains pinkish to beige with faint granules in Wright’s stain.
Nucleated red blood cell (NRBC) - Immature form of the red blood cell characterized by the
presence of a nucleus.
2-GLOSSARY PN 4277219B
GLOSSARY
Outlier - Control results that fall outside the expected or established range.
Parameter - Component of blood that the instrument measures and reports.
Platelet (thrombocyte) - The cytoplasmic fragments of megakaryocytes, circulating as small

discs in the peripheral blood, and an essential component for blood clotting.
Platelet distribution width (PDW) - An index of the variation in platelet size.
Precision - The ability of the instrument to produce similar results when the same specimen
is run repeatedly. The precision of the instrument is calculated as a CV (or an SD for
differential results). Also called reproducibility.
Quality control - A set of procedures performed to ensure that the instrument results are
accurate and precise.
Range - The difference between the highest and lowest measurement in a series.
Red blood cell (erythrocyte) - A biconcave disc, 6 to 8 µ, that carries oxygen to the tissues in
the body and carries carbon dioxide away from the tissues.
Red cell indices - In hematology, refers to the following calculated values for red cell
properties: MVC, MCH and MCHC.
Red distribution width (RDW) - An index of the variation in red blood cell size.
Reproducibility - Ability of the instrument to produce similar results when the same
specimen is run repeatedly. The reproducibility is calculated as a CV (or an SD for differential
results). Also called precision.
Reticulocyte (retic) - An immature form of red cell that, in the maturation process, falls
between a nucleated RBC and a mature RBC. As the nucleated RBC matures, the nucleus
shrinks and eventually is shed, and the RNA in the cytoplasm breaks down. The red cell
without a nucleus but still containing remnants of the RNA is a reticulocyte. Mature RBCs
contain no RNA. Stains, such as new methylene blue, precipitate the RNA, differentiating the
reticulocytes from mature RBCs and other cells.
Shift - Consecutive values that abruptly move from one level (mean) to another and then
maintain a constant level.
Standard deviation - A measurement of deviation from the mean.
Threshold settings - The lower and upper size limits set for a particle count to distinguish
between different particles, and between particles and debris or electronic noise.
Thrombocyte (platelet) - The cytoplasmic fragments of megakaryocytes, circulating as small

discs in the peripheral blood, and an essential component for blood clotting.
Trend - Consecutive values that increase or decrease gradually.
White blood cell (leukocyte) - Blood cells that defend the body against disease.
PN 4277219B GLOSSARY-3
GLOSSARY
4-GLOSSARY PN 4277219B
INDEX
Numerics part number, 8.1-25

5C® cell control 48 Volt bulk or pneumatic Power Supply
using for initial adjustment of average defective, 7.2-9
calibration factors, 4.10-1 48 Volt power outside ±10% limit, 7.2-3
5C Control material used in Retic or SUBSET 48 volts fault isolation, 7.4-5
modes, 7.2-1 60 psi
5C Not Allowed In This Mode, 7.2-1 acceptable limits, A.1-6
5-diff lyse pump. See diff lytic reagent pump development, 2.9-2
5 psi distribution, 2.9-2
acceptable limits, A.1-6 60 PSI pressure high., 7.2-19
connections from Power Supply to Diluter on 60 PSI pressure low, 7.2-19
the GEN•S System, 3.5-1 60 PSI pressure out of range (too high), 7.2-19
connections from Power Supply to Diluter on 60 PSI pressure out of range (too low), 7.2-19
the LH 750 System, 3.13-1 60-psi regulator (RV1)
development, 2.9-3 part number, 8.1-25
distribution, 2.9-3, 2.9-4 function, 2.9-2
5 PSI Pressure High, 7.2-1 location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
5 PSI Pressure Low, 7.2-1 286 Board Communication Error, 7.2-1
5 PSI pressure too high, 7.2-1
5 PSI pressure too low, 7.2-1 A
5-psi regulator (RG2) A Control Lot number archive file was created, 7.3-1
function, 2.9-2 abbreviations
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2 used in this manual, ABBREVIATIONS-1
part number, 8.1-25 ac input voltage specifications, table of, A.1-11
5 Volts on Diluter 1 Card outside limit, 7.2-14 AC Line Voltage Bad, 7.2-2
6-Channel Preamp card. See Six-Channel Preamp AC line voltage below 90 Volt limit, 7.2-2
card ACK Not Received By Diluter, 7.2-2
12 Volts on Diluter 4 Card outside limit, 7.2-14 adjustment procedures
+15 Volts from Diff Power Supply outside limit, 7.2-12 ambient temperature display, 4.65-2
-15 Volts from Diff Power Supply outside limit, 7.2-12 aperture voltage, 4.9-1
-15 Volts on Diluter 1 Card outside limit, 7.2-14 aspiration pump, 4.27-1
+15 Volts on Diluter 1 card outside limit, 7.2-14 bar-code scanner position sensor for laser style
+15 Volts on Diluter 2 Card outside limit, 7.2-13 bar-code reader, 4.53-2
-15 Volts on Diluter 2 Card outside limit, 7.2-13 bar-code scanner position sensor for LED style
24 Volts on Diluter 2 Card outside limit, 7.2-13 bar-code reader, 4.53-1
30 psi bar-code scanner, laser style bar-code
acceptable limits, A.1-6 reader, 4.51-8
connections from Power Supply to Diluter on bar-code scanner, LED style bar-code
the GEN•S System, 3.5-1 reader, 4.51-1
connections from Power Supply to Diluter on bed backward sensor, 4.44-2
the LH 750 System, 3.13-1 bed forward sensor, 4.44-4
development, 2.9-2 bed horizontal sensor, 4.44-3
distribution, 2.9-2, 2.9-4 bellows down sensor, 4.57-2
30 PSI Pressure High, 7.2-1 bellows up sensor, 4.57-2
30 PSI Pressure Low, 7.2-1 bubble/blood detectors, 4.55-3, 4.55-7
30 PSI pressure too high, 7.2-1 CBC calibration factors, 4.10-1
30 PSI pressure too low, 7.2-1 CBC lytic reagent pump, 4.22-1
30-psi regulator (RG1) cleaning truck, 4.58-5
function, 2.9-2 Clog Detector circuit, 4.74-3
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2 CRT intensity on the GEN•S System, 4.34-1
PN 4277219B INDEX-1
INDEX
CRT intensity on the LH750 System, 4.34-2 determining Plt and MPV results on the GEN•S
diff lytic reagent pump, 4.28-1 System, 2.24-3
diff preservative pump, 4.29-1 determining RBC counts on the GEN•S
diff preservative pump volume System, 2.24-2
optimization, 4.66-1 determining RDW results on the GEN•S
diluent dispensers, 4.23-1 System, 2.24-3
Diluter keypad display (contrast), A.3-13 determining WBC counts on the GEN•S
flippers, loading bay, 4.42-1 System, 2.24-2
flippers, unloading bay, 4.42-1 function, 2.3-1, 2.11-2
flow-rate (sheath, diff sample and retic sample generating Plt histogram on the GEN•S
regulators), 4.73-1 System, 2.24-3
Hgb lamp voltage, 4.32-2 generating RBC histogram on the GEN•S
initial sheath, diff sample and retic sample System, 2.24-2
pressures, 4.72-1 generating WBC histogram on the GEN•S
left lift up switch activator, 4.40-3 System, 2.24-2
LS gain, 4.77-1 jumper locations, A.2-1
probe position sensor, 4.60-4 jumpers settings, A.2-1
probe-wipe down sensor, 4.58-6 location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3
probe-wipe up sensor, 4.58-6 location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4
retic clearing solution pump, 4.25-1 part number, 8.1-22
RF Detector Preamp card, 4.74-1 power up signals simplified schematic, 2.6-5
right lift up switch activator, 4.40-3 replacement, 4.6-1
rocker bed belt tension, 4.36-1 RESET signal block diagram, 2.11-3
rocker bed position flag, 4.44-1 switch location, A.2-1
rocker bed rock rate, 4.45-2 switch settings, tables of, A.2-1
stain heater, 4.65-1 AMC Did Not Reply, 7.2-2
stain pump, 4.24-1 AMC Never Sent Start Command, 7.2-2
tube detector, 4.47-1 AMC reported error - ASCII Receive Error, 7.2-3
air water separator (FL1) AMC Reported Error - Diff Transmit Failure., 7.2-13
cleaning, 4.16-1 AMC Reported Error - Function Not Allowed, 7.2-18
filter, part number, 8.1-11 AMC Reported Error - PC not ready., 7.2-28
function, 2.9-2 AMC Reported Error - Retic Transmit Failure, 7.2-32
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2 AMC Reported Error - Run Aborted, PC Not
part number, 8.1-3 Ready, 7.2-34
replacement, 4.16-2 AMC Reported Errors -- Operator Alert 09., 7.2-27
alarms, audible AMC Requested Stop, 7.2-2
descriptions, 4.5-1 AMC, Diluter or DIFF Processor hardware
how to turn off, 7.1-1 malfunction (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-21
testing, 4.5-1 AMC-DIFF communication failure: 286 board, 7.2-1
Ambient Temp Sensor Bad, 7.2-2 AMC-DIFF communication failure:
Ambient temperature sensor defective or unknown., 7.2-39, 7.2-40
disconnected, 7.2-2 AMC-DIFF communication failure: wrong
AMC echo., 7.2-41
component locations, A.2-1 An archive file with patient samples was created, 7.3-1
determining Hgb results on the GEN•S ANA. See Analyzer
System, 2.24-4 ANALOG 5 card
determining MCV results on the GEN•S block diagram, 2.21-6
System, 2.24-2 function, 2.21-6
inputs, 2.21-7
2-INDEX PN 4277219B
INDEX
outputs, 2.21-7 Analyzer +48V Bad, 7.2-3

part number, 8.1-22 Analyzer Error, 7.2-3
See also ANALOG card Analyzer fans
analog backplane function, 2.3-1
for GEN•S System, part number, 8.1-22 location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3
for LH 750 System, part number, 8.1-22 location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4
function, 2.3-1 replacement, 4.12-3
location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3 Analyzer Fans Failed, 7.2-3
location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4 Analyzer Fans Power Supply Defective, 7.2-3
test points and voltage specifications, table Analyzer fans power supply defective, 7.2-3
of, A.1-11 Analyzer keypad. See CRT buttons; Numeric
ANALOG card keypad
function, 2.3-2 Analyzer memory read/write failure., 7.2-34
location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3 ANALYZER MICROCONTROLLER card. See AMC
location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4 Analyzer non-communication error, 7.2-20
replacement, 4.6-1 Analyzer power supplies
See also ANALOG 5 card ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1 card, 2.7-4
Analytical Station ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 2 card, 2.7-6
alarm, turning off, 7.1-1 API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card, 2.7-1, 2.7-3
audible alarms, description, 4.5-1 general description, 2.5-4
connecting to the Workstation on the GEN•S ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1 card
System, 3.4-7 block diagram, 2.7-5
connecting to the Workstation on the LH 750 function, 2.3-1, 2.7-4
System, 3.15-1 input, 2.7-5
decontaminating, 5.3-2 location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3
description, 2.1-2, 2.1-5 location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4
extended shutdown and startup monitors, 2.7-6
procedures, 5.2-1 outputs, 2.7-5
main units, 2.1-2, 2.1-5 part number, 8.1-22
power down/power up procedure, 4.1-1 power status LEDs, table of indications, 2.7-6
software versions, GEN•S System, A.9-1 replacement, 4.6-1
software versions, LH 750 System, A.9-1 test points, 2.7-6
Analytical Station messages Zap circuit, description of, 2.7-4
"and" condition, 7.1-2 ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 2 card
about the message tables, 7.1-2 block diagram, 2.7-7
Analyzer function, 2.3-1, 2.7-6
accessing and using the SCOPE MENU, 4.3-1 input, 2.7-7
accessing and using the SERVICE MENU, 4.2-1 location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3
backplane voltage test points, A.1-11 location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4
card layouts with component descriptions, A.2-1 monitors, 2.7-8
circuit card replacement, 4.6-1 outputs, 2.7-7
illustrated parts. See parts, illustrated power status LEDs, table of indications, 2.7-8
installation, GEN•S System. See installation replacement, 4.6-1
procedure, GEN•S System test points, 2.7-8
installation, LH 750 System. See installation Analyzer stopped, 7.2-2
procedure, LH 750 System Analyzer, GEN•S System
main components, table of functions, 2.3-1 component locations, front view, 2.3-3
See also Analyzer, GEN•S System; Analyzer, component locations, rear view, 2.3-3
LH 750 System CRT buttons. See CRT buttons
PN 4277219B INDEX-3
INDEX
opening side doors, illustration, 3.3-3 switch locations, A.2-2

software menu tree, A.10-1 switch settings, table of, A.2-2
See also Analyzer APS1 card. See ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1 card
Analyzer, LH 750 System APS2 card. See ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 2 card
component locations, front view, 2.3-4 ASCII Rec. Error, 7.2-3
component locations, front view, cover Aspiration -B--, 7.2-4
down, 2.3-4 Aspiration ---C, 7.2-4
component locations, rear view, 2.3-4 aspiration modes
CRT buttons. See CRT buttons options available, 2.1-6
opening side doors, illustration, 3.11-6 Aspiration N---, 7.2-5
software menu tree, A.10-2 Aspiration --P-, 7.2-5
See also Analyzer aspiration pump (PM9)
Analyzer-Diluter communication failure: two NAKs adjustable stops, 2.17-3
sent from AMC, 7.2-39 aspiration state, Automatic mode, 2.17-3
Analyzer-Diluter communication failure: two NAKs aspiration state, Manual mode, 2.17-3
sent from Diluter., 7.2-39 at rest state, 2.17-2
Analyzer-Diluter communication failure: components, illustration of, 2.17-2
unknown., 7.2-39, 7.2-40 function, 2.17-1
Analyzer-to-Diluter communication failure., 7.2-14 function and location reference, A.6-11
Angar™ valves high (Automatic-mode) adjustments,
function, A.6-8 illustration of, 4.27-4
illustration of, 8.2-62 high (Automatic-mode) volume check, 4.27-3
location references, table of, A.6-8 low (Manual-mode) adjustments, illustration
part numbers, 8.1-36, 8.2-63 of, 4.27-2
aperture blocks and module, part numbers, 8.1-3 low (Manual-mode) volume check, 4.27-1
aperture gain matching procedure. See latex voltage module, exploded view of, 8.2-48
calibration part number, 8.1-24
aperture impedance pneumatic signals and piston positions, table
red and white isolation with diluent, table of of, 2.17-1
limits, A.1-3 replacement, 4.27-6
red and white with diluent, table of limits, A.1-3 troubleshooting, 4.27-4
red and white without diluent, table of volume tolerances, A.1-14
limits, A.1-3 Aspiration Pump module
Aperture Voltage Lower Failed, 7.2-3 components, GEN•S System, illustration, A.7-4
Aperture voltage reading above limits, 7.2-3 components, LH 750 System, illustration, A.8-4
Aperture voltage reading below limits, 7.2-3 exploded view of, 8.2-48
Aperture Voltage Upper Failed, 7.2-3 location, GEN•S System, A.7-4
Aperture voltage(s) out of range (<Tube ID>, location, LH 750 System, A.8-4
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-9 aspiration station
API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card component locations, 2.17-17
block diagram, 2.7-1 Aspiration Timeout, 7.2-6
component locations, A.2-2 Aspiration timeout, 7.2-6
function, 2.3-1, 2.7-1, 2.7-3 aspirator tip
input, 2.7-2 function, A.6-9
location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3 location, 2.17-17
monitors, 2.7-2, 2.7-4 location, GEN•S System, A.7-4
outputs, 2.7-2 location, LH 750 System, A.8-4
part number, 8.1-22 attention
replacement, 4.6-1 definition, 1.1-4
4-INDEX PN 4277219B
INDEX
Automatic CBC calibration factors updated from stationary vs moveable, 2.17-17

Analyzer., 7.3-1 backwash cylinder (CL11)
Automatic CBC calibration factors updated from GEN function and location reference, A.6-9
S Workstation., 7.3-1 backwash manifold (MF4)
Automatic Mode Disabled, 7.2-6 function, 2.13-9, 2.17-12
Automatic sampling mode disabled., 7.2-6 function and location reference, A.6-10
Auto-Numbering has been disabled., 7.3-1 See also manifolds
Auto-Numbering has been enabled auto number is backwash tank (VC23)
<Auto-Numbering Start ID>., 7.3-1 choke, CK15, location, 3.1-5, 3.10-5
Autostop - check Workstation, 7.2-6 function, 2.13-8
AutoStop Check Workstation, 7.2-6 function and location reference, A.6-12
Autostop check Workstation, 7.2-6 monitoring the reagent level of, 2.13-8
Autostop has been triggered for Analytical Station reagent flow, illustration of, 2.13-8
<Instrument#>, 7.3-1 testing sensor, 2.13-8, 4.81-1
AutoStop has been triggered for control folder Backwash Tank Not Full, 7.2-7
<lot#>., 7.3-1 backwash tank sensor
AutoStop Requested, 7.2-6 function, 4.81-1
testing, 4.81-1
Backwash Tank Still Full, 7.2-7
B Bar code scanner pressure too low or scanner
BA# obstructed (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>), 7.2-35
diff parameter, 2.1-1 Bar-Code Decoder card
BA% components locations, A.3-1
checking precision, 5.5-1 connector locations, A.3-1
diff parameter, 2.1-1 connectors, table of connections, A.3-1
Background CBC test values within limits, 7.3-1 for LED style bar-code reader, part
Background DIFF test values within limits, 7.3-1 number, 8.1-22
Background: <Background test/parameter> function, 2.4-1
<Background> exceeded <flag> limit, 7.3-1 jumper location, A.3-1
Background: <Background test/parameter> , 7.3-1 jumper setting, A.3-1
backplane interconnects location, GEN•S System, 2.4-6
location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3 part number, 8.1-22
location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4 replacement, 4.7-1
backplane voltage bus bar-code reader
connecting on the GEN•S System, 3.4-4 bar-code label specifications, 2.14-5
connecting on the LH 750 System, 3.12-5 function, 2.14-3
function, 2.3-1, 2.5-3 performance test, 4.49-1
location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3 read-rate specifications, A.1-1
location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4 types of bar codes used, 2.14-5
backplane voltage bus distribution bar-code reader, laser style
block diagram for the GEN•S System, 2.5-3 block diagram, 2.14-4
block diagram for the LH 750 System, 2.5-4 description, 2.14-4
backplanes scanner adjustments, 4.51-8
analog. See analog backplane scanner cylinder replacement, 4.50-2
CRT. See CRT backplane See also bar-code reader
digital. See digital backplane bar-code reader, LED style
backwash cup block diagram, 2.14-3
function, 2.17-17 description, 2.14-3
marker, 2.16-7 scanner adjustments, 4.51-1
PN 4277219B INDEX-5
INDEX
scanner cylinder replacement, 4.50-1 BD ADJ card

See also bar-code reader adjustment locations, A.2-3
bar-code scanner component locations, A.2-3
adjustment locations for LED style bar-code connectors, table of connections, A.2-3
reader, 4.51-6 replacement, 4.6-1
adjustments, laser style bar-code reader, 4.51-8 replacement, illustration, 4.6-2
adjustments, LED style bar-code reader, 4.51-1 BD1
alignment with oscilloscope, 4.54-1 function, A.6-9
allowable distance from bar-code housing, A.1-1 location on the GEN•S System, A.7-4
electrical check for LED style bar-code location on the LH 750 System, A.8-4
reader, 4.52-2 location, GEN•S System, A.7-4
electrical checks, table of test points and location, LH 750 System, A.8-4
acceptable ranges, A.1-1 See also bubble/blood detectors
function, 2.4-1 BD2
location, 2.15-5 function, A.6-9
location, GEN•S System, 2.4-4 location on the GEN•S System, A.7-4
location, LH 750 System, 2.4-8 location on the LH 750 System, A.8-4
park tab length tolerance, A.1-1 location, GEN•S System, A.7-4
position sensor adjustment for laser style location, LH 750 System, A.8-4
bar-code reader, 4.53-2 See also bubble/blood detectors
position sensor adjustment for LED style bed backward sensor
bar-code reader, 4.53-1 adjustment, 4.44-2
speed check for LED style bar-code function, 4.81-1
reader, 4.52-1 location, 2.15-2
stoke timing specifications, A.1-1 testing, 4.81-1
Bar-Code Scanner card bed forward sensor
location, 4.51-4 adjustment, 4.44-4
test point locations, 4.52-2 function, 4.81-1
bar-code scanner cylinder (CL7) location, 2.15-2
acceptable pressure, A.1-6 testing, 4.81-1
function, 2.15-5 bed horizontal sensor
function and location reference, A.6-9 adjustment, 4.44-3
location, 2.15-5 function, 2.15-2, 4.81-1
stroke specifications, A.1-1 testing, 4.81-1
bar-code scanner cylinder pressure regulator (RG5) bed locks
function and location reference, A.6-11 description, 2.15-2
bar-code scanner position sensor location, 2.15-2, 2.15-7
location, 4.53-1 Bed Not Advanced, 7.2-7
Bar-Code Test screen, illustration, 4.49-1 Bed Not Backward, 7.2-7
basophil Bed Not Forward, 7.2-7
definition, GLOSSARY-1 Bed Not Level, 7.2-8
See also BA#; BA%; diff parameters bed position flag
bath overflow chamber (VC10) adjustment, 4.44-1
function and location reference, A.6-12 bed position sensors
BCD card. See Bar-Code Decoder card location, 2.15-2
BCS. See bar-code scanner See also bed backward sensor; bed forward
sensor; bed horizontal sensor
6-INDEX PN 4277219B
INDEX
bed rock cylinder (CL8) API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card, 2.7-1

function, 2.15-3 backplane voltage bus distribution on the
location, 2.15-3 GEN•S System, 2.5-3
location, front and rear views, 4.45-1 backplane voltage bus distribution on the
bed rock rate adjustment, 4.45-2 bar-code reader, laser style, 2.14-4
bellows cylinder (CL3) bar-code reader, LED style, 2.14-3
function, 2.15-5, 2.17-11 CBC analysis on the GEN•S System, 2.18-1
function and location reference, A.6-9 CBC analysis on the LH 750 System, 2.18-2
location, 2.15-5, 2.17-12 control voltage development and distribution,
bellows down sensor new Diluter interconnects, 2.6-2
adjusting, 4.57-2 control voltage development and distribution,
function, 2.17-12, 4.81-2 old Diluter interconnects, 2.6-2
location, 2.17-12, 4.57-1 Diff Power Supply card, 2.8-1
testing, 4.81-2 DIFF PROCESSOR card, 2.21-7
bellows interlock Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply
function, 2.15-5, 2.17-11 card, 2.8-4
location, 2.15-5, 2.17-12 Electronic Power Supply, 2.5-1
Bellows Not Down, 7.2-8 Hgb signal flow, 2.18-8
Bellows not extended, 7.2-8 Laser Power Supply, 2.8-3
Bellows Not Up, 7.2-8 Light Scatter Preamp module, 2.21-5
bellows up sensor PLATELET PROCESSOR card, 2.19-6
adjusting, 4.57-2 power up sequence, 7.4-3
function, 2.17-11, 4.81-1 R/W/P SC/A card], 2.7-3
location, 2.17-12, 4.57-1 reagent distribution in Analytical Stations that
testing, 4.81-1 bypass the diluent reservoir, 2.13-7
belt advance cylinder (CL9) reagent distribution in Analytical Stations that
function, 2.15-3 use the diluent reservoir, 2.13-6
location, 2.15-3 RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards, 2.19-1
belt drive assembly RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card, 2.19-6
allowable slack, A.1-1 RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card, 2.19-4
belt tension adjustment, 4.36-1 RESET signal, 2.11-3
location, 2.15-3 RF Detector Preamp card with vacuum
part number, 8.1-20 tube, 2.21-3
removal, 4.35-1 RF Detector Preamp card, solid state, 2.21-3
replacement, 4.35-1 sample data flow on the GEN•S System from
biological hazards final processing to reporting, 2.24-1
safety precautions, 1.2-1 sample data flow on the LH 750 System from
BLD DET ADJ card final processing to reporting, 2.24-2
function, 2.3-1 Six-Channel Preamp card, 2.19-3
location, 2.3-4 Specimen Transport system, 2.14-1
block diagrams stain heater, 2.23-6
+5.2 control voltage and POWER ON signal System Control overview, 2.11-1
distribution, new Diluter System Power Controller card and System Power
interconnects, 2.6-3 Controller Display, 2.10-1
+5.2 control voltage and POWER ON signal SYSTEM RESET signal, 2.6-6
distribution, old Diluter interconnects, 2.6-3 VCS optimization procedure flow, 4.71-2
ANALOG 5 card, 2.21-6 VCS Technology system overview, 2.21-1
ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1 card, 2.7-5 blood detectors. See bubble/blood detectors
ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 2 card, 2.7-7
PN 4277219B INDEX-7
INDEX
Blood front and rear sensors detected partial replacement, 4.21-1

aspiration (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>), 7.2-5 Bulk Power Supply
blood sampling valve. See BSV 48 V fault isolation, 7.4-5
blood/stain aspiration pump (PM11) connector locations, A.4-2
function, 2.23-2, 2.23-4 connectors, table of connections, A.4-2
function and location reference, A.6-11 function, 2.2-1, 2.5-2
part number, 8.1-24 input, 2.5-2
BSV location, 2.2-2
component part numbers, 8.1-3 outputs, 2.5-2
function, 2.17-5, A.6-9 part number, 8.1-24
location, GEN•S System, A.7-4 replacement, 4.20-1
location, LH 750 System, A.8-4 BVB. See backplane voltage bus
port descriptions, table of, 2.17-6
port locations, 2.17-6
positions, table of, 2.17-5 C
replacement, 4.60-1 C1 adjustment, 4.74-4
See also BSV cylinders; BSV module Cable Adpt card. See Diluter Cable Adapter card
BSV cylinders (CL1 and CL2) cables, part numbers, 8.1-4
CL1 replacement, 4.60-3 calibration
function, 2.17-5 CBC. See CBC calibration
function and location reference, A.6-9 definition, GLOSSARY-1
location, 4.60-2 VCS. See VCS optimization
BSV module Calibration factors received from analyzer
component replacement, 4.60-1 unexpectedly - delete runs & restart., 7.3-2
component replacement, illustration of, 4.60-1 calibration procedures
components, GEN•S System, illustration, A.7-4 CBC. See CBC calibration procedures
components, LH 750 System, illustration, A.8-4 VCS. See VCS optimization procedures
exploded view, 8.2-44 Carryover failed, 7.3-2
location, GEN•S System, A.7-4 Carryover passed, 7.3-2
location, LH 750 System, A.8-4 cassette advance wheel
bubble detectors. See bubble/blood detectors location, 2.15-3
bubble/blood detectors Cassette did not advance to next position., 7.2-35
aspiration messages, table of, 2.17-15 Cassette Not Lowered Onto Bed, 7.2-9
checks and adjustments, 4.55-3, 4.55-7 cassette transport assembly
function, 2.17-13 alignment checks, 4.48-1
function and location reference, A.6-9 component locations, 2.14-2
location, 2.17-13 component locations, GEN•S System, 2.4-4
operation, 2.17-14 component locations, LH 750 System, 2.4-8
part number, 8.1-3 component part numbers, 8.1-6
performance test, 4.56-1 function, 2.4-1, 2.14-2
replacement, 4.55-1, 4.55-5 moving a cassette, 2.15-1
Bulk Power Filter card specifications, A.1-1
component locations, A.4-1 verification procedure, 5.8-1
connector locations, A.4-1 caution
connectors, table of connections, A.4-1 definition, 1.1-3
function, 2.2-1, 2.5-2 CBC Analysis system
location, 2.2-2 analyzing the RBC, WBC and Plt data, 2.19-1
part number, 8.1-22 applying the Coulter Principle, 2.18-4
8-INDEX PN 4277219B
INDEX
CBC analysis on the GEN•S System block matching Manual mode-to-Automatic

diagram, 2.18-1 mode, 4.11-1
CBC analysis on the LH 750 System block CBC lytic reagent
diagram, 2.18-2 and diluent delivery timing check, 4.31-1
delivering CBC samples in the Automatic mode, conditions affecting delivery timing, table
illustration of, 2.16-2 of, 4.31-4
delivering CBC samples in the Manual mode, connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the
illustration of, 2.16-6 GEN•S System, 3.5-2
determining the CBC parameters, 2.19-7 connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the
determining the Hgb, 2.18-8 LH 750 System, 3.13-2
function, 2.18-1 F-key function to prime, A.5-1
making the sample dilutions, 2.18-2 function, 2.18-2, 2.18-8
PLATELET PROCESSOR card, 2.19-6 CBC lytic reagent and diluent delivery timing check
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards, 2.19-1 conditions affecting timing, table of, 4.31-4
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card, 2.19-5 equipment hookup for,
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card, 2.19-3 illustration, 4.31-2, 4.31-3
sample processing components on a GEN•S scope settings for, 4.31-3
System that bypasses the diluent reservoir, timing specifications, A.1-8
illustration, 2.18-3 CBC lytic reagent pump (PM7)
sample processing components on a GEN•S adjustments, illustration of, 4.22-3
system that uses the diluent reservoir, function, 2.18-2
illustration, 2.18-3 function and location reference, A.6-11
sample processing components on the LH 750 part number, 8.1-24
System, illustration, 2.18-4 replacement, 4.22-5
Six-Channel Preamp card, 2.19-2 troubleshooting, 4.22-4
timing the data collection, 2.18-5, 2.18-6 volume check, 4.22-1
CBC aperture checks volume tolerances, A.1-14
procedure, 4.70-1 CBC noise checks
CBC Bath Voltages Out Of Range, 7.2-9 limits, A.1-3
CBC calibration CBC parameters
automatic-mode calibration factor limits, table determining reported results on the GEN•S
of, A.1-3 System, 2.24-2
conditions that require calibration, table determining reported results on the LH 750
of, 2.25-8 System, 2.24-5
flow-rate test limits, table of, A.1-3 generated by instrument, 2.1-1
latex voltage test limits, table of, A.1-2 test limits, A.1-5
manual-mode calibration factor limits, table See also CBC Analysis system
of, A.1-3 CBC Xmit Failure, 7.2-9
mode-to-mode comparison limits, A.1-6 check valves
procedures, overview, 2.25-1 illustration of, 8.2-58
tests available from CBC Calibration part numbers, 8.2-59
window, 2.25-1 chokes
voltage matching test limits, table of, A.1-2 illustration of, 8.2-58
when to calibrate, 2.25-8 part numbers, 8.1-7, 8.2-59
why calibrate, 2.25-1 circuit cards
See also CBC calibration procedures AMC. See AMC
CBC calibration procedures ANALOG. See ANALOG card
flow rate, 4.10-1 ANALYZER MICROCONTROLLER. See AMC
latex voltage, 4.9-1 ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1. See ANALYZER
POWER SUPPLY 1 card
PN 4277219B INDEX-9
INDEX
ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 2. See ANALYZER Motor Controller. See Motor Controller card
POWER SUPPLY 2 card Newbar. See Newbar card
Analyzer, replacement procedure, 4.6-1 PLATELET PROCESSOR. See PLATELET
Analyzer, table of special replacement PROCESSOR card
instructions, 4.6-4 Plt Proc. See PLATELET PROCESSOR card
API. See API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card PVT. See PVT card
API-SIGNAL GENERATOR. See API-SIGNAL R/W Proc 2 card. See RED/WHITE PROCESSOR
GENERATOR card card
APS1. See ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1 card R/W Proc. See RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card
APS2. See ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 2 card R/W/P SC/A. See R/W/P SC/A card
Bar-Code Decoder. See Bar-Code Decoder card R/W/P Signal Conditioner/Analyzer. See R/W/P
Bar-Code Scanner. See Bar-Code Scanner card SC/A card
BCD. See Bar-Code Decoder card Red Pre-amp. See RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards
BLD DET ADJ. See BLD DET ADJ card. RED/WHITE PRE-AMP. See RED/WHITE
Bulk Power Filter. See Bulk Power Filter card PRE-AMP cards
Cable Adpt. See Diluter Cable Adapter card RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2. See RED/WHITE
COMM INTERFACE. See COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR 2 card
INTERFACE card RED/WHITE PROCESSOR. See RED/WHITE
Comm Intfc. See COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR card
INTERFACE card Reg Res Intfc. See Reservoir Interface card
CRT4 Display. See CRT4 Display card Reservoir Interface. See Reservoir Interface card
Diff Power Supply. See Diff Power Supply card RF Detector Preamp. See RF Detector Preamp
Diff Proc. See DIFF PROCESSOR card card
DIFF PROCESSOR. See DIFF PROCESSOR card RF Preamp. See RF Detector Preamp card
Diff PS. See Diff Power Supply card RS/O Intfc. See RS/Opto Intfc card
Dil 1. See Diluter 1 card RS/Opto Intfc. See RS/Opto Intfc card
Dil 2. See Diluter 2 card SC/A. See R/W/P Signal Conditioner/Analyzer
Dil 3. See Diluter 3 card card
Dil 4. See Diluter 4 card Scope 1. See Scope 1 card
Dil Proc. See DILUTER PROCESSOR card Scope 2. See Scope 2 card
Diluter 1. See Diluter 1 card Sensor Dist. See Sensor Distribution card
Diluter 2. See Diluter 2 card Sensor Distribution. See Sensor Distribution
Diluter 3. See Diluter 3 card card
Diluter 4. See Diluter 4 card Six-Channel Aperture Preamp. See Six-Channel
Diluter Cable Adapter. See Diluter Cable Adapter Preamp card
card Six-Channel Preamp. See Six-Channel Preamp
Diluter Cbl Adapter. See Diluter Cable Adapter card
card Sol/Opt PS. See Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power
DILUTER CPU. See DILUTER CPU card Supply card
DILUTER PROCESSOR. See DILUTER SPC. See System Power Controller card
PROCESSOR card System Power Controller. See System Power
Diluter, replacement procedure, 4.7-1 Controller card
Diluter, table of special replacement VCS ANALOG. See VCS ANALOG card
instructions, 4.7-4 White Pre-amp. See RED/WHITE PRE-AMP
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply. See cards
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card circuits
Keyboard and Display Interface. See Keyboard Clog Detector. See Clog Detector circuit
and Display Interface card Diff Lytic Reagent Heater, 2.12-11
Laser Reference 4. See Laser Reference 4 card Peltier and Ambient Temperature, 2.12-10
INDEX
Stain Chamber Heater, 2.12-10 volume tolerances, A.1-14

Zap, 2.7-4 cleaning procedures
CL1 (Diluter) air water separator, 4.16-1
function, A.6-9 flow cell, 4.79-1
location, GEN•S System, A.7-4 lens block, 4.80-1
location, LH 750 System, A.8-4 Probe-Wipe module cleaning truck, 4.58-2
See also BSV cylinders System flush, 5.3-2
CL1 (Power Supply) cleaning truck
function, 2.9-2 adjustment, 4.58-5
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2 cleaning, 4.58-2
CL2 function, A.6-9
function, A.6-9 location, 2.17-17
location, GEN•S System, A.7-4 location, GEN•S System, A.7-4
location, LH 750 System, A.8-4 location, LH 750 System, A.8-4
See also BSV cylinders replacement, 4.58-2
CL3 Clog Detector
function, A.6-9 error generated by, 7.5-1
location, GEN•S System, A.7-4 Clog Detector circuit
location, LH 750 System, A.8-4 adjustment, 4.74-3
See also bellows cylinder function, 2.21-2
CL4. See left lift cylinder threshold voltage limits, A.1-12
CL5. See right lift cylinder coaxial cables, Analyzer
CL6 connecting, 3.4-2
function, A.6-9 coefficient of variation
location, GEN•S System, A.7-2 definition, GLOSSARY-1
location, LH 750 System, A.8-2 COMM INTERFACE card. See
See also tube-ram cylinder COMMUNICATION INTERFACE card
CL7 Comm Intfc card. See COMMUNICATION
function, A.6-9 INTERFACE card
location, GEN•S System, A.7-2 Comment for control folder <lot#>, <comment>,
location, LH 750 System, A.8-2 <comment>, 7.3-2
See also bar-code scanner cylinder COMMON ROM AREA CRC ERROR, 7.2-10
CL8. See bed rock cylinder Communication error with AMC or
CL9. See belt advance cylinder interconnect, 7.2-2
CL10. See stripper plate cylinder Communication failure during transmission to
CL11 diluter, 7.2-16
function, 2.17-17, A.6-9 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE card
location, GEN•S System, A.7-4 communication links, illustration of, 2.11-4
location, LH 750 System, A.8-4 component locations, A.2-4
See also backwash cylinder function, 2.3-2, 2.11-4
cleaning agent location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4
GEN•S System, 3.5-3 part number, 8.1-22
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the replacement, 4.6-1
LH 750 System, 3.13-3 role in analyzing Hgb data, 2.18-8
F-key function to prime, A.5-2 switch locations, A.2-4
cleaning agent pump (PM10) switch settings, table of, A.2-4
function and location reference, A.6-11 Communications error, 7.2-2, 7.2-3
replacement, 4.26-3 Compressor +48V Bad, 7.2-9
volume check, 4.26-1 Compressor Too Hot, 7.2-9
INDEX
compressor. See compressor/vacuum pump component locations, A.2-5

compressor/vacuum pump function, 2.11-7
function, 2.2-1, 2.9-1 switch location, A.2-5
location, 2.2-2, 2.9-1, 2.9-2 switch settings, table of, A.2-5
part number, 8.1-8 CTA. See cassette transport assembly
replacement, 4.14-1 current, leakage specifications. See leakage current
conductivity (RF) specifications
VCS measurement, description, 2.20-1 CV
consumables, part numbers, 8.1-8 definition, GLOSSARY-1
Control Folder <Lot #> is expired (<Expiration CVL43
Date>), 7.3-2 location, A.8-5
Control folder <lot#> created, it must be edited in a See also diff sample valve
system setup for valid flagging., 7.3-2 CVL85/126
Control folder for lot number <lot #> created, 7.3-2 function, A.6-9
Control folder for lot number <lot #> deleted, 7.3-2 CVL87/127
Control folder for lot number <lot #>edited, 7.3-2 function, A.6-10
Control run for control folder <Lot #> out of CVL93
range, 7.3-2 function, A.8-5
Control run outside limits condition has cleared, 7.3-3 See also stained retic sample valve
control voltage development and distribution CVL93/128
block diagram, new Diluter interconnects, 2.6-2 function, A.6-10
block diagram, old Diluter interconnects, 2.6-2 CVL99
Coulter Principle, instrument application location, A.8-5
aperture current, 2.18-4 CVL993
aperture vacuum, 2.18-5 See also retic sample valve
sensing area, 2.18-4 cylinders
sensing area, illustration, 2.18-5 bed rock. See bed rock cylinder
covers, instrument bellows. See bellows cylinder
part numbers, 8.1-10 belt advance. See belt advance cylinder
removal of. See removal procedures BSV. See BSV cylinders
CRC Error, 7.2-10 left lift. See left lift cylinder
CRT backplane part numbers, 8.1-9
+48 V check, test point and acceptable right lift. See right lift cylinder
range, A.1-10 stripper plate. See stripper plate cylinder
function, 2.3-2 tube ram. See tube ram cylinder
part number, 8.1-22 D
test points and voltage specifications, table Daily check precision test failed, 7.3-3
of, A.1-11 Daily check ramp test failed, 7.3-3
CRT buttons data collection, List mode, 4.33-1
function, 2.3-2 data collection, timing
location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4 Plt histogram, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
CRT, Analyzer RBC histogram, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
intensity adjustment on the GEN•S WBC and RBC count data, 2.18-5, 2.18-6
System, 4.34-1 WBC histogram, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
intensity adjustment on the LH 750 dc power cable
System, 4.34-2 connecting on the GEN•S System, 3.4-1
CRT4 Display card connecting on the LH 750 System, 3.12-2
DC. See volume (DC)
INDEX
deactivator clips for pinch valves. See pinch valves low volume check, 4.28-1
decontamination part number, 8.1-24
of the Analytical Station, procedure, 5.3-2 pneumatic signals and piston positions, table
Demographic information updated for <Sample of, 2.22-8
ID>, 7.3-3 reading Volumetric Cylinder for volume
Diagnostic Mode, 7.2-11 measurement, illustration of, 4.28-3
Did not detect rocker bed backward position., 7.2-7 replacement, 4.28-8
Did not detect rocker bed forward position., 7.2-7 troubleshooting, 4.28-7
Did not detect rocker bed horizontal position., 7.2-8 volume tolerances, A.1-14
diff ambient thermistor diff mixing chamber (VC25)
function, 2.22-5 function, 2.22-1, 2.22-3
location, 2.22-5 function and location reference, A.6-13
DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST location, 4.68-1
acceptable ranges, table of, A.1-4 replacement, 4.68-1
procedure, 4.4-1 Diff module
diff chamber mixing motor components, GEN•S System, illustration, A.7-5
replacement, 4.69-1 components, LH 750 System, illustration, A.8-5
Diff communication failure., 7.2-11 diff mixing chamber replacement, 4.68-1
diff heater exploded view, 8.2-40
function, A.6-9 function, 2.4-1
location, GEN•S System, A.7-5 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
location, LH 750 System, A.8-5 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-9
part number, 8.1-18 part number, 8.1-19
replacement, 4.67-1 verifying correct operation, 5.6-1
temperature check, 4.65-1 diff parameters
DIFF heater defective or disconnected., 7.2-11 determining reported results, 2.24-7
Diff Heater Disabled, 7.2-11 generated by instrument, 2.1-1
Diff heater disabled for current cycle., 7.2-11 test limits, A.1-5
Diff Heater Sensor Bad, 7.2-11 verification procedure, 5.6-1
Diff Laser Offset Lower Failed, 7.2-11 See also VCS Technology system
Diff Laser Offset Upper Failed, 7.2-11 Diff PC Communication Failed, 7.2-11
diff lytic reagent Diff Power Supply card
conditions causing a PC2 error, 7.5-2 +48 V check, test point and acceptable
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the range, A.1-10
GEN•S System, 3.5-2 block diagram, 2.8-1
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the component locations, A.3-2
LH 750 System, 3.13-2 connection to backplane voltage bus on the
F-key function to prime, A.5-2 GEN•S System, 3.4-4
function, 2.22-4 connection to backplane voltage bus on the
diff lytic reagent pump (PM4) LH 750 System, 3.12-5
adjustable stops, 2.22-9 connector locations, A.3-2
at rest state, 2.22-7 connectors, table of connections, A.3-2
components, illustration of, 2.22-6 function, 2.4-1, 2.8-1
dispensing state, high volume, 2.22-7 input, 2.8-2
dispensing state, low volume, 2.22-8 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
function and location reference, A.6-11 monitors, 2.8-2
high volume adjustments, illustration of, 4.28-6 outputs, 2.8-2
high volume check, 4.28-4 part number, 8.1-22
low volume adjustments, illustration of, 4.28-4
INDEX
diff preservative DIFF Processor monitor command did not

conditions causing a PC2 error, 7.5-2 finish., 7.2-26
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the Diff Processor Out Of Synch., 7.2-12
GEN•S System, 3.5-2 DIFF PS Card +15 V Error, 7.2-12
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the DIFF PS Card -15 V Error, 7.2-12
LH 750 System, 3.13-2 Diff PS card. See Diff Power Supply card
F-key function to prime, A.5-2 Diff RAM Test Failed, 7.2-12
function, 2.22-4 diff sample pressure
diff preservative pump (PM1) acceptable limits, A.1-6
adjustable stops, 2.22-9 acceptable variation, A.1-9
at rest state, 2.22-7 regulator. See diff sample pressure regulator
components, illustration of, 2.22-6 transducer (DIFF PRESSURE) location, A.3-14
dispensing state, high volume, 2.22-7 DIFF sample pressure above limit (<Tube ID>,
dispensing state, low volume, 2.22-8 <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-12
function, 2.22-6 DIFF sample pressure below limit (<Tube ID>,
function and location reference, A.6-10 <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-11
high volume adjustments, illustration of, 4.29-6 diff sample pressure regulator (RG3)
high volume check, 4.29-4 function, 2.22-4
low volume adjustments, illustration of, 4.29-4 function and location reference, A.6-11
low volume check, 4.29-1 part number, 8.1-25
part number, 8.1-24 diff sample valve (CVL43)
pneumatic signals and piston positions, table function and location reference, A.6-9
of, 2.22-8 diff segment valve
reading Volumetric Cylinder for volume function, 2.17-7
measurement, illustration of, 4.29-3 ports, description, 2.17-10
replacement, 4.29-8 ports, illustration, 2.17-10
troubleshooting, 4.29-6 See also shear valves
volume optimization, 4.66-1 DIFF timer error., 7.2-13
volume optimization, peak-to-peak DC Diff Timer Test Failed, 7.2-13
conductivity noise limits, A.1-9 diff waste chamber (VC13)
volume tolerances, A.1-14 function and location reference, A.6-12
diff preserve. See diff preservative DIFF Xmit Failure, 7.2-13
Diff Pressure Lower Failed, 7.2-11 differential parameters. See diff parameters
Diff Pressure Upper Failed, 7.2-12 Differential Power Supply card. See Diff Power
Diff Proc card. See DIFF PROCESSOR card Supply card
DIFF PROCESSOR card digital backplane
block diagram, 2.21-7 connecting with the RF Detector Preamp card on
component locations, A.2-6 the GEN•S System, 3.4-5
function, 2.3-2, 2.21-7 connecting with the RF Detector Preamp card on
inputs, 2.21-8 the LH 750 System, 3.12-6
location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3 connecting with the RS/Opto Intfc card on the
location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4 GEN•S System, 3.4-6
part number, 8.1-22 connecting with the RS/Opto Intfc card on the
switch location, A.2-6 for GEN•S System, part number, 8.1-22
switch settings, table of, A.2-6 for LH 750 System, part number, 8.1-22
DIFF processor communication failure, 7.2-12 function, 2.3-2
Diff Processor Does Not Answer, 7.2-12 location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3
INDEX
test points and voltage specifications, table fluidic component locations, center front panel,
of, A.1-11 GEN•S System, A.7-2
Dil 1 card. See Diluter 1 card fluidic component locations, center front panel,
Dil 2 card. See Diluter 2 card LH 750 System, A.8-2
Dil 3 card. See Diluter 3 card fluidic component locations, Diff module,
Dil 4 card. See Diluter 4 card GEN•S System, A.7-5
Dil Proc card. See DILUTER PROCESSOR card fluidic component locations, Diff module,
Dil SOL/OP PS +15V Error, 7.2-13 LH 750 System, A.8-5
Dil SOL/OP PS -15V Error, 7.2-13 fluidic component locations, left front panel,
Dil SOL/OP PS 24V Error, 7.2-13 GEN•S System, A.7-1
Dil1 Card 5V Error, 7.2-14 fluidic component locations, left front panel,
Dil1 Card +15V Error, 7.2-14 LH 750 System, A.8-1
Dil1 Card -15V Error, 7.2-14 fluidic component locations, lower left rear
DIL4 Card 12V Error, 7.2-14 door, GEN•S System, A.7-6
diluent fluidic component locations, lower left rear
and CBC lytic reagent delivery timing door, LH 750 System, A.8-6
check, 4.31-1 fluidic component locations, Random Access
conditions affecting delivery timing to WBC module, A.8-5
bath, table of, 4.31-4 fluidic component locations, rear of center front
conditions causing a PC2 error, 7.5-2 panel, GEN•S System, A.7-2
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the fluidic component locations, rear of center front
GEN•S System, 3.5-3 panel, LH 750 System, A.8-2
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the fluidic component locations, rear of left front
LH 750 System, 3.13-3 panel, GEN•S System, A.7-1
F-key function to prime, A.5-2 fluidic component locations, rear of left front
diluent and CBC lytic reagent delivery timing panel, LH 750 System, A.8-1
check. See CBC lytic reagent and diluent fluidic component locations, rear of right front
delivery timing check panel, GEN•S System, A.7-3
diluent dispensers. See RBC diluent dispenser; WBC fluidic component locations, rear of right front
diluent dispenser panel, LH 750 System, A.8-3
Diluent front and rear sensors detected carryover fluidic component locations, Retic
(<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-4 module, A.7-5
Diluent level low or faulty backwash tank float fluidic component locations, right front panel,
sensor., 7.2-7 GEN•S System, A.7-3
Diluent level low or faulty sheath tank float fluidic component locations, right front panel,
sensor., 7.2-36 LH 750 System, A.8-3
Diluent level low or faulty tank sensor, 7.2-38 fluidic component locations, right rear
diluent/cleaning agent chamber (VC28) door, A.7-6
function, 2.13-7 fluidic component locations, Sampling Station,
function and location reference, A.6-13 GEN•S System, A.7-4
diluent/cleaning agent manifold (VC32) fluidic component locations, Sampling Station,
function, 2.13-7 LH 750 System, A.8-4
function and location reference, A.6-13 fluidic component locations, under front cover,
inputs, 2.13-2, 2.13-7 GEN•S System, A.7-4
Diluter fluidic component locations, under front cover,
accessing F-key functions, A.5-1 LH 750 System, A.8-4
Angar valves. See Angar™ valves fluidic components, table of descriptions and
card layouts with component descriptions, A.3-1 location references, A.6-9
circuit card replacement, 4.7-1 function, 2.4-1
F-key functions, table of, A.5-1
INDEX
installation. See installation procedure, GEN•S Diluter 2 I/O card failure (<Tube ID>,
System; installation procedure, LH 750 <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-15
System Diluter 2 RBD card
main components, table of descriptions and component locations, A.3-6
location references, 2.4-1 connector locations, A.3-6
pinch valves. See pinch valves jumper settings, A.3-6
solenoid valves. See solenoids valves LED locations, A.3-6
See also Diluter, GEN•S System; Diluter, LH 750 Diluter 2 REL card
System component locations, A.3-6
Diluter 1 card connector locations, A.3-6
+48 V check, test point and acceptable jumper settings, A.3-6
range, A.1-10 LED locations, A.3-6
component locations, A.3-3 Diluter 3 card
connection to backplane voltage bus on the component locations, A.3-8
GEN•S System, 3.4-4 connector locations, A.3-8
connection to backplane voltage bus on the connectors, table of connections, A.3-9
LH 750 System, 3.12-5 function, 2.4-2, 2.12-8
connector locations, A.3-3 inputs, 2.12-9
connectors, table of connections, A.3-4 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-6
function, 2.4-1, 2.12-4 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-10
input, 2.12-5, 2.12-8 part number, 8.1-22
LED indications, table of, A.3-4 replacement, 4.7-3
LED locations, A.3-3 styles in use, 2.12-8
location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5 Diluter 3 I/O card failure (<Tube ID>,
location, LH 750 System, 2.4-10 <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-15
monitoring, 2.12-5 Diluter 3 SlideMaker Interface card
outputs, 2.12-5, 2.12-8 component locations, A.3-8
part number, 8.1-22, 8.2-25 connector locations, A.3-8
power supply distribution, illustration of, 2.12-4 connectors, table of connections, A.3-9
replacement, 4.7-3 part number, 8.1-23
styles in use, 2.12-3 See also Diluter 3 card
Diluter 1 I/O card failure (<Tube ID>, Diluter 4 card
<Cass/Pos>), 7.2-15 +48 V check, test point and acceptable
Diluter 2 card range, A.1-10
component locations, A.3-5 component locations, A.3-10
connector locations, A.3-5 connection to backplane voltage bus on the
connectors, table of connections, A.3-7 GEN•S System, 3.4-4
function, 2.4-2, 2.12-6, 2.12-8 connection to backplane voltage bus on the
inputs, 2.12-7 LH 750 System, 3.12-5
jumper settings, A.3-5 connector locations, A.3-10
LED indications, table of, A.3-7 connectors, table of connections, A.3-10
LED locations, A.3-5 Diff Lytic Reagent Heater circuit, illustration
location, GEN•S System, 2.4-6 of, 2.12-11
location, LH 750 System, 2.4-10 function, 2.4-2, 2.12-9
monitoring, 2.12-7 inputs, 2.12-11
part number, 8.1-22 LED indications, table of, A.3-10
replacement, 4.7-3 LED locations, A.3-10
styles in use, 2.12-6 location, GEN•System, 2.4-7
INDEX
part number, 8.1-23 Diluter keypad

Peltier and Ambient Temperature circuit, component locations, exploded view, 2.12-12
illustration of, 2.12-10 contrast adjustment, 2.12-11, A.3-13
replacement, 4.7-3 function, 2.4-2, 2.12-11
Stain Chamber Heater circuit, illustration location, 2.4-4
of, 2.12-10 Diluter keypad failure., 7.2-21
Diluter ambient thermistor Diluter Left Power Sup. Bad, 7.2-15
function, 2.22-5 Diluter left power supply defective, 7.2-15
location, 2.22-5 Diluter memory failure, 7.2-15
Diluter Board Not Answering, 7.2-14 Diluter not ready to receive data from AMC., 7.2-27
Diluter Cable Adapter card Diluter not receiving data from AMC, 7.2-2
component locations, A.3-11 Diluter power supplies
connector locations, A.3-11 Diff Power Supply card, 2.8-1
connectors, table of connections, A.3-11 Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply
function, 2.4-2, 2.12-3 card, 2.8-3
location, GEN•S System, 2.4-6 general description, 2.5-4
location, LH 750 System, 2.4-10 Laser Power Supply, 2.8-3
part number, 8.1-23 DILUTER PROCESSOR card
replacement, 4.7-3 component locations, A.2-7, A.2-9
Diluter Card 1 Failure, 7.2-15 function, 2.3-2, 2.12-2
Diluter Card 2 Failure, 7.2-15 location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3
Diluter Card 3 Failure, 7.2-15 location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4
Diluter Cbl Adapter card. See Diluter Cable Adapter part number, 8.1-23, 8.2-5
card replacement, 4.6-1
Diluter Comm. Error, 7.2-15 switch location, A.2-7, A.2-9
Diluter communication failure, 7.2-15 switch settings, table of, A.2-9
Diluter Control system vs DILUTER CPU card, 2.12-6
Diluter 1 card, 2.12-4 Diluter RAM Fault, 7.2-15
Diluter 2 card, 2.12-6, 2.12-8 Diluter received an invalid command from the
Diluter 3 card, 2.12-8 AMC., 7.2-41
Diluter 4 card, 2.12-9 Diluter Right Power Sup. Bad, 7.2-16
Diluter Cable Adapter card, 2.12-3 Diluter right power supply defective, 7.2-16
DILUTER CPU card, 2.12-2 Diluter TxRx Error, 7.2-16
Diluter keypad, 2.12-11 Diluter, GEN•S System
DILUTER PROCESSOR card, 2.12-2 keypad. See Diluter keypad
function, 2.12-1 main component locations, front panels, 2.4-4
numeric keypad, 2.12-11 main component locations, front view, panels
overview, 2.12-1 closed, 2.4-4
DILUTER CPU card main component locations, left door and
function, 2.3-2, 2.12-2 compartment, 2.4-6
replacement, 4.6-1 main component locations, left rear doors, 2.4-7
vs DILUTER PROCESSOR card, 2.12-6 main component locations, right door and
Diluter CPU card compartment, 2.4-5
part number, 8.1-23, 8.2-79 main component locations, right rear door, 2.4-6
Diluter Echo Error, 7.2-15 main component locations, under front
Diluter Error, 7.2-15 cover, 2.4-5
Diluter failure., 7.2-15 opening side doors, illustration, 3.4-3
Diluter front door open during automatic sampling See also Diluter
mode operation., 7.2-16
INDEX
Diluter, LH 750 System doors, instrument, part numbers, 8.1-10

main component locations, center rear DPR Diluter Packet Error, 7.2-16
panel, 2.4-9 dump valve (VL1)
main component locations, front panel, 2.4-8 function, 2.9-2
main component locations, front view, panels location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
closed, 2.4-8 replacement, 4.15-1
main component locations, left door and Dump Valve Stuck Closed, 7.2-16
compartment, 2.4-10 Dump Valve Stuck Open, 7.2-16
main component locations, left rear Duplicate run date and/or run time received, 7.3-3
doors, 2.4-11
main component locations, right door and
compartment, 2.4-10 E
main component locations, right rear electronic forms
door, 2.4-11 available in Workstation, 4.61-1
main component locations, under front Instrument Reference Report, using, 4.61-2
cover, 2.4-9 System Installation Report, using, 4.61-2
opening side doors, illustration, 3.12-1 System Verification Report, using, 4.61-1
See also Diluter electronic hazards
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power Supply card safety precautions, 1.2-1
+48 V check, test point and acceptable Electronic Power Supply
range, A.1-10 block diagram, 2.5-1
block diagram, 2.8-4 component locations, 2.2-2
component locations, A.3-12 Electronic Power system
connector locations, A.3-12 +5.2 V control voltage and POWER ON signal
connectors, table of connections, A.3-12 distribution block diagram, new Diluter
function, 2.4-2, 2.8-3 interconnects, 2.6-3
input, 2.8-3 +5.2 V control voltage and POWER ON signal
LED indications, table of, A.3-12 distribution block diagram, old Diluter
LED locations, illustration, A.3-12 interconnects, 2.6-3
location, GEN•S System, 2.4-6 +5.2 V control voltage distribution, table of
location, LH 750 System, 2.4-10 components and functions, 2.6-4
monitors, 2.8-4 ac power timing sequence, table of, 7.4-1
outputs, 2.8-3 Analyzer power supplies, 2.7-1
part number, 8.1-23 control voltage development, 2.6-1
test point locations, illustration, A.3-12 control voltage development and distribution
test points, table of expected values, A.3-13 block diagram, new Diluter
Diluter/Solenoid/Optics/Power Supply card interconnects, 2.6-2
connection to backplane voltage bus on the control voltage development and distribution
GEN•S System, 3.4-4 block diagram, old Diluter
connection to backplane voltage bus on the interconnects, 2.6-2
LH 750 System, 3.12-5 control voltage distribution, 2.6-1
replacement, 4.7-3 description, 2.5-1
disinfect Diluter power supplies, 2.8-1
dispensers, diluent. See RBC diluent dispenser, instrument power on timing sequence, table
WBC diluent dispenser of, 7.4-2
Door Open Run Stopped, 7.2-16 main cable connections on the GEN•S
door, front System, 3.4-1
testing sensor, 4.81-2 main cable connections on the LH 750
System, 3.12-1
INDEX
power development and distribution, 2.5-1 Fatal DPR Error, 7.2-17

power off signals, 2.6-6 Faulty backwash tank float sensor, 7.2-7
power up sequence, 2.6-4 Faulty diluter memory., 7.2-10
power up sequence block diagram, 7.4-3 Faulty PS1 power supply., 7.2-21
power voltages and power voltage signal lines, Faulty PS2 power supply, 7.2-21
table of, 7.4-1 Faulty sheath tank float sensor, 7.2-36
SYSTEM RESET signal, 2.6-5 Faulty SPC A/D, 7.2-37
SYSTEM RESET signal block diagram, 2.6-6 Faulty SPC A/D., 7.2-36
electronic test limits FC, 7.5-1
for DIFF ANALOG PULSES TEST, A.1-4 filters, part numbers, 8.1-11
for PRECISION TEST 2, A.1-4 fittings
for PRECISION TEST 3, A.1-4 illustration of, 8.2-60
for RAMP TEST 0, A.1-4 part numbers, 8.1-13, 8.2-61
EO# FL1 (Power Supply). See air water separator
diff parameter, 2.1-1 flippers
EO% allowable cassette overlap, A.1-1
checking precision, 5.5-1 location, loading bay, 2.15-3
diff parameter, 2.1-1 location, unloading bay, 2.15-7
eosinophil part numbers, 8.1-14
definition, GLOSSARY-1 flippers, loading bay
See also EO#; EO%; diff parameters checks and adjustments, 4.42-1
erythrocyte flippers, unloading bay
definition, GLOSSARY-1 checks and adjustments, 4.42-1
See also RBC float sensor, backwash tank. See backwash tank
Erythrolyse. See diff lytic reagent sensor
ETX not received from diluter, 7.2-17 float sensor, sheath tank. See sheath tank sensor
ETX not received from Diluter., 7.2-26 float sensor, sweep-flow reservoir. See sweep-flow
ETX Rec. Error, 7.2-17 reservoir sensor
EXPECTED COMMAND FROM AMC, 7.2-17 float sensor, VC22
Expected Command from AMC, 7.2-17 function, 2.9-5
Expected command from AMC, command not float sensor/reservoir cap
received., 7.2-17 replacement, 4.30-1
extended shutdown float sensors, backwash tank
procedure overview, 5.2-1 location, 2.13-8
when to do, 5.2-1 float sensors, diluent (for Analytical Stations that
bypass the diluent reservoir)
function, 2.13-5
F location, 2.13-3
F-key functions float sensors, reagent reservoirs
accessing, A.5-1 function, 2.13-4
descriptions, table of, A.5-1 location, 2.13-3, 2.13-4
Fan Power Bad, 7.2-17 replacement. See float sensor/reservoir cap,
fans replacement
Analyzer. See Analyzer fans float sensors, sheath tank
part numbers, 8.1-11 function, 2.13-9
Power Supply exhaust. See Power Supply location, 2.13-10
exhaust fan float sensors, sweep-flow reservoir
Power Supply intake. See Power Supply intake function, 2.13-10
fan
INDEX
float sensors, waste G

function, 2.13-11 gain matching procedure. See latex voltage
location, 2.13-11 calibration
flow cell (VC18) GEN•S Cell
cleaning procedure, 4.79-1 defined, 2.1-1
errors, troubleshooting, 7.5-1 installation checklist, 3.9-1
function and location reference, A.6-12 main units, description, 2.1-2
port functions, table of, 2.20-5 main units, illustration, 2.1-3
ports, illustration of, 2.20-4 preventive maintenance inspection
Flow Cell Clog, 7.2-18 procedure, 5.9-1
Flow cell voltages/pressures out of space and accessibility requirements,
specifications, 7.3-3 illustration, 3.1-2
flow rate balancing procedure. See flow rate See also instrument
calibration GEN•S System
flow rate calibration installation checklist, 3.9-1
procedure, 4.10-1 main units, description, 2.1-2
procedure overview, 2.25-5 main units, illustration, 2.1-3
flow rate matching procedure. See flow rate preventive maintenance inspection
calibration procedure, 5.9-1
foam trap (VC14) space and accessibility requirements with
function and location reference, A.6-12 SlideMaker, illustration, 3.1-2
foam trap (VC30) space and accessibility requirements,
function and location reference, A.6-13 illustration, 3.1-1
foam trap (VC31) See also instrument
function and location reference, A.6-13 ghost pump. See retic clearing solution pump
foam trap (VC37) ghost reagent. See retic clearing solution
forms
Instrument Reference Report, using H
electronic, 4.61-2 hand-detector assembly
Notice of Information Update, when used, 1.1-1 function, 2.17-16, 4.81-2
System Installation Report, using location, 2.17-17
electronic, 4.61-2 replacement, 4.59-1
System Verification Report, using testing optosensor, 4.81-2
electronic, 4.61-1 handheld scanner
System Verification Report, using electronic laser warning label, 1.2-4
form, 4.61-1 hazards
front door sensor biological, 1.2-1
function, 4.81-2 electronic, 1.2-1
testing, 4.81-2 laser beam, 1.2-2
Front sensor detected air bubbles (<Tube ID>, laser radiation, 1.2-2
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-4 Hct
Function Not Allowed, 7.2-18 CBC parameter, 2.1-1
fuses, Electronic Power Supply determining reported results on the GEN•S
function, 2.5-2 System, 2.24-4
part numbers, 8.1-14 determining reported results on the LH 750
System, 2.24-7
formula for deriving, 2.24-4, 2.24-7
heater, diff. See diff heater
INDEX
heater, stain. See stain heater Host: Bad RCV Buffer End, 7.3-4
hematocrit Host: Bad TestName in TestField, 7.3-4
definition, GLOSSARY-2 Host: Cass/pos Not 6 Char In Testfield, 7.3-4
See also Hct Host: Cass/Pos With Test Type Pending
hemoglobin Duplicate, 7.3-4
definition, GLOSSARY-2 Host: Date Format Incorrect, 7.3-4
See also Hgb Host: Date format incorrect. Non Numeric, 7.3-4
Hgb Host: ID1 Too Long In Test Field, 7.3-4
analyzing the data, 2.18-8 Host: ID1 With Test Type Pending Duplicate, 7.3-4
CBC parameter, 2.1-1 Host: Illegal Comma In Testfield, 7.3-4
checking precision, 5.5-1 Host: Insertion error, Test exists, 7.3-4
determining reported results on the GEN•S Host: Invalid Gender Entry, 7.3-4
System, 2.24-4 Host: Leading Spaces In Field, 7.3-4
determining reported results on the LH 750 Host: No Comma After Testname In TestField, 7.3-5
System, 2.24-7 Host: No CRLF at End of Preamble, 7.3-5
sensing area, illustration of, 2.18-8 Host: No CRLF At Field End, 7.3-5
signal flow block diagram, 2.18-8 Host: No data in transmitted field, 7.3-5
voltage limits, A.1-13 Host: No ID1 Or CassPos, 7.3-5
Hgb cuvette assembly Host: No SOH in preamble, 7.3-5
function, 2.4-2 Host: No Space after Tag, 7.3-5
location, GEN•S System, 2.4-4 Host: No String Between Commas In TestField, 7.3-5
location, LH 750 System, 2.4-8 Host: No Valid Field Tag AC found, 7.3-5
Hgb lamp Host: Non Alpha Char In Alpha Field, 7.3-5
connector, location, 4.32-1 Host: Non Alphanumeric in Alphanumeric field, 7.3-5
part number, 8.1-19 Host: Non Numeric Char In Numeric Field, 7.3-5
replacement, 4.32-1 Host: Nonnumeric Cass/pos Char In Testfield, 7.3-5
voltage adjustment, 4.32-2 Host: Num Of Fields Mismatch in Preamble, 7.3-5
HGB lamp power supply defective, 7.2-19 Host: Number Of Fields Count is 0, 7.3-6
Hgb module Host: Test request UPDATED No Valid Patient
part number, 8.1-19 ID, 7.3-6
Hgb preamp, part number, 8.1-24 Host: Time Format Incorrect, 7.3-6
HGB Status Error, 7.2-19 Host: Time Format Incorrect, Non Numeric, 7.3-6
High pressure High, 7.2-19 Host: Trailing Spaces In Field, 7.3-6
High pressure Low, 7.2-19
High Pressure Too High, 7.2-19
High Pressure Too Low, 7.2-19 I
High Vacuum Low, 7.2-20 IBUS
High vacuum too low., 7.2-20 function, 2.12-3
Histogram Mem. Reset Error, 7.2-20 IBUS cable
histograms connecting on the GEN•S System, 3.4-2
definition, GLOSSARY-2 connecting on the LH 750 System, 3.12-3
Plt. See Plt ID MISMATCH: Sample ID received does not match
RBC. See RBC pre-assigned ID, 7.3-7
WBC. See WBC ID not read by wand or ID was not available., 7.2-26
HLR# Illegal Interrupt, 7.2-21
research parameter, 2.1-2 illustrated parts. See parts, illustrated
HLR% important
research parameter, 2.1-2 definition, 1.1-3
Host: Bad Field Count, 7.3-4 Incomplete Retic Collection, 7.2-32
Host: Bad Intro Field, 7.3-4 Incomplete Retic collection., 7.2-32
INDEX
Incorrect calibration factor transmission, 7.2-38 illustration of, 3.10-4

Incorrect calibration factors or bath voltages., 7.2-41 modification for earthquake-prone areas, 3.10-5
Incorrect calibration factors received, 7.2-21 modification for high altitude, 3.10-5
installation procedure, GEN•S System power up checks, 3.16-1
Analyzer checks, 3.7-2 preinstallation checklist, 3.10-1
connecting the pneumatic lines, 3.5-1 setting up the Analyzer, 3.14-4
electronic report form, using, 4.61-2 setting up the Diluter, 3.14-1
entering system serial numbers and revision setting up the Power Supply, 3.11-2
levels at the Workstation, 3.7-4 space and accessibility requirements for the
filling out the reports, 3.8-3 LH 750 Cell, illustration, 3.10-2
installation checklist, 3.9-1 space and accessibility requirements for the
installing the electrical cables, 3.4-1 LH 750 System with SlideMaker,
installing the pickup tubes, 3.5-1 illustration, 3.10-2
installing the reagent lines, 3.5-1 space and accessibility requirements for the
installing the waste line, 3.5-1 LH 750 System, illustration, 3.10-1
installing the Workstation, 3.2-1 testing the Analytical Station and
main component layout, illustration, 3.3-2 Workstation, 3.17-1
main power and drain line length requirements, unpacking the Analytical Station, 3.11-1
illustration of, 3.1-4 installation procedure, on the LH 750 System
modification for earthquake-prone areas, 3.1-5 installing the electrical cables, 3.12-1
modification for high altitude, 3.1-5 instrument
power up checks, 3.7-1 ac input voltage specifications, A.1-11
preinstallation checklist, 3.1-1 Analytical Station. See Analytical Station
setting up the Analyzer, 3.6-9 auto-start feature, SmartStart™
setting up the Diluter, 3.6-3 recognition, 2.15-1
setting up the Power Supply, 3.6-1 description, 2.1-2
space and accessibility requirements for the electronic forms available, 4.61-1
GEN•S Cell, illustration, 3.1-2 fan locations, 3.10-3
space and accessibility requirements for the fan locations, GEN•S System, 3.1-3
GEN•S System with SlideMaker, function, 2.1-1
illustration, 3.1-2 functional systems, 2.1-2
space and accessibility requirements for the initiating the Automatic-mode cycle, 2.15-1
GEN•S System, illustration, 3.1-1 installation procedure, LH 750 System, 3.15-1
testing the Analytical Station and installation, GEN•S System procedure, 3.2-1
Workstation, 3.8-1 leakage current specifications, 2.1-5
unpacking the Analytical Station, 3.3-1 mode-to-mode comparison limits, table
installation procedure, LH 750 System of, A.1-6
Analyzer checks, 3.16-2 operating modes, 2.1-6
connecting the pneumatic lines, 3.13-1 parameters generated, 2.1-1
entering system serial numbers and revision performance specifications, A.1-5
levels at the Workstation, 3.16-4 preinstallation checklist, 3.10-1
filling out the reports, 3.17-3 preinstallation checklist, GEN•S System, 3.1-1
installation checklist, 3.18-1 tolerances and limits, A.1-1
installing the pickup tubes, 3.13-1 verification procedure, 5.1-1
installing the reagent lines, 3.13-1 whole blood verification procedure, 5.4-1
installing the waste line, 3.13-1 Workstation. See Workstation
installing the Workstation, 3.15-1 See also GEN•S System; GEN•S Cell; LH 750
main component layout, illustration, 3.11-4 System; LH 750 Cell
main power and drain line length requirements,
INDEX
Instrument 1 NO READ Sample received without labels

proper identification [...,....], 7.2-6 laser warning, location, 1.2-3, 1.2-4
Instrument detected clog in flow cell and attempted laser, part number, 8.1-19
three times to clear clog without lamp, Hgb. See Hgb lamp
success., 7.2-18 laser
Instrument dual port RAM memory test failed., 7.2-17 and flow cell alignment procedure, 4.76-1
Instrument has not performed a shutdown in <24> function, 2.4-2
hours., 7.3-7 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
Instrument Reference Report, using electronic location, LH 750 System, 2.4-9
form, 4.61-2 part number, 8.1-19
interface bus power supply. See Laser Power Supply
function, 2.12-3 laser electromagnetic shield, location, 1.2-4
Intermittent PS1 Supply Error, 7.2-21 laser hazards
Intermittent PS2 Supply Error, 7.2-21 safety precautions, 1.2-2
Internal Cal. Fac. Error, 7.2-21 laser interlock switch
Internal software failure, 7.2-37 function, 2.8-2
Interpreter Collator ABORT., 7.3-7 location, 1.2-4
Interpreter Collator Forced to Reset, 7.3-7 Laser offset too high., 7.2-11
Interpreter Collator has timed-out indicating a Laser offset too low., 7.2-11
possible Analytical Station malfunction, 7.3-7 Laser Power module
Invalid character received from Diluter, 7.2-26 function, 2.8-3
Invalid Diluter command., 7.2-26 Laser Power Supply
Invalid dual port RAM packet (<Tube ID>, block diagram, 2.8-3
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-16 function, 2.4-2, 2.8-3
Invalid tube label type read by scanner (<Tube ID>, input, 2.8-3
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-35 Laser Power module, 2.8-3
IQAP data collected., 7.3-7 Laser Reference 4 card, 2.8-3
Ireg Hst., 7.2-21 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
IRF location, LH 750 System, 2.4-10
retic parameter, 2.1-1 monitors, 2.8-3
outputs, 2.8-3
part number, 8.1-23
J Laser PS. See Laser Power Supply
jumpers Laser Reference 4 card
locations and settings. See specific circuit card function, 2.8-3
laser tamper-proof screws, location, 1.2-4
K Laser voltage above limit (<Tube ID>,
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-22
Keyboard and Display Interface card
Laser voltage below limit (<Tube ID>,
component locations, A.3-13
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-22
connector locations, A.3-13
Laser Voltage Lower Failed, 7.2-22
connectors, table of connections, A.3-13
Laser Voltage Too High, 7.2-22
function, 2.3-2, 2.4-2
Laser Voltage Too Low, 7.2-22
Laser Voltage Upper Failed, 7.2-22
potentiometer R3, function, A.3-13
Last Two XB batches are outside limits, 7.3-8
Keyboard Interrupt Error, 7.2-21
Last XB Batch is outside limits, 7.3-8
Last XB batch outside limit conditions has
L cleared, 7.3-8
Label Not Read Run Stopped, 7.2-22 latex voltage calibration
procedure, 4.9-1
INDEX
procedure overview, 2.25-2 LH 755 System

LATRON control defined, 2.1-1
acceptable verification limits, A.1-10 main units, illustration, 2.1-4
used to verify VCS gain settings, 4.78-1 See also instrument
LATRON primer light scatter (LS)
background limits, A.1-8 VCS measurement, description of, 2.20-1
leakage current specifications Light Scatter Preamp module
computers, 2.1-5 block diagram, 2.21-5
GEN•S System and LH 750 System, 2.1-5 function, 2.4-2, 2.21-4
left lift cylinder inputs, 2.21-5
function test, 4.40-3 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
replacement, 4.40-1 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-9
left lift cylinder (CL4) outputs, 2.21-5
Left Lift Not Up, 7.2-23 light scatter sensor. See LS sensor
left lift up switch linear light scatter (LLS)
activator adjustment, 4.40-3 VCS measurement, description of, 2.20-2
activator location, 2.15-7 LIS Upload: Invalid report Profile Requested, 7.3-8
function, 2.15-7, 4.81-2 List mode data collection procedure, 4.33-1
location, 2.15-7 LLS. See linear light scatter (LLS)
replacement, 4.39-1 loading bay
testing, 4.81-2 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-4
Left Load Fail, 7.2-23 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-8
Left Stack Full, 7.2-23 long term shutdown
leukocyte procedure, 5.2-2
definition, GLOSSARY-2 procedure overview, 5.2-1
See also WBC when to do, 5.2-1
Level C------, 7.2-23 Low Vacuum Drifted, 7.2-24
Level Check Fail Caused Stop, 7.2-23 Low Vacuum High, 7.2-25
Level -D-----, 7.2-23 Low Vacuum Low, 7.2-25
Level --L----, 7.2-23 Low vacuum too high., 7.2-25
Level ---P---, 7.2-24 Low vacuum too low., 7.2-25
Level ----R--, 7.2-24 LS Preamp module. See Light Scatter Preamp
Level -----V-, 7.2-24 module
Level ------W, 7.2-24 LS sensor
LH 750 Cell function, 2.21-4
installation checklist, 3.18-1 regions, illustration of, 2.21-4
space and accessibility requirements, LS. See light scatter (LS)
illustration, 3.10-2 LY#
LH 750 System, 2.1-2 diff parameter, 2.1-1
installation checklist, 3.18-1 LY%
main units, description, 2.1-2 checking precision, 5.5-1
main units, illustration, 2.1-4 diff parameter, 2.1-1
space and accessibility requirements with lymphocyte
SlideMaker, illustration, 3.10-2 definition, GLOSSARY-2
space and accessibility requirements, See also LY#; LY%; diff parameters
illustration, 3.10-1
See also instrument
INDEX
M Maximum # Of Repro runs Exceeded - Sample Not

manifolds Stored, 7.3-8
functions, A.6-10 Maximum number of cassettes (12) already loaded,
location references, A.6-10 obstruction or faulty switch., 7.2-23
part numbers, 8.1-19 MCH
manual CBC parameter, 2.1-1
abbreviations used in, ABBREVIATIONS-1 determining reported results on the GEN•S
conventions, 1.1-4 System, 2.24-4
intended audience, 1.1-1 determining reported results on the LH 750
numbering format, 1.1-3 System, 2.24-7
organization, 1.1-2 formula for deriving, 2.24-4, 2.24-7
reference designators used MCHC
in, ABBREVIATIONS-1 CBC parameter, 2.1-1
scope, 1.1-1 determining reported results on the GEN•S
special headings, 1.1-3 System, 2.24-4
Manual CBC calibration factors updated from determining reported results on the LH 750
Analyzer., 7.3-8 System, 2.24-7
Manual CBC calibration factors updated from GEN S formula for deriving, 2.24-4, 2.24-7
Workstation., 7.3-8 MCV
Manual mode-to-Automatic mode calibration CBC parameter, 2.1-1
procedure, 4.11-1 checking precision, 5.5-1
procedure overview, 2.25-7 determining reported results on the GEN•S
Manual Probe Not In, 7.2-26 System, 2.24-3
Manual sampling probe did not retract (<Tube ID>, determining reported results on the LH 750
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-26, 7.2-28 System, 2.24-5
Manual sampling probe wipe obstructed (<Tube ID>, mean cell volume
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-28 definition, GLOSSARY-2
Manual sampling probe wipe obstructed (not down) See also MCV
(<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-28 mean corpuscular (cell) hemoglobin
Manual sampling probe wipe obstructed (not home) definition, GLOSSARY-2
(<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-29 See also MCH
Manual sampling probe wipe obstructed (not up) mean corpuscular (cell) hemoglobin concentration
(<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-29 definition, GLOSSARY-2
Manual-mode activator See also MCHC
location, 2.17-17 mean platelet volume
Manual-mode aspiration station definition, GLOSSARY-2
component locations, 2.17-17 See also MPV
Manual-mode start switch meniscus
function, 4.81-2 how to read correctly, illustration of, 4.22-3
location, 2.17-17 menu trees
testing, 4.81-2 Analyzer, A.10-1
manuals, customer MF. See manifolds
part numbers, 1.1-1 MF4. See backwash manifold
manuals, service mixing chamber, diff. See diff mixing chamber
online version, part number, 1.1-1 mixing motors. See motors, mixing
Slide Making Modules, part number, 1.1-1 MO#
Slide Staining Modules, part number, 1.1-1 diff parameter, 2.1-1
Workstation, part number, 1.1-1 MO%
checking precision, 5.5-1
diff parameter, 2.1-1
INDEX
mode to mode comparison. See Manual NE%

mode-to-Automatic mode calibration checking precision, 5.5-1
mode to mode matching procedure. See Manual diff parameter, 2.1-1
mode-to-Automatic mode calibration needle
modules location, 2.17-12
Aspiration Pump. See Aspiration Pump module part number, 8.1-21
BSV. See BSV module needle assembly
Diff. See Diff module component locations, 2.17-12
Hgb. See Hgb module function, 2.17-11, A.6-9
Peltier. See Peltier module list of components in, 2.17-11
Probe Wipe. See Probe-Wipe module location, 2.15-5
Random Access. See Random Access module location, GEN•S System, A.7-4
Retic. See Retic module location, LH 750 System, A.8-4
Solenoid Interconnect. See Solenoid modules
Interconnect module Needle-Cap Piercer. See Needle-Cap Piercer
Triple Transducer. See Triple Transducer module
module needle vent chamber
Monitor Task Did Not Finish, 7.2-26 function, 2.16-1
monocyte needle vent chamber (VC19)
definition, GLOSSARY-2 function and location reference, A.6-12
See also MO#; MO%; diff parameters location, 2.17-12
Motor Controller card Needle-Cap Piercer module
function, 2.2-1, 2.9-1 part number-Needle Cap Piercer, 8.1-19
jumper locations, A.4-3 replacement, 4.57-1
location, 2.2-2, 2.9-1, 2.9-2 neutrophil
part number, 8.1-23 definition, GLOSSARY-2
replacement, 4.17-1 See also NE#; NE%; diff parameters
motor, Probe-Wipe module. See Probe-Wipe Newbar card
module motor LED and switch locations, 4.51-10
motor, retic mixing. See retic mixing motor location, 4.51-10
motors, mixing No ACK From Diluter, 7.2-26
diff. See diff chamber mixing motor No Calibrator lot number. No statistics will be
part numbers, 8.1-20 calculated, 7.3-9
retic. See retic mixing motor No ETX, 7.2-26
MPV No latex Setup Information available, latex sample
CBC parameter, 2.1-1 will not be stored., 7.3-9
checking precision, 5.5-1 NO MATCH: Sample run received does not match any
determining reported results, 2.24-6 Todo list entry, 7.3-9
determining reported results on the GEN•S NO READ: Sample run received without proper
System, 2.24-3 identification, 7.3-9
MRV No Retics Control In This Mode, 7.2-26
retic parameter, 2.1-1 No Valid ID, 7.2-26
MSCV No Wand ID, 7.2-26
research parameter, 2.1-2 noise checks
CBC aperture checks, procedure, 4.70-1
CBC, limits, A.1-3
N VCS, limits, A.1-9
NE# VCS, procedure, 4.75-1
diff parameter, 2.1-1 Non-ASCII From Diluter, 7.2-26
INDEX
Not Ready For AMC Data, 7.2-27 Operator <Operator ID> changed Reporting Units
note setup, 7.3-11
definition, 1.1-4 Operator <Operator ID> changed Shifts
Notice of Information Update form definition, 7.3-11
when used, 1.1-1 Operator <Operator ID> changed Workstation
NRBC# setup, 7.3-11
LH 750 System parameter, 2.1-1 Operator <Operator ID> changed XB setup, 7.3-11
NRBC% Operator <Operator ID> deleted <# 0f runs> Run(s)
LH 750 System parameter, 2.1-1 from Control Folder <Lot #>, 7.3-11
Numeric keypad Operator <Operator ID> deleted <Location Name>
function, 2.3-2 from the location list., 7.3-11
location, 2.3-4 Operator <Operator ID> installed <Reagent
numeric keypad Type><Coulter/Non-Coulter> Reagent Lot to:
contrast adjustment, 2.12-11 <New Lot#>, opened on <Open Date> with open
contrast adjustment location, 2.12-12 expiration <Open Exp>, 7.3-11
function, 2.12-11 Operator <Operator ID> requested Research Use Only
certification, 7.3-11
Operator <Operator ID> shutdown the GEN S
O Workstation, 7.3-11
OP. See opacity (OP) Operator <Operator ID> Started RAS, 7.3-11
opacity (OP) Operator <Operator ID> Stopped RAS, 7.3-11
VCS measurement, description of, 2.20-1 Operator acknowledged stop condition, 7.3-12
Operator <Operator ID> added <Location Name> to Operator Alert 09, 7.2-27
the location list, 7.3-10 Operator removed sample from probe before
Operator <Operator ID> added <Physician’s First aspiration was complete (<Tube ID>,
Name, Last Name> to from physician <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-35
list, 7.3-11 Operator selected assay limits for control folder <Lot
Operator <Operator ID> added <Physician’s First #>, 7.3-12
Name, Last Name> to the physician list, 7.3-10 O-rings, part numbers, 8.1-21
Operator <Operator ID> changed <Physician’s First Overflow valve malfunction (remained closed)
Name, Last Name> to <Physician’s First Name, detected while turning compressor ON., 7.2-16
Last Name>, 7.3-10 Overflow valve malfunction (remained open) detected
Operator <Operator ID> changed Analytical Station while turning compressor ON., 7.2-16
setup, 7.3-10 OVERLARY AREA CRC ERROR, 7.2-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed Database
setup, 7.3-10
Operator <Operator ID> changed Decision Rules P
setup, 7.3-10 P/W Harness Not Connected, 7.2-31
Operator <Operator ID> changed Display Labels parameters
setup, 7.3-10 CBC, 2.1-1
Operator <Operator ID> changed Institution differential, 2.1-1
setup, 7.3-10 research only, 2.1-2
Operator <Operator ID> changed lis/his setup, 7.3-10 retic, 2.1-1
Operator <Operator ID> changed location <Location parameters, research only
Name> to <Location Name>., 7.3-10 generated by instrument, 2.1-2
Operator <Operator ID> changed Parameter part numbers
setup, 7.3-10 actuators, 8.1-3
Operator <Operator ID> changed Print setup, 7.3-10 air water separator, 8.1-3
Operator <Operator ID> changed reagents Analytical Station, list
setup, 7.3-10 of, 8.1-3, 8.1-4, 8.1-10, 8.1-11, 8.1-15, 8.1-1
INDEX
9, 8.1-21, 8.1-22, 8.1-26, 8.1-31, 8.1-36, 8.1- software, 8.1-28

37 springs, 8.1-29
aperture blocks and modules, 8.1-3 switches, 8.1-29
BSV components, 8.1-3 thermistors, 8.1-31
bubble/blood detectors, 8.1-3 tie wraps, 8.1-31
Bulk Power Supply, 8.1-24 tools, 8.1-31
cables, 8.1-4 Triple Transducer module components, 8.1-32
cassette transport assembly components, 8.1-6 tubing, 8.1-33
chambers, 8.1-6 valves, Angar™, 8.1-36
chokes, 8.1-7 valves, pinch, 8.1-36
circuit cards, 8.1-22 valves, relief (pressure bleed off), 8.1-36
compressor/vacuum pump, 8.1-8 Workstation, 1.1-1
consumables, 8.1-8 parts
covers, 8.1-10 common names and categories used in parts list,
custom components, 8.1-7 table of, 8.1-1
customer documents, 1.1-1 replaceable, master list
cylinders, 8.1-9 of, 8.1-3, 8.1-4, 8.1-10, 8.1-11, 8.1-15, 8.1-1
displays, 8.1-10 9, 8.1-21, 8.1-22, 8.1-26, 8.1-31, 8.1-36, 8.1-
doors, 8.1-10 37
drives, 8.1-10 parts, illustrated
engineering schematics, 6.1-1 Analyzer and Diluter front and side covers and
fans, 8.1-11 doors, LH750 System, 8.2-74
filters, 8.1-11 Analyzer, card cage, rear door and hardware,
fittings, 8.1-7, 8.1-13 GEN•S System, 8.2-4
flippers, 8.1-14 Analyzer, card cage, rear door and hardware,
fuses, 8.1-14 LH 750 System, 8.2-78
hardware, miscellaneous, 8.1-15 Analyzer, front door and hardware, GEN•S
hardware, nuts, 8.1-21 System, 8.2-2
hardware, screws, 8.1-26 Analyzer, front door hardware, LH 750
hardware, washers and spacers, 8.1-37 System, 8.2-76
heaters, 8.1-18 check valves, 8.2-58
labels, 8.1-19 chokes, 8.2-58
lamps, 8.1-19 Diluter, Aspiration Pump module, MF4 and
laser, 8.1-19 MF13, 8.2-48
manifolds, 8.1-19 Diluter, bar-code scanner and tube ram
modules, 8.1-19 cylinder, 8.2-30
motors, 8.1-20 Diluter, BSV module, 8.2-44
muffler, 8.1-20 Diluter, cassette guide panels, 8.2-8
needle, 8.1-21 Diluter, center front panel, 8.2-16
O-rings, 8.1-21 Diluter, Diff module, 8.2-40
preamps, 8.1-24 Diluter, hydraulic inputs, 8.2-54, 8.2-56
Probe-Wipe module cleaning truck Diluter, left door and compartment, 8.2-10
components, 8.1-24 Diluter, left front panel, 8.2-12
pumps, 8.1-24 Diluter, left rear door, 8.2-52
regulators, 8.1-25 Diluter, lower front door hardware, LH 750
Service Resource Kit, 1.1-1 System, 8.2-77
sheath flow coil, 8.1-28 Diluter, piercing station assembly, 8.2-28
Slide Making Modules Service Manual, 1.1-1 Diluter, piercing station, rocker bed, and
Slide Staining Modules Service Manual, 1.1-1 components under front cover, 8.2-26
INDEX
Diluter, Probe-Wipe module, 8.2-46 front and rear views, 4.64-1

Diluter, rear of center front panel, 8.2-18 function, 2.23-6, A.6-10
Diluter, rear of left front panel, 8.2-14 location, GEN•S System, A.7-1
Diluter, rear of right front panel, 8.2-22 location, LH 750 System, A.8-1
Diluter, Retic module, 8.2-42 part number, 8.1-20
Diluter, right door and compartment, 8.2-24 replacement, 4.64-1
Diluter, right front panel, 8.2-20 temperature check, 4.65-1
Diluter, right rear door, 8.2-50 Peltier Temp. Outside Limits, 7.2-28
Diluter, rocker bed, 8.2-32 Peltier temperature outside limits., 7.2-28
Diluter, rocker bed mounting channel, 8.2-34 P-flag
Diluter, Triple Transducer module, 8.2-36 when bubble/blood detectors disabled, 2.17-15
Diluter, Triple Transducer module translation piercing station
plates and hardware, 8.2-38 exploded view of, 8.2-28
fittings, 8.2-60 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-4
hardware, miscellaneous, 8.2-60 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-8
hardware, mounting, 8.2-64 module part number, 8.1-20
Power Supply, Bulk Power Supply, Motor pinch valves
Controller card and mufflers, 8.2-70 function, A.6-8
Power Supply, covers and panels, 8.2-72 illustration of, 8.2-62
Power Supply, overview and location references, table of, A.6-8
compressor/vacuum pump, regulators and part numbers, 8.1-36, 8.2-63
filters, 8.2-66 platelet
Power Supply, SPC card, System Power definition, GLOSSARY-3
Controller Display and air water See also Plt
separator, 8.2-68 Platelet fit algorithm failed (<Tube
Random Access module, 8.2-80 ID>,<Cass/Pos>), 7.2-28
tie wraps, 8.2-64 PLATELET PROCESSOR card
valves, common, 8.2-62 block diagram, 2.19-6
Password changed, 7.3-13 function, 2.3-2, 2.19-6
PC Not Receiving, 7.2-28 inputs, 2.19-7
PC1, 7.5-1 location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3
PC2, 7.5-2 location, LH7 50 System, 2.3-4
Pct replacement, 4.6-1
determining results on the GEN•S PLB1
System, 2.24-4 function, A.6-10
determining results on the LH 750 location, GEN•S System, A.7-1
system, 2.24-6 location, LH 750 System, A.8-1
formula for deriving, 2.24-4, 2.24-6 See also Peltier module
PDW Plt
determining results on the GEN•S analyzing the data, 2.19-1
determining results on the LH 750 checking precision, 5.5-1
System, 2.24-6 determining reported results on the GEN•S
internal check on Plt parameters, 2.1-2 System, 2.24-3
research parameter, 2.1-2 determining reported results on the LH 750
used as internal check, 2.1-2 System, 2.24-6
Peltier Heater Sensor Bad, 7.2-28 histogram, timing of data
Peltier heater sensor defective or disconnected, 7.2-28 collection, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
Peltier module PLT No Fit Aperture 2 Mode Out, 7.2-28
cross-section view, 2.23-6 PLT No Fit Aperture 3 Mode Out, 7.2-28
INDEX
PLT No Fit Aperture X Mode Out, 7.2-28 location, GEN•S System, A.7-3
Plt Proc card. See PLATELET PROCESSOR card location, LH 750 System, A.8-3
PLT PROCESSOR card See also cleaning agent pump
part number, 8.1-23 PM11
PM1 (Diluter) function, A.6-11
location, LH 750 System, A.8-3 See also blood/stain aspiration pump
See also diff preservative pump PMI procedure, 5.9-1
PM1 (Power Supply) Pneumatic Power Supply
location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2 component locations, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
See also compressor/vacuum pump overview, 2.9-1
PM2 Pneumatic Power system
function, A.6-11 connections from Power Supply to Diluter on
location, GEN•S System, A.7-1 the GEN•S System, 3.5-1
location, LH 750 System, A.8-1 connections from Power Supply to Diluter on
See also RBC diluent dispenser the LH 750 System, 3.13-1
PM3 function, 2.9-1
function, A.6-11 Motor Controller card, 2.9-1
location, GEN•S System, A.7-1 pneumatic levels and status monitors, 2.9-3
location, LH 750 System, A.8-1 pneumatic on signals simplified schematic, 2.9-4
See also WBC diluent dispenser pressure development, 2.9-2
PM4 pressure distribution, 2.9-4
function, A.6-11 PVT card, 2.9-5
location, GEN•S System, A.7-1 temperature monitoring, 2.9-3
location, LH 750 System, A.8-1 vacuum development, 2.9-3
See also diff lytic reagent pump vacuum distribution, 2.9-4
PM5 Pneumatics/Power Supply overheated or
function, A.6-11 defective, 7.2-9
location, GEN•S System, A.7-5 Power Development Control system
See also stain pump troubleshooting, 7.4-1
PM6 power down/power up procedures
function, A.6-11 for Analytical Station, 4.1-1
location, GEN•S System, A.7-1 for Workstation, 4.1-1
location, LH 750 System, A.8-1 power supplies, local
See also retic clearing solution pump function, 2.5-4
PM7 See also Analyzer power supplies; Diluter power
function, A.6-11 supplies
location, GEN•S System, A.7-3 Power Supply
location, LH 750 System, A.8-3 card layouts with component descriptions, A.4-1
See also CBC lytic reagent pump component locations, 2.2-2
PM9 conditions that shut it down, 2.10-4
function, A.6-11 cover removal, 4.13-1
location, GEN•S System, A.7-4 function, 2.2-1
location, LH 750 System, A.8-4 illustrated parts. See parts, illustrated
See also aspiration pump installation. See installation procedure, GEN•S
PM10 System
function, A.6-11 left side panel removal, 4.13-1
INDEX
main components, table of functions, 2.2-1 60 psi. See 60 psi

verification procedure, 5.7-1 diff sample. See diff sample pressure
Power Supply 1 problem: +5 Volts above limit, 7.2-29 for bar-code scanner cylinder. See bar-code
Power Supply 1 problem: +5 Volts below limit, 7.2-29 scanner cylinder
Power Supply 1 problem: +15 Volts above retic sample. See retic sample pressure
limit, 7.2-29 sheath. See sheath pressure
Power Supply 1 problem: +15 Volts below VCS variation limits, table of, A.1-9
limit, 7.2-29 preventive maintenance procedure, 5.9-1
Power Supply 1 problem: -15 Volts above limit, 7.2-29 Probe Obstructed, 7.2-28
Power Supply 1 problem: -15 Volts below limit, 7.2-30 probe position sensor
Power Supply 2 defective, 7.2-17 adjustment, 4.60-4
Power Supply 2 problem: +5 Volts above limit, 7.2-30 function, 4.81-2
Power Supply 2 problem: +5 Volts below limit, 7.2-30 location, 4.60-2
Power Supply 2 problem: +12 Volts above orientation, illustration, 4.60-4
limit, 7.2-30 testing, 4.81-2
Power Supply 2 problem: +12 Volts below Probe Wipe Down Fail, 7.2-28
limit, 7.2-30 Probe Wipe Failed, 7.2-28
Power Supply 2 problem: +15 Volts above Probe Wipe Truck Not Home, 7.2-29
limit, 7.2-30 Probe Wipe Up Fail, 7.2-29
Power Supply 2 problem: +15 Volts below probe-wipe down sensor
limit, 7.2-30 adjustment, 4.58-6
Power Supply 2 problem: -15 Volts above limit, 7.2-31 function, 2.17-18, 4.81-3
Power Supply 2 problem: -15 Volts below limit, 7.2-31 replacement, 4.58-2
Power Supply exhaust fan testing, 4.81-3
function, 2.2-1, 2.5-2 Probe-Wipe module
location, 2.2-2 cleaning truck cleaning/replacement, 4.58-2
replacement, 4.12-1 cleaning truck component part numbers, 8.1-24
Power Supply intake fan component locations, 2.17-17
function, 2.2-1, 2.5-2 components, GEN•S System, illustration, A.7-4
location, 2.2-2, 2.9-1, 2.9-2 components, LH 750 System, illustration, A.8-4
replacement, 4.12-2 differences between two styles, 2.17-17
preamps exploded view, 8.2-46
Hgb, part number, 8.1-24 function, 2.17-17, A.6-9
light scatter. See Light Scatter Preamp module location, GEN•S System, A.7-4
RF detector. See RF Detector Preamp card location, LH 750 System, A.8-4
precision monitoring, 2.17-18
definition, GLOSSARY-3 motor replacement, 4.58-2
verification procedure, 5.5-1 part number, 8.1-20
PRECISION TEST 2 sensor replacement, 4.58-2
acceptable values, table of, A.1-4 Probe-Wipe module motor
PRECISION TEST 3 location, 2.17-17
acceptable values, table of, A.1-4 part number, 8.1-20
Precision test 3 replacement, 4.58-2
definition, 2.7-2, 2.7-4 probe-wipe optical sensors
Precision test values within limits, 7.3-13 locations, 2.17-17
preliminary procedures, CBC calibration See also probe-wipe down sensor; probe-wipe up
overview, 2.25-1 sensor
pressure Probe-Wipe Test, 4.58-1
5 psi. See 5 psi probe-wipe up sensor
30 psi. See 30 psi adjustment, 4.58-6
INDEX
function, 2.17-18, 4.81-3 pump

replacement, 4.58-2 diluent dispensers. See RBC diluent dispenser;
testing, 4.81-3 WBC diluent dispenser
procedure summaries retic clearing solution (PM6). See retic clearing
GEN•S System installation, 3.9-1 solution pump
LH 750 System installation, 3.18-1 stain (PM5). See stain pump
pump volume checks, A.1-13 vacuum. See compressor/vacuum pump
VCS optimization, 4.71-2 volume check procedure summary, A.1-13
procedures volume tolerances, table of, A.1-14
adjustment. See adjustment procedures pumps, dual volume
calibration. See CBC calibration procedures; aspiration (PM9). See aspiration pump
VCS optimization procedures diff lytic reagent (PM4). See diff lytic reagent
cleaning. See cleaning procedures pump
installation. See installation procedures diff preservative (PM1). See diff preservative
noise checks. See noise checks pump
power down/power up, See power down/power PVT card
up procedures component locations, A.3-14
preventive maintenance, 5.9-1 connector locations, A.3-14
removal. See removal procedures connectors, table of connections, A.3-14
replacement. See replacement procedures function, 2.4-2, 2.9-5
timing. See timing procedures inputs, 2.9-6
troubleshooting. See troubleshooting location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
procedures location, LH 750 System, 2.4-10
verification. See verification procedures monitors, 2.9-6
PS. See Power Supply part number, 8.1-23
PS1 +5V Supply High, 7.2-29 replacement, 4.7-3
PS1 +15V Supply High, 7.2-29
PS1 +15V Supply Low, 7.2-29 Q
PS1 -15V Supply High, 7.2-29 QD. See quick disconnects
PS1 -15V Supply Low, 7.2-30 quench. See diff preservative
PS2 +5V Supply High, 7.2-30 quick disconnects
PS2 +5V Supply Low, 7.2-30 location references, A.6-11
PS2 +12V Supply High, 7.2-30 part numbers, 8.1-12
PS2 +15V Supply High, 7.2-30 R
R/W Data Mem. Interference, 7.2-34
PS2 -15V Supply High, 7.2-31
RAMP TEST 0
PS2 -15V Supply Low, 7.2-31
acceptable values, table of, A.1-4
pumps
Ramp Test values within limits., 7.3-13
aspiration (PM9). See aspiration pump
Ramp test, definition, 2.7-2, 2.7-4
blood/stain aspiration (PM11). See blood/stain
Random Access module
aspiration pump
components, illustration, A.8-5
CBC lytic reagent (PM7). See CBC lytic reagent
exploded view, 8.2-80
pump
function, 2.4-2
cleaning agent. See Cleaning agent pump
location, 2.4-9
diff lytic reagent (PM4). See diff lytic reagent
part number, 8.1-20
pump
RBC
diff preservative (PM1). See diff preservative
analyzing the data, 2.19-1
INDEX
CBC parameter, 2.1-1 reagent input

checking precision, 5.5-1 connections, 3.5-2, 3.5-3, 3.13-2, 3.13-3
count, timing the data collection, 2.18-5, 2.18-6 reagent input ports, 2.13-1
determining reported count on the GEN•S reagent input ports, illustration (on Analytical
System, 2.24-2 Stations that bypass the diluent
determining reported count on the LH 750 reservoir), 2.13-2
System, 2.24-5 reagent input ports, illustration (on Analytical
diluent dispenser. See RBC diluent dispenser Stations that use the diluent
generating histograms on the LH 750 reservoir), 2.13-1
System, 2.24-5 reagent level monitoring, 2.13-4
generating histograms on the GEN•S Reagent Reservoir module, 2.13-2
System, 2.24-2 Reservoir Interface card, 2.13-5
histogram, timing the data sheath tank, 2.13-9
collection, 2.18-6, 2.18-7 sweep-flow reservoir, 2.13-10
RBC bath (VC2) System-Flush cycle, 2.13-11
function and location reference, A.6-12 waste collection, 2.13-11
RBC diluent dispenser (PM2) waste level monitoring, 2.13-11
adjustments, illustration of, 4.23-3, 4.23-4 waste level sensor bypass
function, 2.18-2 installation, 3.5-3, 3.13-3
function and location reference, A.6-11 waste output connection, 3.5-3, 3.13-3
part number, 8.1-24 Reagent level sense, pressure or voltage error
replacement, 4.23-6 detected., 7.2-11
troubleshooting, 4.23-5 reagent reservoir component replacement. See float
volume check, 4.23-1 sensor/reservoir cap, replacement; reagent
volume tolerances, A.1-14 reservoir solenoids, replacement; Reservoir
RBC vacuum isolator chamber (VC1-R) Interface card, replacement
function, 2.18-4 Reagent Reservoir module
function and location reference, A.6-12 component locations, new style, 2.13-4
RDW component locations, old style, 2.13-3
CBC parameter, 2.1-1 function, 2.4-2, 2.13-2
checking precision, 5.5-1 location, GEN•System, 2.4-7
determining reported results, 2.24-6 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-11
determining reported results on the GEN•S monitoring the reagent level in, 2.13-4
System, 2.24-3 reagent reservoir solenoids
Reagent <Reagent lot #> is expired, 7.3-13 replacement, 4.30-3
Reagent Handling system Received Host Deletion Request
backwash manifold, 2.13-9 %1, %2 ToDo List entries were deleted, 7.3-13
backwash tank, 2.13-8 red blood cell. See RBC
diluent/cleaning agent chamber, 2.13-7 red distribution width
function, 2.13-1 definition, GLOSSARY-3
pickup tube See also RDW
connections, 3.5-2, 3.5-3, 3.13-2, 3.13-3 Red Pre-amp card. See RED/WHITE PRE-AMP
reagent distribution, 2.13-6 cards
reagent distribution block diagram (in RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards
Analytical Stations that bypass the diluent block diagram, 2.19-1
reservoir), 2.13-7 connecting coaxial cables, 3.4-2
reagent distribution block diagram (in function, 2.3-2, 2.19-1
Analytical Stations that use the diluent inputs, 2.19-2
reservoir), 2.13-6 location, 2.3-3
outputs, 2.19-2
INDEX
replacement, 4.6-1 ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 2 card, 4.6-1

RED/WHITE PREAMP cards API-SIGNAL GENERATOR card, 4.6-1
part number, 8.1-23 aspiration pump, 4.27-1
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card Bar-Code Decoder card, 4.7-1
block diagram, 2.19-6 bar-code scanner cylinder, 4.50-1
function, 2.3-2, 2.19-5 BD ADJ card, 4.6-1
input, 2.19-6 bed rock cylinder, 4.45-1
location, 2.3-4 BSV, 4.60-1
replacement, 4.6-1 BSV module components (housing, insulator,
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card O-ring, shaft and spring), 4.60-1
block diagram, 2.19-4 bubble/blood detectors, 4.55-1, 4.55-5
function, 2.3-2, 2.19-3 Bulk Power Filter card, 4.21-1
input, 2.19-5 Bulk Power Supply, 4.20-1
location, 2.3-3 CBC lytic reagent pump, 4.22-1
part number, 8.1-23 cleaning agent pump, 4.26-1
replacement, 4.6-1 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE card, 4.6-1
Red/white processor counter(s) did not compressor/vacuum pump, 4.14-1
reinitialize., 7.2-32 diff chamber mixing motor, 4.69-1
Red/White Reset Error, 7.2-32 diff heater, 4.67-1
reference designators diff lytic reagent pump, 4.28-1
used in this manual, ABBREVIATIONS-1 diff mixing chamber, 4.68-1
Reg Res Intfc card. See Reservoir Interface card diff preservative pump, 4.29-1
regulator DIFF PROCESSOR card, 4.6-1
regulators diluent dispensers, 4.23-1
diff sample pressure. See diff sample pressure Diluter 3 card, 4.7-3
regulator Diluter 4 card, 4.7-3
retic sample pressure. See retic sample pressure Diluter Cable Adapter card, 4.7-3
regulator DILUTER CPU card, 4.6-1
sheath pressure. See sheath pressure regulator DILUTER PROCESSOR card, 4.6-1
vacuum (low). See vacuum regulator Diluter/Solenoid/Optics/Power Supply
relief valve (RV1) card, 4.7-3
part number, 8.1-36 dump valve, 4.15-1
See also 60-psi regulator float sensor/reservoir cap, 4.30-1
removal procedures hand detector assembly, 4.59-1
Power Supply cover, 4.13-1 Hgb lamp, 4.32-1
Power Supply left side panel, 4.13-1 left lift cylinder, 4.40-1
rocker bed, 4.43-1 left lift up switch, 4.39-1
rocker bed belt drive assembly, 4.35-1 Light Scatter Preamp module, 4.7-3
Replace reagent container, 7.2-23 Motor Controller card, 4.17-1
replacement procedures Needle-Cap Piercer module, 4.57-1
air water separator, 4.16-2 Peltier module, 4.64-1
AMC, 4.6-1 PLATELET PROCESSOR card, 4.6-1
ANALOG card, 4.6-1 Power Supply exhaust fan, 4.12-1
Analyzer fans, 4.12-3 Power Supply intake fan, 4.12-2
Analyzer front door gas springs, LH 750 probe-wipe down sensor, 4.58-2
System, 4.82-1 Probe-Wipe module cleaning truck, 4.58-2
ANALYZER POWER SUPPLY 1 card, 4.6-1 Probe-Wipe module motor, 4.58-2
INDEX
probe-wipe up sensor, 4.58-2 Reservoir low or Stain or clearing agent level sense
PVT card, 4.7-3 detected., 7.2-24
reagent reservoir solenoids, 4.30-3 reset signals, 2.6-5
RED/WHITE PRE-AMP cards, 4.6-1 RESET switch
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR 2 card, 4.6-1 function, 2.11-2
RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card, 4.6-1 location, 2.11-3
Reservoir Interface card, 4.30-4 RET#
retic chamber, 4.63-1 retic parameter, 2.1-1
retic clearing solution pump, 4.25-1 RET%
retic mixing motor on the Random Access checking precision, 5.5-1
module, 4.62-2 retic parameter, 2.1-1
retic mixing motor on the Retic module, 4.62-1 Retic Accumulation Not Finished, 7.2-32
RF Detector Preamp card, 4.7-3 retic chamber (VC17)
right lift cylinder, 4.40-1 function, 2.23-2, 2.23-4
right lift up switch, 4.39-1 function and location reference, A.6-12
rocker bed belt drive assembly, 4.35-1 location, 4.63-1, 4.63-2
RS/Opto Intfc card, 4.7-3 replacement, 4.63-1
R/W/P SC/A card, 4.6-1 retic clearing solution
Scope Module, 4.6-1 connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the
Sensor Distribution card, 4.7-3 GEN•S System, 3.5-2
Six-Channel Preamp card, 4.7-2 connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the
stain chamber, 4.63-1 LH 750 System, 3.13-2
stain pump, 4.24-1 F-key function to prime, A.5-2
System Power Controller card, 4.18-1 function, 2.23-5
System Power Controller Display, 4.19-1 retic clearing solution pump (PM6)
top left safety switch, 4.41-1 adjustments, illustration of, 4.25-4
top right safety switch, 4.41-1 function, 2.23-2, 2.23-4
tube detector assembly, 4.46-1 function and location reference, A.6-11
under left stack switch, 4.37-1 part number, 8.1-24
under right stack switch, 4.38-1 replacement, 4.25-6
Repro Set Deleted, 7.3-13 troubleshooting, 4.25-4
reproducibility volume check, 4.25-1
definition, GLOSSARY-3 volume tolerances, A.1-14
verification procedure, 5.5-1 Retic control material used in CBC or CBC/DIFF test
Reservoir Interface card mode., 7.2-26
component locations, A.3-15 Retic laser offset too low., 7.2-32
connector locations, A.3-15 Retic Laser Offset Upper Failed, 7.2-32
connectors, table of connections, A.3-15 retic mixing motor
inputs, 2.13-5 replacement on the Random Access
location, GEN•System, 2.4-7 module, 4.62-2
location, LH 750 System, 2.4-11 replacement on the Retic module, 4.62-1
part number, 8.1-23 Retic module
replacement, 4.30-4 components, illustration, A.7-5
Reservoir low on CBC lyse., 7.2-23 exploded view, 8.2-42
Reservoir low on cleaner., 7.2-23 function, 2.4-3
Reservoir low on DIFF PAK., 7.2-24 location, 2.4-5
Reservoir low on diluent, 7.2-23 part number, 8.1-20
Reservoir low on Retic PAK., 7.2-24 stain chamber and retic chamber
Reservoir low or Stabilyse level sense detected, 7.2-24 replacement, 4.63-1
INDEX
verifying correct operation, 5.6-1 connection to digital backplane on the LH 750

retic parameters System, 3.12-6
determining reported results, 2.24-9 function, 2.4-3, 2.21-2
generated by instrument, 2.1-1 inputs, 2.21-2
test limits, A.1-5 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
verification procedure, 5.6-1 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-9
See also VCS Technology system monitoring, 2.21-4
Retic Pressure Lower Failed, 7.2-32 outputs, 2.21-2
Retic Pressure Upper Failed, 7.2-32 part number, 8.1-24
retic sample pressure replacement, 4.7-3
acceptable limits, A.1-6 solid state, block diagram, 2.21-3
acceptable variation, A.1-9 test point locations, 4.74-3
regulator. See retic sample pressure regulator with vacuum tube, block diagram, 2.21-3
transducer (RETIC PRESSURE) location, A.3-14 RF Lower Limit Failed, 7.2-33
Retic sample pressure above limit (<Tube ID>, RF Preamp card. See RF Detector Preamp card
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-32 RF Upper Limit Failed, 7.2-33
Retic sample pressure below limit (<Tube ID>, RF Voltage Low, 7.2-33
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-32 RF voltage reading below limit., 7.2-33
retic sample pressure regulator (RG6) RF. See conductivity (RF)
function, 2.23-5 RF/DC Detector Preamp card
function and location reference, A.6-11 possible cause of an FC error, 7.5-1
part number, 8.1-25 RG1 (Power Supply)
retic sample valve (CVL99) function, 2.9-2
function and location reference, A.6-10 location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
retic segment valve See also 30-psi regulator
function, 2.17-7 RG2 (Diluter)
ports, description, 2.17-10 function, A.6-11
ports, illustration, 2.17-10 location, GEN•S System, A.7-3
See also shear valves location, LH 750 System, A.8-3
retic stain pump. See stain pump See also vacuum regulator
retic stain. See stain RG2 (Power Supply)
Retic Xmit Failure, 7.2-32 function, 2.9-2
reticulocyte location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
definition, GLOSSARY-3 See also 5-psi regulator
See also RET#; RET%; retic parameters RG3
reticulocyte parameters. See retic parameters function, A.6-11
RF (6.3V) voltage reading above limit (<Tube ID>, location, GEN•S System, A.7-3
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-33 location, LH 750 System, A.8-3
RF (6.3V) voltage reading below limit (<Tube ID>, See also diff sample pressure
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-33 RG4
RF box. See RF Detector Preamp card function, A.6-11
RF Detector Preamp card location, GEN•S System, A.7-3
adjustment, 4.74-1 location, LH 750 System, A.8-3
adjustment locations, 4.74-3 See also sheath pressure regulator
Clog detector circuit. See Clog Detector circuit RG5
connection to digital backplane, 4.74-2 function, A.6-11
connection to digital backplane on the GEN•S location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
System, 3.4-5 location, LH 750 System, A.8-2
INDEX
See also bar-code scanner cylinder pressure Rocker bed obstructed (right lift not up) or faulty
regulator sensor (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-33
RG6 rotated light scatter (RLS)
function, A.6-11 VCS measurement, description of, 2.20-2
location, GEN•S System, A.7-3 RS485 Interface modules
See also retic sample pressure regulator RS/O Intfc card. See RS/Opto Intfc card
Rgt Res module. See Reagent Reservoir module RS/Opto Intfc card
right lift cylinder communication links, illustration of, 2.11-6
function test, 4.40-3 component locations, A.3-16
replacement, 4.40-1 connections to digital backplane on the GEN•S
right lift cylinder (CL5) System, 3.4-6
function, 2.15-3 connections to digital backplane on the LH 750
location, 2.15-3 System, 3.12-7
Right Lift Not Down, 7.2-33 connector locations, A.3-16
Right Lift Not Up, 7.2-33 connectors, table of connections, A.3-16
right lift up switch function, 2.4-3, 2.11-5
activator adjustment, 4.40-3 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
activator location, 2.15-3 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-10
replacement, 4.39-1 Run Aborted. PC Not Ready., 7.2-34
testing, 4.81-3 RV1
Right Stack Full, 7.2-33 function, 2.9-2
right stack loaded switch location, 2.9-1, 2.9-2
function, 2.15-1, 4.81-3 See also 60-psi regulator
location, 2.15-1 R/W Proc card. See RED/WHITE PROCESSOR card
testing, 4.81-3 R/W/P SC/A card
RLS. See rotated light scatter (RLS) block diagram, 2.7-3
rocker bed component locations, A.2-12
air cylinder. See bed rock cylinder connectors, table of connections, A.2-12
belt drive assembly. See belt drive assembly function, 2.3-2
belt. See belt drive assembly inputs, 2.7-4
exploded view, 8.2-32 location, 2.3-4
location, GEN•S System, 2.4-4 outputs, 2.7-4
location, LH 750 System, 2.4-8 part number, 8.1-23
module part number, 8.1-20 replacement, 4.6-1
position flag. See bed position flag R/W/P Signal Conditioner/Analyzer. See R/W/P
position sensors. See bed backward sensor; bed SC/A card
forward sensor; bed horizontal sensor
removal, 4.43-1
rock rate adjustment, 4.45-2 S
rocks per minute, acceptable range, A.1-2 safety precautions
Rocker bed did not advance., 7.2-7 biological, 1.2-1
Rocker bed obstructed (left lift not down) or faulty electronic, 1.2-1
sensor (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-23 laser, 1.2-2
Rocker bed obstructed (left lift not up) or faulty sensor troubleshooting, 1.2-6
(<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-23 Same Label Read Run Stopped, 7.2-35
Rocker bed obstructed (right lift not down) or faulty Sample Access and Reservoir module
sensor (<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-33 location, GEN•S System, A.7-4
INDEX
location, LH 750 System, A.8-4 sample data flow on the LH750 System from
Sample Acquisition system final processing to reporting, block
aspirating a sample in the Automatic diagram, 2.24-2
mode, 2.16-1 sample flags, codes and messages, 2.24-10
aspirating a sample in the Manual mode, 2.16-5 Sample Tube Not Detected, 7.2-35
aspiration path in the Automatic mode, Sampling Station
illustration of, 2.16-1 components, GEN•S System, illustration, A.7-4
aspiration path in the Manual mode, illustration components, LH 750 System, illustration, A.8-4
of, 2.16-5 function, 2.4-3
aspiration path through the BSV in the location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
Automatic mode, illustration of, 2.16-2 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-9
aspiration path through the BSV in the Manual SC display test
mode, illustration of, 2.16-6 procedure, 4.19-1
aspiration pump, 2.17-1 S-CAL® calibrator
blood sampling valve (BSV), 2.17-5 using for initial adjustment of average
bubble/blood detectors, 2.17-13 calibration factors, 4.10-1
cleaning the blood pathways in the Automatic Scanner Error, 7.2-35
mode, 2.16-3 scanner position switch
cleaning the blood pathways in the Manual function, 2.15-5, 4.81-3
mode, 2.16-7 location, 2.15-5
hand-detector assembly, 2.17-16 scanner, handheld
list of components in, 2.17-1 laser warning label, 1.2-4
needle assembly, 2.17-11 Scanning Fault, 7.2-35
overview, 2.16-1 schematics, engineering
Probe-Wipe module, 2.17-17 Analog Backplane, GEN•S System, DCN, 6.1-1
segmenting the sample in the Automatic Analog Backplane, LH 750 System, DCN, 6.1-1
mode, 2.16-2 Backplane Interconnect, GEN•S System,
segmenting the sample in the Manual DCN, 6.1-1
mode, 2.16-6 CRT Backplane, GEN•S System, DCN, 6.1-1
Sample ID portion of the Positive ID has Digital Backplane, GEN•S System, DCN, 6.1-1
changed, 7.3-13 Digital Backplane, LH 750 System, DCN, 6.1-1
Sample Removed Too Soon, 7.2-35 GEN•S Cable Interconnection Diagram,
Sample Reporting system DCN, 6.1-1
CBC analysis parameters on the GEN•S GEN•S Pneumatic/Hydraulic Schematic
System, 2.24-2 Diagram, DCN, 6.1-1
CBC analysis parameters on the LH 750 GEN•S System Signal Interconnection Diagram,
System, 2.24-5 DCN, 6.1-1
diff analysis parameters, 2.24-7 included in Chapter 6, list of, 6.1-1
diff analysis three-dimensional DataPlot, LH 750 Pneu/Hydr, DCN, 6.1-1
example, 2.24-8 LH 750 System Signal Interconnect, DCN, 6.1-1
diff analysis two-dimensional DataPlot, Pneu/Hydr layout, Power Supply, DCN, 6.1-1
example, 2.24-8 when updated in manual, 6.1-1
function, 2.24-1 schematics, simplified
retic analysis DataPlot, example, 2.24-10 pneumatic on signals, 2.9-4
retic analysis parameters, 2.24-9 POWER ON signal, 2.6-4
sample data flow on the GEN•S System from power up signals, 2.6-5
final processing to reporting, block Scope 1 card
diagram, 2.24-1 function, 2.11-7
INDEX
Scope 2 card location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5

SCOPE MENU, Analyzer part number, 8.1-23
accessing, 4.3-1 replacement, 4.7-3
modes and display speeds available, table sensors
of, 4.3-3 backwash. See backwash tank sensor
See also SCOPE MENU, example displays bar-code scanner position, location, 4.53-1
SCOPE MENU, example displays bed backward. See bed backward sensor
CBC ONLY, 4.3-7 bed forward. See bed forward sensor
CBC/DIFF, 4.3-7 bed horizontal. See bed horizontal sensor
conductivity, 4.3-5 bellows down. See bellows down sensor
count test, 4.3-4 bellows up. See bellows up sensor
Diff Analog Pulses Test, 4.3-4 diff ambient thermistor. See diff ambient
DIFF ONLY, 4.3-7 thermistor
electronic test, 4.3-3 Diluter ambient thermistor. See Diluter ambient
F55, 4.3-6 thermistor
light scatter, 4.3-5 float. See float sensor, VC22; float sensors,
light scatter drift, 4.3-6 reagent reservoirs
phase adjust, 4.3-6 front door. See front door sensor
VCS LATRON control, 4.3-4 hand detector. See hand detector assembly
volume, 4.3-5 LS. See LS sensor
Scope Module probe position. See probe position sensor
function, 2.3-2 probe-wipe down. See probe-wipe down sensor
location, GEN•S System, 2.3-3 probe-wipe up. See probe-wipe up sensor
location, LH 750 System, 2.3-4 sheath. See sheath tank sensor
replacement, 4.6-1 sweep-flow reservoir. See sweep-flow reservoir
Scope module sensor
CRT intensity adjustment tube in position. See tube in position sensor
on the LH 750 System, 4.34-2 vacuum overflow tank. See vacuum overflow
CRT intensity adjustment on the GEN•S tank sensor
System, 4.34-1 waste. See waste level sensor
Scope Module 2 SERVICE MENU, Analyzer
function, 2.11-6 accessing, 4.2-1
inputs, 2.11-7 options available. See service options, Analyzer
See also Scope Module service options, Analyzer
screws, part numbers, 8.1-26 on DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES MENU, table of
SD descriptions, 4.2-4
definition, GLOSSARY-3 on DIAGNOSTICS DUMP MENU, table of
Sensor detected diluted blood or non-blood sample descriptions, 4.2-6
(<Tube ID>, <Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-5 on DIFF PROCESSOR DIAGNOSTICS MENU,
Sensor Dist. See Sensor Distribution card table of descriptions, 4.2-6
Sensor Distribution card on ELECTONIC TESTS MENU, table of
component locations, A.3-17 descriptions, 4.2-4
connected to VC22 float sensor, 2.9-5 on MORE DIAGNOSTICS MENU, table of
connector locations, A.3-17 descriptions, 4.2-5
connectors, table of connections, A.3-17 on SERVICE MENU, table of descriptions, 4.2-2
function, 2.4-3, 2.14-5 on SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MENU, table of
input, 2.14-6 descriptions, 4.2-5
LED indications, table of, A.3-17 shear valves
LED locations, A.3-17 hardware description, 2.17-7
INDEX
ports, 2.17-10 SlideMaker

See also diff sample valve; retic sample valve; AMC switch settings for, A.2-1
stained retic sample valve Diluter Processor card switch settings
sheath flow restrictor (VC12) for, A.2-8, A.2-9, A.2-10
function and location reference, A.6-12 service manual name and part number, 1.1-1
sheath pressure SlideStainer
acceptable limits, A.1-6 service manual name and part number, 1.1-1
acceptable variation, A.1-9 SmartStart™ recognition
regulator. See sheath pressure regulator enabling, 2.15-1
transducer location, A.3-14 function, 2.15-1
Sheath Pressure Lower Failed, 7.2-35 hand detector part of, 2.17-16
sheath pressure regulator (RG4) software
function, 2.13-9 part numbers, 8.1-28
function and location reference, A.6-11 procedure for displaying versions, A.9-1
part number, 8.1-25 released version configurations for the GEN•S
Sheath Pressure Upper Failed, 7.2-36 System, A.9-1
Sheath sample pressure above limit (<Tube ID>, released version configurations for the LH 750
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-36 System, A.9-1
Sheath sample pressure below limit (<Tube ID>, Solenoid Interconnect module
<Cass/Pos>)., 7.2-35 function, A.6-9
sheath tank (VC15) location, GEN•S System, A.7-3
function, 2.13-9 location, LH 750 System, A.8-3
function and location reference, A.6-12 part number, 8.1-20
monitoring the reagent level in, 2.13-9, 2.13-10 solenoid valves
reagent flow, illustration of, 2.13-10 functions and location references, table of, A.6-1
testing sensor, 2.13-11, 4.81-4 solenoids valves
Sheath Tank Not Full, 7.2-36 reagent reservoir, replacement
sheath tank sensor Sol/Opt PS card. See Diluter/Solenoid/Optics Power
function, 4.81-4 Supply card
testing, 4.81-4 spacers, part numbers, 8.1-37
Sheath Tank Still Full, 7.2-36 SPC A/D Status Error, 7.2-36
shift SPC card. See System Power Controller card
definition, GLOSSARY-3 SPC Display. See System Power Controller Display
shutdown procedures SPC Power Supply Bad, 7.2-36
extended, 5.2-1 SPC power supply defective, 7.2-36
long term, 5.2-2 SPC Status Not Ready, 7.2-37
Six-Channel Preamp card special headings
block diagram, 2.19-3 attention, 1.1-4
component locations, A.3-18 caution, 1.1-3
connector locations, A.3-18 important, 1.1-3
connectors, table of connections, A.3-18 note, 1.1-4
function, 2.4-3, 2.19-2 Specimen Transport system
location, 2.4-9 bar-code reader, 2.14-3
part number, 8.1-23 block diagram, 2.14-1
replacement, 4.7-2 cassette transport assembly, 2.14-2
Six-Channel Preamp cards detecting a tube at the piercing station, 2.15-4
inputs, 2.19-3 function, 2.14-1
outputs, 2.19-3 identifying the specimen, 2.15-5
initiating the Automatic-mode cycle, 2.15-1
INDEX
list of components in, 2.14-1 Stain temperature high, heater disabled., 7.2-37
moving a cassette to the unloading bay, 2.15-6 Stain temperature low, heater disabled., 7.2-37
moving the cassette across the rocker Stain temperature sensor failed., 7.2-37
bed, 2.15-3 stained retic sample valve (CVL93)
overview, 2.14-1 function and location reference, A.6-10
piercing the cap of the specimen tube, 2.15-5 stained retic segment valve
placing the cassette on the rocker bed, 2.15-3 function, 2.17-9
positioning the tube for sample ports, description, 2.17-11
acquisition, 2.15-4 ports, illustration, 2.17-11
pushing the tube back into the cassette, 2.15-6 See also shear valves
retrieving the cassette from the loading standard deviation
bay, 2.15-1 definition, GLOSSARY-3
Sensor Distribution card, 2.14-5 start switch. See Manual-mode start switch
springs, part numbers, 8.1-29 startup after extended shutdown
StabiLyse. See diff preservative procedure, 5.2-2
Stack Overflow, 7.2-37 procedure overview, 5.2-1
stain startup after long term shutdown
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the procedure, 5.2-2
GEN•S System, 3.5-2 procedure overview, 5.2-1
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the startup procedures
LH 750 System, 3.13-2 after extended shutdown, 5.2-2
F-key function to prime, A.5-2 after long term shutdown, 5.2-2
function, 2.23-5 stripper plate
stain chamber (VC24) function, 2.15-4
function and location reference, A.6-13 stripper plate cylinder (CL10)
location, 4.63-1, 4.63-2 function, 2.15-4
stain heater Stripper Plate Not In, 7.2-38
block diagram, 2.23-6 Stripper Plate Not Out, 7.2-38
checks and adjustments, 4.65-1 Stripper plate obstructed (not in) or faulty
function, 2.23-1, 2.23-3, 2.23-6 sensor., 7.2-38
voltage limits, A.3-11 Stripper plate obstructed (not out) or faulty
Stain Heater Disabled, 7.2-37 sensor., 7.2-38
Stain heater disabled for current cycle., 7.2-37 stripper plate position switch
Stain Heater Sensor Bad, 7.2-37 function, 4.81-4
stain pump (PM5) location, 2.15-4
adjustments on the Random Access module, testing, 4.81-4
illustration of, 4.24-4 STX Rec. Error, 7.2-38
adjustments on the Retic module, illustration SVP
of, 4.24-4 procedure, 5.1-1
function, 2.23-1, 2.23-3 using electronic form for, 4.61-1
function and location reference, A.6-11 Sweep Flow Reservoir Not Full, 7.2-38
part number, 8.1-24 Sweep Flow Reservoir Still Full, 7.2-38
replacement, 4.24-7 sweep-flow reservoir (VC29)
troubleshooting, 4.24-5 function, 2.13-10
volume check, 4.24-1 function and location reference, A.6-13
volume tolerances, A.1-14 testing sensor, 4.81-4
Stain Temp Hi. Heater Disabled, 7.2-37 sweep-flow reservoir sensor
Stain Temp Low. Run Stopped, 7.2-37 testing, 4.81-4
INDEX
sweep-flow tank jumper settings for 48 V fault isolation, 7.4-5

function, A.6-9 LED locations, A.4-4
location, GEN•S System, A.7-2 location, 2.2-2
location, LH 750 System, A.8-2 part number, 8.1-23
switches pneumatic level monitors, 2.10-2
laser interlock. See laser interlock switch POWER ON signal simplified schematic, 2.6-4
left lift up. See left lift up switch replacement, 4.18-1
Manual-mode start. See Manual-mode start temperature monitors, 2.10-2
switch voltage status LEDs, table of indications, A.4-4
on circuit cards. See specific circuit card System Power Controller Display
part numbers, 8.1-29 block diagram, 2.10-1
RESET. See RESET switch electronic and pneumatic level displays, 2.10-4
right lift up. See right lift up switch function, 2.2-1, 2.10-3
right stack loaded. See right stack loaded switch location, 2.2-2
scanner position. See scanner position switch replacement, 4.19-1
settings for System with status displays, 2.10-4
SlideMaker, A.2-1, A.2-8, A.2-9, A.2-10 testing, 4.19-1
stripper plate position. See stripper plate system verification procedure. See SVP
position switch System-Flush cycle
top left safety. See top left safety switch description, 2.13-11
top right safety. See top right safety switch function, 2.13-11
under left stack. See under left stack switch systems
under right stack. See under right stack switch CBC Analysis. See CBC Analysis system
System Control overview Diluter Control. See Diluter Control system
block diagram, 2.11-1 Electronic Power. See Electronic Power system
System Control system functional, listing of, 2.1-2
AMC, 2.11-2 GEN•S System. See GEN•S System
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE card, 2.11-4 LH 750 System. See LH 750 System
function, 2.11-1 Pneumatic Power. See Pneumatic Power system
overview, 2.11-1 Power Development Control. See Power
RS/Opto Intfc card, 2.11-5 Development Control system
Scope Module, 2.11-6 Reagent Handling. See Reagent Handling system
System flush Sample Acquisition. See Sample Acquisition
procedure, 5.3-2 system
System Installation Report, using electronic Sample Reporting. See Sample Reporting system
form, 4.61-2 Specimen Transport. See Specimen Transport
System messages system
tables of, 7.2-1 System Control. See System Control system
See also individual messages VCS Technology. See VCS Technology system
System Power Controller card
A/D converter status monitor, 2.10-3
block diagram, 2.10-1 T
Bulk Power Supply voltage monitors, 2.10-3 tanks
component locations, A.4-4 backwash. See backwash tank
connector locations, A.4-4 sheath. See sheath tank
connectors, table of connections, A.4-4 sweep-flow. See sweep-flow tank
function, 2.2-1, 2.10-1 temperature
input line voltage monitors, 2.10-2 ambient, adjusting display of, 4.65-2
inputs, 2.10-2 changes that require verification of
calibration, 2.25-8, 4.8-1
INDEX
required for instrument operation, 3.1-4, 3.10-4 location, GEN•S System, 2.4-5
requirements for calibration, 2.25-8, 4.8-1 location, LH 750 System, 2.4-9
role of Diluter ambient in diff analysis, 2.22-5 part number, 8.1-32, 8.1-33
role of Peltier module in retic analysis, 2.23-6 voltage noise tolerances, table of, A.1-9
role of stain heater in retic troubleshooting procedures
analysis, 2.23-1, 2.23-3, 2.23-6 +48 V fault isolation, 7.4-5
test modes aspiration pump, 4.27-1
options available, 2.1-6 CBC lytic reagent pump, 4.22-1
The C: drive is full. Please clear Print and diff lytic reagent pump, 4.28-1
Transmission buffers from Run diff preservative pump, 4.29-1
Configuration., 7.3-13 diluent dispensers, 4.23-1
The probe wipe harness is not connected., 7.2-31 flow-cell errors, 7.5-1
thermistors LED style bar-code scanner speed and electrical
diff ambient. See diff ambient thermistor checks, 4.52-1
Diluter ambient. See Diluter ambient thermistor power up problems, 7.4-1
part number, 8.1-31 retic clearing solution pump, 4.25-1
Three Consecutive Voteouts, 7.2-39 stain pump, 4.24-1
Three consecutive voteouts of WBC, RBC, PLT or TTM. See Triple Transducer module
MCV., 7.2-39 tube detector
thrombocyte adjustment, 4.47-1
definition, GLOSSARY-3 allowable distance to rocker bed, A.1-2
See also Plt LED, when it should light, A.1-2
tie wraps where cap is pierced when adjusted
illustration, 8.2-64 correctly, A.1-2
part numbers, 8.1-31, 8.2-65 tube detector assembly
timing procedures component locations, 2.15-4
bar-code scanner cylinder stroke, A.1-1 function, 2.15-4
CBC lytic reagent and diluent location, 2.15-4
delivery, 4.31-2, 4.31-3 replacement, 4.46-1
tools, part numbers, 8.1-31 tube in position sensor
top left safety switch function, 2.15-4, 4.81-4
location, 2.15-6 testing, 4.81-4
replacement, 4.41-1 tube ram cylinder (CL6)
test, 4.41-2 function, 2.15-5
testing, 4.81-4 function and location reference, A.6-9
top right safety switch location, 2.15-5
function, 2.15-2, 4.81-4 tubing, part numbers, 8.1-33
location, 2.15-1 TV3. See transient voltage suppressor
replacement, 4.41-1 Two NAKs From Diluter, 7.2-39
test, 4.41-2 Two NAKs Sent From AMC, 7.2-39
testing, 4.81-4
transient voltage suppressor
function, 2.5-1 U
trend Unable to read cassette label., 7.2-22
definition, GLOSSARY-3 under left stack switch
Triple Transducer module function, 2.15-6, 4.81-5
component part numbers, 8.1-32 location, 2.15-6
exploded view, 8.2-36 replacement, 4.37-1
INDEX
under right stack switch valves

function, 2.15-2, 4.81-5 Angar. See Angar™ valves
location, 2.15-1 blood sampling. See BSV
replacement, 4.38-1 check. See check valves
testing, 4.81-5 dump. See dump valve
Unknown Diff Error Message, 7.2-39, 7.2-40 pinch. See pinch valves
UNKNOWN Diluter Error Message, 7.2-39, 7.2-40 relief. See relief valve
unloading bay shear. See shear valves
location, GEN•S System, 2.4-4 solenoid. See solenoids valves
location, LH 750 System, 2.4-8 VC1
function, A.6-12
location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
V See also vacuum isolator chamber;VC1-R;
vacuum VC1-W
pump. See compressor/vacuum pump VC1-R
See also vacuum, high; vacuum, low function, A.6-12
vacuum chamber (VC16) location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
vacuum chamber (VC27) See also RBC vacuum isolator chamber
function and location reference, A.6-13 VC1-W
vacuum isolator chamber (VC1) function, A.6-12
function, 2.18-4 location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
vacuum overflow tank (VC22) See also WBC vacuum isolator chamber
function, 2.9-5 VC2
sensor testing, 4.81-5 location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
Vacuum overflow tank full., 7.2-24 location, LH 750 System, A.8-2
vacuum overflow tank sensor See also RBC bath, A.6-12
function, 4.81-5 VC3
testing, 4.81-5 function, A.6-13
vacuum regulator (RG2) location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
part number, 8.1-25 See also WBC bath, A.6-13
vacuum trap (VC21) VC10
vacuum, high location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
connections from Power Supply to Diluter on VC11
the GEN•S System, 3.5-1 function, A.6-12
connections from Power Supply to Diluter on location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
the LH 750 System, 3.13-1 location, LH 750 System, A.8-2
development, 2.9-3 VC12
distribution, 2.9-3, 2.9-5 function, A.6-12
vacuum, low location, GEN•S System, A.7-3
distribution, 2.9-5 VC13
transducer (COUNT VACUUM) function, A.6-12
location, A.3-14 location, GEN•S System, A.7-3
INDEX

See also sheath tank function, A.6-13
location, GEN•S System, A.7-3 See also diluent/cleaning agent chamber
location, LH 750 System, A.8-5 See also sweep-flow reservoir
See also retic chamber VC30
See also flow cell function, A.6-13
See also needle vent chamber location, GEN•S System, A.7-2
VC21 location, LH 750 System, A.8-2
function, 2.9-5, A.6-12 See also diluent/cleaning agent manifold
function, 2.9-5, A.6-12 location, LH 750 System, A.8-1
location, GEN•S System, A.7-1 VCS calibration. See VCS optimization
location, LH 750 System, A.8-1 VCS measurements
VC23 conductivity (RF), 2.20-1
function, A.6-12 light scatter (LS), 2.20-1
location, GEN•S System, A.7-1 linear light scatter (LLS), 2.20-2
location, LH 750 System, A.8-1 opacity (OP), 2.20-1
See also backwash tank rotated light scatter (RLS), 2.20-2
VC24 volume (DC), 2.20-1
function, A.6-13 VCS noise checks
location, GEN•S System, A.7-5 limits, A.1-9
location, LH 750 System, A.8-5 procedure, 4.75-1
VC25 VCS optimization
function, A.6-13 diff and retic count time specifications, table
location, GEN•S System, A.7-5 of, A.1-9
location, LH 750 System, A.8-5
INDEX
diff and retic sample pressure variation limits, diff lytic reagent and diff preservative
table of, A.1-9 pumps, 2.22-6
diff preservative pump volume optimization, DIFF PROCESSOR card, 2.21-7
peak-to-peak DC conductivity noise diff sample analysis flow, illustration of, 2.22-4
limits, A.1-9 diff sample processing components on the
latex calibration adjustment and verification GEN•S System, illustration, 2.22-1
limits, table of, A.1-10 diff sample processing components on the
LS offset voltages limits, table of, A.1-9 LH 750 System, illustration, 2.22-2
overview, 4.71-1 electronic overview, 2.21-1
procedure flow, block diagram, 4.71-2 electronic overview block diagram, 2.21-1
VCS static and dynamic noise, table of flow cell port functions, table of, 2.20-5
acceptable limits, A.1-9 flow cell ports, illustration of, 2.20-4
See also VCS optimization procedures flow through flow cell, illustration of, 2.20-4
VCS optimization procedures function, 2.20-1
diff lytic reagent pump volume checks, 4.28-1 light scatter (LS) sensor, 2.21-4
diff preservative pump checks, 4.29-1 Light Scatter Preamp module, 2.21-4
diff preservative pump volume processing the sample for diff analysis on the
optimization, 4.66-1 GEN•S System, 2.22-1
flow-cell cleaning, 4.79-1 processing the sample for diff analysis on the
flow-rate adjustment, 4.73-1 LH 750 System, 2.22-2
initial sheath, diff sample and retic sample processing the sample for retic analysis on the
pressure adjustments, 4.72-1 GEN•S System, 2.23-1
laser and flow-cell alignment, 4.76-1 processing the sample for retic analysis on the
LATRON verification procedure, 4.78-1 LH 750 System, 2.23-3
lens block cleaning, 4.80-1 retic analysis conditions, table of
LS gain adjustment, 4.77-1 specifications, A.1-7
preliminary checks, 4.71-5 retic analysis reagent system, 2.23-5
RF Detector Preamp card adjustments, 4.74-1 retic blood sample and stain delivery to stain
VCS noise checks, 4.75-1 chamber, GEN•S System, illustration, 2.23-2
VCS technology parameters. See diff parameters, retic blood sample and stain delivery to stain
retic parameters chamber, LH 750 System, illustration, 2.23-4
VCS Technology system retic sample analysis flow, illustration of, 2.23-5
ANALOG 5 card, 2.21-6 retic sample processing components on the
applying the VCS technology, 2.20-2 GEN•S System, illustration, 2.23-1
COULTER IntelliKinetics™ retic sample processing components on the
application, 2.22-5, 2.23-5 LH 750 System, illustration, 2.23-3
delivering diff and retic samples in the retic stained sample and clearing solution
Automatic mode, illustration of, 2.16-3 delivery to retic chamber, GEN•S System,
delivering diff and retic samples in the Manual illustration, 2.23-2
mode, illustration of, 2.16-7 retic stained sample and clearing solution
determining the diff parameters, 2.22-10 delivery to retic chamber, LH 750 System,
determining the retic parameters, 2.23-6 illustration, 2.23-4
diff analysis conditions, table of RF Detector Preamp card, 2.21-2
specifications, A.1-7 stain heater block diagram, 2.23-6
diff analysis reagent system, 2.22-4 VCS measurements, 2.20-1
diff blood sample and reagent delivery to mixing VCS technology, instrument application
chamber, GEN•S System, illustration, 2.22-2 DC and RF currents, 2.20-2
diff blood sample and reagent delivery to mixing flow through flow cell, illustration of, 2.20-4
chamber, LH 750 System, illustration, 2.22-3 flow-cell hydraulics, 2.20-3
INDEX
hydrodynamically focused cells, illustration connection to Diluter on the LH 750

of, 2.20-4 System, 3.13-3
laser light source, 2.20-2 waste level sensor
light scatter path, illustration of, 2.20-3 function, 4.81-5
sensing area, illustration of, 2.20-2 testing, 4.81-5
verification procedures waste level sensor bypass
bar-code performance, 4.49-1 installation on the GEN•S System, 3.5-3
cassette transport assembly, 5.8-1 installation on the LH 750 System, 3.13-3
diff and retic, 5.6-1 location on the GEN•S System, 3.5-3
LATRON, 4.78-1 location on the LH 750 System, 3.13-3
Power Supply, 5.7-1 WBC
precision, 5.5-1 analyzing the data, 2.19-1
whole blood, 5.4-1 checking precision, 5.5-1
VIC. See vacuum isolator chamber count, timing the data collection, 2.18-5, 2.18-6
VL1 (Power Supply). See dump valve determining reported count on the GEN•S
Vls Air Error, 7.2-40 System, 2.24-2
Vls Diluent Error, 7.2-40 determining reported count on the LH 750
volume (DC) System, 2.24-5
VCS measurement, description of, 2.20-1 diluent dispenser. See WBC diluent dispenser
Volumetric Cylinder generating histogram on the GEN•S
reading correctly for diff lytic reagent pump System, 2.24-2
volumes, 4.28-3 generating histogram on the LH 750
reading correctly for diff preservative pump System, 2.24-5
volumes, 4.29-3 histogram, timing the data
Voteouts of WBC, RBC, PLT or MCV, 7.2-6 collection, 2.18-6, 2.18-7
WBC bath (VC3)
W WBC differential parameters
warning generated by instrument, 2.1-1
definition, 1.1-3 WBC diluent dispenser (PM3)
washers, part numbers, 8.1-37 adjustments, illustration of, 4.23-3, 4.23-4
waste function, 2.18-2
collection, description, 2.13-11 function and location reference, A.6-11
level monitoring, description, 2.13-11 part number, 8.1-24
See also waste level sensor replacement, 4.23-6
waste chamber (VC11) troubleshooting, 4.23-5
function and location reference, A.6-12 volume check, 4.23-1
waste chamber (VC26) volume tolerances, A.1-14
function and location reference, A.6-13 WBC preserve. See diff preservative
waste container WBC vacuum isolator chamber (VC1-W)
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the function, 2.18-4
GEN•S System, 3.5-3 function and location reference, A.6-12
connections to pickup tube and Diluter on the white blood cell. See WBC
LH 750 System, 3.13-3 White Pre-amp card. See RED/WHITE PRE-AMP
Waste container full., 7.2-24 cards
waste drain whole blood verification
connection to Diluter on the GEN•S procedure, 5.4-1
System, 3.5-3 Workload has been automatically reset in the
database., 7.3-14
INDEX
Workload has been manually archived, 7.3-14 Workstation messages

Workload has been manually printed, 7.3-14 about the message tables, 7.1-3
Workload has been manually reset in the Workstation screens
database, 7.3-14 Bar-Code Test, illustration of, 4.49-1
Workload was automatically printed., 7.3-14 capture procedure, 4.33-1
Workstation Latex Voltage, illustration of, 4.9-2
connecting to the Analytical Station on the Voltage Matching, illustration of, 4.9-3
GEN•S System, 3.4-7 Wrong Cal Factors, 7.2-41
connecting to the Analytical Station on the Wrong Calibration Type, Latex Sample will not be
LH 750 System, 3.15-1 stored., 7.3-14
determining Hgb results on the LH 750 Wrong Calibration Type, Sample will be stored as a
determining MCV results on the LH 750 Wrong Carryover Type, latex Sample will not be
System, 2.24-5 stored., 7.3-14
determining MCV results reported on the Wrong Carryover Type, Sample will be stored as a
GEN•S System, 2.24-3 Patient Sample., 7.3-14
determining MCV results reported on the Wrong Command Interpretation, 7.2-41
LH 750 System, 2.24-5 Wrong Command Sequence, 7.2-41
determining Plt and MPV results on the LH 750 Wrong Control 5C Type, Sample will be stored as a
determining RBC counts on the LH 750 Wrong Control Retics Type, Sample will be stored as a
determining RDW results on the LH 750 Wrong Echo Xmit, 7.2-41
System, 2.24-6 Wrong Match and Balance Type, latex Sample will not
determining WBC counts on the LH 750 be stored., 7.3-14
System, 2.24-5 Wrong Match and Balance Type, Sample will be stored
determining WBC results reported on the as a Patient Sample., 7.3-14
GEN•S System, 2.24-3 Wrong Repro Type, latex Sample will not be
determining WBC results reported on the stored., 7.3-15
LH 750 System, 2.24-5
entering system serial numbers and revisions on
the GEN•S System, 3.7-4 X
entering system serial numbers and revisions on XB all batches were deleted, 7.3-15
thew LH 750 System, 3.16-4 XB current batch was deleted, 7.3-15
error messages, 7.3-1
generating Plt histogram on the LH750
System, 2.24-6
generating RBC histogram on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
generating WBC histogram on the LH 750
System, 2.24-5
installation, GEN•S System, 3.2-1
installation, LH 750 System, 3.15-1
leakage current specifications, 2.1-5
power down/power up procedures, 4.1-1
screens. See Workstation screens
software versions, GEN•S System, A.9-1
software versions, LH 750 System, A.9-1
Workstation comms timeout, 7.2-41
TRADEMARKS
The BECKMAN COULTER logo, 4 C PLUS, 5C, AccuGate, ACCUVETTE, COULTER,

COULTER CLENZ, Erythrolyse, GEN•S, GEN•S SM, GEN•S ST, IntelliKinetics, ISOTON,
LATRON, RCS, S-CAL, SCATTER PAK, SmartStart, and Stabilyse are trademarks of
Beckman Couter, Inc.
All other trademarks, service marks, products, or services are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
PN 4277219B

Service Manual Coulter GEN S PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Service Manual Coulter GEN S PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

COULTER® Analytical Stations

PN 4277219B (July 2001)

HAZARDS AND OPERATIONAL PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and IMPORTANTS alert you as follows:

WARNING - Might cause injury.

Copyright © Beckman Coulter, Inc. 2001

Initial Issue, 2/01

REVISION STATUS, iii

1.1 MANUAL DESCRIPTION, 1.1-1

1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, 1.2-1

2 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION, 2.1-1

2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE GEN•S AND LH 750 SYSTEMS, 2.1-1

2.2 POWER SUPPLY MAIN COMPONENTS, 2.2-1

2.3 ANALYZER MAIN COMPONENTS, 2.3-1

2.4 DILUTER MAIN COMPONENTS, 2.4-1

2.5 ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER DEVELOPMENT AND

2.6 ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - POWER UP, 2.6-1

2.7 ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - LOCAL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE

2.8 ELECTRONIC POWER SYSTEM - LOCAL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE

2.9 PNEUMATIC POWER SYSTEM, 2.9-1

Pressure Distribution, 2.9-4

2.10 POWER DEVELOPMENT CONTROL, 2.10-1

2.11 SYSTEM CONTROL, 2.11-1

2.12 DILUTER CONTROL, 2.12-1

DILUTER CPU CARD, 2.12-2

2.13 REAGENT HANDLING, 2.13-1

Backwash Tank, 2.13-8

2.14 SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION, 2.14-1

2.15 SPECIMEN TRANSPORT SYSTEM - CASSETTE MOVEMENT, 2.15-1

2.16 SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW, 2.16-1

2.17 SAMPLE ACQUISITION SYSTEM - HARDWARE DESCRIPTION, 2.17-1

RBC Histogram, 2.18-6

2.20 VCS TECHNOLOGY - COLLECTING THE DATA, 2.20-1

2.21 VCS TECHNOLOGY - MEASURING AND ANALYZING THE DATA, 2.21-1

RF Detector Preamp Card, 2.21-2

2.22 VCS TECHNOLOGY - DIFF ANALYSIS, 2.22-1

2.23 VCS TECHNOLOGY - RETIC ANALYSIS, 2.23-1

2.24 SAMPLE REPORTING, 2.24-1

CBC Analysis on the LH 750 System, 2.24-5

2.25 CBC CALIBRATION OVERVIEW, 2.25-1

3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES, 3.1-1

PART A: GEN•S SYSTEM INSTALLATION

3.1 GEN•S SYSTEM PREINSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.1-1

3.2 INSTALLING THE GEN•S SYSTEM WORKSTATION, 3.2-1

3.3 UNPACKING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.3-1

3.4 INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE GEN•S SYSTEM, 3.4-1

3.5 CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE GEN•S SYSTEM, 3.5-1

3.6 SETTING UP THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.6-1

3.7 CHECKING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.7-1

3.8 TESTING THE GEN•S SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND

3.9 GEN•S SYSTEM AND GEN•S CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.9-1

PART B: LH 750 SYSTEM INSTALLATION

3.10 LH 750 SYSTEM PREINSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.10-1

3.11 UNPACKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.11-1

3.12 INSTALLING THE ELECTRICAL CABLES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM, 3.12-1

3.13 CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES ON THE LH 750 SYSTEM, 3.13-1

3.14 SETTING UP THE LH 750 SYSTEM DILUTER AND ANALYZER, 3.14-1

3.15 UNPACKING AND INSTALLING THE LH 750 SYSTEM WORKSTATION, 3.15-1

3.16 CHECKING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION, 3.16-1

3.17 TESTING THE LH 750 SYSTEM ANALYTICAL STATION AND

3.18 LH 750 SYSTEM AND LH 750 CELL INSTALLATION CHECKLIST, 3.18-1

4 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES, 4.1-1

4.1 POWER DOWN/POWER UP, 4.1-1